JP2023138617A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably executing processing to specific storage means for storing information.SOLUTION: In RAM clear processing, first a clear start address as a "0" clear execution object is set to an address counter of a main-side CPU 63 as an object address. An area corresponding to the object address is cleared to "0" and the object address is repeatedly updated to a next-order address. The address counter has a two-byte data capacity comprising an upper byte and a lower type. When updating the object address, "1" is added to the lower byte, and "1" is set to a carry flag of the main-side CPU 63 when numerical information of the lower byte is changed from the maximum value to the minimum value. When "1" is set to the carry flag, RAM clear processing is completed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Unexamined Japanese Patent Publication No. 2017-23329

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a need for a configuration that can suitably execute processing on a specific storage means for storing information, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can suitably execute processing on a specific storage means that stores information.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 provides a specific storage means that has a plurality of storage areas associated with addresses and stores information;
Addressing means for specifying a predetermined address in the specific storage means as a target address;
specific processing execution means for executing specific processing on the storage area corresponding to the target address specified by the address specifying means;
Equipped with
The addressing means includes:
address updating means for updating the target address to an address that is next in order with respect to the address that is the current target address when execution of the specific processing by the specific processing execution unit is completed;
information setting means for setting predetermined first information in a predetermined first information storage area when the target address updated by the address updating means becomes a specific address;
Equipped with
The specific processing execution means is characterized in that it ends execution of the specific processing when the predetermined first information is set in the predetermined first information storage area.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably perform processing on a specific storage means that stores information.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the structure of a game board. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition regarding discharge of the game ball which flowed down the game area. FIG. 3 is a front view of the main controller. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning/losing lottery and the like. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main side ROM. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing executed by the main side CPU. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which a detection result of a ball entry detection sensor is input to a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a payout control device and various devices that communicate with the payout control device. It is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the payout side CPU. FIG. 2 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a management IC. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a correspondence memory. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the recognition process performed by main side CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by a management CPU. (a) to (d) are time charts showing how information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers and the types of signals is stored in the correspondence memory; 3 is a flowchart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how history information is stored in the history memory. 3 is a flowchart showing output processing of a setting value update signal executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing display output processing executed by a management CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing display processing executed by a management CPU. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the process for data output performed by main side CPU, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output performed by management side CPU. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main side ROM in the second embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a separate storage memory in a third embodiment. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. 12 is a flowchart showing repeated change monitoring processing executed by the management CPU. 12 is a flowchart illustrating repeated change monitoring processing executed by the main CPU in the fourth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU in the fifth embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of memory for history in a 6th embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of memory for history in a 7th embodiment. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of history memory in an 8th embodiment. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing display output processing executed by a management CPU. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F in a ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the recognition process performed by main side CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by a management CPU. 5A to 5H are time charts showing how information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers and signal types is stored in the correspondence memory. FIG. 12 is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of a signal path for transmitting the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor to the main CPU and management IC in the tenth embodiment. It is a front view of the main control device in an 11th embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration for performing various displays on the first to fourth notification display devices based on the control of the MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing display processing executed by a management CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by the main CPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices when the management results of game history are displayed, and (b) When the setting state of the pachinko machine is changed. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how the first to fourth notification display devices enter the display state. (a) It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the 1st information display device in a 12th embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the composition of the 2nd information display device. The first notification display device when displaying the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices and when displaying that the setting state of the pachinko machine is in a changeable state. and FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the second notification display device. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by the main CPU. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an abnormality display area in the thirteenth embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing an abnormality setting process executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing an abnormality display process executed by the main CPU. 12 is a flowchart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU in the fourteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in another form. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a program and data setting mode of the main side ROM in the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting manner of each area in the main side RAM. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing management execution processing executed by the main CPU. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of a work area for non-specific control used to manage game history. 3 is a flowchart showing a check process executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal ball entry management process performed by main side CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing result calculation processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing display processing executed by the main CPU. 12 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by the main CPU in the sixteenth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing management execution processing executed by the main CPU in the seventeenth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing management execution processing executed by the main CPU in the eighteenth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing management execution processing executed by the main CPU in the nineteenth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by the main CPU in the twentieth embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing management execution processing executed by the main CPU. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration in the twenty-first embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a main CPU in the twenty-second embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing RAM monitoring processing executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in another form. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by the main side CPU in another form. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a main CPU in the twenty-third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing RAM monitoring processing executed by the main CPU in the twenty-fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing RAM monitoring processing executed by the main CPU in the twenty-fifth embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing management execution processing executed by the main CPU. 12 is a flowchart showing another monitoring process executed by the main CPU. 12 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by the main CPU in the twenty-sixth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by the main CPU in the twenty-seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by the main CPU in the twenty-eighth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by the main CPU in the twenty-ninth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main CPU in the 30th embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing a power outage information storage process executed by the main CPU. (a) It is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of the MPU, and (b) is a time chart showing how the reset signal is output by the reset signal output section. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting monitoring process executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing management execution processing executed by the main CPU. 12 is a flowchart showing another monitoring process executed by the main CPU. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main CPU in the 31st embodiment. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a clearing process in the event of an abnormality, which is executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a clearing process for non-specific control executed by the main CPU. 12 is a flowchart showing a power outage information storage process executed by the main CPU in the 32nd embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing checksum monitoring processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a clearing process for non-specific control executed by the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main CPU in the 33rd embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a first timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting monitoring process executed by the main CPU. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration for controlling display of various display circuits by a main CPU. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining various buffers provided in a work area for specific control, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining various storage areas provided in a work area for non-specific control. be. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a display IC. (a) to (g) Show how type data and display data are transmitted from the main CPU to the display IC, and the display data transmitted from the display IC is received by the first display circuit or the second display circuit. This is a time chart. 3 is a flowchart showing second timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices in a situation where a setting value is updated, and (b) the first to fourth notifications in a situation where a setting value is confirmed. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents of a display device for use in a computer. 12 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by the main CPU in the 34th embodiment. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a calculation result storage area in the thirty-fifth embodiment. (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how the base values of various areas are notified on the first to fourth notification display devices; 3 is a flowchart showing result calculation processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing display processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a first timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing second timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing normal setting processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by the main CPU. (a) to (f) are time charts for explaining the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices when the supply of operating power to the main CPU is started; 12 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main CPU in the 36th embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main CPU in the thirty-seventh embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing normal setting processing executed by the main CPU in the thirty-eighth embodiment. (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a setting corresponding storage area provided in the main side ROM in the thirty-ninth embodiment; 12 is a flowchart showing a process of reading a validity table executed by the main CPU. 12 is a flowchart showing a setting process for a fifth display data buffer during a setting update executed by the main CPU. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a setting corresponding storage area provided in the main side ROM in the fortieth embodiment. (a) It is an explanatory view for explaining various display parts provided in the area which becomes visible from the front of the pachinko machine through the window panel in the 41st embodiment, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the round display part. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main CPU in the 42nd embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing a first timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU. 12 is a flowchart showing result calculation processing executed by the main CPU in the 43rd embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing display processing executed by the main CPU. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how the base values of various areas are notified on the first to fourth notification display devices. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how the base values of various areas are notified by the first to fourth notification display devices in the 44th embodiment; 12 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main CPU in the 45th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a storage area related to setting values provided in a work area for specific control. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the main CPU. 12 is a flowchart showing a setting process for a fifth display data buffer during setting confirmation executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by the main CPU. 12 is a flowchart showing a setting process for a fifth display data buffer during a setting update executed by the main CPU. Explanation to explain the contents of the process executed in the main process when the supply of operating power is resumed after the power outage process is executed in a situation where the setting value update process or the setting confirmation process is being executed. It is a diagram. 5A to 5E are time charts showing end timings of setting value update processing and setting confirmation processing in relation to the operating state of the setting key insertion section. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main CPU in the 46th embodiment. Explanation to explain the contents of the process executed in the main process when the supply of operating power is resumed after the power outage process is executed in a situation where the setting value update process or the setting confirmation process is being executed. It is a diagram. Contents of the process executed in the main process when the supply of operating power is subsequently resumed when the power outage process is executed in a situation where the setting value update process or the setting confirmation process is being executed in the 47th embodiment It is an explanatory diagram for explaining. Contents of the process executed in the main process when the supply of operating power is subsequently resumed when the power outage process is executed in a situation where the setting value update process or the setting confirmation process is being executed in the 48th embodiment It is an explanatory diagram for explaining. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main CPU in the 49th embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by the main CPU. 7(a) to (h) are time charts showing how the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process are permitted in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed; FIG. (a) to (g) are time charts showing the progress of processing when an abnormality regarding a power outage flag, checksum, or set value occurs; (a) to (g) are time charts showing the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices when the supply of operating power to the main CPU is started; Explanation to explain the contents of the process executed in the main process when the supply of operating power is resumed after the power outage process is executed in a situation where the setting value update process or the setting confirmation process is being executed. It is a diagram. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control process performed by sound-light side CPU. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the action corresponding to the content of the process executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power in the main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows production control processing performed by sound and light side CPU in a 50th embodiment. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the action corresponding to the content of the process executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power in the main CPU. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main CPU in the 51st embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main CPU in the 52nd embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main CPU in the 53rd embodiment. 7(a) to (g) are time charts showing subsequent processing when the supply of operating power to the main CPU is stopped while the setting value update processing is being executed. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by the main CPU. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a storage area provided in a work area for specific control. (a) to (f) are time charts showing how setting values to be updated are updated. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main CPU in the 54th embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main CPU in the 55th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a clear target area and a non-clear target area provided in a work area for specific control. 3 is a flowchart showing display start processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing second timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining display contents of a special figure display part and a regular figure display part corresponding to the situation at the time of the start of supply of operating power. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area provided in the clear target area of the work area for specific control in the 56th embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing display start processing executed by the main CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining display contents of a special figure display part and a regular figure display part corresponding to the situation at the time of the start of supply of operating power. 12 is a flowchart showing display start processing executed by the main CPU in the 57th embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining display contents of a special figure display part and a regular figure display part corresponding to the situation at the time of the start of supply of operating power. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area provided as a clear target area and a non-clear target area of a work area for specific control in the 58th embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing a first timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing display start processing executed by the main CPU. (a) It is an explanatory view for explaining a losing display lottery table for special symbols, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a losing display lottery table for regular symbols. 13 is a flowchart showing display start processing executed by the main CPU in the 59th embodiment. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an initial display lottery table for special symbols, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an initial display lottery table for regular symbols. It is an explanatory view for explaining display contents of a special figure display part and a regular figure display part corresponding to the situation at the time of the start of supply of operating power. 12 is a flowchart showing display start processing executed by the main CPU in the sixtieth embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining display contents of a special figure display part and a regular figure display part corresponding to the situation at the time of the start of supply of operating power. 12 is a flowchart showing display start processing executed by the main CPU in the sixty-first embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by the main CPU in the sixty-second embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing display start processing executed by the main CPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first display distribution table for special figures, (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second display distribution table for special figures, and (c) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second display distribution table for special figures. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 1st display distribution table for figures, and is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 2nd display distribution table for regular figures (d). 13 is a flowchart showing display start processing executed by the main CPU in the sixty-third embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the 64th embodiment. (a) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 2nd actuating part in the case of a non-guidance state, and (b) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 2nd actuating part in a case of being guided. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device when a game round is executed. (a) to (j) are explanatory diagrams for explaining main symbols and sub-designs that are variably displayed in each symbol row. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view for explaining the internal configuration of the prize distribution device. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings on the main CPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the validity table of the 1st special figure, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the validity table of the 2nd special figure. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the type table for jackpots, (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each of multiple types of jackpot results, and (c) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the type table for small wins. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining, and (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each of a plurality of types of small winning results. It is a flowchart which shows the general-purpose electric power control process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing executed by the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure determination process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for distribution performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special call termination process performed by main side CPU. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area provided in the clearing target area of the work area for specific control. 3 is a flowchart showing second timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU. (a) It is a flowchart showing a setting process to the first display data buffer during the setting update executed by the main side CPU, and (b) the sixth display data buffer during the setting confirmation executed by the main side CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting process for . (a) to (g) are time charts showing how the display contents of the first special figure display section, the second special figure display section, and the special display section change according to the state of the pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing second timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU in the sixty-fifth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing second timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU in the sixty-sixth embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing second timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU in the sixty-seventh embodiment. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the composition of the special display section in the 68th embodiment, and (b) the 15R display section and the 6R display section in a situation where the setting value update process or the setting confirmation process is being executed. and a time chart showing the display contents of the small winning display section. It is a front view of the game board in the 69th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings on the main CPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first validity table when probability is low, (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first validity table when probability is high, and (c) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first validity table when probability is low. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a second validity table, and FIG. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a type table, (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each of multiple types of jackpot results and the contents of one type of small win result, (c) Support FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the mode. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a setting mode of a display continuation period of a game round. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special figure special electric control process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special figure special electric control process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing executed by the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure determination process performed by main side CPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first validity table at the time of low probability in the 70th embodiment, (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first validity table at the time of high probability, and (c ) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second validity table when the probability is low, and (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second validity table when the probability is high. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first validity table at the time of low probability in the 71st embodiment, (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first validity table at the time of high probability, and (c ) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second validity table when the probability is low, and (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second validity table when the probability is high. It is a front view of the game board in the 72nd embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a main control device and a sound emission control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by the main CPU. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting manner of each area in the main side RAM. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the address counter, and (b) to (e) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the carry flag is set to "1" as a result of updating the target address. It is. 3 is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating target address addition processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a clearing process for non-specific control executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing checksum calculation processing executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control process performed by sound-light side CPU. (a) to (f) When the supply of operating power to the main side CPU and the sound/light side CPU is started, a check display is executed on the first to fourth notification display devices, and the movable body 3 is a time chart showing how an initial operation is performed. It is a flow chart which shows production control processing performed by sound and light side CPU in a 73rd embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko machine 10, which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in FIG. 2, the structure within the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. have The outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting wooden boards on four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to island equipment. It should be noted that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in an island facility of a game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. Specifically, when viewed from the front, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation tip side.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front. Further, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided in an exposed manner on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be explained.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21 . A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be explained based on FIG. 3. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail part 25 and an outer rail part 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail part 25 and the outer rail part 26 provide a guide means. The guide rail is configured as follows. A game ball fired from a game ball firing mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

Incidentally, the game ball firing mechanism 27 includes a firing rail 27a that extends toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 55a (described later) onto the firing rail 27a, and a ball feeding device 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 55a (described later) onto the firing rail 27a. The solenoid 27c is an electric actuator that fires the game balls supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. When the firing operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and the game ball is fired.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings passing through it in the front and back direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special winning winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, etc. ing. A total of four general winning holes 31 are provided, and one each is provided for the others.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, if one game ball enters the first operating port 33 or one game ball enters the second operating port 34, In this case, when one game ball is paid out and one game ball enters the general winning hole 31, ten prize balls are paid out and sent to the special electric winning device 32. When one game ball enters the ball, 15 prize balls are paid out.

Note that the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of winning balls than the first operating port 33. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the number of prize balls is greater than 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the gaming area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 has a large number of nails 24b planted therein in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a windmill are also arranged.

Here, entering the ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the game area PA after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the fluid continues to flow down the gaming area PA without being discharged. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 will be used. The landing of a game ball into a ball is also expressed as winning a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are installed in the game board 24 as a unit as an operating port device. Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are open upward. Further, both the operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction with the first operating port 33 facing upward. The second actuating port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric utility object 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, it is possible to enter the second operating hole 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 34 in the downstream direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) that passes through the through gate 35 in the vertical direction, and the game ball that enters the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after winning the prize. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning in the through gate 35, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is held triggered by winning in the through gate 35, and a general figure display of the normal figure unit 38 provided in the lower right corner, which is an area where the game ball does not pass through in the gaming area PA. A changing display of the picture is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is a power open winning, a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuating display of the general figure display section 38a is ended, the state shifts to the general electric power open state. In the general power open state, the general power accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

Note that the general figure display section 38a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of display segments using LEDs are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, etc. It may also be constituted by a display device, CRT or other type of display device such as a dot matrix display. In addition, the patterns that are variably displayed on the general figure display section 38a include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

In the general drawing unit 38, a general drawing holding display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the general drawing display section 38a. The number of game balls that have entered the through gate 35 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the regular game reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is held using the win at the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly displayed through the display effect on the symbol display device 41 of the special symbol unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

Specifically regarding the special figure unit 37, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a. The display area of the special figure display section 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display section 37a, a winning lottery is performed using a prize winning in the first operating port 33 or a winning in the second operating port 34 as a trigger, so that a variable display of symbols or a predetermined display is performed. Then, the results corresponding to the lottery results are displayed. Note that the special figure display section 37a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of display segments using LEDs are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, etc. It may also be constituted by a display device, CRT or other type of display device such as a dot matrix display. In addition, the designs displayed on the special figure display section 37a include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed. Possible configurations include a configuration where .

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure pending display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The number of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the special symbol reservation display section 37b.

In detail about the symbol display device 41, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device to be described later. Note that the symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and may also be a dot matrix display device. It's okay.

In the symbol display device 41, when a variable display of a symbol or a predetermined display is performed on the special symbol display section 37a based on a winning at the first operating port 33 or a winning at the second operating port 34, the symbol is changed accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. For example, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas, and in each symbol row, a main character numbered from "1" to "9" is set. The symbols are scrolled and displayed in ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, scrolling display for all symbol rows is first started, and then the scroll display is switched to standby display in the order of upper symbol row → lower symbol row → middle symbol row, and finally a predetermined display is displayed in each symbol row. The process ends with the symbol displayed statically. In a game round in which the game result is a jackpot, a combination of predetermined symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line set in advance on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, in the case of the most profitable jackpot result, which will be described later, the same odd-numbered symbol combination will be stopped and displayed, and in the case of a low-probability jackpot result, which will be described later, the same even-numbered symbol combination will be stopped and displayed. If the result is a low win/high probability jackpot result, the combination of symbols is not the same symbol combination, but the combination of symbols that would not be stopped and displayed if the result is not a low win/high probability jackpot result is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by winning to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, but also the display effect during the opening/closing execution mode that shifts after winning is performed. be exposed. In addition, based on winning to either of the actuating ports 33, 34, the display starts on the special symbol display section 37a and the symbol display device 41, and the period from displaying a predetermined result to ending is one game round. equivalent to times. Further, the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41 are not limited to the above-mentioned symbols, and for example, only numbers may be displayed in a variable manner as the symbols.

If a jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on winning to the first operating port 33 or winning to the second operating port 34, a transition is made to an opening/closing execution mode in which winning to the special electric winning device 32 is possible. The special electric winning device 32 is equipped with a grand prize opening (not shown) that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and is also provided with an opening/closing door 32a that opens and closes the grand prize opening. The opening/closing door 32a is placed in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes, but if the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery, it can be switched to the open state in which game balls can win prizes. It has become. Incidentally, the opening/closing execution mode is a mode to which the game will transition in the event of a winning result. Note that in the closed state, it is not impossible to win a prize, but it may be configured to be in a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration regarding the discharge of game balls that have flown down the game area PA.

As already explained, the game ball that enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a is ejected from the gaming area PA. In other words, the game ball ejected from the game ball launch mechanism 27 and flowing into the game area PA is either the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, or the out port 24a. By entering the ball, the ball will be ejected from the gaming area PA. A game ball that enters any of the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34, and out opening 24a is guided to the back side of the gaming board 24.

On the back side of the game board 24, discharge passages 42 to 48 are formed in correspondence with the general winning opening 31, the special winning winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, respectively. . The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passages 42 to 48 flow down the discharge passages 42 to 48 into which they have flowed, and are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24, and then to the discharge ball collection part (not shown). will be collected. Then, the game balls collected by the discharged ball collection section are discharged to a ball circulation device of the island equipment in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Each of the discharge passages 42 to 48 is provided with various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting game balls. The discharge passage sections 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be explained below. As described above, there are four general winning openings 31, so there are discharge passages 42 to 44 corresponding to each of the four openings. In this case, one detection sensor 42a, 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning a prize opening detection sensor 42a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the first discharge passage part 42, and the detection range exists in the middle of the second discharge passage part 43. A second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so as to exist. The game ball that entered the leftmost general winning hole 31 is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a while passing through the first discharge passage section 42, and the game ball that entered the general winning hole 31 on the right side The ball is detected by the second prize opening detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage section 43. In addition, a third discharge passage portion 44 is provided for the two right-side general winning ports 31 so as to merge at an intermediate position. The third discharge passage section 44 has an inlet side area corresponding to each of the two general winning ports 31, and has one outlet side area by merging the inlet side areas in the middle. are doing. The third winning a prize opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the exit side area of the third discharge passage section 44. A game ball that enters one of the two general winning holes 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a while passing through the third discharge passage section 44.

A fourth discharge passage section 45 is provided corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32. A special electric detection sensor 45a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fourth discharge passage part 45, and the game ball that enters the special electric winning device 32 is on the way to pass through the fourth discharge passage part 45. It is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. A fifth discharge passage portion 46 is provided corresponding to the first operating port 33 . A first operation port detection sensor 46a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharge passage section 46, and the game ball that enters the first operation port 33 passes through the fifth discharge passage section 46. While passing, it is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 is provided corresponding to the second operating port 34 . A second operating port detection sensor 47a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharge passage portion 47, and the game ball that enters the second operating port 34 passes through the sixth discharge passage portion 47. While passing, it is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a. A seventh discharge passage portion 48 is provided corresponding to the out port 24a. An out-port detection sensor 48a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage section 48, and the game ball that enters the out-port 24a is on the way to pass through the seventh discharge passage section 48. It is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a.

Note that a game ball that is detected by any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a will not be detected by any of the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. Further, a gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and a game ball passing through the through gate 35 while flowing down the gaming area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

Although electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used as the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, any sensor can be used as long as the game balls can be detected individually. Further, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are electrically connected to a main control device 60, which will be described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal when a game ball is not detected, and output a HI level signal when a game ball is detected. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 configured as described above is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window 51 that allows almost the entire area of the gaming area PA to be viewed from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is made of glass to be colorless and transparent, but is not limited to this, and may be made of synthetic resin to be colorless and transparent. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting section 53 is provided above the window section 51. Further, a pair of left and right speaker sections 54 are provided to output sound effects and the like according to the gaming state. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulging portion 55 and a lower bulging portion 56, which bulge toward the front side, are arranged vertically in parallel. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that similarly opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper tray 55a has a function of temporarily storing game balls put out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball firing mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a line. Further, the lower tray 56a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 55a.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 60 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). FIG. 5 is a front view of the main controller 60.

As shown in FIG. 5, the main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. An MPU 62 is mounted on an element mounting surface, which is one board surface of the main control board 61. The board box 60a is formed transparent so that the MPU 62 housed in the board box 60a can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 60a. Note that although the board box 60a is formed to be colorless and transparent, it may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as it is possible to visually observe the MPU 62 housed in the board box 60a from outside the board box 60a. The main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in a board box 60a such that an opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, by opening the gaming machine main body 12 forward of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and exposing the back surface of the resin base 21, it becomes possible to visually see the opposing wall 60b of the board box 60a, and It becomes possible to visually observe the MPU 62 through the opposing wall portion 60b.

The board box 60a is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies 60c back and forth, and these plurality of case bodies 60c prevent separation of these case bodies 60c and leave traces when these case bodies 60c are separated. A connecting portion 60e is provided for leaving a . A plurality of coupling portions 60e are arranged in parallel on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped substrate box 60a. As a result, even if some of the joints 60e are destroyed and the case body 60c is separated in a state in which separation of the case body 60c is prevented using some joints 60e, another joint By bringing the portion 60e into the connected state, it becomes possible to prevent the case body 60c from being separated again. Furthermore, since the joint 60e is destroyed when the case body 60c is separated and traces thereof remain, it is possible to visually check the joint 60e to determine whether or not the case body 60c has been illegally separated. It becomes possible. Furthermore, a seal 60f is pasted on one side of the board box 60a opposite to the side on which the joint portions 60e are arranged so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies 60c. When the sealing seal 60f is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body 60c. Thereby, when the seal 60f is peeled off when the case body 60c is separated, it is possible to leave a trace of the seal 60f.

In the main control device 60 having the above configuration, the main control board 61 includes a board owned by the game hall manager in order to generate an opportunity to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the range of "setting 1" to "setting 6". A setting key insertion section 68a into which a setting key is inserted and turned ON, an update button 68b operated to sequentially change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON, and a main controller. A reset button 68c that is operated to clear data in a main side RAM 65, which will be described later, is provided in the MPU 62 of 60, and first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c to notify the management results of game history. , is provided. In addition, a connection terminal of an external device is connected to the MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 in order to read the management results of game history or the information (programs and data) stored in the main side ROM 64 with the external device. A reading terminal 68d is provided for reading. Note that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to the six stages of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", but can be any number of stages.

These setting key insertion section 68a, update button 68b, reset button 68c, reading terminal 68d (that is, MPU 62), and first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are all provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61. ing. Further, as already explained, the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the opposing wall 60b of the board box 60a, but the setting key insertion part 68a, update button 68b, reset button 68c, and reading terminal 68d face each other. It is not covered by the wall portion 60b. That is, the opposing wall portion 60b has separate openings in areas facing each of the setting key insertion portion 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, and the reading terminal 68d. Thereby, it is possible to insert a setting key into the setting key insertion part 68a without having to open the board box 60a, it is possible to press the update button 68b, and it is possible to press the reset button 68c. It is possible to connect a connection terminal of an external device to the reading terminal 68d.

By inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion part 68a and rotating it in a predetermined direction, the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on. By starting the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 in this state (that is, by starting the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60), it is possible to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. The state becomes changeable. In this state, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed one step at a time in ascending order within the range of "setting 1" to "setting 6." Note that if the update button 68b is operated in the state of "Setting 6", the state is updated to "Setting 1". In addition, by rotating the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion part 68a from the ON operation position in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction and returning it to the initial position, the setting key insertion part 68a can be turned OFF. Become. When the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off, the changeable state ends, and it becomes possible to play the game with the current setting values. In other words, even if the update button 68b is operated after the changeable state ends, the set value cannot be changed.

The ON operation for the setting key insertion section 68a is valid only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on after the process at the start of supply of operating power is completed in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the setting value cannot be changed.

The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 determines the advantage per unit time of the pachinko machine 10, and the larger the value of "setting n" (n is an integer from "1" to "6") (that is, the setting The higher the value), the higher the advantage. Details will be described later, but there are two lottery modes that determine the probability of winning a jackpot: a low probability mode in which the probability of winning is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of winning is relatively high. It is set so that the higher the probability, the higher the probability of winning a jackpot result in the low probability mode. On the other hand, regardless of the setting value, the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode is constant.

The reset button 68c is operated to clear the data in the main RAM 65 as described above, but in order to clear the data, operating power must be supplied to the pachinko machine 10 while the reset button 68c is pressed. (In other words, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60). The ON operation on the reset button 68c is enabled only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if the reset button 68c is pressed after the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 completes the processing at the start of supply of operating power, the data in the main RAM 65 cannot be cleared.

As already explained, the reading terminal 68d is connected to the connection terminal of the external device in order to read the gaming history management results or the information (programs and data) stored in the main ROM 64 with the external device. In order to perform external output to the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the pachinko machine 10 with the connection terminal of the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d (i.e., the operation of the main controller 60 to the MPU 62). (need to start power supply). The connection of an external device to the reading terminal 68d is enabled only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d after the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 completes the processing at the start of supply of operating power, no external output is performed to the external device.

Each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is a segment display device in which seven LED display segments are arranged, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a light emitting body, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. The first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are all installed so that their display surfaces face the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces, and are mounted on the opposing wall 60b of the board box 60a. covered. In this case, since the board box 60a is transparent, the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c housed in the board box 60a can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 60a. becomes possible. Further, as already explained, the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in the board box 60a so that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to third notifications are transmitted through the opposing wall portion 60b. It becomes possible to visually check the display surfaces of the display devices 69a to 69c.

On the display surface of the first notification display device 69a, not only numbers "0" to "9" but also various characters including alphabetical characters are displayed. On the other hand, numbers "0" to "9" are displayed on the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c. The game history management results are notified using the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the contents of this notification will be explained in detail later. Further, in a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, a value corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. Note that the value corresponding to the set value may be displayed on the first notification display device 69a, or may be displayed on the second notification display device 69b. In addition, the setting value before the changeable state is displayed on one of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the current setting value is displayed on the first to third notification display device. The information may be displayed on another one of the notification display devices 69a to 69c.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is installed to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 made of transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism section 73 and a control device assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism section 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls put out by the payout device 76 are delivered to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The dispensing mechanism section 73 is supplied with a main power source of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power on and off.

The control device assembly unit 74 includes a payout control device 77 that has a function of controlling the payout device 76, and a predetermined amount of power required by various control devices, etc., is generated and outputted, and is also used to generate and output electricity when the player operates the firing operation device 28. A power supply/launch control device 78 is provided to control the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply/launch control device 78 are arranged one on top of the other so that the payout control device 77 is located at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 67 that monitors the power supply. The main control board 61 is equipped with an MPU 62 . The MPU 62 includes a main CPU 63, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section, as well as a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 62 includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

The main ROM 64 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory (ie, nonvolatile storage means), and is used for reading only. The main side ROM 64 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the main side CPU 63.

The main RAM 65 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (ie, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The main side RAM 65 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than the main side ROM 64. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64.

The management IC 66 is a management device that manages game history based on information supplied from the main CPU 63. Although details will be described later, the management IC 66 grasps the entry history of game balls into the general prize opening 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, and In accordance with the grasped ball entry history, the frequency of balls entering the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is grasped. In addition, the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode, which will be described later, is grasped by the management IC 66.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power outage monitoring board 67 and a payout control device 77 provided in the main control device 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. A power supply/launch control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power outage monitoring board 67, and operating power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power outage monitoring board 67.

Various sensors such as ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As already explained, each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a includes a first winning opening detection sensor 42a, a second winning opening detection sensor 43a, a third winning opening detection sensor 44a, a special electric detection sensor 45a, and a first operating opening detection sensor. A sensor 46a, a second operating port detection sensor 47a, an outlet detection sensor 48a, and a gate detection sensor 49a are included. Based on the detection results of these ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 determines whether the ball enters each ball entry section. Further, the main side CPU 63 executes various lottery drawings based on winnings to the first operating port 33 and various drawings based on winnings to the second operating port 34.

On the input side of the MPU 62, a setting key insertion section 68a, an update button 68b, and a reset button 68c provided on the main control board 61 are provided. The setting key insertion portion 68a is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether the setting key insertion portion 68a is placed in an ON operation position or an OFF operation position. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies whether the setting key insertion portion 68a is located at the ON operation position or the OFF operation position based on the detection result from the sensor. The update button 68b is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether or not the update button 68b is pressed. Then, the main CPU 63 determines whether or not the update button 68b is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor. The reset button 68c is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Then, the main CPU 63 determines whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor.

A power outage monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77, and a sound emission control device 81 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on the fact that a game ball has entered a prize ball corresponding entering part of the above-mentioned ball entering part where the occurrence of the ball entering corresponds to the payout of the game ball. Ru. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the audio emission control device 81.

On the output side of the MPU 62, there are a drive unit 32b for special electricity that opens and closes the opening/closing door 32a of the special electricity prize winning device 32, a drive unit 34b for general electricity that opens and closes the general electricity accessory 34a of the second operating port 34, and a drive unit 34b for general electricity that opens and closes the opening/closing door 32a of the special electricity winning device 32. A drawing unit 37 and a general drawing unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a and a special figure pending display section 37b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the general drawing unit 38 is provided with a general drawing display section 38a and a general drawing holding display section 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, drive control of the special electric drive unit 32b is executed in the main side CPU 63 so that the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed. Further, when the open state of the general electric utility object 34a is won, the drive control of the general electric drive unit 34b is executed in the main CPU 63 so that the general electric utility object 34a is opened and closed. Furthermore, in each game round, display control of the special figure display section 37a is executed by the main CPU 63. In addition, when displaying the lottery result as to whether or not to open the general utility object 34a, the main side CPU 63 executes display control of the general public figure display section 38a. In addition, when a winning occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, or when a variable display starts in the special symbol display section 37a, the main CPU 63 controls the display of the special symbol pending display section 37b. is executed, and when a winning occurs in the through gate 35, or when variable display is started on the common picture display section 38a, display control of the common picture pending display section 38b is executed in the main CPU 63.

First to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Furthermore, the management results of the gaming history in the management IC 66 are notified through the display on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Further, when changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. In this case, the display of the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b is controlled by the management IC 66 and not by the main CPU 63, whereas the third notification display device 69c is controlled by the main CPU 63. The display is controlled by the management IC 66. Regarding the display on the third notification display device 69c, display control by the main CPU 63 is given priority over display control by the management IC 66.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third notification display device 69c may also have a configuration in which the display is controlled by the management IC 66 and the display is not controlled by the main CPU 63. In this case, if the current setting value is to be displayed on the third notification display device 69c when changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the main CPU 63 instructs the management IC 66 to display the setting value. good.

The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 68d. The reading terminal 68d is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether or not the reading terminal 68d is connected to a connection terminal of an external device. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not a connection terminal of an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d based on the detection result from the sensor. Further, when an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d, the management results of the game history in the management IC 66 or the information (programs and data) stored in the main ROM 64 are outputted to the external device.

The power outage monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power source/launch control device 78, and monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power source/launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

The power source/launch control device 78 is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) in, for example, an amusement hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, necessary operating power is generated for the main control board 61, payout control device 77, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power outages such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF, the power supply unit for power outages supplies power from the main power supply unit. Power for memory retention is supplied to the main side RAM 65 of the control device 60 and the payout control device 77. Further, the power supply/launch control device 78 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. Further, as already explained, the payout mechanism section 73 is provided with a power switch, and when the power switch is turned ON, the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is started, and when the power switch is turned OFF, operation power is started to be supplied to the Pachinko machine 10. As a result, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped.

The audio light emission control device 81 drives and controls the display light emission section 53 and the speaker section 54 provided in the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 82. It is. The display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on commands received from the audio emission control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings on the main CPU 63>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in the main CPU 63 will be described using FIG. 7.

When playing a game, the main CPU 63 uses various types of counter information to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, settings for display on the special pattern display section 37a, settings for display on the pattern display device 41, settings for display on the general pattern display section 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning random number counter C1 used in the lottery of winning occurrences, the jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are changed when the winning occurs. Determine the reach random number counter C3 used for the reach occurrence lottery when playing, the random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the display duration time on the special symbol display section 37a and the symbol display device 41. A variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, a general electric utility object release counter C4 is used to determine whether or not the general electric utility object 34a of the second operating port 34 should be brought into the general electric power open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is provided in the main side RAM 65 as an acquisition information storage means when a winning occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. The data is stored in the reserved storage area 65a.

The reservation storage area 65a includes a reservation area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4. In addition, a combination of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as pending information in any of the pending areas RE1 to RE4.

In this case, if winnings to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 occur multiple times in a row, the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 are Each piece of numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of reservation area RE2 → third reservation area RE3 → fourth reservation area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, the winning history of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 can be held and stored up to a maximum of four. .

Note that the number that can be held and stored is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 37a, and is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE. At this time, a judgment is made based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be explained in detail.

First, the general utility goods release counter C4 will be explained. The general utility utility release counter C4 is configured such that, for example, it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 250, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The general electric utility object release counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the general electric power holding area 65c of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the general electric utility object 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general electric utility object opening counter C4.

In the present pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the common electric accessory 34a are different from each other. In detail, in the support mode, when compared with the situation where the game balls continue to be launched in the same manner into the game area PA, the general electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 opens per unit time. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the state is relatively high or low.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the general electricity release state in the general electricity release lottery using the general electricity utility item release counter C4 is the same (for example, 4/5 in both cases). , In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the general electric utility accessory 34a is in the open state when the general electric power open state is won is set to be greater than that in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening time for one time is also set to be longer. has been done. In this case, when the general power open state is won in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the general power accessory 34a occurs multiple times, the period from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is The closing time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (i.e., The duration of one display on the display section 38a is set short.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operating port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the first operating port 33 is higher than that in the second operating port 34, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize is higher in the first operating port 33 than in the second operating port 34. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 increases. When a winning occurs in the second operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has too much. It can be carried out.

Note that the configuration for making the high-frequency support mode more frequently open to the power grid per unit time than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, in the power grid release lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the general power open state. In addition, the secured time period that is secured between the time when one general electricity lottery is held and the next general electricity distribution lottery is held (for example, the period of time that is secured on the general electricity map display section 38a based on winnings in the through gate 35) is In configurations where multiple types of variable display times are available, it is easier to select a shorter securing time in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, or the average securing time is set to be shorter. Good too. In addition, the number of times the power grid is released, the length of time it is open, the amount of time secured between one general power grid release lottery and the next power grid release lottery is shortened, and such secured time. The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of shortening the average time and increasing the probability of winning.

Here, as already explained, the pachinko machine 10 has setting states of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", but the opening frequency and opening mode of the general electric accessory 34a in the low frequency support mode are different from each other. The setting values are the same, and the opening frequency and opening mode of the utility power accessory 34a in the high-frequency support mode are also the same regardless of the setting values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the opening frequency and opening mode of the general electric accessory 34a varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in at least one of the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode. It may also be a configuration. For example, the higher the setting value is, the higher the frequency of opening of the general electric accessory 34a in the low frequency support mode may be configured, and the second operation when the general electric accessory 34a is opened once in the low frequency support mode. A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of a game ball entering the mouth 34 is increased. Furthermore, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of opening of the general electric accessory 34a in the high-frequency support mode. A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of the game ball entering the operating port 34 is increased.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be explained. The winning random number counter C1 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated regularly and is stored in the holding storage area 65a of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

The random number value that results in a jackpot is stored in the main ROM 64 as a win/fail table. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main side ROM 64. As the success/failure tables, low probability success/failure tables 64a to 64f for low probability mode and high probability success/failure table 64g for high probability mode are stored.

The low probability accuracy tables 64a to 64f are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the setting states of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6." In other words, the low probability table 64a for setting 1 is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1", and the setting is referenced when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2". 2 low probability correctness table 64b, low probability correctness table 64c for setting 3 which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3", and low probability correctness table 64c for setting 3 when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4". , a low probability correctness table 64d for setting 4 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5", a low probability correctness table 64e for setting 5 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5", and the pachinko machine 10 There exists a low certainty propriety table 64f for setting 6 that is referred to when the setting state of is "setting 6".

These low probability success/failure tables 64a to 64f are set such that the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning a jackpot result. Specifically, when the low probability table 64a for setting 1 is referred to, the jackpot result is approximately 1/320, and when the low probability table 64b for setting 2 is referred to, the result is approximately 1/310. When the low probability table 64c for setting 3 is referred to, the result is a jackpot at approximately 1/300, and when the low probability table 64d for setting 4 is referred to, it is approximately 1/290. If the low probability success/failure table 64e for setting 5 is referred to, it will be a jackpot result at approximately 1/280, and if the low probability success/failure table 64f for setting 6 is referred to, it will be a jackpot result at approximately 1/270. This results in a jackpot. As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to a high setting value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the low probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, only one type of high certainty validity table 64g is provided so that it is common to any setting state from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". The high probability success/failure table 64g is set so that the probability of winning a jackpot result is higher than the low probability success/failure tables 64a to 64f in any setting state from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". Specifically, when the high probability success/failure table 64g is referred to, the jackpot result is approximately 1/30. This makes it possible to make the high probability mode more advantageous than the low probability mode regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, even the lowest setting state "Setting 1" becomes a high probability mode, making it possible to make the probability of a jackpot result higher than the low probability mode of "Setting 6" which is the highest setting state. becomes. In addition, regarding the high probability mode, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of advantages or disadvantages depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, and to suppress the storage capacity for storing the high probability probability table 64g in the main side ROM 64 in advance. becomes possible.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and is stored in the holding storage area 65a at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plurality of jackpot results include (1) the mode of opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the win/fail lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (3) the opening/closing mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by differentiating three conditions, namely, the support mode in the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34.

The mode of opening/closing control of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode is such that the frequency of winnings on the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively high or low. A frequent winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in both the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, round games are executed up to a predetermined number of times.

A round game is a game that continues until either one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses, and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the special electric winning device 32. That's true. Further, the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot result is a fixed number of rounds and is the same regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds, regardless of the jackpot result.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types are set for one opening mode of the special electric winning device 32, with different opening durations from when the special electric winning device 32 is opened until it is closed. Specifically, a long time mode in which the open duration is set to a long time of 29 seconds, and a short time mode in which the open duration is set to 0.06 seconds, which is a short time shorter than the above long time, is set.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the firing operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven so that one game ball is fired toward the gaming area PA every 0.6 seconds. controlled. Further, in the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to nine. Then, in the long-time mode among the above-mentioned open modes, the open continuation time is set to be longer than the product of the game ball firing cycle and one round game. On the other hand, in the short time mode, the open duration time is set to be shorter than the product of the game ball firing cycle and one round game, more specifically, shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, if one opening is made in a long-time mode, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will receive a prize equal to the upper limit number in one round game, and one in a short-time mode. When the number of rounds is opened, it is expected that no winnings will be made to the special electric winning device 32, or that only one prize will be won, if any.

In the high frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a long time mode in each round game. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a short time mode in each round game.

In addition, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration time for one opening, and the upper limit number of pieces in one round game are the same as those in the high-frequency winning mode. is not limited to the above values and may be set arbitrarily if the frequency of winnings in the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher than that of the low-frequency winning mode. It is.

The distribution destinations of the jackpot results for the jackpot type counter C2 are stored in the main side ROM 64 as a distribution table 64h, as shown in FIG. In the allocation table 64h, a low probability jackpot result, a low winning high probability jackpot result, and a most profitable jackpot result are set as the destinations to which the jackpot result is distributed in the case of a jackpot result.

The low-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games has reached the end standard number of times (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

For low winning and high probability jackpot results, the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. be. These high probability mode and high frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the win/fail lottery becomes a jackpot state win and the state shifts to a jackpot state accordingly.

The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency winning mode, and furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode becomes a high probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. These high probability mode and high frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the win/fail lottery becomes a jackpot state win and the state shifts to a jackpot state accordingly.

In relation to each of the above gaming states, the normal gaming state refers to a state where the win/fail lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode, not the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a low win/high probability jackpot result is not set as the game result. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode with a low winning/high probability jackpot result, the number of round games may be smaller than in the case of a low probability jackpot result and a most advantageous jackpot result.

In the distribution table 64h, among the values of jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to low probability jackpot results, and "10 to 14" correspond to low probability jackpot results. "15-29" corresponds to the most profitable jackpot result.

Only one type of distribution table 64h is provided so that the distribution table 64h is common to any of the setting states "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". This makes it possible to prevent advantage or disadvantage from occurring depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 regarding the distribution mode of jackpot results, and also allows the storage capacity for storing the distribution table 64h in advance in the main side ROM 64. It becomes possible to suppress the

It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which the manner in which the jackpot results are distributed differs depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. For example, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of being allocated to the most profitable jackpot result, or the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of being allocated to the most profitable jackpot result or the low winning, high probability jackpot result. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the game will enter the high probability mode after a jackpot result. In addition, the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of being assigned to a low winning/high probability jackpot result.If the setting value is high, it will not be assigned to a low winning/high probability jackpot result, whereas if the setting value is low, the probability of being assigned to a low winning/high probability jackpot result will be lower. It may also be configured such that it can be distributed to jackpot results. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the opening/closing execution mode of the high frequency winning mode will occur.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In this pachinko machine 10, an expected performance is set as a type of display performance on the symbol display device 41. Expected production is a gaming machine that is equipped with a symbol display device 41 that is capable of displaying symbols in a fluctuating manner, and in which the final stop result is the award corresponding result in a game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result. This refers to a display state that is made to make the player think that the fluctuating display state is likely to result in the award corresponding result after the start of fluctuating display of symbols and before the stop result is derived and displayed. Specifically, regarding the award correspondence result, combinations of symbols with the same number attached on any active line are stopped and displayed.

Two types of expected effects are set: a ready-to-reach display and a preview display for making users expect the occurrence of a ready-to-reach display or a grant response result at a stage before the ready-to-reach display occurs.

In the ready-to-reach display, the combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying some of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and in this state, the remaining symbol rows are displayed. This includes a display state in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a symbol row. In addition, while the combination of ready-to-reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-reach effect. , those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying or not displaying a combination of ready-to-reach symbols are included.

The preview display may be performed in a situation where the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner in all symbol rows after the variable display of the symbols has started on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, or in a situation in which symbols are being displayed in a variable manner in all symbol rows, or in some symbol rows but in a plurality of symbol rows. In a situation where symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a symbol column, a mode is included in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol column. Also included are those in which the background screen is set in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and those in which the symbols on the symbol row are set in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice display can occur in any game round when a reach display is displayed or when a reach display is not performed, but it is higher when a reach display is performed than when a reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game round in which the same combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Further, in a game round corresponding to a jackpot result in which the same combination of symbols is not stopped and displayed, the game is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, in the game round corresponding to the winning result, this is executed when the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the main side ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. .

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to display a preview is not made by the main control device 60 but by the sound emission control device 81. In this case, the sound emission control device 81 recognizes that a preview display is more likely to occur in a game round corresponding to a jackpot result than in a game round corresponding to a losing result, and that a preview display with a low appearance rate is A lottery process for displaying a preview is executed so as to satisfy at least one condition that the occurrence is likely to occur. Incidentally, this lottery result is reflected when the symbol display device 41 performs a game repeat effect.

Here, the probability that a reach display will occur in a game round that results in a losing result is the same regardless of the setting state from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". This makes it possible to prevent the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from having an advantage or disadvantage with respect to the probability that a reach display will occur in a game round that results in a losing result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability that the reach display will occur in a game round with a losing result.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used by the main CPU 63 to determine the display duration time on the special symbol display section 37a and the display duration time of symbols on the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next timer interrupt process is executed. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the special symbol display section 37a and at the time the symbol display device 41 starts the variation of the symbol.

<About the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed by the main CPU 63 to advance the game will be explained. The processing of the main CPU 63 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, every 4 milliseconds).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, a power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed after the main process is started. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned on (step S103). If the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned on (step S103: NO), it is determined whether the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S104). When the reset button 68c is pressed (step S104: YES), each area of the main side RAM 65 is " 0" is cleared, and initial settings are made for the area cleared to "0" (step S105). In other words, if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while pressing the reset button 68c without turning on the setting key insertion part 68a, the operation to the pachinko machine 10 regarding the setting value information is Clearing of the main RAM 65 is performed while maintaining the state before the power supply was stopped, and the storage area where the clearing has been performed is initialized. This makes it possible to initialize other areas of the main RAM 65 without changing set values. In addition, in step S105, initial settings are performed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0".

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S104: NO), it is determined whether the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S106). A power outage flag is provided in the main side RAM 65, and when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is stopped and a predetermined power outage process is normally executed, the power outage flag is set to "1". will be set. If the power outage flag is set to "1", it is determined whether the checksum calculation result matches the checksum saved when the power was cut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S107). . When the process of step S105 is executed, or when an affirmative determination is made in step S107, it is determined whether the set values of the pachinko machine 10 are normal by checking the main side RAM 65 (step S108). Specifically, the setting value is determined to be normal if it is one of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and it is determined to be abnormal if it is "0" or 7 or more.

If a negative determination is made in any of steps S106 to S108, an operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, after executing an error notification process to notify the hall manager and the like of the occurrence of an error (step S109), an infinite loop occurs. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing the all clear process (step S117), which will be described later.

If a positive determination is made in all steps S106 to S108, a power-on setting process is executed (step S110). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main side RAM 65, such as initialization of a power outage flag, is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. Further, after executing the process of step S110, a recognition process (step S111) is performed to make the management IC 66 recognize various information, and various data are output to an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d of the MPU 62. Data output processing is executed for this purpose (step S112). Details of these recognition processing and data output processing will be explained later.

Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited at the stage when main processing is started. This state in which generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is canceled at a timing when the process in step S112 is completed and before the process in step S113 is executed, and execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process in step S112 is completed and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process in step S113 is started. Therefore, the main CPU 63 will not start the process for advancing the game until the situation is reached.

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps S113 to S116. In other words, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process from step S113 to step S116 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processing of steps S113 to S116 is non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly.

In the remaining processing, first, in step S113, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit generation of timer interrupt processing. In the subsequent step S114, a random number initial value update process is executed to update the random number initial value counter CINI, and in step S115, a variation counter update process is executed to update the variation type counter CS. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main side RAM 65, the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and then the process of overwriting the counter from which it was read is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it exceeds the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S116, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing is permitted. If the process of step S116 is executed, the process returns to step S113 and the processes of steps S113 to S116 are repeated.

On the other hand, if the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on (step S103: YES), the main side RAM 65 includes the area where setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. All areas are cleared to "0" and initial settings are made to the areas cleared to "0" (step S117). In other words, if an operation is being performed to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, all areas of the main RAM 65 are cleared to "0" even if the reset button 68c is not pressed. Initial settings are performed for the storage area where the process was executed. Further, in step S117, initial settings are performed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0". Note that this is not limited to this, and even if an operation is being performed to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, if the reset button 68c is not pressed, all of the main side RAM 65 is A configuration may be adopted in which the clearing process is not executed and the all clearing process is executed when an operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the reset button 68c is pressed.

After that, a set value update process is executed in step S118, and a set value update signal output process is executed in step S119, and then the process moves to step S110. The setting value update process will be explained below. Note that the output process of the setting value update signal will be explained in detail later. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the setting value update process.

First, a set value counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S201). The setting value counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to specify which setting value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is at. By setting "1" to the setting value counter, when the setting value update process is executed, the setting value becomes "setting 1" regardless of the previous setting value.

Thereafter, a setting value display start process is executed (step S202). In the setting value display start process, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that the number "1" corresponding to "setting 1" is displayed. When changing the setting value, the game hall manager can grasp the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by checking the third notification display device 69c.

Thereafter, on the condition that the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned off (step S203: NO), it is determined whether the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S204). Specifically, it is determined whether the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S204, the process returns to step S203, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off.

If the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S204: YES), the value of the set value counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S205). Further, if the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds "6" (step S206: YES), the set value counter is set to "1" (step S207). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated to one step higher, and if the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6", it is changed to "Setting 1". I will be going back.

If a negative determination is made in step S206, or if the process in step S207 is executed, a setting value display update process is executed (step S208). In the setting value display update process, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that a number corresponding to the value of the setting value counter of the main side RAM 65 is displayed. By checking the third notification display device 69c, the game hall manager can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

After executing the process of step S208, the process returns to step S203, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned off. If the OFF operation has not been performed (step S203: NO), the processes from step S204 onwards are executed again. If the OFF operation has been performed (step S203: YES), a setting value display termination process is executed (step S209). In the set value display termination process, the display of the set values on the third notification display device 69c is terminated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds).

First, a power outage information storage process is executed (step S301). In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power outage is received from the power outage monitoring board 67, and if the occurrence of a power outage is identified, an infinite loop is executed after executing power outage processing. Become. In the power outage processing, the power outage flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

After that, a lottery random number update process is executed (step S302). In the random number update process for lottery, the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general utility object opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information was sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general utility goods release counter C4, and a process was performed in which each of the read numerical information was incremented by 1. Afterwards, a process is executed to overwrite the reading source counter. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it exceeds the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S303, a random number initial value update process is executed as in step S114, and in step S304, a fluctuation counter update process is executed as in step S115.

Thereafter, fraud detection processing is executed to monitor whether a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred (step S305). In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, the game stop flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". In the subsequent step S306, it is determined whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1", thereby determining whether or not the progress of the game is stopped. If a negative determination is made in step S306, the processes from step S307 onwards are executed.

In step S307, port output processing is executed. In the port output processing, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt processing, processing is executed to perform output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b. For example, if information is set to switch the special electric winning device 32 to the open state, output of a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and if information is set to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the closed state. stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, if information is set to switch the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state, output of a drive signal to the general electric drive unit 34b should be started, and the general electric accessory 34a should be switched to the closed state. If the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

Thereafter, reading processing is executed (step S308). In the reading process, signals other than the power outage signal and winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

Thereafter, ball entry detection processing is executed (step S309). In the ball entry detection process, the signals received from each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are read, and based on the reading results, the output port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, and first operating port 33 are activated. , the presence or absence of the ball entering the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 is determined. Note that details of the ball entry detection process will be explained later.

Thereafter, a timer update process is executed to collectively update numerical information of multiple types of timer counters provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S310). In this case, the configuration is such that the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are handled collectively, but both the subtraction-type timer counter update and the addition-type timer counter update are performed collectively. It may also be a configuration.

Thereafter, a firing control process for controlling the firing of game balls is executed (step S311). In a situation where the firing operation to the firing operation device 28 is continued, one game ball is fired every 0.6 seconds, which is a predetermined firing cycle. In the following step S312, as an input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process in step S308, the disconnection of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a is confirmed, and the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 is confirmed. I do.

Thereafter, a special figure special electric control process for controlling the execution of the game round and the opening/closing execution mode is executed (step S313). The special figure special electric control process will be explained in detail later.

Thereafter, general electric power control processing is executed (step S314). In the general map and general electric power control process, when a prize is won in the through gate 35, a process is executed to obtain the reservation information on the general electrician side, and when the reservation information on the general electrician side is stored. Then, a release determination is made regarding the hold information, and further, using the release determination as a trigger, processing for performing a production for a regular map is executed. Further, based on the result of the open determination, a process of opening and closing the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is executed. In this case, if the support mode is low-frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed, and if the support mode is high-frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed. Furthermore, in the case of the opening/closing execution mode, even if the previous support mode was the high-frequency support mode, the mode becomes the low-frequency support mode.

In the following step S315, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S313 and step S314, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of pending information related to the special figure display section 37a on the special figure pending display section 37b. , Output information is set to reflect the increase/decrease in the number of hold information related to the general figure display section 38a on the ordinary figure pending display section 38b. In addition, in step S315, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S313 and step S314, output information for updating the display content of the special figure display section 37a is set, and the display content of the regular figure display section 38a is updated. Configure the output information for updating.

Thereafter, the content of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 is confirmed, and a payout state reception process is executed to perform processing corresponding to the confirmation result (step S316). Further, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S317). Further, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of output of an external signal according to the processing results of various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process (step S318). Thereafter, a management output process is executed to output information corresponding to the result of the game ball entering the game area PA to the management IC 66 (step S319). Details of the management output process will be explained later.

Next, the special figure special electric control process in step S313 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 12.

First, pending information acquisition processing is executed (step S401). In the reservation information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, and if a winning has occurred, the number of pending in the pending storage area 65a is the upper limit. It is determined whether the value is less than the value (“4” in this embodiment). If the number of reservations is less than the upper limit value, the number of reservations is increased by 1, and each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S302 is set for reservation. It is stored in the first reservation area among the vacant reservation areas RE1 to RE4 of area RE. In addition, if winnings to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 occur at the same time, the process for acquiring the pending information is executed within the range of executing the pending information obtaining process once. Run multiple times. Furthermore, when new hold information is acquired, a corresponding acquisition command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. When the audio emission control device 81 receives the command, it updates the display of the image showing the number of pending information on the symbol display device 41 to the display content corresponding to the increase in the pending information.

Thereafter, the information of the special figure special electric line counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is read out (step S402), and the special figure special electric line address table provided in the main side ROM 64 is read out (step S403). Then, the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure/special electric line counter is acquired from the special figure/special electric line address table (step S404), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address among the processes of steps S406 to S412 (step S405). ). The special figure special electric line counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to grasp which of the various processes from step S406 to step S412 should be executed, and the special figure special electric line address table is a counter for the special figure special electric line counter. The start address of the program for executing the processes from step S406 to step S412 is set in correspondence with the numerical information.

In step S406, special figure fluctuation start processing is executed. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the special figure fluctuation start process.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, the data setting process is executed on the condition that the number of pieces of reservation information stored in the reservation area RE is 1 or more (step S501: YES) (step S502). In the data setting process, first, the number of reservations is subtracted by 1, and the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process is executed to shift the data stored in each of the reservation areas RE1 to RE4 of the reservation area RE. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side. Specifically, the data is shifted from the second reservation area RE2 to the first reservation area RE1. , third reservation area RE3 → second reservation area RE2, fourth reservation area RE4 → third reservation area RE3, and then the fourth reservation area RE4 is cleared to "0". At this time, a shift command is sent to the audio emission control device 81 to make it recognize that the data in the reservation area has been shifted. When the sound emission control device 81 receives the command, it updates the display of the image showing the number of pending information on the symbol display device 41 to display content corresponding to the decrease in the pending information.

After executing the data setting process, the validity table is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). Specifically, first, information indicating the winning/losing lottery mode from the main side RAM 65 is read out to grasp the current winning/failing lottery mode. If it is the high probability mode, the high probability correctness table 64g is read from the main side ROM 64. On the other hand, when the mode is low probability mode, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is grasped by reading the value of the setting value counter in the main side RAM 65. Then, the low certainty propriety tables 64a to 64f corresponding to the grasped setting values are read from the main side ROM 64.

Thereafter, the validity determination process is executed with reference to the validity tables 64a to 64g read in step S503 (step S504). In the win/fail determination process, the information for the win/fail determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the numerical information related to the winning random number counter C1, is replaced with the jackpot numerical information set in the win/fail tables 64a to 64g read out in step S503. Determine whether or not it matches.

If the result of the judgment process is a jackpot winning result (step S505: YES), a distribution judgment process is executed (step S506). In the distribution determination process, information for distribution determination, that is, numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2, is read out of the information stored in the execution area AE. Then, referring to the distribution table 64h provided in the main side ROM 64, it is specified to which jackpot result the numerical information related to the read jackpot type counter C2 corresponds. Specifically, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to a low-probability jackpot result, a low-win high-probability jackpot result, and a most profitable jackpot result.

Thereafter, a stop result setting process for jackpot results is executed (step S507). Specifically, information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 37a in the game round related to the start of the current variation is obtained from the stop result table for jackpot results stored in advance in the main side ROM 64. The identified information is written to the main RAM 65. In this stop result table for jackpot results, information on the mode of the picture that is stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 37a is set differently for each type of jackpot result.

Thereafter, flag setting processing corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S508). Specifically, the main RAM 65 is provided with flags corresponding to the types of jackpot results, and in step S508, among the flags corresponding to the types of jackpot results, the flags used in the distribution determination process of step S506 are selected. Set "1" to the flag corresponding to the result.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S505 that the result is not a jackpot winning result, a stop result setting process for a winning result is executed (step S509). Specifically, information on the mode of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 37a in the game round related to the start of the current variation is obtained from the stop result table for miss results stored in advance in the main side ROM 64. The identified information is written to the main RAM 65. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a jackpot result.

After executing either step S508 or step S509, a process for determining the duration of a gaming session is executed (step S510). In this process, numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Furthermore, it is determined whether or not a ready-to-reach display will occur on the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, if the game round related to the start of the current variation is a low-probability jackpot result or a most advantageous jackpot result, it is determined that the reach display will occur. Moreover, if it is not any jackpot result and the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach display occurs.

When it is determined that a reach display will occur, the duration of the game round corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the reach occurrence duration table stored in the main side ROM 64. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the continuation of the game round corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is continued by referring to the continuation period table for non-reach occurrence stored in the main side ROM 64. Get the period. Incidentally, the continuation period of a gaming session that can be obtained by referring to the continuation period table for non-reach occurrence is different from the continuation period of a gaming session that can be obtained by referring to the continuation period table for non-reach occurrence.

The duration of the game round when there is no reach is set such that the longer the number of reservation information stored in the reservation area RE, the shorter the duration of the game round. In addition, when the support mode is high-frequency support mode, a shorter game duration is selected than when the support mode is low-frequency support mode, even if the number of pending information is the same. A duration table for reach non-occurrence is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the duration of a game round does not vary depending on the number of pending information or the support mode, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the duration of the game round when the reach occurs. Further, in the case of various jackpot results, separate duration tables may be set for each of the case of a losing reach and the case of a losing result in which no reach occurs. In this case, the duration of the game round will be allocated according to each game result.

Thereafter, the information on the duration of the game round acquired in step S510 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S511). The numerical information set in the special figure special electric timer counter is updated in a timer update process (step S310). Incidentally, as a performance for the game round, a fluctuating display of symbols on the special symbol display section 37a and a fluctuating display of symbols on the symbol display device 41 are performed, but when each of these fluctuating displays is ended, the game cycle The final stop is displayed for a final stop period (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a state where the stop result is displayed (a state in which a predetermined combination of symbols is on standby on the active line in the symbol display device 41). In this case, the duration of the gaming session acquired in step S510 is the total time of one gaming session.

After that, the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step S512). The variation command includes information about the duration of the game. Here, as mentioned above, the duration of the gaming session obtained by referring to the non-reach duration table is different from the duration of the gaming session obtained by referring to the duration table for reach occurrence. Even if the variation command does not include information on whether or not a reach has occurred, the audio emission control device 81 can identify whether or not a reach has occurred from the information on the duration of the game round. In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating the presence or absence of reach. Note that the variation command may include information that directly indicates the presence or absence of reach. Further, the type command includes information on game results.

When the audio light emission control device 81 receives the variation command and the type command from the main CPU 63, it causes the display light emission section 53, the speaker section 54, and the symbol display device 41 to execute the performance for the game round. In this case, the effect of the game round is performed in a manner corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command. Further, in the symbol display device 41, a fluctuating display of symbols is performed as a performance for the game round, and when the performance for the game round ends, a combination of symbols corresponding to the results of the win/fail judgment process and the distribution judgment process is displayed. Stop display.

Thereafter, variable display of the symbols on the special figure display section 37a is started (step S513). Then, the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step S514). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric line counter when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed is "0", the numerical information of the special figure special electric line counter becomes "1". Thereafter, the eleventh output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S515). The eleventh output flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that information indicating that a game round has started should be output to the management IC 66.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 52), in step S407, a process during special figure variation is executed. In the special figure fluctuation processing, it is determined whether the timing is during the duration of the game round and before the final stop display, and if it is before the final stop display, the display mode of the symbols in the special figure display section 37a is set as a rule. Execute processing to change the When it is time to display the final stop, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter changes from the one corresponding to the process during special figure fluctuation to the one corresponding to the process during special figure confirmation. Update things. Note that in this embodiment, the final stop command is not sent from the main side CPU 63 to the audio emission control device 81.

In step S408, special figure confirmation processing is executed. In the special figure confirmation process, the display mode of the symbols in the special figure display section 37a is set to a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game round. In addition, in the special figure confirmation process, it is determined whether or not the final stop period has elapsed, and if the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not a transition to the opening/closing execution mode will occur. If the transition to the opening/closing execution mode does not occur, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0". When a transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter changes from the one corresponding to the process during special figure confirmation to the one corresponding to the special electric line start process. Update.

In step S409, a special call start process is executed. In the special call start process, if the process for starting the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode has not been executed yet, the opening period setting process is executed. Further, an opening command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. By receiving the opening command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emission section 53, the speaker section 54, and the symbol display device 41 to execute the opening effect. If the opening period has elapsed, start processing is executed to start the first round game. In the start process, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and conditions for ending the round game are set. When setting this end condition, the upper limit duration time for keeping the special electric winning device 32 in the open state in the first round game of this time is set, and the upper limit duration time when the special electric winning device 32 is allowed to win in the first round game of this time is set. The upper limit number of game balls is set in a winning number counter provided in the main side RAM 65.

In step S410, a special electric line opening process is executed. In the special electricity release process, it is determined whether or not the end condition of the round game is satisfied. If the termination condition is met, the special electric prize winning device 32 is brought into a closed state. If the round game that has ended this time is the round game of the last run, then by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter is changed from that corresponding to the special electric line opening process to the special electric line closed process. If the round game that ended this time is the last round game to be executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is added by 2 to make the numerical information of the counter correspond to the special electric current open process. Update from a new version to one that supports special call termination processing.

In step S411, special train closed processing is executed. In the special train closing process, it is determined whether the interval period between round games has elapsed. The interval period is set when the previous round game ends. When the interval period has elapsed, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and conditions for ending the round game are set. Then, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the special train special train counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from that corresponding to the special train closed process to that corresponding to the special train open process.

In step S412, special call termination processing is executed. In the special electric signal termination process, if the process for starting the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode has not been executed yet, the ending period (for example, 5 seconds) is set and an ending command is sent to the audio emission control device 81. . By receiving the ending command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emission section 53, the speaker section 54, and the symbol display device 41 to execute an ending effect. When the ending period has elapsed, each of the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is set to a mode corresponding to the jackpot result that triggered the start of the current opening/closing execution mode.

Next, in the main side CPU 63, based on the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through A configuration for identifying whether or not a game ball has entered the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are input to the main CPU 63.

The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled simultaneously. Areas in which information of "0" or "1" is stored in accordance with the voltage of each signal are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. In other words, the area includes the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7. In addition, more than eight types of signals will be input to the input port 63a, but in order to limit the number of signals input at the same time to eight types, the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is determined by the driver IC. Switched through switching control.

In the ball entry detection process (step S309) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set to the signal group from each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a. In a situation where such settings are made, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the 1st bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric detection sensor 45a. , the fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working port detection sensor 46a, the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 47a, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 47a. The 6th bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the exit detection sensor 48a, and the 7th bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a.

When the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a do not detect the passage of a game ball, they output a LOW level signal indicating that the ball is not being detected as a detection signal, thereby detecting the passage of a game ball. In this case, a HI level signal indicating that detection is in progress is output as a detection signal. The input port 63a stores information of "0" for the corresponding bit when receiving a LOW level signal, and stores "1" for the corresponding bit when receiving a HI level signal. Stores information about. In other words, in a situation where the passing of a game ball is not detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a, information of "0" corresponding to the information indicating that the ball is not detected is stored for the corresponding bit, and the passing of the game ball is not detected. In a situation where detection is being performed, information of "1" corresponding to information indicating that detection is being performed is stored for the corresponding bit.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed in step S309 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

When it is confirmed that the situation has changed from the situation where the 0th bit D0 stores the information "0" to the situation where the information "1" is stored, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S601: YES). In this case, the first output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S602), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S603). . The first output flag is used to specify by the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a should be output to the management IC 66. It's a flag. The 10 prize balls counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that 10 game balls should be paid out. If the value of the 10 prize balls counter is 1 or more, the 10 prize balls command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and the 10 prize balls are outputted. When the command is output once, the value of the 10 award balls counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize balls command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the first bit D1 has changed from the state where the information of "0" is stored to the state where the information of "1" is stored, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S604: YES). In this case, the second output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S605), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S606). . The second output flag is used to specify by the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a should be output to the management IC 66. It's a flag.

When it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S607: YES). In this case, the third output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S608), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S609). . The third output flag is used to specify in the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a should be output to the management IC 66. It's a flag.

When it is confirmed that the third bit D3 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S610: YES). In this case, the special electric winning flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S611), the fourth output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S612), and The value of the 15 award balls counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S613). The special electric winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32 in the round game in the opening/closing execution mode. In the special figure special electric line control process (step S313) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), by confirming that "1" is set in the special electric prize winning flag, it is possible to input one game ball into the special electric prize winning device 32. It is specified that a ball has occurred, and the remaining number of balls that can be entered into a special electric winning device 32 in a round game is subtracted by 1. When the process of subtracting 1 from the number of balls that can be entered is executed, the special electric winning flag is cleared to "0". The fourth output flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a should be output to the management IC 66. . The 15 prize balls counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that 15 game balls should be paid out. If the value of the 15 prize balls counter is 1 or more, the 15 prize balls command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and the 15 prize balls are output. When the command is output once, the value of the 15 prize ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize balls command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the fourth bit D4 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 46a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S614: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S615), and the fifth output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S616). Furthermore, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S617). The first operation winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the first operation port 33. In the special figure special electric control process (step S313) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), by confirming that "1" is set in the first operation winning flag, the game is stored in the reservation area RE of the reservation storage area 65a. Processing for newly storing pending information is executed on the condition that the number of pending information that has been stored is less than the upper limit of 4 pieces. In the special electric special electric control process (step S313), it is confirmed that the first operation winning flag is set to "1", and when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0". do. The fifth output flag is used to specify in the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a should be output to the management IC 66. It's a flag. The one prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times one game ball should be paid out. If the value of the counter for one prize ball is 1 or more, a one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and one prize ball is output. When the command is output once, the value of the one prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the one prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

When it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has changed from the state where the information "0" is stored to the state where the information "1" is stored, the second operating port detection sensor 47a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S618: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S619), and the sixth output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S620). Furthermore, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S621). The second operation winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the second operation port 34. In the special figure special electric control process (step S313) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), by confirming that the second operation winning flag is set to "1", the game is stored in the reservation area RE of the reservation storage area 65a. Processing for newly storing pending information is executed on the condition that the number of pending information that has been stored is less than the upper limit of 4 pieces. In the special electric special electric control process (step S313), it is confirmed that the second operation winning flag is set to "1", and when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0". do. The sixth output flag is used to specify in the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a should be output to the management IC 66. It's a flag.

When it is confirmed that the sixth bit D6 has changed from the state in which the information "0" is stored to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the exit detection sensor 48a detects one game ball. is detected (step S622: YES). In this case, the seventh output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S623). The seventh output flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the exit detection sensor 48a should be output to the management IC 66. be.

When it is confirmed that the seventh bit D7 has changed from the situation where the information "0" is stored to the situation where the information "1" is stored, the gate detection sensor 49a detects that one game ball is It is determined that it has been detected (step S624: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S625). The gate winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), the general map and electric power control process (step S314) confirms that the gate winning flag is set to "1," and the general electrician that is stored in the general electric power reservation area 65c. A process of storing the numerical information of the current general utility goods release counter C4 in the general electric utility holding area 65c as the general electric utility object release counter C4 on the condition that the number of pieces of holding information on the side is less than the upper limit of 4 pieces. Execute. It is confirmed that the gate winning flag is set to "1" in the general map general electricity control process (step S314), and when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the gate winning flag is cleared to "0".

Note that the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated at a 4 millisecond cycle as already explained, so when one ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a starts detecting one game ball, the corresponding In a situation where the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a continue to detect that one game ball, the main CPU 63 is responsible for identifying that one game ball has been detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a. It will be held at Therefore, it is sufficient to provide one each of the first to seventh output flags.

Next, the contents of the processing executed by the payout control device 77 will be explained. First, the electrical configuration of the payout control device 77 and various devices that communicate with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 16.

The payout control device 77 includes an MPU 91. The MPU 91 includes a payout side CPU92, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section, a payout side ROM93, a payout side RAM94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The payout side ROM 93 is a memory such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory (ie, nonvolatile storage means), and is used for reading only. The payout side ROM93 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout side CPU92.

The payout side RAM 94 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (that is, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The payout side RAM 94 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than the payout side ROM 93. The payout side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 93.

The payout side CPU 92 is capable of bidirectional communication with the main side CPU 63. When the payout side CPU 92 receives the prize ball command from the main side CPU 63, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the state is such that it is possible to normally pay out the game balls, and when it is determined that the state is such that it is not possible to pay out the game balls normally, the payout side CPU 92 stores information in the payout side RAM 94. To stop a payout device 76 even in a situation where information on the number of prize balls that have not been paid out is stored. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a payout restriction command to the main side CPU 63 indicating that it is not possible to pay out normally. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 issue a notification indicating that it is not possible to normally pay out game balls. A notification command is sent to the audio emission control device 81 so that the notification is performed. The states in which it is not possible to normally pay out game balls include a full state in which the lower tray 56a is filled with game balls, a no-ball state in which the tank 75 is not replenished with game balls, and a state in which the payout device 76 is not filled with game balls. There is an abnormal payout state in which the game machine does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is released from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is released from the inner frame 13. .

A full tank sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball path leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a, and the detection result of the full tank sensor is input to the payout side CPU92. The payout side CPU 92 determines that the tank is full when the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and the state where the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank sensor is canceled. It is determined that the full tank state has been released.

A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball path leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU92. The payout side CPU 92 identifies the no-ball state when the no-ball detection sensor continues to detect no game balls, and when the no-ball detection sensor continues to detect no game balls, the CPU 92 identifies the no-ball state. Specify that the no-ball state has been released.

The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting game balls paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when a game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 identifies a payout abnormal state when the payout detection sensor does not continuously detect a game ball even though the payout device 76 is drive-controlled so that the game ball is paid out. , when the state in which the game balls are not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is canceled, it is determined that the abnormal payout state has been canceled.

A front door open sensor 95 is provided on the front side of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closure detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is in the open state with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door open sensor 95 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 identifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving a closing detection signal from the front door open sensor 95, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving an open detection signal from the front door open sensor 95. It is specified that the front door frame 14 is in an open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a front door open command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it specifies that the front door frame 14 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the front door frame 14 has changed from the open state to the closed state. At this timing, a front door closing command is sent to the main CPU 63. The main side CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when receiving the front door open command, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the front door close command.

A main body opening sensor 96 is provided on the front side of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input to the dispensing side CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits a closure detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body open sensor 96 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the opening detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96. It is determined that the main body 12 is in an open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a main body opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A main body closing command is sent to the main CPU 63 at the appropriate timing. The main side CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state when receiving the main body opening command, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the main body closing command.

The timer interrupt process executed by the payout side CPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 17. The timer interrupt process is activated repeatedly at a predetermined period (for example, 2 milliseconds).

First, a full tank process is executed (step S701). As already explained, the full tank process is a process to identify whether or not the tank is full based on the detection result of the full tank sensor, and to stop the payout of game balls if the tank is full. At the same time, a command indicating that the tank is full is sent to the main CPU 63. Further, when the full tank state is released, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the full tank state is released is sent to the main side CPU 63.

Thereafter, ball unnecessary processing is executed (step S702). In the no-ball process, as already explained, the process is performed to identify whether or not there is no ball based on the detection result of the no-ball detection sensor, and to stop the payout of game balls if there is no ball. At the same time, a command indicating that there is no ball is sent to the main CPU 63. Furthermore, when the no-ball state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the no-ball state is canceled is sent to the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S703). In the payout abnormality monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormal payout state based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and if it is in the abnormal payout state, a process is executed to stop the payout of game balls. At the same time, a command indicating that the payout is in an abnormal state is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the abnormal payout state is canceled, a process to enable the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the abnormal payout state is canceled is sent to the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, front door opening monitoring processing is executed (step S704). In the front door open monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95, and if the front door frame 14 is in the open state, It executes a process to stop the payout of game balls, and also sends a front door opening command to the main CPU 63. Further, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls, and a front door close command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, main body opening monitoring processing is executed (step S705). In the main body open monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96, and if the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the game ball is At the same time, a main body release command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Furthermore, when the game machine main body 12 is closed, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls, and a main body close command is sent to the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, command reading processing is executed (step S706). In the command reading process, a process of reading the prize ball command sent by the main CPU 63 is executed, and the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. After executing the prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S707), the payout device 76 pays out the game balls. A payout control process is executed to control the execution of (step S708). In the payout control process, when the information on the number of unpaid prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 94 is a value of 1 or more, the payout device 76 is driven and controlled, and the payout detection sensor detects one game ball. In this case, the value of prize ball number information is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the prize ball number information becomes "0", the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. Thereafter, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of output of an external signal according to the processing results of various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process (step S709).

Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal board 97. The external terminal board 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, some of which are electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and some of which are electrically connected to the main CPU 63. A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92. Since the main side CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 are each electrically connected to the external terminal board 97 in this way, as shown in FIG. It is possible to output.

One external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the front door open sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the main body open sensor 96. In detail, regarding the configuration of this electrical connection, a signal relay board 98 is provided at a position in the middle of the signal path from the front door open sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92. The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branching from the signal path SL1 from the front door open sensor 95 toward the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal on the external terminal board 97 for opening the front door. Therefore, the electrical signal corresponding to the detection result by the front door opening sensor 95 is not only input to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the front door on the external terminal board 97. This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state to the hall computer HC without being controlled by the payout side CPU 92.

More specifically, regarding the main body open sensor 96, the signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL4 branching from the signal path SL3 from the main body open sensor 96 toward the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal for opening the main body on the external terminal board 97. Therefore, the electrical signal corresponding to the detection result by the main body opening sensor 96 is not only input to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for main body opening on the external terminal board 97. This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state to the hall computer HC without being controlled by the payout side CPU 92.

Next, the contents of the information externally output from the main side CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 to the hall computer HC will be explained. First, the contents of the information externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be explained.

In the external information setting process (step S318) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), the main CPU 63 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97. The information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, information indicating that the support mode is in the high-frequency support mode, and information indicating that the first game round has ended. information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls are sent from the gaming area PA through any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Information indicating that the game ball has been ejected, information indicating that the game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and information indicating that the game ball has entered the second operating port 34 are included. .

The payout side CPU 92 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97 in the external information setting process (step S709) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17). The information output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that ten game balls have been paid out.

The hall computer HC is able to grasp the manner in which game balls are paid out in the pachinko machine 10 in accordance with various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97. for example,
・Ball payout rate which is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out until 100 game balls are ejected from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 ・Ball payout rate that is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out until 100 game balls are discharged from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 Ball rate (hereinafter, this ball rate will be referred to as "B")
・Ball output rate in opening/closing execution mode ・Ball output rate in high-frequency support mode ・Number of games played until 100 game balls are ejected from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this percentage is (referred to as “S”)
・BS × “Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33 and second operating port 34”
- The number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 until 100 game balls are ejected from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "S1")
- The number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 until 100 game balls are ejected from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "S2")
・B-(S1 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the first operating port 33" + S2 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the second operating port 34")
- The probability of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit game play, the probability of occurrence of the high frequency support mode per unit game play, etc. are calculated. Thereby, it becomes possible to manage the manner in which game balls enter the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. Note that the number of prize balls is the number of game balls that are paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding ball entry section.

<Configuration for managing winning modes of game balls>
Next, a configuration for managing gaming history using the management IC 66 will be explained. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

As already explained, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 includes a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66. In addition to these, the MPU 62 also includes an I/F 101 and the reading terminal 68d described above.

The I/F 101 is an interface for transmitting and receiving signals to and from devices external to the MPU 62. The I/F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via an internal bus 103. Detection results from sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a and commands from the payout side CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I/F 101, and based on the input detection results and contents of the commands, As already explained, various processes are executed by the main CPU 63. Furthermore, as a result of various processes being executed by the main side CPU 63, when a signal is output to a device such as the special electric drive unit 32b, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101, and the main side As a result of various processes being executed by the CPU 63, when a command is output to the payout side CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81, the command output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101.

The management IC 66 includes a management side I/F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, a history memory 117, a calculation result memory 131, It is equipped with These devices are connected through an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66 so as to be able to communicate in both directions.

The management side I/F 111 receives various signals from the main CPU 63 via a signal path group 118 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62, and also receives a signal path group 119 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62. This is an interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 68d. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management side I/F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 68d are output from the output port of the management side I/F 111. Note that the main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d via a signal path group 120 for bidirectional communication built in the MPU 62.

The management CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section. The management side ROM 113 is a memory such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory that does not require an external power supply to maintain memory (that is, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for reading only. The management side ROM 113 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the management side CPU 112. The management side RAM 114 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (that is, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The management side RAM 114 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the management side ROM 113. The management RAM 114 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the management ROM 113.

The RTC 115 is a real-time clock that constantly measures date and time information and outputs the measured date and time information (hereinafter also referred to as date and time information) according to instructions from the management CPU 112. This is a configuration that allows this. Note that the RTC 115 is provided with a backup power source, so that it is possible to measure date information and time information even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The correspondence memory 116 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (ie, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence memory 116 is for storing information on the correspondence between each of the buffers 122a to 122p provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122p. used for. Details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be explained later.

The history memory 117 is a memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory (that is, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing purposes. The history memory 117 is used to store information regarding the game history received from the main CPU 63 through the management I/F 111. Details of the contents of the history memory 117 will be explained later.

The calculation result memory 131 is a memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory (that is, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing purposes. The calculation result memory 131 is used to sequentially store various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 using the history information stored in the history memory 117. The contents of the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are sequentially displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and are output to an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d.

Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management side I/F 111 will be explained. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111.

The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a to 122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p through the signal paths 118a to 118p, and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p receives a signal to be input. When the input signal is at the LOW level, information of "0" is stored as the first data, and when the signal to be input is at the HI level, the information of "1" is stored as the second data. Note that the relationship between these LOW and HI and the first data and second data may be reversed.

A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the first signal of LOW level in a situation where no new game ball is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, and the first winning hole detection sensor 42a outputs one game ball. When a ball is detected, a first signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the first signal at HI level is input to the first buffer 122a.

A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a second signal of LOW level in a situation where no new game balls are detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, and the second winning hole detection sensor 43a outputs a second game ball. When a ball is detected, a second signal at HI level is output for a specific period of time. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the second signal at HI level is input to the second buffer 122b.

A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs a third signal of LOW level in a situation where no new game ball is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a, and one game ball is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. When a ball is detected, a third signal at HI level is output for a specific period of time. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the third signal at the HI level is being input to the third buffer 122c.

A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the fourth signal at LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and when one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. A fourth signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the fourth signal at HI level is input to the fourth buffer 122d.

A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the fifth signal of LOW level in a situation where no new game ball is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a, and the first operating port detection sensor 46a outputs the fifth signal of LOW level. When a ball is detected, a fifth signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the fifth signal at the HI level is being input to the fifth buffer 122e.

A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the sixth signal of LOW level in a situation where the second operating port detection sensor 47a does not detect a new game ball, and the second operating port detection sensor 47a outputs the sixth signal of LOW level. When a ball is detected, a sixth signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the sixth signal at the HI level is input to the sixth buffer 122f.

A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the seventh signal at a LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the exit detection sensor 48a, and when one game ball is detected by the exit detection sensor 48a. In this case, the seventh signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the seventh signal at HI level is being input to the seventh buffer 122g.

An eighth signal corresponding to whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is input to the eighth buffer 122h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal at LOW level when the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect, and continuously outputs the eighth signal at HI level when the opening/closing execution mode is present.

A ninth signal corresponding to whether the high-frequency support mode is in progress is input to the ninth buffer 122i. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the ninth signal at LOW level when the mode is not high-frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the ninth signal at HI-level when the mode is high-frequency support mode.

A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open period is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continues to output the 10th signal at LOW level when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and continues to output the 10th signal at HI level when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. and output it.

An eleventh signal corresponding to whether or not a game round has been started is input to the eleventh buffer 122k. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the 11th signal at LOW level until the game round starts, and outputs the 11th signal at HI level for a specific period when the game round starts. do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level eleventh signal is input to the eleventh buffer 122k.

A setting value update signal for making the management CPU 112 recognize that the main CPU 63 has newly set the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level setting value update signal when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not newly set, and when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Then, the HI level setting value update signal outputs a pulse signal that is maintained for a specific period for a number of minutes corresponding to the newly set setting value. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level setting value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o.

The 16th buffer 122p contains an output instruction signal for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize the opportunity to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to the reading terminal 68d. is input. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal when there is no need to output history information, and outputs a HI level output instruction signal for a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p.

The 12th buffer 122l, the 13th buffer 122m, and the 14th buffer 122n can receive signals from the main CPU 63, but are blank to which normal signals are not input in the pachinko machine 10. In this way, by providing the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this pachinko machine 10 with more buffers 122a to 122p than the types of signals output from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66, It becomes possible to use the management IC 66 for a model different from the present pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66. Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p so as to correspond one-to-one to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the signal paths 118l to 118n are not formed between the buffers 122l to 122n to be blanked.

It has been decided at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the setting value update signal will be input to the 15th buffer 122o and that the output instruction signal will be input to the 16th buffer 122p, and the instructions from the main CPU 63 can be received. Instead, the management CPU 112 can specify that the setting value update signal is input to the 15th buffer 122o and that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p. On the other hand, what types of signals are input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are determined by instructions from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. Specification of the types of these signals in the management CPU 112 will be described in detail later, but when control is started in the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 with the start of supply of operating power to the MPU 62, the identification of the types of these signals from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 This is done by sending a type identification command to. In this case, information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the management CPU 112 identifies the types of various signals in a situation where operating power is supplied, Information stored in the correspondence memory 116 is referred to.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. The correspondence memory 116 has first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in one-to-one correspondence to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111. It is provided.

In the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a. In addition, in the first correspondence area 123a, there is information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31, as well as information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 (10 balls). Stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b. In addition, in the second correspondence area 123b, along with information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31, information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 (10 balls) is also included. Stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c. In addition, in the third correspondence area 123c, there is information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31, as well as information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 (10 balls). Stored.

The fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32 as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 122d. In addition, in the fourth correspondence area 123d, there is information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32, as well as information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the special electric winning device 32 (15 balls). Stored. Information indicating that the signal is the first operating port 33 is stored in the fifth correspondence area 123e as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e. Further, in the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating that it is the first operating port 33 and information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the first operating port 33 (1 ) are also stored. Information indicating that the signal is the second operating port 34 is stored in the sixth correspondence area 123f as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 122f. In addition, the sixth correspondence area 123f contains information indicating that the second operating port 34 is used, as well as information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the second operating port 34 (1 ) are also stored. Information indicating that the signal is the output port 24a is stored in the seventh correspondence area 123g as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

The eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is used as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. Information indicating the high frequency support mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. Information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored in the tenth correspondence area 123j as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j. The eleventh correspondence area 123k stores information indicating that a game round has started, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k.

The twelfth correspondence area 123l stores, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l, information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the types. The thirteenth correspondence area 123m stores, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the types. The fourteenth correspondence area 123n stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the types, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n.

As described above, the configuration is such that the management CPU 112 specifies what kind of signals are input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n by receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. , it becomes possible to use the management IC 66 for a model different from the present pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

Furthermore, instead of outputting information for recognizing the type of signal each time a signal corresponding to storage of history information is output to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n, the type of signal is recognized in advance. The correspondence memory 116 stores information for the management CPU 112 to specify the types of signals to be input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n based on the output information. The configuration is as follows. As a result, compared to a configuration in which information for recognizing the type of signal is output each time a signal corresponding to storage of history information is output to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n, the main It becomes possible to suppress the amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112.

Additionally, the management CPU 112 outputs information for specifying the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n when supply of operating power is started. As a result, when a game is started on the pachinko machine 10, the management CPU 112 can specify the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n.

Further, information setting that a setting value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o and information setting that an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p is performed at the design stage of the management IC 66. As a result, the 15th buffer 122o and the 16th buffer 122p can reliably use the setting value update signal and the output instruction signal not only in this pachinko machine 10 but also in other pachinko machines that use the management IC 66. It becomes possible to omit the process for specifying the type of signal input to the input signal. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of processing for identifying the type of signal.

Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be explained. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117.

The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are set in serial numbers, and a history information storage area 125 is set in one-to-one correspondence with each piece of pointer information. The history information storage area 125 can store combinations of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, a 1 byte data capacity is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and an area for storing correspondence information. A data capacity of 1 byte is allocated. When it becomes necessary to store correspondence information according to the signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n (actually, in the case of this pachinko machine 10, the first to eleventh buffers 122a to 122k) First, the date and time information measured by the current RTC 115 is stored in the area for storing RTC information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information currently being written. After that, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122n that triggered the current information storage is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122n in the correspondence memory 116, and the read correspondence information is is stored in the area for storing correspondence information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information currently being written.

Specifically, regarding the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g receive signals corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, as described above. Therefore, the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116 store information corresponding to the types of ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. More specifically, information corresponding to the type of ball entry portion corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. In this pachinko machine 10, as already explained, the first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a detect game balls that have entered the general winning hole 31. Information indicating that each of the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the detection sensors 42a to 44a is a general winning hole 31 is stored. Further, the fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32, and the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that it is the first operating port 33. , the sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating that it is the second operating port 34, and the seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating that it is the out port 24a. If the buffer 122a to 122n that triggered the information storage this time is one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of ball entry part corresponding to the buffer 122a to 122g is the first to seventh buffer. The information about the type of ball entering part is read out from one of the seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, and the information about the type of ball entering part is stored as is in the area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

On the other hand, the eighth buffer 122h receives a signal indicating whether it is in the open/close execution mode, the ninth buffer 122i receives a signal indicating whether it is in the high-frequency support mode, and the tenth buffer 122j receives a signal indicating whether it is in the high-frequency support mode. A signal indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open is inputted, and a signal indicating whether a game round has been started is inputted to the eleventh buffer 122k. Therefore, the eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is set, the ninth correspondence area 123i stores information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set, and the tenth correspondence area Information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored in 123j, and information indicating that it is the game round is stored in the eleventh correspondence area 123k.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the 8th signal at LOW level when the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect, and continuously outputs the 8th signal at HI level when the opening/closing execution mode is in effect. The side CPU 112 specifies that the opening/closing execution mode has started when the eighth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and specifies that the opening/closing execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from HI level to LOW level. becomes possible. Then, in both cases where the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 receives an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Specify that That is, when the eighth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, not only the information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in the opening/closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the start information are transferred to the history information storage area 123h. is stored in the area for storing correspondence relationship information. Furthermore, when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the opening/closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the end information are transferred to the history information storage area 123h. is stored in the area for storing correspondence relationship information.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the 9th signal at LOW level when it is not in high-frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the 9th signal at HI-level when it is in high-frequency support mode. , the management side CPU 112 specifies that the high-frequency support mode has started when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and the high-frequency support mode ends when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It is possible to identify that. Then, when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 receives an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Specify that In other words, when the ninth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, not only the information indicating that the high frequency support mode is in the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the start information are transferred to the history information storage area. It is stored in an area for storing 125 correspondence information. Furthermore, when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the termination information are transferred to the history information storage area. It is stored in an area for storing 125 correspondence information.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the 10th signal at LOW level when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and outputs the 10th signal at HI level when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. In order to continue outputting, the management side CPU 112 identifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the 10th signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the 10th signal changes from HI level to LOW level. It becomes possible to specify that the front door frame 14 is closed. Then, in both cases where the tenth signal changes from LOW level to HI level and from HI level to LOW level, the management CPU 112 receives an opportunity to store correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Specify that In other words, when the 10th signal changes from LOW level to HI level, not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the 10th correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information is stored in the history information. It is stored in the area for storing correspondence information in area 125. Further, when the 10th signal changes from HI level to LOW level, history information is stored together with not only the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is the front door frame 14 read from the 10th correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information. It is stored in the area for storing correspondence information in area 125.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the 11th signal at LOW level until the start timing of the game round, and when the start timing of the game round comes, the 11th signal at HI level is output for a specific period. Output a signal. Therefore, the management side CPU 112 specifies that a game round has started when the eleventh signal changes from LOW level to HI level. In other words, when the 11th signal changes from LOW level to HI level, information indicating that it is a game time read from the 11th correspondence area 123k is stored in the correspondence relationship information of the history information storage area 125. Store it in the area.

The history information storage area 125 is capable of storing all the history information that has occurred during that period, even if there are 10 consecutive business days in which the pachinko machine 10 continues to shoot game balls from opening to closing. It takes a few minutes. For example, if history information is generated 60,000 times in a day, more than 600,000 history information storage areas 125 are provided. This allows all history information to be stored and held in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 in addition to the history area 124. The pointer area 126 stores information for the management CPU 112 to specify pointer information that is currently being written in the history memory 117. Specifically, at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, the pointer area 126 is set with information that specifies pointer information of "0" to be written. Then, each time a piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1. When the pointer information in the last order becomes the write target and the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information in the last order, the pointer information is set so that the pointer information of "0" becomes the write target. The information in the area 126 is updated. As a result, if an opportunity arises to store history information that exceeds the number of pieces of history information that can be stored, the history information storage area 125 where the oldest history information is stored will be overwritten with new history information in order. Become.

Additionally, when history information is read from the history memory 117 by an external device, the history information storage area 125 is cleared to all "0" and the pointer information of "0" becomes the writing target. Information in the pointer area 126 is updated. This makes it possible to prevent history information that has once been targeted for reading from becoming targeted for reading again.

Next, a specific processing configuration for managing gaming history using the management IC 66 will be explained. First, a processing configuration for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 and signal types in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the recognition process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 9).

First, a recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "14" (step S801). The recognition output counter is the remainder of the information output for making the management side CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 correspond to. This counter is used by the main CPU 63 to specify the required number of times. As already explained, since the 14 first to 14th buffers 122a to 122n are the targets of signal type recognition, "14" is set in the recognition output counter.

Thereafter, output processing of an identification start command is executed (step S802). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize which types of signals the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n correspond to. When outputting this command, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used. That is, by using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management CPU 112 to store history information, the first to fourteenth buffers 122a A command is output to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the signals 122n to 122n correspond to. This reduces the number of signal paths compared to a configuration in which the signal path for outputting the command is provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration. The identification start command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In addition, in the process of outputting the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification start command in order to make the management side CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. In addition, the output period of the identification start command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the ninth signal. has been done. By receiving the identification start command, the management side CPU 112 is instructed to start processing for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the signal types in the correspondence memory 116. Identify.

Thereafter, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S803). In this case, the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n correspond to each other so that the first buffer 122a becomes the signal type setting target first, and then the nth buffer and then the n+1th buffer become the signal type setting target. The recognition setting for the signal type to be used is performed. Therefore, if the output counter for recognition is "14" to "12", the type identification command indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 and the number of prize balls is read out, and if the output counter for recognition is "11", it is a special prize winning hole. A type identification command indicating that the device is the device 32 and the number of prize balls is read out, and if the recognition output counter is “10”, a type identification command indicating that the device is the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls is read out, If the output counter for recognition is "9", it is the second operating port 34 and the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls is read out, and if the output counter for recognition is "8", it is the out port 24a. If the output counter for recognition is "7", read the type identification command that indicates the opening/closing execution mode, and if the output counter for recognition is "6", it is the high frequency support mode. If the output counter for recognition is "5", the type identification command is read out indicating that it is the front door frame 14, and if the output counter for recognition is "4", it is the game time. A type identification command indicating that the recognition output counter is between "3" and "1" is read out, and a type identification command indicating that the recognition output counter is blank is read out.

Thereafter, output processing of the read type identification command is executed (step S804). The type identification command has a data capacity of 8 bits like the identification start command, and each bit of data is input as the first to eighth signals to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h, respectively. In addition, in the process of outputting the identification type command, in order to make the management side CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when outputting the identification type command is started. In addition, the output period of the identification type command and the period for maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification type command and the ninth signal. has been done. By receiving the identification type command, the management side CPU 112 sets correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current setting target buffer among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n to correspond to the identification type command. Store information to be used.

Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S805), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S806). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S806: NO), a process for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after being subtracted by 1 is executed (steps S803 and Step S804).

On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S806: YES), output processing of the identification end command is executed (step S807). The identification end command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In addition, in the process of outputting the identification end command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when outputting the identification end command is started, in order to make the management side CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. In addition, the output period of the identification end command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the ninth signal. has been done. By receiving the identification end command, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the process for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the signal types in the correspondence memory 116 has been completed. do.

Next, the management processing executed by the management side CPU 112 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started. Note that the processing speed of the management side CPU 112 is faster than the processing speed of the main side CPU 63, and after one timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started in the main side CPU 63, the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started. The combination of processes from step S908 onward in the management process is executed 16 or more times before the process starts.

First, it is determined whether an identification start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S901). If the identification start command has not been received (step S901: NO), the process returns to step S901 after executing the setting update recognition process (step S902). In the setting update recognition process, the details will be described later, but when the main CPU 63 performs a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, a process corresponding to the new setting is executed.

When the identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S901: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S903). The setting target counter is a counter used by the management CPU 112 to specify the types of the buffers 122a to 122n whose signal types are to be set. The first buffer 122a is the signal type setting target first, and thereafter the signal type is set to the nth buffer and then the (n+1)th buffer.

Thereafter, on the condition that a type identification command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S904: YES), a correspondence relationship setting process is executed (step S905). In the correspondence setting process, the currently received type identification is placed in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the counter to be set in the management side RAM 114 among the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n of the correspondence memory 116. Stores information about the signal type set in the command. Thereafter, the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S906).

If a negative determination is made in step S904, or if the process in step S906 is executed, it is determined whether an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S907). If the identification end command has not been received (step S907: NO), the process returns to step S904, and on the condition that a new type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S904: YES), steps S905 and S906 are performed. Execute the process again.

If the identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S907: YES), the processes of steps S908 to S910 are repeatedly executed. In step S908, a history setting process is executed to store history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117, although the details will be described later. In step S909, although details will be described later, various parameters are calculated using the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the results of the calculations are reported on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Executes display output processing for In step S910, although details will be described later, external output processing is executed to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to the reading terminal 68d.

FIG. 24 is a time chart showing how information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122n is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. 24(a) shows a period during which commands are output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h). b) shows the period in which the output state of the ninth signal is at HI level, and FIG. 24(d) shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed, and FIG. 24(d) shows the timing at which the correspondence setting process (step S905) is executed by the management CPU 112.

By starting the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at timing t1, as shown in FIG. 24(a). Ru. Further, at the timing of t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 24(b). Thereafter, at timing t2 when the identification start command continues to be output, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 24(b). By confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 identifies that the command is being sent from the main side CPU 63, and outputs the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 can be grasped. In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management CPU 112 enters the identification state by making an affirmative determination in step S901 of the management process (FIG. 23). Thereafter, at timing t3, the output of the identification start command is stopped as shown in FIG. 24(a).

Thereafter, at timing t4, output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started as shown in FIG. 24(a). Further, at the timing t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 24(b). Thereafter, at timing t5 when the type identification command continues to be output, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 24(b). The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and updates the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 can be grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process at timing t5 as shown in FIG. 24(d). In the correspondence relationship setting process, information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 and information on the number of prize balls are stored in the first correspondence area 123a of the correspondence memory 116. Thereafter, at timing t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG. 24(a).

After that, at each of the timings from t7 to t9, from t10 to t12, from t13 to t15, and from t16 to t18, the main Correspondence setting processing corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63 is executed by the management side CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence relationship setting process corresponding to the 14th type identification command is completed from timing t16 to timing t18.

Thereafter, at timing t19, output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started as shown in FIG. 24(a). Further, at the timing t19, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 24(b). Thereafter, at timing t20 when the identification end command continues to be output, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 24(b). The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and updates the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 can be grasped. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management CPU 112 ends at timing t20 as shown in FIG. 24(c). Thereafter, at timing t21, the output of the identification end command is stopped as shown in FIG. 24(a).

As described above, by using the ninth signal to make the management CPU 112 recognize whether or not a command is being output, it is possible to instruct the management CPU 112 as to when to store history information. Even in a configuration where command output is performed using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths), it is clearly made clear to the management CPU 112 that the command is being output. It becomes possible to make it recognized.

Next, a processing configuration for storing history information in the history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the management output process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the management output process is executed in step S319 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

First, a management target counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "11" (step S1001). The managed target counter allows the main CPU 63 to determine whether or not there is a managed target that is not specified as to whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in the current management output process. It is also a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed for which management target. The management targets for which the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in one management output process are the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, There are a total of 11 items, including whether the opening/closing execution mode is executed, whether the high-frequency support mode is executed, whether the front door frame 14 is opened or closed, and whether the game round is started. Therefore, first, the managed counter is set to "11".

Thereafter, it is determined whether the output state of the signal to the management CPU 112 for the managed object corresponding to the current managed object counter value is at the HI level (step S1002). If the level is not HI (step S1002: NO), by determining whether the value of the managed counter is 5 or more, the ball entering detection sensor 42a has seven managed targets corresponding to the value of the managed counter. to 48a is specified (step S1003).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined whether the output flag of the main side RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S1004). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is "11" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether the first output flag is set to "1", If the value of the counter to be managed is "10" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether the second output flag is set to "1", and the value of the counter to be managed is determined. is "9" and corresponds to the third winning a prize opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not the third output flag is set to "1", and the value of the managed counter is "8". Yes, if it corresponds to the special electric detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether the fourth output flag is set to "1", and if the value of the managed counter is "7", the first operating port detection sensor 46a is determined. If it is compatible with the second operating port detection sensor 47a, it is determined whether the fifth output flag is set to "1" or not, and the value of the managed counter is "6", which corresponds to the second operating port detection sensor 47a. In this case, it is determined whether or not the sixth output flag is set to "1", and if the value of the managed counter is "5" and corresponds to the output port 24a, the seventh output flag is set to "1". 1" is set. As already explained, these first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 15).

If the output flag corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed is set to "1" (step S1004: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed among the first to seventh signals is set to HI level. (step S1005). Thereafter, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S1006).

If a negative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined whether an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the HI level has occurred (step S1007). Specifically, if the value of the counter to be managed is "4", it is determined whether a transition to the opening/closing execution mode has occurred, and if the value of the counter to be managed is "3", the high It is determined whether a transition to the frequency support mode has occurred, and if the value of the managed counter is "2", it is determined whether the front door frame 14 has become open, and the managed counter is If the value is "1", it is determined whether the game round has started by determining whether or not the eleventh output flag is set to "1". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1007, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to HI level (step S1008). Note that when the process of step S1008 is executed when the value of the managed counter is "1", the eleventh output flag is cleared to "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined whether an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level (step S1009). Specifically, if the value of the management target counter is 5 or more or "1" and the current management target is any of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a or the start of a game round, the first to seventh signals and determines whether a HI output continuation period (specifically 10 milliseconds) has elapsed since the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the 11th signals was switched from the LOW level to the HI level. . This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S908) of the management process (FIG. 23) in the management side CPU 112, and the output of the signal that has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This is a period during which the management CPU 112 can reliably identify the state. In addition, if the value of the managed target counter is "4" and the current managed target is in the open/close execution mode, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode has ended, and if the value of the managed target counter is "3" and the current managed target is in the open/close execution mode. If the current management target is the high-frequency support mode, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode has ended or not, and the value of the management target counter is "2" and the current management target is the front door frame 14. If so, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. If an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S1009: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the LOW level ( Step S1010).

If a negative determination is made in step S1004, if the process of step S1006 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S1007, if the process of step S1008 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S1009, or if a negative determination is made in step S1009, or When the process of S1010 is executed, the value of the managed counter of the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1011). Then, it is determined whether the value of the managed counter after being subtracted by 1 is "0" (step S1012). If the value of the managed target counter is 1 or more (step S1012: NO), the processes from step S1002 onwards are executed for the managed target corresponding to the new managed target counter value.

Next, the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26. The history setting process is executed in step S908 of the management process (FIG. 23).

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is set in a check target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S1101). Specifically, among the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blankness is stored is identified, and the number of correspondence areas is identified. Set the information of the number in the confirmation target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, as already explained, information other than the information indicating blankness is stored in the first to eleventh correspondence areas 123a to 123k, so in step S1101, the counter to be checked is set to "11". do.

Thereafter, it is checked whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1102). Note that when the value of the counter to be checked is "n", the nth buffers 122a to 122n are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "11", the 11th buffer 122k will be the target for checking numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth buffer 122e will be the target for checking numerical information. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S1103). Then, writing processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1104). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is currently the writing target is identified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S1103 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current check target counter value, and written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Furthermore, if the correspondence relationship information is any of the information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, the information indicating that it is in high-frequency support mode, and the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14, the above-mentioned Not only correspondence information but also start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Note that when the value of the confirmation target counter is "n", the n-th correspondence areas 123a to 123n are the targets for reading the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "11", the 11th correspondence area 123k becomes the correspondence relation information read target, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence relation. The information is to be read.

By executing the writing process as described above, the value of the counter to be checked is set to one of the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the game round. In this case, the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written contains the RTC information, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 33. The combination of the operating port 34 and the correspondence information indicating that it is one of the game times is stored as history information. In addition, if the value of the counter to be checked is one of the opening/closing execution mode, high-frequency support mode, and front door frame 14, RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. A combination of the start information and the correspondence information indicating that the mode is one of the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14 is stored as history information.

Thereafter, target pointer update processing is executed (step S1105). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read out and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

If a negative determination is made in step S1102, or if the process in step S1105 is executed, the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked indicate whether or not the signal output has been switched to the LOW level. It is determined whether correspondence information to be checked is stored (step S1106). Specifically, if the current value of the counter to be checked is "8" to "10", information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect and information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in the corresponding correspondence area 123h to 123j are displayed. Since either the information indicating that there is a door frame 14 or the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1106.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1106, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is changed from "1" to "0". By checking whether the input signal from the main CPU 63 has been input to the buffer, it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the HI level to the LOW level (step S1107). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1107, the RTC information is read out in the same manner as in step S1103 (step S1108), and the writing process to the history memory 117 is further executed (step S1109). In the writing process, the RTC information read in step S1108 is written into the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current check target counter value, and written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Furthermore, not only the correspondence information but also the termination information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this way, if the value of the counter to be checked is in the opening/closing execution mode, high-frequency support mode, or front door frame 14, it corresponds to the pointer information to be written. A combination of RTC information, correspondence information indicating that the mode is one of opening/closing execution mode, high-frequency support mode, and front door frame 14, and termination information is stored as history information in the history information storage area 125. The state will be as follows. Thereafter, the target pointer update process is executed in the same manner as step S1105 (step S1110).

If a negative determination is made in step S1106, if a negative determination is made in step S1107, or if the process of step S1110 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S1111). Then, it is determined whether the value of the check target counter after subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S1112). If the value of the check target counter is 1 or more (step S1112: NO), the process from step S1102 onwards is executed for the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

Next, the manner in which history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 27. 27(a) shows a period in which a HI level signal is input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g, 122k, and FIG. 27(b) shows a period when a HI level signal is input to the eighth buffer 122h. 27(c) shows a period when a HI level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 27(d) shows a period when a HI level signal is input to the tenth buffer 122j. FIG. 27E shows the timing of writing history information into the history memory 117.

At timing t1, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g, 122k is switched from LOW level to HI level, as shown in FIG. 27(a). Therefore, at the timing t1, history information is written into the history memory 117 as shown in FIG. 27(e). Thereafter, at timing t2, the signal that was switched to HI level at timing t1 is switched to LOW level, as shown in FIG. 27(a). However, since the signal is input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g, 122k, and the switching of the LOW level is not subject to storage of history information, the signal at t2 is At this timing, writing of history information is not executed as shown in FIG. 27(e).

Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the timing of t5, the timing of t6, the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t13 and the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. The output state of the signal input to any of the No. 11 buffers 122a to 122g, 122k is switched from LOW level to HI level. Therefore, history information is written at each of these timings as shown in FIG. 27(e).

As shown in FIG. 27(b), the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is at HI level from timing t4 to timing t7. This eighth buffer 122h corresponds to whether or not the opening/closing execution mode occurs. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27(e), the timing t4 is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal changes to the LOW level. History information is written at each timing t7. In this case, the history information written at timing t4 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t7 includes end information. Thereby, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode.

Furthermore, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is in the opening/closing execution mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, it is possible to determine which of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the field is in the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 27(c), the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is at the HI level from timing t8 to timing t11. This ninth buffer 122i corresponds to whether or not the high-frequency support mode occurs. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27(e), the timing t8 is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal changes to the LOW level. History information is written at each timing t11. In this case, the history information written at timing t8 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t11 includes end information. This makes it possible to grasp the execution period of the high-frequency support mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

Furthermore, history information is written into the history memory 117 in the order of time. Therefore, the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is also included in the high-frequency support mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, it is possible to determine which of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has hit a field is in the high-frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 27(d), the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is at HI level from timing t12 to timing t15. This tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27(e), the timing t12 is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal changes to the LOW level. History information is written at each timing t15. In this case, the history information written at timing t12 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t15 includes end information. Thereby, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it becomes possible to grasp the period during which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

Furthermore, history information is written into the history memory 117 in the order of time. Therefore, while the front door frame 14 is open, history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is displayed. It becomes possible to distinguish whether it is the one or not. In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, it is possible to determine which of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the front door frame 14 is while the front door frame 14 is being opened.

Next, a process for outputting a setting value update signal that is executed when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set by the main CPU 63 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the output processing of the setting value update signal executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the output process of the set value update signal is executed in step S119 in the main process (FIG. 9).

A value corresponding to the currently set value of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the pulse number counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S1201). Specifically, the value of the set value counter in the main side RAM 65 is set to the pulse number counter. Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value update signal directed to the management side CPU 112 is at the HI level (step S1202). As already explained, the setting value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 in the management IC 66. Here, the setting value update signal output process is a process for causing the management CPU 112 to specify the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n of the input port 121 in the main process (FIG. 9). It is executed before a certain recognition process. On the other hand, since it is set in the management IC 66 at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 that the set value update signal is input to the 15th buffer 122o, the set value update signal is output before the recognition process. Even if the process is executed, it becomes possible for the management CPU 112 to identify that the signal being input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is the setting value update signal.

If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the value of the LOW level counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1203), and whether the value of the LOW level counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" or not is determined. (Step S1204). The LOW level counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to determine whether or not the set value update signal is maintained at the LOW level for a predetermined period of time while the set value update signal outputs a plurality of pulses that make the set value update signal go to the HI level. It is. If the value of the LOW level counter is "0" (step S1204: YES), it means that it is time to set the set value update signal to the HI level, so the set value update signal is set to the HI level. settings (step S1205).

Thereafter, "20" is set in the HI level counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S1206). The HI level counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to specify the period during which the set value update signal is maintained at the HI level. Since the value set in the HI level counter is subtracted by 1 at a cycle of approximately 10 microseconds, the set value update signal is maintained at the HI level for 200 microseconds when one pulse is output. This HI level maintenance period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to identify that the setting value update signal has been changed from a LOW level to a HI level.

If the set value update signal is at HI level (step S1202: YES), the value of the HI level counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1207), and the value of the HI level counter after the 1 subtraction is "0". It is determined whether or not (step S1208). If the value of the HI level counter is "0" (step S1208: YES), it means that it is time to set the set value update signal to the LOW level, so the set value update signal is set to the LOW level. settings (step S1209).

Thereafter, the value of the pulse number counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1210), and it is determined whether the value of the pulse number counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1211). If the value of the pulse number counter is not "0" (step S1211: NO), the output of pulse signals by the set value update signal for the number corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time has been completed. Since this means that there is no data, "20" is set in the LOW level counter of the main side RAM 65 (step S1212). Since the value set in the LOW level counter is subtracted by 1 at a cycle of approximately 10 microseconds, the value is maintained at the LOW level for 200 microseconds between the plurality of pulse outputs caused by the set value update signal. This LOW level maintenance period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to identify that the setting value update signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level.

If the value of the pulse number counter is "0" (step S1211: YES), the output of pulse signals by the set value update signal corresponding to the currently set set value of the pachinko machine 10 has been completed. Therefore, output processing of a setting value identification end command is executed (step S1213). The setting value identification end command is a command for making the management CPU 112 recognize that the output of the setting value update signal for making the management CPU 112 recognize the currently set setting value of the pachinko machine 10 has been completed. When outputting the set value identification end command, the first to eighth signals inputted to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used in the same way as the identification start command, type identification command, and identification end command. However, the signal pattern of the set value identification end command is different from the identification start command, type identification command, and identification end command.

As described above, in the process of outputting the setting value update signal, a pulse signal is output to the management IC 66 by the setting value update signal for a number of minutes corresponding to the value of the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 that was set at the start of the current supply of operating power. do. By executing the setting update recognition process, the management CPU 112 determines the number of pulse signals generated by the setting value update signal, and determines the currently set setting value of the pachinko machine 10 based on the number of pulse signals.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the setting update recognition process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the setting update recognition process is executed in step S902 of the management process (FIG. 23).

It is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1301). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, the value of a setting value grasping counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is set to "1" (step S1302). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means that the setting is "setting 6".

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S1303). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1304). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one level.

If a negative determination is made in step S1303 or if the process in step S1304 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. , it is determined whether a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1305). If a negative determination is made in step S1305, the process returns to step S1303.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1305, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S1306). Then, writing processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1307). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is currently the write target is identified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information that is the write target is corresponded to. The RTC information read in step S1306 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the value information of the set value understanding counter are written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting was made, and information on the setting value when the setting was made. The combination is now stored as history information.

Thereafter, target pointer update processing is executed (step S1308). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read out and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set by executing the setting update recognition process as described above, the information indicating that the setting was made, the date and time when the setting was made, and the A combination of setting values when settings are made is stored in the history area 124 as history information. As a result, by reading and analyzing the information stored in the history memory 117 using the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be updated to the date and time when the setting was newly set and the relevant setting. It becomes possible to understand the contents of the setting values when the settings are made.

Here, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the information stored in the history memory 117 is maintained as is. As a result, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being deleted. It is calculated using historical information that exists before and after. In this case, as described above, the date and time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was newly set is stored in the history memory 117, so an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d and the date and time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is stored in the history memory 117. By reading the information, it becomes possible to calculate various parameters for a period after the timing when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and while the setting state is maintained.

Next, the display output processing executed by the management side CPU 112 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30. Note that the display output process is executed in step S909 of the management process (FIG. 23).

First, it is determined whether or not it is calculation timing (step S1401). If 51 seconds have passed since the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 was started, or if 51 seconds have passed since the previous affirmative determination was made in step S1401, an affirmative determination is made in step S1401. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the number of balls entering each type during normal times is calculated (step S1402). Specifically, first, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the output port 24a is stored, Calculate the number of balls entering. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the ball enters the general winning hole 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the ball enters the general winning hole 31. Calculate the number. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the ball enters the special electric winning device 32 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, Calculate the number. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence relationship information indicating that the first actuation port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, information about the first actuation port 33 is stored. Calculate the number of balls entering. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence relationship information indicating that the second actuation port 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, information on the second actuation port 34 is stored. Calculate the number of balls entering.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 where the correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relationship indicating that it is the front door frame 14 are stored. By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists during the period between the history information storage area 125 where the information and the end information are stored, the exit that occurred when the front door frame 14 is in an open state can be detected. 24a, the number of balls entering each of the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 is calculated (step S1403). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the front door frame is the front door frame 14 and start information are stored; The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the termination information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and start information are stored, and a correspondence relationship that indicates that it is the front door frame 14. If there are multiple sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. Although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the front door frame 14 and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 exists. If the correspondence relationship information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and the end information are not stored in the history information storage area 125 where is stored, the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 are stored. All history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 in which the front door frame 14 is stored is treated as that in which the front door frame 14 is in an open state.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1402 and S1403 (step S1404). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls that occurred while the front door frame 14 was open, calculated in step S1403, is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1402. Then, the following first to eighth parameters are calculated using each number of balls entered after the subtraction. Note that the difference between the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1403 and the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1402 is defined as the number of balls entering K1, and the number of balls entering the general winning hole 31 calculated in step S1402 is The difference between the number of balls entered in the general winning slot 31 calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of entered balls K2, and the difference between the number of balls entered in the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1402 and the number of balls entered in the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1403. The difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1403 is defined as the number K3 of entering balls, and the difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1402. The number of balls entered is K4, and the difference between the number of balls entered into the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1403 and the number of balls entered into the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1402 is set as the number K5 of balls entered.
・First parameter: Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "First operating opening 33 The ratio of the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")/"Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34") D1”)
・Second parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the general prize opening 31 K2/total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5)・Third parameter: Game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 Ratio of total number of game balls entering K3/total number of game balls discharged from gaming area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) 4th parameter: Total number of game balls entering first operating port 33 K4/discharging from gaming area PA Ratio of the total number of game balls (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D2")
- Fifth parameter: ratio of total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 K5/total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D3")
・Sixth parameter: D1 - (D2 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + D3 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")
- Seventh parameter: (K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "General "Number of prize balls for winning into the winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34 8th parameter: K3 × "Number of prize balls received in the special electric winning device 32" / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 × "Number of prize balls received in the general winning slot 31") Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the first actuation port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the second actuation port 34 '') In step S1404, the first to eighth parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the normal storage area of the calculation result memory 131. The first to eighth parameters stored in the normal storage area are stored and held until the next step S1404 is executed. In other words, when step S1404 is executed next time and the first to eighth parameters are calculated, the newly calculated first to eighth parameters are stored in the normal storage area. The previous calculation results of the first to eighth parameters that were previously stored in the normal storage area are overwritten.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 stores correspondence information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect and start information, and the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode exists. By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists during the period between the history information storage area 125 where the end information is stored, the out exit 24a and the general winning opening 31 that have occurred in the opening/closing execution mode are , the number of balls entering each of the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated (step S1405). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect and start information are stored, and correspondence relationship information and end information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being stored. is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is stored, and correspondence information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is stored. If there are multiple sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. Furthermore, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is present. If correspondence relationship information and end information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is not stored in the stored history information storage area 125, correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being stored are stored. Any history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is handled as being in the opening/closing execution mode.

After that, during the period in the opening/closing execution mode specified in step S1405, the out exit 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special winning winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the The number of balls entering each of the second operating ports 34 is calculated (step S1406). The method of calculating the number of entering balls is the same as that in step S1403, except that the period in the opening/closing execution mode specified in step S1405 is assumed.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1405 and S1406 (step S1407). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls that occurred while the front door frame 14 was open, calculated in step S1406, is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1405. Then, the following 11th to 18th parameters are calculated using each number of balls entered after the subtraction. Note that the difference between the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1406 and the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1406 is defined as the number of balls entering K11, and the number of balls entering the general winning hole 31 calculated in step S1405 is The difference between the number of balls entered into the general winning slot 31 calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of entered balls K12, and the difference between the number of balls entered into the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1405 and the number of balls entered in the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1406. The difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1406 is defined as the number K13 of entering balls, and the difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1405. The number of balls entered is K14, and the difference between the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1406 and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1406 is set as the number of balls entering K15.
- 11th parameter: Total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the general winning opening 31" + K13 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "First operating opening 33 Ratio of the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")/(Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34) D11”)
- 12th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the general winning slot 31 K12/total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) - 13th parameter: Game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 Ratio of total number of game balls entering K13/total number of game balls ejected from gaming area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) ・14th parameter: Total number of game balls entering first operating port 33 K14/ejecting from gaming area PA The ratio of the total number of game balls (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D12")
・Fifteenth parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 K15/total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D13")
- 16th parameter: D11 - (D12 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + D13 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")
- 17th parameter: (K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K15 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "General "Number of prize balls for winning in the winning opening 31" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + K15 x "Second operating port 34 18th parameter: K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" / Total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning slot 31") "Number of prize balls" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the first actuation port 33" + K15 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the second actuation port 34"'') In step S1407, the 11th to 18th parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the storage area for opening/closing execution mode in the calculation result memory 131. The 11th to 18th parameters stored in the storage area for the opening/closing execution mode are stored and held until the next step S1407 is executed. In other words, when step S1407 is executed next time and the 11th to 18th parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 11th to 18th parameters are stored in the storage area for opening/closing execution mode. , the previous calculation results of the 11th to 18th parameters previously stored in the storage area for opening/closing execution mode are overwritten.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, a history information storage area 125 where correspondence information indicating that the mode is high frequency support mode and start information are stored, and a correspondence relationship indicating that the mode is high frequency support mode are stored. By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists during the period between the history information storage area 125 where the information and termination information are stored, the output 24a, general The number of balls entering each of the winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34 is calculated (step S1408). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the mode is high frequency support mode and start information are stored, and a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the mode is high frequency support mode and start information are stored. The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the termination information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the mode is high frequency support mode and start information are stored, and a correspondence relationship indicating that the mode is high frequency support mode. If there are multiple sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. Although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating that the mode is high-frequency support mode is stored, RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 exists. If the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating that the mode is high-frequency support mode are not stored in the history information storage area 125 where , the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that the mode is high-frequency support mode are stored. All the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information is stored is treated as that in the high-frequency support mode.

After that, during the period in the high-frequency support mode specified in step S1408, the out exit 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the first operating opening 33 that occur when the front door frame 14 is in an open state. and the number of balls entering each of the second operating ports 34 (step S1409). The method for calculating the number of balls entered is the same as in step S1403, except that the period of high-frequency support mode specified in step S1408 is assumed.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1408 and S1409 (step S1410). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls that occurred while the front door frame 14 was open, calculated in step S1409, is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1408. Then, the following 21st to 26th parameters are calculated using each number of balls entered after the subtraction. Note that the difference between the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1409 and the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1409 is defined as the number of balls entering K21, and the number of balls entering the general winning hole 31 calculated in step S1408 is The difference between the number of balls entered into the general winning slot 31 calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of entered balls K22, and the difference between the number of balls entered into the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1408 and the number of balls entered into the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1409. The difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1409 is defined as the number K23 of entering balls, and the difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1408. The number of balls entered is K24, and the difference between the number of balls entered into the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1409 and the number of balls entered into the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1409 is set as the number K25 of balls entered.
- 21st parameter: Total number of game balls paid out (K22 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the general winning opening 31" + K23 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K24 x "First operating opening 33 The ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")/(Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34) D11”)
・22nd parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the general winning slot 31 K22/total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) ・23rd parameter: Game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 Ratio of total number of game balls entering K23/total number of game balls discharged from gaming area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) ・24th parameter: Total number of game balls entering first operating port 33 K24/ejecting from gaming area PA The ratio of the total number of game balls (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D22")
・25th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 K25/total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D23")
・26th parameter: D21 - (D22 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + D23 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")
In step S1410, the 21st to 26th parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the storage area for high frequency support mode in the calculation result memory 131. The 21st to 26th parameters stored in the high-frequency support mode storage area are stored and held until the next step S1410 is executed. In other words, when step S1410 is executed next time and the 21st to 26th parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 21st to 26th parameters are stored in the high-frequency support mode storage area. Then, the previous calculation results of the 21st to 26th parameters that were previously stored in the storage area for high frequency support mode are overwritten.

Thereafter, the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is calculated and stored (step S1411). Specifically, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the opening/closing execution mode is determined. Calculate the number of occurrences. In addition, the number of occurrences of a game game is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating the start of a game game is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. . Then, the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit game is calculated. Note that the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode is assumed to be the number of occurrences K31, and the number of occurrences of the gaming session is assumed to be the number of occurrences K32.
・31st parameter: K31/K32
In step S1411, the 31st parameter, which is the calculation result, is stored in the opening/closing execution mode frequency storage area in the calculation result memory 131. The 31st parameter stored in the opening/closing execution mode frequency storage area is stored and held until the next step S1411 is executed. In other words, when step S1411 is executed next time and the 31st parameter is calculated, the newly calculated 31st parameter is stored in the opening/closing execution mode frequency storage area, so that until then the opening/closing execution mode is The previous calculation result of the 31st parameter stored in the frequency storage area is overwritten.

Thereafter, the frequency of occurrence of the high-frequency support mode is calculated and stored (step S1412). Specifically, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 that store correspondence information and start information indicating that the high frequency support mode Calculate the number of occurrences of support mode. In addition, the number of occurrences of a game game is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating the start of a game game is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. . Then, the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode per unit game and the ratio of the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode to the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode are calculated. The number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode is set as the number of occurrences K41, the number of occurrences of the game game is set as the number of occurrences K42, and the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode calculated in step S1411 is set as the number of occurrences K43.
・41st parameter: K41/K42
・42nd parameter: K41/K43
In step S1412, the forty-first and forty-second parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area in the calculation result memory 131. The 41st and 42nd parameters stored in the high frequency support mode frequency storage area are stored and held until the next step S1412 is executed. That is, when step S1412 is executed next time and the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 41st to 42nd parameters are stored in the high frequency support mode frequency storage area. Then, the previous calculation results of the 41st and 42nd parameters that were previously stored in the high frequency support mode frequency storage area are overwritten.

If a negative determination is made in step S1401, or if the process in step S1412 is executed, display processing is executed (step S1413). FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing display processing.

First, the value of the update timing counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S1501). The update timing counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify that it is the timing to update the display content of the game history management results on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The management CPU 112 controls the display of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c to display the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, and the thirty-first parameter. The parameters and the calculation results of the 41st and 42nd parameters are notified. In this case, the first notification display device 69a displays information corresponding to the type of parameter to be notified. Furthermore, of the value obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100, the number corresponding to the tens place is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, and the number corresponding to the one place is displayed on the third notification display. It is displayed on the device 69c. In the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the first to eighth parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameters, and the 41st to 41st parameters are used. The display corresponding to the calculation result of the 42nd parameter is sequentially switched according to a predetermined order, and after the calculation result of the 42nd parameter, which is the display target in the last order, is displayed, the display corresponding to the calculation result of the 42nd parameter, which is the display target in the first order, is displayed. The calculation result for one parameter is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds.

Here, the calculation cycle of the various parameters mentioned above in the management side CPU 112 is 51 seconds. On the other hand, the number of various parameters is 25, and the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds. Therefore, various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c at least once.

When the process of step S1501 is executed, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are updated by determining whether the value of the update timing counter after subtraction by 1 is "0". It is determined whether the timing has come to do so (step S1502). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, the value of the display target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1503). If the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value "24" (step S1504: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step S1505).

The display target counter is a counter used by the management CPU 112 to specify the type of parameter to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The 1st to 8th parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter, the 41st to 42nd parameters, and the display target counters "0" to "24". There is a one-to-one correspondence with the possible values. For example, when the value of the display target counter is "0", the first parameter that is the first display target becomes the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the value of the display target counter is "24". In this case, the 42nd parameter, which is the last display target, becomes the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

If a negative determination is made in step S1504 or if the process in step S1505 is executed, the first notification display device 69a is displayed so that information corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is displayed. control (step S1506). Further, the parameter corresponding to the value of the counter to be displayed is read from the calculation result memory 131, the read parameter is multiplied by 100, and the number corresponding to the tens place is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, The number corresponding to the 1's digit is displayed on the third notification display device 69c (step S1507). The content displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c in steps S1506 and S1507 continues until the next update timing or until the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is stopped. Ru. Thereafter, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the management side RAM 114 as a value corresponding to the next update timing (step S1508).

When the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started by executing the display process as described above, the game history management results are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. be done. The management result of the game history is displayed regardless of whether the game is continued or not, and when the game machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 and the main controller 60 is opened from the front of the pachinko machine 10. This is done regardless of whether it is visible or not. In this way, the display control of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is executed regardless of the game situation or the state of the pachinko machine 10, so that the first to third notification display devices 69a It becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for display control of .about.69c.

The display of the game history management results on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c starts after the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started and after the identification end command is received from the main side CPU 63. be done. In this case, the information stored in the calculation result memory 131 is retained even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, similar to the information stored in the history memory 117. Therefore, when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started, the gaming history management results calculated before the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is stopped are displayed.

When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, information corresponding to the setting value that is being changed is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. However, while the information corresponding to the set value is displayed before the identification end command is sent from the main CPU 63, the game history on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is displayed. The display of the management results starts after the identification end command is sent from the main CPU 63. As a result, even if the third notification display device 69c is configured to double as a display device for displaying information corresponding to set values and displaying game history management results, the display of these displays is It is possible to prevent periods from overlapping.

Furthermore, when information corresponding to the set value is to be displayed, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are not displayed. On the other hand, when the game history management results are being displayed, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are not hidden. This makes it possible to identify which of the information corresponding to the setting value and the gaming history management result is being displayed on the third notification display device 69c.

Next, we will discuss the processing configuration for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 and the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d of the MPU 62. explain. FIG. 32(a) is a flowchart showing data output processing executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the data output process is executed in step S112 in the main process (FIG. 9).

In the data output process, first, it is determined whether a connection signal indicating that an external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d is received from the reading terminal 68d (step S1601). If a negative determination is made in step S1601, this data output processing is immediately terminated. In this case, in order to execute the data output process, it is necessary to restart the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63. As a result, in order to output historical information and various parameters to the outside, supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. It is necessary to The power switch for stopping and starting the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is provided on the dispensing mechanism section 73 mounted on the back of the back pack unit 15. In order to do this, it is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 to expose the back side of the back pack unit 15. Under these circumstances, in order to output historical information and various parameters to the outside, supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. By adopting a configuration in which it is necessary to read history information and various parameters, it is possible to make it difficult for anyone other than the game hall manager to read the history information and various parameters.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, by determining whether or not a control information confirmation signal is received from the reading terminal 68d, the current connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is confirmed to be It is determined whether the control information (program and data) confirmation is supported (step S1602). The external device is configured to be able to confirm both control information and history information and various parameters.If confirmation of control information is selected by manual operation of the external device, the external device A signal for confirming control information is transmitted, and if confirmation of history information and various parameters is selected by manual operation on the external device, a signal for confirming history is transmitted from the external device. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the external device for checking control information and the external device for checking history are separate. In this case, if an external device for checking control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, a signal for checking the control information is transmitted from the external device, and an external device for checking the history is connected to the reading terminal 68d. If the device is electrically connected, a history confirmation signal is transmitted from the external device.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, output processing for confirming control information is executed (step S1603). In the output processing, the program and data are read as control information from the main ROM 64, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 68d. This makes it possible to read the control information with an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and check whether the control information is genuine or normal. It becomes possible to do this.

If a negative determination is made in step S1602, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management CPU 112 (step S1604). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from LOW level to HI level. This HI level output state continues for a specific period of time. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p. By switching the output state of the output instruction signal to the HI level, the management CPU 112 executes processing for outputting history information.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32(b), when the output state of the output instruction signal input to the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 switches from LOW level to HI level, the management side CPU 112 (Step S1701: YES), reads the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131, and outputs the read history information and various parameters to the reading terminal 68d. (Step S1702). This allows the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d to read the history information and various parameters, and it becomes possible to analyze the information on the gaming history management results. Moreover, when the management side CPU 112 outputs the history information to the reading terminal 68d, it clears the history memory 117 to "0" (step S1703). The history information in the history memory 117 is erased only when the history information is read by an external device.

Returning to the explanation of the data output process (FIG. 32(a)), when the process of step S1603 is executed or the process of step S1604 is executed, the electrical connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d continues. It is determined whether or not (step S1605). If it is being continued (step S1605: YES), the process remains on standby in step S1605. This makes it possible to prevent the processing set to be executed after the data output processing from being executed until the external device is disconnected from the reading terminal 68d. If the external device is disconnected from the reading terminal 68d (step S1605: NO), this data output process ends.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

When a game ball enters any of the general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34, the game ball is paid out. The player plays the game while hoping that the game ball will land in the ball. In this configuration, a game ball enters any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (hereinafter also referred to as the history target ball entering section). If this occurs, the corresponding history information will be stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. This makes it possible for the pachinko machine 10 to memorize and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering each history target ball entry section or the frequency of ball entry, and this managed information can be used. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters each history target ball entry section. Furthermore, since the history information is stored and held in the pachinko machine 10 itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information.

All the ball entry units that eject game balls from the gaming area PA are subject to storage processing of historical information and are subject to management using historical information. This makes it possible to manage the frequency of ball entry for any history target ball entry section using history information. Furthermore, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering each history target ball entry section to the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA using the history information.

The history information includes RTC information that is information corresponding to the timing at which a game ball entered the history target ball entry section that triggered the storage of the history information. Thereby, by using the history information, it becomes possible to grasp in detail the history of the entry of game balls into the history target ball entry section.

The history memory 117 contains not only history information corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the history target ball entry section, but also history information indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and whether the game ball is in the high-frequency support mode. History information indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open or not, and history information indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open or not are stored. This makes it possible to distinguish between these situations and manage the manner in which the game ball enters the history target ball entry section.

It is possible to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to an external device that is a device outside the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to read the history information with the external device and use the read history information to analyze how the game ball enters the history target ball entry section.

The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 68d, and the program can be read from the main ROM 64 by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. This makes it possible to check whether the program is normal or not. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is outputted to the outside using the reading terminal 68d for outputting the program to the outside. This makes it possible to output history information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

It is specified whether the information to be outputted from the reading terminal 68d is a program or history information, and the information corresponding to the identification result is outputted to the outside through the reading terminal 68d. As a result, in a configuration in which historical information is externally outputted using the reading terminal 68d for externally outputting a program, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether the information to be externally output is the program or the historical information. The specified information is output externally. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the reading terminal 68d is used also, it is possible to read only necessary information.

Based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, it is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 68d is program information or history information. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the selection of information to be outputted from the outside from becoming complicated.

The MPU 62 includes a main ROM 64 that stores programs in advance, and includes a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 68d. This makes it possible to consolidate the signal paths for the reading terminal 68d within the MPU 62. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while making it difficult to make unauthorized access to the signal path to the reading terminal 68d.

The main side CPU 63 executes processing for causing a game ball to be paid out based on the entry of a game ball into any of the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34. A management side CPU 112 is provided separately from the management side CPU 112, and processes for storing history information in the history memory 117 are executed by the management side CPU 112. This makes it possible to manage the manner in which game balls enter each history target ball entry section while preventing the processing load on the main CPU 63 from increasing excessively.

The main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

The main CPU 63 transmits information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a to each buffer of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using the signal paths corresponding to the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. 122a to 122g. As a result, the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 corresponds to each buffer 122a to 122g (that is, each signal path), simplifying the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management CPU 112. It becomes possible to do so.

The main CPU 63 includes information corresponding to whether it is in the opening/closing execution mode, information corresponding to whether it is in the high-frequency support mode, information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is being opened, Information corresponding to the start of the game round is transmitted to each of the buffers 122h to 122k of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using signal paths corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the type of information corresponding to each of these situations corresponds to each buffer 122h to 122k (that is, each signal path), simplifying the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management CPU 112. becomes possible.

The main CPU 63 transmits correspondence relationship information indicating which type of information each buffer 122a to 122k (that is, each signal path 118a to 118k) corresponds to to the management CPU 112. This eliminates the need to store the correspondence information in advance in the management IC 66. Therefore, it becomes possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 . This allows the management IC 66 to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history target ball entry area in a situation where a game ball may enter the history target ball entry area. It becomes possible to do so.

Correspondence information is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the history target ball entry section. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration related to communication compared to a configuration in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting correspondence information is provided.

The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116, and the correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. As a result, each time the main CPU 63 transmits information on the detection results of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, information that enables the management IC 66 to specify the history target ball entry portion corresponding to the information to be transmitted. There is no need to provide it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information on the detection results of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main CPU 63.

By switching the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 from the LOW level to the HI level, information is output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 68d. In this case, the management CPU 112 can identify that the signal path corresponding to the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal without receiving correspondence information from the main CPU 63. . This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the transmission of correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

The management IC 66 is provided with buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63, the number of which is greater than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. It is being Thereby, even if the number of types of information increases or decreases depending on the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to cope with this without changing the configuration regarding the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, it becomes possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

When history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 68d, each piece of history information includes correspondence relationship information indicating the type of the history target ball entry section that corresponds to the history information. This makes it possible to specify how the game ball enters each history target ball entry section using the read history information.

In the management IC 66, by using the history information stored in the history memory 117, various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th -18th parameter, 21st - 26th parameter, 31st parameter, 41st - 42nd parameter) are calculated. Various parameters resulting from these calculations are sequentially displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. This allows the pachinko machine 10 to notify various parameters that are the results of calculations using history information.

Various parameters are calculated while excluding history information corresponding to a situation where the front door frame 14 is open. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation where the front door frame 14 is in a closed state. Further, various parameters are calculated corresponding to each of the opening/closing execution mode situation and the high frequency support mode situation. This allows the manager of the game hall and the like to understand the manner in which game balls enter the game according to each situation.

When the history information in the history memory 117 is output to an external device, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing the history memory 117 clearing process. As a result, history information that exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117 becomes the subject of storage in the history memory 117, and history information that should originally be stored is erased by overwriting. It is possible to make it less likely to occur.

In a configuration in which when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, a corresponding external output is performed through the external terminal board 97, history information is stored in the history memory 117. . As a result, by using the information outputted externally through the external terminal board 97, the number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 and the frequency of entering the balls can be easily grasped, and the history By using the history information stored in the memory 117, it becomes possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls entering the history target ball entry section and the frequency of ball entry.

The probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from "setting 1" to "setting 6". Thereby, even with a single pachinko machine 10, it is possible to create a situation in which the probability of a jackpot result is advantageous or disadvantageous in the low probability mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode varies depending on the settings of the pachinko machine 10 from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", while the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode varies depending on the settings of the pachinko machine 10. It does not change depending on the state. This makes it possible to limit the influence of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 on the probability of a jackpot result to the situation in the low probability mode. In addition, since it is possible to make the high probability correctness table 64g referred to in the high probability mode common regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the accuracy tables 64a to 64g can be prepared in advance in the main side ROM 64. It becomes possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity for storage.

The probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", while the distribution mode of the type of jackpot result depends on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It does not change accordingly. This makes it possible to limit the influence of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 to the situation in the low probability mode. In addition, since it is possible to make the distribution table 64h that is referred to when sorting the types of jackpot results the same regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the distribution table 64h can be stored in the main side ROM 64. It becomes possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity for storing the information in advance.

Even if a new setting is made to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is not deleted and is retained. As a result, even if a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the history information up to that point can be continuously stored in the history memory 117, and the history memory 117 can be stored for a long period of time. Using the history information accumulated in 117, it becomes possible to specify the gaming history management results.

In a configuration in which the history information stored in the history memory 117 is not deleted and is retained even if a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the new setting for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is If this is done, the corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to distinguish between history information before a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is made and history information after the new setting is made.

When a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 117, information corresponding to the setting value is included in the history information. This makes it possible to specify the contents of setting values set in the past by referring to the history information.

When the setting value update process (FIG. 10) is started, the setting value is changed from a predetermined starting setting value. As a result, regardless of the setting value to be used before the setting value update process (Fig. 10) is started, in the setting value update process (Fig. 10), the setting value can be changed from a certain starting setting value. It becomes possible to do this. Therefore, the content of the setting value changing operation becomes easy for the operator to understand.

Specifically, the setting value corresponding to the start is "Setting 1", which has the lowest advantage. Therefore, when the setting value update process (FIG. 10) is started, the setting values are changed starting from "Setting 1" which has the lowest degree of advantage. As a result, even if the administrator of the game hall unintentionally terminates the setting value update process (Fig. 10) immediately after the start of the setting value update process (Fig. 10), the setting value with the lowest degree of advantage will be used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended disadvantages from occurring in the game hall in such a situation.

Note that when calculating various parameters at the calculation timing, history information stored after the history information corresponding to the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117 is used as a reference. It is also possible to use a configuration in which various parameters are calculated. In this case, it is possible to derive the game history management results as various parameters at a timing after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed.

In addition, when calculating various parameters at the calculation timing, history information corresponding to a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117 and corresponding to a change in setting value is used as a reference. The configuration may be such that various parameters are calculated using history information stored later than that. In this case, it becomes possible to derive the gaming history management results at the timing after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed as various parameters.

Further, although the circuit board box 60a of the main controller 60 is provided with an opening for exposing the reading terminal 68d, the opening is not provided and the reading terminal 69d is exposed on the opposing wall 60b. It may also be covered by. In this case, it is necessary to open the board box 60a in order to connect an external device to the reading terminal 68d.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the content of the validity table corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main side ROM 64 in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 33, the main ROM 64 includes an area 161 for setting 1, an area 162 for setting 2, an area 163 for setting 3, an area 164 for setting 4, an area 165 for setting 5, and an area for setting 6. 166 are provided. The setting 1 area 161 includes a low probability win/fail table 161a for setting 1 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1" and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 A high probability win/fail table 161b for setting 1 that is referred to when the setting state of is "setting 1" and the win/fail lottery mode is high probability mode is stored. The setting 2 area 162 includes a low probability win/fail table 162a for setting 2 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2" and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 A high probability win/fail table 162b for setting 2 that is referred to when the setting state is "setting 2" and the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is stored. The setting 3 area 163 includes a low probability win/fail table 163a for setting 3 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3" and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 A high probability win/fail table 163b for setting 3 that is referred to when the setting state is "setting 3" and the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is stored.

The setting 4 area 164 includes a low probability win/fail table 164a for setting 4 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4" and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 A high probability win/fail table 164b for setting 4 that is referred to when the setting state is "setting 4" and the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is stored. The setting 5 area 165 includes a low probability win/fail table 165a for setting 5 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5" and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 A high probability win/fail table 165b for setting 5 that is referred to when the setting state is "setting 5" and the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is stored. The setting 6 area 166 includes a low probability win/fail table 166a for setting 6 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 6" and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 A high probability win/fail table 166b for setting 6 that is referred to when the setting state is "setting 6" and the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is stored.

The winning probabilities of the jackpot results set in each of the low probability success/failure tables 161a to 166a are different from each other. Specifically, when the low probability table 161a for setting 1 is referred to, the jackpot result is approximately 1/320, and when the low probability table 162a for setting 2 is referred to, the result is approximately 1/310. If the low probability success/failure table 163a for setting 3 is referred to, the result will be a jackpot at approximately 1/300, and if the low probability success/failure table 164a for setting 4 is referred to, the result will be approximately 1/290. If the low probability success/failure table 165a for setting 5 is referred to, it will be a jackpot result at approximately 1/280, and if the low probability success/failure table 166a for setting 6 is referred to, it will be a jackpot result at approximately 1/270. This results in a jackpot. As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to a high setting value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the low probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

The winning probabilities of the jackpot results set in each of the high probability success/failure tables 161b to 166b are different from each other. Specifically, when the high probability success/failure table 161b for setting 1 is referred to, the jackpot result is approximately 1/45, and when the high probability success/failure table 162b for setting 2 is referred to, the result is approximately 1/40. If the high probability success/failure table 163b for setting 3 is referred to, the result will be a jackpot at approximately 1/35, and if the high probability success/failure table 164b for setting 4 is referred to, the result will be approximately 1/30. If the high probability success/failure table 165b for setting 5 is referred to, the result will be a jackpot at approximately 1/25, and if the high probability success/failure table 166b for setting 6 is referred to, the result will be approximately 1/20. This results in a jackpot. As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to a high setting value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the high probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

That is, in the first embodiment, the higher the setting value of the pachinko machine 10, the higher the winning probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode, while the winning probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode is "setting 1". ~ "Setting 6" The configuration is the same regardless of the setting state, but in this embodiment, both the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode and the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode are The configuration is such that the higher the setting value of the machine 10, the higher the setting value. This makes it possible to increase the player's advantage of having a high set value set.

In addition, even if the jackpot result in the low probability mode has a winning probability in the case of "Setting 6" which is the highest setting state, the winning probability in the jackpot result in the high probability mode in the case of "Setting 1" which is the lowest setting state. It is set lower than the probability. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's advantage from becoming extremely low when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1", and it is also possible to prevent the player's advantage from becoming extremely low when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1". 6'', it is possible to prevent the player's advantage from becoming extremely high.

On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, only one type of distribution table 64h is provided so that the distribution table 64h is common to any of the setting states "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". This makes it possible to prevent advantage or disadvantage from occurring depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 regarding the distribution mode of jackpot results, and also allows the storage capacity for storing the distribution table 64h in advance in the main side ROM 64. It becomes possible to suppress the

Note that the probability of winning a jackpot result in the low probability mode is higher when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to a higher value, while the probability of winning a jackpot result in the high probability mode is higher when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is higher. A configuration may be adopted in which the set value is lower. In this case, in the low probability mode, the higher the setting value of the pachinko machine 10, the more advantageous it is to the player, and in the high probability mode, the lower the setting value of the pachinko machine 10, the more advantageous it is to the player. becomes possible.

In addition, the probability of winning a jackpot result in the high probability mode is higher when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to a higher value, while the probability of winning a jackpot result in the low probability mode is higher from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". '' may be configured to be constant in the setting state. In this case, in the high probability mode, the higher the setting value of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the more advantageous it is to the player, and in the low probability mode, it is possible to prevent the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from giving rise to an advantage or disadvantage. Become.

<Third embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in how the game history management results are handled when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

The management IC 66 is provided with a separate storage memory 171 in addition to each memory in the first embodiment as a memory for storing information. FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the separate storage memory 171. The separate storage memory 171 is a memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory (that is, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing purposes.

The separate storage memory 171 is provided with a first separate storage area 172, a second separate storage area 173, a third separate storage area 174, a fourth separate storage area 175, and a fifth separate storage area 176. These first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 contain information on the management results of game history calculated when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, more specifically, information on the management results of the game history according to the first embodiment described above. The various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameter, and 41st to 42nd parameters) described in 1. In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, various parameters are first stored in the first separate storage area 172, and thereafter, each time the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the various parameters are stored in the nth separate storage area 172. The areas to be stored are switched so that the storage areas 172 to 176→n+1 separate storage areas 172 to 176. If the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set after the various parameters have been stored in the fifth separate storage area 176, the various parameters are stored again in the first separate storage area 172. At this time, various parameters already stored in the first separate storage area 172 are deleted. As a result, various parameters for the pachinko machine 10 until new settings are executed five times are stored in the separate storage memory 171, and the oldest various parameters are erased for more than five times. be remembered for that.

The various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 can be read by an external device by connecting it to the reading terminal 68d. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the gaming history before a new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the setting update recognition process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 35.

When the setting value update signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from LOW level to HI level (step S1801: YES), the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to "1". settings (step S1802). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means that the setting is "setting 6".

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S1803). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1803, the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1804). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one level.

If a negative determination is made in step S1803 or if the process in step S1804 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. , it is determined whether a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1805). If a negative determination is made in step S1805, the process returns to step S1803.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, repeat change monitoring processing is executed (step S1806). The repeated change monitoring process will be described in detail later, but when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 repeatedly occurs in a short period of time, a process is executed to notify the new setting. In the configuration in which various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 each time a new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is made, the management results of the game history are intended to be used when games are played over a predetermined period of time. It is assumed that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time in order to erase the setting state. On the other hand, by repeatedly executing the change monitoring process, if such an act is performed, a corresponding notification will be issued.

After that, various calculation processes are executed (step S1807). In various arithmetic processing, steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output processing (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed. As a result, various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, and 41st parameters) are ~42nd parameter) are calculated.

Thereafter, the various parameters calculated in step S1807 are stored in the area to be stored this time among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 (step S1808). A pointer information area is set in the separate storage memory 171 to enable the management CPU 112 to specify an area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. The information in the pointer information area is such that when various parameters are stored in the area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176, the storage target is changed to the area in the next order. will be updated. By executing the process of step S1808, various parameters at that time point are stored in the separate storage memory 171 for the current new settings of the pachinko machine 10.

After that, the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" (step S1809). In other words, in this embodiment, not only when history information is read by an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, but also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history memory 117 history information is deleted.

Thereafter, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S1810). Then, writing processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1811). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is currently the writing target is identified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S1810 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both information for identifying the set value and information on the value of the set value understanding counter are written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting was made, and information on the setting value when the setting was made. The combination is now stored as history information.

Thereafter, target pointer update processing is executed (step S1812). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read out and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

Next, the repeated change monitoring process executed in step S1806 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36.

First, it is determined whether the number of games played since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was last set is within a reference number (specifically, 100 times) (step S1901). Specifically, the settings of the pachinko machine 10 are determined by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating the start of a game round is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. The number of times the game has been played since the state was last set is determined, and it is further determined whether the determined number of times the game has been played is within a reference number (specifically, 100 times).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the repeat change counter provided in the separate storage memory 171 is incremented by 1 (step S1902). As already explained, the separate storage memory 171 is a memory that does not require an external power supply to retain the memory, and thus does not require an external power supply to retain the value of the repeat change counter.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the repeat change counter after adding 1 exceeds the notification reference value "5" (step S1903). The notification reference value corresponds to the number of first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 provided in the separate storage memory 171. Therefore, in step S1903, the number of times the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated without intervening the execution of game times exceeding the reference number of times is determined to be the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. It is determined whether the limit has been exceeded or not.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1903, display processing for repeated changes is executed (step S1904). In the repeated change display process, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are changed to correspond to the number of times that the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 exceeds the notification standard value in a short period of time. The display content is subject to repeated changes. The display content of this repeated change is the display content of displaying "E" on all of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and this display content does not occur in other situations. In addition, the state in which the display contents of repeated changes are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c continues until the repeated change flag provided in the separate storage memory 171 is cleared to "0". . The repeated change flag is a flag used by the management CPU 112 to specify that the display contents of repeated changes should be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Further, when the repeat change flag is set to "1" and the display contents of the repeat change are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the display processing in the first embodiment is performed. (FIG. 31) is not executed. Thereafter, the repeat change flag in the separate storage memory 171 is set to "1" (step S1905).

If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the repeat change counter in the separate storage memory 171 is cleared to "0" (step S1906). Thereafter, on the condition that the repeat change flag in the separate storage memory 171 is set to "1" (step S1907: YES), the display contents of the repeat change on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are The display is ended (step S1908), and the repeat change flag is cleared to "0" (step S1909).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

When a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is deleted. Thereby, it becomes possible to leave in the history memory 117 history information based on games executed after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed.

When a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, various parameters are calculated as a result of game history management using the history information in the history memory 117 at that time. This makes it possible to grasp the management results of the game history in the situation before a new setting is made in the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, even if the history information in the history memory 117 is deleted when a new setting is made to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, it is not possible to grasp the management results of the gaming history based on the history information to be deleted. It becomes possible.

In a configuration in which various parameters are calculated using the history information in the history memory 117 at that time when a new setting state is set in the pachinko machine 10, the various calculated parameters are stored in a separate storage memory. 171. As a result, even if a new setting is made in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to grasp the management result of the gaming history in the situation before the setting is made at any subsequent timing.

By providing a plurality of separate storage areas 172 to 176 in the separate storage memory 171, it is possible to store various parameters corresponding to the setting timing of a plurality of setting states. This makes it possible to grasp the management results of gaming history over a plurality of periods based on the timing when a new setting state is set. Furthermore, even if the settings of the pachinko machine 10 are repeatedly set in a situation where no games are being played, the various parameters calculated using the historical information of the situation in which games are actually being played are It is possible to increase the possibility that the data remains in the separate storage memory 171.

The various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 can be read by an external device by connecting it to the reading terminal 68d. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the gaming history before a new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10.

In the configuration in which various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 each time a new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is made, the management results of the game history are intended to be used when games are played over a predetermined period of time. It is assumed that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time in order to erase the setting state. On the other hand, by repeatedly executing the change monitoring process, if such an act is performed, a corresponding notification will be issued. This makes it possible to notify the administrator and the like that new settings for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 have been repeatedly made in a short period of time.

Notification that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time is performed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. This makes it possible to detect whether a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly made in a short period of time by using the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c for notifying the management results of the game history. It becomes possible to make notifications.

In a situation where it is necessary to notify that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time, the display contents of the repeated change are continuously displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. , the notification of the game history management results during normal times is not performed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. This makes it possible to emphasize the notification that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

In addition, if the number of games played after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set is within the standard number of times, and the event in which the new setting is performed exceeds the notification standard value and continues. Although the configuration is such that the notification corresponding to the notification is executed, the notification is not limited to this, and the total discharge of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set. A configuration may also be adopted in which when the number of events for which the new setting is performed exceeds the notification reference value and the number of events continues to exceed the notification reference value, the corresponding notification is executed. In addition, after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a predetermined ball entrance part (for example, any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, or a predetermined ball entry port) If the event for which the new setting is made exceeds the notification standard value and the event for which the new setting is made continues in a situation where the total number of game balls that have entered the game balls (combination) and are ejected is within the standard number, the corresponding notification is executed. good. In addition, an event in which a new setting is made in a situation where the total number of pieces of history information newly stored in the history memory 117 after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is made is within the reference number is notified. It may be configured such that when the reference value is exceeded continuously, a corresponding notification is executed.

Furthermore, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed exceeding the notification reference value within the monitoring reference period (for example, 600 seconds), a corresponding notification may be executed.

In addition, if the number of games played after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set is within the standard number of times, and the event in which the new setting is performed exceeds the notification standard value and continues. However, the setting value was changed in a situation where the number of games played after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 was set was within the standard number of times. It may also be configured such that when an event continues to exceed a notification reference value, a corresponding notification is executed.

In addition, if the number of games played after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set is within the standard number of times, and the event in which the new setting is performed exceeds the notification standard value and continues. Although the configuration is such that a corresponding notification is executed at the same time, the new setting is triggered in a situation where the number of games played after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set is within the standard number of times. A configuration may also be adopted in which a corresponding notification is executed when events for which various parameters are calculated exceed the notification reference value consecutively.

In addition, if the number of games played after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set is within the standard number of times, and the event in which the new setting is performed exceeds the notification standard value and continues. Although the configuration has been described in which a corresponding notification is executed, in addition to or in place of this, a configuration may also be adopted in which the progress of the game is restricted for a predetermined period (for example, one hour).

<Fourth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the third embodiment in that the repeat change monitoring process is executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the third embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the third embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing repeated change monitoring processing executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the repeated change monitoring process is executed when the setting value update process (step S118) is executed in the main process (FIG. 9). That is, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the repeated change monitoring process is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which repeated change monitoring processing is executed when a setting value is changed.

First, it is determined whether the number of games played since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was last set is within a reference number (specifically, 100 times) (step S2001). The main side RAM 65 is provided with a game counter for counting the number of games played after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Each time the number of games is played, the value of the number of games counter is incremented by one. The game count counter is excluded from being cleared to "0" even when the main side RAM 65 clearing process (steps S105 and S117) is executed.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, the value of the repetition change counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2002). The repeated change counter is excluded from being cleared to "0" even when the main side RAM 65 clearing process (steps S105 and S117) is executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the repeat change counter after adding 1 exceeds the notification reference value "5" (step S2003). The notification reference value corresponds to the number of first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 provided in the separate storage memory 171. Therefore, in step S2003, the number of times that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set without intervening the execution of the game number exceeding the reference number of times is determined to be the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. It is determined whether or not the limit has been exceeded.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, a repeat change flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2004). The repeated change flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the situation is such that notification of repeated changes should be made. The repeated change flag is excluded from being cleared to "0" even when the main side RAM 65 clearing process (steps S105 and S117) is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2001, the value of the repeat change counter in the main side RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S2005). Thereafter, on the condition that the repeat change flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2006: YES), the repeat change flag is cleared to "0" (step S2007).

In the repeat change monitoring process, if the repeat change flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2008: YES), a repeat change notification command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step S2009). When the audio light emission control device 81 receives a repeat change notification command, it causes the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53, and the speaker section 54 to notify the repeat change. The notification of the repeated change continues until the supply of operating power to the audio emission control device 81 is stopped.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time based on the control by the main CPU 63. In addition, since the notification is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed without opening the gaming machine main body 12 forward with respect to the outer frame 11. This makes it possible for the administrator to recognize that new settings have been repeatedly made in a short period of time.

Note that in addition to or in place of the configuration in which, when new settings of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 are repeatedly performed in a short period of time, a notification command of the repeated change is sent from the main side CPU 63 to the sound emission control device 81. A configuration may also be adopted in which external output corresponding to this is performed.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the main side CPU 63 executes the repeated change monitoring process in this embodiment, and the management side CPU 112 executes the repeated change monitoring process in the third embodiment. This makes it possible to strictly monitor whether new settings of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 are repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

<Fifth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the setting update recognition process in the management side CPU 112 is different from the third embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the third embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the third embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the setting update recognition process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112.

When the setting value update signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from LOW level to HI level (step S2101: YES), the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to "1". settings (step S2102). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means that the setting is "setting 6".

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2103). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2104). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one level.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103 or if the process in step S2104 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. , it is determined whether a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2105). If a negative determination is made in step S2105, the process returns to step S2103.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2105, it is determined whether a predetermined number or more of predetermined history information exists in the history memory 117 (step S2106). Specifically, the settings of the pachinko machine 10 are determined by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating the start of a game round is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. The number of times the game has been played since the state was last set is determined, and it is further determined whether the determined number of times the game has been played exceeds a reference number (specifically, 100 times). However, it is not limited to this, and the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that game balls have been ejected from the game area PA is stored is the standard number (specifically, 1000 pieces). A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined in step S2106 whether or not the value exceeds . In addition, correspondence relationship information indicating that a game ball has entered a predetermined ball entry portion (for example, any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, or a predetermined combination) The configuration may be such that it is determined in step S2106 whether or not the number of history information storage areas 125 in which are stored exceeds a reference number (specifically, 1000). Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined in step S2106 whether or not the total number of history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds a reference number (specifically, 1000 pieces).

In addition, if the number of games played after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set is within the standard number of times, and the event in which the new setting is performed exceeds the notification standard value and continues. Although the configuration is such that the notification corresponding to the notification is executed, the notification is not limited to this, and the total discharge of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set. A configuration may also be adopted in which when the number of events for which the new setting is performed exceeds the notification reference value and the number of events continues to exceed the notification reference value, the corresponding notification is executed. In addition, after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a predetermined ball entrance part (for example, any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, or a predetermined ball entry port) If the event for which the new setting is made exceeds the notification standard value and the event for which the new setting is made continues in a situation where the total number of game balls that have entered the game balls (combination) and are ejected is within the standard number, the corresponding notification is executed. good. In addition, an event in which a new setting is made in a situation where the total number of pieces of history information newly stored in the history memory 117 after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is made is within the reference number is notified. It may be configured such that when the reference value is exceeded continuously, a corresponding notification is executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, various calculation processes are executed (step S2107). In various arithmetic processing, steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output processing (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed. As a result, various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, and 41st parameters) are ~42nd parameter) are calculated.

Thereafter, the various parameters calculated in step S2107 are stored in the area to be stored this time among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 (step S2108). A pointer information area is set in the separate storage memory 171 to enable the management CPU 112 to specify an area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. The information in the pointer information area is such that when various parameters are stored in an area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176, the storage target is changed to the next area in order. will be updated. By executing the process in step S2108, various parameters at that time point are stored in the separate storage memory 171 for the current new settings of the pachinko machine 10.

If a negative determination is made in step S2106, or if the process in step S2108 is executed, the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" (step S2109). In other words, in this embodiment, the history information is not only read when the history information is read by an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, but also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. 117 history information is deleted.

After that, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S2110). Then, writing processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2111). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is currently the writing target is identified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S2110 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both information for identifying the set value and information on the value of the set value understanding counter are written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting was made, and information on the setting value when the setting was made. The combination is now stored as history information.

Thereafter, target pointer update processing is executed (step S2112). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read out and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

According to the above configuration, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, on the condition that a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the history memory 117, the history information is stored in the history memory 117. Various parameters are calculated using the history information and are stored in the separate storage memory 171. As a result, even if new settings for the pachinko machine 10 are repeatedly made in a short period of time, the separate storage memory 171 will essentially retain information on the management results of game history as a result of games being played. It becomes possible to store the information.

Note that the process in step S2109 may be executed on the condition that the processes in step S2107 and step S2108 have been executed. That is, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is erased on condition that a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being erased even if new settings of the pachinko machine 10 are repeatedly made in a short period of time.

<Sixth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration of the history memory 117. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment.

The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141, a first state area 142, a second state area 143, and a third state area 144. First to fourteenth counters 141a to 141n, 142a to 142n, 143a to 143n, and 144a to 144n are provided in each of these areas 141 to 144, respectively. The first counters 141a to 144a of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from LOW level to HI level. The second counters 141b to 144b of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from LOW level to HI level. The third counters 141c to 144c of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fourth counters 141d to 144d of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifth counters 141e to 144e of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from LOW level to HI level. The sixth counters 141f to 144f of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f has changed from LOW level to HI level. The seventh counters 141g to 144g of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from LOW level to HI level. The eighth counters 141h to 144h of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from LOW level to HI level. The ninth counters 141i to 144i of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from LOW level to HI level. The tenth counters 141j to 144j of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from LOW level to HI level. The eleventh counters 141k to 144k of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k has changed from LOW level to HI level. The twelfth counters 141l to 144l of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from LOW level to HI level. The thirteenth counters 141m to 144m of the respective areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourteenth counters 141n to 144n of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is changed from LOW level to HI level.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the history setting process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112.

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is set in the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2201). Specifically, among the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blankness is stored is identified, and the number of correspondence areas is identified. Set the information of the number in the confirmation target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, since information other than information indicating blankness is stored in the first to eleventh correspondence areas 123a to 123k, "11" is set in the check target counter in step S2201.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the buffers 122a to 122n corresponding to the current counters to be checked are buffers to which the status information signal is input (step S2202). Specifically, in the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked, information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, information indicating that it is in the high-frequency support mode, and It is determined whether any of the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, a state information setting process is executed (step S2203). In this setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress switches from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the first state indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is sent to the management side. The information on the first state is stored in the RAM 114, and when the output state of the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the first state is erased from the management side RAM 114. In addition, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the second state indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress is stored in the management side RAM 114. When the output state of the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the second state is erased from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the 10th signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the third state indicating that the front door frame 14 is open. is stored in the management side RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the third state is erased from the management side RAM 114.

If a negative determination is made in step S2202 or if the process in step S2203 is executed, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is , it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from LOW level to HI level by checking whether it has been changed from "0" to "1" ( Step S2204). Note that if the numerical information stored in the eighth buffer 122h is changed from "0" to "1" in a situation where the current value of the counter to be checked is the value corresponding to the eighth buffer 122h, the process proceeds to step S2203. The first state information is stored in the management side RAM 114, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204. Further, if the numerical information stored in the ninth buffer 122i is changed from "0" to "1" in a situation where the current value of the counter to be checked is a value corresponding to the ninth buffer 122i, the process proceeds to step S2203. The second state information is stored in the management side RAM 114, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204. Furthermore, if the numerical information stored in the tenth buffer 122j is changed from "0" to "1" in a situation where the current value of the counter to be checked is the value corresponding to the tenth buffer 122j, the process proceeds to step S2203. Information on the third state is stored in the management side RAM 114, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, addition processing of the corresponding total counter is executed (step S2205). In the addition process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth total counters 141a to 141n in the total area 141 of the history memory 117. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "11", the eleventh counter 141k for totaling is the target of addition, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 141e for totaling is the target of addition, If the value of the check target counter is "1", the first total counter 141a becomes the addition target.

Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether it is in the opening/closing execution mode (step S2206). If the state is the first state (step S2206: YES), addition processing of the counter for the corresponding first state is executed (step S2207). In this addition process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fourteenth counters 142a to 142n for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "11", the 11th counter 142k for the first state becomes the addition target, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 142e for the first state becomes the addition target. If the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 142a for the first state becomes the target of addition.

Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether it is in the high-frequency support mode (step S2208). If it is the second state (step S2208: YES), an addition process of the counter for the corresponding second state is executed (step S2209). In this addition process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fourteenth counters 143a to 143n for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "11", the 11th counter 143k for the second state becomes the addition target, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 143e for the second state becomes the addition target. If the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 143a for the second state becomes the target of addition.

Thereafter, by referring to the state information in the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether the third state is reached, that is, whether the front door frame 14 is open (step S2210). If the state is the third state (step S2210: YES), addition processing of the counter for the corresponding third state is executed (step S2211). In the addition process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fourteenth counters 144a to 144n for the third state in the third state area 144 of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "11", the 11th counter 144k for the third state becomes the addition target, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 144e for the third state becomes the addition target. If the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 144a for the third state becomes the target of addition.

If a negative determination is made in step S2204, if a negative determination is made in step S2210, or if the process in step S2211 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S2212). Then, it is determined whether the value of the check target counter after subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S2213). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2213: NO), the processes from step S2202 onwards are executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the number of times a game ball enters the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, and the opening/closing execution The number of times a mode has occurred, the number of times a high-frequency support mode has occurred, and the number of times a game has occurred are not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but are stored as frequency information. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

With this configuration in which the number of times information is stored instead of the history information, there is no need to perform a process of deriving the number of times information from the history information when calculating various parameters. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

Next, the setting update recognition process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 41.

When the setting value update signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from LOW level to HI level (step S2301: YES), the value of the setting value grasping counter in the management side RAM 114 is set to "1". settings (step S2302). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means that the setting is "setting 6".

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2303). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2304). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one level.

If a negative determination is made in step S2303 or if the process in step S2304 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. , it is determined whether a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2305). If a negative determination is made in step S2305, the process returns to step S2303.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, the eleventh counter 141k for totaling, which measures the number of times the game has been executed, is opened and closed in the totaling area 141 in the history memory 117. The eighth totaling counter 141h that measures the number of occurrences of the mode, and the ninth totaling counter 141i that measures the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode in the totaling area 141 in the history memory 117. Clear to "0" (steps S2306 to S2308). As a result, the information on the number of times the game is executed, the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurs, and the number of times the high-frequency support mode occurs is cleared to "0" with the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 being set. be done. Therefore, the 31st parameter indicates the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit game, the 41st parameter indicates the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode per unit game, and the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode with respect to the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode. The calculation result of the 42nd parameter indicating the ratio of the number of occurrences corresponds to the game content after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. In a configuration in which the probability of winning a jackpot result is changed when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, as described above, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. The calculation results of the 31st parameter, 41st parameter, and 42nd parameter are appropriate based on the current setting values by making them correspond to the game content after the new settings are made. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

On the other hand, even if a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the counters other than the eighth total counter 141h, the ninth total counter 141i, and the eleventh counter 141k in the history memory 117 will be " 0” is not cleared. As a result, the number of game balls entering each history target ball entry section or the frequency of ball entry is managed based on long-term gaming history without being affected by new settings of the pachinko machine 10. becomes possible.

According to the above configuration, the number of times game balls enter the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurs, and the high frequency support The number of times a mode has occurred and the number of times a game has occurred are not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but are stored as number information. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

Furthermore, with this configuration in which the number of times information is stored instead of the history information, there is no need to perform a process of deriving the number of times information from the history information when calculating various parameters. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

Each number information of the number of times the game is executed, the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs, and the number of times the high-frequency support mode occurs is cleared to "0" when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Therefore, the 31st parameter indicates the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit game, the 41st parameter indicates the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode per unit game, and the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode with respect to the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode. The calculation result of the 42nd parameter indicating the ratio of the number of occurrences corresponds to the game content after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. In a configuration in which the probability of winning a jackpot result is changed when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, as described above, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. The calculation results of the 31st parameter, 41st parameter, and 42nd parameter are appropriate based on the current setting values by making them correspond to the game content after the new settings are made. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

On the other hand, even if a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the counters other than the eighth total counter 141h, the ninth total counter 141i, and the eleventh counter 141k in the history memory 117 will be " 0” is not cleared. As a result, the number of game balls entering each history target ball entry section or the frequency of ball entry is managed based on long-term gaming history without being affected by new settings of the pachinko machine 10. becomes possible.

Note that the configuration of the history memory 117 as in this embodiment may be applied to the first to fifth embodiments and the embodiments described after this embodiment. For example, when applied to the first embodiment, the information in the history memory 117 is maintained as is even if a new setting is made to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when applied to the third embodiment, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the entire history memory 117 is cleared to "0".

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the processes of steps S2306 to S2308 are executed in the setting update recognition process (FIG. 41) when the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are changed. As a result, even if a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, if the setting value is not changed before or after, information on the number of times the game has been executed, information on the number of times the opening/closing execution mode has occurred, and high-frequency support. The information on the number of times the mode occurs is never cleared to "0", and when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, information on the number of times the game is executed, information on the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs, and high-frequency support mode It becomes possible to clear the information of the number of occurrences to "0".

In addition, in the setting update recognition process (FIG. 41), various parameters are calculated using the counters 141 to 144 of the history memory 117 before the processes of steps S2306 to S2308 are executed. Various parameters may be stored in the calculation result memory 131.

<Seventh embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration of the history memory 117. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment.

As the history memory 117, history memories 181 to 186 are provided that correspond to the setting states of the pachinko machine 10, ie, "setting 1" to "setting 6", respectively. Specifically, a history memory 181 for setting 1 is provided corresponding to "setting 1", a history memory 182 for setting 2 is provided corresponding to "setting 2", and " A history memory 183 for setting 3 is provided corresponding to "setting 3", a history memory 184 for setting 4 is provided corresponding to "setting 4", and a history memory 184 for setting 4 is provided corresponding to "setting 5". A history memory 185 for setting 5 is provided, and a history memory 186 for setting 6 is provided corresponding to "setting 6."

Each of the history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6 is provided with a combination of the history area 124 and the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 in the first embodiment. This makes it possible to store history information in correspondence with each of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 from "setting 1" to "setting 6." In this case, when a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the setting value for which the new setting is made are stored as history information. , it becomes possible to store history information separately for each setting value without erasing the history information when setting a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Further, since various parameters are calculated using history information corresponding to the currently set setting state of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters corresponding to each set value.

Note that each of the history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6 includes the total area 141, first state area 142, second state area 143, and third state area 144 in the sixth embodiment. It is also possible to have a configuration in which a combination of the following is set.

Next, the setting update recognition process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 43.

When the setting value update signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from LOW level to HI level (step S2401: YES), the value of the setting value grasping counter provided in the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1" (step S2402). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means that the setting is "setting 6". In addition, in this embodiment, since the calculation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require an external power supply for memory retention, is provided with a set value grasping counter, it is assumed that the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped. The value stored in the set value grasping counter is also memorized and held.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2403). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, 1 is added to the value of the setting value grasping counter in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2404). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one level.

If a negative determination is made in step S2403 or if the process in step S2404 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. , it is determined whether a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2405). If a negative determination is made in step S2405, the process returns to step S2403.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2405, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the value of the set value grasping counter of the calculation result memory 131 are set as the storage target of history information and the reference target when calculating various parameters ( Step S2406). Specifically, if the value of the setting value grasp counter is "1", it means that "setting 1" has been set, so the history memory 181 for setting 1 is used as the storage target for history information and for various parameters. Set as a reference target during calculation. In addition, if the value of the setting value understanding counter is "2", it means that "setting 2" has been set, so the history memory 182 for setting 2 is used as a storage target for history information and when calculating various parameters. Set as a reference target. In addition, if the value of the setting value grasp counter is "3", it means that "setting 3" has been set, so the history memory 183 for setting 3 is used as a storage target for history information and when calculating various parameters. Set as a reference target. In addition, if the value of the setting value understanding counter is "4", it means that "setting 4" has been set. Set as a reference target. Also, if the value of the setting value grasp counter is "5", it means that "setting 5" has been set, so the history memory 185 for setting 5 is used as a storage target for history information and when calculating various parameters. Set as a reference target. In addition, if the value of the setting value understanding counter is "6", it means that "setting 6" has been set, so the history memory 186 for setting 6 is used as a storage target for history information and when calculating various parameters. Set as a reference target.

Thereafter, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S2407). Then, writing processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2408). In the writing process, the history memories 181 to 186 set as the storage target of history information in step S2406 are selected from among the history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6. Then, by referring to the pointer area 126 in the history memory 181 to 186 that is the storage target, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is currently the writing target is identified, and the pointer information that is the current writing target is identified. The RTC information read in step S2407 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information. Further, information for identifying the set value is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, a combination of information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set and RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting was made is stored as history information.

Thereafter, target pointer update processing is executed (step S2409). In the update process, among the history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6, the history memories 181 to 186 that were set to store history information in step S2406 are selected, and the history memories 181 to 186 are The numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 is read out and incremented by 1. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

According to the above configuration, as the history memory 117, history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6 are provided so as to correspond to "settings 1" to "setting 6", respectively. This makes it possible to store game history in correspondence with each of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 from "setting 1" to "setting 6." In this case, when a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the setting value for which the new setting is made are stored as history information. , it becomes possible to store history information separately for each setting value without erasing the history information when setting a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Further, since various parameters are calculated using history information corresponding to the currently set setting state of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters corresponding to each set value.

Note that the history memory 117 is not limited to the configuration in which six memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6 are provided; An area corresponding to history memory 181 for setting 2, an area corresponding to history memory 182 for setting 2, an area corresponding to history memory 183 for setting 3, and an area corresponding to history memory 184 for setting 4. An area corresponding to the history memory 185 for setting 5, and an area corresponding to the history memory 186 for setting 6 may be set.

<Eighth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration of the history memory 117. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment.

As the history memory 117, a first history memory 191 and a second history memory 192 are provided. Each of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is provided with a combination of the history area 124 and pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 in the first embodiment. In this case, in a situation where history information is stored using one of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192, a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is made. is performed, the history information in one of the history memories 191, 192 is left without being erased until a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the other history memory 191, 192. In addition, new history information can be stored in both history memories 191 and 192 until a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the other history memory 191 and 192. Become.

Next, the setting update recognition process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 45.

When the setting value update signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from LOW level to HI level (step S2501: YES), the value of the setting value grasping counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is changed to " 1" (step S2502). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means that the setting is "setting 6".

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2503). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2504). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one level.

If a negative determination is made in step S2503 or if the process in step S2504 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. , it is determined whether a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2505). If a negative determination is made in step S2505, the process returns to step S2503.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2505, the setting change occurrence flag provided in the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1" (step S2506). The setting change occurrence flag is set to the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 that were previously set to store history information after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. This flag is used by the management CPU 112 to specify whether or not not only the history memories 191 and 192 but also the other history memory 191 and 192 are to be stored as history information. In addition, since a setting change occurrence flag is provided in the calculation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require an external power supply for memory retention, a setting change will occur even if the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped. The value stored in the flag is retained.

Thereafter, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S2507). Then, writing processing to each history memory 191, 192 is executed (step S2508). In the writing process, first, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is currently the write target is identified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the first history memory 191, and the pointer information that is the write target is identified. The RTC information read in step S2507 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the history area 124. Further, both information for identifying the set value and information on the value of the set value understanding counter are written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting was made, and information on the setting value when the setting was made. The combination is now stored in the first history memory 191 as history information. In addition, in the writing process, by referring to the pointer area 126 of the second history memory 192, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is currently the writing target is specified, and the pointer information that is the writing target is identified. The RTC information read in step S2507 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the information. Further, both information for identifying the set value and information on the value of the set value understanding counter are written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting was made, and information on the setting value when the setting was made. The combination is now stored in the second history memory 192 as history information.

Thereafter, update processing for each target pointer is executed (step S2509). In the update process, first, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the first history memory 191 is read out and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information. In addition, in the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the second history memory 192 is read out and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

Next, the history setting process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 46.

If the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is not set to "1" (step S2601: NO), the side that is the storage target of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is This means that only historical information should be stored. In this case, first, the history memories 191 and 192 that are current storage targets are determined (step S2602). A storage target flag is provided in the calculation result memory 131, and when the value of the storage target flag is "0", the first history memory 191 becomes the storage target, and the value of the storage target flag is "1". In this case, the second history memory 192 becomes the storage target. Note that since the storage target flag is provided in the calculation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require external power supply for memory retention, even if the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped, the storage target flag will remain unchanged. The value of is stored and retained.

Thereafter, a history setting execution process is executed for the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored (step S2603). Specifically, the processes of steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed for one of the history memories 191 and 192 that is the storage target. As a result, the history information is stored in one of the history memories 191 and 192 that is the storage target.

On the other hand, if the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1" (step S2601: YES), the storage target is selected from among the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192. This means that the situation is such that history information should be stored not only on one side but also on the other side. In this case, history setting execution processing is executed for both history memories 191 and 192 (step S2604). Specifically, first, steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed for the first history memory 191. As a result, the history information is stored in the first history memory 191. Thereafter, steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed on the second history memory 192. As a result, the history information is stored in the second history memory 192.

When the process of step S2603 or the process of step S2604 is executed, it is determined whether the setting change occurrence flag in the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1" (step S2605). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2605, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number or more of ball discharge histories exist in the history memories 191 and 192 that are not to be stored (step S2606). Specifically, when the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is "0", the first history memory 191 is the storage target, so the gaming area PA is stored in the second history memory 192. It is determined whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, "1000") or more of history information indicating that game balls have been ejected are stored. In addition, when the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is "1", the second history memory 192 is the storage target, so the game ball is transferred from the game area PA to the first history memory 191. It is determined whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, "1000") or more of history information indicating that a has been discharged is stored. Note that rather than determining whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, "1000") or more of history information indicating that a game ball has been ejected from the gaming area PA is stored, the determination is made based on whether a game round has been executed. It may be configured to determine whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, "100") or more of history information indicating .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, a storage target change process is executed (step S2607). In the process of changing the storage target, the value of the storage target flag in the calculation result memory 131 is set to a value between two values that is different from the current value, thereby changing the memory for the first history 191 and the second memory 192. Change the side that is to be stored. Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag is "0", the storage target is changed from the first history memory 191 to the second history memory 192 by setting the storage target flag to "1". Furthermore, if the value of the storage target flag is "1", the storage target is changed from the second history memory 192 to the first history memory 191 by clearing the storage target flag to "0". As a result, the history memories 191 and 192, which store only history information from games executed after the new settings of the pachinko machine 10 are set, are set as storage targets. Then, various parameters are calculated using the history information of the history memories 191 and 192 that are newly stored, so that the parameters are executed after the new settings of the pachinko machine 10 are set. It becomes possible to derive various parameters depending on the game.

Thereafter, clearing processing is performed for the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 that have been the storage targets up to that point (step S2608). Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag is "0", the second history memory 192 is cleared to "0", and if the value of the storage target flag is "1", the first history memory 191 is cleared to "0". 0" Clear. Thereafter, the setting change occurrence flag in the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to "0" (step S2609).

Next, the display output processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47.

If it is the calculation timing (step S2701: YES), which side of the first history memory 191 and second history memory 192 is to be stored is determined (step S2702). Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is "0", the first history memory 191 is recognized as the storage target, and if the value of the storage target flag is "1", the second history memory 191 is determined as the storage target. The history memory 192 is grasped as a storage target. Thereafter, steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed using the history information stored in the storage target history memories 191 and 192 ascertained in step S2702. By doing this, various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, 41st to 42nd parameters) are calculated, and the various calculated parameters are calculated. The results are stored in the result memory 131 (step S2703). In this case, the history information is stored in both the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 because the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1". Even if there is, various parameters are calculated using one of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored.

If a negative determination is made in step S2701, or if the process in step S2703 is executed, display processing is executed (step S2704). The contents of the display process are the same as the display process (FIG. 31) in the first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are provided as the history memory 117, and when a new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is made, While the history memories 191 and 192 that were to be stored remain as storage targets, history information is also stored in the history memories 191 and 192 that are not to be stored. If a predetermined number or more of history information corresponding to the ejection of game balls from the gaming area PA is stored in the history memory 191, 192 on the side that is not the storage target, the history information is not the storage target. The history memories 191 and 192 on the side are used as storage targets as they are, and the history memories 191 and 192 on the side that were previously storage targets are cleared to "0". As a result, when a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to calculate various parameters using only the history information of games played with the newly set setting value. Become.

On the other hand, according to the above configuration, even if new settings of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 are repeatedly made in a short period of time in order to prevent various parameters from being calculated appropriately, Memories 191 and 192 are maintained unchanged. Thereby, even if new settings of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 are repeatedly made in a short period of time, it is possible to appropriately derive the management results of the game history up to that point.

Note that the history memory 117 is not limited to a configuration in which two memories, the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192, are provided; A configuration may be adopted in which a first history area corresponding to the memory 191 and a second history area corresponding to the second history memory 192 are set.

Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which only one history memory 117 is provided. In this case, if the total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA exceeds a predetermined number after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. The configuration may be such that the history information before the timing when the setting is made is deleted, and the history information after the timing when the setting is made is stored and held without being deleted. As a result, at the timing when a predetermined number or more of history information has been accumulated since a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was performed, the history information before the timing when the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was set It becomes possible to erase information. In addition, by storing history information corresponding to a new setting of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117, new settings of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be stored in the history memory 117. It becomes possible to distinguish between history information before and after the timing at which the process was performed.

Furthermore, the timing of erasing the history information is limited to when the total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA reaches a predetermined number or more after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Instead, it may be the case that the number of games played after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times.

In addition, even if a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, if the setting value has not been changed before or after, the changes in the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored as described above and the history information The history memory 191, 192 to be stored as described above is configured so that deletion is not performed, and when a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 and the setting value is changed before and after that. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which changes are made and history information is deleted.

<Ninth embodiment>
In this embodiment, among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111, the type of the input signal is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66. This is different from the first embodiment. Further, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 in order to cause the management CPU 112 to specify the type of input signal is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same types of signals as in the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. 2 signals are input to the third buffer 122c, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the fourth buffer 122d, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A signal is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. The sixth signal is inputted, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is inputted to the seventh buffer 122g, and the output instruction signal is inputted to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is inputted as the eighth signal to the eighth buffer 122h, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is inputted as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i, The signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is inputted as the 10th signal to the 10th buffer 122j, the signal corresponding to the start of the game round is inputted as the 11th signal to the 11th buffer 122k, and the setting value update signal is inputted to the 15th buffer 122j. 122o, but in this embodiment, the buffers to which these signals are input are different. Specifically, a signal corresponding to the start of a game round is input to the 11th buffer 122k as a game round signal, a set value update signal is input to the 12th buffer 122l, and a signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input during the opening/closing execution mode. The signal corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is input to the 13th buffer 122m as a signal, and the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the 15th buffer 122n as a high-frequency support mode signal. It is input to buffer 122o.

The game time signal is input to the 11th buffer 122k, the setting value update signal is input to the 12th buffer 122l, the opening/closing execution mode signal is input to the 13th buffer 122m, and the 14th buffer 122n is inputted to the 14th buffer 122n. It is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the high-frequency support mode signal is input, the door open signal is input to the 15th buffer 122o, and the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p. The management side CPU 112 can specify that the corresponding signals are input to the eleventh to sixteenth buffers 122k to 122p without receiving an instruction from the main side CPU 63. On the other hand, what types of signals are input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are determined by receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. Similar to the first embodiment, the process for identifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the recognition process of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 9) as in the first embodiment.

First, the recognition output counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "10", which is the number of the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j whose signal types are to be recognized (step S2801). After that, output processing of an identification start signal is executed (step S2802). In the output processing, the respective output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the opening/closing execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n are determined. By setting the signal to HI level, the output of the identification start signal is started. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

Thereafter, information on the number of outputs corresponding to the current value of the output counter for recognition in the main side RAM 65 is read from the main side ROM 64, and the read information on the number of outputs is set in the output number counter provided in the main side RAM 65 ( Step S2803). The output number counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times the type identification signal is output.

In this embodiment, when the management side CPU 112 is made to recognize the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j, the number of prize balls set for the ball entering section corresponding to the type of signal is determined. The type identification signal is output the same number of times as . The management CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal has been received for each of the first buffer 122a to tenth buffer 122j in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the correspondence memory 116. . In other words, the types of signals input to the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j are understood as the number of prize balls set for the ball entering portion corresponding to the signal type.

In step S2803, if the value of the recognition output counter is one of "10", "9", and "8", "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning hole 31 is set in the output number counter. . Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "7", "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "6", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operating port 33 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "5", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second operating port 34 is set in the output number counter. In addition, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "4", even if the game ball enters the out port 24a although it corresponds to the out port 24a, the payout of the game ball is not executed, so the output number counter Set "0" to "0". Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is one of "3" to "1", the corresponding ball entry part does not exist and is blank, so the output number counter is set to "0".

Thereafter, output processing of a start trigger signal is executed (step S2804). In the output processing, output of the start trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to HI level. The period during which the first signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

Thereafter, on the condition that the value of the output number counter of the main side RAM 65 is not "0" (step S2805: YES), that is, on the condition that a value of 1 or more is set in the output number counter in step S2803, The process advances to step S2806. In step S2806, output processing of the type identification signal is executed. In the output process, output of the type identification signal is started by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to HI level. The period during which the second signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

After that, the value of the output number counter of the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S2807), and it is determined whether the value of the output number counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S2808). If the value of the output count counter is 1 or more (step S2808: NO), the process returns to step S2806.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2805 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S2808, output processing of an end trigger signal is executed (step S2809). In the output process, output of the termination trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to HI level. The period during which the third signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S2810), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S2811). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S2811: NO), the process returns to step S2803 and executes processing for recognizing the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtraction by 1. do.

On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S2811: YES), output processing of an identification end signal is executed (step S2812). In the output processing, the respective output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the opening/closing execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n are determined. By setting the signal to HI level, the output of the identification end signal is started. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

Next, the management processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 50. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

First, it is determined whether the reception of the identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 has been completed (step S2901). If the identification start signal has not been received, the setting update recognition process is executed in step S2902, and then the process in step S2901 is executed again. The contents of the setting update recognition process are the same as those in the first embodiment.

When the reception of the identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 is completed (step S2901: YES), the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S2903). Thereafter, on condition that a start trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2904: YES), the process advances to step S2905. In step S2905, it is determined whether a type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63. If the type identification signal is being received (step S2905: YES), the value of the reception frequency counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2906). The reception frequency counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify the number of times the type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63. Note that the value of the reception number counter is cleared to "0" when an affirmative determination is made in step S2904.

If a negative determination is made in step S2905, or if the process in step S2906 is executed, it is determined whether a termination trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2907). If the termination trigger signal has not been received (step S2907: NO), the process returns to step S2905, and if the termination trigger signal has been received (step S2907: YES), the correspondence relationship setting process is executed (step S2908). In the correspondence relationship setting process, among the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the correspondence memory 116, the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the counter to be set in the management side RAM 114 is set in the reception frequency counter. Store the value that has been set. In this case, "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning hole 31 is set in the first correspondence area 123a, second correspondence area 123b, and third correspondence area 123c, and "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning hole 31 is set in the fourth correspondence area 123d. is set to "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32, "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first actuation port 33 is set to the fifth correspondence area 123e, and the sixth correspondence relationship “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 is set in the area 123f. Furthermore, "0" is set in the seventh to twelfth correspondence areas 123g to 123l. Thereafter, the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2909).

If a negative determination is made in step S2904, or if the process in step S2909 is executed, it is determined whether or not the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has been completed (step S2910). If the reception of the identification end signal has not been completed (step S2910: NO), the process returns to step S2904, and on the condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2904: YES), the process from step S2905 onward is executed. Execute. If the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has been completed (step S2910: YES), the history setting process of step S2911, the display output process of step S2912, and the external output process of step S2913 are repeatedly executed.

FIG. 51 is a time chart showing how information on the correspondence between the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122j is stored in the correspondence memory 116. 51(a) shows a period when the output state of the first signal is at HI level, FIG. 51(b) shows a period when the output state of the second signal is at HI level, and FIG. 51(c) shows a period when the output state of the second signal is at HI level. ) shows the period when the output state of the third signal is at HI level, FIG. 51(d) shows the period when the output state of the signal during opening/closing execution mode is at HI level, and FIG. 51(e) shows the period when the output state of the signal is at HI level. FIG. 51(f) shows the period in which the output state of the signal is at HI level during the high frequency support mode, and FIG. 51(g) shows the timing when the value of the reception counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1, and FIG. 51(h) shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence relationship is executed. The timing at which the correspondence setting process (step S2908) is executed by the management CPU 112 is shown.

By starting the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112, at timing t1, the first signal , the output states of the opening/closing execution mode signal and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from LOW level to HI level. As a result, output of the identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at timing t2, the output states of the first signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t2, the management side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2901 of the management process (FIG. 50), thereby entering the identification state as shown in FIG. 51(f).

Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level from the timing t3 to the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 51(a). As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level from the timing t5 to the timing t7, as shown in FIG. 51(b). As a result, the type identification signal is output to the management CPU 112 once. In this case, at timing t6, the value of the reception count counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1, as shown in FIG. 51(g).

Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t8 to timing t10, as shown in FIG. 51(c). As a result, a state is reached in which a termination trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112. In this case, at timing t9, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 51(h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "1" at the timing when the corresponding relationship setting process is executed, "1" is written as the correspondence relationship information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the current setting target in the correspondence relationship memory 116. ” information is stored.

Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t11 to timing t12, as shown in FIG. 51(a). As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 51(b), the second The output state of the signal is maintained at HI level. As a result, each type identification signal is output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, the value of the reception count counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 at each of timing t14, timing t17, timing t20, and timing t23, as shown in FIG. 51(g).

Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t25 to timing t27, as shown in FIG. 51(c). As a result, the end trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, at timing t26, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 51(h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "10" at the timing when the corresponding relationship setting process is executed, "10" is written as the correspondence relationship information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the current setting target in the correspondence relationship memory 116. ” information is stored.

After that, at timing t28, as shown in FIGS. 51(c), 51(d), and 51(e), the output state of the third signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal becomes LOW. level is changed to HI level. As a result, output of an identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at timing t29, the output states of the third signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t29, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2910 of the management process (FIG. 50), thereby canceling the identification state as shown in FIG. 51(f).

In addition, in this embodiment, since information on the number of prize balls is stored as correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 includes the prize ball corresponding to the entered ball part that triggered the storage of the history information. Information on the number of objects is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, if there are multiple types of ball entry parts with the same number of prize balls, it is not possible to distinguish between the ball entry parts in the history information. Specifically, since both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 have one prize ball, it is difficult to distinguish between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the history information. Can not. Under such circumstances, the number of prize balls for the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 may be made different. This makes it possible to distinguish between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the historical information even in a configuration in which historical information is stored as in this embodiment.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, not only the setting value update signal and the output instruction signal, but also information corresponding to whether a game round has started, information corresponding to whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, Regarding the information corresponding to whether the high-frequency support mode is in effect and the information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is open, the main CPU 63 confirms that the signal path corresponds to these information. The management CPU 112 can specify the correspondence relationship information without receiving the correspondence information. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a is information that requires the main CPU 63 to recognize the correspondence relationship between each information and each signal path 118a to 118j from the management CPU 112. Become. When the correspondence relationship information is to be recognized by the management side CPU 112, pulse signals of the same number as the number of prize balls corresponding to each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a are sent from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 using the second signal. is output to. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration regarding transmission of correspondence information.

<Tenth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for providing information on each ball entry result to the management IC 66. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a signal path for inputting the detection results of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

The detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. In addition, the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. In addition, the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. Further, the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is inputted to the main CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. Further, the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. Further, the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. Furthermore, the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

A first branch route SL21 is formed so as to branch from a midway position of the first signal route SL11, and the first branch route SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a second branch route SL22 is formed so as to branch from a midway position of the second signal route SL12, and the second branch route SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a third branch route SL23 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the third signal route SL13, and the third branch route SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fourth branch route SL24 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fourth signal route SL14, and the fourth branch route SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fifth branch route SL25 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fifth signal route SL15, and the fifth branch route SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a sixth branch route SL26 is formed so as to branch from a midway position of the sixth signal route SL16, and the sixth branch route SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a seventh branch route SL27 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the seventh signal route SL17, and the seventh branch route SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

With the above configuration, the detection results of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without intervening processing by the main CPU 63. As a result, the main side CPU 63 executes a process for making the management side CPU 112 recognize the ball entry results of the out hole 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34. Since there is no need to do this, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63.

Furthermore, the branch points of each of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from each of the signal paths SL11 to SL17 exist within the MPU 62. This makes it difficult to access the branch point and each branch route SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity in which an abnormal ball entry result is input only to the management IC 66. .

<Eleventh embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration of a display device for displaying game history management results. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 53 is a front view of the main control device 60 in this embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the main control device 60 was provided with a first notification display device 69a, a second notification display device 69b, and a third notification display device 69c, but in this embodiment, the first notification display device 69a, the second notification display device 69b, and the third notification display device 69c were provided. A display device 201, a second notification display device 202, a third notification display device 203, and a fourth notification display device 204 are provided. These first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged side by side on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61.

The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are all segment displays in which seven LED display segments are arranged; however, the present invention is not limited to this; It may be a light emitting body, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are all installed so that their display surfaces face the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces, and are mounted on the opposing wall 60b of the board box 60a. covered. In this case, since the board box 60a is transparent, the display surfaces of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 housed in the board box 60a can be visually observed from outside the board box 60a. becomes possible. Furthermore, the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in such a way that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 in the board box 60a. When the main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 are exposed through the opposing wall portion 60b. It becomes possible to visually check the display screen of 204 to 204.

On the display surface of the first notification display device 201, alphabets such as "A", "E", "H", "L", and "O" are displayed. On the other hand, numbers in the range of "0" to "9" are displayed on the second notification display device 202, the third notification display device 203, and the fourth notification display device 204. The game history management results are notified using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this case, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 display the management result of the game history that is the target of notification (the first to eighth parameters in the first embodiment, the eleventh to 18th parameters, Displays corresponding to the types of parameters (21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, 41st to 42nd parameters) are performed, and the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 display the notification target. A display corresponding to the content of the management result of the game history of the type being played is displayed.

Specifically, the types of game history management results are the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, and the forty-first to forty-second parameters in the first embodiment. exists. The first notification display device 201 displays a display corresponding to the type of parameter group to be notified. Specifically, when any of the 1st to 8th parameters is targeted for notification, "A" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and when any of the 11th to 18th parameters is targeted for notification. When the notification target is set, "E" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and when any of the 21st to 26th parameters is the notification target, the first notification display device 201 displays 201, if any of the 31st parameters are to be notified, "L" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and the 41st to 42nd parameters are to be notified. If it is a target, "O" is displayed on the first notification display device 201.

The second notification display device 202 displays an order corresponding to the type of game history management results to be notified among the arrangement order of the gaming history management results in the parameter group to be notified. To explain the parameter group of the first to eighth parameters as an example, when the first parameter is the target of notification, "1" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and the second parameter is If the third parameter is targeted for notification, “2” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and “3” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 when the third parameter is targeted for notification. is displayed, and if the fourth parameter is to be notified, "4" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and if the fifth parameter is to be notified, "4" is displayed on the second notification display device 202. If "5" is displayed on the display device 202 and the sixth parameter is the target of notification, "6" is displayed on the second notification display device 202 and the seventh parameter is the target of notification. If there is, "7" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and "8" is displayed on the second notification display device 202 when the eighth parameter is the notification target. Further, to explain the parameter group of the 21st to 26th parameters as an example, when the 21st parameter is the target of notification, “1” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and the 22nd If the parameter is the target of notification, “2” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and if the 23rd parameter is the target of notification, “2” is displayed on the second notification display device 202. 3" is displayed, and when the 24th parameter is the target of notification, "4" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and when the 25th parameter is the target of notification, the second “5” is displayed on the notification display device 202, and “6” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 when the 26th parameter is the notification target.

In detail, regarding the display contents of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, the number corresponding to the tens place of the value obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100 is the third notification display device 203. It is displayed on the display device 203, and the number corresponding to the ones place is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

In the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, and the forty-first to forty-second parameters Displays corresponding to the calculation results of the parameters are sequentially switched according to a predetermined order, and after the calculation result of the 42nd parameter, which is the display target in the last order, is displayed, the first parameter, which is the display target in the first order, is displayed. The calculation result will be displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds. On the other hand, the calculation cycle of the various parameters mentioned above in the management side CPU 112 is 51 seconds, and the number of various parameters is 25. Therefore, various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are to be reported on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 202 at least once.

In the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the first embodiment, not only the game history management results are notified, but also a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. , the value corresponding to the current setting value is displayed. Specifically, in the changeable state, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are turned off, whereas the first to fourth notification display devices 204 arranged horizontally are located at the right end. The value corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. In other words, when "Setting 1" is selected in the changeable state, "1" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and when "Setting 2" is selected in the changeable state, "1" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. "2" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and if "Setting 3" is selected in the changeable state, "3" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and the change is possible. When “Setting 4” is selected in the state, “4” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and when “Setting 5” is selected in the changeable state, the fourth notification display device 204 displays “4”. "5" is displayed on the display device 204, and when "setting 6" is selected in the changeable state, "6" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

Next, the electrical configuration for performing various displays on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 under the control of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 54 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration for performing various displays on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 under the control of the MPU 62.

As already explained, the main control board 61 is provided with the MPU 62 and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Further, the main control board 61 is provided with a first display IC 205, a second display IC 206, a third display IC 207, and a fourth display IC 208.

The first display IC 205 is provided corresponding to the first notification display device 201, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 via a signal path SL31 and electrically connected to the first notification display device 201 via a signal path SL32. It is connected. The first display IC 205 is provided with a storage buffer for storing display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the first notification display device 201 is performed according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, that is, each display Controls the light emission of the segment. When operating power is supplied to the first display IC 205, the display data stored in the storage buffer can be stored and held, and the display content corresponding to the stored display data is displayed on the first notification display device. 201 to continue displaying. Then, when the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display on the first notification display device 201 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. In addition, in a situation where the display data has not been set by the MPU 62 after the supply of operating power to the first display IC 205 has started, the display data becomes all "0" data, but in this case, Then, the first notification display device 201 is in a non-display state, that is, in a light-off state.

However, the configuration is not limited to this, and by supplying backup power to the first display IC 205, the display can be performed on the first display IC 205 even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. It may also be configured to be able to store and retain data. In this case, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display that was displayed on the first notification display device 201 immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped is It will be started on the first notification display device 201.

The second display IC 206 is provided corresponding to the second notification display device 202, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 through a signal path SL33 and electrically connected to the second notification display device 202 through a signal path SL34. It is connected. The second display IC 206 is provided with a storage buffer for storing display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the second notification display device 202 is performed according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, that is, each display Controls the light emission of the segment. When operating power is supplied to the second display IC 206, the display data stored in the memory buffer can be stored and retained, and the display content corresponding to the stored display data is displayed on the second notification display device. 202 to continue displaying. Then, when the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display on the second notification display device 202 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. In addition, in a situation where the display data has not been set by the MPU 62 after the supply of operating power to the second display IC 206 has started, the display data becomes all "0" data, but in this case, Then, the second notification display device 202 is in a non-display state, that is, in a light-off state.

However, the configuration is not limited to this, and by supplying backup power to the second display IC 206, the display can be displayed on the second display IC 206 even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. It may also be configured to be able to store and retain data. In this case, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display that was displayed on the second notification display device 202 immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped is It will be started on the second notification display device 202.

The third display IC 207 is provided corresponding to the third notification display device 203, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 through a signal path SL35 and electrically connected to the third notification display device 203 through a signal path SL36. It is connected. The third display IC 207 is provided with a storage buffer for storing display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the third notification display device 203 is performed according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, that is, each display Controls the light emission of the segment. When operating power is supplied to the third display IC 207, the display data stored in the storage buffer can be stored and held, and the display content corresponding to the stored display data is displayed on the third notification display device. 203 to continue displaying. Then, when the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display on the third notification display device 203 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. In addition, in a situation where the display data has not been set by the MPU 62 after the supply of operating power to the third display IC 207 has started, the display data becomes all "0" data, but in this case, Then, the third notification display device 203 is in a non-display state, that is, in a light-off state.

However, the configuration is not limited to this, and by supplying backup power to the third display IC 207, the display can be displayed on the third display IC 207 even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. It may also be configured to be able to store and retain data. In this case, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display that was displayed on the third notification display device 203 immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped is It will be started on the third notification display device 203.

The fourth display IC 208 is provided corresponding to the fourth notification display device 204, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 via a signal path SL37 and electrically connected to the fourth notification display device 204 via a signal path SL38. It is connected. The fourth display IC 208 is provided with a storage buffer for storing display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the fourth notification display device 204 is performed according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, that is, each display Controls the light emission of the segment. When operating power is supplied to the fourth display IC 208, the display data stored in the memory buffer can be stored and retained, and the display content corresponding to the stored display data is displayed on the fourth notification display. 204 to continue displaying. Then, when the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display on the fourth notification display device 204 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. In addition, in a situation where the display data has not been set by the MPU 62 after the supply of operating power to the fourth display IC 208 has started, the display data becomes all "0" data, but in this case, Then, the fourth notification display device 204 is in a non-display state, that is, in a light-off state.

However, the configuration is not limited to this, and by supplying backup power to the fourth display IC 208, the fourth display IC 208 can display information even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. It may also be configured to be able to store and retain data. In this case, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display that was displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped is It will be started on the fourth notification display device 204.

The output of display data to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 is performed by the MPU 62, but output settings for the display data are performed by the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112, respectively. That is, the main side CPU 63 executes display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the management side CPU 112 executes display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this case, the period during which the display data output setting is performed in each of the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 is adjusted so that the display data output setting is not performed at the same time. Specifically, in a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started, the output setting of display data by the main CPU 63 is performed. In contrast, the management side CPU 112 does not perform display data output settings. On the other hand, in a state where the set value is not changeable, the management CPU 112 sets the display data to be output, but the main CPU 63 does not set the display data to output.

Note that, if the display data output setting by the main CPU 63 and the display data output setting by the management CPU 112 are performed at the same time, the display data output setting by the main CPU 63 takes priority. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the display data output setting by the management CPU 112 is prioritized.

Next, the display processing in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 55.

First, the value of the update timing counter in the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S3001). The update timing counter is a counter used by the management side CPU 112 to specify that it is the timing to update the display content of the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Thereafter, by determining whether the value of the update timing counter after subtraction by 1 is "0", it is determined whether or not it is time to update the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. is determined (step S3002).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, the value of the display target counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S3003). If the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value "24" (step S3004: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step S3005). The display target counter is a counter used by the management CPU 112 to specify the type of parameter to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The 1st to 8th parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter, the 41st to 42nd parameters, and the display target counters "0" to "24". There is a one-to-one correspondence with the possible values. For example, when the value of the display target counter is "0", the first parameter that is the first display target becomes the display target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the value of the display target counter is "24". In this case, the 42nd parameter, which is the last display target, becomes the display target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

If a negative determination is made in step S3004 or if the process in step S3005 is executed, display data corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read from the management side ROM 113 (step S3006). Then, a setting process for display data corresponding to the first notification display device 201 is executed (step S3007), and a process for setting display data corresponding to the second notification display device 202 is executed (step S3008). For example, if the value of the display target counter is "0" and the first parameter is the display target, display data for displaying "A" on the first notification display device 201 is sent to the first display IC 205. At the same time, display data for displaying "1" on the second notification display device 202 is output to the second display IC 206. For example, if the value of the display target counter is "24" and the 42nd parameter is the display target, display data for displaying "O" on the first notification display device 201 is displayed in the first display. At the same time as being output to the IC 205, display data for displaying "2" on the second notification display device 202 is output to the second display IC 206.

Thereafter, the parameter corresponding to the value of the counter to be displayed is read from the calculation result memory 131, and the display data corresponding to the tens digit and the display data corresponding to the ones digit of the result of multiplying the read parameter by 100 are displayed. It is read from the management side ROM 113 (step S3009). Then, the display of the third notification display device 203 is controlled so that the number corresponding to the tens digit of the result is displayed (step S3010), and the fourth notification display device 203 is controlled so that the number corresponding to the ones digit is displayed. Display control is performed on the notification display device 204 (step S3011). For example, when the result of multiplying by 100 is "53", display data for displaying "5" on the third notification display device 203 is output to the third display IC 207, and at the same time, it is output to the fourth notification display device 204. Display data for displaying "3" is output to the fourth display IC 208.

Thereafter, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the management side RAM 114 as a value corresponding to the next update timing (step S3012).

By executing the display processing as described above, the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The management result of the game history is displayed regardless of whether the game is continued or not, and when the game machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 and the main controller 60 is opened from the front of the pachinko machine 10. This is done regardless of whether it is visible or not. By performing the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 regardless of the game situation or the state of the pachinko machine 10 in this way, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 204 can be simplified.

The display of the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 starts after the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started and after the identification end command is received from the main side CPU 63. be done. In this case, the information stored in the calculation result memory 131 is retained even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, similar to the information stored in the history memory 117. Therefore, when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started, the gaming history management results calculated before the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is stopped are displayed.

The first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 store and hold the display data output from the MPU 62 while operating power is supplied, and the corresponding first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 according to the display data control the display. Therefore, after the display of the gaming history management results has started, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 will not be turned off (that is, non-displayed), but will be turned on corresponding to some display ( In other words, the display state).

Next, the setting value update process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 56.

First, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are turned off (step S3101). Specifically, display data that is all "0" is output to the first to third display ICs 205 to 207. As a result, the display segments of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are all turned off, and the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are placed in a non-display state. Immediately after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, all the display segments of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are off, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 204 are in a non-display state. Therefore, step S3101 is a process for maintaining the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 in a non-display state, and if any of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are If it is in a display state, it is a process of turning it into a non-display state.

Thereafter, the setting value counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3102). The setting value counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to specify which setting value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is at. By setting "1" to the setting value counter, when the setting value update process is executed, the setting value becomes "setting 1" regardless of the previous setting value.

Thereafter, a process to start displaying the setting value in the fourth display notification device 204 is executed (step S3103). In the setting value display start process, display data for displaying "1" is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, the number "1" corresponding to "Setting 1" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

Thereafter, on the condition that the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned off (step S3104: NO), it is determined whether the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3105). Specifically, it is determined whether the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S3105, the process returns to step S3104, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off.

If the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3105: YES), the value of the set value counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3106). Further, if the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds "6" (step S3107: YES), the set value counter is set to "1" (step S3108). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated to one step higher, and if the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6", it is changed to "Setting 1". I will be going back.

If a negative determination is made in step S3107, or if the process in step S3108 is executed, a process for updating the display of the set value on the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3109). In the setting value display update process, display data for displaying a number corresponding to the value of the setting value counter in the main side RAM 65 is output to the fourth display IC 208. Thereby, the number corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. By checking the fourth notification display device 204, the game hall manager can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

After executing the process in step S3109, the process returns to step S3104, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned off. If the OFF operation has not been performed (step S3104: NO), the processes from step S3105 onward are executed again. If the OFF operation has been performed (step S3104: YES), a process to start displaying the management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed (step S3110).

In the display start processing, a management result display start command is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. The management side CPU 112, which has received the management result display start command, executes processing for displaying the first parameter among the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131. The processing contents in this case are the same as steps S3006 to S3012 in the display processing (FIG. 55). As a result, a display corresponding to the first parameter calculated immediately before the operating power of the pachinko machine 10 was stopped last time is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Next, the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the case where the game history management results are displayed and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 are updated will be explained. FIG. 57(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the game history management results are displayed, and FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the setting state of the notification device 10 is changed. FIG.

When the game history management results are displayed, at least one display segment in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a light-emitting state, as shown in FIG. 57(a). In other words, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state. This is the same regardless of which of the 1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, and 41st to 42nd parameters are to be notified. . As a result, the manager of the game hall can visually check that all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the display state, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to grasp that the game history management results are displayed.

On the other hand, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, all the display segments in each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are turned off, as shown in FIG. 57(b). In other words, each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is in a non-display state. Further, any one of "1" to "6" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. In this way, any one of "1" to "6" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 goes into a non-display state. The manager of the game hall can understand that the display corresponding to the set value is being displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and can clearly understand the current set value. becomes possible.

Next, the manner in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 enter the display state will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 58(a) to 58(h). FIG. 58(a) shows the period of the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, and FIG. 58(b) shows the update of the setting display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. 58(c) shows the period for displaying the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 58(d) shows the period for displaying the management results of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices 58(e) shows the period during which the first notification display device 201 is in the display state, and FIG. 58(g) shows a period in which the second notification display device 202 is in the display state, FIG. 58(h) shows a period in which the third notification display device 203 is in the display state, and FIG. This indicates the period during which the display device 204 is in the display state.

The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed at timing t1 as shown in FIG. 58(a) by starting supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 with the setting key insertion part 68a turned on. It becomes a changeable state where it can be changed. At the timing t1, the setting display is updated as shown in FIG. 58(b), and the fourth notification display device 204 enters the display state and continues the display state as shown in FIG. 58(h). In this case, since "Setting 1" is selected, "1" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. On the other hand, at timing t1, as shown in FIGS. 58(e) to 58(g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in a non-display state, that is, all display segments are turned off. maintained.

Thereafter, by operating the update button 68b to change the set value at each of timing t2, timing t3, timing t4, and timing t5, each of these timings is changed as shown in FIG. 58(b). This is the timing to update the setting value display. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58(h), the display content of the fourth notification display device 204 is switched to the number corresponding to the changed setting value at each of these timings, but this display content switching The fourth notification display device 204 is maintained in the display state including each timing when the notification is performed. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 58(e) to 58(g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in the non-display state at each of these setting value display update timings, that is, all display devices are in the non-display state. The segment remains unlit.

Thereafter, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off at timing t6, thereby ending the changeable state as shown in FIG. 58(a). In this case, at the timing t6, the display period of the gaming history management results starts as shown in FIG. 58(c). Specifically, display of the first parameter stored in the calculation result memory 131 is started. Therefore, at the timing t6, as shown in FIGS. 58(e) to 58(g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are switched from the non-display state to the display state, and the fourth notification display is Although the display contents of the device 204 are changed, the display state is maintained.

Thereafter, the display of the game history management results is updated at timing t7, timing t8, timing t9, timing t10, timing t11, and timing t12, respectively, as shown in FIG. 58(d). In this case, as shown in FIGS. 58(e) to 58(h), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 change the display content corresponding to the management result of the game history after the update at each timing. However, all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in the display state, including the timing at which the display contents are switched.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In a configuration in which game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, in a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, a corresponding display is displayed. This is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This allows the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to be used not only as display devices for displaying game history management results, but also for displaying the corresponding display in the changeable state. .

This corresponds to the period during which game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the state in which setting values can be changed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is distinguished from the period in which the display is made. As a result, by understanding the situation in which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, which display is being performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to identify whether there is a

The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged so that when a display corresponding to a setting value changeable state is displayed, the display mode is different from the display mode when the game history management result is displayed. Display controlled. Thereby, by understanding the display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. becomes possible.

A plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided. This makes it possible to perform a wide variety of displays corresponding to the management results of the game history. In addition, due to the presence of multiple notification display devices 201 to 204, the display format is increased depending on whether the gaming history management results are displayed or when the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is displayed. It becomes possible to make the difference.

When the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203, which are not in the non-display state when displaying the game history management results, are in the non-display state. As a result, by simply checking whether or not the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in the non-display state, you can display the game history management results and the display corresponding to the changeable setting value state. It becomes possible to clearly specify which of these is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, the fourth notification display device 204 enters the display state, and the display content is the same as that of the fourth notification display device 204 when displaying the game history management results. This is the display content that can be displayed in . By allowing the display contents on the fourth notification display device 204 to overlap in this way, it is possible to display the results of management of the game history and the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value, respectively. This makes it possible to avoid placing restrictions on the displayed content. Furthermore, even in a configuration where the display contents on the fourth notification display device 204 may overlap, if the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, the display contents on the first to third notification display devices 204 may overlap. Since 201 to 203 are in a non-display state, it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When the game history management results are displayed, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state. As a result, the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are clearly different between when the game history management results are displayed and when the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is displayed. becomes possible.

When the gaming history management results are displayed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not maintained in a hidden state even if the type of gaming history management results to be displayed is changed. . This makes it possible to specify the gaming history management results regardless of the timing at which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are checked in a situation where the gaming history management results are displayed. In addition, regardless of the timing at which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are checked, the game history management results can be displayed and the setting values can be changed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to specify which of the corresponding displays is being performed.

When a display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, only one of the fourth notification display devices 204 is in the display state. This makes it easier to understand whether or not a display corresponding to a setting value changeable state is being displayed.

In a configuration in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged in the horizontal direction, a display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is displayed using only the fourth notification display device 204 located at the right end. It will be done. This makes it easier to understand whether or not a display corresponding to a setting value changeable state is being displayed.

When the gaming history management results are displayed, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are used to display a display corresponding to the type of gaming history management results to be displayed. A display corresponding to the content of the game history management result is performed using the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. This makes it easier to understand the management results of game history. In this case, in the setting value changeable state, both the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, which display the type of game history management result, are in a non-display state. As a result, the state in which the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 for displaying the type are not displayed corresponds to the state in which the setting value can be changed, and corresponds to the state in which the setting value can be changed. It becomes easier to understand what is being displayed.

In addition, when a display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is displayed, not only the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 where the type of management result of the game history is displayed, but also the game The third notification display device 203 on which the contents of the history management results are displayed also goes into a non-display state. This makes it easier to understand that the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is being displayed.

Display data is output from the MPU 62 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, and the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 perform predetermined displays on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 according to the display data. In this configuration, display data is stored and held in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208. As a result, even if execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped in the main CPU 63 due to the occurrence of a radio wave detection abnormality or vibration detection abnormality, for example (if an affirmative determination is made in step S306), It becomes possible to maintain the display of the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Note that among the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the objects that are in a non-display state (all lights out) in a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed are the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The present invention is not limited to the third notification display devices 201 to 203, and may be the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202. In this case, the third notification display device 203 displays a predetermined display (for example, “5”) that is different from the current setting value, and the fourth notification display device 204 displays the current setting value. The configuration may be such that a number corresponding to the number is displayed, and the fourth notification display device 204 displays a predetermined display (for example, "5") that is different from the contents of the current setting value, and the third notification The configuration may be such that the display device 203 displays numbers corresponding to the current setting values. In addition, the first notification display device 201 and the third notification display device 203 are in a non-display state (all lights out), and the second notification display device 202 and the fourth notification display device 204 are in a display state. Alternatively, the first notification display device 201 and the fourth notification display device 204 may be in a non-display state (all lights out), and the second notification display device 202 and third notification display device 203 may be in a display state. It may be configured such that the second notification display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 are in a non-display state (all lights out), and the first notification display device 201 and the fourth notification display device 204 are displayed. The second notification display device 202 and the fourth notification display device 204 may be in a non-display state (all lights out), and the first notification display device 201 and the third notification display device 203 It may be configured such that the is displayed.

Further, in a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, only the first notification display device 201 may be in a non-display state (all lights out), and the second notification A configuration may be adopted in which only the display device 202 is in a non-display state (all lights out), a configuration in which only the third notification display device 203 is in a non-display state (all lights out), and the fourth notification display device may be in a non-display state (all lights out). A configuration may also be adopted in which only the light 204 is in a non-display state (all lights out).

Further, in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, only the first notification display device 201 may be in the display state, and only the second notification display device 202 may be in the display state. It is good also as a structure where only the third notification display device 203 is in the display state.

<Twelfth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 in the setting value changeable state are different from the above-described eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the eleventh embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the eleventh embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 59(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the first notification display device 201, and FIG. 59(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the second notification display device 202.

As shown in FIG. 59(a), the first notification display device 201 includes seven first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g. Each of the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g is formed into a rod shape and has a light emitting body such as an LED inside. These seven first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g are arranged so that the first notification display device 201 becomes a so-called 7 segment display.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), the second notification display device 202 includes seven first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g. Each of the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g is formed into a rod shape and has a light emitting body such as an LED inside. These seven first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g are arranged so that the second notification display device 202 becomes a so-called seven segment display.

FIG. 60 shows a case in which the management results of game history are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and a case in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed in a changeable state in which the setting state can be changed. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 in FIG.

The display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 when displaying the game history management results are the same as those in the eleventh embodiment. Therefore, the first notification display device 201 displays “A”, “E”, “H”, “L”, or “O”, and the second notification display device 202 displays “1” to “8”. ” will be displayed.

In this case, each of the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g of the first notification display device 201 is “A”, “E”, “H”, “L”, It becomes a light emitting target in at least one type of display of "O". In other words, regardless of whether "A", "E", "H", "L", or "O" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, the display segments 201a to 201g that are not subject to light emission are Doesn't exist.

Similarly, regarding the second notification display device 202, each of the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g of the second notification display device 202 corresponds to “1” to “8” in the second notification display device 202. The light is emitted in at least one type of display among the displays. That is, even when displaying any of "1" to "8" on the second notification display device 202, there are no display segments 202a to 202g that are not subject to light emission.

In the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e of the first notification display device 201 are in a light emitting state. As already explained, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e can be in a light-emitting state when the first notification display device 201 displays the game history management results. Furthermore, in any case where the game history management results are displayed on the first notification display device 201, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in a light emitting state. On the other hand, among the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g, only the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in a light emitting state.The display content of the first notification display device 201 is the management of game history. Does not exist when displaying results. As a result, in the setting value changeable state, display segments 201b and 201e that can be in a light emitting state when displaying the management results of the gaming history are used, but the display is not displayed when displaying the management results of the gaming history. It becomes possible to display the mode on the first notification display device 201. Therefore, it is possible to cause the first notification display device 201 to display a display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value while also using the display segments 201a to 201g used when displaying the management results of the game history. It becomes possible.

In the setting value changeable state, the third display segment 202c of the second notification display device 202 is in a light emitting state. As already explained, the third display segment 202c can be in a light emitting state when the second notification display device 202 displays the game history management results. On the other hand, the display content of the second notification display device 202 in which only the third display segment 202c among the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g is in a light emitting state exists when displaying the management results of game history. I haven't. As a result, while the display segment 202c that can be in a light emitting state when displaying the management results of gaming history in the setting value changeable state is used, a display mode that is not displayed when displaying the management results of gaming history can be used. It becomes possible to display it on the second notification display device 202. Therefore, it is possible to cause the second notification display device 202 to display a display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value while also using the display segments 202a to 202g used when displaying the management results of the game history. It becomes possible.

Next, the setting value update process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 61.

First, a process to start displaying set values on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is executed (step S3201). Specifically, in the first notification display device 201, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in a light emitting state, and the other display segments 201a, 201c, 201d, 201f, and 201g are in a light-off state. This display data is output to the first display IC 205. Further, regarding the second notification display device 202, display data is outputted to the second display IC 206 such that the third display segment 202c is in a light-emitting state and the other display segments 202a, 202b, 202d to 202g are in a light-off state. As a result, a display is started on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 to notify that the pachinko machine 10 is in a changeable state in which the setting state can be changed.

Thereafter, a process of turning off the third notification display device 203 is executed (step S3202). Specifically, display data that is all "0" is output to the third display IC 207. As a result, all display segments of the third notification display device 203 are turned off, and the third notification display device 203 is placed in a non-display state.

Thereafter, the set value counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3203). The setting value counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to specify which setting value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is at. By setting "1" to the setting value counter, when the setting value update process is executed, the setting value becomes "setting 1" regardless of the previous setting value.

Thereafter, a process to start displaying the set value on the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3204). In the setting value display start process, display data for displaying "1" is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, the number "1" corresponding to "Setting 1" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

Thereafter, on the condition that the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned off (step S3205: NO), it is determined whether the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3206). Specifically, it is determined whether the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S3206, the process returns to step S3205, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off.

If the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3206: YES), the value of the setting value counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3207). Further, if the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds "6" (step S3208: YES), the set value counter is set to "1" (step S3209). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated to one step higher, and if the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6", it is changed to "Setting 1". I will be going back.

If a negative determination is made in step S3208, or if the process in step S3209 is executed, a process for updating the display of the set value on the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3210). In the setting value display update process, display data for displaying a number corresponding to the value of the setting value counter in the main side RAM 65 is output to the fourth display IC 208. Thereby, the number corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. By checking the fourth notification display device 204, the game hall manager can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

After executing the process in step S3210, the process returns to step S3205, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned off. If the OFF operation has not been performed (step S3205: NO), the processes from step S3206 onwards are executed again. If the OFF operation has been performed (step S3205: YES), a process to start displaying the management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed (step S3211).

In the display start processing, a management result display start command is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. The management side CPU 112, which has received the management result display start command, executes processing for displaying the first parameter among the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131. The processing contents in this case are the same as steps S3006 to S3012 in the display processing (FIG. 55). As a result, a display corresponding to the first parameter calculated immediately before the operating power of the pachinko machine 10 was stopped last time is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

Setting values can be changed by setting the display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202g of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, which can be in a light emitting state when the game history management results are displayed, to a light emitting state. A display corresponding to the status is performed. As a result, in order to diversify the display of the gaming history management results, it is possible to minimize restrictions on the content of the display corresponding to the gaming history management results. On the other hand, for each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202a, which are in a light emitting state when a display corresponding to a setting value changeable state is performed. The combination 202g does not exist when the game history management results are displayed. As a result, by understanding the combinations of the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g that are in a light emitting state for each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, the game history management results are displayed. It becomes possible to grasp which display is being performed among the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value.

Regarding each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, there are display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g that do not emit light even if all patterns of game history management results are displayed. I haven't. This makes it possible to minimize restrictions on the display contents of the gaming history management results in order to diversify the display corresponding to the gaming history management results.

When the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, the third notification display device 203, which does not go into the non-display state when displaying the game history management result, becomes the non-display state. As a result, by checking not only the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, but also whether or not the third notification display device 203 is in a non-display state, the game history It becomes possible to clearly specify which of the display of the management result and the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Note that this configuration is limited to a configuration in which only one type of display content corresponding to a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is set. However, a configuration may be adopted in which multiple types are set. In this case, the display order of the plurality of types of display contents is determined in advance, and each time the changeable state is newly executed, the display contents to be displayed may be changed according to the display order. Even if there are multiple types of display contents corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value in this way, these display contents are displayed in the display segment 201a which becomes a light emitting state when displaying the management results of the game history. 201g, 202a to 202g, and the display content is not displayed when the game history management results are displayed.

In addition, in one of the cases where the management results of the game history are displayed and the display corresponding to the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the first and second notification display devices are used. A configuration may be adopted in which a blinking display is performed in 201 and 202, and a display that remains lit is performed in the other. In this case, the administrator of the game hall can specify whether the display corresponds to the display of the game history management results or the changeable state depending on whether the display is blinking or lit. The combination of the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g that are in the light emitting state in the display corresponding to the possible state may be a combination used when displaying the management results of the gaming history. It may be a combination that is not used when displaying the results. Further, the lighting period and the lights-out period in the blinking display may be the same in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, or may be completely different from each other. , it is also possible to have a configuration in which only some parts overlap.

<Thirteenth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the eleventh embodiment in that when an abnormal state occurs in the pachinko machine 10, a corresponding display is made using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. There is. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the eleventh embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the eleventh embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the abnormality display area 211 provided in the main side RAM 65.

The abnormality display area 211 is an area for storing abnormal state information to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The abnormality display area 211 is provided with a plurality of unit areas 211a to 211d. Specifically, a first unit area 211a, a second unit area 211b, a third unit area 211c, and a fourth unit area 211d are provided. It is possible to store one piece of information about the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 in each of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d. In other words, the abnormality display area 211 can store and hold up to four pieces of information about abnormal states of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, in this embodiment, all information regarding abnormal conditions occurring in the pachinko machine 10 is specified by the main CPU 63. For example, when an abnormality regarding the payout of game balls (for example, the lower tray 56a is full, the tank 75 is empty, the payout device 76 is abnormal), a command corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred is sent to the payout side CPU 92. The information is transmitted from the host CPU 63 to the main CPU 63. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a radio wave detection sensor and a vibration detection sensor (not shown), and when the radio wave detection sensor detects an unauthorized radio wave, a corresponding abnormality signal is sent to the main CPU 63, and an abnormality signal is sent to the main CPU 63. When the vibration detection sensor detects vibration, a corresponding abnormality signal is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Furthermore, based on identifying that the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a no longer transmit normal signals, the occurrence of a disconnection abnormality in the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a is determined.

The number of types of abnormal states specified by the main CPU 63 is greater than the maximum number of abnormal state information that can be stored in the abnormal display area 211. Then, when a large number of abnormal states occur simultaneously, it is assumed that new abnormal information will be generated even though the maximum number of abnormal state information has already been stored in the abnormality display area 211. On the other hand, storage priority is set for abnormal state information at the setting stage of the pachinko machine 10, and in a situation where the maximum number of abnormal state information is already stored in the abnormal display area 211, a new If an abnormal state occurs in the abnormal state, information on the abnormal state with a high storage priority will be left in the abnormal display area 211. This makes it possible to give priority to notification of an abnormal state with a high storage priority.

Next, the abnormality setting process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 63. Note that the abnormality setting process is executed as the first process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

First, it is determined whether or not an abnormality display target has occurred (step S3301). The types of abnormalities to be displayed include fullness of the lower tray 56a, no balls in the tank 75, abnormality in dispensing by the dispensing device 76, abnormality in radio wave detection, abnormality in vibration detection, and disconnection abnormality in each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a. The number of types of abnormality display targets is greater than the number of first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d provided in the abnormality display area 211.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3301, whether information on the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormality display target that has occurred this time has already been stored in any of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211. is determined (step S3302). If it has already been stored, the abnormal state information corresponding to the currently occurring abnormality display target is not stored in the abnormality display area 211. This makes it possible to prevent information on the same type of abnormal state from being stored redundantly in the abnormality display area 211.

If a negative determination is made in step S3302, it is determined whether the value of the abnormality target counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is the maximum value (specifically, "4") (step S3303). The abnormality target counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to specify the number of areas in which abnormal state information is stored among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d in the abnormality display area 211.

If the value of the abnormality target counter is the maximum value (step S3303: YES), a priority comparison process is executed (step S3304). In the priority comparison process, first of all the abnormal state information stored in the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211, the abnormal state information having the lowest storage priority is identified. The memory priority is predetermined at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and specifically, the lower tray 56a is full → there are no balls in the tank 75 → abnormality in vibration detection → abnormality in dispensing by the dispensing device 76 → entering ball detection sensor 42a The storage priority increases in the order of ~49a disconnection abnormality → radio wave detection abnormality. In the priority comparison process, which of the abnormal state information with the lowest storage priority stored in the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d and the abnormality display target that has occurred this time has a higher storage priority. Compare and judge whether

If the storage priority of the abnormality display target that has occurred this time is lower (step S3305: NO), information on the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormality display target that has occurred this time is not stored in the abnormality display area 211. As a result, in a configuration in which the number of types of abnormality display targets is greater than the number of first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d provided in the abnormality display area 211, information on abnormal conditions with a high storage priority can be stored. It becomes possible to leave it in the abnormality display area 211.

If the storage priority of the abnormality display target that has occurred this time is higher (step S3305: YES), a setting process for the abnormality display area 211 is executed (step S3306). In the abnormality display area 211 setting process executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S3305, the current occurrence Overwrites the abnormal state information corresponding to the abnormality display target.

On the other hand, if the value of the abnormality target counter in the main side RAM 65 has not reached the maximum value (step S3303: NO), after adding 1 to the value of the abnormality target counter (step S3307), the setting process of the abnormality display area 211 is performed. (Step S3306). In this setting process, one area is selected from among the unit areas 211a to 211d in which no abnormal state information is stored in the abnormal display area 211, and the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormality display target that has occurred this time is displayed in the selected area. Stores information about.

Note that in step S3306, if there is only one abnormal state information stored in the abnormal display area 211, the abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a, and the abnormal state information stored in the abnormal display area 211 is stored in the first unit area 211a. If there is a plurality of pieces of abnormal state information stored in , the abnormal state information is stored in order from the area with the smallest value of "n" in the n-th unit areas 211a to 211b.

In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether a cancellation event of the abnormality display target has occurred (step S3308). For example, it is determined whether a command indicating that the lower tray 56a is no longer full, that the tank 75 is no longer filled with balls, or that the dispensing abnormality caused by the dispensing device 76 has been received from the dispensing side CPU 92. judge. In addition, whether or not an abnormality release operation was performed in response to the occurrence of a radio wave detection abnormality, whether or not an abnormality release operation was performed in response to the occurrence of a vibration detection abnormality, or whether an abnormality release operation was performed in response to the occurrence of a disconnection abnormality. judge.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3308, a process for erasing the abnormality display area 211 is executed (step S3309). In this erasing process, it is determined whether or not information on the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormality display target that has been canceled this time is stored in any of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211. , if it is stored, clear the area where it is stored to "0" to erase the information about the abnormal state. In this case, if there is only one piece of abnormal state information stored in the abnormality display area 211 after erasing, the information about that abnormal state is stored in the first unit area 211a, and after erasing, the abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a. If there is a plurality of abnormal state information stored in the display area 211, the abnormal state information is stored in order from the area with the smallest value of "n" in the n-th unit areas 211a to 211b. Furthermore, the value of the abnormality target counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S3310).

In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether an operation to start abnormality display has occurred (step S3311). The operation to start the abnormality display is performed by pressing the update button 68b while opening the gaming machine main body 12 forward with respect to the outer frame 11 in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 is not in a changeable state in which the setting state can be changed. This is done through manipulation.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3311, it is determined whether information on one or more abnormal conditions is stored in the abnormality display area 211 (step S3312). If abnormal state information is not stored, abnormality display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not started. This makes it possible to prevent abnormality display from starting even though there is no abnormality information to be reported.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3312, the abnormality displaying flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3313). The abnormality displaying flag stops the display corresponding to the management result of the game history and starts the display corresponding to the abnormal state information stored in the abnormality display area 211 on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the current situation is such that it should be carried out in the next step. Note that even if the abnormality display start operation is performed in a situation where the abnormality display flag has already been set to "1", a negative determination is made in step S3311.

Thereafter, a setting process for canceling the display of management results is executed (step S3314). In the cancellation setting process, a display cancellation command is sent to the management CPU 112 to temporarily stop updating the display of the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Upon receiving the display stop command, the management side CPU 112 stops execution of the display process (FIG. 55). However, even if the management CPU 112 receives the display stop command, it does not set display data that is all "0" data in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208. Therefore, until the display data is sent from the main side CPU 63 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, the display of the game history management results at that point will continue on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Ru.

In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether an operation to end abnormality display has occurred (step S3315). To terminate the abnormality display, press the reset button 68c with the gaming machine main body 12 opened forward relative to the outer frame 11 in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 is not in a changeable state where the setting state can be changed. This is done by manipulating. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3315, the abnormality display flag in the main side RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3316). Note that even if the abnormal display termination operation is performed in a situation where the value of the abnormal display flag is already "0", a negative determination is made in step S3315.

Thereafter, a process for canceling the display of management results is executed (step S3317). In the cancellation cancellation process, by transmitting a cancellation cancellation command to the management CPU 112, it is possible to confirm that the update of the display of the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 has been canceled. unlock. Upon receiving the cancellation cancellation command, the management CPU 112 resumes execution of the display process (FIG. 55). However, even if the management side CPU 112 receives the cancellation cancellation command, it does not set display data that is all "0" data in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208. Therefore, until the display data is transmitted from the management side CPU 112 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, the abnormality display at that point continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In addition, the management CPU 112 continues to store history information and calculate various parameters even when updating of the display of game history management results is stopped, and the results of calculating various parameters are It is stored in the result memory 131. Therefore, when the state in which the update of the display of the gaming history management results is canceled is canceled, the display of the most recent gaming history management results will be immediately displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It will be restarted.

In the abnormality setting process, if the abnormality displaying flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3318: YES), abnormality display processing is executed (step S3319). FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing abnormality display processing.

First, a process of turning off the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is executed (step S3401). Specifically, display data that is all "0" is output to the first and second display ICs 205 and 206. As a result, all display segments of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are turned off, and the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are in a non-display state.

Thereafter, the value of the update timing counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S3402). The update timing counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify that it is the timing to update the display contents of the abnormal display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Note that if the value of the update timing counter is already "0", that state is maintained. Thereafter, by determining whether the value of the update timing counter is "0", it is determined whether it is time to update the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 ( Step S3403).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3403, updating processing of a display target counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is executed (step S3404). In the update process, if this is the first abnormality display process after the abnormality display flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1", the display target counter is set to "0". The value of the display target counter corresponds to the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211. Specifically, the value of "0" of the display target counter corresponds to the first unit area 211a. The value "1" of the display target counter corresponds to the second unit area 211b, the value "2" of the display target counter corresponds to the third unit area 211c, and the value "3" of the display target counter corresponds to the second unit area 211b. ” corresponds to the fourth unit area 211d. In the update process, if this is not the first abnormality display process after the abnormality display flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1", the value of the display target counter is incremented by one.

Thereafter, it is determined whether abnormal state information is stored in the area corresponding to the current value of the display target counter among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d (step S3405). Here, as already explained, when only one piece of abnormal state information is stored, that abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a, and a plurality of pieces of abnormal state information are stored. In this case, abnormal state information is stored in order from the area with the smallest value of "n" in the n-th unit areas 211a to 211b. Therefore, if abnormal state information is not stored in the area corresponding to the current value of the display target counter, abnormal state information is also stored in the area corresponding to a value larger than the value of the display target counter. There will be no. In addition, if the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of "3", the corresponding area does not exist in the first place, so the abnormal state information is treated as not being stored. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3405, the value of the display target counter in the main side RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3406). Here, it is assumed that in a situation where an abnormality display is being performed, all the abnormal conditions that are the target of the abnormality display are canceled. In this case, even in a situation where the abnormality display process is executed, no abnormal state information is stored in the abnormality display area 211. In such a situation, the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 display a message indicating that no abnormal state information is stored.

When a negative determination is made in step S3405, or when the process in step S3406 is executed, display data to be displayed corresponding to the value of the display target counter in the main side RAM 65 is read from the main side ROM 64 (step S3407). Specifically, information stored in the area corresponding to the value of the display target counter of the main side RAM 65 among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211 is read out. Then, display data corresponding to the information is read from the main ROM 64. The display data is set in one-to-one correspondence with the abnormal state information, and the display contents of the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 based on the display data are set for each type of abnormal state information. They are different. Further, there is also display data corresponding to the absence of abnormal state information, and this display data is different from display data corresponding to abnormal state information. Therefore, when abnormal state information does not exist, the display content of the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 becomes different from the display content when abnormal state information exists.

On the other hand, the display contents of the display corresponding to the abnormal state information and the display contents of the display corresponding to the absence of abnormal state information on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are This overlaps with the display content when the game history management results are displayed on the fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 and the display content of the setting value on the fourth notification display device 204. On the other hand, when displaying the game history management results, all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the display state, and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. In this state, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in a non-display state, and the fourth notification display device 204 is in a display state, and when an abnormality is displayed, the first and second notification display devices are in a non-display state. 201 and 202 go into a non-display state, and the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 go into a display state, so even if the display contents overlap as described above, it corresponds to either situation. It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to understand whether the information is displayed or not.

Thereafter, the display of the third notification display device 203 is controlled according to the display data read out in step S3407 (step S3408), and the display of the fourth notification display device 204 is controlled (step S3409). In this case, whether the display corresponding to the abnormal state information or the case where the display corresponding to the absence of abnormal state information is performed, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 203 None of the display devices 204 are in a non-display state (that is, they are not in a completely off state), but are in some display state.

Thereafter, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the main side RAM 65 as a value corresponding to the next update timing (step S3410).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In a configuration in which game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. will be carried out. This allows the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to be used not only as display devices for displaying game history management results but also as display devices for displaying abnormal conditions.

When causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to display a display corresponding to the abnormal condition when no abnormal condition has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 A display corresponding to the fact that no abnormal condition has occurred is performed. This makes it possible to clearly identify whether or not an abnormal state has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 by checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

The period during which game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is distinguished from the period in which As a result, by understanding the situation in which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, which display is being performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to identify whether there is a

The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged so that when a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed, the display mode is different from the display mode when the game history management results are displayed. Display controlled. Thereby, by understanding the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. becomes possible.

A plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided. This makes it possible to perform a wide variety of displays corresponding to the management results of the game history. In addition, due to the presence of multiple notification display devices 201 to 204, the display mode can be made larger depending on whether the game history management results are displayed or when a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. It becomes possible to make the difference.

When a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, which are not in a non-display state when displaying the game history management results, become a non-display state. As a result, by simply checking whether the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are in the non-display state, the management results of the game history and the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 can be displayed. It becomes possible to clearly specify which of these is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed, the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are in a display state, and the display content is , the display contents that can be displayed on the fourth notification display devices 203 and 204. By making it possible for the display contents on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 to overlap in this way, when the game history management results are displayed, the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is It becomes possible to avoid imposing restrictions on the display contents when the display is performed. Furthermore, even if the display contents on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 can overlap in this way, when a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed, the first and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 Since the second notification display devices 201 and 202 are in a non-display state, it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Note that if the abnormality display start operation is performed in a situation where no abnormality information is stored in the abnormality display area 211, the abnormality information will be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that point. The configuration may be such that a display corresponding to the fact that the information is not stored is displayed.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the management output process executed by the main CPU 63 is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the management output process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63.

First, it is determined whether the management start flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3501). The management start flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not history information should be stored in the history memory 117. In this embodiment, the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started) is the management start standard. The history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the number corresponds to the value or more, and when the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA exceeds the number corresponding to the management start reference value. The storage of history information in the history memory 117 is started. At the stage of shipping the Pachinko machine 10, the operation of the Pachinko machine 10 may be checked before shipping, and at that time, game balls are placed in each ball entry section and subsequent operations are checked. In contrast, the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA after the start of supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 reaches or exceeds the management start reference value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the ball entering results and the like during the operation check as described above from being stored as history information.

If a negative determination is made in step S3501, a start management counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "7" (step S3502). The start management counter indicates which of the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is used to specify the detection state of a game ball in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1". This is a counter for identification by the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the output flag of the main side RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the start management counter is set to "1" (step S3503). Specifically, if the value of the starting management counter is "7" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not the first output flag is set to "1". If the value of the start management counter is "6" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether the second output flag is set to "1", and the start management is performed. If the value of the counter is "5" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether the third output flag is set to "1" and the value of the starting management counter is If the value is "4" and corresponds to the special electric detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether the fourth output flag is set to "1", and if the value of the starting management counter is "3" and the first If it corresponds to the operating port detection sensor 46a, it is determined whether the fifth output flag is set to "1", and if the value of the starting management counter is "2", the second operating port detection sensor 47a, it is determined whether the sixth output flag is set to "1", and if the value of the start management counter is "1" and it corresponds to the output port 24a, determines whether the seventh output flag is set to "1". As already explained, these first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 15).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3503, the output flag corresponding to the value of the start management counter is cleared to "0" (step S3504). Thereafter, the value of the discharge number counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3505). The ejected number counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA in a situation where the management start flag of the main RAM 65 is not set to "1".

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the discharge number counter is equal to or greater than the management start reference value (step S3506). Although the management start reference value is set to "300", it is not limited to this and may be configured to have a number less than "300" or may be configured to have a number greater than "300". .

If a negative determination is made in step S3503 or if a negative determination is made in step S3506, the value of the start management counter of the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S3507). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the start management counter after being subtracted by 1 is "0" (step S3508). If a negative determination is made in step S3508, the process returns to step S3503, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3508, the main management output process is directly terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the discharge number counter of the main side RAM 65 is equal to or greater than the management start reference value (step S3506: YES), the management start flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3509). After that, management processing is executed (step S3510). Furthermore, if the management start flag is set to "1" and an affirmative determination is made in step S3501, the management process is also executed (step S3510). The processing contents of the management process are the same as steps S1001 to S1012 of the management output process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started) is managed. History information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA reaches or exceeds the number corresponding to the management start reference value. storage of history information in the history memory 117 is started. At the stage of shipping the Pachinko machine 10, the operation of the Pachinko machine 10 may be checked before shipping, and at that time, game balls are placed in each ball entry section and subsequent operations are checked. In contrast, the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA after the start of supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 reaches or exceeds the management start reference value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the ball entering results and the like during the operation check as described above from being stored as history information.

Here, after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started as described above, until the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA reaches or exceeds the number corresponding to the management start reference value, the history is used. In a configuration in which history information is not stored in the memory 117, it is not possible to calculate the management results of the gaming history during that time. Therefore, in such a situation, a configuration may be adopted in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display corresponding to the situation. For example, all the display segments in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to be in a light emitting state. This display content is not displayed either when displaying the management results of the game history or when displaying the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. By checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to specify whether or not history information is not stored as described above.

Furthermore, after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the setting mode of the information of the management start flag in the main side RAM 65 differs depending on whether the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has become changeable or not. It is also possible to have a configuration in which FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the other embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Steps S3601 to S3609 execute the same processes as steps S101 to S109 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment, and steps S3611 to S3620 execute the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment. The same processing as step S110 to step S119 of 9) is executed. On the other hand, in this alternative embodiment, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3608, the management start flag of the main side RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3610), and after the process of step S3620 is executed, the management start flag of the main side RAM 65 is cleared. is set to "1" (step S3621). According to this configuration, if the process for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not executed, the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. History information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the value exceeds the management start reference value, and when a process for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the History information is stored in the history memory 117 regardless of the number of game balls ejected after the supply of operating power is started. This makes it possible to manage the game history immediately after the start of supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 in a situation where there is a high possibility that the operation check at the time of shipment of the Pachinko machine 10 does not apply.

Further, history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA reaches or exceeds the management start reference value after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. Instead of a configuration in which there is no history memory 117, an area may be provided for storing history information until the total number of game balls reaches a management start reference value or more. This makes it possible to specify the gaming history management result in the situation.

Further, history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA reaches or exceeds the management start reference value after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. A configuration may be adopted in which a condition in which the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where no history information is stored in the history memory 117 may be added as a condition for a situation where no history information is stored. In this case, if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where history information has already been stored in the history memory 117, the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA is the management start criterion. History information will be stored in the history memory 117 from the beginning regardless of whether the value is greater than or equal to the value.

Further, history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA reaches or exceeds the management start reference value after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. In addition to or in place of the configuration, if an abnormal state such as a radio wave detection abnormality or a vibration detection abnormality occurs, the history information may not be stored in the history memory 117 until the abnormal state is canceled. This makes it possible to prevent history information from being stored for events that occur in abnormal situations.

Further, history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA reaches or exceeds the management start reference value after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. In addition to or in place of the configuration in which the game machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is open, the history information may not be stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to prevent history information from being stored for events that occur when the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is open.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in terms of the entity that executes the processing for managing game history. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

In the first embodiment, the MPU 62 is provided with the management IC 66, but in this embodiment, the MPU 62 is not provided with the management IC 66. Although the management IC 66 is not provided, in this embodiment, the processing for managing the game history is executed by the main CPU 63. Further, in this embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes various types of control by distinguishing between specific control and non-specific control. Specifically, control related to the management of game history is defined as non-specific control, and control other than non-specific control, including control for advancing the game based on the game operation by the player, is defined as specific control.

In detail, regarding the specific control, all controls by the main process (FIG. 9) that are executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started are included in the specific control. Note that in this embodiment, among the main processes (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment, the recognition process (step S111), the data output process (step S112), and the setting value update signal output process (step S119) are Not executed. Further, even in this embodiment, the timer interrupt processing is periodically executed by interrupting the processing of steps S113 to S116 in the main processing (FIG. 9), and various processing of the timer interrupt processing is performed. All of the processes other than the management process described later are included in the specific control. Further, some of the management processing is also included in the specific control.

FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how programs and data are set in the main ROM 64. As shown in FIG. Corresponding to the fact that the control executed by the main CPU 63 is divided into specific control and non-specific control, the main ROM 64 also has a program for specific control and a program for specific control, as shown in FIG. Addresses of areas where data, non-specific control programs, and non-specific control data are stored are clearly distinguished.

Specifically, specific control programs are collectively stored in areas of consecutive addresses within the range of addresses X(1) to X(k+2). Furthermore, the addresses X(k+3) to X(k+5) that follow addresses X(1) to X(k+2) are addresses of unused areas where no data is stored, and the addresses X(k+5) that follow addresses X(1) to X(k+2) are addresses of unused areas where no data is stored. Specific control data is collectively stored in areas of consecutive addresses within the range from k+6) to X(m+2). Furthermore, the addresses X(m+3) to X(m+5) that follow addresses X(k+6) to X(m+2) are addresses of unused areas where no data is stored, and the addresses following address X( Non-specific control programs are collectively stored in areas of consecutive addresses within the range from m+6) to X(n+2). Furthermore, the addresses X(n+3) to X(n+5) that follow addresses X(m+6) to X(n+2) are addresses of unused areas where no data is stored, and the addresses X(m+6) to X(n+2) are addresses of unused areas where no data is stored. Non-specific control data is collectively stored in areas of consecutive addresses within the range from n+6) to X(p+2). Note that the relationship between the programs and data and addresses as described above is set in both the physical address in the main side ROM 64 and the logical address on the memory map recognized by the main side CPU 63.

As mentioned above, the program for specific control and the data for specific control, the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control, regardless of the execution order of the processing for executing the corresponding control, Because they are stored in areas with addresses in different ranges, for example, when checking only a specific control program and specific control data, the address where these specific control programs and specific control data are stored. It is only necessary to check the area within the range. For example, when checking only non-specific control programs and non-specific control data, the address where these non-specific control programs and non-specific control data are stored. You only need to check the area within the range. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently check programs and data by distinguishing between specific control and non-specific control. Additionally, it becomes possible to efficiently perform work when modifying programs and data by distinguishing between specific control and non-specific control.

No data is stored between the address range of the area where specific control programs and specific control data are stored and the address range of the area where non-specific control programs and non-specific control data are stored. By setting the address range of an unused area that has not been used, it becomes easier to grasp the boundary between the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control during checking work.

In each of the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control, programs and data are stored in areas of different ranges of addresses, regardless of the order of execution of processes for executing the corresponding control. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform the work efficiently when checking programs and data separately. Additionally, by setting the address range of an unused area where no data is stored between the address range of the area where the program is stored and the address range of the area where the data is stored, the program This makes it easier to grasp the boundary between the address range and the data address range during checking work.

FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting manner of each area in the main side RAM 65. As shown in FIG. Corresponding to the fact that the control executed by the main CPU 63 is divided into specific control and non-specific control, the main RAM 65 also has a work area 221 for specific control and a work area 221 for specific control, as shown in FIG. The address range of the stack area 222 for non-specific control and the address range of the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are clearly distinguished.

Specifically, the area of each consecutive address within the range of addresses Y(1) to Y(r+2) is set as the work area 221 for specific control. Further, addresses Y(r+3) to Y(r+5) that follow addresses Y(1) to Y(r+2) are addresses of unused areas, and addresses Y(r+6) to Y(s+2) that follow addresses Y(r+6) to Y(s+2) are addresses of unused areas. ) is set as a stack area 222 for specific control. Further, addresses Y(s+3) to Y(s+5) that follow addresses Y(r+6) to Y(s+2) are addresses of unused areas, and subsequent addresses Y(s+6) to Y(t+2) are addresses of unused areas. ) is set as a work area 223 for non-specific control. Further, addresses Y(t+3) to Y(t+5) that follow addresses Y(s+6) to Y(t+2) are addresses of unused areas, and subsequent addresses Y(t+6) to Y(u+2) are addresses of unused areas. ) is set as a stack area 224 for non-specific control. The relationship between each area and address as described above is set in both the physical address in the main side RAM 65 and the logical address on the memory map recognized by the main side CPU 63.

As described above, the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 223 for non-specific control are set separately, so that when the main CPU 63 executes specific control and when executing non-specific control, Therefore, different areas of the main RAM 65 are used when various calculations are executed. Thereby, when performing one of the specific control and non-specific control, it is possible to make it difficult for the event that information in the main side RAM 65 necessary for the other control to be erased to occur. Incidentally, when writing information to each work area 221, 223 and reading information from each work area 221, 223, the main CPU 63 issues a load command.

Since the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are set separately, it is possible to Different areas of the main side RAM 65 are used when saving information stored in the register of the side CPU 63 and when storing information on a return address on the program. As a result, when one of the specific control and non-specific control is being executed, when saving the information stored in the register of the main CPU 63 and when storing the information of the return address on the program, it can be used in the other. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the information that is displayed is deleted. Incidentally, when writing information to each stack area 222, 224, the main CPU 63 performs a push command, and when reading information from each stack area 222, 224, the main CPU 63 performs a pop command. Furthermore, when reading information from each stack area 222, 224, the information that is written to the stack area 222, 224 later in the order of writing is read out first.

Here, when the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to specific control, the main CPU 63 can write information to the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, and Information can be read from the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. On the other hand, when the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to specific control, the main CPU 63 can read information from the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control; , information cannot be written to the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. This makes it possible to prevent information used in processing corresponding to non-specific control from being accidentally deleted in a situation where processing corresponding to specific control is being executed.

Furthermore, when the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, the main CPU 63 can write information to the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. At the same time, information can be read from the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. On the other hand, when the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, although the main CPU 63 can read information from the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, Information cannot be written to the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. Thereby, in a situation where processing corresponding to non-specific control is being executed, it is possible to prevent information used in processing corresponding to specific control from being accidentally deleted.

Note that backup power will be supplied to the main side RAM 65 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, but the backup power will be supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the non-specific control. It is supplied to all of the work area 223 for use and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. As a result, the information stored in the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is stored when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off. Even afterward, the data will be retained as long as backup power is supplied.

Next, timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 69. As in the first embodiment, the timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) while the processes in steps S113 to S116 are being executed in the main process (FIG. 9). Note that the program corresponding to timer interrupt processing is set as a specific control program.

In steps S3701 to S3718, the same processes as steps S301 to S318 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment are executed. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data. In step S3719 in the timer interrupt processing, management processing is executed. When executing management processing, the subroutine program corresponding to the management processing set in the specific control program will be executed. Information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt processing in is written to the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. When the management process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the timer interrupt process indicated by the return address.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing management processing. Note that the processes from step S3801 to step S3805 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) (step S3801). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is a process that corresponds to specific control, from being interrupted and activated in the middle of the management execution process, which will be described later, which is a process that corresponds to non-specific control. becomes possible.

Thereafter, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the specific control stack area 222 by a push command as "PUSH PSW" (step S3802). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, a half-carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving such flag register information before the subroutine program corresponding to management execution processing is started, the flag register information in the state before it changes after the subroutine is called or the relevant subroutine starts. It becomes possible to save it to the stack area 222 for specific control. Note that the amount of information in the flag register is 1 byte.

Thereafter, by reading the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program, the management execution process is started (step S3803). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written to the specific control stack area 222 by a push command. When the management execution process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management process indicated by the return address.

When returning to the management processing program after execution of the management execution processing, the main CPU 63 uses a pop instruction to send the information of the flag register saved to the stack area 222 for specific control in step S3802 as "POP PSW". flag register (step S3804). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to the information at the time when step S3802 was executed. In other words, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to information for executing specific control.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) is prohibited to a state in which generation is permitted (step S3805). This enables new execution of timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing management execution processing. Note that the processes from step S3901 to step S3915 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, as "LD SP, Y(u+2)", Y(u+2) is set as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction (step S3901). The stack pointer is an area in which address information is set for the main CPU 63 to specify a storage area in the stack areas 222 and 224 to which information is to be written by a push command. Each time a push instruction is executed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address of the storage area to be written in the next order, and each time a pop instruction is executed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order. The address information of the storage area is updated. Furthermore, when using the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the information to be stored is stored starting from the storage area at the last address in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, and each time information to be stored is added. Then, the storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Therefore, in step S3901, information on the last address in the stack area 224 for non-specific control is set in the stack pointer. The same holds true for the specific control stack area 222, where information is stored from the storage area at the last address to the storage area at the first address.

By the way, if an additional push command is executed even though information has been set in all storage areas for both the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, All areas of the main RAM 65 are cleared to "0", assuming that an abnormality has occurred in the storage process. This makes it possible to prevent the game from continuing even though an abnormality has occurred in the storage process.

Thereafter, the information in the WA register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the WA buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction as "LD (_WABUF), WA" (step S3902). Further, as "LD (_BCBUF), BC", the information in the BC register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the BC buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S3903). Also, “LD
(_DEBUF), DE", the information in the DE register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the DE buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S3904). Further, as "LD (_HLBUF), HL", information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the HL buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S3905). Further, as "LD (_IXBUF), IX", information in the IX register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the IX buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S3906). Further, as "LD (_IYBUF), IY", the information in the IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the IY buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S3907).

The registers of the main CPU 63 include various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in addition to the flag register described above. In this case, in steps S3902 to S3907, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of these various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, is is saved in a corresponding buffer in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Note that the information amount of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is all 2 bytes.

These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the check process (step S3908), which is a process corresponding to non-specific control. By saving the information set in such registers to the work area 223 for non-specific control before executing the check process (step S3908), the information in these registers that was used for specific control can be used for non-specific control. This makes it possible to evacuate the area before it starts. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during non-specific control, the status of these registers can be changed by restoring the information saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control to these registers when terminating non-specific control. It becomes possible to restore the state to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control was executed.

In addition, instead of saving all the information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the work area 223 for non-specific control, WA Register information is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control by selectively saving the information of the registers, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to the work area 223 for non-specific control. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of capacity secured for this purpose. Therefore, it is possible to save the register information as described above while ensuring a large capacity of the work area 223 for non-specific control that can be used during the check process. Of course, among the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the main CPU 63, registers other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register support non-specific control. The information set before the start of the process is stored and held until the process corresponding to the non-specific control is finished and the process corresponding to the specific control is restarted.

Furthermore, by saving register information to the work area 223 for non-specific control instead of saving it to the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the capacity of the stack area 224 for non-specific control can be kept small. It becomes possible. Furthermore, when using the stack area 224 for non-specific control, as described above, the information is written in the order in which the later information is read out first, so if the order in which the information is read is shifted due to some kind of noise, etc. If this happens, all subsequent reading order information will be restored to different registers. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control increases. In contrast, by saving register information to the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned phenomenon from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. .

After executing the processes of steps S3902 to S3907, a check process is executed (step S3908). When executing a check process, a subroutine program corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program will be executed, but when executing the subroutine program, management after execution of the check process will be executed. Information for specifying the return address of the execution process is written to the stack area 224 for non-specific control by a push instruction. When the check process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management execution process indicated by the return address. Details of the check process will be explained later.

After executing the check process, Y(r+α) is set as a fixed address at the time of returning to the specific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction as "LD SP, Y(r+α)" (step S3909 ). The address of Y(r+α) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

The amount of information stored in the specific control stack area 222 immediately before the management execution processing subroutine is executed in step S3803 of the management processing (FIG. 70) is always constant, and accordingly, the amount of information stored in the specific control stack area 222 is always constant. Information on the stack pointer of the side CPU 63 (that is, the value of the stack pointer) is constant. In this case, the information stored in the stack area 222 for specific control includes, for example, information on the return address of the management process (FIG. 70) after the management execution process (FIG. 71) is completed, and information on the return address of the management process (FIG. 70), and For example, the return address information of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) after the completion of FIG. 70) is included. The above-mentioned constant information of the stack pointer is Y(r+α). Therefore, when the check process, which is the process corresponding to non-specific control, ends and the process returns to the process corresponding to specific control, the constant information Y(r+α) is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63. This makes it possible to restore the information of the stack pointer to the information immediately before the process corresponding to non-specific control was started. By setting fixed information in the stack pointer in this way, the information of the stack pointer is restored to the information immediately before the process corresponding to non-specific control was started, so that the process corresponding to non-specific control can be performed. There is no need to save information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 corresponding to the specific control to the main RAM 65 before starting the specific control. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load, and there is no need to secure an area for the evacuation in the main RAM 65.

Thereafter, the information saved in the WA buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the WA register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction as "LD WA, (_WABUF)" (step S3910). Also, as "LD BC, (_BCBUF)", the information saved in the BC buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten in the BC register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S3911). Furthermore, as "LD DE, (_DEBUF)", the information saved in the DE buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the DE register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S3912). Further, as "LD HL, (_HLBUF)", the information saved in the HL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S3913). Further, as "LD IX, (_IXBUF)", the information saved in the IX buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IX register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S3914). Furthermore, as "LD IY, (_IYBUF)", the information saved in the IY buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IY register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S3915). By executing the processing from step S3910 to step S3915, processing corresponding to non-specific control is started for each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63. It becomes possible to restore the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the control.

Here, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63 when the process corresponding to non-specific control is executed is not saved to the main side RAM 65 when the process corresponding to the specific control is restarted. . Thereby, there is no need to secure a storage area for saving the above information in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control.

In addition, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63 when the process corresponding to non-specific control is executed is the same as the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63 when the process corresponding to non-specific control is executed after returning to the process corresponding to specific control. This information is not used when restarted. In other words, the information necessary for multiple processing times of processing corresponding to non-specific control that is executed with processing corresponding to specific control in between is the work area 223 for non-specific control or the stack area for non-specific control. 224, and is not stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63. Therefore, even if the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63 is not saved to the main RAM 65 when processing corresponding to non-specific control is executed, the No problem occurs.

Next, a description will be given of the check processing executed when the subroutine program is called in step S3908. In the checking process, a process for collecting game history information, a process for deriving a game history management result, and a process for notifying the management result are executed. That is, the processing for collecting information on gaming history, the processing for deriving management results of gaming history, and the processing for notifying the management results are executed as processing corresponding to non-specific control.

Prior to explaining the check process, the contents of various areas 231 to 234 of the work area 223 for non-specific control used to manage the game history will be explained. FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas 231 to 234 of the work area 223 for non-specific control used to manage game history.

The work area 223 for non-specific control is provided with a normal counter area 231, an opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and a high frequency support mode counter area 233. Each of these areas 231 to 233 includes general winning counters 231a, 232a, 233a, special electric winning counters 231b, 232b, 233b, first operating counters 231c, 232c, 233c, second operating counters 231d, 232d, 233d, and Out counters 231e, 232e, and 233e are provided. The general prize winning counters 231a, 232a, 233a are counters for counting the number of game balls entering the general prize winning hole 31 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The special electric winning counters 231b, 232b, and 233b are counters for counting the number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The first operation counters 231c, 232c, and 233c are counters for counting the number of game balls entering the first operation port 33 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The second operation counters 231d, 232d, and 233d are counters for counting the number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The out counters 231e, 232e, and 233e are counters for counting the number of game balls entering the out port 24a from a predetermined measurement start timing.

Each of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 corresponds to the ball entry section 24a, which is the target in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in a closed state and neither the opening/closing execution mode nor the high frequency support mode is in effect. It is used to count the number of game balls that have entered balls 31 to 34. Each of the counters 232a to 232e in the counter area 232 for the opening/closing execution mode is set to each counter 232a to 232e when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the opening/closing execution mode is set. It is used to count the number of game balls hit. Each of the counters 233a to 233e in the high frequency support mode counter area 233 corresponds to the target ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 in the high frequency support mode when the front door frame 14 is in a closed state. It is used to count the number of game balls that have entered the ball.

Note that the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is not included in the measurement because a game ball enters the ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34 due to maintenance while the front door frame 14 is open. This is to exclude from the measurement object the number of balls that enter the ball when the ball is thrown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state may be subject to measurement in the same way as the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state.

The work area 223 for non-specific control is provided with a calculation result storage area 234 in addition to a normal counter area 231, an open/close execution mode counter area 232, and a high frequency support mode counter area 233. The calculation result storage area 234 is an area for storing information on game history management results calculated using the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233. . The information on the game history management results stored in the calculation result storage area 234 is stored and held until the newly calculated information is overwritten by the new calculation of the information on the game history management results.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the check process executed when the subroutine program is called in step S3908. Note that the processing from step S4001 to step S4008 in the check processing, including the subroutine processing, is executed by the main CPU 63 using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data. In addition, when executing subroutine processing, information on the return address after execution of the subroutine processing is written in the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer value of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. At the same time, the value of the stack pointer is updated to the address information of the storage area to be stored in the next order. Furthermore, when the processing of the subroutine is completed, the information on the return address is read from the storage area corresponding to the value in the previous order with respect to the current value of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63, and corresponds to the information on the return address. Upon returning to the program, the value of the stack pointer is updated to the address of the storage area from which the information at the return address was read.

In the check process, if the front door frame 14 is in an open state (step S4001: YES), normal ball entry management processing (step S4004), ball entry management processing in opening/closing execution mode (step S4005), and high frequency ball entry management processing are performed. The result calculation process (step S4007) and the display process (step S4008), which will be described later, are executed without executing any of the ball entry management processes (step S4006) in the support mode. Since the gaming area PA is formed by a space divided into the front and back by the back side of the window panel 52 provided on the front door frame 14 and the front side of the game board 24, when the front door frame 14 is in an open state, Even if the game area PA is opened forward and a game ball is fired toward the game area PA in that situation, the game ball cannot normally flow down the game area PA. In addition, if a game ball enters the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 when the front door frame 14 is open, the game hall manager may This is a case where the front door frame 14 is left open and game balls enter the game ball due to maintenance or the like. Since such entering of a game ball is not an entering of a game ball in the execution situation of a regular game, it is not necessary to manage such entering of a game ball. Therefore, in the check process, if the front door frame 14 is in the open state as described above, none of the processes from step S4004 to step S4006 is executed.

If the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and neither the opening/closing execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode is in effect (steps S4001 to S4003: NO), normal ball entry management processing is executed (step S4004). Further, when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the opening/closing execution mode is in effect (step S4001: NO, step S4002: YES), ball entry management processing in the opening/closing execution mode is executed (step S4005). Further, when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the high-frequency support mode is in effect (step S4001: NO, step S4003: YES), ball entry management processing in the high-frequency support mode is executed (step S4006).

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing normal ball entry management processing in step S4004.

When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a (step S4101: YES), that is, the signal received from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is switched from LOW level to HI level. If it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a (step S4103: YES), that is, the signal received from the second winning hole detection sensor 43a When it is confirmed that has switched from the LOW level to the HI level, or when it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a (step S4105: YES), that is, the third winning hole When it is confirmed that the signal received from the detection sensor 44a has switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the value of the normal general winning counter 231a is incremented by 1 (step S4102, step S4104, step S4106).

In addition, if it is the entry management process during the opening/closing execution mode, the value of the general winning counter 232a for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S4102, step S4104, and step S4106. If it is a ball management process, the value of the general winning counter 233a for the high-frequency support mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to steps S4102, S4104, and S4106. Also, in the ball entry detection process (step S3709) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) that is executed as a process corresponding to the specific control, the detection results of the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a are monitored, When it is determined that one game ball is detected by any of the first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a, a process for paying out the number of game balls corresponding to the general winning hole 31. Execute.

If it is determined that one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a (step S4107: YES), that is, it is confirmed that the signal received from the special electric detection sensor 45a has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If so, 1 is added to the value of the normal special electric prize winning counter 231b (step S4108).

Note that if the ball entry management process is in the opening/closing execution mode, the value of the special electric winning counter 232b for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S4108, and if the ball entry management process is in the high-frequency support mode, As a process corresponding to step S4108, 1 is added to the value of the special electric prize winning counter 233b for the high frequency support mode. In addition, the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is also monitored in the ball entry detection process (step S3709) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) executed as a process corresponding to the specific control, and the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is When it is determined that game balls are detected, a process is executed to make the number of game balls corresponding to the special electric winning device 32 paid out, and a process is executed to specify the trigger for ending the round game.

If it is determined that one game ball is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a (step S4109: YES), that is, the signal received from the first operating port detection sensor 46a is switched from LOW level to HI level. If it is confirmed that the change has been made, the value of the first normal operation counter 231c is incremented by 1 (step S4110).

Note that if the ball entry management process is in the open/close execution mode, the value of the first operation counter 232c for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S4110, and if the ball entry management process is in the high frequency support mode, For example, as a process corresponding to step S4110, the value of the first operation counter 233c for high-frequency support mode is incremented by 1. Also, in the ball entry detection process (step S3709) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) that is executed as a process corresponding to the specific control, the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is monitored, and the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is monitored. If it is determined in step 46a that one game ball has been detected, a process is executed so that the number of game balls corresponding to the first operation port 33 is paid out, and at the same time, reservation information for special symbols is obtained. Execute processing to identify the trigger.

If it is determined that one game ball is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a (step S4111: YES), that is, the signal received from the second operating port detection sensor 47a is switched from LOW level to HI level. If it is confirmed that the change has been made, the value of the second normal operation counter 231d is incremented by 1 (step S4112).

Note that if the ball entry management process is in the opening/closing execution mode, the value of the second operation counter 232d for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S4112; For example, as a process corresponding to step S4112, the value of the second operation counter 233d for high-frequency support mode is incremented by 1. Also, in the ball entry detection process (step S3709) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) that is executed as a process corresponding to the specific control, the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is monitored, and the second operating port detection sensor If it is determined in step 47a that one game ball has been detected, a process is executed so that the number of game balls corresponding to the second operation port 34 is paid out, and at the same time, reservation information for special symbols is obtained. Execute processing to identify the trigger.

If it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the exit detection sensor 48a (step S4113: YES), that is, the signal received from the exit detection sensor 48a has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If confirmed, the value of the normal out counter 231e is incremented by 1 (step S4114).

Note that if the ball entry management process is in the opening/closing execution mode, the value of the out counter 232e for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S4114, and if the ball entry management process is in the high-frequency support mode, step S4114 is performed. As a process corresponding to S4114, the value of the out counter 233e for high frequency support mode is incremented by 1. Furthermore, the detection result of the exit detection sensor 48a is not monitored in the ball entry detection process (step S3709) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) that is executed as a process corresponding to the specific control.

By executing the processes from step S4004 to step S4006 as described above, the number of game balls entering the general winning hole 31 is measured using the general winning counters 231a, 232a, and 233a, and the special electric winning device 32 The number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 is measured using the special electric winning counters 231b, 232b, 233b, and the number of gaming balls entering the first operating port 33 is measured using the first operating counters 231c, 232c, 233c. The number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 is measured using the second operating counters 231d, 232d, 233d, and the number of game balls entering the out port 24a is measured using the out counters 231e, 233d. It is measured using 232e and 233e. This makes it possible for the main CPU 63 to grasp the history of ball entry into each ball entry section 24a, 31-34. In addition, since the normal counter area 231, the counter area 232 for opening/closing execution mode, and the counter area 233 for high-frequency support mode are each provided separately, it is possible to avoid situations in which neither opening/closing execution mode nor high-frequency support mode exists. It becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to grasp the history of ball entry into each ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34 by distinguishing between the opening/closing execution mode and the high frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of the check process (FIG. 73), if an affirmative determination is made in step S4001, if the process of step S4004 is executed, if the process of step S4005 is executed, or if the process of step S4006 is executed, the process of step Result calculation processing is executed in S4007, and display processing is executed in step S4008.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the result calculation process in step S4007.

First, it is determined whether the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S4201). The management start flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the situation is such that collection of game history for calculating the game history management results is in order. In this embodiment, when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the Pachinko machine 10 is manufactured (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started), the game ejected from the gaming area PA is Until the total number of balls reaches or exceeds the number corresponding to the management start reference value, the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA is not collected to calculate the game history management results. When the number of pieces exceeds the number corresponding to the management start reference value, collection of game history is executed for calculating a game history management result. At the stage of shipping the Pachinko machine 10, the operation of the Pachinko machine 10 may be checked before shipping, and at that time, game balls are placed in each ball entry section and subsequent operations are checked. On the other hand, after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 starts, until the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA reaches or exceeds the management start reference value, the game for calculating the management results of the game history By disabling the history collection, it is possible to prevent the ball entry results during the operation check as described above from being collected as the gaming history for calculating the gaming history management results. Become.

Here, when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the Pachinko machine 10 is manufactured (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started), the value of the management start flag is "0". It becomes. In this case, the values of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e in the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the values of the counters 233a to 233e in the counter area 233 for high frequency support mode. is also "0". On the other hand, in a situation where the value of the management start flag is "1", the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and then in a situation where backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65, the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. When the supply of the data is started, the value of the management start flag remains at "1". In this case, the values of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e in the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the values of the counters 233a to 233e in the counter area 233 for high frequency support mode. The pachinko machine 10 is also maintained in the state before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. With the above configuration, when the value of the management start flag is "0", the values of each counter 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, the values of each counter 232a to 232e in the open/close execution mode counter area 232, The values of each of the counters 233a to 233e in the high frequency support mode counter area 233 also become "0".

Incidentally, when clearing the main RAM 65 is executed in step S105 or step S117 in the main processing (FIG. 9), the targets of the clearing are the work area 221 for specific control and the stack for specific control. The area 222, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are excluded from the targets of the clearing process. As a result, the game hall manager is configured to be unable to intentionally clear the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control to "0".

In addition, the main CPU 63 checks whether an abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), which will be described later. If confirmed, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared to "0". Thereby, if an abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, it becomes possible to initialize them. In addition, if an abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control in this configuration, the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" without clearing the stack area 224 for non-specific control to "0". However, when an abnormality occurs in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the stack area 224 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" without clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to "0". Good too. Further, even if an abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the calculation result storage area 234 may be excluded from being cleared to "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S4201, the values of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e in the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and the values of the counters 232a to 232e in the counter area 233 for high frequency support mode. The total number is calculated by summing all the values of each counter 233a to 233e (step S4202). Then, it is determined whether the calculated total number is greater than the management start reference value "300" (step S4203).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4203, the management start flag of the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S4204). Also, each counter 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, each counter 232a to 232e in the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and each counter 233a to 233e in the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are all cleared to "0". (Step S4205). As a result, the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 has started (that is, after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 has started) is set to the management start reference value. All game history information collected until the number corresponds to or more will be deleted. Therefore, after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 starts, until the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA reaches the management start reference value or more, the game history cannot be collected for calculating the game history management results. It is possible to prevent this from being executed.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4201, calculation processing for the total number is executed in the same manner as in step S4202 (step S4206). That is, the values of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e in the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the values of the counters 233a to 233e in the counter area 233 for high frequency support mode. Calculate the total number by adding them all up. Then, it is determined whether the calculated total number is equal to or greater than the calculation reference number "6000" (step S4207).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4207, calculation processing of various parameters is executed (step S4208). Specifically, the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are set to K61 to K65, the values of the various counters 232a to 232e in the counter area 232 for the open/close execution mode are set to K71 to K75, and the values of the various counters 232a to 232e are set to K71 to K75 in the counter area 232 for the open/close execution mode. When the values of the various counters 233a to 233e in the counter area 233 are K81 to K85, the following 61st to 68th parameters are calculated.
・61st parameter: Total number of game balls paid out ("K61 + K71 + K81" x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning slot 31" + "K62 + K72 + K82" x "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" + "K63 + K73 + K83 ”דNumber of prize balls for winning into the first operating port 33” + “K64+K74+K84”דNumber of winning balls for winning into the second operating port 34”)/Total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA ( K61+K62+K63+K64+K65+K71+K72+K73+K74+K75+K81+K82+K83+K84+K85) 62nd parameter: Total number of game balls paid out in normal time (K61 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning slot 31" + K62 x "Prize for winning in the special electric winning device 32" Number of balls”+K63 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + K64 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA in normal times (K61 + K62 + K63 + K64 + K65 ) ratio/63rd parameter: Total number of game balls paid out during opening/closing execution mode (K71 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning slot 31" + K72 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32") +K73 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + K74 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA during the opening/closing execution mode Ratio of the number (K71+K72+K73+K74+K75)/64th parameter: Total number of game balls paid out in high-frequency support mode (K81 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning slot 31" + K82 x "Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32""Number of prize balls" + K83 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + K84 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")/Ejected from the gaming area PA during the high-frequency support mode Ratio of the total number of game balls (K81 + K82 + K83 + K84 + K85) / 65th parameter: Total number of game balls entered into the general prize opening 31 (K61 + K71 + K81) / Total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K61 + K62 + K63 + K64 + K65 + K71 + K72 + K73 + K74 + K75+K81+K82+K83+K84+K85) ratio・66th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 (K63+K73+K83)/total number of game balls ejected from gaming area PA (K61+K62+K63+K64+K65+K71+K72+K73+K74+K75+K81+K82+K83+K84+K85)・67th parameter :("K62+K72+K82"× "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" + "K64 + K74 + K84" x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls paid out ("K61 + K71 + K81" x "General winning port 31") "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" + "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32" + "K63 + K73 + K83" × "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + "K64 + K74 + K84" Ratio of "Number of prize balls for winning into the second operating port 34") 68th parameter: "K62 + K72 + K82" x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" / Total number of game balls paid out ("K61 + K71 + K81" × “Number of prize balls for winning into the general winning opening 31” + “K62 + K72 + K82” × “Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32” + “K63 + K73 + K83” × “Number of prize balls for winning into the first operating opening 33” ”+“K64+K74+K84”דNumber of prize balls that hit the second operating port 34”) After that, the 61st to 68th parameters calculated in step S4208 are overwritten in the calculation result storage area 234 (step S4209). . In this case, the 61st to 68th parameters of the calculation results from the previous processing time, which were already stored in the calculation result storage area 234, are deleted. Note that even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65, so if the backup power is being supplied, the power to the pachinko machine 10 is Even immediately after the start of supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10, information on the 61st to 68th parameters calculated before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is stored in the calculation result storage area 234.

After that, each counter 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, each counter 232a to 232e in the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and each counter 233a to 233e in the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are all cleared to "0". (Step S4210). As a result, once the 61st to 68th parameters have been calculated, it is possible to temporarily erase the information on the game history at that point.

Immediately after the management start flag is set to "1", if the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA is equal to or greater than the value obtained by subtracting the management start reference value from the calculation reference number, the process starts from step S4208. It may be configured to execute the process of step S4210, and thereafter execute the processes of steps S4208 to S4210 when the total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA becomes equal to or more than the calculation reference number.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the display processing of step S4008 in the check processing (FIG. 73).

First, the value of the update timing counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is subtracted by 1 (step S4301). The update timing counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify that it is the timing to update the display contents of the game history management results on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The main CPU 63 notifies the calculation results of the 61st to 68th parameters by controlling the display of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. In this case, the first notification display device 69a displays information corresponding to the type of parameter to be notified. Furthermore, of the value obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100, the number corresponding to the tens place is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, and the number corresponding to the one place is displayed on the third notification display. It is displayed on the device 69c. In the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the displays corresponding to the calculation results of the 61st to 68th parameters are sequentially switched according to a predetermined order, and the display target in the last order is the one to be displayed. After the calculation result of the 68th parameter is displayed, the calculation result of the 61st parameter, which is the first display target, is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 10 seconds.

Here, the calculation cycle of the 61st to 68th parameters in the main CPU 63 is 60 minutes at the shortest. On the other hand, the number of the 61st to 68th parameters is eight, and the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 10 seconds. Therefore, the 61st to 68th parameters calculated by the main CPU 63 are displayed at least once on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

When the process of step S4301 is executed, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are updated by determining whether the value of the update timing counter after subtraction by 1 is "0". It is determined whether the timing has come to do so (step S4302). When an affirmative determination is made in step S4302, the value of the display target counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S4303). If the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value "7" (step S4304: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step S4305).

The display target counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to specify the type of parameter to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. There is a one-to-one correspondence between the 61st to 68th parameters and the possible values of the display target counter "0" to "7". For example, when the value of the display target counter is "0", the 61st parameter that is the first display target becomes the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the value of the display target counter is "7". In this case, the last display target, the 68th parameter, becomes the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

If a negative determination is made in step S4304 or if the process in step S4305 is executed, the first notification display device 69a is displayed so that information corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is displayed. control (step S4306). Further, the parameter corresponding to the value of the counter to be displayed is read from the calculation result storage area 234, the read parameter is multiplied by 100, and the number corresponding to the tens place is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, The number corresponding to the ones digit is displayed on the third notification display device 69c (step S4307).

Here, a display IC is provided corresponding to each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. In step S4306, the main CPU 63 outputs display data to the display IC corresponding to the first notification display device 69a, and in step S4307, the main CPU 63 outputs display data to the display IC corresponding to the second notification display device 69b, and the third notification display device 69b. Display data is output to each of the display ICs corresponding to the display device 69c. These display ICs are capable of storing and retaining display data when operating power is supplied, and continue to display display contents corresponding to the stored display data on the corresponding notification display devices 69a to 69c. Display. Then, when the display data is changed by the main CPU 63, the display on the notification display devices 69a to 69c is changed to display content corresponding to the changed display data. As a result, even after the management execution process (Fig. 71), which is the process corresponding to non-specific control, has ended and the process corresponding to specific control has returned, the settings in the execution status of the process corresponding to non-specific control can be changed. The display corresponding to the display data continues on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

Thereafter, a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the work area 223 for non-specific control as a value corresponding to the next update timing (step S4308).

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started by executing the display process as described above, the game history management results are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. be done. The management result of the game history is displayed regardless of whether the game is continued or not, and when the game machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 and the main controller 60 is opened from the front of the pachinko machine 10. This is done regardless of whether it is visible or not. In this way, the display control of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is executed regardless of the game situation or the state of the pachinko machine 10, so that the first to third notification display devices 69a It becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for display control of .about.69c.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The main RAM 65 is provided with a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control, a work area 223 for non-specific control, and a stack area 224 for non-specific control. A work area 221 for specific control and a stack area 222 for specific control are used when processing corresponding to specific control is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control. While it is possible to store and read information, the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control. In some cases, it is possible to read information, but it is not possible to store information. Further, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are capable of storing and reading information when processing corresponding to non-specific control is executed by the main CPU 63. On the other hand, when the process corresponding to the specific control is executed by the main CPU 63, it is possible to read the information, but it is not possible to store the information. As a result, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are treated as storage areas dedicated to processing corresponding to specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area for non-specific control 224 can be treated as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to non-specific control. Therefore, it is possible to clearly differentiate the storage location of information in the main RAM 65 between processing corresponding to specific control and processing corresponding to non-specific control. Therefore, when executing one of the processing corresponding to specific control and the processing corresponding to non-specific control, it is possible to prevent information used in the other processing from being deleted.

Processing corresponding to specific control includes processing for controlling the progress of the game, and processing corresponding to non-specific control includes processing for managing game history. As described above, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are treated as storage areas dedicated to processing corresponding to specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 222 for non-specific control are treated as storage areas dedicated to processing corresponding to specific control. The stack area 224 is treated as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to non-specific control. As a result, when executing the process for controlling the progress of the game, information used in the process for managing the game history, such as the normal counter area 231, the counter area 232 for the opening/closing execution mode, and the high-frequency support mode. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the counter area 233 and the calculation result storage area 234 from being rewritten.

A normal counter area 231 in which information for managing game history is stored, an open/close execution mode counter area 232, a high frequency support mode counter area 233, and a calculation result storage area 234 are provided in the main RAM 65. This allows the main CPU 63 to complete the processing for managing the game history. Further, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of information on the game history and information on various parameters calculated using the information on the game history.

When a situation changes from a situation in which a process corresponding to specific control is being executed to a situation in which a process corresponding to non-specific control is executed, or a situation in which a process corresponding to non-specific control is executed, various types of the main CPU 63 The information in the register is saved to the main RAM 65. As a result, when processing corresponding to non-specific control is executed, it is possible to prevent information stored in various registers of the main CPU 63 from being rewritten when executing processing corresponding to specific control. Become. Further, when or after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is ended, the information saved in the main side RAM 65 is returned to the various registers of the main side CPU 63. As a result, when processing corresponding to non-specific control is completed, it is possible to execute processing corresponding to specific control based on the states of various registers of the main CPU 63 before execution of the processing corresponding to non-specific control. Become.

When the situation changes from executing processing corresponding to specific control to executing processing corresponding to non-specific control, or when the situation changes to executing processing corresponding to non-specific control, various registers of the main CPU 63 Information in some of the registers is saved to the main RAM 65. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for saving the information in the registers of the main CPU 63 in the main RAM 65.

When the situation changes from executing processing corresponding to specific control to executing processing corresponding to non-specific control, or when the situation changes to executing processing corresponding to non-specific control, various registers of the main CPU 63 Among them, information of registers to be stored in information in processing corresponding to non-specific control is saved to the main side RAM 65. As a result, when the process corresponding to non-specific control is completed, it is possible to restart the process corresponding to specific control from the state of the register of the main CPU 63 before the execution of the process corresponding to the non-specific control. , it becomes possible to suppress the storage capacity required for saving the information in the register of the main CPU 63 in the main RAM 65.

When processing corresponding to non-specific control is started, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the stack area 222 for specific control in the processing corresponding to specific control, and the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the WA register, BC register, Each information of the DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is saved to the work area 223 for non-specific control in the process corresponding to non-specific control. This makes it possible to save the information stored in the various registers of the main CPU 63 at a timing favorable to the information, and also to make the process for saving information compatible with specific control and non-specific control. It becomes possible to perform the processing in a distributed manner.

The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, a half-carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. In this case, the information in the flag register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in the process corresponding to specific control before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started. This makes it possible to save information in the flag register in the state before it changes after calling a subroutine corresponding to non-specific control or starting the subroutine in the stack area 222 for specific control.

By saving the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to the work area 223 for non-specific control instead of saving it to the stack area 224 for non-specific control, It is possible to keep the capacity of the stack area 224 for specific control small. Furthermore, when using the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the information is written in the order in which later information is read first, so if the order in which the information is read is shifted due to some kind of noise, All subsequent readout order information will be returned to different registers. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control increases. In contrast, by saving register information to the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned phenomenon from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. .

The stack pointer of the main CPU 63 changes from a situation in which a process corresponding to specific control is being executed to a situation in which a process corresponding to non-specific control is executed, or when a situation changes to a situation in which a process corresponding to non-specific control is executed. The information is configured to be fixed information, and the information of the stack pointer is not saved in the main side RAM 65 at the start of processing corresponding to non-specific control. Thereby, there is no need to secure a capacity for saving the stack pointer information in the main side RAM 65, so that the storage capacity of the main side RAM 65 can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore, even in a configuration where stack pointer information is not saved, if the situation changes from executing processing corresponding to specific control to executing processing corresponding to non-specific control, or when non-specific control When the corresponding process is executed, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 becomes fixed information, so the process corresponding to non-specific control can be executed without saving the stack pointer information as described above. When the process is finished, it is possible to restore the stack pointer information to the information before the process corresponding to the non-specific control was started.

Although the configuration has been described in which the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the specific control when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the information in the flag register may be saved in the main RAM 65 in a process corresponding to non-specific control. Furthermore, although the configuration is such that information is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 in the process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which information is returned to the flag register in a process corresponding to non-specific control.

In addition, after the information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 is started, the main CPU 63 is used in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Although the configuration is such that the information is saved in the side RAM 65, the configuration is not limited to this, and the information in these registers may be saved in the main side RAM 65 in a process corresponding to specific control. In addition, when the process corresponding to non-specific control ends, information is returned to each of the above registers in the process corresponding to non-specific control. However, this is not limited to this, and each of the above The information may be returned to the register in a process corresponding to specific control after the process corresponding to non-specific control is completed.

<Sixteenth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fifteenth embodiment described above in the processing configuration of management processing. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifteenth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as in the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing management processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes of steps S4401 to S4405 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) (step S4401). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is a process that corresponds to specific control, from being interrupted and activated in the middle of the management execution process, which will be described later, which is a process that corresponds to non-specific control. becomes possible.

Thereafter, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the PSW buffer set in the work area 221 for specific control by a load instruction as "LD (_PSWBUF), PSW" (step S4402). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, a half-carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving such flag register information before the start of the subroutine program corresponding to management execution processing, the flag register's state before it changes after the subroutine is called or the subroutine starts. It becomes possible to save information to the work area 221 for specific control.

Thereafter, by reading the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the program for non-specific control, the management execution process is started (step S4403). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written to the specific control stack area 222 by a push command. When the management execution process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management process indicated by the return address.

When returning to the management processing program after executing the management execution processing, the program is saved as "LD PSW, (_PSWBUF)" to the PSW buffer in the specific control work area 221 in step S4402 by a load instruction. The information in the flag register is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S4404). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to the information at the time when step S4402 was executed last time. In other words, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to information for executing specific control.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) is prohibited to a state in which generation is permitted (step S4405). This enables new execution of timer interrupt processing.

According to the above configuration, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 immediately before switching from specific control to non-specific control is saved to the work area 221 for specific control instead of the stack area 222 for specific control. This makes it possible to save the information in the flag register while suppressing the capacity of the stack area 222 for specific control.

Note that although the PSW buffer in the work area 221 for specific control is secured as a dedicated area, it is not limited to this, and may be configured as a shared area in which other information can also be written. In other words, in a situation where management processing is not executed, there is no need to save information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 that corresponds to specific control. A configuration may also be adopted in which a dual-purpose area is also used as a PSW buffer when performing arithmetic processing. In this case, the dual-purpose area will definitely be used to save the information in the flag register when executing the management process, so it will be used as information other than the flag register information before the management process is executed. It is necessary to have a configuration in which unnecessary information is written to a shared area.

<Seventeenth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fifteenth embodiment described above in the processing configuration of management execution processing. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifteenth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as in the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing management execution processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step S4501 to step S4515 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, a load instruction is used to set the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 as "LD SP, Y (u+2)" at the start of non-specific control. Y(u+2) is set as a fixed address at (step S4501).

Thereafter, the information in the WA register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control using a push command as "PUSH WA" (step S4502). In this case, the information in the WA register is saved to the storage area corresponding to the fixed address set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in step S4501. Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

Thereafter, the information in the BC register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control using a push command as "PUSH BC" (step S4503). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

Thereafter, the information in the DE register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control using a push command as "PUSH DE" (step S4504). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

Thereafter, the information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control using a push command as "PUSH HL" (step S4505). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

Thereafter, the information in the IX register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control using a push command as "PUSH IX" (step S4506). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

Thereafter, the information in the IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control using a push command as "PUSH IY" (step S4507). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

After executing the processes in steps S4502 to S4507, a check process is executed (step S4508). When executing the check process, a subroutine program corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program is executed. When executing the program of the subroutine, the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control is transferred using a push command to specify the return address of the management execution process after the check process has been executed. Write to the storage area corresponding to the information. When the check process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out using a pop instruction, and the program returns to the management execution process indicated by the return address. The contents of the check process are the same as in the fifteenth embodiment.

Thereafter, as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, a load instruction is used to set the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 as "LD SP, Y (r+α)" when returning to the specific control. Y(r+α) is set as a fixed address at (step S4509). The address of Y(r+α) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "POP IY", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the previous order is transferred to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by the pop instruction. The IY register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4510). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

After that, as "POP IX", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the previous order information is transferred to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the pop instruction. The IX register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4511). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

After that, as "POP HL", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the previous order information is sent to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the pop instruction. The HL register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4512). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

After that, as "POP DE", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the previous order information is sent to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the pop instruction. The DE register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4513). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

After that, as "POP BC", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the previous order is transferred to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by the pop instruction. The BC register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4514). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

After that, as "POP WA", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the previous order information is sent to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the pop instruction. The WA register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4515). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

By executing the processing from step S4510 to step S4515, processing corresponding to non-specific control is started for each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63. It becomes possible to restore the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the control.

In addition to the flag register, the registers of the main CPU 63 include various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. In this case, in steps S4502 to S4507, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of these various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, is is saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in check processing (step S4508), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control. By saving the information set in such registers to the stack area 224 for non-specific control before executing the check process (step S4508), the information in these registers that was used for specific control can be used for non-specific control. This makes it possible to evacuate the area before it starts. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during non-specific control, the status of these registers can be changed by restoring the information saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control to these registers when terminating the non-specific control. It becomes possible to restore the state to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control was executed.

In addition, instead of saving all the information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the stack area 224 for non-specific control, WA Register information is saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by selectively saving the information of the registers, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to the stack area 224 for non-specific control. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of capacity secured for this purpose. Therefore, it is possible to save the register information as described above while ensuring a large capacity of the stack area 224 for non-specific control that can be used during the check process.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fifteenth embodiment described above in the processing configuration of management execution processing. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifteenth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as in the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the management execution process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step S4601 to step S4605 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, a load instruction is used to set the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 as "LD SP, Y (u+2)" at the start of non-specific control. Y(u+2) is set as a fixed address at (step S4601).

Thereafter, information in all registers of the main CPU 63 is saved to the ALL buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control using a load instruction as "LD (_ALLBUF), ALL" (step S4602). This allows all registers to be used, including not only the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register used in check processing, which is a process corresponding to non-specific control, but also other registers. The information in the registers is collectively saved in the ALL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control. By saving all the registers of the main CPU 63 to the work area 223 for non-specific control in this way, there is no need to selectively save information in the registers of the main CPU 63.

Here, the registers to be saved include flag registers. The information in the flag register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S3802 of the management process (FIG. 70), but the information in the flag register is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control in step S4602. be done. This eliminates the need to selectively save the information in the registers of the main CPU 63, including the information in the flag registers. Furthermore, even if the information in the flag registers is saved in duplicate in this way, after the management execution process ends, in step S3804 of the management process (FIG. 70), the information is transferred from the special control stack area 222 to the main CPU 63. Since the information is restored to the flag register of the main CPU 63, when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, it is possible to restore the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 to the state immediately before the management execution process was executed. becomes.

After that, a check process is executed (step S4603). When executing the check process, a subroutine program corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program is executed. When executing the program of the subroutine, the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control is transferred using a push command to specify the return address of the management execution process after the check process has been executed. Write to the storage area corresponding to the information. When the check process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out using a pop instruction, and the program returns to the management execution process indicated by the return address. The contents of the check process are the same as in the fifteenth embodiment.

Thereafter, as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, a load instruction is used to set the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 as "LD SP, Y (r+α)" when returning to the specific control. Y(r+α) is set as a fixed address at (step S4604). The address of Y(r+α) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "LD ALL, (_ALLBUF)", the information saved in the ALL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the registers corresponding to each of the main side CPUs 63 by a load instruction (step S4605). This makes it possible to restore each information in all the registers of the main CPU 63 to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

According to the above configuration, by saving the information in the register of the main CPU 63 to the work area 223 for non-specific control instead of saving it to the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the stack area for non-specific control is 224 capacity can be kept small. Furthermore, when using the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the information is written in the order in which later information is read first, so if the order in which the information is read is shifted due to some kind of noise, All subsequent readout order information will be returned to different registers. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control increases. In contrast, by saving register information to the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned phenomenon from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. .

In addition, when saving the information of the registers of the main CPU 63 to the work area 223 for non-specific control, the WA register, BC register, DE register, and HL register used in the check process, which is the process corresponding to the non-specific control. , IX register, and IY register, as well as other registers, the information of all registers is collectively saved in the ALL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control. By saving all the registers of the main CPU 63 to the work area 223 for non-specific control in this way, there is no need to selectively save information in the registers of the main CPU 63.

Although the configuration is such that the information in all registers of the main CPU 63 is saved to the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the non-specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the information in all registers may be saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the specific control. In addition, when the process corresponding to non-specific control ends, the information is returned to all registers in the process corresponding to non-specific control. However, this is not limited to this; The information may be returned in a process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

<Nineteenth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fifteenth embodiment described above in the processing configuration of management execution processing. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifteenth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as in the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the management execution process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step S4701 to step S4706 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, as "LD (_SPBUF), SP", information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is saved to the SP buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S4701). As a result, information on the stack pointer corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

Thereafter, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, a load instruction is used to set the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 at the start of non-specific control as "LD SP, Y (u+2)". Y(u+2) is set as a fixed address at (step S4702).

After that, as "PUSH ALL", the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 is transferred from the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control and the corresponding storage area by a push command. It is saved to a continuous storage area (step S4703). In this case, since the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 cannot be stored in one storage area in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the current state of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control as described above. The storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer and the storage area continuous from the storage area are set as the save destination of the information of the register. Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the next order with respect to the storage area where the last information was stored when saving the information of all the registers.

After that, a check process is executed (step S4704). When executing the check process, a subroutine program corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program is executed. When executing the program of the subroutine, the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control is transferred using a push command to specify the return address of the management execution process after the check process has been executed. Write to the storage area corresponding to the information. When the check process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out using a pop instruction, and the program returns to the management execution process indicated by the return address. The contents of the check process are the same as in the fifteenth embodiment.

Thereafter, as "POP ALL", the information saved to the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control and the storage area continuous from the storage area by the pop instruction is sent as "POP ALL". are overwritten in the registers corresponding to each of the main CPUs 63 (step S4705). This makes it possible to restore the information in all the registers of the main CPU 63 to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

Thereafter, the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information saved in the SP buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction as "LD SP, (_SPBUF)" (step S4706). As a result, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 returns to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control was started.

According to the above configuration, when saving the information of the registers of the main CPU 63 to the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the WA register, BC register, and DE register used in the check process, which is the process corresponding to the non-specific control, Information on all registers, including not only the registers, HL register, IX register, and IY register, but also other registers, is saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. By saving all the registers of the main CPU 63 to the stack area 224 for non-specific control in this way, there is no need to selectively save information in the registers of the main CPU 63.

Information on the stack pointer corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control. As a result, even if the stack pointer information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started may change, the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the specific control returns. When returning to the corresponding process, it is possible to return the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control was started.

Although the configuration is such that the information in all registers of the main CPU 63 is saved to the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the non-specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the information in all registers may be saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the specific control. In addition, when the process corresponding to non-specific control ends, the information is returned to all registers in the process corresponding to non-specific control. However, this is not limited to this; The information may be returned in a process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

<Twentieth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fifteenth embodiment in the processing configurations of management processing and management execution processing. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifteenth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as in the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing management processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step S4801 to step S4811 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) (step S4801). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is a process that corresponds to specific control, from being interrupted and activated in the middle of the management execution process, which will be described later, which is a process that corresponds to non-specific control. becomes possible.

Thereafter, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the specific control stack area 222 by a push command as "PUSH PSW" (step S4802). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, a half-carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving such flag register information before the start of the subroutine program corresponding to management execution processing, the flag register's state before it changes after the subroutine is called or the subroutine starts. It becomes possible to save information to the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, the WA register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD WA, 0" (step S4803). Further, as "LD BC, 0", the BC register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4804). Further, as "LD DE, 0", the DE register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4805). Furthermore, the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD HL,0" (step S4806). Further, as "LD IX,0", the IX register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4807). Further, as "LD IY, 0", the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4808).

In addition to the flag register, the registers of the main CPU 63 include various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. In this case, in steps S4803 to S4808, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of these various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, are Clear “0”. These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in check processing (step S4902), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control. By clearing such registers to "0" prior to execution of the management execution process (step S4809), which is the process corresponding to non-specific control, the state of these registers can be changed before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started. In addition, it is possible to create a state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

In addition, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started will be changed after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is finished. This information is unnecessary in the process corresponding to specific control. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to "0" without being saved, no problem will occur in the process corresponding to the specific control that is returned after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

After executing the processes from step S4803 to step S4808, the management execution process is started by reading the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S4809). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written to the specific control stack area 222 by a push command. When the management execution process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management process indicated by the return address.

When returning to the management processing program after execution of the management execution processing, the main CPU 63 uses a pop instruction to send the information of the flag register saved to the stack area 222 for specific control in step S4802 as "POP PSW". flag register (step S4810). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to the information at the time when step S4802 was executed last time. In other words, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to information for executing specific control.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted (step S4811). This enables new execution of timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the management execution process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step S4901 to step S4909 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, a load instruction is used to set the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 as "LD SP, Y (u+2)" at the time of starting non-specific control. Y(u+2) is set as a fixed address (step S4901).

After that, a check process is executed (step S4902). When executing a check process, a subroutine program corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program will be executed, but when executing the subroutine program, management after execution of the check process will be executed. Information for specifying the return address of the execution process is written to the stack area 224 for non-specific control by a push instruction. When the check process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management execution process indicated by the return address. The contents of the check process are the same as in the fifteenth embodiment.

Thereafter, the WA register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD WA, 0" (step S4903). Further, as "LD BC, 0", the BC register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4904). Further, as "LD DE, 0", the DE register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4905). Further, as "LD HL, 0", the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4906). Further, as "LD IX,0", the IX register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4907). Further, as "LD IY, 0", the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4908).

These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the check process (step S4902), which is a process corresponding to non-specific control, as described above. By clearing such registers to 0 before returning from processing corresponding to non-specific control to processing corresponding to specific control, the state of these registers can be changed to the main state before returning to processing corresponding to specific control. It is possible to create a state immediately after the supply of operating power to the side CPU 63 is started.

In addition, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register before the process corresponding to the specific control is started is non-specific after the process corresponding to the specific control is finished. This information is unnecessary in the process corresponding to control. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to "0" without being saved, no problem will occur in the process corresponding to the non-specific control that is returned after the process corresponding to the specific control is completed.

Thereafter, as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, a load instruction is used to set the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 as "LD SP, Y (r+α)" when returning to the specific control. Y(r+α) is set as a fixed address at (step S4909). The address of Y(r+α) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

According to the above configuration, when processing corresponding to non-specific control is started from a situation where processing corresponding to specific control is being executed, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, and IX register of the main CPU 63 The configuration also clears the IY register to "0". This eliminates the need to save the information in these registers to the main RAM 65. Therefore, there is no need to secure capacity for saving each piece of information.

Also, when returning to processing corresponding to specific control from a situation where processing corresponding to non-specific control is being executed, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 are The configuration is to clear "0". Thereby, when returning to processing corresponding to specific control, it is possible to return the states of these registers to the states immediately before the processing corresponding to non-specific control was started.

The state in which each of the above registers is cleared to "0" is the state when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for setting the above registers to predetermined states when starting processing corresponding to non-specific control and when returning to processing corresponding to specific control. .

When starting the process corresponding to non-specific control and when returning to the process corresponding to specific control, the registers to be cleared to "0" are some of the various registers of the main CPU 63. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for setting each register to a predetermined state when starting processing corresponding to non-specific control and when returning to processing corresponding to specific control.

In a configuration where the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are cleared to "0" when starting the process corresponding to non-specific control and when returning to the process corresponding to specific control, Other registers are not cleared to 0. This makes it possible to prevent information necessary for processing corresponding to specific control from being deleted when starting processing corresponding to non-specific control.

Furthermore, information in registers other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is not saved in the main side RAM 65 at the start of processing corresponding to non-specific control. This eliminates the need to secure an area in the main RAM 65 for saving this information.

The information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started is the same as that after the process corresponding to non-specific control is finished. This is information that is not used in processing that corresponds to specific control. As a result, even if the above registers are cleared to "0" when the process corresponding to non-specific control is started, it is possible to respond to specific control after the process corresponding to non-specific control is completed. This makes it possible to avoid affecting the processing.

Note that instead of the configuration in which the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 are cleared to "0" in steps S4803 to S4808 in the management process (FIG. 81), these It may also be configured to initialize registers. In other words, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, each register of the main CPU 63 is once cleared to "0", and then the information of each register is set so that it is in the initial state. In steps S4803 to S4808, each register may be set so as to be in this initial state. In this case, by configuring each register to be set to the above-mentioned initial state in steps S4903 to S4908, the state of each of these registers can be changed to a non-specific state when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control. It becomes possible to return to the state immediately before the processing corresponding to the control was started.

Also, instead of the configuration in which the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 are cleared to "0" in steps S4803 to S4808 in the management process (FIG. 81), A configuration may be adopted in which all registers are set to "1". In this case, by setting all of the above registers to "1" in steps S4903 to S4908, when returning to the process corresponding to specific control, the state of each of these registers is changed to the process corresponding to non-specific control. It becomes possible to return to the state immediately before the start of the process.

Furthermore, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the specific control when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, but this is not limited to this. Instead, the information in the flag register may be saved in the main RAM 65 in a process corresponding to non-specific control. Furthermore, although the configuration is such that information is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 in the process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which information is returned to the flag register in a process corresponding to non-specific control.

Additionally, the process of clearing the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 to "0" is performed before the process corresponding to the non-specific control starts. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process of clearing these registers to "0" may be executed as a process corresponding to non-specific control. In addition, although the configuration is such that when the process corresponding to non-specific control ends, the process of clearing each of the registers to "0" is performed in the process corresponding to non-specific control, the invention is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that the process of clearing each register to "0" is performed in the process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

Furthermore, in the management process (FIG. 81), the "PUSH PSW" process in step S4802 was configured to be executed before each register is set to "0" in steps S4803 to S4808, but instead of this, , the "PUSH PSW" process in step S4802 is executed after each register is set to "0" in steps S4803 to S4808 and before the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process is read in step S4809. It is also possible to have a configuration in which This makes it possible to save the information in the flag register after it has been changed by the load instructions in steps S4803 to S4808 to the stack area 222 for specific control.

<21st embodiment>
The present embodiment differs from the fifteenth embodiment in the configuration for collecting game history information. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifteenth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as in the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration in this embodiment.

The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, and a main RAM 65 as in the fifteenth embodiment. Furthermore, unlike the fifteenth embodiment described above, a management RAM 241 is electrically connected to the MPU 62. That is, a management RAM 241 is provided separately from the main RAM 65 built into the MPU 62, and the management RAM 241 is externally attached to the MPU 62.

The main RAM 65 is provided with a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control, a work area 223 for non-specific control, and a stack area 224 for non-specific control, as in the fifteenth embodiment. ing. Therefore, when the main CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to specific control using the specific control program and data for specific control in the main ROM 64, the work area 221 for specific control in the main RAM 65 and When using the stack area 222 for specific control and using the program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control in the main ROM 64 in the main CPU 63 to execute processing corresponding to non-specific control, A work area 223 for non-specific control and a stack area 224 for non-specific control in the main side RAM 65 are used.

The management RAM 241 is provided with a normal counter area 231, an open/close execution mode counter area 232, a high frequency support mode counter area 233, and a calculation result storage area 234. The contents of each of these areas 231 to 234 are the same as in the fifteenth embodiment. Also in this embodiment, management execution processing including check processing is executed as processing corresponding to non-specific control in the main CPU 63. In the checking process, game history is collected by updating the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233, as in the fifteenth embodiment. The 61st to 68th parameters calculated using the collected game history are written into the calculation result storage area 234. That is, since the management RAM 241 is used when the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, the management RAM 241 is used as a work area for non-specific control.

In addition, when collecting gaming history and calculating the 61st to 68th parameters using the collected history information, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control of the main side RAM 65 are used. Used as appropriate.

According to the above configuration, the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234 are provided in the management RAM 241 externally attached to the MPU 62. This makes it possible to store collected game history information without increasing the required storage capacity in the work area 223 for non-specific control in the main side RAM 65, and to use the game history to It becomes possible to store the calculated 61st to 68th parameters. Further, while using the general-purpose MPU 62, it is possible to increase the storage capacity for storing game history information.

When collecting gaming history and calculating the 61st to 68th parameters using the collected history information, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control of the main side RAM 65 are used as appropriate. be done. This makes it possible to prevent the processing speed from decreasing excessively when processing related to history information is executed.

In addition to or in place of the configuration in which the management RAM 241 is provided with a normal counter area 231, an open/close execution mode counter area 232, a high-frequency support mode counter area 233, and a calculation result storage area 234, the first embodiment described above may be used. A configuration may also be adopted in which a storage area corresponding to the history memory 117 in the form, etc. is set. In this case, it is necessary to increase the storage capacity required to store the history information, but the configuration is such that the management RAM 241 externally attached to the MPU 62 is used as a storage means for storing the history information. Therefore, it becomes possible to flexibly respond to increases in storage capacity.

<Twenty-second embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fifteenth embodiment described above in the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifteenth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as in the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step S5001 to step S5019 in the main process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S5001). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed after the main process is started. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S5002).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed (step S5003), the setting key insertion part 68a is determined to be turned on using the setting key (step S5004), and the inner frame It is determined whether the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to 13 (step S5005), and it is determined whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11 (step S5006).

In this embodiment, a front door open sensor 95 for detecting whether or not the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63. The detection result of 95 is input to the main CPU 63. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closure detection signal to the main CPU 63, and the front door frame 14 is in the open state with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door open sensor 95 transmits an open detection signal to the main CPU 63. The main side CPU 63 identifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving a closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, and when receiving an opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. It is specified that the front door frame 14 is in an open state.

Further, in this embodiment, a main body open sensor 96 for detecting whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11 is electrically connected to the main side CPU 63. The detection result of 96 is input to the main CPU 63. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits a closure detection signal to the main side CPU 63, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body open sensor 96 transmits an open detection signal to the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state when it receives a closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state when it receives an opening detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96. It is determined that the main body 12 is in an open state.

If the reset button 68c is pressed (step S5003: YES) and a negative determination is made in any of steps S5004 to S5006, clear processing for non-setting update is executed (step S5007). . In the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, in the work area 221 for specific control, excluding the area where setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (specifically, the setting value counter), the specific control Clear the work area 221 to "0" and initialize the area cleared to "0". As a result, the area indicating whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the win/fail lottery is performed regardless of the win/fail lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game cycle is not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general figure display section 38a is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in a closed state. situation. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display section 37a is erased and the general figure display section The pending information for 38a is deleted. Further, in the clearing process when updating the settings without setting, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". Furthermore, in the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, initial settings are performed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0".

In the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while the reset button 68c is pressed, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". It becomes possible to do so.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S5003: NO), it is determined whether the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S5008). A power outage flag is provided in the work area 221 for specific control, and when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and a predetermined power outage process is normally executed, the power outage flag is set in the work area 221 for specific control. will be set to "1". If the power outage flag is set to "1", it is determined whether the checksum calculation result matches the checksum saved when the power was cut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S5009). . If the clearing process for non-setting update is executed in step S5007, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S5009, the settings of the pachinko machine 10 are set by checking the value of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control. It is determined whether the value is normal (step S5010). Specifically, if the setting value set in the setting value counter is one of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or 7 or more, it is determined to be abnormal. It is determined that there is.

If a negative determination is made in any of steps S5008 to S5010, operation prohibition processing is executed. In the operation prohibition process, after executing an error notification process to notify the hall manager and the like of the occurrence of an error (step S5011), an infinite loop occurs. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing a clear process (step S5018) when updating settings, which will be described later.

If a positive determination is made in all steps S5008 to S5010, power-on setting processing is executed (step S5012). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the work area 221 for specific control such as initialization of a power outage flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81.

Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited at the stage when main processing is started. This state in which generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is canceled at a timing when the process in step S5012 is completed and before the process in step S5013 is executed, and execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the power-on setting process in step S5012 is completed and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process in step S5013 is started. Therefore, the main CPU 63 will not start the process for advancing the game until the situation is reached.

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps S5013 to S5016. In other words, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process from step S5013 to step S5016 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processing of steps S5013 to S5016 is non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly. In steps S5013 to S5016, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

On the other hand, if the reset button 68c is pressed (step S5003: YES) and all of steps S5004 to S5006 are answered in the affirmative, processing for updating the set value is executed. Specifically, first, a setting value copying process is executed (step S5017). In the copy process, information of a setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. . As a result, even if the setting value counter information is cleared to "0" in the setting value update clearing process (step S5018) to be executed subsequently, the information in the setting value counter before the setting value updating clearing process is executed. It becomes possible to grasp the set value of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped).

Thereafter, a clearing process when updating settings is executed (step S5018). In the clearing process when updating the settings, the work area 221 for specific control is set to "0", except for the area indicating whether the win/fail lottery mode in the work area 221 for specific control is the high probability mode and the above-mentioned copy area. ” is cleared and initial settings are made for the area cleared to “0”. As a result, the game cycle is not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general figure display section 38a is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. A certain situation arises. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display section 37a is erased and the general figure display section The pending information for 38a is deleted. Furthermore, in the clearing process when updating the settings, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are performed for the area cleared to "0". Furthermore, in the clearing process when updating the settings, a setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is cleared to "0". Further, in the clearing process when updating settings, initial settings are performed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0".

On the other hand, in the clearing process when updating the settings, the area indicating whether the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode is not cleared to "0", so even if the setting value updating process (step S5019) is executed, the winning lottery mode will not be cleared. It becomes possible to maintain the mode in which the pachinko machine 10 was in the mode before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped. Furthermore, since the copy area is not cleared to "0" in the clearing process when updating the settings, it becomes possible to specify the setting value that was set before the clearing process when updating the settings.

In the clearing process when updating settings, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if a setting value update process that can change the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". It becomes possible to do so.

Thereafter, after executing setting value update processing in step S5019, the process moves to step S5012. The setting value update process will be explained below. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the setting value update process. Note that the processes from step S5101 to step S5114 in the setting value update process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, a set value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S5101). The setting value counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to specify which setting value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is at. By setting "1" to the setting value counter, when the setting value update process is executed, the setting value becomes "setting 1" regardless of the previous setting value.

Thereafter, a setting value display start process is executed (step S5102). In the setting value display start process, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that the number "1" corresponding to "setting 1" is displayed. When changing the setting value, the game hall manager can grasp the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by checking the third notification display device 69c.

After that, it is determined whether one game ball is detected by the exit detection sensor 48a (step S5103). Specifically, it is determined whether the signal received from the outlet detection sensor 48a has switched from a LOW level to a HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S5103, it is determined whether the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S5104). Specifically, it is determined whether the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S5104, the process returns to step S5103, and it is determined whether one game ball has been detected by the exit detection sensor 48a.

If the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S5104: YES), the value of the set value counter in the specific control work area 221 is incremented by 1 (step S5105). Further, if the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds "6" (step S5106: YES), the set value counter is set to "1" (step S5107). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated to one step higher, and if the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6", it is changed to "Setting 1". I will be going back.

If a negative determination is made in step S5106, or if the process in step S5107 is executed, a setting value display update process is executed (step S5108). In the setting value display update process, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that a number corresponding to the value of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is displayed. By checking the third notification display device 69c, the game hall manager can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

After executing the process of step S5108, the process returns to step S5103, and it is determined whether one game ball is detected by the exit detection sensor 48a. If one game ball is not detected by the exit detection sensor 48a (step S5103: NO), the process from step S5104 onward is executed again. When one game ball is detected by the exit detection sensor 48a (step S5103: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S5109). In this case, instead of specifying whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is in the OFF state, it is specified whether or not a switch has occurred from the ON state to the OFF state, and it is determined that the switch has occurred. If specified, an affirmative determination is made in step S5109.

If it has not been switched to the OFF state (step S5109: NO), the process of step S5109 is executed again. As a result, the process waits until the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off. If it is switched to the OFF state (step S5109: YES), a setting value display end process is executed (step S5110). In the set value display termination process, the display of the set values on the third notification display device 69c is terminated. In this case, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c start displaying information on various parameters stored in the calculation result storage area 234 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

Thereafter, a setting value comparison process is executed (step S5111). In the setting value comparison process, it is determined whether the information on the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control matches the information stored in the copy area in the work area 221 for specific control. That is, it is determined whether or not the set value that was set before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped is the same as the set value that was set in the current set value update process.

If the setting value that was set before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped is the same as the setting value that was set in the current setting value update process (step S5112: NO), the A notification process at the time of change is executed (step S5113). In the non-change notification processing, a setting maintenance command indicating that the setting value has not been changed is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. Upon receiving the setting maintenance command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the setting maintenance, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output a voice saying "Setting maintenance is maintained." Further, the character image "Settings are maintained" is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

These notifications are maintained until a notification execution period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after the setting maintenance command is sent, and are terminated when the notification execution period has elapsed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the administrator of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the above notification, the administrator of the game hall can understand that the set value has been maintained. In addition, in the notification process when no change is made, the setting value is maintained by changing the display content on at least one of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c to the display content corresponding to setting maintenance. It may be configured to notify that the setting value has been maintained, or it may be configured to provide an external output indicating that the set value has been maintained.

If the setting value that was set before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped and the setting value that was set in the current setting value update process are not the same (step S5112: YES), the change is made. The time notification process is executed (step S5114). In the notification process at the time of change, a setting change command indicating that the setting value has been changed is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. Upon receiving the setting change command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting section 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the setting change, and causes the speaker section 54 to output a voice saying "Settings have been changed." Further, the character image "Settings are changed" is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

These notifications are maintained until a notification execution period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after the setting change command is sent, and are terminated when the notification execution period has elapsed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the administrator of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By checking the above-mentioned notification, the administrator of the game hall can understand that the set value has been changed. In addition, in the notification processing at the time of change, it is determined that the setting value has been changed by changing the display content on at least one of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c to the display content corresponding to the setting change. The configuration may be configured to notify the user of the changes, or the configuration may be configured to provide an external output indicating that the set value has been changed.

As described above, in order to execute the setting value update process in this embodiment, not only the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on, but also the reset button 68c is pressed, and the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Therefore, the gaming machine main body 12 must be in an open state. Thereby, even if an attempt is made to illegally execute the setting value update process, it becomes difficult to do so.

Further, in order to execute the setting value update process, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 need to be in an open state. As a result, even if an attempt is made to fraudulently execute the setting value update process, the fraudulent act will be noticeable because the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 are open, and the gaming hall manager will It becomes easier to detect fraudulent activity.

In particular, in order to execute the setting value update process, it is necessary not only to open the gaming machine main body 12 to expose the main controller 60, but also to open the front door frame 14. It is possible to make the work of the above-mentioned fraudulent act complicated, and it is also possible to make the above-mentioned fraudulent act noticeable.

In addition, in a configuration in which the process for proceeding with the game does not return if the setting value update process is not completed, in order to finalize the setting value selected in the setting value update process and end the setting value update process, It is necessary to enter the game ball into the out port 24a and have the out port detection sensor 48a detect the game ball, and then turn off the setting key insertion part 68a. This makes it possible to make it difficult to perform an operation to terminate the setting value update process and return to the process for proceeding with the game, even if the setting value update process is executed fraudulently.

Also, the setting value that was set before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped and the setting value selected in the setting value update process are compared, and whether or not the two setting values are the same is determined. A corresponding notification is executed. Thereby, the administrator of the game hall can easily understand whether or not the setting value has been changed by the setting value update process.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) while the processes in steps S5013 to S5016 are being executed in the main process (FIG. 84). Note that the program corresponding to timer interrupt processing is set as a specific control program.

In steps S5201 to S5205, the same processes as steps S301 to S305 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment are executed. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

Thereafter, a setting confirmation process is executed (step S5206). When executing the settings confirmation process, a subroutine program corresponding to the settings confirmation process set in the specific control program will be executed; Information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt process after execution of is written to the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. When the setting confirmation process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the timer interrupt process indicated by the return address.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process. Note that the processing from step S5301 to step S5312 in the setting confirmation processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, it is determined whether the third notification display device 69c is displaying a setting value corresponding to the information of the setting value counter in the specific control work area 221 (step S5301). If a negative determination is made in step S5301, it is determined whether the mode is neither the game time nor the opening/closing execution mode (step S5302), and the symbol change display time in the general figure display section 38a and the general electric accessory 34a are opened. It is determined whether the state is in any of the normal power open states that can occur (step S5303), it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is in the open state with respect to the inner frame 13 (step S5304), and the outer frame 11, it is determined whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state (step S5305), and it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on (step S5306). The determination as to whether the front door frame 14 is in the open state is made based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 similarly to step S5005 in the main process (FIG. 84), and the determination as to whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state is made based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95. This determination is made based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96, similar to step S5006 in the main process (FIG. 84).

If a negative determination is made in any of steps S5302 to S5306, this setting confirmation process ends without executing the processes in steps S5307 to S5309. If a positive determination is made in all of steps S5302 to S5306, a process to start displaying set values is executed (step S5307). In the setting value display start process, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that the number of the setting value corresponding to the information of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is displayed. When checking the setting values, the game hall manager can grasp the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by visually checking the third notification display device 69c.

Thereafter, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S5308). The game stop flag is set in a situation where an affirmative determination is made in step S5207 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86) and the processes in steps S5208 to S5221 are not executed, that is, in a situation where execution of the process for advancing the game should be stopped. This flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not there is a flag. By setting the game stop flag to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S5207 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86), resulting in a situation in which the processes in steps S5208 to S5221 are not executed. As a result, the setting value is confirmed in a situation where the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped. However, even in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1", steps S5201 to S5205 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86) are executed, so the setting value is checked. Even if it is, power outage monitoring is executed, and the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further fraud detection is executed.

Thereafter, a confirmation notification start command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step S5309). By receiving the confirmation notification start command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the setting confirmation, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output a voice saying “Setting confirmation is in progress.” . In addition, the symbol display device 41 displays a text image saying "Settings are being confirmed." These notifications are continued until a confirmation notification end command is received from the main CPU 63. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which an external output indicating that the set value is being checked is provided.

As mentioned above, on the condition that it is not in either the game cycle or the opening/closing execution mode, and furthermore, it is not in either the cycle of displaying the fluctuation of the symbol in the ordinary figure display section 38a or the ordinary electricity open state in which the ordinary electric accessory 34a can be in the open state. By displaying the display for checking the set value on the third notification display device 69c, it is possible to prevent the work of checking the set value from being performed while a game is being played. It becomes possible.

In addition, in order to display a display for confirming the setting value on the third notification display device 69c, it is necessary not only to turn on the setting key insertion part 68a but also to make the front door frame 14 open. Therefore, the game machine main body 12 must be in an open state. Thereby, even if an attempt is made to fraudulently display a setting value confirmation display, it becomes difficult to do so.

Further, in order to display a display for confirming the set value on the third notification display device 69c, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 need to be in an open state. As a result, even if an attempt is made to fraudulently display a setting value confirmation display, the front door frame 14 and gaming machine main body 12 are in an open state, so the fraudulent act will be noticeable, and the gaming hall management This makes it easier for those involved to discover the fraudulent activity.

In particular, in order to display the setting value on the third notification display device 69c, it is necessary to perform not only the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 necessary to expose the main control device 60 but also By also requiring an operation to open the front door frame 14, it becomes possible to make the work of the above-mentioned fraudulent act complicated, and it becomes possible to make the above-mentioned fraudulent act noticeable.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off (step S5310). If the OFF operation has been performed (step S5310: YES), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S5311). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S5207 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86), resulting in a situation in which the processes in steps S5208 to S5221 are executed. As a result, the state in which execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped is released.

Thereafter, a confirmation notification end command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step S5312). By receiving the confirmation notification end command, the audio light emission control device 81 ends the notification indicating that the setting values in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53, and the speaker section 54 are being confirmed.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86), after finishing the setting confirmation process in step S5206, it is determined whether the game is stopped (step S5207). In this case, if the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" in the setting confirmation process in step S5206, an affirmative determination is made in step S5207, and steps S5208 to S5221 are performed. No processing is performed. Furthermore, even if the occurrence of fraud is detected in the fraud detection process in step S5205, an affirmative determination is made in step S5207 and the processes in steps S5208 to S5221 are not executed.

In steps S5208 to S5219, the same processes as steps S307 to S318 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment are executed. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data. Further, in step S5221, the same process as step S3719 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) in the fifteenth embodiment is executed.

On the other hand, in step S5220, RAM monitoring processing is executed. When executing the RAM monitoring process, a subroutine program corresponding to the RAM monitoring process set in the specific control program will be executed. Information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt processing in is written to the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. When the RAM monitoring process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the timer interrupt process indicated by the return address.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing RAM monitoring processing. Note that the processing from step S5401 to step S5412 in the RAM monitoring process is executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, monitoring processing of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S5401). In this monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the specific control work area 221 due to noise or the like. This monitoring method is arbitrary, but for example, in the work area 221 for specific control, check whether the state of the storage area to which information is not written due to various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state. One method is to monitor the system and determine that an abnormality has occurred when the state is different from the initial state. In this case, if the initial state of the storage area is set to the value "0", it is determined that an abnormality has occurred if "1" is stored in the storage area, and the initial state of the storage area is set to "1". ”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred if the storage area has a value of “0”. Furthermore, in addition to the monitoring method described above, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the value of a predetermined byte is different from a value that can be set in a normal state.

If it is determined in step S5401 that there is an abnormality (step S5402: YES), the processes of steps S5409 to S5412 are executed. If it is determined in step S5401 that there is no abnormality (step S5402: NO), the process advances to step S5403.

In step S5403, monitoring processing of the stack area 222 for specific control is executed. In this monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the stack area 222 for specific control due to noise or the like. This monitoring method is arbitrary, but for example, in the stack area 222 for specific control, check whether the state of the storage area to which information is not written due to various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state. One method is to monitor the system and determine that an abnormality has occurred when the state is different from the initial state. In this case, if the initial state of the storage area is set to the value "0", it is determined that an abnormality has occurred if "1" is stored in the storage area, and the initial state of the storage area is set to "1". ”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred if the storage area has a value of “0”. Furthermore, in addition to the monitoring method described above, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the value of a predetermined byte is different from a value that can be set in a normal state.

If it is determined in step S5403 that there is an abnormality (step S5404: YES), the processes of steps S5409 to S5412 are executed. If it is determined in step S5403 that there is no abnormality (step S5404: NO), the process advances to step S5405.

In step S5405, monitoring processing of the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed. In this monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the non-specific control work area 223 due to noise or the like. This monitoring method is arbitrary, but for example, in the work area 223 for non-specific control, check whether the state of the storage area to which information is not written due to various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state. One method is to monitor this and determine that an abnormality has occurred if the state is different from the initial state. In this case, if the initial state of the storage area is set to the value "0", it is determined that an abnormality has occurred if "1" is stored in the storage area, and the initial state of the storage area is set to "1". ”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred if the storage area has a value of “0”. Furthermore, in addition to the monitoring method described above, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the value of a predetermined byte is different from a value that can be set in a normal state.

If it is determined in step S5405 that there is an abnormality (step S5406: YES), the processes of steps S5409 to S5412 are executed. If it is determined in step S5405 that there is no abnormality (step S5406: NO), the process advances to step S5407.

In step S5407, monitoring processing of the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed. In this monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the stack area 224 for non-specific control due to noise or the like. This monitoring method is arbitrary, but for example, in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, check whether the state of the storage area to which information is not written due to various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state. One method is to monitor this and determine that an abnormality has occurred if the state is different from the initial state. In this case, if the initial state of the storage area is set to the value "0", it is determined that an abnormality has occurred if "1" is stored in the storage area, and the initial state of the storage area is set to "1". ”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred if the storage area has a value of “0”. Furthermore, in addition to the monitoring method described above, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the value of a predetermined byte is different from a value that can be set in a normal state.

If it is determined in step S5407 that there is an abnormality (step S5408: YES), the processes in steps S5409 to S5412 are executed. Specifically, first, a setting value copy process is executed (step S5409). In the copy process, information of a setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. . As a result, even if the information of the set value counter is cleared to "0" in the abnormality clearing process (step S5410) to be executed subsequently, this pachinko machine 10 before the abnormality clearing process is executed. It becomes possible to grasp the setting value of.

Thereafter, a clearing process in the event of an abnormality is executed (step S5410). In the clearing process at the time of abnormality, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" except for the copy area, and the stack area 222 for specific control, work area 223 for non-specific control, and stack for non-specific control are cleared to "0". Clear area 224 to "0". Initial settings are also performed after clearing to "0". In other words, in the RAM monitoring process, an abnormality occurs in any one of the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. If it is determined that the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" except for the copy area, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are cleared to "0". The stack area 224 of is cleared to "0". As a result, if there is a possibility that some kind of information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65, neither the process corresponding to specific control nor the process corresponding to non-specific control will be executed in that state. It becomes possible to do so.

Note that if the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", the information on the return address after execution of the RAM monitoring process will also be erased. Therefore, when the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", after the process of step S5412 is completed, the program is uniquely returned to the predetermined program. Specifically, the configuration is such that the process returns uniquely to the process of step S5013 in the main process (FIG. 22). However, the program that uniquely returns is not limited to step S5013, but may be step S5221 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86). Further, when the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is also set to the address of the first storage area in the storage order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, an abnormality command indicating that abnormality clear processing has occurred is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step S5411). Upon receiving the abnormality command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting section 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to forced clearing, and causes the speaker section 54 to output a voice saying "Forcibly cleared." Further, the character image "Forcibly cleared" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the administrator of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the above-mentioned notification, the administrator of the game hall can understand that the main side RAM 65 has been forcibly cleared.

Thereafter, setting value update processing is executed (step S5412). In other words, if clearing processing occurs in the event of an abnormality, the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control will be cleared to "0", so the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 must be reset. To do this, execute setting value update processing. The contents of the setting value update process are the same as step S5019 of the main process (FIG. 84). Therefore, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated by one step, and the currently selected set value is determined by detecting a game ball with the exit detection sensor 48a. The setting values that are being updated and the set values that have been finalized are displayed on the third notification display device 69c. Thereafter, when the setting key insertion section 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, it is determined that the termination condition for the setting value update process is satisfied.

Here, it is not determined that the end condition is met just by the setting key insertion section 68a being in the OFF state, but when the setting key insertion section 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, the end condition is satisfied. It is determined that it has been established. When the setting value update process is executed in the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88), the setting key insertion section 68a is in the OFF state at the start of the setting value update process, so the termination condition for the setting value update process is not set. In order to establish this, it is necessary to insert a setting key into the setting key insertion section 68a, perform an ON operation once, and then perform an OFF operation. This makes it possible to prevent the setting value update process from ending even though the administrator of the gaming hall has not performed a proper operation.

When the setting key insertion section 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state and the termination condition of the setting value update process is satisfied, step S5111 in the setting value update process (FIG. 85) is executed. It is compared whether the set value stored in the copy area in the work area 221 for specific control and the set value currently set in the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control are the same. That is, it is determined whether the setting value set before the abnormality clearing process (step S5410) is executed and the setting value set in the current setting value update process are the same. If both setting values are the same (step S5112: NO), the setting maintenance notification described above is performed by executing the process for notification when no change is made (step S5113). On the other hand, if the two setting values are different (step S5112: YES), the setting change notification described above is performed by executing the process for notification at the time of change (step S5114).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In order to execute the setting value update process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, not only the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on, but also the reset button 68c is pressed. , the front door frame 14 must be in an open state, and the gaming machine main body 12 must be in an open state. Thereby, even if an attempt is made to illegally execute the setting value update process, it becomes difficult to do so.

In order to execute the setting value update process, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 need to be in an open state. As a result, even if an attempt is made to fraudulently execute the setting value update process, the fraudulent act will be noticeable because the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 are open, and the gaming hall manager will It becomes easier to detect fraudulent activity.

In particular, in order to execute the setting value update process, it is necessary not only to open the gaming machine main body 12 to expose the main control device 60, but also to open the front door frame 14. It is possible to make the work of the above-mentioned fraudulent act complicated, and it is also possible to make the above-mentioned fraudulent act noticeable.

In a configuration that does not return to the process for advancing the game if the setting value update process is not completed, in order to finalize the setting value selected in the setting value update process and end the setting value update process, it is necessary to It is necessary to insert a game ball into the ball 24a, cause the out-port detection sensor 48a to detect the game ball, and then turn off the setting key insertion part 68a. This makes it possible to make it difficult to perform an operation to terminate the setting value update process and return to the process for proceeding with the game, even if the setting value update process is executed fraudulently.

The setting value that was set before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped is compared with the setting value selected in the setting value update process, and it is determined whether or not both setting values are the same. A corresponding notification is executed. Thereby, the administrator of the game hall can easily understand whether or not the setting value has been changed by the setting value update process.

The set value is set on the condition that it is neither the game time nor the opening/closing execution mode, nor is the symbol change display time in the general figure display section 38a nor the general electric open state in which the general electric accessory 34a can be in an open state. By displaying the display for confirmation on the third notification display device 69c, it is possible to prevent the setting value confirmation work from being performed while a game is being played. .

In order to display a display for confirming the set value on the third notification display device 69c, not only the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on, but also the front door frame 14 is opened. The game machine main body 12 must be in an open state. Thereby, even if an attempt is made to fraudulently display a setting value confirmation display, it becomes difficult to do so.

In order to display the setting value on the third notification display device 69c, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 need to be in an open state. As a result, even if an attempt is made to fraudulently display a setting value confirmation display, the front door frame 14 and gaming machine main body 12 are in an open state, so the fraudulent act will be noticeable, and the gaming hall management This makes it easier for those involved to discover the fraudulent activity.

In particular, in order to display the setting value on the third notification display device 69c, it is necessary to perform not only the opening operation of the game machine main body 12 necessary to expose the main control device 60 but also By also requiring an opening operation of the front door frame 14, it becomes possible to make the work of the above-mentioned fraudulent act complicated, and it becomes possible to make the above-mentioned fraudulent act conspicuous.

When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in any one of the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. clears the work area 221 for specific control to "0" except for the copy area, and also clears the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control to "0". "clear. As a result, if there is a possibility that some kind of information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65, both the processing corresponding to specific control and the processing corresponding to non-specific control are executed in the same state. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

In the process corresponding to specific control, an information error occurs not only in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, but also in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It will be monitored whether they are doing so or not. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration compared to a configuration in which processing corresponding to specific control and processing corresponding to non-specific control are separated to monitor whether or not an information abnormality has occurred.

When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in any one of the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. In the process corresponding to specific control, not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, but also the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are set to "0". ” will be cleared. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration compared to a configuration in which "0" clearing is performed separately for processing corresponding to specific control and processing corresponding to non-specific control.

When an abnormality clearing process is executed due to an information abnormality occurring, a setting value update process is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the game from proceeding even though the set value has not been set. In this case, if the setting value that was set before the abnormality clearing process was executed is the same as the setting value that was set in the setting value update process after the abnormality clearing process was executed. Setting maintenance notification is performed. As a result, even if clear processing is executed in the event of an abnormality, setting maintenance notification will be performed by resetting the setting value that was set in the previous situation. It is also possible to clearly indicate to the player that the set value has not changed. By the way, since it is common in gaming halls to record the setting values of each pachinko machine 10 installed, the setting value update process is performed after executing the clearing process in the event of an abnormality so that the recorded setting values become the same. It is possible to execute

Note that the conditions for executing the setting value update process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started may be different from those in the above embodiment. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing another form of main processing. In the main processing, steps S5501 to S5506 and steps S5508 to S5520 are the same as steps S5001 to S5019 of the main processing (FIG. 84) in the above embodiment. On the other hand, in the main processing, it is determined in step S5507 whether the operating handle of the firing operation device 28 operated to launch the game ball into the gaming area PA has been rotated from the initial rotation position. Then, the reset button 68c is pressed (step S5503: YES), the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on (step S5504: YES), and the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13. (Step S5505: YES), the game machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11 (Step S5506: YES), and the operation handle of the firing operation device 28 is rotated from the initial rotation position. If so (step S5507: YES), setting value update processing (step S5520) is executed. As a result, in order to execute the setting value update process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, it is necessary not only to insert the setting key into the setting key insertion section 68a and perform the ON operation, but also to perform the ON operation. It is necessary to start supplying operating power to the pachinko machine 10 while the operating handle of the operating device 28 is being rotated. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally change the setting value. Note that in step S5507, instead of determining whether or not the operating handle of the firing operating device 28 has been rotated from the initial rotation position, it is determined whether the firing operating device 28 is being touched by the player. It may also be a configuration.

In addition, the conditions for executing the setting value update process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started are that the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 and that the outer door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13. Although the configuration is such that both conditions are set, that the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the frame 11, a configuration may be adopted in which only one of these conditions is set.

In addition, the configuration is such that the reset button 68c is pressed as a condition for executing the setting value update process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. However, a configuration may be adopted in which this condition is not set.

In addition, as a condition for executing the setting value update process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the operation to the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where a game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. The configuration may be such that a condition is set that power supply has started. As a result, in order to execute the setting value update process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, it is necessary not only to insert the setting key into the setting key insertion section 68a and perform an ON operation, but also to perform the ON operation. It becomes necessary to start supplying operating power to the pachinko machine 10 while the game balls are retained at the gate 35. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally change the setting value.

Further, the content of the operation for finalizing the setting value in the setting value update process may be different from that in the above embodiment. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing another example of setting value update processing. In the setting value update process, steps S5601 to S5602 and steps S5604 to S5614 execute the same processes as steps S5101 to S5102 and steps S5104 to S5114 of the setting value update process (FIG. 85) in the above embodiment. . On the other hand, in step S5603, in the setting value update process, instead of determining whether or not the exit detection sensor 48a has detected a game ball, the ON signal is continuously output from the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined whether the ON duration period is longer than the end reference period (specifically, 5 seconds). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5603, the currently selected setting value is determined and the process advances to step S5609. According to this configuration, in order to confirm the selected setting value, it is necessary to intentionally keep the game ball in the through gate 35 for a period longer than the end reference period. Game balls staying in the through gate 35 for longer than the end reference period does not occur in a situation where a normal game is being played. Thereby, it is possible to make the conditions for determining the currently selected setting value not satisfied or difficult to be satisfied in a situation where a normal game is being played. Further, even if the setting value update process is started by fraud, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an operation to confirm the selected setting value in the setting value update process.

Furthermore, in the setting value update process, the selected setting value may be determined when the operating handle of the firing operating device 28 is rotated from the initial rotation position, and the firing operating device 28 may be touched by the player. The currently selected setting value may be determined when the selected setting value is selected.

In addition, in the setting value update process, when the special electric detection sensor 45a detects that a game ball enters the special electric winning device 32 provided with an opening/closing member, the selected setting value is determined. Often, the selected setting value may be determined when the second operating port detection sensor 47a detects that a game ball enters the second operating port 34 provided with the opening/closing member. In this case, in order to confirm the selected setting value, it is necessary to manually open the target ball entry section and then clean the game ball, making it difficult to illegally change the setting value. becomes possible.

In addition, in the setting value update process, selection is made based on the fact that it is detected that a game ball enters the second ball entry section after it is detected that the game ball enters the first ball entry section. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the set values inside are fixed. In this case, in order to confirm the selected setting value, it is necessary to enter the game balls into multiple ball entry sections in a predetermined order, making it difficult to illegally change the setting value. becomes possible. In this case, the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are both ball entry sections that are not provided with an opening/closing member, so that the workability of regular work will not be extremely reduced. It becomes possible to do so.

Furthermore, in the setting value updating process, the setting key insertion section 68a may be switched from the ON state to the OFF state, thereby confirming the selected setting value and satisfying the termination condition for the setting value updating process.

Further, in the setting value update process, the operation for updating the setting value by one step is not limited to the configuration in which the update button 68b is pressed, and the setting value is changed by one step by pressing the reset button 68c. The configuration may be updated.

Further, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on by the setting key, If the front door frame 14 is not in an open state with respect to the frame 13 or if the gaming machine main body 12 is not in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, the clearing process at the time of non-setting update (step S5007) is configured to be executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the clearing process is not executed at the time of non-setting update. This makes it possible to prevent the clearing process at the time of non-setting update from being executed against the will of the manager of the gaming hall.

In addition, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion part 68a is not turned on by the setting key, If the front door frame 14 is not in an open state with respect to the frame 13 or if the gaming machine main body 12 is not in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, the clearing process at the time of non-setting update (step S5007) is configured to be executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the clearing process is not executed at the time of non-setting update. As a result, even if an unauthorized person tries to execute the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, it becomes difficult to do so.

<23rd embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the twenty-second embodiment described above in the processing configuration of the main process. Hereinafter, the configuration that is different from the twenty-second embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the twenty-second embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step S5701 to step S5720 in the main processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S5701). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed after the main process is started. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S5702).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 (step S5703), and the outer frame 14 is determined based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96. It is determined whether or not the game machine main body 12 is in an open state (step S5704), and it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step S5705). If a negative determination is made in any of steps S5703 to S5705, the processes of steps S5706 to S5714 are executed. These steps S5706 to S5714 are the same as steps S5008 to S5016 of the main process (FIG. 84) in the twenty-second embodiment.

If a positive determination is made in all of steps S5703 to S5705, selection processing is executed (step S5715). In the selection process, either a situation where clear processing is executed during non-setting update and setting value update processing is not executed, or a situation where clear processing is executed when setting update is executed and setting value update processing is executed. A process is executed to determine whether or not the game hall will be played based on a selection operation by the administrator of the game hall. Specifically, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the state in which one of the above situations is selected is switched to the state in which the other situation is selected. Note that the selection operation may be performed by operating the reset button 68c, or may be performed by operating another operating section. In addition, if a situation is selected in which the clear process is executed during non-setting update and the setting value update process is not executed, "O" is displayed on the first notification display device 69a, and the second notification display device 69b is displayed. And when the third notification display device 69c is turned off and the setting value update process is selected, the second notification display device 69b is set to “O”. is displayed, and the first notification display device 69a and the third notification display device 69c are turned off. In addition, if the reset button 68c is continuously pressed for more than the confirmation selection period (specifically 10 seconds), the selected situation among the above situations is confirmed as the current selection target. do.

In addition, if the update button 68b is pressed continuously for more than the confirmation selection period (specifically, 10 seconds), the selected situation among the above situations is confirmed as the current selection target. It may also be configured such that if the other operation part is pressed continuously for more than a fixed selection period (specifically 10 seconds), the selected situation among the above situations is selected as the current selection. It may also be configured to be determined as a target. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the selected situation among the above-mentioned situations is determined as the current selection target by rotating the operating handle of the firing operating device 28.

In the selection process, if a situation in which the clear process is executed during non-setting update and the setting value update process is not executed is confirmed as the current selection target (step S5716: NO), the clear process during non-setting update is executed. (Step S5717). The contents of the clearing process at the time of non-setting update are the same as step S5007 of the main process (FIG. 84) in the twenty-second embodiment.

In the selection process, if the situation in which the clear process at the time of setting update is executed and the setting value update process is confirmed as the current selection target (step S5716: YES), the setting value copy process is executed (step S5718), clear processing at the time of setting update is executed (step S5719), and setting value update processing is executed (step S5720). The processing contents of steps S5718 to S5720 are the same as steps S5017 to S5019 of the main processing (FIG. 84) in the twenty-second embodiment.

According to the above configuration, even in a configuration where the setting key insertion section 68a is not provided, the clearing process is executed when the setting is not updated and the setting value updating process is not executed, and the clearing process is executed when the setting is updated. At the same time, it becomes possible for the game hall manager to select which of the situations the setting value update process is to be executed.

In addition, not only when executing the setting value update process but also when executing the clear process when the setting is not updated, operating power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 in a situation where the reset button 68c is pressed. In addition to starting the game, it is necessary to open the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 and to open the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11. As a result, even if an unauthorized person tries to execute the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, it becomes difficult to do so.

Note that the conditions for the selection process to be executed when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started are that the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 and that the outer frame is in an open state. Although the configuration has been described in which both the conditions that the game machine main body 12 is in an open state for the game machine 11 are set, a configuration may be adopted in which only one of these conditions is set.

Furthermore, as a condition for executing the selection process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, a condition is added that the firing handle of the firing operation device 28 is rotated. It may be a configuration in which a condition is added that the firing operation device 28 is touched, or a configuration in which a condition is added that the game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. Good too.

<24th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the twenty-second embodiment described above in the processing configuration of the RAM monitoring process. Hereinafter, the configuration that is different from the twenty-second embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the twenty-second embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the RAM monitoring process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step S5801 to step S5814 in the RAM monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, monitoring processing of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S5801). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5401 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined in step S5801 that there is an abnormality (step S5802: YES), the processes of steps S5805 to S5808 are executed.

If it is determined in step S5801 that there is no abnormality (step S5802: NO), monitoring processing of the stack area 222 for specific control is executed (step S5803). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5403 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined in step S5803 that there is an abnormality (step S5804: YES), the processes in steps S5805 to S5808 are executed.

More specifically, regarding the processing in steps S5805 to S5808, first, a setting value copying process is executed (step S5805). In the copy process, information of a setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. . As a result, even if the information of the set value counter is cleared to "0" in the abnormality clearing process (step S5806) to be executed subsequently, this pachinko machine 10 before the abnormality clearing process is executed. It becomes possible to grasp the setting value of.

Thereafter, a clearing process in the event of an abnormality is executed (step S5806). In the clearing process at the time of abnormality, the work area 221 for specific control except for the copy area is cleared to "0", and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". Initial settings are also performed after clearing to "0". On the other hand, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". In other words, in the RAM monitoring process in this embodiment, if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in either the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the specific control is performed except for the copy area. The work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0", and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". As a result, if there is a possibility that some kind of information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the process corresponding to the specific control will be executed in the same state. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening. Furthermore, even if an information error occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to "0". As a result, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control will be cleared to "0" when an information error occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Note that if the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", the information on the return address after execution of the RAM monitoring process will also be erased. Therefore, when the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", after the process of step S5808 is finished, the process returns to the predetermined program. Specifically, the configuration is such that the process returns uniquely to the process of step S5013 in the main process (FIG. 22). However, the program that uniquely returns is not limited to step S5013, but may be step S5221 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 86). Further, when the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is also set to the address of the first storage area in the storage order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, an abnormality command indicating that abnormality clear processing has occurred is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step S5807). Upon receiving the abnormality command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting section 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to forced clearing, and causes the speaker section 54 to output a voice saying "Forcibly cleared." Further, the character image "Forcibly cleared" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the administrator of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the above notification, the manager of the gaming hall can understand that the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control have been forcibly cleared.

Thereafter, setting value update processing is executed (step S5808). The contents of the setting value update process are the same as step S5412 in the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment.

If it is determined that there is no abnormality in both step S5801 and step S5803 (step S5802 and step S5804: NO), monitoring processing of the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed (step S5809). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5405 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined in step S5809 that there is an abnormality (step S5810: YES), the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are performed (step S5811). In this case, the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, the calculation result storage area 234, and the management start flag are all cleared to "0". This makes it possible to eliminate information abnormalities in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

On the other hand, in step S5811, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if an information abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are 0” can be prevented from being cleared.

Note that in step S5811, although the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high-frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234 are cleared to "0", the management start flag is not cleared to "0". It may also be a configuration. In addition, in step S5811, although the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high-frequency support mode counter area 233, and the management start flag are cleared to "0", the calculation result storage area 234 is not cleared to "0". It may also be a configuration. In addition, in step S5811, although the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 are cleared to "0", the calculation result storage area 234 and the management start flag are not cleared to "0". It may also be a configuration.

If a negative determination is made in step S5810 or if the process in step S5811 is executed, a process for monitoring the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed (step S5812). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5407 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined in step S5812 that there is an abnormality (step S5813: YES), the stack area 224 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are performed (step S5814). This makes it possible to eliminate information abnormalities in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

On the other hand, in step S5814, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if an information abnormality occurs in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are 0” can be prevented from being cleared.

According to the above configuration, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in either the specific control work area 221 or the specific control stack area 222, the specific control work area 221 excluding the copy area is cleared to "0" and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". As a result, if there is a possibility that some kind of information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the process corresponding to the specific control will be executed in the same state. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening.

Even if an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". This prevents the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" due to an information error in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control. It becomes possible to do so.

Even if an information abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". This prevents the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" due to an information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control. becomes possible.

Even if an information abnormality occurs in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". This prevents the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" due to an information abnormality in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. becomes possible.

Note that if an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" except for the copy area, while the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". 0" may not be cleared.

In addition, when an information abnormality occurs in the stack area 222 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", but the work area 221 for specific control is not cleared to "0". You can also use it as In this case, even if the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", the process of steps S5805 to S5808 may not be executed.

<25th embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the twenty-second embodiment in the processing configuration for monitoring whether an information abnormality has occurred in each of the areas 221 to 224 of the main side RAM 65. Hereinafter, the configuration that is different from the twenty-second embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the twenty-second embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the RAM monitoring process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step S5901 to step S5908 in the RAM monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, monitoring processing of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S5901). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5401 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined in step S5901 that there is an abnormality (step S5902: YES), the processes of steps S5905 to S5908 are executed.

If it is determined in step S5901 that there is no abnormality (step S5902: NO), monitoring processing of the stack area 222 for specific control is executed (step S5903). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5403 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined in step S5903 that there is an abnormality (step S5904: YES), the processes in steps S5905 to S5908 are executed.

More specifically, regarding the processing in steps S5905 to S5908, first, a setting value copying process is executed (step S5905). In the copy process, information of a setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. . As a result, even if the information of the set value counter is cleared to "0" in the abnormality clearing process (step S5906) to be executed subsequently, this pachinko machine 10 before the abnormality clearing process is executed. It becomes possible to understand the setting value of.

Thereafter, a clearing process in the event of an abnormality is executed (step S5906). In the clearing process at the time of abnormality, the work area 221 for specific control except for the copy area is cleared to "0", and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". Initial settings are also performed after clearing to "0". On the other hand, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". In other words, in the RAM monitoring process in this embodiment, if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in either the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the specific control is performed except for the copy area. The work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0", and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". As a result, if there is a possibility that some kind of information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the process corresponding to the specific control will be executed in the same state. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening. Furthermore, even if an information error occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to "0". As a result, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control will be cleared to "0" when an information error occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Thereafter, an abnormality command indicating that abnormality clear processing has occurred is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step S5907). Upon receiving the abnormality command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emission section 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to forced clearing of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, and also causes the speaker section 54 to output a voice saying ``Forcible clear has been executed for specific control.'' Further, the symbol display device 41 is made to display a text image saying "Forcible clearing has been executed for specific control." These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the administrator of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the above notification, the manager of the gaming hall can understand that the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control have been forcibly cleared.

Thereafter, setting value update processing is executed (step S5908). The contents of the setting value update process are the same as step S5412 in the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment.

In the RAM monitoring process executed using the specific control program and specific control data as described above, information abnormality monitoring is executed for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222. However, information abnormality monitoring is not executed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Monitoring of information abnormalities in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is performed by processing corresponding to non-specific control in which programs for non-specific control and data for non-specific control are used. is executed.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the management execution process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the management execution process is executed by reading a subroutine program in the management process (FIG. 70), as in the fifteenth embodiment. Furthermore, the processes from step S6001 to step S6016 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

In steps S6001 to S6008 and steps S6010 to S6016, the same processes as steps S3901 to S3915 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment are executed. Further, in step S6009, another monitoring process is executed. When executing the separate monitoring process, the subroutine program corresponding to the separate monitoring process set in the non-specific control program will be executed. Information for specifying a return address for later management execution processing is written to the stack area 224 for non-specific control by a push command. When the separate monitoring process ends, information for specifying the return address is read out by the pop command, and the program returns to the management execution process indicated by the return address.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing separate monitoring processing. Note that the processes from step S6101 to step S6108 in the separate monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, a process for monitoring the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed (step S6101). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5405 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined in step S6101 that there is an abnormality (step S6102: YES), the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are performed (step S6103). In this case, the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, the calculation result storage area 234, and the management start flag are all cleared to "0". This makes it possible to eliminate information abnormalities in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

On the other hand, in step S6103, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if an information abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are 0” can be prevented from being cleared.

In addition, in step S6103, although the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high-frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234 are cleared to "0", the management start flag is not cleared to "0". It may also be a configuration. Further, in step S6103, although the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high-frequency support mode counter area 233, and the management start flag are cleared to "0", the calculation result storage area 234 is not cleared to "0". It may also be a configuration. Further, in step S6103, although the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 are cleared to "0", the calculation result storage area 234 and the management start flag are not cleared to "0". It may also be a configuration.

Thereafter, clear notification processing is executed (step S6104). In the clear notification process, a command indicating that the work area 223 for non-specific control has been cleared to "0" is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. By receiving the command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emission section 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the forced clearing of the work area 223 for non-specific control, and also issues a message from the speaker section 54 saying "History information has been forcibly cleared." Outputs a voice saying “I have done this.” Further, a character image "History information has been forcibly cleared." is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the administrator of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the above notification, the manager of the game hall can understand that the work area 223 for non-specific control has been forcibly cleared.

If a negative determination is made in step S6102 or if the process in step S6104 is executed, a process for monitoring the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed (step S6105). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5407 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined in step S6105 that there is an abnormality (step S6106: YES), the stack area 224 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are performed (step S6107). This makes it possible to eliminate information abnormalities in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

On the other hand, in step S6107, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if an information abnormality occurs in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are 0” can be prevented from being cleared.

Thereafter, clear notification processing is executed (step S6108). In the clear notification process, a command indicating that the stack area 224 for non-specific control has been cleared to "0" is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. By receiving the command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the forced clearing of the stack area 224 for non-specific control, and also causes the speaker unit 54 to emit light in a manner that corresponds to the forced clearing of the stack area 224 for non-specific control. "Forcibly cleared." will be output. In addition, a character image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 saying "The stack of non-specific control has been forcibly cleared." These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the administrator of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the above notification, the administrator of the gaming hall can understand that the stack area 224 for non-specific control has been forcibly cleared.

Note that when the stack area 224 for non-specific control is forcibly cleared, the address of the program in step S6010 in the management execution process (FIG. 94) is uniquely set as return address information after execution of another monitoring process. . Thereby, even if the stack area 224 for non-specific control is forcibly cleared, it is possible to return to the program that should originally be returned in the management execution process. Further, when the stack area 224 for non-specific control is forcibly cleared, the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is also set to the address of the first storage area in the storage order in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

According to the above configuration, monitoring of whether an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is executed by the process corresponding to specific control in the main CPU 63, Monitoring of whether an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed in a process corresponding to non-specific control in the main CPU 63. As a result, not only the areas 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65 to be used are clearly distinguished between the processing corresponding to specific control and the processing corresponding to non-specific control, but also the areas of the main RAM 65 to be monitored 221 to 224 can also be clearly distinguished.

Note that when the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0", information of various registers of the main CPU 63 used in processing corresponding to specific control is stored in the work area 223 for non-specific control. The saved information is also cleared to "0". In this case, even if the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the process corresponding to the specific control returns, there is a possibility that the state before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started cannot be restored. Therefore, when the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0", the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control may also be cleared to "0". In addition, in this configuration, the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0", so when returning from the process corresponding to non-specific control to the process corresponding to specific control, the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is A configuration may be adopted in which a setting value update process is executed first as a corresponding process.

<26th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the above-mentioned 20th embodiment in the processing configuration of management processing. Hereinafter, the configuration that is different from the above-mentioned 20th embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the 20th embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing management processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step S6201 to step S6219 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) (step S6201). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is a process that corresponds to specific control, from being interrupted and started in the middle of the management execution process, which will be described later, which is a process that corresponds to non-specific control. becomes possible.

Thereafter, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction as "LD HL, SP" (step S6202). In this case, the amount of information in the stack pointer is 16 bits, and the amount of information in each of the H register and L register is 8 bits, so 8 bits of information from the upper side of the stack pointer are stored in the H register. The L register is overwritten with consecutive 8 bits of information from the lower side of the stack pointer.

After that, a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the stack pointer information stored in the HL register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is set to "0" by a load instruction as "LD (HL), 0". Clear (step S6203). Note that the HL register of the main CPU 63 has been overwritten with the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in step S6202, and the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 has not been updated by the time the process of step S6203 is executed. Since this has not been carried out, in step S6203, the 1-byte storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, as "LD SP, SP-1", the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the next order in the stack area 222 for specific control by a load instruction. (Step S6204). When using the stack area 222 for specific control, information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 222 for specific control, and each time information to be stored is added, information for specific control is stored. The storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 222 of . Therefore, in step S6204, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address corresponding to the storage area with the smaller address by one in the stack area 222 for specific control. By executing the process in step S6204, the storage area in the next order for the storage area cleared to "0" in step S6203 is set as the information storage target for the next push command, and the storage area in step S6203 is The storage area cleared to "0" is set as the information read target by the next pop command.

Thereafter, the WA register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD WA, 0" (step S6205). Further, as "LD BC, 0", the BC register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S6206). Further, as "LD DE, 0", the DE register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S6207). Furthermore, the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD HL,0" (step S6208). Further, as "LD IX,0", the IX register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S6209). Further, as "LD IY, 0", the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S6210).

In addition to the flag register, the registers of the main CPU 63 include various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. In this case, in steps S6205 to S6210, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of these various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, are Clear “0”. These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in management execution processing (step S6212), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control. By clearing such registers to "0" prior to execution of the management execution process (step S6212), which is the process corresponding to non-specific control, the state of these registers can be changed before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started. In addition, it is possible to create a state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

In addition, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started will be changed after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is finished. This information is unnecessary in the process corresponding to specific control. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to "0" without being saved, no problem will occur in the process corresponding to the specific control that is returned after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

Thereafter, as "POP PSW", information is read from the storage area in the previous writing order with respect to the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a pop instruction, The read information is overwritten in the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S6211). The information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 immediately before the pop instruction in step S6211 is executed is the storage area in the next writing order with respect to the storage area in the specific control stack area 222 cleared to "0" in step S6203. The information corresponds to Therefore, the storage area in the write order immediately before the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control becomes the storage area cleared to "0" in step S6203. . Then, by overwriting the flag register of the main CPU 63 with the information read from this storage area, the flag register is cleared to "0". Note that one storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), and the flag register of the main CPU 63 also has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). . By clearing the flag register to "0" prior to execution of the management execution process (step S6212), which is the process corresponding to non-specific control, the state of the flag register can be changed before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started. It is possible to create a state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

Thereafter, by reading the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program, the management execution process is started (step S6212). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written to the specific control stack area 222 by a push command. When the management execution process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management process indicated by the return address.

Note that the processing contents of the management execution process are the same as the management execution process (FIG. 82) in the 20th embodiment. Therefore, after the check process is completed in the management execution process, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are cleared to "0". As a result, these registers will be cleared to "0" before returning from processing corresponding to non-specific control to processing corresponding to specific control, and the state of these registers will be cleared before returning to processing corresponding to specific control. It is possible to create a state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

When returning to the program for management processing after execution of the management execution processing, processing for clearing the flag register of the main CPU 63 to "0" is executed. Specifically, first, the information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the stack area 222 for specific control using a push command as "PUSH HL" (step S6213). After execution of the push instruction, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is changed to the information corresponding to the storage area of the next write order in the storage area where the information of the HL register has been saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Become.

Thereafter, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction as "LD HL, SP" (step S6214). In this case, the amount of information in the stack pointer is 16 bits, and the amount of information in each of the H register and L register is 8 bits, so 8 bits of information from the upper side of the stack pointer are stored in the H register. The L register is overwritten with consecutive 8 bits of information from the lower side of the stack pointer.

After that, a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the stack pointer information stored in the HL register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is set to "0" by a load instruction as "LD (HL), 0". Clear (step S6215). Note that the HL register of the main CPU 63 has been overwritten with the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in step S6214, and the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 has not been updated by the time the process of step S6215 is executed. Since this has not been carried out, in step S6215, the 1-byte storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, as "LD SP, SP-1", the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the next order in the stack area 222 for specific control by a load instruction. (Step S6216). When using the stack area 222 for specific control, information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 222 for specific control, and each time information to be stored is added, information for specific control is stored. The storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 222 of . Therefore, in step S6216, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address corresponding to the storage area with the smaller address by one in the stack area 222 for specific control. By executing the process in step S6216, the storage area in the next order with respect to the storage area cleared to "0" in step S6215 is set as the storage target of information by the next push command, and in addition, in step S6215 The storage area cleared to "0" is set as the information read target by the next pop command.

Thereafter, as "POP PSW", information is read from the storage area in the previous writing order with respect to the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a pop instruction, The read information is overwritten in the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S6217). The information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 immediately before the pop instruction in step S6217 is executed is the storage area in the next writing order with respect to the storage area in the specific control stack area 222 cleared to "0" in step S6215. The information corresponds to Therefore, in the stack area 222 for specific control, the storage area in the writing order immediately before the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is the memory area for specific control cleared to "0" in step S6215. This is a storage area in the stack area 222. Then, by overwriting the flag register of the main CPU 63 with the information read from this storage area, the flag register is cleared to "0". Note that one storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), and the flag register of the main CPU 63 also has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). . By clearing the flag register to "0" after executing the management execution process (step S6212), which is the process corresponding to non-specific control, the state of the flag register is changed to "0" by the main CPU 63 after the process corresponding to non-specific control is completed. It is possible to set the state immediately after the supply of operating power to has started. Furthermore, when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area whose write order in the stack area 222 for specific control is one previous.

Thereafter, the information in the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6213 is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction as "POP HL" (step S6218). Note that since the HL register is cleared to "0" immediately before the end of the management execution process (step S6212), the information cleared to "0" is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6213. At the same time, in step S6218, the information cleared to "0" is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63, resulting in the HL register of the main CPU 63 being cleared to "0". Furthermore, when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) is prohibited to a state in which generation is permitted (step S6219). This enables new execution of timer interrupt processing.

According to the above configuration, in addition to the effects described in the 20th embodiment, the following effects can be achieved.

The flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" when processing corresponding to non-specific control is started from a situation where processing corresponding to specific control is being executed. This eliminates the need to save information in the flag register used in the process corresponding to specific control to the main RAM 65 in a situation where the process corresponding to non-specific control is being executed. Therefore, there is no need to secure capacity for saving the information.

Furthermore, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" even when the process corresponding to the specific control is returned from the situation where the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed. Thereby, when returning to processing corresponding to specific control, it is possible to return the state of the flag register to the state immediately before the processing corresponding to non-specific control was started.

The state where the flag register is cleared to "0" is the state when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for setting the flag register to a predetermined state when starting processing corresponding to non-specific control and when returning to processing corresponding to specific control.

The information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started is information that is not used in the process corresponding to specific control after the process corresponding to non-specific control is finished. As a result, even if the flag register is cleared to "0" when the process corresponding to non-specific control is started, the process corresponding to specific control after the process corresponding to non-specific control is completed. It is possible to avoid any influence.

A predetermined storage area of the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", and the flag register is cleared to "0" by overwriting the information in the cleared storage area to "0" using a pop instruction. It is the composition. This makes it possible to clear the flag register to "0" even in a configuration where it is prohibited to directly clear the flag register to "0" by a load instruction.

Note that instead of the configuration in which the flag register is cleared to "0", a configuration in which the flag register is initialized may be used. In other words, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is once cleared to "0" and then information is set so that it is in the initial state. In S6204 and S6211, the flag register may be set so as to be in this initial state. In this case, by configuring the flag register to be set to the above-mentioned initial state in steps S6213 to S6218, the state of the flag register can be changed to non-specific control when returning to the process corresponding to specific control. It becomes possible to return to the state immediately before the processing corresponding to the start.

Further, instead of clearing the flag register of the main CPU 63 to "0" in steps S6202 to S6204 and step S6211, a structure may be adopted in which all flag registers are set to "1". In this case, all flag registers are set to "1" in steps S6213 to S6218, so that when returning to the process corresponding to specific control, the state of the flag register is changed to start the process corresponding to non-specific control. It is possible to restore the state to the state immediately before it occurred.

Further, instead of the processing in steps S6202 to S6204 and step S6211, the flag register of the main CPU 63 may be directly cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD PSW, 0". Further, instead of the processing in steps S6213 to S6218, the flag register of the main CPU 63 may be directly cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD PSW,0".

Further, instead of the configuration in which the processes of steps S6213 and S6218 are executed, a configuration may be adopted in which the HL register is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD HL,0". Even in this case, it is possible to restore the state of the HL register to the state immediately before the management execution process, which is a process corresponding to non-specific control, was executed.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the process of clearing the flag register to "0" is executed in the process corresponding to specific control, a configuration may be adopted in which the process to clear the flag register to "0" is executed in the process corresponding to non-specific control.

<27th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the above-mentioned 20th embodiment in the processing configuration of management processing. Hereinafter, the configuration that is different from the above-mentioned 20th embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the 20th embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing management processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step S6301 to step S6323 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) (step S6301). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is a process that corresponds to specific control, from being interrupted and started in the middle of the management execution process, which will be described later, which is a process that corresponds to non-specific control. becomes possible.

Thereafter, as "PUSH AF", a push instruction is used to store the information in the A register and the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control, which corresponds to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63. The data is saved in each of the areas and the storage area in the next writing order for the storage area (step S6302). Since the A register and flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an amount of information of 8 bits (1 byte), the information in the A register and the information in the flag register are separately stored for two storage areas with consecutive addresses. will be evacuated. Note that when the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area that is two storage areas later in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "POP HL", the HL register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information of the A register and the information of the flag register, which were saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6302, by a pop instruction (step S6303). . In this case, the information in the A register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the H register of the main CPU 63, and the information in the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the L register of the main CPU 63. The register will be overwritten. The H register and L register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). Note that when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, the A register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD A,0" (step S6304). Then, as "LD L, A", the information in the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the L register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S6305), and as "LD H, A", by the load instruction, The information in the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the H register of the main CPU 63 (step S6306). Since the A register was cleared to "0" in step S6304, by overwriting the information in the A register to each of the L and H registers, each of the L and H registers is cleared to "0". becomes.

After that, as "PUSH HL", the information in the HL register (i.e., H register and L register) of the main CPU 63 is made to correspond to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. The data is saved in each of the storage areas and the storage areas in the next writing order for the storage area (step S6307). Since the H register and L register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information in the H register and the information in the L register are separately stored for two storage areas with consecutive addresses. will be evacuated. Note that when the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area that is two storage areas later in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, the BC register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD BC, 0" (step S6308). Further, as "LD DE, 0", the DE register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S6309). Further, as "LD IX, 0", the IX register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S6310). Further, as "LD IY, 0", the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S6311).

In addition to the flag register, the registers of the main CPU 63 include various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. In this case, in steps S6308 to S6311, the BC register, DE register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of these various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, are cleared to "0". Furthermore, the HL register is cleared to "0" in steps S6305 and S6306. These BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in management execution processing (step S6313), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control. By clearing such registers to "0" prior to execution of the management execution process (step S6313), which is the process corresponding to non-specific control, the state of these registers can be changed before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started. In addition, it is possible to create a state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

In addition, each information of the BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started is used for specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is finished. This information is unnecessary in the corresponding process. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to "0" without being saved, no problem will occur in the process corresponding to the specific control that is returned after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

Thereafter, as "POP AF", the information in the H register and the information in the L register, which were saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6307, are overwritten in the A register and flag register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction ( Step S6312). In this case, the information in the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the A register of the main CPU 63, and the information in the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is used as the flag of the main CPU 63. The register will be overwritten. Since the information in the H register and the information in the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control are all "0" information, the A register of the main CPU 63 is At the same time, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0". This makes it possible to set the state of the flag register to the state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started. Note that when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, by reading the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program, the management execution process is started (step S6313). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written to the specific control stack area 222 by a push command. When the management execution process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management process indicated by the return address.

Note that after the check process is completed in the management execution process, the BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are cleared to "0". As a result, these registers will be cleared to "0" before returning from processing corresponding to non-specific control to processing corresponding to specific control, and the state of these registers will be cleared before returning to processing corresponding to specific control. It is possible to create a state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

When returning to the program for management processing after execution of the management execution processing, processing for clearing the flag register of the main CPU 63 to "0" is executed. Specifically, first, the information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the stack area 222 for specific control using a push command as "PUSH HL" (step S6314). After execution of the push instruction, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is changed to the information corresponding to the storage area of the next write order in the storage area where the information of the HL register has been saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Become.

Thereafter, as "PUSH AF", a push instruction is used to store the information in the A register and the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control, which corresponds to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63. The storage area and the storage area are saved to each storage area in the next writing order (step S6315). Since the A register and flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an amount of information of 8 bits (1 byte), the information in the A register and the information in the flag register are separately stored for two storage areas with consecutive addresses. Evacuated. Note that when the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area that is two storage areas later in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "POP HL", the HL register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information of the A register and the information of the flag register, which were saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6315, by a pop instruction (step S6316). . In this case, the information in the A register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the H register of the main CPU 63, and the information in the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the L register of the main CPU 63. The register will be overwritten. The H register and L register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). Note that when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, the A register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD A,0" (step S6317). Then, as "LD L, A", the information in the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the L register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S6318), and as "LD H, A", by the load instruction, The information in the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the H register of the main CPU 63 (step S6319). Since the A register was cleared to "0" in step S6317, by overwriting the information in the A register to each of the L and H registers, each of the L and H registers is cleared to "0". becomes.

After that, as "PUSH HL", the information in the HL register (i.e., H register and L register) of the main CPU 63 is made to correspond to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. The data is saved in each of the storage areas and the storage areas in the next writing order for the storage area (step S6320). Since the H register and L register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information in the H register and the information in the L register are separately stored for two storage areas with consecutive addresses. will be evacuated. Note that when the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area that is two storage areas later in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "POP AF", the information in the H register and the information in the L register, which were saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6320, are overwritten on the A register and flag register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction ( Step S6321). In this case, the information in the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the A register of the main CPU 63, and the information in the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is used as the flag of the main CPU 63. The register will be overwritten. Since the information in the H register and the information in the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control are all "0" information, the A register of the main CPU 63 is At the same time, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0". By clearing the flag register to "0" after executing the management execution process (step S6313), which is the process corresponding to non-specific control, the state of the flag register is changed to "0" by the main CPU 63 after the process corresponding to non-specific control is completed. It becomes possible to set the state immediately after the supply of operating power to is started. Note that when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, the information in the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6314 is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction as "POP HL" (step S6322). Note that since the HL register is cleared to "0" immediately before the end of the management execution process (step S6313), the information cleared to "0" is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6314. At the same time, in step S6322, the information cleared to "0" is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63, resulting in the HL register of the main CPU 63 being cleared to "0". Furthermore, when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted (step S6323). This enables new execution of timer interrupt processing.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to clear the flag register of the main CPU 63 to "0" without executing the process of clearing a predetermined storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control to "0" by a load instruction. becomes. This makes it possible to clear the flag register of the main CPU 63 to "0" even in a configuration where it is restricted to clear "0" to a predetermined storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control using a load command. becomes possible.

Note that instead of the configuration in which the flag register is cleared to "0", a configuration in which the flag register is initialized may be used. In other words, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is once cleared to "0" and then information is set so that it is in the initial state. In S6307 and S6312, the flag register may be set so as to be in this initial state. In this case, by configuring the flag register to be set to the above-mentioned initial state in steps S6314 to S6322, the state of the flag register can be changed to non-specific control when returning to the process corresponding to specific control. It becomes possible to return to the state immediately before the processing corresponding to the start.

Furthermore, instead of clearing the flag register of the main CPU 63 to "0" in steps S6302 to S6307 and step S6312, a structure may be adopted in which all flag registers are set to "1". In this case, by setting "1" in all flag registers in steps S6314 to S6322, when returning to the process corresponding to specific control, the state of the flag register is changed to start the process corresponding to non-specific control. It is possible to return to the state immediately before the change.

Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the processes in steps S6302 and S6303 are not executed. In this case, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the processes in step S6315 and step S6316 are not executed. In this case, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Also, instead of the configuration that executes the processing of steps S6302 to S6306, the HL register is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD HL, 0", and then the HL register cleared to "0" is cleared to "0" by a push instruction. The flag register of the main CPU 63 may be cleared to "0" by saving the information to the stack area 222 for specific control and then returning the saved information to the AF register using a pop instruction.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the process of clearing the flag register to "0" is executed in the process corresponding to specific control, a configuration may be adopted in which the process to clear the flag register to "0" is executed in the process corresponding to non-specific control.

<28th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fifteenth embodiment described above in the processing configuration of management processing. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifteenth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as in the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing management processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step S6401 to step S6416 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) (step S6401). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is a process that corresponds to specific control, from being interrupted and activated in the middle of the management execution process, which will be described later, which is a process that corresponds to non-specific control. becomes possible.

After that, as "PUSH WA", the information in the WA register (i.e., W register and A register) of the main CPU 63 is made to correspond to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. The data is saved in each of the storage areas and the storage areas in the next writing order for the storage area (step S6402). Since the W register and A register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information in the W register and A register is saved individually to two storage areas with consecutive addresses. Ru. Note that when the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area that is two storage areas later in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the A register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction as "LD A, PSW" (step S6403). In this case, the information amount of both the flag register and the A register is 8 bits (1 byte). Then, as "LD (_FGBUF), A", the information in the A register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the FG buffer set in the work area 221 for specific control by a load instruction (step S6404). Since the A register has been overwritten with the information of the flag register in step S6403, the information of the flag register is saved in the work area 221 for specific control by executing step S6404.

Thereafter, as "POP WA", the information in the WA register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6402 is restored to the WA register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction (step S6405). As a result, even if the A register is used to save flag register information to the specific control work area 221, it is possible to restore the state of the A register to the state before the save was performed. Become. Note that when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, by reading the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program, the management execution process is started (step S6406). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written to the specific control stack area 222 by a push command. When the management execution process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management process indicated by the return address.

Note that the processing contents of the management execution process are the same as the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment. Therefore, before the check process is started in the management execution process, the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the work area 223 for non-specific control. At the same time, each piece of information saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control after the check process is completed in the management execution process is stored in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63. will be reinstated. This makes it possible to keep the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 in the same state before and after the check process.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing content of the management execution process may be the same as the management execution process (FIG. 78) in the seventeenth embodiment, and may be the same as the management execution process in the eighteenth embodiment. (FIG. 79), or may be the same configuration as the management execution process (FIG. 80) in the nineteenth embodiment.

When returning to the management processing program after execution of the management execution processing, processing is executed to return the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 to the state before the management execution processing was executed. In detail, first, the information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the stack area 222 for specific control using a push command as "PUSH HL" (step S6407). After execution of the push instruction, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is changed to the information corresponding to the storage area of the next write order in the storage area where the information of the HL register was saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Become.

Thereafter, the information in the WA register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the specific control stack area 222 by a push command as "PUSH WA" (step S6408). After execution of the push instruction, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is changed to the information corresponding to the storage area of the next write order in the storage area where the information of the WA register has been saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Become.

Thereafter, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction as "LD HL, SP" (step S6409). In this case, the amount of information in the stack pointer is 16 bits, and the amount of information in each of the H register and L register is 8 bits, so 8 bits of information from the upper side of the stack pointer are stored in the H register. The L register is overwritten with consecutive 8-bit information from the lower side of the stack pointer.

Thereafter, as "LD A, (_FGBUF)", the information of the flag register saved in the FG buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S6406 is overwritten in the A register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction (step S6410). Then, as "LD (HL), A", a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the stack pointer information stored in the HL register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is stored on the main side by a load instruction. The information in the A register of the CPU 63 is stored (step S6411). As a result, the information in the flag register saved in the FG buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S6404 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "LD SP, SP-1", the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the next order in the stack area 222 for specific control by a load instruction. (Step S6412). When using the stack area 222 for specific control, information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 222 for specific control, and each time information to be stored is added, information for specific control is stored. The storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 222 of . Therefore, in step S6412, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address corresponding to the storage area with the smaller address by one in the stack area 222 for specific control. By executing the process in step S6412, the next storage area in the storage area where the information in the A register was saved in step S6411 is set as the storage target for information by the next push command, and The storage area in which the information in the A register is saved in S6411 is set as the information read target by the next pop instruction.

Thereafter, as "POP PSW", information is read from the storage area in the previous writing order with respect to the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a pop instruction, The read information is overwritten in the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S6413). The information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 immediately before the pop instruction in step S6413 is executed is the information corresponding to the storage area in the next writing order for the storage area where the information in the A register was saved in step S6411. It has become. Therefore, the storage area in the write order immediately before the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is the storage area in which the information of the A register was saved in step S6411. area. Then, by overwriting the flag register of the main CPU 63 with the information read from this storage area, the information in the flag register saved in the FG buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S6404 becomes the flag of the main CPU 63. It will be returned to the register. Note that when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area whose write order in the stack area 222 for specific control is one previous.

Thereafter, as "POP WA", the information in the WA register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6408 is restored to the WA register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction (step S6414). Note that when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control. Furthermore, as "POP HL", the information in the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6407 is restored to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction (step S6415). Note that when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) is prohibited to a state in which generation is permitted (step S6416). This enables new execution of timer interrupt processing.

According to the above configuration, when processing corresponding to non-specific control is started from a situation where processing corresponding to specific control is being executed, information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is stored in the stack area 222 for specific control instead of in the stack area 222 for specific control. It becomes possible to save it to the work area 221 for specific control. When the process corresponding to the specific control is returned from the situation where the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed, the information in the flag register saved in the work area 221 for specific control is used as the flag of the main CPU 63. Returned to register. As a result, information can be restored from the storage area of the work area 221 for specific control designated on the program to the flag register of the main CPU 63 without referring to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63. Even if the information in the stack pointer of the side CPU 63 is rewritten due to noise or the like, it is possible to restore the information to the flag register of the main side CPU 63.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the process of saving the information in the flag register to the main side RAM 65 is executed in the process corresponding to specific control, a configuration may be adopted in which the process is executed in the process corresponding to non-specific control. Also, instead of the configuration in which the process of restoring the information of the flag register saved in the main side RAM 65 to the flag register of the main side CPU 63 is executed in the process corresponding to specific control, it is executed in the process corresponding to non-specific control. It may also be configured to be executed.

<29th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fifteenth embodiment described above in the processing configuration of management processing. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifteenth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as in the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing management processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step S6501 to step S6519 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit generation of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) (step S6501). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is a process that corresponds to specific control, from being interrupted and started in the middle of the management execution process, which will be described later, which is a process that corresponds to non-specific control. becomes possible.

After that, as "PUSH HL", the information in the HL register (i.e., H register and L register) of the main CPU 63 is made to correspond to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. The data is saved in each of the storage areas and the storage areas in the next writing order for the storage area (step S6502). Since the H register and L register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information in the H register and L register is saved individually to two storage areas with consecutive addresses. Ru. Note that when the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area that is two storage areas later in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "PUSH AF", a push instruction is used to store the information in the A register and the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control, which corresponds to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63. The area and the storage area in the next writing order are saved (step S6503). Since the A register and flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an amount of information of 8 bits (1 byte), the information in the A register and the information in the flag register are separately stored for two storage areas with consecutive addresses. Evacuated. Note that when the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area that is two storage areas later in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "POP HL", the HL register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information of the A register and the information of the flag register, which were saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6503, by a pop instruction (step S6504). . In this case, the information in the A register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the H register of the main CPU 63, and the information in the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the L register of the main CPU 63. The register will be overwritten. Note that when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, the information in the L register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the A register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction as "LD A,L" (step S6505). Since the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the L register in step S6504, by overwriting the information in the L register in the A register, the information in the flag register is overwritten in the A register. Become. Then, as "LD (_FGBUF), A", the information in the A register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the FG buffer set in the work area 221 for specific control by a load instruction (step S6506). Since the A register has been overwritten with the information of the flag register in step S6505, the information of the flag register is saved in the work area 221 for specific control by executing step S6506.

After that, as "PUSH HL", the information in the HL register (i.e., H register and L register) of the main CPU 63 is made to correspond to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. The data is saved in each of the storage areas and the storage areas in the next writing order for the storage area (step S6507). In this case, since the HL register has been overwritten with the information of the A register and the information of the flag register in step S6504, the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are saved to the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6507. It means that I let him do it. Note that when the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area that is two storage areas later in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "POP AF", the information in the H register and the information in the L register, which were saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6507, are overwritten in the A register and flag register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction ( Step S6508). In this case, the information in the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the A register of the main CPU 63, and the information in the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is used as the flag of the main CPU 63. The register will be overwritten. The information in the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is the information in the A register at the time of step S6503, and the information in the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is the flag at the time in step S6503. This is register information. Therefore, by executing the process of step S6508, the states of the A register and flag register of the main CPU 63 are returned to the states at the time of step S6503. Note that when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, the information in the HL register saved in the specific control stack area 222 in step S6502 is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction as "POP HL" (step S6509). As a result, the state of the HL register of the main CPU 63 returns to the state at step S6502. Note that when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, by reading the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program, the management execution process is started (step S6510). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written to the specific control stack area 222 by a push command. When the management execution process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management process indicated by the return address.

In addition, in the management execution process, before the check process is started, each information of the BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the work area 223 for non-specific control, and After the check process is completed in the management execution process, the information saved in the non-specific control work area 223 is returned to the BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63. This makes it possible to keep the BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 in the same state before and after the check process.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing content of the management execution process may be the same as the management execution process (FIG. 78) in the seventeenth embodiment, and may be the same as the management execution process in the eighteenth embodiment. (FIG. 79), or may be the same configuration as the management execution process (FIG. 80) in the nineteenth embodiment.

When returning to the management processing program after execution of the management execution processing, processing is executed to return the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 to the state before the management execution processing was executed. Specifically, first, the information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command as "PUSH HL" (step S6511). After execution of the push instruction, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is changed to the information corresponding to the storage area of the next write order in the storage area where the information of the HL register has been saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Become.

After that, as "PUSH AF", a push command is used to store the information in the A register and the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control, corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63. The data is saved to each of the storage areas and the storage areas in the next writing order for the storage area (step S6512). Since the A register and flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an amount of information of 8 bits (1 byte), the information in the A register and the information in the flag register are separately stored for two storage areas with consecutive addresses. Evacuated. Note that when the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places later in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "POP HL", the HL register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information of the A register and the information of the flag register, which were saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6512, by a pop instruction (step S6513). . In this case, the information in the A register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the H register of the main CPU 63, and the information in the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the L register of the main CPU 63. The register will be overwritten. Note that when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "LD A, (_FGBUF)", the information in the flag register at the time of step S6503, which was saved in the FG buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S6506, is transferred to the A register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction. (step S6514). Then, as "LDL, A", the information in the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the L register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction (step S6515). Since the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 at the time of step S6503 has been restored to the A register in step S6514, by overwriting the information of the A register to the L register, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 at the time of step S6503 is restored to the L register. The information in the flag register will be overwritten.

After that, as "PUSH HL", the information in the HL register (i.e., H register and L register) of the main CPU 63 is made to correspond to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. The data is saved in each of the storage areas and the storage areas in the next writing order for the storage area (step S6516). In this case, since the information in the A register at the time of step S6512 is overwritten in the H register in step S6513, the information in the A register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6516. Become. Furthermore, since the information in the flag register at the time of step S6503 is overwritten in the L register in step S6515, the information in the flag register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6516.

Thereafter, as "POP AF", the information in the H register and the information in the L register, which were saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6516, are overwritten in the A register and flag register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction ( Step S6517). In this case, the information in the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the A register of the main CPU 63, and the information in the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is used as the flag of the main CPU 63. The register will be overwritten. The information in the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is the information in the A register at the time of step S6512, and the information in the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is the flag at the time in step S6503. This is register information. Therefore, by executing the process of step S6517, the state of the A register of the main CPU 63 returns to the state of step S6512, and the state of the flag register returns to the state at step S6503.

Incidentally, the A register of the main CPU 63 is not used in the management execution process. Therefore, the state of the A register at the time of step S6512 is the state of the A register at the time of step S6508, and the state of the A register at the time of step S6508 is the state of the A register at the time of step S6503. Therefore, by executing the process of step S6517, the states of the A register and flag register of the main CPU 63 are returned to the states at the time of step S6503. Note that when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "POP HL", the information in the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6511 is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction (step S6518). As a result, the state of the HL register of the main CPU 63 returns to the state at step S6511. Note that when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted (step S6519). This enables new execution of timer interrupt processing.

According to the above configuration, information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 can be stored without directly overwriting the information of the flag register from the flag register of the main CPU 63 onto other registers of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction. can be saved to the work area 221 for specific control.

Note that the information in the flag register is overwritten by the load instruction as "LD (_FGBUF), L" after executing the process in step S6504 instead of executing the processes in steps S6505 to S6508. By saving the information in the L register to the FG buffer, the information in the flag register may be saved in the work area 221 for specific control.

In addition, without executing the processing in steps S6514 and S6515, instead, after executing the processing in step S6513, a work area for specific control is created as "LDL, (_FGBUF)" by a load command. The configuration may be such that the information in the flag register saved in 221 is overwritten in the L register.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the process of saving the information in the flag register to the main side RAM 65 is executed in the process corresponding to specific control, a configuration may be adopted in which it is executed in the process corresponding to non-specific control. Also, instead of the configuration in which the process of restoring the information in the flag register saved in the main side RAM 65 to the flag register of the main side CPU 63 is executed in the process corresponding to specific control, it is executed in the process corresponding to non-specific control. It may also be configured to be executed.

<Thirtieth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fifteenth embodiment described above in the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifteenth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as in the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step S6601 to step S6621 in the main process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S6601). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed after the main process is started. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S6602).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S6603). If the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S6603: YES), a checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step S6604).

The checksum can be calculated in any way, but for example, a calculation method that adds all the numerical values in the storage area that is the target of the checksum calculation is exemplified. The method for calculating this checksum is the same as the method for calculating the checksum in power outage processing, which will be described later. The checksum calculated in the power outage process described later will be stored in the work area 221 for specific control. It is excluded from the storage area subject to calculation.

That is, when calculating the checksum, some storage areas in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are subject to calculation. In the storage area to be calculated, a checksum is calculated in the power outage processing when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, and then the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is resumed and the process of step S6604 is executed. This storage area is basically a storage area where information is not rewritten if power supply such as backup power is continued to the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control until the specific control work area 221 and the stack area 222 for specific control are continued. Therefore, the information in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is not changed after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped until the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is restarted. In this case, the checksums for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are the same as those immediately before the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped. Note that the storage area to be calculated when calculating this checksum includes an area where setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control (specifically, a setting value counter )It is included.

Thereafter, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area for specific control that were calculated in the power outage process executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 was stopped and saved in the work area 221 for specific control. The checksum for 222 is read from the specific control work area 221, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step S6604 (step S6605). Then, it is determined whether these checksums match (step S6606).

Here, the power outage information storage process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 101. Note that the power outage information storage process is executed in step S6801 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103), which will be described later.

In the power outage information storage process, first, the repetition counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "10", which is information on the number of repetitions for the power outage signal (step S6701), and the work area 221 for specific control is 221 is cleared to "0" (step S6702).

Thereafter, a process of reading information on the power outage signal received at the input port of the MPU 62 is executed (step S6703). In this case, if a power outage signal (LOW level power outage signal) corresponding to the fact that a power outage has not occurred is received, information of "0" is stored in the input port as non-power outage information. When a power outage signal (HI level power outage signal) corresponding to the occurrence of a power outage is being received, information of "1" is stored in the input port as power outage occurrence information. In step S6703, a process is executed to read information on the power outage signal into the register of the main CPU 63.

If the information on the power outage signal read in step S6703 corresponds to the occurrence of a power outage (occurrence of power outage) (step S6704: YES), 1 is added to the numerical information of the power outage detection counter (step S6705). If a negative determination is made in step S6704 or if the process in step S6705 is executed, the numerical information of the repetition counter is subtracted by 1 (step S6706). Then, it is determined whether the numerical information of the repetition counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S6707). If a negative determination is made in step S6707, the process returns to step S6703 and repeats the processing of steps S6703 to S6706. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6707, the process advances to step S6708.

In step S6708, it is determined whether the current numerical information of the power outage detection counter is greater than or equal to the trigger reference number of times corresponding to the occurrence of a power outage. If it is less than the trigger reference number of times, the main power outage information storage process is ended. On the other hand, if the number of times is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, the power outage processing in steps S6709 to S6712 is executed.

Specifically, first, a power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6709). As a result, if power outage processing is executed normally and information is stored and retained in the main side RAM 65 normally, when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is restarted, the specific control This means that the power outage flag of the work area 221 is set to "1".

After that, a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step S6710). In this case, the storage areas in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, which are the targets of calculation when calculating the checksum, become the targets of checksum calculation in step S6604 of the main process (FIG. 100). This is the same storage area as the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. In addition, the storage area to be calculated when calculating this checksum is an area in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control (specifically, a setting value counter )It is included. Then, the calculated checksum is stored in a storage area for storing the checksum in the specific control work area 221, which is excluded from the checksum calculation target.

Thereafter, all output port information in the register of the main CPU 63 is set to "0" (step S6711), and access to the main RAM 65 is prohibited (step S6712). Then, the infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.

Note that by executing the power outage information storage process as the first process of the timer interrupt process, there is no need to execute the timer interrupt process from the middle after power is restored. This eliminates the need to store the address of the process being executed at the time of a power outage in the main RAM 65 as stack information, making it possible to reduce the processing load of the process at the time of a power outage.

Returning to the explanation of the main processing (FIG. 100), if a negative determination is made in step S6603 or step S6606, clear processing at the time of non-setting update is executed (step S6607). In the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, in the work area 221 for specific control, excluding the area where setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (specifically, the setting value counter), the specific control Clears the work area 221 to "0" and executes initial settings. As a result, the area indicating whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the win/fail lottery is performed regardless of the win/fail lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game cycle is not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general figure display section 38a is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in a closed state. situation. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display section 37a is erased and the general figure display section The pending information for 38a is deleted. Further, in the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial setting is executed. Furthermore, in the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, initial settings are executed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0".

On the other hand, in the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control will be set to "0" even if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not executed normally. It is possible to prevent it from being cleared. In addition, even if an abnormality occurs regarding the checksum of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to "0". It is possible to prevent this from happening.

If a negative determination is made in step S6603 or step S6606, after executing the clearing process at the time of non-setting update in step S6607, the pachinko machine can be updated by checking the value of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control. It is determined whether the set value of 10 is normal (step S6608). Specifically, if the setting value set in the setting value counter is one of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or 7 or more, it is determined to be abnormal. It is determined that there is. If the set value is abnormal (step S6608: NO), processing for newly setting the set value (steps S6619 to S6621), which will be described later, is executed. This makes it possible to monitor whether the set value is normal even if a negative determination is made in step S6603 or step S6606 and the clearing process (step S6607) is executed when the setting is not updated. At the same time, if the set value is abnormal, it becomes possible to reset the set value.

If the set value is normal (step S6608: YES), power-on setting processing is executed (step S6609). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the work area 221 for specific control such as initialization of a power outage flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81.

Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited at the stage when main processing is started. This state in which generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is canceled at a timing when the process in step S6609 is completed and before the process in step S6610 is executed, and execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the power-on setting process in step S6609 is completed and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process in step S6610 is started. Therefore, the main CPU 63 will not start the process for advancing the game until the situation is reached.

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps S6610 to S6613. In other words, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process from step S6610 to step S6613 is repeatedly executed using this irregular time. In this respect, the remaining processing of steps S6610 to S6613 can be said to be non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly. In steps S6610 to S6613, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, if the power outage flag in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1", or the checksums do not match. In this case, after executing the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, if the set value is normal (step S6608: YES), the process moves to a process for advancing the game. As a result, even if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not executed normally, the power can be turned on again after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 has started. There is no need to perform an OFF operation. Furthermore, even if an abnormality occurs regarding the checksum of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, the power can be turned on and off again after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. No operation required.

If an affirmative determination is made in both step S6603 and step S6606, it is determined whether the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal by checking the value of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control (step S6614 ). Specifically, if the setting value set in the setting value counter is one of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or 7 or more, it is determined to be abnormal. It is determined that there is. If the set value is abnormal (step S6614: NO), processing for newly setting the set value (steps S6619 to S6621), which will be described later, is executed.

If the set value is normal (step S6614: YES), it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed (step S6615), and whether the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on using the setting key. It is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 (step S6617), and it is determined whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11. It is determined whether there is one (step S6618).

In this embodiment, a front door open sensor 95 for detecting whether or not the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 is electrically connected to the main side CPU 63. The detection result of 95 is input to the main CPU 63. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closure detection signal to the main CPU 63, and the front door frame 14 is in the open state with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door open sensor 95 transmits an open detection signal to the main CPU 63. The main side CPU 63 identifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, and when receiving the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. It is specified that the front door frame 14 is in an open state.

Further, in this embodiment, a main body open sensor 96 for detecting whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11 is electrically connected to the main side CPU 63. The detection result of 96 is input to the main CPU 63. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits a closure detection signal to the main side CPU 63, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body open sensor 96 transmits an open detection signal to the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state when it receives a closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state when it receives an opening detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96. It is determined that the main body 12 is in an open state.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S6615: NO), the power-on setting process is executed in step S6609, and then the remaining processes in steps S6610 to S6613 are repeated. In other words, if the reset button 68c is not pressed, the process shifts to the process for controlling the progress of the game without executing the process of clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. .

If the reset button 68c is pressed (step S6615: YES) and a negative determination is made in any of steps S6616 to S6618, after executing the clearing process at the time of non-setting update (step S6607 ), and on the condition that the set value is normal (step S6608: YES), the process moves to the processing for controlling the progress of the game from step S6609 onwards. The contents of the clearing process at the time of non-setting update are as already described.

If the reset button 68c is pressed (step S6615: YES) and all of steps S6616 to S6618 are answered in the affirmative, processing for updating the set value is executed. Further, even if it is determined in step S6608 or step S6614 that the set value is abnormal, processing for updating the set value is executed.

Specifically, first, a setting value copying process is executed (step S6619). In the copy process, information of a setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. . As a result, even if the setting value counter information is cleared to "0" in the setting value update clearing process (step S6620) to be executed subsequently, the information in the setting value counter before the setting value updating clearing process is executed. It becomes possible to grasp the set value of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped).

Thereafter, a clearing process when updating settings is executed (step S6620). In the clearing process when updating the settings, the work area 221 for specific control is set to "0", except for the area indicating whether the win/fail lottery mode in the work area 221 for specific control is the high probability mode and the above-mentioned copy area. ” and perform the initial settings. As a result, the game cycle is not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general figure display section 38a is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. A certain situation arises. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display section 37a is erased and the general figure display section The pending information for 38a is deleted. Further, in the clearing process when updating settings, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed. Furthermore, in the clearing process when updating the settings, a setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is cleared to "0". Furthermore, in the clearing process when updating settings, initial settings are executed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0".

On the other hand, in the clearing process when updating the settings, the area indicating whether the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode is not cleared to "0", so even if the setting value updating process (step S6621) is executed, the winning lottery mode It becomes possible to maintain the mode in which the pachinko machine 10 was in the mode before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped. Furthermore, since the copy area is not cleared to "0" in the clearing process when updating the settings, it becomes possible to specify the setting value that was set before the clearing process when updating the settings. Note that the configuration is not limited to the above configuration, and a configuration may be adopted in which the setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is not cleared to "0" in the clearing process when updating the settings, and In the clearing process, an area indicating whether the win/fail lottery mode is a high probability mode may be cleared to "0".

In the clearing process when updating settings, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if a setting value update process that can change the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". It becomes possible to do so.

Thereafter, setting value update processing is executed in step S6621. The contents of the setting value update process are the same as the setting value update process (FIG. 85) in the twenty-second embodiment. After executing the setting value update process, the process moves to the process for controlling the progress of the game starting from step S6609.

According to the above configuration, when the set value is abnormal, the set value update process is started without requiring any special operation by the administrator of the gaming hall. Then, when the setting value update process is completed, the process shifts to a process for controlling the progress of the game. This allows the game to be played in a situation where the settings are set to normal values. On the other hand, in order to complete the setting value update process, it is necessary to perform an OFF operation using the setting key on the setting key insertion section 68a, so the setting value may be set without permission by someone other than the administrator of the game hall and the game may be started. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of such events.

Next, a configuration for forcibly stopping the progress of the game when the main CPU 63 is unable to perform various processes normally will be described. FIG. 102(a) is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of the MPU 62.

As shown in FIG. 102(a), the MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, and a main RAM 65, as well as a reset signal output section 251 and a program monitoring section 252. The reset signal output section 251 has a function of outputting a reset signal to the main CPU 63. Specifically, the reset signal output unit 251 outputs the reset signal to the main side as a HI level signal when operating power is supplied from the power supply/launch control device 78 and the output disabling condition is not satisfied. A reset signal is output to the CPU 63, and a reset signal is output to the main CPU 63 when operating power is not supplied from the power supply/launch control device 78, or when an output disable condition is satisfied even when operating power is supplied. Do not output to . The main CPU 63 executes various processes when operating power is supplied from the power source/launch control device 78 and receives a reset signal from the reset signal output section 251, and Even if operating power is being supplied, various processes are not executed if a reset signal is not received from the reset signal output section 251. Furthermore, when the main CPU 63 is supplied with operating power from the power supply/launch control device 78 and switches from not receiving a reset signal from the reset signal output unit 251 to receiving a reset signal, The main process (FIG. 100) is started.

The program monitoring unit 252 has a function of monitoring whether or not the main CPU 63 is in a state where various processes can be performed normally. Specifically, the program monitoring unit 252 monitors whether the value of the program counter provided in the main CPU 63 is an abnormal value. The program counter is for storing an address where an instruction to be executed by the main CPU 63 is stored. The possible values of the program counter are determined, and the program monitoring unit 252 monitors whether the value of the program counter is a value other than the possible values. Furthermore, when writing information to the specific control work area 221 by a load command, the program monitoring unit 252 monitors whether the address specified as the write destination area is an abnormal address. Note that the program monitoring unit 252 may be configured to monitor whether or not the address specified as the area to be read is an abnormal address when information is read from the specific control work area 221 by a load command.

When the program monitoring section 252 determines that the value of the program counter is an abnormal value or when determining that the address specified when writing information by a load instruction is an abnormal address, the reset signal output section 251 Outputs a monitoring abnormality signal. When the reset signal output unit 251 receives a monitoring abnormality signal from the program monitoring unit 252, it temporarily stops outputting the reset signal and continues the stop even if operating power is supplied from the power source/launch control device 78. After stopping the output of the reset signal for a period of time, the output of the reset signal is restarted. The stop duration period is a period sufficient for the main CPU 63 to identify that the output of the reset signal is stopped. As a result, if the value of the program counter becomes an abnormal value, or if the address specified when writing information by a load instruction becomes an abnormal address, the main CPU 63 The main processing will be executed.

FIG. 102(b) is a time chart showing how the reset signal output section 251 outputs the reset signal. 102(b1) shows a period in which operating power is supplied from the power source/launch control device 78, FIG. 102(b2) shows a period in which a reset signal is output from the reset signal output section 251, and FIG. b3) indicates the timing at which a monitoring abnormality signal is output from the program monitoring section 252.

First, to explain the case where a monitoring abnormality signal is not output from the program monitoring unit 252, the supply of operating power from the power source/launch control device 78 to the MPU 62 is started at timing t1 as shown in FIG. , t2, the reset signal output section 251 starts outputting the reset signal as shown in FIG. 102(b). Thereafter, the supply of operating power from the power source/launch control device 78 to the MPU 62 is stopped as shown in FIG. 102(b1) at timing t3, and reset is performed as shown in FIG. 102(b2) at timing t4. The output of the reset signal from the signal output section 251 is stopped.

Next, to explain the case where a monitoring abnormality signal is output from the program monitoring unit 252, the supply of operating power from the power supply/launch control device 78 to the MPU 62 is started at timing t5 as shown in FIG. 102 (b1). As a result, output of the reset signal from the reset signal output unit 251 is started at timing t6 as shown in FIG. 102(b). After that, at timing t7, the value of the program counter becomes an abnormal value or the address specified when writing information by a load instruction becomes an abnormal address, so that the program is monitored as shown in FIG. 102 (b3). A monitoring abnormality signal is output from the section 252 to the reset signal output section 251. As a result, as shown in FIG. 102(b2), the output of the reset signal from the reset signal output section 251 is temporarily stopped at timing t7, and resumed at the subsequent timing t8.

In this case, the main CPU 63 stops executing various processes at timing t7, and starts main processing (FIG. 100) at timing t8, which is the timing at which the rise of the reset signal is confirmed. However, since the power outage process is not executed when the execution of various processes of the main CPU 63 is stopped, the main process (FIG. 100) is executed in a situation where the power outage flag in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1". At the same time, the main processing (FIG. 100) is started without saving the checksums for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. Therefore, in the main processing (FIG. 100), a negative determination is made in step S6603 or step S6606, and a clearing process (step S6607) at the time of non-setting update is executed. As a result, when a monitoring abnormality signal is output from the program monitoring unit 252 because the value of the program counter becomes an abnormal value or the address specified when writing information by a load command becomes an abnormal address, It becomes possible to perform a clearing process at the time of non-setting update, in which a predetermined storage area of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". .

However, in the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if a monitoring abnormality signal is output from the program monitoring unit 252 because the value of the program counter becomes an abnormal value or the address specified when writing information by a load command becomes an abnormal address, it will not occur. It is possible to prevent the work area 223 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0".

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 102(b), thereafter, as shown in FIG. 102(b1) at timing t9, the supply of operating power from the power source/launch control device 78 to the MPU 62 is stopped, and at timing t10. As shown in FIG. 102(b2), output of the reset signal from the reset signal output section 251 is stopped.

Next, the timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 103. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) while the processes of steps S6610 to S6613 are being executed in the main process (FIG. 100). Note that the program corresponding to timer interrupt processing is set as a specific control program.

Steps S6801 to S6819 execute the same processes as steps S5201 to S5219 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86) in the twenty-second embodiment. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data. Thereafter, setting monitoring processing is executed (step S6820). FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the setting monitoring process.

By checking the value of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control, it is determined whether the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal (step S6901). Specifically, if the setting value set in the setting value counter is one of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or 7 or more, it is determined to be abnormal. It is determined that there is.

If the set value is abnormal (step S6901: NO), a copy process of the set value is executed (step S6902). In the copy process, information of a setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. . Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 before execution of the setting value update process to be executed thereafter.

Thereafter, an abnormality command indicating that a setting value abnormality has occurred is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step S6903). Upon receiving the abnormality command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the set value abnormality, and also causes the speaker unit 54 to emit a voice saying "An abnormality in the set value has been detected." Output. Further, the symbol display device 41 displays a text image saying "An abnormality in the set value has been detected." These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the administrator of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By checking the above-mentioned notification, the manager of the game hall can understand that a set value abnormality has occurred.

Thereafter, setting value update processing is executed (step S6904). In other words, each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103) is executed, it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the set value, and if a set value abnormality is identified, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is reset. Execute setting value update processing to do this. The contents of the setting value update process are the same as the setting value update process (FIG. 85) in the twenty-second embodiment. Therefore, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated by one step, and the currently selected set value is determined by detecting a game ball with the exit detection sensor 48a. The setting values that are being updated and the set values that have been finalized are displayed on the third notification display device 69c. Thereafter, when the setting key insertion section 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, it is determined that the termination condition for the setting value update process is satisfied. After executing the setting value update process, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103).

Here, in the setting value update process, it is not determined that the termination condition is satisfied just because the setting key insertion section 68a is in the OFF state, but when the setting key insertion section 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. If this happens, it is determined that the termination condition has been met. When the setting value update process is executed in the setting monitoring process, since the setting key insertion section 68a is in the OFF state at the start of the setting value update process, in order to satisfy the termination condition of the setting value update process, It is necessary to insert a setting key into the setting key insertion section 68a, turn it on once, and then turn it off. This makes it possible to prevent the setting value update process from ending even though the administrator of the gaming hall has not performed a regular operation.

When the setting key insertion section 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state and the termination condition for the setting value update process is satisfied, step S5111 in the setting value update process (FIG. 85) is executed. It is compared whether the set value stored in the copy area in the work area 221 for specific control and the set value currently set in the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control are the same. That is, it is determined whether or not the setting value that was set before the setting value update process (step S6904) was executed is the same as the setting value that was set in the current setting value update process. If both setting values are the same (step S5112: NO), the setting maintenance notification described above is performed by executing the process for notification when no change is made (step S5113). On the other hand, if the two setting values are different (step S5112: YES), the setting change notification described above is performed by executing the process for notification at the time of change (step S5114).

In a configuration in which a setting value update process is executed when a setting value abnormality has occurred, the setting value that was set before the setting value update process was executed, and the setting value that was set in the setting value update process. If the set values are the same, setting maintenance notification is performed. As a result, even if the setting value update process is executed due to a setting value error, setting maintenance notification will be performed by resetting the setting value that was set in the previous situation, and setting value update due to a setting value error. It becomes possible to clearly indicate to the player that the set value has not changed even if the process is executed. By the way, since it is common in gaming halls to record the setting values of each pachinko machine 10 installed, it is possible to perform a setting value update process due to a setting value abnormality so that the set value becomes the recorded setting value. It is possible.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103), after the setting monitoring process is executed in step S6820, the management process is executed in step S6821. When executing management processing, the subroutine program corresponding to the management processing set in the specific control program will be executed. Information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt processing in is written to the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. When the management process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the timer interrupt process indicated by the return address.

FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing management processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step S7001 to step S7005 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 103) (step S7001). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103), which is a process that corresponds to specific control, from being interrupted and started in the middle of the management execution process, which will be described later, which is a process that corresponds to non-specific control. becomes possible.

Thereafter, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the PSW buffer set in the work area 221 for specific control by a load instruction as "LD (_PSWBUF), PSW" (step S7002). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, a half-carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving such flag register information before the start of the subroutine program corresponding to management execution processing, the flag register's state before it changes after the subroutine is called or the subroutine starts. It becomes possible to save information to the work area 221 for specific control.

Thereafter, by reading the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program, the management execution process is started (step S7003). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written to the specific control stack area 222 by a push command. When the management execution process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management process indicated by the return address.

When returning to the management processing program after execution of the management execution processing, the program is saved as "LD PSW, (_PSWBUF)" to the PSW buffer in the specific control work area 221 in step S7002 by a load instruction. The information in the flag register is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S7004). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to the information at the time when step S7002 was executed last time. In other words, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to information for executing specific control.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 103) is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted (step S7005). This enables new execution of timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the management execution process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step S7101 to step S7116 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

In steps S7101 to S7108 and steps S7110 to S7116, the same processes as steps S4501 to S4515 of the management execution process (FIG. 78) in the seventeenth embodiment are executed. Further, in step S7109, another monitoring process is executed. When executing the separate monitoring process, the subroutine program corresponding to the separate monitoring process set in the program for non-specific control will be executed, but when the program of the subroutine is executed, after the separate monitoring process is executed. Information for specifying the return address of the management execution process in is written to the stack area 224 for non-specific control by a push command. When the separate monitoring process ends, information for specifying the return address is read out by the pop command, and the program returns to the management execution process indicated by the return address.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing another monitoring process. Note that the processes from step S7201 to step S7206 in the separate monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

In the separate monitoring process, it is determined whether the value of the pointer indicating the processing position of the process being executed in the non-specific control program exceeds the normal numerical range (step S7201). In addition, the information stored in the normal counter area 231, opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and high-frequency support mode counter area 233 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control has clearly become abnormal information. It is determined whether or not (step S7202). For example, if the value of the normal out counter 231e in the normal counter area 231 is "0" but the value of the normal general win counter 231a is 1000 or more, it is determined that there is an abnormality. Furthermore, it is determined whether the information stored in the calculation result storage area 234 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is clearly abnormal information (step S7203). For example, if the 61st parameter is "0" but any of the 62nd to 64th parameters are not "0", it is determined to be abnormal.

If an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S7201 to S7203, it is assumed that an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control, and a partial clearing process for the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed. (Step S7204). In the partial clearing process, storage areas other than the management start flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control are cleared to "0". In this case, the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234 are all cleared to "0". This makes it possible to eliminate information abnormalities in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

Furthermore, by not clearing the management start flag to "0", it is possible to maintain the state in which the management start flag is already set to "1", and the pachinko machine 10 has already been used in the game hall. It is possible to prevent restrictions on the collection of history information from being imposed at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 even though the pachinko machine 10 is in use. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire non-specific control work area 223 including the management start flag may be cleared to "0" in step S7204.

Furthermore, in step S7204, the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not cleared to "0". In the stack area 224 for non-specific control, information of various registers used in the process corresponding to specific control in steps S7102 to S7107 in the management execution process (FIG. 106) is saved. In this case, by not clearing the stack area 224 for non-specific control to "0", information on various registers used in processing corresponding to this specific control can be stored in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. This makes it possible to prevent the information saved in H.224 from being deleted. In addition, the stack area 224 for non-specific control stores information on the return address of the management execution process (FIG. 106) after the end of another monitoring process, but the stack area 224 for non-specific control is stored as "0". ” By not clearing the return address information, it is possible to prevent the return address information from being erased.

Thereafter, initial setting processing is executed (step S7205). In the initial setting process, initial setting is performed for the storage area that was cleared to "0" in step S7204 in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

After that, clear notification processing is executed (step S7206). In the clear notification process, a command indicating that the work area 223 for non-specific control has been cleared to "0" is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. By receiving the command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emission section 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the forced clearing of the work area 223 for non-specific control, and also issues a message from the speaker section 54 saying "History information has been forcibly cleared." Outputs a voice saying “I have done this.” Further, a character image "History information has been forcibly cleared." is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the administrator of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the above notification, the manager of the game hall can understand that the work area 223 for non-specific control has been forcibly cleared.

If a negative determination is made in all steps S7201 to S7203, or if the process in step S7206 is executed, the separate monitoring process is ended and the process returns to the monitoring execution process (FIG. 106).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

If the program monitoring unit 252 identifies that the address specified when writing information by a load instruction is an abnormal address, the reset signal output unit 251 turns the reset signal from OFF to ON, thereby causing the main CPU 63 to Then, the main process (FIG. 100) is executed in the same way as when the supply of operating power is newly started. If the reset signal is turned from OFF to ON, the power outage flag in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1" and the checksum at the time of power outage is stored in the work area 221 for specific control. Since the setting has not been updated, the clearing process for non-setting update (step S6607) is forcibly executed. In the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the storage areas other than the storage area where the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to "0", and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". 0'' is cleared, and initialization processing for these areas is further executed. As a result, if there is a possibility that an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control On the other hand, by executing the "0" clearing process and the initial setting process, it is possible to eliminate the information abnormality.

When the program monitoring unit 252 identifies that the value of the program counter of the main CPU 63 is an abnormal value, the reset signal output unit 251 turns the reset signal from OFF to ON, so that the main CPU 63 reduces the operating power. The main process (FIG. 100) is executed in the same way as when supply is newly started. If the reset signal is turned from OFF to ON, the power outage flag in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1" and the checksum at the time of power outage is stored in the work area 221 for specific control. Since the setting has not been updated, the clearing process for non-setting update (step S6607) is forcibly executed. In the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the internal storage area of the main CPU 63 including various registers is cleared to "0" and the initial setting process is executed. As a result, if there is a possibility that an information abnormality has occurred in the internal storage area of the main CPU 63, the internal storage area of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" and the initial setting process is executed. It becomes possible to eliminate information abnormalities.

On the other hand, in the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, the information abnormality is identified in the program monitoring unit 252 as described above, and the internal storage area of the main CPU 63, the work area 221 for specific control, and the stack area 222 for specific control are cleared to "0". Even when the initial setting process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information on the gaming history from being deleted, and it is also possible to prevent the information on the management results of the gaming history from being deleted. It becomes possible to do so.

If the power failure flag is not set to "1" in the main process (Fig. 100) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, or if the checksums do not match, clear when updating non-settings. In the configuration in which the process (step S6607) is executed, if the program monitoring unit 252 identifies the occurrence of an information abnormality, the reset signal is turned from OFF to ON to ensure that the power outage flag is not set to "1". At the same time, the main processing (FIG. 100) is executed in a situation where no checksum is stored. This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality identified by the program monitoring unit 252 by using the configuration for resolving the information abnormality at the time of starting supply of operating power.

In a configuration in which whether or not the checksum is normal is monitored in the main processing (FIG. 100) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the target for calculating the checksum is A work area 221 for specific control and a stack area 222 for specific control are included, and a work area 223 for non-specific control and a stack area 224 for non-specific control are not included. This makes it possible to specify whether or not an information abnormality has occurred only in the storage area corresponding to the specific control in the main side RAM 65.

If it is identified that the checksum is abnormal in the main process (FIG. 100) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the clear process at the time of non-setting update (step S6607) is executed. However, in the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are cleared to "0" and initial setting processing is executed. On the other hand, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". This prevents the process corresponding to the specific control from continuing to be executed in the same state even though an information error has occurred in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222. At the same time, when an information error occurs in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, even the storage area corresponding to non-specific control in the main side RAM 65 is cleared to "0". It is possible to prevent this from happening.

In the power outage process (steps S6709 to S6712) of the power outage information storage process (FIG. 101), checksums are calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control; A checksum is not calculated for a storage area corresponding to non-specific control. This makes it possible to prevent the processing period required to complete the power outage processing from becoming excessively long.

If the occurrence of an abnormality is identified in the information stored in the work area 223 for non-specific control in a separate monitoring process (Fig. 107) executed in the process corresponding to non-specific control, non-specific control is supported. In the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107), which is the process to perform this process, the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting process is executed. As a result, even if some abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is executed while the information in the work area 223 for non-specific control is maintained as it is. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening. In addition, since the process of clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to "0" and the process of initializing it are executed in the process corresponding to non-specific control, regarding updating the information of the work area 223 for non-specific control, It becomes possible to prevent intervening processing corresponding to specific control.

In the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107), which is the process corresponding to non-specific control, monitoring is executed to determine whether an abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control, and if an abnormality has occurred, Then, processing for clearing the non-specific control work area 223 to "0" and initialization processing are executed. As a result, monitoring whether an abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control and executing initialization of the work area 223 for non-specific control can be performed as a series of processes in the process corresponding to non-specific control. It is possible to execute as

If the occurrence of an abnormality is identified in the information stored in the work area 223 for non-specific control in the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107) executed in the process corresponding to non-specific control, the Although the work area 223 is cleared to "0" and initialized, the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not cleared to "0" and initialized. This makes it possible to eliminate information abnormalities in the work area 223 for non-specific control, while also managing the information of various registers used in processes corresponding to specific control saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, and separately managing the information. It is possible to prevent the return address information from being deleted after the processing is completed.

The process of clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control to "0" and initializing it is executed in the process corresponding to specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0". The process of clearing and initializing is executed in a process corresponding to non-specific control. As a result, regarding such initialization processing, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are treated as dedicated storage areas for processing corresponding to specific control, and the It becomes possible to treat the work area 223 as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to non-specific control.

Note that the main process (FIG. 100) is configured to monitor whether or not the set values are normal in steps S6608 and S6614, but the process of monitoring whether or not these set values are normal is not necessary. It may be configured so that it is not executed. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load of the process executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Furthermore, even if the set value is not monitored to see if it is normal in the processing at the start of the supply of operating power, the timer interrupt executed after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is completed. Since the setting monitoring process (step S6820) of the process (FIG. 103) monitors whether the setting value is normal or not, it is possible to deal with it if the setting value is abnormal.

Furthermore, the configuration monitoring process (step S6820) is not limited to a configuration in which the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103) is executed every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103) is started. A configuration may be adopted in which the setting monitoring process (step S6820) is executed every time the process is executed a number of times (for example, 10,000 times). In this case, it is possible to periodically monitor whether or not the set value is normal, while reducing the frequency with which the monitoring is performed.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the setting monitoring process (step S6820) is executed in the remaining process (steps S6610 to S6613) in the main process (FIG. 100). In this case, it becomes possible to monitor whether or not the set value is normal using the idle time when the timer interrupt process is not being executed.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the setting monitoring process (step S6820) is executed when a new gaming session is started. More specifically, when a game round is newly started, the setting monitoring process (step S6820) may be executed before the validity determination process is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the validity determination process from being executed in a situation where the set value is abnormal.

In addition, if it is specified that the setting value is abnormal in the setting monitoring process (step S6820), instead of the configuration that moves to the setting value updating process (step S6904), a It is also possible to set the game stop flag to "1". In this case, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6807 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103), the processes in steps S6808 to S6821 will not be executed, so if the set value is abnormal, the progress of the game will be stopped. becomes. However, since the processing from step S6801 to step S6806 is executed, power outage monitoring is executed, and the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and Fraud detection is performed. Further, when the game stop flag is set to "1", a notification indicating that the setting value should be updated may be executed to prompt execution of the setting value updating process. In this case, the gaming hall manager who has confirmed the notification turns off the power and then turns on the power in such a way that the setting value update process is executed, thereby clearing the game stop flag to "0". As a result, the state in which the progress of the game is stopped is released, and the setting value update process is executed to set the normal setting value.

In addition, if it is specified that the setting value is abnormal in the setting monitoring process (step S6820), the setting abnormality flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" and the main processing (step S6820) is performed. Fig. 100) may be configured to start, and the progress of the game is stopped with the setting abnormality flag set to "1", and in order to release the stopped state of the game, turn off the power → A configuration may be adopted in which it is necessary to turn ON. In this case, even if no operation is performed to execute the setting value update process in the main process (Fig. 100), if the setting abnormality flag is set to "1", the setting value will be forcibly set. By executing the value update process, it becomes possible to forcibly set a new setting value using the setting value update process set in the main process (FIG. 100).

Furthermore, when the program monitoring unit 252 identifies the occurrence of an information abnormality and the reset signal is forcibly turned from OFF to ON, initialization processing is executed for the work area 221 for specific control. , the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to be "setting 1". In addition, if the program monitoring unit 252 identifies the occurrence of an information abnormality and the reset signal is forcibly turned from OFF to ON, the settings are made after initialization processing is executed for the work area 221 for specific control. A configuration may also be used in which value update processing is executed.

In addition, if the program monitoring unit 252 identifies the occurrence of an information abnormality, the reset signal is not forcibly turned OFF → ON, and the clearing process (step S6607) at the time of non-setting update is executed. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which clear processing (step S6620) and setting value update processing (step S6621) are executed when updating settings.

In addition, in the clearing process at the time of non-setting update (step S6607), the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes "setting 1" by initializing the storage area that stores setting value information in the work area 221 for specific control. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the setting value is a predetermined setting value other than "setting 1." Thereby, when the clearing process at the time of non-setting update is executed, it becomes possible to set the setting value to a predetermined value.

In addition, in the clearing process at the time of non-setting update (step S6607), the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are configured not to be cleared to "0", but it is also configured that they are cleared to "0". good.

Further, although the management start flag is not cleared to "0" in step S7204 in the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107), the management start flag may be cleared to "0". Further, in step S7204 in the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107), the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 may not be cleared to "0", and the calculation result storage area 234 may be configured not to be cleared to "0".

Further, in step S7204 in the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107), "0" clearing processing and initial setting processing are executed not only for the work area 223 for non-specific control but also for the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It may also be a configuration. In this case, in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the return address information of the management execution process after the end of another monitoring process and the process corresponding to the specific control saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control are used. It is preferable not to erase the information in the various registers.

In addition, in the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107), it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, and if it is identified that an abnormality has occurred, the stack area 224 for non-specific control is monitored. A configuration may also be adopted in which the process of clearing the stack area 224 to "0" and the initial setting process are executed. In this case, it is preferable not to erase information on the return address of the management execution process after the separate monitoring process ends in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

Furthermore, the configuration is not limited to a configuration in which both the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are subject to checksum calculation, and only the work area 221 for specific control is subject to checksum calculation. Alternatively, only the stack area 222 for specific control may be subject to checksum calculation.

<31st embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the above-mentioned 30th embodiment in the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, the configuration that is different from the above-mentioned 30th embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the 30th embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step S7301 to step S7322 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, a power-on wait process is executed (step S7301). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed after the main process is started. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S7302).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S7303). If the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S7303: YES), a checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step S7304). The checksum calculation method is the same as step S6604 of the main processing (FIG. 100) in the thirtieth embodiment.

Thereafter, the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 221 for specific control calculated in the power outage process executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and saved in the work area 221 for specific control. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read from the specific control work area 221, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step S7304 (step S7305). Then, it is determined whether these checksums match (step S7306).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7306, the processes of steps S7307 to S7320 are executed. In this case, the processing contents of steps S7307 to S7314 are the same as steps S6614 to S6621 of the main processing (FIG. 100) in the thirtieth embodiment, and steps S7316 to S7320 are the same as the main processing in the thirtieth embodiment. This is the same as steps S6609 to S6613 in the process (FIG. 100).

Furthermore, if the reset button 68c is being pressed (step S7308: YES) and a negative determination is made in any of steps S7309 to S7311, clearing processing for non-setting update is executed (step S7308: YES). S7315). The contents of the clearing process at the time of non-setting update are the same as step S6607 of the main process (FIG. 100) in the thirtieth embodiment. However, in this embodiment, after executing the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the process proceeds to steps S7316 to S7320 without determining whether the set value is normal. Only if a negative determination is made in any of steps S7309 to S7311, the clearing process at the time of non-setting update (step S7315) will be executed, but before the processes in steps S7309 to S7311 are executed. Since it is determined in step S7307 whether the set value is normal, there is no need to determine whether the set value is normal after executing the clearing process at the time of non-setting update.

If a negative determination is made in step S7303 or step S7306, that is, if the power outage flag in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1" or if a checksum abnormality occurs, clear processing at the time of abnormality is executed. (Step S7321). FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the clearing process in the event of an abnormality. Note that the processing in steps S7401 to S7405 in the abnormality clearing process is executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, clearing processing of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S7401). In the clearing process, in the work area 221 for specific control, excluding the area in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (specifically, the setting value counter), the work area for the specific control is 221 is cleared to "0" and initial settings are made to the area cleared to "0". As a result, the area indicating whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the win/fail lottery is performed regardless of the win/fail lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game cycle is not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general figure display section 38a is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in a closed state. situation. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display section 37a is erased and the general figure display section The pending information for 38a is deleted.

Thereafter, clearing processing of the stack area 222 for specific control is executed (step S7402). In the clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are performed.

Thereafter, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command as "PUSH PSW" (step S7403). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, a half-carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving such flag register information before the start of the subroutine program that corresponds to the clear processing for non-specific control, the flag in its state before it changes after the subroutine is called or the subroutine starts. Register information can be saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Note that the amount of information in the flag register is 1 byte.

Thereafter, by reading the subroutine program corresponding to the clearing process for non-specific control set in the program for non-specific control, the clearing process for the non-specific control is started (step S7404). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the clearing process in the event of an abnormality after the execution of the clearing process for non-specific control is written to the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. Then, when the clearing process for non-specific control is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the abnormality clearing process indicated by the return address.

When returning to the abnormality clear processing program after executing clear processing for non-specific control, the flag register saved to the stack area 222 for specific control in step S7402 by a pop instruction is stored as "POP PSW". information is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S7405). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to the information at the time when step S7402 was executed. In other words, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to information for executing specific control.

FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing clear processing for non-specific control. Note that the processing from step S7501 to step S7516 in the clearing process for non-specific control is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, as "LD SP, Y(u+2)", Y(u+2) is set as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction (step S7501). In this case, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, information on the last address in the stack area 224 for non-specific control is set in the stack pointer.

Thereafter, the information in the WA register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the WA buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction as "LD (_WABUF), WA" (step S7502). Further, as "LD (_BCBUF), BC", the information in the BC register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the BC buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S7503). Also, “LD
(_DEBUF), DE", the information in the DE register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the DE buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S7504). Further, as "LD (_HLBUF), HL", information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the HL buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S7505). Further, as "LD (_IXBUF), IX", information in the IX register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the IX buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S7506). Further, as "LD (_IYBUF), IY", information in the IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the IY buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S7507).

The registers of the main CPU 63 include various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in addition to the flag register described above. In this case, in steps S7502 to S7507, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of these various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, is is saved in a corresponding buffer in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Note that the information amount of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is all 2 bytes.

These WA registers, BC registers, DE registers, HL registers, IX registers, and IY registers are used for processing for clearing a portion of the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S7508) and initial setting processing (step S7508), which corresponds to non-specific control. This is a register used in step S7509). The information set in such registers is saved to the work area 223 for non-specific control before executing the partial clearing process (step S7508) and the initial setting process (step S7509) of the work area 223 for non-specific control. By doing so, it becomes possible to save the information in these registers used for specific control before non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during non-specific control, the status of these registers can be changed by restoring the information saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control to these registers when terminating non-specific control. It becomes possible to restore the state to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control was executed.

In addition, instead of saving all the information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the work area 223 for non-specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, which is a process corresponding to non-specific control, is In the partial clearing process (step S7508) and the initial setting process (step S7509), information on the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to be used is selectively set for non-specific control. By saving the information to the work area 223, it is possible to suppress the capacity secured for saving register information in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Therefore, while ensuring a large capacity of the work area 223 for non-specific control that can be used during the partial clearing process (step S7508) and the initial setting process (step S7509) of the work area 223 for non-specific control, the above-mentioned procedure is performed. It becomes possible to save information in such registers. Of course, among the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the main CPU 63, registers other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register support non-specific control. The information set before the start of the process is stored and held until the process corresponding to the non-specific control is finished and the process corresponding to the specific control is restarted.

Furthermore, by saving register information to the work area 223 for non-specific control instead of saving it to the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the capacity of the stack area 224 for non-specific control can be kept small. It becomes possible. Furthermore, when using the stack area 224 for non-specific control, as described above, the information is written in the order in which the later information is read out first, so if the order in which the information is read is shifted due to some kind of noise, etc. If this happens, all subsequent reading order information will be restored to different registers. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control increases. In contrast, by saving register information to the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned phenomenon from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. .

After executing the processes of steps S7502 to S7507, a process of partially clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed (step S7508). In the partial clearing process, among the storage areas of the work area 223 for non-specific control, storage areas other than the storage area where information of various registers of the main CPU 63 used in processing corresponding to specific control are saved Clear to "0". Specifically, among the storage areas of the work area 223 for non-specific control, the WA buffer, BC buffer, DE buffer, HL buffer, IX buffer, and IY buffer are not cleared to "0", while the memory other than these various buffers is Clear the area to "0".

In this case, the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, the calculation result storage area 234, and the management start flag are all cleared to "0". This makes it possible to eliminate information abnormalities in the work area 223 for non-specific control. In addition, by not clearing to "0" the storage area where the information of various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the process corresponding to specific control is saved, the process corresponding to non-specific control is completed. When returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, it is possible to restore information used in the process corresponding to the specific control to various registers of the main CPU 63.

Furthermore, in step S7508, the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not cleared to "0". The stack area 224 for non-specific control stores information on the return address of the clearing process in the event of an abnormality (FIG. 109) after the clearing process for non-specific control is completed, but the stack area 224 for non-specific control By not clearing 224 to "0", it is possible to prevent the information of this return address from being erased.

Thereafter, initial setting processing is executed (step S7509). In the initial setting process, initial setting is performed for the storage area that was cleared to "0" in step S7508 in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

Thereafter, as "LD SP, Y(r+α)", a load instruction is used to return to specific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63, similar to step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment. Y(r+α) is set as a fixed address at the time (step S7510). The address of Y(r+α) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, the information saved in the WA buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten in the WA register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction as "LD WA, (_WABUF)" (step S7511). Also, as "LD BC, (_BCBUF)", the information saved in the BC buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten in the BC register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S7512). Further, as "LD DE, (_DEBUF)", the information saved in the DE buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the DE register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S7513). Further, as "LD HL, (_HLBUF)", the information saved in the HL buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S7514). Further, as "LD IX, (_IXBUF)", the information saved in the IX buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IX register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S7515). Further, as "LD IY, (_IYBUF)", the information saved in the IY buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IY register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S7516). By executing the processing from step S7511 to step S7516, processing corresponding to non-specific control is started for each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63. It is possible to restore the information to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the control.

According to the above configuration, in the main process (FIG. 108) that is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" or the checksum is abnormal. In some cases, the abnormality clearing process (step S7321) is executed, so that not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control but also the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "0". ” is cleared and initialized. If an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control, there is a possibility that an information abnormality has also occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control. The work area 223 for non-specific control is also initialized to prevent processing corresponding to non-specific control from being executed in the same state even though an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control. It becomes possible to do so.

Even if the process of clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to "0" and the process of initializing it are executed in the clear process at the time of abnormality (step S7321), the work area for non-specific control The information in various registers used in the process corresponding to the specific control saved in 223 is not cleared to "0". As a result, the process of clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to "0" while not erasing the information used in the process corresponding to specific control after the process corresponding to non-specific control is completed. And it becomes possible to execute the initial setting process.

Even if the process of clearing "0" and the process of initializing the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed in the clearing process at the time of abnormality (step S7321), the stack area 224 for non-specific control The process of clearing it to "0" and the process of initializing it are not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the return address information from being deleted after the non-specific control clearing process (FIG. 110) is completed.

The process of clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control to "0" and the process of initializing are executed in the process corresponding to specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0". 0'' clearing process and initializing process are executed in the process corresponding to non-specific control. As a result, regarding the process of clearing to "0" and the process of initializing, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are treated as storage areas dedicated to the process corresponding to the specific control, and the The work area 223 for specific control can be treated as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to non-specific control.

Note that the configuration is not limited to a configuration in which both the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are subject to checksum calculation, and only the work area 221 for specific control is subject to checksum calculation. Alternatively, only the stack area 222 for specific control may be subject to checksum calculation.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the work area 223 for non-specific control is the target of checksum calculation. In this case, the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 223 for non-specific control may be configured to be checksum calculation targets, and the stack area 222 for specific control and the work area 223 for non-specific control may be checked. The configuration may be such that the check sum is calculated, or the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control may be subject to check sum calculation.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the stack area 224 for non-specific control is the target of checksum calculation. In this case, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be configured to be checksum calculation targets, and the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be checked. The configuration may be such that the check sum is calculated, or the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be subject to check sum calculation.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are the targets of checksum calculation. In this case, the work area 221 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be configured to be checksum calculation targets, and the stack area 222 for specific control, the stack area 224 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be configured. The work area 223 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be configured as checksum calculation targets. The work area 223 and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be configured to be checksum calculation targets.

Furthermore, in steps S7508 and S7509 in the clearing process for non-specific control (FIG. 110), not only the work area 223 for non-specific control but also the stack area 224 for non-specific control is cleared to "0". It may also be configured to execute initial setting processing. In this case, it is preferable not to erase the return address information of the abnormality clearing process after the non-specific control clearing process is completed.

Further, in step S7508 in the clearing process for non-specific control (FIG. 110), the management start flag is cleared to "0", but the management start flag may not be cleared to "0". Further, in step S7508 in the clearing process for non-specific control (FIG. 110), the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 may be configured not to be cleared to "0". A configuration may also be adopted in which the calculation result storage area 234 is not cleared to "0".

<Thirty-second embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the above-mentioned 30th embodiment in the processing configuration regarding monitoring of information abnormalities in the main side RAM 65 using a checksum. Hereinafter, the configuration that is different from the above-mentioned 30th embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the 30th embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing power outage information storage processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the power outage information storage process is executed in step S6801 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103). Further, the processing from step S7601 to step S7613 in the power outage information storage process is executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

Steps S7601 to S7608 in the power outage information storage process are the same as steps S6701 to S6708 in the power outage information storage process (FIG. 101) in the thirtieth embodiment. If the occurrence of a power outage is identified, an affirmative determination is made in step S7608, and the power outage processing in steps S7609 to S7613 is executed.

Specifically, first, a power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7609). As a result, if power outage processing is executed normally and information is stored and retained in the main side RAM 65 normally, when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is restarted, the specific control This means that the power outage flag of the work area 221 is set to "1".

Thereafter, checksums are calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step S7610). In this case, the storage areas in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, which are the targets of calculation when calculating the checksum for specific control, are stored in step S7701 of the checksum monitoring process (FIG. 112), which will be described later. This area is the same as the storage area in the specific control work area 221 and specific control stack area 222 on which the specific control checksum is calculated. In addition, the storage area to be calculated when calculating the checksum for specific control includes an area (specifically, is a set value counter). Then, the calculated checksum for specific control is stored in a storage area for storing the checksum for specific control in the work area 221 for specific control, which is excluded from the calculation target of the checksum for specific control. Store it in the storage area where it is located.

Thereafter, checksums are calculated for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control (step S7611). In this case, the storage areas in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, which are the targets of calculation when calculating the checksum for non-specific control, are used for checksum monitoring processing (FIG. 112), which will be described later. This is the same storage area as the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, which are the targets of the calculation of the checksum for non-specific control in step S7706. Then, the calculated checksum for non-specific control is stored in a storage area for storing the checksum for non-specific control in the work area 221 for specific control, and is excluded from the calculation target of the checksum for specific control. The data is stored in the storage area where the data is stored.

Thereafter, all output port information in the register of the main CPU 63 is set to "0" (step S7612), and access to the main RAM 65 is prohibited (step S7613). Then, the infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.

Next, the checksum monitoring process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 112. Note that the checksum monitoring process is executed in place of steps S6604 to S6606 in the main process (FIG. 100). Further, the processes from step S7701 to step S7711 in the checksum monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, a checksum for specific control is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step S7701). The method of calculating the checksum for the specific control is the same as step S7610 in the power outage information storage process (FIG. 111). Thereafter, the checksum for specific control calculated in step S7610 of the power outage processing executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the work area 221 for specific control is specified. At the same time as reading from the control work area 221, the read checksum for specific control is compared with the checksum for specific control calculated in step S7701 (step S7702). Then, it is determined whether the checksums for specific control match (step S7703).

If the checksums for specific control do not match (step S7703: NO). Clear processing of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S7704). In the clearing process, in the work area 221 for specific control, excluding the area in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (specifically, the setting value counter), the work area for the specific control is 221 is cleared to "0" and the initial settings are executed. As a result, the area indicating whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the win/fail lottery is performed regardless of the win/fail lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game cycle is not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general figure display section 38a is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in a closed state. situation. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display section 37a is erased and the general figure display section The pending information for 38a is deleted. In addition, in the clearing process, initial settings are executed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0". Further, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed (step S7705).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7703 or if the process in step S7705 is executed, a checksum for non-specific control is calculated for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control (step S7706). The method of calculating the checksum for non-specific control is the same as step S7611 in the power outage information storage process (FIG. 111). Thereafter, the checksum for non-specific control that was calculated in step S7611 of the power outage processing executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 was stopped and stored in the work area 221 for specific control is While reading out the work area 221 for specific control, the read checksum for non-specific control is compared with the checksum for non-specific control calculated in step S7706 (step S7707). Then, it is determined whether the checksums for non-specific control match (step S7708).

If the checksums for non-specific control do not match (step S7708: NO), the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command as "PUSH PSW" ( Step S7709). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, a half-carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving such flag register information before the start of the subroutine program that corresponds to the clear processing for non-specific control, the flag in its state before it changes after the subroutine is called or the subroutine starts. Register information can be saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Note that the amount of information in the flag register is 1 byte.

Thereafter, by reading the subroutine program corresponding to the clearing process for non-specific control set in the program for non-specific control, the clearing process for the non-specific control is started (step S7710). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the checksum monitoring process after execution of the non-specific control clearing process is written to the specific control stack area 222 by a push command. When the clearing process for non-specific control is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by a pop instruction, and the program returns to the checksum monitoring process indicated by the return address.

When returning to the abnormality clear processing program after executing clear processing for non-specific control, the flag register saved to the stack area 222 for specific control in step S7709 by a pop instruction is stored as "POP PSW". information is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S7711). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to the information at the time when step S7709 was executed. In other words, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to information for executing specific control.

FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing clear processing for non-specific control. Note that the processing from step S7801 to step S7818 in the clearing process for non-specific control is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

Steps S7801 to S7807 in the clearing process for non-specific control are the same as steps S7501 to S7507 in the clearing process for non-specific control (FIG. 110) in the 31st embodiment.

Thereafter, a partial clearing process of the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed (step S7808). In the partial clearing process, among the storage areas of the work area 223 for non-specific control, storage areas other than the storage area where information of various registers of the main CPU 63 used in processing corresponding to specific control are saved Clear to "0". Specifically, among the storage areas of the work area 223 for non-specific control, the WA buffer, BC buffer, DE buffer, HL buffer, IX buffer, and IY buffer are not cleared to "0", while the memory other than these various buffers is Clear the area to "0".

In this case, the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, the calculation result storage area 234, and the management start flag are all cleared to "0". This makes it possible to eliminate information abnormalities in the work area 223 for non-specific control. In addition, by not clearing to "0" the storage area where the information of various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the process corresponding to specific control is saved, the process corresponding to non-specific control is completed. When returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, it is possible to restore information used in the process corresponding to the specific control to various registers of the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, initial setting processing is executed (step S7809). In the initial setting process, initial setting is performed for the storage area that was cleared to "0" in step S7808 in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

Thereafter, a process of partially clearing the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed (step S7810). In the partial clearing process, information on the return address of the checksum monitoring process (FIG. 112) after the clearing process for non-specific control is completed is stored in each storage area of the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Clear all memory areas other than the memory area to "0". This prevents the return address information of the checksum monitoring process (FIG. 112) from being erased after the clearing process for non-specific control is completed, while also preventing information errors in the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being erased. It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

Thereafter, initial setting processing is executed (step S7811). In the initial setting process, initial setting is performed for the storage area that was cleared to "0" in step S7810 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

Thereafter, the processes of steps S7812 to S7818 are executed. These steps S7812 to S7818 are the same as steps S7510 to S7516 in the non-specific control clearing process (FIG. 110) in the thirty-first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, the checksum for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control and the checksum for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are Calculated separately. This makes it possible to individually identify information abnormalities for each of the storage area corresponding to specific control in the main side RAM 65 and the storage area corresponding to non-specific control in the main side RAM 65.

If there is an abnormality in the checksum for specific control, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are cleared to 0 and the initial setting process is performed, and the checksum for non-specific control is If there is an abnormality in the checksum, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to "0" and initialization processing is executed. This makes it possible to narrow down the targets for executing the "0" clearing process and the initial setting process to the area where the checksum abnormality has been identified.

The process of clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control to "0" and the process of initializing are executed in the process corresponding to specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0". 0'' clearing process and initializing process are executed in the process corresponding to non-specific control. As a result, regarding the "0" clearing process and the initial setting process, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are treated as a dedicated storage area for the process corresponding to specific control, and the non-specific It becomes possible to treat the work area 223 for control as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to non-specific control.

Although the management start flag is cleared to "0" in step S7808 in the clearing process for non-specific control (FIG. 113), the management start flag may not be cleared to "0". Further, in step S7808 in the clearing process for non-specific control (FIG. 113), the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 may not be cleared to "0". A configuration may also be adopted in which the calculation result storage area 234 is not cleared to "0".

<33rd embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fifteenth embodiment described above in the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifteenth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as in the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step S7901 to step S7924 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, power-on initial setting processing is executed (step S7901). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed after the main process is started. During this predetermined wait period, the start of operation and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

Thereafter, internal function register setting processing is executed (step S7902). In the internal function register setting process, the interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 117), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, is set to the first interrupt cycle (specifically, 4 milliseconds). In addition, the interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 123), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, is set to a second interrupt cycle that is shorter than the first interrupt cycle. (Specifically, set to 2 milliseconds).

That is, in this embodiment, the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process exist so that the interrupt period is relatively long and short as the timer interrupt process. Both the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process are started by interrupting the main process. Further, the second timer interrupt process is activated by interrupting the first timer interrupt process. On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process interrupts the second timer interrupt process and is not activated. In addition, if both the first and second interrupt cycles have elapsed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process are not being executed, the second timer interrupt process The timer interrupt processing is activated first. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process is a process that is activated with priority over the first timer interrupt process.

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process is set in a specific register of the main CPU 63. do. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to setting the first and second interrupt cycles, for example, setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the winning random number counter C1 is executed.

Thereafter, the start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7903). The start-up processing flag indicates that even if the first timer interrupt processing is started, the first timer interrupt processing should be terminated without executing the various processes set for the first timer interrupt processing. This is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63. By setting "1" to the start-up processing flag, even if the first timer interrupt processing is started, various processes set for the first timer interrupt processing will not be executed, and the first timer interrupt processing will not be executed. The timer interrupt processing will be ended.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step S7904). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt cycle. However, since the start-up processing flag is set to "1" in step S7903, even if the first timer interrupt processing is started, various processes set for the first timer interrupt processing are executed. The first timer interrupt process is ended without any interruption.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S7905). In other words, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the reset button 68c is pressed and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Here, in this embodiment, the main controller 60 is provided with a setting key insertion section 68a and a reset button 68c, but is not provided with an update button 68b. Furthermore, the main control device 60 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the eleventh embodiment, instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S7905: NO), it is determined whether the power outage flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step S7906). When a power outage process is executed in the power outage information storage process (step S8202) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), which will be described later, the power outage flag is set to "1". The power outage flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to determine whether or not the power outage process was appropriately performed during the previous power shutoff.

If the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S7906: YES), a checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step S7907). The checksum calculation method is arbitrary, but the calculation method is the same as the calculation method when the checksum is calculated in the power outage process in the power outage information storage process (step S8202) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), which will be described later. That's the method. The checksum calculated in the power outage processing will be stored in the work area 221 for specific control, but the storage area of the work area 221 for specific control in which this checksum is stored is Excluded from the storage area subject to calculation.

That is, when calculating the checksum, a storage area that is a part of the storage area in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is the storage area to be calculated. In the storage area to be calculated, a checksum is calculated in the power outage processing when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, and then the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is resumed and the process of step S7907 is executed. This storage area is basically a storage area where information is not rewritten if power supply such as backup power is continued to the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control until the specific control work area 221 and the stack area 222 for specific control are continued. Therefore, the information in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is not changed after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped until the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is restarted. In this case, the checksums for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are the same as those immediately before the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped. In addition, the storage area to be calculated when calculating this checksum is an area in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control (specifically, a setting value counter )It is included. Note that the object of the checksum calculation does not include the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

Thereafter, the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 221 for specific control calculated in the power outage process executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and saved in the work area 221 for specific control. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read from the specific control work area 221, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step S7907 (step S7908). Then, it is determined whether these checksums match (step S7909).

If a negative determination is made in step S7906 or step S7909, that is, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" or if the checksums do not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7910). The game stop flag is used in a situation where an affirmative determination is made in step S8207 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) described later and the processes in steps S8208 to S8221 are not executed, that is, the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped. This flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the situation is such that it should be used. By setting the game stop flag to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S8207 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), which will be described later, resulting in a situation in which the processes in steps S8208 to S8221 are not executed. As a result, if the power outage flag was not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not performed properly during the previous power outage, the progress of the game will be stopped, and the specific control If the checksums do not match due to a change in the storage state of information in at least one of the work area 221 and the stack area 222 for specific control since the last time the power was cut off, the progress of the game will be stopped. The state will be as follows.

In this case, the storage area to be calculated when calculating the checksum is an area where information on setting values indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control as described above (specifically, Contains a set value counter). Therefore, if a set value abnormality has occurred after the previous power shutdown, the checksums will not match, and the game will be in a stopped state.

On the other hand, even in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S8202 to S8206 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) are executed. Therefore, even in a situation where the progress of the game is stopped, power outage monitoring is executed, and the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further Fraud detection is performed.

Thereafter, an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality has occurred regarding the power failure flag or checksum is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 at the time of starting supply of operating power (step S7911). Upon receiving the abnormality command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting section 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the time of starting supply of operating power, and also issues a message from the speaker section 54 saying, ``Please change the settings.'' ” will be output. Further, a character image "Please change the settings" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is once stopped, the above notification will not be sent when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the setting value update process (step S7918) is executed. The configuration may be continued.

When the game hall manager confirms the above-mentioned notification while the progress of the game is stopped, he temporarily stops the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10, and then resumes the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10. In this case, an operation is performed to execute the setting value update process (step S7918). As a result, if an abnormality occurs regarding the power outage flag or checksum at the start of supply of operating power, it is possible to perform a new setting of the setting value in the setting value update process (step S7918). .

In particular, the storage area that is subject to calculation when calculating the checksum is an area in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control as described above (specifically, the setting value counter), so if an abnormality occurs in the checksum, there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the set value. On the other hand, if an abnormality occurs regarding the checksum as described above, execution of the setting value update process (step S7918) is prompted to prevent the game from being played with the abnormal setting value. It becomes possible to do so.

If the power outage flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal (steps S7906 and S7909: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using the setting key. Then, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is open to the inner frame 13 and the gaming machine main body 12 is open to the outer frame 11 (step S7913). The front door open sensor 95 is used to detect whether or not the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13, as in the thirtieth embodiment. The main body open sensor 96 is used to detect whether or not it is in the open state, as in the thirtieth embodiment. The setting key insertion part 68a is turned on using the setting key (step S7912: YES), and the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13, and the gaming machine main body is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. 12 is in the open state (step S7913: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step S7914). In the setting confirmation process, the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are checked on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, which are used to display various parameters that are the management results of the game history. A process is executed to display a display indicating the current situation and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process. Note that the processing in steps S8001 to S8003 in the setting confirmation processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, a setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8001). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being confirmed. By setting the setting confirmation display flag to "1", the corresponding display control is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), which will be described later. be exposed. As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked, and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. will be held.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned off using the setting key (step S8002). In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a has been switched from an ON state to an OFF state, or a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is in an OFF state. If the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned off (step S8002: NO), the process of step S8002 is repeated.

If the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off (step S8002: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S8003). As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked, and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. The state in which this occurs is canceled. In this case, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 will start displaying the gaming history management results.

As described above, in this embodiment, the operating power to the main CPU 63 is reduced by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. In the situation where the supply of the key is started and the main process is started, the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on, and the process that allows the game to proceed is performed in the main process. The setting confirmation process is executed in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, which is the situation before the process is executed. This makes it possible to check the set values even when no games are being played.

Assuming that the setting values are checked while the game continues to progress, for example, if the setting values are checked in the middle of a game round, There is a risk that a transition to the open/close execution mode may occur. In this case, there is a possibility that the game ball cannot be fired toward the special electric winning device 32 even though the opening/closing execution mode has been started. In addition, if the setting value is confirmed during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode will proceed under the situation where the setting value is being confirmed. There is a possibility that the game ball will not be able to be fired towards the player.

Assuming that the progress of the game is stopped when checking the set value, if the check of the set value is started while a game is being played, the progress of the game is stopped midway. There is a risk that the processing for this may become complicated. For example, if confirmation of the set value is started in the middle of a game round and the progress of the game is to be stopped midway, a process for stopping the game round midway is required. In this case, when confirmation of the set value is started, the fluctuating display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is stopped midway, and when the confirmation of the set value is completed, the fluctuating display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is restarted. If you try to do so, it will require more complicated processing. Further, for example, if confirmation of the set value is started in the middle of execution of the opening/closing execution mode and it is attempted to stop the progress of the game midway, processing for stopping the opening/closing execution mode midway is required. Furthermore, if confirmation of the set value is started during the execution of the fluctuating display of the symbol on the ordinary figure display section 38a and an attempt is made to stop the progress of the game, the process for stopping the fluctuating display of the symbol midway is performed. It becomes necessary. In addition, if confirmation of the set value is started in the middle of execution of the open execution state of the general electric accessory 34a and you try to stop the progress of the game halfway, it is necessary to perform a process to stop the opening execution state in the middle. Become. On the other hand, a configuration in which the set values are confirmed after waiting until all games are finished may be considered, but in this case, the game time, opening/closing execution mode, fluctuating display of symbols in the general figure display section 38a, and general electric winnings It becomes necessary to wait until a situation in which none of the open execution states of the object 34a is executed, and there is a possibility that the waiting time until starting confirmation of the set value becomes long.

On the other hand, when the supply of operating power is started, which is the situation before the processing that allows the game to proceed in the main processing that is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, Since the setting confirmation process is executed in a situation where the process is being executed, the setting value is confirmed in a situation where the progress of the game has already been stopped. This makes it possible to prevent setting values from being checked while the game is in progress, as well as to stop the game progress midway when checking the setting values, or to stop the game progress. There is no need to wait until the settings are confirmed. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately confirm the setting values.

Returning to the explanation of the main processing (FIG. 114), if the reset button 68c is pressed (step S7905: YES), RAM clear processing is executed (step S7915). In the RAM clearing process, in the work area 221 for specific control, excluding the area in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (specifically, the setting value counter), the work area for the specific control is 221 is cleared to "0" and the initial settings are executed. As a result, the area indicating whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the win/fail lottery is performed regardless of the win/fail lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game cycle is not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general figure display section 38a is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in a closed state. situation. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display section 37a is erased and the general figure display section The pending information for 38a is deleted. Further, in the RAM clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed. Furthermore, in the RAM clearing process, initial settings are executed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing (step S7902) is executed.

On the other hand, in the RAM clearing process, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". This makes it possible to prevent the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" by a clearing operation by the administrator of the gaming hall.

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on using the setting key (step S7916), and the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13. Then, it is determined whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state (step S7917). The front door open sensor 95 is used to detect whether or not the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13, as in the thirtieth embodiment. The main body open sensor 96 is used to detect whether or not it is in the open state, as in the thirtieth embodiment. The setting key insertion part 68a is turned on using the setting key (step S7916: YES), and the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13, and the gaming machine main body is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. 12 is in the open state (step S7917: YES), a setting value update process is executed (step S7918).

FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the setting value update process. Note that the processes from step S8101 to step S8107 in the setting value update process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, a setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8101). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated. By setting the setting update display flag to "1", the corresponding display control is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), which will be described later. be exposed. As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. be exposed.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the setting value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is 1 or more corresponding to "setting 1" and 6 or less corresponding to "setting 6" (step S8102). If the value of the set value counter is "0" or 7 or more, a negative determination is made in step S8102, and the set value counter is set to "1" (step S8103). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes "setting 1."

If an affirmative determination is made in step S8102 or if the process in step S8103 is executed, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off using a setting key (step S8104). In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a has been switched from an ON state to an OFF state, or a configuration in which it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is in an OFF state may be adopted.

If the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned off (step S8104: NO), and on the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed (step S8105: YES), the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is 1 is added to the value of (step S8106). Thereby, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the setting value is updated to one level higher. Further, if the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S8105: NO) or if the value of the set value counter is incremented by 1, the process returns to step S8102, but in step S8102 the value of the set value counter is If it is determined that the value is 7 or more, "1" is set in the set value counter in step S8103. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6", the state returns to "Setting 1".

If the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off (step S8104: YES), the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step S8107). As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. The condition that occurs is canceled. In this case, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 will start displaying the gaming history management results.

As described above, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while pressing the reset button 68c, and the main CPU 63 is started to be supplied with operating power and main processing is started. The button 68c is pressed and the RAM clearing process (step S7915) is executed regardless of whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on. As a result, the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c is uniquely linked to the execution of the RAM clearing process (step S7915), and the RAM clearing process (step S7915) is It becomes possible to make the operation details for generating the game easy to understand for the manager of the game hall.

Even if the RAM clearing process (step S7915) is executed, the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is not cleared to "0" and the information on the setting value counter is not changed. This makes it possible to prevent the setting value from being changed even if the RAM clearing process (step S7915) is executed.

RAM clear processing is performed based on not only turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c, but also turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key. Not only (step S7915) but also setting value update processing (step S7918) is executed. Further, as already explained, the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is performed based on the fact that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. executed. This makes it possible to use the ON operation for the setting key insertion section 68a in common as an operation for executing processing related to setting values. Therefore, it is possible to make the details of the operation for generating the process related to the set value easy for the game hall manager to understand.

In addition, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key, and when pressing the reset button 68c is not added, a setting confirmation process is executed and the reset is performed. When adding a press operation to the button 68c, a setting value update process is executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to change the process to be executed among the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process depending on whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the game hall manager to understand the operation details for executing a desired process among the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process. Furthermore, by increasing the number of operations required to execute the setting value update process than the setting confirmation process, it is possible to make it particularly difficult to perform the setting value update process illegally.

Returning to the explanation of the main process (FIG. 114), if the process of step S7911 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S7912 or step S7913, if the process of step S7914 is executed, a negative determination is made in step S7916 or step S7917. If the determination is made or if the process of step S7918 is executed, the start-up process flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step S7919). By clearing the start-up process flag to "0," the state in which various processes set for the first timer interrupt process are not executed even if the first timer interrupt process is started is canceled. Note that in step S7919, the power outage flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

Thereafter, a return command is sent to the audio emission control device 81 (step S7920). The return command includes information indicating the number of pending information for the special figure display section 37a, information indicating the current win/fail lottery mode, information indicating the current support mode, and information indicating whether the opening/closing execution mode is in the middle of execution. information, and information indicating whether or not a game round is in progress. These pieces of information are set based on information stored in the work area 221 for specific control. By receiving the return command, the audio light emission control device 81 adjusts the display contents of the symbol display device 41, the light emission contents of the display light emitting section 53, and the sound output contents of the speaker section 54 in accordance with the various information set in the return command. The content shall be as follows.

Here, when checking the setting values of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key. Then, for example, if it is necessary to check the setting value during the execution of a game round, the power supply operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed during the execution of the game round, and then the setting key insertion part 68a is pressed by the setting key. While performing the ON operation, the power ON operation of the Pachinko machine 10 will be performed. In this case, since backup power is not supplied to the RAM provided in the audio emission control device 81, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the game replay in the RAM of the audio emission control device 81 is The information used to control it will be erased. On the other hand, since backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 and the clearing process of the main RAM 65 is not executed when checking the set values, the power OFF operation of the Pachinko machine 10 is performed in the middle of playing a game. , If the pachinko machine 10 is then turned on while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key, after the setting confirmation process is executed, the special figure display part 37a will display a changing pattern. will be restarted. In this case, a situation arises in which the symbol display device 41 does not display the symbols in a variable manner even though the special symbol display section 37a displays the symbols in a variable manner.

On the other hand, after the setting confirmation process is completed, a return command is sent to the audio emission control device 81, and the return command includes information indicating whether or not a game round is in the middle of execution. Then, when the sound emission control device 81 receives the return command, it causes the symbol display device 41 to start variable display of symbols. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the symbol display device 41 does not display a variable symbol even though the symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the special symbol display section 37a. . This fluctuating display of symbols is performed at a relatively fast speed so that each symbol being fluctuatedly displayed becomes indiscernible or difficult for the player to identify. Further, the return command does not include the result of the propriety determination process and the result of the distribution determination process for the game session to be restarted, and also does not include information indicating the end timing of the game session to be restarted. Therefore, when the sound emission control device 81 starts the fluctuating display of symbols on the symbol display device 41 based on the return command, if the game round to be restarted corresponds to a loss result, it will not start the next game round. When the symbol display device 41 receives a command to start a demonstration display or a command to start a demonstration display, it terminates the fluctuating display of symbols based on the return command, starts the display corresponding to the newly received command, and restarts the display. If the game round corresponds to the jackpot result, when an opening command indicating the start of the opening/closing execution mode is received, the fluctuating display of symbols based on the return command is ended and the opening performance is started.

In addition, if the return command includes information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the sound emission control device 81 starts a display effect on the symbol display device 41 indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. to be done. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed.

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps S7921 to S7924. In other words, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), but between the first timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process, There will be a remaining time. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of steps S7921 to S7924 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, the remaining processing in steps S7921 to S7924 can be said to be non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly. In steps S7921 to S7924, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

Next, the first timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 117. Note that, as already explained, the first timer interrupt process is started periodically at a 4 millisecond cycle, which is the first interrupt cycle. Further, the program corresponding to the first timer interrupt processing is set as a specific control program.

First, it is determined whether the start-up process flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step S8201). As already explained, the start-up processing flag is set to "1" in step S7903 of the main processing (FIG. 114). If the start-up process flag is set to "1" (step S8201: YES), the first timer interrupt process is ended without executing the various processes in steps S8202 to S8221. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started and the main processing (FIG. 114) is started, the first timer interrupt processing and the second timer interrupt processing are allowed to be executed early. Even if there is, various processes for controlling the progress of the game are executed in the first timer interrupt process until the process for starting the supply of operating power is completed and execution of the process for controlling the progress of the game is permitted. It is possible to prevent it from being executed.

As already explained, the start-up processing flag is cleared to "0" in step S7919 when the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed in the main processing (FIG. 114). In the first timer interrupt processing, if the start-up processing flag is not set to "1" (step S8201: NO), the processing from step S8202 onwards is executed.

Steps S8202 to S8219 and S8221 execute the same processes as steps S3701 to S3719 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) in the fifteenth embodiment. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data. In this case, as already explained, if it is determined in the main process (FIG. 114) that the power outage flag is not set to "1" (step S7906: NO) or if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step S7909: NO), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7910). If the game stop flag is set to "1", the first timer interrupt process executes steps S8201 to S8206, but if an affirmative determination is made in step S8207, steps S8208 to S8221 are executed. Not executed. As a result, if the power outage flag was not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not performed properly during the previous power outage, the progress of the game will be stopped, and the specific control If the checksums do not match due to a change in the storage state of information in at least one of the work area 221 and the stack area 222 for specific control since the last time the power was cut off, the progress of the game will be stopped. The state will be as follows. For example, firing of game balls is prohibited by not executing the process of step S8212. Further, since the process of step S8214 is not executed, execution of the game round and opening/closing execution mode is prohibited. Further, since the process of step S8218 is not executed, the payout of game balls is prohibited.

On the other hand, even in such a situation where the progress of the game is stopped, power outage monitoring is executed in step S8202, and the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 are executed in steps S8203 and S8204. The random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and fraud detection in step S8206 is performed.

In the first timer interrupt process, a setting monitoring process is executed in step S8220. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the setting monitoring process. Note that the processing from step S8301 to step S8303 in the setting monitoring processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

By checking the value of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control, it is determined whether the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal (step S8301). Specifically, if the setting value set in the setting value counter is one of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or 7 or more, it is determined to be abnormal. It is determined that there is.

If the set value is abnormal (step S8301: NO), similarly to step S7910 in the main process (FIG. 114), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8302). By setting the game stop flag to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S8207 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), resulting in a situation in which the processes in steps S8208 to S8221 are not executed. As a result, if it is determined that the set value is abnormal, the progress of the game is stopped. On the other hand, even if the game stop flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S8202 to S8206 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is executed, so the progress of the game is stopped. Even in such a situation, power outage monitoring is executed, and the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further fraud detection is executed.

Thereafter, an abnormality command indicating that the set value is abnormal is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step S8303). Upon receiving the abnormality command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emission section 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the setting value abnormality, and causes the speaker section 54 to output a voice saying "Please change the settings." . Further, a character image "Please change the settings" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is once stopped, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 will resume until the setting value update process (step S7918) of the main process (FIG. 114) is executed. The above-mentioned notification may be continued if the notification is made.

When the game hall manager confirms the above notification while the game progress is stopped, he temporarily stops the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10, and then resumes the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10. In this case, an operation is performed to execute the setting value update process (step S7918). Thereby, when a setting value abnormality occurs, it is possible to perform a new setting of the setting value in the setting value update process (step S7918).

Here, a process for monitoring whether or not the set value is abnormal is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) that is activated periodically. This makes it possible to monitor whether or not the set value is abnormal even when a game is being played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued even though the set value is abnormal. Furthermore, monitoring to determine whether or not the set value is abnormal is performed every time a monitoring opportunity occurs. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of monitoring whether or not the set value is abnormal.

The main process (FIG. 114) does not include a process for monitoring whether or not the set value is normal. If a process for monitoring whether the set value is normal is set in the process at the start of supply of operating power in the main process (Fig. 114), the power failure flag and check sum are set at the start of supply of operating power. In addition to monitoring the settings, it is also necessary to monitor whether the set values are normal or not, which increases the monitoring load. Furthermore, if an attempt is made to execute the RAM clearing process (step S7915) and the setting value update process (step S7918) when it is specified that the set value is abnormal at the start of the supply of operating power, the processing configuration becomes complicated. On the other hand, since the main process (FIG. 114) does not have a process for monitoring whether the set value is normal or not, the process configuration for the process at the start of the supply of operating power is not suitable. It becomes possible to make it a thing. In addition, even if the process to monitor whether the set value is normal is not set in the process at the start of the supply of operating power, the first timer interrupt process (Figure 117) as described above Since the configuration is such that the setting monitoring process (step S8220) is executed by the setting value, it is possible to deal with the abnormal setting value.

In the configuration in which the first timer interrupt processing is executed as described above, in this embodiment, as timer interrupt processing, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) is performed separately from the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117). In addition, the second timer interrupt process is activated by interrupting the first timer interrupt process even when the first timer interrupt process is in the middle of execution. In this case, although not shown in the drawings, in the first timer interrupt processing, the timer interrupt processing is prohibited and the timer interrupt processing is enabled before and after each processing from step S8201 to step S8221. For example, the timer interrupt process is prohibited before the random number update process for lottery (step S8203) is executed, and the timer interrupt process is enabled after the random number update process for the lottery (step S8203) is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the second timer interrupt process from being interrupted and started while the lottery random number update process is being executed. Further, the timer interrupt process is prohibited before executing the special figure special electric line control process (step S8214), and the timer interrupt process is permitted after executing the special figure special electric line control process (step S8214). This makes it possible to prevent the second timer interrupt process from being interrupted and activated while the special figure special electric control process is being executed.

Next, a configuration for controlling the display of various display units by the main CPU 63 will be described. FIG. 119 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration for controlling the display of various display sections by the main CPU 63.

The objects whose display is controlled by the main CPU 63 are the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 exists. Each of these is provided as a segment display section in which a plurality of display segments using LEDs are arranged. These segment display sections enter the light emitting state by setting data corresponding to the light emitting state (for example, data of "1" which is one of the binary data), and enter the light emitting state by setting data corresponding to the light emitting state (for example, data of "1" which is one of the binary data) When the other one (data "0") is set, the light is turned off.

The main control board 61 is provided with a first display circuit 261 in correspondence with the special figure display section 37a, a second display circuit 262 in correspondence with the special figure reservation display section 37b, and a second display circuit 262 in correspondence with the special figure reservation display section 37b. A third display circuit 263 is provided to correspond to the display section 38a, a fourth display circuit 264 is provided to correspond to the general figure reservation display section 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to A fifth display circuit 265 is provided corresponding to 204 . In the eleventh embodiment, the main control board 61 is provided with the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 in one-to-one correspondence with the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. However, in this embodiment, these first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 are not provided.

The first display circuit 261 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the special figure display section 37a. As a result, each display segment of the special figure display section 37a enters a light-emitting state or a light-off state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the first display circuit 261. In this case, although the first display circuit 261 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), after the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all "0". This will bring us closer to the state of Therefore, the display segment of the special figure display section 37a, which is in a light emitting state due to the display data provided to the first display circuit 261, has passed a predetermined period without new display data being provided to the first display circuit 261. This will gradually turn off the light. Moreover, with such a configuration, not only when the display content of the special figure display section 37a is changed, but also when the display content of the special figure display section 37a is not changed, the output processing of the previous display data The same display data as the first display circuit 261 is supplied to the first display circuit 261.

The number of display segments provided in the special figure display section 37a is eight. Therefore, 8-bit data is provided to the first display circuit 261 as display data for controlling the display of the special figure display section 37a.

The second display circuit 262 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the special figure reservation display section 37b. As a result, each display segment of the special figure pending display section 37b enters a light emitting state or a light extinguishing state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the second display circuit 262. In this case, although the second display circuit 262 is able to store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), after the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all "0". This will bring us closer to the state of Therefore, the display segment of the special figure pending display section 37b that is in a light-emitting state due to the display data provided to the second display circuit 262 remains for a predetermined period without new display data being provided to the second display circuit 262. As time passes, the light will gradually turn off. Moreover, with this configuration, not only when the display content of the special figure reservation display section 37b is changed, but also when the display content of the special figure reservation display section 37b is not changed, the previous display data is The same display data as in the output processing time is supplied to the second display circuit 262.

The number of display segments provided in the special figure reservation display section 37b is four. Therefore, 4-bit data is provided to the second display circuit 262 as display data for controlling the display of the special figure pending display section 37b. However, since the display data is provided in 8-bit units, 8-bit data is provided even when the display data is provided to the second display circuit 262, but 4 bits of that are provided to the special figure pending display section. 37b is used as display data for display control.

The third display circuit 263 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the general figure display section 38a. As a result, each display segment of the ordinary figure display section 38a is brought into a light-emitting state or a light-out state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the third display circuit 263. In this case, although the third display circuit 263 is able to store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), after the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all "0". This will bring us closer to the state of Therefore, the display segment of the general figure display section 38a that is in a light emitting state due to the display data provided to the third display circuit 263 has passed a predetermined period without new display data being provided to the third display circuit 263. This will gradually turn off the light. Moreover, with such a configuration, not only when the display contents of the general figure display section 38a are changed, but also when the display contents of the ordinary figure display section 38a are not changed, the output processing of the previous display data The same display data as the third display circuit 263 is supplied to the third display circuit 263.

The number of display segments provided in the ordinary figure display section 38a is eight. Therefore, 8-bit data is provided to the third display circuit 263 as display data for controlling the display of the general figure display section 38a.

The fourth display circuit 264 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the general figure reservation display section 38b. As a result, each display segment of the ordinary figure reservation display section 38b enters a light-emitting state or a light-out state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the fourth display circuit 264. In this case, although the fourth display circuit 264 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), after the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all "0". This will bring us closer to the state of Therefore, the display segment of the regular figure reservation display section 38b that is in a light-emitting state due to the display data provided to the fourth display circuit 264 remains for a predetermined period without new display data being provided to the fourth display circuit 264. As time passes, the light will gradually turn off. Moreover, with such a configuration, not only when the display contents of the general figure reservation display section 38b are changed, but also when the display contents of the ordinary figure reservation display section 38b are not changed, the previous display data is The same display data as in the output processing time is supplied to the fourth display circuit 264.

The number of display segments provided in the ordinary figure reservation display section 38b is four. Therefore, 4-bit data is provided to the fourth display circuit 264 as display data for controlling the display of the ordinary figure reservation display section 38b. However, since display data is provided in 8-bit units, 8-bit data is provided even when display data is provided to the fourth display circuit 264, but 4 bits of that data are provided to the general figure reservation display section. 38b is used as display data for display control.

The fifth display circuit 265 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments provided in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, each display segment of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 enters a light-emitting state or a light-off state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the fifth display circuit 265. In this case, although the fifth display circuit 265 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), after the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all "0". This will bring us closer to the state of Therefore, for the display segments of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 that are in a light emitting state due to the display data provided to the fifth display circuit 265, new display data is provided to the fifth display circuit 265. As a predetermined period of time passes without any interruption, the light gradually turns off. Moreover, with such a configuration, not only the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are changed, but also the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are changed. Even if not, the same display data as the previous display data output processing time is supplied to the fifth display circuit 265.

Each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is provided with seven display segments. In contrast, display data is provided in 8-bit units. When the display data of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is provided to the fifth display circuit 265, the 7-bit display data corresponding to the first notification display device 201 is provided as data in 8-bit units. After that, 7-bit display data corresponding to the second notification display device 202 is provided in 8-bit units, and then 7-bit display data corresponding to the third notification display device 203 is provided in 8-bit units. Finally, 7-bit display data corresponding to the fourth notification display device 204 is provided as 8-bit data.

In the configuration in which the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 are provided as described above, the main CPU 63 supplies display data to the display IC 266. In other words, the display ICs 266 are not provided one to one for the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265, but one display IC 266 is provided in common to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265. A display IC 266 is provided. When the main CPU 63 supplies display data to the display IC 266, it also supplies type data indicating which of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 the display data corresponds to.

Regarding the electrical connection between the main side CPU 63 and the display IC 266, in detail, the main side CPU 63 and the display IC 266 are connected to a type data signal line LN1, a type clock signal line LN2, a display data signal line LN3, and a display clock signal. It is electrically connected using line LN4. These signal lines LN1 to LN4 are all signal lines for transmitting signals from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 by one-way communication.

Type data is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 by serial communication using the type data signal line LN1. In this case, the delimitation of each bit of type data by serial communication is indicated by the type clock signal transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the display IC 266 using the type clock signal line LN2. The type data is data indicating which of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 the display data to be transmitted corresponds to. The type data is transmitted as 5-bit data consisting of the first bit to the fifth bit. When the display data corresponds to the first display circuit 261, the first bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the second display circuit 262, the second bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the third display circuit 263, the third bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the fourth display circuit 264, the fourth bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the fifth display circuit 265, the fifth bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level.

Display data is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 by serial communication using the display data signal line LN3. In this case, the delimitation of each bit of display data by serial communication is indicated by a display clock signal transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 using the display clock signal line LN4. The display data is transmitted in 8-bit units consisting of the first to eighth bits.

The main CPU 63 transmits display data corresponding to each of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 to the display IC 266 in a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) to be described later. In this case, in one processing cycle of the second timer interrupt processing, display data is transmitted to one display circuit among the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265, and the display data is transmitted from the nth display circuit to the n+1th display circuit. The display circuits 261 to 265 to which display data is to be transmitted are changed one by one each time a new processing cycle of the second timer interrupt processing occurs according to the order in which the circuits are arranged. Furthermore, in the second timer interrupt processing in the processing cycle following the processing cycle in which the display data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265, which is the last in the order, is transmitted, the first display circuit 265, which is the first in the above order, Send the display data corresponding to. Note that only one piece of display data in 8-bit units is transmitted in the processing time of the second timer interrupt processing in which display data is transmitted to any of the first to fourth display circuits 261 to 264; In the processing cycle of the second timer interrupt process for transmitting display data, four pieces of display data in 8-bit units are transmitted corresponding to the number of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

In the configuration in which the main CPU 63 transmits display data as described above, the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 223 for non-specific control include various storage areas that are referenced by the main CPU 63 to transmit display data. is set. FIG. 120(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining various buffers 271 to 275 provided in the work area 221 for specific control, and FIG. 120(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the various buffers 271 to 275 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various storage areas 234 and 276.

As shown in FIG. 120(a), the work area 221 for specific control includes a first display data buffer 271, a second display data buffer 272, a third display data buffer 273, a fourth display data buffer 274, A fifth display data buffer 275 is provided.

The first display data buffer 271 stores display data to be supplied to the first display circuit 261. As already explained, the first display circuit 261 is provided corresponding to the special figure display section 37a, so the first display data buffer 271 contains display data for causing the special figure display section 37a to perform a predetermined display. It will be stored. In this case, storage of the display data in the first display data buffer 271 is performed in the display control process (step S8216) based on the contents of the special figure special electric train control process (step S8214) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). . Furthermore, when it comes to the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) for transmitting display data to the first display circuit 261, only when the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 has been changed. Instead, even if the display data has not been changed, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 is sent to the display IC 266.

Display data to be supplied to the second display circuit 262 is stored in the second display data buffer 272 . As already explained, the second display circuit 262 is provided corresponding to the special figure pending display section 37b, so the second display data buffer 272 has a display for causing the special figure pending display section 37b to perform a predetermined display. The data will be stored. In this case, storage of the display data in the second display data buffer 272 is performed in the display control process (step S8216) based on the contents of the special figure special electric train control process (step S8214) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). . Furthermore, when it comes to the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) for transmitting display data to the second display circuit 262, only when the display data stored in the second display data buffer 272 has been changed. Instead, even if the display data has not been changed, the display data stored in the second display data buffer 272 is sent to the display IC 266.

The third display data buffer 273 stores display data to be supplied to the third display circuit 263. As already explained, the third display circuit 263 is provided corresponding to the general figure display section 38a, so the third display data buffer 273 contains display data for causing the ordinary figure display section 38a to perform a predetermined display. It will be stored. In this case, storage of the display data in the third display data buffer 273 is performed in the display control process (step S8216) based on the contents of the general electric power control process (step S8215) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). be exposed. Furthermore, when it comes to the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) for transmitting display data to the third display circuit 263, only when the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 has been changed. Instead, even if the display data has not been changed, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

The fourth display data buffer 274 stores display data to be supplied to the fourth display circuit 264. As described above, the fourth display circuit 264 is provided in correspondence with the ordinary figure pending display section 38b, so the fourth display data buffer 274 contains a display for causing the ordinary figure pending display section 38b to perform a predetermined display. The data will be stored. In this case, storage of the display data in the fourth display data buffer 274 is performed in the display control process (step S8216) based on the contents of the general electric power control process (step S8215) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). be exposed. Furthermore, when it comes to the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) for transmitting display data to the fourth display circuit 264, only when the display data stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 has been changed. Instead, even if the display data has not been changed, the display data stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 is sent to the display IC 266.

The fifth display data buffer 275 stores display data to be supplied to the fifth display circuit 265. As already explained, the fifth display circuit 265 is provided corresponding to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, so that the fifth display data buffer 275 includes the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 .about.204 store display data for performing a predetermined display. When it is time to process the second timer interrupt process for transmitting display data to the fifth display circuit 265, not only when the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is changed, but also when the display data Even if the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is not changed, the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

Here, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display corresponding to the management result of the game history, and also execute a setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) or a setting value update process (FIG. 116). If so, a display corresponding to the current setting value is displayed. In this case, since the fifth display data buffer 275 is provided in the work area 221 for specific control, the process of storing display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is performed as a process corresponding to the specific control. On the other hand, the process for deriving the game history management result is performed as a process corresponding to non-specific control, and the 61st to 68th parameters, which are the game history management results, are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices. 201 to 204 are sequentially displayed.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 120(b), the work area 223 for non-specific control includes not only the calculation result storage area 234 for storing the 61st to 68th parameters, but also the 61st to 68th parameters. A display target setting area 276 is provided for storing parameters to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Even in this embodiment, as in the fifteenth embodiment, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 10 seconds. Every second, the calculation results of the parameters to be displayed are read out from the calculation result storage area 234 in accordance with a predetermined display order, and the calculation results of the read parameters are stored in the display target setting area 276. Ru. If the game history management results are to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), which is a process corresponding to specific control, is performed. , the display data stored in the display target setting area 276 is read, and the read display data is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275.

On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (Fig. 115) is being executed, the first to fourth notification displays are Display data for causing a display indicating that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 to be performed in the devices 201 to 204 is fifth. The data is stored in the display data buffer 275. In addition, when the setting value update process (Fig. 116) is being executed, the first to fourth notification displays are The fifth display data is display data for displaying in the devices 201 to 204 a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. It is stored in buffer 275.

In the configuration in which the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 are provided as described above, at each processing time of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123), the main CPU 63 stores the display data corresponding to that processing time. Reads the display data from the buffers 271 to 275, transmits the read display data to the display IC 266, and also sends type data indicating which of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 the display data corresponds to. It is sent to the display IC 266. FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the display IC 266.

As shown in FIG. 121, the display IC 266 includes a type data buffer 281, a selection signal output section 282, a display data buffer 283, and a display data output section 284. The display data buffer 283 stores display data received from the main CPU 63. The display data output unit 284 transmits the display data stored in the display data buffer 283 to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265. The type data buffer 281 stores type data received from the main CPU 63. The selection signal output unit 282 outputs a selection signal for specifying the display circuits 261 to 265 corresponding to the type data stored in the type data buffer 281 among the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 as display data reception destinations. Output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119, the display IC 266 and the first display circuit 261 are electrically connected using a display signal group 291. The display signal group 291 is provided to make it possible to transmit 8-bit display data at once, and the display data in 8-bit units is transmitted from the display IC 266 by parallel communication. Further, a branch signal group 292 is provided branching off from the display signal group 291, and the branch signal group 292 includes a second display circuit 262, a third display circuit 263, a fourth display circuit 264, and a fifth display circuit 265. electrically connected to each of the Like the display signal group 291, the branch signal group 292 is provided to make it possible to transmit 8-bit display data at once, and the display data in 8-bit units is transmitted from the display IC 266 through parallel communication. Ru.

Since the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 are provided as described above, when the display data stored in the display data buffer 283 is transmitted by the display data output unit 284, the display data is transmitted to the first - Supplied to all of the fifth display circuits 261 to 265. In this case, first to fifth selection signal lines 301 to 305 are provided to designate display circuits 261 to 265 to receive and use the supplied display data.

The first selection signal line 301 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the first display circuit 261. When type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is stored in the type data buffer 281, in order to cause the first display circuit 261 to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output section 284. , the selection signal output section 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a first selection signal to the first display circuit 261 through the first selection signal line 301. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the first display circuit 261.

The second selection signal line 302 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the second display circuit 262. When type data corresponding to the second display circuit 262 is stored in the type data buffer 281, in order to cause the second display circuit 262 to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output section 284. , the selection signal output section 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a second selection signal to the second display circuit 262 through the second selection signal line 302. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the second display circuit 262.

The third selection signal line 303 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the third display circuit 263. When type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is stored in the type data buffer 281, in order to cause the third display circuit 263 to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output section 284. , the selection signal output section 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a third selection signal to the third display circuit 263 through the third selection signal line 303. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the third display circuit 263.

The fourth selection signal line 304 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the fourth display circuit 264. When type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264 is stored in the type data buffer 281, in order to cause the fourth display circuit 264 to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output section 284. , the selection signal output section 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a fourth selection signal to the fourth display circuit 264 through the fourth selection signal line 304. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the fourth display circuit 264.

The fifth selection signal line 305 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the fifth display circuit 265. When type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is stored in the type data buffer 281, in order to cause the fifth display circuit 265 to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output section 284. , the selection signal output section 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a fifth selection signal to the fifth display circuit 265 through the fifth selection signal line 305. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the fifth display circuit 265.

FIG. 122 shows how type data and display data are transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266, and the display data transmitted from the display IC 266 is received by the first display circuit 261 or the second display circuit 262. This is a time chart. 122(a) shows the transmission period of the type data signal from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266, FIG. 122(b) shows the transmission period of the type clock signal from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266, and FIG. ) shows the transmission period of the display data signal from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266, FIG. 122(d) shows the transmission period of the display clock signal from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266, and FIG. 122(f) shows the transmission period of the second selection signal from the display IC 266 to the second display circuit 262, and FIG. It shows the transmission period of display data from the display IC 266 to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265. The same applies to the case where display data is received by the third to fifth display circuits 263 to 265.

Type data is transferred from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 at timing t1 after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 including the main CPU 63, display IC 266, and first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 is started. And transmission of display data is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122(b), a pulse type clock signal is transmitted at each of timing t1, timing t2, timing t3, timing t4, and timing t5. As shown in (a), a pulsed type data signal is transmitted in correspondence with the transmission of the pulsed type clock signal at timing t1. As a result, information corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is stored in the type data buffer 281 of the display IC 266.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 122(d), a pulsed display clock is generated at each of the timings of t1, t2, t3, t4, t5, t6, t7, and t8. As the signal is transmitted, as shown in FIG. 122(c), a pulsed display data signal is transmitted in response to the transmission of the pulsed display clock signal at timing t2, timing t3, timing t5, and timing t7. is sent. As a result, display data corresponding to the above information format is stored in the display data buffer 283 of the display IC 266.

Then, by completing the transmission of the 8th bit display clock signal as shown in FIG. 122(d) at the timing t9, the data is stored in the type data buffer 281 at the timing t9 as shown in FIG. The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 starts transmitting the first selection signal to the first display circuit 261 corresponding to the stored type data, and at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 122(g). The display data output section 284 of the display IC 266 starts transmitting the display data stored in the display data buffer 283. Thereby, the display data is received and used by the first display circuit 261.

Thereafter, at timing t10, as shown in FIGS. 122(a) to 122(d), transmission of type data and display data from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 is newly started. In this case, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIGS. 122(e) and 122(g), the transmission of the first selection signal from the display IC 266 to the first display circuit 261 is stopped, and Transmission of display data to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 is stopped.

In detail, regarding the new transmission of type data and display data, as shown in FIG. At the same time as the signal is transmitted, as shown in FIG. 122(a), a pulsed type data signal is transmitted in response to the transmission of the pulsed type clock signal at timing t11. As a result, information corresponding to the second display circuit 262 is stored in the type data buffer 281 of the display IC 266.

Further, as shown in FIG. 122(d), a pulsed display clock is generated at each of the timing of t10, timing of t11, timing of t12, timing of t13, timing of t14, timing of t15, timing of t16, and timing of t17. Along with the signal being transmitted, as shown in FIG. 122(c), it corresponds to the transmission of pulsed display clock signals at timing t10, timing t11, timing t12, timing t15, timing t16, and timing t17. A pulsed display data signal is then transmitted. As a result, display data corresponding to the above information format is stored in the display data buffer 283 of the display IC 266.

Then, by completing the transmission of the 8th bit display clock signal as shown in FIG. 122(d) at timing t18, data is stored in the type data buffer 281 as shown in FIG. 122(f) at timing t18. The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 starts transmitting the second selection signal to the second display circuit 262 corresponding to the type data that has been selected, and at the timing t18, as shown in FIG. 122(g), The display data output unit 284 of the display IC 266 starts transmitting the display data stored in the display data buffer 283. As a result, the display data is received and used by the second display circuit 262.

Note that for the first to fourth display circuits 261 to 264, only one piece of display data is transmitted in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) to which display data is transmitted, but for the fifth display circuit 265, only one piece of display data is transmitted. In the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) to which display data is to be transmitted, four pieces of display data are transmitted corresponding to the number of first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As already explained, the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 123) is activated at the second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds), but even if it is a process for transmitting four pieces of display data, Each processing time is set so that one processing cycle is completed in less than the second interrupt period.

With the above configuration, it is possible to transmit display data to a plurality of display circuits 261 to 265 using one display IC 266. Here, as already explained, each of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 is capable of storing and retaining the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds); Then, the display data gradually approaches a state of all "0"s. In this case, if the reception of display data in each of the display circuits 261 to 265 exceeds a predetermined period, the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, the regular symbol reservation display section 38b, and the Even if the display content is not changed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the display segments that are in the light emitting state will temporarily approach the light-off state, and as a result, the light in the display segments will be reduced. There is a risk that flashing may occur. On the other hand, in this embodiment, in addition to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) that is started at the first interrupt cycle (specifically, 4 milliseconds), a second interrupt process that is shorter than the first interrupt cycle is executed. A second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) that is activated at a cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds) is set, and display data is collectively transmitted to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt process. .

The second timer interrupt process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 123. Note that the processes from step S8401 to step S8413 in the second timer interrupt process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) (step S8401). By disabling the generation of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 117), the first timer interrupt process (Figure 117) will interrupt the second timer interrupt process (Figure 123) even if the first interrupt cycle has elapsed. It is possible to prevent it from being started. Furthermore, by disabling the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 123), even if the second interrupt period has elapsed during the execution of the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 123), the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 123) is prohibited. It becomes possible to prevent the process (FIG. 123) from being activated redundantly.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step S8402). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the main CPU 63 is executing the setting value update process (FIG. 116). As already explained, the setting value update process (FIG. 116) is performed in the main process (FIG. 114) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, when the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is being executed. However, since the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is started by interrupting even when the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, it is necessary to set the second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63. Even if the value update process (FIG. 116) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is activated by interruption.

The situation where the setting update display flag is set to "1" means that the main CPU 63 is executing the setting value update process (FIG. 116) in the current processing time of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123). This means that the process was started by interrupting the situation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S8402, setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update is executed (step S8403). In the setting process, a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Display data for the display is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275.

When the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the fifth display circuit 265 via the display IC 266, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are explained in FIG. 124(a). The display shown in the figure is displayed. Specifically, when a display indicating that the setting value is being updated is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 At least one display segment in each is illuminated. In other words, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state. As a result, even if a display indicating that the setting value is being updated is displayed, the game hall can be informed that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not malfunctioning. This makes it possible for the administrator to understand the information. Note that even when the gaming history management results are displayed, at least one display segment in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a light emitting state, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in a light emitting state Each of the display devices 201 to 204 enters a display state.

In detail, regarding the display contents of each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, in the first notification display device 201, one display segment in the center is in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a non-lighting state. becomes. Even if the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, one display segment in the center of the first notification display device 201 may be in a light emitting state. When the game history management results are displayed, the display content of the first notification display device 201 does not include display content in which one display segment in the center is in a light-emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a light-out state. Not yet. As a result, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 in the situation where the setting value is updated can be changed to the gaming history while using display segments that can be in a light emitting state even when the management results of the gaming history are displayed. This makes it possible to display content that is not displayed in the management results.

In the second notification display device 202, like the first notification display device 201, one display segment in the center is in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a non-lighting state. Even if the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, one display segment in the center of the second notification display device 202 may be in a light emitting state. The display content of the second notification display device 202 when the game history management results are displayed does not include display content in which one display segment in the center is in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a light-off state. Not yet. As a result, while using the display segment that can be in a light emitting state even when the management results of the game history are displayed, the display contents of the second notification display device 202 in the situation where the setting value is updated can be changed to the game history. This makes it possible to display content that is not displayed in the management results.

In the third notification display device 203, some of the display segments are in a light-emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a light-out state so that the letter "H" is displayed. In this case, the display segments that are in a light-emitting state can be in a light-emitting state even when the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204; The display contents of the third notification display device 203 when displayed do not include the display contents in which the character "H" is displayed. As a result, while using the display segment that can be in a light emitting state even when the management results of the game history are displayed, the display contents of the third notification display device 203 in the situation where the setting value is updated can be changed to the game history. This makes it possible to display content that is not displayed in the management results. Moreover, the display content of the third notification display device 203 in the situation where the set value is being checked does not include the display content in which the character "H" is displayed. Thereby, by displaying "H" on the third notification display device 203, it is possible to notify the game hall manager that the setting value is being updated.

In the fourth notification display device 204, some display segments are in a light-emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a light-out state so that a display corresponding to the current set value is performed. In the case of FIG. 124(a), the current setting value is "Setting 2", so "2" corresponding to "Setting 2" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. By checking the fourth notification display device 204, the game hall manager can grasp the current setting values. Note that the display contents of the fourth notification display device 204 in a situation where setting values are being updated can be displayed both in a situation in which game history management results are displayed and in a situation in which setting values are being confirmed.

Returning to the explanation of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), if a negative determination is made in step S8402, it is determined whether the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1". (Step S8404). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the main CPU 63 is executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115). As already explained, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) is executed in the main process (FIG. 114) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, when the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is being executed. However, since the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is started by interrupting even when the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, it is necessary to set the second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63. Even if the confirmation process (FIG. 115) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is started as an interrupt.

The situation in which the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" means that the main CPU 63 is executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) in the current processing time of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123). This means that the process was started by interrupting the situation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S8404, a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is executed (step S8405). In the setting process, a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Display data for the display is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275.

When the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the fifth display circuit 265 via the display IC 266, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are explained in FIG. 124(b). The display shown in the figure is displayed. Specifically, when a display indicating that a setting value is being updated is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 At least one display segment in each is illuminated. In other words, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state. As a result, even if a display indicating that the set value is being checked is displayed, the game hall can be informed that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not malfunctioning. This makes it possible for the administrator to understand the information.

In detail, regarding the display contents of each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, in the first notification display device 201, one display segment in the center is in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a non-lighting state. becomes. Even when the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, one display segment in the center of the first notification display device 201 may be in a light emitting state. When the game history management results are displayed, the display content of the first notification display device 201 does not include display content in which one display segment in the center is in a light-emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a light-out state. Not yet. As a result, while using the display segment that can be in a light emitting state even when the management results of the game history are displayed, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 in the situation where the setting value is being checked can be changed to the game history. This makes it possible to display content that is not displayed in the management results.

In the second notification display device 202, similarly to the first notification display device 201, one display segment at the center is in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a non-lighting state. Even when the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, one display segment in the center of the second notification display device 202 may be in a light emitting state. The display content of the second notification display device 202 when the game history management results are displayed does not include display content in which one display segment in the center is in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a light-off state. Not yet. As a result, while using the display segment that can be in a light emitting state even when the management results of the game history are displayed, the display contents of the second notification display device 202 in the situation where the setting value is being checked can be changed to the game history. This makes it possible to display content that is not displayed in the management results.

Here, the display contents on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are the same regardless of whether the setting value is being updated or the setting value is being confirmed. This allows the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 to indicate that the display target on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is related to setting values rather than game history management results. This display makes it possible to clearly notify the game hall manager.

In the third notification display device 203, some of the display segments are in a light-emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a light-out state so that the letter "k" is displayed. In this case, the display segments that are in a light-emitting state can be in a light-emitting state even when the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204; The display contents of the third notification display device 203 when displayed do not include the display contents in which the letter "k" is displayed. As a result, while using the display segment that can be in a light emitting state even when the management results of the game history are displayed, the display contents of the third notification display device 203 in the situation where the setting value is confirmed can be changed to the game history. This makes it possible to display content that is not displayed in the management results. Furthermore, while the setting value is being updated, “H” is displayed on the third notification display device 203, while the setting value is being checked, “k” is displayed on the third notification display device 203. " is displayed. As a result, by checking the display contents of the third notification display device 203, the administrator of the game hall is notified whether the setting value is being updated or the setting value is being confirmed. becomes possible.

In the fourth notification display device 204, some display segments are in a light-emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a light-out state so that a display corresponding to the current setting value is performed. In the case of FIG. 124(b), the current setting value is "Setting 2", so "2" corresponding to "Setting 2" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. By checking the fourth notification display device 204, the game hall manager can grasp the current setting values. Note that the display contents of the fourth notification display device 204 in the situation where the setting values are being checked can be displayed in both the situation where the game history management results are displayed and the situation where the setting values are being updated.

Returning to the explanation of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), if a negative determination is made in step S8404, a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 in normal times is executed (step S8406). In this case, information is read from the display target setting area 276 in the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display parameters corresponding to the read information. Display data is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275. By transmitting the display data to the fifth display circuit 265 via the display IC 266, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 calculate the current display target parameter among the 61st to 68th parameters. The results will be displayed.

When the processing in step S8403, step S8405, or step S8406 is executed, the transmission state of the signal through the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 is turned off (step S8407), and the display data signal line LN3 and the display The transmission state of the signal through the clock signal line LN4 is set to the OFF state (step S8408). Thereafter, the type counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is updated (step S8409).

The type counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the display data transmission target among the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 in the current processing round of the second timer interrupt processing. When the value of the type counter is "1", the display data of the first display data buffer 271 is the target of transmission, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the display data of the second display data buffer 272 is the target of transmission. When the value of the type counter is "3", the display data of the third display data buffer 273 becomes the transmission target, and when the value of the type counter is "4", the display data of the fourth display data buffer 274 becomes the transmission target. If the data is to be transmitted and the value of the type counter is "5", the display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is to be transmitted. In the type counter update process, the value of the type counter is incremented by 1, and if the value of the type counter after adding 1 exceeds the upper limit value of "5", the value of the type counter is set to "1". . As a result, the display data transmission targets are sequentially changed in the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 each time the second timer interrupt process is performed.

Thereafter, type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read from the main ROM 64 (step S8410). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is "1", the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main side ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main side ROM 64; The type data corresponding to the display circuit 262 is read from the main side ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "3", the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is read from the main side ROM 64, and the value of the type counter is When the value of the type counter is "4", the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264 is read from the main side ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "5", the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is read from the main side ROM 64. Read from the side ROM 64.

Thereafter, display data is read from the display data buffers 271 to 275 corresponding to the value of the type counter (step S8411). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is "1", display data is read from the first display data buffer 271, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the display data is read from the second display data buffer 272. The display data is read out, and if the value of the type counter is "3", the display data is read out from the third display data buffer 273, and if the value of the type counter is "4", the display data is read out from the fourth display data buffer 274. The display data is read out, and if the value of the type counter is "5", the display data is read out from the fifth display data buffer 275.

Thereafter, various signal transmission processing is executed (step S8412). In the transmission process, signals are output to the type data signal line LN1 and type clock signal line LN2 so that the type data read in step S8410 is transmitted to the display IC 266. In addition, in the transmission process, signals are output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 so that the display data read in step S8411 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set to permit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) (step S8413).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. In the situation where the main process (FIG. 114) is started, the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on, and the process that allows the game to proceed is executed in the main process. The setting confirmation process is executed in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, which is the situation before the operation. This makes it difficult to illegally check the setting values.

Assuming that the setting values are checked while the game continues to progress, for example, if the setting values are checked in the middle of a game round, There is a risk that a transition to the open/close execution mode may occur. In this case, there is a possibility that the game ball cannot be fired toward the special electric winning device 32 even though the opening/closing execution mode has been started. In addition, if the setting value is confirmed during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode will proceed under the situation where the setting value is being confirmed. There is a possibility that the game ball will not be able to be fired towards the player.

Assuming that the progress of the game is stopped when checking the set value, if the check of the set value is started while a game is being played, the progress of the game is stopped midway. There is a risk that the processing for this may become complicated. For example, if confirmation of the set value is started in the middle of a game round and the progress of the game is to be stopped midway, a process for stopping the game round midway is required. In this case, when confirmation of the set value is started, the fluctuating display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is stopped midway, and when the confirmation of the set value is completed, the fluctuating display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is restarted. If you try to do so, it will require more complicated processing. Further, for example, if confirmation of the set value is started in the middle of execution of the opening/closing execution mode and it is attempted to stop the progress of the game midway, processing for stopping the opening/closing execution mode midway is required. Furthermore, if confirmation of the set value is started during the execution of the fluctuating display of the symbol on the ordinary figure display section 38a and an attempt is made to stop the progress of the game, the process for stopping the fluctuating display of the symbol midway is performed. It becomes necessary. In addition, if confirmation of the set value is started in the middle of execution of the open execution state of the general electric accessory 34a and you try to stop the progress of the game halfway, it is necessary to perform a process to stop the opening execution state in the middle. Become. On the other hand, a configuration in which the set values are confirmed after waiting until all games are finished may be considered, but in this case, the game time, opening/closing execution mode, fluctuating display of symbols in the general figure display section 38a, and general electric winnings It becomes necessary to wait until a situation in which none of the open execution states of the object 34a is executed, and there is a possibility that the waiting time until starting confirmation of the set value becomes long.

On the other hand, when the supply of operating power is started, which is the situation before the processing that allows the game to proceed in the main processing that is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, Since the setting confirmation process is executed in a situation where the process is being executed, the setting value is confirmed in a situation where the progress of the game has already been stopped. This makes it possible to prevent setting values from being checked while the game is in progress, as well as to stop the game progress midway when checking the setting values, or to stop the game progress. There is no need to wait until the settings are confirmed. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately confirm the setting values.

The reset button 68c is pressed in a situation where the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the reset button 68c, thereby starting the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and starting the main processing (FIG. 114). is pressed, and the RAM clearing process (step S7915) is executed regardless of whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on. As a result, the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c is uniquely linked to the execution of the RAM clearing process (step S7915), and the RAM clearing process (step S7915) It becomes possible to make the operation details for generating the event easy to understand for the manager of the game hall.

Even if the RAM clearing process (step S7915) is executed, the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is not cleared to "0" and the information on the setting value counter is not changed. This makes it possible to prevent the setting value from being changed even if the RAM clearing process (step S7915) is executed.

RAM Not only the clearing process (step S7915) but also the setting value updating process (step S7918) is executed. Furthermore, as described above, the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is performed based on the fact that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. is executed. This makes it possible to use the ON operation for the setting key insertion section 68a in common as an operation for executing processing related to setting values. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation details for generating the process related to the set value easy for the game hall manager to understand.

When turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key, and when pressing the reset button 68c is not added, a setting confirmation process is executed and the reset button is turned on. When adding the pressing operation 68c, a setting value update process is executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to change the process to be executed among the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process depending on whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the game hall manager to understand the operation details for executing a desired process among the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process. Furthermore, by increasing the number of operations required to execute the setting value update process than the setting confirmation process, it is possible to make it particularly difficult to perform the setting value update process illegally.

A process for monitoring whether or not the set value is abnormal is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) that is activated periodically. This makes it possible to monitor whether or not the set value is abnormal even when a game is being played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued even though the set value is abnormal.

Monitoring to determine whether or not the set value is abnormal is performed every time a monitoring opportunity occurs. More specifically, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is executed every time it is activated. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of monitoring whether or not the set value is abnormal.

The main process (FIG. 114) does not include a process for monitoring whether or not the set value is normal. If a process for monitoring whether the set value is normal or not is set in the process at the start of supply of operating power in the main process (Figure 114), the power failure flag and check sum are set at the start of supply of operating power. In addition to monitoring the settings, it is also necessary to monitor whether the set values are normal or not, which increases the monitoring load. Furthermore, if an attempt is made to execute the RAM clearing process (step S7915) and the setting value update process (step S7918) when it is specified that the set value is abnormal at the start of the supply of operating power, the processing configuration becomes complicated. On the other hand, since the main process (FIG. 114) does not have a process for monitoring whether the set value is normal or not, the process configuration for the process at the start of the supply of operating power is not suitable. It becomes possible to make it a thing. In addition, even if the process to monitor whether the set value is normal or not is not set in the process at the start of supply of operating power, the setting can be monitored in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 117). Since the configuration executes the process (step S8220), it is possible to deal with the abnormal setting value.

The display settings for the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 are performed in the display IC 266 according to the display data transmitted from the main CPU 63, so that the special figure display section 37a can display the display contents corresponding to the display data. , the special figure reservation display section 37b, the ordinary figure display section 38a, the ordinary figure reservation display section 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are display-controlled. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63. In this case, a plurality of display sections such as the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided. In the provided configuration, the display ICs 266 are not provided in one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of display sections, but one display IC 266 is used for the plurality of display sections. This makes it possible to increase the number of display units subject to display control while suppressing an increase in the number of display ICs 266. In addition, the transmission interval of display data from the main side CPU 63 to the display IC 266 is set so that the display circuits 261 to 265 corresponding to each display section are The transmission interval is set at which the display setting by the display IC 266 is performed. As a result, even in a configuration in which one display IC 266 is used for a plurality of display sections, it is possible to appropriately display the display data on each display section.

When transmitting display data to the display IC 266, the main CPU 63 transmits type data to the display IC 266 that allows the type of display circuits 261 to 265 to be set for the display data to be specified. Thereby, when display data is transmitted from the main CPU 63, the display IC 266 only needs to set the display data to the display circuits 261 to 265 corresponding to the type data transmitted from the main CPU 63. Therefore, even in a configuration in which one display IC 266 is used for a plurality of display sections, the configuration of the display IC 266 can be simplified.

The main CPU 63 transmits display data so that when one update cycle is such that a plurality of display units are subject to setting display data once in a predetermined order, the update cycle is repeated. I do. Thereby, the main CPU 63 only needs to change the display unit to which display data is to be transmitted in accordance with a predetermined order, so that the processing configuration of the main CPU 63 can be simplified.

Even if the content of the display data for one display unit is the same as the display data content when the display data was sent last time with that display unit as the transmission target, when the display unit becomes the transmission target, the main CPU 63 sends its display data. Thereby, even in a configuration in which one display IC 266 is used for a plurality of display sections, it is possible to continue displaying the same display on a predetermined display section.

The main CPU 63 executes a process for transmitting display data to the display IC 266 in a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) which is activated by interrupting other processes when the second interrupt cycle has started. This makes it possible to set the display data to each display section at a predetermined period. Therefore, even in a configuration in which one display IC 266 is used for multiple display units, before it becomes impossible to maintain the display corresponding to the display data on each display unit, the This allows display data to be set by the display IC 266.

The processing for transmitting display data to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 that are subject to display settings by the display IC 266 is summarized in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123). This makes it possible to set the display data to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 at the same cycle.

The main CPU 63 interrupts other processes and executes the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) when the first interrupt cycle has arrived. In this case, the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is set to a shorter cycle than the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). This makes it possible to transmit display data in a shorter cycle than in a configuration in which the process of transmitting display data to the display IC 266 is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117).

In addition, the process of transmitting display data to the display IC 266 is set in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), which has a shorter interrupt cycle than the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), in which the process for advancing the game is set. has been done. This allows the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) to be activated at an appropriate cycle to execute the process for progressing the game, while producing the excellent effects already described. Become.

The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is activated by interrupting even when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is being executed. This makes it possible to set the display data transmission cycle to a predetermined cycle.

When the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) is started, the interrupt of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) is prohibited, and when the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) is terminated, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) interrupts are permitted. This makes it possible to prevent the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) from being interrupted and executed in a situation where the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prioritize processing for transmitting display data.

The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is activated by interrupting even when the process for starting the supply of operating power (steps S7901 to S7918) is being executed in the main process (FIG. 114). This makes it possible to control the display of a plurality of display units even in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. In addition, since the configuration is such that the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 123) interrupts and starts the process at the start of the supply of operating power, the processing configuration for the process at the start of the supply of operating power does not have to be complicated. Also, it is possible to control the display of a plurality of display units in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed.

Even in a situation where the setting value update process (step S7918) is being executed in the main process (Figure 114), the second timer interrupt process (Figure 123) is interrupted and started, and in this situation, the second timer interrupt process In (FIG. 123), display data for displaying the current setting values on the fourth notification display device 204 is transmitted. As a result, the current setting value can be displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 in a situation where the setting value update process (step S7918) is being executed without complicating the processing configuration of the main process (FIG. 114). It becomes possible to make it possible to do so.

Even after the process at the start of supply of operating power is executed in the main process (FIG. 114), the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and activated every time the second interrupt period elapses. As a result, by using the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), it is possible to determine both the situation in which the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed and the situation after the process at the start of the supply of operating power is completed. Also, it becomes possible to control the display of a plurality of display units.

Note that an update button 68b is provided as in the first embodiment, and in the setting value update process (FIG. 116), the setting value is updated by one step each time the reset button 68c is pressed. The setting value may be updated by one step each time the update button 68b is pressed. Further, when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a and a turning operation is performed, positions corresponding to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are set as the rotation operation positions, and the setting key is inserted. A configuration may be adopted in which a setting value corresponding to the rotation operation position of the portion 68a is set. In addition, the setting key insertion part 68a is configured to be able to be rotated further than the ON position, and each time a rotation operation beyond the ON position is performed, the setting value in the middle of updating is changed to the setting value in the next order. The configuration may be updated.

In the setting value update process (FIG. 116), the currently selected setting value is determined by turning off the setting key insertion section 68a, and the setting value update process is completed by further pressing the reset button 68c. It is also possible to have a configuration in which In addition, in a configuration in which an update button 68b is provided, in the setting value update process (FIG. 116), the currently selected setting value is determined by turning off the setting key insertion section 68a, and the update button 68b is further pressed. A configuration may be adopted in which the setting value update process is terminated by the operation.

Further, as a condition for executing the setting value update process (FIG. 116), the condition that the game machine main body 12 is in an open state may not be set, and the front door frame 14 is in an open state. The configuration may be such that the condition that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state and the condition that the front door frame 14 is in the open state are not set.

Further, as a condition for executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115), a configuration may be adopted in which the condition that the game machine main body 12 is in an open state is not set, and the front door frame 14 is in an open state. The configuration may be such that the condition that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state and the condition that the front door frame 14 is in the open state are not set.

In addition, in the main process (FIG. 114) that is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, it is identified that the power outage flag is not set to "1" or that the checksum is abnormal. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which RAM clear processing (step S7915) is executed. In this case, after the RAM clearing process (step S7915) is executed, the setting value updating process (step S7918) may be executed, and the notification indicating that the setting value updating process (step S7918) should be executed. The configuration may be such that the game is executed and the progress of the game is stopped, or the process for controlling the progress of the game is started.

Also, in place of the configuration in which the setting confirmation process (step S7914) in the main process (FIG. 114) is executed after the process of determining whether the power outage flag is set to "1" and the process of comparing the checksum. , may be configured to be executed before these processes. In this case, it is possible to give priority to the process for confirming the set value.

Furthermore, the setting monitoring process (step S8220) is not limited to a configuration in which the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is executed every time the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is started; for example, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is The configuration may be such that the setting monitoring process (step S8220) is executed every time it is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10,000 times). In this case, it is possible to periodically monitor whether or not the set value is normal, while reducing the frequency with which the monitoring is performed.

Further, the configuration may be such that the setting monitoring process (step S8220) is executed in the remaining process (steps S7921 to S7924) in the main process (FIG. 114). In this case, it is possible to monitor whether the set value is normal or not using the free time when the first timer interrupt process (Figure 117) and the second timer interrupt process (Figure 123) are not being executed. It becomes possible.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the setting monitoring process (step S8220) is executed when a new gaming session is started. More specifically, when a game round is newly started, the setting monitoring process (step S8220) may be executed before the validity determination process is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the validity determination process from being executed in a situation where the set value is abnormal.

Furthermore, if it is identified in the setting monitoring process (step S8220) that the setting value is abnormal, the configuration may be such that the process moves to the setting value updating process (step S7918).

In addition, if it is specified that the setting value is abnormal in the setting monitoring process (step S8220), the setting abnormality flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" and the main processing (step S8220) is performed. Fig. 114) may be configured to start, and the progress of the game is stopped with the setting abnormality flag set to "1", and in order to release the stopped state of the game, the power must be turned OFF → A configuration may be adopted in which it is necessary to turn ON. In this case, even if no operation is performed to execute the setting value update process in the main process (Fig. 114), if the setting abnormality flag is set to "1", the setting value is forcibly set. By executing the value update process, it becomes possible to forcibly set a new setting value using the setting value update process set in the main process (FIG. 114).

Furthermore, the reservation information obtained when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 and the reservation information obtained when a game ball enters the second operating port 34 are stored separately, and The special figure display section 37a may have a configuration in which a first special figure display section and a second special figure display section are provided in correspondence with the reservation information. In this case, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the first special symbol display section and the fluctuating display of the symbols in the second special symbol display section may be executed in duplicate, and when a predetermined gaming state is reached, either one It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the duration of the variable display of the symbols on the special figure display section is extremely long. In this configuration, if the player tries to wait to confirm the set value until a situation where no game is being played, the waiting time becomes long. In contrast, by executing the setting confirmation process (step S7914) in the process when the main CPU 63 starts supplying operating power, the setting value can be changed without causing the above-described standby time. It becomes possible to confirm.

Further, in the low-frequency support mode, the period of continuous display of the fluctuating pattern on the common figure display section 38a may be configured to be extremely long. In this configuration, if the player tries to wait to confirm the set value until a situation where no game is being played, the waiting time becomes long. In contrast, by executing the setting confirmation process (step S7914) in the process when the main CPU 63 starts supplying operating power, the setting value can be changed without causing the above-described standby time. It becomes possible to confirm.

Further, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) is executed are not limited to the display contents in the above embodiments, and for example, the third notification Instead of displaying the letter "k" on the display device 203, it may be configured such that only the central display segment is in a light emitting state, similar to the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202. . Alternatively, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 may be turned off, and the fourth notification display device 204 may display a display corresponding to the current setting value.

Further, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the setting value update process (FIG. 116) is executed are not limited to the display contents in the above embodiments, and for example, the third notification Instead of displaying the letter "H" on the display device 203 for notification, it may be configured such that only the central display segment is in a light emitting state, similar to the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202. . Alternatively, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 may be turned off, and the fourth notification display device 204 may display a display corresponding to the current setting value.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the main CPU 63 simultaneously transmits the type data and display data to the display IC 266, the main CPU 63 may be configured to start transmitting the display data after starting to transmit the type data. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the display data transmission is started during the transmission of the type data, or a configuration in which the display data transmission is started after the type data transmission is completed. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the transmission of the type data is started after the transmission of the display data is started. In this case, the configuration may be such that the transmission of the type data is started during the transmission of the display data, or the transmission of the type data may be started after the transmission of the display data is completed.

Further, the display IC 266 is not limited to a configuration in which only one display IC 266 is provided in common to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265; A configuration may also be adopted in which they are provided in one-to-one correspondence. In this configuration, if the period for storing display data in each display IC provided in one-to-one correspondence with the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 is short, the display data to each display IC is Depending on the provision period, there is a risk that unintended blinking may occur on each display section. In contrast, by consolidating the process for transmitting display data into the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), which has a relatively short interrupt cycle, as in the above embodiment, display data can be sent to each display IC. It becomes possible to shorten the provision cycle, and it becomes possible to prevent unintended blinking from occurring in each display section.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the winning random number counter C1 is provided in the main side RAM 65, a configuration may be provided in which a random number circuit for updating the random number obtained in the win/fail determination process is provided. In this case, in the internal function register setting process in the main process (FIG. 114), settings are made to associate the random number of the random number circuit with the random number obtained in the validity determination process.

Further, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117), the timer interrupt processing is prohibited and the timer interrupt processing is enabled before and after each processing of steps S8201 to S8221, but this may be changed. For example, for some processing of the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 117), timer interrupt processing is prohibited and timer interrupt processing is enabled before and after, while other processing of the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 117) is disabled. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which prohibition of timer interrupt processing and permission of timer interrupt processing are not performed before and after that. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of processes included in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) are interposed, and prohibition of timer interrupt process and permission of timer interrupt process are set.

Furthermore, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) may not be configured to prohibit the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123). In this case, the second timer interrupt process (Figure 123) is executed with priority over the first timer interrupt process (Figure 117), making it possible to prioritize display control of multiple display units. . In addition, in this configuration, the first timer interrupt process (Figure 117) is prohibited from interrupting the first timer interrupt process (Figure 117) in order to prevent the first timer interrupt process (Figure 117) from being activated redundantly. On the other hand, the configuration may be such that the interrupt of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is not prohibited.

Furthermore, if both the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 117) and the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 123) occur, the execution of the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 123) will be replaced by the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 117), a configuration may be adopted in which execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is prioritized over execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), and the interrupt trigger is A configuration may also be adopted in which the timer interrupt processing that occurs earlier is started first.

Also, instead of the configuration in which execution of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 117) is prohibited when the second timer interrupt process (Figure 123) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (Figure 123) is executed. The configuration may be such that the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is started by interrupting even if the timer is currently running. This makes it possible to give priority to execution of processing for advancing the game over display control of a plurality of display units.

In addition, the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 123) is not set, and the various processes of the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 123) are the main processing (Fig. 114) and the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 117), respectively. It may also be configured to be executed in a distributed manner. For example, in the setting confirmation process (step S7914) in the main process (FIG. 114), a display indicating that the setting is being confirmed and a display corresponding to the current setting value are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is also possible to have a configuration in which a process is set to be performed by the user. In addition, in the setting value update process (step S7918) in the main process (FIG. 114), a display indicating that the setting is being updated and a display corresponding to the current setting value are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is also possible to have a configuration in which a process is set to be performed by the user. In addition, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117), the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 204 may be configured such that processing for display control is set.

Furthermore, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) is not limited to a configuration in which only the processing for controlling the display of multiple display units is executed; in addition to the processing for controlling the display of multiple display units, Alternatively or alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a process different from the process for controlling the display of the plurality of display units is executed. For example, a part of the process for advancing the game may be executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), and the rest may be executed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123). In this case, a process for which a relatively short execution cycle is preferable is executed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), which has a relatively short interrupt cycle, and a process that does not cause problems even if the execution cycle is relatively long. It is preferable to have a configuration in which this is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), which has a relatively long interrupt period. Further, among the processes from step S8202 to step S8221 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) of the above embodiment, the power outage information storage process (step S8202) is executed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), and A configuration may be adopted in which processes other than those described above are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). In this case, power outage monitoring can be repeatedly executed at relatively short intervals. In addition to or in place of this configuration, the fraud detection process (step S8206) is executed in the second timer interrupt process (Figure 123), and other processes are executed in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 117). It is also possible to have a configuration in which In this case, fraud monitoring can be repeatedly executed at relatively short intervals.

Further, the number of display circuits 261 to 265 for which display settings of display data are performed by the display IC 266 is not limited to five, and may be two, three, four, or six or more. Good too. Furthermore, the fifth display circuit 265 is not limited to the configuration in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are associated with each other; A configuration may also be adopted in which display circuits are provided in one-to-one correspondence.

<Thirty-fourth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the thirty-third embodiment described above in the processing configuration of the setting value update process executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the thirty-third embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the thirty-third embodiment described above will be basically omitted. Further, in this embodiment, the main control board 61 is provided with an update button 68b as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the setting value update process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step S8501 to step S8508 in the setting value update process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, a setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8501). After that, it is determined whether the value of the setting value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is greater than or equal to 1, which corresponds to "setting 1", and less than or equal to 6, which corresponds to "setting 6" (step S8502). If the value of the set value counter is "0" or 7 or more, a negative determination is made in step S8502, and the set value counter is set to "1" (step S8503). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes "setting 1."

If an affirmative determination is made in step S8502 or if the process in step S8503 is executed, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step S8504). If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S8504: NO), and the update button 68b is pressed (step S8505: YES), the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is changed. is added by 1 (step S8506). Thereby, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the setting value is updated to one level higher. Further, if the update button 68b is not pressed (step S8505: NO) or if the value of the set value counter is incremented by 1, the process returns to step S8502, but in step S8502 the value of the set value counter is If it is determined that the value is 7 or more, "1" is set in the set value counter in step S8503. As a result, when the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6", the state returns to "Setting 1".

If the reset button 68c is pressed (step S8504: YES), the current set value is determined and the process advances to step S8507. In step S8507, it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off using a setting key. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a has been switched from an ON state to an OFF state, or a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is in an OFF state. If the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned off (step S8507: NO), the process of step S8507 is executed again.

If the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off (step S8507: YES), the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S8508).

According to the above configuration, in a configuration where the setting value is updated by pressing the update button 68b, the setting value is determined by pressing the reset button 68c, and the setting key insertion part 68a is turned OFF. This completes the setting value update process. That is, in order to end the setting value updating process after updating the setting value in the setting value updating process, it is necessary not only to turn off the setting key insertion part 68a but also to press the reset button 68c. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the player to attempt to play a game using the set values after the set values have been updated illegally.

<35th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the thirty-third embodiment described above in the processing configuration regarding display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the thirty-third embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the thirty-third embodiment described above will be basically omitted.

FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the calculation result storage area 234 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

Information on the base value calculated by the main CPU 63 is stored in the calculation result storage area 234. The base value is the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (i.e., the total number of gaming balls supplied to the gaming area PA) in a situation that is neither the opening/closing execution mode based on jackpot results nor the high-frequency support mode. It is the ratio of the total number of game balls paid out.

Regarding the calculation of the base value, in detail, in this embodiment, although a normal counter area 231 is provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control, a counter area 232 for opening/closing execution mode and a counter area 233 for high frequency support mode are provided. is not provided. As in the fifteenth embodiment, the normal counter area 231 includes a general winning counter 231a for normal use, a special electric winning counter 231b for normal use, a first operating counter 231c for normal use, a second operating counter 231d for normal use, and A normal out counter 231e is provided. If one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 in a situation that is neither the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode, the value of the general winning counter 231a for normal use is incremented by 1, and the special When one game ball enters the winning device 32, the value of the special electric winning counter 231b for normal use is incremented by 1, and when one game ball enters the first operating port 33, the value of the special electric winning counter 231b for normal use is added. The value of the first operation counter 231c is incremented by 1, and when one game ball enters the second operation port 34, the value of the second operation counter 231d for normal use is incremented by 1, and the value of the second operation counter 231d for normal use is incremented by 1. When one game ball enters, 1 is added to the value of the normal out counter 231e. Then, when the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 in a situation that is neither the opening/closing execution mode due to the jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode are K91 to K95, the base values are as follows.
・Base value: Total number of game balls paid out (K91 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31" + K92 x "Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" + K93 x "To the first operating opening 33" Ratio of "number of prize balls for winning a prize" + K94 x "number of prize balls for winning a prize in the second operating port 34")/total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (K91 + K92 + K93 + K94 + K95).

The calculation of the base value is performed every time the result calculation process (FIG. 130), which will be described later, is executed in the management process (step S8920) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which will be described later. The values of the various counters 231a to 231e of 231 are in a situation where the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is not set to "1", and the opening/closing execution mode and high-frequency support mode are determined by the jackpot result. When the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the management start reference number in a situation that is neither of the above, it is cleared to "0", and The total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA in a situation where the management start flag is set to "1" and neither the opening/closing execution mode based on jackpot results nor the high-frequency support mode (i.e., the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA When the total number of game balls supplied to the shift reference number becomes the shift reference number, it is cleared to "0".

The management start reference number is set to 300, which is smaller than the shift reference number, as in the fifteenth embodiment. At the stage of shipping the Pachinko machine 10, the operation of the Pachinko machine 10 may be checked before shipping, and at that time, game balls are placed in each ball entry section and subsequent operations are checked. The base value under such a situation may be a different value than under a normal gaming situation. Therefore, in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1" and neither the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode, the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (i.e., the game ball Once the total number of game balls supplied to the area PA reaches the management start reference number, which is smaller than the shift reference number, the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0". This makes it possible to reduce the influence of the above operation check on the base value in a situation where normal games are being played after the Pachinko machine 10 is shipped. Note that the management start reference number is not limited to 300, but can be any number as long as it is multiple, and may be set to a number less than 300, or may be set to a number greater than 300. Good too.

The shift reference number is set to 60,000. Since the pachinko machine 10 shoots a maximum of 100 game balls per minute, 60,000 balls is the maximum number of balls shot in 10 hours. In this case, the general business hours in the gaming hall are about 13 hours, of which about 10 hours are played in situations where the game is not in either the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result or the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the shift standard number is set assuming the maximum number of game balls to be fired in one business day. By clearing the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 to "0" each time the shift reference number is reached, it becomes possible to calculate the base value within the range of the shift reference number. Note that the shift reference number is not limited to 60,000, but can be any number as long as it is a plural number, and may be set to a number smaller than 60,000, or even if it is set to a number greater than 60,000. good.

The calculation result storage area 234 is provided with a current area 311, a first history area 312, a second history area 313, and a third history area 314 as storage areas for storing information on the base value. There is. These various areas 311 to 314 all have the same storage capacity, specifically, a capacity of 1 byte so that base value information can be stored.

The current area 311 stores the base value calculated in the most recent result calculation process (FIG. 130). In other words, the latest base value is stored in the current area 311.

The first history area 312 stores the final base value in the previous calculation period. In this case, if the previous calculation period is after the management start flag is set to "1", the first history area 312 contains the opening/closing execution mode according to the jackpot result in the previous calculation period. The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the shift reference number in a situation other than the high-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode is Stored. In addition, if the management start flag is set to "1" as the previous calculation period has passed, the first history area 312 contains the opening/closing execution mode and the jackpot result in the previous calculation period. The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (that is, the total number of gaming balls supplied to the gaming area PA) reaches the management start reference number in a situation that is not in any of the high-frequency support modes is Stored.

The second history area 313 stores the final base value in the two previous calculation periods. In this case, if the two previous calculation periods are after the management start flag is set to "1", the second history area 313 contains the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result in the two previous calculation periods. The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the shift reference number in a situation other than the high-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode is Stored. In addition, if the management start flag is set to "1" as the two previous calculation periods have passed, the second history area 313 contains the opening/closing execution mode and the jackpot result in the two previous calculation periods. The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (that is, the total number of gaming balls supplied to the gaming area PA) reaches the management start reference number in a situation that is not in any of the high-frequency support modes is Stored.

The third history area 314 stores the final base value in the three previous calculation periods. In this case, if the three previous calculation periods are after the management start flag is set to "1", the third history area 314 contains the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result in the three previous calculation periods. The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the shift reference number in a situation that is neither the nor the high frequency support mode. Stored. In addition, if the management start flag is set to "1" after the three previous calculation periods have passed, the third history area 314 contains the opening/closing execution mode and the jackpot result in the three previous calculation periods. The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the management start reference number in a situation that is not in any of the high-frequency support modes is Stored.

The base values stored in the current area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 are sequentially reported on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Specifically, each time the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses, the information is displayed in the predetermined order of current area 311 → first history area 312 → second history area 313 → third history area 314. The base value to be notified is switched, and the base value to be notified is repeatedly switched in the predetermined order.

127(a) to 127(d) are for the first to fourth notifications when the base values stored in various areas 311 to 314 are notified in a situation where the management start flag is set to "1". 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents of display devices 201 to 204. FIG. FIG. 127(a) shows an example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value stored in the current area 311 is notified, and FIG. 127(b) shows the display contents of the first history display device 201 to 204. 127(c) shows an example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value stored in the area 312 is notified, and FIG. 127(c) shows the base value stored in the second history area 313. An example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when a value is notified is shown, and FIG. 127(d) shows an example of the display contents when the base value stored in the third history area 314 is notified. An example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 127(a) to 127(d), each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 has eight display segments 321 to 324. Of the eight display segments 321 to 324, seven display segments 321 to 324 are all rod-shaped light emitting regions of the same shape and size, and are arranged to form a figure 8. has been done. On the other hand, one display segment 321 to 324 is a circular light emitting area, and is located at the lower right position of the seven display segments 321 to 324 arranged in a figure 8 shape. It is provided. Regardless of which base value in the various areas 311 to 314 is to be notified, at least one display segment 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a light emitting state.

The first notification display device 201 displays a display indicating that the base value is being reported in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Specifically, the character "b" is displayed on the first notification display device 201 regardless of the base value of any of the various areas 311 to 314. When information other than the base value is reported on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the character “b” is not displayed on the first notification display device 201. As a result, by confirming that the letter "b" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, the game hall manager can check the base on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to understand that the value is being reported.

The second notification display device 202 displays a display indicating which base value among the various areas 311 to 314 is being reported. Specifically, in a situation where the base value of the current area 311 is being reported, the character "L." is displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 127(a). In a situation where the base value of the first history area 312 is being reported, the characters "1." are displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 127(b). In a situation where the base value of the second history area 313 is being reported, the characters "2." are displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 127(c). In a situation where the base value of the third history area 314 is being reported, the characters "3." are displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 127(d). As a result, by checking the characters displayed on the second notification display device 202, the administrator of the game hall can determine which base value is being reported on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to understand whether the calculation period is the same as that of the previous calculation period.

In the second notification display device 202, the circular display segments 321 to 324 are in a light emitting state regardless of which base value among the various areas 311 to 314 is being notified. As will be described later, on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, any number from “0” to “9” will be displayed as a display corresponding to the base value. In this case, when any of the numbers "1" to "3" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, the three numbers will be displayed on the second to fourth notification display devices 202 to 204. This makes it difficult to understand the base value. In contrast, the circular display segments 321 to 324 provided at the lower right of the second notification display device 202 are in a light emitting state, so that the second notification display device 202 displays "1" to "1". 3" is displayed, the number displayed on the second notification display device 202 and the number displayed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. It becomes possible to distinguish and understand numbers.

On the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, the number of the base value to be notified is displayed. The base value will be calculated as a decimal number up to the second decimal place, but the number at the first decimal place of the base value is displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the number after the decimal point of the base value is The second place number is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. Here, when the base value is "1.00", the number "0" is displayed on each of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. On the other hand, if the base value is not yet stored in the areas 311 to 314 that are the target of notification, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device A "-" character is displayed on each of the devices 204. As a result, even when the base value calculated as a decimal to the second decimal place is notified on the two display devices, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, the base value It is possible to distinguish the display contents between the case where the base value is "1.00" and the case where the base value is not yet stored in the areas 311 to 314 that are the target of notification.

Note that the display contents of the combination of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are the same when the base value is “1.00” and when the base value is “0.00”. On the other hand, in order to distinguish between the two, one of the former and the latter may be configured to maintain the light-emitting state of displaying "00", and the other may display "00" in a blinking state.

Next, while referring to the time chart in FIG. 129, the base values of the various areas 311 to 314 are announced on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where the management start flag is set to "1". Explain how it is done. 129(a) shows the period during which the base value stored in the current area 311 is notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 129(b) shows the period in which the base value stored in the current area 311 is FIG. 129(c) shows the period in which the base value stored in the second history area 313 is notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. 129(d) shows the period during which the base value stored in the third history area 314 is notified on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204. Fig. 129(e) shows the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA in a situation that is neither the opening/closing execution mode due to the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode since the new base value calculation period started. It shows the period until the number (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6000 balls).

At timing t1, as shown in FIG. 129(a), notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. At the time of this notification, as shown in FIG. 127(a), the first notification display device 201 displays a display indicating that the base value is the notification target, and the second notification display device 202 displays the base value stored in the current area 311. A display indicating that the base value stored in the current area 311 is to be notified is displayed, and a display corresponding to the base value stored in the current area 311 is displayed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204.

Here, as shown in FIG. 129(e), the calculation initial display is performed from timing t1 to timing t2. Specifically, the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA in a situation other than the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result or the high-frequency support mode after the new base value calculation period started (i.e., the gaming area During the period until the total number of game balls supplied to the PA reaches the initial standard number (specifically, 6000 balls), the balls will be displayed on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202. Rather than continuing to light up the characters, the characters to be displayed are displayed blinking as an initial display of the calculation. Immediately after the calculation period starts, there is little information on the gaming history for calculating the base value, so the actual measured value of the base value may be a value that deviates significantly from the theoretical value range of the base value. On the other hand, by performing the initial calculation display immediately after the calculation period starts, it becomes possible for the game hall manager to recognize that the calculation period has just started. .

In addition, in the initial calculation display, the numbers corresponding to the base value are displayed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, in which the numbers continue to be lit, whereas the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, the characters to be displayed are displayed blinking. This makes it possible to notify that the calculation period has just started, without reducing the visibility of the base value. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and even during the initial calculation display, a blinking display may be performed on at least one of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. The configuration may be such that the display is performed, or the configuration may be such that the blinking display is performed only on one of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202. In addition, the initial reference number is not limited to 6000 pieces, but can be any number as long as it is a plurality of pieces, and may be set to a number smaller than 6000 pieces, or even if it is set to a number larger than 6000 pieces. good.

At the timing of t2, the total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA in a situation other than the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result or the high-frequency support mode from the timing of t1 (i.e., the total number of gaming balls supplied to the gaming area PA) When the total number (total number) reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6000), the calculation initial display is ended as shown in FIG. 129(e). Thereby, lighting display is started not only in the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 but also in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202.

Thereafter, when the display duration period elapses from the timing t1 at the timing t3, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is ended as shown in FIG. 129(a), and the display is shown in FIG. As shown, notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is started. In this case, since the base value stored in the first history area 312 is the final base value calculation result in the previous calculation period, initial calculation display is not performed.

Thereafter, the display continuation period elapses from the timing t3 at the timing t4, and the notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is ended as shown in FIG. 129(b), and ), notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 is started. In this case, since the base value stored in the second history area 313 is the final base value calculation result in the calculation period two times before, initial calculation display is not performed.

Thereafter, as the display duration period elapses from the timing t4 at the timing t5, the notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 is ended as shown in FIG. 129(c), and ), notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 is started. In this case, since the base value stored in the third history area 314 is the final base value calculation result in the calculation period three times before, initial calculation display is not performed.

Thereafter, as the display continuation period elapses from the timing t5 at the timing t6, the notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 is ended as shown in FIG. 129(d), and ), notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is started. In this case, the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (i.e., the total number of gaming balls ejected from the gaming area PA in a situation other than the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result or the high-frequency support mode after the new base value calculation period starts) In order to notify that it is a period until the total number of supplied game balls reaches the initial reference number (specifically 6000 balls), from the timing of t6 to the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 129(e) The initial calculation display is performed as shown in .

Thereafter, as the display duration period elapses from the timing t6 at the timing t8, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is ended as shown in FIG. 129(a), and the display is shown in FIG. As shown, notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is started. In this case, since the base value stored in the first history area 312 is the final base value calculation result in the previous calculation period, initial calculation display is not performed.

Next, a processing configuration for making it possible to notify the base value as described above will be described.

The management process (step S8920) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) described later is a process corresponding to non-specific control in step S3803, similar to the management process (FIG. 70) in the fifteenth embodiment. Reads the management execution processing program. In this management execution process (FIG. 71), a check process is executed in step S3908 as in the fifteenth embodiment.

In the check process, when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 in a situation that is neither the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode, the normal general winning counter 231a is When one game ball enters the special electric winning device 32, one is added to the value of the normal special electric winning counter 231b, and one game ball enters the first operating port 33. When the entry of a game ball is identified, the value of the first operation counter 231c for normal use is incremented by 1, and when the entry of one game ball into the second operation port 34 is identified, the value of the first operation counter 231c for normal use is increased. The value of the second operation counter 231d is incremented by 1, and when it is specified that one game ball enters the out port 24a, the value of the normal out counter 231e is incremented by 1. Furthermore, in the checking process, result calculation processing and display processing are executed.

FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the result calculation process. Note that the processing from step S8601 to step S8615 in the result calculation process is executed using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, base value calculation processing is executed (step S8601). In this calculation process, a base value is calculated using the values of various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231. The method of calculating the base value is as described above. Then, the calculated base value is overwritten in the current area 311 (step S8602).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S8603). The management start flag has a value of "0" when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the Pachinko machine 10 is manufactured. Furthermore, when the non-specific control work area 223 including the management start flag is cleared to "0" and initialized, the value of the management start flag becomes "0". The total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA in a situation where the management start flag is "0" and neither the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode (i.e., the total number of gaming balls ejected from the gaming area PA) When the total number of supplied game balls becomes the management start reference number, "1" is set in the management start flag. Further, when the management start flag is set to "1", the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" and a new calculation period is started. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the influence of the operation check at the stage of shipping the Pachinko machine 10 to affect the base value in a situation where a normal game is being played after the Pachinko machine 10 is shipped.

If a negative determination is made in step S8603, the total number is calculated by summing all the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 (step S8604). Then, it is determined whether the calculated total number is greater than the management start reference number of 300 (step S8605).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S8605, the management start flag is set to "1" (step S8606). Thereafter, data shift processing is executed (step S8607). In the data shift process, information stored in the current state area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is transferred from the second history area 313 to the third history area 314. , first history area 312→second history area 313, and current area 311→first history area 312. As a result, the final base value in the two previous calculation periods is stored in the third history area 314 as the final base value in the three previous calculation periods, and the final base value in the one previous calculation period is stored in the third history area 314. is stored in the second history area 313 as the final base value in the two previous calculation periods, and the last calculated base value in the current calculation period is stored as the final base value in the previous calculation period. 1 history area 312. In data shift processing, when shifting information as described above, an LDIR instruction is used. With the LDIR instruction, by specifying the address of the area where the information is to be stored and the address of the area where the information is to be stored, the information stored in the storage source area can be shifted (copied) to the storage destination area. becomes.

However, in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", basically no base value information is stored in the first to third history areas 312 to 314, so in step S8607, management is essentially Only the final base value of the calculation period in a situation where the start flag is not set to "1" is shifted to the first history area 312. Thereafter, all the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" (step S8608).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S8603, the total number is calculated by summing all the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 (step S8609). Then, it is determined whether the calculated total number is greater than the initial reference number of 6000 (step S8610). If a negative determination is made in step S8610, the calculation initial flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S8611), and if an affirmative determination is made in step S8610, the corresponding The calculation initial flag is cleared to "0" (step S8612). The calculation initial flag indicates the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (i.e., the gaming area This flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the total number of game balls supplied to the PA has reached the initial reference number.

When the process of step S8611 or step S8612 is executed, it is determined whether the total number calculated in step S8609 is equal to or greater than the shift reference number of 60,000 (step S8613). If an affirmative determination is made in step S8613, data shift processing is executed (step S8614). In the data shift process, the information stored in the current area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is transferred from the second history area 313 to the third history area 314 in the same way as in step S8607. 3 history area 314, first history area 312→second history area 313, and current area 311→first history area 312. As a result, the final base value in the two previous calculation periods is stored in the third history area 314 as the final base value in the three previous calculation periods, and the final base value in the one previous calculation period is stored in the third history area 314. is stored in the second history area 313 as the final base value in the two previous calculation periods, and the last calculated base value in the current calculation period is stored as the final base value in the previous calculation period. 1 history area 312. In data shift processing, when shifting information as described above, an LDIR command is used. With the LDIR instruction, by specifying the address of the area where the information is to be stored and the address of the area where the information is to be stored, the information stored in the storage source area can be shifted (copied) to the storage destination area. becomes. Thereafter, all the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" (step S8615).

FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing display processing. Note that the processing from step S8701 to step S8714 in the display processing is executed using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, it is determined whether the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S8701). If an affirmative determination is made in step S8701, the value of the switching timing counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is subtracted by 1 (step S8702). The switching timing counter selects the first to fourth notification displays among the base values stored in the current state area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234, respectively. This counter is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that it is the timing to switch the base value to be notified in the devices 201 to 204. As already explained, each time the display duration period (specifically 5 seconds) elapses, notification is made in the predetermined order of current area 311 → first history area 312 → second history area 313 → third history area 314. The target base value is switched, and the base value to be notified is repeatedly switched in the predetermined order.

When the process of step S8702 is executed, by determining whether the value of the switching timing counter after subtraction by 1 is "0", the base value that is currently the target of notification becomes the target of notification. It is determined whether the display continuation period has elapsed since then (step S8703). When an affirmative determination is made in step S8703, the value of the display target counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8704). If the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value "3" (step S8705: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step S8706).

The counters to be displayed are the first to fourth notification displays among the base values stored in each of the current area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234. This counter is used by the main CPU 63 to specify the base value to be notified in the devices 201 to 204. Specifically, when the value of the display target counter is "0", the base value stored in the current area 311 is the target of notification, and when the value of the display target counter is "1", the base value stored in the first history area The base value stored in the second history area 312 becomes the notification target, and when the value of the display target counter is "2", the base value stored in the second history area 313 becomes the notification target, and the value of the display target counter is "3". ”, the base value stored in the third history area 314 becomes the notification target.

If a negative determination is made in step S8705 or if the process in step S8706 is executed, the switching timing counter of the work area 223 for non-specific control displays a value corresponding to the next notification target switching timing (specific Specifically, a value corresponding to 5 seconds is set (step S8707).

If a negative determination is made in step S8703 or if the process in step S8707 is executed, the display target setting area 276 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control corresponds to the base value that is the current notification target. Execute the process to set the display data to be displayed. Specifically, first, display type data corresponding to the value of the display target counter is set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8708). The display type data includes display data for causing the first notification display device 201 to display that the notification target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the base value, and the base value of the notification target. A display indicating which of the current area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 the value corresponds to is displayed on the second notification display device 202. and display data for causing the process to occur.

After that, the base value is read from the area corresponding to the value of the counter to be displayed among the current area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234, and the base value is read out from the area corresponding to the value of the counter to be displayed. The calculation result data corresponding to the first decimal place number and the second decimal place number in the value are set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8709). The calculation result data includes display data for causing the third notification display device 203 to display a display corresponding to the number in the first decimal place in the base value to be notified, and the number in the second decimal place in the base value to be notified. and display data for causing the fourth notification display device 204 to perform a display corresponding to the above.

As described above, display data consisting of display type data and calculation result data is set in the display target setting area 276. By transmitting the display data to the display IC 266 in a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) to be described later, a display corresponding to the display data is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. .

Further, the process of step S8709 is executed every time the display process (FIG. 131) is executed, regardless of the switching timing of the base value to be notified. As already explained, each time the calculation result storage process (FIG. 130) is executed, the base value is calculated using the current values of each counter 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, and the calculated base value is It is stored in the current state area 311 of the calculation result storage area 234. In this case, as described above, the process of step S8709 for setting the calculation result data in the display target setting area 276 is executed every time the display process (FIG. 131) is performed regardless of the switching timing of the base value of the notification target. When the base value of the current area 311 is changed in a situation where the base value of the current area 311 is to be notified, the changed base value can be notified.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the base value of the current area 311 is to be notified based on the value of the display target counter (step S8710), and the calculation initial flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to " 1" is set (step S8711). As already explained, the calculation initial flag is the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA in a situation other than the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result or the high-frequency support mode after the new base value calculation period started. This flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) has reached the initial standard number. If an affirmative determination is made in both step S8710 and step S8711, the initial display flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S8712), and either step S8710 or step S8711 is set. If a negative determination is made in step S8713, the initial display flag is cleared to "0".

The initial display flag is set on the first notification display device 201 to notify that in a situation where the base value of the current area 311 is the target of notification, the base value is the initial base value of the calculation after the start of the calculation period. This flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the second notification display device 202 should be displayed blinking. When it is specified in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) that will be described later that the initial display flag is set to "1", it is not enough to simply send the display data stored in the display target setting area 276 to the display IC 266. In the case where the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display corresponding to the display data, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are blinked, and the third The notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are turned on. Note that if it is determined in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) that the initial display flag is not set to "1", the display corresponding to the display data stored in the display target setting area 276 is When the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are to be used, all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are turned on.

On the other hand, if the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is not set to "1" and a negative determination is made in step S8701, regardless of the value of the display target counter, the current area 311 The base value is read, and calculation result data corresponding to the first decimal place number and the second decimal place number in the read base value are set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8714). By transmitting the display data corresponding to the calculation result data to the display IC 266, the number to the first decimal place in the base value of the current area 311 is displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the base value of the current area 311 is displayed on the third notification display device 203. The second decimal place digit in the value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. With the above configuration, in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", the base value in the past calculation period will not be reported, and only the base value calculated in the current calculation period will be reported. be done.

In a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", calculation result data is set in the display target setting area 276, but display type data is not set. Details will be described later, but when the base value is notified in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are The display content is different from the case where the base value is notified in a situation where the start flag is set to "1".

Next, the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 132. Note that the processing from step S8801 to step S8825 in the main processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, power-on initial setting processing is executed (step S8801). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed after the main process is started. During this predetermined wait period, the start of operation and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

Thereafter, internal function register setting processing is executed (step S8802). In the internal function register setting process, the interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, is set to the first interrupt cycle (specifically, 4 milliseconds). At the same time, the interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, is set to a second interrupt cycle that is shorter than the first interrupt cycle. (Specifically, set to 2 milliseconds).

That is, in this embodiment, as in the thirty-third embodiment, there are first timer interrupt processing and second timer interrupt processing so that the interrupt cycles are relatively long and short. Both the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process are started by interrupting the main process. Further, the second timer interrupt process is activated by interrupting the first timer interrupt process. On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process interrupts the second timer interrupt process and is not activated. In addition, if both the first and second interrupt cycles have elapsed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process are not being executed, the second timer interrupt process The timer interrupt processing is activated first. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process is a process that is activated with priority over the first timer interrupt process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the first timer interrupt process is activated with priority over the second timer interrupt process.

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process is set in a specific register of the main CPU 63. do. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to setting the first and second interrupt cycles, for example, setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the winning random number counter C1 is executed.

Thereafter, the start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8803). The start-up processing flag indicates that even if the first timer interrupt processing is started, the processing for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring among the various processing set for the first timer interrupt processing will be executed. On the other hand, this flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the first timer interrupt process should be terminated without executing the process for advancing the game.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the first timer interrupt process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that, as already explained, the first timer interrupt process is started periodically at a 4 millisecond cycle, which is the first interrupt cycle. Further, the program corresponding to the first timer interrupt processing is set as a specific control program.

In steps S8901 to S8905, the same processes as steps S301 to S305 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment are executed. That is, power outage monitoring is executed by executing power outage information storage processing in step S8901. Specifically, similar to the power outage information storage process (FIG. 101) in the thirtieth embodiment, it is monitored whether a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power outage is received from the power outage monitoring board 67, and the power outage is detected. If the occurrence of this is identified, an infinite loop occurs after the power outage process is executed. In the power outage processing, a power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored in the work area 221 for specific control. In addition, by executing the lottery random number update process in step S8902, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general utility goods opening counter C4 is updated, and in step S8903 The numerical information of the random number initial value counter CINI is updated by executing the random number initial value update process, and the numerical information of the variation type counter CS is updated by executing the variation counter update process in step S8904. Further, by executing fraud detection processing in step S8905, it is monitored whether an event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred. In the fraud detection process, by monitoring the occurrence of multiple types of events and confirming that any one of these multiple types of events has occurred, the game stoppage provided in the work area 221 for specific control is detected. Set the flag to "1".

After executing the processing from step S8901 to step S8905, it is determined whether "1" is set in either the game stop flag or the start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control. (Step S8906). If "1" is not set in either the game stop flag or the start-up process flag (step S8906: NO), the processes of steps S8907 to S8920 are executed. In steps S8907 to S8919, the same processes as steps S8208 to S8220 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed. In step S8920, management processing is executed similarly to step S8221 of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) in the thirty-third embodiment, but the content of the check processing of the management execution processing called in the management processing is has already been explained. In the checking process, updating processing for each of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 is executed, as well as result calculation processing (FIG. 130) and display processing (FIG. 131).

On the other hand, if at least one of the game stop flag and the start-up processing flag is set to "1" (step S8906: YES), the first timer interrupt processing is executed without executing the processing of steps S8907 to S8920. finish. In other words, not only when the game stop flag is set to "1" but also when the start-up processing flag is set to "1", steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt processing. However, the processes in steps S8907 to S8920 are not executed.

The start-up processing flag indicates that the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps S8801 to S8819) is started in the main processing (FIG. 132) and interrupt permission (step S8805) is set, as in the thirty-third embodiment described above. It is set to "1" before performing this operation, and is cleared to "0" before the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed and the remaining processing (steps S8822 to S8825) is started. In this case, as described above, in the first timer interrupt processing, if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the processing from step S8907 to step S8920 is not executed, thereby reducing the supply of operating power. It is possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being executed in a situation where the process at the start (steps S8801 to S8819) is being executed. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt processing, even if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", by executing the processing from step S8901 to step S8905, when the supply of operating power starts Even in a situation where the processing (steps S8801 to S8819) is being executed, power outage monitoring is executed, and the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and random number initial value counter CINI are updated. is executed, and further fraud detection is performed.

In particular, by executing the power outage information storage process (step S8901) even when the start-up process flag is set to "1", the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S8801 to S8819) Even if a power outage occurs in a situation where ) is being executed, it is possible to perform power outage processing in response to the power outage. As already explained in the power outage processing, the power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored in the work area 221 for specific control. Since the information is stored, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality in the main RAM 65 from being identified when the supply of operating power is restarted. As a result, even if a power outage occurs during the setting value update process (step S8819), the setting values selected at that time can be stored and retained as the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. . Therefore, even if a power outage occurs during execution of the set value update process, there is no need to execute the set value update process again when the supply of operating power is restarted.

By the way, in a situation where the setting value update process is being executed, interrupts are not prohibited for either the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) or the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134) and can be interrupted at any timing. It is possible. In this case, if the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) or the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134) interrupts and is activated in the main process (Figure 132) including the setting value update process, the activation target Information on the return address of the main process (FIG. 132) for returning after the timer interrupt process has been completed is saved to the stack area 222 for specific control, and the main side information immediately before the timer interrupt process is started is saved. Information in various registers of the CPU 63 is saved in a stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt processing that was the target of activation ends, the process returns to the main processing (FIG. 132) corresponding to the return address information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and The information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is returned to various registers of the main CPU 63.

Returning to the explanation of the main processing (FIG. 132), after setting the start-up processing flag to "1" in step S8803, the initial check period (specific Specifically, a value corresponding to 5 seconds is set (step S8804). In this embodiment, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, each display segment 321 to 324 provided in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can normally enter a light emitting state. In order to have the administrator of the game hall confirm whether the game is correct or not, a check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 from the start of the process in step S8804 until the initial check period has elapsed. . Specifically, as the check display, all the display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in a light emitting state, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128(b). . In step S8804, information corresponding to this initial check period is set in the checking counter.

Note that the initial check period is required until the process for controlling the progress of the game is started when none of the processes of step S8811, step S8812, step S8815, and step S8819, which will be described later, are executed in the main process. The time is set longer than the maximum time. Therefore, a game may be started in a situation where a check display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step S8805). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt cycle. However, since the start-up processing flag is set to "1" in step S8803, even if the first timer interrupt processing is started, out of the various processing of the first timer interrupt processing, power failure monitoring and various counters are While the process for updating and fraud monitoring is executed, the first timer interrupt process is ended without executing the process for advancing the game.

Thereafter, in steps S8806 to S8825, processes similar to steps S7905 to S7924 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed. Specifically, in step S8806, it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed. In other words, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the reset button 68c is pressed and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Here, in this embodiment, like the thirty-third embodiment described above, the main controller 60 is provided with a setting key insertion section 68a and a reset button 68c, but is not provided with an update button 68b. Furthermore, the main control device 60 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the eleventh embodiment, instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S8806: NO), it is determined whether the power outage flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step S8807). When the power outage process is executed in the power outage information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the power outage flag is set to "1". The power outage flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to determine whether or not the power outage process was appropriately performed during the previous power shutoff.

If the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S8807: YES), a checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step S8808). The checksum calculation method is the same as in the 33rd embodiment. Thereafter, the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 221 for specific control calculated in the power outage process executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and saved in the work area 221 for specific control. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read from the specific control work area 221, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step S8808 (step S8809). Then, it is determined whether these checksums match (step S8810).

If a negative determination is made in step S8807 or step S8810, that is, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" or if the checksums do not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8811). When the game stop flag is set to "1", steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and when an affirmative determination is made in step S8906, steps S8907 to S8905 are executed. Do not execute the process in S8920. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not performed properly at the time of the previous power shutdown, or if the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control If the checksums do not match due to a change in the storage state of information for at least one of the following items since the last time the power was shut off, processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring will be executed. However, the process for advancing the game will not be executed.

Thereafter, an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality has occurred regarding the power failure flag or checksum is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 at the time of starting supply of operating power (step S8812). Upon receiving the abnormality command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting section 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the time of starting supply of operating power, and also issues a message from the speaker section 54 saying, ``Please change the settings.'' ” will be output. Further, a character image "Please change the settings" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is once stopped, the above notification will not be sent when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the setting value update process (step S8819) is executed. The configuration may be continued.

If the power outage flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal (steps S8807 and S8810: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using the setting key. Then, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is open to the inner frame 13 and the gaming machine main body 12 is open to the outer frame 11 (step S8814). The front door open sensor 95 is used to detect whether or not the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13, as in the thirtieth embodiment. The main body open sensor 96 is used to detect whether or not it is in the open state, as in the thirtieth embodiment. The setting key insertion part 68a is turned on using the setting key (step S8813: YES), and the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13, and the gaming machine main body is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. 12 is in the open state (step S8814: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step S8815). Details of the setting confirmation process will be explained later.

If the reset button 68c is pressed (step S8806: YES), RAM clear processing is executed (step S8816). The contents of the RAM clearing process are the same as step S7915 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment. Thereafter, the setting key insertion part 68a is turned ON using the setting key (step S8817: YES), and the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13, and the game is not inserted with respect to the outer frame 11. If the machine body 12 is in the open state (step S8818: YES), a setting value update process is executed (step S8819). Details of the setting value update process will be explained later.

If the process of step S8812 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S8813 or step S8814, if the process of step S8815 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S8817 or step S8818, or if the process of step S8819 is If executed, the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step S8820). By clearing the start-up process flag to "0", the state in which the process for advancing the game is not executed even if the first timer interrupt process is started is released. Note that in step S8820, the power outage flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

Thereafter, a return command is sent to the audio emission control device 81 (step S8821). The content of the information included in the return command and the processing content of the audio emission control device 81 when the return command is received are the same as in step S7920 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the 33rd embodiment. .

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps S8822 to S8825. In other words, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), but between the first timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process, There will be a remaining time. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of steps S8822 to S8825 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, the remaining processing in steps S8822 to S8825 can be said to be non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly. In steps S8822 to S8825, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

Next, the second timer interrupt process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 134. Note that the processes from step S9001 to step S9014 in the second timer interrupt process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) (step S9001). By disabling the generation of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133), the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) will interrupt the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134) even if the first interrupt cycle has elapsed. It is possible to prevent it from being started. Furthermore, since the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 134) is prohibited from occurring, even if the second interrupt period has elapsed during the execution of the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 134), the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 134) is prohibited. It becomes possible to prevent the process (FIG. 134) from being activated redundantly.

Thereafter, the checking counter is updated (step S9002). In the checking counter updating process, when the value of the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is 1 or more, the value of the checking counter is subtracted by 1. As a result, when the checking counter is used to measure the initial check period, the value of the checking counter is periodically decremented each time the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134) is started. The Rukoto.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step S9003). The setting update display flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the main CPU 63 is executing the setting value update process (FIG. 137). As already explained, the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is performed in the main process (FIG. 132) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, when the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is being executed. However, since the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting even when the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, it is necessary to set it in the main CPU 63. Even if the value update process (FIG. 137) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated by interruption.

The situation where the setting update display flag is set to "1" means that the current processing time of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) is executing the setting value update processing (FIG. 137) in the main CPU 63. This means that the process was started by interrupting the situation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9003, a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update is executed (step S9004). In this setting process, similarly to step S8403 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) in the thirty-third embodiment, the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are updated on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Display data for displaying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 and displaying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the fifth display data buffer 275. As a result, similarly to the thirty-third embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a display indicating the current setting value. will be held.

If a negative determination is made in step S9003, it is determined whether the setting confirmation display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step S9005). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the main CPU 63 is executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136). As already explained, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is executed in the main process (FIG. 132) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, when the process for starting the supply of operating power is being executed. However, since the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting even when the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, it is necessary to set it in the main CPU 63. Even if the confirmation process (FIG. 136) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated by interruption.

The situation in which the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" means that the main CPU 63 is executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 137) in the current processing time of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134). This means that the process was started by interrupting the situation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9005, a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is executed (step S9006). In this setting process, similarly to step S8405 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) in the thirty-third embodiment, the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are checked on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Display data for displaying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 and displaying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the fifth display data buffer 275. As a result, similarly to the thirty-third embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting value is being checked and a display indicating the current setting value. will be held.

If a negative determination is made in step S9005, normal setting processing is executed (step S9007). The normal setting process will be explained in detail later.

When the processing in step S9004, step S9006, or step S9007 is executed, the processing in steps S9008 to S9014 is executed. The processing contents of steps S9008 to S9014 are the same as steps S8407 to S8413 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) in the thirty-third embodiment.

Specifically, first, the transmission state of the signal through the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 is turned off (step S9008), and the signal is transmitted through the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4. The state is set to OFF state (step S9009). Thereafter, the type counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is updated (step S9010).

The type counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the display data transmission target among the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 in the current processing round of the second timer interrupt processing. When the value of the type counter is "1", the display data of the first display data buffer 271 is the target of transmission, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the display data of the second display data buffer 272 is the target of transmission. When the value of the type counter is "3", the display data of the third display data buffer 273 becomes the transmission target, and when the value of the type counter is "4", the display data of the fourth display data buffer 274 becomes the transmission target. If the data is to be transmitted and the value of the type counter is "5", the display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is to be transmitted. In the type counter update process, the value of the type counter is incremented by 1, and if the value of the type counter after adding 1 exceeds the upper limit value of "5", the value of the type counter is set to "1". . As a result, the display data transmission targets are sequentially changed in the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 each time the second timer interrupt process is performed.

Thereafter, type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read from the main ROM 64 (step S9011). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is "1", the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main side ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main side ROM 64; The type data corresponding to the display circuit 262 is read from the main side ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "3", the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is read from the main side ROM 64, and the value of the type counter is When the value of the type counter is "4", the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264 is read from the main side ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "5", the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is read from the main side ROM 64. Read from the side ROM 64.

Thereafter, display data is read from the display data buffers 271 to 275 corresponding to the value of the type counter (step S9012). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is "1", display data is read from the first display data buffer 271, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the display data is read from the second display data buffer 272. The display data is read, and if the value of the type counter is "3", the display data is read from the third display data buffer 273, and if the value of the type counter is "4", the display data is read from the fourth display data buffer 274. The display data is read out, and if the value of the type counter is "5", the display data is read out from the fifth display data buffer 275.

Thereafter, various signal transmission processing is executed (step S9013). In the transmission process, signals are output to the type data signal line LN1 and type clock signal line LN2 so that the type data read in step S9011 is transmitted to the display IC 266. In addition, in the transmission process, signals are output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 so that the display data read in step S9012 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set to permit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) (step S9014).

FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the normal setting process in step S9007 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134). Note that the processing from step S9101 to step S9109 in the normal setting processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, it is determined whether the value of the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is 1 or more (step S9101). If the value of the checking counter is 1 or more (step S9101: YES), it means that it is the initial check period. In this case, the check display data is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the specific control work area 221 (step S9102). As already explained, the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 is display data for controlling the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Furthermore, the data for the check display is display data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform the check display, that is, the data for each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This is display data for setting all display segments 321 to 324 in a light emitting state. By supplying the check display data to the display IC 266, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. The display segments 321 to 324 of are in a light emitting state. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether each of the display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can normally be in a light emitting state.

Here, the initial check period is configured to be cancelable at the time of setting confirmation or setting value update. This cancelable configuration will be explained. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process executed in step S8815 of the main process (FIG. 132). Note that the processes from step S9201 to step S9206 in the setting confirmation process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, an operation instruction command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step S9201). Upon receiving the operation instruction command, the audio emission control device 81 causes the speaker section 54 to output a voice saying "Please operate the reset button 68c." The notification continues until the reset button 68c is pressed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S9202). If the reset button 68c is not pressed, the process waits in step S9202. When the reset button 68c is pressed (step S9202: YES), the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S9203). This cancels the initial check period.

Thereafter, the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S9204). By setting the setting confirmation display flag to "1", in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), an affirmative determination is made in step S9005 as already explained, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to In step 204, display data for displaying that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked and displaying the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275. (Step S9006). As a result, similarly to the thirty-third embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting value is being checked and a display indicating the current setting value. will be held.

Thereafter, on the condition that the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off (step S9205: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S9206). As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked, and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. The state in which this occurs is canceled. In this case, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start displaying the base value.

When the setting confirmation process is started as described above, on condition that the reset button 68c is pressed, the initial check period is canceled midway and the current status is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The setting value will be announced. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the main processing (FIG. 132) is started in the main CPU 63, the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power in the main processing is executed. Even if the configuration is such that the initial check period is started in the situation where the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the process at the start of supply of operating power is not executed. When checking the set values in a situation where the current set values are to be confirmed, it is possible to cancel the initial check period and display the current set values on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, it is possible to check the set value without waiting for the initial check period to elapse.

Furthermore, even if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is executed in the main process (FIG. 132), the initial check period starts first, so the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 It is possible to check the set value after checking whether each of the display segments 321 to 324 can normally be in a light emitting state. This makes it possible to accurately check the set values.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the setting value update process executed in step S8819 of the main process (FIG. 132). Note that the processes from step S9301 to step S9310 in the setting value update process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, an update start command is sent to the audio emission control device 81 (step S9301). Upon receiving the update start command, the audio emission control device 81 causes the speaker section 54 to output a voice saying "Settings are being changed." This notification continues until this setting value update process is completed.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the setting value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is greater than or equal to 1, which corresponds to "setting 1", and less than or equal to 6, which corresponds to "setting 6" (step S9302). If the value of the set value counter is "0" or 7 or more, a negative determination is made in step S9302, and the set value counter is set to "1" (step S9303). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes "setting 1."

If an affirmative determination is made in step S9302 or if the process in step S9303 is executed, it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off using a setting key (step S9304). In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a has been switched from an ON state to an OFF state, or a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is in an OFF state.

If the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned off (step S9304: NO), it is determined whether the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S9305). If the reset button 68c is pressed (step S9305: YES), the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1" (step S9306: NO). ), sets the setting update display flag to "1" (step S9307), and clears the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control to "0" (step S9308).

The initial check period is canceled by clearing the checking counter to "0". Furthermore, by setting the setting update display flag to "1", in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), an affirmative determination is made in step S9003 as already explained, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, display data for displaying that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and displaying the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275. The information is stored (step S9004). As a result, similarly to the thirty-third embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a display indicating the current setting value. will be held.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S9306, or if the process in step S9308 is executed, the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S9309). Thereby, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the setting value is updated to one level higher. Further, if the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S9305: NO) or if the value of the set value counter is incremented by 1, the process returns to step S9302, but in step S9302 the value of the set value counter is If it is determined that the value is 7 or more, "1" is set in the set value counter in step S9303. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6", the state returns to "Setting 1".

If the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off (step 9304: YES), the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step S9310). As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. The condition that occurs is canceled. In this case, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start displaying the base value.

When the setting value update process is executed as described above, the initial check period is canceled midway and the current status is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 on the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed. The setting value will be announced. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the main processing (FIG. 132) is started in the main CPU 63, the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power in the main processing is executed. Even if the configuration is such that the initial check period is started in the situation where the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the process at the start of supply of operating power is not executed. When updating the setting value in a situation where the current setting value is to be updated, the initial check period can be canceled and the current setting value can be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, it is possible to update the setting values while checking the current setting values without waiting for the initial check period to elapse.

Furthermore, even if the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is executed in the main process (FIG. 132), the initial check period starts first, so the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 The setting value can be updated after confirming whether each of the display segments 321 to 324 can normally be in a light emitting state. This makes it possible to update setting values accurately.

Furthermore, when the reset button 68c is pressed in order to update the setting value in the setting value update process (FIG. 137), the initial check period is canceled. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed to update the set value, the initial check period is canceled accordingly, making it possible to improve the operability for canceling the initial check period. Become.

Returning to the description of the normal setting process (FIG. 135), if the value of the checking counter is "0" and it is not the initial check period (step S9101: NO), the It is determined whether the management start flag is set to "1" (step S9103). If the management start flag is not set to "1" (step S9103: NO), a pre-management display setting process is executed for the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 (step S9104). In the setting process, display data for setting all display segments 321 and 322 in the light emitting state in each of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. Note that the configuration is not limited to having all the display segments 321, 322 in a light emitting state in each of the first and second notification display devices 201, 202, and the first and second notification display devices 201, 202, all display segments 321 and 322 may be configured to perform blinking display.

After that, the calculation result data set in the display target setting area 276 in the work area 223 for non-specific control is read out (step S9105), and the read calculation result data is displayed on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204. The display data to be applied is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 (step S9106). As already explained, in the display processing (FIG. 131), if the management start flag is not set to "1" (step S8701: NO), the base value is read from the current area 311, and the first decimal point in the read base value is The calculation result data corresponding to the digit in the digit and the digit in the second decimal place are set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8714). In step S9106, this calculation result data is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 as display data to be applied to the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204.

By supplying the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in steps S9104 and S9106 to the display IC 266, the first and second notification displays are displayed as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128(c). In a situation where all the display segments 321 and 322 in each of the devices 201 and 202 are in a light emitting state, the first decimal place of the base value calculated in the current calculation period by the third notification display device 203 At the same time, the fourth notification display device 204 displays the number to the second decimal place of the base value calculated in the current calculation period. The numbers corresponding to the base value are displayed on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 while all the display segments 321 and 322 are in a light emitting state in the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, respectively. By doing so, it becomes possible to make the game hall manager recognize that the base value currently being reported is the base value in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1".

In addition, in a situation where the management start flag is set to "1", as already explained, each time the display duration period (specifically 5 seconds) elapses, the current area 311 → first history area 312 → first history area 312 → 2 history area 313→3rd history area 314, the base value to be notified is switched in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a predetermined order, whereas the management start flag is changed to 1" is not set, the base value of the current area 311 is maintained as the notification target. As a result, when the operation of the Pachinko machine 10 is checked during the shipping stage of the Pachinko machine 10, the current base value can be checked at any timing.

If the management start flag is set to "1" (step S9103: YES), the display data set in the display target setting area 276 in the work area 223 for non-specific control is read out, and the read display data is 5 display data buffer 275 (step S9107). By supplying the display data to the display IC 266, if the base value of the current area 311 is the target of notification, the display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 127(a) is displayed for the first to fourth notifications. This is performed on the display devices 201 to 204, and if the base value of the first history area 312 is the target of notification, the display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 127(b) is the first to fourth notification display. If the base value of the second history area 313 is the target of notification, the display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 127(c) will be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices. 201 to 204, and if the base value of the third history area 314 is the target of notification, a display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 127(d) is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201. ~204 will be held.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the initial display flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S9108). As already explained, the initial display flag is used in the first notification to notify that the base value of the current area 311 is the initial base value of the calculation after the start of the calculation period in the situation where the base value of the current area 311 is the target of notification. This flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the display device 201 and the second display device 202 should be displayed blinking. If the initial display flag is set to "1" (step S9108: YES), a blinking setting process is executed for the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 (step S9109).

In the blinking setting process, when a display corresponding to the display data currently set in the fifth display data buffer 275 is performed on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, the display is blinked. Configure the settings to make it work. As a setting for blinking display, specifically, regarding the transmission of display data to the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, the display data currently set in the fifth display data buffer 275 is set. The corresponding data is sent to the display IC 266 until a predetermined lighting period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, and then all display segments 321 and 322 of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are turned off. State data is transmitted to the display IC 266 until a predetermined light-off period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, and thereafter the predetermined light-on period and predetermined light-off period are alternately repeated. As a result, if the base value in the current area 311 becomes the target of notification immediately after the start of a new base value calculation period, the initial calculation display will be performed on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202. Therefore, it is possible to make the game hall manager understand that the current base value reported on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the value immediately after the start of the new calculation period. It becomes possible.

Next, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 138. FIG. 138(a) shows the initial check period, and FIG. 138(b) shows the base value notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1". FIG. 138(c) shows the display period before the start of management, in which the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially announced on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. 138(d) shows a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fourth display periods. 138(e) shows the display period during setting updates performed on the notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 138(f) shows a display period during setting confirmation during which display indicating setting values is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 138(f) shows the timing when the reset button 68c is pressed.

First, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) and A case where the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is not executed will be described.

At timing t1, an initial check period starts as shown in FIG. 138(a). As a result, the check display starts on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128(b).

Thereafter, at timing t2, the initial check period ends without being canceled midway, as shown in FIG. 138(a). In this case, the pre-management display period starts at the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 138(b). In the display period before the start of management, all the display segments 321 and 322 in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are in a light emitting state, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. On the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, numbers corresponding to the current base value are displayed.

After that, at timing t3, the game balls ejected from the gaming area PA in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1" and neither the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode. The total number (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the management start reference number, which is smaller than the shift reference number. As a result, the management start flag is set to "1", and the pre-management display period ends as shown in FIG. 138(b). In this case, the normal display period starts at the timing t3 as shown in FIG. 138(c). In the normal display period, as shown in FIGS. 127(a) to 127(d), the base values stored in various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Announcements will be made sequentially.

Next, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the management start flag is set to "1", a setting confirmation process (FIG. 136 ) and the setting value update process (FIG. 137) are not executed.

At timing t4, an initial check period starts as shown in FIG. 138(a). As a result, the check display starts on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128(b).

Thereafter, at timing t5, the initial check period ends without being canceled midway, as shown in FIG. 138(a). In this case, the normal display period starts at the timing t5 as shown in FIG. 138(c). In the normal display period, as shown in FIGS. 127(a) to 127(d), the base values stored in various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Announcements will be made sequentially.

Next, in the case where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the management start flag is set to "1", the setting value update process (Fig. 137 ) is executed.

At timing t6, an initial check period starts as shown in FIG. 138(a). As a result, the check display starts on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128(b).

Thereafter, the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is started in the middle of the initial check period, and the reset button 68c is pressed at timing t7 as shown in FIG. 138(f). As a result, the initial check period is prematurely ended as shown in FIG. 138(a) at the timing of t7, and the setting update display period is started as shown in FIG. 138(d) at the timing of t7. Ru.

Thereafter, at timing t8, the display period during setting update ends as shown in FIG. 138(d). In this case, the normal display period starts at the timing t8 as shown in FIG. 138(c). In the normal display period, as shown in FIGS. 127(a) to 127(d), the base values stored in various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Announcements will be made sequentially.

Next, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the management start flag is set to "1", a setting confirmation process (FIG. 136 ) is executed.

At timing t9, an initial check period starts as shown in FIG. 138(a). As a result, the check display starts on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128(b).

Thereafter, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is started in the middle of the initial check period, and the reset button 68c is pressed at timing t10 as shown in FIG. 138(f). As a result, the initial check period is prematurely ended as shown in FIG. 138(a) at the timing of t10, and the setting confirmation display period is started as shown in FIG. 138(e) at the timing of t10. Ru.

Thereafter, at timing t11, the setting confirmation display period ends as shown in FIG. 138(e). In this case, the normal display period starts at the timing t11 as shown in FIG. 138(c). In the normal display period, as shown in FIGS. 127(a) to 127(d), the base values stored in various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Announcements will be made sequentially.

Note that when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is performed in the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power. Or, if the setting value update process (Fig. 137) is executed and the initial check period is canceled midway, the display period before starting management starts after the display period during setting update or the display period during setting confirmation ends. That will happen.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

An initial check period may occur in which each of the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a light emitting state as a check display. This makes it possible to check whether each of the display segments 321 to 324 is in a light emitting state, and to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal. It becomes possible to do so.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, an initial check period for the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. Thereby, when the supply of operating power is started, it becomes possible to quickly confirm whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal.

Each time the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, an initial check period for the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. This makes it possible to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal each time the supply of operating power is started.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, an initial check period for the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started without requiring any special operation. This makes it possible to easily confirm whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal.

Even if the initial check period has not elapsed, if a cancellation trigger occurs, the above-mentioned check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is terminated midway. Thereby, even in the middle of the initial check period, it is possible to end the check display and cause the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to display other displays.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and before the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed, an initial check period is started and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to At 204, the above-mentioned check display is started. This makes it possible to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal before the game starts.

In a configuration where predetermined setting-related processes such as setting confirmation processing (FIG. 136) and setting value update processing (FIG. 137) are executed in a situation where the processing for starting the supply of operating power is being executed, the supply of operating power is started. An initial check period begins in the situation where the current process is being performed. This makes it possible to integrate not only the predetermined setting-related processing but also the processing for starting the initial check period with respect to the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power.

In the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) and the setting value update process (FIG. 137), these predetermined settings are Before the related processing is executed, an initial check period is started, and the above-mentioned check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, after confirming whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal, the current setting values are confirmed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to do so. Therefore, it becomes possible to confirm the setting values accurately.

Based on the fact that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the setting value update process (FIG. 137) was executed in a situation during the initial check period, the first to fourth notifications are executed even if the initial check period has not passed. The above-mentioned check display on the display devices 201 to 204 is ended midway. As a result, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is executed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 do not have to wait for the initial check period to elapse. After completing the above-mentioned checking process in step 204, it becomes possible to display the current set values on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, it becomes possible to check the current setting values at an early stage.

If the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is executed in a situation where the initial check period is in progress, and the reset button 68c is pressed, it is determined that the initial check period has elapsed. Even if there is no such check, the above-mentioned check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is ended midway. This makes it possible to end the initial check period at any timing after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is started. For example, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is started, the administrator of the game hall must confirm that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal. After checking, it becomes possible to end the checking display and start displaying the current set value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Further, in the setting value update process (FIG. 137), the setting value of the selected object is updated by pressing the reset button 68c. In this case, when the reset button 68c is pressed as described above, the check display is ended on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the display of the current setting value is started. This eliminates the need for a dedicated operation to end the check display and start displaying the current set values. Therefore, it is possible to improve the work efficiency of updating setting values.

The calculation result storage area 234 stores a plurality of base values derived using the information in the normal counter area 231 for different periods. This makes it possible to grasp the base value in a plurality of periods, so it becomes possible to accurately grasp the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls supplied to the gaming area PA.

The calculation result storage area 234 is provided with a current area 311 where the most recent base value is stored, and first to third history areas 312 to 314 where base values derived earlier are stored. There is. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls supplied to the gaming area PA not only in the recent past but also in the past.

The base values that are repeatedly calculated at relatively short intervals before one calculation period has elapsed are stored in the current area 311, and the base values calculated when one calculation period has elapsed are stored in the first to third It is stored in history areas 312-314. This makes it possible to grasp the latest ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls supplied to the gaming area PA, as well as to grasp the above ratio in the past in units of one calculation period. becomes possible. Furthermore, since base values in units of one calculation period are stored in the first to third history areas 312 to 314, the number of base values stored in the first to third history areas 312 to 314 is suppressed. becomes possible.

Based on the elapse of one calculation period, the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0". This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the normal counter area 231. Furthermore, even if the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are configured to be cleared to "0" in this way, the base value calculated when one calculation period has elapsed will be Since it is stored in the history areas 312 to 314, it becomes possible to later grasp the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls supplied to the gaming area PA in the past calculation period.

A plurality of history areas 312 to 314 are provided as areas for storing past base values. This makes it possible to compare base values in multiple past calculation periods.

The base values stored in each of the current area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 are sequentially displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to individually grasp base values in a plurality of calculation periods while suppressing the number of notification display devices 201 to 204.

Even if the process for starting the supply of operating power is being executed, the occurrence of a power outage is monitored by executing the power outage information storage process (step S8901), and if the occurrence of a power outage is identified, Power outage processing is executed. As a result, if a power outage occurs while the process for starting the supply of operating power is being executed, it is possible to appropriately deal with the power outage.

In a configuration where the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) includes the power outage information storage process (step S8901), the first timer interrupt process is executed even when the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed. It is activated by interrupt. This makes it possible to periodically monitor the occurrence of a power outage even when the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed.

The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated by interrupting even if the remaining process is being executed after the process at the start of supply of operating power is completed. As a result, by using the first timer interrupt process that is started by interrupting the remaining process, it is possible to periodically monitor the occurrence of a power outage while the process for starting the supply of operating power is being executed. Become.

If the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) interrupts and is started while the process for starting the supply of operating power is being executed, " 1" is set, the process for advancing the game is not executed. As a result, in a configuration in which the first timer interrupt process is interrupted and started even when the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, the occurrence of a power outage is periodically monitored. It is possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being executed in a situation where the process at the start of supply is being executed.

In a configuration where the setting value update process (Fig. 137) is executed while the process for starting the supply of operating power is being executed, the power outage information is not updated even when the process for starting the supply of operating power is being executed. Storage processing (step S8901) is executed. As a result, even if a power outage occurs while setting the setting values to be used, it is possible to appropriately deal with it.

Note that the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not limited to a configuration in which the check display is terminated when the initial check period has elapsed, and an operation for terminating the check display may be performed. The check display may be continued until the check is performed. For example, the operation for terminating the termination may include operating the reset button 68c regardless of whether either the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is being executed. Often, an operation section other than the reset button 68c may be operated. In this case, the check display continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 until it is time to check the base value or set value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, it is possible to check the base value or set value after checking whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal. Furthermore, since the check display is terminated based on the operation of the operating unit, it is possible to terminate the check display at a desired timing.

In addition, when a predetermined operation unit such as the update button 68b or the reset button 68c is operated, regardless of whether the supply of operating power has started or not, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are used for checking. The configuration may be such that the display starts. In this case, it is possible to start the check display at a desired timing when checking the base value or set value. In addition, in this configuration, the check display may be terminated when a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, and the check display may be terminated using the above-mentioned predetermined operation section operated to start the check display or a separate operation section. The check display may be configured to end when the operation unit is operated.

Further, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while a specific operation unit other than the reset button 68c, such as the update button 68b, is operated, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are activated. A configuration may be adopted in which the check display is started, and when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started without any operation of the specific operation unit, the check display is not started. In this case, in a configuration in which the check display is performed upon the start of the supply of operating power, it becomes possible to select whether or not to start the check display by the operation of the manager of the gaming hall.

Furthermore, the base value is not limited to the configuration in which the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 regardless of whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state. The base value may be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when it is specified based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96 that the main body is in the open state. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start checking display, and then the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start displaying for checking. The base value may be displayed in step 204. This makes it possible to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal before checking the base value. In addition, in this configuration, the check display may be terminated when a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, and the check display may be terminated using the above-mentioned predetermined operation section operated to start the check display or a separate operation section. The check display may be configured to end when the operation unit is operated.

Furthermore, if the main processing (Fig. 132) is started when the conditions for executing the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 136) are met, the check displays on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are If the main process is not started and the conditions for executing the setting confirmation process are not satisfied, the check display may be started. In this case, if it is certain that the set value will be confirmed, it is possible to prevent the check display from being performed.

Furthermore, if the main processing (Fig. 132) is started when the conditions for executing the setting value update processing (Fig. 137) are satisfied, the check displays on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are If the main process is not started and the conditions for executing the setting value update process are not satisfied, a check display may be started. In this case, if it is certain that the set value will be updated, it is possible to prevent the check display from being displayed.

Additionally, if the main process (Figure 132) is started when either the conditions for executing the setting confirmation process (Figure 136) or the conditions for executing the setting value update process (Figure 137) are met. The main processing is performed in a state where the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not started and both the conditions for executing the setting confirmation process and the conditions for executing the setting value update process are not satisfied. A configuration may be adopted in which a check display is started when the check is started. In this case, if it is certain that the set value will be confirmed or updated, it is possible to prevent the check display from being displayed.

Furthermore, the check display is not limited to a configuration in which each of the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is maintained in a light emitting state; Each of the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the display devices 201 to 204 may be in a blinking state. In addition, in the check display, each of the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 becomes a light emitting state one by one or a plurality of segments one by one, and within the range of the initial check period. Each of the display segments 321 to 324 may be in a light emitting state at least once.

Further, the process of displaying a check on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not limited to a configuration in which the process is executed as a process corresponding to specific control, but is a process corresponding to non-specific control. It may also be configured to be executed as

Further, if the base value is not stored in any of the first to third history areas 312 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234, the history areas 312 to 314 are stored in the first to fourth notification display devices 201. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the information is not subject to notification in steps 204 to 204. In this case, for example, if the base value is stored in the current area 311 and the first history area 312, but the base value is not stored in the second history area 313 and the third history area 314, the display duration period Each time, the notification targets in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are switched between the current area 311 and the first history area 312, and the second history area 313 and the third history area 314 It will not be subject to notification.

Furthermore, base values expressed as decimals up to the second decimal point are stored in the current state area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234. Although the configuration is described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that information on a combination of the number in the first decimal place and the number in the second decimal place of the base value is stored. To make it possible to calculate the total number of game balls paid out (K91 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning slot 31" + K92 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" + K93 x "No. The combination of "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + K94 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34") and the total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA (K91 + K92 + K93 + K94 + K95) It may also be configured such that information is stored. In the former case, the information in the various areas 311 to 314 can be set as is in the display target setting area 276, and in the latter case, the information in the various areas 311 to 314 can be used to calculate the base value and then the relevant information can be set as is. Information about the number in the first decimal place and the number in the second decimal place extracted from the base value is set in the display target setting area 276.

Further, the calculation result storage area 234 may have a configuration in which only the current area 311 and the first history area 312 are provided as areas for storing base values. A configuration may be adopted in which only two history areas 313 are provided. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which four or more areas are provided as history areas for storing past base value information.

In addition, the calculation result storage area 234 is not limited to a configuration in which various areas 311 to 314 are fixed in terms of addresses, and the base value is shifted in these various areas 311 to 314 as necessary. .about.314 may be provided as a ring buffer.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the base value is calculated as the aspect information, a configuration in which the 61st parameter to the 68th parameter are calculated as in the fifteenth embodiment may be used. In this case, all of the 61st to 68th parameters may be stored in each of the current area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234. A configuration may be adopted in which some parameters are stored, such as the 61st to 68th parameters are stored in the current area 311, but only the 61st parameter is stored in the first to third history areas 312 to 314.

Furthermore, in addition to or in place of the base value as mode information, the probability of occurrence of a jackpot result may be calculated and stored, or the probability of occurrence of a high frequency support mode may be calculated and stored.

Furthermore, the trigger for shifting the base values in the various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is limited to when the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA exceeds the shift reference number. Instead, the shift may be performed when a predetermined period of time (for example, 8 hours) has elapsed, or the shift may be performed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. The shift may be performed when the supply of operating power to the CPU 63 is started, or the shift may be performed when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which there are multiple types of opportunities for shifting.

In addition, until the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1", the display segments 321 and 322 in each of the first and second notification display devices 202 are in a light emitting state. The display segments 321 and 322 in each of the first and second notification display devices 202 may be in a blinking state. Furthermore, until the management start flag is set to "1", "bL.--" → "b1.--" → "b2.--" → "bL.--" → "b1.--" → "b2.--" A configuration may be adopted in which the display "b3.--" is repeated.

Furthermore, until the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1", the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are The display segments 321 and 322 in each of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are in a light emission state or a blinking state without the check display being in a light emission state, and the third and fourth notification displays are not performed. A configuration may also be adopted in which a display corresponding to the fact that the management start flag is not set to "1" is displayed, such as a display corresponding to the current base value is displayed on the display devices 203 and 204.

In addition, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" or the checksums do not match, the game stop flag is set to "1" and the progress of the game is stopped, the first to fourth notification In the display devices 201 to 204, each of the display segments 321 to 324 may be in a light emitting state, similar to the check display, or each of the display segments 321 to 324 may be in a blinking state.

Further, the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not limited to the configuration in which the main side CPU 63 performs the display control, but may be configured to be performed by a dedicated control means. The configuration may be performed by the display control device 82, or the display control device 82 may perform the configuration. In this case, when displaying the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the base value to be notified is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the control means that is the main control body, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 When setting values are displayed on the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the setting values to be notified are transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means that is the main control unit. In addition, when the main side CPU 63 executes the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are Information corresponding to the start of the check display is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the control means serving as the control entity so that the check display is started.

<36th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the thirty-fifth embodiment described above in the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the thirty-fifth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the thirty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step S9401 to step S9426 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

In steps S9401 to S9403, the same processes as steps S8801 to S8803 of the main process (FIG. 132) in the thirty-fifth embodiment are executed. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step S9404). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt cycle. However, since the start-up processing flag is set to "1" in step S9403, even if the first timer interrupt processing is started, out of the various processing of the first timer interrupt processing, power failure monitoring and various counters are While the process for updating and fraud monitoring is executed, the first timer interrupt process is ended without executing the process for advancing the game.

Thereafter, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9405). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. When the checking counter is set to a value of 1 or more, a check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the checking counter is "0" (step S9406). Then, the process waits in step S9406 until the value of the checking counter becomes "0". As a result, the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 continues until the initial check period set in step S9405 has elapsed.

Thereafter, the processes of steps S9407 to S9426 are executed. The processing contents of steps S9407 to S9426 are the same as steps S8806 to S8825 of the main processing (FIG. 132) in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power is started in the main CPU 63, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. A check display is performed, and in this situation, the progress of the process at the start of supply of operating power is stopped until the initial check period has elapsed. This makes it possible to prevent setting confirmation and setting value update from being executed during the initial check period, making it possible to suppress an increase in processing load. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the game from being started in the middle of the initial check period.

<37th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the thirty-fifth embodiment described above in the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the thirty-fifth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the thirty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step S9501 to step S9525 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

Steps S9501 to S9518 execute the same processes as steps S7901 to S7918 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment. Thereafter, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9519). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. If the checking counter is set to a value of 1 or more, the checking display continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

Thereafter, the processing from step S9520 onwards is executed. The processing contents of steps S9520 to S9525 are the same as steps S7919 to S7924 of the main processing (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the remaining processing is performed after the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps S9501 to S9518) is completed in the main CPU 63. Before (steps S9522 to S9525) are started, an initial check period is started. As a result, there is no need to control the initial check period in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, reducing the processing load in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. becomes possible.

The settings confirmation process (step S9514) and the setting value update process (step S9518) are executed when the supply of operating power is started, whereas the initial check period is when the process when the supply of operating power is started is completed. will start later. As a result, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the setting values are not displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to avoid any influence.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, either the setting confirmation process (step S9514) or the setting value update process (step S9518) is executed, and the setting confirmation process (step S9518) is executed. Even if neither S9514) nor the setting value update process (S9518) are executed, a check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal, regardless of the situation when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

The main processing of the main CPU 63 (FIG. 140) includes cases where either the setting confirmation process (step S9514) or the setting value update process (step S9518) is executed, and the setting confirmation process (step S9514) or the setting value update process (step S9518). This is a process that is commonly executed even when neither the value update process (step S9518) is executed, and is a process that is executed in common even when neither the value update process (step S9518) is executed, and neither the setting confirmation process (step S9514) nor the setting value update process (step S9518) is executed, a check mark is placed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as a process that is executed later than the setting confirmation process (step S9514) and the setting value update process (step S9518). The process to start the display is set. By setting the process for starting the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as a common process, it is possible to simplify the process configuration and achieve the advantages already described. This makes it possible to achieve the desired effect.

Even in a situation where a check display is being executed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the main CPU 63 can start processing for advancing the game. As a result, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 after the setting confirmation process (step S9514) or the setting value update process (step S9518) is executed, the game can be played. It becomes possible to prevent the start timing of the process for proceeding from being delayed.

Note that a configuration may be adopted in which the processing from step S9520 onwards is not started until the initial check period has elapsed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game from being started in a situation where the check display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

<38th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the thirty-fifth embodiment in the processing configuration of the normal setting process executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the thirty-fifth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the thirty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the normal setting process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step S9601 to step S9605 in the normal setting process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, it is determined whether the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S9601). If the management start flag is not set to "1" (step S9601: NO), check display data is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the specific control work area 221 (step S9602). By supplying the data for the check display to the display IC 266, the check display starts on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Specifically, all the display segments 321 to 324 in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in a light emitting state. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether each of the display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can normally be in a light emitting state.

If the management start flag is set to "1" (step S9601: YES), the processes of steps S9603 to S9605 are executed. The processing contents of steps S9603 to S9605 are the same as steps S9107 to S9109 in the normal setting processing (FIG. 135) in the thirty-fifth embodiment. By executing the processes of steps S9603 to S9605, the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. At the same time, when the base value of the current area 311 is notified immediately after the start of a new calculation period, initial calculation display is performed on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202.

According to the above configuration, when the management start flag is not set to "1", there is an initial check period in which check displays are performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial check period is limited to a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1" at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, etc. becomes possible.

<39th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the thirty-third embodiment described above in the configuration regarding setting values. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the thirty-third embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the thirty-third embodiment described above will be basically omitted.

FIGS. 142(a) to 142(d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the setting corresponding storage area 325 provided in the main side ROM 64.

The setting correspondence storage area 325 stores a low probability mode correctness table, a high probability mode correctness table, a setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) and a setting value update process (FIG. 116) in correspondence with the setting values of the pachinko machine 10. Display data of setting values used for displaying the current setting values on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is set. More specifically, the setting storage area 325 includes a first setting information storage area 325a, a second setting information storage area 325b, a third setting information storage area 325c, a fourth setting information storage area 325d, and a fifth setting information storage area. 325e and a sixth setting information storage area 325f.

Each of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f includes a storage area for storing a low probability mode win/fail table that is referred to when the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and a storage area for storing a low probability mode win/fail table that is referred to when the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode. A storage area for storing the high probability mode validity table that is referred to when the high probability mode is selected, and a storage area for the first to fourth notifications in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) and the setting value update process (FIG. 116). A storage area is provided for storing display data of setting values used to display the current setting values on the display devices 201 to 204. In each of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, a predetermined area of multiple bytes is secured as a storage area for storing the success/failure table for the low probability mode, and an area for storing the success/failure table for the high probability mode. A predetermined area of multiple bytes is reserved as a storage area for storing setting value display data, and a 1-byte area is reserved as a storage area for storing display data of setting values. Therefore, each of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f has a storage capacity of multiple bytes. In this case, the start address of the first setting information storage area 325a is A(1), the start address of the second setting information storage area 325b is A(2), and the start address of the third setting information storage area 325c The start address of the fourth setting information storage area 325d is A(4), and the start address of the fifth setting information storage area 325e is A(5). The start address of the sixth setting information storage area 325f is A(6).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first form in this embodiment with the above configuration, six levels of setting values from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are set as the setting values of the pachinko machine 10, similar to the above 33 embodiments. ing. In this case, while the probabilities of a jackpot result in the low probability mode are different for each of "Settings 1" to "Settings 6", the probabilities of a jackpot result in the high probability mode are the same. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 142(a), in the first setting information storage area 325a, a first low probability probability table LT ( 1) is stored, and a common high probability probability table HT that is common to "Settings 1" to "Settings 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the probability table for the high probability mode. Display data for displaying "1" is stored in a storage area for storing display data. In the second setting information storage area 325b, a second low probability correctness table LT(2) corresponding to "setting 2" is stored in a storage area for storing the correctness table for the low probability mode, and a second low probability correctness table LT(2) corresponding to "setting 2" is stored. A common high-probability table HT that is common to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the propriety table, and " Display data for displaying "2" is stored.

In the third setting information storage area 325c, a third low probability correctness table LT(3) corresponding to "setting 3" is stored in a storage area for storing the correctness table for the low probability mode, and a third low probability correctness table LT(3) corresponding to "setting 3" is stored. A common high-probability table HT that is common to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the propriety table, and " Display data for displaying "3" is stored. In the fourth setting information storage area 325d, a fourth low probability correctness table LT(4) corresponding to "setting 4" is stored in a storage area for storing the correctness table for the low probability mode, and a fourth low probability correctness table LT(4) corresponding to "setting 4" is stored. A common high-probability table HT that is common to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the propriety table, and " Display data for displaying "4" is stored.

In the fifth setting information storage area 325e, a fifth low probability table LT(5) corresponding to "setting 5" is stored in a storage area for storing a low probability mode probability table, and a high probability mode A common high-probability table HT that is common to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the propriety table, and " Display data for displaying "5" is stored. In the sixth setting information storage area 325f, a sixth low probability correctness table LT(6) corresponding to "setting 6" is stored in a storage area for storing the correctness table for the low probability mode, and a sixth low probability correctness table LT(6) corresponding to "setting 6" is stored. A common high-probability table HT that is common to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the propriety table, and " Display data for displaying "6" is stored.

In the case of the configuration of the first form, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode. On the other hand, in the high probability mode, the probability of a jackpot result is the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, since the probability of a jackpot result in high probability mode is 1/30, the probability of a jackpot result in high probability mode is higher than the jackpot probability of low probability mode in "setting 6" even with "setting 1". There is a high probability.

In the first form in which "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are set as setting values, in order to execute the validity judgment process in Step S504 of the special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), it is executed in Step S503. The process of reading out the validity table will be explained. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the read-out process of the validity table. Note that the processing from step S9701 to step S9705 in the read-out process of the validity table is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, the value of the set value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control in the main side RAM 65 is read out (step S9701). Which of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in the setting correspondence storage area 325 should the setting value counter refer to when reading the validity table and when reading the display data of the setting values? This is a counter for specifying by the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, a storage area corresponding to the value of the setting value counter read in step S9701 is selected from among the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in the setting corresponding storage area 325 (step S9702). The set value counter is configured to take any value from "1" to "6" as in the thirty-third embodiment, and when the value of the set value counter is "1", the first If the setting information storage area 325a is selected, and the value of the setting value counter is "2", the second setting information storage area 325b is selected, and if the value of the setting value counter is "3", the third setting information storage area 325b is selected. If the setting information storage area 325c is selected, and the value of the setting value counter is "4", the fourth setting information storage area 325d is selected, and if the value of the setting value counter is "5", the fifth setting information storage area 325c is selected. The setting information storage area 325e is selected, and if the value of the setting value counter is "6", the sixth setting information storage area 325f is selected.

When making this selection, a correspondence table previously stored in the main ROM 64 is referred to. The correspondence table defines the correspondence between the value of the setting value counter and the start address of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f. Specifically, A(1), which is the start address of the first setting information storage area 325a, is set corresponding to the value "1" of the setting value counter, and A(1) is set corresponding to the value "2" of the setting value counter. A(2), which is the start address of the second setting information storage area 325b, is set, and A(2), which is the start address of the third setting information storage area 325c, is set in correspondence with the value "3" of the setting value counter. (3) is set, A(4), which is the start address of the fourth setting information storage area 325d, is set corresponding to the value of "4" of the setting value counter, and "5" of the setting value counter is set. A(5), which is the start address of the fifth setting information storage area 325e, is set in correspondence with the value of ``6'' of the setting value counter, and the start address of the sixth setting information storage area 325f is set in correspondence with the value of ``6'' of the setting value counter. The start address A(6) is set.

Thereafter, if the current winning/failure lottery mode is the low probability mode (step S9703: NO), the winning/failure table of the low probability mode is read out from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f selected in step S9702 (step S9704). On the other hand, if the current win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode (step S9703: YES), the high probability mode win/fail table is read from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f selected in step S9702 (step S9705).

By executing the win/fail table reading process as described above, the win/fail table corresponding to the current win/fail lottery mode is read out from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f corresponding to the value of the setting value counter. Then, in the validity determination process (step S504) of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), the read validity table is used to determine whether the current game round corresponds to the jackpot result.

Next, we will explain the process when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and started while the setting value update process (step S7918) is being executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63. do. In this case, in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), a process for setting the fifth display data buffer 275 while updating the set value is executed (step S8403). FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during a setting update. Note that the processing from step S9801 to step S9805 in the setting process is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, the value of the set value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control in the main side RAM 65 is read out (step S9801). Thereafter, a storage area corresponding to the value of the setting value counter read in step S9801 is selected from among the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in the setting corresponding storage area 325 (step S9802). The set value counter is configured to take any value from "1" to "6" as in the thirty-third embodiment, and when the value of the set value counter is "1", the first If the setting information storage area 325a is selected, and the value of the setting value counter is "2", the second setting information storage area 325b is selected, and if the value of the setting value counter is "3", the third setting information storage area 325b is selected. If the setting information storage area 325c is selected, and the value of the setting value counter is "4", the fourth setting information storage area 325d is selected, and if the value of the setting value counter is "5", the fifth setting information storage area 325c is selected. The setting information storage area 325e is selected, and if the value of the setting value counter is "6", the sixth setting information storage area 325f is selected. When making this selection, the correspondence table previously stored in the main ROM 64 is referred to, similar to the process of reading out the validity table (FIG. 143).

Thereafter, display data of setting values is read from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f selected in step S9802 (step S9803). Then, the display data of the read setting value is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the specific control work area 221 as display data to be applied to the fourth notification display device 204 (step S9804). Further, display data for displaying a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated on the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. (Step S9805).

By executing the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update as described above, the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step S9805 is This is performed on the third notification display devices 201 to 203, and a display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step S9804 is performed on the fourth notification display device 204. As a result, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124(a), the display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and the display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are changed to the first ~Performed on the fourth notification display devices 201-204.

Note that the settings that are executed when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and started while the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is being executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63 The setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during confirmation (step S8405) is similar to the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update (FIG. 144) regarding setting of display data of setting values. processing is executed.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first form, six levels of setting values from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are set as the setting values of the pachinko machine 10, but depending on the model and model of the pachinko machine 10, In some cases, setting values less than six levels are used. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second form shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third form shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth form shown in the explanatory diagram (d), only one setting value of "setting 1" is set. In this case, in any of the pachinko machines 10 of the second to fourth forms, the first to sixth setting information storages allow setting of six levels of setting values, similarly to the first form of pachinko machine 10. A setting corresponding storage area 325 having areas 325a to 325f is used.

In detail, when the setting corresponding storage area 325 is used in the pachinko machine 10 of the second form, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 142(b), the first setting information storage area 325a and the fourth setting information storage area Various information corresponding to "Setting 1" is stored in 325d. That is, in the first setting information storage area 325a and the fourth setting information storage area 325d, a first low probability correctness table LT (1 ) is stored, and a first high probability correct/fail table HT(1) corresponding to "Setting 1" is stored in the storage area for storing the high probability mode correct/fail table, and the display data of the set value is stored. Display data for displaying "1" is stored in the storage area for storage.

Various information corresponding to "Setting 3" is stored in the second setting information storage area 325b and the fifth setting information storage area 325e. That is, in the second setting information storage area 325b and the fifth setting information storage area 325e, a third low probability correctness table LT (3 ) is stored, and a third high probability correctness table HT(3) corresponding to "Setting 3" is stored in the storage area for storing the accuracy table of the high probability mode, and the display data of the setting value is stored. Display data for displaying "3" is stored in the storage area for storage.

Various information corresponding to "Setting 6" is stored in the third setting information storage area 325c and the sixth setting information storage area 325f. That is, in the third setting information storage area 325c and the sixth setting information storage area 325f, the sixth low probability correctness table LT (6 ) is stored, and a sixth high probability probability table HT(6) corresponding to "Setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the probability table of the high probability mode, and the display data of the set value is stored. Display data for displaying "6" is stored in the storage area for storage.

In the case of the configuration of the second embodiment, even if the configuration uses the setting corresponding storage area 325 having the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, these first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f The setting value for the number of stages is set to be smaller than the number of 6 stages. The probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode increases as the set value increases, and the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode also increases as the set value increases. Note that the jackpot probability in the high probability mode in "Setting 1" is higher than the jackpot probability in the low probability mode in "Setting 6".

In the case of the configuration of the second embodiment, in the read-out process of the validity table (FIG. 143), whether the value of the setting value counter is "1" or "4" corresponds to "setting 1". The validity table is read out, and whether the value of the setting value counter is "2" or "5", the validity table corresponding to "setting 3" is read out, and the value of the setting value counter is In either case of "3" or "6", the validity table corresponding to "Setting 6" is read out.

In the read-out process of the validity table (FIG. 143), the validity table is read from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter, regardless of the number of stages of the setting value. As a result, even if three levels of set values are set, the processing configuration of the read/fail table read process (FIG. 143) is the same as when six levels of set values are set. becomes possible.

In the case of the configuration of the second form, when the setting corresponding storage area 325, which can set six levels of setting values, is used, three levels of setting values are set, so that settings can be made in the setting corresponding storage area 325. It is possible to divide the number of settings value stages by the number of settings value stages to be used. In other words, the number of stages of setting values to be used is a divisor of the maximum number of stages of setting values that can be set in the setting correspondence storage area 325, and is different from the maximum number of stages. In this case, the same number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are allocated to each of the setting values to be used, and the setting values of three stages are arranged one by one in ascending order as one group. In this case, setting values are assigned to the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f so that the group is repeated. As a result, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated in a situation where the value of the setting value counter is "1" in the setting value update process (FIG. 116), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. The setting values displayed will be changed in the order of "1" → "3" → "6" → "1" → "3" → "6" → "1" → . In other words, the display changes to a different setting value in response to one operation of the reset button 68c, and the display is displayed in a fixed manner when one display cycle is defined as displaying each settable setting value once. The rounds will be repeated. Therefore, it becomes easier to update the setting values.

In the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 (FIG. 144) during the setting update, the setting value is displayed from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter, regardless of the number of stages of the setting value. This is a configuration for reading data. As a result, even if three levels of setting values are set, the processing configuration of the setting process (Fig. 144) can be made the same as when six levels of setting values are set. It becomes possible.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second form, various information corresponding to "setting 1" is stored in the first setting information storage area 325a and the second setting information storage area 325b, and the third setting information storage area 325c and the third setting information storage area 325c and the second setting information storage area 325b are stored. Various information corresponding to "Setting 3" is stored in the 4th setting information storage area 325d, and various information corresponding to "Setting 6" is stored in the 5th setting information storage area 325e and 6th setting information storage area 325f. A configuration may also be used. In other words, the same number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are allocated to each of the setting values to be used, and the setting information storage area where the same setting value is continuous in relation to the value of the setting value counter. The configuration may be set to 325a to 325f. In this case, if the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated in a situation where the value of the setting value counter is "1" in the setting value update process (FIG. 116), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 The setting values displayed will be changed in the order of "1" → "1" → "3" → "3" → "6" → "6" → "1" → .

In detail, when the setting corresponding storage area 325 is used in the pachinko machine 10 of the third form, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 142(c), the first setting information storage area 325a and the second setting information storage area 325b stores various information corresponding to "Setting 1". That is, in the first setting information storage area 325a and the second setting information storage area 325b, a first low probability correctness table LT (1 ) is stored, and a common high probability table HT that is common to "Settings 1" to "Settings 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the high probability mode's pass/fail table, and the set values are displayed. Display data for displaying "1" is stored in a storage area for storing data.

Various information corresponding to "Setting 2" is stored in the third setting information storage area 325c and the fourth setting information storage area 325d. That is, in the third setting information storage area 325c and the fourth setting information storage area 325d, a second low probability correctness table LT (2 ) is stored, and a common high probability table HT that is common to "Settings 1" to "Settings 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the high probability mode's pass/fail table, and the set values are displayed. Display data for displaying "2" is stored in a storage area for storing data.

Various information corresponding to "Setting 3" is stored in the fifth setting information storage area 325e. That is, in the fifth setting information storage area 325e, a third low probability correctness table LT(3) corresponding to "setting 3" is stored in the storage area for storing the correctness table of the low probability mode, and a third low probability correctness table LT(3) corresponding to "setting 3" is stored. A common high-probability table HT that is common to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the probability mode probability table, and a storage area for storing display data of setting values. Display data for displaying "3" is stored.

Various information corresponding to "Setting 4" is stored in the sixth setting information storage area 325f. That is, in the sixth setting information storage area 325f, a fourth low probability correctness table LT(4) corresponding to "setting 4" is stored in the storage area for storing the correctness table of the low probability mode, and a fourth low probability correctness table LT(4) corresponding to "setting 4" is stored. A common high-probability table HT that is common to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the probability mode probability table, and a storage area for storing display data of setting values. Display data for displaying "4" is stored.

In the case of the configuration of the third embodiment, even if the configuration uses the setting storage area 325 having the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, these first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f The setting value for the number of stages is set to be smaller than the number of 6 stages. The probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode increases as the setting value increases, and the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode is the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, since the probability of a jackpot result in high probability mode is 1/30, even with "Setting 1", the probability of a jackpot result in high probability mode is higher than the jackpot probability of low probability mode with "Setting 4". There is a high probability.

In the case of the configuration of the third embodiment, in the read-out process of the validity table (FIG. 143), whether the value of the setting value counter is "1" or "2" corresponds to "setting 1". The validity table is read out, and whether the value of the setting value counter is "3" or "4", the validity table corresponding to "setting 2" is read out, and the value of the setting value counter is If the value of the setting value counter is "5", the validity table corresponding to "Setting 3" is read out, and if the value of the setting value counter is "6", the validity table corresponding to "Setting 4" is read out.

In the process of reading the validity table (FIG. 143), the validity table is read from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter, regardless of the number of stages of the setting value. As a result, even if four levels of set values are set, the processing configuration of the read/fail table read process (Fig. 143) is the same as when six levels of set values are set. becomes possible.

In the case of the configuration of the third embodiment, when the settings storage area 325 that can set six levels of setting values is used, four levels of setting values are set, so settings can be made in the settings storage area 325. The number of stages of the setting value cannot be divided by the number of stages of the setting value to be used. In this case, two consecutive setting information storage areas 325a to 325d are allocated to each of "Setting 1" and "Setting 2" in relation to the value of the setting value counter, and "Setting 3" and One setting information storage area 325e, 325f is allocated to each of "setting 4". As a result, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated in a situation where the value of the setting value counter is "1" in the setting value update process (FIG. 116), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. The setting values displayed will be changed in the order of "1" → "1" → "2" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "1" → .

In the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 (FIG. 144) during the setting update, the setting value is displayed from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter, regardless of the number of stages of the setting value. This is a configuration for reading data. As a result, even if four levels of setting values are set, the processing configuration of the setting process (Fig. 144) can be made the same as when six levels of setting values are set. It becomes possible.

In addition, in order to change the display of the setting value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in response to one operation of the reset button 68c in the setting value update process (FIG. 116), It is preferable that various pieces of information corresponding to the same setting value are not set in consecutive setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in relation to the value of the setting value counter. For example, various information corresponding to "Setting 1" is set in the first setting information storage area 325a, various information corresponding to "Setting 2" is set in the second setting information storage area 325b, and various information corresponding to "Setting 2" is set in the second setting information storage area 325b. 325c is set with various information corresponding to "Setting 3", the fourth setting information storage area 325d is set with various information corresponding to "Setting 4", and the fifth setting information storage area 325e is set with various information corresponding to "Setting 1". A conceivable configuration is to set various kinds of information corresponding to "Setting 2" in the sixth setting information storage area 325f. In this case, if the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated in a situation where the value of the setting value counter is "1" in the setting value update process (FIG. 116), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 The setting values displayed will be changed in the order of "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "1" → "2" → "1" → .

In detail, when the setting corresponding storage area 325 is used in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth form, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 142(d), all of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f Various information corresponding to "Setting 1" is stored in . That is, in the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, the first low probability correctness table LT(1) corresponding to "setting 1" is stored in the storage area for storing the correctness table of the low probability mode. A common high probability pass/fail table HT that is common to "Settings 1" to "Settings 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the pass/fail table for the high probability mode, and the display data of the setting values is stored. Display data for displaying "1" is stored in a storage area for displaying "1".

In the configuration of the fourth embodiment, only one type of setting value is set even if the setting corresponding storage area 325 having the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f is used. Even in a configuration in which only one type of setting value is set in this way, the validity table is read out from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter in the validity table reading process (FIG. 143). be. As a result, even if only one type of setting value is set, the processing configuration of the read/fail table readout process (Fig. 143) is the same as when six levels of setting values are set. It becomes possible to do so.

In the case of the configuration of the fourth form above, there is no need to set the setting value, so basically there is no need to execute the setting value update process (Fig. 116), but if an abnormality occurs in the setting value, the setting value An update process (FIG. 116) may be performed. In this case, "setting 1" is assigned to all of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f. Therefore, in the setting value update process (FIG. 116), if the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated in a situation where the value of the setting value counter is "1", the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 The displayed setting value continues to be displayed as "1" → "1" → "1" → "1" → "1" → "1" → "1" → ... It happens.

In the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 (FIG. 144) during the setting update, the setting value is displayed from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter, regardless of the number of stages of the setting value. This is a configuration for reading data. As a result, even when only one type of setting value is set, the processing configuration of the setting process (Fig. 144) is the same as when six levels of setting values are set. becomes possible.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

Since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player expects that the more advantageous setting value is to be used. It happens. In this case, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second to fourth embodiments, a first predetermined number (specifically, six) of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are provided for storing the validity table corresponding to the setting value. In this configuration, the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to share the configuration regarding the setting corresponding storage area 325 with the pachinko machine 10 of the first form in which the number of types of setting values to be used is the first predetermined number, and changing the number of types of setting values. This makes it possible to easily design the pachinko machine 10 when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

In the setting value update process (step S7918), each time the reset button 68c is operated, the numerical information of the setting value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is changed, so that the setting value to be used is changed. By using the validity tables in the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f corresponding to the changed numerical information in the validity determination process, the validity determination process is executed in a manner corresponding to the setting value to be used. Become. In this case, each validity table of setting values that can be set is configured to be stored in at least one setting information storage area 325a to 325f, and is a part of the first predetermined number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f. Since the areas 325a to 325f are configured to store the same validity table, the validity table is stored in all of the first predetermined number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f. As a result, the first predetermined number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f can be used as is, and the setting value to be used can be determined while using the configuration of determining the setting value to be used using the setting value counter. It becomes possible to make the number of types smaller than the first predetermined number.

The configuration is such that a propriety table is read from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f corresponding to the numerical information of the setting value counter, and a propriety determination process is executed using the read propriety table. As a result, even if the number of types of set values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number, it is possible to use the configuration that reads the validity table when executing the validity determination process as is. .

In a situation where the setting value update process (step S7918) is executed, setting value display data is read from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f corresponding to the numerical information of the setting value counter, and the setting value display data that has been read is The configuration is such that a corresponding display is performed on the fourth notification display device 204. As a result, even if the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number, the configuration that reads out the display data of the setting value when displaying the setting value can be used as is. It becomes possible to do so.

The number of stages of setting values to be used is a divisor of the maximum number of stages of setting values that can be set in the setting correspondence storage area 325, and is different from the maximum number of stages. In this case, the same number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are allocated to each of the setting values to be used, and the setting values of three stages are arranged one by one in ascending order as one group. In this case, setting values are assigned to the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f so that the group is repeated. As a result, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated in a situation where the value of the setting value counter is "1" in the setting value update process (FIG. 116), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. The setting values displayed will be changed in the order of "1" → "3" → "6" → "1" → "3" → "6" → "1" → . In other words, the display changes to a different setting value in response to one operation of the reset button 68c, and the display is displayed in a fixed manner when one display cycle is defined as displaying each settable setting value once. The rounds will be repeated. Therefore, it becomes easier to update the setting values.

Note that in a configuration in which the high probability mode validity table does not change depending on the setting value, the high probability mode validity table is stored in the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f of the setting correspondence storage area 325. Instead, the settings may be stored in a storage area different from the setting storage area 325 in the main ROM 64.

Further, when there is only one setting value to be used, the validity table corresponding to that setting value is set in only one setting information storage area 325a to 325f, and the remaining setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are set. 325f may have a configuration in which no pass/fail table is set. Further, if the setting values to be used are in multiple stages, but the number of stages is smaller than the number of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, the validity tables corresponding to each of the setting values are A configuration may also be adopted in which the validity table is set only in one corresponding setting information storage area 325a to 325f and the validity table is not set in the remaining setting information storage areas 325a to 325f. In this configuration, the numerical information corresponding to the setting information storage areas 325a to 325 in which the validity table is not set is set as numerical information that cannot be selected in the setting value counter, so that the setting information storage area in which the validity table is not set. 325a to 325f can be prevented from being selected when reading the validity table or reading the setting value display data.

<40th embodiment>
In the above-mentioned 39th embodiment, the configuration uses the setting storage area 325 in which setting values can be set in 6 stages, but in this embodiment, setting is supported in which setting values can be set in 3 stages. The storage area 326 is used.

FIGS. 145(a) to 145(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the setting corresponding storage area 326 stored in advance in the main side ROM 64.

The settings storage area 326 is provided with a first settings information storage area 326a, a second settings information storage area 326b, and a third settings information storage area 326c. In the first form of pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 145(a), various information corresponding to "Setting 1" is set in the first setting information storage area 326a, and "Setting 2" is set in the second setting information storage area 326b. Various information corresponding to "Setting 3" is set in the third setting information storage area 326c. In other words, in the first form of pachinko machine 10, the maximum number of settable setting values are set in the setting correspondence storage area 326.

In the second form of pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 145(b), various information corresponding to "setting 1" is set in all of the first to third setting information storage areas 326a to 326c. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second form, only one type of setting value is set using the setting corresponding storage area 326 in which three levels of setting values can be set.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third form shown in FIG. 145(c), various information corresponding to "setting 1" is set in the first setting information storage area 326a and the second setting information storage area 326b, and the third setting Various information corresponding to "Setting 3" is set in the information storage area 326c. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, two levels of setting values are set using the setting corresponding storage area 326 in which three levels of setting values can be set.

According to the above configuration, the setting corresponding storage area 326 in which setting values in three stages can be set is used in the second and third forms in which setting values in a number of stages smaller than the setting values in three stages are to be used. It becomes possible to use it as is for the pachinko machine 10. In addition, similarly to the thirty-ninth embodiment, the processing configuration of the read-out process of the validity table (FIG. 143) and the processing configuration of the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update (FIG. 144) are - It becomes possible to use it in common in the pachinko machine 10 of the third form.

<41st embodiment>
In this embodiment, when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) or the setting value update process (step S7918) is executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63, it is visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. This embodiment differs from the thirty-third embodiment in that a predetermined notification is executed on the display section. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the thirty-third embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the thirty-third embodiment described above will be basically omitted.

FIG. 146(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining various display sections provided in an area that is visible from the front of the Pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 that forms the front surface of the Pachinko machine 10.

As various display sections, a special symbol display section 37a, a special symbol reservation display section 37b, a regular symbol display section 38a, and a regular symbol reservation display section 38b are provided. These functions are the same as in the first embodiment. The special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are arranged side by side, but the round display section 330 is arranged side by side with respect to the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a. It is being

The round display section 330 has seven display segments 331 to 337, similar to the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a. The seven display segments 331 to 337 are all bar-shaped light emitting regions having the same shape and size, and are arranged to form a figure "8". The seven display segments 331 to 337 are individually controlled to emit light.

The round display section 330 notifies the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot result. In this embodiment, the jackpot results that can be selected when a jackpot is won in the judgment process are the first jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the number of executions of the round game is relatively small, and the round game. There is a second jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the number of executions is relatively large. Specifically, the round game is executed twice in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first jackpot result, and the round game is executed 16 times in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second jackpot result.

In addition, the first jackpot result includes a jackpot result in which the winning lottery mode becomes a low probability mode and the support mode becomes a low frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and a jackpot result in which the winning lottery mode becomes a high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. There is a jackpot result in which the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. In addition, the second jackpot result includes a jackpot result in which the winning lottery mode becomes a low probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends and the support mode becomes a low frequency support mode, and a jackpot result in which the winning lottery mode becomes a high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. There is a jackpot result in which the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode.

FIG. 146(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the round display section 330.

When the opening/closing execution mode triggered by one of the jackpot results is started, the round display section 330 changes from a non-display state in which all display segments 331 to 337 are turned off to at least some display segments. A display state is entered in which the segments 331 to 337 are in a light emitting state. In a situation where the opening/closing execution mode continues, the display content displayed on the round display section 330 at the start of the opening/closing execution mode is maintained. Then, when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the round display section 330 changes from the display state to the non-display state.

In the open/close execution mode in which two round games are played, as shown in FIG. 146(b), the first to fourth display segments 331 to 334 of the round display section 330 are turned off, and the fifth ~The seventh display segments 335 to 337 are turned on. In the open/close execution mode in which 16 round games are played, as shown in FIG. 146(b), the first to fourth display segments 331 to 334 of the round display section 330 are lit, and the fifth ~The seventh display segments 335 to 337 are turned off. As a result, when the opening/closing execution mode is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, the administrator of the game hall can check the round display section 330 to determine which type of opening/closing execution mode the opening/closing execution mode corresponds to. This makes it possible to understand whether the

If the setting value update process (step S7918) is being executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63, a corresponding display is performed on the round display section 330. Specifically, when the setting value update process (step S7918) is being executed, as shown in FIG. 146(b), the first display segment 331, the third display segment 333, and The fifth display segment 335 and the seventh display segment 337 are turned off, and the second display segment 332, the fourth display segment 334, and the sixth display segment 336 are turned on.

The display on the round display section 330 corresponding to the setting value update process (step S7918) is started when the setting value update process (step S7918) is started, and is displayed when the setting value update process (step S7918) is finished. be terminated. This display content is different from the display content displayed on the round display section 330 when the opening/closing execution mode is executed. The display content displayed in 330 is also different. Thereby, the game hall manager can easily understand whether or not the setting value update process (step S7918) is being executed by checking the round display section 330. Moreover, such an understanding can be performed using the round display section 330.

If the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is being executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63, a corresponding display is performed on the round display section 330. Specifically, when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is executed, as shown in FIG. 146(b), the first display segment 331, the third display segment 333, and The fifth display segment 335 and the seventh display segment 337 are turned on, and the second display segment 332, the fourth display segment 334, and the sixth display segment 336 are turned off.

The display on the round display unit 330 corresponding to the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is started when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is started, and is displayed when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is finished. be terminated. This display content is different from the display content displayed on the round display section 330 when the opening/closing execution mode is executed, and is also different from the display content displayed on the round display section 330 when the setting value update process (step S7918) is executed. The displayed content is also different. Thereby, by checking the round display section 330, the game hall manager can easily grasp whether or not the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is being executed. Moreover, such an understanding can be performed using the round display section 330.

In the situation where the setting confirmation process (step S7914) and the setting value update process (step S7918) are executed in the main process (FIG. 114), the process for advancing the game is not executed. Therefore, the setting confirmation process (step S7914) and the setting value update process (step S7918) are not executed in a situation where the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. Further, in a situation where one of the setting confirmation process (step S7914) and the setting value update process (step S7918) is being executed, the other is not executed. Therefore, even if the round display section 330 is also used as a display section for performing each display, the situations in which each display should be performed will not occur redundantly.

Note that the display content of the round display section 330 is not limited to the above display content, and may be arbitrary as long as it is possible to distinguish each situation from the display content of the round display section 330, for example. One of the display and setting value update processing (step S7918) corresponding to the setting confirmation processing (step S7914) may be configured such that all of the first to seventh display segments 331 to 337 are turned on. Also, in one of the display and setting value update processing (step S7918) corresponding to the setting confirmation processing (step S7914), all of the first to seventh display segments 331 to 337 are turned on and the state is maintained. On the other hand, all of the first to seventh display segments 331 to 337 may be in a blinking state.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the round display unit 330 displays a display corresponding to the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process, a configuration may be adopted in which these displays are performed in the special figure display unit 37a. A configuration may be adopted in which these displays are performed on the ordinary figure display section 38a. In addition, a display corresponding to the setting confirmation process is displayed on any one of the special figure display section 37a, the general figure display section 38a, and the round display section 330, and the setting confirmation process is performed on the other display section. A configuration may also be adopted in which a display corresponding to the value update process is performed.

Further, the reservation information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first operating port 33 and the reservation information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second operating port 34 are stored separately, and The special figure display section 37a includes a first special figure display section in which a game round triggered by reservation information corresponding to the first operating port 33 is executed, and a game triggered by reservation information corresponding to the second operating port 34. In a configuration in which a second special figure display section is provided, in which a display corresponding to the setting confirmation process and a display corresponding to the setting value update process are performed in the first special figure display section. Alternatively, the second special figure display section may display a display corresponding to the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process, and the first special figure display section may correspond to the setting confirmation process. A configuration may also be adopted in which a display corresponding to the set value update process is performed on the second special figure display section at the same time as a display is performed.

Further, a configuration may be provided in which a dedicated display unit is provided to display that a setting confirmation process is being executed, and to display that a setting value update process is being executed. The configuration may be such that a dedicated display section is provided for displaying that the setting confirmation process is being executed or that the setting value update process is being executed. A configuration may also be adopted in which a display section is provided. In this case, the dedicated display section may be configured to be display-controlled by the main CPU 63, or may be configured to be display-controlled by the audio emission control device 81 or the display control device 82.

<42nd embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the thirty-third embodiment described above in the processing configurations of the main processing and the first timer interrupt processing. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the thirty-third embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the thirty-third embodiment described above will be basically omitted.

FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step S9901 to step S9923 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, power-on initial setting processing is executed (step S9901). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed after the main process is started. During this predetermined wait period, the start of operation and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

Thereafter, internal function register setting processing is executed (step S9902). In the internal function register setting process, similar to step S7902 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment, a first timer interrupt process (a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process) is performed. 148) is set to the first interrupt cycle (specifically, 4 milliseconds), and the second timer interrupt process (Figure 123), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, is set. ) is set to a second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds) that is shorter than the first interrupt cycle.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set for the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) (step S9903). As a result, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and activated at the second interrupt cycle. On the other hand, interrupt permission is not set for the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) is still maintained in a state in which interrupts are prohibited.

Thereafter, the processes from step S9904 to step S9917 are executed. The processing contents of steps S9904 to S9917 are the same as steps S7905 to S7918 of the main processing (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment.

After completing the processes from step S9904 to step S9917, interrupt permission is set for the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) (step S9918). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) is interrupted and activated at the first interrupt cycle. That is, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt period. Thereafter, in steps S9919 to S9923, the same processes as steps S7920 to S7924 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed.

FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the first timer interrupt process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that, as already explained, the first timer interrupt process is started periodically at a 4 millisecond cycle, which is the first interrupt cycle. Further, the program corresponding to the first timer interrupt processing is set as a specific control program.

First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) (step SA101). By prohibiting the occurrence of the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 148), the occurrence of the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 148) is prohibited, so that if the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 148) is Even if the first interrupt cycle has elapsed, it is possible to prevent the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) from being activated redundantly. Furthermore, since the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 123) is prohibited from occurring, even if the second interrupt period has elapsed, the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 123) is It is possible to prevent this from being started by interrupting.

Thereafter, in steps SA102 to SA121, the same processes as steps S8202 to S8221 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step SA107 or if the process in step SA121 is executed, interrupt permission is set to allow the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 148) and the second timer interrupt process (Figure 123). (Step SA122).

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed in the main process (FIG. 147), the interrupt of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is permitted, while the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 148) interrupts are not permitted. As a result, display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be executed by the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) even when the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the processing for controlling the progress of the game by the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148) from being executed.

Additionally, the first timer interrupt process (Figure 148) interrupts the second timer interrupt process (Figure 123) and is not activated, and the second timer interrupt process (Figure 123) interrupts the first timer interrupt process (Figure 148). It interrupts and does not start. This makes it possible to prevent timer interrupt processing from being activated redundantly.

<43rd embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the thirty-fifth embodiment in the configuration for displaying the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the thirty-fifth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the thirty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

In this embodiment, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, a normal counter area 231 is provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. As in the fifteenth embodiment, the normal counter area 231 includes a general winning counter 231a for normal use, a special electric winning counter 231b for normal use, a first operating counter 231c for normal use, a second operating counter 231d for normal use, and A normal out counter 231e is provided. If one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 in a situation that is neither the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode, the value of the general winning counter 231a for normal use is incremented by 1, and the special When one game ball enters the winning device 32, the value of the special electric winning counter 231b for normal use is incremented by 1, and when one game ball enters the first operating port 33, the value of the special electric winning counter 231b for normal use is added. The value of the first operation counter 231c is incremented by 1, and when one game ball enters the second operation port 34, the value of the second operation counter 231d for normal use is incremented by 1, and the value of the second operation counter 231d for normal use is incremented by 1. When one game ball enters, 1 is added to the value of the normal out counter 231e. Then, when the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 in a situation that is neither the opening/closing execution mode due to the jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode are K91 to K95, the base values are as follows.
・Base value: Total number of game balls paid out (K91 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31" + K92 x "Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" + K93 x "To the first operating opening 33" Ratio of "number of prize balls for winning a prize" + K94 x "number of prize balls for winning a prize in the second operating port 34")/total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (K91 + K92 + K93 + K94 + K95).

In addition to the normal counter area 231, the work area 223 for non-specific control is provided with a calculation result storage area 234. Similar to the thirty-fifth embodiment, the calculation result storage area 234 has a current area 311, a first history area 312, a second history area 313, and a second history area 311 as storage areas for storing base value information. 3 history area 314 (see FIG. 126). The current area 311 stores the most recent base value calculated in the result calculation process (FIG. 149). The first history area 312 stores the final base value in the previous calculation period. The second history area 313 stores the final base value in the two previous calculation periods. The third history area 314 stores the final base value in the three previous calculation periods.

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the result calculation process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the management process (step S8920) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is a process corresponding to non-specific control in step S3803, similar to the management process (FIG. 70) in the fifteenth embodiment. Reads the management execution processing program. In this management execution process (FIG. 71), a check process is executed in step S3908 as in the fifteenth embodiment. In this check process, a result calculation process is executed, and a display process (FIG. 150), which will be described later, is executed. Furthermore, the processing from step SA201 to step SA217 in the result calculation process is executed using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, base value calculation processing is executed (step SA201). In the calculation process, the base value is calculated using the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. Here, in this embodiment, the calculation of the base value is not completed in one process of the result calculation process, but is completed by executing the process of the result calculation process a predetermined plurality of times.

Specifically, in a predetermined processing time of the result calculation process in which a new base value calculation is started, in step SA201, the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are set to K91 to K95. In this case, K91 x ``Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31'', K92 x ``Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32'', and K93 x ``Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating opening 33''. The number of prize balls", K94 x "the number of prize balls for winning into the second operating port 34", and the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (K91+K92+K93+K94+K95), and calculate the results of each of these calculations. is stored in the calculation-in-progress storage area provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Thereafter, in step SA201 of calculating the results of the processing round after the predetermined processing round, the total number of game balls to be paid out (K91 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31" + K92 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" + K93 x "Number of winning balls for winning in the first operation opening 33" + K94 x "Second operation The number of prize balls that hit the winning hole 34) is calculated, and the result of the calculation is stored in the calculation-in-progress storage area. Thereafter, in step SA201 of calculating the result of the second processing time after the predetermined processing time, the base value is calculated using various information stored in the storage area during calculation.

That is, in this embodiment, it is necessary to perform the result calculation process three times in order to calculate one base value. In this case, the result calculation process is called and executed in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133), so it is executed every time the first interrupt cycle (specifically, 4 milliseconds) elapses. Become. Therefore, one base value is calculated at a period of about 12 milliseconds. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cycle in which one base value is calculated may be shorter than the 12 millisecond cycle, or may be longer than the 12 millisecond cycle.

By adopting a configuration in which one base value is calculated by executing the result calculation process multiple times as described above, it is possible to reduce the processing load for calculating the base value. In particular, the result calculation process is executed as a process corresponding to non-specific control, so in order to execute the result calculation process, it is necessary not only to read the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control, but also to perform the process for specific control. It is necessary to save information in various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the processing corresponding to the above. In this case, by reducing the processing load for calculating the base value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for result calculation processing, and as a result, the processing load for executing processing corresponding to non-specific control can be reduced. It becomes possible to reduce the

Even in a configuration where result calculation processing is executed multiple times to calculate one base value, each piece of information during the calculation of the base value in each processing time of result calculation processing is used as a workpiece for non-specific control. It is written to area 223. As a result, as the processing corresponding to the specific control is executed between one processing time and the next processing time of the result calculation processing, the main CPU 63 used in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is Even if information in various registers is erased, it is possible to store and hold each piece of information while the base value is being calculated.

Even in a configuration where the result calculation process is executed multiple times to calculate one base value, the normal counter area 231 is used in the first process of the result calculation process to calculate a new base value. All the values of the various counters 231a to 231e are extracted, and the extracted values are used to calculate the base value for that calculation time. As a result, even if the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are changed while the base value of 1 is being calculated, the base value of 1 can be calculated without being affected by the change in value. It becomes possible to calculate.

After the base value calculation process is executed in step SA201, it is determined whether the calculation of one base value has been completed in the result calculation process of the current processing round (step SA202). If the calculation of the first base value is not completed (step SA202: NO), the base value is not overwritten to the current area 311 of the calculation result storage area 234 by not executing the processes of steps SA203 to SA205.

If the calculation of the first base value has been completed (step SA202: YES), the base value for which the calculation has been completed is overwritten in the current area 311 (step SA203). Thereafter, it is determined whether the shift trigger flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SA204). In this embodiment, the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in a situation that is neither the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode is When calculation of a new base value is completed after the shift reference number (specifically 60,000) is reached, data shift processing (step SA216) in the calculation result storage area 234 is executed. In this data shift process, information stored in the current state area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is transferred from the second history area 313 to the third history area. 314, after shifting in the order of first history area 312 → second history area 313, current area 311 → first history area 312, current area 311 is cleared to "0". The shift trigger flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the situation is after the total number of game balls has reached the shift reference number and before data shift processing is executed.

If the shift trigger flag is set to "1" (step SA204: YES), the shift calculation completion flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SA205). The calculation completion flag at the time of shift is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the calculation of the base value of 1 is completed after the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number.

If a negative determination is made in step SA202, if a negative determination is made in step SA204, or if the process in step SA205 is executed, "1" is set in the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. It is determined whether it is set (step SA206). If the management start flag is not set to "1" (step SA206: NO), pre-management processing is executed (step SA207). In the pre-management processing, steps S8604 to S8608 of the result calculation processing (FIG. 130) in the thirty-fifth embodiment are executed.

If the management start flag is set to "1" (step SA206: YES), it is determined whether the shift trigger flag in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to "1" (step SA208). . If the shift trigger flag is not set to "1" (step SA208: NO), the total number is calculated by summing all the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 (step SA209). Then, it is determined whether the calculated total number is equal to or greater than the shift reference number of 60,000 (step SA210).

When an affirmative determination is made in step SA210, the shift trigger flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SA211). Furthermore, the pre-shift display flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SA212). The pre-shift display flag mainly indicates that the situation is such that a pre-shift display corresponding to the total number of game balls reaching the shift reference number should be started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This is a flag for identification by the side CPU 63.

If the shift trigger flag is set to "1" and an affirmative determination is made in step SA208, it is determined whether or not the shift calculation completion flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1". (Step SA213). As already explained, the computation completion flag at the time of shift is set to "1" when the calculation of the base value of 1 is completed after the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number. When an affirmative determination is made in step SA213, the shift trigger flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step SA214). Furthermore, the computation completion flag at the time of shift in the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step SA215).

Thereafter, data shift processing is executed (step SA216). In the data shift process, information stored in the current state area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is transferred from the second history area 313 to the third history area 314. , first history area 312 → second history area 313, current area 311 → first history area 312, and then clears the current area 311 to "0". As a result, the final base value in the two previous calculation periods is stored in the third history area 314 as the final base value in the three previous calculation periods, and the final base value in the one previous calculation period is stored in the third history area 314. is stored in the second history area 313 as the final base value in the calculation period two times ago, and the base value calculated after the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number in the current calculation period is stored once. It is stored in the first history area 312 as the final base value in the previous calculation period. Further, the current area 311 is in a state where no base value is stored. Note that in the data shift process, when shifting information as described above, an LDIR instruction is used. With the LDIR instruction, by specifying the address of the area where the information is to be stored and the address of the area where the information is to be stored, the information stored in the storage source area can be shifted (copied) to the storage destination area. becomes. Thereafter, all the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" (step SA217).

FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing display processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step SA301 to step SA320 in the display processing is executed using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, it is determined whether the management start flag in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to "1" (step SA301). If a negative determination is made in step SA301, the base value is read from the current area 311, and the first decimal place in the read base value is read out, as in step S8714 of the display processing (FIG. 131) in the thirty-fifth embodiment. The calculation result data corresponding to the number and the number in the second decimal place are set in the display target setting area 276 (step SA302). By transmitting the display data corresponding to the calculation result data to the display IC 266, the number to the first decimal place in the base value of the current area 311 is displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the base value of the current area 311 is displayed on the third notification display device 203. The second decimal place digit in the value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. With the above configuration, in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", the base value in the past calculation period will not be reported, and only the base value calculated in the current calculation period will be reported. be done. Note that the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value is notified in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1" are the same as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. .

When an affirmative determination is made in step SA301, the value of the switching timing counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is subtracted by 1 (step SA303). The switching timing counter determines the timing at which the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are switched in a situation where the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by the main CPU 63. This is a counter for specifying.

In this embodiment, the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in a situation that is neither the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode is In a situation where the shift reference number has not been reached, the base value stored in each of the current area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 will be notified for the display duration period (specifically is executed for a period of 5 seconds), and the interval hidden display is executed for an interval period (specifically, 1 (seconds). Specifically, as the interval non-display, all the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are turned off, so that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are turned off. 204 becomes hidden. By performing interval hiding before the base value to be notified is switched in the predetermined order of current area 311 → first history area 312 → second history area 313 → third history area 314, the notification is It becomes possible to make the game hall manager clearly aware that the target base value will be switched.

In a situation where the total number of game balls has reached the shift reference number, a corresponding pre-shift display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Specifically, as the pre-shift display, "A." is displayed on each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The display content of "A." is display content that is not displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during either the display duration period of the display corresponding to the base value or the interval period in which the display is not displayed for the interval. be. As a result, the entire display content of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the pre-shift display is performed is changed to the display duration period of the display corresponding to the base value and the interval period in which the display is not displayed for the interval. can have different display contents. Therefore, when the game hall manager confirms that the pre-shift display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the total number of game balls has reached the shift reference number. This makes it possible to understand that the base value is being shifted.

The display contents of the pre-shift display are the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where the check display is performed, and the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where the check display is performed, and the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where the pre-management flag is not set to "1". Display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is being executed, and setting value update This is also different from the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where the process (FIG. 137) is being executed. From this point of view, if the game hall manager confirms that the pre-shift display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the total number of game balls can be adjusted to the shift standard number. By reaching , it becomes possible to understand that the base value is being shifted.

The execution period of the pre-shift display is set to be longer than the interval period (specifically, 1 second) in which the interval non-display is performed. Further, the execution period of the pre-shift display is set to a period longer than the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) of the display corresponding to the base value. Specifically, the execution period of the pre-shift display is set to 8 seconds. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution period of the pre-shift display may be configured to be longer than the interval period and less than or equal to the display duration period of the display corresponding to the base value, or may be configured to be less than or equal to the interval period. . However, in order to make the game hall manager clearly aware that the pre-shift display is being performed, it is preferable that the execution period of the pre-shift display be set to a longer period than the interval period.

As already explained, in order to complete the calculation of the base value of 1, it is necessary to execute the result calculation process (Fig. 149) multiple times, and specifically, the cycle of calculating the base value of 1 is as follows: It has a period of 12 milliseconds. In addition, data shift processing (step SA216) in which base value information is shifted between the various areas 311 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, Executed after one base value is newly calculated after the base value is reached. In this case, the execution period of the pre-shift display is longer than the longest period required until the data shift process (step SA216) is completed when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number. It is set. As a result, in the situation where the pre-shift display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the new calculation of the first base value and the data shift process of the base value (step SA216) are completed. becomes possible.

Returning to the explanation of the display processing (FIG. 150), when the processing of step SA303 is executed, the base value is displayed by determining whether the value of the switching timing counter after subtracting 1 is "0". It is determined whether the current measurement target period among the duration period, the interval period during which interval non-display is performed, and the execution period of pre-shift display has elapsed (step SA304). If an affirmative determination is made in step SA304, the situation is such that the pre-shift display should be started by determining whether the pre-shift display flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1". It is determined whether or not (step SA305). If a negative determination is made in step SA305, it is determined whether the interval flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SA306). The interval flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the situation is such that interval non-display should be started.

If a negative determination is made in step SA306, it means that the base value is the target for which notification should be started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at the current switching timing. In this case, the value of the display target counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step SA307). If the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value "3" (step SA308: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step SA309).

The counters to be displayed are the first to fourth notification displays among the base values stored in each of the current area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234. This counter is used by the main CPU 63 to specify the base value to be notified in the devices 201 to 204. Specifically, when the value of the display target counter is "0", the base value stored in the current area 311 is the target of notification, and when the value of the display target counter is "1", the base value stored in the first history area The base value stored in the second history area 312 becomes the notification target, and when the value of the display target counter is "2", the base value stored in the second history area 313 becomes the notification target, and the value of the display target counter is "3". ”, the base value stored in the third history area 314 becomes the notification target.

If a negative determination is made in step SA308 or if the process in step SA309 is executed, the base value is displayed on the switching timing counter of the work area 223 for non-specific control as the value corresponding to the next switching timing. A value corresponding to the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set (step SA310). Thereafter, the interval flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SA311). As a result, if the pre-shift display flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is not set to "1" before the next switching timing, the interval non- A display will be made.

Thereafter, a process is executed to set display data corresponding to the base value that is the current notification target in the display target setting area 276 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Specifically, similar to step S8708 of the display processing (FIG. 131) in the thirty-fifth embodiment, display type data corresponding to the value of the display target counter is set in the display target setting area 276 (step SA312). . The display type data includes display data for causing the first notification display device 201 to display that the notification target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the base value, and the base value of the notification target. A display indicating which of the current area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 the value corresponds to is displayed on the second notification display device 202. and display data for causing the process to occur.

After that, similarly to step S8709 of the display processing (FIG. 131) in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the current area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are The base value is read out from the area corresponding to the value of the display target counter, and the calculation result data corresponding to the first decimal point number and the second decimal point number in the read base value are displayed in the display target setting area 276. (step SA313). The calculation result data includes display data for causing the third notification display device 203 to display a display corresponding to the number in the first decimal place in the base value to be notified, and the number in the second decimal place in the base value to be notified. and display data for causing the fourth notification display device 204 to perform a display corresponding to the above.

By setting the display data consisting of display type data and calculation result data in the display target setting area 276, the display data is set to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) similarly to the thirty-fifth embodiment. The display data corresponding to the display data is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In other words, when the base value of the current area 311 is the subject of notification, a display as shown in FIG. 127(a) is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, When the base value of the history area 312 is the subject of notification, a display as shown in FIG. 127(b) is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and When the base value of 313 is the subject of notification, a display as shown in FIG. 127(c) is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and When the base value is to be notified, a display as shown in FIG. 127(d) is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, for example.

If the interval flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" and an affirmative determination is made in step SA306, the current switching timing is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This means that the target for which notification should be started using this as a trigger is interval non-display. In this case, an interval setting process is executed (step SA314). In this setting process, a value corresponding to an interval period (specifically, 1 second) is set in the switching timing counter of the work area 223 for non-specific control as a value corresponding to the next switching timing. Thereafter, the interval flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step SA315). As a result, if the pre-shift display flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is not set to "1" before the next switching timing, the base value will be A display will be made.

After that, interval data is set in the display target setting area 276 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA316). The interval data is data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform interval non-display, and specifically, all the This is data for turning off the display segments 321 to 324. By setting the interval data as display data in the display target setting area 276, the interval data is transmitted to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are all in a non-display state. After confirming that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the non-display state, the game hall manager can understand that it is the interval period.

If a positive determination is made in step SA305 because the pre-shift display flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1", the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display the current information. This means that the target for which notification should be started at the switching timing is the pre-shift display. In this case, a pre-shift display period setting process is executed (step SA317). In this setting process, a value corresponding to the execution period of the pre-shift display (specifically, 8 seconds) is set in the switching timing counter of the work area 223 for non-specific control as a value corresponding to the next switching timing.

Thereafter, the interval flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" and the pre-shift display flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step SA318), and The display target counter in the work area 223 is set to the maximum value "3" (step SA319). When the execution period of the pre-shift display has elapsed by clearing the interval flag to "0", the next notification target becomes the base value. Then, by setting the maximum value in the display target counter, if a negative determination is made in step SA306 to notify the base value, the display target counter after adding 1 to the value of the display target counter in step SA307 exceeds the maximum value, an affirmative determination is made in step SA308, and the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0". As a result, when the execution period of the pre-shift display has elapsed, the next notification target becomes the base value, and the base value becomes the base value of the current area 311 of the calculation result storage area 234.

That is, when the pre-shift display is performed, the notification starts from the base value regardless of whether the notification target before the pre-shift display is the base value or the interval non-display. Thereby, when the pre-shift display ends, it becomes possible to check the base value without waiting for the interval period to elapse. Furthermore, it is also possible to determine which of the current area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 the base value that was the last notification target before the pre-shift display was performed. Even if there is, when the pre-shift display ends, the notification starts from the base value of the current area 311. This makes it possible to return the base value notification order in the current area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 to the initial notification order, and immediately after the base value shift occurs. It becomes possible to make it easier for the game hall manager to recognize that this is the case.

Thereafter, pre-shift display data is set in the display target setting area 276 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA320). The pre-shift display data is data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform pre-shift display, and specifically, in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, “ This is data for displaying "A.". By setting the pre-shift display data as display data in the display target setting area 276, the pre-shift display data is transmitted to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), and is used for the first to fourth notifications. “A.” is displayed on each of the display devices 201-204. After confirming that the pre-shift display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the gaming hall manager can understand that it is the period for performing the pre-shift display. .

Next, while referring to the time chart in FIG. 151, the base values of the various areas 311 to 314 are announced on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where the management start flag is set to "1". Explain how it is done. 151(a) shows the period during which the base value stored in the current area 311 is notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 151(b) shows the period in which the base value stored in the current area 311 is FIG. 151(c) shows the period during which the base value stored in the second history area 313 is notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. 151(d) shows the period during which the base value stored in the third history area 314 is notified on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204. FIG. 151(e) shows a period in which interval non-display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 151(f) shows a period in which interval non-display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. 201 to 204 indicate the period in which the pre-shift display is performed, and Fig. 151 (g) shows a situation in which the base value calculation period starts anew and is not in either the opening/closing execution mode due to the jackpot result or the high-frequency support mode. It shows the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60,000 balls).

At timing t1, as shown in FIG. 151(a), notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. At the time of this notification, as shown in FIG. 127(a), the first notification display device 201 displays a display indicating that the base value is the notification target, and the second notification display device 202 displays the base value stored in the current area 311. A display indicating that the base value stored in the current area 311 is to be notified is displayed, and a display corresponding to the base value stored in the current area 311 is displayed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204.

Thereafter, when the display duration period elapses from the timing t1 at the timing t2, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is ended as shown in FIG. 151(a), and as shown in FIG. 151(e). In this way, interval non-display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This interval non-display ends at timing t3, which is the timing at which the interval period has elapsed from timing t2, as shown in FIG. 151(e).

At timing t3, as shown in FIG. 151(b), notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. At the time of this notification, as shown in FIG. 127(b), the first notification display device 201 displays a display indicating that the base value is the notification target, and the second notification display device 202 displays a message in the first history area 312. A display indicating that the stored base value is the target of notification is performed, and a display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is displayed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. be exposed.

Thereafter, when the display duration period elapses from the timing t3 at the timing t4, the notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is ended as shown in FIG. 151(b), and as shown in FIG. 151(e) As shown in FIG. 3, interval non-display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This interval non-display is ended at timing t5, which is the timing at which the interval period has elapsed from timing t4, as shown in FIG. 151(e).

At timing t5, as shown in FIG. 151(c), notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. At the time of this notification, as shown in FIG. 127(c), the first notification display device 201 displays a display indicating that the base value is the notification target, and the second notification display device 202 displays a message in the second history area 313. A display indicating that the stored base value is the target of notification is performed, and a display corresponding to the base value stored in the second history area 313 is displayed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. be exposed.

Thereafter, when the display duration period elapses from the timing t5 at the timing t6, the notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 is ended as shown in FIG. 151(c), and as shown in FIG. 151(e) As shown in FIG. 3, interval non-display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This interval non-display is ended at timing t7, which is the timing at which the interval period has elapsed from timing t6, as shown in FIG. 151(e).

At timing t7, as shown in FIG. 151(d), notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. At the time of this notification, as shown in FIG. 127(d), the first notification display device 201 displays a display indicating that the base value is the notification target, and the second notification display device 202 displays a message in the third history area 314. A display indicating that the stored base value is the target of notification is performed, and a display corresponding to the base value stored in the third history area 314 is displayed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. be exposed.

Thereafter, when the display duration period elapses from the timing t7 at the timing t8, the notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 is ended as shown in FIG. 151(d), and as shown in FIG. 151(e). As shown in FIG. 3, interval non-display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This interval non-display is ended as shown in FIG. 151(e) at timing t9, which is the timing at which the interval period has elapsed from timing t8.

After that, from timing t9 to timing t10, similarly to the timing from t1 to t2, as shown in FIG. 151(a), the display corresponding to the base value stored in the current area 311 is 4 notification display devices 201 to 204, and as shown in FIG. 151(e), as shown in FIG. This is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Then, at the timing t11, similarly to the timing t3, the display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as shown in FIG. It will be started at

Thereafter, at timing t12, which is the middle of the display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312, as shown in FIG. 151(g), the base value calculation period is newly updated. Since the start of the game, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in a situation that is neither the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode has shifted. The standard number (specifically 60,000) is reached. However, at the timing of t12, since the display continuation period has not elapsed since the display corresponding to the base value of the first history area 312 started at the timing of t11, The display corresponding to the base value of the 1 history area 312 continues. As a result, even if the timing when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number is arbitrary, the display of the current notification target on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be performed as scheduled. After a period of time has elapsed, it becomes possible to start the pre-shift display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Thereafter, when the display duration period elapses from the timing t11 at the timing t13, the notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is ended as shown in FIG. 151(b), and as shown in FIG. 151(f). As shown in FIG. 3, pre-shift display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In addition, even if the total number of game balls mentioned above reaches the shift reference number while other base value notifications are in progress, if the display continuation of the base value notification has elapsed, it will not be displayed before the shift. Display starts on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In addition, even if the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number while interval hiding is being performed, the pre-shift display will change to The notification is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Thereafter, at the timing t14, the execution period of the pre-shift display has elapsed from the timing t13, so the pre-shift display is finished as shown in FIG. 151(f), and the current area 311 is Notification of the base value stored in is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In other words, even if the notification target when the pre-shift display starts is the base value of the first history area 312, when the pre-shift display ends, it corresponds to the first notification order in the base value notification order. Notification starts from the base value of the current area 311.

Thereafter, when the display duration period elapses from the timing t14 at the timing t15, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is ended as shown in FIG. 151(a), and as shown in FIG. 151(e). In this way, interval non-display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This interval non-display is ended as shown in FIG. 151(e) at timing t16, which is the timing when the interval period has elapsed from timing t15, and as shown in FIG. 151(b), the base of the first history area 312 is Display corresponding to the value is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The base values stored in the current state area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. be done. This makes it possible to individually notify the respective base values corresponding to different periods while suppressing the number of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Furthermore, since each base value is displayed in a predetermined order, it becomes easier for the game hall manager to understand the type of base value being displayed.

The display order of base values is determined in association with each of the current area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying the type of base value to be displayed when starting a new display of the base value.

Before the situation where one base value is displayed changes to the situation where the next base value is displayed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 change to the interval non-display state. This allows the game hall manager to clearly understand that the type of base value being displayed has been switched.

In a configuration in which the base value is sequentially displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, after the base value calculation period starts anew, either the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result or the high-frequency support mode If the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60,000 pieces) in a situation where the - A pre-shift display is performed on the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Thereby, it becomes possible to notify that the total number of game balls has reached the shift reference number by using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, the base value is stored in the current state area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234. is shifted to the later storage area in the storage order, and the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" and calculation of the base value for a new calculation period is started. Therefore, when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, the notification content of the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is changed. In this case, if the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, the base value notification will be restarted after the pre-shift display is performed, so the total number of game balls will reach the shift reference number. It becomes possible to make the manager of the game hall aware that the notification content of the base value will be changed in response to the change.

If the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number while the base value is being displayed, the pre-shift display is started after the display continuation period of the base value display has elapsed. This makes it possible to start the pre-shift display while not interfering with the display of the base value that is already being performed.

In a configuration in which a plurality of base values stored in the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially displayed in a predetermined display order, after the pre-shift display is performed, the base values are displayed starting from the first base value in the predetermined display order. Thereby, when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, it becomes possible to check again from the base value of the first order in the predetermined display order.

In a configuration in which a base value is calculated in the result calculation process (FIG. 149), the result calculation process is executed multiple times from the start of calculation of one base value until the calculation of the base value is completed. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for executing the result calculation process, compared to a configuration in which calculation of the base value is completed in one result calculation process.

When the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, the base value is newly derived at the timing when the shift reference number is reached, and then the base value data shift process (step SA216) is executed. When the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, a pre-shift display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, in a situation where a base value is newly derived and data shift processing of the base value is being performed, it becomes possible to perform a pre-shift display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and It is possible to prevent the display of the previous base value from continuing as it is even though the reference number has been reached.

In addition, the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA since the start of the base value calculation period in situations other than the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result or the high-frequency support mode (i.e., the total number of gaming balls supplied to the gaming area PA Until the total number of game balls (total number of game balls) reaches the initial standard number (specifically 6000 balls), as in the thirty-fifth embodiment above, when the base value of the current area 311 is displayed, the first to fourth A configuration may be adopted in which initial calculation display is performed on the notification display devices 201 to 204.

In addition, if the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number (specifically 60,000 balls) while the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the interval non-display state, the game balls will be shifted immediately. When the previous display has started and the base value is being displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the total number of game balls has reached the shift reference number (specifically, 60,000 balls). In this case, the pre-shift display may be started when the display duration period of the base value display has elapsed. This makes it possible to start the pre-shift display early while preventing the display of the base value that has already been performed from ending midway.

Furthermore, the display contents of the pre-shift display are not limited to those described above, and the display contents on at least a part of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be displayed in other situations as well. However, the entire display content of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to be display content that is not displayed in other situations. Furthermore, when the pre-shift display is performed, at least one display segment 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is turned on. A part of the four notification display devices 201 to 204 may have a configuration in which all display segments 321 to 324 are turned off. In addition, when a pre-shift display is performed, the display content of the pre-shift display is not limited to a configuration in which the display content of the pre-shift display is maintained over the execution period of the pre-shift display, and the display content of the pre-shift display is the pre-shift display. It may also be configured to blink over the execution period.

Furthermore, the execution period of the pre-shift display is not limited to a fixed configuration; for example, a new base value is calculated after the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60,000 balls). The execution period of the pre-shift display may be configured to vary depending on the period required for the base value data shift process to be completed.

In addition, when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, the last of the display cycles of each base value being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that time. The pre-shift display may be started after the display of the base value of the order (that is, the base value stored in the third history area 314) is completed. Thereby, after the display cycle of each base value is completed, it becomes possible to start a new display cycle of each base value via the pre-shift display.

Furthermore, when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, calculation of the base value is started using the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 at that time, and the calculation of the base value is started. The configuration may be such that the data shift process (step SA216) is performed when the process is completed. In this case, it becomes possible to accurately calculate the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number.

In addition, during the interval period, instead of the interval non-display being performed, predetermined displays are performed on at least some of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the first to fourth notification displays are The overall display of the devices 201 to 204 may be configured to display an interval display that is different from the display content that may occur in a situation where the base value is notified. For example, in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, only the central display segments 321 to 324 may be turned on to display a "-", and the first to fourth It may be configured such that "-" is displayed on some of the four notification display devices 201 to 204, and the remaining display devices are in a non-display state.

Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which no interval period is set. In this case, when the display duration period for one base value has elapsed, the display of the base value to be displayed in the next order starts on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Become.

<44th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the forty-third embodiment described above in the start timing of the pre-shift display. Hereinafter, the configuration that is different from the forty-third embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the forty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

The start timing of the pre-shift display in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 152. 152(a) shows the period during which the base value stored in the current area 311 is notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 152(b) shows the period in which the base value stored in the current area 311 is FIG. 152(c) shows the period during which the base value stored in the second history area 313 is notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. 152(d) shows the period during which the base value stored in the third history area 314 is notified on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204. 152(e) shows a period in which interval non-display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 152(f) shows a period in which interval non-display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. 201 to 204 indicate the period in which the pre-shift display is performed, and FIG. 152 (g) shows a situation in which the base value calculation period starts anew and is not in either the opening/closing execution mode due to the jackpot result or the high-frequency support mode. It shows the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60,000 balls).

At the timing from t1 to t11, the display duration period is set on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, similarly to the time charts of FIGS. 151(a) to 151(g) in the forty-third embodiment. The display corresponding to the base value over the interval period and the execution of interval non-display during the interval period are repeated, and the display corresponding to the base value is changed from the current area 311 of the calculation result storage area 234 to the first history area 312 to the second history area 312. The process is repeated in the order of history area 313 → third history area 314. Then, at timing t11, as shown in FIG. 152(b), display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Thereafter, at the timing t12 during which the display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is being performed, the base value calculation period is updated as shown in FIG. 152(g). Since the start, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in a situation that is neither the opening/closing execution mode depending on the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode is shifted. The standard number (specifically 60,000) is reached. In this case, at the timing of t12, although the display duration period has not elapsed since the display corresponding to the base value of the first history area 312 started at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 152(b), The notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is finished, and pre-shift display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. 152(f).

Note that even if the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number while other base values are being notified, the pre-shift display will be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 at that timing. ~204. In addition, even if the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number while the interval non-display is being performed, the pre-shift display will be changed to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that timing. It will be started at

Thereafter, at the timing t13, the execution period of the pre-shift display has elapsed from the timing t12, so the pre-shift display is finished as shown in FIG. 152(f), and the current area 311 is Notification of the base value stored in is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In other words, even if the notification target when the pre-shift display starts is the base value of the first history area 312, when the pre-shift display ends, it corresponds to the first notification order in the base value notification order. Notification starts from the base value of the current area 311.

Thereafter, when the display duration period elapses from the timing t13 at the timing t14, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is ended as shown in FIG. 152(a), and as shown in FIG. 152(e). In this way, interval non-display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This interval non-display is terminated as shown in FIG. 152(e) at timing t15, which is the timing when the interval period has elapsed from timing t14, and as shown in FIG. 152(b), the base of the first history area 312 is Display corresponding to the value is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

According to the above configuration, the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (i.e., the game ball When the total number of game balls supplied to the area PA reaches the shift reference number (specifically 60,000 balls), at that timing, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display the pre-shift information. Display starts. Thereby, it becomes possible to start the pre-shift display at an early stage, and it becomes possible to notify at an early stage that the total number of game balls has reached the shift reference number.

<45th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the thirty-fifth embodiment described above in the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the thirty-fifth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the thirty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step SA401 to step SA425 in the main process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, a power-on initial setting process is executed (step SA401). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed after the main process is started. During this predetermined wait period, the start of operation and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

Thereafter, internal function register setting processing is executed (step SA402). In the internal function register setting process, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, is set as the first interrupt cycle. (specifically, 4 milliseconds), and set the interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, to be longer than the first interrupt cycle. The second interrupt period is also set to be a short period (specifically, 2 milliseconds).

In other words, in this embodiment, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are performed so that the interrupt period is relatively long and short. exists. Both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are started by interrupting the main process. Further, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) interrupts the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) and is not activated. In addition, if both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) and the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134) are not being executed, those cycles The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started first regardless of the order of progress. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started with priority over the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated with priority over the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134).

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is set as the main interrupt cycle. Set in a specific register of the side CPU 63. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to setting the first and second interrupt cycles, for example, setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the winning random number counter C1 is executed.

Thereafter, the start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SA403). As in the thirty-fifth embodiment, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started, the start-up processing flag is used to indicate whether the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is in progress or not. The situation is such that the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 133) should be terminated without executing the processing for advancing the game, while executing the processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring. This is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63.

The start-up processing flag indicates that the processing for starting the supply of operating power (steps SA401 to SA418) is started in the main processing (FIG. 153) and interrupt permission (step SA404) is set, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. It is set to "1" before the operation, and cleared to "0" before the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed and the remaining processing (steps SA422 to SA425) is started. In this case, similarly to the thirty-fifth embodiment, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S8907 to S8920 are not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the processing for advancing the game from being executed in a situation where the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SA401 to SA418) is being executed. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), even if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", by executing the processing from step S8901 to step S8905, the operating power Power outage monitoring is executed even when the supply start processing (steps SA401 to SA418) is being executed, and the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and random number initial value counter CINI update is performed and further fraud detection is performed.

In particular, by executing the power outage information storage process (step S8901) even when the start-up process flag is set to "1", the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SA401 to SA418) Even if a power outage occurs in a situation where ) is being executed, it is possible to perform power outage processing in response to the power outage. In the power outage processing, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is used for specific control. Since the data is stored in the work area 221 of the main side RAM 65, it is possible to prevent it from being identified as an abnormality occurring in the main side RAM 65 when the supply of operating power is restarted. As a result, if a power outage occurs during the settings confirmation process (step SA415) or setting value update process (step SA418), the next operating power supply will be notified that the power outage has occurred during these settings-related processes. This can be specified at the start.

Incidentally, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA415) or the setting value update process (step SA418) is being executed, neither the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) nor the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134) Interrupts are not prohibited and can be interrupted at any time. In this case, the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) or the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134) is performed in the main process (Figure 153), including the setting confirmation process (step SA415) and setting value update process (step SA418). When activated by an interrupt, information on the return address of the main process (FIG. 153) for returning after the timer interrupt process that is the target of activation is completed is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. , information of various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before the timer interrupt processing is started is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt processing that was the activation target ends, the processing returns to the main processing (FIG. 153) corresponding to the return address information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and The information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is returned to various registers of the main CPU 63.

After setting the start-up processing flag to "1" in step SA403, interrupt permission is set (step SA404). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt cycle. However, since the startup processing flag is set to "1" in step SA403, even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started, various processing of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) will not be executed. Of these, the processes for monitoring power outages, updating various counters, and monitoring fraud are executed, while the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) ends without executing processes for advancing the game. .

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step SA405). In other words, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the reset button 68c is pressed and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Here, in this embodiment, like the thirty-fifth embodiment, the main controller 60 is provided with a setting key insertion section 68a and a reset button 68c, but is not provided with an update button 68b. Furthermore, the main control device 60 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the eleventh embodiment, instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SA405: NO), it is determined whether the power outage flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SA406). When the power outage process is executed in the power outage information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the power outage flag is set to "1". The power outage flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the power outage processing was appropriately performed during the previous power cutoff.

If the power outage flag is set to "1" (step SA406: YES), a checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step SA407). The checksum calculation method is the same as in the 33rd embodiment. Thereafter, the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 221 for specific control calculated in the power outage process executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and saved in the work area 221 for specific control. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read out, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step SA407 (step SA408). Then, it is determined whether these checksums match (step SA409).

If a negative determination is made in step SA406 or step SA409, that is, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" or if the checksums do not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SA410). When the game stop flag is set to "1", steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and when an affirmative determination is made in step S8906, steps S8907 to S8905 are executed. Do not execute the process in S8920. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not performed properly during the previous power shutoff, or if the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control If the checksums do not match due to a change in the storage state of information for at least one of the following items since the last time the power was shut off, processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring will be executed. However, the process for advancing the game will not be executed.

Thereafter, at the start of supply of operating power, an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality has occurred regarding the power failure flag or checksum is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step SA411). Upon receiving the abnormality command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of supply of operating power, and also issues a message from the speaker unit 54 saying, ``Please change the settings.'' ” will be output. Further, a character image "Please change the settings" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is once stopped, the above notification will not be sent when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the setting value update process (step SA418) is executed. The configuration may be continued.

If the power outage flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal (step SA406 and step SA409: YES), "1" is set to the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control. It is determined whether or not (step SA412). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting value update process (step SA418) is being executed, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and the setting update display flag is set to "1". is set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a display indicating the setting value that is being updated. The setting update display flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the setting value update process (step SA418) is started and is cleared to "0" when the setting value update process (step SA418) is finished. , in a situation where the setting value update process (step SA418) is not executed, the setting update display flag is basically not set to "1". However, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update process (step SA418) is being executed, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is subsequently started; In this state, the setting update display flag is set to "1". When the setting update display flag is set to "1", the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed, or the setting update display flag is cleared to "0" in the setting value update process (step SA418). It will remain until it is executed.

If the setting update display flag is not set to "1" and a negative determination is made in step SA412, it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using a setting key (step SA413). ). If the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using a setting key (step SA413: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SA415). Furthermore, even if the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on using a setting key (step SA413: NO), the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1". is set (step SA414: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SA415). The setting confirmation process will be explained later.

The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is being executed, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1". is set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting value is being checked and a display indicating the currently set setting value. be exposed. The setting confirmation display flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is started and is cleared to "0" when the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is ended. , in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed, the setting confirmation display flag is basically not set to "1". However, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is being executed, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is subsequently started; In this state, the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1". When this setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed, or the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" in the setting confirmation process (step SA415). It will remain until it is executed.

If the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA405: YES), RAM clear processing is executed (step SA416). In the RAM clearing process, in the work area 221 for specific control, excluding the area in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (specifically, the setting reference area 341 described later), the specific control work area 221 is cleared. Clears the work area 221 to "0" and executes initial settings. As a result, the area indicating whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the win/fail lottery is performed regardless of the win/fail lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game cycle is not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general figure display section 38a is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in a closed state. situation. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display section 37a is erased and the general figure display section The pending information for 38a is deleted. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to "0". Further, a setting update area 342, which will be described later, provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". Further, in the RAM clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed. Furthermore, in the RAM clearing process, initial settings are executed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step SA402 is executed. Note that for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, processing for clearing to "0" and processing for initializing are not executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned on using a setting key (step SA417). If the ON operation has been performed (step SA417: YES), setting value update processing is executed (step SA418). The setting value update process will be explained later.

If the process of step SA411 is executed, if the negative determination is made in step SA414, if the process of step SA415 is executed, if the negative determination is made in step SA417, or if the process of step SA418 is executed, the specific control Information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 (step SA419). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. If the checking counter is set to a value of 1 or more, the checking display continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the remaining processing is performed after the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (step SA401 to step SA418) is completed in the main CPU 63. Before (steps SA422 to SA425) are started, an initial check period is started. As a result, there is no need to control the initial check period in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, reducing the processing load in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. becomes possible.

Furthermore, the settings confirmation process (step SA415) and the setting value update process (step SA418) are executed as the process at the start of the supply of operating power, whereas the process at the start of the supply of operating power is performed during the initial check period. Starts after it finishes. As a result, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the setting values are not displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to avoid any influence.

Thereafter, the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SA420). When the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started by clearing the start-up processing flag to "0", a negative determination is made in step S8906, so that not only the processing in steps S8901 to S8905 is executed. The processes from step S8907 to step S8920 are executed, and the state in which the process for advancing the game is not executed is canceled. Incidentally, in step SA420, the power outage flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

Thereafter, a return command is sent to the audio emission control device 81 (step SA421). The content of the information included in the return command and the processing content of the audio emission control device 81 when the return command is received are the same as in step S7920 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the 33rd embodiment. .

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps SA422 to SA425. In other words, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), but between the first timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process, There will be a remaining time. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining processes of steps SA422 to SA425 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processing of steps SA422 to SA425 is non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly. In steps SA422 to SA425, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

Next, a configuration regarding setting values in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 154 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the storage area regarding setting values provided in the work area 221 for specific control.

As shown in FIG. 154, the specific control work area 221 is provided with a setting reference area 341 and a setting update area 342. The setting reference area 341 is a storage area in which information for specifying the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 by the main CPU 63 is stored. In step S503 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13), the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is specified based on the information stored in the setting reference area 341, and the validity table corresponding to the specified setting value is read out. Then, in step S504, the read validity table is used to execute the validity determination process. In addition, in a situation where the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 is displayed on the fourth notification display. This is done in device 204.

Numerical information is stored in the setting reference area 341 as setting value information. Specifically, when numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1". If numerical information of “2” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2”. If numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3". If numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4". If numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5". If numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 6".

The setting update area 342 stores information about setting values that are being updated in the setting value update process (step SA418). In other words, in the setting value update process (step SA418), the information on the setting value to be selected is updated every time the reset button 68c is pressed. The setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is changed without changing the value information. This makes it possible to update the setting values while storing and retaining the information on the setting values that were set before the setting value update process (step SA418) was started. When the setting value update process (step SA418) is terminated, the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 at that time is overwritten in the setting reference area 341. As a result, the setting value updated in the setting value update process (step SA418) is set as the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in a situation where the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342 is displayed on the fourth notification display. This is done in device 204.

Numerical information is stored in the setting update area 342 as setting value information. Specifically, when numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target (selection target or change target) becomes "setting 1". If numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 2". If numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 3". When numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 4". If numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is "setting 5". If numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is "setting 6".

FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process executed in step SA415 of the main process (FIG. 153). Note that the processing from step SA501 to step SA504 in the setting confirmation processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

On the condition that the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1" (step SA501: NO), the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step SA502). . By setting the setting confirmation display flag to "1" and making an affirmative determination in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is performed. (Step S9006) is executed.

FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation. Note that the processing from step SA601 to step SA603 in the setting process is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, setting value display data corresponding to the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 of the specific control work area 221 is read out (step SA601). Then, the display data of the read setting value is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the specific control work area 221 as display data to be applied to the fourth notification display device 204 (step SA602). Further, display data for causing the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 to display a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. (Step SA603).

By executing the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation as described above, the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA603 is The information is displayed on the third notification display devices 201 to 203, and a display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA602 is performed on the fourth notification display device 204. As a result, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124(b), for example, the display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked and the display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are changed to the first ~Performed on the fourth notification display devices 201-204.

Returning to the explanation of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155), if an affirmative determination is made in step SA501 or if the process in step SA502 is executed, the setting key insertion section 68a changes from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key. It is determined whether the switch has been made (step SA503). Specifically, it is determined whether the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion section 68a has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. do. Therefore, the OFF state is maintained not only when the setting key insertion section 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting confirmation process is started in a situation where the setting key insertion section 68a is in the OFF state. In this case, a negative determination is made in step SA503. If it is not specified that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SA503: NO), the process of step SA503 is repeated.

If it is specified that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SA503: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SA504). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), resulting in a situation in which the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 (step S9006) during setting confirmation is not executed. Therefore, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. The current state is canceled.

As described above, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 starts. In the situation where the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on in the situation where the main processing (FIG. 153) is started, the game can proceed in the main processing (FIG. 153). The setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, which is the situation before the process described above is executed. This makes it possible to check the set values even when no games are being played.

FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the setting value update process executed in step SA418 of the main process (FIG. 153). Note that the processing from step SA701 to step SA710 in the setting value update processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, it is determined whether the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SA701). If the setting update display flag is not set to "1" (step SA701: NO), the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SA702). Thereafter, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 in the specific control work area 221 is overwritten in the setting update area 342 in the specific control work area 221 (step SA703). As a result, information about the setting value that was set when the supply of operating power was stopped last time is set in the setting update area 342.

On the other hand, after the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process is being executed, the supply of operating power is restarted and the RAM clearing process (step SA416) of the main process (FIG. 153) is executed. If the setting update display flag has already been set to "1" because the setting value update process has been started without any error (step SA701: YES), the process of step SA703 is not executed. In this case, the processing from step SA704 onward may be executed with the setting value information set in the setting update area 342 in the setting value update processing before the supply of operating power being stopped. Become.

If the setting update display flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), thereby setting the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update. (Step S9004) is executed.

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during a setting update. Note that the processing from step SA801 to step SA803 in the setting process is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, setting value display data corresponding to the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 of the specific control work area 221 is read (step SA801). Then, the display data of the read setting value is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the specific control work area 221 as display data to be applied to the fourth notification display device 204 (step SA802). Further, display data for causing the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 to display a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. (Step SA803).

By executing the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update as described above, the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA803 is At the same time, a display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA802 is performed on the fourth notification display device 204. As a result, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124(a), a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and a display of the setting values selected as the update target of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Returning to the explanation of the setting value update process (FIG. 157), if an affirmative determination is made in step SA701 or if the process in step SA703 is executed, the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is set to It is determined whether it is one of "6" (step SA704). If it is not one of "1" to "6" (step SA704: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SA705). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 1."

If an affirmative determination is made in step SA704 or if the process in step SA705 is executed, the setting key insertion unit 68a determines whether the setting key has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SA706). Specifically, it is determined whether the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion section 68a has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. do. Therefore, the OFF state is maintained not only when the setting key insertion section 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting value update process is started in a situation where the setting key insertion section 68a is in the OFF state. In this case, a negative determination is made in step SA706.

If a negative determination is made in step SA706, the value in the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 on the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA707: YES) (step SA708). Thereby, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the setting value is updated to one level higher. Further, if the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SA707: NO) or if the value in the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1, the process returns to step SA704, but the settings are updated in step SA704. If it is determined that the value in the setting update area 342 is 7 or more, "1" is set in the setting update area 342 in step SA705. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6", the state returns to "Setting 1".

If it is determined that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SA706: YES), the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is overwritten in the setting reference area 341 ( Step SA709). As a result, the setting value information updated in the current setting value update process is set in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is the current pachinko machine 10. This becomes the set value.

Thereafter, the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SA710). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), resulting in a situation in which the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 (step S9004) during the setting update is not executed. Therefore, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated, and the settings selected to be updated for the pachinko machine 10. The state where the value is displayed is canceled.

As described above, in addition to turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c, the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key. Not only the RAM clearing process (step SA416) but also the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is executed. Furthermore, as already explained, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is performed based on the fact that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. executed. This makes it possible to use the ON operation for the setting key insertion section 68a in common as an operation for executing setting-related processing regarding setting values. Therefore, it is possible to make the details of the operation for generating the setting-related process easy to understand for the game hall manager.

In addition, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key, and when pressing the reset button 68c is not added, a setting confirmation process is executed and the reset is performed. When adding a press operation to the button 68c, a setting value update process is executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to change the process to be executed among the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process depending on whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the game hall manager to understand the operation details for executing a desired process among the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process. Furthermore, by increasing the number of operations required to execute the setting value update process than the setting confirmation process, it is possible to make it particularly difficult to perform the setting value update process illegally.

Next, if the power outage process is executed while the setting value update process (Figure 157) or the setting confirmation process (Figure 155) is being executed, the main process (Figure 153) will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 159.

First, if the power outage process is executed in a situation where neither the setting value update process (Figure 157) nor the setting confirmation process (Figure 155) is executed, the main process ( The contents of the process executed in FIG. 153) will be explained.

If the supply of operating power is resumed without the setting key insertion part 68a being turned on and the reset button 68c being pressed (that is, in the case of "no operation"), the RAM is None of the clearing process (step SA416), setting value updating process (step SA418), and setting confirmation process (step SA415) is executed. When the supply of operating power is resumed while the reset button 68c is pressed while the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on (that is, when the "RAM clear operation" is performed), the main process (FIG. 153) In this step, RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed, while setting value update processing (step SA418) and setting confirmation processing (step SA415) are not executed. When the supply of operating power is resumed while the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on and the reset button 68c is pressed (that is, when a "setting change operation" is performed), the main processing (FIG. 153) While the clearing process (step SA416) is executed and the setting value updating process (step SA418) is executed, the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. When the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on but the supply of operating power is resumed without pressing the reset button 68c (that is, when the "setting confirmation operation" is performed), the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is executed, while RAM clear processing (step SA416) and setting value update processing (step SA418) are not executed.

Next, if the power outage process is executed in a situation where the setting value update process (step SA418) is being executed (that is, a situation where the setting update display flag is set to "1"), the subsequent operating power supply The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) when restarting will be explained.

When the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where the "RAM clear operation" has been performed, the main process (FIG. 153) executes the RAM clear process (step SA416), while the setting value update process (step SA418) and The setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. In other words, even if the power outage process is executed while the setting value update process (step SA418) is being executed, if the "RAM clear operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting value The RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed without restarting or newly executing the update process (step SA418). This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of only the RAM clearing process (step SA416) with respect to the "RAM clearing operation". In this case, if the power outage process is executed before the process of step SA709 is executed in the setting value update process (step SA418), the setting value updated in the setting value update process (step SA418) (i.e. Since the information on the changed setting value) is not set in the setting reference area 341, the setting value that was set before the relevant setting value update process (step SA418) is started is not used when the supply of operating power is resumed. It can also be used later. Note that the setting update display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the RAM clearing process (step SA416).

When the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where a "setting change operation" has been performed, in the main process (Figure 153), RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed and setting value update processing (step SA418) is executed. However, the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. In other words, even if the power outage processing is executed while the setting value update processing (step SA418) is being executed, if a "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the RAM will be cleared. After the process (step SA416) is executed, the setting value update process (step SA418) is newly started.

When the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed, the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" as described above, so in the setting value updating process (FIG. 157), step SA701 is executed. By making a negative determination, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 is overwritten in the setting update area 342. Therefore, if the power outage process is executed before the process of step SA709 is executed in the setting value update process (step SA418) before the supply of operating power is stopped, then the setting value update process (step SA418) ) is invalidated because it is not set in the setting reference area 341. In this case, in the setting value update process (step SA418) after restarting the supply of operating power, the settings that were set before the start of the setting value update process (step SA418) before the supply of operating power was stopped The setting value will be updated from the value.

If the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation of "no operation" or if the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation of "setting confirmation operation", the main process (Figure 153) will check the power outage flag and By making an affirmative determination in step SA412 on the condition that no abnormality has occurred with respect to the thumb, the setting value updating process (step SA418) is executed without executing the RAM clearing process (step SA416). If the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is not executed, the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control will remain set to "1", so the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) will not be executed in step SA416. By making an affirmative determination in SA701, the setting value information in the setting update area 342 is maintained as is. Therefore, the update of the set value will be restarted from the set value that was being updated in the set value update process (step SA418) before the supply of operating power was stopped. As a result, if the power outage processing is executed during the setting value update process (step SA418) and the "RAM clear operation" is not performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the "setting Even if the "change operation" is not performed, it is possible to restart the setting value update process (step SA418).

In particular, it is assumed that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off by mistake while the setting value update process (step SA418) is being executed, and in this case, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is immediately turned on. It is conceivable that this will be done. In this case, it is assumed that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without pressing the reset button 68c while the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on, and in that case, the "setting confirmation operation" is performed. In this situation, the supply of operating power will be resumed. In this situation, the setting value update process (step SA418) is executed as described above, and the setting value update process (step SA418) before the supply of operating power is stopped in the setting value update process (step SA418). The update of the setting value is restarted from the setting value that is currently being updated. Thereby, even if the above-mentioned event occurs, it is possible to restart updating of the setting values without any problem.

Next, if the power outage process is executed in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is being executed (that is, a situation where the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1"), the subsequent operating power supply The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) when restarting will be explained.

When the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where the "RAM clear operation" has been performed, the main process (FIG. 153) executes the RAM clear process (step SA416), while the setting value update process (step SA418) and The setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. In other words, even if the power outage process is executed while the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is being executed, if the "RAM clear operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the settings will be confirmed. RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed without newly executing processing (step SA415). This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of only the RAM clearing process (step SA416) with respect to the "RAM clearing operation". Note that the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the RAM clearing process (step SA416).

If the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where a "setting change operation" has been performed, in the main process (Figure 153), RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed and setting value update processing (step SA418) is executed. However, the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. In other words, even if the power outage process is executed while the settings confirmation process (step SA415) is being executed, if a "settings change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the settings will be confirmed. The setting value update process (step SA418) is executed after the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed without newly executing the service process (step SA415). This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the RAM clearing process (step SA416) and the setting value updating process (step SA418) for the "setting change operation". Further, even if the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed in this way, the setting value to be updated is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 by executing the setting value update process (step SA418). At the same time, upon completion of the setting value update process (step SA418), information on the setting values that are subject to update at that time is set in the setting reference area 341. You can check 10 setting values. Note that the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the RAM clearing process (step SA416).

If the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where the "settings confirmation operation" has been performed, the main process (Figure 153) will proceed with the settings confirmation process (step SA415) is executed. As a result, even if the power outage process is executed during the setting confirmation process (step SA415), it is possible to resume checking the setting values by performing the "setting confirmation operation" when the supply of operating power is resumed. becomes.

When the supply of operating power is resumed in the "no operation" situation, the main process (FIG. 153) makes an affirmative determination in step SA414 on the condition that no abnormality has occurred regarding the power outage flag and checksum. , the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is executed even if the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on. As a result, even if the power outage process is executed during the setting confirmation process (step SA415) and there is no operation when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting values can be confirmed. It is possible to restart it.

Next, the end timing of the setting value update process (FIG. 157) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) in relation to the operating state of the setting key insertion section 68a will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 160. FIG. 160(a) shows the period when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the ON state, FIG. 160(b) shows the period when the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on, and FIG. 160(c) shows the period when the power is on. Figure 160(d) shows the period during which the value update process (Figure 157) is executed, Figure 160(d) shows the period during which the setting confirmation process (Figure 155) is executed, and Figure 160(e) shows the period when the power outage process is executed. Indicates the period in which the

First, the case where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) are executed in the normal flow will be described.

At timing t1, the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 160(b), and then at timing t2, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 160(a). An operation is performed. In this case, the reset button 68c is also pressed. Therefore, at timing t3, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started as shown in FIG. 160(c). Thereafter, at timing t4, as shown in FIG. 160(b), the setting key insertion section 68a changes from the ON state to the OFF state. This completes the setting value update process (FIG. 157) as shown in FIG. 160(c).

Further, at timing t5, the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 160(b), and then at timing t6, as shown in FIG. The ON operation is performed. In this case, the reset button 68c is not pressed. Therefore, at timing t7, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is started as shown in FIG. 160(d). Thereafter, at timing t8, as shown in FIG. 160(b), the setting key insertion section 68a changes from the ON state to the OFF state. This completes the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) as shown in FIG. 160(d).

Next, a case will be described in which the power outage process is executed during the execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 157) and the situation is "no operation" when the supply of operating power is resumed.

At timing t9, the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 160(b), and then at timing t10, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 160(a). An operation is performed. In this case, the reset button 68c is also pressed. Therefore, at timing t11, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started as shown in FIG. 160(c). Then, at timing t12 during the execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 157), the power is turned off as shown in FIG. In this state, power outage processing is started as shown in FIG. 160(e). In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) ends at the timing t12, as shown in FIG. 160(c), and the power outage process ends at the timing t13, as shown in FIG. 160(e).

Thereafter, at timing t14, the setting key insertion part 68a is turned off as shown in FIG. 160(b), and in this state, at timing t15, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off as shown in FIG. 160(a). An ON operation is performed. In this case, the reset button 68c is not pressed. In other words, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a "no operation" situation. However, when the pachinko machine 10 was previously powered off, the power outage process was executed during the setting value update process (FIG. 157). Therefore, at timing t16, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started as shown in FIG. 160(c). In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is terminated when it is determined that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON operation state to the OFF operation state. Even if the setting key insertion section 68a is maintained in the OFF-operated state from the start timing of step 157), this does not mean that the termination condition for the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is satisfied.

Thereafter, at timing t17 while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON using the setting key as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 160(b), the setting key insertion section 68a changes from the ON state to the OFF state at the timing. This completes the setting value update process (FIG. 157) as shown in FIG. 160(c).

Next, a case will be described in which the power outage process is executed during the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the situation is "no operation" when the supply of operating power is resumed.

At timing t19, as shown in FIG. 160(b), the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on using the setting key, and then at timing t20, as shown in FIG. 160(a), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. An operation is performed. In this case, the reset button 68c is not pressed. Therefore, at timing t21, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is started as shown in FIG. 160(d). Then, at timing t22 during execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155), the power is turned off as shown in FIG. In this state, power outage processing is started as shown in FIG. 160(e). In this case, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) ends at the timing t22, as shown in FIG. 160(d), and the power outage process ends at the timing t23, as shown in FIG. 160(e).

Thereafter, at timing t24, the setting key insertion part 68a is turned off as shown in FIG. 160(b), and in this state, at timing t25, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off as shown in FIG. 160(a). An ON operation is performed. In this case, the reset button 68c is not pressed. In other words, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a "no operation" situation. However, when the pachinko machine 10 was previously powered off, the power outage process was executed during the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155). Therefore, at timing t26, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is started as shown in FIG. 160(d). In this case, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is terminated when it is determined that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON operation state to the OFF operation state. Even if the setting key insertion section 68a is maintained in the OFF-operated state from the start timing of step 155), this does not mean that the termination condition of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is satisfied.

Thereafter, at timing t27 while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 160(b), and then at t28. As shown in FIG. 160(b), the setting key insertion section 68a changes from the ON state to the OFF state at the timing. This completes the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) as shown in FIG. 160(d).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In order to execute the setting value update process (FIG. 157), when the supply of operating power is started, turn on the setting key insertion section 68a and press the reset button 68c. It is necessary to perform a change operation. This makes it difficult to illegally change the setting value. In this case, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is being executed, if the supply of operating power is restarted, the "setting change operation" will not be performed. The setting value update process (FIG. 157) can be executed even if the setting value is updated. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 157).

If the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is being executed, a "setting confirmation operation" is performed to confirm the setting value when the supply of operating power is restarted. In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed instead of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155). This makes it possible to prioritize setting value changes over setting value confirmation, and prevents the game from starting even though the setting value change to be used has not actually been completed. becomes possible.

In a situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, the setting values selected to be updated are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to change the setting value while keeping track of the setting value selected to be updated. In addition, by displaying the setting values selected for update in this way, when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting value update process (Fig. 157), it becomes possible to substantially confirm the set value.

In a situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display not only the setting value selected as the update target but also the setting value update process. A display corresponding to the situation in which (FIG. 157) is being executed is also displayed. As a result, even if the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is started even though the "setting confirmation operation" has been performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting value update process (Fig. 157) will not be executed. It becomes easier for the game hall manager to understand that the game has started.

If the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is being executed, and if the supply of operating power is resumed afterwards, if there is "no operation" or "setting confirmation operation". ”, the setting value is changed from the setting value that was selected before the supply of operating power was stopped. This makes it possible to continue changing the setting value from the setting value that was selected before the supply of operating power was stopped.

If the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (Figure 157) is being executed, and the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the current The setting value is changed from the setting value to be used. This makes it possible to vary the initial set value when starting to change the set value, depending on the content of the operation when the supply of operating power is restarted.

Even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (Figure 157) is being executed, if the "RAM clear operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, Setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is not executed. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (Figure 157) is being executed, there is no need to execute the setting value update process (Figure 157) afterwards. By performing a "RAM clear operation" when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the setting value update process (FIG. 157) from being executed.

In order to execute the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155), it is necessary to perform a "setting confirmation operation" by turning on the setting key insertion part 68a when the supply of operating power is started. . This makes it difficult to illegally check the setting values. In this case, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (Figure 155) is being executed, if the supply of operating power is restarted, the "setting confirmation operation" has not been performed. The settings confirmation process (FIG. 155) can be executed even if the settings are checked. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155).

Even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (Figure 155) is being executed, if the "settings change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed. The setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed without executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155). This makes it possible to give priority to the task of changing setting values over the task of checking setting values.

The work area 221 for specific control is provided with a setting reference area 341 and a setting update area 342. Information corresponding to the setting value to be used is stored in the setting reference area 341, and setting value update processing is performed. Information corresponding to the setting value that is being changed in the situation where (FIG. 157) is being executed is stored in the setting update area 342. As a result, while the information on the setting values that were set before the setting value update processing (Fig. 157) was started is stored and retained in the setting reference area 341, the information to be updated in the setting value updating processing (Fig. 157) is retained. It becomes possible to change the setting value.

If the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is being executed, when the supply of operating power is restarted, there is a case of "no operation" or a "setting confirmation operation" is performed. In this case, the change of the setting value is started from the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342, and when the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, It is sufficient to start changing the setting value from the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341. This allows each of these situations to occur appropriately.

In order to start the setting value update process (FIG. 157), it is necessary to turn on the setting key insertion part 68a using the setting key, so an attempt is made to start the setting value update process (FIG. 157) fraudulently. It is possible to make it difficult to perform an action. In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) will not be terminated just by turning off the setting key insertion section 68a, but if the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off after being turned on. will be terminated in As a result, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is being executed, and when the supply of operating power is subsequently restarted, the setting key can be inserted due to "no operation". Even if the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started in a situation where the section 68a is in the OFF state, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is not immediately terminated, and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on once. Since the set value update process (FIG. 157) is completed by further operating OFF after the operation, it becomes possible to complete the set value update process (FIG. 157) at a timing that is convenient for the administrator of the gaming hall.

In order to start the setting confirmation process (Fig. 155), it is necessary to turn on the setting key insertion part 68a using the setting key, so an attempt is made to start the setting confirmation process (Fig. 155) fraudulently. It is possible to make it difficult to perform an action. In this case, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is not terminated only when the setting key insertion section 68a is turned OFF, but when the setting key insertion section 68a is turned OFF after being turned ON. will be terminated in As a result, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (Figure 155) is being executed, the setting key can be inserted due to "no operation" when the supply of operating power is restarted. Even if the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is started in a situation where the setting key insertion section 68a is in the OFF state, the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is not immediately terminated, and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON once. Since the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is terminated by further OFF operation after the operation, it is possible to terminate the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) at a timing favorable to the administrator of the gaming hall.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (step SA401 to step SA418) is completed in the main CPU 63, and the remaining processing (step SA422 to step SA418) is completed. Before SA 425) is started, an initial check period is started. As a result, there is no need to control the initial check period in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, reducing the processing load in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. becomes possible.

The settings confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the setting value update process (FIG. 157) are executed when the supply of operating power is started, whereas the initial check period is when the process when the supply of operating power is started is completed. will start later. As a result, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the setting values are not displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to avoid any influence.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, either the setting confirmation process (Fig. 155) or the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is executed, and the setting confirmation process (Fig. 155) and the setting value update process (FIG. 157) are not executed, a check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal, regardless of the situation when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

The main processing (FIG. 153) of the main CPU 63 includes cases where either the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) or the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed, and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) or the setting value update process (FIG. 157). This is a process that is commonly executed even when neither the value update process (Figure 157) is executed, and it is a process that is executed in common even when neither the value update process (Figure 157) is executed, and neither the setting confirmation process (Figure 155) nor the setting value update process (Figure 157) is executed, a check mark is placed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as a process that is executed later than the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and setting value update process (FIG. 157). The process to start the display is set. By setting the process for starting the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as a common process, it is possible to simplify the process configuration and achieve the advantages already described. This makes it possible to achieve the desired effect.

Even in a situation where a check display is being executed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the main CPU 63 can start processing for advancing the game. As a result, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) or the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed, the game can be played. It becomes possible to prevent the start timing of the process for proceeding from being delayed.

In addition, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (Figure 157) is being executed, and if the supply of operating power is restarted and there is "no operation", the setting value update process is executed. (FIG. 157) is not limited to a configuration in which the configuration starts from the setting value that is in the process of being changed before the supply of operating power is stopped, but from the current setting value to be used stored in the setting reference area 341. The configuration may be started. In addition, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is being executed, and when the supply of operating power is restarted, if there is "no operation", the RAM clearing process ( A configuration may be adopted in which the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed after step SA416) is executed, or a configuration in which the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed after the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed. You can also use it as

In addition, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is being executed, and if the supply of operating power is restarted and there is no operation, the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is executed. 157) may not be executed. In this case, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 may be overwritten in the setting update area 342 at the start of the next setting value update process (FIG. 157).

In addition, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (Fig. 155) is being executed, and if the supply of operating power is restarted and there is "no operation", the setting confirmation process (Figure 155) is executed. 155) may not be executed.

Furthermore, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and the "RAM clear operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, A configuration may be adopted in which the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed after the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed. In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be configured to start from the setting value that is in the process of being changed before the supply of operating power is stopped, and the current usage target stored in the setting reference area 341 may be used. It may be configured to start from the set value of .

Furthermore, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and the "RAM clear operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, The setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be executed without executing the RAM clear process (step SA416), or the RAM clear process (step SA416) may be performed after the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which this is executed. In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be configured to start from the setting value that is in the process of being changed before the supply of operating power is stopped, and the current usage target stored in the setting reference area 341 may be used. It may be configured to start from the set value of .

Furthermore, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (Fig. 155) is being executed, and the "RAM clear operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, The configuration may be such that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed after the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed, or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is performed without the RAM clear process (step SA416) being executed. may be executed, or the RAM clearing process (step SA416) may be executed after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed.

Furthermore, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, Although the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is configured to start from the current target setting value stored in the setting reference area 341, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) starts when the supply of operating power is stopped. The configuration may be such that the setting value is started from the setting value that is currently being changed.

Furthermore, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, The setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be executed without executing the RAM clear process (step SA416), or the RAM clear process (step SA416) may be performed after the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which this is executed. In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be configured to start from the setting value that is being changed before the supply of operating power is stopped, and the current usage target stored in the setting reference area 341 It may be configured to start from the set value of .

Furthermore, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, and the "settings change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, Although the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is configured to start from the current target setting value stored in the setting reference area 341, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) starts when the supply of operating power is stopped. A configuration may also be adopted in which the setting value is started from the setting value that is currently being changed.

Furthermore, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, and the "settings change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, The setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be executed without executing the RAM clear process (step SA416), or the RAM clear process (step SA416) may be performed after the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which this is executed.

Furthermore, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, and the "settings change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, A configuration may also be adopted in which the setting confirmation process (Figure 155) is executed but the setting value update process (Figure 157) is not executed, or the setting value update process (Figure 157) is executed after the setting confirmation process (Figure 155) is executed. The configuration may be such that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed after the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed. Furthermore, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, and the "settings change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, A configuration may be adopted in which both the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the setting value update process (FIG. 157) are not executed.

Furthermore, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and the "setting confirmation operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, The setting value update process (Fig. 157) is not limited to a configuration in which the setting value is started from the setting value that is being changed before the supply of operating power is stopped, and the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is performed in the setting reference area. The configuration may be such that the process starts from the current setting value of the target to be used stored in 341.

Furthermore, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and the "setting confirmation operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, The setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be executed after the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed, or the RAM clear process (step SA416) may be executed after the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed. It may also be configured to be executed.

In addition, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is being executed, and the "setting confirmation operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, the settings will be changed. A configuration may be adopted in which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed without executing the value update process (FIG. 157). In this case, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 may be overwritten in the setting update area 342 at the start of the next setting value update process (FIG. 157).

Furthermore, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and the "setting confirmation operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, The setting value update process (Figure 157) may be executed after the setting confirmation process (Figure 155) is executed, or the setting value update process (Figure 155) is executed after the setting value update process (Figure 157) is executed. ) may be configured to be executed. Furthermore, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and the "setting confirmation operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, A configuration may be adopted in which both the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the setting value update process (FIG. 157) are not executed.

In addition, if the supply of operating power is started in a situation where the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", the power supply for wait is set in the power-on initial setting process (step SA401). When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is allowed to interrupt after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a display indicating that the setting value is being updated is stored in the setting update area 342. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the display indicating the set value corresponding to the information is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and these displays can be performed without waiting for the elapse of the predetermined time for the wait. The configuration may be such that the display starts. Furthermore, even if the setting update display flag is set to "1", it is possible to indicate that the setting value is being updated, provided that the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is being executed. The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may display the setting values corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342. In this case, it is possible to prevent these displays from being performed in a situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is not being executed.

In addition, if the supply of operating power is started in a situation where the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", the power supply for the wait is set in the power-on initial setting process (step SA401). When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is allowed to interrupt after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a display indicating that the setting value is being checked is stored in the setting reference area 341. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the display indicating the set value corresponding to the information is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The display may be started. Furthermore, even if the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", it is possible to confirm that the setting value is being checked, provided that the setting confirmation process (Figure 155) is being executed. The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may display the setting values corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342. In this case, it is possible to prevent these displays from being performed in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is not being executed.

Further, in a situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, an image indicating that the setting value is being updated on the symbol display device 41 may be displayed. In addition to or in place of this, an image showing the operating procedure for updating the setting value may be displayed, and the display light emitting unit 53 or the speaker unit 54 may indicate that the setting value is being updated. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the notification shown in FIG. In this case, it becomes possible to make the game hall manager clearly aware that the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed.

Further, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, an image indicating that the setting value is being confirmed on the symbol display device 41 may be displayed. In addition to or in place of this, an image showing the operating procedure for checking the setting value may be displayed, and the display light emitting section 53 or the speaker section 54 may indicate that the setting value is being checked. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the notification shown in FIG. In this case, it becomes possible to make the game hall manager clearly aware that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed.

Further, the operation unit operated to update the setting value in the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is not limited to the reset button 68c, and may be a dedicated operation unit such as the update button 68b. It may be an operation section provided in the main controller 60 to cancel the abnormal state. Further, when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a and a turning operation is performed, positions corresponding to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are set as the rotation operation positions, and the setting key is inserted. A configuration may be adopted in which a setting value corresponding to the rotation operation position of the portion 68a is set. In addition, the setting key insertion part 68a is configured to be able to be rotated further than the ON position, and each time a rotation operation beyond the ON position is performed, the setting value in the middle of updating is changed to the setting value in the next order. The configuration may be updated.

Furthermore, when the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed, a corresponding signal may be externally outputted from the pachinko machine 10 to the management computer of the gaming hall. In this case, the configuration may be such that the signal output is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds), and the signal output is continued while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed. It is also possible to configure This makes it possible for the management computer of the game hall to know that the setting value update process (FIG. 157) has been executed in the pachinko machine 10.

Further, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed, a corresponding signal may be externally outputted from the pachinko machine 10 to the management computer of the gaming hall. In this case, the configuration may be such that the signal output is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds), and the signal output is continued while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed. It is also possible to configure This makes it possible for the game hall management computer to know that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) has been executed in the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, the configuration that terminates the process when the key insertion section is changed from the ON state to the OFF state is applied to processes other than the setting confirmation process (Figure 155) and the setting value update process (Figure 157). Good too. For example, in order to display the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a predetermined key insertion part needs to be operated to the ON position, and a predetermined key insertion part is turned ON. The display may be terminated when it is determined that the state has been changed to the OFF state.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the condition for starting the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is that at least one of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14, which is the opening target, is being operated to open. . In this configuration, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and when the supply of operating power is restarted, there is no operation or no setting confirmation operation. 157, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be started even if the release target is not operated.

Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the condition for starting the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is that at least one of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14, which is the opening target, is being operated to open. . In this configuration, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (Fig. 155) is being executed, and if there is "no operation" when restarting the supply of operating power, the above-mentioned release is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is started even if the target is not operated to open.

In addition, the RAM clearing process that is executed before the setting value update process (FIG. 157) and the RAM clearing process that is executed without executing the setting value update process can prevent initialization in the main RAM 65. A configuration may be adopted in which the target areas are different.

In addition, if the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started in a situation where the setting update display flag is not set to "1", the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 is The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the setting value is changed, but may be a configuration in which the setting value is changed from a predetermined initial value. The initial value may be, for example, "Setting 1", "Setting 6", or any other setting value.

In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed as the process at the start of the supply of operating power, it is also possible to A configuration may be adopted in which the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed based on the fact that `` has been performed. Even with this configuration, if the setting value update process (Figure 157) ends before the normal termination trigger occurs, the setting value update process (Figure 157) will continue even if no "setting change operation" is performed. By configuring this to be executed, it is possible to give priority to the task of changing setting values.

In addition to or in place of the configuration in which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed as the process at the start of the supply of operating power, the setting confirmation '' has been performed, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be executed. Even with this configuration, if the settings confirmation process (Figure 155) is completed before the normal termination trigger occurs, the settings confirmation process (Figure 155) will be executed even if the "settings confirmation operation" is not performed. By configuring this to be executed, it is possible to prioritize the setting value confirmation work.

<46th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the forty-fifth embodiment in the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, the configuration that is different from the forty-fifth embodiment will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the forty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step SA901 to step SA925 in the main processing is executed using a specific control program and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

In steps SA901 to SA904, the same processes as steps SA401 to SA404 of the main process (FIG. 153) in the forty-fifth embodiment are executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SA905). If the supply of operating power is restarted after being stopped while the setting value update process (step SA918) is being executed, the setting update display flag is set to "1". The main processing will start at this point.

If a negative determination is made in step SA905, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA906). In other words, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the reset button 68c is pressed and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SA906: NO), it is determined whether the power outage flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SA907). When the power outage process is executed in the power outage information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the power outage flag is set to "1". The power outage flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the power outage processing was appropriately performed during the previous power cutoff.

If the power outage flag is set to "1" (step SA907: YES), a checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step SA908). The checksum calculation method is the same as in the 33rd embodiment. Thereafter, the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 221 for specific control calculated in the power outage process executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and saved in the work area 221 for specific control. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step SA908 (step SA909). Then, it is determined whether these checksums match (step SA910).

If a negative determination is made in step SA907 or step SA910, that is, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" or if the checksums do not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SA911). Furthermore, at the start of supply of operating power, an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality has occurred regarding the power failure flag or checksum is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step SA912). The processing contents of step SA911 and step SA912 are the same as step SA410 and step SA411 of the main processing (FIG. 153) in the forty-fifth embodiment.

If the power outage flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal (step SA907 and step SA910: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using the setting key. (Step SA913). If the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using a setting key (step SA913: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SA914). The contents of the setting confirmation process are the same as those in the forty-fifth embodiment. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", the setting confirmation process is executed as long as the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on. Not done. Therefore, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process is being executed, the setting confirmation process will not be executed unless the supply of operating power is restarted in a situation where the "setting confirmation operation" is performed.

If the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SA905: YES) or if the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA906: YES), RAM clear processing is executed (step SA915). The contents of the RAM clear processing are the same as the RAM clear processing (step SA416) of the main processing (FIG. 153) in the forty-fifth embodiment.

Thereafter, if the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SA916: YES), the setting value update process is executed regardless of whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on (step SA916: YES). SA918). On the other hand, if the setting update display flag is not set to "1" (step SA916: NO), the setting value is updated on the condition that the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on (step SA917: YES). Processing is executed (step SA918). In other words, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process is being executed, the RAM clearing process (step After SA915) is executed, the setting value update process (step SA918) is newly started.

If the process of step SA912 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step SA913, if the process of step SA914 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step SA917, or if the process of step SA918 is executed, step SA919 ~Execute the process of step SA925. The processing contents of step SA919 to step SA925 are the same as steps SA419 to step SA425 of the main processing (FIG. 153) in the forty-fifth embodiment.

FIG. 162 shows the main processing ( FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the process executed in FIG. 161).

If the power outage process is executed in a situation where neither the setting value update process (step SA918) nor the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is executed, the main process (Fig. 161 ) is the same as in the forty-fifth embodiment. In other words, when the supply of operating power is resumed in the "no operation" situation, the main processing (FIG. 161) includes RAM clearing processing (step SA915), setting value updating processing (step SA918), and setting confirmation processing (step SA914) are not executed. Furthermore, if the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where a "RAM clear operation" has been performed, the RAM clear process (step SA915) is executed in the main process (FIG. 161), while the setting value update process (step SA915) is executed. SA918) and setting confirmation processing (step SA914) are not executed. If the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where a "setting change operation" has been performed, in the main process (Fig. 161), RAM clear processing (step SA915) is executed and setting value update processing (step SA918) is executed. However, the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is not executed. If the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where the "setting confirmation operation" has been performed, the main processing (FIG. 161) executes the setting confirmation processing (step SA914), while the RAM clearing processing (step SA915) And the setting value update process (step SA918) is not executed.

Next, if the power outage process is executed in a situation where the setting value update process (step SA918) is being executed (that is, a situation where the setting update display flag is set to "1"), the subsequent operating power supply The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 161) when restarting will be explained.

If the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation of "no operation", if the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation of "RAM clear operation", it will operate in the situation that "setting change operation" is performed. Regardless of whether the supply of power is resumed or if the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where the "setting confirmation operation" has been performed, the main process (FIG. 161) performs the RAM clear process (step SA915). ) is executed and the setting value update process (step SA918) is executed, while the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is not executed. In other words, if the power outage process is executed while the setting value update process (step SA918) is being executed, no matter what operation is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the RAM will be cleared. After the process (step SA915) is executed, the setting value update process (step SA918) is newly started.

With the above configuration, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting value update process (step SA918), when the supply of operating power is restarted, the setting key insertion part when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is Regardless of the operations performed on the reset button 68a and the reset button 68c, the setting value update process (step SA918) can be newly started after the RAM clear process (step SA915) is executed. As a result, if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of updating the setting values, if the supply of operating power is resumed afterwards, there will be an opportunity to update the setting values and then complete the update. becomes possible. Therefore, even though the supply of operating power is stopped during the update of the setting value, if the supply of operating power is restarted afterwards, the setting before the previous setting value update process (step SA918) is started. It is possible to prevent the game from starting with the same value.

In addition, if the supply of operating power is stopped during the setting value update process (step SA918), the RAM clearing process (step SA915) is uniquely executed regardless of the operation details when restarting the supply of operating power. By executing the setting value update process (step SA918) after the setting value update process (step SA918), the process configuration is simplified compared to a configuration in which the process content to be executed is changed depending on the content of each operation, and the advantages described above can be achieved. This makes it possible to achieve the desired effect.

Next, if the power outage process is executed in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is being executed (that is, a situation where the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1"), the subsequent operating power supply The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 161) when restarting will be explained.

If the power outage process is executed while the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is being executed (that is, the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1"), the main The content of the process executed in the process (Figure 161) is when the power outage process is executed in a situation where neither the setting value update process (Figure 157) nor the setting confirmation process (Figure 155) is executed. The content of the process is the same as that executed in the main process (FIG. 161) when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter. In other words, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is being executed, if the supply of operating power is resumed afterwards, the operation to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 will be delayed. Processing corresponding to the operation content is executed.

Confirming the setting value is different from changing the setting value, and even if the game is terminated midway and is not restarted, it will not affect the game. Therefore, even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of checking the setting values, the process corresponding to the operation when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, so that the administrator of the game hall can It becomes possible to give priority to the details of the operation when turning on the power.

<47th embodiment>
In this embodiment, when the power outage process is executed in a situation where the setting value update process (step SA918) or the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is being executed, the main process ( The content of the process executed in FIG. 161) is different from the forty-fifth embodiment described above. Hereinafter, the configuration that is different from the forty-fifth embodiment will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the forty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 163 shows the main processing ( FIG. 153 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the process executed in FIG. 153).

If the power outage process is executed in a situation where neither the setting value update process (Figure 157) nor the setting confirmation process (Figure 155) is executed, the main process (Figure 153) is executed when the supply of operating power is resumed. ) is the same as in the forty-fifth embodiment. In addition, if the power outage process is executed while the setting confirmation process (step 155) is being executed (that is, the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1"), the subsequent operating power supply will be The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) upon restarting are the same as in the forty-sixth embodiment.

If the power outage process is executed while the setting value update process (Figure 157) is being executed (that is, the setting update display flag is set to "1"), the main The contents of the process executed in the process (FIG. 153) are as in the case of "no operation" and "setting confirmation operation", restart of the setting value update process (FIG. 157), as in the forty-fifth embodiment above. It is. Further, in the case of "RAM clear operation" and "setting change operation", the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is restarted after the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed. In this case, in the RAM clearing process (step SA416), not only the setting reference area 341 provided in the work area 221 for specific control but also the setting update display flag and setting reference area 341 provided in the work area 221 for specific control are used. Area 342 is excluded from initialization targets. Therefore, even if the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed in a situation where the setting update display flag is set to "1", when starting the subsequent setting value update process (FIG. 157), the setting update display flag is "1" is set, and updating of the setting value is started from the setting value information stored at that time in the setting update area 342.

With the above configuration, if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of updating the setting value, the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is not only reliably executed when the supply of operating power is resumed. , it becomes possible to restart the update of the set value from the set value that was being updated immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped. This makes it possible to continue changing the setting values.

<48th embodiment>
In this embodiment, when the power outage process is executed in a situation where the setting value update process (step SA918) or the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is being executed, the main process ( The content of the process executed in FIG. 161) is different from the forty-fifth embodiment described above. Hereinafter, the configuration that is different from the forty-fifth embodiment will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the forty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 164 shows the main processing ( FIG. 153 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the process executed in FIG. 153).

If the power outage process is executed in a situation where neither the setting value update process (Figure 157) nor the setting confirmation process (Figure 155) is executed, the main process (Figure 153) is executed when the supply of operating power is resumed. ) is the same as in the forty-fifth embodiment. In addition, if the power outage process is executed while the setting confirmation process (step 155) is being executed (that is, the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1"), the subsequent operating power supply The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) upon restarting are the same as those in the forty-sixth embodiment.

If the power outage process is executed while the setting value update process (Figure 157) is being executed (that is, the setting update display flag is set to "1"), the main The content of the process executed in the process (Figure 153) is the setting value update process (Figure 157) and setting confirmation in the case of "no operation", in the case of "RAM clear operation", and in the case of "setting confirmation operation". The contents of the process are the same as those executed in the main process (Figure 153) when the supply of operating power is resumed when the power outage process is executed in a situation where none of the main processes (Figure 155) are executed. It is. In other words, in the case of "no operation", none of the RAM clear processing (step SA416), setting value update processing (Fig. 157), and setting confirmation processing (Fig. 155) is executed, and the "RAM clear operation" In this case, RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed, but setting value update processing (Fig. 157) and setting confirmation processing (Fig. 155) are not executed, and in the case of "setting confirmation operation", Although the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed, the RAM clear process (step SA416) and setting value update process (FIG. 157) are not executed.

On the other hand, in the case of a "setting change operation", the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is restarted after the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed. In this case, in the RAM clearing process (step SA416), not only the setting reference area 341 provided in the work area 221 for specific control but also the setting update display flag and setting reference area 341 provided in the work area 221 for specific control are used. Area 342 is excluded from initialization targets. Therefore, even if the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed in a situation where the setting update display flag is set to "1", when starting the subsequent setting value update process (FIG. 157), the setting update display flag is "1" is set, and updating of the setting value is started from the setting value information stored at that time in the setting update area 342.

With the above configuration, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting values are being updated, the operations performed by the administrator of the gaming hall will be handled when the supply of operating power is resumed. It becomes possible to prioritize the execution of processing.

In addition, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being updated, and if the supply of operating power is resumed while the "setting change operation" is being performed, the supply of operating power will be stopped. It becomes possible to restart the update of the setting value from the setting value that was being updated immediately before it was stopped. This makes it possible to continue changing the setting values.

<49th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the forty-fifth embodiment in the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, the configuration that is different from the forty-fifth embodiment will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the forty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step SB101 to step SB128 in the main processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, a power-on initial setting process is executed (step SB101). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed after the main process is started. During this predetermined wait period, the start of operation and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

Thereafter, internal function register setting processing is executed (step SB102). In the internal function register setting process, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, is set as the first interrupt cycle. (specifically, 4 milliseconds), and set the interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, to be longer than the first interrupt cycle. The second interrupt period is also set to be a short period (specifically, 2 milliseconds).

In other words, in this embodiment, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are performed so that the interrupt period is relatively long and short. exists. Both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are started by interrupting the main process. Further, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) interrupts the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) and is not activated. In addition, if both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) and the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134) are not being executed, those cycles The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated first regardless of the order of progress. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started with priority over the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated with priority over the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134).

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is set as the main interrupt cycle. Set in a specific register of the side CPU 63. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to setting the first and second interrupt cycles, for example, setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the winning random number counter C1 is executed.

Thereafter, the start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB103). As in the thirty-fifth embodiment, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated, the start-up processing flag is used to indicate whether the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is in progress or not. The situation is such that the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 133) should be terminated without executing the processing for advancing the game, while executing the processing for monitoring power outage, updating various counters, and monitoring fraud. This is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63.

The start-up process flag is set to "1" when the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is started in the main process (FIG. 165); It is cleared to "0" after (steps SB101 to SB122) are completed and before the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128) is started. Similarly to the thirty-fifth embodiment, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the processes from step S8907 to step S8920 are not executed. Therefore, in order to proceed with the game in a situation where a setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or a setting value update process (FIG. 167), which will be described later, is being executed among the processes at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122). It is possible to prevent this process from being executed. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), even if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", by executing the processing from step S8901 to step S8905, the operating power Power outage monitoring is executed even when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or setting value update process (FIG. 167), which will be described later, is being executed among the processes at the start of supply (steps SB101 to SB122). At the same time, the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and fraud detection is also performed.

In particular, by executing the power outage information storage process (step S8901) even in a situation where the start-up process flag is set to "1", the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) ), even if a power outage occurs in a situation where a setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or a setting value update process (FIG. 167), which will be described later, is being executed, the power outage process can be executed in response. In the power outage processing, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is used for specific control. Since the data is stored in the work area 221 of the main side RAM 65, it is possible to prevent it from being identified as an abnormality occurring in the main side RAM 65 when the supply of operating power is restarted. As a result, if a power outage occurs during the setting confirmation process (Figure 166) or the setting value update process (Figure 167), the next operating power supply will be informed that the power outage has occurred during the setting-related process. This can be specified at the start.

Incidentally, when the setting confirmation process (Figure 166) or the setting value update process (Figure 167) is being executed, neither the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) nor the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134) Interrupts are not prohibited and can be interrupted at any time. In this case, if the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) or the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134) is activated by interrupting the setting confirmation process (Figure 166) or the setting value update process (Figure 167), Information on the return address of the main process (FIG. 165) for returning after the timer interrupt process that was the target of activation is completed is saved to the stack area 222 for specific control, and the timer interrupt process is activated. The information of various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before is saved to the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt processing that was the target of activation ends, the process returns to the main processing (FIG. 165) corresponding to the return address information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and The information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is returned to various registers of the main CPU 63.

After setting the start-up processing flag to "1" in step SB103, it is determined whether or not the power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB104). . When the power outage process is executed in the power outage information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the power outage flag is set to "1". The power outage flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to determine whether or not the power outage process was appropriately performed during the previous power shutoff.

If the power outage flag is set to "1" (step SB104: YES), it is determined whether the checksum is normal (step SB105). Specifically, first, checksums are calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. The checksum calculation method is the same as in the 33rd embodiment. Thereafter, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control work area 221 calculated in the power outage process executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the specific control work area 221. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated as described above in the current main processing. Then, it is determined whether these checksums match.

If the checksums match (step SB105: YES), check whether the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 (see FIG. 154) in the specific control work area 221 is within a normal range. It is determined whether or not (step SB106). The setting reference area 341 is a storage area in which information for specifying the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 by the main CPU 63 is stored, as in the forty-fifth embodiment. If numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1". If numerical information of “2” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2”. If numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3". If numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4". If numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5". If numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 6". In step SB106, it is determined whether the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 is one of "1" to "6".

If a positive determination is made in all steps SB104 to SB106, it is determined whether the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB107). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and the setting update display flag is set to "1". is set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a display indicating the setting value that is being updated. The setting update display flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the setting value update process (Fig. 167) is started and is cleared to "0" when the setting value update process (Fig. 167) is ended. , in a situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is not executed, the setting update display flag is basically not set to "1". However, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is subsequently started; In this state, the setting update display flag is set to "1". The state in which the setting update display flag is set to "1" is maintained until the setting update display flag is cleared to "0" in the setting value update process (FIG. 167).

If a negative determination is made in step SB107 because the setting update display flag is not set to "1", it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB108). That is, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the reset button 68c is pressed and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Here, in this embodiment, like the thirty-fifth embodiment, the main control device 60 is provided with a setting key insertion section 68a and a reset button 68c, but is not provided with an update button 68b. Furthermore, the main control device 60 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the eleventh embodiment, instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB108: NO), it is determined whether the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SB109). The game stop flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the power outage flag is not set to "1", when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. When the game stop flag is set to "1", steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and when an affirmative determination is made in step S8906, steps S8907 to S8905 are executed. Do not execute the process in S8920. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not performed properly during the previous power shutoff, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control If the checksums do not match due to a change in the storage state of information on at least one side since the last time the power was shut off, or if the set value is abnormal, power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and unauthorized While the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step SB109, the processes of step SB121 and step SB122, which will be described later, are executed.

If a negative determination is made in step SB109, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using a setting key (step SB110). When the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using a setting key (step SB110: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SB112). Furthermore, even if the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on using a setting key (step SB110: NO), the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1". If set (step SB111: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SB112).

The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1". is set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting value is being checked and a display indicating the currently set setting value. be exposed. The setting confirmation display flag is a flag that is set to ``1'' when the setting confirmation process (Figure 166) is started and is cleared to ``0'' when the setting confirmation process (Figure 166) is ended. , in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is not executed, the setting confirmation display flag is basically not set to "1". However, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is subsequently started; In this state, the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1". When the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) to be described later is executed, the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) to be described later is executed, or the setting is confirmed. It is maintained until the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" in the process (FIG. 166).

Not only when the reset button 68c is not pressed as described above and the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on (that is, when the "setting confirmation operation" is performed), but also when the reset button 68c is pressed. The setting confirmation process (Figure 166) is executed even if the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" in a situation where no pressing operation is performed. If the power outage process is executed in such a situation, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed even if the "setting confirmation operation" is not performed when the supply of operating power is resumed. This makes it possible to continue checking the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, even if the power outage process is executed while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed, if the reset button 68c is pressed when the supply of operating power is resumed, Among the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) and setting value updating process (FIG. 167), the process corresponding to the operation performed when the supply of operating power is restarted is executed without executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). be done. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) or the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) over the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166).

Here, the setting confirmation process executed in step SB112 will be explained. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process. Note that the processing from step SB201 to step SB207 in the setting confirmation processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, interrupt permission is set (step SB201). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt cycle.

In this embodiment, in the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122), interrupts of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are basically prohibited. , interrupts are permitted in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167). Therefore, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) and the setting value update process (Fig. 167) are not executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122), the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 134) are prohibited and the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) or setting value update processing (Fig. 167) is executed. ) and second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are permitted. However, when the setting confirmation process (Figure 166) or the setting value update process (Figure 167) is being executed, the startup process flag is set to 1, so the first timer interrupt process (Figure 167) is executed. 133) is started, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133), the processes for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, while the processes for proceeding with the game are executed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is ended without any process being executed.

Thereafter, on the condition that the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1", the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step SB202). By setting the setting confirmation display flag to "1" and making an affirmative determination in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is performed. (Step S9006) is executed. The contents of the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation are the same as in the forty-fifth embodiment. By executing this process, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124(b), a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked and the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. A display indicating this is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Thereafter, a confirmation start command is sent to the audio emission control device 81 (step SB203). By receiving the confirmation start command, the audio emission control device 81 recognizes an image indicating that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed and the operation details for terminating the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). Display control is performed on the display control device 82 so that the image for making the display possible is displayed on the symbol display device 41. This allows the game hall administrator to recognize that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked, and is necessary for ending the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166). This makes it possible for the game hall manager to recognize the operation details. In addition to or instead of the notification being executed by the symbol display device 41, the notification may be executed by at least one of the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54. Further, an external output indicating that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed may be configured to be sent to a device external to the pachinko machine 10, such as a management computer of a game hall.

Thereafter, the setting key insertion section 68a determines whether the setting key has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB204). Specifically, similar to the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) in the forty-fifth embodiment, the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion section 68a corresponds to the ON state. It is determined whether the reception state corresponding to the OFF state has changed from the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion part 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is started in a situation where the setting key insertion part 68a is in the OFF state, the OFF state is Even if it is maintained, a negative determination is made in step SB204. If it is not specified that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB204: NO), the process of step SB204 is repeated.

If it is specified that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (Step SB204: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (Step SB205). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), resulting in a situation in which the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 (step S9006) during setting confirmation is not executed. Therefore, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. The current state is canceled.

Thereafter, interrupt prohibition is set (step SB206). As a result, when ending the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and returning to the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of starting the supply of operating power in the main process (FIG. 165), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are prohibited.

Thereafter, a return command upon confirmation is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step SB207). By receiving the return command at the time of confirmation, the audio emission control device 81 specifies that the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) in the main side CPU 63 has been completed, and also specifies that the processing for starting the supply of operating power at this time is completed. It is specified that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) has been executed in the process at the start of supply (steps SB101 to SB122). Then, processing corresponding to receiving the return command at the time of confirmation is executed. The details of this process will be explained later.

As described above, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 starts. In the situation where the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on in the situation where the main processing (FIG. 165) is started, the game proceeds in the main processing (FIG. 165). The setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, which is the situation before the process of . This makes it possible to check the set values even when no games are being played.

Returning to the explanation of the main process (FIG. 165), when the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on using a setting key and the setting confirmation display flag is not set to "1" (steps SB110 and Step SB111: NO), a normal return command is sent to the audio emission control device 81 (step SB113). By receiving the normal return command, the audio light emission control device 81 specifies that the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) has ended in the main CPU 63, and also specifies that the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power this time has been completed. In the time processing (steps SB101 to SB122), it is determined that none of the first RAM clearing processing (step SB117), the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166), and the setting value updating processing (FIG. 167) are being executed. . Then, processing corresponding to receiving the normal return command is executed. The details of this process will be explained later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SB108 that the reset button 68c has been pressed, and it is determined that the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned on using the setting key (steps SB108 and SB114 :YES), or if it is determined in step SB107 that the setting update display flag is set to "1", a setting value update process is executed (step SB115). Not only when the reset button 68c is pressed as described above and the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on (that is, when a "setting change operation" is performed), but also when the reset button 68c is pressed. The setting value is updated by executing the setting value update process (FIG. 167) even when the setting update display flag is set to "1" regardless of whether there is a pressing operation or an ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a. If the power outage process is executed in a situation where the process (Figure 167) is being executed, the operation contents when starting the supply of operating power after that are "No operation", "RAM clear operation", and "Setting change". The setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed regardless of whether it is a ``operation'' or a ``setting confirmation operation.'' This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 167).

Here, the setting value update process executed in step SB115 will be explained. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the setting value update process. Note that steps SB301 to SB314 in the setting value update process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, interrupt permission is set (step SB301). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt cycle.

In this embodiment, the interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are basically prohibited in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122). , interrupts are permitted in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167). Therefore, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) and the setting value update process (Fig. 167) are not executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122), the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 134) are prohibited and the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) or setting value update processing (Fig. 167) is executed. ) and second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are permitted. However, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (Figure 166) or the setting value update process (Figure 167) is being executed, the startup process flag is set to "1", so the first timer interrupt process (Figure 167) is executed. 133) is started, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133), the processes for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, while the processes for proceeding with the game are executed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is ended without any process being executed.

Thereafter, on the condition that the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1", the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SB302). By setting the setting update display flag to "1" and making an affirmative determination in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is performed. (Step S9004) is executed. The contents of the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update are the same as in the forty-fifth embodiment. By executing this process, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124(a), a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and the pachinko machine 10 being selected as an update target are displayed. The currently set values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Thereafter, initial settings at the time of starting are performed (step SB303). In the initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". If the power outage flag is not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not performed appropriately during the previous power outage (step SB104: NO), the game stop flag is set to the work area 221 for specific control and If the checksums do not match because the storage state of information in at least one of the stack areas 222 for specific control has changed since the last time the power was shut off (step SB105: NO), or the setting reference area 341 This flag is set to "1" in step SB119 of the main process (FIG. 165) when the setting value corresponding to the information stored in is not within the normal range (step SB106: NO). When the game stop flag is set to "1", steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and when an affirmative determination is made in step S8906, steps S8907 to S8905 are executed. Do not execute the process in S8920. As a result, when an information abnormality in the main RAM 65 as described above occurs, processing for monitoring power outages, updating various counters, and monitoring fraud is executed, while processing for advancing the game is executed. It will not be done. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" in the process of step SB303, the state in which the occurrence of information abnormality in the main side RAM 65 is specified is canceled when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed. becomes possible.

Thereafter, "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (see FIG. 154) in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB304). The setting update area 342 is a storage area in which information about setting values that are being updated in the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is stored, as in the forty-fifth embodiment. When numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target (selection target or change target) becomes "setting 1". If numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 2". If numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 3". When numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 4". If numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is "setting 5". If numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is "setting 6".

By setting "1" in the setting update area 342 at step SB304, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 1." That is, in this embodiment, no matter what the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is, when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started, the setting value to be updated will be "setting 1".

Thereafter, an update start command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step SB305). When the audio emission control device 81 receives the update start command, it displays an image indicating that the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, and an image that makes it possible to recognize the operation details for changing the setting value. , and the display control device 82 is controlled to display an image on the symbol display device 41 so that the operation details for terminating the setting value update process (FIG. 167) can be recognized. This allows the administrator of the game hall to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and the operation details and setting value update process necessary to change the setting value (Figure 167) It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the details of the operation required to end the game. In addition to or instead of the notification being executed by the symbol display device 41, the notification may be executed by at least one of the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54. Furthermore, an external output indicating that the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed may be configured to be sent to a device external to the pachinko machine 10, such as a management computer of a game hall.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is one of "1" to "6" (step SB306). If it is not one of "1" to "6" (step SB306: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SB307). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 1."

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB306 or if the process in step SB307 is executed, the setting key insertion unit 68a determines whether or not the setting key has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB308). Specifically, it is determined whether the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion section 68a has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. do. Therefore, the OFF state is maintained not only when the setting key insertion section 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting value update process is started in a situation where the setting key insertion section 68a is in the OFF state. In this case, a negative determination is made at step SB308.

If a negative determination is made in step SB308, the value in the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 on the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB309: YES) (step SB310). Thereby, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the setting value is updated to one level higher. Further, if the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB309: NO) or if the value in the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1, the process returns to step SB306, but the settings are updated in step SB306. If it is determined that the value in the setting update area 342 is 7 or more, "1" is set in the setting update area 342 in step SB307. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6", the state returns to "Setting 1".

If it is determined that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB308: YES), the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is overwritten in the setting reference area 341 ( Step SB311). As a result, the setting value information updated in the current setting value update process (FIG. 167) is set in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is changed to the current setting value. This is the setting value of the pachinko machine 10.

Thereafter, interrupt prohibition is set (step SB312). As a result, when ending the setting value update process (Figure 167) and returning to the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of starting the supply of operating power in the main process (Figure 165), the first timer interrupt process (Figure 167) is completed. 133) and second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are prohibited.

Thereafter, a second RAM clearing process is executed (step SB313). In the second RAM clearing process, similar to the RAM clearing process (step SA416) in the forty-fifth embodiment, in the work area 221 for specific control, the area ( That is, except for the setting reference area 341), the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed. As a result, the area indicating whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the win/fail lottery is performed regardless of the win/fail lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game cycle is not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general figure display section 38a is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in a closed state. situation. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display section 37a is erased and the general figure display section The pending information for 38a is deleted. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to "0". Further, the setting update area 342 provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". Also, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". Further, in the second RAM clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed. Further, in the second RAM clearing process, initial settings are executed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step SB102 is executed. Note that for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, processing for clearing to "0" and processing for initializing are not executed.

Thereafter, a return command at the time of update is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step SB314). By receiving the return command at the time of update, the audio emission control device 81 specifies that the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) in the main side CPU 63 has ended, and also specifies that the current operating power supply is completed. It is specified that the setting value update process (FIG. 167) has been executed in the process at the start of supply (steps SB101 to SB122). Then, the process corresponding to the reception of the return command at the time of update is executed. The details of this process will be explained later.

As described above, in addition to turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c, the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key. Setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed. Further, as already explained, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is performed based on the fact that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. executed. This makes it possible to use the ON operation for the setting key insertion section 68a in common as an operation for executing setting-related processing regarding setting values. Therefore, it is possible to make the details of the operation for generating the setting-related process easy to understand for the game hall manager.

In addition, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key, and when pressing the reset button 68c is not added, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is performed. When the reset button 68c is pressed, the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed. Thereby, depending on whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed, it is possible to change the process to be executed among the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167). Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the game hall manager to understand the operation details for executing a desired process among the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167). In addition, by increasing the number of operations to execute the setting value update process (Figure 167) than the setting confirmation process (Figure 166), the user may specifically attempt to cause the setting value update process (Figure 167) to be performed fraudulently. It is possible to make it more difficult.

Returning to the explanation of the main processing (FIG. 165), if it is determined in step SB108 that the reset button 68c is pressed, and the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on using the setting key. If it is determined (step SB114: NO), it is determined whether the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB116). The game stop flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the power outage flag is not set to "1", when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. When the game stop flag is set to "1", steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and when an affirmative determination is made in step S8906, steps S8907 to S8905 are executed. Do not execute the process in S8920. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not performed properly during the previous power shutdown, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control If the checksums do not match due to changes in the storage state of information for at least one of the devices since the last time the power was shut off, or if the set values are abnormal, power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and unauthorized While the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

If the game stop flag is not set to "1" (step SB116: NO), a first RAM clearing process is executed (step SB117). In the first RAM clearing process, similarly to the RAM clearing process (step SA416) in the forty-fifth embodiment, in the work area 221 for specific control, the area ( That is, except for the setting reference area 341), the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed. As a result, the area indicating whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the win/fail lottery is performed regardless of the win/fail lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game cycle is not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general figure display section 38a is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in a closed state. situation. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display section 37a is erased and the general figure display section The pending information for 38a is deleted. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to "0". Further, the setting update area 342 provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". Furthermore, in the first RAM clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed. Furthermore, in the first RAM clearing process, initial settings are executed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step SB102 is executed.

Note that for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, processing for clearing to "0" and processing for initializing are not executed. Furthermore, the processing contents of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) are the same as the processing contents of the second RAM clearing process (step SB313) in the setting value updating process (FIG. 167), but some of these processing contents are different. It is also possible to have a configuration in which For example, the area to be cleared to "0" and initialized in the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) may not be cleared to "0" and to be initialized in the second RAM clearing process (step SB313). The area to be cleared to 0 and initialized in the second RAM clearing process (step SB313) may not be cleared to 0 and initialized in the first RAM clearing process (step SB117).

Thereafter, a return command upon clearing is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step SB118). By receiving the return command at the time of clearing, the audio emission control device 81 specifies that the processing for starting the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) has ended in the main CPU 63, and also specifies that the processing for starting the supply of operating power at this time is completed. It is specified that the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) has been executed in the process at the start of supply (steps SB101 to SB122). Then, the processing corresponding to the reception of the return command at the time of clearing is executed. The details of this process will be explained later.

If a negative determination is made in any of steps SB104 to SB106 in the main processing (FIG. 165), that is, if the power outage flag is not set to "1", if the checksums do not match, or if the set value is abnormal If so, the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SB119). As already explained, by setting the game stop flag to "1", steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and an affirmative determination is made in step S8906. The processes from step S8907 to step S8920 are not executed. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not performed properly during the previous power shutoff, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control If the checksums do not match due to a change in the storage state of information on at least one side since the last time the power was shut off, or if the set value is abnormal, power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and unauthorized While the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step SB120). If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB120: NO), an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality has occurred regarding the power outage flag, checksum, or set value at the time of starting the supply of operating power is sent to the audio emission control device 81. (Step SB121). Upon receiving the abnormality command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of supply of operating power, and also issues a message from the speaker unit 54 saying, ``Please change the settings.'' ” will be output. Further, a character image "Please change the settings" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is once stopped, the above notification will not be sent when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed. It will start again.

Thereafter, external output processing in the event of an abnormality is executed (step SB122). In the external output process at the time of an abnormality, a process for externally outputting an abnormal signal to the management computer of the gaming hall is executed. In this case, the abnormal signal is output for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds). However, this is not limited to this, and in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1", the abnormal signal will continue to be output, and when the game stop flag is cleared to "0", the abnormal signal will be output. A configuration may also be adopted in which the signal output is stopped. Further, the abnormality signal can be outputted even when an abnormality different from the abnormality related to the power outage flag, checksum, and set value occurs. For example, an abnormal signal may also be generated when it is identified that fraud has occurred in the monitored object (detection of unauthorized radio waves or detection of unauthorized magnetism) in the fraud detection processing (step S8905) of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133). It is output externally. However, the configuration is not limited to this configuration in which the abnormal signal is also used, and a configuration in which a dedicated abnormal signal is output externally for abnormalities related to the power failure flag, checksum, or set value may also be used. It is also possible to have a configuration in which abnormality signals corresponding to each of the abnormality related to the above, the abnormality related to the checksum, and the abnormality related to the set value are outputted to the outside.

If the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB120: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using a setting key (step SB114). When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using a setting key (step SB114 and step SB120: YES), a setting value update process is executed (step SB115). The contents of the setting value update process have already been described. In other words, if operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63 while a "setting change operation" is being performed, an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65, so a negative result is determined in any of steps SB104 to SB106. Even if a determination is made, the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed. This makes it possible to prioritize changes to set values. Further, in the setting value update process (FIG. 167), as already explained, the initial setting at the start is executed in step SB303, and the game stop flag is cleared to "0". As a result, when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, it is possible to eliminate the abnormal state in the main RAM 65 after the setting value update is completed.

On the other hand, if the reset button 68c is pressed but the setting key insertion part 68a is not turned on (step SB120: YES, step SB114: NO), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1". ” is set (step SB116). In the process of step SB116 after the game stop flag is set to "1" at step SB119, since the game stop flag is naturally set to "1", an affirmative determination is made at step SB116. In this case, an abnormality command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 in step SB121, and an abnormality signal is externally outputted in step SB122.

In other words, if an abnormality regarding the power outage flag, checksum, and set value occurs and a negative determination is made in any of steps SB104 to SB106, the operation to the main CPU 63 is Even if power supply is started, the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is not executed. In addition, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1" and a "RAM clear operation" is being performed, the first RAM clear process is performed. (Step SB117) is not executed. This prevents the game stop flag from being set to "1" even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the "RAM clear operation" is being performed. It becomes possible. On the other hand, if a "setting change operation" is being performed, the setting value update process (Fig. 167) is executed regardless of whether the game stop flag is set to "1" and the corresponding setting is The game stop flag is cleared to "0" in the initial setting (step SB303) at the start of the value update process (FIG. 167). As a result, in order to eliminate the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1", it becomes necessary to execute the setting value update process (FIG. 167). Therefore, when an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control, it is possible to not only perform processing to initialize the work area 221 for specific control, but also to reset the setting values. .

In addition, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1", if no "setting change operation" is performed, that is, "no operation" is detected. In this case, or when a "RAM clear operation" or "setting confirmation operation" is performed, by making an affirmative determination in step SB109 or step SB116, an abnormality command is transmitted in step SB121, and an abnormality command is transmitted in step SB122. Executes external output processing. As a result, when the game stop flag is set to "1", regardless of the processing results of steps SB104 to SB106 in the subsequent main processing, the main side Every time the supply of operating power to the CPU 63 is started, abnormality notification in the pachinko machine 10 and external output of the abnormality to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 are performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to make the administrator of the game hall aware that the setting value should be changed.

If the process of step SB112 is executed, if the process of step SB113 is executed, if the process of step SB115 is executed, if the process of step SB118 is executed, or if the process of step SB122 is executed, the Information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 (step SB123). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. If the checking counter is set to a value of 1 or more, the checking display continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the remaining processing is performed after the main CPU 63 completes the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122). Before (steps SB125 to SB128) are started, an initial check period is started. As a result, there is no need to control the initial check period in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, reducing the processing load in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. becomes possible.

Furthermore, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are executed as the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122), whereas the initial check period is It is started after the processing at the start of supply is completed. As a result, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the setting values are not displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to avoid any influence.

Thereafter, the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SB124). When the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started by clearing the start-up processing flag to "0", a negative determination is made in step S8906, so that not only the processing in steps S8901 to S8905 is executed. The processes from step S8907 to step S8920 are executed, and the state in which the process for advancing the game is not executed is canceled. Incidentally, in step SB124, the power outage flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps SB125 to SB128. In other words, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), but between the first timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process, There will be a remaining time. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of steps SB125 to SB128 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processing of steps SB125 to SB128 is non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly. In steps SB125 to SB128, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

Next, in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is being executed, the interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are permitted. The situation will be explained with reference to the time chart in FIG. 168. FIG. 168(a) shows a period in which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the ON state, and FIG. 168(b) shows a period in which the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is executed. 168(c) shows a period in which the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", and FIG. 168(d) shows a period during which the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128) is completed. FIG. 168(e) shows the period in which interrupts are being executed, and FIG. 168(f) shows the period in which the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is being executed. FIG. 168(g) shows the period during which the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, and FIG. 168(h) shows the period during which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed. Indicates the period.

First, a case will be described in which both the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122).

At timing t1, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 168(a). In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on in a "no operation" situation in which none of the "RAM clear operation," "setting change operation," and "setting confirmation operation" are performed. At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 168(b), the main CPU 63 starts the process for starting the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122). Further, as shown in FIG. 168(c), the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1".

Thereafter, at timing t2, the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed as shown in FIG. 168(b), and the remaining processing (step SB125) is completed as shown in FIG. 168(d). ~Step SB128) is started. Further, at the timing t2, the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 168(c). Note that at the timing when the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128) is started, interrupts are not permitted as shown in FIG. 168(e).

Thereafter, at timing t3, the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128) is completed as shown in FIG. 168(d), and interrupts are permitted as shown in FIG. 168(e). As a result, timer interrupt processing is started as shown in FIG. 168(f). In this case, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed first, and when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) ends, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed. However, this is not limited to this, and if the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) is executed first and the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) ends, the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134) is executed. It may also be configured to be executed.

Next, a case will be described in which the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122).

At timing t4, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 168(a). In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the "setting change operation" is being performed. At the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 168(b), the main CPU 63 starts the process for starting the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122). Further, as shown in FIG. 168(c), the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1".

Thereafter, at timing t5, the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started as shown in FIG. 168(g). In this case, an interrupt is permitted at the timing t5 as shown in FIG. 168(e). By allowing the interrupt, timer interrupt processing is started at timing t6 as shown in FIG. 168(f). In this case, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed first, and when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) ends, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed. However, this is not limited to this, and if the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) is executed first and the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) ends, the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134) is executed. It may also be configured to be executed. Furthermore, even if the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 133) is executed, the start-up processing flag is set to "1" as shown in Fig. 168(c), so power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, etc. While the process for monitoring fraud is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

The timer interrupt process ends at timing t7 as shown in FIG. 168(f), and then the setting value update process (FIG. 167) ends at timing t8 as shown in FIG. 168(g). Then, at the timing t8, as shown in FIG. 168(b), the processing for starting the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed, and as shown in FIG. 168(c), the start-up processing flag is set. Cleared to "0". Further, at the timing of t8, the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128) is started as shown in FIG. 168(d).

Next, a case will be described in which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122).

At timing t9, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on as shown in FIG. 168(a). In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the "setting confirmation operation" is being performed. At the timing t9, as shown in FIG. 168(b), the main CPU 63 starts the process for starting the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122). Further, as shown in FIG. 168(c), the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1".

Thereafter, at timing t10, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is started as shown in FIG. 168(h). In this case, an interrupt is permitted at the timing t10 as shown in FIG. 168(e). By allowing the interrupt, timer interrupt processing is started at timing t11 as shown in FIG. 168(f). In this case, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed first, and when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) ends, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed. However, this is not limited to this, and if the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) is executed first and the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) ends, the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134) is executed. It may also be configured to be executed. Furthermore, even if the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 133) is executed, the start-up processing flag is set to "1" as shown in Fig. 168(c), so power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, etc. While the process for monitoring fraud is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

The timer interrupt process ends at timing t12 as shown in FIG. 168(f), and then the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) ends at timing t13 as shown in FIG. 168(h). Then, at the timing t13, as shown in FIG. 168(b), the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed, and as shown in FIG. 168(c), the start-up processing flag is set. Cleared to "0". Further, at the timing t13, the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128) is started as shown in FIG. 168(d).

As described above, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122), the first timer interrupt process ( 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 134) are prohibited and the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) or setting value update processing (Fig. 167) is being executed. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are permitted to be executed. If the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed, the timer interrupt process is prevented from interrupting and starting during the process at the start of operating power supply (steps SB101 to SB122). By doing so, it becomes possible to quickly complete the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122).

On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are executed, the process is executed according to the operation of the administrator of the game hall, so the period of time spent in these processes is becomes longer. In this case, if the timer interrupt processing interrupt is still prohibited even when the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) and setting value update processing (Fig. 167) are being executed, the execution of the timer interrupt processing starts. The timing will be extremely slow. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, the interrupt of the timer interrupt process is permitted. This makes it possible to prevent the execution start timing of the timer interrupt process from becoming extremely late. Furthermore, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are being executed, the process for controlling the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed. By executing the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), the setting values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 using the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134). It becomes possible to make it happen.

Further, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the start-up process flag is set to "1". Therefore, even if the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) is started while the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) or the setting value update process (Fig. 167) is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (Fig. Among the various processes in 133), the processes for monitoring power outages, updating various counters, and monitoring fraud are executed, while the processes for advancing the game can be prevented from being executed.

Next, the progress of processing when an abnormality regarding the power outage flag, checksum, or setting value occurs will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 169. FIG. 169(a) shows a period in which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the ON state, and FIG. 169(b) shows a period in which the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is executed. 169(c) shows the period in which the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128) is being executed, and FIG. 169(d) shows the period during which the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128) is being executed, and FIG. ) is being executed, FIG. 169(e) shows a period when the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1", and FIG. 169(f) shows the period when the abnormal signal is externally executed. The output period is shown, and FIG. 169(g) shows the period during which the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed.

At timing t1, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 169(a). In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on in a "no operation" situation in which none of the "RAM clear operation," "setting change operation," and "setting confirmation operation" are performed. At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 168(b), the main CPU 63 starts the process for starting the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122).

Thereafter, at timing t2, the occurrence of an abnormality regarding any of the power outage flag, checksum, and set value is identified, and the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to " 1" is set. Further, at the timing t2, external output of the abnormal signal is started as shown in FIG. 169(f). This makes it possible for the management computer of the gaming hall to specify that an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 regarding any of the power outage flag, checksum, and set value.

Thereafter, at timing t3, as shown in FIG. 169(b), the processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) is completed, and the remaining processing (step SB125 to step SB122) is completed as shown in FIG. 169(c). SB128) is started. Further, at timing t4, the external output of the abnormal signal is terminated as shown in FIG. 169(f). By continuing to output the abnormality signal externally for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds) from timing t2 to timing t4, an abnormality regarding any of the power outage flag, checksum, and set value occurs in the pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible to accurately specify what has happened in the gaming hall management computer. Further, since the period during which the external output of the abnormal signal is continued is a constant predetermined period, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for externally outputting the abnormal signal. In addition to external output of the abnormality signal, abnormality notification in the symbol display device 41, display light emitting section 53, and speaker section 54 is also executed.

Thereafter, the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128) ends at timing t5 as shown in FIG. 169(c). Then, timer interrupt processing is executed as shown in FIG. 169(d) from timing t5 to timing t6, and residual processing ( Steps SB125 to SB128) are executed, and timer interrupt processing is executed from timing t7 to timing t8 as shown in FIG. 169(d). However, as shown in FIG. 169(e), the game stop flag is set to "1", so even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud will occur. Although processing for monitoring is executed, processing for advancing the game is not executed. At timing t8, a power outage process is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off as shown in FIG. 169(a).

Thereafter, at timing t9, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again as shown in FIG. 169(a), and as shown in FIG. ) is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 169(e), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1". Therefore, the abnormality signal is output to the outside from the timing t10 to the timing t12, as shown in FIG. 169(f). This makes it possible to once again make the game hall management computer recognize that an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 regarding any of the power outage flag, checksum, and set value. In addition to external output of the abnormality signal, abnormality notification in the symbol display device 41, display light emitting section 53, and speaker section 54 is also executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169(b), the process at the start of supply of operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) ends at timing t11, and from timing t11 to timing t13, as shown in FIG. 169(c). The remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128) is executed as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 169(d), timer interrupt processing is executed at timing t13. However, as shown in FIG. 169(e), the game stop flag is set to "1", so even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud will occur. Although processing for monitoring is executed, processing for advancing the game is not executed. At timing t14, a power outage process is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off as shown in FIG. 169(a).

Thereafter, at timing t15, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again as shown in FIG. 169(a), and as shown in FIG. ) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 169(g), the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed from timing t16 to timing t17. By executing the setting value update process (FIG. 167), not only the setting value is changed, but also the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 169(e). Ru. As a result, the state in which execution of the process for advancing the game is blocked due to the occurrence of an information abnormality in the work area 221 for specific control is resolved. Thereafter, residual processing (steps SB125 to SB128) is executed as shown in FIG. 169(c) from timing t17 to timing t18, and timer interrupt processing is executed at timing t18 as shown in FIG. 169(d). is started.

As mentioned above, if an abnormality regarding the power outage flag, checksum, and setting value occurs and a negative determination is made in any of steps SB104 to SB106 in the main process (FIG. 165), the game in the work area 221 for specific control By setting the stop flag to "1", a situation arises in which processing for advancing the game is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent a game from being played even though an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control.

Further, the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1" will not be resolved unless the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed. As a result, in order to eliminate the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1", it becomes necessary to execute the setting value update process (Fig. 167), and an information error occurs in the work area 221 for specific control. In this case, it becomes possible to require not only the processing for initializing the work area 221 for the specific control but also the resetting of the setting values.

Next, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 170. FIG. 170(a) shows a period in which the process at the start of supply of operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) is executed, and FIG. 170(b) shows the process at the start of supply of operating power (step SB101 to step SB122). ) is completed, FIG. 170(c) shows the initial check period, and FIG. 170(d) shows the period during which the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed. , FIG. 170(e) shows that the display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and the display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. 170(f) shows a period during which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed, and FIG. 170(g) shows the display period during which the settings are updated during the setting update. This indicates a setting confirmation display period in which a display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is in progress and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

First, a case will be described in which both the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122).

As shown in FIG. 170(a), processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is executed from timing t1 to timing t2. Then, at timing t2, as shown in FIG. 170(b), the process after the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is started. In this case, the initial check period is started by executing the checking counter setting process at step SB122 in the main process (FIG. 165) at the timing t2. As a result, the check display starts on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (see FIG. 128(b)). Since the process for advancing the game is executed even during the initial check period, the game can be played in a situation where the check display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. . Thereafter, the initial check period ends at timing t3 as shown in FIG. 170(c). As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start displaying the base value.

Next, a case will be described in which the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122).

At timing t4, as shown in FIG. 170(a), the process for starting the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is started. Then, the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed as shown in FIG. 170(d) from timing t5 to timing t6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 170(e), the setting update display period extends from timing t5 to timing t6.

Thereafter, at timing t6, as shown in FIG. 170(b), the process after the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is started. In this case, the initial check period is started by executing the checking counter setting process at step SB122 in the main process (FIG. 165) at the timing t6. As a result, the check display starts on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (see FIG. 128(b)). Since the process for advancing the game is executed even during the initial check period, the game can be played in a situation where the check display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. . Thereafter, the initial check period ends at timing t7 as shown in FIG. 170(c). As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start displaying the base value.

Next, a case will be described in which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122).

At timing t8, the process for starting the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is started as shown in FIG. 170(a). Then, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed as shown in FIG. 170(f) from timing t9 to timing t10. In this case, as shown in FIG. 170(g), the setting confirmation display period extends from timing t9 to timing t10.

Thereafter, at timing t10, as shown in FIG. 170(b), the process after the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is started. In this case, the initial check period is started by executing the checking counter setting process at step SB122 in the main process (FIG. 165) at the timing t10. As a result, the check display starts on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (see FIG. 128(b)). Since the processing for advancing the game is executed even during the initial check period, the game can be played in a situation where the check display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. . Thereafter, the initial check period ends at timing t11 as shown in FIG. 170(c). As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start displaying the base value.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the remaining processing is performed after the main CPU 63 completes the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122). Before (steps SB125 to SB128) are started, an initial check period is started. As a result, there is no need to control the initial check period in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, reducing the processing load in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. becomes possible.

Furthermore, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are executed as the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122), whereas the initial check period is is started after the processing at the start of supply is completed. As a result, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the setting values are not displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to avoid any influence.

Next, if the power outage process is executed while the setting value update process (Fig. 167) or the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) is being executed, the main process (Fig. 165) will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 171.

If the power outage process is executed in a situation where neither the setting value update process (Figure 167) nor the setting confirmation process (Figure 166) is executed, the main process (Figure 165) is executed when the supply of operating power is resumed. ) will first be explained.

When the supply of operating power is resumed in the "no operation" situation, the main processing (Fig. 165) includes first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting value update processing (Fig. 167), and setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166). ) are not executed. Furthermore, when the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where a "RAM clear operation" has been performed, the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed in the main process (FIG. 165), while the setting value update process ( FIG. 167) and setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) are not executed. When the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where the "setting change operation" has been performed, the main process (Figure 165) executes the setting value update process (Figure 167), and the first RAM clear process (step SB117). ) and setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) are not executed. When the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where the "setting confirmation operation" has been performed, the main processing (FIG. 165) executes the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166), and the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) is executed. ) and setting value update processing (FIG. 167) are not executed.

Next, if the power outage process is executed in a situation where the setting value update process (Figure 167) is being executed (that is, a situation where the setting update display flag is set to "1"), the subsequent operating power supply The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 165) when restarting will be explained.

If the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation of "no operation", if the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation of "RAM clear operation", it will operate in the situation that "setting change operation" is performed. Regardless of whether the supply of power is resumed or if the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where the "setting confirmation operation" has been performed, the main process (Figure 165) performs the setting value update process (Figure 165). 167) is executed, while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is not executed. In other words, if the power outage processing is executed in a situation where the setting value update process (Fig. 167) is being executed, the setting value will be updated no matter what operation is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed. The process (FIG. 167) is started anew.

With the above configuration, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting value update process (FIG. 167), when the supply of operating power is restarted, the setting key insertion part when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 is It becomes possible to newly start the setting value update process (FIG. 167) regardless of the operation contents of the reset button 68a and the reset button 68c. This makes it possible to reliably create an opportunity to complete updating of the setting values. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being started even though the setting value update has not been completed.

Additionally, if the supply of operating power is stopped during the setting value update process (Fig. 167), the setting value update process (Fig. 167) is uniquely executed regardless of the operation details when restarting the supply of operating power. By doing so, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while simplifying the processing configuration compared to a configuration in which the processing content to be executed is changed depending on the content of each operation.

Next, if the power outage process is executed in a situation where the setting confirmation process (Figure 166) is being executed (that is, a situation where the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1"), the subsequent operating power supply will be The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 165) when restarting will be explained.

If the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where a "RAM clear operation" has been performed, the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed in the main process (Figure 165), while the setting value update process (Figure 167) And the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is not executed. In other words, even if the power outage process is executed in a situation where the settings confirmation process (Figure 166) is being executed, if the "RAM clear operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the settings will be confirmed. The first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is executed without newly executing the process (FIG. 166). This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) over the "RAM clearing operation". Note that the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the first RAM clearing process (step SB117).

When the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where a "setting change operation" has been performed, the main process (Figure 165) executes the setting value update process (Figure 167), while the setting confirmation process (Figure 166) is not executed. In other words, even if the power outage process is executed while the settings confirmation process (Figure 166) is being executed, if a "settings change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the settings will be confirmed. The setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed without newly executing the process (FIG. 166). This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 167) for the "setting change operation". Furthermore, even if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is not executed, the setting value to be updated is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 by executing the setting value update process (FIG. 167). At the same time, upon completion of the setting value update process (FIG. 167), information on the setting values that are subject to update at that time is set in the setting reference area 341. You can check 10 setting values. Note that the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the second RAM clearing process (step SB313) in the setting value updating process (FIG. 167).

If the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where the "setting confirmation operation" has been performed, the main process (Figure 165) will perform the setting confirmation operation on the condition that no abnormality has occurred regarding the power outage flag, checksum, and setting value. Execute the process (FIG. 166). As a result, even if the power outage process is executed during the setting confirmation process (Figure 166), it is possible to resume checking the setting values by performing the "setting confirmation operation" when the supply of operating power is resumed. becomes.

When the supply of operating power is resumed in the "no operation" situation, the main process (FIG. 165) will insert the setting key insertion part 68a on the condition that no abnormality has occurred regarding the power outage flag, checksum, and setting value. The setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed even if the ON operation is not performed. As a result, even if the power outage process is executed during the setting confirmation process (Figure 166) and there is no operation when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting values can be confirmed. It becomes possible to restart the process.

Next, the processing executed by the audio emission control device 81 will be explained. Prior to explaining the processing, the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device 81 will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 172.

The audio emission control device 81 includes an audio emission control board 351. A sound and light side MPU 352 is mounted on the sound and light emission control board 351 . The sound and light side MPU 352 includes a sound and light side ROM 354 and a sound and light side RAM 355 in addition to a sound and light side CPU 353 which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control section and a calculation section. In addition to the above-described elements, the audio-optical side MPU 352 includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

The audio-optical side ROM 354 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory (that is, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for reading only. The sound-light side ROM 354 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the sound-light side CPU 353.

The audio-optical RAM 355 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (that is, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The audio-optical side RAM 355 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than the audio-optical side ROM 354. The audio-optical RAM 355 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the audio-optical ROM 354.

The audio/light emission control board 351 is equipped with an RTC 356 and an RTC memory 357 in addition to the audio/light MPU 352. The RTC 356 is a real-time clock that constantly measures date and time information, and outputs the measured date and time information (hereinafter also referred to as date and time information) according to instructions from the audio and optical side CPU 353. This is a configuration that allows for Note that the RTC 356 is provided with a backup power source, so that it is possible to measure date information and time information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to a configuration in which date and time information is measured in the RTC 356, and may be configured in which only time information is measured.

The RTC memory 357 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (ie, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The date and time information of the RTC 356 is stored in the RTC memory 357 according to instructions from the audio-optical CPU 353. Further, the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is read out by the audio-optical CPU 353 as needed. The sound and light side CPU 353 grasps the reference time based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357, and executes a time-based production every time a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) passes based on the reference time. Execute processing to make it. Note that the RTC memory 357 is configured to be supplied with backup power from a backup power supply provided for the RTC 356, and the date and time information is stored and retained even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RTC memory 357 may be an EEPROM or the like that does not require an external power supply to store and retain information.

Next, the production control process executed by the sound and light side CPU 353 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 173. Note that the production control process is executed when the supply of operating power to the sound and light side CPU 353 is started.

If an update start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step SB401: YES), update time notification setting processing is executed (step SB402). As already explained, the update start command is sent to the sound and light side CPU 353 when the main side CPU 63 starts the setting value update process (FIG. 167). In the update time notification setting process, an image showing that the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, an image to make it possible to recognize the operation details for changing the setting value, and a setting value update process (FIG. 167) are displayed. The display control device 82 is controlled to display an image on the symbol display device 41 to make it possible to recognize the operation details for ending the process shown in FIG. 167). This allows the administrator of the game hall to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and the operation details and setting value update process necessary to change the setting value (Figure 167) It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the details of the operation required to end the game. In addition to or instead of the notification being executed by the symbol display device 41, the notification may be executed by at least one of the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54.

If the confirmation start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step SB403: YES), a confirmation notification setting process is executed (step SB404). As already explained, the confirmation start command is sent to the sound and light side CPU 353 when the main side CPU 63 starts the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). In the confirmation notification setting process, an image indicating that the setting confirmation process (Figure 166) is being executed and an image that makes it possible to recognize the operation details for terminating the setting confirmation process (Figure 166) are displayed. Display control is performed on the display control device 82 so that the symbol is displayed on the symbol display device 41. This allows the game hall administrator to recognize that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked, and is necessary for ending the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166). This makes it possible for the game hall manager to recognize the operation details. In addition to or instead of the notification being executed by the symbol display device 41, the notification may be executed by at least one of the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54.

When the processes in steps SB401 to SB404 are executed, it is determined whether any of the normal return command, clear return command, confirmation return command, and update return command is received from the main CPU 63 ( Step SB405). The normal return command is executed when the supply of operating power is started (step SB101) without executing any of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166), and setting value update processing (FIG. 167). ~Step SB122) is completed. The return command at the time of clearing is sent when the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is executed and the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed. The return command for confirmation is sent when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed and the process for starting the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed. The return command at the time of update is sent when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed and the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed.

If these return commands have not been received (step SB405: NO), the process returns to step SB401. The main side CPU 63 transmits one of the return commands to the sound and light side CPU 353 when the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed. In this case, as described above, the sound-light side CPU 353 does not execute the processing from step SB406 until it receives any of the return commands from the main side CPU 63. This makes it possible to prevent the sound and light side CPU 353 from starting normal performance execution control while the main side CPU 63 is executing the process for starting the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122). It becomes possible.

In addition, in a situation where no return command has been received, there is a possibility that an update start command or confirmation start command will be received from the main CPU 63, and if an update start command is received, the setting value update process will be performed as already explained. It is necessary to make a notification corresponding to the execution of (Fig. 167), and when a confirmation start command is received, the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) is executed as already explained. It is necessary to ensure that corresponding notifications are made. In this case, the sound-light side CPU 353 does not execute the processing from step SB406 onwards until it receives any of the return commands from the main side CPU 63, so that when it receives the update start command or the confirmation start command, the corresponding notification is sent. It becomes possible to suitably start the process.

When any return command is received from the main CPU 63 (step SB405: YES), it is determined whether the received return command is a normal return command (step SB406). As already explained, the normal return command is executed when the supply of operating power is started without any of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166), and setting value update processing (Fig. 167) being executed. It is transmitted when the processing (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed. When the normal return command is received (step SB406: YES), the current date and time information of the RTC 356 is read out, and the read date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357 (step SB407). As a result, the date and time information that serves as a reference when specifying the timing to perform the time-based performance is stored in the RTC memory 357.

If the return command received this time is not a normal return command (step SB406: NO) but is a return command at the time of update (step SB408: YES), an end process of update time notification is executed (step SB409). As already explained, the return command at the time of update is sent to the sound and light side CPU 353 when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is completed by the main side CPU 63. In the update time notification termination process, the notification corresponding to the setting value update process (FIG. 167) started in step SB402 is ended.

If the return command received this time is not a return command for update (step SB408: NO) but a return command for confirmation (step SB410: YES), a confirmation notification termination process is executed (step SB411). As already explained, the return command at the time of confirmation is sent to the sound and light side CPU 353 when the main side CPU 63 finishes the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). In the confirmation notification termination process, the notification corresponding to the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) started in step SB404 is terminated.

If the process of step SB407 is executed, if the process of step SB409 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step SB410, or if the process of step SB411 is executed, the process for controlling the execution of normal effects is executed. Execute. Specifically, first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the time-based production (step SB412).

The time-based performance is a performance that is performed every time a predetermined time (for example, one hour) passes based on the reference time corresponding to the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357. In the time-based performance, the display light-emitting section 53 performs a light-emitting performance that corresponds to the time-based performance, the speaker unit 54 performs a sound output performance that corresponds to the time-based performance, and the symbol display device 41 performs a sound output performance that corresponds to the time-based performance. A display effect is performed.

In addition, when a time-based performance is started in a situation where a game-based performance is being executed, the display light emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 execute the time-based performance with priority over the game-based performance. On the other hand, in the symbol display device 41, an image corresponding to the time-based performance is displayed in a state where the image display corresponding to the performance of the game cycle is displayed in a reduced size on a part of the display surface of the symbol display device 41. In addition, if a time-based performance is started in a situation where a performance for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the display light emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 give priority to the time-based performance over the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. On the other hand, in the symbol display device 41, an image corresponding to the time-based performance is displayed in a state where the image display corresponding to the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is displayed in a reduced size on a part of the display surface of the symbol display device 41.

By having a configuration in which a time-based effect is executed every time a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses based on the reference time corresponding to the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357, multiple adjacent If the reference times of the pachinko machines 10 match, it becomes possible to simultaneously start time-based performances in the plurality of pachinko machines 10. Note that in a game hall, the power of a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is turned on at the same time, so basically the reference times of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are the same.

In step SB412, the reference time is determined based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357. Also, the current date and time information of the RTC 356 is read out. Then, it is determined whether the difference between the reference time and the time corresponding to the current date and time information read from the RTC 356 is an integral multiple of the predetermined time. When an affirmative determination is made in step SB412, a time-based performance setting process is executed (step SB413). In the time-based performance setting process, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 are set to execute the time-based performance, and the display control device issues a command to cause the symbol display device 41 to execute the time-based performance. 82. Note that the execution content of the time-based performance may be different depending on the number of times the time-based performance is executed based on the reference time corresponding to the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357.

If a negative determination is made in step SB412 or if the process in step SB413 is executed, other processes are executed (step SB414). In other processing, when a command to start a game replay is received from the main CPU 63, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53, and the speaker section 54 are used to start the game replay. If the situation is such that the game cycle performance should be performed, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are set to proceed with the game cycle performance, and the game cycle is started. If the situation is such that the performance for the game should be ended, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53, and the speaker section 54 are set to end the performance for the game. In addition, in other processing, when a command to start the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is received from the main CPU 63, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 start the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. If the situation is such that the opening/closing execution mode performance should be performed, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are used to proceed with the opening/closing execution mode performance. Settings are made, and when the situation is such that the performance for the opening/closing execution mode should be ended, settings are made for terminating the performance for the opening/closing execution mode on the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53, and the speaker section 54.

Next, the operation corresponding to the contents of the process executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power in the main CPU 63 (steps SB101 to SB122) will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 174.

In the processing at the start of supply of operating power in the main CPU 63 (steps SB101 to SB122), the first RAM clearing processing (step SB117), the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166), and the setting value updating processing (FIG. 167) are performed. is not executed, the main side CPU 63 transmits a normal return command to the audio-light side CPU 353 when the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed. When the sound-light side CPU 353 receives the normal return command, it does not perform control related to notification in response to the command. On the other hand, when the audio-light side CPU 353 receives the normal return command, it stores the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357. As a result, information corresponding to the reference time that is referred to in order to identify the trigger for executing the time-based performance is newly stored in the RTC memory 357.

If the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) in the main CPU 63, the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) When the process ends, the main side CPU 63 transmits a clearing return command to the sound and light side CPU 353. When the sound and light side CPU 353 receives the return command upon clearing, it does not perform control related to notification in response to the command. Moreover, even if the sound-light side CPU 353 receives the return command at the time of clearing, it does not store the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357. Since backup power is supplied to the RTC memory 357, if new date and time information is not stored in the RTC memory 357, the RTC memory is The date and time information stored in 357 is stored and retained as is.

If the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power in the main CPU 63 (steps SB101 to SB122), the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) When the process ends, the main side CPU 63 transmits a return command at the time of update to the sound and light side CPU 353. When the sound-light side CPU 353 receives the return command at the time of update, it ends the notification corresponding to the execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 167). Further, even if the audio-light side CPU 353 receives the return command at the time of update, it does not store the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357. Since backup power is supplied to the RTC memory 357, if new date and time information is not stored in the RTC memory 357, the RTC memory is The date and time information stored in 357 is stored and retained as is.

If the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) in the main CPU 63, the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) When the process ends, the main side CPU 63 transmits a return command at the time of confirmation to the sound and light side CPU 353. When the sound-light side CPU 353 receives the return command at the time of confirmation, it ends the notification corresponding to the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). Moreover, even if the sound-light side CPU 353 receives the return command at the time of confirmation, it does not store the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357. Since backup power is supplied to the RTC memory 357, if new date and time information is not stored in the RTC memory 357, the RTC memory is The date and time information stored in 357 is stored and retained as is.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

When the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started, the setting value is changed from a predetermined starting setting value. As a result, regardless of the setting value to be used before the setting value updating process (Fig. 167) is started, the setting value can be changed from a certain starting setting value in the setting value updating process (Fig. 167). It becomes possible to do this. Therefore, the content of the setting value changing operation becomes easy for the operator to understand.

Specifically, the setting value corresponding to the start is "Setting 1", which has the lowest advantage. Therefore, when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started, the setting values are changed starting from "Setting 1", which has the lowest degree of advantage. As a result, even if the game hall manager unintentionally terminates the setting value update process (Fig. 167) immediately after the start of the setting value update process (Fig. 167), the setting value with the least advantageous value will be changed. Therefore, even if a game is started in such a situation, it is possible to prevent an unintended disadvantage from occurring in the game hall.

The work area 221 for specific control is provided with a setting reference area 341 and a setting update area 342. Information corresponding to the setting value to be used is stored in the setting reference area 341, and setting value update processing is performed. Information corresponding to the setting value that is being changed in the situation where (FIG. 167) is being executed is stored in the setting update area 342. As a result, while the information on the setting values that were set before the setting value update processing (Fig. 167) was started is stored and retained in the setting reference area 341, the information to be updated in the setting value updating processing (Fig. 167) can be stored and retained. It becomes possible to change the setting value.

When the supply of operating power is started, the main CPU 63 transmits a return command upon clearing when executing the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), and when executing the setting value updating process (FIG. 167). When the return command for updating is sent and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, the return command for confirmation is sent, and the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), setting value updating process (FIG. 167), and If none of the settings confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is executed, a normal return command is sent. This enables control corresponding to the type of start situation when the supply of operating power is started to be performed not only by the main side CPU 63 but also by the sound and light side CPU 353.

The sound and light side CPU 353 makes an affirmative determination in step SB405 of the production control process (FIG. 173) regardless of whether the normal return command, clear return command, update return command, or confirmation return command is received. Then, a state is reached in which the processing of steps SB412 to SB414 is executed. On the other hand, if a normal return command is received, a write process to the RTC memory 357 (step SB407) is executed, and if a return command for update is received, an update notification end process (step SB409) is executed. If the confirmation return command is received, the confirmation notification termination process (step SB411) is executed, and if the clear return command is received, the dedicated process is not executed. As a result, the sound and light side CPU 353 starts processing corresponding to the progress of the game upon reception of any one of the return commands, and the control corresponding to each return command is controlled by the sound and light side CPU 353. It becomes possible to execute the process on the side CPU 353.

After transmitting one of the return commands, the main CPU 63 ends the process for starting the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) and starts the process for controlling the progress of the game (steps S8907 to S8920). However, when receiving any of the return commands, the sound and light side CPU 353 controls the execution of a performance corresponding to the progress of the game. As a result, after the main side CPU 63 is in a situation where processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed, the sound and light side CPU 353 controls the execution of the performance corresponding to the content of the game progress. becomes possible. In this case, the sound-light side CPU 353 executes processing corresponding to each return command. As a result, the sound and light side CPU 353 uses a plurality of return commands that change the execution contents of the processing at the start of the supply of operating power to the sound and light side CPU 353 to control the start of the execution control of the effect corresponding to the progress of the game. This makes it possible to recognize the

Since the time-based performance is executed when it is time to execute the time-based performance based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357, the time-based performance is executed at the predetermined time. It becomes possible to In this case, if the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), setting value updating process (FIG. 167), or setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. While new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 does not occur, all of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting value update processing (Fig. 167), and setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) are executed. If not, the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 is stored in the RTC memory 357. As a result, the situation in which date and time information is newly stored in the RTC memory 357 and the situation in which date and time information is newly stored in the RTC memory 357 and It is possible to create a situation in which date and time information is not newly stored in the memory 357.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, if a "RAM clear operation" is performed, the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed, and if a "setting change operation" is performed, The setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, and when the "setting confirmation operation" is performed, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed. On the other hand, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in the "no operation" situation, the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 167), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) ) are not executed. In this case, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started as described above, the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 167), or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed. In this case, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 will not occur, but none of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting value update processing (FIG. 167), and setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) will occur. If the current date and time information is not executed, the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 is stored in the RTC memory 357. As a result, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, will the date and time information be newly stored in the RTC memory 357, or will the date and time information not be newly stored in the RTC memory 357? The administrator of the game hall can select the following.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the main CPU 63 completes the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (step SB101 to step SB122), and the remaining processing (step SB125 to step SB122) is completed. An initial check period is initiated before SB128) is initiated. As a result, there is no need to control the initial check period in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, reducing the processing load in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. becomes possible.

Setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) and setting value update processing (FIG. 167) are executed as processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122), whereas during the initial check period, the supply of operating power is Starts after the initial processing has finished. As a result, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the setting values are not displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to avoid any influence.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, either the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) or the setting value update process (Fig. 167) is executed, and the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed, a check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal, regardless of the situation when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

The main processing (FIG. 165) of the main CPU 63 includes cases where either the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167). This is a process that is commonly executed even when neither the value update process (Figure 167) is executed, and it is a process that is executed in common even when neither the value update process (Figure 167) is executed, and neither the setting confirmation process (Figure 166) nor the setting value update process (Figure 167) is executed, a check mark is placed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as a process that is executed later than the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and setting value update process (FIG. 167). The process to start the display is set. By setting the process for starting the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as a common process, it is possible to simplify the process configuration and achieve the advantages already described. This makes it possible to achieve the desired effect.

Even in a situation where a check display is being executed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the main CPU 63 can start processing for advancing the game. As a result, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, the game can be played. It becomes possible to prevent the start timing of the process for proceeding from being delayed.

In the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (step SB101 to step SB122), which is executed when the supply of operating power is started in the main CPU 63, it is determined whether the set value to be used is within the normal range. Processing for monitoring is executed. If the set value to be used is abnormal, a regulated state is entered in which processing for advancing the game is not started. This makes it possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being started even though the set value to be used is abnormal.

The process for monitoring whether the set value of the target to be used is within the normal range is performed even after the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) ) is executed in step S8919. As a result, even if the setting value to be used becomes abnormal as the game progresses, it becomes possible to deal with it.

In the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (step SB101 to step SB122), which is executed when the supply of operating power is started in the main CPU 63, it is determined whether the set value to be used is within the normal range. In addition to monitoring, monitoring is performed to see whether the power outage flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", and the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are checked. Monitoring is performed to see if the thumb is normal. Then, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" or if the checksum is abnormal, a regulated state is entered in which processing for advancing the game is not started. This makes it possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being started even though an information abnormality has occurred in the main side RAM 65.

Even if the supply of operating power is stopped, the regulated state is resumed when the supply of operating power is restarted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the state in which execution of processing for advancing the game is restricted due to an information abnormality occurring in the main side RAM 65 from being canceled simply by stopping the supply of operating power. Become.

The above-mentioned restricted state is canceled by executing the set value update process (FIG. 167). Thereby, when the state in which the progress of the game is restricted due to the occurrence of an information abnormality in the main side RAM 65 is released, it becomes possible to make a new setting of the setting value to be used.

Even in the above-mentioned restricted state, power outage monitoring and various counter updating processes are executed. This makes it possible to ensure the execution of necessary processing even when the progress of the game is restricted as described above. In particular, by performing power outage monitoring, even if the progress of the game is restricted, if a power outage occurs, it becomes possible to deal with it appropriately.

When the above-mentioned restriction state is reached, it is notified that the setting value of the object to be used should be changed. Thereby, if an information abnormality occurs in the main side RAM 65, it becomes possible to prompt the gaming hall manager to resolve the problem.

If an information abnormality occurs in the main side RAM 65, an abnormality signal is externally outputted to the management computer of the gaming hall. As a result, if an information abnormality occurs in the main side RAM 65, it becomes possible to prompt the gaming hall manager to resolve it.

An abnormality signal is externally outputted to the management computer of the gaming hall even when an abnormality different from the case where an information abnormality occurs regarding the main side RAM 65 occurs. This allows the configuration to be used for external output.

Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in a regulated state where the progress of the game is regulated due to an information abnormality occurring regarding the main side RAM 65, the regulation still remains when the supply of operating power is restarted. If the condition is not cleared, the abnormal signal is outputted to the outside again. As a result, in the regulated state, an abnormality signal is outputted to the outside every time the supply of operating power is restarted. Therefore, it becomes easier for the game hall manager to recognize that an information abnormality has occurred in the main side RAM 65.

In the situation where the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) and the setting value update process (Fig. 167) are not executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122), the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) is executed. The first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 134) are prohibited and the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) or the setting value update process (Fig. 167) is executed. Execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is permitted. If the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed, the timer interrupt process is prevented from interrupting and starting during the process at the start of operating power supply (steps SB101 to SB122). By doing so, it becomes possible to quickly complete the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122).

On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are executed, the process is executed according to the operation of the administrator of the game hall, so the period of time spent in these processes is becomes longer. In this case, if the timer interrupt processing interrupt is still prohibited even when the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) and setting value update processing (Fig. 167) are being executed, the execution of the timer interrupt processing starts. The timing will be extremely slow. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, the timer interrupt process is permitted. This makes it possible to prevent the execution timing of the timer interrupt process from becoming extremely late. Furthermore, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are being executed, the process for controlling the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed. By executing the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), the setting values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 using the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134). It becomes possible to make it happen.

Further, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the start-up process flag is set to "1". Therefore, even if the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) is started while the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) or the setting value update process (Fig. 167) is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (Fig. Among the various processes in 133), the processes for monitoring power outages, updating various counters, and monitoring fraud are executed, while the processes for advancing the game can be prevented from being executed.

Note that if none of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting value update processing (FIG. 167), and setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) are executed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs. However, when any of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting value update processing (FIG. 167), and setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is executed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 is performed. It is not limited to configurations where this does not occur. For example, if none of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting value update processing (FIG. 167), and setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) are executed, or if the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) is executed It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs. Also, if none of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting value update processing (Fig. 167), and setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) is executed, or if the setting value update processing (Fig. 167) is executed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs. Also, if none of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting value update processing (Fig. 167), and setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) is executed, or if the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) is executed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs.

Furthermore, if none of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting value update processing (FIG. 167), and setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is executed, and if the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed, Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the date and time information is newly stored in the RTC memory 357 when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed. Furthermore, if none of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting value update processing (FIG. 167), and setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is executed, and if the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) is executed, Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the date and time information is newly stored in the RTC memory 357 when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed. Furthermore, if none of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting value update processing (FIG. 167), and setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is executed, and if the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) is executed, Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed.

Furthermore, when the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is executed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs, and in other cases, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which storage does not occur. Furthermore, when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, new date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357, and in other cases, new date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which storage does not occur. Furthermore, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, new date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357, and in other cases, new date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which storage does not occur. Furthermore, when the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) or the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) is executed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs; A configuration may also be adopted in which new storage of date and time information in the memory 357 does not occur. If the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs; otherwise, the RTC memory 357 It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which no new storage of date and time information occurs. Furthermore, when the setting value update process (Fig. 167) or the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) is executed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs; A configuration may also be adopted in which new storage of date and time information in the memory 357 does not occur.

Furthermore, when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, the entire work area 221 for specific control, including the setting reference area 341 and the setting update area 342, is A configuration may also be adopted in which the area is cleared to "0" and initialization is executed. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the second RAM clearing process (step SB313) is not executed in the setting value updating process (FIG. 167).

Furthermore, when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started, the configuration may be such that the setting value change is started from a predetermined setting value other than "setting 1". For example, the configuration may be such that changing the setting value starts from "Setting 2", it may start from changing the setting value from "Setting 3", and the changing of the setting value starts from "Setting 4". It may be a configuration in which the setting value change starts from "Setting 5", or a configuration in which the setting value change starts from "Setting 6".

Furthermore, when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 is overwritten in the setting update area 342, as in the forty-fifth embodiment. In this way, a configuration may be adopted in which the change of the setting value is started from the setting value that has been set as the target of use up to that point.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the process for transmitting various return commands in the main process (FIG. 165) is set as a process before the remaining process (steps SB125 to SB128) is started. In this case, if any of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting value update processing (Fig. 167), and setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) is executed, the corresponding flag is set, and the In the process for transmitting various return commands, a configuration may be adopted in which a return command corresponding to the state of the flag is sent to the audio-light side CPU 353.

In addition to or in place of the configuration in which time-based effects are executed every time a predetermined time elapses based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357, the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 may be used as a reference. The configuration may be such that monitoring is performed to determine whether a predetermined abnormality has occurred each time a predetermined time elapses, and each time a predetermined time elapses based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357. A configuration may also be adopted in which the base value is notified. In this case, the RTC 356 and the RTC memory 357 may be provided in the main control board 61, and the main CPU 63 may be configured to monitor the abnormality or notify the base value. Abnormality monitoring is executed simultaneously on a plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in a gaming hall, and the results are reported on, for example, the symbol display device 41, thereby periodically determining whether or not a predetermined abnormality is occurring. This makes it possible to monitor a plurality of pachinko machines 10 at once. In addition, by simultaneously notifying the base value on the symbol display device 41 of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 set in the gaming hall, regular monitoring of the base value can be carried out collectively for the plurality of pachinko machines 10. It becomes possible to do this by Note that the various types of notifications described above are not limited to a configuration that is performed by the pachinko machine 10 itself, but may also be configured to be performed by external output to the management computer of the gaming hall.

Also, if it is determined that the power outage flag is not set to "1" in the main processing (FIG. 165), if it is determined that the checksum is abnormal, or if the setting value in the setting reference area 341 is abnormal. If it is determined, the configuration may be such that the setting value update process (FIG. 165) is forcibly executed regardless of whether or not the "setting change operation" is being performed. This makes it possible to immediately change the set value when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 65.

<50th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the forty-ninth embodiment described above in the processing configuration of the effect control processing executed by the sound and light side CPU 353. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the forty-ninth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the forty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the production control process in this embodiment executed by the sound and light side CPU 353.

In steps SB501 to SB505, the same processes as steps SB401 to SB405 of the production control process (FIG. 173) in the forty-ninth embodiment are executed. If any of the normal return command, clear return command, confirmation return command, and update return command is received from the main CPU 63 (step SB505: YES), the currently received return command is other than the normal return command. It is determined whether it is a return command (step SB506).

If the return command received this time is one of the return command for clearing, the return command for confirmation, and the return command for update (step SB506: YES), the production control process in the forty-ninth embodiment (FIG. 173) Similarly to step SB407, the current date and time information of the RTC 356 is read, and the read date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357 (step SB407). As a result, the date and time information that serves as a reference when specifying the timing to perform a time-based effect is stored in the RTC memory 357.

In steps SB508 to SB514, the same processes as steps SB408 to SB414 of the production control process (FIG. 173) in the forty-ninth embodiment are executed.

FIG. 176 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the action corresponding to the content of the processing executed in the processing at the start of supply of operating power in the main CPU 63 (steps SB101 to SB122).

Similar to the forty-ninth embodiment, the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power in the main CPU 63 (steps SB101 to SB122) includes the first RAM clearing processing (step SB117), the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166), and If none of the setting value update processes (FIG. 167) are executed, the main side CPU 63 sends a normal return command to the sound-light side CPU 353, and if the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed, The main side CPU 63 sends a return command when clearing to the sound and light side CPU 353, and when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, the main side CPU 63 sends a return command when updating to the sound and light side CPU 353. , when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, the main side CPU 63 transmits a return command at the time of confirmation to the audio/light side CPU 353.

Similarly to the forty-ninth embodiment, when the sound-light side CPU 353 receives a return command at the time of update, it ends the notification corresponding to the execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 167), and also terminates the notification corresponding to the execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 167). When the return command is received, the notification corresponding to the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is terminated. Further, as in the forty-ninth embodiment, even if the sound and light side CPU 353 receives the normal return command and the clear return command, it does not execute notification-related control in response to the normal return command and the clear return command.

When the sound-light side CPU 353 receives any of the return command for clearing, the return command for updating, and the return command for confirmation, it stores the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357. As a result, information corresponding to the reference time that is referred to in order to identify the trigger for executing the time-based performance is newly stored in the RTC memory 357. On the other hand, even if the audio-light side CPU 353 receives the normal return command, it does not store the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357. Since backup power is supplied to the RTC memory 357, if the date and time information is not newly stored in the RTC memory 357, the RTC memory 357 is The date and time information stored in the memory 357 is stored and retained as is.

According to the above configuration, in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122), one of the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting value update process (FIG. 167), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is performed. is executed, the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is rewritten to the current date and time information measured in the RTC 356, whereas the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB101) If none of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting value update processing (FIG. 167), and setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is executed in step SB122), the information stored in the RTC memory 357 Date and time information cannot be rewritten. As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off once for maintenance or operation check of the pachinko machine 10 during operation of the game hall, when the supply of operating power is resumed after that, the situation will be "no operation". By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 from being rewritten. Therefore, when restarting the supply of operating power after turning off the power to the pachinko machine 10 during operation of the game hall, it is necessary to set the reference time of the time-based performance to be the same with the surrounding pachinko machines 10 in the game hall. However, it is possible to improve the operability for restarting the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is not rewritten by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 in the "no operation" condition, so the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on so that the information is not rewritten, unintended operations such as the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), setting value updating process (Fig. 167), and setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) are performed. It is possible to prevent the process from being executed.

<51st embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the forty-ninth embodiment described above in the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the forty-ninth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the forty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step SB601 to step SB630 in the main processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

Steps SB601 to SB622 execute the same processes as steps SB101 to SB122 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

If the process of step SB612 is executed, if the process of step SB613 is executed, if the process of step SB615 is executed, if the process of step SB618 is executed, or if the process of step SB622 is executed, the Information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 (step SB623). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. If the checking counter is set to a value of 1 or more, the checking display continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the remaining processing is performed after the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (step SB601 to step SB622) is completed in the main CPU 63. Before (steps SB627 to SB630) are started, an initial check period is started. As a result, there is no need to control the initial check period in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, reducing the processing load in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. becomes possible.

Furthermore, while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are executed as the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB601 to SB622), the initial check period is is started after the processing at the start of supply is completed. As a result, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the setting values are not displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to avoid any influence.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step SB624). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt cycle. When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started, the first to fourth notification display devices are configured so that a check display is performed in a situation where the checking counter is set to a value of 1 or more. The display of 201 to 204 is controlled.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the checking counter in the specific control work area 221 is "0" (step SB625). Then, the process waits in step SB625 until the value of the checking counter becomes "0". In this case, since the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control remains set to "1", even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started, Among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the processes for monitoring power outages, updating various counters, and monitoring fraud are executed, while the processes for advancing the game are not executed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is ended. Therefore, until the initial check period set in step SB623 has elapsed, a check display is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where execution of the process for advancing the game is blocked. will continue.

Thereafter, the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SB626). When the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started by clearing the start-up processing flag to "0", a negative determination is made in step S8906, so that not only the processing in steps S8901 to S8905 is executed. The processes from step S8907 to step S8920 are executed, and the state in which the process for advancing the game is not executed is canceled. Incidentally, in step SB626, the power outage flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

Thereafter, the process proceeds to steps SB627 to SB630 for remaining processing. In other words, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), but between the first timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process, There will be a remaining time. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process from step SB627 to step SB630 is repeatedly executed using this irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processing of steps SB627 to SB630 is non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly. In steps SB627 to SB630, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

According to the above configuration, a check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where execution of a process for advancing the game is blocked. This makes it possible to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal under a situation where no game is being played.

<52nd embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the forty-ninth embodiment described above in the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the forty-ninth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the forty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step SB701 to step SB734 in the main processing is executed using a specific control program and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

In the main processing of this embodiment, unlike the forty-ninth embodiment described above, power-on initial setting processing is not executed. Therefore, when the main process is started, the process starting from step SB701 is started without waiting for the predetermined wait time to elapse. Although the power-on initialization process is not executed, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted when the main process is started.

In the main processing, first, internal function register setting processing is executed (step SB701) similar to step SB102 of the main processing (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment described above, and the main processing (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment described above is executed. Similarly to step SB103, the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SB702). After that, the power outage flag is set to "1", the checksum is normal, the setting value is normal, and the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1". Under this condition (steps SB703 to SB705: YES, step SB706: NO), it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB707).

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB707: NO), it is determined whether the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SB708). If the game stop flag is not set to "1" and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB708: NO, step SB709: YES), or the game stop flag is set to "1". is not set to "1" and the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on using the setting key, and the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1". If yes (steps SB708 and SB709: NO, step SB710: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SB711). In the setting confirmation process, steps SB201 to SB202 and steps SB204 to SB207 in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) in the forty-ninth embodiment are executed.

That is, in the setting confirmation process of this embodiment, a confirmation start command is not sent to the audio-optical side CPU 353. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the setting confirmation process is executed, notification corresponding to the setting confirmation process is not executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. In this embodiment, as already explained, when the main process is started, the process from step SB701 onward is started without waiting for the predetermined wait time to elapse, so the symbol is displayed at the timing when the setting confirmation process is started. There is a possibility that the start of operation and initial settings of the display device 41 have not been completed. In contrast, by preventing the notification corresponding to the setting confirmation process from being executed on the symbol display device 41 as described above, display control of the symbol display device 41 is started in a situation where the initial settings are not completed. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which the notification corresponding to the setting confirmation process is performed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 but not by the symbol display device 41.

After executing the setting confirmation process, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB712). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. If the checking counter is set to a value of 1 or more, the checking display continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. In other words, when the setting confirmation process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB701 to SB729), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to At 204, a check display is started, and the check display is performed in a situation where progress of processing is not waited.

This is a case where the reset button 68c has not been pressed, the game stop flag has not been set to "1", and the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned on using the setting key, and this is a workpiece for specific control. If the setting confirmation display flag in area 221 is not set to "1" (steps SB707 to SB710: NO), the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set (step SB713). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. If the checking counter is set to a value of 1 or more, the checking display continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step SB714). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt cycle. When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started, the first to fourth notification display devices are configured so that a check display is performed in a situation where the checking counter is set to a value of 1 or more. The display of 201 to 204 is controlled.

Thereafter, wait processing is executed (step SB715). In the wait process, the process waits until the value of the checking counter in the specific control work area 221 becomes "0". In this case, since the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control remains set to "1", even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started, Among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the processes for monitoring power outages, updating various counters, and monitoring fraud are executed, while the processes for advancing the game are not executed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is ended. Therefore, until the initial check period set in step SB713 has elapsed, a check display is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where execution of the process for advancing the game is blocked. will continue. In addition, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the waiting time in the wait process. In other words, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by using the wait period to prevent execution of processing for advancing the game until the symbol display device 41 starts operating and initial settings are completed. This makes it possible to display a check display. After the wait process (step SB715) is completed, a normal return command is sent to the sound-light side CPU 353 (step SB716), similar to step SB113 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using a setting key (step SB707 and step SB717: YES), a setting value update process is executed (step SB718). In addition, even if the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" regardless of whether or not the above-mentioned "setting change operation" is performed (step SB706: YES) ), the setting value update process is executed (step SB717). In the setting value update process, steps SB301 to SB304 and steps SB306 to SB314 in the setting value update process (FIG. 167) in the forty-ninth embodiment are executed.

That is, in the setting value update process of this embodiment, the update start command is not sent to the audio-light side CPU 353. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the set value update process is executed, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 do not provide notification corresponding to the set value update process. In this embodiment, as already explained, when the main process is started, the process from step SB701 onward is started without waiting for the predetermined wait time to elapse, so the symbol is displayed at the timing when the setting value update process is started. There is a possibility that the start of operation and initial settings of the display device 41 have not been completed. On the other hand, by preventing the notification corresponding to the setting value update process from being executed on the symbol display device 41 as described above, display control of the symbol display device 41 is started in a situation where the initial setting is not completed. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which notification corresponding to the setting value update process is performed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54, but not by the symbol display device 41.

After executing the setting value update process, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB719). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. If the checking counter is set to a value of 1 or more, the checking display continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. In other words, when the setting value update process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB701 to SB729), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to At 204, the check display is started, and the check display is performed in a situation where the progress of the process is not on standby.

If the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion part 68a is not turned on (step SB707: YES, step SB717: NO), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1". is not set (step SB720: NO), the first RAM clearing process is executed (step SB721). The contents of the first RAM clear process are the same as the first RAM clear process (step SB117) of the main process (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

Thereafter, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB722). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. If the checking counter is set to a value of 1 or more, the checking display continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step SB723). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt cycle. When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started, the first to fourth notification display devices are configured so that a check display is performed in a situation where the checking counter is set to a value of 1 or more. The display of 201 to 204 is controlled.

Thereafter, wait processing is executed (step SB724). In the wait process, the process waits until the value of the checking counter in the specific control work area 221 becomes "0". In this case, since the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control remains set to "1", even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started, Among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the processes for monitoring power outages, updating various counters, and monitoring fraud are executed, while the processes for advancing the game are not executed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is ended. Therefore, until the initial check period set in step SB722 has elapsed, a check display is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where execution of the process for advancing the game is blocked. will continue. Further, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the waiting time in the wait process. In other words, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by using the wait period to prevent execution of processing for advancing the game until the symbol display device 41 starts operating and initial settings are completed. This makes it possible to display a check display. After the wait process (step SB724) is completed, a return command upon clearing is sent to the sound-light side CPU 353 (step SB725), similar to step SB118 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

If a negative determination is made in any of steps SB703 to SB705, after setting the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 to "1" (step SB726), check whether the reset button 68c has been pressed. (Step SB727). When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB717 and step SB727: YES), the setting value update process is performed at step SB718. At the same time, in step SB719, a checking counter setting process is executed. The contents of these processes are as already explained.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB727: NO), if it is determined in step SB720 that the game stop flag is set to "1", or if the game stop flag is set to "1" in step SB708 If it is determined that is set, the processes of steps SB728 and SB729 are executed. The processing contents of step SB728 and step SB729 are the same as step SB121 and step SB122 of the main processing (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

If the process of step SB712 is executed, if the process of step SB716 is executed, if the process of step SB719 is executed, if the process of step SB725 is executed, or if the process of step SB729 is executed, the The startup processing flag in the work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SB730). When the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started by clearing the start-up processing flag to "0", a negative determination is made in step S8906, so that not only the processing in steps S8901 to S8905 is executed. The processes from step S8907 to step S8920 are executed, and the state in which the process for advancing the game is not executed is canceled. Note that in step SB730, the power outage flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps SB731 to SB734. In other words, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), but between the first timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process, There will be a remaining time. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of steps SB731 to SB734 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processing of steps SB731 to SB734 is non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly. In steps SB731 to SB734, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

According to the above configuration, if the setting confirmation process (step SB711) and the setting value update process (step SB718) are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB701 to SB729), the wait process While waiting for the progress of the process, the check display continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 utilize the wait period to prevent execution of processing for progressing the game until the start of operation of the symbol display device 41 and initial settings are completed. It is now possible to display a check display. Furthermore, it is possible to secure an opportunity to check the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 before the process for advancing the game is started.

On the other hand, since the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the setting value update process (step SB718) does not end unless the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off by at least the administrator of the game hall, these setting confirmation processes (step SB711) Or, by the time the set value update process (step SB718) is finished, a time longer than the time required to start the operation of the symbol display device 41 and complete the initial settings will have elapsed. In this case, when the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the setting value update process (step SB718) is executed, the wait process is not executed. When the value update process (step SB718) is executed, it is possible to prevent the time required until the process for advancing the game is started from becoming excessively long.

In addition, when the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the setting value update process (step SB718) is executed, the first to A check display is performed on the four notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 while not affecting the display of setting values using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. becomes possible.

<53rd embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the forty-ninth embodiment described above in the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the forty-ninth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the forty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step SB801 to step SB826 in the main processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, a power-on initial setting process is executed (step SB801). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed after the main process is started. During this predetermined wait period, the start of operation and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

Thereafter, internal function register setting processing is executed (step SB802). In the internal function register setting process, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, is set as the first interrupt cycle. (specifically, 4 milliseconds), and set the interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, to be longer than the first interrupt cycle. The second interrupt period is also set to be a short period (specifically, 2 milliseconds).

In other words, in this embodiment, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are performed so that the interrupt period is relatively long and short. exists. Both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are started by interrupting the main process. Further, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) interrupts the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) and is not activated. In addition, if both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) and the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134) are not being executed, those cycles The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started first regardless of the order of progress. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started with priority over the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated with priority over the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134).

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is set as the main interrupt cycle. Set in a specific register of the side CPU 63. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to setting the first and second interrupt cycles, for example, setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the winning random number counter C1 is executed.

Thereafter, the start-up process flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB803). As in the thirty-fifth embodiment, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started, the start-up processing flag is used to indicate whether the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is in progress or not. The situation is such that the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 133) should be terminated without executing the processing for advancing the game, while executing the processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring. This is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63.

The start-up processing flag is set to "1" when the processing for starting the supply of operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) is started in the main processing (FIG. 165), and the operating power supply flag is set to "1". It is cleared to "0" before the processing at the start of supply is completed and the remaining processing (steps SB819 to SB822) is started. Similarly to the thirty-fifth embodiment, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the processes from step S8907 to step S8920 are not executed. Therefore, among the processes at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826), a setting confirmation process (step SB810) or a setting value update process (FIG. 181), which will be described later, is being executed. It becomes possible to prevent the processing for advancing the game from being executed in the game. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), even if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the operating power is Even if the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the setting value update process (FIG. 181), which will be described later, is being executed among the processes at the start of supply (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826), Power outage monitoring is executed, and the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further fraud detection is executed.

In particular, by executing the power outage information storage process (step S8901) even when the start-up process flag is set to "1", the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818) , Steps SB823 to Step SB826), even if a power outage occurs while the setting confirmation process (Step SB810) or the setting value update process (FIG. 181), which will be described later, is being executed, the power outage process is executed in response. becomes possible. In the power outage processing, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is used for specific control. Since the data is stored in the work area 221 of the main side RAM 65, it is possible to prevent it from being identified as an abnormality occurring in the main side RAM 65 when the supply of operating power is restarted. As a result, if a power outage occurs during the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the setting value update process (Fig. 181), the next operating power supply will be notified that the power outage has occurred during these setting-related processes. This can be specified at the start.

Incidentally, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the setting value update process (Figure 181) is being executed, neither the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) nor the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134) Interrupts are not prohibited and can be interrupted at any time. In this case, if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated by interrupting the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the setting value update process (FIG. 181), Information on the return address of the main process (FIG. 179) for returning after the timer interrupt process that is the target of activation is completed is saved to the stack area 222 for specific control, and the timer interrupt process is activated. The information of various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before is saved to the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt processing that has been activated ends, the process returns to the main processing (FIG. 179) corresponding to the return address information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and The information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is returned to various registers of the main CPU 63.

After setting the start-up processing flag to "1" in step SB803, it is determined whether or not the power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB804). . When the power outage process is executed in the power outage information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the power outage flag is set to "1". The power outage flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to determine whether or not the power outage process was appropriately performed during the previous power shutoff.

If the power outage flag is set to "1" (step SB804: YES), it is determined whether the checksum is normal (step SB805). Specifically, first, checksums are calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. The checksum calculation method is the same as in the 33rd embodiment. Thereafter, the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 221 for specific control calculated in the power outage process executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and saved in the work area 221 for specific control. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated as described above in the current main processing. Then, it is determined whether these checksums match.

If the checksums match (step SB805: YES), check whether the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 (see FIG. 154) in the specific control work area 221 is within a normal range. It is determined whether or not (step SB806). The setting reference area 341 is a storage area in which information for specifying the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 by the main CPU 63 is stored, as in the forty-fifth embodiment. If numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1". If numerical information of “2” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2”. If numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3". If numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4". If numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5". If numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 6". In step SB806, it is determined whether the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 is one of "1" to "6".

If a positive determination is made in all steps SB804 to SB806, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB807). That is, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the reset button 68c is pressed and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Here, in this embodiment, like the thirty-fifth embodiment, the main control device 60 is provided with a setting key insertion section 68a and a reset button 68c, but is not provided with an update button 68b. Furthermore, the main control device 60 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the eleventh embodiment, instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB807: NO), it is determined whether the game stop flag or setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1". (Step SB808).

The game stop flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the power outage flag is not set to "1", when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. When the game stop flag is set to "1", steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and when an affirmative determination is made in step S8906, steps S8907 to S8905 are executed. Do not execute the process in S8920. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not performed properly during the previous power shutdown, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control If the checksums do not match due to changes in the storage state of information for at least one of the devices since the last time the power was shut off, or if the set values are abnormal, power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and unauthorized While the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

The setting update display flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and the setting update display flag is set to "1". is set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a display indicating the setting value that is being updated. The setting update display flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the setting value update process (Fig. 181) is started and is cleared to "0" when the setting value update process (Fig. 181) is ended. , in a situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is not executed, the setting update display flag is basically not set to "1". However, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is subsequently started; In this state, the setting update display flag is set to "1". The state in which the setting update display flag is set to "1" is maintained until the setting update display flag is cleared to "0" in the setting value update process (FIG. 181).

If the game stop flag and the setting update display flag are not set to "1" and a negative determination is made in step SB808, it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using a setting key. (Step SB809). If the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using a setting key (step SB809: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SB810). The processing contents of the setting confirmation process are the same as the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) in the forty-ninth embodiment. Note that in this embodiment, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process is being executed, the settings will not be confirmed unless the "setting confirmation operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed. processing is not performed.

If the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned on using a setting key (step SB809: NO), a normal return command is sent to the audio emission control device 81 (step SB811). The processing contents executed by the audio emission control device 81 when a normal return command is received are the same as those in the forty-ninth embodiment.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SB807 that the reset button 68c has been pressed, and it is determined that the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned on using the setting key (steps SB807 and SB812 :YES), the setting value update process is executed (step SB813). In other words, in this embodiment, even if the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", the "setting change operation" is not performed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. The setting value update process will not be executed until then. Details of the setting value update process will be explained later.

If it is determined in step SB807 that the reset button 68c is pressed, and it is determined that the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on using the setting key (step SB812: NO), the specified It is determined whether the game stop flag or setting update display flag in the control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SB814).

If both the game stop flag and the setting update display flag are not set to "1" (step SB814: NO), the first RAM clearing process is executed (step SB815). In the first RAM clearing process, similarly to the RAM clearing process (step SA416) in the forty-fifth embodiment, in the work area 221 for specific control, the area ( That is, except for the setting reference area 341), the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed. As a result, the area indicating whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the win/fail lottery is performed regardless of the win/fail lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game cycle is not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general figure display section 38a is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in a closed state. situation. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display section 37a is erased and the general figure display section The pending information for 38a is deleted. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to "0". Further, the setting update area 342 provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". Furthermore, in the first RAM clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed. Furthermore, in the first RAM clearing process, initial settings are executed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing at step SB802 is executed. Note that for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, processing for clearing to "0" and processing for initializing are not executed.

Thereafter, a return command upon clearing is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step SB816). The processing contents executed by the audio emission control device 81 when receiving the return command at the time of clearing are the same as in the forty-ninth embodiment described above.

If the process of step SB810 is executed, if the process of step SB811 is executed, if the process of step SB813 is executed, or if the process of step SB816 is executed, the check provided in the work area 221 for specific control Information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in a counter (step SB817). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. If the checking counter is set to a value of 1 or more, the checking display continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) is completed in the main CPU 63. Later and before the residual processing (steps SB819 to SB822) is started, an initial check period is started. As a result, there is no need to control the initial check period in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, reducing the processing load in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. becomes possible.

In addition, the setting confirmation process (step SB810) and the setting value update process (FIG. 181) are executed as the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826); The initial check period starts after the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed. As a result, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the setting values are not displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to avoid any influence.

Thereafter, the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SB818). When the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started by clearing the start-up processing flag to "0", a negative determination is made in step S8906, so that not only the processing in steps S8901 to S8905 is executed. The processes from step S8907 to step S8920 are executed, and the state in which the process for advancing the game is not executed is canceled. In step SB818, the power outage flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps SB819 to SB822. In other words, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), but between the first timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process, There will be a remaining time. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process from step SB819 to step SB822 is repeatedly executed using this irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processing of steps SB819 to SB822 is non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly. In steps SB819 to SB822, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

In the main process (FIG. 179), if a negative determination is made in any of steps SB804 to SB806, that is, if the power outage flag is not set to "1", if the checksums do not match, or if the set value is abnormal If so, the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SB823). As already explained, by setting the game stop flag to "1", steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and an affirmative determination is made in step S8906. The processes from step S8907 to step S8920 are not executed. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not performed properly during the previous power shutoff, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control If the checksums do not match due to a change in the storage state of information on at least one side since the last time the power was shut off, or if the set value is abnormal, power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and unauthorized While the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the reset button 68c has been pressed (step SB824). If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB824: NO), an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality has occurred regarding the power outage flag, checksum, or set value at the time of starting supply of operating power is sent to the audio light emission control device 81. (Step SB825). Upon receiving the abnormality command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of supply of operating power, and also issues a message from the speaker unit 54 saying, ``Please change the settings.'' ” will be output. Further, a character image "Please change the settings" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is once stopped, the above notification will not be sent when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is executed. It will be restarted.

Thereafter, external output processing in the event of an abnormality is executed (step SB826). In the external output process at the time of an abnormality, a process for externally outputting an abnormal signal to the management computer of the gaming hall is executed. In this case, the abnormality signal is output for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a situation where an event that triggers the execution of the process in step SB826 occurs, the signal output of the abnormal signal continues, and the event that triggers the execution of the process in step SB826 does not occur. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the signal output of the abnormal signal is stopped when the abnormality signal is not detected. Furthermore, the abnormality signal is not output only in step SB826, but may also be output through other processing. For example, an abnormal signal may also be generated when it is identified that fraud has occurred in the monitored object (detection of unauthorized radio waves or detection of unauthorized magnetism) in the fraud detection processing (step S8905) of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133). It is output externally. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration in which the abnormal signal is also used, and a configuration in which the abnormal signal dedicated to step SB826 is output externally may be adopted.

If the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB824: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using a setting key (step SB812). When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using a setting key (step SB812 and step SB824: YES), a setting value update process is executed (step SB813). In other words, if operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63 while a "settings change operation" is being performed, an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65, so a negative result is returned in any of steps SB804 to SB806. Even if a determination is made, the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is executed. This makes it possible to prioritize changes to set values.

On the other hand, if the reset button 68c is pressed but the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on (step SB824: YES, step SB812: NO), the game stop flag or setting update in the work area 221 for specific control It is determined whether the display flag is set to "1" (step SB814). In the process of step SB814 after the game stop flag is set to "1" at step SB823, since the game stop flag is naturally set to "1", an affirmative determination is made at step SB814. In this case, an abnormality command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 in step SB825, and an abnormality signal is outputted to the outside in step SB826. Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processes of steps SB819 to SB822 without executing the processes of steps SB817 and SB818.

In other words, if an abnormality regarding the power outage flag, checksum, and set value occurs and a negative determination is made in any of steps SB804 to SB806, the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed while the "RAM clear operation" is being performed. Even if power supply is started, the first RAM clearing process (step SB815) is not executed. In addition, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1" and a "RAM clear operation" is being performed, the first RAM clear process is performed. (Step SB815) is not executed. This prevents the game stop flag from being set to "1" even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the "RAM clear operation" is being performed. It becomes possible. On the other hand, if a "setting change operation" is being performed, the setting value update process (Fig. 181) is executed regardless of whether the game stop flag is set to "1" and the details are As will be described later, the game stop flag is cleared to "0" in the initial setting at the start of the setting value update process (FIG. 181). As a result, in order to eliminate the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1", it becomes necessary to execute the setting value update process (FIG. 181). Therefore, when an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control, it is possible to not only perform processing to initialize the work area 221 for specific control, but also to reset the setting values. .

Here, if it is determined in step SB807 that the reset button 68c is not pressed, the game stop flag or setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" in step SB808. If it is determined that this is the case, an abnormality command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 in step SB825, and an abnormality signal is outputted to the outside in step SB826. After executing these processes, the process proceeds to the remaining processes of steps SB819 to SB822 without executing the processes of steps SB817 and SB818. Further, when it is determined in step SB807 that the reset button 68c has been pressed, and it is determined in step SB812 that the setting key insertion part 68a has not been turned on (that is, when a "RAM clear operation" has been performed) ), if the game stop flag or setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step SB814, and a sound emission is performed in step SB825. The abnormality command is transmitted to the control device 81, and at the same time, an abnormality signal is outputted to the outside in step SB826. After executing these processes, the process proceeds to the remaining processes of steps SB819 to SB822 without executing the processes of steps SB817 and SB818.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 180, a description will be given of the subsequent processing when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed. . FIG. 180(a) shows the period during which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the ON state, and FIG. 180(b) shows the processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826). FIG. 180(c) shows a period in which the process is being executed after the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) is completed, FIG. 180(d) shows the period during which the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, and FIG. 180(e) shows the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 being set to "1". FIG. 180(f) shows a period when the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1", and FIG. 180(g) shows an abnormal signal being output to the outside. Indicates the period.

At timing t1, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 180(a). In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the "setting change operation" is being performed. At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 180(b), the main CPU 63 starts the process for starting the supply of operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826), and at the same time, as shown in FIG. ), the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1".

Thereafter, at timing t2, the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started as shown in FIG. 180(d). In this case, at the timing t2, the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 180(e).

After that, as shown in FIG. 180(d), at timing t3, which is a situation in which the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, so that the main CPU 63 The supply of operating power is stopped. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 180(b), the processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) is completed, and the setting value update processing (as shown in FIG. 180(d)) FIG. 181) ends.

Thereafter, at timing t4, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed again as shown in FIG. 180(a). In this case, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where the "RAM clear operation" is performed. At the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 180(b), the main CPU 63 starts the process for starting the supply of operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 180(e) and 180(f), both the setting update display flag and the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control have been set to "1" since before the previous operation power supply was stopped. " is set.

This time, since the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the "RAM clear operation" is performed in a situation where the setting update display flag is set to "1", the first RAM clear process (step SB815 ) is not executed, and the abnormal signal is output to the outside for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds) from timing t5 to timing t7, as shown in FIG. 180(g). Also, at timing t5, abnormality notification based on transmission of the abnormality command is started.

As shown in FIG. 180(b), the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) started at timing t4 ends at timing t6. Then, at the timing t6, the process after the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) is started.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 180(f), since the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1", it is assumed that the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started. In this case, processes for monitoring power outages, updating various counters, and monitoring fraud are executed, but processes for advancing the game are not executed. Thereafter, at timing t8, as shown in FIG. 180(a), the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, thereby stopping the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63. Also, at the timing t8, the post-supply process ends as shown in FIG. 180(c).

Thereafter, at timing t9, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed again as shown in FIG. 180(a). In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the "setting change operation" is being performed. At the timing t9, as shown in FIG. 180(b), the main CPU 63 starts the process for starting the supply of operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 180(e) and 180(f), both the setting update display flag and the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control have been set to "1" since before the previous operation power supply was stopped. " is set.

Thereafter, the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is executed as shown in FIG. 180(d) from timing t10 to timing t11. In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 181) ends normally. Then, at timing t11, which is the timing at which the process ends, the setting update display flag is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 180(e). Further, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 180(b), the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) is completed. As a result, at the timing t11, the start-up processing flag is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 180(f). Then, at the timing t11, as shown in FIG. 180(c), the process after the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) is started. In this case, the start-up processing flag has already been cleared to "0", so when the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 133) is started, processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is performed. In addition to this, processing for advancing the game is executed.

If the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed as described above, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted, Unless a "setting change operation" is performed, the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) involves sending an abnormality command to the audio emission control device 81 and outputting an abnormality signal to the outside. is executed, and even if a "RAM clear operation" has been performed, the first RAM clear process (step SB815) will not be executed, and even if a "settings confirmation operation" has been performed, the settings confirmation process ( Step SB810) is never executed. Furthermore, when the abnormality command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 and the abnormality signal is externally outputted, a process (step Since the remaining processing (steps SB819 to SB822) is executed without executing SB818), power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are performed even if the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 133) is activated. The process for advancing the game is not executed. As a result, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update process (Fig. 181) is being executed, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped when the "setting change operation" is performed. It becomes necessary to restart the supply of operating power and execute the setting value update process (FIG. 181). Therefore, it is possible to reliably change the set value.

Next, the setting value update process in this embodiment executed in step SB813 of the main process (FIG. 179) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 181. Note that the processes from step SB901 to step SB918 in the setting value update process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" (step SB901). The OFF confirmation flag 361 is provided in the work area 221 for specific control, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 182. Even in this embodiment, in the setting value update process (FIG. 181), each time the reset button 68c is pressed, the value in the setting update area 342 of the work area 221 for specific control, that is, the setting value to be updated, is changed to 1. will be added. In this case, in order to add only "1" to the setting value to be updated for each press operation of the reset button 68c, when the reset button 68c changes from the non-operated state to the operated state, that is, When the detection signal from the detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 68c switches from a state in which no operation is detected to a state in which the operation is detected, the setting value to be updated is set by adding 1 to the value in the setting update area 342. The configuration is such that 1 is added.

In this configuration, the OFF confirmation flag 361 determines whether or not it is the timing at which the pressing operation of the reset button 68c has started when checking whether the reset button 68c has been pressed in the setting value update process (FIG. 181). This is a flag for confirmation. After executing the determination process (step SB910) of whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed in the setting value update process (FIG. 181), if it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed, "1" is returned. " is set or the set state of "1" is maintained, and when it is determined that the reset button 68c is not pressed, it is cleared to "0" or the state of "0" is maintained.

Here, as already explained, the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is executed on the condition that it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed in step SB807 or step SB824 of the main process (FIG. 179). In step SB807 or step SB824, the main CPU 63 directly monitors the input port into which the detection signal from the detection sensor that detects whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed, determines whether the reset button 68c has been pressed. Determine whether In this case, instead of checking the start timing and end timing of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c, it is checked whether the reset button 68c is being pressed. Therefore, in step SB807 or step SB824, an affirmative determination is made without checking the OFF confirmation flag 361 if a signal corresponding to the reset button 68c being pressed is input to the input port.

However, in this configuration, the end timing of pressing the reset button 68c when pachinko machine 10 is powered on to start the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) and the start timing of the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) are different. Depending on the relationship, there will be cases where the pressing operation becomes a trigger for adding 1 to the setting value to be updated, and cases where it does not become the trigger. In this case, the update mode of the setting value to be updated changes depending on the end timing of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, resulting in a decrease in operability. On the other hand, in a configuration in which the setting value to be updated is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed in a situation where the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "0", the setting value update process is performed. (FIG. 181) is started, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" in step SB901, which is executed before the process of determining whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the setting value to be updated from being incremented by 1 due to the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

After executing the process of step SB901, interrupt permission is set (step SB902). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt cycle. In this embodiment, as in the forty-ninth embodiment, the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) basically includes the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133). Interrupts in the 2-timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are prohibited, and interrupts are permitted in the setting confirmation process (step SB810) and the setting value update process (FIG. 181). Therefore, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SB810) and the setting value update process (FIG. 181) are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826), the In a situation where execution of the 1st timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the 2nd timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is prohibited, and the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, Execution of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) is permitted. However, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the setting value update process (Fig. 181) is being executed, the start-up processing flag is set to "1", so the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) is started, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133), the processes for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, while the processes for proceeding with the game are executed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is ended without any process being executed.

Thereafter, on the condition that the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1", the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SB903). By setting the setting update display flag to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), and the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is performed. (Step S9004) is executed. The contents of the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update are the same as in the forty-fifth embodiment. By executing this process, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124(a), a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and the pachinko machine 10 being selected as an update target are displayed. The currently set values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Thereafter, initial settings at the time of starting are performed (step SB904). In the initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". If the power outage flag is not set to "1" because the power outage process was not properly performed during the previous power outage (step SB804: NO), the game stop flag is set to the specific control work area 221 and If the checksums do not match due to a change in the storage state of information in at least one of the stack areas 222 for specific control since the last time the power was shut off (step SB805: NO), or the setting reference area 341 This flag is set to "1" in step SB823 of the main process (FIG. 179) when the setting value corresponding to the information stored in is not within the normal range (step SB806: NO). When the game stop flag is set to "1", steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and when an affirmative determination is made in step S8906, steps S8907 to S8905 are executed. Do not execute the process in S8920. As a result, when an information abnormality in the main RAM 65 as described above occurs, processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, while processing for advancing the game is executed. It will not be done. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" in the process of step SB904, the state in which the occurrence of information abnormality in the main side RAM 65 is identified can be canceled when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is executed. becomes possible.

Thereafter, "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (see FIG. 154) in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB905). The setting update area 342 is a storage area in which information about setting values that are being updated in the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) is stored, as in the forty-fifth embodiment. When numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target (selection target or change target) becomes "setting 1". If numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is "setting 2". When numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 3". If numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is "setting 4". If numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is "setting 5". If numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is "setting 6".

By setting "1" in the setting update area 342 at step SB905, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 1." That is, in this embodiment, no matter what the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is, when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the setting value to be updated will be "setting 1".

Thereafter, an update start command is sent to the audio emission control device 81 (step SB906). Upon receiving the update start command, the audio emission control device 81 displays an image indicating that the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, and an image for making it possible to recognize the operation details for changing the setting value. , and the display control device 82 is controlled to display an image on the symbol display device 41 to make it possible to recognize the operation details for ending the setting value update process (FIG. 181). This allows the game hall manager to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and the operation details and setting value update process necessary to change the setting value (Figure 181) It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the details of the operation required to end the game. In addition to or instead of the notification being executed by the symbol display device 41, the notification may be executed by at least one of the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54. Furthermore, an external output indicating that the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed may be configured to be sent to a device external to the pachinko machine 10, such as a management computer of a game hall.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is one of "1" to "6" (step SB907). If it is not one of "1" to "6" (step SB907: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SB908). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 1."

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB907 or if the process in step SB908 is executed, the setting key insertion unit 68a determines whether the setting key has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB909). Specifically, it is determined whether the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion section 68a has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. do.

If a negative determination is made in step SB909, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB910). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed by directly monitoring an input port into which a detection signal from a detection sensor that detects whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB910: NO), the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SB911), and then the process returns to step SB907.

If the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB910: YES), it is determined whether the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the specific control work area 221 is "0" (step SB912). If the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" (step SB912: NO), the current confirmation timing is not the start timing of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c, but the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is being continued. Therefore, the process returns to step SB907 without adding 1 to the setting value to be updated.

If the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 is "0" (step SB912: YES), it means that the current confirmation timing is the timing to start pressing the reset button 68c. In this case, after setting the OFF confirmation flag 361 to "1" (step SB913), 1 is added to the value of the setting update area 342 (step SB914). Thereby, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the set value is updated to one step higher. Further, if the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB910: NO), if the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" (step SB912: NO), or if the value of the setting update area 342 is set to 1. If it is added (step SB914), the process returns to step SB907, but if it is determined in step SB907 that the value in the setting update area 342 is 7 or more, the setting update area 342 is added in step SB908. 342 is set to "1". As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6", the state returns to "Setting 1".

If it is determined that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB909: YES), the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is overwritten in the setting reference area 341 ( Step SB915). As a result, the setting value information updated in the current setting value update process (FIG. 181) is set in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is changed to the current setting value. This is the setting value of the pachinko machine 10.

Thereafter, interrupt prohibition is set (step SB916). As a result, when ending the setting value update process (FIG. 181) and returning to the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) in the main process (FIG. 179), the Interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are prohibited.

Thereafter, a second RAM clearing process is executed (step SB917). In the second RAM clearing process, similar to the RAM clearing process (step SA416) in the forty-fifth embodiment, in the work area 221 for specific control, the area ( That is, except for the setting reference area 341), the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed. As a result, the area indicating whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the win/fail lottery is performed regardless of the win/fail lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game cycle is not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general figure display section 38a is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in a closed state. situation. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display section 37a is erased and the general figure display section The pending information for 38a is deleted. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to "0". Further, the setting update area 342 provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". Also, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". Further, in the second RAM clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed. Further, in the second RAM clearing process, initial settings are executed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing at step SB802 is executed. Note that for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, processing for clearing to "0" and processing for initializing are not executed.

Thereafter, a return command at the time of update is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step SB918). The contents of the process executed by the audio emission control device 81 when a return command at the time of update is received are the same as in the forty-ninth embodiment.

Next, the manner in which the setting values to be updated are updated will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 183. FIG. 183(a) shows the period during which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the ON state, FIG. 183(b) shows the operation status of the setting key insertion part 68a, and FIG. 183(c) shows the operation of the reset button 68c. 183(d) shows the period during which the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, FIG. 183(e) shows the setting status of the OFF confirmation flag 361, and FIG. 183(f) shows the setting Indicates the update timing of the value.

First, a comparative example will be described in which the OFF confirmation flag 361 is not set to "1" when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started.

At timing t1, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 183(b), and the reset button 68c is pressed as shown in FIG. 183(c). Then, at timing t2 when the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c are continued, the power ON operation of the Pachinko machine 10 is performed as shown in FIG. 183(a). In this case, since the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where the "setting change operation" is performed, the setting value update process ( 181) is started.

In this comparative example, when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is not set to "1", so the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 is changed at timing t3 as shown in FIG. 183(e). is "0". Thereafter, at timing t4, where the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is continued during the power ON operation, the reset button 68c is pressed while the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 is "0". By specifying this, 1 is added to the setting value to be updated as shown in FIG. 183(f). Further, at the timing t4, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 183(e).

In other words, in the above comparative example, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c during the power ON operation is continued even after the setting value update process (FIG. 181) has started, so that the setting value to be updated is changed to 1 using the pressing operation as a trigger. It will be added. In this case, even though the administrator of the game hall has no intention of updating the setting values to be updated, the setting values to be updated will be updated.

Next, a description will be given of this embodiment in which the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started.

At timing t5, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 183(b), and the reset button 68c is pressed as shown in FIG. 183(c). Then, at timing t6, when the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c are continued, the power ON operation of the Pachinko machine 10 is performed as shown in FIG. 183(a). In this case, since the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where the "setting change operation" is performed, the setting value update process ( 181) is started. When the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started, a process of setting the OFF confirmation flag 361 to "1" is executed in step SB901. Therefore, at timing t7, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 183(e). Since the timing at which this OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" is before the timing at which it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed in the setting value update process (FIG. 181), ), even if the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is continued during the power ON operation, the setting value to be updated is not incremented by 1. Thereafter, at timing t8, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is completed as shown in FIG. 183(c), and the OFF confirmation flag 361 is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 183(e).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 183(c), the reset button 68c is pressed at each of the timings from t9 to t10, from t11 to t12, and from t13 to t14. In this case, the reset button 68c is pressed in a situation where the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 is "0" at each of timing t9, timing t11, and timing t13, so that As shown, 1 is added to the setting value to be updated at each of these timings.

Thereafter, at the timing t15, the setting key insertion part 68a is turned off as shown in FIG. ) ends.

As described above, in the configuration in which the setting value to be updated is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed in the situation where the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "0", the setting value update process (Fig. 181) is started, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" in step SB901, which is executed before the process of determining whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. This makes it possible to prevent the setting value to be updated from being incremented by 1 due to the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

When the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the setting value is changed from a predetermined starting setting value. As a result, regardless of the setting value to be used before the setting value updating process (Fig. 181) is started, the setting value can be changed from a certain starting setting value in the setting value updating process (Fig. 181). It becomes possible to do this. Therefore, the content of the setting value changing operation becomes easy for the operator to understand.

Specifically, the setting value corresponding to the start is "Setting 1", which has the lowest advantage. Therefore, when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the setting values are changed starting from "Setting 1" which has the lowest advantage. As a result, even if the administrator of the game hall unintentionally terminates the setting value updating process (Fig. 181) immediately after starting the setting value updating process (Fig. 181), the setting value with the lowest degree of advantage is set. Therefore, even if a game is started in such a situation, it is possible to prevent an unintended disadvantage from occurring in the game hall.

The work area 221 for specific control is provided with a setting reference area 341 and a setting update area 342. Information corresponding to the setting value to be used is stored in the setting reference area 341, and setting value update processing is performed. Information corresponding to the setting value that is being changed in the situation where (FIG. 181) is being executed is stored in the setting update area 342. As a result, while the information on the setting values that were set before the setting value update processing (Fig. 181) was started is stored and retained in the setting reference area 341, the information on the setting values to be updated in the setting value updating processing (Fig. 181) is retained. It becomes possible to change the setting value.

If the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, the game will not start when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed. The system enters a restricted state in which the process for advancing the process is not started. This makes it possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being started even though the setting value update process (FIG. 181) has not been completed.

Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is subsequently resumed. The above-mentioned restricted state does not occur if a "setting change operation" is performed. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the process for advancing the game from being restricted even when the setting value is changed.

Even in the above-mentioned restricted state, power outage monitoring and various counter updating processes are executed. This makes it possible to ensure execution of necessary processing even when the progress of the game is restricted as described above. In particular, by performing power outage monitoring, even if the progress of the game is restricted, if a power outage occurs, it becomes possible to appropriately deal with it.

Even if the supply of operating power is stopped, the regulated state is resumed when the supply of operating power is restarted. As a result, in a situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the execution of the process for advancing the game is regulated. This makes it possible to prevent the release from being canceled simply by stopping the supply of.

In a configuration in which the setting value to be updated is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed in a situation where the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "0", the setting When the value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" in step SB901, which is executed before the process of determining whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. It is configured to do this. This makes it possible to prevent the setting value to be updated from being incremented by 1 due to the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

Note that in the case where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the setting value update process (FIG. 181), the setting confirmation process ( When step SB810) is executed, the configuration may be such that the setting update display flag is cleared to "0" and the execution of the process for advancing the game is not restricted. By executing the setting confirmation process (step SB810), the current setting value of the object to be used is notified, so that the manager of the gaming hall can grasp the setting value of the object to be used. In such a case, even if the execution of the process for advancing the game is not regulated, the game will not proceed with the setting values not expected by the administrator of the gaming hall.

In addition, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the setting value update process (FIG. 181), whether or not a "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is subsequently restarted. The setting value update process (FIG. 181) may be forcibly executed regardless of the configuration. This makes it possible to forcibly change the set value.

Furthermore, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the setting confirmation process (step SB810), execution of the process for proceeding with the game is regulated when the supply of operating power is resumed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the regulated state is achieved. In this case, if the setting confirmation process (step SB810) is executed when the supply of operating power is restarted, the above-mentioned restricted state may not be achieved. When the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is executed, a configuration may be adopted in which the above-mentioned restricted state does not occur.

In addition, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the setting confirmation process (step SB810), whether or not a "setting confirmation operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is subsequently restarted. The configuration may be such that the setting confirmation process (step SB810) is forcibly executed regardless of the settings. This makes it possible to forcibly confirm the set value.

In addition, in the setting value update process (FIG. 181), it is determined that the reset button 68c is not pressed in the previous processing time in two consecutive processing times, and the reset button 68c is pressed in the subsequent processing time. Although the configuration is such that the setting value of the selection target is changed when it is determined that a pressing operation is being performed, the configuration is not limited to this, and the reset button 68c is changed at each of a plurality of consecutive past processing times. When it is determined that the reset button 68c is not being pressed, and in that situation, it is determined that the reset button 68c is being pressed in one processing time or in a plurality of consecutive processing times, the setting value of the selection target is changed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which Even in this case, when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started, information regarding the confirmation history of press operations of the reset button 68c in a plurality of past consecutive processing times is stored. By rewriting the information to the information corresponding to the setting value update process (FIG. 181), the setting value to be selected in the setting value update process (FIG. 181) will be changed by pressing the reset button 68c to start the setting value update process (FIG. 181). It is possible to prevent this from occurring.

<54th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fifty-third embodiment described above in the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, the configuration that is different from the above-described 53rd embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the fifty-third embodiment described above will be basically omitted.

FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step SC101 to step SC128 in the main processing is executed using a specific control program and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

In steps SC101 to SC106, the same processes as steps SB801 to SB806 of the main process (FIG. 179) in the 53rd embodiment are executed. If an affirmative determination is made in all steps SC104 to SC106, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SC107). Further, if the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SC107: NO), it is determined whether the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SC108). ). If the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting update display flag is not set to "1" (step SC107 and step SC108: NO), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1". ” is set (step SC109). If the game stop flag is set to "1", an abnormality command is transmitted in step SC127, and external output processing at the time of abnormality is executed in step SC128.

If the game stop flag is not set to "1" (step SC109: NO), the process advances to step SC110. In steps SC110 to SC112, the same processes as steps SB809 to SB811 of the main process (FIG. 179) in the 53rd embodiment are executed.

If it is determined in step SC107 that the reset button 68c is pressed, or if it is determined in step SC108 that the setting update display flag is set to "1", in step SC113 the setting key insertion section 68a It is determined whether or not the button has been turned on using the setting key. If it is determined that the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on (step SC113: YES), after setting the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the work area 221 for specific control to "1" (step SC114), the setting A value update process is executed (step SC115). Note that in steps SC116 to SC128, the same processes as steps SB114 to SB826 of the main process (FIG. 179) in the 53rd embodiment are executed.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the execution of the setting value update process (step SC115), there is a situation where there is "no operation" or a "RAM clear operation" is performed. If the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted under the circumstances, the situation in which the processing for advancing the game is blocked continues as in the 53rd embodiment, while the "setting change operation" Not only when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed in a situation where "setting confirmation operation" has been performed, but also when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed in a situation where "setting confirmation operation" has been performed. Setting value update processing (step SC115) is executed. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the execution of the setting value update process (step SC115), the setting value update process (step SC115) is resumed. Step SC115) becomes easier to execute.

In particular, when performing a "setting change operation," it is necessary to use the setting key to turn on the setting key insertion part 68a and press the reset button 68c, and when performing a "setting confirmation operation," the setting key is used to set the setting key. In a configuration where it is necessary to turn on the key insertion section 68a, if the setting update display flag is set to "1", the setting key insertion section 68a will be turned on even if the reset button 68c is not pressed. Setting value update processing (step SC115) is executed. As a result, although the setting value update process (step SC115) is started by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 in a situation where a "setting change operation" has been performed, for example, the power is turned off by mistake during the process. In order to quickly return the power to the ON state in the event that It becomes possible to execute the value update process (step SC115).

Further, in the present embodiment, if it is determined in step SC112 that the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on, before the setting value update process (step SC115) is started, in step SC114, the workpiece for specific control is The OFF confirmation flag 361 in the area 221 is set to "1". As a result, when the set value update process (step SC115) is started, even if the OFF confirmation flag 361 is not set to "1", the reset button 68c is pressed when the power is turned ON. It becomes possible to prevent the setting value to be updated from being incremented by 1. Incidentally, in the setting value update process (step SC115) in this embodiment, the process in step SB901 of the setting value update process (FIG. 181) in the 53rd embodiment is not executed, and the processes in steps SB902 to SB918 are executed. executed.

In addition, in the setting value update process (step SC115), it is identified that the reset button 68c is not pressed in the previous processing time in two consecutive processing times, and the reset button 68c is pressed in the subsequent processing time. Although the configuration is such that the setting value of the selection target is changed when it is determined that a pressing operation is being performed, the configuration is not limited to this, and the reset button 68c is changed at each of a plurality of consecutive past processing times. When it is determined that the reset button 68c is not being pressed, and in that situation, it is determined that the reset button 68c is being pressed in one processing time or in a plurality of consecutive processing times, the setting value of the selection target is changed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which Even in this case, when the setting value update process (step SC115) is started, information regarding the confirmation history of the press operation of the reset button 68c in a plurality of consecutive past processing times is stored. By rewriting the information to the information corresponding to the setting value update process (FIG. 181), the setting value to be selected in the setting value update process (FIG. 181) will be changed by pressing the reset button 68c to start the setting value update process (FIG. 181). It is possible to prevent this from happening.

<55th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the forty-ninth embodiment described above in the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the forty-ninth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the forty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step SC201 to step SC230 in the main processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, a power-on initial setting process is executed (step SC201). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed after the main process is started. During this predetermined wait period, the start of operation and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

Thereafter, internal function register setting processing is executed (step SC202). In the internal function register setting process, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, is set as the first interrupt cycle. (specifically, 4 milliseconds), and set the interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (Figure 188), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, to be longer than the first interrupt cycle. The second interrupt period is also set to be a short period (specifically, 2 milliseconds).

In other words, in this embodiment, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) are performed so that the interrupt cycles are relatively long and short. exists. Both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) are started by interrupting the main process. Further, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) interrupts the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) and is not activated. In addition, if both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) and the second timer interrupt process (Figure 188) are not being executed, those cycles The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is activated first regardless of the order of progress. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is started with priority over the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated with priority over the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188).

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is set as the main interrupt cycle. Set in a specific register of the side CPU 63. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to setting the first and second interrupt cycles, for example, setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the winning random number counter C1 is executed.

Thereafter, the start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SC203). As in the thirty-fifth embodiment, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started, the start-up processing flag is used to indicate whether the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is in progress or not. The situation is such that the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 133) should be terminated without executing the processing for advancing the game, while executing the processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring. This is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63.

The start-up process flag is set to "1" when the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is started in the main process (FIG. 185), and the process at the start of supply of operating power is set to "1". It is cleared to "0" after (step SC201 to step SC223) ends and before the remaining processing (step SC227 to step SC230) is started. Similarly to the thirty-fifth embodiment, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the processes from step S8907 to step S8920 are not executed. Therefore, among the processes at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the process for advancing the game in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed. It is possible to prevent this from being executed. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), even if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", by executing the processing from step S8901 to step S8905, the operating power Power outage monitoring is executed even when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the setting value update process (step SC216) among the processes at the start of supply (steps SC201 to SC223) is being executed. The winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and fraud detection is also performed.

In particular, by executing the power outage information storage process (step S8901) even when the start-up process flag is set to "1", the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is performed. ), even if a power outage occurs in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the power outage process can be executed in response to the power outage. In the power outage processing, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is used for specific control. Since the data is stored in the work area 221 of the main side RAM 65, it is possible to prevent it from being identified as an abnormality occurring in the main side RAM 65 when the supply of operating power is restarted. As a result, if a power outage occurs during the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) or the setting value update processing (step SC216), the next operating power supply will be notified that the power outage has occurred during the setting-related processing. This can be specified at the start.

Incidentally, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, neither the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) nor the second timer interrupt process (Figure 188) Interrupts are not prohibited and can be interrupted at any time. In this case, if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is activated by interrupting the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the setting value update process (step SC216), Information on the return address of the main process (FIG. 185) for returning after the timer interrupt process that was the target of activation is completed is saved to the stack area 222 for specific control, and the timer interrupt process is activated. The information of various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before is saved to the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt processing that has been activated ends, the process returns to the main processing (FIG. 185) corresponding to the return address information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and The information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is returned to various registers of the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, the display start flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SC204). The display start flag specifies that the main CPU 63 is in a situation where display control of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a should be started after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. This is a flag for

Thereafter, in steps SC205 to SC225, the same processes as steps SB104 to SB124 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment are executed. In this case, the processing content to be executed in the main processing (FIG. 185) based on the combination of the situation when the supply of operating power was stopped last time and the content of the operation when the supply of operating power was started this time is as described in the forty-ninth above. Similar to the embodiment, the processing contents are shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 171. For example, if the power outage process is executed in a situation where neither the setting confirmation process (step SC213) nor the setting value update process (step SC216) is executed, or the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is executed. If the power outage processing is executed in a situation where the power outage processing is performed and a "RAM clear operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the first RAM clear processing (step SC218) is executed. In addition, if the power outage process is executed while the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the setting value update process (step SC216) In step SC216), the second RAM clear process (step SB313 in FIG. 167 in the 49th embodiment) is executed, and the power outage process is executed in a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is not executed. Even if the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is subsequently restarted, the second RAM clearing process (as shown in FIG. 49 in the 49th embodiment) is performed in the setting value updating process (step SC216). Step SB313) is executed.

In the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing, the area to be cleared 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed, while the area 372 not to be cleared in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". "0" clearing and initialization are not performed for the bit. FIG. 186 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the clear target area 371 and the non-clear target area 372 provided in the work area 221 for specific control.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped due to the power of the pachinko machine 10 being in the OFF state, the power supply/launch control Backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 from a power supply unit provided in the device 78 for use during power outage as power for memory retention. By supplying backup power to the main RAM 65 in this way, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are Backup power is also provided. Then, by supplying backup power to the work area 221 for specific control, backup power is supplied to the clear target area 371 and the non-clear target area 372. As a result, backup power is supplied to the clear target area 371 and the non-clear target area 372 even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped due to the pachinko machine 10 being powered off. , information is stored and held in these areas to be cleared 371 and areas not to be cleared 372.

The area to be cleared 371 includes a second display data buffer 272, a fourth display data buffer 274, and a fifth display data buffer 275. The second display data buffer 272 is an area where display data for causing the special figure pending display section 37b to perform a predetermined display is set, similar to the thirty-third embodiment. If the pending information for the special figure display section 37a is newly stored in the pending storage area 65a in the pending information acquisition process (step S401) in the special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 12), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the display control means (step S8915) stores the display data corresponding to the number of pending information for the special figure display section 37a stored in the pending storage area 65a in the second display data buffer 272. is set to In addition, if the pending information for the special figure display section 37a is used as a trigger for playing a game in the data setting process (step S502) in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), the first timer interrupt process ( In the display control means (step S8915) in FIG. 133), display data corresponding to the number of pending information for the special figure display section 37a stored in the pending storage area 65a after the consumption is stored in the second display data buffer 272. Set.

The fourth display data buffer 274 is an area in which display data for causing the ordinary drawing reservation display section 38b to perform a predetermined display is stored, as in the thirty-third embodiment. If the hold information for the general use figure display section 38a is newly stored in the general electric power holding area 65c in the general electric power control process (step S8914) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the first timer After the storage, the display control means (step S8915) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 133) displays the display data corresponding to the number of hold information for the power grid display unit 38a stored in the power grid storage area 65c in the fourth display. It is set in the data buffer 274. In addition, in the general-purpose electric power control process (step S8914) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the pending information for the ordinary electrician display section 38a is digested as an execution trigger for the variable display time of the ordinary electrician display section 38a. In this case, the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) corresponds to the number of hold information for the general power grid display section 38a stored in the general power grid holding area 65c after the extinguishment. The display data to be displayed is set in the fourth display data buffer 274.

The fifth display data buffer 275 is an area where display data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform a predetermined display is set, as in the thirty-third embodiment. The display data is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in steps SC403, SC405, and SC406 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188), which will be described later.

In addition to the second display data buffer 272, fourth display data buffer 274, and fifth display data buffer 275, the clearing target area 371 also includes a pending storage area 65a in which pending information for the special figure display section 37a is stored, and a normal display data buffer. A general electricity reservation area 65c is included in which reservation information for the diagram display section 38a is stored. Therefore, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed, the reservation information for the special figure display section 37a and the reservation information for the regular figure display section 38a are erased. In this case, as described above, the area to be cleared 371 includes the second display data buffer 272 and the fourth display data buffer 274. As a result, when the hold storage area 65a is initialized and the hold information for the special figure display section 37a becomes 0, the display contents of the special figure hold display section 37b are also held for the special figure display section 37a. It becomes possible to set the display content to 0 pieces of information, and by initializing the general electricity holding area 65c, when the holding information for the general electricity drawing display section 38a becomes 0, the general electricity holding area 65c is set to 0 pieces. The display content of the display section 38b can also be such that there is no pending information for the ordinary figure display section 38a.

In addition, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, after the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed, the basic Value information will be displayed, but if the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is executed during the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the current pachinko machine 10 If the set value is displayed and the set value update process (step SC216) is executed, the set value that is being updated is displayed, and furthermore, the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed. In this case, a check display is performed. In other words, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, when the supply of operating power is resumed, information different from the base value information displayed before the supply of operating power is stopped is displayed. It will be displayed. Therefore, even if the fifth display data buffer 275 is initialized when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed, no problem will occur in the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. .

The area to be cleared 371 includes, in addition to the above-mentioned areas, an area for special figure/special electric line control and an area for ordinary figure/general electric line control. Therefore, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed, the win/fail lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the win/fail lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game cycle is not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general figure display section 38a is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in a closed state. situation. Additionally, the setting update display flag and setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to "0", and the setting update area 342 provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". be done. Furthermore, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed. Further, initial settings are executed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step SC202 is executed.

Note that the processing contents of the first RAM clearing process are the same as the processing contents of the second RAM clearing process in the setting value updating process, but a configuration may be adopted in which some of these processing contents are different. For example, the area to be cleared to "0" and initialized in the first RAM clearing process may not be cleared to "0" and to be initialized in the second RAM clearing process; The area to be cleared and initialized may be configured to not be cleared to "0" and not to be initialized in the first RAM clearing process.

The non-clear target area 372 includes a first display data buffer 271, a third display data buffer 273, and an initial display completed flag 373. The first display data buffer 271 is an area where display data for causing the special figure display section 37a to perform a predetermined display is stored, as in the thirty-third embodiment. In step S513 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13), the display control means (in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) In step S8915), display data corresponding to the display at the start of variation of the special figure display section 37a is set in the first display data buffer 271. In addition, the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133), the display control means (step S8915) sets display data in the first display data buffer 271 to advance the variable display of the symbols on the special figure display section 37a. In addition, in the special figure confirmation process (step S408) in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 12), the display content of the special figure display section 37a is changed to the validity judgment process (step S504) and the distribution judgment process (step S504) in the current game round. By executing the process for displaying the display contents corresponding to the process result of step S506), the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) displays the current game on the special figure display section 37a. Display data for performing a display corresponding to the result of the second round is set in the first display data buffer 271. The display data set in this case becomes the display data selected in step S507 or step S509 of the special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 13) at the start of the current game round. Further, the display data set in this case is stored and held in the first display data buffer 271 until a new game round is started on the special figure display section 37a.

The third display data buffer 273 is an area in which display data for causing the ordinary figure display section 38a to perform a predetermined display is stored, as in the thirty-third embodiment. In the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the first timer interrupt process ( In the display control means (step S8915) in FIG. 133), display data corresponding to the display at the start of the fluctuation of the ordinary figure display section 38a is set in the third display data buffer 273. In addition, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the first timer interrupt process ( The display control means (step S8915) in FIG. 133) sets display data in the third display data buffer 273 to advance the variable display of the picture on the ordinary figure display section 38a. In addition, in the general electric utility grid control process (step S8914) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the display content of the electric utility grid display section 38a is changed to the display content corresponding to the result of the general electric power opening lottery in the current variable display time. By executing the process for this purpose, the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) causes the general figure display section 38a to display a display corresponding to the result of the current variable display time. Display data for the display is set in the third display data buffer 273. The display data set in this case is stored and held in the third display data buffer 273 until a situation arises in which a new variable display cycle is started on the ordinary figure display section 38a.

The initial display completion flag 373 is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the situation is after completing the initial display of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a at the factory shipping stage. Since the initial display completed flag 373 is included in the area 372 that is not subject to clearing, once the initial display of the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a at the time of shipment from the factory is confirmed, subsequent operating power It becomes possible to prevent the initial display from being performed when the supply is restarted.

Since the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 are included in the non-clear target area 372, even if the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed, the supply of operating power is resumed. The display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a when the display of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a are started after the operation is stopped are the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a before the supply of operating power is stopped. It is possible to return to. As a result, even if the player checks the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a after the supply of operating power is resumed, it is possible to specify whether the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process has been executed. I won't be able to do that.

In particular, since the second RAM clearing process is executed in the setting value update process (step SC216) that allows changing the setting values of the pachinko machine 10, when the second RAM clearing process is executed, the special figure display section When the display content of at least one of the display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a becomes the display content corresponding to the execution of the second RAM clearing process, or is changed from the display content before the supply of operating power is stopped, the display content changes. By checking the special figure display section 37a or the regular figure display section 38a, it is possible to predict whether or not the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 has been changed. On the other hand, even if the second RAM clearing process is executed, when the display of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a is started after the supply of operating power is started, these special figure display sections 37a Then, the display content of the ordinary figure display section 38a returns to the display content before the supply of operating power was stopped. Thereby, even if the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are checked, it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not the setting value update process (step SC216) has been executed.

In addition to the above-mentioned areas, the non-clearing area 372 includes an area (ie, setting reference area 341) in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. Thereby, even if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed, the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as is. Furthermore, the non-clear target area 372 also includes a work area 223 for non-specific control and a stack area 224 for non-specific control.

Incidentally, since backup power is not supplied to the RAM of the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the supply of operating power to the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 is interrupted. When stopped, the information stored in the RAM of the audio emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 is erased. However, if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the supply of operating power is started, the supply of operating power will be stopped from the main side CPU 63 to the sound emission control device 81 to change the performance execution state. By transmitting a command to return to the state immediately before the operation, the contents of the performance execution control in the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are returned to the state immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped. It happens.

Returning to the explanation of the main process (FIG. 185), after executing the process of step SC225, a display start process is executed (step SC226). Thereafter, residual processing is executed in steps SC227 to SC230. The processing contents of steps SC227 to SC230 are the same as steps SB125 to SB128 of the main processing (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

Next, the display start process executed in step SC226 of the main process (FIG. 185) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 187. Note that the processing from step SC301 to step SC305 in the display start processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

If the initial display completed flag 373 is not set to "1" (step SC301: NO), the initial display data for the special map is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC302), and the initial display data for the regular map is set to the first display data buffer 271 (step SC302). Display data is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC303). Then, the initial display flag 373 is set to "1" (step SC304).

By controlling the display of the special figure display section 37a using the initial display data for the special figure stored in the first display data buffer 271, initial display is performed in the special figure display section 37a. Although the display content of the initial display in the special figure display section 37a is arbitrary, for example, it may be configured such that all of the plurality of light emitting sections provided in the special figure display section 37a are in a light emitting state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which some of the plurality of light emitting parts are in a light emitting state. When some of the light emitting parts are in the light emitting state, the light emitting parts that are in the light emitting state and the light emitting parts that are maintained in the unlit state may be arranged alternately in the arrangement order. In addition, by controlling the display of the ordinary figure display section 38a using the initial display data for ordinary figures stored in the third display data buffer 273, initial display is performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a. Although the display content of the initial display on the ordinary figure display section 38a is arbitrary, for example, it may be configured such that all of the plurality of light emitting parts provided on the ordinary figure display section 38a are in a light emitting state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which some of the plurality of light emitting parts are in a light emitting state. When some of the light emitting parts are in the light emitting state, the light emitting parts that are in the light emitting state and the light emitting parts that are maintained in the unlit state may be arranged alternately in the arrangement order.

On the other hand, if the initial display completed flag 373 is set to "1" (step SC301: YES), the processes of step SC302 and step SC303 are not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 stores the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, and the third display data buffer 273 stores the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. The display data stored in is stored as is. Furthermore, as already explained, since the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 are provided in the area 372 that is not subject to clearing, the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are performed in the main process (FIG. 185). Even if either of these is executed, the first display data buffer 271 stores the display data that was stored immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped, and the third display data buffer 273 stores the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. The display data stored immediately before the supply of the data is stopped is stored as is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC301, or if the process in step SC304 is executed, the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SC305). . The display start flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not to start display control of the special figure display section 37a, special figure reservation display section 37b, general figure display section 38a, and general figure reservation display section 38b. It is. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not control the display of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b. , when the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the regular symbol reservation display section 38b.

As already explained, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing is after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started. The timing is earlier than the timing at which the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) for executing display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed for the first time. Then, as described above, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 187) that is executed after the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed. As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of operating power is maintained. After the processing at the start (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed, display control of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b is started.

Next, the second timer interrupt process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 188. Note that the processes from step SC401 to step SC415 in the second timer interrupt process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63. Further, the second timer interrupt process is permitted when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is started, and is prohibited when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is ended. Furthermore, the second timer interrupt process is permitted when the setting value update process (step SC216) is started, and is prohibited when the setting value update process (step SC216) is finished. In addition, in the second interrupt processing, interrupts are not allowed until interrupt permission is set in step SC230 of the main processing (FIG. 185) and interrupt disable is set in step SC227 of the main processing (FIG. 185). Allowed. The same applies to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133).

In steps SC401 to SC409, the same processes as steps S8401 to S8409 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the type counter is "5" (step SC410). Similar to the thirty-third embodiment, the type counter specifies, by the main CPU 63, the display data transmission target among the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 in the current processing round of the second timer interrupt processing. This is a counter for When the value of the type counter is "1", the display data of the first display data buffer 271 is the target of transmission, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the display data of the second display data buffer 272 is the target of transmission. When the value of the type counter is "3", the display data of the third display data buffer 273 becomes the transmission target, and when the value of the type counter is "4", the display data of the fourth display data buffer 274 becomes the transmission target. If the data is to be transmitted and the value of the type counter is "5", the display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is to be transmitted.

When the value of the type counter is one of "1" to "4", in other words, one of the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the regular symbol reservation display section 38b is displayed. If the situation is to be controlled (step SC410: NO), it is determined whether the display start flag of the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SC411). If the value of the type counter is "5" (step SC410: YES), or if the value of the type counter is one of "1" to "4" and the display start flag is set to "1" (Step SC410: NO, Step SC411: YES), the processes of steps SC412 to SC414 are executed.

In the processing from step SC412 to step SC414, first, type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read from the main side ROM 64 (step SC412). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is "1", the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main side ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main side ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the type data The type data corresponding to the display circuit 262 is read from the main side ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "3", the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is read from the main side ROM 64, and the value of the type counter is "3". When the value of the type counter is "4", the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264 is read from the main side ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "5", the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is read from the main side ROM 64. Read from the side ROM 64.

Thereafter, display data is read from the display data buffers 271 to 275 corresponding to the value of the type counter (step SC413). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is "1", display data is read from the first display data buffer 271, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the display data is read from the second display data buffer 272. The display data is read, and if the value of the type counter is "3", the display data is read from the third display data buffer 273, and if the value of the type counter is "4", the display data is read from the fourth display data buffer 274. The display data is read out, and if the value of the type counter is "5", the display data is read out from the fifth display data buffer 275.

Thereafter, various signal transmission processing is executed (step SC414). In the transmission process, signals are output to the type data signal line LN1 and type clock signal line LN2 so that the type data read in step SC412 is transmitted to the display IC 266. In addition, in the transmission process, signals are output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 so that the display data read in step SC413 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

On the other hand, if the value of the type counter is one of "1" to "4" and the display start flag is not set to "1" (step SC410 and step SC411: NO), the processes in step SC412 to step SC414 do not execute. As a result, even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, until the display start flag is set to "1", the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the general symbol display section 38a And, without starting the display control of the regular symbol reservation display section 38b, the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the ordinary symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b are maintained in the off state.

If a negative determination is made in step SC411, or if the process in step SC414 is executed, interrupt permission is set to permit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process (step SC415).

Next, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of operating power is started will be explained. FIG. 189 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of operating power is started.

At the time of shipment from the factory, the initial display flag 373 has not yet been set to "1", so the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the special symbol display section 37a and the regular symbol display section 38a are displayed. When started, initial display is started in these special figure display section 37a and regular figure display section 38a. The initial display on the special figure display section 37a is when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 and the start condition for the game round is satisfied, so that a picture is displayed on the special figure display section 37a. continues until the variable display starts. The initial display on the normal figure display section 38a continues until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the symbol on the normal figure display section 38a starts.

If it is not at the factory shipping stage, that is, if the initial display flag 373 has already been set to "1", the first RAM clearing process is performed at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223). If the process is executed, the setting value update process is executed, the setting confirmation process is executed, or even if these processes are not executed, the supply of operating power is stopped. The display of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a is controlled so that the display contents are displayed immediately before. Thereby, even if the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are checked, it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not the setting value update process (step SC216) has been executed.

In particular, the display contents when the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a start displaying, and the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. are the same. As a result, after checking and memorizing the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, the contents of the display of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a after the supply of operating power is started. Even if the display contents initially displayed on the display section 38a are checked, it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not the setting value update process (step SC216) has been executed.

In addition, by setting the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the clear target area 372 that is not subject to execution of the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process in the work area 221 for specific control, The display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a when the display starts are the same as the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. It is configured to do this. In other words, no special processing is required to prevent it from being possible to identify whether or not the setting value update process (step SC216) has been executed even if the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are checked. . Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing an increase in processing load.

Note that the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which both the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 are provided in the area 372 not to be cleared, and the first display data buffer 271 is provided in the area 372 not to be cleared. However, the third display data buffer 273 may be provided in the area to be cleared 371. In this case, if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the special figure display section 37a will display the display contents from before the supply of operating power was stopped. will be started, and an initial display will be performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a. Further, instead of this, the third display data buffer 273 is provided in the non-clear target area 372, but the first display data buffer 271 may be provided in the clear target area 371. In this case, if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the general figure display section 38a will display the display contents from before the supply of operating power was stopped. will be started, but an initial display will be performed in the special figure display section 37a.

Further, in a configuration in which a round display section is provided as a display section whose display is controlled by the main side CPU 63 for notifying the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot result. Alternatively, an area in which display data for displaying on the round display unit is stored may be provided in the non-clear target area 372. In this case, when the supply of operating power is stopped while a predetermined display is being displayed on the round display section, and when the supply of operating power is started, the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed. Even so, the predetermined display will be restarted on the round display section.

In addition, all the display sections whose display is directly controlled by the main CPU 63, including the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the ordinary symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b, are used for display purposes. The area in which the display data of is stored may not be initialized by the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process. In this case, any display section that is directly controlled for display by the main CPU 63 will not be supplied with operating power, even if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the operating power supply is started. The display will be based on the display content before it was stopped. In addition, in this configuration, although the special figure pending display section 37b and the regular figure pending display section 38b start displaying the display contents before the supply of operating power is stopped, the corresponding pending information is 0 after that. A configuration may be adopted in which the display content is switched to correspond to the number of items.

In addition, the area where display data for displaying in the special figure pending display section 37b and the general figure pending display section 38b is stored is initialized when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed. However, the special figure pending display section 37b and the regular figure pending display section 38b may be configured to be displayed in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to understand the number of pieces of corresponding pending information. In this case, by executing the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process, a display indicating that the corresponding pending information is 0 is displayed in each of the special figure pending display section 37b and the general figure pending display section 38b. Even if the number of pending information is 0, it would be difficult for the player to understand that the display indicating that the number of pending information is 0 is displayed. Even so, it becomes difficult to identify whether the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process has been executed.

<56th embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is restarted are different from the above-mentioned 55th embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifty-fifth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the fifty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 190 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control.

The clearing target area 371 includes a second display data buffer 272 that stores display data for causing the special symbol reservation display section 37b to perform a predetermined display, and a second display data buffer 272 that stores display data for causing the special symbol reservation display section 37b to perform a predetermined display. In addition to the fourth display data buffer 274 in which display data is stored and the fifth display data buffer 275 in which display data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform predetermined display is stored. , a first display data buffer 271 in which display data for causing the special figure display section 37a to perform a predetermined display is stored, and a first display data buffer 271 in which display data for causing the regular figure display section 38a to perform a predetermined display is stored. 3 display data buffer 273 is provided. Therefore, when the first RAM clearing process (step SC218) is executed in the main process (FIG. 185) or the second RAM clearing process in the setting value update process (step SC216), the supply of operating power is The display data corresponding to the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a immediately before they are stopped will be erased.

In addition to the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275, an initial display flag 375 is provided in the area to be cleared 371. The initial display flag 375 is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not it is necessary to perform initial display in the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a. Since the initial display flag 375 is provided in the clear target area 371, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the initial display flag 375 becomes "0". ” will be cleared. Therefore, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the special figure is displayed after the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is executed. When the display of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a is started, the initial display will be performed in the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a.

FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step SC501 to step SC511 in the display start process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

If the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" (step SC501: NO), the initial display data for the special map is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC502), and the initial display data for the regular map is set to the first display data buffer 271 (step SC502). The display data is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC503). Then, the initial display flag 375 is set to "1" (step SC504).

By controlling the display of the special figure display section 37a using the initial display data for the special figure stored in the first display data buffer 271, initial display is performed in the special figure display section 37a. Although the display content of the initial display in the special figure display section 37a is arbitrary, for example, it may be configured such that all of the plurality of light emitting sections provided in the special figure display section 37a are in a light emitting state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which some of the plurality of light emitting parts are in a light emitting state. When some of the light emitting parts are in the light emitting state, the light emitting parts that are in the light emitting state and the light emitting parts that are maintained in the unlit state may be arranged alternately in the arrangement order. In addition, the display content of the initial display on the special figure display section 37a is different from the display content that is stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 37a to notify the game result of the game round. In addition, the initial display content on the special figure display section 37a is different from the display content displayed in a situation where a variable display of the pattern is being performed on the special figure display section 37a. This makes it possible to clearly specify that the initial display is being performed on the special figure display section 37a.

By controlling the display of the ordinary figure display section 38a using the initial display data for ordinary figures stored in the third display data buffer 273, initial display is performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a. Although the display content of the initial display on the ordinary figure display section 38a is arbitrary, for example, it may be configured such that all of the plurality of light emitting parts provided on the ordinary figure display section 38a are in a light emitting state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which some of the plurality of light emitting parts are in a light emitting state. When some of the light emitting parts are in the light emitting state, the light emitting parts that are in the light emitting state and the light emitting parts that are maintained in the unlit state may be arranged alternately in the arrangement order. In addition, the display content of the initial display on the common picture display section 38a is different from the display content that is stopped and displayed on the common picture display section 38a to notify the result of the Shinden opening lottery in the variable display time. There is. Further, the initial display content on the ordinary figure display section 38a is different from the display content displayed in the situation where the variable display of the picture is being performed on the ordinary figure display section 38a. Thereby, it becomes possible to clearly specify that the initial display is being performed on the ordinary figure display section 38a.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC501, the game cycle can be executed by referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the game cycle is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored. It is determined whether or not the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power was stopped during the execution of (step SC505). In the storage area, information indicating that the game session is being executed when the game session is started is stored, and information indicating that the game session is being executed when the game session is ended is stored in the memory area. be removed from the area. Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the information in the storage area is stored and retained as long as backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, and the information in the main CPU 63 is maintained. It is also stored and retained even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when power supply is resumed.

In addition, by referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored, the operating power is It is determined whether or not the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power has been stopped (step SC506). The storage area stores information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed when the opening/closing execution mode is ended. Information is erased from the storage area. Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the information in the storage area is stored and retained as long as backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, and the information in the main CPU 63 is maintained. It is also stored and retained even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when power supply is resumed.

If the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was neither during the execution of the game round nor during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode (step SC505 and step SC506: NO), the initial display data for the special figure is changed to the first display data. It is set in the buffer 271 (step SC507). By controlling the display of the special figure display section 37a using the initial display data for the special figure stored in the first display data buffer 271, the initial display described above is performed in the special figure display section 37a. On the other hand, if the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was during the execution of the game round or the execution of the opening/closing execution mode (step SC505 or step SC506: YES), the initial display data for the special figure is Since the first display data buffer 271 is not set, the display data stored before the supply of operating power is stopped remains stored in the first display data buffer 271 as is. Therefore, when the display on the special figure display section 37a is started, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped will be resumed as they are.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC505, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC506, or if the process in step SC507 is executed, the fluctuation of the general figure display section 38a in the clearing target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control By referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the image is being displayed is stored, the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of the operating power is stopped during the fluctuating display of the picture in the ordinary figure display section 38a. It is determined whether the situation is the same (step SC508). The storage area stores information indicating that the fluctuating display of the pattern is being executed in the fuji display section 38a when the fluctuating display of the picture is started on the fuji display section 38a. When the fluctuating display of the picture is ended in step , information indicating that the fluctuating display of the picture is being executed in the ordinary picture display section 38a is deleted from the storage area. Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the information in the storage area is stored and retained as long as backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, and the information in the main CPU 63 is maintained. It is also stored and retained even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when power supply is resumed.

In addition, by referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the general power open state is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored, it is possible to It is determined whether or not the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power was stopped (step SC509). This storage area stores information indicating that the general power open state is being executed when the general power open state is started, and information indicating that the general power open state is being executed when the general power open state is ended. Information indicating that there is is erased from the storage area. Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the information in the storage area is stored and retained as long as backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, and the information in the main CPU 63 is maintained. It is also stored and retained even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when power supply is resumed.

If the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was neither during the execution of the fluctuating display of the picture in the ordinary figure display section 38a nor during the execution of the ordinary power open state (step SC508 and step SC509: NO), the ordinary figure display unit 38a The initial display data of is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC510). By controlling the display of the ordinary figure display section 38a using the initial display data for ordinary figures stored in the third display data buffer 273, the initial display described above is performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a. On the other hand, if the previous time when the supply of operating power was stopped was either during the execution of the fluctuating display of the picture on the general figure display section 38a or during the execution of the general power open state (step SC508 or step SC509: YES), Since the initial display data for ordinary figures is not set in the third display data buffer 273, the display data stored before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as is in the third display data buffer 273. . Therefore, when the display on the ordinary figure display section 38a is started, the display contents of the ordinary figure display section 38a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped will be resumed as they are.

If the process of step SC504 is executed, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC508, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC509, or if the process of step SC510 is executed, the area to be cleared in the work area 221 for specific control 371 is set to "1" (step SC511). Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly determines whether or not to start the display control of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b. This is a flag for identification by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not control the display of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b. , when the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the regular symbol reservation display section 38b.

As in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing is after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started. The timing is earlier than the timing at which the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) for executing display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed for the first time. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 191) that is executed after the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed. As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of operating power is maintained. After the processing at the start (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed, display control of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b is started.

In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 191), even if both the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the first display data buffer 271 is In addition to setting initial display data for special figures, initial display data for regular figures may be set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if display control of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a is started immediately after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, then the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section The initial display will start immediately after the display contents immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped at step 38a. Then, the player who visually observes such a change in display content will start the initial display on the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a in a situation where both the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed. I can understand what happened. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 191), the display start flag is set after the process for setting the display data is completed. is set to "1" and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a is started. This makes it possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

Next, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of operating power is started will be explained. FIG. 192 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of operating power is started.

When the first RAM clearing process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) or the second RAM clearing process is executed in the setting value update process, "1" is set in the initial display flag 375. " is not set, so when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a is started, the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a are not set. Initial display is started in section 38a. The initial display on the special figure display section 37a is when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 and the start condition for the game round is satisfied, so that a picture is displayed on the special figure display section 37a. continues until the variable display starts. The initial display on the normal figure display section 38a continues until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the symbol on the normal figure display section 38a starts. It should be noted that since the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" even at the time of shipment from the factory, the initial display will be started in the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a.

Regardless of whether the first RAM clearing process is executed based on the "RAM clearing operation" or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed based on the "settings changing operation" as described above, When the display of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a is started, the initial display is performed in the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a, and the supply of operating power is started and the special figure display section 38a is started. Even if you check the display contents of the display parts 37a and 38a when the display starts on the diagram display part 37a and the general diagram display part 38a, it is difficult to know whether the first RAM clearing process or the setting value updating process has been executed. I can't figure it out. As a result, even if the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are checked when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the setting value update process has been executed. It becomes possible to do so.

Even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the situation in which the supply of operating power is stopped is not guaranteed in the game. If the situation is neither during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, and when the special figure display section 37a starts displaying, the initial display starts on the special figure display section 37a. In addition, even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the situation in which the supply of operating power is stopped When the normal figure display section 38a is neither in the process of displaying a fluctuating picture pattern nor in the state where the general power is open, the normal figure display section 38a starts displaying the normal figure. Initial display starts in section 38a. As already explained, even when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the special figure display section 37a and Initial display is performed on the general map display section 38a. As a result, even if it is confirmed that the initial display is being performed on the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a when the supply of operating power is started, the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are It becomes possible to make it impossible to specify that either one has been executed.

On the other hand, if the situation in which the supply of operating power is stopped is either during the execution of a game round or during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, the first RAM is If the clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed, the special figure display unit 37a is configured so that when the display starts on the special figure display unit 37a, the display contents are the same as those displayed immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. The display of 37a is controlled. In addition, if the situation in which the supply of operating power is stopped is either during the execution of the fluctuating display of the picture in the general figure display section 38a or during the execution of the general power open state, the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power (step SC201 - If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed in step SC223), the display content immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped when the display starts on the general figure display section 38a. The display of the ordinary figure display section 38a is controlled so that the figure becomes . As a result, when the supply of operating power is restarted and the gaming situation immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, the special figure display section 37a and the normal It becomes possible to start displaying on the diagram display section 38a.

In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the contents of the initial display displayed on the special figure display section 37a are different depending on whether the first RAM clearing process is executed or the second RAM clearing process is executed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which Furthermore, when the supply of operating power is started, the content of the initial display displayed on the general figure display section 38a is different depending on whether the first RAM clearing process is executed or the second RAM clearing process is executed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

Further, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the initial display is performed on the special figure display section 37a, whereas the general figure display section 38a In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the display contents before the supply of operating power is stopped are displayed. Further, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the initial display is performed on the regular figure display section 38a, whereas the special figure display section 37a In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the display contents before the supply of operating power is stopped are displayed.

In addition, there are multiple types of initial displays on the special figure display section 37a, and when the supply of operating power is started, when the initial display is performed on the special figure display section 37a, the initial display is selected by lottery. It may be configured such that the initial display is performed on the special figure display section 37a. In addition, there are multiple types of initial display of the general figure display section 38a, and when the supply of operating power is started and the initial display is performed on the general figure display section 38a, the initial display is selected by lottery. A configuration may be adopted in which the initial display is performed on the ordinary figure display section 38a.

Further, in a configuration in which a round display section is provided as a display section whose display is controlled by the main side CPU 63 for notifying the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot result. In the case where either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, or in the case where both the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed. Even if there is, the initial display may be performed on the round display section. As a result, even if the round display section is checked, it is not possible to specify whether the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process has been executed.

In addition, all the display sections whose display is directly controlled by the main CPU 63, including the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b, are supplied with operating power. The initial display is It is also possible to have a configuration in which this is done. In addition, in this configuration, although the initial display is once started in the special figure reservation display section 37b and the regular figure reservation display section 38b, the display contents are switched to the display contents corresponding to the fact that the corresponding reservation information is 0 pieces. It may also be a configuration.

Furthermore, when the supply of operating power is started and the first RAM clearing process is executed, steps SC502 to SC503 of the display start process (FIG. 191) are executed, while the second RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, steps SC502 to SC503 of the display start process (FIG. 191) may not be executed. Further, when the supply of operating power is started and the second RAM clearing process is executed, steps SC502 to SC503 of the display start process (FIG. 191) are executed, while the first RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, steps SC502 to SC503 of the display start process (FIG. 191) may not be executed.

<57th embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is resumed are different from the above-mentioned 56th embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifty-sixth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the 56th embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step SC601 to step SC605 in the display start process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63. Further, first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 and an initial display flag 375 are provided in a clearing target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control.

If the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" (step SC601: NO), the out-of-place display data for special figures is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC602), and the off-set display data for regular figures is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC602) Display data is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC603). Then, the initial display flag 375 is set to "1" (step SC604).

The deviation display data for the special figure is selected in the stop result setting process for the deviation result (step S509) when the result of the validity judgment process (step S504) of the special pattern fluctuation start process (FIG. 13) is a deviation result. This is the display data that will be displayed. That is, the winning display data for the special figure is display data for finally displaying a winning result on the special figure display section 37a in a game round in which the result of the win/fail judgment process is a winning result. Since only one type of missing display data for special figures is set, there is also one type of missing display in the special figure display section 37a. In addition, there are multiple types of win displays that are finally displayed on the special figure display section 37a in a game round where the result of the win/fail judgment process is a win result, but the miss display is different from these multiple types of win displays. This is the displayed content.

By controlling the display of the special figure display section 37a using the missed display data for the special figure stored in the first display data buffer 271, a missed display is performed in the special figure display section 37a. The display content of the out-of-line display is arbitrary, but for example, it may be configured such that only one of the plurality of light-emitting parts provided in the special figure display section 37a is in a light-emitting state, or a plurality of light-emitting parts are in a light-emitting state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the state is set.

The loss display data for ordinary electricity is used to execute the general electricity opening lottery when the result of the ordinary electricity opening lottery in the ordinary electricity electricity opening control process (step S8914) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is an unsuccessful result. This is display data for causing the ordinary figure display section 38a to finally perform an out-of-order display in the variable display times of the ordinary figure display section 38a corresponding to the above. Since only one type of out-of-place display data for ordinary figures is set, there is also one type of out-of-place display in the ordinary figure display section 38a. In addition, only one type of winning display is set to be finally displayed on the general map display section 38a in the variable display times of the general public map display section 38a where the result of the public power open lottery is the winning result, but the winning display is The display content is different from the winning display.

By controlling the display of the ordinary figure display section 38a using the out-of-place display data for ordinary figures stored in the third display data buffer 273, out-of-place display is performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a. Although the display content of the out-of-line display is arbitrary, for example, it may be configured such that only one of the plurality of light-emitting parts provided in the normal figure display section 38a is in a light-emitting state, or a plurality of light-emitting parts are in a light-emitting state. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the state is set.

When an affirmative determination is made in step SC601 or when the process in step SC604 is executed, the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SC605). . Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly determines whether or not to start the display control of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b. This is a flag for identification by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not control the display of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b. , when the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the regular symbol reservation display section 38b.

As in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing is after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started. The timing is earlier than the timing at which the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) for executing display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed for the first time. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 193) that is executed after the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed. As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of operating power is maintained. After the processing at the start (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed, display control of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b is started.

In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 193), if either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185) as already explained, the special image is stored in the first display data buffer 271. At the same time, the third display data buffer 273 is set with the missing display data for the regular figure. In this case, if display control of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a is started immediately after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, then the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section Immediately after the display contents immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped at step 38a, the off-color display starts. Then, the player who visually observed such a change in display content will notice that the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a start displaying out of place in a situation where either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed. I can understand what happened. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 191), the display start flag is set after the process for setting the display data is completed. is set to "1" and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a is started. This makes it possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

On the other hand, if the initial display flag 375 is set to "1" (step SC601: YES), the processes of step SC602 and step SC603 are not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 stores the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, and the third display data buffer 273 stores the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. The display data stored in is stored as is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the special figure display section 37a is started, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. A display corresponding to the above is displayed on the special figure display section 37a. Further, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the general figure display section 38a is started, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. A corresponding display is performed on the ordinary figure display section 38a.

Next, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of operating power is started will be explained. FIG. 194 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of operating power is started.

When the first RAM clearing process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) or the second RAM clearing process is executed in the setting value update process, "1" is set in the initial display flag 375. " is not set, so when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a is started, the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a are not set. The display section 38a starts displaying the error. The missing display on the special figure display section 37a is when the game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 and the start condition for the game round is satisfied, so that the special symbol display section 37a displays a pattern. continues until the variable display starts. The out-of-game display on the normal figure display section 38a continues until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the symbol on the normal figure display section 38a starts. It should be noted that since the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" even at the time of shipment from the factory, the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a will start displaying out of place.

Regardless of whether the first RAM clearing process is executed as described above or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed, the display of the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a starts. In this case, the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a display an out-of-order display, whereby the supply of operating power is started and the display starts on the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a. Even if the display contents of the display sections 37a and 38a are checked in the case where the user is executed, it is not possible to determine which of the first RAM clearing process and the setting value updating process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are checked when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the setting value update process has been executed. It becomes possible to do so.

If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process are not executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the special figure display section 37a starts displaying. In this case, the special figure display section 37a starts displaying the display contents immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, and when the regular figure display section 38a starts displaying, the supply of operating power stops. The display on the ordinary figure display section 38a starts with the display contents immediately before being displayed. Here, in most cases, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off when neither the game round nor the opening/closing execution mode is executed during the closing time of the game hall, and furthermore, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off when the game hall is closed. In most cases, the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off when neither the variable display cycle nor the normal power open state is executed. That is, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped are basically out-of-order displays. As already explained, even when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the special figure display section 37a and An out-of-order display is performed on the normal figure display section 38a. As a result, even if it is confirmed that the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are displaying an error when the supply of operating power is started, the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are It becomes possible to make it impossible to specify that either one has been executed.

In addition, in a configuration in which there are multiple types of out-of-display displays on the special figure display section 37a, if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, those multiple types are displayed. A configuration may be adopted in which one type of predetermined type of out-of-off display is performed on the special figure display section 37a. In addition, in a configuration in which there are multiple types of out-of-order display on the general figure display section 38a, if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, those multiple types A configuration may be adopted in which one type of predetermined type of out-of-out display is performed on the normal figure display section 38a.

Furthermore, when the supply of operating power is started and the first RAM clearing process is executed, steps SC602 to SC603 of the display start process (FIG. 193) are executed, while the second RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, steps SC602 to SC603 of the display start process (FIG. 193) may not be executed. Furthermore, when the supply of operating power is started and the second RAM clearing process is executed, steps SC602 to SC603 of the display start process (FIG. 193) are executed, while the first RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, steps SC602 to SC603 of the display start process (FIG. 193) may not be executed.

<58th embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is restarted are different from the above-mentioned 55th embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifty-fifth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the fifty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 195 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area provided in the clear target area 371 and the non-clear target area 372 of the work area 221 for specific control.

The clearing target area 371 includes a second display data buffer 272 that stores display data for causing the special symbol reservation display section 37b to perform a predetermined display, and a second display data buffer 272 that stores display data for causing the special symbol reservation display section 37b to perform a predetermined display. In addition to the fourth display data buffer 274 in which display data is stored and the fifth display data buffer 275 in which display data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform predetermined display is stored. , a first display data buffer 271 in which display data for causing the special figure display section 37a to perform a predetermined display is stored, and a first display data buffer 271 in which display data for causing the regular figure display section 38a to perform a predetermined display is stored. A 3-display data buffer 273 is provided. Therefore, when the first RAM clearing process (step SC218) is executed in the main process (FIG. 185) or the second RAM clearing process in the setting value update process (step SC216), the supply of operating power is The display data corresponding to the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a immediately before they are stopped will be erased.

In addition to the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275, an initial display flag 375 is provided in the area to be cleared 371. The initial display flag 375 is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to determine whether or not it is necessary to perform an out-of-order display as an initial display in the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a. Since the initial display flag 375 is provided in the clear target area 371, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the initial display flag 375 becomes "0". ” will be cleared. Therefore, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the special figure is displayed after the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is executed. In the section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a, an out-of-order display will be performed as an initial display.

The area 372 that is not to be cleared is provided with an initial display counter 381 for special symbols and an initial display counter 382 for regular symbols. The initial display counter 381 for special figures is used for special figures for which there are multiple types, when displaying the special figure display part 37a is performed as an initial display when the display of the special figure display part 37a is started. This is a counter for determining by lottery which type of special figure out of the out of the out of the out of the out of the out out display is to be performed. The numerical range that the special figure initial display counter 381 can take is "0 to 59", but is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures is used when displaying a blank figure as an initial display in the ordinary figure display section 38a when the display of the ordinary figure display section 38a is started. This is a counter for determining by lottery which type of out-of-order display for regular figures is to be performed among the out-of-out display. The numerical range that the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures can take is "0 to 59", but is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The initial display counter 381 for special figures and the initial display counter 382 for regular figures are provided in the non-clear target area 372 as described above. As a result, if the supply of backup power to the main RAM 65 is continued in a situation where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the first RAM clear process or the Even if the 2RAM clearing process is executed, the initial display counter 381 for special symbols and the initial display counter 382 for regular symbols are not initialized, and the numerical information immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored. is maintained.

The numerical information of the initial display counter 381 for special figures and the numerical information of the initial display counter 382 for regular figures are updated regularly by the first timer interrupt process in a situation where activation of the first timer interrupt process is permitted. be done. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the first timer interrupt process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step SC701 to step SC722 in the first timer interrupt processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

In steps SC705 and SC705, the same processes as steps S8901 and S8905 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) in the thirty-fifth embodiment are executed. After that, the initial display counter update process for the special figure is executed (step SC706). In the update process, the current numerical information is read from the initial display counter 381 for special figures, and after adding 1 to the read numerical information, the numerical information after the addition of 1 is overwritten on the initial display counter 381 for special figures. do. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value (specifically, "59"), it is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, in step SC707, it is determined whether "1" is set in either the game stop flag or the starting processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control. If any of the flags is set to "1" (step SC707: YES), the first timer interrupt process ends without executing the processes of steps SC708 to SC722. If "1" is not set in any of the flags (step SC707: NO), initial display counter update processing for ordinary figures is executed (step SC708). In the update process, the current numerical information is read from the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures, the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and then the numerical information after the addition of 1 is overwritten on the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures. do. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value (specifically, "59"), it is cleared to "0". In steps SC709 to SC722, the same processes as steps S8907 to S8920 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) in the thirty-fifth embodiment are executed.

Here, the initial display counter update process for special figures (step SC706) is set as a process that is executed regardless of whether the game stop flag or the start-up processing flag is set to "1". On the other hand, the initial display counter update process for ordinary figures (step SC708) is set as a process that is not executed when the game stop flag or the starting process flag is set to "1". This allows the initial display counter 381 for special figures and the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures to have different update frequencies, and the initial display counter 381 for special figures and the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures. This makes it possible to prevent the files from becoming synchronized.

FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step SC801 to step SC807 in the display start process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

If the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" (step SC801: NO), a lottery process for out-of-place display data for special symbols is executed (step SC802). In the lottery process for the special figure losing display data, reference is made to the special figure losing display lottery table 383 stored in the main side ROM 64 in advance. FIG. 198(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the missing display lottery table 383 for special symbols. As shown in FIG. 198(a), as the missing display data for the special figure, there are first missing display data for the special figure, second missing display data for the special figure, and third missing display data for the special figure. ing.

The first out of line display data for special figures, the second out of line display data for special figures, and the third out of line display data for special figures are based on the results of the validity judgment process (step S504) of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13). This is display data that can be selected by lottery in the stop result setting process for a wrong result (step S509) when the result is a wrong result. In other words, the first to third winning display data for special figures are display data for finally displaying a winning result on the special figure display section 37a in a game game in which the result of the judgment process is a winning result. . The first out of line display data for special figures is data for displaying the first out of line indication for special figures on the special figure display section 37a, and the second out of line display data for special figures is the data for displaying the first out of line indication for special figures. This is data for displaying the display on the special figure display section 37a, and the third off display data for the special figure is data for displaying the third off display for the special figure on the special figure display section 37a. The display contents of the first out-of-place display for the special figure, the second out-of-place display for the special figure, and the third out-of-place display for the special figure are different from each other. In addition, there are multiple types of winning displays that are finally displayed on the special figure display section 37a in a game round where the result of the win/fail judgment process is a winning result, but the first to third winning displays for special figures are The display content is different from these multiple types of winning displays. In addition, in the stop result setting process for a missed result (step S509), the special figure initial display counter 381 and the special figure missed display lottery table 383 are used to determine the missed display displayed on the special figure display section 37a. Select the type from the first to third out-of-place displays for special figures.

In the special figure losing display lottery table 383, a numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure is set for each of the first to third missing display data for the special figure. Specifically, the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure of "0 to 19" is set for the first out-of-place display data for the special figure, and the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure is set to In contrast, the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure of "20 to 39" is set, and the initial display counter for the special figure of "40 to 59" is set for the third out of display data for the special figure. A numerical range of 381 is set. In other words, the selection probability of the first missing display data for special figures, the second missing display data for special figures, and the third missing display data for special figures in the lottery process of the missing display data for special figures is "1/3". ” are the same.

In the lottery process for the special figure missing display data, after reading the special figure missing display lottery table 383, the special figure initial display counter 381 provided in the non-clear target area 372 in the work area 221 for specific control is read out. Obtain the current numerical information of. Then, by comparing the acquired numerical information against the special figure out-of-place display lottery table 383, the display data to be displayed this time is the first out-of-place display data for the special figure and the second out-of-place display data for the special figure. Select from out of line display data and third out of line display data for special figures.

The display data selected in the lottery process of out-of-place display data for special figures is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC803). By controlling the display of the special figure display section 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, a missed display corresponding to the display data is performed in the special figure display section 37a. That is, when the first missing display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first missed display for the special figure is performed in the special figure display section 37a, and the first display data buffer 271 When the second out of line display data for the special figure is set, the second out of line display for the special figure is performed in the special figure display section 37a, and the third out of line display data for the special figure is displayed in the first display data buffer 271. When the display data is set, the special figure display section 37a displays a third missed display for the special figure.

Thereafter, a lottery process for out-of-place display data for ordinary figures is executed (step SC804). In the lottery process for the losing display data for ordinary figures, reference is made to the losing display lottery table 384 for ordinary figures stored in the main side ROM 64 in advance. FIG. 198(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the losing display lottery table 384 for ordinary figures. As shown in FIG. 198(b), as the deviation display data for ordinary figures, there are first deviation display data for ordinary figures, second deviation display data for ordinary figures, and third deviation display data for ordinary figures. ing.

The first deviation display data for ordinary figures, the second deviation display data for ordinary figures, and the third deviation display data for ordinary figures are generated in the ordinary figures and general electric power control process (step SC716) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196). ), when the result of the general electricity release lottery executed using the general electricity accessory opening counter C4 to determine whether or not to open the general electricity accessory 34a is a loss result, This is display data for causing the general figure display section 38a to finally display a deviation for a normal figure during the variable display times of the figure display section 38a. The first deviation display data for ordinary figures is data for displaying the first deviation indication for ordinary figures on the ordinary figure display section 38a, and the second deviation display data for ordinary figures is data for displaying the first deviation indication for ordinary figures. This is data for displaying the display on the ordinary figure display section 38a, and the third out of place display data for ordinary figures is data for causing the third out of place display for ordinary figures to be displayed on the ordinary figure display section 38a. The display contents of the first out-of-order display for ordinary figures, the second out-of-place indication for ordinary figures, and the third out-of-order indication for ordinary figures are different from each other. In addition, there are multiple types of winning displays that are finally displayed on the general map display section 38a in the fluctuating display times in which the result of the public power open lottery is the winning result. The display content is different from these multiple types of winning displays. In addition, in the ordinary figure general electricity control process (step SC716), the type of missing display to be displayed on the ordinary figure display section 38a is determined by using the ordinary figure initial display counter 382 and the ordinary figure missing display lottery table 384. Select from the 1st to 3rd outlier displays for ordinary figures.

In the out-of-order display lottery table 384 for normal-sized figures, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for normal-sized figures is set for each of the first to third out-of-place display data for ordinary figures. Specifically, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures of "0 to 19" is set for the first out of line display data for ordinary figures, and the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures is set for the first out of line display data for ordinary figures. In contrast, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures is set as "20 to 39", and the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures as "40 to 59" is set for the third out-of-order display data for ordinary figures. A numerical range of 382 is set. In other words, the selection probability of the first out of line display data for normal figures, the second out of line display data for normal figures, and the third out of line display data for normal figures in the lottery process of out of line display data for normal figures is "1/3". ” are the same.

In the lottery process for out-of-order display data for ordinary figures, after reading out the out-of-place indication lottery table 384 for ordinary figures, the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures provided in the area 372 that is not to be cleared in the work area 221 for specific control is Obtain the current numerical information of. Then, by comparing the acquired numerical information against the out-of-order display lottery table 384 for ordinary figures, the display data to be displayed this time is the first out-of-place display data for ordinary figures, and the second out-of-place display data for ordinary figures. It is selected from the out-of-order display data and the third out-of-line display data for ordinary figures.

The display data selected in the lottery process for out-of-place display data for ordinary figures is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC805). By controlling the display of the ordinary figure display section 38a using the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, a missing display corresponding to the display data is performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a. In other words, when the first out-of-place display data for the ordinary figure is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first out-of-place display for the ordinary figure is performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a, and the third display data buffer 273 When the second deviation display data for ordinary figures is set, the second deviation display for ordinary figures is performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a, and the third deviation display data for ordinary figures is displayed in the third display data buffer 273. When the display data is set, a third out-of-order display for ordinary figures is performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a.

After executing the processes from step SC802 to step SC805, the initial display flag 375 provided in the clear target area 371 in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SC806).

When an affirmative determination is made in step SC801 or when the process in step SC806 is executed, the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SC807). . Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly determines whether or not to start the display control of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b. This is a flag for identification by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not control the display of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b. , when the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the regular symbol reservation display section 38b.

As in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing is after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started. The timing is earlier than the timing at which the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) for executing display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed for the first time. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 197) that is executed after the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed. As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of operating power is maintained. After the processing at the start (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed, display control of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b is started.

In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 197), if either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), as already explained, the special image is stored in the first display data buffer 271. At the same time, any one of the first to third out-of-place display data for normal figures is set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if display control of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a is started immediately after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, then the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section Immediately after the display contents immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped at step 38a, the off-color display starts. Then, the player who visually observed such a change in display content will notice that the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a start displaying out of place in a situation where either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed. I can understand what happened. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 197), the display start flag is set after the process for setting the display data is completed. is set to "1" and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a is started. This makes it possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

On the other hand, if the initial display flag 375 is set to "1" (step SC801: YES), the processes of steps SC802 to SC805 are not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 stores the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, and the third display data buffer 273 stores the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. The display data stored in is stored as is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the special figure display section 37a is started, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. A display corresponding to the above is displayed on the special figure display section 37a. Further, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the general figure display section 38a is started, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. A corresponding display is performed on the ordinary figure display section 38a.

As described in detail above, when the first RAM clearing process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) or the second RAM clearing process is executed in the setting value update process, the initial Since the display flag 375 is not set to "1", when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a is started, these special symbols are not set. Out of line display starts in the figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a. The missing display on the special figure display section 37a is when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 and the start condition for the game round is satisfied. continues until the variable display starts. The out-of-game display on the normal figure display section 38a continues until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the symbol on the normal figure display section 38a starts. It should be noted that since the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" even at the time of shipment from the factory, the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a will start displaying out of place.

Regardless of whether the first RAM clearing process is executed as described above or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed, the display on the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a is When starting, the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a display an out-of-order display, so that the supply of operating power is started and the display on the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a starts. Even if you check the display contents of these display units 37a and 38a when the process is started, it is not possible to know which of the first RAM clearing process and the setting value updating process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are checked when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the setting value update process has been executed. It becomes possible to do so.

If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process are not executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the special figure display section 37a starts displaying. In this case, the special figure display section 37a starts displaying the display contents immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, and when the regular figure display section 38a starts displaying, the supply of operating power stops. The display on the ordinary figure display section 38a starts with the display contents immediately before being displayed. Here, in most cases, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off when neither the game round nor the opening/closing execution mode is executed during the closing time of the game hall, and furthermore, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off when the game hall is closed. In most cases, the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off when neither the variable display cycle nor the normal power open state is executed. That is, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped are basically out-of-order displays. As already explained, even when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the special figure display section 37a and An out-of-order display is performed on the normal figure display section 38a. As a result, even if it is confirmed that the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are displaying an error when the supply of operating power is started, the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are It becomes possible to make it impossible to specify that either one has been executed.

In particular, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed in a configuration where there are multiple types of missing displays for special figures, a selection is made by lottery from among the multiple types of missing displays. The selected type of out-of-play display is displayed on the special figure display section 37a. Thereby, when the supply of operating power is started, it is determined whether or not to execute either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value update process based on the type of out-of-line display that is first displayed on the special figure display section 37a. This can make it difficult to identify.

Similarly, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed in a configuration where there are multiple types of out-of-order displays for ordinary figures, a selection is made by lottery from among the multiple types of out-of-out displays. The type of failure displayed is displayed on the ordinary figure display section 38a. Thereby, when the supply of operating power is started, it is determined whether or not to execute either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process based on the type of out-of-order display that is first displayed on the general figure display section 38a. This can make it difficult to identify.

In addition, in the lottery process (step SC802) of the missing display data for the special figure executed in the display start process (FIG. 197), the first lost display data for the special figure, the second lost display data for the special figure, and the special The selection probabilities of the third outlier display data for illustration are not limited to the same configuration, but may be slightly different but substantially the same, or may have significantly different selection probabilities.

In addition, in the lottery process (step SC802) of the missing display data for the special figure executed in the display start process (FIG. 197), the first missing display data for the special figure, the second lost display data for the special figure, and the special The respective selection probabilities of the third winning display data for the figures are the first winning display data for the special pattern, the second winning display data for the special pattern, and the third winning display for the special pattern in the game game when the result is a winning result. Although the configuration is such that the selection probabilities are the same as the respective selection probabilities of the data, the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the selection probabilities are slightly different but substantially the same, or the selection probabilities may be significantly different.

In addition, in the lottery process (step SC804) of the out-of-order display data for the normal figure executed in the display start process (FIG. 197), the first out-of-out display data for the normal figure, the second out-of-line display data for the normal figure, and the normal out-of-out display data The selection probabilities of the third outlier display data for illustration are not limited to the same configuration, but may be slightly different but substantially the same, or the selection probabilities may be significantly different from each other. good.

In addition, in the lottery process (step SC804) of the out-of-order display data for the normal figure executed in the display start process (FIG. 197), the first out-of-out display data for the normal figure, the second out-of-line display data for the normal figure, and the normal out-of-out display data The respective selection probabilities of the third out-of-line display data for figures are the first out-of-out display data for normal figures, the second out-of-place display data for normal figures, and the third out-of-order display data for normal figures in the fluctuating display times when the result is out. Although the selection probabilities are the same as the respective selection probabilities of the display data, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selection probabilities may be slightly different but substantially the same, or the selection probabilities may be significantly different.

Furthermore, when the supply of operating power is started and the first RAM clearing process is executed, steps SC802 to SC805 of the display start process (FIG. 197) are executed, while the second RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which steps SC802 to SC805 of the display start process (FIG. 197) are not executed. Furthermore, when the supply of operating power is started and the second RAM clearing process is executed, steps SC802 to SC805 of the display start process (FIG. 197) are executed, while the first RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which steps SC802 to SC805 of the display start process (FIG. 197) are not executed.

In addition, when the supply of operating power is started and the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed, the first to third outliers for special figures are The display data is not limited to a configuration in which the display data is selected by lottery, and each time the process of step SC802 is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the first out-of-place display data for the special figure → the special figure The second out of line display data for the special figure → the third out of line display data for the special figure → the first out of line display data for the special figure →... The out of line display data for the special figure to be selected are arranged in a predetermined order. The configuration may be changed in sequence.

In addition, if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, in step SC804 of the display start process (FIG. 197), the first to third outliers for normal figures are The display data is not limited to a configuration in which the display data is selected by lottery, and each time the process of step SC804 is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the first out-of-order display data for the ordinary figure → the ordinary figure is changed. The second deviation display data for ordinary figures→the third deviation display data for ordinary figures→the first deviation display data for ordinary figures→... The deviation display data for ordinary figures to be selected are arranged in a predetermined order. The configuration may be changed in sequence.

<59th embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is restarted are different from the above-mentioned 58th embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the fifty-eighth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the 58th embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step SC901 to step SC907 in the display start process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

If "1" is not set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC901: NO), a lottery process for initial display data for special symbols is executed (step SC902). In the lottery process of the initial display data for special symbols, the initial display lottery table 385 for special symbols stored in the main side ROM 64 in advance is referred to. FIG. 200(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the initial display lottery table 385 for special symbols. As shown in FIG. 200(a), the initial display data for the special figure includes the first out-of-place display data for the special figure, the second out-of-place display data for the special figure, the third out-of-place display data for the special figure, and the third out-of-place display data for the special figure. There is first win display data for the special figure, second win display data for the special figure, and third win display data for the special figure.

The first out of line display data for special figures, the second out of line display data for special figures, and the third out of line display data for special figures are based on the results of the validity judgment process (step S504) of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13). This is display data that can be selected by lottery in the stop result setting process for a wrong result (step S509) when the result is a wrong result. In addition, the first winning display data for special symbols, the second winning display data for special symbols, and the third winning display data for special symbols are used in the validity judgment process (step S504) of the special pattern variation start process (FIG. 13). This is display data that can be selected by lottery in the stop result setting process for jackpot results (step S507) when the result is a winning result. In other words, the first to third winning display data for the special figure are display data for finally displaying a winning result on the special figure display section 37a in a game game in which the result of the judgment process is a winning result. The first to third winning display data for the special figure are display data for finally displaying a winning result on the special figure display section 37a in a game round in which the result of the judgment process is a winning result.

The first out of line display data for special figures is data for displaying the first out of line indication for special figures on the special figure display section 37a, and the second out of line display data for special figures is the data for displaying the first out of line indication for special figures. This is data for displaying the display on the special figure display section 37a, and the third off display data for the special figure is data for displaying the third off display for the special figure on the special figure display section 37a. In addition, the first winning display data for the special pattern is data for displaying the first winning display for the special pattern on the special pattern display section 37a, and the second winning display data for the special pattern is the data for displaying the first winning display for the special pattern on the special pattern display section 37a. This is data for displaying the 2-win display on the special figure display section 37a, and the 3rd win display data for the special figure is data for displaying the 3rd win display for the special figure on the special figure display section 37a. . The first winning display for special symbols shows that the result of the validity judgment process (step S504) of the special pattern variation start process (FIG. 13) is the winning result, and the result of the distribution judgment process (step S506) is the low-probability jackpot result. It is finally displayed on the special figure display section 37a in a certain game round. In addition, in the second winning display for special symbols, the result of the validity judgment process (step S504) of the special pattern variation start process (FIG. 13) is the winning result, and the result of the distribution judgment process (step S506) is the low winning amount. It is finally displayed on the special figure display section 37a in the game round which is a guaranteed jackpot result. In addition, in the third winning display for special symbols, the result of the validity judgment process (step S504) of the special pattern fluctuation start process (FIG. 13) is the winning result, and the result of the distribution judgment process (step S506) is the most profitable jackpot. The result is finally displayed on the special figure display section 37a in the game round. These 1st winning display for special drawings, 2nd winning display for special drawings, 3rd winning display for special drawings, 1st winning display for special drawings, 2nd winning display for special drawings, and 3rd winning display for special drawings. The display contents of the third winning display are different from each other.

The initial display lottery table 385 for special figures includes initial display counters 381 for special figures for each of the first to third winning display data for special figures and the first to third winning display data for special figures. A numerical range is set. Specifically, the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure of "0 to 9" is set for the first out-of-place display data for the special figure, and the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure is set to In contrast, the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for special figures "10 to 19" is set, and the initial display counter 381 for special figures "20 to 29" is set for the third out of display data for special figures. The numerical range of 381 is set, and the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for special symbols is set as "30 to 39" for the first winning display data for special symbols. The numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure of "40-49" is set for the 2nd win display data, and the special figure of "50-59" for the 3rd win display data for the special figure. The numerical range of the initial display counter 381 is set. In other words, in the lottery process of the initial display data for special figures, the first winning display data for special drawings, the second winning display data for special drawings, the third winning display data for special drawings, and the first winning display data for special drawings. The selection probabilities of the display data, the second winning display data for special symbols, and the third winning display data for special symbols are "1/6", which is the same.

In the lottery process for the initial display data for special figures, after reading the initial display lottery table 385 for special figures, the initial display counter 381 for special figures provided in the area 372 that is not to be cleared in the work area 221 for specific control is Obtain the current numerical information of. Then, by comparing the acquired numerical information against the initial display lottery table 385 for special figures, the display data to be displayed this time is the first out-of-place display data for special figures and the second out of line display data for special figures. It is selected from among the winning display data, the third winning display data for special symbols, the first winning display data for special symbols, the second winning display data for special symbols, and the third winning display data for special symbols.

The display data selected in the initial display data lottery process for special figures is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC903). By controlling the display of the special figure display section 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, a miss display or a hit display corresponding to the display data is performed in the special figure display section 37a. . That is, when the first missing display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first missed display for the special figure is performed in the special figure display section 37a, and the first display data buffer 271 When the second out of line display data for the special figure is set, the second out of line display for the special figure is performed in the special figure display section 37a, and the third out of line display data for the special figure is displayed in the first display data buffer 271. When the display data is set, the special figure display section 37a displays a third missed display for the special figure. In addition, when the first win display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first win display for the special figure is performed in the special figure display section 37a, and the first display data buffer 271 When the second winning display data for the special pattern is set, the second winning display for the special pattern is performed in the special pattern display section 37a, and the third winning display data for the special pattern is displayed in the first display data buffer 271. When the display data is set, a third winning display for the special pattern is performed on the special pattern display section 37a.

Thereafter, a lottery process for initial display data for common figures is executed (step SC904). In the lottery process for the initial display data for ordinary figures, the initial display lottery table 386 for ordinary figures stored in the main side ROM 64 in advance is referred to. FIG. 200(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the initial display lottery table 386 for ordinary figures. As shown in FIG. 200(b), the initial display data for ordinary figures include first deviation display data for ordinary figures, second deviation display data for ordinary figures, third deviation display data for ordinary figures, and ordinary figures. There is winning display data for the game.

The first deviation display data for ordinary figures, the second deviation display data for ordinary figures, and the third deviation display data for ordinary figures are generated in the ordinary figures and general electric power control process (step SC716) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196). ), when the result of the general electricity release lottery executed using the general electricity accessory opening counter C4 to determine whether or not to open the general electricity accessory 34a is a loss result, This is display data for causing the general figure display section 38a to finally display a deviation for a normal figure during the variable display times of the figure display section 38a. In addition, when the result of the above-mentioned general power opening lottery is a winning result, the winning display data for general power is displayed in the general power map display section 38a in the fluctuation display time of the general power map display section 38a. This is display data for displaying a hit.

The first deviation display data for ordinary figures is data for displaying the first deviation indication for ordinary figures on the ordinary figure display section 38a, and the second deviation display data for ordinary figures is data for displaying the first deviation indication for ordinary figures. This is data for displaying the display on the ordinary figure display section 38a, and the third out of place display data for ordinary figures is data for causing the third out of place display for ordinary figures to be displayed on the ordinary figure display section 38a. Moreover, the win display data for ordinary figures is data for displaying the winning indication for ordinary figures on the ordinary figure display section 38a. The display contents of the first miss display for ordinary figures, the second miss display for ordinary figures, the third miss display for ordinary figures, and the hit display for ordinary figures are different from each other.

In the initial display lottery table 386 for ordinary figures, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures is set for each of the first to third loss display data for ordinary figures and the winning display data for ordinary figures. has been done. Specifically, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures of "0 to 14" is set for the first deviation display data for ordinary figures, and the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures is set for the first deviation display data for ordinary figures. In contrast, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures is set as "15 to 29", and the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures as "30 to 44" is set for the third out-of-order display data for ordinary figures. A numerical range of 382 is set, and a numerical range of "45 to 59" for the initial display counter 382 for ordinary symbols is set for the winning display data for ordinary symbols. That is, in the lottery process of the initial display data for ordinary figures, the first lose display data for ordinary figures, the second lose display data for ordinary figures, the third lose display data for ordinary figures, and the winning display data for ordinary figures. The selection probabilities are "1/4" and the same.

In the lottery process for the initial display data for ordinary figures, after reading the initial display lottery table 386 for ordinary figures, the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures provided in the area 372 that is not to be cleared in the work area 221 for specific control is Obtain the current numerical information of. Then, by comparing the acquired numerical information against the initial display lottery table 386 for ordinary figures, the display data to be displayed this time is the first out-of-place display data for ordinary figures, and the second display data for ordinary figures. The selection is made from the loss display data, the third loss display data for ordinary figures, and the hit display data for ordinary figures.

The display data selected in the initial display data lottery process for ordinary figures is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC905). By controlling the display of the ordinary figure display section 38a using the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, a miss display or a hit display corresponding to the display data is performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a. . That is, when the first out-of-place display data for the normal figure is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first out-of-line display data for the normal figure is performed in the normal figure display section 38a, and the third display data buffer 273 When the second deviation display data for ordinary figures is set, the second deviation display for ordinary figures is performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a, and the third deviation display data for ordinary figures is displayed in the third display data buffer 273. When the display data is set, the third winning display for the normal pattern is performed in the normal pattern display section 38a, and when the winning display data for the normal pattern is set in the third display data buffer 273, the normal pattern is displayed. A win display for the normal figure is performed on the figure display section 38a.

After executing the processing from step SC902 to step SC905, the initial display flag 375 provided in the clear target area 371 in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SC906).

When an affirmative determination is made in step SC901 or when the process in step SC906 is executed, the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SC907). . Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly determines whether or not to start display control of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b. This is a flag for identification by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not control the display of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b. , when the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b.

As in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing is after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started. The timing is earlier than the timing at which the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) for executing display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed for the first time. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 199) that is executed after the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed. As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of operating power is maintained. After the processing at the start (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed, display control of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b is started.

In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 199), if either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185) as already explained, the special image is stored in the first display data buffer 271. At the same time, the first to third winning display data for regular symbols and the first to third winning display data for regular symbols are set in the third display data buffer 273. Set any of the hit display data for normal figures. In this case, if display control of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a is started immediately after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, then the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section Immediately after the display contents immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped at 38a, the miss display or the win display will start. Then, the player who visually observes such a change in the display contents will be able to see a miss or a win on the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a in a situation where either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process has been executed. This makes it possible to know that the display has started. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 199), the display start flag is set after the process for setting the display data is completed. is set to "1", and the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a start displaying. This makes it possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

On the other hand, if the initial display flag 375 is set to "1" (step SC901: YES), the processes of steps SC902 to SC905 are not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 stores the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, and the third display data buffer 273 stores the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. The display data stored in is stored as is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the special figure display section 37a is started, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. A display corresponding to the above is displayed on the special figure display section 37a. In addition, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the general figure display section 38a is started, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. A corresponding display is performed on the ordinary figure display section 38a.

Next, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of operating power is started will be explained. FIG. 201 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of operating power is started.

When the first RAM clearing process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) or the second RAM clearing process is executed in the setting value update process, "1" is set in the initial display flag 375. " is not set, so when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a is started, the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a are not set. A miss display or a win display starts on the display section 38a. The missed display or the hit display on the special figure display section 37a is performed when the game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 and the game round start condition is satisfied. This continues until the variable display of the picture starts at . The miss display or the win display on the normal figure display section 38a continues until the game ball enters the through gate 35 and the fluctuating display of the symbols on the normal figure display section 38a starts. Note that since the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" even at the factory shipping stage, the special symbol display section 37a and the regular symbol display section 38a will start displaying a loss or a win.

Regardless of whether the first RAM clearing process is executed as described above or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed, the display on the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a is When the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a display a miss or a hit, the supply of operating power is started and the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a are started. Even if the display contents of the display sections 37a and 38a are checked when the display is started, it is not possible to determine which of the first RAM clearing process and the setting value updating process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are checked when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the setting value update process has been executed. It becomes possible to do so.

If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process are not executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the special figure display section 37a starts displaying. In this case, the special figure display section 37a starts displaying the display contents immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, and when the regular figure display section 38a starts displaying, the supply of operating power stops. The display on the ordinary figure display section 38a starts with the display contents immediately before the display. In other words, if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the special figure display section 37a and the general figure The display content of the display unit 38a depends on the situation at the timing when the supply of operating power is stopped, and the display content varies. On the other hand, if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the special figure display section 37a and the normal A losing display or a winning display is determined by lottery and displayed on the graphic display section 38a. As a result, even if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), when the supply of operating power starts. As in the case where the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process were not executed in the process (steps SC201 to SC223), the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are It becomes possible to diversify. Therefore, even if you check the display when the supply of operating power is started and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a is started, either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is This makes it difficult to identify what has been executed.

In addition, the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure which can be selected when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process are executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) The display data on the display section 38a is display data that can be selected during normal gaming. As a result, the first RAM clearing process or It becomes possible to diversify the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a when the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed.

In addition, in the lottery process (step SC902) of the initial display data for the special figure executed in the display start process (FIG. 199), the first out of line display data for the special figure, the second out of line display data for the special figure, and the second out of line display data for the special figure are Limited to a configuration in which the selection probabilities of the third winning display data for figures, the first winning display data for special figures, the second winning display data for special figures, and the third winning display data for special figures are the same. The selection probabilities may be slightly different but substantially the same, or the selection probabilities may be significantly different. An example of a configuration with greatly different selection probabilities is, for example, a configuration in which the total selection probability of the first to third winning display data for special symbols is higher than the total selection probability of the first to third winning display data for special symbols. It is also possible to have a low configuration.

In addition, in the lottery process (step SC904) for the initial display data for ordinary figures executed in the display start process (FIG. 199), the first out-of-place display data for ordinary figures, the second out-of-place display data for ordinary figures, the ordinary The selection probabilities of the third winning display data for figures and the winning display data for regular figures are not limited to the same configuration, but may be slightly different but substantially the same, and the selection probabilities can be significantly different. It may be configured as a probability.

In addition, in order to display data that is not included in the stop result of the game round as display data selected in the lottery process (step SC902) of initial display data for special symbols executed in the display start process (FIG. 199). It is also possible to have a configuration in which display data of . Also, as the display data selected in the initial display data lottery process (step SC904) for regular figures executed in the display start process (FIG. 199), display that is not included in the stop results of the variable display times is performed. It may also be configured to include display data for.

Furthermore, when the supply of operating power is started and the first RAM clearing process is executed, steps SC902 to SC905 of the display start process (FIG. 199) are executed, while the second RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, steps SC902 to SC905 of the display start process (FIG. 199) may not be executed. Further, when the supply of operating power is started and the second RAM clearing process is executed, steps SC902 to SC905 of the display start process (FIG. 199) are executed, while the first RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, steps SC902 to SC905 of the display start process (FIG. 199) may not be executed.

In addition, if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the first to third outliers for special figures are The display data and the first to third winning display data for special symbols are not limited to the configuration in which they are selected by lottery, and each time the process of step SC902 is executed when the supply of operating power is started. 1st winning display data for special drawings → 2nd winning display data for special drawings → 3rd winning display data for special drawings → 1st winning display data for special drawings → 2nd winning display data for special drawings → The display data to be selected may be sequentially changed in a predetermined order, such as third winning display data for special symbols→first losing display data for special symbols→...

In addition, if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the first to third outliers for ordinary figures are The display data and the first to third winning display data for regular figures are not limited to the configuration in which they are selected by lottery, and each time the process of step SC904 is executed when the supply of operating power is started. 1st loss display data for normal pattern → 2nd loss display data for normal pattern → 3rd loss display data for normal pattern → Hit display data for normal pattern → 1st loss display data for normal pattern →... The display data to be selected may be sequentially changed in a predetermined order.

<60th embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is resumed are different from the above-described 59th embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifty-ninth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the fifty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step SD101 to step SD115 in the display start process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

If the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" (step SD101: NO), the processes of steps SD102 to SD106 are executed. The processing contents of step SD102 to step SD106 are the same as steps SC901 to step SC906 of the display start processing (FIG. 199) in the fifty-ninth embodiment. As a result, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed, the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a start displaying, similarly to the 59th embodiment. In such cases, a miss display or a win display is performed.

When the initial display flag 375 is set to "1" (step SD101: YES), information indicating whether a game round is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored. By referring to the storage area where the game is played, it is determined whether or not the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power was stopped during the execution of a game round (step SD107). In the storage area, information indicating that the game session is being executed is stored when the game session is started, and information indicating that the game session is being executed when the game session is ended is stored in the memory area. be removed from the area. Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the information in the storage area is stored and retained as long as backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, and the information in the main CPU 63 is maintained. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when power supply is resumed, the memory is retained.

In addition, by referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is being executed in the area to be cleared 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored, the operating power is It is determined whether or not the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power has been stopped (step SD108). The storage area stores information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed when the opening/closing execution mode is ended. Information is erased from the storage area. Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the information in the storage area is stored and retained as long as backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, and the information in the main CPU 63 is maintained. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when power supply is resumed, the memory is retained.

If the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was neither during the execution of the game round nor during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode (step SD107 and step SD108: NO), the lottery process of the initial display data for the special drawing is executed. (Step SD109). The processing contents of the lottery processing of the initial display data for special symbols are the same as step SD102, and more specifically, the processing contents are the same as step SC902 of the display start processing (FIG. 199) in the 59th embodiment. As a result, when starting the display of the special figure display section 37a, the first missed display data for the special figure, the first missed display data for the special figure, and the display data for causing the special figure display section 37a to display a miss or a win. Select from 2nd winning display data, 3rd winning display data for special drawings, 1st winning display data for special drawings, 2nd winning display data for special drawings, and 3rd winning display data for special drawings. be done.

The display data selected in the initial display data lottery process for special figures is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SD110). By controlling the display of the special figure display section 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, a miss display or a hit display corresponding to the display data is performed in the special figure display section 37a. . That is, when the first missing display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first missed display for the special figure is performed in the special figure display section 37a, and the first display data buffer 271 When the second out of line display data for the special figure is set, the second out of line display for the special figure is performed in the special figure display section 37a, and the third out of line display data for the special figure is displayed in the first display data buffer 271. When the display data is set, the special figure display section 37a displays a third missed display for the special figure. In addition, when the first win display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first win display for the special figure is performed in the special figure display section 37a, and the first display data buffer 271 When the second winning display data for the special pattern is set, the second winning display for the special pattern is performed in the special pattern display section 37a, and the third winning display data for the special pattern is displayed in the first display data buffer 271. When the display data is set, a third winning display for the special pattern is performed on the special pattern display section 37a.

On the other hand, if the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was during the execution of the game round or the execution of the opening/closing execution mode (step SD107 or step SD108: YES), the initial display data for the special figure is Since the first display data buffer 271 is not set, the display data stored before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as is in the first display data buffer 271. Therefore, when the display on the special figure display section 37a is started, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped will be resumed as they are.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD107, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD108, or if the process of step SD110 is executed, the fluctuation of the general figure display section 38a in the clearing target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control By referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the image is being displayed is stored, the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of the operating power is stopped during the fluctuating display of the picture in the ordinary figure display section 38a. It is determined whether the situation is the same (step SD111). The storage area stores information indicating that the fluctuating display of the pattern is being executed in the fuji display section 38a when the fluctuating display of the picture is started on the fuji display section 38a. When the fluctuating display of the picture is ended in step , information indicating that the fluctuating display of the picture is being executed in the ordinary picture display section 38a is deleted from the storage area. Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the information in the storage area is stored and retained as long as backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, and the information in the main CPU 63 is maintained. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is resumed, the memory is retained.

In addition, by referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the general power open state is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored, it is possible to It is determined whether or not the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power was stopped (step SD112). This storage area stores information indicating that the general power open state is being executed when the general power open state is started, and information indicating that the general power open state is being executed when the general power open state is ended. Information indicating that there is is erased from the storage area. Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the information in the storage area is stored and retained as long as backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, and the information in the main CPU 63 is maintained. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is resumed, the memory is retained.

If the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was neither during the execution of the fluctuating display of the picture in the ordinary figure display section 38a nor during the execution of the ordinary power open state (step SD111 and step SD112: NO), the ordinary figure display section 38a A lottery process for the initial display data is executed (step SD113). The contents of the lottery process for the initial display data for ordinary figures are the same as step SD104, and more specifically, the same as step SC904 of the display start process (FIG. 199) in the 59th embodiment. As a result, when the display of the ordinary figure display section 38a is started, the display data for causing the ordinary figure display section 38a to perform a miss display or a hit display are the first miss display data for the ordinary figure, the first miss display data for the ordinary figure, and the first miss display data for the ordinary figure. One of the second loss display data, the third loss display data for ordinary figures, and the hit display data for ordinary figures is selected.

The display data selected in the initial display data lottery process for ordinary figures is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SD114). By controlling the display of the ordinary figure display section 38a using the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, a miss display or a hit display corresponding to the display data is performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a. . That is, when the first out-of-place display data for the normal figure is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first out-of-line display data for the normal figure is performed in the normal figure display section 38a, and the third display data buffer 273 When the second deviation display data for ordinary figures is set, the second deviation display for ordinary figures is performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a, and the third deviation display data for ordinary figures is displayed in the third display data buffer 273. When the display data is set, the third winning display for the normal pattern is performed in the normal pattern display section 38a, and when the winning display data for the normal pattern is set in the third display data buffer 273, the normal pattern is displayed. A win display for the normal figure is performed on the figure display section 38a.

On the other hand, if the previous time when the supply of operating power was stopped was either during the execution of the fluctuating display of the pattern on the general figure display section 38a or during the execution of the general power open state (step SD111 or step SD112: YES), Since the initial display data for ordinary figures is not set in the third display data buffer 273, the display data stored before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as is in the third display data buffer 273. . Therefore, when the display on the ordinary figure display section 38a is started, the display contents of the ordinary figure display section 38a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped will be resumed as they are.

If the process of step SD106 is executed, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD111, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD112, or if the process of step SD114 is executed, the area to be cleared in the work area 221 for specific control 371 is set to "1" (step SD115). Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly determines whether or not to start the display control of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b. This is a flag for identification by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not control the display of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b. , when the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the regular symbol reservation display section 38b.

As in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing is after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started. The timing is earlier than the timing at which the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) for executing display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed for the first time. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 202) that is executed after the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed. As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of operating power is maintained. After the processing at the start (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed, display control of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b is started.

In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 202), even if both the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the first display data buffer 271 is In addition to setting initial display data for special figures, initial display data for regular figures may be set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if display control of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a is started immediately after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, then the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section The initial display will start immediately after the display contents immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped at step 38a. Then, the player who visually observes such a change in display content will start the initial display on the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a in a situation where both the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed. I can understand what happened. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 202), the display start flag is set after the process for setting the display data is completed. is set to "1" and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a is started. This makes it possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

Next, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of operating power is started will be explained. FIG. 203 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of operating power is started.

When the first RAM clearing process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) or when the second RAM clearing process is executed in the setting value update process, "1" is set in the initial display flag 375. " is not set, so when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a is started, the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a are A miss display or a win display starts on the display section 38a. The missed display or the hit display on the special figure display section 37a is performed when the game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 and the start condition for the game round is satisfied. This continues until the variable display of the pattern starts at . The miss display or the win display on the normal figure display section 38a continues until the game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the symbols on the normal figure display section 38a starts. Note that since the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" even at the factory shipping stage, the special symbol display section 37a and the regular symbol display section 38a will start displaying a loss or a win.

Regardless of whether the first RAM clearing process is executed as described above or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed, the display on the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a is When the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a display a miss or a hit, the supply of operating power is started and the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a are started. Even if the display contents of the display sections 37a and 38a are checked when the display is started, it is not possible to determine which of the first RAM clearing process and the setting value updating process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are checked when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the setting value update process has been executed. It becomes possible to do so.

Even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the situation in which the supply of operating power is stopped is not guaranteed in the game. If the situation is neither during the execution of the round nor during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, when the special figure display section 37a starts displaying, the special figure display section 37a starts displaying a miss or a hit. be done. In addition, even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the situation in which the supply of operating power is stopped If the situation is neither that the fluctuating display of the picture in the general figure display section 38a is being executed nor that the general power open state is being executed, the general figure display will be displayed when the display starts in the general figure display section 38a. A miss display or a win display is started in the section 38a. As already explained, even when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the special figure display section 37a and A miss display or a win display is performed on the normal figure display section 38a. As a result, even if it is confirmed that a miss display or a win display is performed on the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a when the supply of operating power is started, the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM It becomes possible to make it impossible to specify that any one of the clearing processes has been executed.

On the other hand, if the situation in which the supply of operating power is stopped is either during the execution of a game round or during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, the first RAM is If the clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed, the special figure display unit 37a is configured so that when the display starts on the special figure display unit 37a, the display contents are the same as those displayed immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. The display of 37a is controlled. In addition, if the situation in which the supply of operating power is stopped is either during the execution of the fluctuating display of the picture in the general figure display section 38a or during the execution of the general power open state, the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power (step SC201 - If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed in step SC223), the display content immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped when the display starts on the general figure display section 38a. The display of the ordinary figure display section 38a is controlled so that the figure becomes . As a result, when the supply of operating power is restarted and the gaming situation immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, the special figure display section 37a and the normal It becomes possible to start displaying on the diagram display section 38a.

In addition, in the lottery process (step SD102, step SD109) of the initial display data for the special figure executed in the display start process (FIG. 202), the first out of line display data for the special figure and the second out of line display for the special figure The selection probabilities of the data, the third winning display data for special symbols, the first winning display data for special symbols, the second winning display data for special symbols, and the third winning display data for special symbols are the same. The configuration is not limited, and the configurations may be slightly different but substantially the same, or the configurations may have significantly different selection probabilities. An example of a configuration with greatly different selection probabilities is, for example, a configuration where the total selection probability of the first to third winning display data for special symbols is higher than the total selection probability of the first to third winning display data for special symbols. It is also possible to have a low configuration.

In addition, in the lottery process (step SD104, step SD113) of the initial display data for the ordinary figure that is executed in the display start process (FIG. 202), the first out of line display data for the ordinary figure, the second out of line display for the ordinary figure The selection probabilities of the data, the third loss display data for ordinary figures, and the winning display data for ordinary figures are not limited to the same configuration, but may be configured to be slightly different but substantially the same, A configuration with significantly different selection probabilities may also be used.

In addition, as the display data selected in the lottery process (step SD102, step SD109) of initial display data for special symbols executed in the display start process (FIG. 202), a display that is not included in the stop result of the game round is selected. A configuration may also be adopted in which display data for causing the process to be performed is included. In addition, as display data selected in the initial display data lottery process (steps SD104, step SD113) for ordinary figures executed in the display start process (FIG. 202), displays that are not included in the stop results of the variable display times It may also be configured to include display data for causing the process to occur.

Furthermore, when the supply of operating power is started and the first RAM clearing process is executed, steps SD102 to SD105 of the display start process (FIG. 202) are executed, while the second RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, steps SD102 to SD105 of the display start process (FIG. 202) may not be executed. Furthermore, when the supply of operating power is started and the second RAM clearing process is executed, steps SD102 to SD105 of the display start process (FIG. 202) are executed, while the first RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, steps SD102 to SD105 of the display start process (FIG. 202) may not be executed.

<61st embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is resumed are different from the above-mentioned 56th embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifty-sixth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the 56th embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step SD201 to step SD219 in the display start process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

If the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" (step SD201: NO), the lottery target counter provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is set to the special figure display section 37a. "7" corresponding to the number of light-emitting sections determined is set (step SD202). The lottery target counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not it is necessary to execute the processing in steps SD203 to SD207 or the processing in steps SD211 to SD215.

Thereafter, a random number value is obtained from the special figure random number circuit corresponding to the value of the lottery target counter (step SD203). In this embodiment, the main control board 61 is provided with a number of special pattern random number circuits corresponding to the number of light emitting sections provided in the special pattern display section 37a. Specifically, since seven light emitting parts are provided in the special figure display section 37a, seven special figure random number circuits are provided. These seven random number circuits for special symbols are held at relatively short periods (for example, 1 microsecond to 7 microseconds) and each has a different period when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. It is configured to update a random value to be used, and even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped by supplying backup power. This configuration is capable of storing and holding the random value just before the random number.

When the seven light emitting parts of the special figure display section 37a are used as the first to seventh light emitting parts and the seven special figure random number circuits are used as the first to seventh special figure random number circuits, the first special figure The random number circuit for the special figure corresponds to the first light emitting part, the random number circuit for the second special figure corresponds to the second light emitting part, the random number circuit for the third special figure corresponds to the third light emitting part, The random number circuit for the 4th special figure corresponds to the 4th light emitting part, the random number circuit for the 5th special figure corresponds to the 5th light emitting part, and the random number circuit for the 6th special figure corresponds to the 6th light emitting part. The seventh special figure random number circuit corresponds to the seventh light emitting section. In addition, when the value of the lottery target counter is "7", it corresponds to the first light emitting part and the first special symbol random number circuit, and when the value of the lottery target counter is "6", the second It corresponds to the light emitting part and the random number circuit for the second special figure, and if the value of the lottery target counter is "5", it corresponds to the third light emitting part and the random number circuit for the third special figure, and the lottery target When the value of the counter is "4", it corresponds to the fourth light emitting part and the fourth special symbol random number circuit, and when the value of the lottery target counter is "3", it corresponds to the fifth light emitting part and the fourth special symbol random number circuit. It corresponds to the 5th special figure random number circuit, and when the value of the lottery target counter is "2", it corresponds to the 6th light emitting part and the 6th special figure random number circuit, and the value of the lottery target counter is "2". If it is "1", it corresponds to the seventh light emitting section and the seventh special figure random number circuit. Note that the random number circuits for the first to seventh special symbols all have the same numerical range of random numbers (for example, "0 to 255").

Thereafter, a lighting lottery process for special symbols is executed (step SD204). In the lighting lottery process for special symbols, the lighting lottery table for special symbols is read from the main side ROM 64. In the lighting lottery table for special symbols, half of the random values that can be taken by the first to seventh random number circuits for special symbols are set as winning random values. Then, the random number value obtained in step SD203 is checked against the lighting lottery table for special symbols.

If the result of the lighting lottery process for the special figure is a lighting win (step SD205: YES), lighting information is displayed in the area corresponding to the current lottery target counter value among the clear target areas 371 in the work area 221 for specific control. is stored (step SD206). Note that each area provided corresponding to the lottery target counter is cleared to "0" when the process of step SD202 is executed.

Thereafter, the value of the lottery target counter is subtracted by 1 (step SD207), and it is determined whether the value of the lottery target counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step SD208). If a negative determination is made in step SD208, the processes in steps SD203 to SD207 are executed again.

When an affirmative determination is made in step SD208, initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SD209). The initial display data for the special figure is determined by the presence or absence of lighting information corresponding to each of the values of the lottery target counter from "1" to "7". For example, while the lighting information corresponding to the values of the lottery target counter are "7", "5", and "1" is stored, the lighting information corresponding to other values of the lottery target counter is not stored. In this case, the first light emitting section, the third light emitting section, and the seventh light emitting section of the special figure display section 37a are in a light emitting state, and the second light emitting section, the fourth light emitting section, the fifth light emitting section, and the sixth light emitting section are in a light emitting state. Initial display data for a special figure that enables initial display of a special figure that is in an unlit state is set in the first display data buffer 271.

By controlling the display of the special figure display section 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed in the special figure display section 37a. The display contents that can be displayed on the special figure display section 37a as an initial display include display contents that can be displayed on the special figure display section 37a in a normal game, as well as display contents that are not displayed on the special figure display section 37a in a normal game. It also includes the content. In addition, the display content that can be displayed on the special figure display section 37a as an initial display, and the display content that can be displayed on the special figure display section 37a in a normal game, is the display content that can be displayed on the special figure display section 37a as a final display in the game round with a losing result. This includes a winning display for a special figure that is displayed on the special figure display section 37a and a winning display for a special figure that is finally displayed on the special figure display section 37a in the winning result game round.

Thereafter, the lottery target counter provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "7", which corresponds to the number of light emitting parts provided in the ordinary figure display section 38a (step SD210).

Thereafter, a random number value is obtained from the random number circuit for common figures corresponding to the value of the lottery target counter (step SD211). In this embodiment, the main control board 61 is provided with a number of random number circuits for ordinary figures corresponding to the number of light emitting parts provided in the ordinary figure display section 38a. Specifically, since seven light emitting parts are provided in the ordinary figure display section 38a, seven random number circuits for ordinary figures are provided. These seven random number circuits for general figures are held at relatively short periods (for example, 1 microsecond to 7 microseconds) and each has a different period when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. It is configured to update a random value to be used, and even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped by supplying backup power. This configuration is capable of storing and holding the random value just before the random number.

When the seven light emitting parts of the ordinary figure display section 38a are used as the first to seventh light emitting parts, and the seven random number circuits for ordinary figures are used as the first to seventh random number circuits for ordinary figures, the first ordinary figure The random number circuit for ordinary figures corresponds to the first light emitting part, the second random number circuit for ordinary figures corresponds to the second light emitting part, and the third random number circuit for ordinary figures corresponds to the third light emitting part, The 4th random number circuit for ordinary figures corresponds to the 4th light emitting part, the 5th random number circuit for ordinary figures corresponds to the 5th light emitting part, and the 6th random number circuit for ordinary figures corresponds to the 6th light emitting part. The seventh general figure random number circuit corresponds to the seventh light emitting section. In addition, when the value of the lottery target counter is "7", it corresponds to the first light emitting part and the first random number circuit, and when the value of the lottery target counter is "6", it corresponds to the second random number circuit. It corresponds to the light emitting part and the second random number circuit for general figures, and if the value of the lottery target counter is "5", it corresponds to the third light emitting part and the third random number circuit for general figures, and it corresponds to the random number circuit for the third general figure. When the value of the counter is "4", it corresponds to the fourth light emitting part and the fourth random number circuit for general figures, and when the value of the lottery target counter is "3", it corresponds to the fifth light emitting part and the fourth random number circuit. It corresponds to the random number circuit for 5 ordinary figures, and when the value of the lottery target counter is "2", it corresponds to the 6th light emitting part and the 6th random number circuit for ordinary figures, and the value of the lottery target counter is "2". When it is "1", it corresponds to the seventh light emitting section and the seventh general random number circuit. Note that the numerical range of random numbers in the first to seventh random number circuits for common figures is the same (for example, "0 to 255").

Thereafter, a lighting lottery process for ordinary figures is executed (step SD212). In the lighting lottery process for ordinary figures, the lighting lottery table for ordinary figures is read from the main side ROM 64. Half of the random numbers that can be obtained in the first to seventh random number circuits for common symbols are set as winning random numbers in the lighting lottery table for common symbols. Then, the random number value obtained in step SD211 is checked against the lighting lottery table for ordinary figures.

If the result of the lighting lottery process for ordinary figures is a lighting win (step SD213: YES), lighting information is displayed in the area corresponding to the current lottery target counter value among the clear target areas 371 in the work area 221 for specific control. is stored (step SD214). Note that each area provided corresponding to the lottery target counter is cleared to "0" when the process of step SD210 is executed.

Thereafter, the value of the lottery target counter is subtracted by 1 (step SD215), and it is determined whether the value of the lottery target counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step SD216). If a negative determination is made in step SD216, the processes in steps SD211 to SD215 are executed again.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD216, the initial display data for ordinary figures is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SD217). The initial display data for the general figure is determined by the presence or absence of lighting information corresponding to the values of the lottery target counter of "1" to "7". For example, while the lighting information corresponding to the values of the lottery target counter are "7", "5", and "1" is stored, the lighting information corresponding to other values of the lottery target counter is not stored. In this case, the first light emitting section, the third light emitting section, and the seventh light emitting section of the normal figure display section 38a are in the light emitting state, and the second light emitting section, the fourth light emitting section, the fifth light emitting section, and the sixth light emitting section are in the light emitting state. Initial display data for the ordinary figure that enables execution of the initial display for the ordinary figure in the unlit state is set in the third display data buffer 273.

By controlling the display of the ordinary figure display section 38a using the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a. The display contents that can be displayed on the general figure display section 38a as an initial display include the display contents that can be displayed on the ordinary figure display section 38a during normal games, as well as the display contents that are not displayed on the general figure display section 38a during normal games. It also includes the content. In addition, as the display content that can be displayed on the normal pattern display section 38a as an initial display and that can be displayed on the normal pattern display section 38a during a normal game, the final display content that can be displayed on the normal pattern display section 38a in the fluctuating display time of a losing result. This includes a winning display for a normal pattern that is displayed in a regular manner, and a win display for a normal pattern that is finally displayed on the normal pattern display section 38a in the display times of fluctuating winning results.

After executing the processes from step SD202 to step SD217, the initial display flag 375 provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SD218).

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD201 or if the process in step SD218 is executed, the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SD219). . Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly determines whether or not to start the display control of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b. This is a flag for identification by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not control the display of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b. , when the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the regular symbol reservation display section 38b.

As in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing is after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started. The timing is earlier than the timing at which the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) for executing display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed for the first time. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 204) that is executed after the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed. As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of operating power is maintained. After the processing at the start (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed, display control of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b is started.

In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 204), if either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185) as already explained, the special image is stored in the first display data buffer 271. At the same time, initial display data for ordinary figures is set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if display control of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a is started immediately after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, then the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section The initial display will start immediately after the display contents immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped at step 38a. Then, the player who visually observes such a change in display content will start the initial display on the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a in a situation where either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process has been executed. You will be able to understand what happened. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 204), the display start flag is set after the process for setting the display data is completed. is set to "1", and the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a start displaying. This makes it possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

On the other hand, if the initial display flag 375 is set to "1" (step SD201: YES), the processes from step SD202 to step SD218 are not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 stores the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, and the third display data buffer 273 stores the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. The display data stored in is stored as is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the special figure display section 37a is started, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. A display corresponding to the above is displayed on the special figure display section 37a. In addition, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the general figure display section 38a is started, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. A corresponding display is performed on the ordinary figure display section 38a.

As described in detail above, when the first RAM clearing process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) or the second RAM clearing process is executed in the setting value update process, the initial Since the display flag 375 is not set to "1", when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a is started, these special figures are not set. Initial display is started in the figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a. The initial display on the special figure display section 37a is when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 and the start condition for the game round is satisfied, so that a picture is displayed on the special figure display section 37a. continues until the variable display starts. The initial display on the normal figure display section 38a continues until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the symbol on the normal figure display section 38a starts. It should be noted that since the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" even at the time of shipment from the factory, the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a will start displaying out of place.

Regardless of whether the first RAM clearing process is executed as described above or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed, the display on the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a is When the start is started, the initial display is performed on the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a, and the supply of operating power is started, and the display is started on the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a. Even if you check the display contents of these display units 37a and 38a when the process is started, it is not possible to know which of the first RAM clearing process and the setting value updating process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are checked when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the setting value update process has been executed. It becomes possible to do so.

If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process are not executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the special figure display section 37a starts displaying. In this case, the special figure display section 37a starts displaying the display contents immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, and when the regular figure display section 38a starts displaying, the supply of operating power stops. The display on the ordinary figure display section 38a starts with the display contents immediately before being displayed. In other words, if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the special figure display section 37a and the general figure The display content of the display unit 38a depends on the situation at the timing when the supply of operating power is stopped, and the display content varies. On the other hand, if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the special figure display section 37a and the normal The initial display is determined by lottery and displayed on the diagram display section 38a. As a result, even if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), when the supply of operating power starts. As in the case where the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process were not executed in the process (steps SC201 to SC223), the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are It becomes possible to diversify. Therefore, even if you check the display when the supply of operating power is started and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a is started, either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is This makes it difficult to identify what has been executed.

In particular, when determining the display content of the initial display, the lighting lottery process is executed for each light emitting part for each of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a. This makes it possible to diversify the display contents that can be selected as the initial display.

Note that even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the supply of operating power is started, the processes of steps SD202 to SD218 of the display start process (FIG. 204) are executed. Good too. In this case, even if the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are checked when the supply of operating power is started, the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not completed when the supply of operating power is started. It becomes possible to make it impossible to specify whether any of them has been executed. In addition, in this configuration, if the special figure display section 37a is in the middle of displaying a variable pattern immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, or if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the display will start. A configuration may also be adopted in which the display of the display contents before the supply of operating power is stopped is resumed on the special figure display section 37a by not executing the processing of steps SD202 to step SD209 of the processing (FIG. 204). . In addition, if the general figure display section 38a is in the process of displaying a changing pattern immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, or if the normal power supply is in the middle of being disconnected, the display start process ( By not executing the processes of steps SD210 to SD217 in FIG. 204), the display of the display contents before the supply of operating power is stopped may be resumed on the special figure display section 37a.

In addition, in the special figure lighting lottery process (step SD204) of the display start process (FIG. 204), a lottery is not performed to determine whether each light emitting part of the special figure display section 37a is individually lit. , 2 or 3, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to turn on the lights in units of a predetermined plurality of units. In addition, in the lighting lottery process (step SD212) for ordinary figures in the display start process (FIG. 204), a lottery is not performed to determine whether each light emitting part of the ordinary figure display section 38a is to be turned on individually. , 2 or 3, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to turn on the lights in units of a predetermined plurality of units.

Furthermore, when the supply of operating power is started and the first RAM clearing process is executed, steps SD202 to SD217 of the display start process (FIG. 204) are executed, while the second RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, steps SD202 to SD217 of the display start process (FIG. 204) may not be executed. Furthermore, when the supply of operating power is started and the second RAM clearing process is executed, steps SD202 to SD217 of the display start process (FIG. 204) are executed, while the first RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, steps SD202 to SD217 of the display start process (FIG. 204) may not be executed.

<62nd embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the 58th embodiment in the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the fifty-eighth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the 58th embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the setting value update process in this embodiment executed at step SC216 in the main process of the main CPU 63 (FIG. 185). Note that the processing from step SD301 to step SD316 in the setting value update processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, interrupt permission is set (step SD301). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt cycle.

In this embodiment, in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) are basically prohibited. , interrupts are permitted in the setting confirmation process (step SC213) and the setting value update process (FIG. 205). Therefore, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) and the setting value update process (see FIG. 205) are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the first timer interrupt process (see FIG. 196) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) are prohibited and the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 205) is executed, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 196) is prohibited. ) and second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) are permitted. However, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the setting value update process (Fig. 205) is being executed, the start-up processing flag is set to "1", so the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 196) is started, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 196), the processes for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, while the processes for proceeding with the game are executed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) is ended without any process being executed.

Thereafter, on the condition that the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1", the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SD302). By setting the setting update display flag to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step SC402 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188), and the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is performed. (Step SC403) is executed. The contents of the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update are the same as in the forty-fifth embodiment. By executing this process, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124(a), a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and the pachinko machine 10 being selected as an update target are displayed. The currently set values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Thereafter, initial settings at the time of starting are performed (step SD303). In the initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". If the power outage flag is not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not performed appropriately during the previous power outage (step SC205: NO), the game stop flag is set to the specific control work area 221 and If the checksums do not match because the storage state of information in at least one of the stack areas 222 for specific control has changed since the last time the power was cut off (step SC206: NO), or the setting reference area 341 This flag is set to "1" in step SC220 of the main process (FIG. 185) when the setting value corresponding to the information stored in is not within the normal range (step SC207: NO). When the game stop flag is set to "1", steps SC701 to SC706 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196), and when an affirmative determination is made in step SC707, steps SC708 to SC706 are executed. Do not execute the process of SC722. As a result, when an information abnormality in the main RAM 65 as described above occurs, processing for monitoring power outages, updating various counters, and monitoring fraud is executed, while processing for advancing the game is executed. It will not be done. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" in the process of step SD303, the state in which the occurrence of information abnormality in the main side RAM 65 is specified is canceled when the setting value update process (FIG. 205) is executed. becomes possible.

Thereafter, "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (see FIG. 154) in the specific control work area 221 (step SD304). The setting update area 342 is a storage area in which information about setting values that are being updated in the setting value updating process (FIG. 205) is stored, as in the forty-fifth embodiment. When numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target (selection target or change target) becomes "setting 1". If numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 2". If numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 3". When numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 4". If numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is "setting 5". If numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is "setting 6".

By setting "1" in the setting update area 342 in step SD304, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 1." That is, in this embodiment, no matter what the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is, when the setting value update process (FIG. 205) is started, the setting value to be updated will be "setting 1".

Thereafter, an update start command is sent to the audio emission control device 81 (step SD305). Upon receiving the update start command, the audio emission control device 81 displays an image indicating that the setting value update process (FIG. 205) is being executed, and an image for making it possible to recognize the operation details for changing the setting value. , and the display control device 82 is controlled to display an image on the symbol display device 41 so that the operation details for terminating the setting value update process (FIG. 205) can be recognized. This allows the game hall administrator to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and the operation details and setting value update process necessary to change the setting value (Figure 205) It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the details of the operation required to end the game. In addition to or instead of the notification being executed by the symbol display device 41, the notification may be executed by at least one of the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54. Further, an external output indicating that the setting value update process (FIG. 205) is being executed may be configured to be sent to a device external to the pachinko machine 10, such as a management computer of a game hall.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is one of "1" to "6" (step SD306). If it is not one of "1" to "6" (step SD306: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SD307). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 1."

When an affirmative determination is made in step SD306 or when the process in step SD307 is executed, it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SD308). Specifically, it is determined whether the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion section 68a has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. do. Therefore, the OFF state is maintained not only when the setting key insertion section 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting value update process is started in a situation where the setting key insertion section 68a is in the OFF state. In this case, a negative determination is made in step SD308.

If a negative determination is made in step SD308, the value in the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 (step SD310), provided that the reset button 68c is pressed (step SD309: YES). Thereby, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the setting value is updated to one level higher. Further, if the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SD309: NO) or if the value in the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1, the process returns to step SD306, but the settings are updated in step SD306. If it is determined that the value in the area 342 for setting is 7 or more, "1" is set in the area 342 for setting update in step SD307. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6", the state returns to "Setting 1".

When it is determined that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SD308: YES), the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342 is stored in the setting reference area 341. By determining whether or not the setting value is greater than or equal to the setting value corresponding to the information, the setting value that is greater than or equal to the advantageousness of the setting value that was selected before the current setting value update process (Fig. 205) was started is determined. It is determined whether it has been selected in the current setting value update process (FIG. 205) (step SD311). When an affirmative determination is made in step SD311, the rising expectation flag provided in the clear target area 371 in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SD312). The increase expectation flag indicates whether or not a setting value that is higher than or equal to the advantageous value of the setting value selected up to that point in the processing at the start of the current supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is set on the main side. This is a flag for identification by the CPU 63.

If a negative determination is made in step SD311, or if the process in step SD312 is executed, the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is overwritten in the setting reference area 341 (step SD313). As a result, the setting value information updated in the current setting value update process (FIG. 205) is set in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is changed to the current setting value. This is the setting value of the pachinko machine 10.

Thereafter, interrupt prohibition is set (step SD314). As a result, when ending the setting value update process (Figure 205) and returning to the process (steps SC201 to SC223) at the time of starting the supply of operating power in the main process (Figure 185), the first timer interrupt process (Figure 205) is completed. 196) and second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) are prohibited.

Thereafter, a second RAM clearing process is executed (step SD315). In the second RAM clearing process, similarly to the first RAM clearing process (step SC218) of the main process (FIG. 185), the area provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0", and the initial Run the settings. It should be noted that the area in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (that is, the setting reference area 341) is provided not in the clearing target area 371 but in the non-clearing target area 372.

Thereafter, a return command at the time of update is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step SD316). By receiving the return command at the time of update, the audio light emission control device 81 specifies that the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) in the main side CPU 63 has ended, and also specifies that the current operating power supply is completed. It is specified that the setting value update process (FIG. 205) has been executed in the process at the start of supply (steps SC201 to SC223). Then, similar to the forty-ninth embodiment described above, the process corresponding to the reception of the return command at the time of update is executed.

FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step SD401 to step SD413 in the display start process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

If the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" (step SD401: NO), check whether the rise expectation flag of the area to be cleared 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1". Determination is made (step SD402). If the rising expectation flag is not set to "1" (step SD402: NO), the first display distribution table 391 for special symbols provided in the main side ROM 64 is read out (step SD403), and the rising expectation flag is set to "1". 1" is set (step SD402: YES), the second display distribution table 392 for special symbols provided in the main side ROM 64 is read out (step SD404).

FIG. 207(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first display distribution table 391 for special figures, and FIG. 207(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second display distribution table 392 for special figures. It is a diagram. Both the first display distribution table 391 for special figures and the second display distribution table 392 for special figures include the first initial display data for special figures, the first initial display data for special figures, and the second display distribution table 392 for special figures. There are second initial display data and third initial display data for special figures.

The first initial display data for the special figure is data for displaying the first initial display for the special figure on the special figure display section 37a, and the second initial display data for the special figure is the second initial display data for the special figure. This is data for displaying the display on the special figure display section 37a, and the third initial display data for the special figure is data for displaying the third initial display for the special figure on the special figure display section 37a. The display contents of the first initial display for the special figure, the second initial display for the special figure, and the third initial display for the special figure are different from each other.

The first initial display data for special figures, the second initial display data for special figures, and the third initial display data for special figures are used in the stop result setting process (step This is display data that is not selected in either S507) or the stop result setting process for the off result (step S509). Therefore, the first initial display for the special figure, the second initial display for the special figure, and the third initial display for the special figure are different from the display contents that can be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 37a in the game round. ing. Furthermore, the first initial display for special figures, the second initial display for special figures, and the third initial display for special figures are to be displayed when a variable display of symbols is performed in the special figure display section 37a in a game round. This is the display content that is not selected as . As a result, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and when the display on the special figure display section 37a starts, the first initial display for the special figure, the second initial display for the special figure, and the third initial display for the special figure are started. If any of the initial displays is performed, either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is performed in the process at the start of the current supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223). It becomes possible to understand what has been executed.

As shown in FIGS. 207(a) and 207(b), each of the first display distribution table 391 for special symbols and the second display distribution table 392 for special symbols includes - A numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure is set for each of the third initial display data. The initial display counter 381 for the special figure is provided in the non-clear target area 372 as in the above-described 58th embodiment, so when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the initial display counter 381 is stored in the main RAM 65. If the supply of backup power is continued, the value immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped without being initialized even if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed. The state in which the information is stored is maintained. Moreover, the numerical information of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure is updated in step SC706 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196), similarly to the above-mentioned 58th embodiment.

In the first display distribution table 391 for special figures, as shown in FIG. The numerical range is set, and the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure of "40 to 54" is set for the second initial display data for the special figure, and the third initial display data for the special figure is set. A numerical value range of "55 to 59" for the initial display counter 381 for the special figure is set for the display data. In other words, in the first display distribution table 391 for special figures, the selection probability of the first initial display data for special figures is 2/3, which means that the selection probability is the highest, and the second initial display data for special figures has the highest selection probability. The selection probability of the data is 1/4, which gives the second highest selection probability, and the selection probability of the third initial display data for the special figure is 1/12, which gives the lowest selection probability.

In the second display distribution table 392 for special figures, as shown in FIG. A numerical range is set, and the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure of "10 to 39" is set for the second initial display data for the special figure, and the third initial display data for the special figure is set. A numerical range of "40 to 59" for the initial display counter 381 for the special figure is set for the display data. In other words, in the second display distribution table 392 for special figures, the selection probability of the second initial display data for special figures is 1/2, which means that the selection probability is highest, and the third initial display data for special figures has the highest selection probability. The selection probability of the data is 1/3, which is the second highest selection probability, and the selection probability of the first initial display data for the special figure is 1/6, which is the lowest selection probability.

Returning to the explanation of the display start process (FIG. 206), after executing the process of step SD403 or the process of step SD404, a lottery process of the initial display data for special symbols is executed (step SD405). In the lottery process of the initial display data for the special figure, the current numerical information of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure is acquired. Then, the acquired numerical information is read out from the main side ROM 64 in step SD403 as the first display distribution table 391 for special symbols, or in step SD404 as the second display distribution table for special symbols read out from the main side ROM64. 392, the display data to be displayed this time can be selected from among the first initial display data for special figures, the second initial display data for special figures, and the third initial display data for special figures. select.

The display data selected in the lottery process of initial display data for special figures is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SD406). By controlling the display of the special figure display section 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed in the special figure display section 37a. That is, when the first initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first initial display for the special figure is performed in the special figure display section 37a, and the first display data buffer 271 When the second initial display data for the special figure is set in the special figure display section 37a, the second initial display for the special figure is performed in the first display data buffer 271, and the third initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271. When the display data is set, a third initial display for the special figure is performed on the special figure display section 37a.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the rise expectation flag of the area to be cleared 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SD407). If the rising expectation flag is not set to "1" (step SD407: NO), the first display distribution table 393 for ordinary figures provided in the main side ROM 64 is read out (step SD408), and the rising expectation flag is set to "1". If "1" is set (step SD407: YES), the second display distribution table 394 for ordinary figures provided in the main side ROM 64 is read out (step SD409).

FIG. 207(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first display distribution table 393 for ordinary figures, and FIG. 207(d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second display distribution table 394 for ordinary figures. It is a diagram. Both the first display distribution table 393 for ordinary figures and the second display distribution table 394 for ordinary figures include the first initial display data for ordinary figures, the first initial display data for ordinary figures, and the second display distribution table 394 for ordinary figures. There are second initial display data and third initial display data for ordinary figures.

The first initial display data for ordinary figures is data for displaying the first initial display for ordinary figures on the ordinary figure display section 38a, and the second initial display data for ordinary figures is data for displaying the first initial display for ordinary figures. This is data for displaying the display on the ordinary figure display section 38a, and the third initial display data for ordinary figures is data for displaying the third initial display for ordinary figures on the ordinary figure display section 38a. The display contents of the first initial display for ordinary figures, the second initial display for ordinary figures, and the third initial display for ordinary figures are different from each other.

The first initial display data for ordinary figures, the second initial display data for ordinary figures, and the third initial display data for ordinary figures are generated in the ordinary figures and electric power control process (step SC716) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196). ), the result of the general electricity opening lottery executed using the general electricity accessory opening counter C4 in order to determine whether or not to open the general electricity accessory 34a is a losing result and a winning result. This is display data that is not selected in any case. Therefore, the first initial display for ordinary figures, the second initial display for ordinary figures, and the third initial display for ordinary figures are the display contents that can be finally stopped and displayed on the ordinary figure display section 38a during the variable display times. It's different. Furthermore, the first initial display for ordinary figures, the second initial display for ordinary figures, and the third initial display for ordinary figures are displayed when the variable display of the picture is performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a in the variable display time. This is display content that is not selected as a target. As a result, the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, and when the display on the ordinary figure display section 38a starts, the first initial display for ordinary figures, the second initial display for ordinary figures, and the third initial display for ordinary figures are displayed. If any of the initial displays is performed, either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is performed in the process at the start of the current supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223). It becomes possible to understand what has been executed.

As shown in FIGS. 207(c) and 207(d), each of the first display distribution table 393 for ordinary figures and the second display distribution table 394 for ordinary figures includes the first display distribution table for ordinary figures. - A numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures is set for each of the third initial display data. Since the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures is provided in the non-clear target area 372 as in the above-described 58th embodiment, when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is stopped, the initial display counter 382 is stored in the main side RAM 65. If the supply of backup power is continued, the value immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped without being initialized even if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed. The state in which the information is stored is maintained. Further, the numerical information of the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures is updated at step SC708 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196), similarly to the fifty-eighth embodiment.

In the first display distribution table 393 for ordinary figures, as shown in FIG. A numerical range is set, and the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for the common figure of "30 to 49" is set for the second initial display data for the common figure, and the third initial display data for the common figure is set. A numerical value range of "50 to 59" for the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures is set for the display data. In other words, in the first display distribution table 393 for ordinary figures, the selection probability of the first initial display data for ordinary figures is 1/2, which means that the selection probability is the highest, and the second initial display data for ordinary figures has the highest selection probability. The selection probability of the data is 1/3, which is the second highest selection probability, and the selection probability of the third initial display data for ordinary figures is 1/6, which is the lowest selection probability.

In the second display distribution table 394 for ordinary figures, as shown in FIG. The numerical range is set, and the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for the common figure of "20 to 29" is set for the second initial display data for the common figure, and the third initial display data for the common figure is set. A numerical range of "30 to 59" for the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures is set for the display data. In other words, in the second display distribution table 394 for ordinary figures, the selection probability of the third initial display data for ordinary figures is 1/2, which means that the selection probability is the highest, and the first initial display data for ordinary figures has the highest selection probability. The selection probability of the data is 1/3, which is the second highest selection probability, and the selection probability of the second initial display data for ordinary figures is 1/6, which is the lowest selection probability.

Returning to the explanation of the display start process (FIG. 206), after executing the process of step SD408 or the process of step SD409, a lottery process of initial display data for ordinary figures is executed (step SD410). In the lottery process for the initial display data for ordinary figures, the current numerical information of the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures is acquired. Then, the acquired numerical information is read out from the main side ROM 64 in step SD408 as the first display distribution table 393 for regular figures, or in step SD409 as the second display distribution table for ordinary figures read out from the main side ROM64. 394, the display data to be displayed this time can be selected from among the first initial display data for ordinary figures, the second initial display data for ordinary figures, and the third initial display data for ordinary figures. select.

The display data selected in the initial display data lottery process for ordinary figures is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SD411). By controlling the display of the ordinary figure display section 38a using the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a. That is, when the first initial display data for a general figure is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first initial display for a general figure is performed in the general figure display section 38a, and the third display data buffer 273 When the second initial display data for the ordinary figure is set in the ordinary figure display section 38a, the second initial display for the ordinary figure is performed, and the third initial display data for the ordinary figure is stored in the third display data buffer 273. When the display data is set, the third initial display for the ordinary figure is performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a.

After executing the processes from step SD402 to step SD411, the initial display flag 375 provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SD412).

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD401 or if the process in step SD412 is executed, the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SD413). . Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly determines whether or not to start the display control of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b. This is a flag for identification by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not control the display of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b. , when the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the regular symbol reservation display section 38b.

As in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing is after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started. The timing is earlier than the timing at which the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) for executing display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed for the first time. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 206) that is executed after the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed. As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of operating power is maintained. After the processing at the start (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed, display control of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b is started.

In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 206), if either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185) as already explained, the special image is stored in the first display data buffer 271. At the same time, any one of the first to third initial display data for ordinary figures is set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if display control of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a is started immediately after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, then the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section The initial display will start immediately after the display contents immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped at step 38a. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 206), the display start flag is set after the process for setting the display data is completed. is set to "1", and the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a start displaying. This makes it possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

On the other hand, if the initial display flag 375 is set to "1" (step SD401: YES), the processes from step SD402 to step SD412 are not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 stores the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, and the third display data buffer 273 stores the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. The display data stored in is stored as is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the special figure display section 37a is started, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. A display corresponding to the above is displayed on the special figure display section 37a. In addition, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the general figure display section 38a is started, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. A corresponding display is performed on the ordinary figure display section 38a.

As described in detail above, when the first RAM clearing process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) or the second RAM clearing process is executed in the setting value update process, the initial Since the display flag 375 is not set to "1", when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a is started, these special figures are not set. Initial display is started in the figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a. The initial display on the special figure display section 37a is when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 and the start condition for the game round is satisfied, so that a picture is displayed on the special figure display section 37a. continues until the variable display starts. The initial display on the normal figure display section 38a continues until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the symbol on the normal figure display section 38a starts. It should be noted that since the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" even at the time of shipment from the factory, the initial display will be started in the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a.

Regardless of whether the first RAM clearing process is executed as described above or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed, the display on the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a is When the start is started, the initial display is performed on the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a, and the supply of operating power is started, and the display is started on the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a. Even if you check the display contents of these display units 37a and 38a when the process is started, it is impossible to know which of the first RAM clearing process and the setting value updating process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are checked when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the setting value update process has been executed. It becomes possible to do so.

On the other hand, when the set value update process (FIG. 205) is executed and a set value that is higher than the advantage of the previous set value is selected in the set value update process (FIG. 205), the special figure display section 37a If the second display distribution table 392 for special figures is selected as the table for determining the initial display to be performed, but the setting value update process (FIG. 205) is not executed or the setting value is updated. In the process (FIG. 205), if a set value that is higher than the advantage of the previous set value is not selected, the first display for the special figure is used as a table for determining the initial display to be performed on the special figure display section 37a. Display distribution table 391 is selected. The initial display selection mode is different between the first display distribution table 391 for these special symbols and the second display distribution table 392 for special symbols. As a result, by checking the contents of the initial display when the supply of operating power is started and the display of the special figure display section 37a is started, a set value that is higher than the advantage of the previous set value is newly set. It becomes possible to predict whether or not the

Similarly, when the set value update process (Figure 205) is executed and a set value that is higher than the advantage of the previous set value is selected in the set value update process (Figure 205), the If the second display distribution table 394 for ordinary figures is selected as the table for determining the initial display to be performed on the display section 38a, but the setting value update process (FIG. 205) is not executed, or In the setting value update process (FIG. 205), if a setting value that is higher than or equal to the advantage of the previous setting value is not selected, the general drawing table is used as a table for determining the initial display to be performed by the general drawing display section 38a. The first display distribution table 393 is selected. The initial display selection mode is different between the first display distribution table 393 for ordinary figures and the second display distribution table 394 for ordinary figures. As a result, by checking the contents of the initial display when the supply of operating power is started and the display of the general figure display section 38a is started, a set value that is higher than the advantage of the previous set value is newly set. It becomes possible to predict whether or not the

Furthermore, as described above, when the supply of operating power is started and the display is started, it is possible to predict whether or not a new set value has been set that is more advantageous than the previous set value based on the contents of the initial display. There are a plurality of display sections such as a special figure display section 37a and a regular figure display section 38a as possible display sections. As a result, there will be more information to use when predicting whether or not a new set value has been set that is higher than the advantage of the previous set value, making it possible to improve the accuracy of the prediction by the player. .

In addition, in the setting value update process (Fig. 205), if a setting value that is higher than the advantage of the previous setting value is set, the rising expectation flag is set to "1" and the special symbol is used when drawing the initial display data. It is not limited to the configuration in which the second display distribution table 392 or the second display distribution table 394 for ordinary figures is referred to, and in the setting value update process (FIG. 205), the setting value is more advantageous than the previous setting value. When the set value is set, the rising expectation flag is set to "1", and the second display distribution table 392 for special symbols or the second display distribution table 394 for regular symbols is referred to when drawing the initial display data. When the setting value update process (FIG. 205) is executed, the increase expectation flag is set to "1" and the initial display data is drawn by lottery regardless of which setting value is newly set. At this time, the second display distribution table 392 for special figures or the second display distribution table 394 for regular figures may be referred to.

In addition, the initial display data for a special figure that can be selected when the first display distribution table 391 for special figures is referred to and the special figure that can be selected when the second display distribution table 392 for special figures is referred to. The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which the initial display data for the special figure completely matches the initial display data for the special figure set in the first display distribution table 391 for the special figure and the initial display data for the special figure. A configuration may be adopted in which the initial display data for special symbols set in the second display distribution table 392 does not completely match. In this case, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a will clearly differ depending on whether "1" is set to the rising expectation flag in the setting value update process (FIG. 205). Therefore, by checking the display content of the special figure display section 37a when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to clearly identify whether or not a set value that is higher than the advantage of the previous set value has been set. becomes possible.

In addition, although initial display data for special figures that are common to each of the first display distribution table 391 for special figures and the second display distribution table 392 for special figures is set, It is also possible to have a configuration in which there is initial display data for special symbols that is set in one of the first display distribution table 391 and the second display distribution table 392 for special symbols and not in the other. In this case, if the initial display corresponding to the initial display data for special figures that is set only in the first display distribution table 391 for special figures is executed in the special figure display section 37a, the settings up to that point It becomes possible to specify that a set value that is equal to or higher than the advantageous value has not been set. On the other hand, when the initial display corresponding to the initial display data for a special figure set only in the second display distribution table 392 for special figures is executed in the special figure display section 37a, the settings up to that point are It becomes possible to specify that a set value that is higher than the advantageous value of the value has been set.

Further, the initial display data for ordinary figures that can be selected when the first display distribution table 393 for ordinary figures is referred to, and the ordinary figures that can be selected when the second display distribution table 394 for ordinary figures is referred to. The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which the initial display data for ordinary figures completely matches the initial display data for ordinary figures set in the first display distribution table 393 for ordinary figures, and the initial display data for ordinary figures set in the first display distribution table 393 for ordinary figures A configuration may also be adopted in which the initial display data for regular figures set in the second display distribution table 394 does not completely match. In this case, the display contents of the ordinary figure display section 38a will clearly differ depending on whether "1" is set in the rising expectation flag in the setting value update process (FIG. 205). Therefore, by checking the display content of the general figure display section 38a when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to clearly identify whether or not a set value that is higher than the advantage of the previous set value has been set. becomes possible.

In addition, although common initial display data for ordinary figures is set for each of the first display distribution table 393 for ordinary figures and the second display distribution table 394 for ordinary figures, It is also possible to have a configuration in which there is initial display data for ordinary figures that is set in one of the first display distribution table 393 for ordinary figures and the second display distribution table 394 for ordinary figures and not set in the other. In this case, if the initial display corresponding to the initial display data for ordinary figures set only in the first display distribution table 393 for ordinary figures is executed in the ordinary figure display section 38a, the previous settings It becomes possible to specify that a set value that is equal to or higher than the advantageous value has not been set. On the other hand, when the initial display corresponding to the initial display data for ordinary figures set only in the second display distribution table 394 for ordinary figures is executed in the ordinary figure display section 38a, the previous settings It becomes possible to specify that a set value that is higher than the advantageous value of the value has been set.

In addition, the initial display data for the special figure is not limited to the configuration determined by lottery, and the initial display data for the special figure selected when the rising expectation flag is set to 1 is 1. In addition to only one type, there is only one type of initial display data for the special figure that is selected when the rising expectation flag is not set to "1", and furthermore, the initial display data for each special figure is different. A configuration may also be used. In this case, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a will differ depending on whether or not a setting value that is higher than the advantage of the previous setting value is set.

In addition, the initial display data for ordinary figures is not limited to the configuration determined by lottery, and the initial display data for ordinary figures selected when "1" is set in the rising expectation flag is 1. In addition to only one type, only one type of initial display data for common figures is selected when the rise expectation flag is not set to "1", and furthermore, the initial display data for each common figure is different. A configuration may also be used. In this case, the display contents of the ordinary map display section 38a will differ depending on whether or not a setting value that is higher than the advantage of the previous setting value is set.

<63rd embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is restarted are different from the above-mentioned 62nd embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the sixty-second embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the sixty-second embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step SD501 to step SD514 in the display start process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

If the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" (step SD501: NO), a lottery process for initial display is executed (step SD502). In the initial display lottery process, the same processes as steps SD402 to SD411 of the display start process (FIG. 206) in the sixty-second embodiment are executed. As a result, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed, the display of the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a is started in the same manner as in the 62nd embodiment. Initial display is performed in case. Thereafter, the initial display flag 375 is set to "1" (step SD503).

If the initial display flag 375 is set to "1" (step SD501: YES), information indicating whether a game round is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored. By referring to the storage area where the game is played, it is determined whether or not the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power was stopped during the execution of the game round (step SD504). In the storage area, information indicating that the game session is being executed when the game session is started is stored, and information indicating that the game session is being executed when the game session is ended is stored in the memory area. be removed from the area. Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the information in the storage area is stored and retained as long as backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, and the information in the main CPU 63 is maintained. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is resumed, the memory is retained.

In addition, by referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored, the operating power is It is determined whether or not the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power has been stopped (step SD505). The storage area stores information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed when the opening/closing execution mode is ended. Information is erased from the storage area. Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the information in the storage area is stored and retained as long as backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, and the information in the main CPU 63 is maintained. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is resumed, the memory is retained.

If the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was neither during the execution of the game round nor during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode (step SD504 and step SD505: NO), the first display shaker for special symbols is read from the main side ROM 64. The minute table 391 is read out (step SD506). Then, a lottery process for the initial display data for special symbols is executed (step SD507). In the lottery process of the initial display data for the special figure, the current numerical information of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure is acquired. Then, by comparing the acquired numerical information with the first display distribution table 391 for special figures read from the main side ROM 64 in step SD506, the display data to be displayed this time is Select from among the first initial display data, the second initial display data for special figures, and the third initial display data for special figures.

The display data selected in the lottery process of initial display data for special figures is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SD508). By controlling the display of the special figure display section 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed in the special figure display section 37a. That is, when the first initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first initial display for the special figure is performed in the special figure display section 37a, and the first display data buffer 271 When the second initial display data for the special figure is set in the special figure display section 37a, the second initial display for the special figure is performed in the first display data buffer 271, and the third initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271. When the display data is set, a third initial display for the special figure is performed on the special figure display section 37a.

On the other hand, if the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was during the execution of the game round or the execution of the opening/closing execution mode (step SD504 or step SD505: YES), the initial display data for the special figure is Since the first display data buffer 271 is not set, the display data stored before the supply of operating power is stopped remains stored in the first display data buffer 271 as is. Therefore, when the display on the special figure display section 37a is started, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped will be resumed as they are.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD504, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD505, or if the process in step SD508 is executed, the change in the general figure display section 38a in the clearing target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control By referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the image is being displayed is stored, the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of the operating power is stopped during the fluctuating display of the picture in the ordinary figure display section 38a. It is determined whether the situation is the same (step SD509). The storage area stores information indicating that the fluctuating display of the pattern is being executed in the fuji display section 38a when the fluctuating display of the picture is started on the fuji display section 38a. When the fluctuating display of the picture is ended in step , information indicating that the fluctuating display of the picture is being executed in the ordinary picture display section 38a is deleted from the storage area. Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the information in the storage area is stored and retained as long as backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, and the information in the main CPU 63 is maintained. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is resumed, the memory is retained.

In addition, by referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the general power open state is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored, it is possible to It is determined whether or not the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power was stopped (step SD510). This storage area stores information indicating that the general power open state is being executed when the general power open state is started, and information indicating that the general power open state is being executed when the general power open state is ended. Information indicating that there is is erased from the storage area. Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the information in the storage area is stored and retained as long as backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, and the information in the main CPU 63 is maintained. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is resumed, the memory is retained.

If the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was neither during the execution of the fluctuating display of the picture in the general figure display section 38a nor during the execution of the general power open state (step SD509 and step SD510: NO), the main side ROM 64 The first display distribution table 393 for ordinary figures is read from (step SD511). Then, a lottery process for the initial display data for ordinary figures is executed (step SD512). In the lottery process for the initial display data for ordinary figures, the current numerical information of the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures is acquired. Then, by comparing the obtained numerical information with the first display distribution table 393 for ordinary figures read from the main side ROM 64 in step SD511, the display data to be displayed this time is It is selected from among the first initial display data, the second initial display data for ordinary figures, and the third initial display data for ordinary figures.

The display data selected in the initial display data lottery process for general figures is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SD513). By controlling the display of the ordinary figure display section 38a using the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a. That is, when the first initial display data for a general figure is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first initial display for a general figure is performed in the general figure display section 38a, and the third display data buffer 273 When the second initial display data for the ordinary figure is set in the ordinary figure display section 38a, the second initial display for the ordinary figure is performed, and the third initial display data for the ordinary figure is stored in the third display data buffer 273. When the display data is set, the third initial display for the ordinary figure is performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a.

On the other hand, if the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was either during the execution of the fluctuating display of the picture on the general figure display section 38a or during the execution of the general power open state (step SD509 or step SD510: YES), Since the initial display data for the ordinary figure is not set in the third display data buffer 273, the display data stored before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as is in the third display data buffer 273. . Therefore, when the display on the ordinary figure display section 38a is started, the display contents of the ordinary figure display section 38a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped will be resumed as they are.

If the process of step SD503 is executed, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD509, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD510, or if the process of step SD513 is executed, the area to be cleared in the work area 221 for specific control 371 is set to "1" (step SD514). Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly determines whether or not to start the display control of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b. This is a flag for identification by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not control the display of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b. , when the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the regular symbol reservation display section 38b.

As in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing is after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started. The timing is earlier than the timing at which the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) for executing display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed for the first time. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 202) that is executed after the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed. As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of operating power is maintained. After the processing at the start (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed, display control of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b is started.

In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 202), even if both the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the first display data buffer 271 is In addition to setting initial display data for special figures, initial display data for regular figures may be set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if display control of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a is started immediately after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, then the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section The initial display will start immediately after the display contents immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped at step 38a. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 208), the display start flag is set after the process for setting the display data is completed. is set to "1" and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a is started. This makes it possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

According to the above configuration, even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the supply of operating power is continued. If the stopped situation is neither during the execution of the game round nor during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, when the special figure display section 37a starts displaying, the special figure display section 37a displays the initial information. Display starts. In addition, even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the situation in which the supply of operating power is stopped When the normal figure display section 38a is neither in the process of displaying a fluctuating picture pattern nor in the state where the general power is open, the normal figure display section 38a starts displaying the normal figure. Initial display starts in section 38a. As already explained, even when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the special figure display section 37a and Initial display is performed on the general map display section 38a. As a result, even if it is confirmed that the initial display is being performed on the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a when the supply of operating power is started, the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are It becomes possible to make it impossible to specify that either one has been executed.

In addition, when the initial display is performed in the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a when the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process are not executed, the special figure Reference is made to the first display distribution table 391 for ordinary figures and the first display distribution table 393 for ordinary figures. As a result, only when the setting value update process (Fig. 205) is executed and a new setting value that is higher than the advantage of the previous setting value is set, the initial display data is used for the special drawing process. It becomes possible to refer to the second display distribution table 392 for normal figures and the second display distribution table 394 for ordinary figures. Therefore, even if the configuration is such that it is not possible to specify that either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process has been executed as described above, the supply of operating power is started and the special figure display section By checking the contents of the initial display when the display of 37a and normal figure display section 38a is started, the player can predict whether or not a new set value has been set that is higher than the advantage of the previous set value. It becomes possible to do so.

On the other hand, if the situation in which the supply of operating power is stopped is either during the execution of a game round or during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, the first RAM is If the clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed, the special figure display unit 37a is configured so that when the display starts on the special figure display unit 37a, the display contents are the same as those displayed immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. The display of 37a is controlled. In addition, if the situation in which the supply of operating power is stopped is either during the execution of the fluctuating display of the picture in the general figure display section 38a or during the execution of the general power open state, the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power (step SC201 - If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed in step SC223), the display content immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped when the display starts on the general figure display section 38a. The display of the ordinary figure display section 38a is controlled so that the figure becomes . As a result, when the supply of operating power is restarted and the gaming situation immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, the special figure display section 37a and the normal It becomes possible to start displaying on the diagram display section 38a.

<64th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the 56th embodiment described above in the execution content of the game. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifty-sixth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the 56th embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 209 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

An inner rail part 401 and an outer rail part 402 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail part 401 and the outer rail part 402 provide a guide means. The guide rail is configured as follows. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings passing through it in the front-rear direction. Each opening includes a general winning part 411, a first operating part 412, a second operating part 413, a through winning part 414, a sorting winning device 415, a special winning device 416, a variable display unit 421, a special drawing unit 422, and a regular drawing. Units 423 and the like are provided respectively. A total of four general prize winning sections 411 are provided, and one each is provided for the other sections.

Even if a game ball enters the through winning section 414, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, if a game ball enters any of the general winning section 411, first operating section 412, second operating section 413, distribution winning device 415, and special electric winning device 416, the game ball can be used by the player. A predetermined number of game balls are paid out in order to increase the number of game media. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when a game ball enters the general prize winning section 411, ten game balls are paid out, and when a game ball enters the first operating section 412, ten game balls are paid out. When this occurs, three game balls are paid out, and when a game ball enters the second operating section 413, one game ball is paid out, and the prize distribution device When a game ball enters the winning device 415, the payout of 15 game balls is executed, and when a game ball enters the special electric prize winning device 416, the paying out of 15 game balls occurs. The same payout of 15 game balls as in the case where balls are generated is executed.

In addition, the distribution winning device 415 is provided with a discharge passage area 445b and a V winning passage area 445c as described later, and game balls that enter the distribution winning apparatus 415 are provided with a discharge passage area 445b and a V winning passage area 445c. Although it will pass through either of the areas 445c, the same number of game balls (specifically 15) will be paid out regardless of which of the discharge passage area 445b and the V winning passage area 445c the game balls pass through. be done. Further, the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, it may be configured such that the number of prize balls of the first operating section 412 and the second operating section 413 is the same, and the number of prize balls of the distribution prize device 415 is higher than the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 415. The number of balls awarded by the device 416 may be greater or less than the number of prize balls.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the gaming area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, and is also provided with various members such as a windmill.

A variable display unit 421 is provided so as to include the central portion of the gaming area PA. Due to the peripheral edge of the variable display unit 421 protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, an area is defined in which game balls fired into the game area PA can flow down. Specifically, in the gaming area PA, there is an upper area PA1 that is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 421, and an area that is continuous below the upper area PA1 and is higher than the variable display unit 421. A left area PA2 which is an area on the left, a right area PA3 which is continuous below the upper area PA1 and is an area to the right of the variable display unit 421, and each of the left area PA2 and the right area PA3. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower area PA4 that is continuous below the variable display unit 421 and is below the variable display unit 421.

When the player operates the firing operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the first range that is less than the reference rotation amount as the first firing operation, the game ball is positioned to the left of the horizontal center position in the upper area PA1. It starts to flow down. In this case, the game ball will flow down in the order of upper area PA1 → left area PA2 → lower area PA4. On the other hand, when the player operates the firing operation device 28 as a second firing operation with a rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount, the player can move the firing operation device 28 to the right of the horizontal center position in the upper area PA1. The game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game ball will flow down in the order of upper area PA1 → right area PA3 → lower area PA4. In other words, by adjusting the rotational operation amount of the firing operation device 28, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2 of the left area PA2 and the right area PA3, and A game can be played as the game ball flows down PA3. Incidentally, when the firing operation device 28 is operated with the maximum amount of rotation, the game balls will flow down in the order of upper area PA1 → right area PA3 → lower area PA4.

The first actuating section 412 is installed in the lower area PA4. The first operating section 412 is open upward, and no member such as an opening/closing member for preventing the game balls from entering the first operating section 412 is provided. In a situation where game balls are being shot in the same manner, the probability of winning a prize in the first operating section 412 is constant regardless of the game state. In other words, the first operating section 412 allows the game balls flowing down the gaming area PA toward the first operating section 412 to enter at all times. In addition, the first actuating part 412 is disposed directly below the stage 421a formed in the variable display unit 421, and is a game ball that flows onto the stage 421a through the guide path formed in the variable display unit 421. The game balls discharged from the lateral center of the stage 421a to the outside of the variable display unit 421 can easily enter the first actuating section 412 to win a prize. The first operating section 412 is provided with a detection sensor 412a, and the game ball that has won in the first operating section 412 is detected by the detection sensor 412a. The detection sensor 412a is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and based on the detection result of the detection sensor 412a, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not there is a winning in the first operating section 412.

As mentioned above, the first actuating part 412 is provided in the lower area PA4, but the game ball that has flown down the right area PA3 is located upstream of the first actuating part 412 toward the right area PA3. A restriction nail 24c is provided so as to make it impossible to reach the first operating portion 412. Further, the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 421a is provided for the left side area PA2, and is not provided for the right side area PA3. With these configurations, if the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, it is possible to win a prize in the first actuating part 412, but if the game ball flows down the right area PA3, it is possible to win a prize. If the firing operation device 28 is operated in such a manner, winning in the first operating section 412 is not possible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the regulating nail 24c is not provided or the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 421a is provided in the right area PA3, the game ball may flow down the right area PA3. A configuration may also be adopted in which it is possible to win a prize in the first operating section 412 even when the firing operation device 28 is operated.

The second actuator 413 is installed in the right area PA3. In other words, if the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, winning is not possible, and the second operating unit 413 operates the firing operation so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. Winning is possible when the device 28 is operated.

The configuration of the second actuating section 413 will be explained with reference to FIG. 210(a). FIG. 210(a) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the second operating portion 413 in the non-guided state. The second operating section 413 includes a base unit 431 in which a discharge passage 433 for discharging game balls flowing in from the game area PA to the rear of the game board 24 is formed, and a discharge passage 433 for discharging game balls flowing down the game area PA. and a guidance unit 432 for guiding the robot. The entrance portion 433a of the discharge passage 433 has an opening area equal to or larger than one game ball, and is open toward the front of the Pachinko machine 10. A detection sensor 434 is provided on the exit portion 433b side of the discharge passage 433, and the detection sensor 434 detects the game ball that has entered the second operating section 413. The detection sensor 434 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and based on the detection result of the detection sensor 434, the main side CPU 63 specifies whether or not there is a winning in the second operating section 413.

The guiding unit 432 receives the game balls flowing down the front area of the entrance part 433a in the game area PA from below, and includes a guide member 435 for guiding the received game balls into the discharge passage 433, and a guide member 435 for guiding the received game balls into the discharge passage 433. A situation in which a guide drive unit 436 for displacing the guide member 435 between an initial position that disables the guidance of the game ball and a guide position that enables the guidance, and the guide member 435 are arranged at the initial position. In the situation where the guide member 435 is placed in a blocking position that prevents the game balls from flowing into the discharge passage 433, and the guide member 435 is placed in the guiding position, it is placed in a non-blocking position that does not prevent the game balls from flowing into the discharge passage 433. A blocking member 437 is provided. The guide member 435 and the blocking member 437 are arranged to face each other at a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, with the guide member 435 facing downward. A transmission unit 438 is provided to transmit the driving force of the guide drive section 436 to the guide member 435 and the blocking member 437.

When the guide drive unit 436 is in a non-driven state, the guide member 435 is placed in the initial position by the urging force of a urging means such as a spring (not shown), and the blocking member 437 is placed in the blocking position. In this case, the guide member 435 and the blocking member 437 are entirely buried within the discharge passage 433 and do not protrude into the game area PA. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front area of the entrance part 433a of the discharge passage 433 in the game area PA is not guided into the discharge passage 433 by the guide member 435 and the blocking member 437. The ball flows downward in the game area PA without entering the operating section 413. Further, since the blocking member 437 is disposed at the blocking position, the substantial opening area of the entrance portion 433a of the discharge passage 433 becomes less than one game ball. Thereby, in a situation where the guide member 435 is placed at the initial position, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from entering the second operating section 413.

When the guide drive unit 436 is in the driven state, the guide member 435 and the blocking member 437 are displaced against the biasing force of the biasing means, and the guide member 435 is placed in the guiding position and the blocking member 437 is released. placed in a blocking position. FIG. 210(b) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the second actuating portion 413 in the guided state.

When the guide member 435 is arranged at the guiding position, the distal end side of the guide member 435 projects from the entrance portion 433a of the discharge passage 433 toward the game area PA side. This amount of protrusion is such that it is possible to receive the game ball flowing down the front area of the entrance portion 433a in the game area PA from below. Since the upper surface of the distal end side of the guide member 435 is sloped downward toward the entrance portion 433a of the discharge passage 433, the game balls received from below at the distal end side of the guide member 435 are It rolls on the upper surface and is guided into the discharge passage 433. Furthermore, when the blocking member 437 is disposed at the non-blocking position, the distal end of the blocking member 437 is displaced to a position above the blocking position, so that the game that rolls on the upper surface of the guide member 435 The balls flow into the discharge passage 433 without interfering with the blocking member 437. As a result, the guide driving section 436 is brought into the driving state, so that the game ball flowing down the area in front of the entrance section 433a in the gaming area PA enters the second operating section 413. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the state in which the guide drive section 436 is in a non-driving state, the guide member 435 is disposed at the initial position, and the blocking member 437 is disposed in the blocking position will be referred to as the non-guiding state of the guiding unit 432 or the second actuating state. 413 is called the closed state, and the state in which the guide drive section 436 is in the driving state, the guide member 435 is placed in the guiding position, and the blocking member 437 is placed in the non-blocking position is called the guiding state of the guiding unit 432 or the second operating part. This is called the open state of 413.

The second operating section 413 includes a cover member 439 that is provided to face the entrance section 433a of the discharge passage 433 from the front of the Pachinko machine 10. The cover member 439 is formed in a gate shape so as to form a vertical passage section 439a in a region in front of the entrance section 433a in the game area PA, and allows one game ball to pass through the front region of the entrance section 433a at the same time. It is provided so as to restrict the movement of the game ball to the front of the pachinko machine 10 and the movement of the game ball in the lateral direction. This prevents a plurality of game balls from being guided into the discharge passage 433 of the second actuating part 413 at the same time when the guiding unit 432 of the second actuating part 413 enters the guiding state, and In the guided state, it is possible to reliably guide game balls passing through the front area of the entrance portion 433a into the discharge passage 433. Note that the guide drive unit 436 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the drive control of the guide drive unit 436 is executed by the main CPU 63.

As shown in FIG. 209, a through winning section 414 is provided above the second operating section 413 in the right side area PA3. In other words, the through winning section 414 cannot win if the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the firing operation device 28 operates so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. If 28 is operated, it is possible to win a prize. The through winning part 414 has a through hole that penetrates in the vertical direction. In addition, a second operating section 413 is provided at a position vertically below the through winning section 414, and further downstream of the second operating section 413 in the right area PA3 is a special electric winning device 416 and a distribution winning device. 415 is provided. Therefore, the game ball that has won the through winning section 414 can win the second operating section 413, the special electric winning device 416, or the distribution winning device 415.

The right side area PA3 where the second actuating section 413 and the through winning section 414 are arranged is defined on the left by a side wall 421b that protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 in the variable display unit 421. At the same time, the right side is defined by a regulating wall provided on the resin base 21 of the inner frame 13 and protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. The right side area PA3 is set to have a narrower lateral dimension than the lower area PA4, and the lateral dimension is such that it is impossible to arrange the game ball entry devices laterally at the same height position. It becomes. This makes it possible to limit the trajectory of the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 to a predetermined range, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second operating part 413 and the through winning part 414. .

The arrangement of the plurality of nails 24b on the upstream side of the through winning section 414 in the right area PA3 is set so as to guide the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 to the through winning section 414. As a result, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 can easily enter the through winning section 414, and as the ball can easily enter the through winning section 414, the ball can easily enter the second operating section 413. There is. The through-winning portion 414 is provided with a detection sensor 414a, and the game ball that has won the through-winning portion 414 is detected by the detection sensor 414a. The detection sensor 414a is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and based on the detection result of the detection sensor 414a, the main CPU 63 specifies whether there is a prize in the through prize section 414.

Based on winning in the through winning section 414, the guiding unit 432 of the second operating section 413 is switched from the non-guiding state to the guiding state. Specifically, an internal lottery is held triggered by a winning in the through-winning portion 414, and a general drawing display section of the general drawing unit 423 provided in the lower left corner, which is an area where the game ball does not pass through in the gaming area PA. In step 423a, the pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is a win in the guidance execution state, a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuating display of the symbols on the common figure display section 423a is terminated, the state shifts to the guidance execution state. In the guidance execution state, the guidance unit 432 enters the guidance state in a predetermined manner.

The ordinary figure display section 423a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, although it is not possible to perform a complicated display like the symbol display device 424 on the ordinary figure display section 423a, it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the ordinary figure display section 423a. However, the display device is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, the picture displayed on the general drawing display section 423a may include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed. Possible configurations include a configuration where .

In the general drawing unit 423, a general drawing holding display section 423b is provided at a position adjacent to the general drawing display section 423a. The number of game balls won in the through winning section 414 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the regular game ball reservation display section 423b. The ordinary figure display section 423a and the ordinary figure pending display section 423b are electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, and the main side CPU 63 executes display control of the ordinary figure display section 423a and the ordinary figure pending display section 423b. be done.

Incidentally, the display range of the ordinary symbol display section 423a is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 424. Furthermore, the display ranges of both the common symbol display section 423a and the common symbol pending display section 423b are also narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 424. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the symbol display device 424 rather than the ordinary symbol display section 423a and the ordinary symbol pending display section 423b.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of modes are set as support modes so that the frequency of occurrence of the guiding state of the guiding unit 432 is different. Specifically, in the support mode, the frequency with which the guidance unit 432 enters the guidance state per unit time is relatively high when compared with the situation in which the game balls continue to be launched in the same manner to the game area PA. A high frequency support mode and a low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency is high and low.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the guided state in the guided state lottery based on the entry of game balls into the through winning section 414 is the same (specifically, 4/5). However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the guidance unit 432 enters the guidance state when the guidance state is won is set to be greater than that in the low-frequency support mode, and in addition, the number of times the guidance unit 432 enters the guidance state in one guidance control execution time is set. The upper limit induction period during which the unit 432 is maintained in the induction state is set to be long. In this case, when the guidance state is won in the high-frequency support mode and the guidance state of the guidance unit 432 occurs multiple times, the closed period from the end of one guidance state until the start of the next guidance state is , is set shorter than one upper limit induction period. Furthermore, the high-frequency support mode is more important than the low-frequency support mode in that the minimum secured time between one guidance state lottery and the next guidance state lottery (i.e., the general map display area 423a) is set short.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operating section 413 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize is higher in the first operating part 412 than in the second operating part 413, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize is higher in the first operating part 412 than in the second operating part 413. The probability of winning the prize in section 413 increases. When a winning occurs in the second operating unit 413, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has too much. Can be done.

Note that the structure for making the high frequency support mode higher in the frequency of being in the guided state per unit time than the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, the structure in which the guided state is won in the guided state lottery It may be configured to increase the probability that . In addition, the secured time that is secured after one guiding state lottery is performed and the next guiding state lottery is performed (for example, the period of time that is secured in the general drawing display section 423a based on winnings in the through prize section 414). In a configuration where multiple types of variable display time) are available, it is easier to select a shorter securing time in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, or even if the average securing time is set to be shorter. good. Furthermore, we can increase the number of times the guided state is executed, lengthen the upper limit guided period, shorten the time secured between one guided state lottery and the next guided state lottery. The advantage of high-frequency support mode over low-frequency support mode can be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of shortening the average securing time and increasing the probability of winning. good.

A winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of a winning in the first actuating part 412 or the second actuating part 413. When a winning lottery is held, a changing display of the symbols is performed in the special drawing unit 422, and finally a result corresponding to the result of the winning lottery is displayed.

The special figure unit 422 is located at the lower right corner of the game area PA, and is provided in a position where the game ball does not flow down in front of it. Further, the special figure unit 422 is provided at a position where it can be seen from the front of the Pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 even when the front door frame 14 is placed in the closed position. Therefore, the manager of the gaming hall can visually check the display contents of the various display sections 425 to 429 provided in the special drawing unit 422 without having to open the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14. becomes.

FIG. 209(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the special figure unit 422. Specifically regarding the special figure unit 422, the special figure unit 422 is provided with a first special figure display section 425 and a second special figure display section 426. In the first special figure display section 425, a winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of a winning in the first actuating section 412, and a changing display of the symbols is performed, and a result corresponding to the lottery result is finally displayed. be done. In addition, in the second special figure display section 426, a winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of a winning in the second operating section 413, and a fluctuating display of symbols is performed, and the final result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. is displayed. The period from when the fluctuating display of a symbol is started in either the first special figure display section 425 or the second special symbol display section 426 until the fluctuating display of the symbol is ended after displaying a predetermined result is one game round. equivalent to times.

The first special figure display section 425 includes seven display segments 425a. Each of these display segments 425a is formed into a rod shape and has a light emitting body such as an LED inside. These seven display segments 425a are arranged so that the first special figure display section 425 becomes a so-called 7 segment display. The first special figure display section 425 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, and the main CPU 63 individually controls lighting and extinguishing of each display segment 425a. Although it is not possible to perform a complicated display like the pattern display device 424 in the first special figure display section 425, it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the first special figure display section 425. .

Note that the display segments 425a may be formed in a circular shape, and the display segments 425a may be arranged in a straight line or in a circle. Further, the first special figure display section 425 may be constituted by another type of display device such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, the picture displayed on the first special figure display section 425 may include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed. A possible configuration is such that the colors are displayed.

The second special figure display section 426 includes seven display segments 426a. Each of these display segments 426a is formed into a rod shape and has a light emitting body such as an LED inside. These seven display segments 426a are arranged so that the second special figure display section 426 becomes a so-called 7 segment display. The second special figure display section 426 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, and the main CPU 63 individually controls lighting and extinguishing of each display segment 426a. Although it is not possible to perform complex displays like the symbol display device 424 in the second special figure display section 426, it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the second special figure display section 426. .

Note that the display segments 426a may be formed in a circular shape, and the display segments 426a may be arranged linearly or circularly. Further, the second special figure display section 426 may be constituted by another type of display device such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, the designs displayed on the second special figure display section 426 may include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed. A possible configuration is such that the colors are displayed.

In the special figure unit 422, a first special figure reservation display section 427 is provided at a position adjacent to the first special figure display section 425. The number of game balls won in the first actuating section 412 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the first special figure reservation display section 427. Further, a second special figure reservation display section 428 is provided at a position adjacent to the second special figure display section 426. The number of game balls won in the second actuating section 413 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the second special figure reservation display section 428. The first special figure holding display section 427 and the second special figure holding display section 428 are electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, and the first special figure holding display section 427 and the second special figure holding display section 428 are controlled by the main CPU 63. Display control of the hold display section 428 is executed.

In the special figure unit 422, a special display section 429 is provided at a position adjacent to the second special figure display section 426. When the opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 416 is in the open state is started, the display of the special display section 429 is controlled so as to be in a predetermined display state, and the opening/closing execution mode is ended and a new game round is started. When the special display section 429 is turned off, the display of the special display section 429 is controlled so that the predetermined display state ends and the light goes out.

The special display section 429 includes seven display segments 429a. Each of these display segments 429a is formed into a rod shape and has a light emitting body such as an LED inside. These seven display segments 429a are arranged so that the special display section 429 becomes a so-called 7 segment display. The special display section 429 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, and the main CPU 63 individually controls lighting and extinguishing of each display segment 429a. Although it is not possible to perform a complex display like the symbol display device 424 in the special display section 429, it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the special display section 429.

Note that the display segments 429a may be formed in a circular shape, and the display segments 429a may be arranged linearly or circularly. Further, the special display section 429 may be configured by another type of display device such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. Additionally, the contents displayed on the special display section 429 include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed. Possible configurations include the displayed configuration.

The display range of the first special figure display section 425 and the second special figure display section 426 is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 424. In addition, the entire display range of the first special symbol display section 425, second special symbol display section 426, first special symbol reservation display section 427, second special symbol reservation display section 428, and special display section 429 is also the symbol display area. The area is narrower than the display surface of the device 424. As a result, the game is displayed on the symbol display device 424 rather than the first special symbol display section 425, second special symbol display section 426, first special symbol reservation display section 427, second special symbol reservation display section 428, and special display section 429. This makes it possible to increase the attention of people.

When a variable display of symbols is performed on the first special symbol display section 425 or the second special symbol display section 426, that is, when a game round is being executed, the symbol display device 424 provided in the variable display unit 421 displays the symbols accordingly. A display effect is performed. In addition, the symbol display device 424 not only displays display effects triggered by winning to the first operating section 412 or second operating section 413, but also display effects during the opening/closing execution mode that shifts after a jackpot result, etc. A display effect, etc. is performed during the distribution execution mode, which is entered after the small winning result is achieved. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode, the distribution execution mode, and the high-frequency support mode, a right-hitting notification image is displayed on the pattern display device 424 to notify that the game ball should be fired aiming at the right area PA3. .

The symbol display device 424 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by the display control device 82. Note that the symbol display device 424 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and may also be a dot matrix display device. You can.

The contents of the display effect performed on the symbol display device 424 during the execution of a game round will be explained with reference to FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 424 when a game round is executed.

As shown in FIG. 211(a), on the display surface of the symbol display device 424, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is composed of main symbols and sub-symbols arranged in a predetermined order. That is, when a game round is executed, the entire display surface of the symbol display device 424 is used to display symbols in a variable manner.

FIG. 212 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the main symbols and sub-symbols that are variably displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. As shown in FIGS. 212(a) to 212(j), the patterns, which are a type of pattern, include nine types of main patterns with numbers "1" to "9" attached to them, and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs consisting of. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as octopuses are numbered from "1" to "9" to form the main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 211(b), in the upper pattern row Z1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is placed between each main symbol. They are arranged one by one. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged on the top, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and it is composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a cyclically scrolling manner in a predetermined direction. The symbol display device 424 is configured to stop display three symbols for each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and as a result, a total of nine symbols (3×3) are stopped and displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 211(a), the symbol display device 424 has five valid lines set, namely, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a downward right line L4, and an upward right line L5. .

When a variable display of symbols is performed on the display screen based on winning in the first operating section 412 or the second operating section 413, the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are scrolled periodically in a predetermined direction. The variable display starts. Then, basically, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and finally a state in which a predetermined symbol is displayed statically in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. It ends with. In addition, when the fluctuating display of symbols ends, if the result of the internal lottery is a 15R jackpot result described later, a combination of "7" symbols will be formed on any active line, and the result of the internal lottery will be described later. In the case of a 6R jackpot result, a combination of the same odd symbols other than the "7" symbol is formed on any active line, and the result of the internal lottery is one of the 1st to 3rd small winning results described later. If so, the same combination of even symbols is formed on any active line.

In the configuration in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as described above, an expected performance is set as a display performance on the symbol display device 424 when a game round is executed. The expected performance is a display state that is made to make the player think that the fluctuating display state is likely to result in a jackpot, at a stage after the fluctuating display of symbols on the symbol display device 424 starts and before the stop result is derived and displayed. say. Two types of expected effects are set: a ready-to-reach display and a preview display for making players expect the occurrence of a ready-to-reach display or a jackpot result at a stage before the ready-to-reach display occurs.

In the reach display, the combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying the same type of symbols for upper symbol row Z1 and lower symbol row Z3 among multiple symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and in that state, the remaining middle symbols are displayed. A display state in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner is included in column Z2. In addition, while the combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-reach effect. , those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface after displaying or not displaying a combination of ready-to-reach symbols in a reduced size. If it is a game round that results in a jackpot result or a small win result, the same type of symbols as the symbols forming the combination of reach symbols will be stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2, and the result will be a jackpot result or a small win result. If it is a game round that does not result in any of the above, symbols of a different type from the symbols forming the combination of ready-to-reach symbols are stopped and displayed on the ready-to-reach line in the middle symbol row Z2.

The preview display may be performed in a situation where the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the fluctuating display of symbols has started in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, or in some symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Z3 includes a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It also includes a case in which the background screen is set in a predetermined form different from the previous form, and a case in which the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set in a predetermined form different from the previous form. Such a notice display can occur in any game round when a reach display is displayed or when a reach display is not performed, but it is higher when a reach display is performed than when a reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

If either the 6R jackpot result or the 15R jackpot result is selected in the internal lottery executed based on winnings in the first operating section 412 or the second operating section 413, the game round corresponding to the jackpot result has ended. Afterwards, it shifts to opening/closing execution mode. In the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to win a prize using the special electric prize winning device 416. As shown in FIG. 209, the special electric winning device 416 is provided at a position below the second operating section 413 and above the distribution winning device 415 in the right area PA3. In other words, the special electric winning device 416 cannot win if the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the firing operation device 416 operates so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. If 28 is operated, it is possible to win a prize.

As shown in FIG. 209, the special electric winning device 416 includes a grand prize opening 416a formed in a size that allows a game ball to pass through, and a closed state in which a game ball cannot pass through the special prize opening 416a. and a special electric side opening/closing member 416b that switches between the opening state and the open state through which game balls can pass. The special electric side opening/closing member 416b is brought into an open state by being driven by the special electric drive unit 416c through a link mechanism (not shown). The special electric winning device 416 is equipped with a game ball passage such that the grand prize opening 416a serves as an entrance portion, and the game balls that flow into the game ball passage through the grand prize opening 416a are detected by a special electric winning prize detection sensor provided in the game ball passage. After being detected by 416d, it is discharged to the rear of the game board 24. The special electric winning detection sensor 416d is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and based on the detection result of the special electric winning detecting sensor 416d, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not there is a winning on the special electric winning device 416. Further, the special electric drive unit 416c is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the main CPU 63 executes drive control of the special electric drive unit 416c.

In the opening/closing execution mode, a round game is executed a plurality of times (specifically, 5, 6, 8, 14, or 16 times). The round game continues until either one of the following conditions is met: the number of times the special electric winning device 416 is opened and closed reaches the upper limit, and the predetermined upper limit number of winning game balls enters the prize in the special electric winning device 416. It is a game that is played. In this embodiment, the special electric winning device 416 is opened and closed once in one round game, and the opening duration period in each round game is set to 29 seconds. Further, the upper limit number of winnings to the special electric winning device 416 is set to 10. In a situation where the firing operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the gaming area PA every 0.6 seconds, so that the round game cannot be played. The opening duration period is set to be longer than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit number of winnings in one round game. Therefore, in each round game, it can be expected that more game balls than the upper limit winning number will be won in the special electric winning device 416.

If any of the first to third small winning results is selected in the internal lottery executed based on winnings to the second operating unit 413, after the game round corresponding to the small winning result has ended. Shift to distribution execution mode. In the distribution execution mode, it is possible to win a prize using the distribution winning device 415.

As shown in FIG. 209, the distribution winning device 415 is provided at a position lower than the special electric winning device 416 in the right area PA3. In other words, if the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, it is not possible to win a prize, and the distribution winning device 415 operates the firing operation so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. Winning is possible when the device 28 is operated.

The configuration of the prize distribution device 415 will be explained with reference to FIG. 213 in addition to FIG. 209. FIG. 213 is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining the internal structure of the prize distribution device 415.

As shown in FIG. 209, the sorting winning device 415 is equipped with a sorting entrance 441 that is large enough to allow game balls to pass through, and is in a closed state in which game balls cannot pass through the sorting entrance 441. It is provided with a distribution side opening/closing member 442 that can be switched to an open state through which a ball can pass. The distribution side opening/closing member 442 is brought into an open state by being driven by the distribution entrance drive unit 443 through a link mechanism (not shown). The distribution entrance drive unit 443 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the main side CPU 63 executes drive control of the distribution entrance drive unit 443.

The winning game balls at the sorting entrance 441 are led out to a branch passage 445 formed in the base body 444 of the sorting winning device 415, as shown in FIG. The branch passage 445 includes an upstream passage area 445a that is set so that the passage direction slopes downward in the horizontal direction from the entrance of the branch passage 445 to an intermediate position of the branch passage 445, and the upstream passage area 445a. A discharge passage area 445b that is continuous with the downstream end of the discharge passage area 445b and set so that the passage direction is vertically downward; A V winning passage area 445c for guiding the ball is provided. In this case, since the upstream passage area 445a has a dimension in the direction perpendicular to the passage direction that is equal to or more than one game ball and less than two game balls, The game balls are prevented from passing through the upstream passage area 445a in a state where a plurality of game balls are lined up. Therefore, a plurality of game balls are prevented from simultaneously reaching the branch position to the V winning passage area 445c in the discharge passage area 445b.

A switching piece 446 for guiding the game balls that have flowed into the discharge passage area 445b to the V winning passage area 445c is provided at the branch point of the discharge passage area 445b to the V winning passage area 445c. The switching piece 446 is rotatably supported in a region opposite to the V-winning passage region 445c with respect to the discharge passage region 445b of the base body 444, and is completely retracted outside the discharge passage region 445b. position and a V-guide position protruding into the discharge passage area 445b. The driving force of a switching drive section 447 is transmitted to the switching piece 446 through a transmission unit (not shown). When the switching drive section 447 is in the non-driven state, the switching piece 446 is placed in the retracted position by the biasing force of a biasing means such as a spring (not shown), and when the switching drive section 447 is in the driven state, the switching piece 446 is moved to the retracted position. The switching piece 446 is displaced against the biasing force and placed in the V guide position. The switching drive section 447 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, and the main CPU 63 executes drive control of the switching drive section 447.

When the switching piece 446 is disposed at the retracted position, the game ball that has flowed into the branch passage 445 flows down the discharge passage area 445b without being guided to the V winning passage area 445c. Then, the game ball is discharged to the rear of the game board 24 after being detected by the count detection sensor 448 provided downstream of the branch position by the switching piece 446 in the discharge passage region 445b. The count detection sensor 448 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and based on the detection result of the count detection sensor 448, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the count detection sensor 448 detects game balls.

On the other hand, when the switching piece 446 is arranged at the V-guidance position, the game balls flowing into the branch passage 445 are received by the switching piece 446 from below. The upper surface of the switching piece 446 in the state of being disposed at the V guiding position is inclined downward toward the V winning passage area 445c. As a result, the game ball received from below by the switching piece 446 flows into the V winning passage area 445c due to its own weight, and flows down the V winning passage area 445c. Then, the game ball is discharged to the rear of the game board 24 after being detected by the V win detection sensor 449 provided in the V win passage area 445c. The V winning prize detection sensor 449 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and based on the detection result of the V winning prize detecting sensor 449, the main side CPU 63 specifies whether or not a game ball has passed through the V winning prize path area 445c. be done.

When the distribution side opening/closing member 442 is in the open state, the period in which it is maintained in the open state is constant at 10 seconds, which is longer than the firing cycle of the game ball, and the distribution side opening/closing member 442 is kept in the open state for a constant period of 10 seconds, which is longer than the firing cycle of the game ball. The upper limit number of winning game balls that can be entered into the winning device 415 is fixed at 10. Furthermore, in a situation where the firing operation device 28 is being operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the gaming area PA every 0.6 seconds. Further, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 reaches the position of the distribution side opening/closing member 442 unless the ball enters the second operating section 413 or the special electric prize winning device 416 on the way. Then, when the sorting side opening/closing member 442 is in the open state, if the game ball continues to be launched so that it flows down toward the sorting winning device 415, the upper limit is set to the sorting winning device 415. It is possible to win more game balls than the winning number.

On the other hand, the switching piece 446 is placed from the retracted position to the V-guidance position two seconds after the distribution-side opening/closing member 442 is opened, and then remains in the V-guidance position for 12 seconds. Retained. Then, when 12 seconds have elapsed, the vehicle returns from the V-guidance position to the retracted position. In this case, in a situation where the firing operation device 28 is operated by the player as described above, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the gaming area PA every 0.6 seconds. Therefore, at the timing when the switching piece 446 is placed in the V guidance position, the number of winnings to the distribution winning device 415 has not yet reached the upper limit number of winnings in the distribution execution mode, and the distribution side opening/closing member 442 is closed. The open state is maintained. Further, as described above, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 reaches the position of the distribution side opening/closing member 442 unless the ball enters the second operating section 413 or the special electric winning device 416 on the way. Therefore, if the distribution side opening/closing member 442 is in the open state and the game ball continues to be launched so that the game ball flows down toward the distribution winning device 415, the distribution side opening/closing member 442 is in the open state. The switching piece 446 is placed at the V-guidance position at the timing when the winning game ball in the sorting winning device 415 reaches the position of the switching piece 446 after 2 seconds have passed since the opening state. Therefore, in the distribution execution mode, the game balls are basically detected by the V winning detection sensor 449.

Regardless of whether a game ball is detected by the count detection sensor 448 or a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 449, the same number of prize balls corresponding to the distribution winning device 415 is paid out. be done. Further, when a game ball is detected by the V winning prize detection sensor 449 in the sorting execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode occurs after the sorting execution mode. On the other hand, when the sorting execution mode ends without any game ball being detected by the V winning prize detection sensor 449, the opening/closing execution mode does not occur.

Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in the main CPU 63 will be explained using FIG. 214.

During the game, the main CPU 63 uses various counter information to determine the winning lottery, display settings on the special symbol display sections 425 and 426, symbol display settings on the symbol display device 424, display settings on the regular symbol display section 423a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 214, a winning random number counter C1 used in the lottery when a winning occurs, a type counter C2 used when determining the jackpot type and small winning type, and a symbol display. A reach random number counter C3 used for the reach random number lottery when the device 424 loses and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of the hit random number counter C1, special symbol display units 425, 426, and symbol display device 424. A variable type counter CS is used to determine the display duration of game times. Further, a general electric utility object opening counter C4 is used to determine whether or not the guidance unit 432 of the second operating section 413 is to be brought into the guidance execution state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is stored in the special figure holding area provided in the main side RAM 65 when a winning occurs in the first operating section 412 or the second operating section 413. 451. The special figure holding area 451 includes a first special figure holding area 452, a second special figure holding area 453, and a special figure execution area 454.

The first special drawing holding area 452 includes a first area 452a, a second area 452b, a third area 452c, and a fourth area 452d. Each numerical value information of the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 452a to 452d as pending information on the special figure side. In this case, in the first area 452a to the fourth area 452d, if winnings to the first operating section 412 occur multiple times in succession, the first area 452a → second area 452b → third area 452c → Each piece of numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of the four areas 452d. By providing the four areas 452a to 452d in this manner, the winning history of game balls entered into the first operating section 412 can be stored in abeyance at a maximum of four. The number that can be held and stored in the first special drawing holding area 452 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more. , may be singular.

The second special figure holding area 453 includes a first area 453a, a second area 453b, a third area 453c, and a fourth area 453d. Each numerical value information of the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 453a to 453d as pending information on the special figure side. In this case, in the first area 453a to fourth area 453d, if winnings to the second operating section 413 occur multiple times in succession, the first area 453a → second area 453b → third area 453c → Each piece of numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of the four areas 453d. By providing the four areas 453a to 453d in this manner, the winning history of game balls entered into the second operating section 413 can be stored in abeyance at a maximum of four. Note that the number that can be held and stored in the second special figure holding area 453 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other number such as 2, 3, or 5 or more. , may be singular.

The execution area 454 for special figures is an area in which pending information for objects to be judged, such as whether or not the special figure is appropriate or not and type is determined, is stored when starting variable display on either of the special figure display sections 425, 426. It is. Specifically, when starting the variable display of the first special figure display section 425, the pending information stored in the first area 452a of the first special figure holding area 452 is moved to the special figure execution area 454. be done. On the other hand, when starting the variable display of the second special figure display section 426, the reservation information stored in the first area 453a of the second special figure reservation area 453 is moved to the special figure execution area 454. In addition, in the following explanation, the reservation information stored in the first special figure holding area 452 and the reservation information moved from the first special figure holding area 452 to the execution area 454 for special figures are stored on the first special figure side. The pending information stored in the second special drawing holding area 453 and the holding information moved from the second special drawing holding area 453 to the special drawing execution area 454 are called holding information on the second special drawing side. .

Information corresponding to the general public utility object opening counter C4 is stored in the general public figure holding area 455 provided in the main side RAM 65 when a winning to the through prize section 414 occurs. The general figure holding area 455 includes a first area 455a, a second area 455b, a third area 455c, and a fourth area 455d. Numerical information is stored in one of the areas 455a to 455d as pending information on the ordinary map side. In this case, in the first area 455a to the fourth area 455d, if winnings to the through winning section 414 occur multiple times in a row, the first area 455a → second area 455b → third area 455c → fourth area Numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of area 455d. By providing the four areas 455a to 455d in this manner, the winning history of game balls entered into the through winning section 414 can be held and stored up to a maximum of four. Note that the number that can be held and stored in the general drawing holding area 455 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more; It may be.

The ordinary figure holding area 455 is provided with an execution area 456 for ordinary figures. The execution area 456 for ordinary figures contains pending information on targets for which a guiding state lottery is performed to determine whether or not to put the guiding unit 432 in the guiding state when starting variable display on the ordinary figure display section 423a. This is the area where the information is stored. Specifically, when starting the variable display of the general figure display section 423a, the reservation information stored in the first area 455a of the ordinary figure holding area 455 is moved to the ordinary figure execution area 456.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 will be explained in detail.

First, the general utility goods release counter C4 will be explained. The general utility utility release counter C4 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 250, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The general public accessory opening counter C4 is updated regularly, and is stored in the general public figure holding area 455 of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when a game ball wins in the through winning section 414. Then, at a predetermined timing, a guidance state lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the guidance unit 432 to the guidance state based on the stored value of the general utility object release counter C4. As already explained, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are set as the support mode of the guidance unit 432 (that is, the support mode of the second actuation section 413), and the guidance state of the guidance unit 432 (that is, the support mode of the second actuation section 413) (open state) is controlled in a manner corresponding to the type of support mode at that time.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be explained. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 9999, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 9999). The winning random number counter C1 is updated regularly and is stored in the special figure holding area 451 of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when a game ball wins in the first operating section 412 or the second operating section 413. Then, a win/fail determination process is performed using the stored value of the winning random number counter C1.

The value of the random number that becomes a win in the win/fail determination process is stored in the main side ROM 64 as a win/fail table. As a win/fail table, a first special map win/fail table 461 is provided in correspondence with the reservation information on the first special map side, and a second special map win/fail table 461 is provided in correspondence with the reservation information on the second special map side. 462 are provided. In addition, in this embodiment, as the winning/failure lottery mode, there are not multiple types of modes that differ in the probability of a jackpot result, but rather, if the setting value is the same, the probability of a jackpot result is constant. One type of mode is set.

FIG. 215(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the validity table 461 of the first special symbol, and FIG. 215(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the validity table 462 of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 215(a) and 215(b), there are a jackpot result, a small win result, and a miss result as the result of the win/fail judgment process. The jackpot result is a win/fail result that can trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric prize winning device 416 is controlled to open and close, and can also trigger the transition to the support mode. The small winning result triggers the transition to the distribution execution mode in which the distribution winning device 415 is controlled to open and close, and if a V win occurs in the distribution execution mode, it triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode and the support mode. On the other hand, if the V winning prize does not occur in the distribution execution mode, it is a win/fail result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode and the support mode. A negative result is a right or wrong result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode or the distribution execution mode, and does not trigger a transition to the support mode.

As shown in FIG. 215(a), the jackpot result and the miss result are set in the win/fail table 461 of the first special symbol as the judgment result of the win/fail judgment process, but the small win result is not set. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has setting states "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", and the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a winning result. It is set as follows.

Specifically, "Setting 1", which is the lowest setting value, is set to 50 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot, and the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will result in a losing result. 9950 is set as the number. In addition, in "Setting 2", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 1", 52 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot result, and the winning random number counter that will be a losing result. 9948 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of C1. In addition, in "Setting 3", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 2", 54 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot result, and the winning random number counter that will be a losing result. 9946 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of C1. In addition, "Setting 4", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 3", is set to 56 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number counter which will be the winning result. 9944 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of C1. In addition, "Setting 5", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 4", is set to 58 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot result, and the winning random number counter that will be a losing result. 9942 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of C1. In addition, in the highest setting value "Setting 6", 60 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and 60 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a losing result. 9940 pieces are set.

That is, in "Setting 1", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the first special symbol side is 1/200. In "Setting 2", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the first special drawing side is about 1/192. In "Setting 3", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the first special drawing side is about 1/185. In "Setting 4", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the first special drawing side is about 1/179. In "Setting 5", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the first special drawing side is about 1/172. In "Setting 6", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the first special drawing side is about 1/167. In addition, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot may be configured to be set in aggregation so that it becomes a serial number, or it may be set in a distributed manner so that at least a part or all of it is not a serial number. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

As shown in FIG. 215(b), a jackpot result, a small win result, and a miss result are set in the win/fail table 462 of the second special symbol as the determination results of the win/fail determination process. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has setting states "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", and the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a winning result. It is set as follows. On the other hand, the probability of a small winning result is set to be the same for any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6".

Specifically, the lowest setting value "Setting 1" is set to 50 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a small winning. The number of pieces of information is set to 2000, and the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is a losing result is set to 7950 pieces. In addition, "Setting 2", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 1", is set to 52 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 2,000, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 7,948. In addition, "Setting 3", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 2", is set to 54 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 2000, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 7946. In addition, "Setting 4", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 3", is set to 56 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 2000, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 7944. In addition, "Setting 5", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 4", is set to 58 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 2000, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 7942. In addition, the highest setting value "Setting 6" is set to 60 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a small winning. 2000 pieces are set as the winning result, and 7940 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which is a losing result.

That is, in "Setting 1", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special symbol side is 1/200, which is the same as the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the first special symbol side. In "Setting 2", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special symbol side is about 1/192, which is the same as the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the first special symbol side. In "Setting 3", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special symbol side is about 1/185, which is the same as the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the first special symbol side. In "Setting 4", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special symbol side is about 1/179, which is the same as the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the first special symbol side. In "Setting 5", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special symbol side is about 1/172, which is the same as the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the first special symbol side. In "Setting 6", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special symbol side is about 1/167, which is the same as the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the first special symbol side.

The probability of a small winning result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is 1/5, which is the same for any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". The probability of a small winning result is higher than the probability of a jackpot result for any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". In addition, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot may be configured to be set in aggregation so that it becomes a consecutive number, or it may be set in a distributed manner so that at least a part or all of it is not a serial number. It is also possible to have a configuration in which Further, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a small win may be configured to be set in aggregation so that it becomes a serial number, or it may be set in a distributed manner so that at least a part or all of it is not a serial number. A configuration may also be used.

As mentioned above, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, regardless of whether it is triggered by reservation information on the first special drawing side or when triggered by reservation information on the second special drawing side. The higher the setting value is, the more advantageous it is to the player. In addition, the opening/closing execution mode is the period in which the amount of increase in the player's possession per unit time is the largest, and the probability of a jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode fluctuates according to the setting value. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the set value.

In this configuration in which the probability of a jackpot result varies depending on the setting value, the probability of a small win result is the same for any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". This makes it possible for the player to focus on only jackpot results in order to estimate the set value, thereby making it difficult for the player to guess the set value.

In addition, in the win/fail table 462 of the second special figure, no matter which setting value is used, the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the winning result is greater than the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the small winning result. In a configuration where the number of numerical information is larger than that of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the jackpot result, the variation due to the set value of the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the jackpot result is the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the losing result. is absorbed by fluctuations in the number of Also from this point of view, it is possible to make it difficult to estimate the set value.

Next, the type counter C2 will be explained. The type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The type counter C2 is updated regularly and stored in the special figure holding area 451 of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating section 412 or the second operating section 413. Then, type determination processing is performed using the stored value of the type counter C2.

The type determination process using the type counter C2 is performed in each of the cases where a jackpot result is obtained and a small win result in the win/fail judgment process. That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpot results are set, and a plurality of types of small win results are set. When a jackpot result is selected in the win/fail determination process, the type of jackpot result is selected using the jackpot type table 463 and type counter C2 stored in advance in the main ROM 64. Further, when a small winning result is selected in the win/fail judgment process, the type of small winning result is selected using the small winning type table 464 and type counter C2 stored in advance in the main side ROM 64. Hereinafter, types of jackpot results and types of small win results will be explained.

FIG. 216(a) is referred to in order to sort the type of jackpot result when a jackpot result is selected in the validity judgment process triggered by the reservation information on the first special symbol side or the reservation information on the second special symbol side. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a type table 463 for jackpot. Moreover, FIG. 216(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each of the plurality of types of jackpot results.

The jackpot type table 463 is referred to when a jackpot result is selected in the judgment process triggered by the reservation information for the first special symbol, and is also referred to in the judgment process triggered by the reservation information for the second special symbol. Referenced when a jackpot result is selected in processing. In other words, when a jackpot result is selected in the judgment process triggered by the reservation information for the first special symbol, and when a jackpot result is selected in the judgment process triggered by the reservation information for the second special symbol, In either case, the same jackpot type table 463 is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 216(a), in the jackpot type table 463, 6R jackpot results and 15R jackpot results are set as jackpot result types. The numerical information of the type counter C2 of "0 to 26" corresponds to the 6R jackpot result, and the numerical information of the type counter C2 of "27 to 29" corresponds to the 15R jackpot result. That is, when the jackpot result is selected in the success/failure determination process, the 6R jackpot result is selected with a probability of 9/10, and the 15R jackpot result is selected with a probability of 1/10.

When a 6R jackpot result is obtained, a round game occurs six times in the subsequent opening/closing execution mode as shown in FIG. 216(b). Furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode starts. In this high-frequency support mode, if the reservation information that triggered the occurrence of the 6R jackpot result was the reservation information on the first special symbol side, the game round triggered by the reservation information on the second special symbol side If it is executed once, it ends and shifts to low-frequency support mode. As already explained, the second special figure holding area 453 is provided with the first to fourth areas 453a to 453d, and it is possible to hold and store four pieces of hold information on the second special figure side. Therefore, in a situation where the first game round triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is being executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the second actuating unit 413 controlled in the high frequency support mode has four pieces. By entering the game ball, it becomes possible to execute five game rounds triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, if the pending information that triggered the occurrence of the 6R jackpot result was the pending information on the second special drawing side, the game round triggered by the pending information on the second special drawing side was executed five times. If so, exit and move to infrequent support mode. As already explained, the second special figure holding area 453 is provided with the first to fourth areas 453a to 453d, and it is possible to hold and store four pieces of hold information on the second special figure side. Therefore, in a situation where the fifth game round triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is being executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the second actuating section 413 controlled in the manner of the high-frequency support mode is activated. By entering the game balls, it becomes possible to execute nine game rounds triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In the case of a 15R jackpot result, 15 round games occur in the subsequent opening/closing execution mode as shown in FIG. 216(b). Therefore, the 15R jackpot result is more advantageous than the 6R jackpot result at least in terms of the number of times the round game is executed. Furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode starts. In this high-frequency support mode, even if the pending information that triggered the occurrence of the 15R jackpot result is either the pending information on the 1st special drawing side or the pending information on the 2nd special drawing side, the 2nd special drawing side When the game session triggered by the hold information has been executed five times, the game ends and shifts to the low-frequency support mode. As already explained, the second special figure holding area 453 is provided with the first to fourth areas 453a to 453d, and it is possible to hold and store four pieces of hold information on the second special figure side. Therefore, in a situation where the fifth game round triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is being executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the second actuating section 413 controlled in the high frequency support mode is activated. By entering the game balls, it becomes possible to execute nine game rounds triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

FIG. 216(c) shows a small win type table 464 that is referred to in order to sort the types of small win results when a small win result is selected in the right/fail judgment process triggered by the hold information on the second special drawing side. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining. Moreover, FIG. 216(d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each of the plurality of types of small winning results. In addition, as already explained, since the small hit result is not selected in the win/fail judgment process triggered by the reservation information on the first special drawing side, the small winning result is not selected in the game round triggered by the reservation information on the first special drawing side. The winning type table 464 is never referenced.

As shown in FIG. 216(c), in the small win type table 464, the first small win result, the second small win result, and the third small win result are set as the types of the small win result. The numerical information of the type counter C2 of "0 to 9" corresponds to the first small winning result, and the numerical information of the type counter C2 of "10 to 19" corresponds to the second small winning result, The numerical information of the type counter C2 of "20 to 29" corresponds to the third small winning result. In other words, when a small win result is selected in the win/fail judgment process, the first small win result is selected with a probability of 1/3, the second small win result is selected with a probability of 1/3, and the second small win result is selected with a probability of 1/3. The third small winning result is selected with a probability of .

Regardless of the first small winning result, the second small winning result, or the third small winning result, the distribution execution mode is first started as shown in FIG. 216(d). In this distribution execution mode, the distribution winning device 415 is opened and closed once. As already explained, the distribution winning device 415 becomes open when the opening duration period of 10 seconds has elapsed, and the number of game balls that have entered the distribution prize device 415 reaches the upper limit of 10 balls. This will continue until one of the conditions is met. Then, in a situation where the distribution winning device 415 continues to be in the open state, by continuing the firing operation so that the game ball flows down toward the distribution winning device 415, the ball enters the distribution winning device 415. The game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 449, and a V winning occurs. Note that even if a plurality of game balls are detected by the V winning detection sensor 449 in one distribution execution mode, the number of occurrences of the V winning is treated as one.

When the V winning occurs, the opening/closing execution mode occurs thereafter. In this case, if it is after the distribution execution mode triggered by the first small win result, it will be the opening/closing execution mode in which 5 round games are executed, and even if it is the distribution execution mode triggered by the second small win result. For example, if it is an opening/closing execution mode in which 8 round games are executed, and if it is a sorting execution mode triggered by the third small winning result, it becomes an opening/closing execution mode in which 14 round games are executed. Therefore, the second small winning result is more advantageous than the first small winning result at least in terms of the number of times the round game is executed, and the third small winning result is more advantageous than the second small winning result.

If any of the 1st small winning result, 2nd small winning result, or 3rd small winning result occurs and a V winning occurs in the distribution execution mode and the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the opening/closing execution mode ends. Afterwards, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before starting the distribution execution mode. In this high-frequency support mode, regardless of whether it is triggered by the first small winning result, second small winning result, or third small winning result, the game rotation is triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side. If has been executed five times, it ends and shifts to low frequency support mode. As already explained, the second special figure holding area 453 is provided with the first to fourth areas 453a to 453d, and it is possible to hold and store four pieces of hold information on the second special figure side. Therefore, in a situation where the fifth game round triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is being executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the second actuating section 413 controlled in the high frequency support mode is activated. By entering the game balls, it becomes possible to execute nine game rounds triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In addition, if a V winning does not occur in the distribution execution mode triggered by any of the 1st small winning result, 2nd small winning result, or 3rd small winning result, the distribution execution mode will be changed. After the opening/closing execution mode is finished, the opening/closing execution mode does not occur, and the support mode before the start of the distribution execution mode is maintained.

The flow of the game with the win/fail tables 461, 462 and type tables 463, 464 set as described above will be explained. When the game hall starts operating, the support mode basically becomes the low-frequency support mode. In the low-frequency support mode, a firing operation is performed with the aim of winning a prize in the first actuating part 412, and when a prize in the first actuating part 412 occurs, a fluctuating display of symbols is displayed in the first special symbol display part 425. At the same time as the game is executed, a game round in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 424 is executed. When the jackpot result is selected in the win/fail judgment process executed at the start of this game round, the opening/closing execution mode occurs after the game round ends. In this opening/closing execution mode, the round game is executed 6 times if the 6R jackpot result is the trigger, and the round game is executed 15 times if the 15R jackpot result is the trigger.

After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is entered. In this case, the high-frequency support mode is ended when the game round in the second special figure display section 426 is executed once if the jackpot result that triggered the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is a 6R jackpot result, If the jackpot result that triggered the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is a 15R jackpot result, the game ends when the game round on the second special figure display section 426 is played five times. If the high-frequency support mode is terminated when the game round on the second special figure display section 426 is executed once, it is possible to execute the game round 5 times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side. Therefore, if the high-frequency support mode is terminated when the game round on the second special figure display section 426 has been executed 5 times, the game round triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is executed 9 times. becomes possible.

In the high-frequency support mode, a firing operation is performed with the aim of winning a prize in the second actuating part 413, and when a prize in the second actuating part 413 occurs, a fluctuating display of symbols is displayed in the second special figure display part 426. At the same time as the game is executed, a game round in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 424 is executed. A game round triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side results in a small win with a high probability of 1/5. If the result is a small win, the game enters a sorting execution mode, and in the sorting execution mode, the firing operation continues with the aim of winning the sorting prize device 415, thereby basically generating a V prize. When a V winning occurs, the opening/closing execution mode occurs thereafter. In this opening/closing execution mode, if the first small win result is the trigger, the round game is executed 5 times, if the second small win result is the trigger, the round game is executed eight times, and the third small win result is the trigger. If the trigger occurs, the round game will be executed 14 times. After the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of whether the trigger is the first small winning result, the second small winning result, or the third small winning result, the high frequency support mode will be activated, and the high frequency support mode will be The game ends when the game on the second special figure display section 426 has been played five times. In this case, it becomes possible to execute nine game rounds triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side.

In other words, when a transition to the high-frequency support mode occurs, a small winning result occurs in the game round triggered by the hold information on the second special drawing side, and the distribution execution mode and opening/closing execution mode are generated. At the same time, it becomes possible to subsequently execute nine game rounds triggered by the hold information on the second special drawing side. As a result, players expect that a transition to the high-frequency support mode will occur, and if a transition to the high-frequency support mode occurs, the game period will be changed based on the reservation information on the second special drawing side. You can expect to get a small hit. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, a jackpot result may occur even in a game round triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side, and when a jackpot result occurs, an opening/closing execution mode occurs. In addition, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the occurrence, the high-frequency support mode will be activated, and in the high-frequency support mode, the game times on the second special figure display section 426 will be executed five times. will be terminated if

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly, and is stored in the special figure holding area 451 of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating section 412 or the second operating section 413. Then, using the stored value of the reach random number counter C3, it is determined whether or not to generate the reach display in the game round that results in a losing result.

Here, in this pachinko machine 10, an expected performance is set as a type of display performance on the symbol display device 424. Expected production is a symbol display in a gaming machine that is equipped with a symbol display device 424 that is capable of displaying fluctuating symbols, and in which the final stop result is the award corresponding result in a game round that results in a jackpot result or a small win result. This refers to a display state that is used to make the player think that the fluctuating display state is likely to result in the above-mentioned granting result, at a stage after the fluctuating display of symbols in the device 424 is started and before the stop result is derived and displayed. Specifically, regarding the award correspondence result, combinations of symbols with the same number attached on any active line are stopped and displayed.

Two types of expected effects are set: a ready-to-reach display and a preview display for making users expect the occurrence of a ready-to-reach display or a grant response result at a stage before the ready-to-reach display occurs.

In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying some of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 424, and in this state, the remaining symbols are displayed. Includes a display state in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a row. In addition, while the combination of ready-to-reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-reach effect. , those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface after reducing or not displaying a combination of ready-to-reach symbols are included.

The preview display is performed in a situation where the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner in all symbol rows after the variable display of the symbols has started on the display surface of the symbol display device 424, or in a situation in which symbols are being displayed in a variable manner in all symbol rows, or in some symbol rows where multiple symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In a situation where symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a symbol column, a mode is included in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol column. Also included are those in which the background screen is set in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and those in which the symbols on the symbol row are set in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice display can occur in any game round when a reach display is displayed or when a reach display is not performed, but it is higher when a reach display is performed than when a reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a game round in which the same combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed, that is, in a game round corresponding to a jackpot result or a small win result. In addition, in the game round corresponding to the winning result, this is executed when the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the main side ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. .

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to display a preview is not made by the main control device 60 but by the sound emission control device 81. In this case, the sound emission control device 81 determines that a preview display is more likely to occur in a game round corresponding to either a jackpot result or a small win result than in a game round corresponding to a losing result, and that the appearance rate is lower. A lottery process for displaying a preview is executed so as to satisfy at least one condition that a low notice display is likely to occur. Incidentally, this lottery result is reflected when the pattern display device 424 performs a game replay.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used by the main CPU 63 to determine the display continuation period of the variable display of symbols in the special symbol display units 425 and 426 and the display duration of the variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 424. The variation type counter CS is repeatedly updated and is acquired when determining a variation pattern at the start of symbol variation in the special symbol display units 425, 426 and at the start of symbol variation by the symbol display device 424.

<General purpose electric power control processing>
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 63 will be explained. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the regular electricity control process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the general electric power control process is executed in step S8914 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). Further, the processing from step SD601 to step SD610 in the general electric power control process is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, a process for acquiring reservation information on the general figure side is executed (step SD601). In the acquisition process, if a prize has been won in the through prize section 414 and the holding information on the general drawing side for the maximum number of pieces has not been acquired in the general drawing holding area 455, the general drawing accessory release counter C4 The numerical information of is stored in the general map holding area 455. In this case, the reservation information on the general map side is stored in the order of first area 455a → second area 455b → third area 455c → fourth area 455d.

Thereafter, the numerical information of the general/universal electricity counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is read out (step SD602), and the general/universal electricity address table provided in the main side ROM 64 is read out (step SD603). Then, a start address corresponding to the numerical information of the general-purpose electricity counter is acquired from the general-purpose electricity address table (step SD604), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the obtained start address (step SD605).

The general purpose electric power counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to grasp which of the steps SD606 to SD610 in the general electric power control process should be executed. In the address table, the start address of the program for executing each process of step SD606 to step SD610 is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the general electric power counter. If the value of the general pattern/universal electricity counter is "0", the process jumps to step SD606 to start the general pattern fluctuation, and if the value of the general/universal electricity counter is "1", the process jumps to the general pattern fluctuation start process of step SD607. Jumps to intermediate processing, and when the value of the general map and general electric power counter is "2", jumps to the general map confirmation process of step SD608, and when the value of the general electric map and general electric power counter is "3", The process jumps to step SD609, during which the general power is open, and if the value of the general power counter is "4", the process jumps to step SD610, during which the general power is closed.

In the general pattern fluctuation start process of step SD606, the pending information on the general pattern side stored in the general pattern holding area 455 is on the condition that the general pattern side holding information is held and stored in the general pattern holding area 455. Execute the process of shifting. Specifically, the reservation information on the general drawing side stored in the first area 455a of the general drawing holding area 455 is shifted to the ordinary drawing execution area 456, and then the second area 455b → the first area 455a, The reservation information on the general map side is shifted so that the third area 455c→the second area 455b and the fourth area 455d→the third area 455c. Then, the guide state lottery process is executed using the reservation information on the ordinary figure side newly shifted to the execution area 456 for ordinary figures as a lottery value. In this embodiment, as already explained, there are a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode as support modes. However, the probability of winning the guided state in the guided state lottery process is the same in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode (specifically, 4/5).

In the ordinary figure variation start process, when the guided state lottery process is executed, a process for starting the variable display of the symbols in the ordinary figure display section 423a is executed. In this case, information on the display duration period during which the symbols are variably displayed on the general figure display section 423a is set in the general figure general electric timer counter provided in the main side RAM 65. The value set in the general electric power timer counter is subtracted by 1 each time the timer update process (step S8910) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed. In this case, the display duration period is shorter in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode, the display duration is 1 second, and in the low-frequency support mode, the display duration is 10 seconds. Thereafter, after starting the variable display of the pattern on the general figure display section 423a, the value of the general figure general electric counter is updated from "0" to "1". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the general-purpose figure and electric power control process becomes the process during general-purpose figure fluctuation.

In the process during normal figure variation in step SD607, a process for updating the display of the picture in the normal figure display section 423a is executed. In addition, if the value set in the general-purpose pattern timer counter in the main side RAM 65 in the general-purpose pattern fluctuation start process is "0," the information on the fixed period on the general-purpose pattern side is transferred to the general-purpose pattern in the main-side RAM 65. In addition to setting it in the general-purpose electric timer counter, the general-purpose figure display section 423a stops displaying the pattern corresponding to the result of the induction state lottery process that triggered the execution of the current pattern fluctuation display on the general-purpose figure display section 423a. Execute processing. Then, the value of the general electricity counter is updated from "1" to "2". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the general-purpose map and electric power control process becomes the general-purpose map determining process.

In the general figure determination processing in step SD608, if the value of the general figure general electricity timer counter is "0", the result of the induction state lottery process that triggered the execution of the current pattern fluctuation display time is the guide Determine whether the state is elected or not. If the induction state is not won, the value of the general map and general power counter is cleared to "0". Thereby, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the general-purpose figure and electric power control process becomes the general-purpose figure fluctuation start process.

If the guidance state is won, a process for bringing the guidance unit 432 of the second actuating section 413 into the guidance state is executed. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the guidance unit 432 enters the guidance state is set to three times, and the upper limit guidance period for each execution of each guidance state is set to two seconds. On the other hand, in the low-frequency support mode, the number of times the guidance unit 432 enters the guidance state is set to one time, and the upper limit guidance period for the number of executions of the guidance state is set to 0.6 seconds. Information on the number of executions of the guidance state is set in a general power release number counter provided in the main side RAM 65, and information on the upper limit guidance period is set in a general power circuit timer counter. Furthermore, in both the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the upper limit number of winning game balls to the second operating section 413 is 10 when the induced state is won. Information on the upper limit winning number is set in a general electricity winning counter provided in the main side RAM 65. When the value of the general electricity prize winning counter becomes "0", the execution of the guidance state triggered by the winning of the current guidance state is terminated. Further, by starting to output a drive signal to the guide drive section 436, the guiding unit 432 is switched from the non-guiding state to the guiding state. After making settings to enable execution of the guidance state as described above, the value of the general/universal electricity counter is updated from "2" to "3". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the general purpose electric power control process becomes the general electric power open process.

In step SD609, during normal electricity release processing, when a win to the second operating unit 413 has occurred, a value corresponding to the number of winnings is subtracted from the value of the general electricity winning counter in the main side RAM 65. If the value of the general electric winning counter is "0," the guiding unit 432 is switched from the guiding state to the non-guiding state by stopping the output of the drive signal to the guide drive section 436, and then the general electric winning prize counter is switched from the guiding state to the non-guiding state. Clear the value of the general electricity counter to "0". Thereby, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the general-purpose figure and electric power control process becomes the general-purpose figure fluctuation start process. Furthermore, even if the value of the general-purpose electric prize winning counter is not "0," if the value of the general electrician timer counter is "0," the output of the drive signal to the guide drive unit 436 is stopped. As a result, the induction unit 432 is switched from the induction state to the non-induction state, and the value of the normal power disconnection counter is subtracted by 1. If the value of the general power disconnection counter is not "0", the information on the non-induction continuation period of the guidance unit 432 is set in the general power power timer counter, and then the value of the general power power disconnection counter is set to "3". Update from ``4'' to ``4''. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the general utility grid control process becomes the general electricity closed process. When the value of the general power supply opening counter is "0", the value of the general power supply number counter is cleared to "0". Thereby, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the general-purpose figure and electric power control process becomes the general-purpose figure fluctuation start process.

In step SD610, during the power outage process, the guidance unit 432 is activated by starting to output a drive signal to the guide drive section 436, provided that the value of the power outage timer counter is "0". The state is switched from the non-induction state to the induction state, and information on the upper limit induction period is set in the general-purpose electricity timer counter. Then, the value of the general electric power counter is updated from "4" to "3". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the general purpose electric power control process becomes the general electric power open process.

By executing the general/universal electricity/university electricity control process as described above, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the general/universal figure display section 423a, triggered by the occurrence of a winning in the through prize section 414. If the guiding state is won in the guiding state lottery process, the guiding unit 432 of the second operating section 413 enters the guiding state. When the second operating section 413 enters the guided state, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second operating section 413, and when the game ball enters the second operating section 413, the reservation information on the second special drawing side is changed. It is stored in the second special figure holding area 453.

<Special figure special electric control processing>
FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the special figure special electric control process is executed in step S8913 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). Further, the processing of steps SD701 to SD713 in the special figure special electric control process is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, pending information acquisition processing is executed (step SD701). In the reservation information acquisition process, if a winning has occurred in the first actuating section 412, the number of reservation information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure reservation area 452 is the upper limit storage number (specific On the condition that the number is less than 4), storage processing of the reservation information on the first special drawing side is executed. In the storage process, each numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first area 452a to fourth area 452d of the first special figure holding area 452 as the hold information on the first special figure side. It is stored in the area where the reservation information on the first special figure side is not stored, which is earlier in the order of consumption. In addition, when the reservation information on the first special symbol side is acquired, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display section 427 are updated in accordance with the increase in the number of reservation information on the first special symbol side. Configure the data to do so. Moreover, when the hold information on the first special figure side is acquired, a hold increase command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. As a result, the image for informing the number of pending storages of the pending information on the first special symbol side in the symbol display device 424 is updated in accordance with the new acquisition of the pending information on the first special symbol side.

If a prize has been won to the second actuating part 413, the number of reservation information on the second special drawing side stored in the second special drawing holding area 453 is less than the upper limit storage number (specifically, 4 pieces) On the condition that this is the case, storage processing of the reservation information on the second special figure side is executed. In the storage process, each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is stored as the reservation information on the second special symbol side, and is stored in the first area 453a to the fourth area 453d of the second special symbol reservation area 453. It is stored in the area where the reservation information on the second special figure side is not stored, which is earlier in the order of consumption. In addition, when the reservation information on the second special symbol side is acquired, the display contents of the second special symbol reservation display section 428 are updated in accordance with the increase in the number of reservation information on the second special symbol side. Configure the data to do so. Moreover, when the hold information on the second special figure side is acquired, a hold increase command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. As a result, the image for informing the number of pending storages of the pending information on the second special symbol side in the symbol display device 424 is updated in accordance with the new acquisition of the pending information on the second special symbol side.

After executing the reservation information acquisition process, the special figure/special electric line address table stored in the main side ROM 64 is read out (step SD702). Then, a start address corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure/telephone counter is acquired from the special figure/telephone address table (step SD703), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step SD704).

The special figure special electric line counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to grasp which of each process from step SD705 to step SD713 in the special figure special electric line control process should be executed. is set as the start address in the program for executing each process from step SD705 to step SD713 in correspondence with the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter. If the value of the special figure special electric line counter is "0", the process jumps to the special figure fluctuation start process of step SD705, and if the value of the special figure special electric line counter is "1", the process jumps to the special figure fluctuation process of step SD706. If the value of the special figure special electric line counter is ``2'', the process jumps to the special figure confirmation process of step SD707, and if the value of the special figure special electric line counter is ``3'', the process jumps to step SD708. If the value of the special figure special electric line counter is "4", jump to the distribution process of step SD709, and if the value of the special figure special electric line counter is "5", step Jump to the special train start process of SD710, and if the value of the special map special train counter is "6", jump to the special train opening process of step SD711, and if the value of the special map special train counter is "7" The program jumps to the special train closing process in step SD712, and when the value of the special map special train counter is "8", jumps to the special train end process in step SD713. Each process from step SD705 to step SD713 will be individually explained below.

<Special figure fluctuation start process>
First, the special symbol fluctuation start process in step SD705 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 219. In addition, the processing of steps SD801 to step SD818 in the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, on the condition that the reservation information on the first special figure side or the reservation information on the second special figure side is stored (step SD801: YES), a data setting process is executed (step SD802). . In the data setting process, if the second special figure holding area 453 stores hold information on the second special figure side, it is acquired in the first special figure holding area 452 before the hold information on the second special figure side. Regardless of whether or not the hold information on the first special figure side has been acquired, the hold information on the second special figure side stored in the first area 453a of the second special figure hold area 453 is It is moved to the execution area 454 for special figures to be executed. As a result, it is possible to give priority to the hold information on the second special figure side as an opportunity to execute the validity judgment process over the hold information on the first special figure side, and it is also possible to give priority as an opportunity to execute the game round. Become.

When the second special figure side hold information stored in the first area 453a of the second special figure hold area 453 is moved to the special figure execution area 454, it is then stored in the second special figure hold area 453. A process is executed to shift the pending information on the second special figure side that has been set. This data shift processing sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas 453a to 453d to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area 453b → first area 453a, third area 453c → second area 453b, fourth area 453d → third area 453c, and the data is shifted to the fourth area 453d. Clear to "0". In addition, in the data setting process, data is set so that the display contents of the second special symbol reservation display section 428 are updated in accordance with the current reduction in the number of reservation information on the second special symbol side. Further, in the data setting process, a hold reduction command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. As a result, the image for informing the number of pending storages of the pending information on the second special symbol side in the symbol display device 424 is updated in accordance with the decrease in the pending information on the second special symbol side.

On the other hand, in the data setting process, if the second special figure holding area 453 does not store the holding information on the second special figure side, the data stored in the first area 452a of the first special figure holding area 452 is move to the execution area 454 for After that, a process of shifting the data stored in the first special figure holding area 452 is executed. This data shift processing sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas 452a to 452d to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area 452b → first area 452a, third area 452c → second area 452b, fourth area 452d → third area 452c, and the data is shifted to the fourth area 452d. Clear to "0". In addition, in the data setting process, data is set so that the display content of the first special figure reservation display section 427 is updated in accordance with the current reduction in the number of reservation information on the first special figure side. Further, in the data setting process, a hold reduction command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. As a result, the image for informing the number of pending storages of the pending information on the first special symbol side in the symbol display device 424 is updated in accordance with the decrease in the pending information on the first special symbol side.

After executing the data setting process, an appropriateness determination process is executed (step SD803). In the validity judgment process, if the hold information on the first special figure side is stored in the special figure execution area 454 and the current game round is triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side, the current pachinko The validity table 461 (see FIG. 215(a)) of the first special symbol corresponding to the setting value of the machine 10 is read from the main side ROM 64. Then, the numerical information about the winning random number counter C1 is read out from the pending information on the first special figure side that triggered the start of the current game round, and the read numerical information is applied to the win/fail table 461 of the first special figure. By comparing the results, it is determined whether the result of the current success/failure determination process is a jackpot result or a miss result.

On the other hand, in the validity judgment process, if the pending information on the second special figure side is stored in the special figure execution area 454 and the current game round is triggered by the pending information on the second special figure side, the current The second special figure win/fail table 462 (see FIG. 215(b)) corresponding to the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 is read from the main side ROM 64. Then, the numerical information about the winning random number counter C1 is read out from the pending information on the second special figure side that triggered the start of the current game round, and the read numerical information is applied to the win/fail table 462 of the second special figure. By comparing the results, it is determined whether the result of the current success/failure determination process is a jackpot result, a small win result, or a miss result.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot result (step SD804: YES), a jackpot type determination process is executed (step SD805). In the jackpot type determination process, the jackpot type table 463 shown in FIG. 216(a) is read from the main ROM 64. In addition, if the hold information on the first special figure side is the trigger for the current game round, the numerical information about the type counter C2 is read out of the hold information on the first special figure side, and the hold information on the second special figure side is read out. If the information is the trigger for the current game round, the numerical information about the type counter C2 is read out of the pending information on the second special figure side. Then, check which type of jackpot result numerical range of the 6R jackpot result and 15R jackpot result set in the jackpot type table 463 that the numerical information about the read type counter C2 corresponds to. Identify.

After executing the jackpot type determination process, a flag in the main side RAM 65 corresponding to the type of jackpot result identified in the type determination process is set to "1" (step SD806). The state of the flag set to "1" is cleared to "0" when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Thereafter, a stop result setting process for jackpot results is executed (step SD807). Specifically, information about the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the current game round on the side that is the target of execution of the game round among the first special figure display section 425 and the second special figure display section 426. is specified from the stop result table for jackpot results stored in advance in the main side ROM 64, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 65. In this stop result table for jackpot results, the types of stop modes of the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the first special figure display section 425 or the second special figure display section 426 are set differently for each type of jackpot result. In step SD807, information on the stop mode of the symbols corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in step SD805 is stored in the main side RAM 65. Note that the pattern stopping manner may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of pattern stopping patterns may be set for at least some of the jackpot results. For jackpot results in which a plurality of types of pattern stopping modes are set, a method for selecting a stopping result is arbitrary, but for example, a structure may be adopted in which a stopping result is selected according to the value of the type counter C2.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is a small hit result (step SD808: YES), a type determination process at the time of a small win is executed (step SD809). In addition, as already explained, when the validity judgment process is executed for the reservation information on the first special figure side, the small winning result is not selected, and the determination process is performed for the reservation information on the second special figure side. When the determination process is executed, a small winning result may be selected. In the type determination process for small winnings, a small winning type table 464 shown in FIG. 216(c) is read from the main side ROM 64. Further, numerical information regarding the type counter C2 is read out of the pending information on the second special figure side which is the trigger for the current game round. Then, the numerical information about the read type counter C2 is of any type of small winning result among the first small winning result, second small winning result, and third small winning result set in the small winning type table 464. Specify whether it corresponds to the numerical range of the winning result.

After executing the small win type determination process, a flag in the main side RAM 65 corresponding to the type of small win result specified in the type determination process is set to "1" (step SD810). If the opening/closing execution mode does not occur after the distribution execution mode ends, the state of the flag set to "1" will be cleared to "0" when the distribution execution mode ends, and the distribution execution mode will end. If the opening/closing execution mode occurs later, it is cleared to "0" when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Thereafter, a stop result setting process for small winning results is executed (step SD811). Specifically, information on the stopping mode of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed in the second special figure display section 426 in the current game round is obtained from the stopping result table for small winning results stored in advance in the main side ROM 64. The identified information is stored in the main RAM 65. In this stop result table for small hit results, the types of stopping modes of the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the second special figure display section 426 are set differently for each type of small win result, and in step SD811 , information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the type of small hit result specified in step SD809 is stored in the main side RAM 65. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a jackpot result. Note that the pattern stopping mode may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each small win result, or a plurality of types of pattern stopping modes may be set for at least some of the small win results. . Although the method of selecting a stop result for a small win result in which a plurality of types of pattern stop modes are set is arbitrary, it may be configured such that, for example, a stop result is selected according to the value of the type counter C2.

If the result of the win/fail determination process is neither a jackpot result nor a small win result (step SD804 and step SD808: NO), a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed (step SD812). Specifically, information about the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the current game round on the side that is the target of execution of the game round among the first special figure display section 425 and the second special figure display section 426. is specified from the stop result table for failure results stored in advance in the main side ROM 64, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 65. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a jackpot result and the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a small win result.

After any one of the stop result setting processes is executed, a display continuation period understanding process is executed (step SD813). In this process, numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not a ready-to-reach display will occur on the symbol display device 424 in the current game round. Specifically, if the game round related to the start of the current variation is any of the jackpot results or any of the small win results, it is determined that the reach display will occur. In addition, even if it is neither a jackpot result nor a small hit result, the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area 454 for special symbols is the numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence. In this case, it is determined that a reach display occurs.

If it is determined that the reach display will occur, refer to the reach occurrence duration table stored in the main side ROM 64 to obtain the display duration of the game session corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the game times corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS are displayed by referring to the reach non-occurrence continuation period table stored in the main side ROM 64. Get duration. Incidentally, the display continuation period of a gaming session that can be obtained by referring to the continuation period table for non-reach occurrence is different from the display continuation period of a gaming session that can be obtained by referring to the continuation period table for non-reach occurrence.

Thereafter, a variation command and a type command corresponding to the results of the current propriety determination process and type determination process, the current support mode type, and the process result of step SD813 are selected from the main ROM 64 (step SD814). Then, the selected variation command and type command are transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step SD815). The audio emission control device 81 executes control so that the performance for the game round corresponding to the received variation command and type command is executed.

Thereafter, variable display of symbols is started on the side of the first special figure display section 425 and second special figure display section 426 that is the target of the current game round (step SD816). The first special figure display part 425 and the second special figure display part 425 and the second special figure display part serve as a table referred to by the main side CPU 63 when the first special figure display part 425 or the second special figure display part 426 displays a changing pattern. A variable display table for special symbols common to 426 is stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. When variable display of symbols is executed in the first special figure display section 425 or the second special figure display section 426, the same variable display table is used regardless of the result of the validity judgment process and the result of the type judgment process. Ru. When the first special figure display section 425 or the second special figure display section 426 displays a variable pattern, the variable display of the symbol according to a predetermined pattern is repeated, but the variable display table for the special figure is Control data for one round in the variable display of the picture according to the predetermined pattern is set. Therefore, when a variable display of symbols is performed in the first special figure display section 425 or the second special figure display section 426, the variable display table for the special figure is displayed until the display duration of the game round determined in step SD813 has elapsed. will be used repeatedly.

Note that the content of the variable display of the picture in the first special figure display section 425 and the second special figure display section 426 is arbitrary, and for example, when all the display segments 425a and 426a are in a light-emitting state in a predetermined order, the picture changes. A structure may be adopted in which a variable display of the picture is performed, or a structure may be adopted in which a variable display of a pattern is performed by some display segments 425a, 426a, such as two or three display segments, being in a light emitting state in a predetermined order. , a configuration may be adopted in which all the display segments 425a, 426a blink to display a changing pattern, or some display segments 425a, 426a, such as one or two, blink to display a variable pattern. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which this is performed.

Thereafter, the special display section 429 is turned off (step SD817). In the special display section 429, when the opening/closing execution mode occurs, information corresponding to the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode is displayed. In other words, when the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a 6R jackpot result, a display corresponding to six round games is performed on the special display section 429 when the opening/closing execution mode is started. In addition, when the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a 15R jackpot result, a display corresponding to the 15 round game is performed on the special display section 429 when the opening/closing execution mode is started. In addition, if the opening/closing execution mode occurs due to a V winning occurring in the distribution execution mode triggered by the first small winning result, the special display section 429 will display 5 when the opening/closing execution mode is started. A display corresponding to the current round game is displayed. In addition, if the opening/closing execution mode occurs due to a V winning occurring in the distribution execution mode triggered by the second small winning result, the special display section 429 will display 8 when the opening/closing execution mode is started. A display corresponding to the current round game is displayed. In addition, if the opening/closing execution mode occurs due to a V winning occurring in the distribution execution mode triggered by the third small winning result, the special display section 429 will display 14 when the opening/closing execution mode is started. A display corresponding to the current round game is displayed. In the above configuration, by executing the light-off process of the special display section 429 in step SD817 of the special figure fluctuation start process, it corresponds to the number of round games in the special display section 429 that is started when the opening/closing execution mode is started. This display ends when a new game round is started after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The special display section 429 is maintained in an off state until a new opening/closing execution mode occurs.

Thereafter, the value of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step SD818). When the special figure fluctuation start process is executed, the value of the special figure special electric counter is "0", so when 1 is added, the value of the special figure special electric counter that is subject to the addition is changed to the value of the special figure special electric counter that is subject to the addition during the special figure fluctuation processing ( It becomes "1" corresponding to step SD706).

<Processing during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the special figure fluctuation process executed in step SD706 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 218) will be described.

If the display duration of the current game round has not elapsed, and it is time to update the display contents of the special figure display sections 425, 426 that are the targets of the current game round, the special figure display By referring to the variable display table, data settings for updating the display contents of the special figure display sections 425 and 426 are performed. As a result, the display contents of the symbols in the special figure display sections 425 and 426 that are the targets of the current game round are updated to the display contents of the next order. In addition, the main side RAM 65 includes a first display order counter that is referred to in order to derive the display contents of the symbol from the variable display table for the special symbol when it is time to update the symbol in the first special symbol display unit 425. It is provided. In addition, the main side RAM 65 includes a second display order counter that is referred to in order to derive the display contents of the symbol from the variable display table for the special symbol when it is time to update the symbol in the second special symbol display section 426. It is provided.

The manner at the start of the fluctuating display of the symbols in the special figure display sections 425 and 426 and the manner of updating the fluctuating display of the symbols are performed in a constant manner regardless of the result of the validity determination process and the result of the type determination process, and It is performed in a fixed manner regardless of the content of the game replay on the symbol display device 424. For example, when a predetermined update timing occurs a plurality of times, the display content of the symbol goes around once, and a display pattern in which the display order is a certain order is repeated, and the display duration of the game session has elapsed. Regardless of the order in which the display pattern is displayed, the stop result determined at the start of the game round is displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display sections 425 and 426.

On the other hand, if the display continuation period of the game round has elapsed, the information on the stop mode of the symbols in the special figure display sections 425, 426 stored in the main side RAM 65 at the start of the game cycle is read out, and the stop mode of the symbol is also read out. The display of the special figure display parts 425 and 426, which are the targets of the current game round, is controlled so as to be displayed. As a result, the special figure display sections 425 and 426, which are the target of execution of the current game round, display the symbols corresponding to the results of the validity judgment process and the result of the type judgment process of the current game round. Fluctuation display is stopped. The state of the picture that is stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 425, 426 is the same as the next variation display of the picture on the special figure display section 425, 426, regardless of whether it is in the distribution execution mode or the opening/closing execution mode. Remains until started. Further, information on the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 65. Thereby, measurement of the final stop period is started.

Thereafter, a final stop command is sent to the audio emission control device 81. When the audio emission control device 81 receives the final stop command from the main CPU 63, it transmits the final stop command to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the final stop command from the audio emission control device 81, it reads out a display pattern table for displaying the combination of stop symbols in the current game round in a stop state over the final stop period. As a result, the combination of stopped symbols corresponding to the current game round is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 424 over the final stopping period.

Thereafter, add 1 to the value of the special figure special electric counter. Since the value of the special figure special electric line counter is "1" when the process during special figure fluctuation is executed, the value of the special figure special electric line counter corresponds to the process during special figure confirmation (step SD707) by adding 1. It becomes "2".

<Special drawing confirmation process>
Next, the special figure confirmation process executed in step SD707 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 218) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 220. In addition, the processing of steps SD901 to step SD915 in the special figure confirmation process is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

If the final stop period has passed and the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result (step SD901 and step SD902: YES), display start processing on the special display section 429 is executed (step SD903). . In the display start process of the special display section 429, data settings are performed to control the display of the special display section 429 so that when the current jackpot result is a 6R jackpot result, a display corresponding to 6 round games is started. I do. In addition, in the display start processing of the special display section 429, if the current jackpot result is a 15R jackpot result, the display of the special display section 429 is controlled so that the display corresponding to the 15 round game is started. Perform data settings. Thereafter, 3 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step SD904). Since the value of the special figure special electric line counter when the special figure confirmation process is executed is "2," the value of the special figure special electric line counter that is subject to addition by adding 3 is changed to the value of the special figure special electric line counter that is subject to the addition. ), which corresponds to "5".

If the final stop period has passed and the current game round does not correspond to the jackpot result (Step SD901: YES, Step SD902: NO), the support flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to “1”. is set (step SD905). The support flag is set to "1" in the high frequency support mode, and is set to "0" in the low frequency support mode. Therefore, in step SD905, it is determined whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode.

If it is high-frequency support mode and the support flag is set to "1" (step SD905: YES), whether or not the game session that ended this time is the game session that was triggered by the hold information on the second special drawing side. is determined (step SD906). If the game round that ended this time is a game round that was triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side (step SD906: YES), the value of the second special figure counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1, and (Step SD907), and the value of the total counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (Step SD908). On the other hand, if the game round that ended this time is a game round triggered by the reservation information on the first special figure side (step SD906: NO), the value of the first special figure counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1. At the same time (step SD909), the value of the total counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step SD910). After executing the process of step SD908 or step SD910, it is determined whether the value of any one of the first special figure counter, the second special figure counter, and the total counter is "0" (step SD911). If an affirmative determination is made in step SD911, the support flag in the main side RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step SD912). As a result, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

As already explained, when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. This high-frequency support mode ends when the number of game runs after the opening/closing execution mode ends reaches the end reference number of times, and the mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode. The first special symbol counter, the second special symbol counter, and the total counter are all counters for specifying the end reference number of times by the main CPU 63. The first special figure counter is a counter for measuring the number of times the game is executed triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, and the second special figure counter is a counter for opening/closing execution. This is a counter for measuring the number of game runs triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side after the mode ends, and the total counter is for the number of times the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. This is a counter for measuring the total number of executions of game times triggered by reservation information and game times triggered by reservation information on the second special figure side. No matter what kind of jackpot result or small win result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode, "100" will be set in the first special symbol counter and total counter when the opening/closing execution mode ends. be done. On the other hand, the second special figure counter is set to "1" if the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the 6R jackpot result based on the reservation information on the first special figure side, and the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by other events. If it is in the mode, "5" is set.

As mentioned above, when a game round triggered by the hold information on the 1st special figure side is executed, the values of the 1st special figure counter and the total counter are each subtracted by 1, and the hold information on the 2nd special figure side is subtracted by 1. When a game round triggered by this is executed, the values of the second special symbol counter and the total counter are each subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of any one of the first special symbol counter, the second special symbol counter, and the total counter becomes "0", the high frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, when the number of game runs triggered by the hold information on the second special drawing side after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes 1 or 5, the opening/closing execution mode ends. If the number of game rounds triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side later reaches 100, or when the game round triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side after the opening/closing execution mode ends The game ends when the total number of games triggered by the hold information on the second special drawing side reaches 100.

However, in the high frequency support mode, the firing operation is basically performed so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. Therefore, the high-frequency support mode basically ends when the number of game runs triggered by the hold information on the second special drawing side after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes 1 or 5. becomes. In addition, when the number of executions of the game round triggered by the hold information on the second special drawing side after the opening/closing execution mode ends is 1, "ending" means that the first game after the opening/closing execution mode ends. 2. The high-frequency support mode ends when the game round triggered by the hold information on the special figure side ends. In addition, when the number of executions of the game round triggered by the hold information on the second special drawing side after the opening/closing execution mode ends is 5, it means that the fifth game after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode ends when the game round triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side ends.

If a negative determination is made in step SD905, if a negative determination is made in step SD911, or if the process of step SD912 is executed, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to the small winning result (step SD913). If the current game round does not correspond to the small winning result (step SD913: NO), the value of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step SD914). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step SD705). On the other hand, if the current game round corresponds to the small winning result (step SD913: YES), the value of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step SD915). Since the value of the special figure special electric line counter when the special figure confirmation process is executed is "2," the value of the special figure special electric line counter that becomes the target of the addition by 1 is changed to the value of the special figure special electric line counter that is subject to the addition. It becomes "3" corresponding to step SD708).

<Processing for starting distribution>
Next, the distribution start process executed in step SD708 of the special figure special electric train control process (FIG. 218) will be explained.

First, a distribution start command is sent to the audio emission control device 81. When the audio emission control device 81 receives a distribution start command from the main CPU 63, the audio emission control device 81 controls the emission of the display emission section 53 and the sound of the speaker section 54 so that an effect indicating that the distribution execution mode is in progress is executed. Execute output control. Further, the audio emission control device 81 transmits a distribution start command to the display control device 82 . When the display control device 82 receives the distribution start command from the audio emission control device 81, after a display effect indicating that the distribution execution mode has started is executed, a display indicating that the distribution execution mode is in progress is executed. Display control is performed on the symbol display device 424 so that the performance is executed.

Thereafter, "10" is set in the distribution winning counter provided in the main side RAM 65. The distribution prize counter determines the trigger for switching the distribution prize device 415 from the open state to the closed state in relation to the number of game balls that have entered the distribution prize device 415 which is in the open state in the distribution execution mode. This is a counter for identification by the main CPU 63. It also executes a distribution release period setting process. In the process of setting the distribution opening period, information corresponding to 10 seconds is stored in the timer counter of the main side RAM 65 so that the period during which the distribution prize winning device 415 is maintained in the open state is 10 seconds, which is the distribution opening period. set. Then, in order to open the prize distribution device 415, output of a drive signal to the distribution entrance drive unit 443 is started.

Thereafter, add 1 to the value of the special figure special electric counter. When the distribution start process is executed, the value of the special figure special electric line counter is "3," so by adding 1, the value of the special figure special electric line counter becomes ``3'', which corresponds to the process for sorting (step SD709). 4".

<Distribution processing>
Next, the distribution process executed in step SD709 of the special figure/special electric train control process (FIG. 218) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 221. Note that the processing from step SE101 to step SE118 in the distribution processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, it is determined whether or not the timing has come to switch the switching piece 446 of the prize distribution device 415 from the retracted position to the V guiding position (step SE101). If 2 seconds have passed since the prize distribution device 415 was opened, an affirmative determination is made in step SE101. If an affirmative determination is made in step SE101, a drive signal is output to the switching drive unit 447 so that the switching piece 446 moves from the retracted position to the V-guidance position (step SE102). As a result, the switching piece 446 is placed at the V guiding position, and game balls that have subsequently reached the position of the switching piece 446 are guided by the switching piece 446 to the V winning path area 445c and are detected by the V winning detection sensor 449. .

When the game ball is detected by the V winning prize detection sensor 449 of the distribution prize winning device 415 (step SE103: YES), the V winning prize flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step SE104). The V win flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the game ball has been detected by the V win detection sensor 449. Further, a V winning command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step SE105). When the audio light emission control device 81 receives a V winning command from the main CPU 63, it controls the light emission of the display light emitting unit 53 and performs a production corresponding to the detection of a game ball by the V winning detection sensor 449. Executes sound output control of the speaker section 54. Further, the audio emission control device 81 transmits a V winning command to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the V winning command from the audio emission control device 81, the display control device 82 displays the symbol display device 424 so that a display effect indicating that a game ball has been detected by the V winning detection sensor 449 is executed. Control.

In the situation where the distribution winning device 415 is in the open state, it is determined whether the distribution opening period measured using the timer counter of the main side RAM 65 has elapsed (step SE106). If the distribution opening period has not elapsed (step SE106: NO), the distribution is performed by determining whether or not the game ball is detected by the count detection sensor 448 or the V prize detection sensor 449 of the distribution prize winning device 415. It is determined whether a winning has occurred in the winning device 415 (step SE107). If a prize has been won to the distribution prize device 415 (step SE107: YES), the value of the distribution prize counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step SE108). Then, it is determined whether the value of the distributed prize counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step SE109).

If an affirmative determination is made in step SE106, or if an affirmative determination is made in step SE109, the closing condition for the distribution prize winning device 415 is satisfied, so a drive signal is output to the drive unit 443 for the distribution entrance. By stopping the system, the prize distribution device 415 is brought into a closed state (step SE110). After that, in order to wait for the end of the distribution execution mode until there are no game balls in the distribution winning device 415, information corresponding to the waiting period is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 65 (step SE111). . The waiting period is set as a period longer than the longest period required until the game ball that enters the distribution winning device 415 is detected by either the count detection sensor 448 or the V winning detection sensor 449. Specifically, it is set to 4 seconds. By waiting for the end of the sorting execution mode until the waiting period has elapsed in this way, the game ball that entered the sorting winning device 415 immediately before the sorting winning device 415 is closed will be temporarily detected as a V winning prize. When detected by the sensor 449, it can be treated as valid.

If the standby period measured by the timer counter in the main side RAM 65 has elapsed (step SE112: YES), the switching drive unit 447 is driven so that the switching piece 446 returns from the V-guidance position to the retracted position. The output of the signal is stopped (step SE113). This causes the switching piece 446 to return to the retracted position.

After that, by determining whether "1" is set in the V winning flag of the main side RAM 65, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the V winning prize detection sensor 449 in the current distribution execution mode. (Step SE114). If the V winning flag is set to "1" (step SE114: YES), display start processing for the special display section 429 is executed (step SE115). In the display start processing of the special display section 429, if the current distribution execution mode is triggered by the first small winning result, the special display section 429 is displayed so that the display corresponding to the 5 round game is started. Configure data settings for control. In addition, in the display start process of the special display section 429, if the current distribution execution mode is triggered by the second small winning result, the special display section 429 Configure data settings to control display. In addition, in the display start process of the special display section 429, if the current distribution execution mode is triggered by the third small winning result, the special display section 429 Configure data settings to control display. After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step SE116). Since the value of the special figure special electric line counter when the distribution process is executed is "4," by adding 1, the value of the special figure special electric line counter that is subject to the addition is changed to the value of the special figure special electric line counter that is subject to the addition (step SD710). The number "5" corresponds to "5". Incidentally, when an affirmative determination is made in step SE114, the V winning flag is cleared to "0".

If the V winning flag is not set to "1" (step SE114: NO), a flag clearing process is executed (step SE117). In the flag clearing process, flags for specifying the type of small winning result are cleared to "0". Thereafter, the value of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step SE118). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step SD705).

<Special call start process>
Next, the special train start process executed in step SD710 of the special figure special train control process (FIG. 218) will be explained.

In the special electric start process, if it is before the start of the opening period, measurement of the opening period (for example, 4 seconds) is started, and an opening command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. When the audio light emission control device 81 receives the opening command, it controls the light emission of the display light emitting section 53 and the sound output of the speaker section 54 so that the opening effect is executed. Further, the audio light emission control device 81 transmits an opening command to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the opening command, it controls the display of the symbol display device 424 so that the opening effect is executed.

In the special electric start processing, when the opening period has elapsed, information corresponding to the number of executions of the round game in the current opening/closing execution mode is set in a round counter provided in the main side RAM 65. The round counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 each time a round game is executed. In addition, information on the open duration period of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 65, and the special electric winning device 416 in one round game is set in the winning counter provided in the main side RAM 65. Information corresponding to the upper limit number of prizes to be won (specifically, "10") is set. Then, a special electricity release setting process is executed. In the opening setting process, output of a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 416c is started so that the special electric prize winning device 416 becomes in an open state. Thereafter, add 1 to the value of the special figure special electric counter. As a result, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes "6" corresponding to the special electricity release process (step SD711).

<Processing while special electric line is open>
Next, the special train opening process executed in step SD711 of the special figure special train control process (FIG. 218) will be described.

In the special line opening process, when the opening continuation period of the special line winning device 416 has passed or when the upper limit winning number of game balls has been won in the special line winning device 416, a closing setting process is executed. In the closing setting process, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 416c is stopped so that the special electric winning device 416 is in the closed state. Thereafter, the value of the round counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1.

If the value of the round counter after subtraction by 1 is not "0", information corresponding to the closing duration period (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 65. Thereafter, add 1 to the value of the special figure special electric counter. As a result, the value of the special train special train counter becomes "7" corresponding to the special train closing process (step SD712).

If the value of the round counter after being subtracted by 1 is "0", information corresponding to the ending period (specifically, 10 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 65. Further, an ending command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. When receiving the ending command, the audio light emission control device 81 controls the light emission of the display light emitting section 53 and the sound output of the speaker section 54 so that the ending effect is executed. Further, the audio emission control device 81 transmits an ending command to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the ending command, it controls the display of the symbol display device 424 so that the ending effect is executed. After that, add 2 to the value of the special figure special electric counter. As a result, the value of the special figure special electric line counter becomes "8" corresponding to the special electric line end process (step SD713).

<Processing during special electric train closure>
Next, the special train closed process executed in step SD712 of the special train special train control process (FIG. 218) will be described.

If the closing duration period has elapsed, information on the open duration period of the round game (specifically 29 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 65, and one round game is set in the winning counter of the main side RAM 65. Information (specifically, "10") corresponding to the upper limit number of prizes to be won to the special electric prize winning device 416 in is set. Then, by executing the opening setting process for special electricity, the special electricity prize winning device 416 is brought into an open state. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1. As a result, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes "6" corresponding to the special electricity release process (step SD711).

<Special call termination process>
Next, the special train termination process executed in step SD713 of the special figure special train control process (FIG. 218) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 222. Note that the processing from step SE201 to step SE209 in the special call termination processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

If the ending period has elapsed (step SE201: YES), the total counter in the main side RAM 65 is set to "100" (step SE202), and the first special symbol counter in the main side RAM 65 is set to "100". Set (step SE203). Thereafter, it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the reservation information on the second special map side (step SE204). In addition, if the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the reservation information on the first special map side (step SE204: NO), it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the 15R jackpot result (step SE204: NO). SE205). If a positive determination is made in step SE204 or step SE205, "5" is set in the second special symbol counter of the main side RAM 65 (step SE206), and if a negative determination is made in both step SE204 and step SE205. Then, the second special figure counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step SE207). The conditions for ending the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends are set by the processing in steps SE202 to SE207.

When the process of step SE206 or step SE207 is executed, the support flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step SE208). As a result, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the high-frequency support mode. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step SE209). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step SD705).

<Notification that settings-related processing is in progress>
Next, a setting confirmation process (step SC213) or a setting value update process (step SC216) is executed in the main process (FIG. 185) that is started when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. A configuration for notifying that a situation is present will be explained.

FIG. 223 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control.

The clearing target area 371 includes a first display data buffer 271, a second display data buffer 272, a third display data buffer 273, a fourth display data buffer 274, and a fifth display data buffer 275, as in the fifty-sixth embodiment. is provided. Further, in addition to the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275, a sixth display data buffer 471, a seventh display data buffer 472, and an eighth display data buffer 473 are provided in the area to be cleared 371.

The first display data buffer 271 stores display data for causing the first special figure display section 425 to perform a predetermined display. At step SD816 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 219), a process for starting the variable display of the symbols in the first special figure display section 425 is executed, thereby controlling the display in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). In the means (step S8915), display data corresponding to the display at the start of variation of the first special figure display section 425 is set in the first display data buffer 271. In addition, the first timer interrupt process is performed by executing the process for updating the display contents of the first special figure display section 425 in the special figure fluctuation process (step SD706) in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 218). The display control means (step S8915) in (FIG. 133) sets display data in the first display data buffer 271 to advance the variable display of the symbols on the first special figure display section 425. In addition, the display contents of the first special symbol display section 425 are changed in the special symbol fluctuation processing (step SD706) in the special symbol special electric control processing (FIG. 218) to the validity determination processing (step SD803) in the current game round and in the event of a jackpot. The display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) displays the first special figure by executing the process for displaying the content corresponding to the process result of the type determination process (step SD805). Display data for causing the unit 425 to display a display corresponding to the result of the current game round is set in the first display data buffer 271. The display data set in this case becomes the display data selected in step SD807 or step SD812 of the special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 219) at the start of the current game round. Further, the display data set in this case is stored and held in the first display data buffer 271 until the first special figure display section 425 starts a new game round. Note that a first display circuit 261 is provided corresponding to the first special figure display section 425, and the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 is supplied to the first display circuit 261 to display the corresponding display. A display corresponding to the data is performed on the first special figure display section 425.

The second display data buffer 272 stores display data for causing the first special figure pending display section 427 to perform a predetermined display. When the reservation information on the first special figure side is newly stored in the first special figure reservation area 452 in the reservation information acquisition process (step SD701) in the special figure special electric train control process (FIG. 218), the first timer The display control means (step S8915) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 133) displays the display data corresponding to the number of pending information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure pending area 452 after the storage. It is set in the display data buffer 272. In addition, if the pending information on the first special figure side is used as the execution trigger for the game round in the data setting process (step SD802) in the special figure fluctuation start process (Figure 219), the first timer interrupt process (Figure 219) After the consumption, the display control means (step S8915) in 133) transfers the display data corresponding to the number of pending information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure pending area 452 to the second display data buffer 272. is set to In addition, a second display circuit 262 is provided corresponding to the first special figure pending display section 427, and the display data stored in the second display data buffer 272 is supplied to the second display circuit 262, so that the corresponding A display corresponding to the display data is performed on the first special figure reservation display section 427.

The third display data buffer 273 stores display data for causing the ordinary figure display section 423a to perform a predetermined display. The first timer interrupt process ( In the display control means (step S8915) in FIG. 133), display data corresponding to the display at the start of the fluctuation of the ordinary figure display section 423a is set in the third display data buffer 273. In addition, the first timer interrupt process ( The display control means (step S8915) in FIG. 133) sets display data in the third display data buffer 273 to advance the variable display of the picture on the ordinary figure display section 423a. In addition, in the general pattern fluctuation process (step SD607) of the general pattern general electricity control process (FIG. 217), the display content of the general pattern display section 423a is changed to the display content corresponding to the result of the guidance state lottery in the current fluctuation display time. By executing the process for this purpose, the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) causes the general figure display unit 423a to display a display corresponding to the result of the current variable display time. The display data of is set in the third display data buffer 273. The display data set in this case is stored and held in the third display data buffer 273 until a situation arises in which the normal figure display section 423a starts a new variable display time. Note that a third display circuit 263 is provided corresponding to the general figure display section 423a, and the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is supplied to the third display circuit 263, thereby changing the display data to the third display circuit 263. A corresponding display is performed on the ordinary figure display section 423a.

The fourth display data buffer 274 stores display data for causing the ordinary figure reservation display section 423b to perform a predetermined display. If the suspension information on the utility grid side is newly stored in the utility grid storage area 455 in the processing for acquiring the suspension information on the utility grid side (step SD601) of the utility grid/electricity control process (FIG. 217), the first After the storage, the display control means (step S8915) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) stores the display data corresponding to the number of pending information on the general drawing side stored in the general drawing holding area 455 in the fourth display data buffer. 274. In addition, when the pending information on the general map side is used as the execution trigger for the fluctuation display time of the general map display section 423a in the general map fluctuation start process (step SD606) of the general map general electric power control process (FIG. 217), , the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) displays the fourth display data corresponding to the number of pending information on the general drawing side stored in the general drawing holding area 455 after the consumption. It is set in the display data buffer 274. Note that a fourth display circuit 264 is provided corresponding to the common figure reservation display section 423b, and the display data stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 is supplied to the fourth display circuit 264, thereby displaying the display data. A display corresponding to the above is displayed on the ordinary drawing reservation display section 423b.

The fifth display data buffer 275 stores display data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform predetermined displays. Setting of display data to the fifth display data buffer 275 is executed in steps SE303, SE307, and SE310 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224), which will be described later. Note that a fifth display circuit 265 is provided corresponding to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is supplied to the fifth display circuit 265. As a result, a display corresponding to the display data is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

The sixth display data buffer 471 stores display data for causing the second special figure display section 426 to perform a predetermined display. In step SD816 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 219), a process for starting the variable display of the symbols in the second special figure display section 426 is executed, thereby controlling the display in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). In the means (step S8915), display data corresponding to the display at the start of variation of the second special figure display section 426 is set in the sixth display data buffer 471. In addition, the process for updating the display contents of the second special figure display section 426 is executed in the special figure variation process (step SD706) in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 218), so that the first timer interrupt process In the display control means (step S8915) in (FIG. 133), display data for advancing the variable display of the symbols on the second special figure display section 426 is set in the sixth display data buffer 471. In addition, in the special figure fluctuation processing (step SD706) in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 218), the display content of the second special figure display section 426 is changed to the correctness judgment process (step SD803) in the current game round, and in the case of a jackpot. The display control in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is performed by executing the process for displaying content corresponding to the processing results of the type determination process (step SD805) and the type determination process at the time of small winning (step SD809). In the means (step S8915), display data for causing the second special figure display section 426 to display a display corresponding to the result of the current game round is set in the sixth display data buffer 471. The display data set in this case becomes the display data selected in step SD807, step SD811 or step SD812 of the special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 219) at the start of the current game round. Further, the display data set in this case is stored and held in the sixth display data buffer 471 until the second special figure display section 426 starts a new game round. Note that a sixth display circuit is provided corresponding to the second special figure display section 426, and the display data stored in the sixth display data buffer 471 is supplied to the sixth display circuit, so that the display data is A corresponding display is performed on the second special figure display section 426.

The seventh display data buffer 472 stores display data for causing the second special figure pending display section 428 to perform a predetermined display. When the hold information on the second special figure side is newly stored in the second special figure hold area 453 in the hold information acquisition process (step SD701) in the special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 218), the first timer After the storage, the display control means (step S8915) in the interrupt process (FIG. 133) displays the display data corresponding to the number of pending information on the second special figure side stored in the second special figure pending area 453. It is set in the display data buffer 472. In addition, if the pending information on the second special figure side is used as the execution trigger for the game round in the data setting process (step SD802) in the special figure fluctuation start process (Figure 219), the first timer interrupt process (Figure 219) After the consumption, the display control means (step S8915) in 133) displays the display data corresponding to the number of pending information on the second special figure side stored in the second special figure holding area 453 in the seventh display data buffer 472. is set to A seventh display circuit is provided corresponding to the second special figure pending display section 428, and the display data stored in the seventh display data buffer 472 is supplied to the seventh display circuit. A display corresponding to the above is displayed on the second special figure reservation display section 428.

The eighth display data buffer 473 stores display data for causing the special display section 429 to perform a predetermined display. If the information on the number of round games is set in the special display section 429 display start process (step SD903) in the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 220) in the game round corresponding to the jackpot result, the first timer interrupt In the display control means (step S8915) in the process (FIG. 133), display data corresponding to the information on the number of round games is stored in the eighth display data buffer 473. In addition, if the information on the number of round games is set in the display start process (step SE115) of the special display section 429 in the distribution process (FIG. 221) by entering the distribution execution mode, the first timer Display data corresponding to the information on the number of round games is stored in the eighth display data buffer 473 by the display control means (step S8915) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 133). In addition, when the special display unit 429 extinguishing process (step SD817) is executed in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 219), the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) The display data in the eighth display data buffer 473 is cleared to "0". Note that an eighth display circuit is provided corresponding to the special display section 429, and by supplying the display data stored in the eighth display data buffer 473 to the eighth display circuit, a display corresponding to the display data is displayed. is displayed on the special display section 429.

Since the clearing target area 371 includes the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 275, 471 to 473, the first RAM clearing process (step SC218) or setting value updating process (step SC218) of the main process (FIG. 185) When the second RAM clearing process of SC216) is executed, the display data set in the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 275, 471 to 473 are cleared to "0". In addition to the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 275, 471 to 473, the area to be cleared 371 includes an area for special figure/special electric line control and an area for regular figure/general electric line control. Therefore, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode regardless of the support mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game cycle is not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general figure display section 423a is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the guidance unit 432 of the second actuating section 413 is not being executed. This results in a non-induced state. Additionally, the setting update display flag and setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to "0", and the setting update area 342 provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". be done. Furthermore, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed. Further, initial settings are executed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0".

FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the second timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step SE301 to step SE317 in the second timer interrupt process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63. In addition, the second timer interrupt process is enabled when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) of the main process (FIG. 185) is started, and is interrupted when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is finished. is prohibited. In addition, the second timer interrupt process is enabled when the setting value update process (step SC216) of the main process (FIG. 185) is started, and is also an interrupt when the setting value update process (step SC216) is finished. is prohibited. In addition, the second timer interrupt processing is performed from the time when interrupt permission is set in step SC230 of the main process (FIG. 185) until the interrupt disable setting is performed in step SC227 of the main process (FIG. 185). is allowed. The same applies to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133).

First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) (step SE301). By disabling the generation of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133), the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) will interrupt the second timer interrupt process (Figure 224) even if the first interrupt cycle has elapsed. It is possible to prevent it from being started. Furthermore, since the occurrence of the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 224) is prohibited, even if the second interrupt cycle has elapsed during the execution of the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 224), the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 224) is prohibited. It becomes possible to prevent the process (FIG. 224) from being activated redundantly.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SE302). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the main CPU 63 is executing the setting value update process (step SC216). Similarly to the fifty-sixth embodiment, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) is started by interrupting even when the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step SE302, a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update is executed (step SE303). In the setting process, similarly to the thirty-third embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated, and the pachinko machine 10 Display data for displaying the current set value of is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. As a result, a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. . This display continues while the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

Thereafter, a setting process for the first display data buffer 271 during the setting update is executed (step SE304). FIG. 225(a) is a flowchart showing a setting process for the first display data buffer 271 during a setting update. Note that the processes of steps SE401 to SE405 in the setting process for the first display data buffer 271 during the setting update are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

In this setting process, in a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the first special figure display section 425 displays changing symbols in the same way as when a game round is being executed. Execute the process. In addition, in the setting process, in order to cause the first special figure display unit 425 to display the symbol in a variable manner, the special figure variable display table and the special figure variable display table used in the special figure variation process (step SD706) are 1Use the display order counter.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not this time is the timing to update the display contents of the first special figure display section 425 (step SE401). The cycle of updating the display contents of the symbols on the first special figure display section 425 is the same as the cycle of updating the display contents of the symbols on the first special figure display section 425 in the game round. If it is time to update the display contents (step SE401: YES), the value of the first display order counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step SE402). If the value of the first display order counter after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value (for example, "20") (step SE403: YES), the value of the first display order counter is cleared to "0" ( Step SE404). As already explained, the first display order counter is a counter for specifying the display content of the pattern to be derived from the special pattern variable display table when it is time to update the pattern in the first special pattern display section 425. .

If a negative determination is made in step E401, if a negative determination is made in step SE403, or if the process in step SE404 is executed, the display content of the pattern corresponding to the current value of the first display order counter is changed to the special figure. is derived from the variable display table, and display data corresponding to the derived display content of the picture is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SE405). As a result, a pattern corresponding to the display data is displayed on the first special figure display section 425.

Due to the above configuration, in a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the display order is in a fixed order as in the case where the game round is being executed on the first special figure display section 425. The variable display of the symbols according to a certain display pattern is repeated on the first special figure display section 425. In this case, the special figure variable display table and first display order counter used to display the symbols in question are used when a game round is executed in the first special figure display section 425. It is something that As a result, while suppressing an increase in the required storage capacity, it is possible to display a changing pattern on the first special figure display section 425 in a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed. Become.

Returning to the explanation of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224), after executing the setting process for the first display data buffer 271 during the setting update (step SE304), the setting process for the eighth display data buffer 473 during the setting update is executed. Setting processing is executed (step SE305). In this setting process, display data for performing a predetermined display on the special display section 429 is set in the eighth display data buffer 473. Specifically, in the display start process (step SD903) of the special display section 429 in the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 220), display settings were made that correspond to the number of times the round game is executed in the case of a 15R jackpot result. In this case, the same display data as the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 473 is set in the eighth display data buffer 473. As a result, in a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, not only the first special figure display section 425 displays changing symbols as in the case of the game round, but also the special display section 429 Similarly to the case where a 15R jackpot result is obtained, a display corresponding to the fact that the number of times the round game has been executed is 15 is displayed.

The display data set in the first display data buffer 271 in step SE304 and the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 473 in step SE305 are executed when the setting value update process (step SC216) ends. It is cleared to "0" in the second RAM clearing process (step SB313). As a result, when the setting value update process (step SC216) ends, the first special figure display section 425 displays a symbol change and the special display section 429 displays a display corresponding to the fact that the number of times the round game has been executed is 15. It becomes possible to terminate. Thereafter, the display start process (FIG. 191) is executed in step SC226 of the main process (FIG. 185), so that the initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271. As a result, the initial display is started on the first special figure display section 425 similarly to the fifty-sixth embodiment. On the other hand, the special display section 429 is maintained in an off state until the next opening/closing execution mode is started.

Note that the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 473 in step SE305 is not limited to a configuration in which the display data is display data for causing a display corresponding to the fact that the number of executions of the round game is 15. For example, it may be display data for causing a display corresponding to the number of times the round game has been executed to be 6, as in the case of a 6R jackpot result, and the same as in the case of a first small win result. The display data may be for displaying a display corresponding to the fact that the number of times the round game has been executed is 5 times, or the number of times the round game has been executed is 8 times as in the case where the second small winning result has been obtained. It may be display data for causing a display to be displayed corresponding to a certain thing, such as for causing a display to be displayed corresponding to the fact that the number of times the round game has been executed is 14, as in the case where the third small winning result has been obtained. may be display data. Even in these cases, when the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the setting value update process (step SC216) is executed using the display data used to cause the special display section 429 to perform a predetermined display. It is possible to make a notification on the special display section 429 indicating that the current situation is present.

If a negative determination is made in step SE302, it is determined whether the setting confirmation display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SE306). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the main CPU 63 is executing the setting confirmation process (step SC213). As in the fifty-sixth embodiment, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) is started by interrupting even when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step SE306, a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is executed (step SE307). In the setting process, similarly to the thirty-third embodiment above, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked, and the pachinko machine 10 Display data for displaying the current set value of is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. As a result, a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being confirmed and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. . This display continues while the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed.

Thereafter, the setting process for the sixth display data buffer 471 during setting confirmation is executed (step SE308). FIG. 225(b) is a flowchart showing the setting process for the sixth display data buffer 471 during setting confirmation. Note that the processing of steps SE501 to SE505 in the setting processing for the sixth display data buffer 471 during setting confirmation is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

In this setting process, when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the second special figure display section 426 displays changing symbols in the same way as when a game round is being executed. Execute the process. In addition, in the setting process, in order to cause the second special figure display section 426 to display a variable display of this symbol, the special figure variable display table and the special figure variable display table used in the special figure variation process (step SD706) are 2Use the display order counter.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not this time is the timing to update the display contents of the second special figure display section 426 (step SE501). The cycle of updating the display contents of the symbols on the second special figure display section 426 is the same as the cycle of updating the display contents of the symbols on the second special figure display section 426 in the game round. If it is time to update the display contents (step SE501: YES), the value of the second display order counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step SE502). If the value of the second display order counter after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value (for example, "20") (step SE503: YES), the value of the second display order counter is cleared to "0" ( Step SE504). As already explained, the second display order counter is a counter for specifying the display content of the symbol to be derived from the special symbol variable display table when it is time to update the symbol in the second special symbol display section 426. .

If a negative determination is made in step E501, if a negative determination is made in step SE503, or if the process in step SE504 is executed, the display content of the pattern corresponding to the current value of the second display order counter is changed to the special figure. The display data corresponding to the derived display content of the picture is set in the sixth display data buffer 471 (step SE505). As a result, a pattern corresponding to the display data is displayed on the second special figure display section 426.

Due to the above configuration, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the display order is in a fixed order as in the case where the game round is being executed on the second special figure display section 426. The variable display of the symbols according to a certain display pattern is repeated on the second special figure display section 426. In this case, the special figure variable display table and second display order counter used to display the symbols in question are used when a game round is executed in the second special figure display section 426. It is something that As a result, while suppressing an increase in the required storage capacity, it is possible to display a variable pattern on the second special figure display section 426 while the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. Become.

Returning to the explanation of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 224), after executing the setting processing for the sixth display data buffer 471 during setting confirmation (step SE308), the setting processing for the eighth display data buffer 473 during setting confirmation is executed. Setting processing is executed (step SE309). In this setting process, display data for performing a predetermined display on the special display section 429 is set in the eighth display data buffer 473. Specifically, in the display start process (step SD903) of the special display section 429 in the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 220), the display setting corresponding to the number of times the round game is executed in the case of a 6R jackpot result is made. In this case, the same display data as the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 473 is set in the eighth display data buffer 473. As a result, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, not only the symbols are displayed changing on the second special figure display section 426 in the same way as in the game round, but also the special display section 429 Similarly to the case where a 6R jackpot result is obtained, a display corresponding to the fact that the number of times the round game has been executed is 6 is displayed. The display contents of this special display section 429 are different from the display contents of the special display section 429 in a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

The display data set in the sixth display data buffer 471 in step SE308 and the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 473 in step SE309 are set to "0" when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) ends. ” will be cleared. As a result, when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is finished, the second special figure display section 426 displays a symbol change and the special display section 429 displays a display corresponding to the fact that the number of times the round game has been executed is 6. It becomes possible to terminate. Thereafter, the display start process (FIG. 191) is executed in step SC226 of the main process (FIG. 185), so that the initial display data for the special figure is set in the sixth display data buffer 471. As a result, initial display is started on the second special figure display section 426. On the other hand, the special display section 429 is maintained in an off state until the next opening/closing execution mode is started.

Note that the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 473 in step SE309 is not limited to a configuration in which the display data is display data for causing a display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game being six. For example, it may be display data for causing a display corresponding to the fact that the number of times the round game has been executed is 15, similar to the case where the result is a 15R jackpot, and the same as when the result is the first small win. The display data may be for displaying a display corresponding to the fact that the number of times the round game has been executed is 5 times, or the number of times the round game has been executed is 8 times as in the case where the second small winning result has been obtained. It may be display data for causing a display to be displayed corresponding to a certain thing, such as for causing a display to be displayed corresponding to the fact that the number of times the round game has been executed is 14, as in the case where the third small winning result has been obtained. may be display data. Even in these cases, the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is executed using display data used to cause the special display section 429 to display a predetermined display when the opening/closing execution mode occurs. It becomes possible to make a notification on the special display section 429 indicating that the vehicle is present.

If a negative determination is made in step SE306, the process in step SE310 is executed. The processing contents of step SE310 are the same as step S8406 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) in the thirty-third embodiment.

When the processing in step SE305, step SE309, or step SE310 is executed, the transmission state of the signal through the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 is turned off (step SE311), and the transmission state of signals through the display data signal line LN3 and display clock signal line LN4 is set to OFF state (step SE312). Thereafter, the type counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is updated (step SE313).

The type counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the display data transmission target among the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 275, 471 to 473 in the current processing round of the second timer interrupt processing. . When the value of the type counter is "1", the display data of the first display data buffer 271 is the target of transmission, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the display data of the second display data buffer 272 is the target of transmission. When the value of the type counter is "3", the display data of the third display data buffer 273 becomes the transmission target, and when the value of the type counter is "4", the display data of the fourth display data buffer 274 becomes the transmission target. If the value of the type counter is "5", the display data of the fifth display data buffer 275 becomes the target of transmission, and if the value of the type counter is "6", the display data of the sixth display data buffer 471 When the data is to be transmitted and the value of the type counter is "7", the display data in the seventh display data buffer 472 is to be transmitted, and when the value of the type counter is "8", the eighth display data buffer 473 The displayed data will be sent. In the type counter update process, the value of the type counter is incremented by 1, and if the value of the type counter after adding 1 exceeds the upper limit of "8", the value of the type counter is set to "1". . As a result, the display data transmission target is sequentially changed in the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 275 and 471 to 473 each time the second timer interrupt process is performed.

Thereafter, type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read from the main ROM 64 (step SE314). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is "1", the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main side ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main side ROM 64; The type data corresponding to the display circuit 262 is read from the main side ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "3", the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is read from the main side ROM 64, and the value of the type counter is When the value of the type counter is "4", the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264 is read from the main side ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "5", the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is read from the main side ROM 64. When the value of the type counter is "6", the type data corresponding to the sixth display circuit is read from the main side ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "7", the type data corresponding to the sixth display circuit is read from the main side ROM64, and when the value of the type counter is "7", the type data corresponding to the sixth display circuit is Type data corresponding to the circuit is read from the main side ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "8", type data corresponding to the eighth display circuit is read from the main side ROM 64.

Thereafter, display data is read from the display data buffers 271 to 275 and 471 to 473 corresponding to the value of the type counter (step SE315). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is "1", display data is read from the first display data buffer 271, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the display data is read from the second display data buffer 272. The display data is read, and if the value of the type counter is "3", the display data is read from the third display data buffer 273, and if the value of the type counter is "4", the display data is read from the fourth display data buffer 274. When the value of the type counter is "5", the display data is read from the fifth display data buffer 275, and when the value of the type counter is "6", the display data is read from the sixth display data buffer 471. The display data is read, and if the value of the type counter is "7", the display data is read from the seventh display data buffer 472, and if the value of the type counter is "8", the display data is read from the eighth display data buffer 473. Read display data.

Thereafter, various signal transmission processing is executed (step SE316). In the transmission process, signals are output to the type data signal line LN1 and type clock signal line LN2 so that the type data read in step SE314 is transmitted to the display IC 266. In addition, in the transmission process, signals are output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 so that the display data read in step SE315 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set to permit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) (step SE317).

Next, how the display contents of the first special figure display section 425, second special figure display section 426, and special display section 429 change depending on the state of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 226. . 226(a) shows a period in which the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, FIG. 226(b) shows a period in which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, and FIG. 226(c) ) indicates the period during which the variable display of the picture is being executed in the first special figure display section 425, and FIG. 226(e) shows a period during which the fluctuating display of the pattern is executed in the second special pattern display section 426, and FIG. 226(f) shows a period during which the predetermined pattern is stopped in the second special pattern display section 426. The displayed period is shown, and FIG. 226(g) shows the period during which a predetermined display is performed on the special display section 429.

First, a situation in which the setting value update process (step SC216) and the setting confirmation process (step SC213) are not executed will be described.

At the timing of t1, a game round triggered by the reservation information on the first special figure side is started, and as shown in FIG. 226(c), the first special figure display section 425 starts to display changing symbols. be done. Then, when the display continuation period of the game round passes at timing t2, the variable display of the symbols in the first special figure display section 425 is ended, as shown in FIGS. 226(c) and 226(d). The first special figure display section 425 starts displaying a pattern corresponding to the results of the validity judgment process and the type judgment process in the game round. In this case, the 15R jackpot result is selected for the game round. Therefore, at the timing t2, stop display of the symbol corresponding to the 15R jackpot result is started on the first special symbol display section 425.

Thereafter, at timing t3, when the final stop period of the stop display of the symbols passes, the game round corresponding to the jackpot result ends and the opening/closing execution mode is started. In this case, at the timing t3, a display corresponding to the fact that the number of times the round game has been executed is started on the special display section 429 as shown in FIG. 226(g). Note that the special display section 429 is in an off state until the timing t3.

Thereafter, at timing t4, the opening/closing execution mode ends, and as shown in FIG. 226(e), the second special figure display section 426 starts displaying the changing pattern. In this case, at the timing t4, the special display section 429 is turned off as shown in FIG. 226(g). Then, when the display continuation period of the game round passes at timing t5, the fluctuating display of the symbols on the second special figure display section 426 ends, as shown in FIGS. 226(e) and 226(f). The second special figure display section 426 starts displaying a pattern corresponding to the results of the validity judgment process and the type judgment process in the game round. In this case, the first small win result is selected in the game round. Therefore, at timing t5, the second special symbol display section 426 starts to stop displaying the symbol corresponding to the first small win result.

Thereafter, when the final stop period of the picture stop display has elapsed, the distribution execution mode is started, and the distribution execution mode ends at timing t6. Since the V winning prize has occurred in the distribution execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode is started at timing t6. In this case, at the timing t6, a display corresponding to the fact that the number of times the round game has been executed is started on the special display section 429 as shown in FIG. 226(g). Note that the special display section 429 remains off until timing t6. After that, although the opening/closing execution mode ends at timing t7, the display corresponding to the fact that the number of times the round game has been executed in the special display section 429 is 5 is the first special symbol display section 425 or the second special symbol display section 426. This continues until a new game round starts.

When the game is being played as described above, the special display section 429 will display a display corresponding to the number of times the round game has been executed while the first special figure display section 425 is displaying the changing symbols. Similarly, in a situation where the special display section 429 is displaying a display corresponding to the number of times the round game has been executed, the first special symbol display section 425 will not display changing symbols. In addition, when the game is being played as described above, in a situation where the second special figure display section 426 is displaying changing symbols, the special display section 429 will display a display corresponding to the number of times the round game has been executed. Similarly, in a situation where the special display section 429 displays a display corresponding to the number of round game executions, the second special symbol display section 426 does not display changing symbols. .

Next, a situation in which the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed will be described.

At timing t8, the setting value update process (step SC216) is started as shown in FIG. 226(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 226(c) at the timing t8, the first special symbol display section 425 switches from a light-off state to a state in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing t8, the special display section 429 switches from a light-off state to a state in which a display corresponding to the fact that the number of times the round game has been executed is 15, as shown in FIG. 226(g).

Thereafter, the setting value updating process (step SC216) ends at timing t9 as shown in FIG. 226(a). Thereby, as shown in FIG. 226(c) at the timing t9, the variable display of the symbols in the first special figure display section 425 is ended. In this case, as shown in FIG. 226(d), initial display is started in the first special figure display section 425. The content of the initial display is the same as the content of the initial display of the special figure display section 37a in the fifty-sixth embodiment. Further, at the timing t9, the display corresponding to the fact that the number of times the round game has been executed on the special display section 429 is ended, as shown in FIG. 226(g). In this case, the special display section 429 is turned off.

Next, a situation in which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is executed will be described.

At timing t10, the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is started as shown in FIG. 226(b). In this case, as shown in FIG. 226(e) at the timing t10, the second special symbol display section 426 switches from a light-off state to a state in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing of t10, the special display unit 429 switches from a light-off state to a state in which a display corresponding to the fact that the number of times the round game has been executed is six, as shown in FIG. 226(g).

Thereafter, at timing t11, the setting confirmation process (step SC213) ends as shown in FIG. 226(b). As a result, at the timing t11, the variable display of the symbols in the second special figure display section 426 is ended as shown in FIG. 226(e). In this case, as shown in FIG. 226(f), the second special figure display section 426 starts initial display. The content of the initial display is the same as the content of the initial display of the special figure display section 37a in the 56th embodiment. Furthermore, at the timing t11, as shown in FIG. 226(g), the display corresponding to the fact that the number of times the round game has been executed is 6 on the special display section 429 is ended. In this case, the special display section 429 is turned off.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the first special figure display section 425 displays a changing pattern, and the special display section 429 displays a display corresponding to the number of times the round game has been executed. be exposed. When a game is being played, a display corresponding to the number of round game executions will not be displayed on the special display section 429 in a situation where the first special figure display section 425 is displaying a changing pattern. . Therefore, the administrator of the game hall confirms that the first special symbol display section 425 is displaying a changing pattern, and the special display section 429 is displaying a display corresponding to the number of times the round game has been executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to understand that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

In particular, the first special figure display section 425 and the special display section 429 are provided in an area that can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 without requiring opening operations of the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14. As the first special figure display section 425 and special display section 429 notify that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the setting value update process (step SC216) is executed. ) is being executed.

In addition, when a game is being played, the opening/closing execution mode occurs after the game round is executed, so after the first special symbol display section 425 displays a changing pattern, the special display section 429 A display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game is performed. In a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, these two displays with different execution periods are displayed at the same time, so that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed. This makes it possible to clearly notify the situation.

A combination of the display contents of the first special figure display section 425 and the special display section 429 provides notification indicating that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed. As a result, in order to make an unauthorized notification indicating that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, it is necessary to Therefore, it becomes necessary to commit fraud. Therefore, it becomes possible to make it difficult to commit the fraudulent act.

The first special figure display section 425 and the special display section 429 are display sections used when a game is being executed. By using such a display unit to notify that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, it is possible to make the notification while suppressing the complexity of the configuration. Become.

When a notification indicating that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed is performed, the first special symbol display section 425 displays changing symbols, and the special display section 429 displays the execution of the round game. A display corresponding to the number of times is displayed. The symbol fluctuation display on the first special display section 425 is a display content that occurs even when a game is being executed, and the display corresponding to the number of round game executions on the special display section 429 is a display content that occurs even when a game is being executed. This is the display content that occurs even when the This makes it possible to notify that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed using the display content that occurs when the game is being executed.

The first special figure display section 425 and the special display section 429 are provided collectively in a predetermined range as a special figure unit 422. This makes it possible to easily confirm the display contents of the first special figure display section 425 and the special display section 429.

In a situation where a game is being executed, if a display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game is displayed on the special display section 429, the special electric winning device 416 is opened or closed. On the other hand, in a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the special display unit 429 is displaying a display corresponding to the number of times the round game has been executed, and the special electric winning device 416 is in the closed state. will be maintained. This makes it possible to notify that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

In a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the second special figure display section 426 displays a changing pattern, and the special display section 429 displays a display corresponding to the number of times the round game has been executed. be exposed. When a game is being played, a display corresponding to the number of round game executions will not be displayed on the special display section 429 in a situation where the second special figure display section 426 displays a changing pattern. . Therefore, the administrator of the game hall confirms that the second special figure display section 426 is displaying changing symbols, and the special display section 429 is displaying a display corresponding to the number of times the round game has been executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to understand that the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed.

In addition, whether the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed or the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the special display section 429 corresponds to the number of round game executions. On the other hand, in a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the first special figure display section 425 displays a changing pattern, whereas the setting confirmation process (step SC213) ) is being executed, the second special figure display section 426 displays a changing pattern. This allows the gaming hall manager to clearly distinguish which of the setting value update process (step SC216) and the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed.

The variation in each set value of the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot result in the validity judgment process for the reservation information on the second special figure side is the validity or failure with respect to the reservation information on the second special figure side. It is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which is determined to be a losing result in the determination process. As a result, while not affecting the probability of a small hit result in the judgment process for the reservation information on the second special drawing side, the judgment process for the reservation information on the second special drawing side will produce a jackpot result. It becomes possible to vary the probability.

The number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a small winning result in the validity judgment process for the reservation information on the second special figure side is the same regardless of the set value. Thereby, it becomes possible to make constant the probability that a small hit result is selected in the validity determination process for the reservation information on the second special symbol side at all setting values. In addition, even if the probability that a small hit result is selected is constant in the process of determining the validity of the pending information on the second special drawing side, the probability of selecting a small winning result is fixed, but the process of determining the validity of the pending information of the second special Since the variation in each setting value of the probability that a jackpot result will be selected is absorbed by the variation in the probability that a winning result will be selected, the jackpot result will be selected in the validity judgment process for the pending information on the second special drawing side. This makes it possible to set the probability that the result is a probability that corresponds to the set value.

The number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which is determined to be a failure result in the validity determination process for the reservation information on the second special figure side is the largest regardless of each set value. As a result, the variation in each setting value of the probability that a jackpot result will be selected in the judgment process for the pending information on the second special drawing side will be adjusted to select a winning result in the judgment process for the pending information on the second special drawing side. Even if it is configured to absorb the variation in the probability that will occur, the probability that the result will be incorrect in the validity judgment process for the pending information on the second special drawing side will not vary greatly between the setting values of multiple stages. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, in a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the first special figure display section 425 displays a changing pattern, and the second special figure display section A configuration may also be adopted in which the pattern is displayed in a variable manner in step 426. When a game is being played, if one of the first special figure display section 425 and the second special figure display section 426 is displaying a variable pattern, the other is displaying a variable pattern. It is a configuration that does not cause In this case, in a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed as described above, the first special figure display section 425 and the second special figure display section 426 are configured to display changing patterns. This makes it possible to notify the game hall manager that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed. When notifying that the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed in the configuration, the change display of the picture in each of the first special figure display section 425 and the second special figure display section 426 In addition, it may be configured such that the regular pattern display section 423a displays a variable pattern, and in addition to the variable display of the pattern in each of the first special pattern display section 425 and the second special pattern display section 426, the special pattern display section 429 A configuration may also be adopted in which a predetermined display is performed.

Further, the display content displayed on the special display unit 429 in the situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed is not limited to the display content corresponding to the number of times the round game is executed, Although the display content does not correspond to the number of times the round game has been executed, a predetermined display may be performed when at least one display segment 429a in the special display section 429 is in a light emitting state. When a game is being played and the first special figure display section 425 is displaying a changing pattern, the special display section 429 is in a non-display state with all display segments 429a turned off. Therefore, the setting value update process (step SC216) is executed when the special display section 429 is not in the hidden state in a situation where the first special figure display section 425 is displaying a changing pattern. This makes it possible to notify that the situation is present. In addition, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the second special figure display section 426 displays changing symbols, and the special display section 429 displays a display corresponding to the number of round game executions. A configuration may also be adopted in which a predetermined display is performed, although this is not the case.

Additionally, in addition to or in place of the configuration of the above embodiment, a dedicated display section for notifying that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed is provided on the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame. The window panel 52 may be provided in an area that can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 without requiring the opening operation of the window panel 14.

Further, in addition to or in place of the configuration of the above embodiment, a dedicated display section for notifying that the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed is provided on the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame. The window panel 52 may be provided in an area that can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 without requiring the opening operation of the window panel 14.

Additionally, in addition to or in place of the configuration of the above embodiment, a dedicated display section for notifying that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and a setting confirmation process (step SC213) are provided. Each of the dedicated display sections for notifying that the game is being executed becomes visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 without requiring opening operations of the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14. It may also be configured such that it is provided in a region.

In addition to or in place of the configuration of the above embodiment, a dedicated The display section may be provided in an area that can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 without requiring opening operations of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14. In this case, notification is performed on the same dedicated display unit regardless of whether the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed or the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. . Furthermore, in the configuration, the display content on the same dedicated display section is different between the situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

In addition, instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, the same notification is issued regardless of whether the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed or the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. It may also be configured to be executed. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which one of the situations in which the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the situation in which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed is notified, but the other is not notified.

Furthermore, in addition to or in place of the configuration of the above embodiment, even if the setting value update process (step SC216) is executed as in the 55th embodiment, the 1 In a configuration in which the display at the time of the previous power outage is resumed on the special figure display section 425, when the setting value update process (step SC216) is started, the display data corresponding to the display at the time of the previous power outage is is saved from the first display data buffer 271 in the main side RAM 65 to an area where "0" clearing and initialization are not executed when the second RAM clearing process is executed, and is saved when the setting value updating process (step SC216) is completed. The display data may be returned to the first display data buffer 271. As a result, in a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, a corresponding display is displayed on the first special figure display section 425, and after the setting value update process (step SC216) is completed, The display at the time of the previous power outage can be restarted.

Additionally, in addition to or in place of the configuration of the above embodiment, a configuration may be provided in which a display section compatible with distribution execution that displays a display indicating that the distribution execution mode is in the distribution execution mode is provided. good. The display section compatible with sorting execution is switched from a non-display state (i.e., all lights out) to a predetermined display state when the sorting execution mode is started, and a predetermined display when the sorting execution mode ends. state to hidden state. In this configuration, when the setting value update process (step SC216) is executed, the display section corresponding to the distribution execution becomes a predetermined display state, and the special display section 429 becomes a predetermined display state, so that the setting value is updated. It is possible to notify that the value update process (step SC216) is being executed. Further, such a configuration regarding notification may be applied to a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed.

Moreover, in addition to or in place of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the small hit result can be selected even when the reservation information on the first special symbol side is subject to the validity determination process. Even in this case, the variation in each set value of the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot result when the validity judgment process is executed for the reservation information on the first special drawing side. However, it may be configured such that it is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a losing result when the validity determination process is executed for the reservation information on the first special drawing side. . In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability that a small winning result is selected when the validity determination process is executed on the reservation information on the first special figure side is the same for each set value. In addition, in place of the above configuration, when the validity determination process is executed for the reservation information on the first special drawing side, variations in each setting value of the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot result. As a configuration in which the minute is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a small winning result when the validity judgment process is executed for the reservation information on the first special drawing side. Good too.

In addition, instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, each number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot result when the validity judgment process is executed for the pending information on the second special drawing side. The fluctuation in the set value is absorbed by the fluctuation in the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a small winning result when the validity judgment process is executed for the pending information on the second special drawing side. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

In addition to or in place of the configuration of the above embodiment, a configuration in which there is a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of determining a jackpot result in the win/fail determination process is relatively high or low is provided. Good too. In addition, in this configuration, the small winning result can be selected even when the validity judgment process is executed for the reservation information on the first special figure side, and the validity Sorting is executed in both cases when the judgment process is executed and the small winning result is selected, and when the judgment process is executed on the pending information on the second special drawing side and the small winning result is selected. A configuration may also be adopted in which the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode instead of the opening/closing mode. In the opening/closing execution mode, the special electric winning device 416 is configured to perform a short opening of about 1 second a small number of times, about 2 times. In the above configuration, as the type of jackpot result, in the opening/closing execution mode, the special electric prize winning device 416 becomes open in the same manner as in the case of a small winning result, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, it becomes the high probability mode. If the support mode before the start of the object opening/closing execution mode is the low-frequency support mode, it may be configured such that there is a latent probability variable jackpot result in which the low-frequency support mode is maintained. In this case, in a situation where the mode is low probability mode and low frequency support mode, a short release of about 1 second is executed in the special electric winning device 416 a small number of times, about 2 times, triggered by the reservation information on the first special drawing side. In this way, it becomes possible for the player to predict whether the winning result will be triggered by a small winning result or a latent probability variable jackpot result. In addition, in this configuration, when the win/fail judgment process is executed for at least the reservation information on the first special drawing side, the probability that a small winning result is selected is the same or By having substantially the same configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing not only the set value but also the win/fail lottery mode based on the frequency of occurrence of small winning results.

In addition to or in place of the configuration of the above embodiment, if the opening/closing execution mode occurs due to a V winning in the distribution execution mode that resulted in any of the small wins, the distribution execution mode that has already ended The execution mode may be set to one round, and a display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game on the special display section 429 may be performed. In this case, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first small winning result, a display corresponding to 6 round games is displayed on the special display section 429, and in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second small winning result, a display corresponding to 6 round games is performed. A display corresponding to the round game is performed on the special display section 429, and a display corresponding to 15 round games is performed on the special display section 429 in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the third small winning result.

In addition to or in place of the configuration of the above embodiment, there is only one type of small winning result, and when a V winning occurs in the distribution execution mode, the number of round games that occur in the subsequent open/close execution mode is The configuration may be determined by lottery. In this case, the player will pay attention to the timing when the V winning occurs.

Further, in addition to or in place of the configuration of the above embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the distribution probability of the types of jackpot results varies depending on the set value. In this case, the probability that a jackpot result will be selected in the judgment process may also be configured to vary according to the set value, and the probability that a jackpot result will be selected in the judgment process does not vary according to the setting value. It may be configured to be constant.

<65th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the 64th embodiment described above in the processing configuration of the second timer interrupt processing. The different configurations from the sixty-fourth embodiment described above will be explained below. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the sixty-fourth embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing second timer interrupt processing in this embodiment. Note that the processes from step SE601 to step SE615 in the second timer interrupt process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, interrupt prohibition is set (step SE601) in the same way as step SE301 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the sixty-fourth embodiment. Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SE602). If the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SE602: YES), a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is executed (step SE603). The contents of the setting process are the same as step SE303 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the sixty-fourth embodiment.

Thereafter, a setting process for all lighting display during setting update is executed (step SE604). In this setting process, all the display segments of the regular figure display section 423a, all the light emitting parts of the ordinary figure reservation display section 423b, all the display segments 425a of the first special figure display section 425, and the second special figure display section 426 display segments 426a, all light emitting parts of the first special figure holding display part 427, all light emitting parts of the second special figure holding display part 428, and all display segments 429a of the special display part 429. Set to light emitting state. That is, all of the display sections that are controlled by the main CPU 63 and that can be viewed through the window panel 52 without requiring opening operations of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are set to a light emitting state. This full lighting state is terminated when the setting value update process (step SC216) is terminated. The above-mentioned full lighting state does not occur in other situations, including situations where a game is being played. Therefore, the administrator of the game hall can understand whether the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed by checking whether the full lighting state as described above is being performed. .

If a negative determination is made in step SE602, it is determined whether the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step SE605). If the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step SE605: YES), a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is executed (step SE606). The contents of the setting process are the same as step SE307 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the sixty-fourth embodiment.

Thereafter, a setting process for all lighting display during setting confirmation is executed (step SE607). In the setting process, all display segments 425a of the first special figure display section 425, all display segments 426a of the second special figure display section 426, all light emitting parts of the first special figure reservation display section 427, All the light emitting parts of the 2 special figure reservation display part 428 and all the display segments 429a of the special display part 429 are set to the light emitting state. In other words, among the display sections whose display is controlled by the main CPU 63 and which can be viewed through the window panel 52 without requiring opening operations of the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14, the normal figure display section 423a and the normal All display sections other than the figure pending display section 423b are set to a light emitting state. This full lighting state ends when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) ends. The above-mentioned full lighting state does not occur in other situations, including situations where a game is being played. Therefore, the administrator of the game hall can understand whether the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed by checking whether the full lighting state as described above is being performed. .

If a negative determination is made in step SE605, the processes of steps SE608 to SE615 are executed. Furthermore, when the process of step SE604 or step SE607 is executed, the processes of steps SE609 to SE615 are executed. The processing contents of steps SE608 to SE615 are the same as steps SE310 to SE317 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 224) in the sixty-fourth embodiment.

According to the above configuration, while the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, it is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14, which are display units whose display is controlled by the main CPU 63. All of the display parts that can be visually recognized through the window panel 52 are in a light emitting state. Such a fully lit state does not occur in other situations, including situations where a game is being played. Therefore, the administrator of the game hall can understand whether the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed by checking whether the full lighting state as described above is being performed. . In addition, all of the display sections that are controlled by the main CPU 63 and that can be viewed through the window panel 52 without requiring opening operations of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are in a light-emitting state. , it becomes easier to identify whether or not the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

In addition, while the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the window panel 52 is displayed on the display section which is controlled by the main CPU 63 and does not require opening operations of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14. All of the display parts other than the ordinary figure display part 423a and the ordinary figure pending display part 423b among the display parts that can be visually recognized through the display are in a light emitting state. Such a fully lit state does not occur in other situations, including situations where a game is being played. Therefore, the administrator of the game hall can understand whether the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed by checking whether the full lighting state as described above is being performed. .

In addition, in the situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the display section in which all the display segments are in a light emitting state can be operated by the window panel 52 without requiring the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14. The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which all of the display sections are visible through the display, but a configuration in which only a part of the display sections can be viewed may be used. For example, in a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, all of the display segments 425a and 429a of the first special figure display section 425 and the special display section 429 may be in a light emitting state. Often, all of the display segments 425a and 426a of the first special figure display section 425 and the second special figure display section 426 may be in a light-emitting state, and each of the ordinary figure display section 423a and the special display section 429 All of the display segments of the normal figure display section 423a, the second special figure display section 426, and the special display section 429 may all be in the light emission state. good. Further, the configuration may be applied as a configuration for notifying that the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed.

<66th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the sixty-fourth embodiment in the processing configurations of the second timer interrupt processing and setting value update processing. The different configurations from the sixty-fourth embodiment described above will be explained below. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the sixty-fourth embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing second timer interrupt processing in this embodiment. Note that the processes from step SE701 to step SE715 in the second timer interrupt process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, interrupt prohibition is set (step SE701) in the same way as step SE301 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the sixty-fourth embodiment. Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SE702).

If the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SE702: YES), a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is executed (step SE703). The contents of the setting process are the same as step SE303 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the sixty-fourth embodiment. Thereafter, a setting process for the first display data buffer 271 during the setting update is executed (step SE704). The contents of the setting process are the same as step SE304 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the sixty-fourth embodiment. As a result, the first special figure display section 425 displays a changing pattern while the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the process of step SE305 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the sixty-fourth embodiment is not executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, in a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the special display section 429 does not display a predetermined display and remains in the off state.

If a negative determination is made in step SE702, it is determined whether the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step SE705). If the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step SE705: YES), a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is executed (step SE706). The contents of the setting process are the same as step SE307 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the sixty-fourth embodiment. Thereafter, the setting process for the sixth display data buffer 471 during setting confirmation is executed (step SE707). The contents of the setting process are the same as step SE308 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the sixty-fourth embodiment. As a result, while the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the second special figure display section 426 displays a variable pattern. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the process of step SE309 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the sixty-fourth embodiment is not executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the special display section 429 does not display a predetermined display and remains in the off state.

If a negative determination is made in step SE705, the processes of steps SE708 to SE715 are executed. Further, when the process of step SE704 or step SE707 is executed, the processes of steps SE709 to SE715 are executed. The processing contents of steps SE708 to SE715 are the same as steps SE310 to SE317 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 224) in the sixty-fourth embodiment.

FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the setting value update process in this embodiment. Note that the processing from step SE801 to step SE816 in the setting value update processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, interrupt permission is set (step SE801). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 228) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt cycle.

Thereafter, a process for opening the special electric prize winning device 416 is executed (step SE802). In the release process, output of a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 416c provided in the special electric prize winning device 416 is started. As a result, the special electric prize winning device 416 becomes in an open state. Thereafter, steps SE803 to SE812 execute processing to update the set value, step SE813 sets interrupt prohibition, step SE814 executes second RAM clear processing, and step SE815 updates the setting value. Send a return command. The processing contents of steps SE803 to SE815 are the same as steps SB302 to SB314 of the setting value update process (FIG. 167) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

Thereafter, a process for closing the special electric prize winning device 416 is executed (step SE816). In the closing process, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 416c provided in the special electric prize winning device 416 is stopped. As a result, the special electric prize winning device 416 enters the closed state.

With the above configuration, in this embodiment, in a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the first special figure display section 425 displays a changing pattern and the special electric prize winning device 416 is activated. It becomes open. When a game is being played, the special electric prize winning device 416 is opened when the game round corresponding to the jackpot result is executed and the symbol corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display section 425. state. That is, when a game is being played, the special electric prize winning device 416 will not be in the open state in a situation where the first special figure display section 425 is displaying a changing pattern. On the other hand, in a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the first special figure display section 425 displays a changing pattern and the special electric prize winning device 416 is in an open state. Thereby, it becomes possible to notify that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed using the first special figure display section 425 and the special electric prize winning device 416.

Further, in a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the special display section 429 is maintained in a non-display state even though the special electric prize winning device 416 is in an open state. When a game is being played and the special electric prize winning device 416 is in the open state, a display corresponding to the number of times the round game has been executed is displayed on the special display section 429. Therefore, the administrator of the game hall can make settings by confirming that the display corresponding to the number of round game executions is not displayed on the special display section 429 even though the special electric winning device 416 is in the open state. It becomes possible to understand that the value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

In particular, in a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, all display segments 429a of the special display section 429 are maintained in an off state even though the special electric prize winning device 416 is in an open state. By doing so, the special display section 429 is placed in a non-display state. As a result, the administrator of the game hall can perform the setting value update process (step SC216) by checking whether any display is displayed on the special display section 429 when the special electric prize winning device 416 is in the open state. This makes it possible to clearly understand the situation in which the system is being executed.

Here, even in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the special electric prize winning device 416 is in an open state, similar to a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed. Further, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the second special figure display section 426 displays a changing pattern. When a game is being played, the game round corresponding to the jackpot result or small win result is executed, and the symbol corresponding to the jackpot result or small win result is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display section 426. Depending on the situation, the special electric prize winning device 416 becomes open. In other words, when a game is being played, the special electric prize winning device 416 will not be in the open state in a situation where the second special figure display section 426 is performing a variable display of the symbols. On the other hand, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the second special figure display section 426 displays a changing pattern and the special electric prize winning device 416 is in an open state. Thereby, it becomes possible to notify that the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed by using the second special figure display section 426 and the special electric prize winning device 416.

Note that instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, it is possible to notify that one of the situations where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. In order to do so, a structure may be adopted in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the ordinary figure display section 423a and the guiding unit 432 of the second actuating section 413 is placed in the guiding state. When a game is being played, a situation in which the symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner on the normal figure display section 423a and a situation in which the guidance unit 432 of the second operating section 413 is in the guidance state do not occur at the same time. Therefore, by causing these situations to occur at the same time, it is possible to determine whether the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed or the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. It becomes possible to notify.

In addition, instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, it is possible to notify that one of the situations where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. In order to do so, it may be configured such that both the distribution winning device 415 and the special electric winning device 416 are in an open state. When a game is being played, a situation in which both the distribution prize device 415 and the special electric prize winning device 416 are in the open state will not occur, so both the distribution prize device 415 and the special electric prize winning device 416 are in the open state. By doing so, it is possible to notify that one of the situations where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. .

In addition, instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, a plurality of special electric winning devices 416 that are in the open state in the opening/closing execution mode are provided, and when a game is being played, the plurality of special electric winning devices 416 are simultaneously in the open state. In a configuration where this is not the case, to notify that one of the situations where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of special electric prize winning devices 416 are opened at the same time.

In addition, instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, it is possible to notify that one of the situations where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. In order to do so, the special electric winning device 416 may be opened, but the degree of opening may be made smaller than the open state when a game is being played.

Additionally, in addition to or in place of the configuration of the above embodiment, the present invention includes a display section compatible with distribution execution that displays a predetermined display when in distribution execution mode, and also includes a display section that is compatible with distribution execution and executes the setting value update process (step SC216). The special display unit 429 is displayed in the situation where the special electric prize winning device 416 is in the open state in order to notify that one of the situations where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed and the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. A configuration may also be adopted in which both the display unit and the display unit corresponding to the distribution execution are turned off.

In addition to or in place of the configuration of the above embodiment, one of a situation in which a setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and a situation in which a setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. In order to notify this, a configuration may be adopted in which the special electric prize winning device 416 is opened and a display different from the display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game is displayed on the special display section 429.

<67th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the 64th embodiment described above in the processing configuration of the second timer interrupt processing. The different configurations from the sixty-fourth embodiment described above will be explained below. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the sixty-fourth embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing second timer interrupt processing in this embodiment. Note that the processes from step SE901 to step SE915 in the second timer interrupt process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, interrupt prohibition is set (step SE901) in the same way as step SE301 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the sixty-fourth embodiment. Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SE902).

If the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SE902: YES), a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is executed (step SE903). The contents of the setting process are the same as step SE303 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the sixty-fourth embodiment.

Thereafter, the display data during setting update is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SE904). This display data during setting update continues to be stored in the first display data buffer 271 until the second RAM clearing process is executed in the setting value updating process (step SC216), and the display data continues to be stored in the first display data buffer 271 until the second RAM clearing process is executed. Cleared to "0".

The display data during setting update is display data for causing the first special figure display section 425 to display during setting update. The setting update display is not included in the display contents that are displayed when the first special figure display section 425 displays a changing pattern in a game round, and is not included in the display contents that are displayed when a changing display of symbols is performed in the first special figure display section 425 in a game round. It is also not included in the display contents of the picture that is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display section 425 to notify the result of the determination process. In other words, the setting update display is a display content that is not displayed on the first special figure display section 425 while the game is being played. Furthermore, the setting update display is a display content that is not displayed on the first special figure display section 425 in a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is not being executed. Thereby, by checking whether the setting update in progress display is being displayed on the first special figure display section 425, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed. It becomes possible to do so.

Specifically, the display content of the setting update display is such that all display segments 425a of the first special figure display section 425 are in a light emitting state. In other words, in the setting update display, the display segments 425a that can be in a light-emitting state in a situation where a game is being played are in a light-emitting state, but the combinations of display segments 425a that are in a light-emitting state are This is a combination that is not selected in . Note that the display contents of the setting update display are not limited to those described above, and may be display contents in which only the display segment 425a that is not in a light-emitting state when a game is being played is in a light-emitting state.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the process of step SE305 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the sixty-fourth embodiment is not executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, in a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the special display section 429 does not display a predetermined display and remains in the off state.

If a negative determination is made in step SE902, it is determined whether the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step SE905). If the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step SE905: YES), a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is executed (step SE906). The contents of the setting process are the same as step SE307 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the sixty-fourth embodiment.

Thereafter, the display data during setting confirmation is set in the sixth display data buffer 471 (step SE907). This display data during setting confirmation continues to be stored in the sixth display data buffer 471 until the setting confirmation process (step SC213) ends, and is cleared to "0" when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) ends. Ru.

The setting confirmation display data is display data for causing the second special figure display section 426 to display a setting confirmation display. The setting confirmation display is not included in the display content that is displayed when the second special figure display section 426 displays a changing pattern in the game round, and is not included in the display contents that are displayed when the symbol changes are displayed on the second special figure display section 426 in the game round. It is also not included in the display contents of the picture that is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display section 426 to notify the result of the determination process. In other words, the setting confirmation display is a display content that is not displayed on the second special figure display section 426 while the game is being played. Furthermore, the setting confirmation display is a display content that is not displayed on the second special figure display section 426 in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is not executed. As a result, by checking whether or not the setting confirmation display is being displayed on the second special figure display section 426, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. It becomes possible to do so.

Specifically, the display content of the setting confirmation display is such that all display segments 426a of the second special figure display section 426 are in a light emitting state. In other words, in the setting confirmation display, display segments 426a that can be in a light-emitting state in a game being played are in a light-emitting state, but combinations of display segments 426a that are in a light-emitting state are different from situations in which a game is being played. This is a combination that is not selected in . Note that the display contents of the setting confirmation display are not limited to those described above, and may be display contents in which only the display segment 426a, which is not in a light emitting state when a game is being played, is in a light emitting state.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the process of step SE309 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 224) in the sixty-fourth embodiment is not executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the special display section 429 does not display a predetermined display and remains in the off state.

If a negative determination is made in step SE905, the processes of steps SE908 to SE915 are executed. Further, when the process of step SE904 or step SE907 is executed, the processes of steps SE909 to SE915 are executed. The processing contents of steps SE908 to SE915 are the same as steps SE310 to SE317 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 224) in the sixty-fourth embodiment.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the setting value updating process (step SC216) is being executed, the first special figure display section 425 has dedicated display content indicating that the setting value updating process (step SC216) is being executed. A setting update in progress display is displayed. Thereby, it becomes possible to notify whether or not the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed using the first special figure display section 425.

In addition, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the second special figure display section 426 displays the setting, which is a dedicated display content indicating that the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. A confirmation message is displayed. Thereby, it becomes possible to notify whether or not the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed using the second special figure display section 426.

In addition to or in place of the configuration of the above embodiment, one of the situations where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. In order to notify this, a special display may be displayed on the special display section 429 that is not displayed when a game is being played.

Further, in addition to or in place of the configuration of the above embodiment, one of a situation where a setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and a situation where a setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. In order to notify this, a special display may be made that is not displayed when a game is being played on both the first special symbol display section 425 and the special display section 429.

In addition to or in place of the configuration of the above embodiment, one of a situation in which a setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and a situation in which a setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. In order to notify this, a special display may be made that is not displayed when a game is being played on both the second special figure display section 426 and the special display section 429.

Further, in addition to or in place of the configuration of the above embodiment, one of a situation where a setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and a situation where a setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. In order to notify this, a special display may be made that is not displayed when a game is being played on both the first special symbol display section 425 and the second special symbol display section 426.

In addition to or in place of the configuration of the above embodiment, one of a situation in which a setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and a situation in which a setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. In order to notify this, a special display that is not displayed when a game is being played may be displayed on the common figure display section 423a.

<68th embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration for notifying that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and that the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed is the 64th configuration described above. This is different from the embodiment. The different configurations from the sixty-fourth embodiment described above will be explained below. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the sixty-fourth embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 231(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the special display section 429 in this embodiment.

In the special display section 429, four light emitting sections 481 to 484 are arranged side by side at equal intervals. Among the four light emitting parts 481 to 484, the leftmost light emitting part 481 is a 15R display part 481 for notifying that the round game will be played 15 times, and the display part 482 to the right of it is a 15R display part 481 for notifying that the round game will be played 9 times. There is a 9R display section 482 for informing that the round game will be executed, and a display section 483 on the right side is a 6R display section 483 for informing that the round game will be executed six times, and a display section 484 on the right end. is a small win display section 484 for notifying that the mode is the distribution execution mode.

At a position adjacent to the 15R display section 481 (specifically, at a lower position), the number "15" is displayed as a 15R display section 485 indicating that the 15R display section 481 is compatible with the execution of 15 round games. It is printed. At a position adjacent to the 9R display section 482 (specifically, at a lower position), the number "9" is displayed as a 9R display section 486 indicating that the 9R display section 482 is compatible with the execution of nine round games. It is printed. At a position adjacent to the 6R display section 483 (specifically, at a lower position), the number "6" is displayed as a 6R display section 487 indicating that the 6R display section 483 is compatible with the execution of six round games. It is printed. On the other hand, at a position adjacent to the small win display section 484, there is no clear section that indicates that the small win display section 484 is compatible with execution of the distribution execution mode.

When the result of the win/fail determination process and the type determination process is a 15R jackpot result and the opening/closing execution mode is started, the 15R display section 481 changes from a light-off state to a light-emitting state. The 15R display section 481 is maintained in the light emitting state while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, and when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the 15R display section 481 changes from the light emitting state to the extinguished state. In addition, there is an opening/closing execution mode in which 14 round games are executed when a V winning occurs in the distribution execution mode, which is triggered by the third small winning result as a result of the win/fail determination process and the type determination process. When the 15R display section 481 is started, the 15R display section 481 changes from the off state to the light emitting state. The 15R display section 481 is maintained in the light emitting state while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, and when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the 15R display section 481 changes from the light emitting state to the extinguished state.

When the result of the win/fail judgment process and the type judgment process becomes the second small winning result, the opening/closing execution mode starts in which a V prize is generated and 8 round games are executed. In this case, the 9R display section 482 changes from the off state to the light emitting state. The 9R display section 482 is maintained in the light emitting state while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, and when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the 9R display section 482 changes from the light emitting state to the extinguished state.

When the result of the win/fail judgment process and the type judgment process is a 6R jackpot result and the opening/closing execution mode is started, the 6R display section 483 changes from the light-off state to the light-emitting state. Then, while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the 6R display section 483 is maintained in the light emitting state, and when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the 6R display section 483 changes from the light emitting state to the extinguished state. In addition, there is an opening/closing execution mode in which five round games are executed when a V winning occurs in a distribution execution mode triggered by the first small winning result as a result of the win/fail determination process and type determination process. When the 6R display section 483 is started, the 6R display section 483 changes from the off state to the light emitting state. Then, while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the 6R display section 483 is maintained in the light emitting state, and when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the 6R display section 483 changes from the light emitting state to the extinguished state.

When the result of the win/fail determination process and the type determination process is one of the first small win result, second small win result, and third small win result and the distribution execution mode is started, the small win display section 484 changes from the lighted out state. It will be in a light emitting state. While the distribution execution mode is being executed, the small win display section 484 is maintained in a light emitting state, and when the distribution execution mode ends, the small win display section 484 is turned off from the light emission state.

With the above configuration, in a situation where a game is being played, a plurality of display sections 481 to 484 among the 15R display section 481, 9R display section 482, 6R display section 483, and small winning display section 484 are in a light emitting state at the same time. It won't happen. In contrast, in this embodiment, in a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the 15R display section 481, the 9R display section 482, A plurality of display sections 481 to 484 of the 6R display section 483 and the small winning display section 484 are simultaneously in a light emitting state.

FIG. 231(b) shows the display contents of the 15R display section 481, 6R display section 483, and small hit display section 484 in a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) or the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. This is a time chart. FIG. 231(b1) shows a period in which the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, FIG. 231(b2) shows a period in which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, and FIG. ) shows the period when the 15R display section 481 is in the light emitting state, FIG. 231 (b4) shows the period when the 6R display section 483 is in the light emitting state, and FIG. 231 (b5) shows the period when the small winning display section 484 is in the light emitting state. Indicates the period in which the light is emitted.

At timing t1, the setting value update process (step SC216) is started as shown in FIG. 231 (b1). In this case, at the timing of t1, the 15R display section 481 switches from the off state to the light emitting state as shown in FIG. 231(b3), and the small win display section 484 switches from the off state to the light emitting state as shown in FIG. 231(b5). Switch to state. The light emitting state of these 15R display section 481 and small winning display section 484 is continued while the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

Thereafter, at timing t2, the setting value update process (step SC216) ends as shown in FIG. 231 (b1). As a result, at the timing of t2, the 15R display section 481 switches from the light emitting state to the off state as shown in FIG. 231(b3), and the small win display section 484 switches from the light emitting state to the off state as shown in FIG. 231(b5). Switch to state.

Further, at timing t3, the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is started as shown in FIG. 231(b2). In this case, at the timing of t3, the 15R display section 481 switches from the off state to the light emitting state as shown in FIG. 231(b3), and the 6R display section 483 switches from the off state to the light emitting state as shown in FIG. 231(b4). Switch to . The light emitting states of these 15R display section 481 and 6R display section 483 are continued while the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed.

Thereafter, the setting confirmation process (step SC213) ends at timing t4 as shown in FIG. 231(b2). As a result, at the timing t4, the 15R display section 481 switches from the light emitting state to the off state as shown in FIG. 231(b3), and the 6R display section 483 switches from the light emitting state to the off state as shown in FIG. 231(b4). Switch to .

According to the above configuration, both the 15R display section 481 and the small hit display section 484 are in a light emitting state in a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed. A situation in which both the 15R display section 481 and the small win display section 484 are in a light emitting state does not occur in a situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is not executed, including a situation where a game is being executed. This makes it possible to notify whether or not the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed using the 15R display section 481 and the small hit display section 484.

In a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, both the 15R display section 481 and the 6R display section 483 are in a light emitting state. A situation in which both the 15R display section 481 and the 6R display section 483 are in a light emitting state does not occur in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is not executed, including a situation where a game is being executed. This makes it possible to notify whether or not the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed using the 15R display section 481 and the 6R display section 483.

<Sixty-ninth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the above-mentioned 64th embodiment in the content of the game execution. The different configurations from the sixty-fourth embodiment described above will be explained below. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the sixty-fourth embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 232 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

Even in this embodiment, an inner rail part 401 and an outer rail part 402 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and these inner rail parts 401 and outer rail parts The rail portion 402 constitutes a guide rail as a guide means. The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings passing through it in the front and back direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning section 411, a first operating section 412, a second operating section 413, a through winning section 414, a special electric winning device 416, a variable display unit 421, a special drawing unit 422, a general drawing unit 423, etc. It is being Furthermore, the game area PA is divided by the variable display unit 421 into an upper area PA1, a left area PA2, a right area PA3, and a lower area PA4. The configurations of the general winning section 411, first operating section 412, second operating section 413, through winning section 414, special electric winning device 416, variable display unit 421, special drawing unit 422, and general drawing unit 423 are the same as those in the 64th embodiment. and the arrangement position in the game area PA is also the same as in the sixty-fourth embodiment. However, in this embodiment, the prize distribution device 415 in the sixty-fourth embodiment is not provided.

Even if a game ball enters the through winning section 414, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, if a game ball enters any of the general winning section 4111, first operating section 412, second operating section 413, and special electric winning device 416, the number of gaming media available to the player is increased. A predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when a game ball enters the general prize winning section 411, ten game balls are paid out, and when a game ball enters the first operating section 412, ten game balls are paid out. When this occurs, three game balls are paid out, and when a game ball enters the second operating section 413, one game ball is paid out, and the special electric winning device 416 When a game ball enters the ball, 15 game balls are paid out.

A first guide nail 491a that guides all the game balls flowing down the right side area PA3 to the through prize part 414 is provided in the area above the through prize part 414 in the right area PA3. By providing the first guide nail 491a, all the game balls flowing down the right side area PA3 will pass through the through winning part 414. However, since the game ball that won in the through winning section 414 continues to flow down the right side area PA3, the second actuating section 413 and the special electric winning section provided on the downstream side of the through winning section 414 in the right area PA3 Winnings to device 416 may occur. Note that the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which all the game balls that flow into the right area PA3 win through the prize winning section 414, and the game balls that flow into the right side area PA3 win through the prize with a high probability such as a probability of 9/10. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the player wins the prize in the division 414.

A second guide nail 491b that guides all the game balls flowing down the right side area PA3 to the second actuation part 413 in an area below the through winning part 414 in the right side area PA3 and above the second actuation part 413. is provided. By providing the second guide nail 491b, all the game balls flowing down the right side area PA3 will surely flow into the passage part 439a formed by the cover member 439 of the second operating part 413. Therefore, in a situation where the guiding unit 432 of the second operating section 413 is in the guiding state, the game balls that flow into the right area PA3 and are guided to the second operating section 413 by the second guide nails 491b are reliably transferred to the second operating section 413. He will enter the ball. On the other hand, in a situation where the guiding unit 432 of the second actuating section 413 is in the non-guiding state, the game balls that flow into the right area PA3 and are guided to the second actuating section 413 by the second guiding nail 491b are in the second operating section 413. Although the ball flows into the passage section 439a formed by the cover member 439, it does not enter the second operating section 413. This game ball passes through the passage section 439a and flows downstream from the second operating section 413. For example, when the special electric winning device 416 is in an open state, this game ball will enter the special electric winning device 416 with a high probability. It should be noted that when the special electric winning device 416 is in an open state, the game ball may be configured to surely enter the special electric winning device 416.

In the above configuration, when a game ball enters the second operating section 413, the number of game balls to be paid out is one, so even if the ball enters the second operating section 413 frequently, the number of balls to be paid out is one. The number of game balls owned by the player does not increase. On the other hand, when the guiding unit 432 of the second operating section 413 is in the non-guiding state, even the game ball guided by the second guiding nail 491b does not enter the second operating section 413. Therefore, even if the support mode is in the high-frequency support mode and the guidance unit 432 is in the guidance state frequently, as long as the opening/closing execution mode does not occur and a game ball enters the special electric winning device 416. , even if it becomes difficult to reduce the number of game balls owned by the player, the number of game balls owned by the player will not increase.

Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in the main CPU 63 will be described using FIG. 233.

When playing a game, the main CPU 63 uses various types of counter information to determine winning lottery results, display settings on the special symbol display sections 425 and 426, symbol display settings on the symbol display device 424, display settings on the regular symbol display section 423a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 233, the winning random number counter C1 used in the lottery of winning occurrences, the type counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot, and the symbol display device 424 are removed. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach random number lottery when fluctuation occurs, the random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the special symbol display parts 425, 426 and the symbol display device 424 of the gaming machine. A variation type counter CS that determines the display duration period is used. Furthermore, a general utility utility release counter C4 is used to determine whether or not the guidance unit 432 of the second operating section 413 is to be put into the guidance execution state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is stored in the special figure holding area provided in the main side RAM 65 when a winning occurs in the first operating section 412 or the second operating section 413. 451. The special figure holding area 451 includes a first special figure holding area 452, a second special figure holding area 453, and a special figure execution area 492.

The first special drawing holding area 452 includes a first area 452a, a second area 452b, a third area 452c, and a fourth area 452d. Each numerical value information of the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 452a to 452d as pending information on the special figure side. In this case, in the first area 452a to the fourth area 452d, if winnings to the first operating section 412 occur multiple times in succession, the first area 452a → second area 452b → third area 452c → Each piece of numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of the four areas 452d. By providing the four areas 452a to 452d in this manner, the winning history of game balls entered into the first operating section 412 can be stored in abeyance at a maximum of four. The number that can be held and stored in the first special drawing holding area 452 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more. , may be singular.

The second special figure holding area 453 includes a first area 453a, a second area 453b, a third area 453c, and a fourth area 453d. Each numerical value information of the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 453a to 453d as pending information on the special figure side. In this case, in the first area 453a to fourth area 453d, if winnings to the second operating section 413 occur multiple times in succession, the first area 453a → second area 453b → third area 453c → Each piece of numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of the four areas 453d. By providing the four areas 453a to 453d in this manner, the winning history of game balls entered into the second operating section 413 can be stored in abeyance at a maximum of four. Note that the number that can be held and stored in the second special figure holding area 453 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other number such as 2, 3, or 5 or more. , may be singular.

The special figure execution area 492 includes an execution area 493 for the first special figure and an execution area 494 for the second special figure. The first special figure execution area 493 is the first special figure side where the special figure validity judgment process, type judgment process, etc. This is the area where the pending information for is stored. The execution area 494 for the second special figure is the second special figure side where the special figure validity judgment process, type judgment process, etc. are performed when the second special figure display section 426 starts displaying the changing pattern This is the area where the pending information for is stored. Specifically, when starting the variable display of symbols in the first special figure display section 425, the reservation information on the first special figure side stored in the first area 452a of the first special figure reservation area 452 is It is moved to the execution area 493 for 1 special figure. On the other hand, when starting the variable display of the symbols in the second special figure display section 426, the reservation information on the second special figure side stored in the first area 453a of the second special figure holding area 453 is changed to the second special figure side. is moved to the execution area 494.

Information corresponding to the general public utility object release counter C4 is stored in the general public figure holding area 455 provided in the main side RAM 65 when a prize to the through prize section 414 occurs. The general figure holding area 455 includes a first area 455a, a second area 455b, a third area 455c, and a fourth area 455d. Numerical information is stored in one of the areas 455a to 455d as pending information on the ordinary map side. In this case, in the first area 455a to fourth area 455d, if winnings to the through winning section 414 occur multiple times in succession, the first area 455a → second area 455b → third area 455c → fourth area Numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of area 455d. By providing the four areas 455a to 455d in this manner, the winning history of game balls entered into the through winning section 414 can be stored in abeyance at a maximum of four. Note that the number that can be held and stored in the general drawing holding area 455 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more; It may be.

The ordinary figure holding area 455 is provided with an execution area 456 for ordinary figures. The ordinary figure execution area 456 is the ordinary figure side on which a guidance state lottery is performed to determine whether or not to put the guidance unit 432 into the guidance state when starting variable display on the ordinary figure display section 423a. This is the area where the pending information for is stored. Specifically, when starting the variable display of the general figure display section 423a, the pending information on the ordinary figure side stored in the first area 455a of the ordinary figure holding area 455 is moved to the ordinary figure execution area 456. be done.

Among the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4, the configurations regarding the reach random number counter C3, the random number initial value counter CINI, and the utility power release counter C4 are the same as in the sixty-fourth embodiment. On the other hand, the configurations regarding the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, and fluctuation type counter CS are different from those of the sixty-fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration regarding the random number counter C1, type counter C2, and fluctuation type counter CS will be explained. In addition, in this embodiment, the reach display does not occur on the symbol display device 424 in the game round corresponding to the small winning result, and furthermore, the combination of the same symbols is not stopped and displayed after the variable display of symbols.

First, the winning random number counter C1 will be explained. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 9999, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 9999). The winning random number counter C1 is updated regularly and is stored in the special figure holding area 451 of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when a game ball wins in the first operating section 412 or the second operating section 413. Then, a win/fail determination process is performed using the stored numerical information of the winning random number counter C1.

The value of the random number that becomes a win in the win/fail determination process is stored in the main side ROM 64 as a win/fail table. As the validity tables, first validity tables 495 and 496 are provided corresponding to the reservation information on the first special figure side, and second validity tables 497 and 498 are provided corresponding to the reservation information on the second special figure side. It is provided. Further, in this embodiment, as the winning/failure lottery mode, there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of a jackpot result is relatively high or low.

FIG. 234(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first validity table 495 at the time of low probability, which is referred to when performing the validity determination process on the reservation information on the first special symbol side in the low probability mode. 234(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first validity table 496 at high probability, which is referred to when performing validity determination processing on the reservation information on the first special symbol side in the high probability mode, and FIG. 234(c) ) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second validity table 497 at the time of low probability, which is referred to when performing the validity determination process on the pending information on the second special symbol side in the low probability mode, and FIG. 234(d) is It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second validity table 498 at the time of high probability that is referred to when performing the validity determination process on the reservation information on the second special figure side in the high probability mode.

As shown in FIGS. 234(a) to 234(d), as in the sixty-fourth embodiment, there are a jackpot result, a small win result, and a miss result as a result of the win/fail determination process. The jackpot result is a win/fail result that can trigger a transition to an opening/closing execution mode in which a plurality of round games are executed, and can trigger a transition to a win/fail lottery mode and a support mode. The small win result is a win/fail result that triggers a transition to an opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric prize winning device 416 is controlled to open/close, but does not trigger a transition to a win/fail lottery mode and a support mode. A losing result is a win/fail result that does not trigger a shift to the opening/closing execution mode, and also does not trigger a shift to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode.

As shown in FIG. 234(a), in the first win/fail table 495 at low probability, a jackpot result, a small win result, and a miss result are set as the results of the win/fail judgment process. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has setting states "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", and the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a winning result. It is set as follows. On the other hand, the probability of a small winning result is set to be the same for any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6".

Specifically, the lowest setting value "Setting 1" is set to 50 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a small winning. The number of pieces of information is set to 1000, and the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is a losing result is set to 8950 pieces. In addition, "Setting 2", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 1", is set to 52 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 1000, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 8948. In addition, "Setting 3", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 2", is set to 54 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 1000, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 8946. In addition, "Setting 4", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 3", is set to 56 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 1,000, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 8,944. In addition, "Setting 5", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 4", is set to 58 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 1,000, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 8,942. In addition, the highest setting value "Setting 6" is set to 60 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a small winning. 1000 pieces are set as the winning result, and 8940 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which is a losing result.

As shown in FIG. 234(b), in the first win/fail table 496 at high probability, a jackpot result, a small win result, and a miss result are set as the judgment results of the win/fail judgment. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has setting states "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", and the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a winning result. It is set as follows. On the other hand, the probability of a small winning result is set to be the same for any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6".

Specifically, the lowest setting value "Setting 1" is set to 500 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a small winning. The number of pieces of information is set to 1,000, and the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a losing result is set to 8,500 pieces. In addition, "Setting 2", which is a setting value one level higher than "Setting 1", is set to 520 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 1000, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 8480. In addition, in "Setting 3", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 2", 540 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 1,000, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 8,460. In addition, "Setting 4", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 3", is set to 560 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 1000, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 8440. In addition, "Setting 5", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 4", is set to 580 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 1,000, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 8,420. In addition, the highest setting value "Setting 6" is set to 600 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a small winning. 1,000 pieces are set as the winning result, and 8,400 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which is a losing result.

In "Setting 1", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the first special drawing side is 1/200 in low probability mode and 1/20, which is 10 times that in high probability mode. It is. In "Setting 2", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the first special drawing side is about 1/192 in low probability mode, and about 10 times that in high probability mode. /19.2. In "Setting 3", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the first special drawing side is about 1/185 in low probability mode, and about 10 times that in high probability mode. /18.5. In "Setting 4", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the first special drawing side is about 1/179 in low probability mode, and about 10 times that in high probability mode. /17.9. In "Setting 5", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the first special drawing side is about 1/172 in the low probability mode, and about 10 times that in the high probability mode. /17.2. In "Setting 6", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the first special drawing side is about 1/167 in the low probability mode, and about 10 times that in the high probability mode. /16.7. In other words, regardless of any of "Settings 1" to "Settings 6", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the first special drawing side is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode. It becomes 10 times.

On the other hand, the probability of a small winning result triggered by the reservation information on the first special drawing side is 1/10, which is the same for any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". Further, the probability of a small winning result triggered by the reservation information on the first special symbol side is 1/10, which is the same in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In other words, the probability of a small winning result triggered by the reservation information on the first special drawing side is constant regardless of the setting state and the win/fail lottery mode. Further, the probability of a small winning result triggered by the reservation information on the first special drawing side is higher than the probability of a jackpot result, regardless of the setting state and winning/failure lottery mode. However, when the reservation information on the first special drawing side is used as a trigger, the probability of a losing result is the highest regardless of the setting state and winning/failure lottery mode. Furthermore, when the hold information on the first special drawing side is used as a trigger, the probability of a winning result is higher than the combined probability of the jackpot result and the small win result, regardless of the setting state and winning/failure lottery mode. .

In addition, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot may be configured to be set in aggregation so that it becomes a consecutive number, or it may be set in a distributed manner so that at least a part or all of it is not a serial number. It is also possible to have a configuration in which Further, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a small win may be configured to be set in aggregation so that it becomes a serial number, or it may be set in a distributed manner so that at least a part or all of it is not a serial number. A configuration may also be used.

As shown in FIG. 234(c), in the second win/fail table 497 at low probability, a jackpot result, a small win result, and a miss result are set as the results of the win/fail judgment process. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has setting states "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", and the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a winning result. It is set as follows. On the other hand, the probability of a small winning result is set to be the same for any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6".

Specifically, the lowest setting value "Setting 1" is set to 50 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a small winning. The number of pieces of information is set to 9,400, and the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a losing result is set to 550 pieces. In addition, "Setting 2", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 1", is set to 52 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 9400, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 548. In addition, "Setting 3", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 2", is set to 54 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 9400, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 546. In addition, "Setting 4", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 3", is set to 56 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 9400, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 544. In addition, "Setting 5", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 4", is set to 58 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 9400, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 542. In addition, the highest setting value "Setting 6" is set to 60 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a small winning. 9,400 pieces are set as the winning result, and 540 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which is a losing result.

As shown in FIG. 234(d), the second win/fail table 498 at high probability has set the jackpot result, small win result, and miss result as the result of the win/fail judgment process. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has setting states "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", and the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a winning result. It is set as follows. On the other hand, the probability of a small winning result is set to be the same for any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6".

Specifically, the lowest setting value "Setting 1" is set to 500 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a small winning. The number of pieces of information is set to 9,400, and the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is a losing result is set to 100 pieces. In addition, "Setting 2", which is a setting value one level higher than "Setting 1", is set to 520 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 9,400, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 80. In addition, in "Setting 3", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 2", 540 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 9,400, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 60. In addition, "Setting 4", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 3", is set to 560 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 9400, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 40. In addition, "Setting 5", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 4", is set to 580 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 9,400, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 20. In addition, the highest setting value "Setting 6" is set to 600 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a small winning. 9,400 pieces are set as 9400 pieces, and the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is a losing result is 0 pieces.

In "Setting 1", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is 1/200 in low probability mode and 1/20, which is 10 times that in high probability mode. It is. In "Setting 2", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is about 1/192 in low probability mode, and about 10 times that in high probability mode. /19.2. In "Setting 3", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is about 1/185 in low probability mode, and about 10 times that in high probability mode. /18.5. In "Setting 4", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is about 1/179 in low probability mode, and about 10 times that in high probability mode. /17.9. In "Setting 5", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is about 1/172 in low probability mode, and about 10 times that in high probability mode. /17.2. In "Setting 6", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is about 1/167 in low probability mode, and about 10 times that in high probability mode. /16.7. In other words, for any of "Settings 1" to "Settings 6", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special map side is higher in high probability mode than in low probability mode. It becomes 10 times. In addition, when comparing combinations with the same setting status and win/fail lottery mode, the probability of a jackpot result is the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the first special drawing side and when triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side. It is the same in the case of

On the other hand, the probability of a small winning result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is about 1/1.06, which is the same for any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". Further, the probability of a small winning result triggered by the reservation information on the second special symbol side is 1/1.06, which is the same in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In other words, the probability of a small winning result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is constant regardless of the setting state and the win/fail lottery mode. The probability of a small winning result triggered by the reservation information on the second special symbol side is higher than the probability of a small winning result triggered by the reservation information on the first special symbol side. Further, the probability of a small winning result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is higher than the probability of a jackpot result regardless of the setting state and winning/failure lottery mode. Furthermore, when the reservation information on the second special drawing side is used as a trigger, the probability of a small winning result is higher than the probability of a losing result, regardless of the setting state and winning/failure lottery mode. Furthermore, when the hold information on the second special drawing side is used as a trigger, the probability of a small hit result is higher than the combined probability of a jackpot result and a miss result, regardless of the setting state and win/fail lottery mode. .

In addition, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot may be configured to be set in aggregation so that it becomes a consecutive number, or it may be set in a distributed manner so that at least a part or all of it is not a serial number. It is also possible to have a configuration in which Further, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a small win may be configured to be set in aggregation so that it becomes a serial number, or it may be set in a distributed manner so that at least a part or all of it is not a serial number. A configuration may also be used.

As mentioned above, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, regardless of whether it is triggered by reservation information on the first special drawing side or when triggered by reservation information on the second special drawing side. The higher the setting value is, the more advantageous it is to the player. In addition, the opening/closing execution mode is the period in which the amount of increase in the player's possession per unit time is the largest, and the probability of a jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode fluctuates according to the setting value. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the set value.

In addition, in a configuration where the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode regardless of any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" is a certain number of times greater than "1" (specifically, 10 times) higher than the probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode. This makes it possible to keep the rate of change in the probability of a jackpot result constant between the low probability mode and the high probability mode in any setting state.

In addition, when comparing combinations with the same setting status and win/fail lottery mode, the probability of a jackpot result is the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the first special drawing side and when triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side. It is the same in the case of This makes it possible to ensure that there is no difference in the probability of occurrence of a jackpot result when triggered by reservation information on the first special symbol side and when triggered by reservation information on the second special symbol side. .

In addition, when the hold information on the first special drawing side is used as a trigger, the probability of a small winning result is the same for any of "Settings 1" to "Settings 6", and the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and It is the same regardless of the high probability mode. In addition, when the hold information on the second special drawing side is used as a trigger, the probability of a small winning result is the same for any of "Settings 1" to "Settings 6", and the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and It is the same regardless of the high probability mode. This makes it possible for the player to focus on only jackpot results in order to estimate the set value, thereby making it difficult for the player to guess the set value.

On the other hand, the probability of a small winning result is higher when triggered by reservation information on the second special symbol side than when triggered by reservation information on the first special symbol side. As a result, the frequency of occurrence of small winning results differs between when a game round triggered by the reservation information on the first special figure side is executed and when a game round is executed triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side. It is possible to make them different.

In addition, in the first win/fail table 495, 496, the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the winning result is greater than the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the small winning result. In this configuration, the variation in the probability of a jackpot result due to the set value is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to a winning result. The number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the losing result is the largest. This makes it possible to reduce the probability variation of a winning result due to the set value in order to absorb the probability variation of the jackpot result due to the set value. Therefore, when the reservation information on the first special drawing side is used as a trigger, it becomes possible for the player to focus on the jackpot results in order to guess the set value, and it becomes difficult to guess the set value. It becomes possible.

In addition, in the second win/fail table 497, 498, the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the winning result is smaller than the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the small winning result. In this configuration, the variation in the probability of a jackpot result due to the set value is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to a winning result. Then, in "Setting 6", which is the situation where the combination probability of the jackpot result and the small win result is the highest, and in the high probability mode, the validity judgment process was performed on the pending information on the second special drawing side. The probability of a wrong result in this situation is 0%. As a result, when the setting is "Setting 6" and the high probability mode is set, the probability of combining the jackpot result and the small win result is suitably increased in a situation where the validity judgment process is performed on the pending information on the second special drawing side. becomes possible.

Next, the type counter C2 will be explained. The type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The type counter C2 is updated regularly and stored in the special figure holding area 451 of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating section 412 or the second operating section 413. Then, type determination processing is performed using the stored value of the type counter C2.

The type determination process using the type counter C2 is performed when a jackpot result is obtained in the win/fail determination process. On the other hand, if the win/fail determination process results in a small win, the type determination process is not performed. That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpot results are set, whereas only one type of small win result is set. When a jackpot result is selected in the success/failure determination process, the type of jackpot result is selected using the type table 499 and type counter C2 stored in advance in the main side ROM 64. The contents of each type of jackpot result and small win result will be explained below.

FIG. 235(a) is referred to in order to sort out the type of jackpot result when a jackpot result is selected in the validity judgment process triggered by the reservation information on the first special drawing side or the reservation information on the second special drawing side. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a type table 499. FIG. Moreover, FIG. 235(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each of a plurality of types of jackpot results and the contents of one type of small win result.

The type table 499 is referred to when a jackpot result is selected in the success/failure judgment process triggered by the hold information for the first special symbol, and is also referred to when a jackpot result is selected in the win/fail judgment process triggered by the hold information for the second special figure. Referenced when a result is selected. In other words, when a jackpot result is selected in the judgment process triggered by the reservation information for the first special symbol, and when a jackpot result is selected in the judgment process triggered by the reservation information for the second special symbol, In either case, the same type table 499 is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 235(a), in the type table 499, as the types of jackpot results, 6R normal jackpot results, 6R high certainty jackpot results, and 16R high certainty jackpot results are set. The numerical information of the type counter C2 of "0 to 10" corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result, and the numerical information of the type counter C2 of "11 to 26" corresponds to the 6R high probability jackpot result, The numerical information of the type counter C2 of “27 to 29” corresponds to the 16R high probability jackpot result. In other words, when a jackpot result is selected in the judgment process, the 6R normal jackpot result is selected with a probability of 11/30, the 6R high probability jackpot result is selected with a probability of 16/30, and the probability is 3/30. 16R high sure jackpot result is selected.

When the 6R normal jackpot result is obtained, a round game occurs six times in the subsequent opening/closing execution mode as shown in FIG. 235(b). In addition, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the mode becomes low probability mode regardless of the win/fail lottery mode before the start of the opening/closing execution mode, and the high frequency support mode regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode starts. . However, this high-frequency support mode will end if the total number of games triggered by the hold information on the first special map side and the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is played 50 times. to enter infrequent support mode.

In addition, in the round game, as in the 64th embodiment, the number of opening and closing times of the special electric winning device 416 becomes the upper limit number of times, and the predetermined upper limit winning number of game balls enters the prize in the special electric winning device 416. A game that continues until one of the conditions is met. In this embodiment, the special electric winning device 416 is opened and closed once in one round game, and the opening duration period in each round game is set to 29 seconds. Further, the upper limit number of winnings to the special electric winning device 416 is set to 10. In a situation where the firing operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the gaming area PA every 0.6 seconds, so that the round game cannot be played. The opening duration period is set to be longer than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit number of winnings in one round game. Therefore, in each round game, it can be expected that more game balls than the upper limit winning number will be won in the special electric winning device 416.

When a 6R high-probability jackpot result is obtained, a round game occurs six times in the subsequent opening/closing execution mode as shown in FIG. 235(b). In addition, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, it becomes a high probability mode regardless of the win/fail lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode starts, and it becomes a high frequency support mode regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode starts. . These high probability mode and high frequency support mode continue until the end of the game round that results in the next jackpot. However, it is not limited to this, and these high probability modes and high frequency support modes will end when the number of game runs reaches the end standard number, but that end standard number will be the jackpot result. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode may be configured to continue until the end of the game round, which is a very large number of times compared to the probability, and thus substantially results in the next jackpot.

When a 16R high-probability jackpot result is obtained, a round game occurs 16 times in the subsequent opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 235(b). Therefore, the 16R high certainty jackpot result is the most advantageous jackpot result at least in terms of the number of times the round game is executed. In addition, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the mode becomes high probability mode regardless of the win/fail lottery mode before the start of the opening/closing execution mode, and the mode becomes low frequency support mode regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode starts. . These high probability mode and low frequency support mode continue until the end of the game round that results in the next jackpot. However, this is not limited to this, and these high probability modes and low frequency support modes will end when the number of game runs reaches the end standard number of times, but the end standard number of times will be the jackpot result. The high probability mode and the low frequency support mode may be configured to continue until the end of the game round in which the next jackpot result is substantially exceeded because the number of times is very large compared to the probability.

If the result is a small win, the special electric prize winning device 416 is opened once in the subsequent opening/closing execution mode as shown in FIG. 235(b). This one opening round ends when either one of the following conditions is satisfied: 2 seconds have elapsed and the number of winnings in the special electric winning device 416 has reached 10. In this case, as already explained, when the firing operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is operated so that one game ball is fired toward the gaming area PA every 0.6 seconds. Since the drive is controlled, the opening duration period of the opening round is set to a shorter time than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit number of prizes for the opening round. Therefore, in the opening round, basically more than the upper limit winning number of game balls will not be won in the special electric winning device 416, and the special electric winning device 416 will be in a closed state after the opening duration period of 2 seconds has elapsed. . Further, even if a small winning result occurs, the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode are maintained in the mode before the start of the opening/closing execution mode.

As already explained, the small hit result can be selected in the validity determination process whether triggered by the suspension information on the first special symbol side or triggered by the suspension information on the second special symbol side. However, the probability that a small winning result will be selected is higher when triggered by the reservation information on the second special symbol side than when triggered by reservation information on the first special symbol side. More specifically, when the hold information on the second special drawing side is used as a trigger, the probability that a small hit result will be selected in the win/fail judgment process is higher than the combined probability of the jackpot result and the miss result. Therefore, when the suspension information on the first special figure side is used as a trigger, the probability that a losing result is selected is higher than the probability that a small winning result is selected in the win/fail determination process. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode in which the frequency of winnings to the second actuating section 413 is high, the probability of a small winning result per unit number of shots is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. However, the expected number of game balls that will be awarded to the special electric winning device 416 in the event of a small win triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is higher in the low-frequency support mode than in the high-frequency support mode. many. The reason why such an event occurs will be explained below.

FIG. 235(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the support mode. In either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the guidance state in the guidance state lottery for determining whether or not to control the guidance unit 432 of the second actuator 413 to the guidance state is They are the same at 95%. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning the induction state is approximately the same in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability than the low-frequency support mode. A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning the induced state is high.

The display duration of the fluctuating display of the symbol on the general figure display section 423a, which is executed when the induction state lottery is executed, is 4 seconds in the low frequency support mode, whereas in the high frequency support mode, the display duration is 4 seconds. , it is 0.1 second. While the symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner on the general pattern display section 423a, the guidance unit 432 of the second actuating section 413 remains in the guiding state even if the general pattern holding information is stored in the general pattern holding area 455. Not. Then, when the guiding unit 432 of the second operating section 413 is in the non-guiding state, the game ball that has flowed into the right area PA3 is placed at the position of the special electric winning device 416 that is present on the downstream side of the second operating section 413. can be reached.

When the guidance state is won, the guidance unit 432 enters the guidance state only once for 2 seconds in the low frequency support mode, whereas the guidance unit 432 enters the guidance state only once for 2 seconds. In the frequency support mode, the guidance unit 432 enters the guidance state only once for 6 seconds. Note that the guidance state of the guidance unit 432 also ends when the number of prizes entered into the second operating section 413 reaches the upper limit of 10, but as already explained, the firing operation device 28 is activated by the player. In the situation where the game ball is operated by 432 is in the guidance state for 2 seconds, and if it is in the high frequency support mode, the guidance unit 432 is in the guidance state for 6 seconds.

With the above configuration, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the guided state of the guiding unit 432 is as high as 95%, and the game ball has a pattern display duration of 0.1 seconds on the normal figure display section 423a. The guidance unit 432 remains in the guidance state for 6 seconds. Moreover, as already explained, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 basically wins the prize in the through prize part 414, and basically wins the prize in the second operating part 413 if the guiding unit 432 is in the guiding state. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, if the game ball continues to be launched so as to flow down the right side area PA3, the guiding unit 432 is basically in the guiding state and the winning to the second actuating section 413 is delayed. Due to this occurrence, game balls do not flow into the downstream side of the second operating section 413. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, although winnings to the second operating unit 413 occur frequently, a small winning result occurs triggered by the hold information on the second special drawing side, and the special electric winning device 416 is activated. Even if it becomes an open state, since the game ball does not reach a position where the ball can enter the special electric winning device 416, basically no winning to the special electric winning device 416 occurs. By the way, even if winnings to the second operating section 413 occur, the number of game balls that will be paid out is one, so even if winnings to the second operating section 413 occur frequently in the high-frequency support mode, the game will not be played. The number of game balls owned by the player does not increase.

On the other hand, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the guided state of the guiding unit 432 is as high as 95%, and the display duration of the symbol on the normal figure display section 423a is longer than the firing cycle of the game ball, which is 4 seconds. Furthermore, in the guidance state, the guidance unit 432 remains in the guidance state for 2 seconds. Moreover, as already explained, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 basically wins the prize in the through prize part 414, and basically wins the prize in the second operating part 413 if the guiding unit 432 is in the guiding state. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, if the game ball continues to be launched so as to flow down the right side area PA3, the guiding unit 432 will be in the guiding state, and a winning may occur in the second operating section 413. The game ball can reach the position of the special electric winning device 416 on the downstream side of the second operating section 413. Therefore, in the case of low-frequency support mode, the frequency of winnings to the second actuating section 413 is lower than that of high-frequency support mode, but the result is a small win triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side. A prize may be won to the special electric prize winning device 416 which is in an open state.

In the low-frequency support mode, in a configuration where a prize can be generated in the special electric winning device 416 which is in an open state due to a small winning result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side, the second special drawing display is By making the display duration of game times in the portion 426 different depending on whether the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode or the high probability mode, the right area can be displayed in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. Even if the firing operation is carried out so as to flow down PA3, the profit per unit time will be extremely low.On the other hand, in a situation where the mode is high probability mode and low frequency support mode, the firing operation is performed so as to flow down the right area PA3. The structure is such that the profit per unit time will be higher if this is done. The configuration will be explained below.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is based on the display duration period of the variation display of the symbol in the special symbol display units 425 and 426 (i.e., the variation display period of the symbol) and the duration of the display duration of the symbol in the symbol display device 424 (ie, the variation display period of the symbol). (These display duration periods are also referred to as the display duration periods of a gaming session). The variation type counter CS is repeatedly updated and acquired when determining a variation pattern at the start of variation display in the special symbol display units 425, 426 and at the start of symbol variation by the symbol display device 424. The manner of setting the display duration period of a game session will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 236. Note that the numbers “0 to 99” in FIG. 236 correspond to the values of the variation type counter CS.

In the low probability mode, the setting mode of the display continuation period of the game round in the first special figure display section 425 becomes the normal setting mode. In the normal setting mode, as shown in FIG. 236, if the result of the win/fail determination process is a winning result and a complete win without a reach effect, the upper limit number (specifically When a new game round is started in a situation where the hold information of the first special figure (4 pieces) is stored, 2 seconds is selected as the display duration of the game round, and the first special figure hold information is stored. When a new game round is started in a situation where the hold information of the first special symbol with the upper limit number is not stored in the area 452, the display duration of the game round is 10 seconds, 20 seconds, or 30 seconds. is selected. In addition, in the normal setting mode, when the result of the win/fail judgment process is a miss result but a reach effect occurs, the result of the win/fail judgment process is a jackpot result, and the result of the win/fail judgment process is a small win result. In any of the cases, one of 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds, 1 minute, 1 minute and 30 seconds, and 2 minutes is selected as the display duration of the game session. In this case, a longer duration is more likely to be selected for a jackpot result or a small win result than for a miss reach, and the average duration selected is also longer for a jackpot result or a small win result than for a miss reach. It's getting longer.

On the other hand, in the low probability mode, the setting mode of the display continuation period of the game round in the second special figure display section 426 is a long-term setting mode. In the long-term setting mode, there is only one type of display duration for the selected game session, and that one type of game session continues to be displayed regardless of the validity judgment result and type judgment result of the target game session. A period is selected. The display duration of this selected game round is 10 minutes. The display duration is longer than 2 minutes, which is the display duration of the longest game round selected in the normal selection mode. As a result, in the low probability mode, the frequency of execution of game times in the second special figure display section 426 is lower than the frequency of execution of game times in the first special figure display section 425.

In the high probability mode, the setting manner of the display duration of game times is different from the low probability mode. Specifically, in the high probability mode, the first special symbol display section 425 will display only one type of game round, regardless of whether a reach effect occurs or not, if the winning/failure judgment result is a winning result. are the selection targets, and only one type is the selection target even if the judgment result is a jackpot result or a small win result. In this case, the display duration of the gaming session in the case of a jackpot result or small winning result is set longer than the display duration of the gaming session in the case of a losing result. While the display duration of a game round is 10 seconds, the display duration of a game round in the case of a jackpot result or a small win result is 30 seconds.

In the high probability mode, the display duration of the game round on the second special figure display section 426 is selected to be 0.5 seconds with a probability of 9/10 when the winning/failure judgment result is a miss or a small hit. 1 minute and 30 seconds is selected with a probability of 10. On the other hand, when the result of the judgment is a jackpot result, only one type of 1 minute and 30 seconds is selected.

When a game round is executed on the second special figure display section 426 in the high probability mode and the result is a small win, the display duration of the game round will be 0.5 seconds with a high probability. The total period of the game round including the final stop period of the game round is 1 second. On the other hand, as already explained, in the low-frequency support mode, the display duration of the general figure display section 423a is 4 seconds, the duration of the guidance state of the guidance unit 432 is 2 seconds, and the second operation When a winning occurs in section 413, there is a high probability of a small winning result, and in the case of a small winning result, the period in which the special electric winning device 416 is in the open state in the opening/closing execution mode is 2 seconds. Then, in the high probability mode and low frequency support mode, by performing the firing operation of the game ball so as to flow down the right side area PA3, the special electric prize winning device 416 that is in the open state is triggered by the small winning result. Winnings occur more frequently than in other situations. This winning frequency is determined by the number of game balls owned by the player when the game ball is launched so as to flow down the right area PA3 in the high probability mode and low frequency support mode. The winning frequency is set to increase.

As already explained, the trigger that causes the situation to become the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode is the 16R high probability jackpot result. In addition, in the case of a 16R high-probability jackpot result, after the opening/closing execution mode in which round games occur 16 times, the situation is that it is a high probability mode and a low-frequency support mode until a new jackpot result occurs. continues. Then, as mentioned above, in the high probability mode and low frequency support mode, by operating the game ball to flow down the right area PA3, the special electric prize that is released as a result of a small hit is triggered. The frequency at which winnings occur in the device 416 is as follows: In the high probability mode and low frequency support mode, if the game ball is launched so as to flow down the right area PA3, the winnings will occur in the game owned by the player. The winning frequency is set to increase the number of balls. Therefore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends with a 16R high certainty jackpot result, the greater the number of games played in the second special figure display section 426 until a new jackpot result occurs, the more the game ball owned by the player. The number of items will increase. Therefore, in this situation, the player expects that a jackpot result will not occur.

Even if a jackpot result occurs, if it is a 16R high probability jackpot result, the situation of high probability mode and low frequency support mode will occur again after the opening/closing execution mode in which round games occur 16 times. That will happen. Therefore, although the player expects that a jackpot result will not occur, if a jackpot result does occur, he expects that it will be a 16R high certainty jackpot result.

When a 6R high-probability jackpot result occurs, a high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode is entered after an opening/closing execution mode in which a round game occurs six times. This situation continues until a new jackpot result occurs. In this situation, as already explained, by performing the firing operation so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3, winnings to the second actuating part 413 occur frequently, but the small winning result triggers the release state. Basically, winnings to the special electric winning device 416 do not occur. Therefore, in this situation, although it is not possible to increase the number of game balls owned by the player, it is possible to generate the next jackpot result while preventing the number of game balls from decreasing too much. Therefore, in this situation, the player expects a jackpot result to occur quickly.

When a 6R normal jackpot result occurs, the opening/closing execution mode in which the round game occurs six times is performed, and then the low probability mode and high frequency support mode are entered. Even in this situation, by performing the firing operation so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3, winnings to the second actuating part 413 occur frequently, but the special electric winnings are in an open state triggered by a small hit result. Basically, winnings to the device 416 do not occur. However, the win/fail lottery mode is a low probability mode, and when the number of game runs reaches 50, the high frequency support mode ends and shifts to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, in this situation, the player expects that the next jackpot result will occur within the range in which the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls that the player owns too much.

In the case of low probability mode and low frequency support mode, even if the firing operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3, the display duration of the game round in the second special figure display section 426 is extremely long. It will be a long 10 minutes. In this case, even if the player performs the firing operation so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3, the efficiency of playing the game will deteriorate, so the player should perform the firing operation so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2. Become. A game round in the first special figure display section 425 is executed by performing a firing operation so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2. In this case, the display duration of the game round will be in the normal setting mode as already explained.

<First special figure special electric line control process and second special figure special electric line control process>
Next, the first special figure special electric charge control process and the second special figure special electric charge control process executed by the main side CPU 63 will be explained. In this embodiment, unlike the 64th embodiment, even if a game round is being executed on the first special figure display section 425, a game round can be started on the second special figure display section 426, and Even if a game round is being executed on the second special figure display section 426, a game round can be started on the first special figure display section 425. Therefore, the first special figure special electric line control process is set as the special figure special electric line control process for the first special figure display section 425, and the second special figure special electric line control process is set as the special figure special electric line control process for the second special figure display section 426. Special electric control processing is set. These first special figure special electric line control process and second special figure special electric line control process are executed instead of the special figure special electric line control process in the above-mentioned 64th embodiment, and are the steps in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). It is executed in S8913.

FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the first special figure special electric line control process, and FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the second special figure special electric line control process. Note that the processing from step SF101 to step SF111 in the first special figure special electric line control process and the process from step SF201 to step SF211 in the second special figure special electric line control process are performed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63. It is executed using.

In the first special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 237), first, the acquisition process of reservation information on the first special figure side is executed (step SF101). In the acquisition process, if a winning has occurred in the first actuating section 412, the number of reservation information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure reservation area 452 is the upper limit storage number (specifically, On the condition that the number is less than 4), storage processing of the reservation information on the first special drawing side is executed. In the storage process, the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 are stored as the reservation information on the first special symbol side, and are stored in the first area 452a to fourth area 452d of the first special symbol reservation area 452. It is stored in the area where the reservation information on the first special figure side is not stored, which is earlier in the order of consumption. In addition, when the reservation information on the first special symbol side is acquired, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display section 427 are updated in accordance with the increase in the number of reservation information on the first special symbol side. Configure the data to do so. Moreover, when the hold information on the first special figure side is acquired, a hold increase command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. As a result, the image for informing the number of pending storages of the pending information on the first special symbol side in the symbol display device 424 is updated in correspondence with the new acquisition of the pending information on the first special symbol side.

In the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 238), first, a process for obtaining reservation information on the second special figure side is executed (step SF201). In the acquisition process, if a winning occurs in the second actuating unit 413, the number of reservation information on the second special figure side stored in the second special figure reservation area 453 exceeds the upper limit storage number (specifically, On the condition that the number is less than 4), storage processing of the reservation information on the second special drawing side is executed. In the storage process, each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is stored as the reservation information on the second special symbol side, and is stored in the first area 453a to the fourth area 453d of the second special symbol reservation area 453. It is stored in the area where the reservation information on the second special figure side is not stored, which is earlier in the order of consumption. In addition, when the reservation information on the second special symbol side is acquired, the display contents of the second special symbol reservation display section 428 are updated in accordance with the increase in the number of reservation information on the second special symbol side. Configure the data to do so. Moreover, when the hold information on the second special figure side is acquired, a hold increase command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. As a result, the image for informing the number of pending storages of the pending information on the second special symbol side in the symbol display device 424 is updated in accordance with the new acquisition of the pending information on the second special symbol side.

Returning to the explanation of the first special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 237) and the second special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 238), after executing the hold information acquisition process (step SF101 or step SF201), the main side ROM 64 is The stored special figure special electric address table is read out (step SF101, step SF202). Then, in the case of the first special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 237), a start address corresponding to the numerical information of the first special figure special electric line counter is obtained from the special figure special electric line address table (step SF103), and the obtained start address is The process jumps to the process shown (step SF104). In addition, in the case of the second special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 238), a start address corresponding to the numerical information of the second special figure special electric line counter is acquired from the special figure special electric line address table (step SF203), and the acquired start address is The process jumps to the process shown (step SF204).

The first special figure special electric line counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to grasp which of each process from step SF105 to step SF111 in the first special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 237) should be executed. be. The second special figure special electric line counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to grasp which of each process from step SF205 to step SF211 in the second special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 238) should be executed. be. In the special figure/special electric line address table, the start address of the program for executing each process of steps SF105 to step SF111 is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the first special figure/special electric line counter, and the start address of the second special figure/special electric line counter is set. A start address in the program for executing each process from step SF205 to step SF211 is set corresponding to the numerical information of .

If the value of the first special figure special electric line counter or the second special figure special electric line counter is "0", the process jumps to the special figure fluctuation start process of step SF105 or step SF205, and the value of the first special figure special electric line counter or the second special figure special electric line counter is If the value of the special electricity counter is "1", the process jumps to the special figure fluctuation processing in step SF106 or step SF206, and if the value of the first special figure special electricity counter or the second special figure special electricity counter is "2" , the process jumps to the special figure confirmation process in step SF107 or step SF207, and if the value of the first special figure special charge counter or the second special figure special charge counter is "3", the process jumps to the special charge start process in step SF108 or step SF208. If the value of the first special pattern special electricity counter or the second special pattern special electricity counter is "4", the process jumps to step SF109 or step SF209, where the special electricity is being released, and the value of the first special pattern special electricity counter or the second special pattern special electricity counter is "4". If the value of the 2nd special pattern special electricity counter is "5", the process jumps to step SF110 or step SF210, which is the special electricity closing process, and if the value of the 1st special pattern special electricity counter or the 2nd special pattern special electricity counter is "6", If so, the process jumps to step SF111 or step SF211, which is the special call termination process. Each of the processes in steps SF105 to SF111 and steps SF205 to SF211 will be individually explained below.

<Special figure fluctuation start process>
First, the special symbol variation start processing in step SF105 and step SF205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 239. In addition, the processing of steps SF301 to step SF317 in the special figure variation start processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, it is first determined whether or not the process for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed on the side that does not correspond to the current special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 237 and 238) (step SF301). As already explained, even in a situation where a game round is being executed on one of the first special figure display section 425 and the second special figure display section 426, a game session can be executed on the other. In this case, step SF301 is executed, and if the opening/closing execution mode process is being executed on the side that does not correspond to the current special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 237 and 238), the process from step SF302 onward is executed. The start of a new game round is regulated without being played. As a result, in a situation where the opening/closing execution mode is being executed triggered by a game round in one of the first special figure display section 425 and the second special figure display section 426, a new game round in the other one is not started. Regulated. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, if this time is the special figure fluctuation start process in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237), it is determined in step SF301 whether the value of the second special figure special electric line counter is 3 or more, and if it is 3 or more. In this case, the configuration is such that the processing from step SF302 onwards is not executed. In addition, if this time is the special figure fluctuation start process in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 238), it is determined in step SF301 whether or not the value of the first special figure special electric line counter is 3 or more. In this case, the configuration is such that the processing from step SF302 onwards is not executed.

When a negative determination is made in step SF301, it is determined whether the corresponding number of pending items is one or more (step SF302). If this time is the special symbol fluctuation start process in the first special symbol special electric control process (FIG. 237), it is determined whether one or more pieces of reservation information on the first special symbol side are stored in the first special symbol reservation area 452. However, if this time is the special figure fluctuation start process in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 238), check whether one or more pieces of hold information on the second special figure side are stored in the second special figure hold area 453. Determine.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SF302, data setting processing is executed (step SF303). In the data setting process, if this is the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237), the data stored in the first area 452a of the first special figure holding area 452 is transferred to the execution area 493 for the first special figure. Moving. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure holding area 452 is executed. This data shift processing sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas 452a to 452d to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area 452b → first area 452a, third area 452c → second area 452b, fourth area 452d → third area 452c, and the data is shifted to the fourth area 452d. Clear to "0". In addition, in the data setting process, data is set so that the display content of the first special figure reservation display section 427 is updated in accordance with the current reduction in the number of reservation information on the first special figure side. Further, in the data setting process, a hold reduction command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. As a result, the image for informing the number of pending storages of the pending information on the first special symbol side in the symbol display device 424 is updated in accordance with the decrease in the pending information on the first special symbol side.

In the data setting process, if this is the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 238), the data stored in the first area 453a of the second special figure holding area 453 is transferred to the execution area 494 for the second special figure. Moving. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure holding area 453 is executed. This data shift processing sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas 453a to 453d to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area 453b → first area 453a, third area 453c → second area 453b, fourth area 453d → third area 453c, and the data is shifted to the fourth area 453d. Clear to "0". In addition, in the data setting process, data is set so that the display contents of the second special symbol reservation display section 428 are updated in accordance with the current reduction in the number of reservation information on the second special symbol side. Further, in the data setting process, a hold reduction command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. As a result, the image for informing the number of pending storages of the pending information on the second special symbol side in the symbol display device 424 is updated in accordance with the decrease in the pending information on the second special symbol side.

After executing the data setting process, an appropriateness determination process is executed (step SF304). In the win/fail determination process, if the current game round is triggered by the hold information on the first special drawing side, the first win/fail tables 495, 496 (Fig. 234(a) and FIG. 234(b)) is read from the main side ROM 64. Then, the numerical information about the winning random number counter C1 is read out from the pending information on the first special figure side that triggered the start of the current game round, and the read numerical information is applied to the first win/fail table 495, 496. By comparing, it is determined whether the result of the current validity determination process is a jackpot result, a small win result, or a miss result. On the other hand, in the win/fail judgment process, if the current game round is triggered by the hold information on the second special drawing side, the second win/fail table 497, 498 corresponding to the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 and the win/fail lottery mode (See FIGS. 234(c) and 234(d)) is read from the main ROM 64. Then, the numerical information about the winning random number counter C1 is read out from the pending information on the second special figure side that triggered the start of the current game round, and the read numerical information is applied to the second win/fail table 497, 498. By comparing, it is determined whether the result of the current validity determination process is a jackpot result, a small win result, or a miss result.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot result (step SF305: YES), a type determination process is executed (step SF306). In the type determination process, the type table 499 shown in FIG. 235(a) is read from the main ROM 64. In addition, if the hold information on the first special figure side is the trigger for the current game round, the numerical information about the type counter C2 is read out of the hold information on the first special figure side, and the hold information on the second special figure side is read out. If the information is the trigger for the current game round, the numerical information about the type counter C2 is read out of the pending information on the second special figure side. Then, the numerical information about the read type counter C2 falls within the numerical range of any type of jackpot result among the 6R normal jackpot result, 6R high probability jackpot result, and 16R high probability jackpot result set in the type table 499. Determine whether it is compatible.

After executing the type determination process, the flag in the main side RAM 65 corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in the type determination process is set to "1" (step SF307). The state of the flag set to "1" is cleared to "0" when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Thereafter, a stop result setting process for jackpot results is executed (step SF308). Specifically, information about the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the current game round on the side that is the target of execution of the game round among the first special figure display section 425 and the second special figure display section 426. is specified from the stop result table for jackpot results stored in advance in the main side ROM 64, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 65. In this stop result table for jackpot results, the types of stop modes of the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the first special figure display section 425 or the second special figure display section 426 are set differently for each type of jackpot result. In step SF308, information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in step SF306 is stored in the main side RAM 65. Note that the pattern stopping manner may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of pattern stopping patterns may be set for at least some of the jackpot results. For jackpot results in which a plurality of types of pattern stopping modes are set, a method for selecting a stopping result is arbitrary, but for example, a structure may be adopted in which a stopping result is selected according to the value of the type counter C2.

If the result of the win/fail determination process is a small win result (step SF309: YES), "1" is set in the flag in the main side RAM 65 corresponding to the small win result (step SF310). The state of the flag set to "1" is cleared to "0" when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Thereafter, a stop result setting process for small winning results is executed (step SF311). Specifically, information about the stop mode of the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed in the first special figure display section 425 or the second special figure display section 426 in the current game round is read from the main side ROM 64, and the read information is read out from the main side ROM 64. It is stored in the main side RAM 65. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a jackpot result.

If the result of the win/fail determination process is neither a jackpot result nor a small win result (step SF305 and step SF309: NO), a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed (step SF312). Specifically, information about the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the current game round on the side that is the target of execution of the game round among the first special figure display section 425 and the second special figure display section 426. is specified from the stop result table for failure results stored in advance in the main side ROM 64, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 65. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a jackpot result and the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a small win result.

After any one of the stop result setting processes is executed, a display continuation period understanding process is executed (step SF313). In this process, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired, and information on the current situation and the display duration period corresponding to the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is selected in the manner shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 236.

After that, a variable command and a type command are selected from the main ROM 64, which correspond to the results of the current win/fail determination process and type determination process, the current win/fail lottery mode type, the current support mode type, and the processing result of step SF313. do. Then, the selected variation command and type command are transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step SF314). The audio emission control device 81 executes control to execute a game round effect corresponding to the received variation command and type command.

Thereafter, variable display of the symbols is started on the side of the first special figure display section 425 and the second special figure display section 426 that is the target of the current game round (step SF315). The first special figure display part 425 and the second special figure display part 425 and the second special figure display part serve as a table referred to by the main side CPU 63 when the first special figure display part 425 or the second special figure display part 426 displays a changing pattern. A variable display table for special symbols common to 426 is stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. When variable display of symbols is executed in the first special figure display section 425 or the second special figure display section 426, the same variable display table is used regardless of the result of the validity judgment process and the result of the type judgment process. Ru. When the first special figure display section 425 or the second special figure display section 426 displays a variable pattern, the variable display of the symbol according to a predetermined pattern is repeated, but the variable display table for the special figure is Control data for one round in the variable display of the picture according to the predetermined pattern is set. Therefore, when a variable display of symbols is performed in the first special figure display section 425 or the second special figure display section 426, the variable display table for the special figure is displayed until the display duration of the game round determined in step SF313 elapses. will be used repeatedly.

Thereafter, a process for turning off the special display section 429 is executed (step SF316). In the special display section 429, when the opening/closing execution mode occurs, information corresponding to the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode is displayed. In other words, if the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a 6R normal jackpot result or a 6R high sure jackpot result, when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the special display section 429 will display the 6-round game. A corresponding display takes place. In addition, if the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a 16R high probability jackpot result, a display corresponding to the 16 round game will be displayed on the special display section 429 when the opening/closing execution mode is started. be exposed. Furthermore, when the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a small winning result, a display corresponding to the small winning result is displayed on the special display section 429 when the opening/closing execution mode is started. In the above configuration, when the special display section 429 is turned off in step SF316 of the special figure variation start process, when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the display on the special display section 429 that is started is in the opening/closing execution mode. It ends when a new game round is started after the game ends. The special display section 429 is maintained in an off state until a new opening/closing execution mode occurs.

After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric line control process (Figure 237), the value of the first special figure special electric line counter is incremented by 1, and the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric line control process (Figure 237). 238), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step SF317). When the special figure fluctuation start process is executed, the value of the special figure special electric counter is "0", so when 1 is added, the value of the special figure special electric counter that is the target of the addition is changed to the value of the special figure special electric counter that is subject to the addition during the special figure fluctuation processing ( It becomes "1" corresponding to step SF106 and step SF206).

<Processing during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the special symbol fluctuation processing executed in step SF106 of the first special symbol special electric charge control process (FIG. 237) and step SF206 of the second special figure special electric charge control process (FIG. 238) will be described.

If the display duration of the current game round has not elapsed, and it is time to update the display contents of the special figure display sections 425, 426 that are the targets of the current game round, the special figure display By referring to the variable display table, data settings for updating the display contents of the special figure display sections 425 and 426 are performed. As a result, the display contents of the symbols in the special figure display sections 425 and 426 that are the targets of the current game round are updated to the display contents of the next order. In addition, the main side RAM 65 includes a first display order counter that is referred to in order to derive the display contents of the symbol from the variable display table for the special symbol when it is time to update the symbol in the first special symbol display unit 425. It is provided. In addition, the main side RAM 65 includes a second display order counter that is referred to in order to derive the display contents of the symbol from the variable display table for the special symbol when it is time to update the symbol in the second special symbol display section 426. It is provided.

The mode at the start of the variable display of the symbols in the special figure display sections 425, 426 and the mode of updating the variable display of the symbols are performed in a constant manner regardless of the result of the validity determination process and the result of the type determination process, and It is performed in a fixed manner regardless of the content of the game replay on the symbol display device 424. For example, when a predetermined update timing occurs a plurality of times, the display contents of the symbols go around once, and a display pattern in which the display order is a certain order is repeated, and the display duration of the game session has elapsed. Regardless of the order in which the display pattern is displayed, the stop result determined at the start of the game round is displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display sections 425 and 426.

On the other hand, if the display continuation period of the game round has elapsed, the information on the stop mode of the symbols in the special figure display sections 425, 426 stored in the main side RAM 65 at the start of the game cycle is read out, and the stop mode of the symbol is also read out. The display of the special figure display parts 425 and 426, which are the targets of the current game round, is controlled so as to be displayed. As a result, the special figure display sections 425 and 426, which are the target of execution of the current game round, display the symbols corresponding to the results of the validity judgment process and the result of the type judgment process of the current game round. Fluctuation display is stopped. The mode of the picture that is stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 425, 426 is maintained until the next variable display of the picture on the special figure display section 425, 426 starts, regardless of whether it is in the opening/closing execution mode. be done. Further, information on the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 65. As a result, measurement of the final stop period is started.

Thereafter, a final stop command is sent to the audio emission control device 81. When the audio emission control device 81 receives the final stop command from the main CPU 63, it transmits the final stop command to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the final stop command from the audio emission control device 81, it reads out a display pattern table for displaying the combination of stop symbols in the current game round in a stop state over the final stop period. As a result, the combination of stopped symbols corresponding to the current game round is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 424 over the final stopping period.

After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric line control process (Figure 237), the value of the first special figure special electric line counter is incremented by 1, and the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric line control process (Figure 237). 238), increment the value of the second special figure special electric counter by 1. Since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special figure changing process is executed is "1," by adding 1, the value of the special figure special electric counter that is subject to the addition is changed to the value of the special figure special electric counter that is subject to the addition. This is "2" corresponding to step SF107 and step SF207).

<Special drawing confirmation process>
Next, please refer to the flowchart in FIG. 240 regarding the special symbol confirmation process executed in step SF107 of the first special symbol special electric vehicle control process (FIG. 237) and step SF207 of the second special symbol special electric vehicle control process (FIG. 238). I will explain while doing so. In addition, the processing of steps SF401 to step SF409 in the special figure confirmation process is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

If the final stop period has passed and the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result (step SF401 and step SF402: YES), a jackpot setting process is executed (step SF403). In the jackpot setting process, if the current jackpot result is a 6R normal jackpot result or a 6R high sure jackpot result, the special display section 429 is display-controlled so that a display corresponding to the 6 round game is started. Configure data settings for In addition, in the jackpot setting process, data for controlling the display of the special display section 429 is set so that if the current jackpot result is a 16R high-probability jackpot result, a display corresponding to 16 round games is started. Make settings.

If the final stop period has passed and the current game round corresponds to a small win result (step SF401 and step SF404: YES), a setting process for a small win is executed (step SF405). In the small win setting process, data settings are performed to control the display of the special display section 429 so that a display corresponding to the small win result is started.

When the process of step SF403 or step SF405 is executed, the value of the special figure special electric line counter on the side that does not correspond to the current special figure special electric line control process (FIGS. 237 and 238) is cleared to "0" (step SF406). As a result, even if the execution control of the game round is performed in the special figure special electric line control process (Figures 237, 238) on the side that does not correspond to the current special figure special electric line control process (Figures 237, 238), the relevant game The session is forcibly terminated. In other words, in a situation where game rounds are being executed on both the first special figure display section 425 and the second special figure display section 426, if one game session that results in a jackpot result or a small win result ends, the other The game round will also end midway. Thereafter, the end processing for the other game round is executed (step SF407). In the termination process, a display corresponding to the winning result is made to be displayed on the special figure display section 425, 426 on the side that is the target of forced termination of the game round.

After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric line control process (Figure 237), the value of the first special figure special electric line counter is incremented by 1, and the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric line control process (Figure 237). (FIG. 238), increment the value of the second special figure special electric counter by 1 (step SF408). Since the value of the special figure special electric line counter when the special figure confirmation process is executed is "2," by adding 1, the value of the special figure special electric line counter that is the target of the addition is changed to the value of the special figure special electric line counter that is subject to the addition. , step SF208).

If the result of this game is a loss (step SF404: NO), and if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 237), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is set to " If the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 238), the value of the second special figure special electric line counter is cleared to ``0'' (step SF409). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step SF105, step SF205).

<Special call start process>
Next, the special train start process executed in step SF108 of the first special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 237) and step SF208 of the second special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 238) will be described.

In the special electric start process, if it is before the start of the opening period, measurement of the opening period (for example, 4 seconds) is started, and an opening command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. When the audio light emission control device 81 receives the opening command, it controls the light emission of the display light emitting section 53 and the sound output of the speaker section 54 so that the opening effect is executed. Further, the audio light emission control device 81 transmits an opening command to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the opening command, it controls the display of the symbol display device 424 so that the opening effect is executed.

In the special electric start processing, if the opening period has passed and this time is triggered by any jackpot result, the round counter provided in the main side RAM 65 corresponds to the number of executions of the round game in the current opening/closing execution mode. Set the information to be used. The round counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 each time a round game is executed. In addition, information on the open duration period of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 65, and the special electric winning device 416 in one round game is set in the winning counter provided in the main side RAM 65. Information corresponding to the upper limit number of prizes to be won (specifically, "10") is set. On the other hand, if this time is triggered by a small winning result, the round counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". In addition, the timer counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to the information on the opening duration of the small winning result (specifically, 2 seconds), and the winning counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to the special electric prize winning result for the small winning result. Information corresponding to the upper limit number of prizes to be won (specifically, "10") is set in the device 416.

After that, the special electric power release setting process is executed. In the opening setting process, output of a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 416c is started so that the special electric prize winning device 416 becomes in an open state. After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric line control process (Figure 237), the value of the first special figure special electric line counter is incremented by 1, and the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric line control process (Figure 237). 238), increment the value of the second special figure special electric counter by 1. When the special train start process is executed, the value of the special train special train counter is "3", so when 1 is added, the value of the special train special train counter that is the target of the addition is changed to the value of the special train special train counter that is subject to the addition during the special train opening process (step SF109, It becomes "4" corresponding to step SF209).

<Processing while special electric line is open>
Next, the special train opening process executed in step SF109 of the first special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 237) and step SF209 of the second special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 238) will be described.

In the special line opening process, when the opening continuation period of the special line winning device 416 has passed or when the upper limit winning number of game balls has been won in the special line winning device 416, a closing setting process is executed. In the closing setting process, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 416c is stopped so that the special electric winning device 416 is in the closed state. Thereafter, the value of the round counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1.

If the value of the round counter after being subtracted by 1 is not "0", information corresponding to the closing duration period (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 65. After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric line control process (Figure 237), the value of the first special figure special electric line counter is incremented by 1, and the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric line control process (Figure 237). 238), increment the value of the second special figure special electric counter by 1. When the special train opening process is executed, the value of the special train special train counter is "4", so when 1 is added, the value of the special train special train counter that is subject to the addition is changed to the value of the special train special train counter that is subject to the addition during the special train closed process (step SF110). , step SF210).

If the value of the round counter after being subtracted by 1 is "0", information corresponding to the ending period (specifically, 10 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 65. Further, an ending command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. When receiving the ending command, the audio light emission control device 81 controls the light emission of the display light emitting section 53 and the sound output of the speaker section 54 so that the ending effect is executed. Further, the audio emission control device 81 transmits an ending command to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the ending command, it controls the display of the symbol display device 424 so that the ending effect is executed. After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric line control process (Fig. 237), the value of the first special figure special electric line counter is incremented by 2, and the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric line control process (Fig. 237). 238), increment the value of the second special figure special electric counter by 2. Since the value of the special figure special electric line counter when the special electric line release process is executed is "4," by adding 2, the value of the special figure special electric line counter that is the target of the addition is changed to the value of the special figure special electric line counter that is subject to the addition. It becomes "6" corresponding to step SF211).

<Processing during special electric train closure>
Next, the special train closed process executed in step SF110 of the first special train special train control process (FIG. 237) and step SF210 of the second special train special train control process (FIG. 238) will be described.

If the closing duration period has elapsed, information on the open duration period of the round game (specifically 29 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 65, and one round game is set in the winning counter of the main side RAM 65. Information (specifically, "10") corresponding to the upper limit number of prizes to be won to the special electric prize winning device 416 in is set. Then, by executing the opening setting process for special electricity, the special electricity winning device 416 is brought into an open state. After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric line control process (Figure 237), the value of the first special figure special electric line counter is subtracted by 1, and the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric line control process (Fig. 237). 238), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1. When the special train closed process is executed, the value of the special train special train counter is "5", so when 1 is subtracted, the value of the special train special train counter that is the target of the subtraction is changed to the value of the special train special train counter that is subject to the subtraction during the special train open process (step SF109). , step SF209).

<Special call termination process>
Next, the special train ending process executed in step SF111 of the first special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 237) and step SF211 of the second special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 238) will be explained.

If the ending period has elapsed, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed. In the transition processing, if the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a 6R normal jackpot result, the win/fail lottery mode is set to a low probability mode and the support mode is set to a high frequency support mode. Note that information for terminating the high-frequency support mode when the total number of games has reached 50 is also set. If the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a 6R high certainty jackpot result, the win/fail lottery mode is set to the high probability mode, and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. If the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a 16R high probability jackpot result, the win/fail lottery mode is set to the high probability mode, and the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode. On the other hand, if the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a small winning result, the process for changing the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode from before the opening/closing execution mode is started is not executed.

After that, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric line control process (Figure 237), the value of the first special figure special electric line counter is cleared to "0", and the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric line control process. If it corresponds to the process (FIG. 238), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step SF105, step SF205).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The fluctuation in each set value of the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, which is determined to be a jackpot result in the validity judgment process for the reservation information on the first special figure side, is the validity determination for the reservation information on the first special figure side. It is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which is determined to be a losing result in the processing. As a result, while not affecting the probability of a small hit result in the validity determination process for the reservation information on the first special figure side, a jackpot result can be achieved in the validity determination process for the reservation information on the first special figure side. It becomes possible to vary the probability.

The number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a small winning result in the validity judgment process for the reservation information on the first special figure side is the same regardless of the set value. Thereby, it becomes possible to make constant the probability that a small hit result is selected in the validity determination process for the reservation information on the first special symbol side at all setting values. In addition, even if the probability that a small hit result is selected is constant in the validity judgment process for the reservation information on the first special drawing side, the probability that the small winning result is selected is fixed, Since the variation in each setting value of the probability that a jackpot result will be selected is absorbed by the variation in the probability that a winning result will be selected, the jackpot result will be selected in the validity judgment process for the pending information on the first special drawing side. This makes it possible to set the probability that the result is a probability that corresponds to the set value.

The number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which is determined to be a losing result in the validity determination process for the reservation information on the first special figure side is the largest regardless of each set value. As a result, the variation in each setting value of the probability that a jackpot result is selected in the judgment process for the reservation information on the first special drawing side is changed to a winning result in the judgment process for the reservation information on the first special drawing side. Even if it is configured to absorb the variation in the probability that will occur, the probability that the result will be incorrect in the validity judgment process for the pending information on the first special drawing side will not vary greatly between the setting values of multiple stages. It becomes possible to do so.

The variation in each set value of the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, which is determined to be a jackpot result in the validity judgment process for the reservation information on the second special figure side, is the validity determination for the reservation information on the second special figure side. It is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which is determined to be a losing result in the processing. As a result, while not affecting the probability of a small hit result in the judgment process for the reservation information on the second special drawing side, the judgment process for the reservation information on the second special drawing side will produce a jackpot result. It becomes possible to vary the probability.

The number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a small winning result in the validity judgment process for the reservation information on the second special figure side is the same regardless of the set value. Thereby, it becomes possible to make constant the probability that a small hit result is selected in the validity determination process for the reservation information on the second special symbol side at all setting values. In addition, even if the probability that a small hit result is selected is constant in the process of determining the validity of the pending information on the second special drawing side, the probability of selecting a small winning result is fixed, but the process of determining the validity of the pending information of the second special Since the variation in each setting value of the probability that a jackpot result will be selected is absorbed by the variation in the probability that a winning result will be selected, the jackpot result will be selected in the validity judgment process for the pending information on the second special drawing side. This makes it possible to set the probability that the result is a probability that corresponds to the set value.

In the situation where the setting value is "Setting 6" and the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, which is the situation where the probability of a jackpot result is the highest in the winning/failure judgment process for the pending information on the second special drawing side, the second The number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a losing result in the validity determination process for the reservation information on the special figure side becomes 0. As a result, the variation in each setting value of the probability of a jackpot result in the judgment process for the reservation information on the second special drawing side is used to increase the probability of a winning result in the judgment process for the reservation information on the second special drawing side. In a configuration that absorbs the variation, it is possible to make the probability of a jackpot result as high as possible in a situation where the probability of a jackpot result is highest as described above.

The probability of a small winning result in the validity determination process for the reservation information on the first special drawing side is the same regardless of the setting value and the lottery mode. This makes it possible to prevent the player from inferring both the set value and the win/fail lottery mode based on the probability of a small winning result.

The probability of a small winning result not only in the validity judgment process for the reservation information on the first special figure side but also in the validity determination process for the reservation information on the second special figure side is determined by the setting value and the lottery mode. are also the same. As a result, regardless of the validity judgment process for the reservation information on the first special symbol side and the validity determination process for the reservation information on the second special symbol side, the setting value and the lottery mode are determined based on the probability of a small winning result. It becomes possible to prevent the player from guessing about both.

The probability that a small hit result is selected in the validity judgment process for the reservation information on the first special figure side is different from the probability that a small hit result is selected in the validity judgment process for the reservation information on the second special figure side. There is. As a result, the probability of a small winning result not only in the validity judgment process for the reservation information on the first special figure side but also in the validity judgment process for the reservation information on the second special figure side is determined by the setting value and the lottery mode. Even if the configuration is the same, it is possible to create a situation in which the probability of a small winning result differs.

In addition, in place of the configuration of the above embodiment, each of the numbers of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot result when the validity determination process is executed for the reservation information on the first special drawing side. The fluctuation in the set value is absorbed by the fluctuation in the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a small winning result when the validity judgment process is executed for the pending information on the first special drawing side. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

In addition, instead of the configuration of the above embodiment, each number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot result when the validity judgment process is executed for the pending information on the second special drawing side. The fluctuation in the set value is absorbed by the fluctuation in the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a small winning result when the validity judgment process is executed for the pending information on the second special drawing side. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

In addition, when the validity judgment process is executed on the reservation information on the first special drawing side, the small winning result can be selected, but instead of this, the reservation information on the first special drawing side A configuration may be adopted in which the small winning result is not selected when the success/failure determination process is executed.

<70th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the sixty-ninth embodiment described above in the content of the validity table referred to in the validity determination process. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the sixty-ninth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the sixty-ninth embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 241(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first validity table 495 at the time of low probability, which is referred to when performing the validity determination process on the reservation information on the first special figure side in the low probability mode. (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first validity table 496 at the time of high probability, which is referred to when performing the validity determination process on the reservation information on the first special symbol side in the high probability mode; ) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second validity table 501 at the time of low probability, which is referred to when performing the validity determination process on the pending information on the second special symbol side in the low probability mode, and FIG. 241(d) is It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second validity table 502 at the time of high probability that is referred to when performing the validity determination process on the reservation information on the second special figure side in the high probability mode.

As shown in FIGS. 241(a) and 241(b), the contents of the first validity table 495 when the probability is low and the first validity table 496 when the probability is high are the same as those in the sixty-ninth embodiment. On the other hand, the contents of the second validity table 501 at low probability shown in FIG. 241(c) and the second validity table 502 at high probability shown in FIG. 241(d) are different from the above-described sixty-ninth embodiment. The second validity table 501 when the probability is low and the second validity table 502 when the probability is high will be explained below.

As shown in FIG. 241(c), in the second win/fail table 501 at low probability, a jackpot result, a small win result, and a miss result are set as the judgment results of the judgment process. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has setting states "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", and the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a winning result. It is set as follows. On the other hand, the probability of a small winning result is set to be the same for any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6".

Specifically, the lowest setting value "Setting 1" is set to 50 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a small winning. The number of pieces of information is set to 9,300, and the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a losing result is set to 650 pieces. In addition, "Setting 2", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 1", is set to 52 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 9300, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 648. In addition, "Setting 3", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 2", is set to 54 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 9300, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 646. In addition, "Setting 4", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 3", is set to 56 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 9,300, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 644. In addition, "Setting 5", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 4", is set to 58 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 9300, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 642. In addition, the highest setting value "Setting 6" is set to 60 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a small winning. 9,300 pieces are set as the winning result, and 640 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which is a losing result.

As shown in FIG. 241(d), the second win/fail table 502 at the time of high probability is set with a jackpot result, a small win result, and a miss result as the judgment results of the win/fail judgment process. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has setting states "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", and the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a winning result. It is set as follows. On the other hand, the probability of a small winning result is set to be the same for any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6".

Specifically, the lowest setting value "Setting 1" is set to 500 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a small winning. The number of pieces of information is set to 9,300, and the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is a losing result is set to 200 pieces. In addition, "Setting 2", which is a setting value one level higher than "Setting 1", is set to 520 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 9300, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 180. In addition, in "Setting 3", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 2", 540 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 9300, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 160. In addition, "Setting 4", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 3", is set to 560 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 9300, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 140. In addition, "Setting 5", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 4", is set to 580 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 9,300, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 120. In addition, the highest setting value "Setting 6" is set to 600 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a small winning. 9,300 pieces are set as the winning result, and 100 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which is a losing result.

In "Setting 1", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is 1/200 in low probability mode and 1/20, which is 10 times that in high probability mode. It is. In "Setting 2", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is about 1/192 in low probability mode, and about 10 times that in high probability mode. /19.2. In "Setting 3", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is about 1/185 in low probability mode, and about 10 times that in high probability mode. /18.5. In "Setting 4", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is about 1/179 in low probability mode, and about 10 times that in high probability mode. /17.9. In "Setting 5", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is about 1/172 in low probability mode, and about 10 times that in high probability mode. /17.2. In "Setting 6", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is about 1/167 in low probability mode, and about 10 times that in high probability mode. /16.7. In other words, for any of "Settings 1" to "Settings 6", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special map side is higher in high probability mode than in low probability mode. It becomes 10 times. In addition, when comparing combinations with the same setting status and win/fail lottery mode, the probability of a jackpot result is the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the first special drawing side and when triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side. It is the same in the case of

On the other hand, the probability of a small winning result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is about 1/1.08, which is the same for any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". Further, the probability of a small winning result triggered by the reservation information on the second special map side is 1/1.08, which is the same in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In other words, the probability of a small winning result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is constant regardless of the setting state and the win/fail lottery mode. The probability of a small winning result triggered by the reservation information on the second special symbol side is higher than the probability of a small winning result triggered by the reservation information on the first special symbol side. Further, the probability of a small winning result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is higher than the probability of a jackpot result regardless of the setting state and winning/failure lottery mode. Furthermore, when the reservation information on the second special drawing side is used as a trigger, the probability of a small winning result is higher than the probability of a losing result, regardless of the setting state and winning/failure lottery mode. Furthermore, when the hold information on the second special drawing side is used as a trigger, the probability of a small hit result is higher than the combined probability of a jackpot result and a miss result, regardless of the setting state and win/fail lottery mode. .

In addition, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot may be configured to be set in aggregation so that it becomes a consecutive number, or it may be set in a distributed manner so that at least a part or all of it is not a serial number. It is also possible to have a configuration in which Further, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a small win may be configured to be set in aggregation so that it becomes a serial number, or it may be set in a distributed manner so that at least a part or all of it is not a serial number. A configuration may also be used.

According to the above configuration, the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the winning result is greater than the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the small winning result in the second win/fail table 497, 498. In a configuration in which there are fewer numbers, the variation in the probability of a jackpot result due to the setting value is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the winning result. In this case, in "Setting 6", which is the situation where the combination probability of the jackpot result and the small win result is the highest, and in the high probability mode, the validity judgment process is performed on the pending information on the second special drawing side. Even in a situation where there is a difference, the probability of a wrong result is 1/100. As a result, in the case of "Setting 6" and high probability mode, it is possible to make it possible to select an unsuccessful result even in a situation where a validity judgment is made on the pending information on the second special map side. It becomes possible.

<71st embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the sixty-ninth embodiment described above in the content of the validity table referred to in the validity determination process. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the sixty-ninth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the sixty-ninth embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 242(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first validity table 495 at the time of low probability, which is referred to when performing the validity determination process on the reservation information on the first special figure side in the low probability mode. 242(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first validity table 496 at the time of high probability, which is referred to when performing the validity determination process for the reservation information on the first special symbol side in the high probability mode, and FIG. 242(c) ) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second validity table 503 at the time of low probability, which is referred to when performing the validity determination process on the pending information on the second special symbol side in the low probability mode, and FIG. 242(d) is It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second validity table 504 at the time of high probability that is referred to when performing the validity determination process on the reservation information on the second special figure side in the high probability mode.

As shown in FIGS. 242(a) and 242(b), the contents of the first validity table 495 when the probability is low and the first validity table 496 when the probability is high are the same as those in the sixty-ninth embodiment. On the other hand, the contents of the second validity table 503 for low probability shown in FIG. 242(c) and the second validity table 504 for high probability shown in FIG. 242(d) are different from the above-described sixty-ninth embodiment. The second validity table 503 when the probability is low and the second validity table 504 when the probability is high will be explained below.

As shown in FIG. 242(c), in the second win/fail table 503 at low probability, a jackpot result, a small win result, and a miss result are set as the judgment results of the judgment process. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has setting states "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", but the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a small win result. It is set to be. On the other hand, the probability of a negative result is set to be the same for any of "Settings 1" to "Settings 6".

Specifically, the lowest setting value "Setting 1" is set to 50 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a small winning. The number of pieces of information is set to 9450, and the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that is a losing result is set to 500 pieces. In addition, "Setting 2", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 1", is set to 52 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 9448, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 500. In addition, "Setting 3", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 2", is set to 54 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 9446, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 500. In addition, "Setting 4", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 3", is set to 56 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 9444, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 500. In addition, "Setting 5", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 4", is set to 58 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 9442, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 500. In addition, the highest setting value "Setting 6" is set to 60 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a small winning. 9,440 pieces are set as the winning result, and 500 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 which is a losing result.

As shown in FIG. 242(d), the second win/fail table 504 at the time of high probability is set with a jackpot result, a small win result, and a miss result as the judgment results of the win/fail judgment process. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has setting states "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", but the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of a small win result. It is set to be. On the other hand, the probability of a negative result is set to be the same for any of "Settings 1" to "Settings 6".

Specifically, the lowest setting value "Setting 1" is set to 500 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a small winning. The number of pieces of information is set to 9000, and the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a losing result is set to 500 pieces. In addition, "Setting 2", which is a setting value one level higher than "Setting 1", is set to 520 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 8980, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 500. In addition, in "Setting 3", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 2", 540 is set as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 8960, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 500. In addition, "Setting 4", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 3", is set to 560 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 8940, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 500. In addition, "Setting 5", which is a setting value one step higher than "Setting 4", is set to 580 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot result, and the winning random number that will be the small winning result. The number of numerical information for the counter C1 is set to 8920, and the number of numerical information for the winning random number counter C1 that results in a loss is set to 500. In addition, the highest setting value "Setting 6" is set to 600 as the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot, and the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a small winning. 8,900 pieces are set as 8900 pieces, and the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a losing result is 500 pieces.

In "Setting 1", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is 1/200 in low probability mode and 1/20, which is 10 times that in high probability mode. It is. In "Setting 2", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is about 1/192 in low probability mode, and about 10 times that in high probability mode. /19.2. In "Setting 3", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is about 1/185 in low probability mode, and about 10 times that in high probability mode. /18.5. In "Setting 4", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is about 1/179 in low probability mode, and about 10 times that in high probability mode. /17.9. In "Setting 5", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is about 1/172 in low probability mode, and about 10 times that in high probability mode. /17.2. In "Setting 6", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is about 1/167 in low probability mode, and about 10 times that in high probability mode. /16.7. In other words, for any of "Settings 1" to "Settings 6", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the second special map side is higher in high probability mode than in low probability mode. It becomes 10 times. In addition, when comparing combinations with the same setting status and win/fail lottery mode, the probability of a jackpot result is the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the reservation information on the first special drawing side and when triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side. It is the same in the case of

In addition, in "Setting 1", the probability of a small winning result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is about 1/1.0582 in the low probability mode and about 1/1.0582 in the high probability mode. It is 1/1.111. In "Setting 2", the probability of a small winning result triggered by the hold information on the second special drawing side is about 1/1.0584 in low probability mode and about 1/1 in high probability mode. It is 1.113. In "Setting 3", the probability of a small winning result triggered by the reservation information on the second special drawing side is about 1/1.0586 in low probability mode and about 1/1 in high probability mode. It is 1.116. In "Setting 4", the probability of a small winning result triggered by the hold information on the second special drawing side is about 1/1.0589 in low probability mode and about 1/1 in high probability mode. It is 1.119. In "Setting 5", the probability of a small winning result triggered by the hold information on the second special drawing side is about 1/1.0591 in low probability mode and about 1/1 in high probability mode. It is 1.121. In "Setting 6", the probability of a small winning result triggered by the hold information on the second special drawing side is about 1/1.0593 in low probability mode and about 1/1 in high probability mode. It is 1.124.

In addition, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot may be configured to be set in aggregation so that it becomes a consecutive number, or it may be set in a distributed manner so that at least a part or all of it is not a serial number. It is also possible to have a configuration in which Further, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a small win may be configured to be set in aggregation so that it becomes a serial number, or it may be set in a distributed manner so that at least a part or all of it is not a serial number. A configuration may also be used.

According to the above configuration, the number of values of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to a winning result is greater than the number of values of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to a small winning result in the first win/fail table 495, 496. In a configuration with a large number of winnings, the variation in the probability of a jackpot result due to the setting value is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to a winning result. Regardless of the setting value, the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the losing result is the largest. This makes it possible to reduce the probability variation of a winning result due to the set value in order to absorb the probability variation of the jackpot result due to the set value. Therefore, when the reservation information on the first special drawing side is used as a trigger, it becomes possible for the player to focus on the jackpot results in order to guess the set value, and it becomes difficult to guess the set value. It becomes possible.

In addition, in the second win/fail tables 503 and 504, the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the small winning result is greater than the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the winning result. In this configuration, a variation in the probability of a jackpot result due to a setting value is absorbed by a variation in the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to a small winning result. No matter which setting value is used, the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the small winning result is the largest. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the probability variation of the small win result due to the set value to absorb the probability variation of the jackpot result due to the set value. Therefore, when the reservation information on the first special drawing side is used as a trigger, it becomes possible for the player to focus on the jackpot results in order to guess the set value, making it difficult for the player to guess the set value. It becomes possible.

<72nd embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the forty-ninth embodiment described above in the processing configuration when the supply of operating power is started. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the forty-ninth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the forty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 243 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

As in the first embodiment, an inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and these inner rail portions 25 and the outer rail portion 26 constitute a guide rail as a guide means. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail. Also, in the gaming area PA, as in the first embodiment, a general prize opening 31, a special prize winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, and a special figure unit. 37, a general drawing unit 38, etc. are provided, respectively.

Here, in this embodiment, a movable body 512 is provided on a center frame 511 provided so as to surround the symbol display device 41 in the variable display unit 36. The movable body 512 is connected to a movable body drive unit 513 via a link mechanism (not shown), and is driven when the movable body drive unit 513 enters a displacement state and moves from an initial position in a predetermined direction. At the same time, the movable body drive unit 513 enters the return state and moves to return to the initial position. The movement of the movable body 512 can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. In other words, the movement of the movable body 512 can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 without requiring opening operations of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14.

In detail about the movable body 512, the movable body 512 is movable between an initial position and a movement limit position, and by moving from the initial position toward the movement limit position, it is placed in front of the display surface 41a. Therefore, the range facing the display surface 41a in front of the display surface 41a becomes wider than in the initial position. Specifically, in the initial position, the entire movable body 512 is placed outside the display surface 41a and within the center frame 511, and the movable body 512 is not visible or visible when the display surface 41a is viewed from the front. It has a difficult configuration. On the other hand, at the movement limit position, the entire movable body 512 faces the display surface 41a from the front, and although the visibility of the movable body 512 is improved compared to the initial position, the visibility of the display surface 41a is reduced. Become. Note that the movable body 512 is not limited to this, and may be configured such that the movable body 512 is visible both when it is disposed at the initial position and when it is disposed at the movement limit position.

The movable body 512 is a movable decorative body whose surface that is visible to the player when placed at the movement limit position (that is, the surface facing the front of the gaming machine) is decorated with a predetermined character. (for example, a "fish"), but the specific shape is arbitrary. The movement of the movable body 512 from the initial position to the movement limit position is performed in conjunction with the performance of the game round on the display surface 41a, and returns to the initial position when the predetermined performance is completed. In this way, the movement of the movable body 512 is used to perform an integrated presentation with the image presentation on the display surface 41a.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the movable body 512 is moved from the initial position during the performance of the game round (for example, during reach), the opening/closing execution mode is The configuration has high expectations for the transition to . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to or in place of the configuration, if the winning/failure lottery results in a high probability after the opening/closing execution mode, the same effect can be used in the game replay. In a configuration where a result that does not clearly indicate a high probability, such as a combination of symbols with even numbers, is displayed while still displaying a result as if a promotion to a high probability has occurred during the opening/closing execution mode, the A configuration may also be adopted in which the movable body 512 is moved from the initial position as a performance.

Next, the electrical configuration of the main control device 60 and the sound emission control device 81 will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 244.

The main control device 60 is provided with a main control board 61 as in the forty-ninth embodiment, and the main control board 61 includes a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64 and An MPU 62 with a built-in main side RAM 65 is provided. Further, the main control board 61 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the forty-ninth embodiment. The display contents displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are the same as those in the thirty-fifth embodiment. Therefore, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, a check display is performed for an initial check period, and after that, the base value is displayed. A notification is displayed.

The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged side by side on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 as in the eleventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 53). The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are all segment displays in which seven LED display segments are arranged; however, the present invention is not limited to this; It may be a light emitting body, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are all installed so that their display surfaces face the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces, and are mounted on the opposing wall 60b of the board box 60a. covered. In this case, since the board box 60a is transparent, the display surfaces of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 housed in the board box 60a can be visually observed from outside the board box 60a. becomes possible. Furthermore, the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in such a way that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 in the board box 60a. When the main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 are exposed through the opposing wall portion 60b. It becomes possible to visually check the display screen of 204 to 204.

As shown in FIG. 244, the sound emission control device 81 includes a sound emission control board 351. A sound and light side MPU 352 is mounted on the sound and light emission control board 351 . The sound and light side MPU 352 includes a sound and light side ROM 354 and a sound and light side RAM 355 in addition to a sound and light side CPU 353 which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control section and a calculation section. In addition to the above-described elements, the audio-optical side MPU 352 includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

The audio-optical side ROM 354 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory (that is, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for reading only. The sound-light side ROM 354 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the sound-light side CPU 353.

The audio-optical RAM 355 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (that is, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The audio-optical side RAM 355 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than the audio-optical side ROM 354. The audio-optical RAM 355 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the audio-optical ROM 354.

The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is electrically connected to the input side of the audio/light side MPU 352, and the display light emitting section 53, speaker section 54, display control device 82, and movable object are connected to the output side of the audio/light side MPU 352. A driving section 513 is electrically connected. The sound/light side MPU 352 drives and controls the display light emitting section 53, the speaker section 54, and the movable body drive section 513 based on various commands received from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 82. The display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on commands received from the sound-light side MPU 352. As a result, various performances and various notifications are executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53, the speaker section 54, and the movable body 512 in the situation where the game round or the opening/closing execution mode is being executed.

Next, the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 245. Note that the processing from step SF501 to step SF529 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, a power-on initial setting process is executed (step SF501). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed after the main process is started. During this predetermined wait period, the start of operation and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

Thereafter, internal function register setting processing is executed (step SF502). In the internal function register setting process, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, is set as the first interrupt cycle. (specifically, 4 milliseconds), and set the interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, to be longer than the first interrupt cycle. The second interrupt period is also set to be a short period (specifically, 2 milliseconds).

In other words, in this embodiment, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are performed so that the interrupt period is relatively long and short. exists. Both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are started by interrupting the main process. Further, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) interrupts the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) and is not activated. In addition, if both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) and the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134) are not being executed, those cycles The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated first regardless of the order of progress. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started with priority over the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated with priority over the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134).

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is set as the main interrupt cycle. Set in a specific register of the side CPU 63. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to setting the first and second interrupt cycles, for example, setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the winning random number counter C1 is executed.

Thereafter, the start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SF503). As in the thirty-fifth embodiment, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated, the start-up processing flag is used to indicate whether the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is in progress or not. The situation is such that the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 133) should be terminated without executing the processing for advancing the game, while executing the processing for monitoring power outage, updating various counters, and monitoring fraud. This is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63.

The start-up process flag is set to "1" when the process at the start of supply of operating power (step SF501 to step SF523) is started in the main process (FIG. 245); It is cleared to "0" after (step SF501 to step SF523) ends and before the remaining processing (step SF526 to step SF529) is started. Similarly to the thirty-fifth embodiment, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the processes from step S8907 to step S8920 are not executed. Therefore, in order to proceed with the game in a situation where a setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) or a setting value update process (FIG. 247), which will be described later, is being executed among the processes at the start of supply of operating power (steps SF501 to STEP SF523). It is possible to prevent this process from being executed. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), even if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", by executing the processing from step S8901 to step S8905, the operating power Power outage monitoring is executed even when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) or setting value update process (FIG. 247), which will be described later, is being executed among the processes at the start of supply (steps SF501 to SF523). At the same time, the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and fraud detection is also performed.

In particular, by executing the power outage information storage process (step S8901) even when the start-up process flag is set to "1", the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SF501 to SF523) ), even if a power outage occurs in a situation where a setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) or a setting value update process (FIG. 247), which will be described later, is being executed, the power outage process can be executed in response. In the power outage process, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", and the checksum calculation process (FIG. 253) is executed. Since the calculated checksum is stored in the work area 221 for specific control, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality in the main RAM 65 from being identified when the supply of operating power is restarted. As a result, if a power outage occurs during the setting confirmation process (Figure 246) or the setting value update process (Figure 247), the next operating power supply will be informed that the power outage has occurred during the setting-related process. This can be specified at the start.

Incidentally, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (Figure 246) or the setting value update process (Figure 247) is being executed, neither the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) nor the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134) Interrupts are not prohibited and can be interrupted at any time. In this case, if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated by interrupting the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) or the setting value update process (FIG. 247), Information on the return address of the main process (FIG. 245) for returning after the timer interrupt process that is the target of activation is completed is saved to the stack area 222 for specific control, and the timer interrupt process is activated. The information of various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before is saved to the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt processing that has been activated ends, the processing returns to the main processing (FIG. 245) corresponding to the return address information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and The information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is returned to various registers of the main CPU 63.

After setting the start-up processing flag to "1" in step SF503, it is determined whether or not the power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SF504). . When the power outage process is executed in the power outage information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the power outage flag is set to "1". The power outage flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to determine whether or not the power outage process was appropriately performed during the previous power shutoff.

If the power outage flag is set to "1" (step SF504: YES), the checksum calculation process (FIG. 253) is executed in the same way as in the power outage process (step SF505), and the calculated checksum is It is determined whether or not it is normal (step SF506). Although the details will be described later, in the checksum calculation process (FIG. 253) in each of the power outage process and step SF505, checksums are calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. In step SF506, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control work area 221 calculated and saved in the specific control work area 221 in the power outage process executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step SF505. Then, it is determined whether these checksums match.

If the checksums match (step SF506: YES), check whether the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 (see FIG. 154) in the specific control work area 221 is within a normal range. It is determined whether or not (step SF507). The setting reference area 341 is a storage area in which information for specifying the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 by the main CPU 63 is stored, as in the forty-fifth embodiment. If numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1". If numerical information of “2” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2”. If numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3". If numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4". If numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5". If numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 6". In step SF507, it is determined whether the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 is one of "1" to "6".

If a positive determination is made in all of steps SF504, step SF506, and step SF507, it is determined whether the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SF508). . The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting value update process (FIG. 247) is being executed, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and the setting update display flag is set to "1". is set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a display indicating the setting value that is being updated. The setting update display flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the setting value update process (Fig. 247) is started and is cleared to "0" when the setting value update process (Fig. 247) is ended. , in a situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 247) is not executed, the setting update display flag is basically not set to "1". However, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 247) is being executed, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is subsequently started; In this state, the setting update display flag is set to "1". The state in which the setting update display flag is set to "1" is maintained until the setting update display flag is cleared to "0" in the setting value update process (FIG. 247).

If a negative determination is made in step SF508 because the setting update display flag is not set to "1", it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SF509). In other words, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the reset button 68c is pressed and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Here, in this embodiment, like the thirty-fifth embodiment, the main controller 60 is provided with a setting key insertion section 68a and a reset button 68c, but is not provided with an update button 68b.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SF509: NO), it is determined whether the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SF510). The game stop flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the power outage flag is not set to "1", when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. When the game stop flag is set to "1", steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and when an affirmative determination is made in step S8906, steps S8907 to S8905 are executed. Do not execute the process in S8920. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not performed properly during the previous power shutoff, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control If the checksums do not match due to a change in the storage state of information on at least one side since the last time the power was shut off, or if the set value is abnormal, power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and unauthorized While the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed. When an affirmative determination is made in step SF510, processing in step SF522 and step SF523, which will be described later, is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step SF510, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using a setting key (step SF511). When the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using a setting key (step SF511: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SF513). Furthermore, even if the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on using a setting key (step SF511: NO), the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1". is set (step SF512: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SF513).

The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) is being executed, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1". is set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting value is being checked and a display indicating the currently set setting value. be exposed. The setting confirmation display flag is a flag that is set to ``1'' when the setting confirmation process (Figure 246) is started and is cleared to ``0'' when the setting confirmation process (Figure 246) is ended. , in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) is not executed, the setting confirmation display flag is basically not set to "1". However, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) is being executed, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is subsequently started; In this state, the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1". When this setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", the RAM clearing process (FIG. 250) described later is executed, or the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246). It is maintained until the process is executed.

Not only when the reset button 68c is not pressed as described above and the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on (that is, when the "setting confirmation operation" is performed), but also when the reset button 68c is pressed. The setting confirmation process (Figure 246) is executed even when the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" in a situation where no pressing operation is performed. If the power outage process is executed in such a situation, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) is executed even if the "setting confirmation operation" is not performed when the supply of operating power is resumed. This makes it possible to continue checking the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, even if the power outage process is executed while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) is being executed, if the reset button 68c is pressed when the supply of operating power is resumed, The processing corresponding to the operation performed when the supply of operating power was restarted among the RAM clearing processing (Fig. 250) and the setting value updating processing (Fig. 247) was executed without executing the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 246). Ru. This makes it possible to prioritize execution of the RAM clearing process (FIG. 250) or the setting value update process (FIG. 247) over the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246).

Here, the setting confirmation process executed in step SF513 will be described. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process. Note that the processing from step SF601 to step SF607 in the setting confirmation processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, interrupt permission is set (step SF601). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt cycle.

In this embodiment, the interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are basically prohibited in the process at the start of supply of operating power (step SF501 to step SF523). , interrupts are permitted in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) and the setting value update process (FIG. 247). Therefore, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (Fig. 246) and the setting value update process (Fig. 247) are not executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SF501 to Step SF523), the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 134) are prohibited and the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 246) or setting value update processing (Fig. 247) is executed. ) and second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are permitted. However, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (Figure 246) or the setting value update process (Figure 247) is being executed, the startup process flag is set to "1", so the first timer interrupt process (Figure 247) is executed. 133) is started, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133), the processes for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, while the processes for proceeding with the game are executed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is ended without any process being executed.

Thereafter, on the condition that the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1", the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step SF602). By setting the setting confirmation display flag to "1" and making an affirmative determination in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is performed. (Step S9006) is executed. The contents of the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation are the same as in the forty-fifth embodiment. By executing this process, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124(b), a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked and the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. A display indicating this is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

After that, a confirmation start command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 352 (step SF603). By receiving the confirmation start command, the sound/light side CPU 353 can recognize an image indicating that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) is being executed and the operation details for terminating the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246). The display control device 82 is controlled to display an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41. This allows the game hall administrator to recognize that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked, and is necessary for ending the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246). This makes it possible for the game hall manager to recognize the operation details. In addition to or instead of the notification being executed by the symbol display device 41, the notification may be executed by at least one of the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54. Further, an external output indicating that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) is being executed may be configured to be sent to a device external to the pachinko machine 10, such as a management computer of a game hall.

Thereafter, the setting key insertion section 68a determines whether the setting key has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SF604). Specifically, similar to the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) in the forty-fifth embodiment, the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion section 68a corresponds to the ON state. It is determined whether the reception state corresponding to the OFF state has changed from the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion part 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) is started in a situation where the setting key insertion part 68a is in the OFF state, the OFF state is Even if it is maintained, a negative determination is made in step SF604. If it is not specified that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SF604: NO), the process of step SF604 is repeated.

If it is specified that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SF604: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SF605). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), resulting in a situation in which the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 (step S9006) during setting confirmation is not executed. Therefore, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. The current state is canceled.

Thereafter, interrupt prohibition is set (step SF606). As a result, when ending the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) and returning to the process (step SF501 to step SF523) at the time of starting the supply of operating power in the main process (FIG. 245), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are prohibited.

Thereafter, a return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 352 (step SF607). By receiving the return command at the time of confirmation, the sound-light side CPU 353 specifies that the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (step SF501 to step SF523) has been completed in the main CPU 63, and also restarts the current supply of operating power. It is specified that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) has been executed in the start process (step SF501 to step SF523). Then, processing corresponding to receiving the return command at the time of confirmation is executed. The details of this process will be explained later.

As described above, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 starts. In the situation where the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on in the situation where the main processing (FIG. 245) is started, the game can proceed in the main processing (FIG. 245). The setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) is executed in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, which is the situation before the process is executed. This makes it possible to check the set values even when no games are being played.

Returning to the explanation of the main processing (FIG. 245), when the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on using a setting key and the setting confirmation display flag is not set to "1" (steps SF511 and Step SF512: NO), a normal return command is sent to the sound-light side MPU 352 (step SF514). By receiving the normal return command, the sound-light side CPU 353 specifies that the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (step SF501 to step SF523) in the main side CPU 63 has ended, and also specifies that the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power this time is completed. In the process (step SF501 to step SF523), it is determined that none of the RAM clear process (FIG. 250), setting confirmation process (FIG. 246), and setting value update process (FIG. 247) is being executed. Then, processing corresponding to receiving the normal return command is executed. The details of this process will be explained later.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SF509 and step SF515: YES), Alternatively, if it is determined in step SF508 that the setting update display flag is set to "1", setting value update processing is executed (step SF516). Not only when the reset button 68c is pressed as described above and the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on (that is, when a "setting change operation" is performed), but also when the reset button 68c is pressed. The setting value is updated by executing the setting value update process (FIG. 247) even when the setting update display flag is set to "1" regardless of whether there is a pressing operation or an ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a. If the power outage process is executed while the process (Fig. 247) is being executed, the operation details for starting the subsequent operation power supply will be "no operation", "RAM clear operation", and "setting change". The setting value update process (FIG. 247) is executed regardless of whether it is a ``operation'' or a ``setting confirmation operation.'' This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 247).

Here, the setting value update process executed in step SF516 will be explained. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the setting value update process. Note that the processing from step SF701 to step SF714 in the setting value update processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, interrupt permission is set (step SF701). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt cycle.

In this embodiment, the interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are basically prohibited in the process at the start of supply of operating power (step SF501 to step SF523). , interrupts are permitted in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) and the setting value update process (FIG. 247). Therefore, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (Fig. 246) and the setting value update process (Fig. 247) are not executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SF501 to Step SF523), the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 134) are prohibited and the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 246) or setting value update processing (Fig. 247) is executed. ) and second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are permitted. However, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (Figure 246) or the setting value update process (Figure 247) is being executed, the startup process flag is set to "1", so the first timer interrupt process (Figure 247) is executed. 133) is started, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133), the processes for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, while the processes for proceeding with the game are executed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is ended without any process being executed.

Thereafter, on the condition that the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1", the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SF702). By setting the setting update display flag to "1" and making an affirmative determination in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is performed. (Step S9004) is executed. The contents of the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update are the same as in the forty-fifth embodiment. By executing this process, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124(a), a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and the pachinko machine 10 being selected as an update target are displayed. The currently set values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Thereafter, initial settings at the time of starting are performed (step SF703). In the initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". If the power outage flag is not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not performed appropriately during the previous power outage (step SF504: NO), the game stop flag is set to the specific control work area 221 and If the checksums do not match because the storage state of information in at least one of the stack areas 222 for specific control has changed since the last time the power was shut off (step SF506: NO), or the setting reference area 341 This flag is set to "1" in step SF520 of the main process (FIG. 245) when the setting value corresponding to the information stored in is not within the normal range (step SF507: NO). When the game stop flag is set to "1", steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and when an affirmative determination is made in step S8906, steps S8907 to S8905 are executed. Do not execute the process in S8920. As a result, when an information abnormality in the main RAM 65 as described above occurs, processing for monitoring power outages, updating various counters, and monitoring fraud is executed, while processing for advancing the game is executed. It will not be done. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" in the process of step SF703, the state in which the occurrence of information abnormality in the main side RAM 65 is specified is canceled when the setting value update process (FIG. 247) is executed. becomes possible.

Thereafter, "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (see FIG. 154) in the specific control work area 221 (step SF704). The setting update area 342 is a storage area in which information about setting values that are being updated in the setting value updating process (FIG. 247) is stored, as in the forty-fifth embodiment. When numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target (selection target or change target) becomes "setting 1". If numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 2". If numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 3". When numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 4". If numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is "setting 5". If numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is "setting 6".

By setting "1" in the setting update area 342 in step SF704, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 1." That is, in this embodiment, no matter what the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is, when the setting value update process (FIG. 247) is started, the setting value to be updated will be "setting 1".

Thereafter, an update start command is transmitted to the audio-optical side MPU 352 (step SF705). Upon receiving the update start command, the sound/light side CPU 353 displays an image indicating that the setting value update process (FIG. 247) is being executed, an image for making it possible to recognize the operation details for changing the setting value, And display control is performed on the display control device 82 so that an image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so that the content of the operation for ending the setting value update process (FIG. 247) can be recognized. This allows the administrator of the game hall to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and the operation details and setting value update process necessary to change the setting value (Figure 247) It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the details of the operation required to end the game. In addition to or instead of the notification being executed by the symbol display device 41, the notification may be executed by at least one of the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54. Further, an external output indicating that the setting value update process (FIG. 247) is being executed may be configured to be sent to a device external to the pachinko machine 10, such as a management computer of a game hall.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is one of "1" to "6" (step SF706). If it is not one of "1" to "6" (step SF706: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SF707). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 1."

When an affirmative determination is made in step SF706 or when the process in step SF707 is executed, the setting key insertion unit 68a determines whether or not the setting key has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SF708). Specifically, it is determined whether the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion section 68a has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. do. Therefore, the OFF state is maintained not only when the setting key insertion section 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting value update process is started in a situation where the setting key insertion section 68a is in the OFF state. In this case, a negative determination is made in step SF708.

If a negative determination is made in step SF708, the value in the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 (step SF710), provided that the reset button 68c is pressed (step SF709: YES). Thereby, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the setting value is updated to one level higher. Further, if the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SF709: NO) or if the value in the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1, the process returns to step SF706, but the settings are updated in step SF706. If it is determined that the value in the area 342 for setting is 7 or more, "1" is set in the area 342 for setting update in step SF707. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6", the state returns to "Setting 1".

If it is determined that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SF708: YES), the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is overwritten in the setting reference area 341 ( Step SF711). As a result, the setting value information updated in the current setting value update process (FIG. 247) is set in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is changed to the current setting value. This is the setting value of the pachinko machine 10.

Thereafter, interrupt prohibition is set (step SF712). As a result, when ending the setting value update process (Figure 247) and returning to the process (step SF501 to step SF523) at the time of starting the supply of operating power in the main process (Figure 245), the first timer interrupt process (Figure 247) is completed. 133) and second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are prohibited.

Thereafter, RAM clear processing is executed (step SF713). In the RAM clearing process, similarly to the RAM clearing process (step SA416) in the forty-fifth embodiment, an area in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the specific control work area 221 (i.e. Except for the setting reference area 341), the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed. As a result, the area indicating whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the win/fail lottery is performed regardless of the win/fail lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game cycle is not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general figure display section 38a is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in a closed state. situation. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display section 37a is erased and the general figure display section The pending information for 38a is deleted. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to "0". Further, the setting update area 342 provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". Also, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". Further, in the RAM clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed. Furthermore, in the RAM clearing process, initial settings are executed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step SF502 is executed. Note that for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, processing for clearing to "0" and processing for initializing are not executed.

Thereafter, a return command at the time of update is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 352 (step SF714). By receiving the return command at the time of update, the sound-light side CPU 353 specifies that the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (step SF501 to step SF523) in the main side CPU 63 has ended, and also restarts the current supply of operating power. It is specified that the setting value update process (FIG. 247) has been executed in the process at the start (step SF501 to step SF523). Then, the process corresponding to the reception of the update return command is executed. The details of this process will be explained later.

As described above, in addition to turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c, the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key. Setting value update processing (FIG. 247) is executed. Further, as already explained, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) is performed based on the fact that the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. executed. This makes it possible to use the ON operation for the setting key insertion section 68a in common as an operation for executing setting-related processing regarding setting values. Therefore, it is possible to make the details of the operation for generating the setting-related process easy to understand for the game hall manager.

In addition, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key, and when pressing the reset button 68c is not added, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) is performed. When the reset button 68c is pressed, the setting value update process (FIG. 247) is executed. Thereby, depending on whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed, it is possible to change the process to be executed among the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) and the setting value update process (FIG. 247). Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the game hall manager to understand the operation details for executing a desired process among the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) and the setting value update process (FIG. 247). In addition, by increasing the number of operations to execute the setting value update process (Figure 247) than the setting confirmation process (Figure 246), the user may specifically attempt to cause the setting value update process (Figure 247) to be performed fraudulently. It is possible to make it more difficult.

Returning to the explanation of the main processing (FIG. 245), if it is determined in step SF509 that the reset button 68c is pressed, and the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on using the setting key. If it is determined (step SF515: NO), it is determined whether the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SF517). The game stop flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the power outage flag is not set to "1", when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. When the game stop flag is set to "1", steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and when an affirmative determination is made in step S8906, steps S8907 to S8905 are executed. Do not execute the process in S8920. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not performed properly during the previous power shutdown, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control If the checksums do not match due to changes in the storage state of information for at least one of the devices since the last time the power was shut off, or if the set values are abnormal, power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and unauthorized While the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

If the game stop flag is not set to "1" (step SF517: NO), RAM clear processing is executed (step SF518). The content of the RAM clear process is the same as the content of the RAM clear process in step SF713 in the setting value update process (FIG. 247).

Thereafter, a return command upon clearing is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 352 (step SF519). By receiving the return command at the time of clearing, the sound-light side CPU 353 specifies that the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (step SF501 to step SF523) in the main side CPU 63 has ended, and also restarts the current supply of operating power. It is specified that the RAM clearing process (step SF518) was executed in a situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 247) was not executed in the start process (steps SF501 to step SF523). Then, the processing corresponding to the reception of the return command at the time of clearing is executed. The details of this process will be explained later.

In the main process (FIG. 245), if a negative determination is made in any of step SF504, step SF506, and step SF507, that is, if the power outage flag is not set to "1", if the checksums do not match, or if the setting If the value is abnormal, the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SF520). As already explained, when the game stop flag is set to "1", steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and an affirmative determination is made in step S8906. The processes from step S8907 to step S8920 are not executed. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not performed properly during the previous power shutdown, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control If the checksums do not match due to changes in the storage state of information for at least one of the devices since the last time the power was shut off, or if the set values are abnormal, power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and unauthorized While the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SF521). If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SF521: NO), an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality has occurred regarding the power outage flag, checksum, or set value at the start of supply of operating power is sent to the sound-light side MPU 352. (Step SF522). Upon receiving the abnormality command, the sound/light side CPU 353 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the time of starting the supply of operating power, and also sends the message "Please change the settings" from the speaker unit 54. Outputs the sound. Further, a character image "Please change the settings" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is once stopped, the above notification will not be sent when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the setting value update process (FIG. 247) is executed. It will start again.

Thereafter, external output processing in the event of an abnormality is executed (step SF523). In the external output process at the time of an abnormality, a process for externally outputting an abnormal signal to the management computer of the gaming hall is executed. In this case, the abnormal signal is output for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds). However, this is not limited to this, and in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1", the abnormal signal will continue to be output, and when the game stop flag is cleared to "0", the abnormal signal will be output. A configuration may also be adopted in which the signal output is stopped. Further, the abnormality signal can be outputted even when an abnormality different from the abnormality related to the power outage flag, checksum, and set value occurs. For example, an abnormal signal may also be generated when it is identified that fraud has occurred in the monitored object (detection of unauthorized radio waves or detection of unauthorized magnetism) in the fraud detection processing (step S8905) of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133). It is output externally. However, the configuration is not limited to this configuration in which the abnormal signal is also used, and a configuration in which a dedicated abnormal signal is output externally for abnormalities related to the power failure flag, checksum, or set value may also be used. It is also possible to have a configuration in which abnormality signals corresponding to each of the abnormality related to the above, the abnormality related to the checksum, and the abnormality related to the set value are outputted to the outside.

If the reset button 68c is pressed (step SF521: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using a setting key (step SF515). When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using a setting key (step SF515 and step SF521: YES), a setting value update process is executed (step SF516). The contents of the setting value update process have already been described. In other words, if operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63 while a "setting change operation" is being performed, an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65, and one of step SF504, step SF506, and step SF507 will be executed. Even if a negative determination is made in , the setting value update process (FIG. 247) is executed. This makes it possible to prioritize changes to set values. Furthermore, in the setting value update process (FIG. 247), as already explained, the game stop flag is cleared to "0" by executing the initial setting at the start in step SF703. As a result, when the setting value update process (FIG. 247) is executed, it is possible to eliminate the abnormal state in the main side RAM 65 after the setting value update is completed.

On the other hand, if the reset button 68c is pressed but the setting key insertion part 68a is not turned on (step SF521: YES, step SF515: NO), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1". ” is set (step SF517). In the process of step SF517 after the game stop flag is set to "1" in step SF520, since the game stop flag is naturally set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step SF517. In this case, an abnormality command is transmitted to the audio/light side MPU 352 in step SF522, and an abnormality signal is externally outputted in step SF523.

In other words, if an abnormality regarding the power outage flag, checksum, and set value occurs and a negative determination is made in any of step SF504, step SF506, and step SF507, the main CPU 63 Even if supply of operating power to is started, the RAM clearing process (step SF518) is not executed. Also, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1" and a "RAM clear operation" is being performed, the RAM clear process ( Step SF518) is not executed. This prevents the game stop flag from being set to "1" even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the "RAM clear operation" is being performed. It becomes possible. On the other hand, if a "setting change operation" is being performed, the setting value update process (Fig. 247) is executed regardless of whether the game stop flag is set to "1" and the setting The game stop flag is cleared to "0" in the initial setting (step SF703) at the start of the value update process (FIG. 247). As a result, in order to eliminate the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1", it becomes necessary to execute the setting value update process (FIG. 247). Therefore, when an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control, it is possible to not only perform processing to initialize the work area 221 for specific control, but also to reset the setting values. .

In addition, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1", if the "setting change operation" is not performed, that is, "no operation". In this case, or when a "RAM clear operation" or "setting confirmation operation" is performed, an affirmative determination is made in step SF510 or step SF517, and an abnormality command is transmitted in step SF522, and an abnormality command is transmitted in step SF523. Executes external output processing. As a result, if the game stop flag is set to "1", regardless of the processing results of step SF504, step SF506, and step SF507 in the subsequent main processing, as long as the setting value update processing (FIG. 247) is not executed. , Every time the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, abnormality notification in the pachinko machine 10 and external output of the abnormality to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 are performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to make the administrator of the game hall aware that the setting value should be changed.

If the process of step SF513 is executed, if the process of step SF514 is executed, if the process of step SF516 is executed, if the process of step SF519 is executed, or if the process of step SF523 is executed, the Information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 (step SF524). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. If the checking counter is set to a value of 1 or more, the process of step S9102 is executed in the normal setting process (FIG. 135) in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), so that the 35th As in the embodiment described above, the check display continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the remaining processing is performed after the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (step SF501 to step SF523) is completed in the main CPU 63. Before (step SF526 to step SF529) is started, an initial check period is started. As a result, there is no need to control the initial check period in a situation where the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (step SF501 to step SF523) is being executed. It becomes possible to reduce the processing load in a situation where SF523) is being executed.

Furthermore, while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) and the setting value update process (FIG. 247) are executed as the process (step SF501 to step SF523) at the start of the supply of operating power, the initial check period is It is started after the processing at the start of supply (step SF501 to step SF523) is completed. As a result, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the setting values are not displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to avoid any influence.

Thereafter, the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SF525). When the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started by clearing the start-up processing flag to "0", a negative determination is made in step S8906, so that not only the processing in steps S8901 to S8905 is executed. The processes from step S8907 to step S8920 are executed, and the state in which the process for advancing the game is not executed is canceled. Incidentally, in step SF525, the power outage flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps SF526 to SF529. In other words, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), but between the first timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process, There will be a remaining time. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but such irregular time is used to repeatedly execute the remaining processes of steps SF526 to SF529. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processing of steps SF526 to SF529 is non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly. In steps SF526 to SF529, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

Next, the setting manner of each area in the main side RAM 65 will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 248.

As in the fifteenth embodiment, the main RAM 65 is provided with a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control, a work area 223 for non-specific control, and a stack area 224 for non-specific control. It is being In addition, in the main side RAM 65, the address range of the work area 221 for specific control, the address range of the stack area 222 for specific control, the address range of the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area for non-specific control 224 address ranges are clearly distinguished from each other.

The address ranges of each of these areas 221 to 224 will be explained in detail. The address of the main side RAM 65 is set as 2-byte data. For convenience of explanation, 2-byte address data will be explained as 4-digit hexadecimal data. Among the 2-byte data addresses, the area of each consecutive address within the range of the start address "0000" to Y(k-1) is an unused address, and then the address Y(k-1) is an unused address. ) to "00FF" is set as a work area 221 for specific control. Furthermore, the addresses "0100" to "Y(l-1)" that follow the addresses Y(k) to "00FF" are addresses of unused areas, and the addresses Y(l) to "01FF" that follow the addresses Y(k) to "00FF" are addresses of unused areas. The area of each consecutive address within the range is set as a stack area 222 for specific control. Furthermore, the addresses "0200" to "Y(m-1)" that follow the addresses Y(l) to "01FF" are addresses of unused areas, and the addresses Y(m) to "02FF" follow them. The area of each consecutive address within the range is set as a work area 223 for non-specific control. In addition, the addresses "0300" to "Y(n-1)" that follow the addresses Y(m) to "02FF" are addresses of unused areas, and the addresses Y(n) to "03FF" follow them. The area of each consecutive address within the range is set as a stack area 224 for non-specific control.

The relationship between each area and address as described above is set in both the physical address in the main side RAM 65 and the logical address on the memory map recognized by the main side CPU 63. In addition, the address range (Y(k) to "00FF") of the work area 221 for specific control, the address range (Y(l) to "01FF") of the stack area 222 for specific control, and the address range (Y(l) to "01FF") of the work area 221 for specific control, The address range of the work area 223 (Y(m) to "02FF") and the address range of the stack area 224 for non-specific control (Y(n) to "03FF") are different from each other. Specifically, the address range of the work area 221 for specific control (Y(k) to "00FF") is the widest, followed by the address range of the work area 223 for non-specific control (Y(m) to "02FF"). ") is widest, followed by the address range of the stack area 222 for specific control (Y(l) to "01FF"), and the address range of the stack area 224 for non-specific control (Y(n) to "03FF"). ) is the narrowest. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the address ranges of the areas 221 to 224 are the same or substantially the same.

As described above, the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 223 for non-specific control are set separately, so that when the main CPU 63 executes specific control and when executing non-specific control, Therefore, different areas of the main RAM 65 are used when various calculations are executed. Thereby, when performing one of the specific control and the non-specific control, it is possible to make it difficult for the event that information in the main side RAM 65 necessary for the other control to be erased to occur. Incidentally, when writing information to each work area 221, 223 and reading information from each work area 221, 223, the main CPU 63 issues a load command.

Since the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are set separately, it is possible to Different areas of the main side RAM 65 are used when saving information stored in the register of the side CPU 63 and when storing information on a return address on the program. As a result, when one of the specific control and non-specific control is being executed, when saving the information stored in the register of the main CPU 63 and when storing the information of the return address on the program, it can be used in the other. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the information that is displayed is deleted. Incidentally, when writing information to each stack area 222, 224, the main CPU 63 performs a push command, and when reading information from each stack area 222, 224, the main CPU 63 performs a pop command. Furthermore, when reading information from each stack area 222, 224, the information that is written to the stack area 222, 224 later in the order of writing is read out first.

When the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to specific control, the main CPU 63 can write information to the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. It is possible to read information from the work area 221 and the stack area 222 for specific control. On the other hand, when the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to specific control, the main CPU 63 can read information from the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control; , information cannot be written to the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. This makes it possible to prevent information used in processing corresponding to non-specific control from being accidentally deleted in a situation where processing corresponding to specific control is being executed.

When the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, the main CPU 63 can write information to the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, and Information can be read from the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. On the other hand, when the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, although the main CPU 63 can read information from the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, Information cannot be written to the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. Thereby, in a situation where processing corresponding to non-specific control is being executed, it is possible to prevent information used in processing corresponding to specific control from being accidentally deleted.

Note that backup power will be supplied to the main side RAM 65 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, but the backup power will be supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the non-specific control. It is supplied to all of the work area 223 for use and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. As a result, the information stored in the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is stored when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off. Even afterward, the data will be retained as long as backup power is supplied.

Here, if the end address of the work area 221 for specific control, stack area 222 for specific control, work area 223 for non-specific control, and stack area 224 for non-specific control is a hexadecimal number, then the lower The two digits are "FF", and if it is a binary number, the lower 8 bits (that is, the lower 1 byte) are set to be all "1". On the other hand, the end address of the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is the upper two digits in hexadecimal. , if it is a binary number, the upper 8 bits (that is, the upper 1 byte) following the most significant bit are different, so the addresses are different as a whole. In other words, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control all have a predetermined lower range (lower 1 byte) of address data is common as predetermined data.

The main CPU 63 reads data from a predetermined area of the main RAM 65, such as RAM clear processing (FIG. 250), non-specific control clear processing (FIG. 252), and checksum calculation processing (FIG. 253). When writing data to a predetermined range of areas in the main RAM 65 (hereinafter, data reading and data writing are collectively referred to as specific processing), first set the start address as the target address, and then write the area corresponding to the target address. Execute specific processing for. Thereafter, by adding "1" to that target address, the next address is set as the target address, and specific processing is executed for the area corresponding to the target address. Then, by adding "1" to this target address, the next address is set as the target address and specific processing is executed for the area corresponding to that target address until the target address becomes the end address. continue.

The main CPU 63 is provided with an address counter 515 as shown in FIG. 244. FIG. 249(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the address counter 515. The address counter 515 is a counter for setting address data of the target address. The main CPU 63 sets the address data of the start address in the address counter 515 when starting the specific process, and adds "1" to the address counter 515 when updating the target address. Then, the main CPU 63 grasps the target address by referring to the address counter 515.

Corresponding to the fact that the address of the main RAM 65 is set as 2-byte address data, the address counter 515 has a 2-byte data capacity. That is, the address counter 515 includes an upper byte 515a consisting of one byte and a lower byte 515b consisting of one byte. When the address counter 515 is incremented by "1" to update the target address, "1" is added to the lower byte 515b.

The main CPU 63 is provided with a carry flag 516 as shown in FIG. 244. In a situation where the address data in the lower predetermined range of the target address is the predetermined data, if adding "1" to the target address makes the target address become the next address, "1" is set in the carry flag 516. " is set. Specifically, in a situation where the target address is a hexadecimal number, the lower two digits are "FF", and if it is a binary number, the lower eight bits (i.e., the lower byte 515b) are all "1". When "1" is added to the target address, if it is a hexadecimal number, a carry occurs to the two most significant digits, or if it is a binary number, it is a carry for the upper eight bits following the most significant bit. (ie, to the upper byte 515a), the carry flag 516 is set to "1".

FIGS. 249(b) to 249(e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how the carry flag 516 is set to "1" as a result of updating the target address.

First, a case will be described in which the carry flag 516 is not set to "1" when the target address is updated. As shown in FIG. 249(b), in a situation where the lower byte 515b is not all "1" (that is, when the lower byte 515b is not the maximum value), "1" is added to the lower byte 515b in order to update the target address. As a result, the address data of the lower byte 515b becomes address data incremented by "1" as shown in FIG. 249(c). In this case, the lower byte 515b does not become all zeros and a carry to the upper byte 515a does not occur, so the carry flag 516 is maintained at "0" and the address data of the upper byte 515a is maintained.

Next, a case will be described in which the carry flag 516 is set to "1" when the target address is updated. As shown in FIG. 249(d), in a situation where the lower byte 515b is all "1" (that is, a situation where the lower byte 515b has the maximum value), "1" is added to the lower byte 515b to update the target address. As a result, the lower byte 515b becomes all zeros as shown in FIG. 249(e). In this case, the carry flag 516 is set to "1", and the main CPU 63 recognizes that a carry to the upper byte 515a has occurred by confirming that the carry flag 516 is set to "1". Therefore, "1" is added to the upper byte 515a.

In other words, if "1" is added to the lower byte 515b and the lower byte 515b becomes all zeros, it becomes necessary to add "1" to the upper byte 515a. A carry flag 516 is provided in order for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not it is necessary to add . Then, if the carry flag 516 is not set to "1", "1" is not added to the upper byte 515a, and if the carry flag 516 is set to "1", the upper byte is not added to the upper byte 515a. An addition of "1" to byte 515a is performed.

In such a configuration, as described above, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are all located on the lower side of the end address. A predetermined range of address data is common to the predetermined data. Specifically, if the end address of each of the specific control work area 221, specific control stack area 222, non-specific control work area 223, and non-specific control stack area 224 is a hexadecimal number, The lower two digits are "FF", and if it is a binary number, the lower eight bits (ie, the lower byte 515b) are set to be all "1". As a result, a situation where specific processing is being executed for any of the work area 221 for specific control, stack area 222 for specific control, work area 223 for non-specific control, and stack area 224 for non-specific control In this case, if the specific process is completed for the area corresponding to the end address of areas 221 to 224 that are the targets of the specific process and the target address is updated to the next address, a carry flag is set. 516 will be set to "1". Therefore, by checking whether the carry flag 516 is set to "1", the main CPU 63 moves to the area corresponding to the end address of the areas 221 to 224 that are the targets of the specific processing. It becomes possible to specify whether or not the specific process has been executed for the specified process. Therefore, there is no need to perform address comparison processing when determining whether or not the address is the end address of each of the areas 221 to 224, making it possible to reduce the processing load.

The process of setting "1" to the carry flag 516 when a carry occurs is the process of adding a target address (FIG. 251), which is a process of updating the target address by adding "1" to the target address. It will be executed at In this case, the target address addition process (Figure 251) is set as a common subroutine in the specific control program, and the target address addition process (Figure 251) is set as a common subroutine in the specific control program. When executing a process, a common subroutine is called and executed. Further, addition processing of target addresses is also set in a program for non-specific control.

As mentioned above, if the end address of the specific control work area 221, specific control stack area 222, non-specific control work area 223, and non-specific control stack area 224 is a hexadecimal number, then the lower The two digits of ``FF'' become "FF", and if it is a binary number, the lower 8 bits (that is, the lower byte 515b) are set to be all "1", so each of these areas 221 to 224 becomes the end address. The address range is set such that the lower address data in the predetermined range becomes the predetermined data. In contrast, the number of area addresses required for each area 221 to 224 is less than 256. Therefore, in the address order, the address range before the specific control work area 221, the address range between the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, the address range between the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, and the specific control stack area 222 There are unused areas in each of the address range between the work area 223 for non-specific control and the address range between the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. ing.

Next, the RAM clearing process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 250. The RAM clear process is executed at step SF518 of the main process (FIG. 245) and at step SF713 of the setting value update process (FIG. 247). Note that the processing from step SF801 to step SF810 in the RAM clearing process is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, in the work area 221 for specific control, a clear start address, which is a start address when executing RAM clear processing, is set as a target address (step SF801). In this case, address data corresponding to the current clear start address is set in each of the upper byte 515a and lower byte 515b of the address counter 515 of the main CPU 63. That is, the upper 8 bits of the current clear start address are set to the upper byte 515a, and the lower 8 bits of the current clear start address are set to the lower byte 515b. A setting reference area 341 is set in the area corresponding to the start address of the work area 221 for specific control, and the clear start address is set to the next sequential address for the setting reference area 341. . This makes it possible to exclude the setting reference area 341 from the execution target of the RAM clearing process. In step SF801, the carry flag 516 is cleared to "0" and the work completion flag provided in the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0". Thereafter, the area corresponding to the target address in the main side RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step SF802). Then, addition processing of the target address is executed (step SF803).

FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing the process of adding target addresses. In the target address addition process, first, "1" is added to the lower byte 515b of the address counter 515 of the main CPU 63 (step SF901). In this case, when "1" is added to the lower byte 515b in a situation where the 8 bits of the lower byte 515b are all "1", the 8 bits of the lower byte 515b become all zeros. When the 8 bits of the lower byte 515b are all zero (step SF902: YES), the carry flag 516 of the main CPU 63 is set to "1" (step SF903).

If a negative determination is made in step SF902, or if the process in step SF903 is executed, it is determined in step SF904 whether or not the carry flag 516 of the main CPU 63 is set to "1". If the carry flag 516 is set to "1" (step SF904: YES), "1" is added to the upper byte 515a of the address counter 515 of the main CPU 63 (step SF905).

Returning to the explanation of the RAM clearing process (FIG. 250), after executing the target address addition process (step SF803), it is determined whether the carry flag 516 of the main CPU 63 is set to "1" (step SF804). ). If the carry flag 516 is not set to "1" (step SF804: NO), the target address clearing process (step SF802) and the target address addition process (step SF803) are executed again. If the carry flag 516 is set to "1" (step SF804: YES), it is determined whether the work completion flag provided in the main CPU 63 is set to "1" (step SF805). The work completion flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to determine whether the clearing process for the specific control work area 221 has been completed.

If the work completion flag is not set to "1" (step SF805: NO), after setting the work completion flag to "1" (step SF806), the start address of the stack area 222 for specific control, Y( l) as the target address (step SF807). In this case, address data corresponding to the current start address is set in each of the upper byte 515a and lower byte 515b of the address counter 515 of the main CPU 63. That is, the upper 8 bits of the current start address are set to the upper byte 515a, and the lower 8 bits of the current start address are set to the lower byte 515b. Note that in step SF807, the carry flag 516 is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, the processing from step SF802 to step SF804 is repeated until the carry flag 516 is set to "1" in the addition processing of the target address in step SF803. When the carry flag 516 is set to "1" and the work completion flag is set to "1" (step SF804 and step SF805: YES), initialization of the main side RAM 65 is executed (step S808). Thereafter, various registers of the main CPU 63 are cleared to "0" (step SF809), and initial settings of the various registers are executed (step SF810). In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step SF502 in the main processing (FIG. 245) is executed.

Next, a clearing process for non-specific control executed by the main CPU 63 will be explained.

In this embodiment, a separate monitoring process (step S6009) is executed in the management execution process (FIG. 94) as in the twenty-fifth embodiment. In the separate monitoring processing, monitoring processing of the work area 223 for non-specific control and monitoring processing of the stack area 224 for non-specific control are executed. The processing content of the monitoring process of the work area 223 for non-specific control is the same as step S5405 in the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, and the processing content of the monitoring process of the stack area 224 for non-specific control is the same as that of the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment. This is the same as step S5407 in . If it is determined that there is an abnormality in these monitoring processes, a clearing process for non-specific control is executed. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing clear processing for non-specific control. Note that the processing in steps SG101 to SG107 in the clearing process for non-specific control is executed using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, Y(m), which is the start address of the work area 221 for non-specific control, is set as a target address (step SG101). In this case, address data corresponding to the current start address is set in each of the upper byte 515a and lower byte 515b of the address counter 515 of the main CPU 63. That is, the upper 8 bits of the current start address are set to the upper byte 515a, and the lower 8 bits of the current start address are set to the lower byte 515b. In step SG101, the carry flag 516 is cleared to "0" and the work completion flag provided in the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, the area corresponding to the target address in the main side RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step SG102). Then, addition processing of the target address is executed (step SG103). In this case, a non-specific control subroutine stored in the main ROM 64 is called to execute addition processing of the target address. The processing contents of the addition processing of the target address are similar to the processing contents of the flowchart shown in FIG. 251. That is, "1" is added to the lower byte 515b of the address counter 515, and if the 8 bits of the lower byte 515b become all zeros after the addition, "1" is set in the carry flag 516 of the main CPU 63. Further, when the carry flag 516 is set to "1", "1" is added to the upper byte 515a of the address counter 515.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the carry flag 516 is set to "1" (step SG104). If the carry flag 516 is not set to "1" (step SG104: NO), the target address clearing process (step SG102) and the target address addition process (step SG103) are executed again. If the carry flag 516 is set to "1" (step SG104: YES), it is determined whether the work completion flag provided in the main CPU 63 is set to "1" (step SG105). The work completion flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether the clearing process for the non-specific control work area 223 has been completed.

If the work completion flag is not set to "1" (step SG105: NO), after setting the work completion flag to "1" (step SG106), Y, which is the start address of the stack area 224 for non-specific control, is set. (n) is set as the target address (step SG107). In this case, address data corresponding to the current start address is set in each of the upper byte 515a and lower byte 515b of the address counter 515 of the main CPU 63. That is, the upper 8 bits of the current start address are set to the upper byte 515a, and the lower 8 bits of the current start address are set to the lower byte 515b. Note that in step SG107, the carry flag 516 is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, the processing in steps SG102 to SG104 is repeated until the carry flag 516 is set to "1" in the addition processing of the target address in step SG103. If the carry flag 516 is set to "1" and the work completion flag is set to "1" (step SG104 and step SG105: YES), this clearing process for non-specific control ends. .

Next, the checksum calculation process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 253. The checksum calculation process is executed in the power outage process and also in step SF505 of the main process (FIG. 245). Note that the processes in steps SG201 to SG208 in the checksum calculation process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, in the work area 221 for specific control, an addition start address, which is a start address when executing a checksum calculation process, is set as a target address (step SG201). In this case, address data corresponding to the current addition start address is set in each of the upper byte 515a and lower byte 515b of the address counter 515 of the main CPU 63. That is, the upper 8 bits of the current addition start address are set to the upper byte 515a, and the lower 8 bits of the current addition start address are set to the lower byte 515b. A setting reference area 341 is set in the area corresponding to the start address of the work area 221 for specific control, and a checksum calculation process in the power outage process is set in the area at the next address with respect to the area. A total counter at the time of a power outage is set to store the checksum information calculated in the main processing. A total counter at the time of power restoration is set to store checksum information. The addition start address is set to the next sequential address for the total counter at the time of power restoration. This makes it possible to exclude the setting reference area 341, the total counter at power outage, and the total counter at power restoration from the checksum calculation targets in the checksum calculation process. In step SG201, the carry flag 516 is cleared to "0" and the work completion flag provided in the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, the data of the target address in the main side RAM 65 is read (step SG202), and the numerical information of the read data is stored in the total counter (main processing (FIG. 245)) provided in the work area 221 for specific control in the main side RAM 65. If it is a checksum calculation process, it is added to the total counter at the time of power restoration, and if it is a checksum calculation process during a power outage process, it is added to the total counter at the time of power outage) (step SG203). Then, addition processing of the target address is executed (step SG204). In this case, a common subroutine stored in the main ROM 64 for specific control is called to execute addition processing of the target address. The processing contents of the addition processing of the target address are similar to the processing contents of the flowchart shown in FIG. 251. That is, "1" is added to the lower byte 515b of the address counter 515, and if the 8 bits of the lower byte 515b become all zeros after the addition, "1" is set in the carry flag 516 of the main CPU 63. Further, when the carry flag 516 is set to "1", "1" is added to the upper byte 515a of the address counter 515.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the carry flag 516 is set to "1" (step SG205). If the carry flag 516 is not set to "1" (step SG205: NO), the processes of steps SG202 to SG204 are executed again. If the carry flag 516 is set to "1" (step SG205: YES), it is determined whether the work completion flag of the main CPU 63 is set to "1" (step SG206).

If the work completion flag is not set to "1" (step SG206: NO), after setting the work completion flag to "1" (step SG207), the start address of the stack area 222 for specific control, Y( l) is set as the target address (step SG208). In this case, address data corresponding to the current start address is set in each of the upper byte 515a and lower byte 515b of the address counter 515 of the main CPU 63. That is, the upper 8 bits of the current start address are set to the upper byte 515a, and the lower 8 bits of the current start address are set to the lower byte 515b. Note that in step SG208, the carry flag 516 is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, the processing in steps SG202 to SG205 is repeated until the carry flag 516 is set to "1" in the addition processing of the target address in step SG204. If the carry flag 516 is set to "1" and the work completion flag is set to "1" (step SG205 and step SG206: YES), the checksum calculation process ends.

Next, the effect control process executed by the sound and light side CPU 353 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 254. Note that the production control process is executed when the supply of operating power to the sound and light side CPU 353 is started.

If an update start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step SG301: YES), update time notification setting processing is executed (step SG302). As already explained, the update start command is sent to the sound and light side CPU 353 when the main side CPU 63 starts the setting value update process (FIG. 247). In the update time notification setting process, an image showing that the setting value update process (FIG. 247) is being executed, an image to make it possible to recognize the operation details for changing the setting value, and a setting value update process (FIG. 247) are displayed. The display control device 82 is controlled to display an image on the symbol display device 41 to make it possible to recognize the operation details for ending the process shown in FIG. 247). This allows the administrator of the game hall to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and the operation details and setting value update process necessary to change the setting value (Figure 247) It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the details of the operation required to end the game. In addition to or instead of the notification being executed by the symbol display device 41, the notification may be executed by at least one of the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54.

If the confirmation start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step SG303: YES), a confirmation notification setting process is executed (step SG304). As already explained, the confirmation start command is sent to the sound and light side CPU 353 when the main side CPU 63 starts the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246). In the confirmation notification setting process, an image that shows that the setting confirmation process (Figure 246) is being executed and an image that makes it possible to recognize the operation details for terminating the setting confirmation process (Figure 246) are displayed. Display control is performed on the display control device 82 so that the symbol is displayed on the symbol display device 41. This allows the game hall administrator to recognize that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked, and is necessary for ending the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246). This makes it possible for the game hall manager to recognize the operation details. In addition to or instead of the notification being executed by the symbol display device 41, the notification may be executed by at least one of the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54.

If an abnormality command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step SG305: YES), an abnormality notification setting process is executed (step SG306). As already explained, the abnormality command is transmitted to the audio and optical side CPU 353 when it is specified that an abnormality has occurred regarding the power outage flag, checksum, or set value at the start of supply of operating power. In the abnormal time notification setting process, the display light emitting section 53 emits light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the time of starting supply of operating power, and the speaker section 54 outputs a voice saying "Please change the settings." Further, the display control device 82 is controlled to display a character image "Please change settings." on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is once stopped, the above notification will not be sent when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the setting value update process (FIG. 247) is executed. It will start again.

When the processes in steps SG301 to SG306 are executed, it is determined whether any of the normal return command, clear return command, confirmation return command, and update return command is received from the main CPU 63 ( Step SG307). The normal return command does not execute any of the RAM clear processing (step SF518), setting confirmation processing (FIG. 246), and setting value update processing (FIG. 247), and the processing at the start of operating power supply (steps SF501 to It is transmitted when step SF523) is completed. The return command at the time of clearing is sent when the RAM clearing process (step SF518) is executed and the process at the time of starting supply of operating power (steps SF501 to step SF523) is completed. The return command for confirmation is sent when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) is executed and the process for starting the supply of operating power (step SF501 to step SF523) is completed. The return command at the time of update is sent when the setting value update process (FIG. 247) is executed and the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SF501 to step SF523) is completed.

If these return commands have not been received (step SG307: NO), the process returns to step SG301. The main side CPU 63 transmits one of the return commands to the sound and light side CPU 353 when the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SF501 to step SF523) is normally completed. In this case, as described above, the sound-light side CPU 353 does not execute the processing from step SG308 until it receives any of the return commands from the main side CPU 63. This prevents the sound and light side CPU 353 from starting normal performance execution control while the main side CPU 63 is executing the process for starting the supply of operating power (step SF501 to step SF523). In addition, if the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (step SF501 to step SF523) on the main side CPU 63 does not end normally, the sound and light side CPU 353 will not start controlling the execution of normal effects. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, in a situation where no return command has been received, there is a possibility that an update start command, confirmation start command, or abnormality command will be received from the main CPU 63, and if an update start command is received, the settings can be made as described above. It is necessary to make a notification corresponding to the execution of the value update process (Fig. 247), and when the confirmation start command is received, the setting confirmation process (Fig. 246) is executed as already explained. It is necessary to make a notification corresponding to the situation, and when an abnormal command is received, it is necessary to make an abnormality notification as already explained. In this case, the sound-light side CPU 353 does not execute the processing after step SG206 until it receives any of the return commands from the main side CPU 63, so that when it receives an update start command, confirmation start command, or abnormality command, it It becomes possible to suitably start the corresponding notification.

When any return command is received from the main CPU 63 (step SG307: YES), information corresponding to the standby period (specifically 2 seconds) is set in the standby counter provided in the sound-light side RAM 355 (step SG308). The information on the standby period set in the standby counter is decremented by 1 by an interrupt process that is activated periodically (specifically, every 4 milliseconds) in the sound-light side CPU 353.

Thereafter, processing corresponding to the type of return command is executed (step SG309). Specifically, as in the forty-ninth embodiment, when the normal return command is received, the current date and time information of the RTC 356 is read out, and the read date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357. As a result, the date and time information that serves as a reference when specifying the timing to perform the time-based performance is stored in the RTC memory 357.

If the return command received this time is a return command at the time of update, processing for terminating update time notification is executed. As already explained, the return command at the time of update is sent to the sound and light side CPU 353 when the setting value update process (FIG. 247) is completed by the main side CPU 63. In the update time notification termination process, the notification corresponding to the setting value update process (FIG. 247) started in step SG302 is ended.

If the return command received this time is a confirmation return command, the confirmation notification termination process is executed. As already explained, the return command at the time of confirmation is sent to the sound and light side CPU 353 when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) is completed by the main side CPU 63. In the confirmation notification termination process, the notification corresponding to the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) started in step SG304 is terminated.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the standby period has elapsed by determining whether the value of the standby counter in the sound/light side RAM 355 is "0" (step SG310). If the value of the standby counter is not "0" (step SG310: NO), the process of step SG310 is executed again. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the processing after step SG311 in the production control processing (FIG. 252) from being executed until the standby period has elapsed. Note that even in a situation where the process of step SG310 is repeatedly executed, the value of the standby counter is decremented by 1 when it is time to execute the interrupt process.

When an affirmative determination is made in step SG310, initial operation processing is executed (step SG311). In the initial operation process, a drive signal is output to the movable body drive unit 513 so that the movable body 512 placed at the initial position is moved to the movement limit position and then returned to the initial position. As a result, the movable body 512 moves from the initial position to the movement limit position, and then returns from the movement limit position to the initial position. By checking the operation of the movable body 512, the manager of the game hall can understand whether the movable body 512 operates normally.

As described above, the sound-light side CPU 353 executes the initial operation process (step SG311) when the standby period has elapsed from the timing of receiving any of the return commands from the main side CPU 63. As a result, the initial operation of the movable body 512 is performed after a standby period has elapsed after the main CPU 63 completes the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SF501 to SF523). Here, as already explained, the main CPU 63 starts the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SF501 to step SF523) is completed. .

On the other hand, as described above, the initial operation of the movable body 512 is started when the standby period has elapsed from the timing when any of the return commands is received from the main CPU 63. After the check display starts on the display devices 201 to 204, the initial operation of the movable body 512 starts. Therefore, when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 and the audio/light side CPU 353 is started, the main side CPU 63 first performs the first The check display on the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started, and after a waiting period has elapsed, the movable body 512 starts the initial operation. Therefore, when checking the operation of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of shipment from the factory or checking the daily operation of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall, first open the game machine main body 12 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 and check the operation of the game machine main body 12. After confirming whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 operate normally with the back side exposed, the gaming machine main body 12 is closed and the movable body 512 is inserted from the front side of the gaming machine main body 12. It is possible to check whether or not it is working properly.

After executing the initial operation process (step SG311), other processes are repeatedly executed (step SG312). In other processing, when a command to start a game replay is received from the main CPU 63, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53, and the speaker section 54 are used to start the game replay. If the situation is such that the game cycle performance should be performed, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are set to proceed with the game cycle performance, and the game cycle is started. If the situation is such that the performance for the game should be ended, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53, and the speaker section 54 are set to end the performance for the game. In this case, if execution of a performance that moves the movable body 512 is instructed during the performance of the game round, the movable body 512 is moved from the initial position to the movement limit position and then returned to the initial position. Configure settings. In addition, in other processing, when a command to start the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is received from the main CPU 63, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 start the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. If the situation is such that the opening/closing execution mode performance should be performed, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are used to proceed with the opening/closing execution mode performance. Settings are made, and when the situation is such that the performance for the opening/closing execution mode should be ended, settings are made for terminating the performance for the opening/closing execution mode on the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53, and the speaker section 54. In this case, if execution of a performance that moves the movable body 512 is instructed during the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, the movable body 512 is moved from the initial position to the movement limit position and then returned to the initial position. Make settings for

Next, when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 and the sound/light side CPU 353 is started, a check display is executed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the movable body 512 The manner in which the initial operation is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 255. 255(a) shows a period in which the main CPU 63 executes the process for starting the supply of operating power (step SF501 to step SF523), and FIG. 255(b) shows the process for setting confirmation in the main CPU 63 (see FIG. 246) or the setting value update process (FIG. 247) is executed, and FIG. 255(c) shows the timing when the sound-light side CPU 353 receives any of the return commands transmitted from the main side CPU 63. , FIG. 255(d) shows the execution period of the initial check period in which the check display is executed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. The period during which the period is measured is shown, and FIG. 255(f) shows the period during which the initial operation of the movable body 512 is being performed.

First, in the process at the start of supply of operating power (step SF501 to step SF523), if none of the RAM clear process (step SF518), setting confirmation process (Fig. 246), and setting value update process (Fig. 247) is executed. I will explain about it.

At timing t1, supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 and the audio/light side CPU 353 is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 255(a), the main CPU 63 starts the process for starting the supply of operating power (step SF501 to step SF523) at the timing t1. Note that display of the image is started on the symbol display device 41 at the timing of t1. When starting the supply of operating power this time, none of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation", and "setting confirmation operation" is executed. Therefore, the RAM clearing process (step SF518), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246), and the setting value update process (FIG. 247) are not executed, and the process for starting the supply of operating power (step SF501 to step SF523) are completed. In this case, at the timing t2, the check display starts on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. 255(d). Specifically, all the display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in a light emitting state. However, all the display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be displayed blinking as a check display.

Further, at timing t2, as shown in FIG. 255(c), a normal return command is transmitted from the main side CPU 63, and the normal return command is received by the sound-light side CPU 353. Upon receiving the normal return command, the sound-light side CPU 353 starts measuring the standby period at timing t2 as shown in FIG. 255(e). Then, as shown in FIG. 255(e), the waiting period elapses at timing t3 while the check display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As shown in (f), the initial operation of the movable body 512 is started.

Thereafter, at timing t4, the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is ended, as shown in FIG. 255(d). Further, at the subsequent timing t5, the initial operation in the movable body 512 is ended as shown in FIG. 255(f).

Next, a case will be described in which a setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) or a setting value update process (FIG. 247) is executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SF501 to step SF523).

At timing t6, supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 and the audio/light side CPU 353 is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 255(a), at the timing t6, the process for starting the supply of operating power (step SF501 to step SF523) is started in the main CPU 63. Note that display of the image is started on the symbol display device 41 at the timing t6. At the start of the current supply of operating power, a "setting change operation" or "setting confirmation operation" is being executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 255(b), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) or the setting value update process (FIG. 247) is executed from timing t7 to timing t8.

At timing t8, as shown in FIG. 255(b), the settings-related process that is currently being executed out of the settings confirmation process (FIG. 246) and setting value update process (FIG. 247) is completed, and as a result, the process shown in FIG. 255(a) is completed. ), the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power (step SF501 to step SF523) ends. In this case, at the timing t8, the check display starts on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. 255(d). Specifically, all the display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in a light emitting state. However, all the display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be displayed blinking as a check display.

Further, at timing t8, as shown in FIG. 255(c), a return command for confirmation or a return command for update is transmitted from the main side CPU 63, and the return command is received by the sound-light side CPU 353. Upon receiving the return command, the sound/light side CPU 353 starts measuring the standby period at timing t8 as shown in FIG. 255(e). Then, as shown in FIG. 255(e), the waiting period elapses at timing t9 while the check display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As shown in (f), the initial operation of the movable body 512 is started.

Thereafter, at timing t10, the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is ended as shown in FIG. 255(d). Further, at the subsequent timing t11, the initial operation in the movable body 512 is ended as shown in FIG. 255(f).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

When executing RAM clear processing (Fig. 250), non-specific control clear processing (Fig. 251), and checksum calculation processing (Fig. 252), the target address is sequentially updated, and the target address after being updated is A "0" clearing process or a checksum calculation process is executed for the area of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the address (hereinafter, these processes are also referred to as specific processes). This makes it possible to sequentially target a plurality of areas in the main RAM 65 for specific processing. In this case, if the updated target address becomes the reference address (specific address), the carry flag 516 of the main CPU 63 is set to "1"; In this case, the execution of the specific process is terminated. As a result, in order to determine whether execution of a specific process has been completed for all areas of the main RAM 65 that are to be executed, it is only necessary to determine whether or not the carry flag 516 is set to "1". Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for performing the identification.

In a configuration where a plurality of reference addresses exist, any of the reference addresses has the carry flag 516 set to " by updating the target address in a situation where the previous address for the reference address is set as the target address. 1" is the address to be set. As a result, regardless of which reference address is used as the reference, it is possible to specify whether execution of the specific process has been completed by specifying whether "1" is set in the carry flag 516. becomes possible.

The target address is set in the address counter 515 of the main CPU 63. Address counter 515 includes an upper byte 515a and a lower byte 515b. When updating the target address, "1" is added to the lower byte 515b, but in a situation where all "1" is set as the maximum value in the lower byte 515b, "1" is added to the lower byte 515b. '' is added, the lower byte 515b is set to all zeros, which is the minimum value, and it is necessary to add "1" to the upper byte 515a. In this case, if the lower byte 515b is changed from the maximum value to the minimum value, the carry flag 516 is set to "1", so it is determined whether the carry flag 516 is set to "1" or not. This makes it possible to specify whether it is necessary to add "1" to the upper byte 515a. By determining whether the carry flag 516 is set to "1" in the configuration, it can be determined whether the execution of the specific process has been completed for all areas of the main RAM 65 that are to be executed. It becomes possible to do so. As a result, by using the configuration for determining whether it is necessary to add "1" to the upper byte 515a, the specific process can be executed for all areas of the main RAM 65 that are to be executed. It becomes possible to specify whether or not the process has been completed.

The work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are all located at the last sequential address in the address range of the main side RAM 65. The lower byte 515b has the maximum value. As a result, by checking whether the carry flag 516 of the main CPU 63 is set to "1" for any of the areas 221 to 224, it is possible to specify whether or not the execution of the specific process has been completed. becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not execution of specific processing has been completed.

In a configuration in which RAM clear processing (Fig. 250), non-specific control clear processing (Fig. 251), and checksum calculation processing (Fig. 252) are set as specific processing, which of these specific processing is executed? Even in such a situation, it is possible to specify the trigger for ending the specific process by specifying whether "1" is set in the carry flag 516 of the main CPU 63. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying the trigger for ending the specific processing.

Since the movable body 512 performs an initial operation when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to confirm whether or not the movable body 512 operates normally when the supply of operating power is started. In this case, by delaying the start timing of the initial operation in the movable body 512, there is no need to confirm the initial operation immediately after the supply of operating power is started, and the initial operation can be confirmed with plenty of time. It becomes possible to do this.

When the supply of operating power is started, a check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, so when the supply of operating power is started, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. It becomes possible to confirm whether or not 204 operates normally. In addition, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are made visible by exposing the back side of the pachinko machine 10, whereas the movable body 512 is made visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. In order to check the check displays of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the initial operation of the movable body 512, it is necessary to visually check the back side and the front side of the pachinko machine 10, respectively. In this case, the start timing of the initial operation of the movable body 512 is delayed. As a result, after exposing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and checking the check displays on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the game machine main body 12 is closed and the initial operation of the movable body 512 is checked. This makes it possible to suitably confirm each initial operation.

By measuring the waiting period, the initial operation of the movable body 512 is delayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for delaying the initial operation of the movable body 512.

The waiting period is measured based on the timing at which the return command transmitted from the main CPU 63 is received. This makes it possible to delay the initial operation of the movable body 512 based on the progress of control in the main CPU 63. Furthermore, the main CPU 63 transmits a return command when the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SF501 to SF523) is completed. This makes it possible to delay the initial operation of the movable body 512 based on the timing at which the processing at the start of supply of operating power in the main CPU 63 (step SF501 to step SF523) is completed.

Since the main side CPU 63 transmits different types of return commands depending on the execution content of the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (step SF501 to step SF523), the sound-light side CPU 353 transmits the return command when the main side CPU 63 starts supplying the operating power It becomes possible to execute control according to the execution content of the processing (step SF501 to step SF523). In this case, no matter which type of return command is sent, a standby period is set to delay the initial operation of the movable body 512, so the processing at the start of supply of operating power in the main CPU 63 It becomes possible to delay the initial operation of the movable body 512 regardless of the execution content of (steps SF501 to step SF523).

The movable body 512 performs an initial operation after the sound-light side CPU 353 receives the return command transmitted when the main side CPU 63 executes the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SF501 to step SF523). This makes it possible for the movable body 512 to perform an initial operation after the main CPU 63 executes the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SF501 to SF523). Furthermore, the main CPU 63 transmits a return command when the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SF501 to SF523) is completed. This makes it possible to cause the movable body 512 to perform an initial operation based on the timing at which the processing at the start of supply of operating power in the main CPU 63 (step SF501 to step SF523) is completed.

Note that the update of the target address is not limited to the configuration in which updating is performed in an additive manner, but may be performed in a subtractive manner. In this case, when the target address is updated, the value of the lower byte 515b of the address counter 515 is subtracted by "1". When the value of the lower byte 515b is subtracted by "1" in a situation where the 8 bits of the lower byte 515b are all zero (that is, a situation where the numerical information of the lower byte 515b is the minimum value), the carry flag of the main CPU 63 is 516 is set to "1" and the value of the upper byte 515a is subtracted by "1". In this configuration, the lower byte at the last sequential address in each address range of the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. By configuring 515b to be all zero, by specifying whether or not "1" is set in the carry flag 516, all areas of the main RAM 65 that are the target of execution are the target of the specific process. It becomes possible to specify whether or not the

Further, when updating the target address, the update value added or subtracted from the lower byte 515b is not limited to "1", but may be "2", or may be "3". It may be "4".

Also, instead of the configuration in which "1" is set to the carry flag 516 when the numerical information of the lower byte 515b is changed from one of the minimum value and the maximum value to the other, The carry flag 516 may be set to "1" when the value of a predetermined bit on the side is changed. In this configuration, the last sequential address in each address range of the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is This is an address whose numerical value of the predetermined bit is changed when the last sequential address is updated to the next sequential address. Thereby, by determining whether "1" is set in the carry flag 516, it is determined whether all areas of the main RAM 65 targeted for execution are targeted for execution of the specific process. becomes possible.

Further, the address of the main RAM 65 is not limited to 2 bytes, but may be 1 byte, 3 bytes, or 4 or more bytes. In the case of 3 bytes, the carry flag 516 may be set to "1" when a carry occurs from the lower 2 bytes to the upper 1 byte. In this configuration, the last sequential address in each address range of the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is This is an address that causes a carry from the lower 2 bytes to the upper 1 byte when the last sequential address is updated to the next sequential address. Thereby, by determining whether "1" is set in the carry flag 516, it is determined whether all areas of the main RAM 65 targeted for execution are targeted for execution of the specific process. becomes possible.

Further, in the case of one byte, the carry flag 516 is set to "1" when the numerical value of a predetermined bit higher than the least significant bit of the one byte is changed. In this configuration, the last sequential address in each address range of the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is This is an address whose numerical value of the predetermined bit is changed when the last sequential address is updated to the next sequential address. Thereby, by determining whether "1" is set in the carry flag 516, it is determined whether all areas of the main RAM 65 targeted for execution are targeted for execution of the specific process. becomes possible.

Furthermore, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the specific processing is executed in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, and the specific processing for the work area 221 for specific control and the specific processing for specific control are A configuration may be adopted in which the specific processing for the stack area 222 is performed individually. Even in this case, by determining whether the carry flag 516 is set to "1" in each specific process, it is possible to determine whether the execution of the specific process has been completed. Become.

Furthermore, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the specific processing is executed in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, and the specific processing for the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed simultaneously. A configuration may be adopted in which the specific processing for the stack area 224 for non-specific control is performed separately. Even in this case, by determining whether the carry flag 516 is set to "1" in each specific process, it is possible to determine whether the execution of the specific process has been completed. Become.

Further, the configuration is not limited to a configuration in which a blank area is set at the address between the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control in the main side RAM 65, and the work area 221 for specific control It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the address and the stack area 222 for specific control are set to be consecutive addresses. In this case, "1" is set in the carry flag 516 when the last sequential address in the rear area of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is updated to the next sequential address. By setting the address to be 1, it is possible to determine whether the carry flag 516 is set to "1" when specific processing is executed for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 at the same time. By specifying whether the execution of the specific process has been completed or not, it becomes possible to specify whether or not the execution of the specific process has been completed.

Furthermore, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which a blank area is set at the address between the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control in the main side RAM 65; A configuration may be adopted in which the work area 223 and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are set at consecutive addresses. In this case, the last sequential address in the rear area of the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is set to "1" in the carry flag 516 when updating to the next sequential address. By setting the address to be set, "1" is set in the carry flag 516 when specific processing is executed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control at the same time. By specifying whether or not the specific process has been executed, it becomes possible to specify whether or not the execution of the specific process has been completed.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of addresses assigned to the work area 221 for specific control is 257 or more. In this case, not only the last sequential address in the specific control work area 221 but also the intermediate sequential addresses are addresses in which the lower 8 bits are all set to "1". In this configuration, the number of times "1" is set in the carry flag 516 is counted, and the number of times the measurement is made is the number of addresses in which the lower 8 bits are all "1" in the work area 221 for specific control. The configuration is such that when a certain end reference number is reached, it is determined that the execution of the specific process for the specific control work area 221 has been completed. This makes it possible to use the carry flag 516 to specify the trigger for ending the specific process.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the main CPU 63 executes the addition process (FIG. 251) of the target address using a program, a configuration may be adopted in which the target address is updated by a dedicated circuit. In this case, when the target address is updated by the dedicated circuit, if the lower byte 515b is changed from one of the minimum value and the maximum value to the other, the carry flag 516 is set to "1" and the upper byte 515a is updated. Thereby, by determining whether the carry flag 516 is set to "1", it is possible to determine whether execution of the specific process has been completed.

In addition, the last sequential address in the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is such that the lower 8 bits are the maximum. The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which the value is set to a value, but a configuration in which the lower 8 bits are set to a minimum value may be used. In this case, when the last address is updated from the previous address to the last address, the carry flag 516 will be set to "1", so the carry flag 516 will be set to "1". 1" is set, the specific process is executed for the area of the target address at that time, and then the specific process is terminated.

In addition, a configuration in which special processing is executed when the carry flag 516 is set to "1" is used for purposes other than determining whether or not specific processing has been executed for all areas of the target address. You may use it.

For example, in a configuration including a random number counter consisting of multiple bytes, when the numerical information of the lower byte is changed from one of the minimum value and the maximum value to the other, the carry flag 516 is set to "1", and the carry flag 516 is set to "1". The configuration is such that the numerical information of the upper byte is updated when the carry flag 516 is set to "1", and when the carry flag 516 is set to "1", a random number counter other than the above random number counter is updated. The configuration may be started. In this case, when updating multiple random number counters at the same time, it becomes possible to shift the update start timing of the random number counters at a fixed interval, and to identify the trigger for shifting at the fixed interval, simply check the carry flag 516. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load.

For example, in a configuration equipped with a timer counter consisting of multiple bytes, when the numerical information of the lower byte is changed from one of the minimum value and maximum value to the other, the carry flag 516 is set to "1" and the carry flag 516 is set to "1". When "1" is set, the numerical information of the upper byte is updated, and when "1" is set in the carry flag 516, the period is measured by a timer counter different from the above-mentioned timer counter. It is also possible to configure the system to start. In this case, when measuring multiple periods using multiple timer counters, it is possible to shift the measurement start timing of each period at a fixed interval, and when specifying the trigger for shifting at the fixed interval, it is possible to Since it is only necessary to check the flag 516, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the start timing of the initial operation of the movable body 512 is delayed, so that the movable body 512 can move after the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 has started. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the initial movement in the movable body 512 is started, and the initial movement in the movable body 512 can be started by delaying the start timing of the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. A configuration may be adopted in which the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started after the start.

In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the start timing of the initial operation of the movable body 512 is delayed, so that the movable body 512 can move after the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 has started. In the configuration in which the initial movement of the movable body 512 is started, the initial movement of the movable body 512 may be started after the timing when the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 ends.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the start timing of the initial operation of the movable body 512 is not delayed. In other words, when the main CPU 63 executes the process for starting the supply of operating power (step SF501 to step SF523) and sends a return command, the initial operation of the movable body 512 starts at the timing when the return command is received. It is also possible to have a configuration in which In this case, although the start timing of the initial operation of the movable body 512 is not delayed, the initial operation of the movable body 512 is started at the timing when the main side CPU 63 completes the process for starting the supply of operating power (step SF501 to step SF523). It becomes possible to do so. In this configuration, it is determined whether the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) or the setting value update process (FIG. 247) is executed in the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 (step SF501 to step SF523). Accordingly, the timing at which the initial operation of the movable body 512 is started differs. In other words, if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) and the setting value update process (FIG. 247) are not executed, the initial operation of the movable body 512 will start immediately when the supply of operating power is started. When the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246) or the setting value update process (FIG. 247) is executed, the initial operation of the movable body 512 starts at a timing delayed from the timing when the supply of operating power is started. be done.

In addition, when the start timing of the initial operation is delayed when the supply of operating power is started, or when the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (step SF501 to step SF523) is completed in the main CPU 63, the initial operation The target to be executed is not limited to the movable body 512, but is arbitrary. For example, in addition to or in place of the movable body 512, any one of the display light emitting section 53, the speaker section 54, and the symbol display device 41 may be used. In addition, when all the control targets controlled by the sound and light side CPU 353 start the supply of operating power, the start timing of the initial operation is delayed, or the main side CPU 63 processes the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power ( The configuration may be such that the initial operation is executed when steps SF501 to SF523) are completed.

<73rd embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing contents of the effect control processing executed by the sound and light side CPU 253 are different from the above-mentioned 72nd embodiment. The different configurations from the seventy-second embodiment described above will be explained below. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the seventy-second embodiment described above will be basically omitted.

FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the production control process in this embodiment.

In steps SG401 to SG406, the same processes as steps SG301 to SG306 of the production control process (FIG. 254) in the 72nd embodiment are executed. When the processes in steps SG401 to SG406 are executed, it is determined whether any of the normal return command, clear return command, confirmation return command, and update return command is received from the main CPU 63 ( Step SG407). If these return commands have not been received (step SG407: NO), the process returns to step SG401.

If any return command is received from the main CPU 63 (step SG407: YES), processing corresponding to the type of return command is executed (step SG408). The contents of this process are the same as the process of step SG309 of the production control process (FIG. 254) in the 72nd embodiment.

Thereafter, on the condition that the return command received this time is a return command different from the normal return command, that is, a return command for clearing, a return command for confirmation, or a return command for updating (step SG409: NO). , information corresponding to a standby period (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in a standby counter provided in the audio/light side RAM 355 (step SG410). The information on the standby period set in the standby counter is decremented by 1 by an interrupt process that is activated periodically (specifically, every 4 milliseconds) in the sound-light side CPU 353.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the standby period has elapsed by determining whether the value of the standby counter in the sound/light side RAM 355 is "0" (step SG411). If the value of the standby counter is not "0" (step SG411: NO), the process of step SG411 is executed again. As a result, if any one of the return command for clearing, return command for confirmation, and return command for update is received from the main CPU 63, step SG412 in the production control process (FIG. 256) will be executed until the standby period has elapsed. It is possible to prevent subsequent processing from being executed. Note that even in a situation where the process of step SG411 is repeatedly executed, the value of the standby counter is decremented by 1 when it is time to execute the interrupt process.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SG409 or if an affirmative determination is made in step SG411, initial operation processing is executed (step SG412). In the initial operation process, a drive signal is output to the movable body drive unit 513 so that the movable body 512 placed at the initial position is moved to the movement limit position and then returned to the initial position. As a result, the movable body 512 moves from the initial position to the movement limit position, and then returns from the movement limit position to the initial position. By checking the operation of the movable body 512, the manager of the game hall can understand whether or not the movable body 512 operates normally.

After that, other processing is executed (step SG413). The processing contents of other processes are the same as the process of step SG312 of the production control process (FIG. 254) in the 72nd embodiment.

According to the above configuration, in the processing at the start of supply of operating power in the main CPU 63 (step SF501 to step SF523), RAM clear processing (step SF518), setting confirmation processing (FIG. 246), and setting value update processing (FIG. 247) are performed. When any of the above is executed, the initial operation of the movable body 512 is performed after the standby period is measured in the sound-light side CPU 353, and the processing at the start of supply of operating power in the main side CPU 63 (step SF501 to step SF523) is performed. ), if none of the RAM clearing process (step SF518), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 246), and the setting value update process (FIG. 247) are executed, a standby period is measured by the sound-light side CPU 353. The initial operation of the movable body 512 is performed without any trouble. When the game hall starts business, the main power supply for supplying operating power to each pachinko machine 10 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state while the power of the Pachinko machines 10 is turned ON. There is. When such a power ON operation is performed, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started without opening the gaming machine main body 12. In such a situation, RAM clearing processing (step SF518), setting confirmation processing (FIG. 246), and setting value updating processing ( Since none of the steps in FIG. 247) are executed, the initial operation of the movable body 512 is started without measuring the standby period. This makes it possible to immediately confirm the initial operation of the movable body 512.

On the other hand, when any one of the "RAM clear operation", "setting confirmation operation", and "setting change operation" is performed, it is performed with the gaming machine main body 12 opened. In such a situation, RAM clearing processing (step SF518), setting confirmation processing (FIG. 246), and setting value updating processing ( 247) is executed, the initial operation of the movable body 512 is started after the waiting period is measured. This makes it possible to start the initial operation of the movable body 512 after the gaming machine main body 12 is closed.

Note that the configuration is not limited to a configuration in which a waiting period is measured in order to delay the start timing of the initial operation of the movable body 512, and an opening/closing detection sensor is used to detect when the gaming machine main body 12 changes from an open state to a closed state. A configuration may be adopted in which the initial operation of the movable body 512 is started on the condition that the detection is detected, thereby delaying the start timing of the initial operation of the movable body 512. In this case, the initial operation of the movable body 512 can be started after the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state.

In addition, in this configuration, if the supply of operating power is started while the game machine main body 12 is in a closed state, the initial operation of the movable body 512 will not be performed, but this is not limited to this. If the supply of operating power is started in a situation where the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state, the main CPU 63 completes the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps SF501 to SF523) and issues a return command. A configuration may be adopted in which the initial operation of the movable body 512 is started when the is transmitted.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, even if the game machine main body 12 changes from the open state to the closed state, if a return command is not received from the main CPU 63 at that time, the initial operation of the movable body 512 will not be started. , a configuration may be adopted in which the initial operation of the movable body 512 is started after receiving the return command. That is, when the return command is received from the main CPU 6363 and the gaming machine main body 12 changes from the open state to the closed state, the initial operation of the movable body 512 is started.

Further, in the configuration of the above embodiment, the initial operation of the movable body 512 may not be performed when a normal return command is received. This makes it possible to prevent the initial operation of the movable body 512 from being performed when the game hall starts operating.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the embodiments described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the following changes may be made. Incidentally, the configurations of the following alternative forms may be applied individually to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

(1) In the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit game is calculated as a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode, but in addition to or instead of this, In addition, it may be configured to calculate the result of dividing the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode by the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA. In addition to or in place of this, there is also a configuration that calculates the result of dividing the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurs by the total number of balls entering the first operating port 33 and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34. You can also use it as Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to seventy-third embodiments described above.

(2) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the parameters indicating the frequency of occurrence of the high-frequency support mode are the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode per unit game and the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode. In addition to or instead of this, the configuration may be configured to calculate the result of dividing the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode by the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA. good. In addition to or in place of this, the result is calculated by dividing the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode by the total number of balls entering the first operating port 33 and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34. It may also be a configuration. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to seventy-third embodiments described above.

(3) A configuration may be adopted in which not only the jackpot result but also the small win result exists as the game result that triggers the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode. If the result is a small win, the open/close execution mode occurs, but the win/fail lottery mode and support mode are not changed before and after the open/close execution mode. Furthermore, the opening/closing execution mode that results in a small win may be configured to become a low-frequency winning mode. In this case, when a jackpot result occurs, history information corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is stored in the history memory 117, and when a small win result occurs, history information corresponding to the occurrence of the small win result is stored in the history memory 117. The configuration may be such that the information is stored in the memory 117 for use. Further, in this configuration, a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of a jackpot result and a parameter indicating a frequency of occurrence of a small win result may be calculated by using history information stored in the history memory 117. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to seventy-third embodiments described above.

Further, the probability of winning a small winning result may be configured to change depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, or may be configured not to change. In the case of a configuration in which the probability of winning a small winning result changes depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, it may be configured such that the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability of winning the small winning result, and the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of winning the small winning result. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of such occurrence is low.

In addition, in a configuration in which there is a small hit result, reservation information is obtained when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 and retention information is obtained when a game ball enters the second operating port 34. The distribution ratio of the type of jackpot result in the case of a jackpot result is different depending on the pending information, and when aiming to enter the first operation port 33, the variable display unit 36 in the gaming area PA The firing operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the area on the left side, and when aiming the ball to enter the second operating port 34, the game ball flows down the area on the right side of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. The configuration may be such that the firing operation is performed as shown in FIG.

In this configuration, the following 51st parameter may exist as a management result of the game history. Note that the normal period is the sum of the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a small hit result based on the ball entering the first operating port 33 and the execution period of the low frequency support mode instead of the opening/closing execution mode. do. In addition, the number of balls entering the out port 24a during the normal period is the number of balls entering K51, the number of balls entering the general winning hole 31 during the normal period is the number K52 of entering balls, and the number of balls entering the special electric winning device 32 during the normal period. The number of balls entering the first operating port 33 during the normal period is K54, and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 during the normal period is the number K55 of entering balls.
-51st parameter: Total number of game balls paid out during the regular period (K52 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning slot 31" + K53 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" + K54 x "1st Ratio of the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA during the normal period (K51+K52+K53+K54+K55) In the configuration in which the 51st parameter is calculated, if the probability of winning a small win varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the normal value of the 51st parameter may vary depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. becomes. Therefore, it is preferable that the history information used to calculate the 51st parameter be deleted when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. On the other hand, if the winning probability of the small winning result does not vary depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the normal value of the 51st parameter does not vary depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is preferable that the history information used to calculate the 51st parameter is not deleted even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed.

(4) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the history memory 117 regardless of which type of jackpot result occurs. Therefore, history information corresponding to the type of jackpot result may be stored in the history memory 117. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence is calculated for each type of jackpot result. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to seventy-third embodiments described above.

(5) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, various parameters (the first to the eighth parameters, the eleventh to the eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, and the forty-first to forty-second parameters) Although the configuration is such that the parameters) are calculated, the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA reaches the calculation trigger number (for example, 10,000 balls), various parameters are calculated. The configuration may be such that various parameters are calculated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and the number of execution times of the game is the number of calculation triggers (for example, 1000 times). A configuration may also be adopted in which various parameters are calculated depending on the case. In this case, the history memory 117 may be cleared to "0" at the timing when various parameters are calculated. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to seventy-third embodiments described above.

(6) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, each time it is time to calculate various parameters, the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, and the Although the configuration is such that all of the 41st and 42nd parameters are calculated, the configuration is not limited to this, and only some of the various parameters mentioned above are subject to calculation at one calculation timing, and each time the calculation timing comes A configuration may also be adopted in which the parameter groups to be calculated are sequentially changed. For example, at one calculation timing, the 1st to 8th parameters are calculated, at the next calculation timing, the 11th to 18th parameters are calculated, at the next calculation timing, the 21st to 26th parameters are calculated, and then A configuration may be adopted in which the 31st parameter and the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated at the timing, and thereafter, the change of the calculation target in the above order is repeated every time the calculation timing comes. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating parameters when one calculation timing is reached. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to seventy-third embodiments described above.

(7) In the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, calculations of various parameters using history information in the history memory 117 may be executed on the condition that a game is being played. For example, the configuration may be such that calculations of various parameters are executed on the condition that game balls are supplied to the game area PA. This makes it possible to prevent calculations of various parameters from being needlessly repeated even though no game is being played. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to seventy-third embodiments described above.

(8) In the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the management IC 66 is provided separately from the main CPU 63, and the function of the management IC 66 is performed by the main CPU 63. It may also be a configuration. In this case, the correspondence information will be stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a history memory 117, a calculation result memory 131, and a separate storage memory 171 are provided separately from the main RAM 65. A configuration may be adopted in which the function of the storage memory 171 is fulfilled. In a configuration where the main side RAM 65 functions as the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171, when the main side RAM 65 clearing process (step S105, step S117) is executed, the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 are It may be configured such that part or all of the areas corresponding to each of the memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 are cleared to "0." The area corresponding to each of the memory 171 may be excluded from the target of "0" clearing, and may be configured to be cleared to "0" when the corresponding clearing conditions in each of the above embodiments are satisfied. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure the main RAM 65 to have different manual operations for executing clear processing in areas corresponding to the history memory 117, calculation result memory 131, and separate storage memory 171 and other areas. good. Alternatively, the function of the management IC 66 may be performed by the sound emission control device 81.

(9) In the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, when a new setting is made to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the history information in the history memory 117 is stored and retained without being deleted; A configuration may also be adopted in which various parameters stored in the result memory 131 are deleted. This makes it possible to prevent notification of various parameters calculated before a new setting is made after a new setting is made. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to seventy-third embodiments described above.

(10) In the third to fifth embodiments described above, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed (that is, even if the setting value update process is executed by the main CPU 63), the corresponding If the setting value is not changed before and after the setting, the clearing process of the history memory 117 may not be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being deleted even though the setting value has not been changed.

In this configuration, the area for storing setting values in the main side RAM 65 is configured so that it is not cleared to "0" even if the entire clearing process (step S117) is executed, so that the setting value update process ( It becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the set value has been changed before and after step S118). In this case, if the main CPU 63 identifies that the setting value has not been changed, a signal is output to the management CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is not executed in the management CPU 112, and the main CPU 63 If it is determined that a setting value has been changed, a signal may be output to the management CPU 112 so that the management CPU 112 executes a setting update recognition process.

Further, when a signal indicating that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been made is received from the main side CPU 63, the management side CPU 112 can refer to the history information stored in the history memory 117. It may be configured to specify whether or not the setting value has been changed. In this case, if the management CPU 112 identifies that the setting value has not been changed, the history memory 117 is not cleared, and the management CPU 112 identifies that the setting value has been changed. In this case, the history memory 117 can be cleared.

(11) In the third to fifth embodiments described above, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed (that is, even if the setting value update process is executed by the main CPU 63), the corresponding If the set value is not changed before and after the setting, the configuration may be such that calculation processing of various parameters is not executed based on the new setting of the setting state. This makes it possible to prevent various parameters from being calculated based on a new setting of the setting state even though the setting value has not been changed.

In this configuration, the area for storing setting values in the main side RAM 65 is configured so that it is not cleared to "0" even if the entire clearing process (step S117) is executed, so that the setting value update process ( It becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to specify whether the set value has been changed before or after step S118). In this case, if the main CPU 63 identifies that the setting value has not been changed, a signal is output to the management CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is not executed in the management CPU 112, and the main CPU 63 If it is determined that a setting value has been changed, a signal may be output to the management CPU 112 so that the management CPU 112 executes a setting update recognition process.

Further, when a signal indicating that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been made is received from the main side CPU 63, the management side CPU 112 can refer to the history information stored in the history memory 117. It may be configured to specify whether or not the setting value has been changed. In this case, if the management CPU 112 determines that the setting values have not been changed, calculations of various parameters triggered by new settings in the current setting state are not executed, and the management CPU 112 When it is determined that a value has been changed, calculations of various parameters can be executed using the new setting of the current setting state as an opportunity.

(12) In the third to fifth embodiments, when a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, various parameters are calculated in various calculation processes (step S1807) at that point. The various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 at that time are stored in the area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171, and the calculation The information stored in the result memory 131 may be cleared to "0". In this case, since there is no need to calculate various parameters under the situation where a new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is made, it is possible to quickly complete the storage of various parameters in the separate storage memory 171. Become.

(13) In the third to fifth embodiments, the contents of various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 are changed by performing a predetermined display start operation. It may be configured to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c or other display devices. The predetermined display start operation may be performed by operating a dedicated operation section, or may be performed by performing a predetermined dedicated operation on an operation section for performing other operations. This makes it possible to easily check various parameters stored in the separate storage memory 171.

(14) The out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are all configured to store history information (or ball entry history), but this The structure is not limited to, and only a part of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are subject to storage of history information. You can also use it as For example, a configuration may be adopted in which only the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the second operating opening 34 are subject to storing history information, or a configuration in which only the general winning opening 31 is subject to storing historical information may be adopted. It's good. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball during a predetermined period with respect to the ball entry part for which the history information is stored.

(15) A signal path for transmitting information corresponding to the ball entry result of the game ball in correspondence with each of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, and the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. 118a to 118c have been set, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to the ball entry results for the same type of ball entry part may be used if there are multiple ball entry parts of the same type. Even if the configuration includes a plurality of ball entry detection sensors, the configuration may be such that the information is transmitted as one type of information. This makes it possible to suppress the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66.

(16) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each buffer 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Although the configuration is such that the information is transmitted to the IC 66, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence relationship information may be stored in advance in the management IC 66. In this case, there is no need to execute a process for making the management IC 66 recognize the correspondence relationship information, so it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63.

(17) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each buffer 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Although the configuration is such that the transmission to the main CPU 63 is performed at the start of supply of operating power to the main CPU 63, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be able to communicate bidirectionally, The configuration may be such that when a signal requesting transmission of the correspondence information is received from the IC 66, the main CPU 63 transmits the correspondence information to the management IC 66. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a nonvolatile memory and is configured to be used for both reading and writing, and the correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped is transferred to the main CPU 63. The configuration is such that even if the supply of operating power is stopped, the information is stored and retained in the correspondence memory 116. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency at which correspondence information is transmitted.

(18) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each buffer 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Although the configuration is such that transmission is performed using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information on the detection results of the respective ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence relationship A configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting information from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is provided. This allows the management IC 66 to know which type of information it is receiving from the main CPU 63 based on the type of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

(19) In the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, information is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66, but information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main side CPU 63, but the configuration is not limited to this. Instead, the configuration may be such that information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 based on history information are transmitted to the main CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute notification control of the notification means so that notifications corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters are performed, and the main CPU 63 By sending commands corresponding to the contents of the parameters to the audio light emission control device 81, notifications corresponding to the contents of various parameters are executed using the symbol display device 41, the display light emission section 53, and the speaker section 54. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

(20) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 is activated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117. Various parameters may be calculated, and the contents of the calculated various parameters may be notified using the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53, the speaker section 54, etc. In this case, when the gaming hall starts business, it is possible to confirm whether or not the entry state of game balls in the gaming area PA on the previous business day was normal. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to seventy-third embodiments described above.

(21) If the various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 in the first to fourteenth embodiments are abnormal results, the pachinko machine 1 It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the game cannot be started at . As a configuration for preventing the game from starting, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the firing of game balls is prohibited, a configuration in which each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a is disabled, and a configuration in which the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the win/fail determination process may not be executed. Further, the prohibition release operation may be an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again while the reset button 68c is pressed, and can be operated when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. It is also possible to operate the operating means. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being played in a situation where the game ball enters the game area PA in an abnormal manner. Further, it is possible to prevent the game from being played in a situation where the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is abnormal. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to seventy-third embodiments described above.

(22) Although the history information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117 in the first to fourteenth embodiments, the calculation of various parameters using the history information is A configuration may be adopted in which neither the main side CPU 63 nor the management side CPU 112 executes. In this case, the history information may be read by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and various parameter calculations may be performed using the read history information by the reading worker. Often, an external device may perform calculations of various parameters using the read history information. In this case, it becomes possible to reduce the processing load on the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to seventy-third embodiments described above.

(23) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the management IC 66 is provided with a separate power source from the main CPU 63, and even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 The configuration may be such that it is possible to calculate various parameters using history information and to output information on history information or various parameters. Thereby, even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, it becomes possible to read history information and various parameters with an external device.

(24) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the reading terminal 68d used to read the program from the main ROM 64 is also used as a terminal used to read history information or various parameters with an external device. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the terminal used for reading historical information or various parameters with an external device is the reading terminal 68d for reading the program from the main ROM 64. It may also be configured separately. In this case, the terminal used to read the history information or various parameters may be provided in the MPU 62, or may be provided in a location other than the MPU 62 on the main control board 61.

(25) In the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, the correspondence memory 116, the history memory 117, and the calculation result memory 131 are not limited to the configuration in which they are provided as nonvolatile storage means such as flash memory. For example, one of these memories 116, 117, and 131 is provided as a volatile storage means that requires power supply to store and retain information, and by supplying backup power to that memory, the main side The information may be stored and retained even if the supply of operating power to the CPU 63 is stopped. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated backup power device is provided for the memory, or a configuration in which backup power is supplied to the memory from the power supply/launch control device 78 that supplies backup power to the main side RAM 65. Good too.

(26) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the management IC 66 includes the management CPU 112 as a general-purpose CPU, and performs storage processing of history information and calculation processing of various parameters based on programs and data stored in the management ROM 113. The execution configuration is not limited to this, and the management IC 66 may have a configuration in which a hardware circuit designed to have these functions is formed. Specifically, regarding the configuration, for example, in the first embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a. , the correspondence information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored from the correspondence memory 116 to the history memory 117, and the information of the RTC 115 at that time is stored in the history memory 117. do. Further, for example, in the sixth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that one of the detection sensors 42a to 48a has detected a game ball, the hardware circuit receives the signal. The value of the counter corresponding to the buffer is incremented by 1. Furthermore, when a calculation trigger occurs in the first embodiment or the like, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using history information at that time. Further, when an external output trigger to the reading terminal 68d occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters that are calculation results and also outputs history information to the outside.

(27) In the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, may be provided as separate boards, or may be provided as separate control devices. It is also possible to have a configuration provided as .

(28) Regarding the entry of game balls into the out port 24a, the number of balls entered is counted, while the number of game balls entering the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 A configuration may be adopted in which history information including RTC information is stored regarding the entry of balls into the bonus opportunity entry section that triggers the payout of prize balls and the judgment process. As a result, while making it possible to extract the history of game balls entering the bonus opportunity ball entry section, it is also possible to calculate the frequency of game balls entering each bonus opportunity ball entry section with respect to the total number of game balls discharged. Become.

(29) A configuration may be adopted in which the predetermined event that triggers the storage of history information includes events other than those in the above embodiments. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the fact that the lower tray 56a is in a full state, the timing at which the full state is started, and the timing at which the full state is canceled is stored as history information. It may be configured such that at least one of the fact that there is no ball state, the timing at which the no ball state is started, and the timing at which the no ball state is canceled is stored as history information, and the dispensing device 76 is in an abnormal state. In particular, at least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 started and the timing when the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 was released may be stored as history information. In this case, it becomes possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

(30) In the first embodiment, it is set in advance at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the management IC 66 can recognize that the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal by transmitting a type identification command from the main CPU 63. You can also use it as Furthermore, in the first embodiment, it is set in advance at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 corresponds to the setting value update signal. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the management IC 66 recognizes that the fifteenth buffer 122o corresponds to the setting value update signal by transmitting a type identification command from the main CPU 63. It may also be a configuration. In this case, there is no need to previously set in the management IC 66 the correspondence between each of the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to those buffers 122a to 122p.

(31) In the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, the management IC 66 may be configured to send a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when it is operating normally. In this case, it becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to monitor whether the management IC 66 is operating normally.

(32) The display device that displays the setting value that is being updated in the setting value update process is not limited to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and may be the symbol display device 41, It may also be a dedicated display device. Further, the display device that displays the setting value in the setting confirmation process is not limited to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and may be the symbol display device 41, or a dedicated display device. It may be.

(33) The operation unit operated to update the setting value in the setting value update process is not limited to the update button 68b, and may be the reset button 68c. Further, when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a and a turning operation is performed, positions corresponding to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are set as the rotation operation positions, and the setting key is inserted. A configuration may be adopted in which a setting value corresponding to the rotation operation position of the portion 68a is set. In addition, the setting key insertion part 68a is configured to be able to be rotated further than the ON position, and each time a rotation operation beyond the ON position is performed, the setting value in the middle of updating is changed to the setting value in the next order. The configuration may be updated.

(34) In the first to tenth and fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are arranged horizontally, but they are not arranged vertically. It may be possible to have a structure in which there are two layers, a structure in which they are arranged diagonally in parallel, or a structure in which they are arranged in two rows, one above the other. Further, in the eleventh to fourteenth and twenty-second to seventy-third embodiments, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged side by side, but they are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction. It may be a configuration, a configuration in which they are arranged diagonally in parallel, or a configuration in which they are arranged in two stages, one above the other. Further, in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be used as display devices for displaying the management results of game history.

(35) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, history information (hereinafter referred to as history information subject to fluctuation) used to calculate parameters whose normal values will fluctuate depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. ) and history information used to calculate parameters whose normal values do not change depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as non-variable history information) are located in different areas in the history memory 117. The configuration may be such that the information is stored in the . In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the area in the history memory 117 where the history information to be changed is stored is "0". On the other hand, the area in the history memory 117 where history information that does not change is stored may be cleared to "0" and may not be cleared. This makes it possible to accurately calculate parameters whose normal values vary depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 even after changing the setting values, and also prevent the normal values from varying depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. The accuracy of parameter calculation can be improved. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to seventy-third embodiments described above.

(36) In the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments, the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may not be specified in advance in the main RAM 65. Even in this case, areas corresponding to these stack areas 222 and 224 will be designated as the main side RAM 65 at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, but if the area is designated in excess of its storage capacity. When the information storage process is executed, information that is not originally planned will be written in an area that is not originally planned, so the configuration may be such that the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0".

(37) In the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments described above, when the main side RAM 65 clearing process (step S105, step S117) is executed, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are The work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to 0, but the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to 0. In step S117), not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control but also the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared to "0". . In addition, in the clearing process of the main side RAM 65 (step S105, step S117), not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, but also the normal counter area 231, the counter area 232 for opening/closing execution mode, and the high frequency Although the support mode counter area 233 is cleared to "0", the calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to "0". In this case, it becomes possible to protect the information stored in the calculation result storage area 234.

(38) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments described above, the operation for clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control to “0” and the work area 223 for non-specific control and the The configuration may be such that the operation for clearing the specific control stack area 224 to "0" is a different operation. For example, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while operating the reset button 68c, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are cleared to "0", and the update button 68b is pressed. When the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while the pachinko machine 10 is being operated, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared to "0". This makes it possible to selectively erase each piece of information. In addition, in this configuration, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while operating both the update button 68b and the reset button 68c, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control , the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may all be cleared to "0". This makes it possible to improve work efficiency when erasing information in each area 221 to 224 all at once in the configuration that allows selective erasure as described above.

(39) In the 15th to 18th and 20th embodiments, as in the 19th embodiment, when starting the process corresponding to non-specific control, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is set to the workpiece for non-specific control. The information may be saved to the area 223 and the saved information may be returned to the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control. As a result, even if the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is configured to fluctuate when processing corresponding to non-specific control is started, when processing corresponding to non-specific control ends, the main CPU 63 It becomes possible to restore the state of the stack pointer of the CPU 63 to the state before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control was started.

(40) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, processing for collecting game history information as processing corresponding to non-specific control, processing for calculating various parameters using the collected history information, and The configuration is such that processing for notifying calculation results is executed, but only part of these processes is executed as processing corresponding to non-specific control, and the rest is executed as processing corresponding to specific control. You can also use it as Additionally, in addition to or in place of the processing for collecting game history information, the processing for calculating various parameters using the collected history information, and the processing for notifying the calculation results, processing other than these processing may be performed. The configuration may be such that the process is executed as a process corresponding to non-specific control. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of fraud monitoring and notification of monitoring results is executed as a process corresponding to non-specific control.

(41) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, when the main CPU 63 returns to the process corresponding to specific control from the situation where the process corresponding to non-specific control is being executed, the flag register of the main CPU 63, Although the configuration is such that neither the stack pointer nor the various registers are saved to the main RAM 65, instead of this, the main CPU 63 can switch from a situation in which a process corresponding to non-specific control is being executed to a process corresponding to specific control. When returning, at least some information among the flag register, stack pointer, and various registers of the main CPU 63 is saved to the main RAM 65, and the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started again using the saved information. In such a case, the configuration may be such that the data is returned to the corresponding storage area of the main CPU 63. This makes it possible to carry over and use the information of the main CPU 63 used in processing corresponding to non-specific control.

(42) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, various parameters are calculated when the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area reaches 6000, but the trigger for the calculation is The total number of game balls may be more or less than 6000. For example, various parameters may be calculated when the total number of game balls ejected from the game area reaches 60,000. In this case, the storage capacity required to store the game history information will increase, but as in the twenty-first embodiment, the game history information is stored in the management RAM 241 externally attached to the MPU 62. By having a storage configuration, it becomes possible to flexibly respond to an increase in the storage capacity.

(43) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, the 61st to 68th parameters are calculated as the gaming history management results, but in addition to or in place of this, the 31st to 68th parameters in the first embodiment are The configuration may be such that at least some of the parameters, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are calculated.

(44) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, when the process of newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the work area 221 for specific control In addition, not only the stack area 222 for specific control, but also the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared to "0". In this case, when the process of newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency The support mode counter area 233 and the calculation result storage area 234 are cleared to "0".

In addition, when processing to newly set the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control Although the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 are cleared to "0", the calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to "0". In this case, it becomes possible to protect the information stored in the calculation result storage area 234.

In addition, when a process to newly set the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are set to "0". ''Although the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to ``0'', the configuration may be such that they are not cleared. In this case, it becomes possible to protect the information stored in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

In addition, when the above configuration (43) is provided, when the process of newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the above-mentioned first Although the history information for calculating the 31st parameter, 41st parameter, and 42nd parameter in the embodiment is deleted, the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 And the calculation result storage area 234 may be configured not to be cleared to "0".

(45) In the first to seventy-third embodiments described above, instead of the configuration in which the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is used to calculate various parameters, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA is used. A configuration may be adopted in which the total number of game balls supplied is used. In this case, for example, a detection sensor is provided to detect a game ball that has been fired from the game ball launch mechanism 27 and has reached the game area PA, and based on the detection result of the detection sensor, the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA is It may also be configured to count the number of pieces. In this configuration, since it is not necessary to measure the number of game balls discharged from the outlet 24a, a configuration may be adopted in which the outlet detection sensor 48a is not provided.

(46) In the fifteenth to seventy-third embodiments, at least part of the information of various registers and stack pointers of the main CPU 63 is stored in the stack area 222 for specific control or the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It may also be configured to be saved by a load command. In this case, when saving information to the stack areas 222 and 224, it is necessary to update the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63. Alternatively, the information saved in the stack areas 222 and 224 may be returned to the corresponding storage area of the main CPU 63 by a load command. In this case as well, when information is returned from the stack areas 222 and 224, it is necessary to update the information in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63.

(47) In each of the above embodiments, when a setting value update process is being executed, a corresponding notification may be provided to any of the symbol display device 41, display light emitting unit 53, and speaker unit 54. This makes it possible for the gaming hall manager to clearly understand that the setting value update process is being executed.

(48) In each of the embodiments described above, a history of new setting values may be stored in the main RAM 65. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a history of new setting values is stored in a RAM provided in the audio emission control device 81. In this case, each time the setting value update process is completed, a command including information on the setting value set in the setting value update process is sent from the main side CPU 63 to the audio emission control device 81, and the audio emission control device 81 is configured to cumulatively store information indicating that a setting value has been newly set and information indicating the setting value at that time in the RAM of the audio emission control device 81 each time the command is received. In this configuration, when a predetermined operation is performed, the setting history of the setting values cumulatively stored in the RAM of the sound emission control device 81 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

(49) In each of the above embodiments, when the setting value is newly set in the setting value update process, the information indicating the number of game balls to be put out stored in the payout control device 77 is not deleted. However, instead of this, the information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out may be deleted. In addition, if the setting value update process is executed but the setting value is not changed, the information indicating the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out will not be deleted, and if the setting value is changed, the information indicating the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out will not be deleted. The information indicating the number of game balls may be deleted.

(50) In each of the above embodiments, if the setting value update process is executed but the setting value is not changed, the areas 221 to 224 of the main side RAM 65 will not be cleared to "0" and the setting value will be changed. When changed, at least a portion of each area 221 to 224 of the main side RAM 65 may be cleared to "0". For example, when a setting value is changed, areas other than the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control may be cleared to "0".

(51) In the 22nd to 73rd embodiments, even if the main side CPU 63 is executing the process for confirming the setting value in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 87), it will not affect the profit of the game. A configuration may also be adopted in which the motion of the movable object involved continues. For example, in the opening/closing execution mode, the ball entering means that can enter the ball is provided with a V zone and a non-V zone, and the game ball that enters the ball entering means is distributed to either the V zone or the non-V zone. In a configuration including a distribution member, the operation of the distribution member may be continued even when a process for confirming a setting value is being executed in a setting confirmation process. In this case, even if an attempt is made to stop the operation of the distributing member by illegally causing a situation in which a process for confirming the setting value is executed in the setting confirmation process, it becomes impossible. In addition to the above-mentioned distribution member, movable objects that continue to operate even when the process for confirming the set value is executed in the setting confirmation process include the ball entering means. A game ball is provided in either an advantageous hole that causes a round game after the game ball enters, and a discharge port that discharges the game ball that has entered the ball entry means without allowing it to enter the advantageous hole. A distribution member that distributes the information can be considered.

(52) In the twenty-second to seventy-third embodiments, at least one of the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be configured not to be monitored for information abnormality. In this case, even if it is identified that an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area for non-specific control 224 is not cleared to "0" to prevent a situation in which the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to "0" based on the occurrence of an information error. It becomes possible to do so.

(53) In the 22nd to 73rd embodiments, an information error occurs in the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. A configuration may be adopted in which all monitoring to determine whether or not the occurrence of such occurrence is performed in a process corresponding to non-specific control. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the processing for clearing each of the areas 221 to 224 to "0" when an information abnormality occurs is all performed by processing corresponding to non-specific control.

(54) In each of the above embodiments, the main side RAM 65 requires power supply to store and retain information, and backup power is not supplied to the main side RAM 65 even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF. However, the main RAM 65 may be a nonvolatile memory that does not require power supply to store and retain information.

(55) In each of the above embodiments, in the various clearing processes of the main side RAM 65, the target area of the main side RAM 65 is initialized by executing a process of clearing it to "0" and a process of initializing it. Alternatively, the target area may be initialized by performing an initial setting process without performing a "0" clearing process.

(56) In each of the above embodiments, if the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the setting value update process is executed without requiring any other operation. It is also possible to have a configuration in which Furthermore, instead of the setting key insertion section 68a that is turned on and off by a setting key, a setting switch that can be turned on and off directly by hand may be provided. Further, if the setting key insertion part 68a is not provided and the reset button 68c is pressed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the setting value is reset without requiring any other operation. A configuration may also be adopted in which update processing is executed. In this case, a structure may be provided in which a cover member is provided so that the reset button 68c can be switched between a closed state that covers it and an open state that does not cover it, and a locking device that locks this cover member in the closed state position. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

(57) A configuration in which the currently selected setting value is determined and the setting value updating process ends when the setting key insertion section 68a is maintained in the OFF position for a predetermined period in the setting value updating process. You can also use it as Furthermore, if a termination reference period (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the setting value update process was started, the currently selected setting value is automatically determined and the setting value update process is ended. Furthermore, in the setting value update process, if the update button 68b or the reset button 68c is held down for longer than the termination reference period (for example, 10 seconds), the selected setting value is confirmed and the setting value update process is ended. It may also be a configuration.

(58) The setting key insertion part 68a is configured to be able to be rotated further than the ON position, and each time the rotation operation beyond the ON position is performed, the setting value in the middle of updating is changed to the setting value in the next order. In the configuration updated to , when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the setting key insertion part 68a is operated to the ON position, a setting confirmation process that enables confirmation of the setting value is started. The setting confirmation process may be terminated when the setting key insertion section 68a is operated to the OFF position. In addition, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the update button 68b or the reset button 68c is pressed, a setting confirmation process that allows confirmation of the setting value is started, and the button is pressed. The setting confirmation process may be configured to end when the pressing operation is released. In addition, in a configuration in which a setting switch that is directly operated on and off by hand is provided instead of the setting key insertion part 68a that is operated on and off by the setting key, when the setting switch is turned on and off, the main When the supply of operating power to the side CPU 63 is started, a setting confirmation process that enables confirmation of the setting value is started, and when the setting switch is turned OFF or turned ON after the OFF operation. The configuration may be such that the setting confirmation process is ended. In addition, in a configuration in which a setting switch that is directly operated on and off by hand is provided instead of the setting key insertion part 68a that is operated on and off by the setting key, when the setting switch is turned on and off, the main The configuration is such that when the supply of operating power to the side CPU 63 is started, a setting confirmation process that enables confirmation of the setting value is started, and when the reset button 68c is pressed, the setting confirmation process is ended. Good too.

(59) In each of the above embodiments, when a setting confirmation process or a setting value update process is executed, an image corresponding to the procedure may be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and a configuration may be used to assist the process. A configuration may also be adopted in which audio corresponding to the procedure is output from the speaker section 54. For example, in the setting value update process in the thirty-third embodiment, the setting value is changed by one step by pressing the reset button 68c, and the setting value update process is ended by turning off the setting key insertion part 68a. It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is notified that the event will occur. This makes it easier to update the setting values. Note that the display control of the symbol display device 41 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are performed by the sound emission control device 81, so when the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process is started, the corresponding command is When the command is sent from the main CPU 63 and the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process is ended, it is necessary that the main CPU 63 sends a corresponding command.

(60) In each of the above embodiments, the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not terminated when the initial check period has elapsed, but the check display is terminated when the check display is terminated. It may be configured such that the check display continues until an operation is performed. The operation for terminating the termination may be, for example, operating the reset button 68c regardless of whether or not either the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process is being executed, or an operation other than the reset button 68c. The portion may be operated. In this case, the check display continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 until it is time to check the base value or set value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, it is possible to check the base value or set value after checking whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal. Furthermore, since the check display is terminated based on the operation of the operating unit, it is possible to terminate the check display at a desired timing.

(61) In each of the above embodiments, the first to fourth notification display devices A configuration may be adopted in which the check displays 201 to 204 are started. In this case, it is possible to start the check display at a desired timing when checking the base value or set value. In addition, in this configuration, the check display may be terminated when a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, and the check display may be terminated using the above-mentioned predetermined operation section operated to start the check display or a separate operation section. The check display may be configured to end when the operation unit is operated.

(62) In each of the above embodiments, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while a specific operation unit other than the reset button 68c, such as the update button 68b, is operated, the first to fourth notification A configuration may also be adopted in which the check display on the display devices 201 to 204 is started, and when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started without any operation of the specific operation unit, the check display is not started. . In this case, in a configuration in which the check display is performed upon the start of the supply of operating power, it becomes possible to select whether or not to start the check display by the operation of the manager of the gaming hall.

(63) In each of the above embodiments, the base value is not displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 regardless of whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state; 12 is in the open state based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96, the base value may be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start checking display, and then the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start displaying for checking. The base value may be displayed in step 204. This makes it possible to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal before checking the base value. In addition, in this configuration, the check display may be terminated when a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, and the check display may be terminated using the above-mentioned predetermined operation section operated to start the check display or a separate operation section. The check display may be configured to end when the operation unit is operated.

(64) In each of the above embodiments, when the main process is started with the conditions for executing the setting confirmation process being fulfilled, the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. Alternatively, if the main process is started without satisfying the conditions for executing the setting confirmation process, a check display may be started. In this case, if it is certain that the set value will be confirmed, it is possible to prevent the check display from being performed.

(65) In each of the above embodiments, if the main process is started with the conditions for executing the setting value update process being met, the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. Alternatively, if the main process is started without satisfying the conditions for executing the setting value update process, a check display may be started. In this case, if it is certain that the set value will be updated, it is possible to prevent the check display from being displayed.

(66) In each of the above embodiments, if the main process is started with either the conditions for executing the setting confirmation process or the conditions for executing the setting value update process, the first to fourth notifications are sent. If the main processing is started without the checking display of the display devices 201 to 204 starting and the conditions for executing the setting confirmation processing and the conditions for executing the setting value update processing are not satisfied. may be configured such that a check display is started. In this case, if it is certain that the set value will be confirmed or updated, it is possible to prevent the check display from being displayed.

(67) In each of the above embodiments, in the check display, each display segment 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not maintained in a light emitting state, but the first to fourth Each of the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to be in a blinking state. In addition, in the check display, each of the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 becomes a light emitting state one by one or a plurality of segments one by one, and within the range of the initial check period. Each of the display segments 321 to 324 may be in a light emitting state at least once.

(68) In each of the above embodiments, the process of displaying a check on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not executed as a process corresponding to specific control, but corresponds to non-specific control. It may also be configured to be executed as a process.

(69) In each of the above embodiments, the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be performed not by the main CPU 63 but by a dedicated control means, and the sound emission control device 81 or a display control device 82 may be used. In this case, when displaying the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the base value to be notified is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the control means that is the main control body, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 When setting values are displayed on the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the setting values to be notified are transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means that is the main control unit. In addition, when the main side CPU 63 executes the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are Information corresponding to the start of the check display is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the control means serving as the control entity so that the check display is started.

(70) In each of the above embodiments, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" or the checksums do not match, the game stop flag is set to "1" and the progress of the game is stopped. In the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, each of the display segments 321 to 324 may be in a light emitting state in the same way as the check display, or each of the display segments 321 to 324 may be in a blinking state. good.

(71) In each of the above embodiments, not only when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, but also when the setting change trigger occurs after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is completed, the setting value A configuration may also be used in which update processing is executed. This makes it possible to eliminate the need for turning off and turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 when starting the setting value update process.

(72) In each of the above embodiments, the “setting change operation” and the “setting confirmation operation” may have a reverse relationship. In other words, when the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on, it is determined that the "setting confirmation operation" is being performed, and when the reset button 68c is not pressed and the settings are set A configuration may be adopted in which it is specified that a "setting change operation" is being performed when the key insertion section 68a is turned on. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the "setting change operation" and the "setting confirmation operation" do not overlap at all.

(73) In each of the above embodiments, the setting value update process is started based on the start of supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 while the reset button 68c is pressed, and the setting value update process In this case, instead of changing the setting value of the selected object each time the reset button 68c is pressed, the setting value of the selected object is changed between the operating section operated to start the setting value updating process and the setting value of the selected object in the setting value updating process. The configuration may be such that the operation units operated to change the setting values of the settings do not match.

(74) In the forty-ninth to seventy-third embodiments described above, in the setting value update process, the process of setting the information in the setting update area 342 to the setting reference area 341, that is, the process of setting the setting value to be used. Although the configuration is such that the second RAM clearing process is executed later, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second RAM clearing process may be executed before the process of setting the setting value to be used. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the second RAM clearing process is executed instead of performing the initial setting at the start of the setting value update process.

In addition, in the setting value update process, since both the initial setting at the start and the second RAM clearing process are not executed, even if the setting value to be used is set in the setting value update process, the area to be cleared 371 It is also possible to configure a configuration in which initialization is not performed. When this configuration is applied to the 55th to 63rd embodiments, when the "RAM clear operation" is performed and the first RAM clear process is executed, the clear target area 371 is initialized. , when the setting value update process is executed, the initialization of the area to be cleared 371 will not be executed. Further, when the above configuration is applied to the above 56th embodiment, even if the setting value update process is executed, the initial display may be performed in the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a, A configuration may also be adopted in which the initial display is not performed. In addition, when the above configuration is applied to the 57th to 58th embodiments, even if the setting value update process is executed, the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a will display an error. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the error display is not performed. Further, when the above configuration is applied to the 59th to 60th embodiments, even if the setting value update process is executed, the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a will not display a miss or a hit. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the winning display or the winning display is not performed. In addition, when the above configuration is applied to the 61st embodiment, even if the setting value update process is executed, each light emitting section of the special figure display section 37a and each light emitting section of the regular figure display section 38a will be lit. A configuration may be adopted in which a lottery process is executed, or a configuration in which the lighting lottery process is not executed. Further, when the above configuration is applied to the 62nd to 73rd embodiments, even if the setting value update process is executed, the initial display data lottery process (step SD405) in the display start process (FIGS. 206 and 208) , step SD410, step SD502) may be executed, or a configuration may be adopted in which the lottery processing of the initial display data (step SD405, step SD410, step SD502) is not executed.

(75) Instead of the structure in the forty-ninth to seventy-third embodiments described above, the display data for causing the special figure display section 37a to display is stored in the main side RAM 65 which requires power supply when storing information. Alternatively, the display data may be stored in a memory that does not require power supply when storing and retaining information and is used for both reading and writing. In this case, the display data stored in the memory may not be erased during the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process, and the area to be cleared 371 is initialized during the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process. The display data stored in the memory may also be erased. Moreover, you may apply the said structure to the display data for displaying on the general figure display part 38a.

(76) In the above-mentioned 55th to 73rd embodiments, the reservation information on the special drawing side obtained when a winning occurs in the first operating port 33 and the information obtained when a winning occurs in the second operating port 34 It is also possible to apply a configuration in which the reservation information on the special figure side that has been released is stored separately, and the reservation information on the second actuation port 34 side is digested with priority; A configuration may be applied in which the pending information on the 33 side is digested with priority, or a configuration in which the pending information on the 33 side is digested in the acquisition order regardless of whether it is the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 may be applied. Good too. Further, in the above configuration, instead of the plurality of operating ports being arranged vertically in parallel, a structure may be adopted in which the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are arranged in parallel on the left and right, and both of these operating ports may be arranged side by side. The openings may be arranged diagonally in parallel. Furthermore, depending on the operation mode of the firing operation device 28, the operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged apart from each other so that a prize can be aimed only at the first operating port 33 or only at the second operating port 34. It may also be a configuration. In addition, when the pending information acquired due to the occurrence of a winning in the first operating port 33 is subject to the judgment of validity, and when the pending information obtained due to the occurrence of a winning in the second operating port 34 is A configuration may be adopted in which the profit obtained by the player differs depending on whether the game is subject to a determination of validity or failure.

In the above configuration, as the special figure display section 37a, there is a first special figure display section that displays the result of judgment on the validity of the reservation information acquired based on winnings in the first operation port 33, and a first special figure display section that displays the result of judgment on the validity of reservation information acquired based on winnings in the first operation port 33; It is also possible to separately provide a second special figure display section that displays the result of the determination of the validity of the reservation information acquired based on the winnings. In this case, prior to or based on the reservation information acquired based on winning the first operating port 33 becoming the target of the determination of success or failure, the first special symbol display section displays the picture. At the same time as the variable display starts, a stop result corresponding to the hit/fail determination is displayed, and the variable display for one game is ended. In addition, prior to or based on the reservation information acquired based on the winning to the second actuation port 34 becoming the subject of the judgment, the second special figure display section displays the picture. At the same time as the fluctuating display is started, a stop result corresponding to the hit/fail determination is displayed, and the fluctuating display for one game is ended.

In the configuration in which the first special figure display part and the second special figure display part are provided as described above, the special figure display part 37a when the supply of operating power is started in the fifty-fifth to sixty-third embodiments. The structure of the display contents may be applied to each of the first special figure display part and the second special figure display part, or it may be applied only to one of the first special figure display part and the second special figure display part. You can.

In addition, in the configuration in which the first special figure display part and the second special figure display part are separately provided as described above, one of the first special figure display part and the second special figure display part is used to display the changing pattern. A configuration may also be adopted in which when the target game round is being executed, the game round in which the other is the target of the variable display of symbols is not executed. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a game round in which the first special figure display section is the object of variable display of symbols and a game round in which the second special figure display section is the object of variable display of symbols can be executed overlappingly. In this configuration where the game rounds can be executed overlappingly, as a result of the game rounds on the second special figure display section, the expected number of winning game balls to the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode is higher than when the result is a jackpot. A configuration may also be adopted in which a small winning result is set in which the number of small winnings decreases, and the winning probability of the small winning result is set higher than that of a jackpot result. In this configuration, when the supply of operating power is stopped, there is a high possibility that a win display corresponding to either a jackpot result or a small win result will be displayed on the special figure display section 37a. Therefore, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the first to third out-of-range display data for the special figure and the It is preferable that any one of the first to third winning display data for special figures be selected.

(77) The characteristic display content configuration when the supply of operating power is started in the 55th to 73rd embodiments is applied to both the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a. The configuration is not limited, and may be configured to be applied only to one of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a. For example, the configuration of characteristic display contents when the supply of operating power is started may be configured to be applied only to the special figure display section 37a, or may be configured to be applied only to the regular figure display section 38a. Good too.

(78) In the 55th to 73rd embodiments, even if the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure are not displayed until the display start flag is set to "1". Although the display section 38a has a configuration in which the display does not start, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display start flag is not provided, and this is especially true when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. It is good also as a structure where the display in the figure display part 37a and the ordinary figure display part 38a is started. In this case, if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the supply of operating power is stopped in the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a. After the previous display is started, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a will be switched to the display corresponding to the execution of the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process.

(79) The display device on which base value information is displayed in each of the above embodiments, such as electronic paper, requires the supply of operating power when rewriting the display content, and requires the supply of operating power when retaining the display content. A display device that does not require supply may also be used. Thereby, even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, it is possible to grasp the information on the base value by visually checking the display device.

(80) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the audio emission control device 81 based on the command sent from the main control device 60, the display control device 82 is controlled based on the command sent from the main control device 60. A configuration may be adopted in which the device 82 controls the audio emission control device 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the audio emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be may be integrated into the main control device 60, or both functions of these two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60. Furthermore, the configuration of the commands sent from the main control device 60 to the audio emission control device 81 and the configuration of the commands sent from the audio emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are also arbitrary.

(81) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball that opens a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to game machines such as a pachinko machine in which a jackpot is generated when a ball is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mahjong ball machine.

In addition, non-pinball type game machines, for example, are equipped with multiple reels with multiple types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, and rotation of the reels is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination is established on the active line that can be seen from the display window, the player is given benefits such as a payout of medals, etc. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body, which is supported by the outer frame in an openable and closable manner, is equipped with a storage section and a retrieval device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage section are retrieved by the retrieval device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which starts the rotation of the reels by doing so.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, for example, when a game is started based on the operation of a start lever, the results of the lottery processing of the winning combinations executed are recorded as history information. It may also be configured to store it as history information and use that history information to calculate the actual winning probability for each role.When a transition to a special game state such as a bonus game occurs, it is stored as history information and the history information is stored as history information. The configuration may be such that the actual transition probability to the special gaming state is calculated using the information, or the ratio of the number of games staying in the special gaming state to the total number of games played may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be readable by an external device, or the gaming machine itself may provide notifications corresponding to the calculation results of the various parameters. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which there are multiple setting states such as "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", and the probability of winning in the winning combination processing is varied depending on the setting state. In this case, the configurations in each of the above embodiments may be applied regarding handling of history information, calculation of various parameters, and handling of repeated changes when a setting state setting is newly set or a setting value is changed. .

(82) The characteristic configurations of the first to seventy-third embodiments may be mutually applied in any combination. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the tenth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the thirtieth embodiment. The characteristic configuration of the forty-fifth embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fifty-fifth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the sixty-fourth embodiment may be combined. A characteristic configuration of the second embodiment, a characteristic configuration of the fourth embodiment, a characteristic configuration of the eighth embodiment, a characteristic configuration of the eleventh embodiment, A characteristic configuration of the thirty-third embodiment, a characteristic configuration of the forty-third embodiment, a characteristic configuration of the fifty-eighth embodiment, and a characteristic configuration of the sixty-fifth embodiment. The characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fifteenth embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the twenty-first embodiment, and the twenty-ninth embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the thirty-fourth embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the forty-ninth embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixtieth embodiment, and The characteristic configuration of the sixty-ninth embodiment and the characteristic configuration of the seventy-second embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic configuration of the second embodiment and the sixteenth embodiment may be combined. , the characteristic configuration of the twenty-second embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the thirty-fifth embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the thirty-ninth embodiment, and the fifty-third embodiment. A combination of the characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 62nd embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 71st embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the 73rd embodiment You can. Further, to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to seventy-third embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination, the configurations of the above-mentioned other embodiments may be applied in any combination.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, structures corresponding to each of the above embodiments are indicated in parentheses as appropriate, but the present invention is not limited to the specific structures shown in parentheses.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
A history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores game history information corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event due to the execution of a game in the history storage means (history memory 117); )and,
information erasing means (third In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1809 in the management CPU 112, in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2109 in the management CPU 112, and in the sixth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2109 in the management CPU 112. (a function to execute the process in step S2308, in the eighth embodiment, a function to execute the process in step S2608 in the management CPU 112);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature A1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that Furthermore, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event, and by using this managed information, it is possible to manage the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information.

In this case, at least a portion of the history information stored in the history storage means is erased on at least one condition that a setting value to be used has been newly set. This makes it possible to adjust the contents of the history storage means so that the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events can be suitably managed in the situation after a new setting of the setting value to be used is made. .

Feature A2. Ball entry means (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
an attachment determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the attachment information;
Based on the awarding result that the special information corresponds to the awarding information in the awarding determination, a privilege awarding means (steps in the main CPU 63) that awards a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player. a function of executing the processing from S409 to S412);
The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the probability of obtaining the award corresponding result in the award determination varies depending on the set value.

According to feature A2, in a so-called pachinko machine, it is possible to vary the probability of a grant corresponding result depending on a set value. In this case, by having the configuration of feature A1 described above, the history storage means can appropriately manage the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in a situation after the probability of giving a corresponding result is changed. It becomes possible to adjust the content.

Feature A3. The information erasing means erases all of the history information stored in the history storage means on at least one condition that the setting value to be used has been set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2.

According to feature A3, when a setting value to be used is newly set, all history information stored in the history storage means is deleted, so that the setting value to be used is changed. It becomes possible to specify the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event based on the timing when the event is newly performed.

Feature A4. The information erasing means erases some of the history information stored in the history storage means, with at least one condition being that the setting value to be used has been set by the setting means, The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized in that part of the history information stored in the history storage means is retained.

According to feature A4, when a setting value to be used is newly set, history information that is unnecessary for the subsequent management of the occurrence frequency of a predetermined event is deleted, and the history information that is unnecessary for the subsequent management of the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event is It becomes possible to leave necessary history information. This makes it possible to suitably manage the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event after the setting value to be used is newly set.

Feature A5. The history information stored in the history storage means includes first history information (history indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has occurred) in which the probability of occurrence of the predetermined event corresponding to the history information varies according to the set value; information) and second history information (history information indicating that a game ball has been ejected from the game area PA) that does not change according to the setting value,
The information erasing means erases the first history information stored in the history storage means on at least one condition that the setting value to be used has been set by the setting means, and The gaming machine according to feature A4, characterized in that the second history information stored in the history storage means is left.

According to feature A5, when a new set value is set to be used, the first history information corresponding to a predetermined event whose occurrence probability changes according to the set value is deleted, and the occurrence probability is changed to the set value. The second history information corresponding to a predetermined event that does not change depending on the event is not deleted. As a result, when the first history information before the setting value to be used is newly set is carried over after the setting value is newly set, a predetermined event corresponding to the first history information occurs. The first history information that is undesirable for specifying the frequency can be deleted when the setting value is newly set. On the other hand, the second history information is not deleted even if the setting value to be used is newly set, so that it can be referred to when specifying the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event corresponding to the second history information. Since it is possible to secure a large amount of second history information, it is possible to accurately identify the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event corresponding to the second history information.

Feature A6. Ball entry means (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
an attachment determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the attachment information;
Based on the awarding result that the special information corresponds to the awarding information in the awarding determination, a privilege awarding means (steps in the main CPU 63) that awards a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player. a function of executing the processing from S409 to S412);
The configuration is such that the probability of the granting result being the granting result in the granting determination varies depending on the set value,
The first history information includes information corresponding to the award of the benefit,
The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the second history information includes information corresponding to game balls being ejected from the gaming area in a predetermined manner.

According to feature A6, since the probability of granting a benefit varies depending on the setting value, the first history information should be deleted when the setting value to be used is newly set. This makes it possible to specify the frequency of granting benefits under the newly set setting value. On the other hand, since the frequency at which game balls are ejected from the gaming area does not change depending on the setting value, the second history information is not deleted even if the setting value to be used is newly set. It becomes possible to accurately specify the frequency at which game balls are ejected from the game area in a predetermined manner.

Feature A7. The information erasing means deletes at least one of the history information when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means and a predetermined amount or more of the history information is stored in the history storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, characterized in that a portion of the gaming machine is erased.

According to feature A7, if a predetermined amount or more of predetermined history information is not stored in the history storage means, the history information is not deleted even if a new set value to be used is set. This makes it possible to prevent history information from being repeatedly erased from the history storage means even if new setting values are repeatedly set in a situation where no game is played.

Feature A8. With at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to respond to the gaming results in a predetermined period. information derivation means (in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management side CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management side CPU 112). The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7.

According to feature A8, having the configuration of feature A1 above, at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage means is stored on at least one condition that a new setting value to be used has been set. In the configuration to be deleted, a mode in which the history information stored in the history storage means is used to correspond to the gaming results in a predetermined period when a new setting value to be used is set. Information is derived. As a result, even if at least part of the history information is erased when the setting value is changed, it is possible to grasp the management results of gaming history such as the frequency of occurrence of specified events in the situation before the setting value was changed. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to feature A8, further comprising mode information storage means (separate storage memory 171) for storing the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to feature A9, when a new set value to be used is set, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to generate mode information corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period. When the form information is derived, the form information is stored in the form information storage means. Thereby, even if the setting value is changed, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the gaming history in the situation before the setting value was changed at any subsequent timing.

Feature A10. The gaming machine according to feature A9, wherein the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the aspect information.

According to feature A10, since it is possible to store a plurality of pieces of mode information in the mode information storage means, it is possible to grasp the management results of gaming history in a plurality of periods based on the timing when a new setting value is set. It becomes possible to do so. Furthermore, even if new setting values are repeatedly set in a situation where no game is being played, the mode information derived using the history information of the situation where a game is actually being played is stored in the mode information storage means. This makes it possible to increase the possibility that the

Feature A11. The mode information storage means is capable of storing a predetermined number of the mode information,
This gaming machine includes a means (in the third embodiment, a means for executing special processing in the management side CPU 112) when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means more than the predetermined number of times under predetermined conditions. The gaming machine according to feature A9 or A10, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing repeated change monitoring processing (in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing repeated change monitoring processing in the main CPU 63).

According to feature A11, in order to prevent the mode information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is actually being played from remaining in the mode information storage means, the set value is set in a situation where no game is played. If a new setting is repeated, special processing is performed for it. This makes it possible to deal with the act.

Feature A12. The gaming machine according to any one of features A8 to A11, wherein the information derivation means derives the mode information when a predetermined amount or more of the history information is stored in the history storage means. .

According to feature A12, mode information is derived when a predetermined amount or more of predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means, so it is possible to prevent mode information from being derived in vain. .

Feature A13. The information erasing means erases the history information from when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means until a predetermined amount of the history information is stored in the history storage means. If a specified amount or more of the history information is stored in the history storage means after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, before the setting value is set. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, characterized in that the history information stored in the history storage means is deleted.

According to feature A13, until a specific amount of predetermined history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if a new setting is made for the setting value to be used, the setting is not stored before the setting is made. The history information that was previously saved will not be deleted. This makes it possible to specify the gaming history management results for a predetermined period even if new settings are made.

Feature A14. The history storage means includes a first history storage means (first history memory 191) and a second history storage means (second history memory 192),
The history storage execution means includes:
If the predetermined event occurs during a predetermined period from when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means until the cancellation condition is satisfied, the corresponding history information is stored in the first history storage means and A means for storing in both the second history storage means (a function for executing the process of step S2604 in the management CPU 112);
When the predetermined event occurs during a period other than the predetermined period, means for storing the corresponding history information in the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that is set as a storage target. (Function to execute the process of step S2603 in the management CPU 112);
Equipped with
The information erasing means erases the history information stored in the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that was previously set as the storage target when the cancellation condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13.

According to feature A14, until a specific amount of history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if a new setting value for use is made, the setting value is not stored before the new setting is made. History information will not be deleted. This makes it possible to specify the gaming history management results for a predetermined period even if new settings are made. Furthermore, this effect can be produced simply by appropriately changing the history storage means for storing history information between the first history storage means and the second history storage means.

Feature A15. Deriving mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that is set as the storage target. The gaming machine according to feature A14, further comprising information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step S2703 in the management CPU 112).

According to feature A15, even if the history information is stored in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means due to a new setting of the setting value, the mode in which the history information is used is It becomes possible to derive information appropriately.

Note that for the configuration of features A1 to A15, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
A history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores game history information corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event due to the execution of a game in the history storage means (history memory 117); )and,
Equipped with
The predetermined history information stored in the history storage means before the setting value to be used is set by the setting means is set as the setting value to be used by the setting means. A game machine characterized in that the history is stored and retained in the history storage means even after the game is played.

According to feature B1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that Furthermore, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event, and by using this managed information, it is possible to manage the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information.

In this case, even if the setting value to be used is newly set, the history information stored in the history storage means is not deleted but is stored and retained. As a result, even if the setting value to be used is set, the history information up to that point can be continuously stored in the history storage means, and the history information will not be accumulated in the history storage means over a long period of time. It becomes possible to specify the management results of the game history using the history information obtained.

Feature B2. When the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the history storage execution means stores the corresponding history information in the history storage means (first storage execution means at the time of setting). In the embodiment, the game according to feature B1 is provided with a function of executing the process of step S1307 in the management side CPU 112, and a function of executing the process of step S2408 in the management side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment. Machine.

According to feature B2, in a configuration in which history information is not deleted and is stored and retained even if a setting value to be used is newly set, the setting value to be used is newly set. History information corresponding to this is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to distinguish between history information before a new setting of the setting value to be used and history information after the setting is made.

Feature B3. When the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the storage execution means at the time of setting causes the history storage means to store information corresponding to the set value as the history information. The gaming machine according to feature B2.

According to feature B3, by referring to history information, it is possible to specify the contents of setting values set in the past.

Feature B4. The history storage means includes a plurality of correspondence history storage means (history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6) corresponding to each of the plurality of types of setting values that can be set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3.

According to feature B4, since the correspondence history storage means is provided corresponding to each setting value, it is possible to store history information separately for each setting value.

Feature B5. When the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, means for making the correspondence history storage means corresponding to the setting value for which the setting is to be stored for the subsequent history information (management side The gaming machine according to feature B4, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S2406 in the CPU 112.

According to feature B5, when a setting value to be used is newly set, the correspondence history storage means corresponding to that setting value is to be stored for subsequent history information, so that It becomes possible to distinguish and store history information.

Feature B6. Information derivation means (display output processing in the management side CPU 112 The gaming machine according to feature B5, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the following functions.

According to feature B6, in a configuration where history information is stored separately for each setting value, it is possible to derive mode information corresponding to the currently set setting value.

Feature B7. Ball entry means (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
an attachment determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the attachment information;
Based on the awarding result that the special information corresponds to the awarding information in the awarding determination, a privilege awarding means (steps in the main CPU 63) that awards a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player. a function of executing the processing from S409 to S412);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein the probability of the award corresponding result in the award determination varies depending on the set value.

According to feature B7, in a so-called pachinko machine, it is possible to vary the probability of a grant corresponding result depending on a set value.

Note that for the configuration of features B1 to B7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
A history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores game history information corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event due to the execution of a game in the history storage means (history memory 117); )and,
post-setting response means for not erasing the history information until at least a predetermined amount of the history information is stored in the history storage means after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means; (Function to execute the processing of step S2506 and steps S2605 to S2609 in the management CPU 112),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature C1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that Furthermore, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information.

In this case, until a specific amount of predetermined history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if a new setting is made for the setting value to be used, it will not be stored before the setting is made. History information will not be deleted. This makes it possible to specify the gaming history management results for a predetermined period even if new settings are made.

Feature C2. The post-setting response means sets the setting value when a predetermined amount of the history information is stored in the history storage means in excess of the specified amount after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that the history information stored in the history storage means is deleted before the above is performed.

According to feature C2, when a specific amount of history information is stored in the history storage means that makes it possible to specify the gaming history management results for a predetermined period after a new setting value is set. In this case, the history information stored in the history storage means is erased before the new settings are made. This makes it possible to prevent useless history information from being continuously stored in the history storage means.

Feature C3. The history storage means includes a first history storage means (first history memory 191) and a second history storage means (second history memory 192),
The history storage execution means includes:
When the predetermined event occurs, means for storing the corresponding history information in the first history storage means and the second history storage means that are set to be stored (step S2603 in the management CPU 112) function) and
After the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the predetermined history information is stored in the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that is not set as the storage target. Means for storing the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means (management CPU 112) until the specified amount or more is stored. function of executing the process of step S2604);
Equipped with
The post-setting response means are:
After the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the predetermined history information is stored in the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that is not set as the storage target. means for changing the storage target between the first history storage means and the second history storage means (a function of executing the process of step S2607 in the management CPU 112) when the specified amount or more is stored;
After the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the predetermined history information is stored in the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that is not set as the storage target. When the specified amount or more is stored, means for erasing the history information of the side that has been set as the storage target among the first history storage means and the second history storage means (step S2608 in the management CPU 112) function) and
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature C3, until a specific amount of history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if a new setting of the setting value to be used is made, the setting value is not stored before the setting is made. History information will not be deleted. This makes it possible to specify the gaming history management results for a predetermined period even if new settings are made. Furthermore, this effect can be produced simply by appropriately changing the history storage means for storing history information between the first history storage means and the second history storage means.

Feature C4. Deriving mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that is set as the storage target. The gaming machine according to feature C3, further comprising information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step S2703 in the management CPU 112).

According to feature C4, even if the history information is stored in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means due to a new setting of the setting value, the manner in which the history information is used is It becomes possible to derive information appropriately.

Feature C5. Ball entry means (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
an attachment determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the attachment information;
Based on the awarding result that the special information corresponds to the awarding information in the awarding determination, a privilege awarding means (steps in the main CPU 63) that awards a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player. a function of executing the processing from S409 to S412);
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, characterized in that the probability of obtaining the award corresponding result in the award determination varies depending on the set value.

According to feature C5, it is possible to vary the probability of a grant corresponding result in a so-called pachinko machine according to a set value.

Note that for the configuration of features C1 to C5, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
Special execution means (in the third embodiment, monitoring of repeated changes in the management CPU 112 (a function to execute a process, a function to execute a repeated change monitoring process in the main CPU 63 in the fourth embodiment, a function to make a negative determination in step S2106 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature D1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, the special process is executed with at least one condition that the new setting of the setting value to be used is executed in a special situation. This makes it possible to deal with a case where a new set value is set under an unfavorable situation.

Feature D2. Feature D1 characterized in that the special execution means executes the special processing on the condition that at least one condition is that setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means has been executed a specified number of times or more in the special situation. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature D2, even if a new setting of a setting value to be used is executed in a special situation, the special process is not executed if the number of executions is less than a specific number of times. This makes it possible to prevent special processing from being executed even when a regular worker sets a new set value less than a specific number of times in a special situation.

Feature D3. The special execution means is configured to determine, as the special situation, a situation in which no game is played after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, or a setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means. In a situation where a game exceeding a predetermined standard has not been played since the execution of the special processing, the special processing is executed with at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2.

According to feature D3, special processing is executed when a new setting value to be used is made in a situation where a game is not being played or a game is not actually being played. If such an act occurs, it will be possible to deal with it.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the special execution means executes a notification process as the special process.

According to feature D4, the notification process is executed with at least one condition that a new setting of the setting value to be used is executed in a special situation. This makes it possible to prompt the user to take action when a new set value is set under an unfavorable situation.

Feature D5. A history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores game history information corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event due to the execution of a game in the history storage means (history memory 117); )and,
With at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to respond to the gaming results in a predetermined period. information derivation means (in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management side CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management side CPU 112);
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, characterized by comprising:

According to feature D5, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information.

In this case, when a new set value is set to be used, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to generate mode information corresponding to the gaming results in a predetermined period. derived. This makes it possible to grasp the management results of the game history, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events in the situation before the setting value is changed.

Feature D6. The special execution means causes the information derivation means to derive the aspect information as the special processing, with at least one condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means is set in the special situation. The gaming machine according to feature D5, characterized in that the gaming machine does not allow users to perform.

According to feature D6, even if a new setting of a setting value to be used is made, if the setting is made in an unfavorable situation, mode information is not derived. This makes it possible to prevent aspect information from being derived in vain.

Feature D7. The gaming machine according to feature D5 or D6, further comprising mode information storage means (separate storage memory 171) for storing the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to feature D7, when a new setting value to be used is set, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to generate mode information corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period. When the form information is derived, the form information is stored in the form information storage means. Thereby, even if the setting value is changed, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the gaming history in the situation before the setting value was changed at any subsequent timing.

Feature D8. The gaming machine according to feature D7, wherein the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the aspect information.

According to feature D8, since it is possible to store a plurality of pieces of mode information in the mode information storage means, it is possible to grasp the management results of gaming history in a plurality of periods based on the timing when a new setting value is set. It becomes possible to do so. Furthermore, even if new setting values are repeatedly set in a situation where no game is being played, the mode information derived using the history information of the situation where a game is actually being played is retained in the mode information storage means. This makes it possible to increase the possibility that the

Feature D9. The mode information storage means is capable of storing a predetermined number of the mode information,
Feature D7: The special execution means executes the special processing when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means more than the predetermined number of times in the special situation. Or the gaming machine described in D8.

According to feature D9, in order to prevent the mode information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is actually being played from remaining in the mode information storage means, the set value is set in a situation where no game is played. If a new setting is repeated, special processing is performed for it. This makes it possible to deal with the act.

Feature D10. Ball entry means (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
an attachment determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) that determines whether the special information corresponds to the attachment information;
Based on the awarding result that the special information corresponds to the awarding information in the awarding determination, a privilege awarding means (steps in the main CPU 63) for awarding a privilege (open/close execution mode) to the player; a function of executing the processing from S409 to S412);
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein the probability of obtaining the award corresponding result in the award determination varies depending on the set value.

According to the feature D10, it is possible to vary the probability of a grant corresponding result in a so-called pachinko machine according to a set value.

Note that for the configuration of features D1 to D10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
A history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores game history information corresponding to a predetermined event in the history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of a game. )and,
Responding to gaming results in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means, with at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means. information deriving means (in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management side CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management side CPU 112);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature E1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that Furthermore, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information.

In this case, when a new set value is set to be used, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to generate mode information corresponding to the gaming results in a predetermined period. derived. This makes it possible to grasp the management results of the game history, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events in the situation before the setting value is changed.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, further comprising mode information storage means (separate storage memory 171) for storing the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to feature E2, when a new setting value to be used is set, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to generate mode information corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period. When the form information is derived, the form information is stored in the form information storage means. Thereby, even if the setting value is changed, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the gaming history in the situation before the setting value was changed at any subsequent timing.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the aspect information.

According to feature E3, since it is possible to store a plurality of pieces of mode information in the mode information storage means, it is possible to grasp the management results of gaming history over a plurality of periods based on the timing when a new setting value is set. It becomes possible to do so. Furthermore, even if new setting values are repeatedly set in a situation where no game is being played, the mode information derived using the history information of the situation where a game is actually being played is retained in the mode information storage means. This makes it possible to increase the possibility that the

Feature E4. The mode information storage means is capable of storing a predetermined number of the mode information,
This gaming machine includes a means (in the third embodiment, a means for executing special processing in the management side CPU 112) when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means more than the predetermined number of times under predetermined conditions. The gaming machine according to feature E2 or E3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing repeated change monitoring processing (in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing repeated change monitoring processing in the main CPU 63).

According to feature E4, in order to prevent the mode information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is actually being played from remaining in the mode information storage means, the set value is set in a situation where no game is played. If a new setting is repeated, special processing is performed for it. This makes it possible to deal with the act.

Feature E5. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the information derivation means derives the mode information when a predetermined amount or more of the history information is stored in the history storage means. .

According to feature E5, mode information is derived when a predetermined amount or more of predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means, so it is possible to prevent mode information from being derived in vain. Become.

Feature E6. Ball entry means (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
an attachment determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the attachment information;
Based on the awarding result that the special information corresponds to the awarding information in the awarding determination, a privilege awarding means (steps in the main CPU 63) that awards a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player. a function of executing the processing from S409 to S412);
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that the probability of obtaining the award corresponding result in the award determination varies depending on the set value.

According to feature E6, it is possible to vary the probability of a grant corresponding result in a so-called pachinko machine according to a set value.

Note that for the configuration of features E1 to E6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the above feature A group, the above feature B group, the above feature C group, the above feature D group, and the above feature E group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group F>
Feature F1. Ball entry means (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
an attachment determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the attachment information;
Based on the awarding result that the special information corresponds to the awarding information in the awarding determination, a privilege awarding means (steps in the main CPU 63) that awards a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player. (a function to execute the processing from S409 to S412);
a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
Equipped with
The grant determination means has a high probability mode and a low probability mode as the grant determination modes such that the probability of the grant corresponding result is relatively high or low,
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of the award corresponding result changes at least in the low probability mode depending on the set value.

According to feature F1, it is possible to vary the probability of a grant corresponding result at least in the low probability mode in a so-called pachinko machine according to a set value. Thereby, even in a single gaming machine, it is possible to create an advantageous or disadvantageous situation with respect to the probability of a grant corresponding result in the low probability mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the probability of the award corresponding result in the high probability mode does not vary depending on the set value.

According to feature F2, the probability of a grant-compatible result in low probability mode is changed according to the setting value, while the probability of a grant-compatible result in high probability mode is not changed according to the setting value. By doing so, it becomes possible to limit the influence of the setting value to the situation in the low probability mode.

Feature F3. There are multiple types of benefits,
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the selection mode of the benefit does not vary depending on the setting value.

According to feature F3, the probability of receiving a corresponding result in low probability mode is changed according to the setting value, while the selection mode of benefits is not changed according to the setting value, thereby reducing the influence of the setting value. can be restricted to situations in low probability mode.

Note that for the configuration of features F1 to F3, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above feature group F, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. A history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores game history information corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event due to the execution of a game in the history storage means (history memory 117); )and,
Information deriving means (in the first embodiment, step S1402 to step S1412 in the management CPU 112 (in the third embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S2107 in the management CPU 112),
The information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the eleventh to In the fourteenth embodiment, a first information display control means (a function for executing display processing in the management CPU 112) that controls the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
A second information display control means (step S202 and step S208 in the main CPU 63 in the first to tenth embodiments) that controls the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to another information different from the mode information is displayed In the 11th embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs steps S3101, S3103, and S3109. In the 12th embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs steps S3201, S3202, and S3204. and a function of executing the process of step S3210, a function of executing the abnormality display process in the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature G1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, mode information corresponding to the results of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed on the information display means. This makes it possible to grasp the gaming history management results, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. Further, in the information display means, not only a display corresponding to the mode information but also a display corresponding to other information is performed. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the information display means.

Feature G2. The feature G1 according to feature G1, characterized in that a period in which a display corresponding to the aspect information is displayed on the information display means and a period in which a display corresponding to the separate information is displayed on the information display means Game machine.

According to feature G2, by understanding the situation in which display is being performed on the information display means, it is possible to determine which of the display corresponding to mode information and the display corresponding to other information is being performed on the information display means. It becomes possible to specify.

Feature G3. The second information display control means displays the information corresponding to the separate information by controlling the display of the information display means so that the display mode is different from the display mode when the display corresponding to the mode information is displayed. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, wherein

According to feature G3, by understanding the display mode of the information display means, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to different information is being performed on the information display means. It becomes possible.

Feature G4. As the information display means, individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the eleventh to fourteenth In the embodiment, the gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, characterized in that it includes a plurality of first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204).

According to feature G4, by using a plurality of individual information display means to display a display corresponding to the mode information, it is possible to display a wide variety of mode information. In addition, the presence of multiple individual information display means makes it possible to make the display mode significantly different between when a display corresponding to mode information is displayed and when a display corresponding to different information is displayed. .

Feature G5. When causing a display corresponding to the separate information to be displayed, the second information display control means selects a predetermined individual information display means from among the plurality of individual information display means that does not go into a non-display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is displayed. Information display means (first notification display device 69a and second notification display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments; first notification display device 201 and second notification device in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) Feature G4 characterized in that the display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 (in the thirteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are in a non-display state. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature G5, a predetermined individual information display means that does not go into a non-display state when a display corresponding to aspect information is performed becomes a non-display state when a display corresponding to another information is performed. As a result, simply by understanding the type of individual information display means that is in a hidden state, it is possible to clearly identify which of the display corresponding to mode information and the display corresponding to separate information is being performed. becomes possible.

Feature G6. When causing a display corresponding to the separate information to be displayed, the second information display control means selects a specific individual information display means (the second information display means) which is in a display state when displaying the aspect information among the plurality of individual information display means. In the first to tenth embodiments, the third notification display device 69c, in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the fourth notification display device 204, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification device display device 204) in a display state,
The display content of the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the separate information is performed may be displayed on the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. The gaming machine according to feature G5.

According to feature G6, in a specific individual information display means, the display content that can be displayed when a display corresponding to aspect information is performed can also be displayed when a display corresponding to another information is performed, so that the aspect It becomes possible to avoid imposing restrictions on the display contents when displaying information corresponding to the information. Furthermore, even if the specific individual information display means has a configuration that can display the same display content, it will not be in a non-display state if it has the configuration of feature G5 above and a display corresponding to the mode information is performed. Since the predetermined individual information display means is in a non-display state when a display corresponding to another information is performed, it is possible to specify which of the plurality of individual information display means is being displayed.

Feature G7. The gaming machine according to feature G5 or G6, wherein the first information display control means puts each of the plurality of individual information display means into a display state when causing the display corresponding to the aspect information to be displayed.

According to feature G7, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state, so that the predetermined individual information display means corresponds to another information in which the predetermined individual information display means is in the non-display state. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the display from the display.

Feature G8. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the aspect information on the information display means, and even when changing the display of the aspect information, the predetermined individual information display means is in a non-display state. The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G7, characterized in that the game machine is not maintained in the same state as above.

According to feature G8, when display corresponding to mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display means is not maintained in a non-display state. As a result, regardless of the timing at which the plurality of individual information display means are checked, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to separate information is being performed on the plurality of individual information display means. becomes possible.

Feature G9. The second information display control means controls one specific individual information display means among the plurality of individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the third notification display device 69c, the eleventh, and the twelfth display devices). In the embodiment, any one of features G5 to G8 is characterized in that the fourth notification display device 204) displays a display corresponding to the separate information, and the remaining individual information display means is in a non-display state. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to feature G9, when a display corresponding to separate information is performed, only one individual information display means is in the display state, so it is easy to understand whether or not a display corresponding to separate information is being performed. Become.

Feature G10. The plurality of individual information display means are arranged in a predetermined direction,
The gaming machine according to feature G9, wherein the specific individual information display means is present at an end in the predetermined direction of the plurality of individual information display means arranged in the predetermined direction.

According to feature G10, since one individual information display means in which a display corresponding to separate information is displayed is located at an end in a predetermined direction, it is possible to determine whether or not a display corresponding to separate information is being performed. It becomes easier to do.

Feature G11. The first information display control means is a part of the plurality of individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first notification display device 69a, the eleventh ~ In the fourteenth embodiment, a display corresponding to the type of the aspect information to be displayed is performed on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202), and a plurality of the individual information display means Individual information display means for displaying results (in the first to tenth embodiments, the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c; in the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments, the individual information display device 69b and the third notification device 69c) A display corresponding to the content of the mode information to be displayed is performed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G10, wherein the predetermined individual information display means corresponds to the individual information display means for the type display target.

According to feature G11, when a display corresponding to aspect information is to be performed, a display corresponding to the type of aspect information to be displayed is performed on the individual information display means for the type display target, and an individual information display for the result display target is performed. The means performs a display corresponding to the content of the mode information to be displayed. This makes it easier to understand the mode information to be displayed. In this case, when the display corresponding to separate information is performed, the individual information display means for which the type is displayed is hidden, so the state in which the type display is hidden corresponds to the separate information. It will be easier to understand if separate information is displayed.

Feature G12. The information display means has a plurality of unit light emitting parts (display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202g), and performs a predetermined display by a combination of unit light emitting parts that are in a light emitting state among the plurality of unit light emitting parts. It is a configuration that allows
The second information display control means corresponds to the different information by setting a unit light emitting unit, which can be set in a light emitting state when a display corresponding to the mode information is displayed, among the plurality of unit light emitting parts, into a light emitting state. A combination of the unit light emitting parts that is in a light emitting state when a display corresponding to the other information is displayed does not exist when a display corresponding to the aspect information is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G11, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be a combination.

According to feature G12, when a display corresponding to the mode information is performed, a unit light emitting section that can be set to a light emitting state is set to a light emitting state, whereby a display corresponding to another information is performed, and a display corresponding to the mode information is displayed. In order to diversify the information, it is possible to place as few restrictions as possible on the content of the display corresponding to the mode information. On the other hand, a combination of unit light emitting parts that are in a light emitting state when a display corresponding to different information is performed is a combination that does not exist when a display corresponding to mode information is performed. Thereby, by understanding the combination of unit light emitting parts that are in the light emitting state, it becomes possible to understand which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to other information is being performed.

Feature G13. There are a plurality of display modes corresponding to the mode information in the information display means,
The game according to feature G12, wherein among the plurality of unit light emitting parts, there is no unit light emitting part that does not enter a light emitting state even if all the displays corresponding to the mode information of the plurality of modes are performed. Machine.

According to feature G13, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the unit light emitting parts of any combination are set to the light emitting state. Therefore, in order to diversify the display corresponding to the aspect information, It becomes possible to place as few restrictions as possible on the content of the display corresponding to the information.

Feature G14. Specific individual information display means as the information display means (the third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, the fourth notification display device 204 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the thirteenth In the embodiment, a plurality of individual information display means including a third notification display device 203 and a fourth notification display device 204 are provided,
When causing a display corresponding to the separate information to be displayed, the second information display control means selects a predetermined individual information display means from among the plurality of individual information display means that does not go into a non-display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is displayed. Information display means (first notification display device 69a and second notification display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments; first notification display device 201 and second notification device in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) Feature G12 characterized in that the display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 (in the thirteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are in a non-display state. Or the gaming machine described in G13.

According to feature G14, a predetermined individual information display means that does not go into a non-display state when a display corresponding to mode information is performed becomes a non-display state when a display corresponding to another information is performed. As a result, simply by understanding the type of individual information display means that is in a hidden state, it is possible to clearly identify which of the display corresponding to mode information and the display corresponding to separate information is being performed. becomes possible.

Feature G15. Equipped with a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G14, wherein the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to the separate information to be displayed in a situation where the setting value can be changed.

According to feature G15, the information display means that displays the display corresponding to the mode information can also be used as the display means for notifying that the setting value can be changed.

Feature G16. The gaming machine according to feature G15, wherein the second information display control means causes information corresponding to the currently selected setting value to be displayed as the display corresponding to the separate information.

According to feature G16, the information display means that displays the display corresponding to the mode information can also be used as the display means for displaying the setting value that is being changed.

Feature G17. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G16, wherein the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the gaming machine to be displayed as the display corresponding to the separate information.

According to feature G17, the information display means for displaying a display corresponding to mode information can also be used as a display means for displaying a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the gaming machine.

Feature G18. The second information display control means is characterized in that when displaying a display corresponding to the abnormal state in a situation where the abnormal state does not occur, the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to the fact that the abnormal state does not occur. The gaming machine according to feature G17.

According to feature G18, it is possible to clearly identify whether or not an abnormal state has occurred by checking the information display means.

Note that for the configuration of features G1 to G18, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. A history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores game history information corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event due to the execution of a game in the history storage means (history memory 117); )and,
Information deriving means (in the first embodiment, step S1402 to step S1412 in the management CPU 112 (in the third embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S2107 in the management CPU 112),
The information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the eleventh to In the fourteenth embodiment, a first information display control means (a function for executing display processing in the management CPU 112) that controls the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
A second information display control means (step S202 and step S208 in the main CPU 63 in the first to tenth embodiments) that controls the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to another information different from the mode information is displayed In the 11th embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs steps S3101, S3103, and S3109. In the 12th embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs steps S3201, S3202, and S3204. and a function of executing the process of step S3210, a function of executing the abnormality display process in the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment),
Equipped with
The information display means has a plurality of unit light emitting parts (display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202g), and performs a predetermined display by a combination of unit light emitting parts that are in a light emitting state among the plurality of unit light emitting parts. It is a configuration that allows
The second information display control means corresponds to the different information by setting a unit light emitting unit, which can be set in a light emitting state when a display corresponding to the mode information is displayed, among the plurality of unit light emitting parts, into a light emitting state. A combination of the unit light emitting parts that becomes a light emitting state when a display corresponding to the other information is displayed does not exist when a display corresponding to the aspect information is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that it allows combinations to be made.

According to feature H1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, mode information corresponding to the results of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed on the information display means. This makes it possible to grasp the gaming history management results, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. Further, in the information display means, not only a display corresponding to the mode information but also a display corresponding to other information is performed. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the information display means.

In addition, display corresponding to different information is performed by setting a unit light-emitting section to a light-emitting state, which can be set to a light-emitting state when a display corresponding to the mode information is displayed, thereby diversifying the display corresponding to the mode information. It becomes possible to place as few restrictions as possible on the content of the display corresponding to the mode information. On the other hand, a combination of unit light emitting parts that are in a light emitting state when a display corresponding to different information is performed is a combination that does not exist when a display corresponding to mode information is performed. Thereby, by understanding the combination of unit light emitting parts that are in the light emitting state, it becomes possible to understand which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to other information is being performed.

Feature H2. There are a plurality of display modes corresponding to the mode information in the information display means,
The game according to feature H1, wherein among the plurality of unit light emitting parts, there is no unit light emitting part that does not enter a light emitting state even if all the displays corresponding to the mode information of the plurality of modes are performed. Machine.

According to feature H2, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the unit light emitting parts of any combination are set to the light emitting state. Therefore, in order to diversify the display corresponding to the aspect information, It becomes possible to place as few restrictions as possible on the content of the display corresponding to the information.

Feature H3. Specific individual information display means as the information display means (the third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, the fourth notification display device 204 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the thirteenth In the embodiment, a plurality of individual information display means including a third notification display device 203 and a fourth notification display device 204 are provided,
When causing a display corresponding to the separate information to be displayed, the second information display control means selects a predetermined individual information display means from among the plurality of individual information display means that does not go into a non-display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is displayed. Information display means (first notification display device 69a and second notification display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments; first notification display device 201 and second notification device in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) Feature H1 characterized in that the display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 (in the thirteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are in a non-display state. Or the gaming machine described in H2.

According to feature H3, a predetermined individual information display means that does not go into a non-display state when a display corresponding to aspect information is performed becomes a non-display state when a display corresponding to another information is performed. As a result, simply by understanding the type of individual information display means that is in a hidden state, it is possible to clearly identify which of the display corresponding to mode information and the display corresponding to separate information is being performed. becomes possible.

Feature H4. The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the first information display control means sets each of the plurality of individual information display means to a display state when causing the display corresponding to the aspect information to be performed.

According to feature H4, when a display corresponding to mode information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in a display state, so that a predetermined individual information display means corresponds to another information that is in a non-display state. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the display from the display.

Feature H5. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the aspect information on the information display means, and even when changing the display of the aspect information, the predetermined individual information display means is in a non-display state. The gaming machine according to feature H3 or H4, characterized in that the game machine is not maintained in the same state.

According to feature H5, when display corresponding to mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display means is not maintained in a non-display state. As a result, regardless of the timing at which the plurality of individual information display means are checked, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to separate information is being performed on the plurality of individual information display means. becomes possible.

Feature H6. Equipped with a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to the separate information to be displayed in a situation where the setting value can be changed.

According to feature H6, the information display means that displays the display corresponding to the mode information can also be used as the display means for notifying that the setting value can be changed.

Feature H7. The gaming machine according to feature H6, wherein the second information display control means causes information corresponding to the currently selected setting value to be displayed as the display corresponding to the separate information.

According to feature H7, the information display means that displays the display corresponding to the aspect information can also be used as the display means for displaying the setting value that is being changed.

Note that for the configuration of features H1 to H7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. A history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores game history information corresponding to a predetermined event in the history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of a game. )and,
Information deriving means (in the first embodiment, step S1402 to step S1412 in the management CPU 112 (in the third embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S2107 in the management CPU 112),
A first information display control means (management side a function of executing display processing in the CPU 112);
a second information display control means (a function for executing abnormality display processing in the main CPU 63) that controls the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the gaming machine is displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature I1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, mode information corresponding to the results of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed on the information display means. This makes it possible to grasp the gaming history management results, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. In addition, the information display means not only displays the mode information but also displays the abnormal state of the gaming machine. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the information display means.

Feature I2. The second information display control means is characterized in that when displaying a display corresponding to the abnormal state in a situation where the abnormal state does not occur, the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to the fact that the abnormal state does not occur. The gaming machine according to feature I1.

According to feature I2, it is possible to clearly identify whether an abnormal state has occurred by checking the information display means.

Feature I3. Feature I1 or I2 is characterized in that a period during which a display corresponding to the mode information is displayed on the information display means and a period during which a display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed on the information display means is distinguished. The game machine described.

According to feature I3, by understanding the situation in which display is being performed on the information display means, it is possible to determine which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is being performed on the information display means. It becomes possible to specify.

Feature I4. The second information display control means displays a display corresponding to the abnormal state by controlling the display of the information display means so that the display mode is different from the display mode when the display corresponding to the mode information is displayed. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, wherein

According to feature I4, by understanding the display mode of the information display means, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is being performed on the information display means. It becomes possible.

Feature I5. Features I1 to I4 characterized in that the information display means includes a plurality of individual information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) each capable of displaying a plurality of types of information. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature I5, by using a plurality of individual information display means to display a display corresponding to the mode information, it is possible to display a wide variety of mode information. Furthermore, by having multiple individual information display means, it is possible to make the display mode significantly different between when the display corresponding to the mode information is displayed and when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is displayed. .

Feature I6. When causing a display corresponding to the abnormal state to be displayed, the second information display control means selects a predetermined individual information display means from among the plurality of individual information display means that does not go into a non-display state when a display corresponding to the mode information is performed. The gaming machine according to feature I5, characterized in that the information display means (the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are in a non-display state.

According to feature I6, the predetermined individual information display means, which does not go into a non-display state when a display corresponding to mode information is performed, becomes a non-display state when a display corresponding to an abnormal state is performed. As a result, simply by understanding the type of individual information display means that is in a hidden state, it is possible to clearly identify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is being performed. becomes possible.

Feature I7. When causing a display corresponding to the abnormal state to be displayed, the second information display control means selects a specific individual information display means (the second information display means) which is in a display state when displaying the aspect information among the plurality of individual information display means. The third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204) are brought into a display state,
The display content of the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed may be displayed on the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. The gaming machine according to feature I6.

According to feature I7, in the specific individual information display means, the display contents that can be displayed when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed can also be displayed when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed, so that the aspect It becomes possible to avoid imposing restrictions on the display contents when displaying information corresponding to the information. In addition, even if the specific individual information display means has a configuration that can display the same display content, it will not become a non-display state if it has the configuration of feature I7 above and a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. When a predetermined individual information display means displays a display corresponding to an abnormal state, it becomes a non-display state, so it is possible to specify which of the plurality of individual information display means is displaying.

Feature I8. The gaming machine according to feature I6 or I7, wherein the first information display control means puts each of the plurality of individual information display means into a display state when causing the display corresponding to the mode information to be displayed.

According to feature I8, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state, so this corresponds to an abnormal state in which a predetermined individual information display means is in the non-display state. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the display from the display.

Feature I9. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the aspect information on the information display means, and even when changing the display of the aspect information, the predetermined individual information display means is in a non-display state. The gaming machine according to any one of features I6 to I8, characterized in that the game machine is configured such that the game machine is not maintained in the same state.

According to feature I9, when display corresponding to mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display means is not maintained in a non-display state. As a result, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is being performed on the plurality of individual information display means, regardless of the timing at which the plurality of individual information display means are checked. becomes possible.

Note that for the configuration of features I1 to I9, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. A history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores game history information corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event due to the execution of a game in the history storage means (history memory 117); )and,
Information deriving means (in the first embodiment, step S1402 to step S1412 in the management CPU 112 (in the third embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S2107 in the management CPU 112),
The information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the eleventh to In the fourteenth embodiment, a first information display control means (a function for executing display processing in the management CPU 112) that controls the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
Equipped with
The first information display control means sequentially changes the display corresponding to the aspect information on the information display means, and even when changing the display corresponding to the aspect information, the information display means does not display any information. A game machine characterized by preventing the game machine from being maintained in a state.

According to feature J1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, mode information corresponding to the results of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed on the information display means. This makes it possible to grasp the gaming history management results, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. Furthermore, when a display corresponding to the mode information is displayed, the information display means is not maintained in a non-display state. This makes it possible to specify the display corresponding to the mode information, regardless of the timing at which the information display means is checked.

Feature J2. As the information display means, individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the eleventh to fourteenth In the embodiment, the gaming machine according to feature J1 is provided with a plurality of first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204).

According to feature J2, by using a plurality of individual information display means to display a display corresponding to the mode information, it is possible to display a wide variety of mode information.

Feature J3. The gaming machine according to feature J2, wherein the first information display control means sets each of the plurality of individual information display means to a display state when causing the display corresponding to the aspect information to be displayed.

According to feature J3, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, and even when the display corresponding to the mode information is changed, the display state is not changed. maintained. This makes it easier to understand the aspect information.

Feature J4. The first information display control means is a part of the plurality of individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first notification display device 69a, the eleventh ~ In the fourteenth embodiment, a display corresponding to the type of the aspect information to be displayed is performed on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202), and a plurality of the individual information display means Individual information display means for displaying results (in the first to tenth embodiments, the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c; in the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments, the individual information display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c) The gaming machine according to feature J2 or J3, wherein a display corresponding to the content of the aspect information to be displayed is performed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204).

According to feature J4, when a display corresponding to aspect information is to be performed, a display corresponding to the type of aspect information to be displayed is performed on the individual information display means for the type display target, and an individual information display to be displayed as a result is performed. The means performs a display corresponding to the content of the mode information to be displayed. This makes it easier to understand the mode information to be displayed.

Note that for the configuration of features J1 to J4, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. A history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores game history information corresponding to a predetermined event in the history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of a game. ),
The history storage execution means is a means for preventing the history information from being stored in the history storage means even if the predetermined event occurs in a restricted situation (a function for making a negative determination in step S3501 in the main CPU 63). ) A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature K1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. In addition, in a restricted situation, history information is not stored even if a predetermined event occurs, so it is possible to prevent history information from being stored in situations where it is undesirable to store history information. .

Feature K2. The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein the restriction situation can occur as a situation from when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started until a restriction release event occurs.

According to feature K2, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a predetermined event due to an operation check immediately after the start of supply of operating power from being stored as history information.

Feature K3. means for setting the restricted state when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started and a restrictive condition is satisfied (a function for executing the process of step S3610 in the main CPU 63); ,
Means for not setting the above-mentioned restriction situation when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started and the above-mentioned restriction condition is not satisfied (a function of executing the process of step S3621 in the main CPU 63) and,
The gaming machine according to feature K2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature K3, there are cases in which a restriction situation is set and cases in which it is not set, depending on whether or not a restriction condition is satisfied. This makes it possible to avoid being set to a restricted status as needed.

Feature K4. The limiting situation may occur as a situation from when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started until the number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area exceeds a predetermined reference number. The gaming machine according to any one of K1 to K3.

According to feature K4, it is possible to prevent history information from being stored until the number of game balls discharged from the game area reaches or exceeds a predetermined reference number after the supply of operating power is started.

Feature K5. When a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of a game, the corresponding game history information is stored in the history storage means (normal counter area 231, opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, high frequency support mode counter area 233). History storage execution means for storing (function for executing normal ball entry management processing in the main CPU 63, ball entry management processing during opening/closing execution mode, and ball entry management processing during high frequency support mode);
information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step S4208 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the information deriving means does not derive the mode information when the situation is restricted.

According to feature K5, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, mode information corresponding to the results of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to grasp the gaming history management results, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. Furthermore, in the case of a restricted situation, modal information will not be derived even if a predetermined event occurs, so it is possible to prevent modal information from being derived in situations where it is undesirable to derive modal information. .

Feature K6. The gaming machine according to feature K5, wherein the restriction situation can occur as a situation from when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started until a restriction release event occurs.

According to feature K6, it is possible to prevent mode information from being derived using history information based on the occurrence of a predetermined event in an operation check immediately after the start of supply of operating power.

Feature K7. The limiting situation may occur as a situation from when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started until the number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area exceeds a predetermined reference number. The gaming machine described in K5 or K6.

According to feature K7, it is possible to prevent mode information from being derived until the number of game balls discharged from the game area reaches or exceeds a predetermined reference number after the supply of operating power is started.

Note that for the configuration of features K1 to K7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above feature G group, the above feature H group, the above feature I group, the above feature J group, and the above feature K group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. It includes a control means (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processing,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
a second predetermined process execution means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
When the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, at least one of the items stored in the internal storage means is evacuation execution means (in the fifteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S3802 and steps S3902 to S3907 in the main side CPU 63; In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S4402 in the main CPU 63, in the 17th embodiment, the function of executing the process of steps S4502 to S4507 in the main CPU 63, and in the 18th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S4502 in the main CPU 63. a function of executing the process of S4602, a function of executing the processes of step S4701 and step S4703 in the main CPU 63 in the 19th embodiment),
When or after the second predetermined process is finished, return execution means (in the fifteenth embodiment, step S3804 and A function to execute the process from step S3910 to step S3915, a function to execute the process from step S4404 in the main CPU 63 in the 16th embodiment, and a function to execute the process from step S4510 to step S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the 17th embodiment. (in the 18th embodiment, a function to execute the processing of step S4605 in the main CPU 63, and in the 19th embodiment, a function to execute the processing in step S4705 and step S4706 in the main CPU 63),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature L1, when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the information is stored in the internal storage means. At least some of the information is saved in a predetermined storage means. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage means from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. Furthermore, when or after the second predetermined process is finished, the information saved in the predetermined storage means is restored to the internal storage means. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is completed, it becomes possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process based on the state of the internal storage means before execution of the second predetermined process. From the above, it becomes possible to perform various types of control suitably.

Feature L2. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the predetermined information is part of the information stored in the internal storage means.

According to feature L2, only part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved to the predetermined storage means, so that the storage capacity required for saving the information in the internal storage means in the predetermined storage means is reduced. It is possible to suppress it.

Feature L3. The internal storage means has a first storage area (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register) and a second storage area (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and registers other than IY registers),
The second predetermined process execution means is configured to store information in the first storage area in the second predetermined process, but not to store information in the second storage area,
The gaming machine according to feature L2, wherein the saving execution means saves the information stored in the first storage area to the predetermined storage means.

According to feature L3, when a situation changes from a situation where the first predetermined process is being executed to a situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when a situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the second predetermined process is stored in the internal storage means. The information in the first storage area to be stored is saved to a predetermined storage means. As a result, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before execution of the second predetermined process, It becomes possible to suppress the storage capacity required to save information in the storage means.

Feature L4. The predetermined storage means is
a first predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control, stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
a second predetermined storage area (work area 223 for non-specific control, stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information to the second predetermined storage area.

According to feature L4, since the predetermined storage means is provided with the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area, the storage destination of information in the predetermined storage means can be determined by the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. It becomes possible to make a clear difference. Thereby, when executing one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process, it is possible to prevent information used in the other process from being deleted. In this case, when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, at least a portion of the information stored in the internal storage means is information is saved to the second predetermined storage area. This makes it possible to save the information in the internal storage means immediately before the start of the second predetermined process, and also makes it possible to save the information without using the first predetermined storage area.

Feature L5. The evacuation execution means is
When the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the first predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is used in the first predetermined process. means for saving to the first predetermined storage area (in the fifteenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S3802 in the main CPU 63; in the sixteenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S4402 in the main CPU 63); ,
When the situation changes from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the second predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is stored in the second predetermined process. (a function of executing steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, and a function of executing steps S4502 to S4507 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment) (in the 18th embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S4602 in the main CPU 63; in the 19th embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S4702 and step S4703 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to feature L4, comprising:

According to feature L5, the first predetermined information that is part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the first predetermined storage area in the first predetermined process, and the part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the first predetermined storage area in the first predetermined process. The second predetermined information is saved in the second predetermined storage area in the second predetermined process. As a result, it becomes possible to save each piece of information stored in the internal storage means at a timing that is preferable, and the process for saving information is executed in a distributed manner between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. becomes possible.

Feature L6. The gaming machine according to feature L5, wherein the first predetermined information is information in a flag register provided in the internal storage means.

According to feature L6, it is possible to appropriately save information in the flag register in a situation where the first predetermined process is being executed.

Feature L7. The second predetermined storage area is
a stack area (stack area 224 for non-specific control) into which information can be written with a push command and read with a pop command;
a work area (work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information can be written and read by a load command;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features L4 to L6, wherein the saving execution means saves the predetermined information to one of the stack area and the work area.

According to feature L7, when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the stack area in the second predetermined storage area At least part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved to one of the work area and the work area. This makes it possible to consolidate information saving destinations, and to simplify the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for restoring information.

Feature L8. The gaming machine according to feature L7, wherein the saving execution means saves the predetermined information to the work area.

According to feature L8, since the save destination of at least part of the information stored in the internal storage means is the work area, it is possible to save the information without cumulatively changing the stack pointer. Become.

Feature L9. The first predetermined storage area is capable of storing and reading information when the first predetermined process is executed, and is capable of reading information when the second predetermined process is executed. Inability to remember information
The second predetermined storage area is capable of storing and reading information when the second predetermined process is executed, and is capable of reading information when the first predetermined process is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features L4 to L8, characterized in that information cannot be stored.

According to feature L9, it is possible to treat the first predetermined storage area as a storage area dedicated to the first predetermined process, and it is also possible to treat the second predetermined storage area as a storage area dedicated to the second predetermined process. becomes.

Feature L10. The predetermined storage means is
a stack area (stack area 224 for non-specific control) into which information can be written with a push command and read with a pop command;
a work area (work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information can be written and read by a load command;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L9, wherein the saving execution means saves the predetermined information to one of the stack area and the work area.

According to feature L10, it becomes possible to consolidate the save destinations of the predetermined information, and it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for saving the predetermined information and the processing configuration for restoring the predetermined information.

Feature L11. The gaming machine according to feature L10, wherein the saving execution means saves the predetermined information to the work area.

According to feature L11, since the save destination of the predetermined information is the work area, it becomes possible to save the information without cumulatively changing the stack pointer.

Feature L12. The predetermined information is a part of information stored in the internal storage means,
The save execution means stores the internal storage means when the situation changes from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed or when the situation changes to a situation where the second predetermined process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature L11, further comprising a means for saving specific information, which is a part of the information stored in the stack area, into the stack area (a function of executing the process of step S3802 in the main CPU 63). .

According to feature L12, in a configuration in which predetermined information is saved in the work area, specific information is saved in the stack area. This allows the information stored in the internal storage means to be distributed and saved in the work area and the stack area.

Feature L13. The gaming machine according to feature L12, wherein the predetermined information has a larger amount of information than the specific information.

According to feature L13, by saving the predetermined information having a larger amount of information than the specific information to the work area, a large amount of information is cumulatively stored in the stack area when saving the information stored in the internal storage means. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Feature L14. When the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to a situation where the second predetermined process is executed, information on a stack pointer provided in the internal storage means; is a configuration that is fixed information,
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L13, wherein the information on the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means is not saved by the save execution means.

According to feature L14, there is no need to secure a capacity for saving stack pointer information in the predetermined storage means, so it is possible to suppress the capacity of the predetermined storage means. Furthermore, even in a configuration where the stack pointer information is not saved, if the situation changes from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or the situation where the second predetermined process is executed. In this case, the stack pointer information becomes fixed information, so it is possible to restore the stack pointer information to the one before the start of the second predetermined process without saving the stack pointer information as described above. It is possible.

Feature L15. Means for setting the fixed information in the stack pointer when or after the second predetermined process (in the fifteenth embodiment, a function for executing the process in step S3909 in the main CPU 63, in the seventeenth embodiment) According to the embodiment, the gaming machine according to feature L14 is equipped with a function of executing the process of step S4509 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing the process of step S4604 in the main CPU 63 in the 18th embodiment. .

According to feature L15, when or after the second predetermined process ends, it is possible to restore the stack pointer information to the information before the second predetermined process was started.

Feature L16. When the situation changes from executing the first predetermined process to executing the second predetermined process, or when the situation changes to executing the second predetermined process, the stack pointer is set to the second predetermined process. means for setting the corresponding second response start information (in the fifteenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S3901 in the main CPU 63; in the seventeenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S4501 in the main CPU 63; In the eighteenth embodiment, the gaming machine according to feature L14 or L15 is provided with a function of executing the process of step S4601 in the main CPU 63.

According to feature L16, when the second predetermined process is started, the second response start information corresponding to the second predetermined process is set to the stack pointer, so that an appropriate address can be set in the second predetermined process. It becomes possible to store information in the stack area.

Feature L17. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L16, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a gaming history.

According to feature L17, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, thereby controlling the progress of the game. It becomes possible to prevent the information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the process for managing the game history.

Feature L18. The predetermined storage means is
a first predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control, stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
a second predetermined storage area (work area 223 for non-specific control, stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
Equipped with
The second predetermined storage area includes a history storage area (normal counter area 231, opening/closing execution mode counter area 232) in which game history information corresponding to a predetermined event occurring as a result of a game being executed is stored. , a high-frequency support mode counter area 233).

According to feature L18, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. In addition, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Feature L19. The second predetermined process execution means is an information derivation means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) that derives mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. The gaming machine according to feature L18, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of (a).

According to feature L19, the game history, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, can be managed by deriving mode information corresponding to gaming results in a predetermined period using history information stored in the history storage area. It becomes possible to understand the results.

Feature L20. The gaming machine according to feature L19, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) that stores the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to feature L20, when mode information corresponding to game results in a predetermined period is derived using history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the gaming history management results at any time. In addition, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Note that for the configuration of features L1 to L20, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature M group>
Feature M1. It includes a control means (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processing,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
a second predetermined process execution means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
When the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, at least one of the items stored in the internal storage means is evacuation execution means (in the 15th embodiment, a function to execute the processing of steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63, in the 17th embodiment In the 18th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S4502 to S4507, and in the 19th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S4701 and S4602. function to execute the process of S4703),
When or after the second predetermined process is finished, return execution means (in the fifteenth embodiment, step S3910 in the main CPU 63) returns the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means to the internal storage means A function to execute the process in step S3915, a function to execute the process in steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the 17th embodiment, a function to execute the process in step S4605 in the main CPU 63 in the 18th embodiment, In the 19th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S4705 and step S4706 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the saving execution means saves the predetermined information in the predetermined storage means in response to a load command.

According to feature M1, when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the information is stored in the internal storage means. At least part of the predetermined information is saved in a predetermined storage means. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage means from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. Further, when or after the second predetermined process is finished, the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means is restored to the internal storage means. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is completed, it becomes possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process based on the state of the internal storage means before execution of the second predetermined process. When the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the above predetermined information is saved to the predetermined storage means by a load instruction. . This makes it possible to save predetermined information without changing the stack pointer.

Feature M2. The predetermined storage means is
a stack area (stack area 224 for non-specific control) into which information can be written with a push command and read with a pop command;
a work area (work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information can be written and read by a load command;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature M1, wherein the saving execution means saves the predetermined information to the work area.

According to feature M2, since the predetermined information, which is at least part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is saved to the work area, the information is saved without cumulatively changing the stack pointer. becomes possible.

Feature M3. The predetermined information is a part of information stored in the internal storage means,
The evacuation execution means stores the internal storage means when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature M2, further comprising means for saving specific information that is part of the information stored in the stack area to the stack area (a function of executing the process of step S3802 in the main CPU 63). .

According to feature M3, in a configuration in which predetermined information is saved in the work area, specific information is saved in the stack area. This allows the information stored in the internal storage means to be distributed and saved in the work area and the stack area.

Feature M4. The gaming machine according to feature M3, wherein the predetermined information has a larger amount of information than the specific information.

According to feature M4, by saving the predetermined information having a larger amount of information than the specific information to the work area, a large amount of information is cumulatively stored in the stack area when saving the information stored in the internal storage means. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Feature M5. The work area is
a first work area (work area 221 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
a second work area (work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features M2 to M4, wherein the saving execution means saves the predetermined information to the second work area.

According to feature M5, by providing the first work area and the second work area in the work area, the storage destination of information in the work area is clearly different between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. becomes possible. Thereby, when executing one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process, it is possible to prevent information used in the other process from being deleted. In this case, when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, at least a portion of the information stored in the internal storage means is information is saved to the second work area. This makes it possible to save the information in the internal storage means immediately before the start of the second predetermined process, and also makes it possible to save the information without using the first work area.

Feature M6. The first work area is capable of storing and reading information when the first predetermined process is executed, and is capable of reading information when the second predetermined process is executed. Inability to remember information
The second work area is capable of storing and reading information when the second predetermined process is executed, and is capable of reading information when the first predetermined process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature M5, characterized in that information cannot be stored.

According to feature M6, it becomes possible to treat the first work area as a storage area dedicated to the first predetermined process, and it becomes possible to treat the second work area as a storage area dedicated to the second predetermined process. .

Feature M7. It includes a control means (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processing,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
a second predetermined process execution means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
When the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, at least one of the items stored in the internal storage means is evacuation execution means (in the 15th embodiment, a function to execute the processing of steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63, in the 17th embodiment In the 18th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S4502 to S4507, and in the 19th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S4701 and S4602. function to execute the process of S4703),
When or after the second predetermined process is finished, return execution means (in the fifteenth embodiment, step S3910 in the main CPU 63) returns the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means to the internal storage means A function to execute the process in step S3915, a function to execute the process in steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the 17th embodiment, a function to execute the process in step S4605 in the main CPU 63 in the 18th embodiment, In the 19th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S4705 and step S4706 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The predetermined storage means is
a stack area (stack area 224 for non-specific control) into which information can be written with a push command and read with a pop command;
a work area (work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information can be written and read by a load command;
Equipped with
A gaming machine, wherein the saving execution means saves the predetermined information to one of the stack area and the work area.

According to feature M7, when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the information is stored in the internal storage means. At least part of the predetermined information is saved in a predetermined storage means. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage means from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. Further, when or after the second predetermined process is finished, the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means is restored to the internal storage means. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is completed, it becomes possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process based on the state of the internal storage means before execution of the second predetermined process.

In addition, when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, one of the stack area and the work area in the predetermined storage means. Then, the predetermined information is saved. This makes it possible to consolidate information saving destinations, and to simplify the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for restoring information.

Note that for the configuration of features M1 to M7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics N group>
Feature N1. It includes a control means (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processing,
The control means is
a first predetermined process execution means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
a second predetermined process execution means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
Equipped with
When the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means is configured to be fixed information. A gaming machine.

According to feature N1, when the situation changes from the situation in which the first predetermined process is executed to the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed, the information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means becomes fixed information, so that the second predetermined process is executed. There is no need to save information on the stack pointer when starting a predetermined process. This eliminates the need to secure a storage area for saving stack pointer information. Additionally, when the situation changes from executing the first predetermined process to executing the second predetermined process, the stack pointer information becomes fixed information, so the stack pointer information should not be saved as described above. However, it is possible to restore the stack pointer information to the information before the start of the second predetermined process.

Feature N2. Means for setting the fixed information in the stack pointer when or after the second predetermined process (in the fifteenth embodiment, a function for executing the process in step S3909 in the main CPU 63, in the seventeenth embodiment) In the embodiment, the gaming machine according to feature N1 is equipped with a function of executing the process of step S4509 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing the process of step S4604 in the main CPU 63 in the 18th embodiment. .

According to feature N2, when or after the second predetermined process is finished, it is possible to restore the stack pointer information to the information before the second predetermined process was started.

Feature N3. means for setting second response start information corresponding to the second predetermined process in the stack pointer when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed; In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3901 in the main CPU 63, in the 17th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S4501 in the main CPU 63, and in the 18th embodiment, the process of step S4601 in the main CPU 63 The gaming machine according to feature N1 or N2, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the above function.

According to feature N3, when the second predetermined process is started, the second response start information corresponding to the second predetermined process is set to the stack pointer, so that an appropriate address can be set in the second predetermined process. It becomes possible to store information in the stack area.

Feature N4. When the situation changes from executing the first predetermined process to executing the second predetermined process, or when the situation changes to executing the second predetermined process, at least one of the items stored in the internal storage means is evacuation execution means (in the fifteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S3802 and steps S3902 to S3907 in the main side CPU 63; In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S4402 in the main CPU 63, in the 17th embodiment, the function of executing the process of steps S4502 to S4507 in the main CPU 63, and in the 18th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S4502 in the main CPU 63. a function of executing the process of S4602, a function of executing the processes of step S4701 and step S4703 in the main CPU 63 in the 19th embodiment),
When or after the second predetermined process is finished, return execution means (in the fifteenth embodiment, step S3804 in the main CPU 63 and A function to execute the process from step S3910 to step S3915, a function to execute the process from step S4404 in the main CPU 63 in the 16th embodiment, and a function to execute the process from step S4510 to step S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the 17th embodiment. In the 18th embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step S4605; in the 19th embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of steps S4705 and S4706);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N3, wherein the information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means is not saved by the save execution means.

According to feature N4, when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the information is stored in the internal storage means. At least some of the information is saved in a predetermined storage means. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage means from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. Furthermore, when or after the second predetermined process is finished, the information saved in the predetermined storage means is restored to the internal storage means. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is completed, it becomes possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process based on the state of the internal storage means before execution of the second predetermined process. Furthermore, since the stack pointer information is not to be saved, there is no need to secure a capacity for saving the stack pointer information in the predetermined storage means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the capacity of the predetermined storage means. Furthermore, even in a configuration where the stack pointer information is not saved, if the situation changes from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or the situation where the second predetermined process is executed. In this case, the stack pointer information becomes fixed information, so it is possible to restore the stack pointer information to the one before the start of the second predetermined process without saving the stack pointer information as described above. It is possible.

Feature N5. The predetermined storage means is
a first predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control, stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
a second predetermined storage area (work area 223 for non-specific control, stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature N4, wherein the saving execution means saves the predetermined information to the second predetermined storage area.

According to feature N5, since the predetermined storage means is provided with the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area, the storage destination of information in the predetermined storage means can be determined by the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. It becomes possible to make a clear difference. Thereby, when executing one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process, it is possible to prevent information used in the other process from being deleted. In this case, when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, at least a portion of the information stored in the internal storage means is information is saved to the second predetermined storage area. This makes it possible to save the information in the internal storage means immediately before the start of the second predetermined process, and also makes it possible to save the information without using the first predetermined storage area.

Feature N6. The first predetermined storage area is capable of storing and reading information when the first predetermined process is executed, and is capable of reading information when the second predetermined process is executed. Inability to remember information about things,
The second predetermined storage area is capable of storing and reading information when the second predetermined process is executed, and is capable of reading information when the first predetermined process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature N5, characterized in that it is not possible to store information about objects.

According to feature N6, it is possible to treat the first predetermined storage area as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and it is also possible to treat the second predetermined storage area as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. becomes.

Note that for the configuration of features N1 to N6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group O>
Feature O1. It includes a control means (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processing,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
a second predetermined process execution means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
When the situation changes from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to a situation where the second predetermined process is executed, at least a portion of the storage in the internal storage means is stored. A first state setting means (which executes the processing of steps S4803 to S4808 in the main CPU 63) to set the state of the predetermined storage area (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register) to a predetermined state. function) and
a second state setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S4903 to S4908 in the main CPU 63) that sets the state of the predetermined storage area to the predetermined state when or after the second predetermined process is finished;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature O1, when the situation changes from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the predetermined storage area of the internal storage means The state of the predetermined storage area is set to a predetermined state, and when or after the second predetermined process ends, the state of the predetermined storage area is set to the predetermined state again. This allows the state of the predetermined storage area to be in the predetermined state before and after the second predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the predetermined storage area caused by one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process from affecting the other process. From the above, it becomes possible to perform various types of control suitably.

Feature O2. The gaming machine according to feature O1, wherein the predetermined state is a state when supply of operating power to the control means is started.

According to feature O2, the predetermined storage area is set to the predetermined state when the supply of operating power to the control means is started, so the processing configuration for setting the predetermined state is simplified. becomes possible.

Feature O3. The gaming machine according to feature O1 or O2, wherein the predetermined state is a state in which the predetermined storage area is cleared to "0".

According to feature O3, since the predetermined storage area is set to a state cleared to "0" as the predetermined state, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for setting the predetermined state.

Feature O4. The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O3, wherein the predetermined storage area is a part of the storage area in the internal storage means.

According to feature O4, only a part of the storage area of the internal storage means is set to the predetermined state, so that it is possible to reduce the processing load for setting the predetermined state.

Feature O5. The internal storage means includes at least the predetermined storage area and another storage area (registers other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register),
The second predetermined process execution means is configured to store information in the predetermined storage area in the second predetermined process, but not to store information in the separate storage area,
The gaming machine according to feature O4, wherein the first state setting means and the second state setting means are configured not to change the state of the separate storage area.

According to feature O5, when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the second predetermined process is stored in the internal storage means. A predetermined storage area in which information is to be stored is set to a predetermined state. This makes it possible to prevent the state of the predetermined storage area caused by the first predetermined process from affecting the second predetermined process. In addition, since the state of the separate storage area is not changed, setting it to the predetermined state when the second predetermined process is started does not affect the process after the second predetermined process ends. It becomes possible.

Feature O6. Features O1 to O5, characterized in that the information in the predetermined storage area before the predetermined state is set by the first state setting means is information that is not used after the second predetermined process is completed. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature O6, the second predetermined process ends even if the predetermined storage area is set to the predetermined state when the second predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed. This makes it possible to avoid affecting subsequent processing.

Feature O7. A portion stored in the internal storage means when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed. evacuation execution means (a function for executing the process of step S4802 in the main CPU 63) that saves predetermined information (information of the flag register) that is information on the information in the predetermined storage means (main RAM 65);
return execution means for restoring the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means to the internal storage means when or after the second predetermined process is finished (a function of executing the process of step S4810 in the main CPU 63); and,
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O6, characterized by comprising:

According to feature O7, when the situation changes from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the information is stored in the internal storage means. Part of the predetermined information is saved in a predetermined storage means. As a result, when the second predetermined process is executed, the information stored in the internal storage means when the first predetermined process was executed and which is necessary for the subsequent execution of the first predetermined process is rewritten. It is possible to prevent this from happening. Further, when or after the second predetermined process is finished, the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means is restored to the internal storage means. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is completed, it becomes possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process based on the state of the internal storage means before execution of the second predetermined process.

Feature O8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a gaming history.

According to feature O8, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, thereby controlling the progress of the game. It becomes possible to prevent the information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the process for managing the game history.

Feature O9. The predetermined storage means is
a first predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control, stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
a second predetermined storage area (work area 223 for non-specific control, stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
Equipped with
The second predetermined storage area includes a history storage area (normal counter area 231, opening/closing execution mode counter area 232) in which game history information corresponding to a predetermined event occurring as a result of a game being executed is stored. , a high-frequency support mode counter area 233).

According to feature O9, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. In addition, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Feature O10. The second predetermined process execution means is an information derivation means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) that derives mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. The gaming machine according to feature O9, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of (a).

According to feature O10, the game history, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, can be managed by deriving mode information corresponding to gaming results in a predetermined period using history information stored in the history storage area. It becomes possible to understand the results.

Feature O11. The gaming machine according to feature O10, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) that stores the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to feature O11, when mode information corresponding to game results in a predetermined period is derived using history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the gaming history management results at any time. In addition, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Note that for the configuration of features O1 to O11, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature P group>
Feature P1. It includes a control means (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processing,
The control means is
a first predetermined process execution means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
a second predetermined process execution means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
a first predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control, stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
a second predetermined storage area (work area 223 for non-specific control, stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature P1, a first predetermined storage area and a second predetermined storage area are provided, and the first predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process. It is treated as a storage area dedicated to the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to clearly differentiate the storage location of information in the predetermined storage means between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Therefore, when executing one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process, it is possible to prevent information used in the other process from being deleted.

Feature P2. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to feature P1, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a gaming history.

According to feature P2, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, thereby controlling the progress of the game. It becomes possible to prevent the information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the process for managing the game history.

Feature P3. The second predetermined storage area includes a history storage area (normal counter area 231, opening/closing execution mode counter area 232) in which game history information corresponding to a predetermined event occurring as a result of a game being executed is stored. , a high-frequency support mode counter area 233).

According to feature P3, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. In addition, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Feature P4. The second predetermined process execution means is an information derivation means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) that derives mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. The gaming machine according to feature P3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of (a).

According to feature P4, the game history, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, can be managed by deriving mode information corresponding to game results in a predetermined period using history information stored in the history storage area. It becomes possible to understand the results.

Feature P5. The gaming machine according to feature P4, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) that stores the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to feature P5, when mode information corresponding to game results in a predetermined period is derived using history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the gaming history management results at any time. In addition, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Feature P6. When the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the first predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is used in the first predetermined process. A first saving means (in the fifteenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S3802 in the main CPU 63, and in the sixteenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S4402 in the main CPU 63) function) and
When the situation changes from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the second predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is stored in the second predetermined process. A second saving means (in the 15th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63, and in the 17th embodiment, a function of executing steps S4502 to S4502 in the main CPU 63) A function to execute the process of step S4507, a function to execute the process of step S4602 in the main side CPU 63 in the 18th embodiment, a function to execute the processes of step S4701 and step S4703 in the main side CPU 63 in the 19th embodiment) and,
The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P5, characterized by comprising:

According to feature P6, the first predetermined information that is part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the first predetermined storage area in the first predetermined process, and the part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the first predetermined storage area in the first predetermined process. The second predetermined information is saved in the second predetermined storage area in the second predetermined process. As a result, it becomes possible to save each piece of information stored in the internal storage means at a timing that is preferable, and the process for saving information is executed in a distributed manner between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. becomes possible.

Feature P7. When or after the second predetermined process is finished, first return execution means (in the fifteenth embodiment, the main (a function of executing the process of step S3804 in the side CPU 63, a function of executing the process of step S4404 in the main side CPU 63 in the 16th embodiment);
When or after the second predetermined process is finished, a second return execution means (in the fifteenth embodiment, the main In the 17th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S3910 to S3915 in the side CPU 63, and in the 18th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S4605. (a function of executing the process, in the nineteenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S4705 and step S4706 in the main CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to feature P6, comprising:

According to feature P7, when or after the second predetermined process ends, the first predetermined information saved in the first predetermined storage area is returned to the internal storage means, and the first predetermined information saved in the second predetermined storage area is returned to the internal storage means. Since the second predetermined information is restored to the internal storage means, it is possible to restore the state of the internal storage means to the state before the second predetermined process was started.

Feature P8. The gaming machine according to feature P6 or P7, wherein the first predetermined information includes information of a flag register provided in the internal storage means.

According to feature P8, it is possible to appropriately save information in the flag register in a situation where the first predetermined process is being executed.

Feature P9. The gaming machine according to any one of features P6 to P8, wherein the second predetermined information includes information on all registers of the internal storage means.

According to feature P9, the information of all the registers in the internal storage means is saved at once, so there is no need to selectively save the information of the registers.

Feature P10. The second predetermined storage area is
a stack area (stack area 224 for non-specific control) into which information is written by a push command and read by a pop command;
A work area (work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information is written and read by a load instruction;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature P9, wherein the second saving execution means saves the second predetermined information to one of the stack area and the work area.

According to feature P10, information in all registers of the internal storage means is saved to one of the stack area and the work area in the second predetermined storage area. This makes it possible to consolidate the save destinations for information of all registers, and it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for restoring.

Feature P11. The gaming machine according to feature P10, wherein the second saving execution means saves the second predetermined information to the stack area.

According to feature P11, it is possible to save information in all registers while not using the work area.

Feature P12. The gaming machine according to any one of features P6 to P11, wherein the second predetermined information includes information on a stack pointer of the internal storage means.

According to feature P12, it is possible to appropriately save stack pointer information in a situation where the first predetermined process is being executed.

Note that for the configuration of features P1 to P12, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature L group, the feature M group, the feature N group, the feature O group, and the feature P group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately perform various controls, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature Q group>
Features Q1. A control unit (MPU 62) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the process;
History storage means (management RAM 241) that is provided as a separate chip from the control means and is capable of temporarily storing information;
Equipped with
The control means includes a history storage execution means (normal ball entry management processing in the main CPU 63, A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing ball entry management processing during opening/closing execution mode and ball entry management processing during high frequency support mode.

According to feature Q1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, since the history storage means is provided as a separate chip from the control means, it is possible to increase the storage capacity for storing history information while using a general-purpose control means.

Features Q2. The gaming machine according to feature Q1, wherein the control means includes a predetermined storage means (main RAM 65) that temporarily stores information when executing various processes.

According to feature Q2, in a configuration including not only a predetermined storage means provided in the control means but also a history storage means provided as a separate chip from the control means, by storing history information in the history storage means. It becomes possible to store and hold a large amount of historical information.

Feature Q3. The gaming machine according to feature Q2, wherein the control means causes the predetermined storage means to temporarily store information when executing processing related to the history information.

According to feature Q3, in a configuration in which the history storage means for storing history information is provided as a separate chip from the control means, when processing related to history information is executed, a predetermined storage means provided in the control means is used. Since the information is temporarily stored, it is possible to prevent the processing speed from decreasing excessively when processing related to history information is executed.

Features Q4. The control means includes information derivation means (executes the process of step S4208 in the main CPU 63) that derives mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q3, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of:

According to feature Q4, the game history, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, can be managed by deriving mode information corresponding to the game results in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means. It becomes possible to understand the results.

Features Q5. The gaming machine according to feature Q4, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) that stores the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to feature Q5, when mode information corresponding to game results in a predetermined period is derived using history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the gaming history management results at any time.

Note that for the configuration of features Q1 to Q5, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature Q group described above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic R group>
Feature R1. a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
Changing the set value to be used based on the fact that a plurality of events including the first event and the second event occur when the supply of operating power to the control means having the setting means is started. Situation generation means (in the 22nd embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5003 to S5006 in the main CPU 63, and in another embodiment, a situation generation unit that causes the main CPU 63 to reach a settable situation) a function of executing the process of step S5507, a function of executing the process of steps S5703 to S5705 and step S5715 in the main CPU 63 in the 23rd embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature R1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, in order to set the set value to be used, multiple events including the first event and the second event must occur when the supply of operating power to the control means is started. Must be. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to fraudulently set a setting value to be used.

Feature R2. An open grasping means for grasping that the opening/closing body (front door frame 14) is in an open state (in the 22nd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S5005 in the main CPU 63, in another embodiment, a step in the main CPU 63) (a function of executing the process of step S5505, a function of executing the process of step S5703 in the main CPU 63 in the 23rd embodiment),
Feature R1 characterized in that the situation generation means specifies that the first event has occurred based on the fact that the opening/closing body is recognized by the openness recognition means as being in an open state. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature R2, in order to set the setting value to be used, the opening/closing body needs to be in an open state. As a result, if an act of fraudulently setting a setting value to be used is performed, it becomes possible to highlight the fraudulent act, and as a result, it becomes easier to discover the fraudulent act. .

Feature R3. Separate opening/closing means (in the 22nd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S5006 in the main side CPU 63; in another embodiment, the main side CPU 63 (in the twenty-third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S5704 in the main CPU 63),
The situation generation means is characterized in that it specifies that the second event has occurred based on the fact that the separate opening/closing body is grasped by the separate openness grasping means. The gaming machine described in feature R2.

According to feature R3, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to open the opening/closing body but also to open another opening/closing body. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to fraudulently set a setting value to be used, and it is also possible to make the fraudulent behavior noticeable.

Feature R4. The setting means selects at least one of the setting value to be used and setting the setting value to be used, based on the operation of the predetermined operation means (update button 68b, reset button 68c). The configuration is to perform
The gaming machine according to feature R2 or R3, wherein the predetermined operating means is configured to be operable by opening a separate opening/closing body.

According to feature R4, the setting value to be used cannot be set unless an opening/closing body different from the separate opening/closing body that is opened to enable the predetermined operating means to be operated is opened. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to fraudulently set a setting value to be used, and it is also possible to make the fraudulent behavior noticeable.

Feature R5. The opening/closing body defines the front side of the gaming machine in the gaming area where the gaming balls flow down,
The gaming machine according to any one of features R2 to R4, wherein the gaming area is opened to the front of the gaming machine by opening the opening/closing body.

According to feature R5, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary to open the opening/closing body to open the gaming area to the front of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to fraudulently set a setting value to be used, and it is also possible to make the fraudulent behavior noticeable.

Feature R6. The situation generating means specifies that one of the plurality of events has occurred based on the fact that a predetermined operation is being performed with a setting key on the setting key insertion section (setting key insertion section 68a). The gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R5.

According to feature R6, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to perform a predetermined operation using the setting key on the setting key insertion section, but also to cause a different event to occur. be. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to fraudulently set a setting value to be used.

Feature R7. The situation generation means generates the plurality of events based on the fact that a predetermined game event (operation of the firing operation device 28, ball entering the through gate 35) occurs when a game is played. The gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R6, characterized in that it is specified that one of the events has occurred.

According to feature R7, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is not only necessary to generate a predetermined gaming event that occurs when a game is played, but also to set a setting value that is to be used. It is necessary to cause the following events to occur. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to fraudulently set a setting value to be used.

Feature R8. The situation generating means is based on the fact that a game ball is detected by ball entry detection means (gate detection sensor 49a) that detects that a game ball has entered a predetermined ball entry section provided in the gaming area. , the gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R7, characterized in that it is specified that one of the plurality of events has occurred.

According to feature R8, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary to make the game ball enter a predetermined ball entry part, and it is also necessary to cause another event to occur. There is. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to fraudulently set a setting value to be used.

Feature R9. A setting value notification means (a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) that causes a notification means to notify the setting value to be used set by the setting means,
The setting value notification means transmits the setting value to be used set by the setting means to the notification means based on the occurrence of a plurality of events including the first event and the second event. The gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R8, characterized in that the game machine is notified by:

According to feature R9, it is possible to make it difficult to fraudulently check the setting values. In addition, the administrator of the game hall only needs to generate the first and second events when setting the setting values to be used or when confirming the setting values, so the work is simplified. This will make it easier to understand each task.

Feature R10. a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
A plurality of events including both a predetermined operation by a setting key on the setting key insertion part (setting key insertion part 68a) and another event different from the predetermined operation by the setting key on the setting key insertion part are performed. Situation generation means (in the 22nd embodiment, a situation generation means in the main CPU 63) that creates a setting possible situation in which the setting value to be used can be set by the setting means based on what has occurred. A function to execute the processing from step S5003 to step S5006, in another form, a function to execute the processing from step S5503 to step S5507 in the main CPU 63, and in the twenty-third embodiment, a function to execute the processing from step S5703 to step S5705 and step S5715 in the main CPU 63. functions) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature R10, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to perform a predetermined operation using the setting key on the setting key insertion section, but also to cause a different event to occur. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to fraudulently set a setting value to be used.

Feature R11. An open grasping means for grasping that the opening/closing body (front door frame 14) is in an open state (in the 22nd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S5005 in the main CPU 63, in another embodiment, a step in the main CPU 63) (a function of executing the process of step S5505, a function of executing the process of step S5703 in the main CPU 63 in the 23rd embodiment),
Feature R10 is characterized in that the situation generation means specifies that the other event has occurred based on the fact that the opening/closing body is recognized by the openness recognition means as being in the open state. The game machine described.

According to feature R11, in order to set the setting value to be used, the opening/closing body needs to be in an open state. As a result, if an act of fraudulently setting a setting value to be used is performed, it becomes possible to highlight the fraudulent act, and as a result, it becomes easier to discover the fraudulent act. .

Feature R12. Separate opening/closing means (in the 22nd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S5006 in the main side CPU 63; in another embodiment, the main side CPU 63 (in the twenty-third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S5704 in the main CPU 63),
The situation generating means identifies that one of the plurality of events has occurred based on the fact that the separate opening/closing body is in an open state is grasped by the separate opening grasping means. The gaming machine according to feature R11.

According to feature R12, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to open the opening/closing body but also to open another opening/closing body. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to fraudulently set a setting value to be used, and it is also possible to make the fraudulent behavior noticeable.

Feature R13. The setting means selects at least one of the setting value to be used and setting the setting value to be used, based on the operation of the predetermined operation means (update button 68b, reset button 68c). The configuration is to perform
The gaming machine according to feature R11 or R12, wherein the predetermined operating means is configured to be operable by opening a separate opening/closing body.

According to feature R13, the setting value to be used cannot be set unless an opening/closing body different from the separate opening/closing body that is opened to enable the operation of the predetermined operating means is opened. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to fraudulently set a setting value to be used, and it is also possible to make the fraudulent behavior noticeable.

Feature R14. The opening/closing body defines the front side of the gaming machine in the gaming area where the gaming balls flow down,
The gaming machine according to any one of features R11 to R13, wherein the gaming area is opened to the front of the gaming machine by opening the opening/closing body.

According to feature R14, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary to open the opening/closing body to open the gaming area to the front of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to fraudulently set a setting value to be used, and it is also possible to make the fraudulent behavior noticeable.

Feature R15. The situation generation means generates the plurality of events based on the fact that a predetermined game event (operation of the firing operation device 28, ball entering the through gate 35) occurs when a game is played. The gaming machine according to any one of features R10 to R14, characterized in that it is specified that one of the events has occurred.

According to feature R15, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to perform a predetermined operation using the setting key in the setting key insertion section, but also to perform a predetermined operation that occurs when a game is played. It is necessary to generate a gaming event. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to fraudulently set a setting value to be used.

Feature R16. The situation generating means is based on the fact that a game ball is detected by ball entry detection means (gate detection sensor 49a) that detects that a game ball has entered a predetermined ball entry section provided in the gaming area. , the gaming machine according to any one of features R10 to R15, characterized in that it is specified that one of the plurality of events has occurred.

According to feature R16, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to perform a predetermined operation using the setting key on the setting key insertion part, but also to insert a game ball into a predetermined ball entry part. You need to make the ball. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to fraudulently set a setting value to be used.

Feature R17. A setting value notification means (a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) that causes a notification means to notify the setting value to be used set by the setting means,
The setting value notification means is configured to notify the setting value based on the fact that the predetermined operation with the setting key on the setting key insertion section is being performed and that a plurality of events including both of the other events have occurred. The gaming machine according to any one of features R10 to R16, characterized in that the setting value to be used that is set by the notification means is notified.

According to feature R17, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of fraudulently checking the set value. In addition, whether the administrator of the game hall is setting the setting value to be used or confirming the setting value, he/she must perform the specified operation using the setting key in the setting key insertion section and another event may occur. Since the tasks can be shared, it becomes easier to understand each task.

Note that for the configuration of features R1 to R17, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature R group described above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to deal with fraud against the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature S group>
Feature S1. a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
A situation generating means (in the 22nd embodiment, the processing of steps S5003 to S5006 and steps S5401 to S5408 in the main CPU 63 In another embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S5503 to S5507, and in the twenty-third embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S5703 to S5705 and S5715. In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S5801 to S5804; in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S5901 to S5904);
Setting value grasping means (in the 22nd embodiment, step S5017 in the main CPU 63 and a function of executing the processing of steps S5111 and S5112 (in another form, a function of executing the processing of steps S5611 and S5612 in the main CPU 63),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature S1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, it is determined whether the setting value before the setting possible situation is the same as the setting value set in the setting possible situation. This makes it possible to execute processing corresponding to whether or not setting values are the same across settable situations. Therefore, when a setting value to be used is set, it is possible to create a favorable situation for the setting result, and it is possible to suitably perform the setting value setting work.

Feature S2. Based on the fact that the setting value grasping means has grasped that the setting value before the setting possible state and the setting value set by the setting means are the same, a corresponding simultaneous process is performed. It has a simultaneous means (in the 22nd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S5113 in the main CPU 63, and in another embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S5613 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to feature S1.

According to feature S2, when the setting values are the same across the settable situations, the same time processing is executed, thereby making it possible to create a favorable situation for the setting values being the same. Become.

Feature S3. The gaming machine according to feature S2, wherein the same time means executes, as the same time process, a process for making a notification corresponding to the fact that the setting value has not been changed.

According to feature S3, it is possible to notify the game hall manager or the like that the set values are the same across the settable situations.

Feature S4. Based on the fact that the setting value grasping means has grasped that the setting value before the setting possible situation is different from the setting value set by the setting means, a corresponding non-same time process is executed. (In the twenty-second embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step S5114; in another embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step S5614.) The gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S3.

According to feature S4, when the set values are not the same across the settable situations, the non-identical process is executed, thereby making it possible to create a favorable situation for the changed set values. becomes.

Feature S5. The gaming machine according to feature S4, wherein the non-same time means executes, as the non-same time process, a process for making a notification corresponding to the change of the setting value. .

According to feature S5, it is possible to notify the game hall manager or the like that the setting value has been changed while the setting is possible.

Feature S6. The situation generating means is configured to perform the setting based on the need to erase information in the storage means for storing the setting value after the supply of operating power to the control means having the setting means has started. The gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S5, characterized in that the gaming machine makes the situation possible.

According to feature S6, when it becomes necessary to erase the information in the storage means that stores the setting values, the setting becomes possible, so the game is not continued even though the information on the setting values has been erased. It is possible to prevent this from happening. In this case, the configuration of feature S1 is provided, and it is determined whether or not the setting value before the setting possible situation is the same as the setting value set in the setting possible situation. This makes it possible to execute processing corresponding to whether or not setting values are the same across settable situations.

Feature S7. The setting value is not changed based on the setting value grasping means recognizing that the setting value before the setting possible state and the setting value set by the setting means are the same. (In the 22nd embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S5113 in the main side CPU 63, in another embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S5613 in the main side CPU 63). The gaming machine according to feature S6.

According to feature S7, even if a setting possible situation occurs due to the erasure of information in the storage means, if the setting values are the same across the setting possible situation, the setting values will not be changed. An announcement will be made in response to the failure. This makes it possible to notify the player that the setting value has not been changed even if the setting becomes possible in the middle of the game, and the player can feel safe even if the setting becomes possible in the middle of the game. It becomes possible to continue playing the game with care.

Feature S8. The situation generating means is
A first situation generating means (in the 22nd embodiment, from step S5003 in the main CPU 63 A function to execute the process of step S5006, in another form, a function to execute the processes of steps S5503 to S5507 in the main CPU 63, and in the 23rd embodiment, a function to execute the processes of steps S5703 to S5705 and step S5715 in the main CPU 63. function) and
a second situation in which the setting possible situation occurs based on the need to erase information in a storage unit that stores the setting values after the supply of operating power to the control unit has started; Generating means (in the 22nd embodiment, a function to execute the processing of steps S5401 to S5408 in the main CPU 63, in the 24th embodiment, a function to execute the processing of steps S5801 to S5804 in the main CPU 63, In the embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5901 to S5904 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The setting value grasping means is configured to determine whether the settable situation is caused by the first situation generating means or the settable situation caused by the second situation generating means, before the settable situation becomes the settable situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S7, characterized in that it is determined whether or not the set value in , and the set value set by the setting means are the same.

According to feature S8, when it becomes necessary to erase the information in the storage means that stores the setting values, the setting becomes possible, so the game is not continued even though the information on the setting values has been erased. It is possible to prevent this from happening. In this case, using the same process as when the setting possible state is reached based on the start of supply of operating power to the control means, the setting possible state is changed as the information in the storage means is erased. When this occurs, it becomes possible to execute processing corresponding to whether or not the set values are the same across the settable situation.

Note that for the configuration of features S1 to S8, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature S group described above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to create a favorable situation when a setting value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine is set, and improvements are still needed in this regard. There is room for

<Characteristic T group>
Feature T1. It includes a control means (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processing,
The control means is
a first predetermined process execution means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments);
a second predetermined process execution means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments);
a first predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control, stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
a second predetermined storage area (work area 223 for non-specific control, stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
A first monitoring execution means for monitoring whether or not the first predetermined storage area is normal (in the 22nd embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5401 to S5404 in the main CPU 63, in the 24th embodiment) A function to execute the processing of steps S5801 to S5804 in the main CPU 63, a function to execute the processing of steps S5901 to S5904 in the main CPU 63 in the 25th embodiment, and a function to execute the processing of step S7701 in the main CPU 63 in the 32nd embodiment. ~Function to execute the process of step S7703),
A second monitoring execution means for monitoring whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal (in the 22nd embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5405 to S5408 in the main CPU 63, in the 24th embodiment) A function of executing the processing of steps S5809, step S5810, step S5812 and step S5813 in the main side CPU 63, a function of executing the processing of steps S6101, step S6102, step S6105 and step S6106 in the main side CPU 63 in the 25th embodiment, In the 32nd embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S7706 to S7708 in the main CPU 63);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature T1, a first predetermined storage area and a second predetermined storage area are provided, and the first predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process. It is treated as a storage area dedicated to the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to clearly differentiate the storage location of information in the predetermined storage means between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Therefore, when executing one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process, it is possible to prevent information used in the other process from being deleted. Further, by monitoring whether the first predetermined storage area is normal and monitoring whether the second predetermined storage area is normal, the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process are performed. It becomes possible to specify whether the situation is such that each of the processes can be performed normally.

Feature T2. The game according to feature T1, wherein the monitoring by the first monitoring execution means and the monitoring by the second monitoring execution means are executed in either the first predetermined process or the second predetermined process. Machine.

According to feature T2, monitoring whether the first predetermined storage area is normal or not and monitoring whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal is performed in one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. It is executed centrally. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration compared to a configuration in which monitoring of each storage area is executed in a distributed manner in the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process.

Feature T3. The gaming machine according to feature T1 or T2, wherein the monitoring by the first monitoring execution means and the monitoring by the second monitoring execution means are executed in the first predetermined process.

According to feature T3, monitoring whether the first predetermined storage area is normal or not and monitoring whether the second predetermined storage area is normal or not can be collectively executed in the first predetermined process. becomes.

Feature T4. A predetermined erasing means (in the 22nd embodiment, a main side The function of executing the process of step S5410 in the CPU 63, the function of executing the process of steps S5806, step S5811, and step S5814 in the main CPU 63 in the 24th embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step S5906 and step S5906 in the main CPU 63 in the 25th embodiment The gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of steps S6103 and S6107.

According to feature T4, when the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, the information in the first predetermined storage area is erased, so that the first predetermined process is executed while the first predetermined storage area is in an abnormal state. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening.

Feature T5. The predetermined erasing means erases the information in the first predetermined storage area based on the fact that the first monitoring execution means specifies that the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, and erases the information in the second predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to feature T4, characterized in that information in the area is erased.

According to feature T5, when the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, not only the first predetermined storage area but also the second predetermined storage area is erased. Thereby, if there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the second predetermined storage area, it becomes possible to erase the information in the second predetermined storage area regardless of the monitoring result by the second monitoring execution means.

Feature T6. The predetermined erasing means may erase information in the second predetermined storage area based on the second monitoring execution means specifying that the second predetermined storage area is abnormal. The gaming machine described in T4 or T5.

According to feature T6, when the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, the information in the first predetermined storage area is erased, so that the first predetermined process is executed while the first predetermined storage area is in an abnormal state. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening.

Feature T7. The predetermined erasing means erases the information in the second predetermined storage area based on the second monitoring execution means specifying that the second predetermined storage area is abnormal, and deletes the information in the first predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to feature T6, characterized in that information in the area is erased.

According to feature T7, when the second predetermined storage area is abnormal, not only the second predetermined storage area but also the first predetermined storage area is erased. Thereby, if there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the first predetermined storage area, it becomes possible to erase the information in the first predetermined storage area regardless of the monitoring result by the first monitoring execution means.

Feature T8. According to any one of features T4 to T7, the process for erasing information by the predetermined erasing means is performed in either one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. gaming machines.

According to feature T8, the process of erasing information in each predetermined storage area based on the identification of an abnormality is performed collectively in one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration compared to a configuration in which erasing information in each storage area is executed in a distributed manner in the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process.

Feature T9. The gaming machine according to any one of features T4 to T7, wherein a process for erasing information by the predetermined erasing means is executed in the first predetermined process.

According to feature T9, it becomes possible to collectively execute the process of erasing information in each predetermined storage area based on the identification of an abnormality in the first predetermined process.

Feature T10. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T9, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a gaming history.

According to feature T10, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, thereby controlling the progress of the game. It becomes possible to prevent the information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the process for managing the game history.

Feature T11. The second predetermined storage area includes a history storage area (normal counter area 231, opening/closing execution mode counter area 232) in which game history information corresponding to a predetermined event occurring as a result of a game being executed is stored. , a high-frequency support mode counter area 233).

According to feature T11, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. In addition, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Feature T12. The second predetermined process execution means is an information derivation means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) that derives mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. The gaming machine according to feature T11, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of (a).

According to feature T12, the game history, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, can be managed by deriving mode information corresponding to game results in a predetermined period using history information stored in the history storage area. It becomes possible to understand the results.

Feature T13. The gaming machine according to feature T12, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) that stores the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to feature T13, when mode information corresponding to game results in a predetermined period is derived using history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the gaming history management results at any time. In addition, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Note that for the configuration of features T1 to T13, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature U group>
Feature U1. It includes a control means (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processing,
The control means is
a first predetermined process execution means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
a second predetermined process execution means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
a flag register provided in the internal storage means when a situation in which the first predetermined process is executed changes to a situation in which the second predetermined process is executed or a situation in which the second predetermined process is executed; state setting means (in the 26th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S6202 to S6204 and step S6211 in the main CPU 63, and in the 27th embodiment, the step in the main CPU 63) A function to execute the processes of S6302 to S6307 and S6312);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature U1, when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the flag register of the internal storage means is The state is set to a specific state. This makes it possible to start the second predetermined process in a situation where the state of the flag register is in a predetermined specific state. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably perform various controls.

Feature U2. The gaming machine according to feature U1, wherein the specific state is a state when supply of operating power to the control means is started.

According to feature U2, since the flag register is set to the state when the supply of operating power to the control means is started as the specific state, the processing configuration for setting the specific state can be simplified. It becomes possible.

Feature U3. The gaming machine according to feature U1 or U2, wherein the specific state is a state in which the flag register is cleared to "0".

According to feature U3, since the flag register is set to a cleared state of "0" as the specific state, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for setting the specific state.

Feature U4. Means for causing the state of the flag register to become the specific state when or after the second predetermined process is completed (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, executing the processes of steps S6213 to S6218 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function (in the twenty-seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S6314 to S6322 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature U4, the second predetermined process is executed not only when the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation is such that the second predetermined process is executed. When or even if the process ends, the state of the flag register is set to a specific state. This makes it possible to restart the first predetermined process in a situation where the state of the flag register is in a predetermined specific state. Furthermore, it is possible to set the state of the flag register to a specific state before and after the second predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the flag register caused by one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process from affecting the other process.

Feature U5. comprising a predetermined storage means (main side RAM 65) in which information is temporarily stored when executing processing in the control means,
The state setting means includes:
Means for bringing the state of a predetermined storage area in the predetermined storage means into the specific state (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S6202 to S6204 in the main CPU 63; in the twenty-seventh embodiment, A function of executing the processing of steps S6302 to S6307 in the main CPU 63),
Means for causing the state of the flag register to become the specific state by storing information stored in the predetermined storage area in the flag register (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the processing in step S6211 in the main CPU 63 is performed) (in the twenty-seventh embodiment, a function to execute the process of step S6312 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U4, characterized by comprising:

According to feature U5, even if the configuration is such that it is not possible to directly set the state of the flag register to a specific state as a command of the control means, the flag is set by writing information to the predetermined storage means and reading the information. It becomes possible to set the state of the register to a specific state.

Feature U6. The predetermined storage means is
a stack area (stack area 222 for specific control) into which the control means can write information with a push command and into which the control means can read information with a pop command;
a work area (work area 221 for specific control) in which the control means can write and read information in accordance with a load command;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature U5, wherein the predetermined storage area is provided in the stack area.

According to feature U6, even in a configuration in which information stored in the work area cannot be directly written to the flag register, the state of the flag register can be specified by using writing of information to the stack area and reading of the information. It is possible to set the status.

Feature U7. a predetermined register provided in the internal storage means when a situation in which the first predetermined process is being executed changes to a situation in which the second predetermined process is executed or a situation in which the second predetermined process is executed; (a function of executing steps S6205 to S6210 in the main CPU 63 in the 26th embodiment, a function of executing steps S6308 to S6311 in the main CPU 63 in the 27th embodiment) processing functions),
According to any one of features U1 to U6, the state setting means causes the state of the flag register to become the specific state after the state of the predetermined register is set to the predetermined state. Game machine.

The state of the flag register can change each time various processes are executed by the control means. In this case, according to feature U7, since the state of the flag register is set to the specific state after the state of the predetermined register is set to the predetermined state, the flag register becomes the specific state immediately before the second predetermined process is started. It becomes possible to make it seem that the

Feature U8. It includes a control means (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processing,
The control means is a means for making the state of the flag register become a specific state (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S6202 to S6204 and step S6211 in the main CPU 63, and in the twenty-seventh embodiment) A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing the processing of steps S6302 to S6307 and step S6312 in the main CPU 63.

According to feature U8, it is possible to set the state of the flag register to a specific state as necessary.

Note that for the configuration of features U1 to U8, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group V>
Feature V1. It includes a control means (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processing,
The control means is
a first predetermined process execution means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
a second predetermined process execution means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
a flag register provided in the internal storage means when the situation changes from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to a situation where the second predetermined process is executed; evacuation execution means (in the 15th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3802 in the main CPU 63, and in the 16th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S4402 in the main CPU 63) In the 20th embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S4802 in the main CPU 63, in the 28th embodiment, the function to execute the process in steps S6402 to S6405 in the main CPU 63, In the embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S6502 to S6509 in the main CPU 63);
When or after the second predetermined process is finished, return execution means (step S3804 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment) returns the information of the flag register saved in the predetermined storage means to the flag register; In the 16th embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S4404 in the main CPU 63, in the 20th embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S4810 in the main CPU 63, in the 28th embodiment In the 29th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S6407 to S6415 in the main CPU 63, and the function of executing the processing of steps S6511 to S6518 of the main CPU 63 in the 29th embodiment),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature V1, when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the information in the flag register is stored in the predetermined memory. be evacuated by means. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the flag register from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. Furthermore, when or after the second predetermined process is finished, the information saved in the predetermined storage means is returned to the flag register. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process based on the state of the flag register before execution of the second predetermined process. From the above, it becomes possible to perform various types of control suitably.

Feature V2. The predetermined storage means is
a first predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control, stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
a second predetermined storage area (work area 223 for non-specific control, stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature V1, wherein the saving execution means saves the information in the flag register to the first predetermined storage area.

According to feature V2, since the predetermined storage means is provided with the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area, the storage destination of information in the predetermined storage means can be determined by the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. It becomes possible to make a clear difference. Thereby, when executing one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process, it is possible to prevent information used in the other process from being deleted. In this case, when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the information in the flag register is stored in the first predetermined storage area. will be evacuated to. This makes it possible to save the information in the flag register immediately before the second predetermined process is started, and also makes it possible to save the information without using the second predetermined storage area.

Feature V3. The first predetermined storage area is capable of storing and reading information when the first predetermined process is executed, and is capable of reading information when the second predetermined process is executed. Inability to remember information
The second predetermined storage area is capable of storing and reading information when the second predetermined process is executed, and is capable of reading information when the first predetermined process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature V2, characterized in that information cannot be stored.

According to feature V3, it is possible to treat the first predetermined storage area as a storage area dedicated to the first predetermined process, and it is also possible to treat the second predetermined storage area as a storage area dedicated to the second predetermined process. becomes.

Feature V4. The predetermined storage means is
a stack area (stack area 222 for specific control) into which information can be written with a push command and read out with a pop command;
a work area (work area 221 for specific control) in which information can be written and read by a load command;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V3, wherein the saving execution means saves the information in the flag register to one of the stack area and the work area.

According to feature V4, when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the stack area in the second predetermined storage area The information of the flag register is saved in one of the work area and the work area. This makes it possible to consolidate information saving destinations, and to simplify the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for restoring information.

Feature V5. The gaming machine according to feature V4, wherein the saving execution means saves the information in the flag register to the work area.

According to feature V5, since the save destination of the information in the flag register is the work area, it becomes possible to save the information without cumulatively changing the stack pointer.

Feature V6. The evacuation execution means is
Means for storing the information of the flag register in a predetermined register provided in the internal storage means (in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S6402 and step S6403 in the main CPU 63; in the twenty-ninth embodiment, a main function) a function of executing the processing of steps S6502 to S6505 in the side CPU 63);
Means for storing information of the flag register stored in the predetermined register in the predetermined storage means (in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S6404 in the main CPU 63, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the main CPU 63 function of executing the process of step S6506);
The gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V5, characterized by comprising:

According to feature V6, even if the configuration is such that the information in the flag register cannot be directly saved to the predetermined storage means as a command of the control means, writing of information to the predetermined register and predetermined information stored in the predetermined register are performed. By using writing to the storage means, it becomes possible to save the information in the flag register to a predetermined storage means.

Note that for the configuration of features V1 to V6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature W group>
Feature W1. Equipped with a control means (main CPU 63) that executes various processes,
The control means is
a first predetermined process execution means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
a second predetermined process execution means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
a first predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control, stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
a second predetermined storage area (work area 223 for non-specific control, stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
Abnormal event monitoring means (program monitoring unit 252) that monitors whether an abnormal event is occurring;
It is possible to create a situation in which information erasure processing is performed on at least the first predetermined storage area based on the fact that the abnormal event has been identified by the abnormal event monitoring means. an erasing situation generating means (reset signal output section 251),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature W1, a first predetermined storage area and a second predetermined storage area are provided, and the first predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process. It is treated as a storage area dedicated to the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to clearly differentiate the storage location of information in the predetermined storage means between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Therefore, when executing one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process, it is possible to prevent information used in the other process from being deleted. Further, based on the identification that an abnormal event has occurred, information erasure processing is performed on at least the first predetermined storage area. This makes it possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed while the information in the first predetermined storage area is held as is even though an abnormal event has occurred.

Feature W2. The control means includes:
Means for executing processing for storing power outage response information when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped (in the 30th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S6709 and step S6710 in the main CPU 63) , in the 32nd embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S7609 to S7611 in the main CPU 63);
When the supply of operating power to the control means is started in a situation where the power outage response information is not stored and the process at the time of supply start is executed, the information erasing process is performed for at least the first predetermined storage area. means (in the 30th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S6607 in the main CPU 63, in the 31st embodiment, the function of executing the clearing process in the case of an abnormality in the main CPU 63; In the embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S7704, S7705, S7808, and S7810 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The erasure situation generating means causes the control means to start the supply in a situation where the power outage response information is not stored, based on the fact that the abnormal event monitoring means has identified that the abnormal event has occurred. The gaming machine according to feature W1, characterized in that the processing at the time is executed.

According to feature W2, when the supply of operating power to the control means is started and the process at the time of supply start is executed in a situation where power outage response information is not stored, the information erasing process is performed at least in the first predetermined manner. By being executed on the storage area, the information in the first predetermined storage area is retained as is when the supply of operating power to the control means is started in a situation where the processing at the time of a power outage is not properly performed. It is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed in the current state. In this case, based on the fact that it has been identified that an abnormal event has occurred, the control means executes the process at the time of supply start in a situation where power outage response information is not stored. As a result, by utilizing a configuration that executes information erasure processing when the control means executes processing at the time of supply start in a situation where power outage response information is not stored, information is stored in response to the occurrence of an abnormal event. It becomes possible to execute the erasing process.

Feature W3. The control means executes various processes when receiving a reset signal, and is configured to perform various processing when receiving the reset signal in a situation where operating power is being supplied but not receiving the reset signal. The processing at the start of supply is started based on the situation where
The erasure situation generating means is configured to cause the control means to set a state in which the reset signal is not received based on the fact that the abnormal event monitoring means has identified that the abnormal event has occurred. The gaming machine according to feature W2, wherein the gaming machine receives the reset signal.

According to feature W3, the excellent effects described above can be achieved by switching the reception state of the reset signal.

Feature W4. The control means is configured to temporarily store information in an internal storage means (a register and a program counter of the main CPU 63) when executing a process, and stores information stored in the internal storage means in the first predetermined storage. It is configured so that it can be temporarily evacuated to an area,
The abnormal event monitoring means monitors whether an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the internal storage means as the abnormal event,
Any one of features W1 to W3, wherein the erasing situation generating means generates a situation in which the erasing process of the information is performed on at least both the first predetermined storage area and the internal storage means. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature W4, since the information stored in the internal storage means can be temporarily saved to the first predetermined storage area, when an abnormality occurs regarding the information stored in the internal storage means, the first predetermined storage area is saved. 1. There is also a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the predetermined storage area. In this case, if an abnormality occurs with respect to the information stored in the internal storage means, information deletion processing is performed not only on the internal storage means but also on the first predetermined storage area. This makes it possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed in that state even though an abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in the first predetermined storage area.

Feature W5. The erasure status generating means prevents the information erasure process from being executed on the second predetermined storage area even if the abnormal event monitoring means identifies that the abnormal event has occurred. The gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W4.

According to feature W5, even if an abnormal event occurs, information can be stored and retained in the second predetermined storage area.

Feature W6. The erasure status generating means is configured to erase the information based on the fact that the abnormal event monitoring means has identified that the abnormal event has occurred. The gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W4, characterized in that the gaming machine generates a situation in which the game is executed for both of the following.

According to feature W6, information deletion processing is performed on both the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area based on the identification that an abnormal event has occurred. This makes it possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed with the information in the first predetermined storage area being retained as is even though an abnormal event has occurred, and also to It is possible to prevent the second predetermined process from being executed while the information in the second predetermined storage area is retained as it is even though the information in the second predetermined storage area is retained.

Feature W7. The information erasing process for the first predetermined storage area is executed in the first predetermined process, and the information erasing process for the second predetermined storage area is executed in the second predetermined process. The gaming machine according to feature W6.

According to feature W7, also regarding the information erasure process, the first predetermined storage area is treated as a storage area dedicated to the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is treated as a storage area dedicated to the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to

Feature W8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a gaming history.

According to feature W8, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, thereby controlling the progress of the game. It becomes possible to prevent the information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the process for managing the game history.

Feature W9. The second predetermined storage area includes a history storage area (normal counter area 231, opening/closing execution mode counter area 232) in which game history information corresponding to a predetermined event occurring as a result of a game being executed is stored. , a high-frequency support mode counter area 233).

According to feature W9, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. In addition, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Feature W10. The second predetermined process execution means is an information derivation means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) that derives mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. The gaming machine according to feature W9, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of (a).

According to feature W10, the game history, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, can be managed by deriving mode information corresponding to gaming results in a predetermined period using history information stored in the history storage area. It becomes possible to understand the results.

Feature W11. The gaming machine according to feature W10, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) that stores the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to feature W11, when mode information corresponding to game results in a predetermined period is derived using history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the gaming history management results at any time. In addition, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Note that for the configuration of features W1 to W11, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics X group>
Features X1. Equipped with a control means (main CPU 63) that executes various processes,
The control means is
a first predetermined process execution means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
a second predetermined process execution means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
a first predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control, stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
a second predetermined storage area (work area 223 for non-specific control, stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
Equipped with
The second predetermined process execution means is configured to perform erasure execution means ( In the 25th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function to execute the process of step S6103 and step S6107, in the 30th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function to execute the process of step S7204, and in the 31st embodiment, the main CPU 63 (a function of executing the process of step S7508 in the 32nd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S7808 and step S7810 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature X1, a first predetermined storage area and a second predetermined storage area are provided, the first predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is It is treated as a storage area dedicated to the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to clearly differentiate the storage location of information in the predetermined storage means between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Therefore, when executing one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process, it is possible to prevent information used in the other process from being deleted.

In addition, when an erasure trigger occurs, information deletion processing is executed for the second predetermined storage area, so even if some abnormality has occurred in the second predetermined storage area, the second predetermined storage area This makes it possible to prevent the second predetermined process from being executed while the information is retained as is. Further, since the information deletion process is executed in the second predetermined process, it is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from intervening in updating the information in the second predetermined storage area.

Features X2. The erasure execution means executes the information erasure process on the second predetermined storage area while preventing non-erasure target information (management monitoring flag, return address information, information on various registers) from being erased. The gaming machine described in feature X1.

According to feature X2, the information erasing process for the second predetermined storage area is performed while ensuring that non-erasure target information in the second predetermined storage area is not erased. This makes it possible to perform the information erasing process on the second predetermined storage area while preventing even necessary information from being erased.

Feature X3. The second predetermined process execution means is configured to execute the second predetermined process when a situation in which the first predetermined process is executed changes to a situation in which the second predetermined process is executed or a situation in which the second predetermined process is executed. Storage execution means (in the 30th embodiment A function to execute the processing of steps S7102 to S7107 in the main CPU 63, a function to execute the processing of steps S7502 to S7507 in the main CPU 63 in the 31st embodiment, and a function to execute the processing of step S7802 in the main CPU 63 in the 32nd embodiment. - a function to execute the process of step S7807),
The game according to feature Machine.

According to the feature It becomes possible to perform information deletion processing on the storage area.

Features X4. The storage execution means stores, as the return correspondence information, information on a return address of the program when the second predetermined process ends and the program returns to the first predetermined process in the second predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to feature X3.

According to feature X4, since the information erasing process is executed on the second predetermined storage area while preventing the information of the return address of the program from being erased when returning to the first predetermined process, the second predetermined storage area Even if the information erasing process is executed on the program, it is possible to return to the predetermined program in the first predetermined process when the second predetermined process is completed.

Features X5. The control means is configured to temporarily store information in an internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the process,
The gaming machine according to feature X3 or X4, wherein the storage execution means stores the information stored in the internal storage means in the second predetermined storage area as the return correspondence information.

According to the feature On the other hand, even if the information deletion process is executed, the information used in the first predetermined process can be restored to the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is completed.

Features X6. The erasure execution means causes the information erasure process to be executed on the second predetermined storage area based on the occurrence of an abnormality in the second predetermined storage area, as the occurrence of the erasure trigger. The gaming machine according to any one of features X1 to X5.

According to feature X6, based on the occurrence of an abnormality in the second predetermined storage area, information deletion processing is executed for the second predetermined storage area, so that the abnormality occurs in the second predetermined storage area. This makes it possible to prevent the second predetermined process from being executed while the user is in the current state.

Feature X7. The second predetermined process execution means executes the second predetermined process by monitoring whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal (in the thirtieth embodiment, the second predetermined process execution means monitors whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal) The gaming machine according to feature X6, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of executing processing.

According to feature X7, not only the information deletion process for the second predetermined storage area but also the monitoring of whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal is performed in the second predetermined process without intervening the first predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to execute monitoring whether the second predetermined storage area is normal or not and executing the information erasing process for the second predetermined storage area as a series of processes in the second predetermined process. .

Features X8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features X1 to X7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a gaming history.

According to feature X8, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, thereby controlling the progress of the game. It becomes possible to prevent the information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the process for managing the game history.

Features X9. The second predetermined storage area includes a history storage area (normal counter area 231, opening/closing execution mode counter area 232) in which game history information corresponding to a predetermined event occurring as a result of a game being executed is stored. , a high-frequency support mode counter area 233).

According to feature X9, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. In addition, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Features X10. The second predetermined process execution means is an information derivation means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) that derives mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. The gaming machine according to feature

According to feature X10, the game history, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, can be managed by deriving mode information corresponding to gaming results in a predetermined period using history information stored in the history storage area. It becomes possible to understand the results.

Features X11. The gaming machine according to feature X10, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) that stores the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to feature X11, when mode information corresponding to game results in a predetermined period is derived using history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the gaming history management results at any time. In addition, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Note that for the configuration of features X1 to X11, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics Y group>
Feature Y1. Equipped with a control means (main CPU 63) that executes various processes,
The control means is
a first predetermined process execution means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
a second predetermined process execution means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
a first predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control, stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
a second predetermined storage area (work area 223 for non-specific control, stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
A first calculation means for calculating first reference numerical information corresponding to a plurality of pieces of information stored in the first predetermined storage area (in the 30th embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the processes of step S6604 and step S6710) In the 31st embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step S7304; in the 32nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of steps S7610 and S7701);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature Y1, a first predetermined storage area and a second predetermined storage area are provided, the first predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is It is treated as a storage area dedicated to the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to clearly differentiate the storage location of information in the predetermined storage means between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Therefore, when executing one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process, it is possible to prevent information used in the other process from being deleted. In this case, first reference numerical information corresponding to a plurality of pieces of information stored in the first predetermined storage area is calculated. By using the first reference numerical information, it is possible to specify whether an information abnormality has occurred only in the first predetermined storage area.

Feature Y2. Information erasing means for performing information erasing processing on the first predetermined storage area based on identifying the occurrence of an abnormality with respect to the first reference numerical information calculated by the first calculating means; (In the 30th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S6607 in the main side CPU 63, in the 31st embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S7401 and step S7402 in the main side CPU 63, and in the 32nd embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S7407 in the main side CPU 63 The gaming machine according to feature Y1, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of step S7704 and step S7705 in the CPU 63.

According to feature Y2, when the occurrence of an abnormality with respect to the first reference numerical information is identified, information deletion processing is executed for the first predetermined storage area, so that even though an information abnormality has occurred, First, it is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed while the information in the first predetermined storage area is retained as is.

Feature Y3. The first calculation means is
a first power outage calculation unit that calculates the first reference numerical information when the supply of operating power to the control unit is stopped (in the 30th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S6710 in the main CPU 63; In the 32nd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S7610 in the main CPU 63),
A first power-on calculation means (in the 30th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S6604 in the main CPU 63) that calculates the first reference numerical information when the supply of operating power to the control means is started. , in the 31st embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S7304 in the main side CPU 63, and in the 32nd embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S7701 in the main side CPU 63),
Equipped with
The information erasing means is based on the fact that the first reference numerical information calculated by the first power outage calculation means and the first reference numerical information calculated by the first power on calculation means do not match. , the gaming machine according to feature Y2, wherein the information erasing process is executed on at least the first predetermined storage area.

According to feature Y3, it is possible to determine whether or not the information in the first predetermined storage area is stored and retained even when the supply of operating power is stopped by calculating the first reference numerical information. becomes. If the information in the first predetermined storage area is not stored and retained after the supply of operating power is stopped, information deletion processing is executed for the first predetermined storage area, so that an information error occurs. It is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed while the information in the first predetermined storage area is held as is despite the occurrence of the above.

Feature Y4. The information erasing means does not perform erasing processing of the information on the second predetermined storage area even if the occurrence of an abnormality is identified regarding the first reference numerical information calculated by the first calculation means. The gaming machine according to feature Y2 or Y3.

According to feature Y4, when the occurrence of an abnormality is identified regarding the first reference numerical information, information deletion processing is executed for the first predetermined storage area, while information deletion processing is performed for the second predetermined storage area. Processing is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent even the information in the second predetermined storage area from being erased in a situation where an information abnormality occurs in the first predetermined storage area.

Feature Y5. The gaming machine according to any one of features Y1 to Y4, wherein the first reference numerical information is information that does not change depending on the information stored in the second predetermined storage area.

According to feature Y5, in a configuration in which a first predetermined storage area and a second predetermined storage area exist, it is possible to individually identify information abnormalities regarding the first predetermined storage area using the first reference numerical information. It becomes possible.

Feature Y6. A second calculation means (a function for executing the processing of step S7611 and step S7706 in the main CPU 63) is provided for calculating second reference numerical information corresponding to a plurality of pieces of information stored in the second predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of features Y1 to Y5.

According to feature Y6, second reference numerical information corresponding to a plurality of pieces of information stored in the second predetermined storage area is calculated. By using the second reference numerical information, it is possible to specify whether an information abnormality has occurred only in the second predetermined storage area.

Feature Y7. means for performing information erasure processing on at least the second predetermined storage area based on the identification of the occurrence of an abnormality with respect to the second reference numerical information calculated by the second calculation means; The gaming machine according to feature Y6, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of step S7808 and step S7810 in the main CPU 63.

According to feature Y7, when the occurrence of an abnormality with respect to the second reference numerical information is identified, information deletion processing is performed on the second predetermined storage area, so that even though an information abnormality has occurred, First, it is possible to prevent the second predetermined process from being executed while the information in the second predetermined storage area is retained as is.

Feature Y8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features Y1 to Y7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a gaming history.

According to feature Y8, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, thereby controlling the progress of the game. It becomes possible to prevent the information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the process for managing the game history.

Feature Y9. The second predetermined storage area includes a history storage area (normal counter area 231, opening/closing execution mode counter area 232) in which game history information corresponding to a predetermined event occurring as a result of a game being executed is stored. , a high-frequency support mode counter area 233).

According to feature Y9, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. In addition, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Feature Y10. The second predetermined process execution means is an information derivation means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) that derives mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. The gaming machine according to feature Y9, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of (a).

According to feature Y10, the game history, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, can be managed by deriving mode information corresponding to gaming results in a predetermined period using history information stored in the history storage area. It becomes possible to understand the results.

Feature Y11. The gaming machine according to feature Y10, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) that stores the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to feature Y11, when mode information corresponding to game results in a predetermined period is derived using history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the gaming history management results at any time. In addition, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Note that for the configuration of features Y1 to Y11, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature T group, the feature U group, the feature V group, the feature W group, the feature X group, and the feature Y group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately perform various controls, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature Z group>
Feature Z1. a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
a situation generating means (a function of executing the processes of step S7905, step S7916, and step S7917 in the main CPU 63) for creating a setting possible situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed;
In a situation where the supply of operating power to the control means (main CPU 63) having the setting means is started and the process at the time of supply start is being executed, the setting value of the target to be used in a situation where the setting is not possible is determined. a setting notification means (a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for making notifications;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature Z1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, in order to check the set value that is set to be used, it is necessary to temporarily stop the supply of operating power to the control means and then restart the supply of operating power to the control means. . This makes it difficult to illegally check the setting values. Further, since the set value is notified while the supply start process is being executed, there is no need to notify the set value when the game is interrupted. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the setting value.

Feature Z2. The gaming machine according to feature Z1, wherein the situation generation means causes the settable situation to occur in a situation where the supply start process is being executed.

According to feature Z2, a setting possible situation in which setting values to be used can be set and a situation in which setting values to be used are notified in situations where settings are not possible are defined at the time of supply start. It becomes possible to summarize the situation in which processing is being executed.

Feature Z3. comprising a first identifying means (a function of executing the processing of step S7912 and step S7916 in the main CPU 63) for identifying the occurrence of the first trigger event,
The setting notification means is configured to enable the setting based on the situation where the process at the time of supply start is being executed and the occurrence of the first trigger event has been specified by the first specifying means. The gaming machine according to feature Z1 or Z2, characterized in that the setting value of the object to be used is notified in a situation other than the current situation.

According to feature Z3, in order to notify the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to start supplying operating power to the control means but also to generate a first trigger event. This makes it difficult to illegally check the setting values.

Feature Z4. The gaming machine according to feature Z3, wherein the first trigger event is that a predetermined operation with a setting key is performed on a setting key insertion section (setting key insertion section 68a).

According to feature Z4, in order to notify the setting of the target to be used, it is necessary to perform a predetermined operation using the setting key on the setting key insertion section. This makes it difficult to illegally check the setting values.

Feature Z5. The setting notification means satisfies the notification condition based on the situation in which the process at the time of supply start is being executed and the occurrence of the first trigger event has been specified by the first identification device. In this case, the setting value of the target to be used is notified in a situation where the setting is not possible,
The situation generating means satisfies the setting condition based on the situation where the process at the time of supply start is being executed and the occurrence of the first triggering event has been specified by the first specifying means. When the above setting is possible,
The gaming machine according to feature Z3 or Z4, wherein the notification condition and the setting condition are different.

According to feature Z5, in both cases of generating a settable situation and notifying a setting value to be used, not only the supply of operating power to the control means is started, but also the first trigger event is triggered. need to occur. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to fraudulently set a setting value to be used, and to fraudulently attempt to confirm a setting value to be used. On the other hand, because the setting conditions for generating a configurable situation and the notification conditions for notifying the setting value to be used are different, the situation in which the configurable situation and the setting value to be used are announced is different. It becomes possible to cause either one of these to occur independently.

Feature Z6. comprising a second identifying means (a function of executing the process of step S7905 in the main CPU 63) for identifying the occurrence of the second trigger event,
The setting condition is a situation in which the occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying means in a situation where the process at the time of supply start is being executed, and the occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the second specifying means. Established on the basis that the occurrence of the triggering event is specified,
The notification condition is a situation in which the first specifying means has specified the occurrence of the first trigger event in a situation where the supply start process is being executed, and the second specifying means has specified the second trigger event. The gaming machine according to feature Z5, characterized in that the trigger event is established based on a situation in which the occurrence of the trigger event is not specified.

According to feature Z6, in order to generate the settable situation, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the control means and not only to generate the first trigger event but also to generate the second trigger event. As a result, whether the set value to be used is set or the set value to be used is notified, it not only starts supplying operating power to the control means. In a configuration in which it is necessary to generate a first trigger event, it is possible to make the operation for generating a settable situation more complicated. Therefore, it becomes possible to more intensively prevent acts of attempting to set setting values to be used illegally.

Feature Z7. The gaming machine according to feature Z6, wherein the second trigger event is that a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c) is operated.

According to feature Z7, in order to generate the settable situation, it is necessary not only to start supplying operating power to the control means and to generate the first trigger event, but also to operate the predetermined operation means. This makes it difficult for people to illegally set setting values to be used, while also preventing the operations to legitimately create a setting-enabled situation from becoming excessively complicated. becomes possible.

Feature Z8. Information erasing means ( The gaming machine according to feature Z6 or Z7, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S7915 in the main CPU 63.

According to feature Z8, the conditions for generating a settable situation and the setting values to be used in a situation that is not a settable situation are established by using the second trigger event necessary to execute the information deletion process. It becomes possible to make the conditions for making the notification different.

Feature Z9. The gaming machine according to feature Z8, wherein the information erasing means executes the information erasing process even when the setting possible situation occurs.

According to feature Z9, it is possible to execute the information deletion process when the setting becomes possible.

Feature Z10. A situation in which the occurrence of the second triggering event is specified by the second specifying means in a situation where the process at the time of supply start is being executed, and the occurrence of the first triggering event is specified by the first specifying means. The gaming machine according to feature Z8 or Z9, characterized in that if the setting is not possible, the information erasing means executes the information erasing process even though the setting is not possible.

According to feature Z10, depending on whether or not the first trigger event is generated when the supply of operating power to the control means is started, information erasure processing is executed and a setting possible state is reached; It is possible to select a case where the deletion process is executed but the setting is not possible.

Note that for the configuration of features Z1 to Z10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group a>
Feature a1. a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
a situation generating means (a function of executing the processes of step S7905, step S7916, and step S7917 in the main CPU 63) for creating a setting possible situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed;
an information erasing means (a function that executes the process of step S7915 in the main CPU 63) that executes information erasing processing;
a setting notification means (a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for notifying the setting value of the usage target in a situation where the setting is not possible;
a first specifying means for specifying the occurrence of a first trigger event (a function of executing the processes of step S7912 and step S7916 in the main CPU 63);
a second specifying means for specifying the occurrence of the second trigger event (a function for executing the process of step S7905 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The situation generating means specifies that the first triggering event occurs in a situation where the supply of operating power to the control means having the setting means is started and processing at the time of supply start is being executed, by the first specifying means. and the occurrence of the second triggering event is specified by the second specifying means, so that the setting possible situation is set;
The information erasing means performs the information erasing process based on the fact that the second specifying means has identified the occurrence of the second trigger event in the situation where the supply start process is being executed. Run
A situation in which the occurrence of the second triggering event is specified by the second specifying means in a situation where the process at the time of supply start is being executed, and the occurrence of the first triggering event is specified by the first specifying means. If the situation is such that the setting is not possible, the information erasing means executes the information erasing process, although the setting is not possible.
The setting notification means is configured to detect the occurrence of the first trigger event in a situation where the first specifying means specifies the occurrence of the first trigger event in a situation where the supply start process is being executed, and the second specifying device specifies the second trigger event. A gaming machine characterized in that the setting value of the target to be used in a situation where the setting is not possible is notified based on the situation where the occurrence of a triggering event is not specified.

According to feature a1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that Furthermore, since the configuration allows information erasure processing to be executed, it is possible to prevent a game from being played even though an information abnormality has occurred. Furthermore, since the configuration is such that the setting values that are set to be used can be notified, it becomes possible to confirm the setting values.

In this case, in order to confirm the set value that is set to be used, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the control means and to generate a first trigger event. This makes it difficult to illegally check the setting values.

In addition, in order to generate a settable situation, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the control means and to generate not only the first trigger event but also the second trigger event. As a result, whether the set value to be used is set or the set value to be used is notified, it not only starts supplying operating power to the control means. In a configuration in which it is necessary to generate a first trigger event, it is possible to make the operation for generating a settable situation more complicated. Therefore, it becomes possible to more intensively prevent acts of attempting to set setting values to be used illegally.

In addition, by using the second trigger event necessary to execute the information deletion process, the conditions for generating a setting possible situation and the setting values to be used in situations where the setting is not possible are announced. This makes it possible to vary the conditions for achieving this.

Also, depending on whether or not the first trigger event occurs when the supply of operating power to the control means is started, the information deletion process may be executed and the setting becomes possible, or the information deletion process may be executed. It becomes possible to select whether or not the settings will be executed.

Feature a2. The gaming machine according to feature a1, wherein the first trigger event is that a predetermined operation using a setting key is performed on a setting key insertion section (setting key insertion section 68a).

According to feature a2, in order to notify the setting of the target to be used, it is necessary to perform a predetermined operation using the setting key on the setting key insertion section. This makes it difficult to illegally check the setting values.

Feature a3. The gaming machine according to feature a1 or a2, wherein the second trigger event is that a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c) is operated.

According to feature a3, in order to generate the settable situation, it is necessary not only to start supplying operating power to the control means and to generate the first trigger event, but also to operate the predetermined operation means. This makes it difficult for people to illegally set setting values to be used, while also preventing the operations to legitimately create a setting-enabled situation from becoming excessively complicated. becomes possible.

Note that for the configuration of features a1 to a3, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature Z group and the feature a group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a need for a configuration that can suitably confirm the setting values that determine the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. .

<Characteristic group b>
Feature b1. a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
a situation generating means (a function of executing the processes of step S7905, step S7916, and step S7917 in the main CPU 63) for creating a setting possible situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed;
a setting monitoring means (a function of executing the process of step S8220 in the main CPU 63) that executes a setting monitoring process for monitoring whether the setting value of the target to be used is abnormal;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the setting monitoring process is not included in the process at the start of supply that is executed when the supply of operating power to the control means having the setting means is started.

According to feature b1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that Further, since a setting monitoring process is executed to monitor whether or not the setting value to be used is abnormal, it is possible to deal with it if the setting value to be used is abnormal. Moreover, since the setting monitoring process is not included in the process at the time of starting supply, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while preventing the processing load of the process at the time of starting supply from increasing.

Feature b2. The gaming machine according to feature b1, wherein the situation generating means generates the settable situation in a situation where the supply start process is being executed.

According to feature b2, since the setting possible situation occurs in a situation where the processing at the start of supply is being executed, it is possible to set the setting value to be used before the game starts. . In this case, since the setting value to be used is set in the process at the start of supply, the processing load of the process at the start of supply increases accordingly. On the other hand, with the configuration of feature b1 above, since the settings monitoring process is not included in the process at the start of supply, the processing load of the process at the start of supply is not further increased, and the It becomes possible to monitor whether or not the set value is abnormal.

Feature b3. The gaming machine according to feature b1 or b2, wherein the setting monitoring means executes the setting monitoring process after the process at the time of starting supply is completed.

According to feature b3, since the setting monitoring process is executed after the process at the start of supply is completed, the setting value to be used is detected to be abnormal while preventing the processing load of the process at the start of supply from increasing. It becomes possible to monitor whether the

Feature b4. The gaming machine according to feature b3, wherein the setting monitoring means executes the setting monitoring process every time a monitoring opportunity occurs after the supply start process is completed.

According to feature b4, since the setting monitoring process is executed every time a monitoring opportunity occurs after the process at the start of supply is completed, it becomes easier to identify that the setting value to be used is abnormal.

Feature b5. A means for executing periodically activated interrupt processing (a function for executing the first timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to any one of features b1 to b4, wherein the interrupt processing includes the setting monitoring processing.

According to feature b5, since the setting monitoring process is executed every time the device is periodically activated, it is possible to increase the frequency of monitoring whether or not the setting value to be used is abnormal.

Feature b6. The setting monitoring means is a means for regulating the progress of the game (step S8207 and The gaming machine according to any one of features b1 to b5, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the process of step S8302.

According to feature b6, the progress of the game is regulated when it is identified that the setting value to be used is abnormal, so the game is not continued even though the setting value to be used is abnormal. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Feature b7. The setting monitoring means is configured to provide a notification that allows the player to recognize that the setting possible situation should occur based on the fact that the setting value of the target to be used is determined to be abnormal in the setting monitoring process. The gaming machine according to any one of features b1 to b6, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a means for executing the process (a function of executing the process of step S8303 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature b7, when it is specified that the setting value of the target to be used is abnormal, a notification is executed that allows the player to recognize that a setting possible situation should occur. If the value becomes abnormal, it is possible to prompt the manager of the game hall to resolve it.

Note that for the configuration of features b1 to b7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature b group described above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably manage the setting values that determine the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group c>
Feature c1. Predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204),
a predetermined display control means (a function for executing second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63) that controls the display of the predetermined display means;
Equipped with
The predetermined display control means includes a check control means (35th check control means) that causes the predetermined display means to perform a check display that makes it possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal based on the occurrence of a check opportunity. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing the process of step S9102 in the main CPU 63 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S9602 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-eighth embodiment.

According to feature c1, a check display is performed on the predetermined display means based on the occurrence of a check opportunity. This makes it possible to check whether the predetermined display means is normal.

Feature c2. The predetermined display means has a plurality of light emitting parts (display segments 321 to 324),
The gaming machine according to feature c1, wherein the check display is a display that allows confirmation that each of the plurality of light emitting parts can be in a light emitting state.

According to feature c2, each of the plurality of light emitting parts of the predetermined display means enters a light emitting state as a check display. This makes it possible to confirm whether each of the plurality of light emitting sections of the predetermined display means is in a light emitting state.

Feature c3. The gaming machine according to feature c1 or c2, wherein the check trigger occurs when supply of operating power is started.

According to feature c3, since a check display is performed when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to quickly confirm whether the predetermined display means is normal.

Feature c4. The gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c3, wherein the check opportunity occurs every time supply of operating power is started.

According to feature c4, it is possible to check whether the predetermined display means is normal each time the supply of operating power is started.

Feature c5. The gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c4, wherein the check opportunity is generated without requiring an operation for generating the check opportunity when the supply of operating power is started.

According to feature c5, when the supply of operating power is started, a check display is performed without requiring any special operation, which makes it easy to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature c6. The check control means causes the predetermined display means to display the check display when the supply of the operating power is started and the check trigger has occurred, and when the supply of the operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c5, wherein the predetermined display means does not display the check display when the check opportunity has not occurred.

According to feature c6, since the check display is performed when the supply of operating power is started and a check opportunity has occurred, the predetermined display is performed before the game starts on the gaming machine. It becomes possible to check whether the means are normal or not. On the other hand, even if the supply of operating power has started, the check display will not be displayed if no check trigger has occurred, so the check display will not be displayed in situations where there is no need to display the check display. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Feature c7. A means (a function for executing the process of step S8606 in the main CPU 63) is provided for storing information in a usage correspondence storage means (management start flag) based on the fact that the gaming machine is used in a predetermined manner,
The check control means is configured such that the check trigger occurs when the supply of operating power is started and the information stored in the usage correspondence storage means does not correspond to the usage correspondence information. when the predetermined display means displays the check display, and the supply of operating power is started and the information stored in the usage compatible storage means corresponds to the usage compatible information. The gaming machine according to feature c6, wherein the predetermined display means does not display the check display on the assumption that the check opportunity has not occurred.

According to feature c7, until the gaming machine is used in a predetermined manner, a check display is performed on the predetermined display means when the supply of operating power is started, and the gaming machine is used in a predetermined manner. Even if the supply of operating power is started based on this, no check display is performed on the predetermined display means. As a result, for example, at the shipping stage of a game machine, when the supply of operating power is started, a check display is performed on the predetermined display means, so that it can be checked whether the predetermined display means is normal or not. After the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, it is possible to prevent the checking display from being displayed on the predetermined display means even if the supply of operating power is started.

Feature c8. The check control means includes:
Display terminating means (a function of executing the process of step S9002 in the main CPU 63 and a function of making a negative determination in step S9101) for terminating the check display on the predetermined display means based on the occurrence of a termination trigger;
Cancellation means for terminating the check display on the predetermined display means based on the occurrence of a cancellation trigger even in a situation where the termination trigger has not occurred (a function for executing the process of step S9203 in the main CPU 63; a function of making a negative determination in step S9101, a function of executing the process of step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function of making a negative determination in step S9101);
The gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c7, characterized by comprising:

According to characteristic c8, the check display is terminated based on the occurrence of a cancellation trigger even if the check display termination trigger has not occurred, so that the check display is performed on the predetermined display means. Even so, it is possible to terminate the check display midway and display another display.

Feature c9. The gaming machine according to feature c8, wherein the cancellation trigger occurs based on the operation of a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c).

According to feature c9, since a cancellation opportunity occurs based on the operation of the predetermined operation means, it is possible to end the check display at any timing.

Feature c10. The predetermined display control means includes a separate display control means (a function for executing the processes of step S9004 and step S9006 in the main CPU 63) that causes a separate display different from the check display to be performed when a separate display execution status occurs. Prepare,
The gaming machine according to feature c8 or c9, wherein the cancellation trigger occurs based on the separate display execution status.

According to feature c10, since the check display is terminated when a cancellation opportunity occurs based on the separate display execution status, it is possible to give priority to the separate display over the check display.

Feature c11. Features c1 to 1 are characterized by comprising means for waiting for the progress of processing in a situation where the check display is being executed on the predetermined display means (a function for executing the processing of step S9406 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of c10.

According to feature c11, since a check display is performed on the predetermined display means in a situation where the progress of processing is on standby, it is possible to perform a check display while suppressing an increase in processing load.

Feature c12. The check control means causes the predetermined display means to start the check display before a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of c1 to c11.

According to feature c12, when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal before playing a game on the gaming machine.

Feature c13. a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
Means for executing processing at the start of supply of operating power based on the start of supply of operating power (in the 35th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S8801 to S8819 in the main CPU 63, In the embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S9401 to S9420 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
A configuration in which predetermined setting-related processing regarding the setting value (setting confirmation processing, setting value update processing) can be executed in a situation where the processing at the time of starting supply of operating power is being executed,
The gaming machine according to feature c12, wherein the check control means starts the check display on the predetermined display means in a situation where the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is being executed.

According to feature c13, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that Furthermore, predetermined setting-related processing regarding setting values may be executed in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. This allows setting-related processing to be executed at a stage before the game starts. In this case, a check display is started on the predetermined display means in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. This makes it possible to integrate not only the predetermined setting-related processing but also the processing for starting the check display on the predetermined display means with respect to the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power.

Feature c14. The check control means is a means for starting the check display on the predetermined display means before the predetermined setting-related process can be executed (in the 35th embodiment, step S8804 and step S8805 in the main CPU 63). (in the thirty-sixth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S9404 and step S9405 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature c14, it is possible to check whether the predetermined display means is normal before the predetermined setting-related process is executed.

Feature c15. The predetermined display control means is a means for displaying the current setting value on the predetermined display means when the predetermined setting-related process is executed (a function of executing the processes of step S9004 and step S9006 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to feature c13 or c14, characterized by comprising:

According to feature c15, when a predetermined setting-related process is executed, the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means, so the game hall manager can check the current setting value by checking the predetermined display means. It becomes possible to understand. In this case, the configuration of feature c13 is provided, and the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power includes not only the predetermined setting-related processing but also the processing for starting the check display on the predetermined display means. , the work of checking the predetermined display means to understand whether the predetermined display means is normal or not, and the work of checking the predetermined display means to understand the current setting value are performed at the time of starting the supply of operating power. This makes it possible to do this all at once in a situation where the

Furthermore, when the configuration of feature c14 is provided, the predetermined display means starts displaying a check before the current set value is displayed on the predetermined display means, so that the predetermined display means is normal. After checking whether or not the current setting value is set, it becomes possible to check the current setting value using a predetermined display means. This makes it possible to accurately check the set values.

Feature c16. The check control means includes:
means for starting the check display on the predetermined display means before the timing when the predetermined setting-related process can be executed (a function for executing the processes of step S8804 and step S8805 in the main CPU 63);
Means for terminating the check display based on the occurrence of a cancellation opportunity in the predetermined setting-related process in a situation where the check display is being performed (a function and step of executing the process of step S9203 in the main CPU 63) (a function to make a negative determination in S9101, a function to execute the process in step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function to make a negative determination in step S9101);
The gaming machine according to feature c15, comprising:

According to feature c16, before the current set value is displayed on the predetermined display means, the check display starts on the predetermined display means, so that after confirming whether the predetermined display means is normal or not, , it becomes possible to check the current setting values using a predetermined display means. This makes it possible to accurately check the set values. In addition, when a predetermined setting-related process is executed in a situation where a check display is being performed and a cancellation opportunity occurs, the check display is terminated. As a result, when a predetermined setting-related process is executed, the check display can be ended and the current setting value can be displayed on the predetermined display means without waiting for the check display to end. It becomes possible. Therefore, it becomes possible to check the current setting values at an early stage.

Feature c17. The gaming machine according to feature c16, wherein the cancellation trigger occurs based on the operation of a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c).

According to feature c17, since a cancellation opportunity occurs based on the operation of the predetermined operation means, it is possible to end the check display at any timing.

Feature c18. As the predetermined setting-related process, a means for executing a process to bring about a setting enable situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, a step in the main CPU 63) In the 36th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of making an affirmative determination in steps S8806, S8817, and S8818. The gaming machine according to any one of features c13 to c17.

According to feature c18, the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power includes not only the processing for setting the setting value to be used but also the processing for starting the check display on the predetermined display means. becomes possible.

Feature c19. The setting means updates the setting value to be used based on the operation of a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c) in the setting possible condition,
The check control means includes:
means for starting the check display on the predetermined display means before the setting possible state is reached (a function for executing the processing of step S8804 and step S8805 in the main CPU 63);
Means for terminating the check display based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in the setting possible state where the check display is being performed (executing the process of step S9203 in the main CPU 63); a function that makes a negative determination in step S9101, a function that executes the process of step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function that makes a negative determination in step S9101),
Equipped with
The predetermined display control means is a means for displaying the current setting value on the predetermined display means after the check display is finished in the setting possible situation (executes the processing of step S9004 and step S9006 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to feature c18, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of:

According to feature c19, before the current set value is displayed on the predetermined display means, the check display starts on the predetermined display means, so that after confirming whether the predetermined display means is normal or not, , it becomes possible to check the current setting values using a predetermined display means. This makes it possible to accurately check the set values. Furthermore, when the check display is being performed and the setting becomes possible and the predetermined operating means is operated, the check display is terminated and the current set value is displayed. This makes it possible to end the check display and display the current setting value on the predetermined display means without waiting for the check display to end when the setting becomes possible. . Therefore, it becomes possible to check the current setting values at an early stage.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which the setting values to be used are updated based on the operation of a predetermined operation means in a setting possible state, the check display is updated based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in a setting possible state. Since the check display is terminated and the current set values are displayed, no special operation is required to terminate the check display and display the current set values. Therefore, it is possible to improve the work efficiency of updating the setting values to be used.

Feature c20. The predetermined setting-related process includes means for executing a process for displaying the current setting value on the predetermined display means (a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of features c13 to c19.

According to feature c20, for the processing at the start of supply of operating power, it is possible to consolidate not only the processing for checking the current setting value but also the processing for starting the check display on the predetermined display means. It becomes possible.

Feature c21. The predetermined display control means includes means for displaying information corresponding to the management results of the game history on the predetermined display means (a function of executing the processing of steps S8708, S8709, and S9107 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c20.

According to feature c21, it is possible to notify the gaming hall manager of the gaming history management results. In this case, by having the configuration of feature c1 above and performing a check display on the predetermined display means, it is possible to check whether or not the information corresponding to the management result of the gaming history is being accurately displayed on the predetermined display means. It becomes possible to confirm.

Note that for the configuration of features c1 to c21, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature d group>
Feature d1. Predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204),
a predetermined display control means (a function for executing second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63) that controls the display of the predetermined display means;
Equipped with
The predetermined display control means is configured to check whether or not the predetermined display means is normal before a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed when the supply of operating power is started. Check control means (in the 35th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S9102 in the main CPU 63, and in the 38th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S9602 in the main CPU 63) A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a function of

According to the feature d1, by performing a check display on the predetermined display means, it is possible to confirm whether the predetermined display means is normal. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the check display starts before the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed, so when the supply of operating power is started, the gaming machine It becomes possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal before playing the game.

Feature d2. a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
Means for executing processing at the start of supply of operating power based on the start of supply of operating power (in the 35th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S8801 to S8819 in the main CPU 63, In the embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S9401 to S9420 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
A configuration in which predetermined setting-related processing regarding the setting value (setting confirmation processing, setting value update processing) can be executed in a situation where the processing at the time of starting supply of operating power is being executed,
The gaming machine according to feature d1, wherein the check control means starts the check display on the predetermined display means in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed.

According to feature d2, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that Furthermore, predetermined setting-related processing regarding setting values may be executed in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. This allows setting-related processing to be executed at a stage before the game starts. In this case, a check display is started on the predetermined display means in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. This makes it possible to integrate not only the predetermined setting-related processing but also the processing for starting the check display on the predetermined display means with respect to the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power.

Feature d3. The check control means is a means for starting the check display on the predetermined display means before the predetermined setting-related process can be executed (in the 35th embodiment, step S8804 and step S8805 in the main CPU 63). (in the thirty-sixth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S9404 and step S9405 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature d3, it is possible to check whether the predetermined display means is normal before the predetermined setting-related process is executed.

Feature d4. The predetermined display control means is a means for displaying the current setting value on the predetermined display means when the predetermined setting-related process is executed (a function of executing the processes of step S9004 and step S9006 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to feature d2 or d3, comprising:

According to feature d4, when a predetermined setting-related process is executed, the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means, so the game hall manager can check the current setting value by checking the predetermined display means. It becomes possible to understand. In this case, the configuration of feature d2 is provided, and the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power includes not only the predetermined setting-related processing but also the processing for starting the check display on the predetermined display means. , the work of checking the predetermined display means to understand whether the predetermined display means is normal or not, and the work of checking the predetermined display means to understand the current setting value are performed at the time of starting the supply of operating power. This makes it possible to do this all at once in a situation where the

Furthermore, in the case of having the configuration of feature d3 above, the predetermined display means starts displaying a check before the current set value is displayed on the predetermined display means, so that the predetermined display means is normal. After checking whether or not the current setting value is set, it becomes possible to check the current setting value using a predetermined display means. This makes it possible to accurately check the set values.

Feature d5. The check control means includes:
means for starting the check display on the predetermined display means before the timing at which the predetermined setting-related process can be executed (a function for executing the processes of step S8804 and step S8805 in the main CPU 63);
Means for terminating the check display based on the occurrence of a cancellation opportunity in the predetermined setting-related process in a situation where the check display is being performed (a function and step of executing the process of step S9203 in the main CPU 63) (a function to make a negative determination in S9101, a function to execute the process in step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function to make a negative determination in step S9101);
The gaming machine according to feature d4, comprising:

According to feature d5, before the current set value is displayed on the predetermined display means, the check display starts on the predetermined display means, so that after confirming whether the predetermined display means is normal or not, , it becomes possible to check the current setting values using a predetermined display means. This makes it possible to accurately check the set values. In addition, when a predetermined setting-related process is executed in a situation where a check display is being performed and a cancellation opportunity occurs, the check display is terminated. As a result, when a predetermined setting-related process is executed, the check display can be ended and the current setting value can be displayed on the predetermined display means without waiting for the check display to end. It becomes possible. Therefore, it becomes possible to check the current setting values at an early stage.

Feature d6. The gaming machine according to feature d5, wherein the cancellation trigger occurs based on the operation of a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c).

According to feature d6, since a cancellation opportunity occurs based on the operation of the predetermined operation means, it is possible to end the check display at any timing.

Feature d7. As the predetermined setting-related process, a means for executing a process to bring about a setting enable situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, a step in the main CPU 63) In the 36th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of making an affirmative determination in steps S8806, S8817, and S8818. The gaming machine according to any one of features d2 to d6.

According to feature d7, for the processing at the start of supply of operating power, not only the processing for setting the setting value to be used but also the processing for starting the check display on the predetermined display means is integrated. becomes possible.

Feature d8. The setting means updates the setting value to be used based on the operation of a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c) in the setting possible condition,
The check control means includes:
means for starting the check display on the predetermined display means before the setting possible state is reached (a function for executing the processing of step S8804 and step S8805 in the main CPU 63);
Means for terminating the check display based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in the setting possible state where the check display is being performed (executing the process of step S9203 in the main CPU 63); a function that makes a negative determination in step S9101, a function that executes the process of step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function that makes a negative determination in step S9101),
Equipped with
The predetermined display control means is a means for displaying the current setting value on the predetermined display means after the check display is finished in the setting possible situation (executes the processing of step S9004 and step S9006 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to feature d7, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of:

According to feature d8, the check display is started on the predetermined display means before the current set value is displayed on the predetermined display means, so that after confirming whether or not the predetermined display means is normal, , it becomes possible to check the current setting values using a predetermined display means. This makes it possible to accurately check the set values. Furthermore, when the check display is being performed and the setting becomes possible and the predetermined operating means is operated, the check display is terminated and the current set value is displayed. This makes it possible to end the check display and display the current setting value on the predetermined display means without waiting for the check display to end when the setting becomes possible. . Therefore, it becomes possible to check the current setting values at an early stage.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which the setting values to be used are updated based on the operation of a predetermined operation means in a setting possible state, the check display is updated based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in a setting possible state. Since the check display is terminated and the current set values are displayed, no special operation is required to terminate the check display and display the current set values. Therefore, it is possible to improve the work efficiency of updating the setting values to be used.

Feature d9. The predetermined setting-related process includes means for executing a process for displaying the current setting value on the predetermined display means (a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of features d2 to d8.

According to feature d9, for the processing at the start of supply of operating power, it is possible to consolidate not only the processing for checking the current set value but also the processing for starting the check display on the predetermined display means. It becomes possible.

Feature d10. The predetermined display control means includes means for displaying information corresponding to the management results of the game history on the predetermined display means (a function of executing the processing of steps S8708, S8709, and S9107 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of features d1 to d9.

According to feature d10, it is possible to notify the gaming hall manager of the gaming history management results. In this case, by having the configuration of feature d1 above and performing a check display on the predetermined display means, it is possible to check whether the information corresponding to the management result of the gaming history on the predetermined display means is being accurately displayed. It becomes possible to confirm.

Note that for the configuration of features d1 to d10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature c group and the feature d group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a need for a configuration that allows it to be confirmed whether or not the display on the predetermined display means is being performed accurately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. be.

<Characteristic group e>
Feature e1. A history storage execution means (normal ball entry management processing in the main CPU 63) that stores game history information corresponding to a predetermined event when a game is executed in the history storage means (normal counter area 231). ) and
information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step S8601 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to the result of the game using the history information stored in the history storage means;
aspect information storage means (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the aspect information derived by the information derivation means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the aspect information derived at different timings by the information deriving means.

According to feature e1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. By storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information can be prevented. Moreover, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means, and the derived mode information is stored in the mode information storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, the aspect information storage means can store a plurality of aspect information derived at different timings. This makes it possible to ascertain the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in a plurality of periods, thereby making it possible to accurately grasp the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event.

Feature e2. The mode information storage means includes:
a most recent storage area (current area 311) for storing the most recent aspect information derived by the information deriving means;
A past storage area (first to third history areas 312 to 314) that stores the aspect information derived by the information deriving means before the aspect information stored in the latest storage area. The gaming machine according to feature e1.

According to feature e2, since both the latest aspect information and the past aspect information derived before that are stored, not only the latest occurrence frequency of a predetermined event but also the past ones can be grasped. becomes possible.

Feature e3. A period elapse specifying means (a function of executing the processes of step S8605 and step S8613 in the main CPU 63) that specifies that a predetermined period has passed from the occurrence of a period start opportunity until the period end opportunity occurs;
Most recent storage execution means (steps in the main CPU 63) for storing the aspect information derived by the information derivation means in the most recent storage area in a situation where the period elapse specifying means has not specified that the predetermined period has elapsed. function to execute the process of S8602),
Based on the fact that the predetermined period of time has elapsed has been specified by the period elapse specifying means, the predetermined information is derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means. past storage execution means (a function of executing the processes of step S8607 and step S8614 in the main CPU 63) for storing period-related mode information corresponding to the game results in the period in the past storage area;
The gaming machine according to feature e2, comprising:

According to feature e3, aspect information derived in a situation where a predetermined period has not yet elapsed is stored in the latest storage area, and aspect information derived when the predetermined period has elapsed is stored in the past storage area. be done. This makes it possible to grasp the latest frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event, and also to grasp the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the past in units of a predetermined period. Further, since the past storage area stores aspect information in units of a predetermined period, it is possible to suppress the number of aspect information stored in the past storage area.

Feature e4. Means for erasing the history information stored in the history storage means (processing of steps S8608 and S8615 in the main CPU 63 The gaming machine according to feature e3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the following functions.

According to feature e4, since the history information in the history information storage means is erased when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is possible to suppress the required storage capacity in the history information storage means. Furthermore, even if the historical information is deleted after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the mode information derived using the historical information during the predetermined period is stored in the past storage area, so the predetermined It becomes possible to later grasp the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event during the period.

Feature e5. The gaming machine according to any one of features e2 to e4, wherein the past storage area is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the aspect information derived at different timings.

According to feature e5, since a plurality of pieces of aspect information are stored in the past storage area, it is possible to compare the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event corresponding to a plurality of periods.

Feature e6. Period elapse specifying means for specifying that a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of a predetermined period start trigger until the predetermined period end trigger occurs (a function that executes the processing of step S8605 and step S8613 in the main CPU 63) )and,
Based on the period elapse specifying means specifying that the predetermined period has elapsed, the predetermined information derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means. past storage execution means (a function of executing the processes of step S8607 and step S8614 in the main CPU 63) for storing period-related aspect information corresponding to the game results in the period in the aspect information storage means;
Equipped with
The game according to any one of features e1 to e5, wherein the mode information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of mode information corresponding to a plurality of periods corresponding to each of the different predetermined periods. Machine.

According to feature e6, since a plurality of pieces of past aspect information derived in units of a predetermined period are stored, it is possible to cope with multiple periods while suppressing the number of aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means. It becomes possible to compare the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events.

Feature e7. Means for erasing the history information stored in the history storage means (processing of steps S8608 and S8615 in the main CPU 63 The gaming machine according to feature e6, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the above function.

According to feature e7, since the history information in the history information storage means is erased when a predetermined period of time has passed, it is possible to suppress the required storage capacity in the history information storage means. Furthermore, even if the historical information is deleted after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the mode information derived using the historical information during the predetermined period is stored in the past storage area, so the predetermined It becomes possible to later grasp the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event during the period.

Feature e8. means (main side) for controlling the notification means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that notifications corresponding to each of the plurality of aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means are sequentially executed; The gaming machine according to any one of features e1 to e7, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of steps S8702 to S8709 in the CPU 63.

According to feature e8, notification corresponding to the mode information is performed by the notification means. This makes it possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Moreover, since notifications corresponding to each of the plurality of aspect information are performed sequentially, it is possible to individually grasp the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in a plurality of periods while suppressing the number of notification means.

Feature e9. The aspect information storage means includes a first storage area (first history area 312) capable of storing the aspect information and a second storage area (second history area 313) capable of storing the aspect information. ) and,
This gaming machine has means (step S8607 in the main CPU 63) for shifting the aspect information stored in the first storage area to the second storage area by an instruction including at least an LDIR instruction when an information shift opportunity occurs. and a function of executing the process of step S8614).

According to feature e9, it becomes possible to shift aspect information between storage areas with a simple processing configuration.

Note that for the configuration of features e1 to e9, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature e group described above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature f group>
Feature f1. Means for executing processing at the start of supply of operating power based on the start of supply of operating power (in the 35th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S8801 to S8819 in the main CPU 63, In the embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S9401 to S9420 in the main CPU 63);
A power outage monitoring means (a function of executing the process of step S8901 in the main CPU 63 )and,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature f1, the power outage monitoring process is executed even when the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, so a power outage does not occur while the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed. If this occurs, it becomes possible to deal with it appropriately.

Feature f2. A means for executing periodically activated interrupt processing (a function for executing the first timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63),
The interrupt processing includes the power outage monitoring processing,
The gaming machine according to feature f1, wherein the interrupt processing can be started by interrupting in a situation where the processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed.

According to feature f2, even when the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, the interrupt process is periodically interrupted and activated, so that the process at the start of supply of operating power is executed. It becomes possible to periodically monitor the occurrence of power outages even under the current situation.

Feature f3. The interrupt processing can be started by interrupting even in a situation where post-completion processing (steps S8822 to S8825 in the main CPU 63) is being executed after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is completed. The gaming machine according to feature f2.

According to feature f3, the occurrence of a power outage can be regularly monitored in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, by using an interrupt process that can be interrupted and started in a situation where the post-completion process is being executed. This makes it possible to do so.

Feature f4. The interrupt process includes a progress corresponding process (steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63) executed to control the progress of the game,
If the interrupt process is interrupted and activated in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, the power failure monitoring process is executed, but the progress response process is not executed,
According to feature f3, when the interrupt process interrupts and is started in a situation where the post-termination process is being executed, both the power outage monitoring process and the progress response process can be executed. gaming machines.

According to feature f4, the occurrence of a power outage can be regularly monitored in a situation where a process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, by using an interrupt process that can be interrupted and started in a situation where a post-completion process is being executed. In a configuration where the game is executed automatically, even if the interrupt process is interrupted and started while the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, the process corresponding to the progress to control the progress of the game will not be executed. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature f5. Equipped with a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level,
Any one of the features f1 to f4, characterized in that in a situation where the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power is being executed, a setting possible situation may occur in which the setting value to be used can be changed. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature f5, the power outage monitoring process is executed even when the setting values to be used are being set, so a power outage occurs while the setting values to be used are being set. Even if this happens, it will be possible to deal with it appropriately.

Feature f6. If the supply of operating power is stopped after the occurrence of a power outage is identified in the power outage monitoring process, if the supply of operating power is restarted, the device that is set as a target for use before the supply of operating power is stopped. The gaming machine according to feature f5, characterized in that it is possible to play the game with the set values unchanged.

According to feature f6, even if a power outage occurs in a situation where setting values to be used are being set, the power outage monitoring process identifies the occurrence of a power outage, so the supply of operating power is resumed. In this case, it becomes possible to play the game in a situation where the setting values that were selected at the time of the power outage are used. As a result, even if a power outage occurs while the setting values to be used are being set, there is no need to set the setting values again when the supply of operating power is resumed.

Note that for the configuration of features f1 to f6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above characteristic group f, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately deal with the occurrence of a power outage, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group g>
Feature g1. A setting corresponding storage area (in the 39th embodiment, the first to sixth setting information storage area A setting corresponding storage means (setting corresponding storage area 325 in the 39th embodiment) having a first predetermined number of areas 325a to 325f, first to third setting information storage areas 326a to 326c in the fortieth embodiment); In the 40th embodiment, a settings corresponding storage area 326);
A setting means for setting setting values to be used (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63);
profit-related means that executes profit-related processing (step S504) related to the player's profit using the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means; (Function to execute special figure fluctuation start processing in the main CPU 63),
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the number of types of the setting values that can be set by the setting means is smaller than the first predetermined number.

According to feature g1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, in a configuration in which a first predetermined number of setting corresponding storage areas are provided for storing setting corresponding information corresponding to setting values, the number of types of setting values to be used is greater than the first predetermined number. The number is small. As a result, it becomes possible to share the configuration of the setting correspondence storage means with a gaming machine that uses the first predetermined number of types of setting values, so that when changing the number of types of setting values, the gaming machine It becomes possible to perform design work easily. From the above, it is possible to make the configuration regarding setting values suitable.

Feature g2. comprising a correspondence information storage means (a setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control) capable of storing and holding correspondence information corresponding to each of the first predetermined number of setting correspondence storage areas;
The setting means sets the setting value to be used by changing the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means based on a change operation,
The setting correspondence information of the setting values that can be set by the setting means is stored in at least one setting correspondence storage area, and is part of the first predetermined number and corresponds to a plurality of the setting correspondences. The configuration is such that the same setting correspondence information is stored in the storage areas, so that the setting correspondence information is stored in all of the first predetermined number of the setting correspondence storage areas. The gaming machine described in g1.

According to feature g2, the setting value to be used is changed by changing the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means based on the change operation, and the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the changed correspondence information is changed. By using the setting correspondence information in the profit-related process, the profit-related process will be executed in a manner corresponding to the setting value to be used. In this case, the setting correspondence information of the setting value that can be set by the setting means is stored in at least one setting correspondence storage area, and is part of the first predetermined number and is a part of the plurality of setting correspondence storage areas. Since the same setting correspondence information is stored in the areas, the setting correspondence information is stored in all of the first predetermined number of setting correspondence storage areas. As a result, the first predetermined number of settings corresponding storage areas can be used as is, and the configuration for determining the settings to be used using the correspondence information storage means can be used as is, while the number of types of settings to be used can be increased. can be made smaller than the first predetermined number.

Feature g3. The profit-related means are:
means for reading out the setting correspondence information from the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means (a function for executing read processing of the validity table in the main CPU 63);
means for executing the profit-related process using the read setting correspondence information (a function for executing the process of step S504 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to feature g2, comprising:

According to feature g3, even if the configuration has a configuration in which the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number, the setting correspondence corresponding to the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means. Since the profit-related process may be executed using the setting correspondence information read from the storage area, it is possible to use the configuration for reading the setting correspondence information as is when executing the profit-related process.

Feature g4. Predetermined display control for causing a predetermined display means (fourth notification display device 204) to display a display corresponding to the current setting value in a situation where the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means can be changed; means (a function for executing the processing of steps S9801 to S9804 in the main CPU 63);
The predetermined display control means is
Means for reading display information of setting values corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information of the correspondence information storage means (processing of steps S9801 to S9803 in the main CPU 63) function) and
means for causing the predetermined display means to display a display corresponding to the display information of the read setting values (a function for executing the process of step S9804 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to feature g2 or g3, characterized by comprising:

According to feature g4, when changing the setting value to be used, it is possible to change the setting value while checking the display corresponding to the current setting value displayed on the predetermined display means. Become. In this case, even if the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number, the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information in the correspondence information storage means is The configuration is such that display information of a corresponding setting value is read out and a predetermined display means is caused to display a display corresponding to the display information of the read setting value. This makes it possible to use the configuration for reading the display information of the set value as is when executing the display corresponding to the set value.

Feature g5. The number of types of the setting value that can be set by the setting means is a divisor of the first predetermined number and is different from the first predetermined number,
The gaming machine according to feature g4, wherein the number of the setting correspondence storage areas in which the setting correspondence information corresponding to each setting value is stored is the same number among the setting values.

According to feature g5, even if the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number, the frequency at which the display corresponding to the setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means is limited. It is possible to make each setting value the same.

Feature g6. The setting correspondence information corresponding to the same setting value is not stored in the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information in a consecutive order in the change order of the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature g4 or g5, characterized in that:

According to feature g6, each time a change operation is performed, it is possible to change the setting value to be displayed on the predetermined display means. Thereby, even if the configuration is such that the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number, it is possible to improve the operability of the change operation.

Note that for the configuration of features g1 to g6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above characteristic group g, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to have a suitable configuration regarding the setting values that determine the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic h group>
Feature h1. Display means (special figure display section 37a, special figure reservation display section 37b, regular figure display section 38a, ordinary figure reservation display section 38b, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, first to fifth display circuits 261 ~265) and
a display control means (main CPU 63) that transmits display data (display data signal, display clock signal) corresponding to display content to be displayed on the display means;
Display execution means (display IC 266) that performs display settings on the display means so that display content corresponds to the display data when the display data is transmitted by the display control means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
comprising a plurality of the display means,
The display control means includes a sequential transmission means (a function of executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) for sequentially transmitting the display data corresponding to each of the plurality of display means to the display execution means,
When the display data is transmitted by the display control means, the display execution means transmits display content corresponding to the display data to a display means to which the display data is set among the plurality of display means. The above display settings are made so that
The transmission interval of the display data from the sequential transmission means to the display execution means is such that the display execution means transmits the display data to each display means before the display corresponding to the display data can no longer be maintained in each display means. A gaming machine characterized in that the transmission interval is the transmission interval at which the display setting is performed.

According to feature h1, the display execution means performs display settings for the display means in accordance with the display data transmitted from the display control means, and thereby the display means is display-controlled so that the display content corresponds to the display data. Ru. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the display control means. In this case, in a configuration where a plurality of display means are provided, the display execution means is not provided in one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of display means, but one display execution means is provided for the plurality of display means. Execution means are shared. This makes it possible to increase the number of display means while suppressing an increase in the number of display execution means. In addition, the transmission interval of display data from the display control means to the display execution means is such that the display setting by the display execution means for each display means is determined before the display corresponding to the display data can no longer be maintained on each display means. The transmission interval is set at which the transmission will be performed. As a result, even in a configuration where one display execution means is used for a plurality of display means, it is possible to appropriately display the display data on each display means. From the above, it is possible to provide a suitable configuration for controlling the display of the display means.

Feature h2. When transmitting the display data to the display execution means, the sequential transmission means transmits identifying information (type data signal, type clock signal) that enables identification of the type of the display means to which the display data is set. The gaming machine according to feature h1, characterized in that the information is transmitted to the display execution means.

According to feature h2, when display data is transmitted from the display control means, the display execution means may set the display data to the display means corresponding to the specifiable information transmitted from the display control means. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration of the display execution means even if one display execution means is used for a plurality of display means.

Feature h3. The sequential transmitting means transmits the data so that when one update cycle is such that a plurality of the display units are subject to setting of the display data once in a predetermined order, the update cycle is repeated. The gaming machine according to feature h1 or h2, characterized in that the gaming machine transmits display data.

According to feature h3, since the display control means only needs to change the display means to which display data is to be transmitted in accordance with a predetermined order, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration of the display control means.

Feature h4. The sequential transmission means is configured to transmit data to one of the display means, even if the content of the display data for one of the display means is the same as the content of the display data when the display data was previously transmitted with the display means as the transmission target. The gaming machine according to any one of features h1 to h3, wherein the gaming machine transmits the display data when the game machine becomes a game machine.

According to feature h4, since the display data to be transmitted is transmitted even if the contents of the display data have not been changed, the configuration is such that one display execution means is used for a plurality of display means. It is also possible to continue displaying the same information on a predetermined display means.

Feature h5. The sequential transmission means executes a process for transmitting the display data in a predetermined interrupt process (second timer interrupt process) that is activated by interrupting a situation in which a predetermined process is being executed in the display control unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features h1 to h4.

According to feature h5, since the process for transmitting display data is executed in the predetermined interrupt process, it is possible to set the display data to each display means at a predetermined cycle. Therefore, even in a configuration in which one display execution means is used for multiple display means, before it becomes impossible to maintain the display corresponding to the display data on each display means, the It becomes possible to set the display data by the display execution means.

Feature h6. According to feature h5, the processing for transmitting the display data by the display execution means to the plurality of display means to be subjected to the display settings is integrated into the predetermined interrupt processing. Game machine.

According to feature h6, it is possible to set the display data to each display means to be set by the display execution means at the same cycle.

Feature h7. The display control means includes means for interrupting and activating a specific interrupt process (first timer interrupt process) while the predetermined process is being executed (a function for executing the first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63). ,
The gaming machine according to feature h5 or h6, wherein the interrupt cycle of the predetermined interrupt process is shorter than the interrupt cycle of the specific interrupt process.

According to feature h7, a process in which display data is transmitted to the display execution means is executed in a predetermined interrupt process that has a cycle shorter than the interrupt cycle of the specific interrupt process. This makes it possible to transmit display data in a shorter period than in a configuration in which the process of transmitting display data to the display execution means is executed in specific interrupt processing.

Feature h8. The gaming machine according to feature h7, wherein a process for advancing the game is executed in the specific interrupt process.

According to feature h8, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while activating the specific interrupt process at an appropriate cycle to execute the process for advancing the game.

Feature h9. The gaming machine according to feature h7 or h8, wherein the predetermined interrupt process is started by interrupting even when the specific interrupt process is being executed.

According to feature h9, the predetermined interrupt process is activated by interrupting even when the specific interrupt process is being executed, so even if the specific interrupt process is configured to be activated by interrupting, the display data transmission cycle cannot be changed. It becomes possible to set the period to a predetermined period.

Feature h10. Features h7 to h9 characterized in that when the predetermined interrupt processing is started, the interruption of the specific interrupt processing is prohibited, and when the predetermined interrupt processing is ended, the interruption of the specific interrupt processing is permitted. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature h10, it is possible to prevent a specific interrupt process from being interrupted and executed in a situation where a predetermined interrupt process is being executed. This makes it possible to prioritize processing for transmitting display data.

Feature h11. The display control means is a means for executing processing at the time of starting supply of operating power when supply of operating power is started (in the 33rd embodiment, a function for executing processing of steps S7901 to S7918 in the main CPU 63). , in the 35th embodiment, the function to execute the processing of steps S8801 to S8819 in the main CPU 63, in the 36th embodiment, the function to execute the processing of steps S9401 to S9420 in the main CPU 63, and in the 37th embodiment In the 42nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S9501 to S9518, and in the 42nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S9901 to S9917.
The gaming machine according to any one of features h5 to h10, wherein the predetermined interrupt process is started by interrupting even when the process at the time of starting supply of operating power is being executed.

According to feature h11, it is possible to control the display of a plurality of display means even in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. In addition, since the configuration is such that a predetermined interrupt process is activated by interrupting the process at the start of the supply of operating power, it is possible to supply the operating power without complicating the processing configuration for the process at the start of the supply of operating power. It becomes possible to control the display of a plurality of display means in a situation where the processing at the time of starting is being executed.

Feature h12. Equipped with a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level,
In a situation where the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is being executed, the configuration can be a setting enable situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed,
The sequential transmitting means transmits the display data to the display execution means so that a display corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on a predetermined display means in the setting possible situation. The gaming machine described in feature h11.

According to feature h12, since the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means in a situation where the setting value to be used is being set, it becomes easier to perform the work of setting the setting value to be used. .

Feature h13. The display control means includes means (a function of executing a first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) for executing a process corresponding to the game in order to control the progress of the game after the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is completed. Prepare,
The sequential transmission means transmits the display data to the display execution means so that a corresponding display corresponding to the execution result of the progress correspondence process is displayed on at least some of the plurality of display means. to send,
The gaming machine according to feature h11 or h12, wherein the predetermined interrupt process is started by interrupting even after the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power ends.

According to feature h13, by using the predetermined interrupt processing, multiple interrupts can be performed both in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed and in the situation after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed. It becomes possible to control the display of the display means.

Note that for the configuration of features h1 to h13, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature i group>
Feature i1. A first interrupt execution means (first timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63 ) and
A second interrupt execution means (second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63 ) and
Equipped with
The second interrupt cycle is a shorter cycle than the first interrupt cycle,
For controlling the display of predetermined display means (special figure display section 37a, special figure reservation display section 37b, general figure display section 38a, ordinary figure reservation display section 38b, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) A gaming machine characterized in that processing is executed in the second interrupt processing.

According to feature i1, a process for controlling the display of a predetermined display means is executed in a predetermined interrupt process having a cycle shorter than the interrupt cycle of the specific interrupt process. This makes it possible to control the display of the predetermined display means in a shorter period than in a configuration in which the process for controlling the display of the predetermined display means is executed by specific interrupt processing.

Feature i2. The gaming machine according to feature i1, wherein processing for advancing the game is executed in the first interrupt processing.

According to feature i2, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while activating the first interrupt process at an appropriate cycle to execute the process for advancing the game.

Feature i3. The gaming machine according to feature i1 or i2, wherein the second interrupt process is started by interrupting even when the first interrupt process is being executed.

According to feature i3, the second interrupt process is activated by interrupting even when the first interrupt process is being executed, so even if the configuration is such that the first interrupt process is activated by interrupting, the predetermined display is It becomes possible to perform display control of the means at a predetermined period.

Feature i4. A feature characterized in that when the second interrupt processing is started, the interruption of the first interrupt processing is prohibited, and when the second interrupt processing is ended, the interruption of the first interrupt processing is permitted. The gaming machine according to any one of i1 to i3.

According to feature i4, it is possible to prevent the first interrupt process from interrupting and being executed in a situation where the second interrupt process is being executed. This makes it possible to give priority to display control of a predetermined display means.

Feature i5. A means for executing processing at the time of starting supply of operating power when supply of operating power is started (a function for executing main processing in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features i1 to i4, wherein the second interrupt process is started by interrupting even when the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is being executed.

According to feature i5, it is possible to control the display of the predetermined display means even in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. In addition, since the configuration is such that the second interrupt process interrupts and starts the process when the supply of operating power starts, it is possible to reduce the amount of operating power without complicating the processing configuration of the process when the supply of operating power starts. It becomes possible to control the display of the predetermined display means in a situation where the process at the start of supply is being executed.

Feature i6. Equipped with a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level,
In a situation where the processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, the configuration can be a setting enable situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed,
The second interrupt execution means is characterized in that the second interrupt processing executes processing for causing the predetermined display means to display a display corresponding to the current setting value in the setting possible situation. The gaming machine according to feature i5.

According to feature i6, since the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means in a situation where the setting value to be used is being set, it becomes easier to perform the work of setting the setting value to be used. .

Feature i7. Feature i5, wherein the second interrupt execution means executes the second interrupt processing based on the elapse of the second interrupt cycle even after the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed. Or the gaming machine described in i6.

According to feature i7, by using the predetermined interrupt processing, the predetermined interrupt processing can be performed both in a situation where the processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed and in a situation after the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed. It becomes possible to control the display of the display means.

Note that for the configuration of features i1 to i7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature h group and the feature i group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to have a suitable configuration for displaying on the display means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature j1. Means for executing processing at the start of supply of operating power based on the start of supply of operating power (in the 33rd embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S7901 to S7918 in the main CPU 63, In the embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S8801 to S8819, in the 36th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S9401 to S9420, and in the 37th embodiment, the main CPU 63 (in the 42nd embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S9901 to S9917 in the main CPU 63);
Predetermined interrupt execution means that interrupts the process at the start of supply of operating power and executes a predetermined interrupt process (a function to execute the first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63, a function to execute the second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) )and,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature j1, the predetermined interrupt process is interrupted and activated even when the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, so even if the process is started immediately after the supply of operating power starts, the predetermined interrupt process can be set as the predetermined interrupt process. It becomes possible to give priority to the execution of the processing that is currently being performed. In addition, since there is no need to set a process that is set as a predetermined interrupt process for the process at the start of the supply of operating power, it is possible to operate without complicating the processing configuration for the process at the start of the supply of operating power. Even immediately after the start of power supply, it is possible to give priority to the execution of the process set as the predetermined interrupt process. As described above, it is possible to suitably perform processing when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature j2. The predetermined interrupt execution means includes predetermined display means (special figure display section 37a, special figure reservation display section 37b, regular figure display section 38a, ordinary figure reservation display section 38b, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). ) is executed in the predetermined interrupt process.

According to feature j2, it is possible to cause a predetermined display to perform a predetermined display even immediately after the start of supply of operating power.

Features j3. Equipped with a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level,
In a situation where the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is being executed, the configuration can be a setting enable situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed,
The predetermined interrupt execution means executes a process for causing a display corresponding to the current setting value to be performed on a predetermined display means (fourth notification display device 204) in the setting possible situation in the predetermined interrupt processing. The gaming machine according to feature j1 or j2, characterized in that the gaming machine is executed by:

According to feature j3, since the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means in a situation where the setting value to be used is being set, it becomes easier to perform the work of setting the setting value to be used. .

Features j4. According to any of features j1 to j3, the predetermined interrupt execution means executes the predetermined interrupt processing based on the elapse of a predetermined interrupt period even after the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power is completed. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to feature j4, by using the predetermined interrupt processing, the predetermined interrupt processing can be performed both in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed and in the situation after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed. It becomes possible to execute processing set as interrupt processing.

Features j5. The gaming machine according to any one of features j1 to j4, wherein the predetermined interrupt execution means executes a power outage monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage in the predetermined interrupt process.

According to feature j5, the power outage monitoring process is executed even in a situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, so that a power outage occurs in a situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed. If this occurs, it becomes possible to deal with it appropriately.

Features j6. The predetermined interrupt process includes a progress corresponding process (steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63) executed to control the progress of the game,
If the predetermined interrupt process is interrupted and activated in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, the power outage monitoring process is executed, but the progress response process is not executed,
If the predetermined interrupt process is interrupted and started in a situation where the post-completion process (steps S8822 to S8825 in the main CPU 63) is being executed after the process at the start of the supply of operating power is completed, the power failure monitoring The gaming machine according to feature j5, characterized in that both the processing and the progress corresponding processing can be executed.

According to feature j6, the occurrence of a power outage can be monitored in a situation where a process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed by using a predetermined interrupt process that can be interrupted and activated in a situation where a post-termination process is being executed. In a configuration where operations are performed periodically, even if a predetermined interrupt process is interrupted and started while the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, the process corresponding to the progress to control the progress of the game will not be executed. It becomes possible to do so.

Note that for the configuration of features j1 to j6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above feature j group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, processing needs to be performed appropriately when the supply of operating power is started, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic k group>
Feature k1. A history storage execution means (normal ball entry management processing in the main CPU 63) that stores game history information corresponding to a predetermined event when a game is executed in the history storage means (normal counter area 231). ) and
information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step SA201 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to the result of the game using the history information stored in the history storage means;
Mode information display control means (main CPU 63 function for executing display processing and second timer interrupt processing);
A predetermined response display that causes a predetermined response display (pre-shift display) to be performed on the information display means before a new display corresponding to the mode information is started based on the occurrence of a predetermined display trigger. a control means (a function of executing the process of step SA320 and the second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature k1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. By storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information can be prevented. Further, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to derive the mode information corresponding to the result of the game, and the information display means displays a display corresponding to the derived mode information. This makes it possible to grasp the gaming history management results, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. Furthermore, a predetermined corresponding display is performed on the information display means before a new display corresponding to the mode information is started based on the occurrence of a predetermined display trigger. As a result, when a predetermined display trigger occurs, it becomes possible to cause the information display means to display a predetermined corresponding display with priority over the display corresponding to the aspect information, and to use the information display means to It becomes possible to notify that a predetermined display trigger has occurred.

Feature k2. Equipped with a period elapse specifying means (a function of executing the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) that specifies that a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of a predetermined period start trigger until the predetermined period end trigger occurs. ,
The predetermined correspondence display control means determines that the predetermined display trigger has occurred when the period elapse specifying means specifies that the predetermined period has elapsed, and causes the information display means to display the predetermined correspondence display. The gaming machine according to feature k1, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to play.

According to feature k2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a predetermined corresponding display is performed on the information display means, and then a new display corresponding to the mode information is started on the information display means. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to recognize that the mode information displayed on the information display means is after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

Feature k3. The information deriving means utilizes the history information corresponding to the predetermined event that occurred after the predetermined period, based on the fact that the predetermined period has elapsed by the period elapse specifying device. The mode information is derived by
The predetermined correspondence display control means displays the history information corresponding to the predetermined event that occurred after the predetermined period, based on the fact that the predetermined period has elapsed by the period elapse specifying means. The predetermined correspondence display is performed on the information display means before the information display means performs a display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information derivation means using the method. The gaming machine described in feature k2.

According to feature k3, in a configuration in which new derivation of aspect information is performed based on the passage of a predetermined period, when the predetermined period has elapsed, after the predetermined correspondence display is performed on the information display means. After a predetermined period has elapsed, a display corresponding to the newly derived aspect information is performed. This allows the game hall manager to understand whether the display corresponding to the mode information on the information display means is the display corresponding to the mode information newly derived after a predetermined period has elapsed. becomes.

Feature k4. Means for erasing the history information stored in the history storage means based on the fact that the predetermined period has passed by the period elapse specifying means (executing the process of step SA217 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature k3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following function.

According to feature k4, since the history information in the history information storage means is deleted when a predetermined period of time has passed, it is possible to suppress the required storage capacity in the history information storage means.

Feature k5. Based on the fact that the predetermined period of time has elapsed has been specified by the period elapse specifying means, the predetermined information is derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means. Storage execution means (a function for executing the processing of step SA203 and step SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing the above-mentioned aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in the period in the aspect information storage means (calculation result storage area 234) as period-related aspect information ),
The mode information display control means controls the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to the period-corresponding mode information stored in the mode information storage means is displayed,
The predetermined correspondence display control means displays the period correspondence newly stored in the aspect information storage means by the storage execution means based on the fact that the period elapse specifying means specifies that the predetermined period has elapsed. The game according to any one of features k2 to k4, characterized in that the predetermined correspondence display is performed on the information display means before the display corresponding to the mode information is performed on the information display means. Machine.

According to feature k5, past mode information derived in units of a predetermined period is stored as period-corresponding mode information, and a display corresponding to the period-corresponding mode information is performed on the information display means. Thereby, by checking the information display means, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp the past period corresponding mode information derived in units of predetermined periods. Further, when a predetermined period has elapsed, a predetermined correspondence display is performed on the information display means, and then a display corresponding to the newly derived period correspondence mode information is performed after the predetermined period has elapsed. As a result, the administrator of the game hall can determine whether or not the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information on the information display means is the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information newly derived based on the elapse of a predetermined period. It becomes possible to understand.

Feature k6. The mode information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of period-corresponding mode information corresponding to each of the different predetermined periods,
The mode information display control means controls the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to each of the plurality of period-corresponding mode information stored in the mode information storage means is displayed. The gaming machine according to feature k5.

According to feature k6, a plurality of pieces of past period-corresponding form information derived in units of a predetermined period are stored, and a display corresponding to the plurality of period-corresponding form information is performed on the information display means. It becomes possible to compare the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event corresponding to a predetermined period.

Feature k7. In a situation where a display corresponding to the mode information is being performed, the information display means is set to a pre-switching state (interval non-display state) before displaying a display corresponding to the mode information different from the mode information. The gaming machine according to any one of features k1 to k6, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with means for executing the processing of step SA316 and the second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63.

According to feature k7, when the mode information to be displayed is switched, the information display means is in the pre-switching state, so that the administrator of the game hall can clearly indicate that the mode information to be displayed has been switched. It becomes possible to understand. In this case, the information display means is provided with the configuration of feature k1, and a predetermined corresponding display is performed on the information display means based on the occurrence of a predetermined display trigger. This makes it possible to notify that a predetermined display trigger has occurred by using the information display means that displays information corresponding to different mode information with the pre-switching state in between.

Feature k8. When the predetermined display trigger occurs, the predetermined corresponding display control means controls the predetermined corresponding display to the information display means even if the display duration period of the display corresponding to the mode information has not elapsed. The gaming machine according to any one of features k1 to k7, characterized in that the gaming machine is started with

According to feature k8, when a predetermined display trigger occurs, the predetermined corresponding display is started even if the display corresponding to the mode information is in the middle. Thereby, it becomes possible to notify at an early stage that a predetermined display trigger has occurred.

Feature k9. When the predetermined display trigger occurs during the display duration period of the display corresponding to the aspect information, the predetermined corresponding display control means controls the predetermined corresponding display to the information display unit after the display duration period has elapsed. The gaming machine according to any one of features k1 to k7, characterized in that the gaming machine is started with

According to feature k9, even if a predetermined display trigger occurs, the predetermined corresponding display is started after the display corresponding to the mode information displayed at that time is completed. This makes it possible to notify that a predetermined display trigger has occurred while not interfering with the display corresponding to the mode information that is already being performed.

Feature k10. comprising mode information storage means (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information derivation means,
The aspect information storage means has a plurality of specific storage areas (current area 311, first history area 312) so as to be able to store each of the plurality of aspect information derived at different timings by the information derivation means. , a second history area 313, and a third history area 314),
The aspect information display control means controls the information display means so that displays corresponding to each of the plurality of aspect information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas are sequentially executed according to a predetermined display order. The gaming machine according to any one of features k1 to k9.

According to feature k10, since notifications corresponding to each of a plurality of aspect information are executed sequentially, it is possible to individually grasp the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in a plurality of periods while suppressing the number of information display means. becomes. In addition, since the displays corresponding to each of the plurality of mode information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas are sequentially executed according to the predetermined display order, the administrator of the game hall can grasp the type of mode information to be displayed. It becomes easier to do.

Feature k11. The gaming machine according to feature k10, wherein a predetermined display order is determined in association with the plurality of specific storage areas.

According to feature k11, since a predetermined display order of displays corresponding to aspect information is determined in association with a plurality of specific storage areas, when starting a new display corresponding to one aspect information, the display target It becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying the type of aspect information.

Feature k12. When causing the information display means to display a display corresponding to the mode information after the predetermined correspondence display has been performed by the information display means, the mode information display control means may display information in the first order in the predetermined display order. The gaming machine according to feature k10 or k11, characterized in that the game machine starts from a display corresponding to the corresponding aspect information.

According to feature k12, after the predetermined corresponding display is performed based on the occurrence of a predetermined display trigger, the display starts from the display corresponding to the aspect corresponding to the first order in the predetermined display order. Thereby, when a predetermined display trigger occurs, it becomes possible to confirm the display corresponding to the mode information again from the first order of the predetermined display order.

Feature k13. a period elapse specifying means (a function of executing the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) that specifies that a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of a predetermined period start trigger until the predetermined period end trigger occurs;
Based on the fact that the period elapse specifying means specifies that the predetermined period has elapsed, the predetermined information is derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means. storage execution means (a function of executing the processing of step SA203 and step SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing the mode information corresponding to the game results in the period in the plurality of specific storage areas as period-corresponding mode information;
Equipped with
Any one of features k10 to k12, characterized in that the storage execution means stores the period-corresponding mode information in the plurality of specific storage areas in accordance with the order derived by the information derivation means. 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the feature k13, it becomes possible to confirm the period correspondence mode information according to the order in which it was derived.

Feature k14. The information derivation means executes an information derivation process for deriving the aspect information based on the occurrence of a processing execution opportunity, and starts deriving the aspect information and then starts deriving the aspect information. The gaming machine according to any one of features k1 to k13, characterized in that the information derivation process is executed a plurality of times until the information derivation process is completed.

According to feature k14, the information derivation process is executed multiple times from the start of the derivation of the aspect information until the derivation of the aspect information is completed, so the derivation of the aspect information is completed in one information derivation process. It becomes possible to reduce the processing load for executing the information derivation process compared to the configuration in which the information derivation process is performed.

Feature k15. a period elapse specifying means (a function of executing the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) that specifies that a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of a predetermined period start trigger until the predetermined period end trigger occurs;
Based on the fact that the predetermined period of time has elapsed has been specified by the period elapse specifying means, the predetermined information is derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means. Storage execution means (a function for executing the processing of step SA203 and step SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing the above-mentioned aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in the period in the aspect information storage means (calculation result storage area 234) as period-related aspect information )and,
Equipped with
The mode information display control means controls the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to the period-corresponding mode information stored in the mode information storage means is displayed,
The predetermined correspondence display control means determines that the predetermined display trigger has occurred when the period elapse specifying means specifies that the predetermined period has elapsed, and causes the information display means to display the predetermined correspondence display. The gaming machine according to feature k14, wherein the gaming machine is configured to play the game.

According to feature k15, past mode information derived in units of a predetermined period is stored as period-corresponding mode information, and a display corresponding to the period-corresponding mode information is performed on the information display means. Thereby, by checking the information display means, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp the past period corresponding mode information derived in units of predetermined periods. Further, when a predetermined period has elapsed, a predetermined correspondence display is performed on the information display means, and then a display corresponding to the newly derived period correspondence mode information is performed after the predetermined period has elapsed. As a result, the administrator of the game hall can determine whether or not the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information on the information display means is the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information newly derived based on the elapse of a predetermined period. It becomes possible to understand. In addition, it is possible to display a predetermined correspondence during a period in which period correspondence mode information is being derived, so that when a predetermined period has elapsed and period correspondence mode information is still being derived. However, it is possible to prevent the display corresponding to the period correspondence mode information from being displayed regardless of this.

Feature k16. The predetermined correspondence display control means causes the information display means to display the predetermined correspondence for a period longer than the longest period required for the information derivation means to derive one of the aspect information. The gaming machine according to feature k15.

According to feature k16, when a predetermined period has elapsed and period correspondence mode information is being derived, a predetermined correspondence display is performed on the information display means.

Note that for the configuration of features k1 to k16, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature l group>
Feature l1. A history storage execution means (normal ball entry management processing in the main CPU 63) that stores game history information corresponding to a predetermined event when a game is executed in the history storage means (normal counter area 231). ) and
information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step SA201 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to the result of the game using the history information stored in the history storage means;
aspect information storage means (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the aspect information derived by the information derivation means;
mode information display control means (main side (a function of executing display processing and second timer interrupt processing in the CPU 63);
Equipped with
The aspect information storage means has a plurality of specific storage areas (current area 311, first history area 312) so as to be able to store each of the plurality of aspect information derived at different timings by the information derivation means. , a second history area 313, and a third history area 314),
The aspect information display control means controls the information display means so that displays corresponding to each of the plurality of aspect information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas are sequentially executed according to a predetermined display order. A gaming machine with special features.

According to feature 11, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. By storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information can be prevented. Further, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to derive the mode information corresponding to the result of the game, and the information display means displays a display corresponding to the derived mode information. This makes it possible to grasp the gaming history management results, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events.

Moreover, since the aspect information storage means stores a plurality of aspect information derived at different timings and the notification corresponding to each of the plurality of aspect information is sequentially executed, the number of information display means can be suppressed. , it becomes possible to individually grasp the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in a plurality of periods. In addition, since the displays corresponding to each of the plurality of mode information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas are sequentially executed according to the predetermined display order, the administrator of the game hall can grasp the type of mode information to be displayed. It becomes easier to do.

Feature l2. The gaming machine according to feature 11, wherein a predetermined display order is determined in association with the plurality of specific storage areas.

According to feature 12, since a predetermined display order of displays corresponding to aspect information is determined in association with a plurality of specific storage areas, when starting a new display corresponding to one aspect information, the display target It becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying the type of aspect information.

Feature l3. A predetermined response display that causes a predetermined response display (pre-shift display) to be performed on the information display means before a new display corresponding to the mode information is started based on the occurrence of a predetermined display trigger. comprising a control means (a function of executing the process of step SA320 and the second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63),
When causing the information display means to display a display corresponding to the mode information after the predetermined correspondence display has been performed by the information display means, the mode information display control means may display information in the first order in the predetermined display order. The gaming machine according to feature 11 or 12, characterized in that the game machine starts from the display corresponding to the corresponding aspect information.

According to feature 13, after the predetermined correspondence display is performed based on the occurrence of a predetermined display trigger, the display starts from the display corresponding to the aspect corresponding to the first order in the predetermined display order. Thereby, when a predetermined display trigger occurs, it becomes possible to confirm the display corresponding to the style information again from the first order of the predetermined display order.

Feature l4. a period elapse specifying means (a function of executing the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) that specifies that a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of a predetermined period start trigger until the predetermined period end trigger occurs;
Based on the period elapse specifying means specifying that the predetermined period has elapsed, the predetermined information derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means. storage execution means (a function of executing the processing of step SA203 and step SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing the mode information corresponding to the game result in the period in the plurality of specific storage areas as period-corresponding mode information;
Equipped with
Any one of features 11 to 13, characterized in that the storage execution means stores the period-corresponding mode information in the plurality of specific storage areas according to the order derived by the information derivation means. 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to feature 14, it becomes possible to confirm the period correspondence mode information according to the order in which it was derived.

Feature l5. In a situation where a display corresponding to the mode information is being performed, the information display means is set to a pre-switching state (interval non-display state) before displaying a display corresponding to the mode information different from the mode information. The gaming machine according to any one of features 11 to 14, further comprising means for executing step SA316 processing and second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63.

According to feature 15, when the mode information to be displayed is switched, the information display means is in the pre-switching state, so that the administrator of the game hall can clearly indicate that the mode information to be displayed has been switched. It becomes possible to understand.

Note that for the configuration of features l1 to l5, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature m group>
Feature m1. A history storage execution means (normal ball entry management processing in the main CPU 63) that stores game history information corresponding to a predetermined event when a game is executed in the history storage means (normal counter area 231). ) and
information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step SA201 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to the result of the game using the history information stored in the history storage means;
Equipped with
The information derivation means executes an information derivation process for deriving the aspect information based on the occurrence of a processing execution opportunity, and starts deriving the aspect information and then starts deriving the aspect information. A gaming machine characterized in that the information derivation process is executed a plurality of times until the information derivation process is completed.

According to feature m1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. By storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information can be prevented. Furthermore, by using the history information stored in the history storage means to derive mode information corresponding to gaming results in a predetermined period, management results of gaming history such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events can be grasped. becomes possible. In addition, since the information derivation process is executed multiple times from the start of deriving the aspect information until the derivation of the aspect information is completed, compared to a configuration in which the derivation of the aspect information is completed in one information derivation process. It becomes possible to reduce the processing load for executing information derivation processing.

Feature m2. a period elapse specifying means (a function of executing the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) that specifies that a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of a predetermined period start trigger until the predetermined period end trigger occurs;
Based on the fact that the predetermined period of time has elapsed has been specified by the period elapse specifying means, the predetermined information is derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means. Storage execution means (a function for executing the processing of step SA203 and step SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing the above-mentioned aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in the period in the aspect information storage means (calculation result storage area 234) as period-related aspect information )and,
mode information display control means (for controlling the display of the information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that a display corresponding to the period-corresponding mode information stored in the mode information storage means is performed; a function of executing display processing and second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63;
Predetermined correspondence display control means (step SA320 in the main CPU 63 processing and second timer interrupt processing);
The gaming machine according to feature m1, comprising:

According to feature m2, past mode information derived in units of a predetermined period is stored as period-corresponding mode information, and a display corresponding to the period-corresponding mode information is performed on the information display means. Thereby, by checking the information display means, the manager of the game hall can grasp the past period correspondence mode information derived in units of predetermined periods. Further, when a predetermined period has elapsed, a predetermined correspondence display is performed on the information display means, and then a display corresponding to the newly derived period correspondence mode information is performed after the predetermined period has elapsed. As a result, the administrator of the game hall can determine whether or not the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information on the information display means is the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information newly derived based on the elapse of a predetermined period. It becomes possible to understand. In addition, it is possible to display a predetermined correspondence during a period in which period correspondence mode information is being derived, so that when a predetermined period has elapsed and period correspondence mode information is still being derived. However, it is possible to prevent the display corresponding to the period correspondence mode information from being displayed regardless of this.

Feature m3. The predetermined correspondence display control means causes the information display means to display the predetermined correspondence for a period longer than the longest period required for the information derivation means to derive one of the aspect information. The gaming machine according to feature m2.

According to feature m3, when a predetermined period has elapsed and period correspondence mode information is being derived, a predetermined correspondence display is performed on the information display means.

Note that for the configuration of features m1 to m3, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above-mentioned feature k group, above-mentioned feature l group, and above-mentioned feature m group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature n group>
Feature n1. a setting means (a function for executing the process of step SA709 in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
When the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used is changed based on the fact that the first setting-related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed. A situation generating means (in the 45th embodiment, a function and step of making an affirmative determination at step SA412 in the main CPU 63 A function to make an affirmative determination in SA417, a function to make an affirmative determination in step SA905 and step SA916 in the main CPU 63 in the 46th embodiment, and a function to make an affirmative determination in step SA917),
Based on the fact that the second setting-related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a) is performed when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used that is set by the setting means is determined. a notification generating means (a function for executing setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The situation generation means is configured to enable the setting even if the second setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting possible situation and when the supply of operating power is started thereafter. (in the 45th embodiment, a function to make an affirmative determination in step SA412 in the main CPU 63, and in the 46th embodiment, a function to make an affirmative determination in step SA905 and step SA916 in the main CPU 63) A game machine characterized by being equipped with a function to perform the following functions.

According to feature n1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In addition, in order to change the set value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting related operation when the supply of operating power is started, so any act of attempting to illegally change the set value to be used It is possible to make it difficult to perform. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used will be notified by performing the second setting-related operation, so the administrator of the game hall can check the setting value to be used as necessary. becomes possible.

Further, if the supply of operating power is stopped during the setting possible state, even if the second setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started thereafter, the setting possible state will be reached. As a result, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value to be used is being changed, when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting value to be used will be notified rather than the setting value to be used. It becomes possible to give priority to the change of values, and it becomes possible to prevent the game from being started even though the change of the setting value to be used has not actually been completed.

Feature n2. A status notification means (a function of executing the processing of steps SA801 to step SA803 in the main CPU 63 and a function of executing the second timer interrupt processing) is provided to notify the setting value that is in the process of being changed in the setting possible situation. The gaming machine according to feature n1.

According to feature n2, in the setting possible situation, the setting value that is being changed is notified, so that it is possible to change the setting value while grasping the current setting value. In addition, by being notified of the setting value that is in the process of being changed in the setting possible state, even if the operation related to the second setting is performed when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value becomes settable and the setting value is not changed. Even if the configuration is such that priority is given to changing the value, it becomes possible to substantially check the set value.

Feature n3. A feature characterized in that both the situation notification means and the notification generation means display target setting values on predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). The gaming machine described in n2.

According to feature n3, the target setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means regardless of whether the setting value is changed or the setting value is confirmed. On the other hand, it becomes possible to use a predetermined display means. In addition, even if the second setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started, even if the configuration is in a setting possible state, the set value will be displayed on the predetermined display means when the setting becomes possible. is displayed, the manager of the gaming hall who performed the second setting-related operation can confirm the set value by visually checking the predetermined display means.

Feature n4. In feature n3, the situation notification means causes the predetermined display means to display a display corresponding to the setting value in the process of being changed and a display corresponding to the setting possible situation. The game machine described.

According to feature n4, when the setting is possible, the predetermined display means displays not only a display corresponding to the setting value that is being changed, but also a display corresponding to the setting possible. As a result, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of a setting possible state, and when the supply of operating power is started afterwards, the setting becomes possible even though the second setting-related operation is performed. In this case, it becomes easier for the game hall manager to understand that the setting is possible.

Feature n5. The after-start generation means is configured to enable the set value to be changed from the set value that was selected when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable state when the settable state is set. The gaming machine according to any one of features n1 to n4.

According to feature n5, even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of a setting possible situation, when the supply of operating power is restarted, the setting value can be changed from the state immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped. It becomes possible to continue the operation.

Feature n6. a setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting values set by the setting means;
selection correspondence storage means (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the setting possible situation;
Equipped with
The situation generation means is means for changing the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means so that the setting value to be selected is changed when a change trigger occurs in the setting possible situation. (a function of executing the process of step SA708 in the main CPU 63),
The setting means stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means in the setting correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information when a termination trigger occurs in the setting possible situation. Accordingly, the setting values that were to be selected in the setting possible situation are set to be used,
The after-start generation means is configured to generate a setting corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting possible situation when the setting possible situation is set. The gaming machine according to any one of features n1 to n5, characterized in that the setting value can be changed from the value.

According to feature n6, the setting correspondence storage means stores the setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used, and the selection correspondence storage means stores the selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value that is being changed in the setting possible situation. By providing this, it becomes possible to change the setting value in the settable situation while storing and retaining information on the setting value that was set before the settable situation started. In this case, if the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting possible situation, the information stored in the selection corresponding storage means when the supply of operating power is stopped. The setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of a setting possible situation, when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting value change operation will continue from the state immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped. It is now possible to do so.

Feature n7. The situation generating means may be configured to generate the first setting-related operation when the first setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting possible situation and when the supply of operating power is started thereafter. Means for making it possible to change the setting value from the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means (in the 45th embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA417 in the main CPU 63, In the 46th embodiment, the gaming machine according to feature n6 is provided with a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA917 in the main CPU 63.

According to feature n7, if the second setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of a setting possible situation, the supply of operating power is stopped. It is possible to resume changing the setting value from the setting value that was subject to change before the change was made, while the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power was stopped in the middle of the setting possible situation. In this case, if the second setting-related operation is performed, the setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means. This makes it possible to vary the initial set value when starting to change the set value depending on the operation content when the supply of operating power is restarted.

Feature n8. The after-start generation means is configured to perform the first setting-related operation and the second setting-related operation when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting possible situation and the supply of operating power is started thereafter. The gaming machine according to any one of features n1 to n7, characterized in that the setting possible state can be achieved even if no operation is performed.

According to feature n8, if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of a setting possible situation, both the first setting-related operation and the second setting-related operation are performed when the subsequent operation power supply is started. Even if the setting value is not changed, the setting may become possible, so if the operating power supply is stopped while the setting value is being changed, the setting value should be changed when the operating power supply is resumed. It becomes possible to actively create a situation where this is possible.

Feature n9. The first setting-related operation includes setting the setting key insertion part (setting key insertion part 68a) to a predetermined corresponding state (turned ON state) by the setting key,
The situation generating means terminates the settable situation based on the setting key insertion section specifying that the setting key has changed from the predetermined corresponding state to a specific corresponding state (OFF operated state). The gaming machine according to any one of features n1 to n8, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with means (a function of executing the processing of step SA709 and step SA710 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature n9, in order to enable setting, it is necessary to use the setting key to bring the setting key insertion part into a predetermined compatible state, so it is prohibited to illegally change the setting value to be used. It is possible to make it difficult to perform. In this case, the settable status does not end only when the setting key insertion section is in the specific compatibility state, but ends when the setting key insertion section is changed from the predetermined compatibility state to the specific compatibility state. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of a configurable state and the supply of operating power is subsequently started while the setting key insertion section is in a specific compatible state, the configurable state is immediately restored. The setting key insertion section is not terminated, and the setting possible status is terminated by changing the setting key insertion section from the specified compatible state to the specified compatible state, and then from the specified compatible state to the specified compatible state. It becomes possible to end the settable situation at a timing favorable to the user.

Feature n10. The situation generation means is configured to detect a situation when the supply of operating power is stopped while the notification generation means is notifying the setting value of the target to be used, and when the supply of operating power is started thereafter. The gaming machine according to any one of features n1 to n9, characterized in that when the first setting-related operation is performed, the setting becomes possible.

According to feature n10, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value to be used is being notified, if the first setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is subsequently started. The setting becomes possible. This makes it possible to give priority to the task of changing setting values over the task of checking setting values.

Note that for the configuration of features n1 to n10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group o>
Feature o1. Means for executing profit grant processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set to be used from among setting values at multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) ) and
Setting-related execution means (a function of executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63, a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) that executes a predetermined setting-related process regarding the setting value;
midway restarting means for restarting the predetermined setting-related process from the middle after the supply of operating power is started, based on the fact that the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed; In the 45th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA412 and the main CPU 63 has a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA414, and in the 46th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA905 and step SA916. function to make a positive judgment), and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature o1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, if the supply of operating power is restarted, the predetermined setting-related process is restarted from the middle. Thereby, even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of a predetermined setting-related process, it is possible to continue the predetermined setting-related process when the supply of operating power is restarted.

Features o2. The setting-related execution means executes a predetermined setting-related operation (if the predetermined setting-related process is a setting value update process, an ON operation of the setting key insertion section 68a and a pressing operation of the reset button 68c; the predetermined setting-related process is a setting confirmation operation). If it is a process, the predetermined setting-related process is executed based on the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a),
The gaming machine according to feature o1, wherein the midway restart means restarts the predetermined setting-related process from the middle even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed.

According to feature o2, if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, the predetermined setting-related process is restarted from the middle even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed. , it becomes possible to give priority to restarting a predetermined setting-related process from the middle.

Feature o3. The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related process based on the predetermined setting-related operation being performed when supply of operating power is started;
The intermediate restart means restarts the predetermined setting-related process from the middle even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed when the supply of operating power is started;
If the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, and the predetermined setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started thereafter, the mid-resuming means causes the The gaming machine according to feature o2, characterized in that the predetermined setting-related process is not restarted from the middle, but the predetermined setting-related process is newly started by the setting-related execution means.

According to feature o3, since the predetermined setting-related process is executed based on the predetermined setting-related operation being performed when the supply of operating power is started, the act of causing the predetermined setting-related process to be executed fraudulently It is possible to make it difficult to perform. In this case, if the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of a predetermined setting-related process, even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed, the predetermined setting-related process will continue. Since the process is restarted from the beginning, it is possible to give priority to restarting from the middle of the predetermined setting-related process. On the other hand, if a predetermined setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed after the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of a predetermined setting-related process, the predetermined setting-related process will be restarted from the middle. It is not restarted but started anew. As a result, if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of a predetermined setting-related process, the predetermined setting-related process can be newly started depending on the presence or absence of a predetermined setting-related operation when the supply of operating power is restarted. It becomes possible to select either of or restarting a predetermined setting-related process from the middle.

Feature o4. The predetermined setting-related operation includes setting the setting key insertion part (setting key insertion part 68a) to a predetermined compatible state (turned ON state) by the setting key,
The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related process based on the fact that the setting key insertion section has determined that the predetermined corresponding state has been changed to a specific corresponding state (OFF operated state) by the setting key. (a function of executing the processing of step SA504 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the processing of step SA709 and step SA710 in the main CPU 63). Game machine.

According to feature o4, in order to start a predetermined setting-related process, it is necessary to use a setting key to bring the setting key insertion part into a predetermined compatible state, and therefore, it is impossible to perform an act of unauthorized execution of a predetermined setting-related process. It is possible to make it difficult to perform. In this case, the predetermined setting-related processing does not end only when the setting key insertion section is in the specific compatibility state, but ends when the setting key insertion section is changed from the predetermined compatibility state to the specific compatibility state. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, even if the supply of operating power is subsequently started while the setting key insertion part is in a specific compatible state, the The predetermined setting-related processing is not terminated, and the predetermined setting-related processing is terminated by changing the setting key insertion section from the specific compatibility state to the predetermined compatibility state and then further changing from the predetermined compatibility state to the specific compatibility state. Therefore, it becomes possible to finish the predetermined setting-related processing at a timing that is convenient for the administrator of the gaming hall.

Feature o5. The gaming machine according to any one of features o1 to o4, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process for changing a setting value to be used.

According to feature o5, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being changed, when the supply of operating power is restarted, the setting value can be changed from the setting value that was being changed. It becomes possible to restart the process. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while changing the set value, it is possible to continue changing the set value when the supply of operating power is restarted.

Feature o6. The predetermined setting-related process is a process for changing the setting value to be used,
a setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) that stores setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used;
selection correspondence storage means (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the predetermined setting related process;
Equipped with
The setting-related execution means includes:
The predetermined setting-related process includes means for changing the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means (main side a function of executing the process of step SA708 in the CPU 63);
As the predetermined setting-related process, when a termination trigger occurs, information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means is stored as the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage means, means for setting the setting value that was the selection target to be used (a function for executing the process of step SA709 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
When the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, the midway restart means restarts the setting value from the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features o1 to o5, characterized in that it is possible to change the game machine.

According to feature o6, the setting correspondence storage means stores the setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used, and the selection correspondence storage means stores the selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value that is being changed in the setting possible situation. By providing this, it becomes possible to change the setting value in the settable situation while storing and retaining information on the setting value that was set before the settable situation started. In this case, if the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being changed, if the supply of operating power is stopped, the memory is stored in the storage means corresponding to the selection. The setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information that was previously selected. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while changing the setting value, when the supply of operating power is restarted, the setting value will be changed from the state immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped. It becomes possible to continue the operation.

Feature o7. The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related process based on a predetermined setting-related operation being performed when supply of operating power is started;
The intermediate restart means restarts the predetermined setting-related process from the middle based on the fact that the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed when the supply of operating power is started;
The setting-related execution means is configured to perform, in a case where the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, and when the supply of operating power is started thereafter, the predetermined setting-related operation is performed. , means for making it possible to change the setting value from the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means (in the forty-fifth embodiment, an affirmative determination is made in step SA417 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature o6, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA917 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-sixth embodiment.

According to feature o7, when the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power is stopped while changing the setting value, the operating power is While it is possible to resume changing the set value from the set value that was subject to change before the supply of power was stopped, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the set value is being changed If a predetermined setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means. This makes it possible to vary the initial set value when starting to change the set value depending on the operation content when the supply of operating power is restarted.

Note that for the configuration of features o1 to o7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature p group>
Feature p1. Means for executing profit granting processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set to be used from among setting values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) ) and
Predetermined setting-related operations (if the predetermined setting-related process is a setting value update process, turn on the setting key insertion section 68a and press the reset button 68c; if the predetermined setting-related process is a setting confirmation process, insert the setting key) A setting-related execution means (a function of executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63, a setting in the main CPU 63) that executes a predetermined setting-related process regarding the setting value based on the ON operation of the section 68a has been performed. (a function to execute confirmation processing),
If the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related process, the setting-related execution means determines whether the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed after the supply of operating power is started. Also includes a post-supply execution means (in the 45th embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA412 in the main CPU 63 and a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA414 in the main CPU 63) that executes the predetermined setting-related processing. In the embodiment No. 46, the gaming machine is equipped with a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA905 and step SA916 in the main CPU 63.

According to feature p1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that Further, by performing a predetermined setting-related operation, it is possible to execute a predetermined setting-related process. In this case, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined settings-related processing is completed, if the supply of operating power is resumed, the predetermined settings will be applied even if the predetermined settings-related operations are not performed. Related processing is executed. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of predetermined setting-related processing.

Feature p2. The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related process based on the predetermined setting-related operation being performed when supply of operating power is started;
The gaming machine according to feature p1, wherein the post-supply execution means executes the predetermined setting-related process even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed when the supply of operating power is started. .

According to feature p2, since a predetermined setting-related process is executed based on a predetermined setting-related operation being performed when the supply of operating power is started, an act of causing a predetermined setting-related process to be executed fraudulently. It is possible to make it difficult to perform. In this case, if the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of a predetermined setting-related process, the predetermined setting-related process will be executed even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to give priority to the execution of predetermined setting-related processing.

Feature p3. The predetermined setting-related operation includes setting the setting key insertion part (setting key insertion part 68a) to a predetermined compatible state (turned ON state) by the setting key,
The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related process based on the fact that the setting key insertion section has determined that the predetermined corresponding state has been changed to a specific corresponding state (OFF operated state) by the setting key. (a function of executing the process of step SA504 in the main side CPU 63, a function of executing the process of steps SA709 and step SA710 in the main side CPU 63). Game machine.

According to feature p3, in order to start a predetermined setting-related process, it is necessary to use the setting key to bring the setting key insertion part into a predetermined compatible state, so it is impossible to perform an act of unauthorized execution of a predetermined setting-related process. It is possible to make it difficult to perform. In this case, the predetermined setting-related processing does not end only when the setting key insertion section is in the specific compatibility state, but ends when the setting key insertion section is changed from the predetermined compatibility state to the specific compatibility state. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, even if the supply of operating power is subsequently started while the setting key insertion part is in a specific compatible state, the The predetermined setting-related processing is not terminated, and the predetermined setting-related processing is terminated by changing the setting key insertion section from the specific compatibility state to the predetermined compatibility state and then further changing from the predetermined compatibility state to the specific compatibility state. Therefore, it becomes possible to finish the predetermined setting-related processing at a timing that is convenient for the administrator of the gaming hall.

Feature p4. The post-supply execution means is configured to perform a specific related operation when the supply of operating power is started thereafter even if the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related process. The gaming machine according to any one of features p1 to p3, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is not executed in the case where the setting-related process is performed.

According to feature p4, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before completing a predetermined setting-related process, if the supply of operating power is started after that, and a specific related operation is performed. , the predetermined setting-related processing is not executed. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before a predetermined setting-related process is completed, the supply of operating power will be started if there is no need to execute the predetermined setting-related process afterwards. By performing a specific related operation when a specific setting related process is performed, it is possible to prevent a predetermined setting related process from being executed.

Feature p5. The gaming machine according to any one of features p1 to p4, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process for notifying setting values to be used.

According to feature p5, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being notified, when the supply of operating power is subsequently started, it is assumed that the predetermined setting-related operation has not been performed. Notification of the set value is restarted. This makes it possible to give priority to notification of setting values.

Feature p6. a setting means (a function for executing the process of step SA709 in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
When the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used is changed based on the fact that a specific related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed. A situation generating means (in the 45th embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA412 in the main CPU 63 and a function in step SA417) that makes it possible to set the setting value (a situation in which the setting value update process is executed). (in the 46th embodiment, a function to make an affirmative judgment in step SA905 and step SA916 in the main CPU 63, and a function to make an affirmative judgment in step SA917);
Equipped with
The post-supply execution means is configured to perform the specific related operation when the supply of operating power is started thereafter even if the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related process. , the predetermined setting-related process is not executed;
The situation generating means is configured to perform the specific related operation when the supply of operating power is started after that even if the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related process. The gaming machine according to feature p5, characterized in that when the setting is possible, the setting becomes possible.

According to feature p6, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being notified, if the specific related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started afterwards. In this case, the setting value is not notified, but the setting value becomes settable, allowing the setting value to be changed. As a result, when a specific related operation is performed to bring about a settable situation in which a setting value can be changed, it is possible to give priority to the occurrence of a settable situation over notification of a set value.

Feature p7. The gaming machine according to any one of features p1 to p6, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process for changing a setting value to be used.

According to feature p7, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being changed, the setting value can be changed when the supply of operating power is restarted. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while changing the set value, it is possible to continue changing the set value when the supply of operating power is restarted.

Note that for the configuration of features p1 to p7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics Q group>
Feature q1. Means for executing profit granting processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set to be used from among setting values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) ) and
a setting-related execution means for executing a predetermined setting-related process regarding the setting value (a function of executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63, a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The setting-related execution means executes a specific related operation (predetermined setting-related processing) when the supply of operating power is started after that even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed. If a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation is performed if the process is for setting confirmation, or a RAM clear operation if the predetermined setting-related process is a setting value update process, then the predetermined setting-related process is not executed. A gaming machine with special features.

According to feature q1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related processing, if the specified related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started afterwards, the specified setting-related Setting-related processing is not executed. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before a predetermined setting-related process is completed, the supply of operating power will be started if there is no need to execute the predetermined setting-related process afterwards. By performing a specific related operation when a specific setting related process is performed, it is possible to prevent a predetermined setting related process from being executed.

Feature q2. The gaming machine according to feature q1, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process for notifying setting values to be used.

According to feature q2, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being notified, if the supply of operating power is started afterwards and a specific related operation is performed, the setting is Value notification is not restarted. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being notified, if there is no need to notify the setting value afterwards, when the supply of operating power is started. By performing specific related operations, it is possible to prevent setting values from being notified.

Feature q3. The setting-related execution means executes a predetermined setting-related operation (if the predetermined setting-related process is a setting value update process, an ON operation of the setting key insertion section 68a and a pressing operation of the reset button 68c; the predetermined setting-related process is a setting confirmation operation). If it is a process, the predetermined setting-related process is executed based on the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a, and the supply of operating power is performed before the predetermined setting-related process is completed. Even if the supply of operating power is stopped, if the specific related operation is performed instead of the predetermined setting related operation when the supply of operating power is started thereafter, the predetermined setting related process is not executed. The gaming machine according to q1 or q2.

According to feature q3, since it is necessary to perform a predetermined setting-related operation in order to perform a predetermined setting-related process, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of fraudulently executing a predetermined setting-related process.

Feature q4. The setting-related execution means determines whether the specific related operation is not performed if the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related process and if the supply of operating power is started thereafter. In this case, means for executing the predetermined setting-related processing even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed (in the 45th embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA412 in the main CPU 63 and a function in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature q3, further comprising a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA414.

According to feature q4, if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, the predetermined setting-related operation is determined depending on whether or not a specific related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started. It becomes possible to select whether or not to execute a predetermined setting-related process without having to do so.

Feature q5. The predetermined setting-related operation includes setting the setting key insertion part (setting key insertion part 68a) to a predetermined compatible state (turned ON state) by the setting key,
The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related process based on the fact that the setting key insertion section has identified that the predetermined corresponding state has been changed to a specific corresponding state (OFF operated state) by the setting key. The gaming machine according to feature q4, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a means for terminating the process (a function of executing the processing of step SA504 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the processing of steps SA709 and step SA710 in the main CPU 63) .

According to feature q5, in order to start a predetermined setting-related process, it is necessary to use the setting key to bring the setting key insertion part into a predetermined compatible state. It is possible to make it difficult to perform. In this case, the predetermined setting-related processing does not end only when the setting key insertion section is in the specific compatibility state, but ends when the setting key insertion section is changed from the predetermined compatibility state to the specific compatibility state. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, even if the supply of operating power is subsequently started while the setting key insertion part is in a specific compatible state, the The predetermined setting-related processing is not terminated, and the predetermined setting-related processing is terminated by changing the setting key insertion section from the specific compatibility state to the predetermined compatibility state and then further changing from the predetermined compatibility state to the specific compatibility state. Therefore, it becomes possible to finish the predetermined setting-related processing at a timing that is convenient for the administrator of the gaming hall.

Feature q6. Another execution means for executing a separate process different from the predetermined setting-related process based on the specific related operation being performed when the supply of operating power is started (the predetermined setting-related process is for setting confirmation) If it is a process, a function that executes only the RAM clear process in the main CPU 63 and does not execute the setting value update process, or a function that executes the RAM clear process and the setting value update process in the main CPU 63, or a predetermined setting related process is the setting value. If it is an update process, the main CPU 63 in the 45th embodiment executes only the RAM clear process and does not execute the setting value update process). gaming machines.

According to feature q6, when the supply of operating power is stopped before a predetermined setting-related process is completed by using a specific related operation performed to execute another process, the supply of operating power is subsequently stopped. It is possible to prevent a predetermined setting-related process from being executed when the process is started.

Feature q7. The separate execution means determines that even if the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related process, when the supply of operating power is started thereafter, it is determined that the specific related operation has been performed. The gaming machine according to feature q6, characterized in that the separate processing is executed based on the above.

According to feature q7, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before a predetermined setting-related process is completed, if the supply of operating power is started after that, and a specific related operation is performed. It becomes possible to give priority to the execution of another process over a predetermined setting-related process.

Feature q8. In feature q6 or q7, the predetermined setting-related process is a process for notifying a setting value to be used, and the separate process is a process for changing a setting value to be used. The game machine described.

According to feature q8, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being notified, if the supply of operating power is started afterwards and a specific related operation is performed, the setting is Value notification is not restarted. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being notified, if there is no need to notify the setting value afterwards, when the supply of operating power is started. By performing specific related operations, it is possible to prevent setting values from being notified. Further, as an operation for preventing notification of a setting value in this way, it is possible to use a specific related operation for executing a process for changing a setting value.

Note that for the configuration of features q1 to q8, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic r group>
Feature r1. a setting means (a function for executing the process of step SA709 in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
Situation generation means (in the 45th embodiment, step SA412 in the main CPU 63 In the 46th embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SA905 and step SA916 in the main CPU 63, and the function of making an affirmative determination in step SA917 in the main CPU 63. )and,
a setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting values set by the setting means;
selection correspondence storage means (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the setting possible situation;
Equipped with
The situation generation means is means for changing the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means so that the setting value to be selected is changed when a change trigger occurs in the setting possible situation. (a function of executing the process of step SA708 in the main CPU 63),
The setting means stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means in the setting correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information when a termination trigger occurs in the setting possible situation. The gaming machine is characterized in that the setting value that was the selection target in the setting possible situation is set as the usage target.

According to feature r1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, a setting correspondence storage means for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used, and a selection correspondence storage means for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value that is being changed in the setting possible situation are provided. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the setting value in the setting possible situation while storing and retaining information on the setting value that was set before the setting possible situation started.

Feature r2. The situation generating means is configured to generate the information stored in the selection correspondence storage means in the previous settable situation in the settable situation that occurs after the settable situation ends before the termination trigger occurs. Feature r1 is characterized in that it is provided with a first change execution means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA701 in the main CPU 63) that enables changing the setting value from the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information. The game machine described.

Feature r2. If the settable situation is started after the settable situation ends before the termination trigger occurs, the setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means. . As a result, even if the configurable status ends before the termination trigger occurs, when the configurable status is restarted, the setting value can be changed from the setting value that was last selected in the previous configurable status. It becomes possible to continue to do so.

Feature r3. The situation generating means generates a setting corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means in the setting possible situation that occurs after the setting possible situation ends before the termination trigger occurs. The gaming machine according to feature r2, further comprising a second change execution means (a function of making a negative determination in step SA701 in the main CPU 63) that allows the setting value to be changed from the value.

According to feature r3, when a configurable situation is started after the configurable situation ends before the termination trigger occurs, the setting value is changed from the setting value that was last selected in the previous configurable situation. Not only is it possible to restart the setting, but also it corresponds to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means when the setting possible situation is started after the setting possible situation ends before the termination trigger occurs. It becomes possible to change the setting value from the setting value. This allows the initial setting value when starting to change the setting value to be different depending on the situation when the settable situation is restarted.

Feature r4. The second change execution means is configured to change a setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means in the settable situation that occurs after the settable situation that ended due to the occurrence of the termination trigger. The gaming machine according to feature r3, characterized in that the setting value can be changed from .

According to feature r4, in a normal setting possible situation, the setting value is changed from the current setting value of the target of use.

Feature r5. The situation generation means is configured to generate a situation based on a specific related operation being performed when the settable situation is started after the settable situation ends before the termination trigger occurs in the settable situation. , a situation in which a setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means can be changed, and a setting corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means; It is characterized by having a means (a function of executing the processing of step SA405, step SA412, and step SA417 in the main CPU 63) for making one of the situations possible to change the set value from the value. The gaming machine according to feature r3 or r4.

According to feature r5, when a configurable situation is started after the configurable situation ends before the termination trigger occurs, the setting value is changed from the setting value that was last selected in the previous configurable situation. The administrator of the game hall can select whether to restart the change or to start changing the setting value from the current setting value to be used.

Feature r6. In the setting possible situation, the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means is displayed on a predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). The gaming machine according to any one of features r1 to r5, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with means for executing the processing of steps SA801 to SA803 in the main CPU 63.

According to feature r6, it is possible to change the setting value while checking the setting value that is being changed in the setting possible state.

Feature r7. In a situation where the setting is not possible, the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means is displayed on a predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). The gaming machine according to any one of features r1 to r6, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with means for executing the processing in steps SA601 to SA603 in the main CPU 63.

According to feature r7, it is possible to check the current setting values of the target to be used as needed.

Note that for the configuration of features r1 to r7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention relating to the above n group of features, the o group of features, the p group of features, the q group of features, and the r group of features, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to have a suitable configuration regarding the setting values that determine the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature s group>
Feature s1. A predetermined response process (setting confirmation process, setting value update process) is started based on the fact that the predetermined key insertion section (setting key insertion section 68a) is set to a predetermined corresponding state (ON operation state) by a predetermined key. Predetermined response starting means (in the 45th embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA413 in the main CPU 63 and a function of making an affirmative decision in step SA417 in the main CPU 63, and a step in the main CPU 63 in the 46th embodiment) (a function to make an affirmative determination in SA913 and a function to make an affirmative determination in step SA917);
a predetermined response terminating means (main unit) for terminating the predetermined response processing based on the fact that the predetermined key insertion section has identified that the predetermined response state has been changed from the predetermined response state to a specific response state (OFF operated state) by the predetermined key; a function of executing the processing of step SA709 and step SA710 in the side CPU 63);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature s1, in order to start the predetermined response process, it is necessary to use the predetermined key to bring the predetermined key insertion section into the predetermined response state, and therefore, an act of attempting to start the predetermined response process in an unauthorized manner is performed. It is possible to make it more difficult. In this case, the predetermined correspondence process does not end only when the predetermined key insertion section is in the specific support state, but ends when the predetermined key insertion section is changed from the predetermined support state to the specific support state. As a result, even if the predetermined response processing is started in a situation where the predetermined key insertion section is in the specific response state for some reason, the predetermined response processing will not be immediately terminated, and the predetermined key insertion section will be changed from the specific response state. Since the predetermined response process is terminated by further changing from the predetermined response state to the specific response state after changing to the predetermined response state, it becomes possible to terminate the predetermined response process at a timing favorable to the manager of the game hall.

Feature s2. Another starting means (in the forty-fifth embodiment, step SA412 in the main CPU 63 and a function to make an affirmative judgment in step SA414 in the main CPU 63; in the 46th embodiment, a function to make an affirmative judgment in step SA905 and step SA916 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to feature s1.

According to feature s2, the predetermined response process is started even in a situation where the predetermined key insertion section is in the specific response state based on the specific start condition being satisfied, so the trigger for starting the predetermined response process can be varied. It becomes possible to convert However, in this configuration, the predetermined response process is started when the predetermined key insertion section is in the specific compatibility state, but with the configuration of feature s1 above, the predetermined response processing is started when the predetermined key insertion section is in the specific compatibility state. The process does not end when the predetermined key insertion section changes from the predetermined compatible state to the specific compatible state. As a result, even if the predetermined response processing is started in a situation where the predetermined key insertion section is in the specific response state, the predetermined response processing is not immediately terminated, and the predetermined key insertion section is changed from the specific response state to the predetermined response state. Since the predetermined response process is terminated by further changing from the predetermined response state to the specific response state after changing to , it becomes possible to terminate the predetermined response process at a timing that is favorable to the administrator of the gaming hall.

Feature s3. The predetermined response starting means starts the predetermined response processing based on the fact that the predetermined key insertion section is in the predetermined response state when supply of operating power is started;
According to feature s2, the specific start condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is stopped and the supply of operating power is restarted in a situation where the predetermined response process is being executed. gaming machines.

According to feature s3, when the supply of operating power is started, the predetermined response process is started based on the fact that the predetermined key insertion part is in the predetermined response state, so it is difficult to start the predetermined response process fraudulently. This makes it possible to make it difficult to perform such actions. In addition, even if the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a predetermined response process is being executed, if the supply of operating power is resumed and the specific start condition is met, the predetermined key insertion part will respond to the predetermined response. The predetermined response process is started even if it is not in this state. This makes it possible to give priority to starting the predetermined response process if the predetermined response process ends midway.

Feature s4. Means for executing profit granting processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set to be used from among setting values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) ),
The gaming machine according to any one of features s1 to s3, wherein the predetermined corresponding process is a process related to the set value.

According to feature s4, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects in processing related to setting values.

Note that for the configuration of features s1 to s4, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above characteristic group s, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, for example, by the control means to determine whether or not to generate a gaming state advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, the processing in the control means needs to proceed in a suitable manner, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature t group>
Feature t1. A setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage level (in the first embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S205 to S207 in the main CPU 63, In the 11th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S3106 to S3108, in the 12th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S3207 to S3209, and in the 22nd embodiment In the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S5605 to step S5607 in the main CPU 63, in the 53rd embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB915 in the main CPU 63. ) and
A situation generating means (in the first embodiment, step S103 in the main CPU 63 In the 22nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 makes an affirmative decision in steps S5503 to S5507. In the 49th embodiment, the main CPU 63 makes an affirmative decision in step SB113. , in the 53rd embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB812 in the main CPU 63);
When the setting is possible, a start response means (in the first embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step S201) changes the setting value from a predetermined start response setting value. In the 11th embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process in step S3102; in the 12th embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process in step S3203; in the 22nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 (in the 49th embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process in step SB304; in the 53rd embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process in step SB905);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature t1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, when the setting becomes possible, the setting value is changed from the predetermined starting setting value. As a result, irrespective of the setting value of the object to be used before the setting possible state, in the setting possible state, it is possible to change the setting value from a certain starting setting value. Therefore, the content of the setting value changing operation becomes easy for the operator to understand.

Feature t2. The gaming machine according to feature t1, wherein the setting value corresponding to the start is a setting value with the lowest advantage ("setting 1").

According to feature t2, when the setting becomes possible, the setting value is changed starting from the setting value with the lowest advantage. As a result, even if the administrator of the game hall unintentionally terminates the setting possible situation immediately after the setting possible situation, the setting value will be the least advantageous, so in such a situation, the game It is possible to prevent unintended disadvantages from occurring in the game hall even if the game is performed.

Feature t3. a setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting values set by the setting means;
selection correspondence storage means (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the setting possible situation;
Equipped with
The situation generation means is means for changing the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means so that the setting value to be selected is changed when a change trigger occurs in the setting possible situation. (In the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB307 and step SB310 in the main CPU 63, and in the 53rd embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB908 and step SB914 in the main CPU 63),
The setting means stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means in the setting correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information when a termination trigger occurs in the setting possible situation. Accordingly, the setting values that were to be selected in the setting possible situation are set as targets for use,
The game according to feature t1 or t2, wherein the start response means stores the selection response information corresponding to the setting value of the start response in the selection response storage means when the setting possible situation occurs. Machine.

According to feature t3, the setting correspondence storage means stores the setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used, and the selection correspondence storage means stores the selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value that is being changed in the setting possible situation. By providing this, it becomes possible to change the setting value in the settable situation while storing and retaining information on the setting value that was set before the settable situation started.

Feature t4. In the setting possible situation, the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means is displayed on a predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). The gaming machine according to feature t3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with means for executing the processing of steps SA801 to SA803 in the main CPU 63.

According to the feature t4, it is possible to change the setting value while checking the setting value that is being changed in the setting possible state.

Feature t5. In a situation where the setting is not possible, the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means is displayed on a predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). The gaming machine according to feature t3 or t4, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a means for executing the processing in steps SA601 to SA603 in the main CPU 63.

According to the feature t5, it is possible to check the current setting value of the target to be used as needed.

Note that for the configuration of features t1 to t5, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above feature t group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to have a suitable configuration regarding the setting values that determine the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic U group>
Feature u1. A first control means (MPU62),
a second control means (sound-light side MPU 352) that executes control corresponding to the information transmitted by the first control means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The first control means includes:
A first transmitting means (in the 49th embodiment, the main side (a function of executing the process of step SB314 in the CPU 63, a function of executing the process of step SB918 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment);
a second transmitting means (49th transmitter) for transmitting second start response information (a return command at the time of confirmation or a return command at the time of clearing) based on the fact that the second start status is reached when the supply of operating power is started; In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB118 or step SB207 in the main CPU 63, in the 51st embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB618 in the main CPU 63, and in the 52nd embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB63 in the main CPU 63. a function of executing the process of step SB725, a function of executing the process of step SB816 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SC118 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature u1, in a configuration in which the second control means executes control corresponding to the information transmitted by the first control means, the first control means performs the first start when the supply of operating power is started. The first start correspondence information is transmitted based on the current situation, and the second start correspondence information is transmitted based on the second start situation. This allows not only the first control means but also the second control means to perform control corresponding to the type of starting situation when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature u2. The first control means may perform processing at the time of starting supply of operating power (49th embodiment Steps SB101 to SB122, steps SB601 to SB622 in the 51st embodiment, steps SB701 to SB729 in the 52nd embodiment, steps SB801 to SB818 and steps SB823 to SB826 in the 53rd embodiment, In the embodiment No. 54, the gaming machine according to feature u1, wherein at least part of the processing contents of steps SC101 to SC120 and steps SC125 to SC128) are configured to be different.

According to feature u2, when the supply of operating power is started, at least a part of the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power in the first control means is performed depending on which of the first start situation and the second start situation. Since the processing contents are different, it becomes possible for the first control means to execute a process corresponding to the start situation as a process when starting the supply of operating power.

Feature u3. The second control means
A start support execution means that executes start support processing regardless of whether the first start support information is received or the second start support information is received. function) and
When one of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is received, a predetermined correspondence process is executed, and the other of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is received. a predetermined response execution means (a function of executing the processes of step SB407, step SB409, and step SB411 in the sound-light side CPU 353) that does not execute the predetermined response process when the start response information is received;
The gaming machine according to feature u1 or u2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature u3, since the second control means executes the start support process even when receiving either the first start support information or the second start support information, the first control means executes the start support process. It becomes possible to cause the second control means to execute the start response process in response to the transmission of the information. Further, the second control means executes a predetermined response process when receiving one of the first start response information and the second start response information, and executes a predetermined response process when receiving the other start response information. Do not perform corresponding processing. This allows not only the first control means but also the second control means to perform control corresponding to the type of starting situation when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature u4. One of the first start situation and the second start situation indicates that a predetermined start response operation (RAM clear operation, setting change operation, or setting confirmation operation) is performed when the supply of operating power is started. Occurs based on
Feature u3, wherein the other of the first start situation and the second start situation occurs based on the predetermined start response operation not being performed when supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature u4, the content of the control executed not only by the first control means but also by the second control means depending on whether or not a predetermined start-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started. It is possible to make them different.

Feature u5. The first control means controls the progress of the game after transmitting any one of the plurality of types of start correspondence information including the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information. It is configured to execute (steps S8907 to S8920),
The second control means is configured to execute processing (steps SB412 to SB414) corresponding to the progress of the game after receiving any one of the plurality of types of start correspondence information. The gaming machine according to feature u3 or u4.

According to feature u5, the first control means transmits any of the start correspondence information before starting the process for controlling the progress of the game, and the second control means transmits any of the start correspondence information after receiving any of the start correspondence information. Executes processing corresponding to the progress of the game. Thereby, after the first control means is in a situation where the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed, the second control means can execute the process corresponding to the content of the progress of the game. It becomes possible. In this case, by having the configuration of feature u3 above, a plurality of pieces of start correspondence information that differ in whether or not to execute a predetermined corresponding process in the second control means are used to start a process corresponding to the content of the progress of the game. It becomes possible to make the second control means recognize the trigger.

Feature u6. The first control means includes:
Means for executing a common response process regardless of whether the supply of operating power is started in the first start situation or in the second start situation (49th embodiment) In the 51st embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes steps SB101 to SB103. In the 51st embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes steps SB601 to SB603. In the 52nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs the steps A function to execute the processing of SB701 and step SB702, a function to execute the processing of steps SB801 to SB803 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, a function to execute the processing of steps SC101 to Step SC103 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. ) and
When the supply of operating power is started, specific response processing is executed based on the fact that one of the first start situation and the second start situation is established, and the supply of operating power is started. means for not executing the specific response process based on the fact that the other of the first start situation and the second start situation has occurred in the case (in the forty-ninth embodiment, step SB112 in the main CPU 63, step A function to execute the process of SB115 or step SB117, a function to execute the process of step SB612, step SB615 or step SB617 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, a function to execute the process in the main CPU 63 in step SB711 and step SB11 in the 52nd embodiment A function to execute the process of SB718 or step SB721, a function to execute the process of step SB810, step SB813, or step SB815 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and a function to execute the process in the main CPU 63 in step SC111 and step SB815 in the 54th embodiment. function to execute the process of SC115 or step SC117);
The gaming machine according to any one of features u1 to u5, characterized by comprising:

According to feature u6, the first control means executes the common response process regardless of whether the first start situation is the first start situation or the second start situation. The specific response process is executed in one of the two start situations. As a result, the first control means executes the common response process regardless of the start situation, and the first control means executes the process corresponding to the type of start situation. It becomes possible to do so. In this case, the first control means has the configuration of feature u1 above, and the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information based on the first start situation, and transmits the first start correspondence information based on the second start situation. 2. Since the start response information is transmitted, the control corresponding to the type of start situation when the supply of operating power is started can be performed not only by the first control means but also by the second control means. Become.

Feature u7. The first control means includes:
Setting means (in the 49th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB311 in the main CPU 63, In the embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB915 in the main CPU 63);
Based on the fact that the first setting-related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed when the supply of operating power is started, the first starting situation is determined. A first response execution means (in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment) that brings about a setting possible situation (a situation where setting value update processing is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed. A function to make an affirmative determination in step SB114, a function to make an affirmative determination in step SB614 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, a function to make an affirmative determination in step SB717 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment, In the 53rd embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB812 in the main CPU 63; in the 54th embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SC113 in the main CPU 63);
Based on the fact that the second setting-related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a) is performed when the supply of operating power is started, the second starting situation is set by the setting means. a second response execution means (a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for notifying the setting values to be used;
The gaming machine according to any one of features u1 to u6, characterized by comprising:

According to feature u7, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In addition, in order to change the set value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting related operation when the supply of operating power is started, so any act of attempting to illegally change the set value to be used It is possible to make it difficult to perform. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used will be notified by performing the second setting-related operation, so the administrator of the game hall can check the setting value to be used as necessary. becomes possible. In this case, the first control means has the configuration of feature u1 above, and the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information based on the first start situation, and transmits the first start correspondence information based on the second start situation. Since the second start correspondence information is transmitted, it is possible for the second control means to perform different controls depending on whether the setting is possible or when the setting value to be used is notified.

Feature u8. The first control means includes:
Means for executing profit granting processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set to be used from among setting values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) ) and
A first response execution means (setting value update processing or setting confirmation in the main CPU 63) that executes a predetermined setting-related process regarding the setting value based on the first start situation when the supply of operating power is started. functions), and
A second response execution means (in the forty-ninth embodiment, a main side The function of executing the process of step SB117 in the CPU 63, the function of executing the process of step SB617 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB721 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment, In the 53rd embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step SB815; in the 54th embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step SC117);
The gaming machine according to any one of features u1 to u7.

According to feature u8, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that Further, when the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined setting-related process regarding the setting value is executed based on the first start situation, and when the supply of operating power is started, the second start situation is the first start situation. Based on this, another corresponding process different from the predetermined setting-related process is executed. Thereby, it is possible to cause a case in which a predetermined setting-related process is executed or a case in which it is not executed depending on the starting situation when the supply of operating power is started. In this case, the first control means has the configuration of feature u1 above, and the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information based on the first start situation, and transmits the first start correspondence information based on the second start situation. 2. In order to transmit the start correspondence information, it is possible to cause the second control means to perform different control depending on whether the predetermined setting-related process is executed by the first control means or not. .

Feature u9. The gaming machine according to feature u8, wherein the second response execution means executes processing for initializing a predetermined storage area provided in the first control means as the separate response processing.

According to feature u9, a predetermined setting-related process is executed and a predetermined storage area of the first control means is initialized depending on the starting situation when the supply of operating power is started. It becomes possible to do so. In this case, the first control means has the configuration of feature u1 above, and the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information based on the first start situation, and transmits the first start correspondence information based on the second start situation. 2. In order to transmit the start correspondence information, the second control means performs different controls depending on when the first control means executes a predetermined setting-related process and when a predetermined storage area is initialized. It becomes possible to

Feature u10. The second control means
When one of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is received, the time correspondence information measured by the time measuring means (RTC 356) that enables time measurement is stored in a time correspondence memory. Means for storing in the means (RTC memory 357) (in the 49th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB407 in the sound and light side CPU 353, and in the 50th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB507 in the sound and light side CPU 353) function) and
Means for executing time-based processing when the processing execution timing is reached based on the time-based information stored in the time-based storage means (in the 49th embodiment, executing the process of step SB413 in the audio-light side CPU 353) (in the fiftieth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB513 in the sound and light side CPU 353),
The gaming machine according to any one of features u1 to u9.

According to feature u10, the second control means executes the time-based processing when the processing execution timing is reached based on the time-based information stored in the time-based storage means, so that the timing when the predetermined time has arrived This makes it possible to perform time-based processing. In this case, when one of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is received, the time correspondence information measured by the time measurement means is stored in the time correspondence storage means. This makes it possible to select a situation in which the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means and a situation in which it is not newly stored.

Note that for the configuration of features u1 to u10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group v>
Feature v1. Time storage execution means (in the 49th embodiment, the sound-light side (a function of executing the process of step SB407 in the CPU 353, a function of executing the process of step SB507 in the sound-light side CPU 353 in the 50th embodiment);
Time corresponding execution means (in the 49th embodiment, step SB413 in the sound-light side CPU 353 (a function of executing the process, in the fiftieth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB513 in the sound-light side CPU 353),
Equipped with
The time storage execution means is configured to perform a first start situation when the supply of operating power is started (in the forty-ninth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on in a state where no operation is performed, a fiftieth start state is set). In the embodiment, the time is measured by the time measuring means based on the fact that the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 in a situation where a RAM clear operation, a setting change operation, or a setting confirmation operation has been performed. The time correspondence information corresponding to the current time is stored in the time correspondence storage means, and when the supply of operating power is started, a second start situation (in the 49th embodiment, a RAM clear operation, a setting change operation, or a setting confirmation operation is performed) is stored in the time correspondence storage means. (In the 50th embodiment, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 in a situation where no operation is performed) A gaming machine characterized in that the time correspondence information measured by the time measurement means is not stored in the time correspondence storage means.

According to feature v1, the time-based processing is executed when the processing execution timing is reached based on the time-based information stored in the time-based storage means, so the time-based processing is executed at the timing when the predetermined time has arrived. It becomes possible to have the program executed. In this case, when the supply of operating power is started and the first start situation is reached, the time correspondence information measured by the time measuring means is stored in the time correspondence storage means, and the supply of operating power is started. If the second start situation occurs in the case where the time correspondence information is stored in the time correspondence storage means. This makes it possible to select a situation in which the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means and a situation in which it is not newly stored.

Features v2. One of the first start situation and the second start situation indicates that a predetermined start response operation (RAM clear operation, setting change operation, or setting confirmation operation) is performed when the supply of operating power is started. Occurs based on
Feature v1, characterized in that the other of the first start situation and the second start situation occurs based on the predetermined start response operation not being performed when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature v2, depending on whether or not a predetermined start response operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started, a situation in which time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means or a situation in which it is not newly stored is determined. It becomes possible to select each of them.

Features v3. The second start situation occurs based on a predetermined start response operation (RAM clear operation, setting change operation, or setting confirmation operation) performed when the supply of operating power is started,
The gaming machine according to feature v1 or v2, wherein the first start situation occurs based on the fact that the predetermined start corresponding operation is not performed when supply of operating power is started.

According to feature v3, if a predetermined start response operation is not performed when the supply of operating power is started, the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means, and the supply of operating power is started. In this case, when a predetermined start corresponding operation is performed, the time correspondence information is not stored in the time correspondence storage means. As a result, when the supply of operating power is started, the time correspondence information is basically newly stored in the time correspondence storage means, and the time can be changed by performing a predetermined start correspondence operation as necessary. It becomes possible to prevent correspondence information from being stored in the time correspondence storage means.

Features v4. When the supply of operating power is started, specific response processing is executed based on the fact that one of the first start situation and the second start situation is established, and the supply of operating power is started. means for not executing the specific response process based on the fact that the other of the first start situation and the second start situation has occurred in the case (in the forty-ninth embodiment, step SB112 in the main CPU 63, step A function to execute the process of SB115 or step SB117, a function to execute the process of step SB612, step SB615 or step SB617 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, a function to execute the process in the main CPU 63 in step SB711 and step SB11 in the 52nd embodiment A function to execute the process of SB718 or step SB721, a function to execute the process of step SB810, step SB813, or step SB815 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and a function to execute the process in the main CPU 63 in step SC111 and step SB815 in the 54th embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of features v1 to v3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the process of step SC115 or step SC117.

According to feature v4, the specific response process is executed when the start situation is one of the first start situation and the second start situation. In this case, the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means based on the configuration of feature v1 described above, based on the fact that the first start situation is set, and the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means based on the fact that the second start situation is set. The correspondence information is not stored in the time correspondence storage means. This makes it possible to associate whether or not specific correspondence processing is executed with whether or not new time correspondence information is stored.

Features v5. Execute specific response processing based on the fact that the second start situation is reached when the supply of operating power is started, and the first start situation is reached when the supply of operating power is started. (in the 49th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB112, step SB115, or step SB117 in the main CPU 63; in the 51st embodiment, step SB612 in the main CPU 63; A function to execute the process of step SB615 or step SB617, a function to execute the process of step SB711, step SB718 or step SB721 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment, step SB810 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, Features v1 to v4 are provided with a function of executing the process of step SB813 or step SB815 (in the 54th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SC111, step SC115, or step SC117 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature v5, the specific response process is executed when the starting situation is the second starting situation among the first starting situation and the second starting situation. In this case, the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means based on the configuration of feature v1 described above, based on the fact that the first start situation is set, and the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means based on the fact that the second start situation is set. The correspondence information is not stored in the time correspondence storage means. This makes it possible to prevent time correspondence information from being newly stored in the time correspondence storage means when specific correspondence processing is executed.

Features v6. Means for executing a common response process regardless of whether the supply of operating power is started in the first start situation or in the second start situation (49th embodiment) In the 51st embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes steps SB101 to SB103. In the 51st embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes steps SB601 to SB603. In the 52nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs the steps A function to execute the processing of SB701 and step SB702, a function to execute the processing of steps SB801 to SB803 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, a function to execute the processing of steps SC101 to Step SC103 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. The gaming machine according to feature v4 or v5, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the following.

According to feature v6, the common response process is executed regardless of whether the first start situation is the first start situation or the second start situation. The specific response process is executed when one of the start conditions is met. As a result, it is possible to execute the common response process regardless of the start situation, and also to execute the process corresponding to the type of start situation.

Features v7. Means for executing profit granting processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set to be used from among setting values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) ) and
a setting-related execution means (a function of executing a setting value update process or a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) that executes a predetermined setting-related process regarding the setting value when the supply of operating power is started;
Equipped with
The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related process based on one of the first start situation and the second start situation when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features v1 to v6.

According to feature v7, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that Further, when the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined setting-related process is executed based on the fact that one of the first start situation and the second start situation is the start situation. This makes it possible to associate whether or not a predetermined setting-related process is executed with whether or not new time-corresponding information is stored.

Features v8. Initializing a predetermined storage area provided in the control means based on one of the first start situation and the second start situation when the supply of operating power is started. means (in the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB117 in the main CPU 63; in the 51st embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB617 in the main CPU 63; in the 52nd embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB617 in the main CPU 63) A function of executing the process of step SB721, a function of executing the process of step SB815 in the main side CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SC117 in the main side CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features v1 to v7.

According to feature v8, when the supply of operating power is started, the predetermined storage area of the first control means is initialized based on the fact that one of the first start situation and the second start situation is reached. be converted into This makes it possible to associate the presence or absence of initialization of the predetermined storage area with the presence or absence of new storage of time-corresponding information.

Note that for the configuration of features v1 to v8, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature u group and the feature v group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, processing needs to be performed appropriately when the supply of operating power is started, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic W group>
Feature w1. Predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204),
a predetermined display control means (a function for executing second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63) that controls the display of the predetermined display means;
Means for executing profit granting processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set to be used from among setting values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) ) and
a setting-related execution means (a function of executing a setting value update process or a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) that executes a predetermined setting-related process regarding the setting value when the supply of operating power is started;
Equipped with
The predetermined display control means includes:
means for causing the predetermined display means to display the setting values when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed (a function of executing the processing of step S9004 and step S9006 in the main CPU 63);
After the predetermined setting-related process is executed, check control means (in the thirty-seventh embodiment, the main check control means) causes the predetermined display means to perform a check display that allows checking whether or not the predetermined display means is normal. A function of executing the process of step S9519 in the side CPU 63, a function of executing the process of step SA419 in the main side CPU 63 in the 45th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SA919 in the main side CPU 63 in the 46th embodiment, In the 49th embodiment, the function of executing step SB123 in the main CPU 63, in the 51st embodiment, the function of executing step SB623 in the main CPU 63, and in the 52nd embodiment, step SB712 in the main CPU 63 and a function of executing the process of step SB719, a function of executing the process of step SB817 in the main side CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SC119 in the main side CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature w1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In addition, when a predetermined setting-related process is executed, the setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means, so the game hall manager can grasp the current setting value by checking the predetermined display means. becomes. Further, by displaying the check display on the predetermined display means, it becomes possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal.

In this case, when the supply of operating power is started, a check display is performed on the predetermined display means after predetermined setting-related processing is executed. As a result, when a predetermined setting-related process is started, the display regarding the setting value when the predetermined setting-related process is executed is displayed without the need for adjustment processing such as ending the check display midway. can be given priority over the check display.

Feature w2. The check control means displays the check display regardless of whether the supply of operating power is started, the predetermined setting-related process is executed, or the predetermined setting-related process is not executed. The gaming machine according to feature w1, wherein the gaming machine causes the predetermined display means to perform the following.

According to feature w2, when the supply of operating power is started, a check display is performed on the predetermined display means regardless of whether or not a predetermined setting-related process is executed. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal regardless of the situation when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature w3. Regardless of whether the predetermined setting-related process is executed or the predetermined setting-related process is not executed as the process at the time of supply start that is executed when the supply of operating power is started. A common process is set that is a process that is executed in common and is a process that is executed later than the predetermined setting-related process when the predetermined setting-related process is executed;
The gaming machine according to feature w1 or w2, wherein a process of causing the predetermined display means to start the check display is set as the common process.

According to feature w3, when the supply of operating power is started, a check display is performed on the predetermined display means regardless of whether or not a predetermined setting-related process is executed. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal regardless of the situation when the supply of operating power is started. Further, since the process for starting the check display on the predetermined display means is set as a common process, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while simplifying the process configuration.

Feature w4. A means for executing processing for advancing the game after the supply of operating power is started and the processing at the start of supply is completed (a function for executing the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to any one of features w1 to w3, characterized in that processing for advancing the game can be started even in a situation where the check display is being executed on the predetermined display means. .

According to feature w4, the process for advancing the game can be started even when the check display on the predetermined display means is being executed, so the check on the predetermined display means is performed after the predetermined setting-related process is executed. Even when a game display is performed, it is possible to prevent the start timing of processing for advancing the game from being delayed.

Features w5. Delay execution means (executes the processes of step SB715 and step SB724 in the main CPU 63 function),
The check control means causes the predetermined display means to start displaying the check display before the delay processing is started if the predetermined setting-related processing is not executed when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features w1 to w4.

According to feature w5, the initial settings of various devices are completed by executing a delay process that makes it possible to delay the start of the process for progressing the game when the supply of operating power is started. It becomes possible to start processing for advancing the game later. In this case, if the predetermined setting-related processing is not executed when the supply of operating power is started, a check display on the predetermined display means is started before the delay processing is started. This makes it possible to display a check display using the period during which the start of the process for advancing the game is delayed.

Feature w6. The gaming machine according to feature w5, wherein the delay execution means does not execute the delay process when the predetermined setting-related process is executed.

According to feature w6, since a predetermined period of time is required when a predetermined setting-related process is executed, it is possible to complete the initial settings of various devices before the process for proceeding with the game is started. Become. In this case, by preventing the delay process from being executed when a predetermined setting-related process is executed, the start of the process for advancing the game in a situation where the predetermined setting-related process is executed is extremely delayed. This makes it possible to avoid delays.

Features w7. The setting-related execution means includes:
When the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used is changed based on the fact that the first setting-related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed. A situation generating means (in the 49th embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination at step SB114 in the main CPU 63, In the 51st embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB614 in the main CPU 63, in the 52nd embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB717 in the main CPU 63, and in the 53rd embodiment, the step in the main CPU 63 (a function to make an affirmative determination at SB812, a function to make an affirmative determination at step SC113 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment);
Generating a notification so that the setting value to be used is notified based on a second setting-related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a) when the supply of operating power is started. means (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features w1 to w6, characterized by comprising:

According to feature w7, in order to change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting-related operation when the supply of operating power is started, so the setting value to be used cannot be changed illegally. This makes it possible to make it difficult to perform the desired action. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used will be notified by performing the second setting-related operation, so the administrator of the game hall can check the setting value to be used as necessary. becomes possible.

Feature w8. The predetermined display control means includes means for displaying information corresponding to the management results of the game history on the predetermined display means (a function of executing the processing of steps S8708, S8709, and S9107 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of features w1 to w7.

According to feature w8, it is possible to notify the gaming hall manager of the gaming history management results. In this case, by having the configuration of the feature w1 described above and performing a check display on the predetermined display means, it is possible to check whether information corresponding to the management result of the gaming history is being accurately displayed on the predetermined display means. It becomes possible to confirm.

Note that for the configuration of features w1 to w8, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature x group>
Features x1. Predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204),
a predetermined display control means (a function for executing second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63) that controls the display of the predetermined display means;
A means for executing a process for advancing the game after the supply of operating power is started and the situation after the start of supply is completed (a function for executing the process of steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The predetermined display control means is a check control means for causing the predetermined display means to perform a check display that allows checking whether or not the predetermined display means is normal in the situation after the start of supply (according to the thirty-sixth embodiment). In the 52nd embodiment, the main side CPU 63 has a function of executing the process of step S9405, and in the 52nd embodiment, the main side CPU 63 has a function of executing the process of step SB713 and step SB722),
A delay situation in which it is possible to delay the start of the process for advancing the game in a situation where the check display is performed on the predetermined display means (in the 36th embodiment, a negative determination is made in step S9406) A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration in which a situation in which the main side CPU 63 executes the processing of step SB715 and step SB724 can occur.

According to feature x1, when the supply of operating power is started, a check display is performed on the predetermined display means, thereby making it possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal. In this case, in a situation where a check display is being performed, a delay situation may occur in which it is possible to delay the start of processing for advancing the game. This makes it possible to ensure an opportunity to check the check display on the predetermined display means before starting the process for advancing the game. Furthermore, due to the occurrence of a delay situation, it becomes possible to complete the initial settings of various devices before the processing for advancing the game is started. Then, it becomes possible to make a check display on the predetermined display means by utilizing this delay situation.

Features x2. Means for causing the delay situation to occur in a situation where the check display is performed on the predetermined display means (in the 36th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S9406 in the main CPU 63, in the 52nd embodiment) The gaming machine according to feature x1, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of executing the processing of step SB715 and step SB724 in the main CPU 63.

According to feature x2, since the situation where the check display is being performed is a delayed situation, the process for advancing the game should not be started while the check display is being performed. becomes possible.

Features x3. When the supply of operating power is started, in a situation where the check display is performed on the predetermined display means based on the first start situation, the delay situation occurs and the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to feature x1 or x2, wherein the delay situation does not occur in a situation where the check display is performed on the predetermined display means based on the second start situation.

According to feature x3, in the first starting situation, a delay situation occurs in a situation where a check display is being performed on the predetermined display means, so that the game is allowed to proceed while the check display is being performed. This makes it possible to prevent the process from starting, and in the case of the second start situation, to prevent a delay situation from occurring in a situation where a check display is performed on the predetermined display means. It becomes possible to prevent the start timing of processing for advancing the game from becoming extremely late.

Features x4. Means for executing profit granting processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set to be used from among setting values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) ) and
a setting-related execution means (a function of executing a setting value update process or a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) that executes a predetermined setting-related process regarding the setting value when the supply of operating power is started;
Equipped with
The first start situation is a situation in which the predetermined setting-related process is not executed in the post-supply start situation;
The gaming machine according to feature x3, wherein the second start situation is a situation in which the predetermined setting-related process is executed in the after-supply start situation.

According to feature x4, since a predetermined period of time is required when a predetermined setting-related process is executed, it is possible to complete the initial settings of various devices before the process for advancing the game is started. Become. In this case, when a predetermined setting-related process is executed, the predetermined setting-related process is executed by preventing a delay situation from occurring in a situation where a check display is displayed on the predetermined display means. It is possible to prevent the start of processing for advancing the game from being extremely delayed under certain circumstances.

Features x5. The setting-related execution means includes:
When the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used is changed based on the fact that the first setting-related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed. A situation generating means (in the 49th embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination at step SB114 in the main CPU 63, In the 51st embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination at step SB614 in the main CPU 63, in the 52nd embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB717 of the main CPU 63, and in the 53rd embodiment, the step in the main CPU 63 (a function to make an affirmative determination at SB812, a function to make an affirmative determination at step SC113 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment);
Generating a notification so that the setting value to be used is notified based on a second setting-related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a) when the supply of operating power is started. means (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to feature x4, comprising:

According to feature x5, in order to change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting-related operation when the supply of operating power is started, so the setting value to be used cannot be changed illegally. This makes it possible to make it difficult to perform the desired action. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used will be notified by performing the second setting-related operation, so the administrator of the game hall can check the setting value to be used as necessary. becomes possible.

Features x6. The predetermined display control means includes means for displaying information corresponding to the management results of the game history on the predetermined display means (a function of executing the processing of steps S8708, S8709, and S9107 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of features x1 to x5.

According to feature x6, it becomes possible to notify the gaming hall manager of the gaming history management results. In this case, by having the configuration of feature x1 above and performing a check display on the predetermined display means, it is possible to check whether the information corresponding to the management result of the gaming history is being accurately displayed on the predetermined display means. It becomes possible to confirm.

Note that for the configuration of features x1 to x6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature w group and the feature x group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a need for a configuration that allows it to be confirmed whether or not the display on the predetermined display means is being performed accurately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. be.

<Characteristics y group>
Feature y1. Setting means (in the 49th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB311 in the main CPU 63, In the embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB915 in the main CPU 63);
Situation generation means (in the 49th embodiment, step SB114 in the main CPU 63 In the 51st embodiment, the main CPU 63 makes an affirmative decision in step SB614. In the 52nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 makes an affirmative decision in step SB717. (in the embodiment, the main CPU 63 makes an affirmative determination in step SB812; in the 54th embodiment, the main CPU 63 makes an affirmative determination in step SC113);
Setting monitoring means (in the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB106 in the main CPU 63, the 51st In the embodiment, the function executes the process of step SB606 in the main CPU 63, in the 52nd embodiment, the function executes the process of step SB705 in the main CPU 63, and in the 53rd embodiment, the function executes the process of step SB806 in the main CPU 63. a function to execute, in the 54th embodiment, a function to execute the process of step SC106 in the main CPU 63),
Equipped with
Processing at the start of supply that is executed when the supply of operating power to the control means having the setting means is started (steps SB101 to SB122 in the 49th embodiment, steps SB601 to SB601 in the 51st embodiment) SB622, step SB701 to step SB729 in the 52nd embodiment, step SB801 to step SB818 and step SB823 to step SB826 in the 53rd embodiment, step SC101 to step SC120 and step SC125 to step SC128 in the 54th embodiment) A gaming machine characterized in that said setting monitoring process is included in said setting monitoring process.

According to feature y1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that Further, since a setting monitoring process is executed to monitor whether or not the setting value to be used is abnormal, it is possible to deal with it if the setting value to be used is abnormal. In addition, since the settings monitoring process is included in the process at the start of supply, it is possible to prevent the process to proceed with the game from starting even though the setting value to be used is abnormal. becomes.

Feature y2. The gaming machine according to feature y1, wherein the setting monitoring means executes the setting monitoring process every time a monitoring opportunity occurs even after the process at the start of supply is completed.

According to feature y2, since the setting monitoring process is executed every time a monitoring opportunity occurs after the process at the start of supply is completed, it becomes easier to identify that the setting value to be used is abnormal.

Feature y3. A means for executing periodically activated interrupt processing (a function for executing the first timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to feature y2, wherein the interrupt processing includes the setting monitoring processing.

According to feature y3, since the setting monitoring process is executed every time the device is periodically activated, it is possible to increase the frequency of monitoring whether or not the setting value to be used is abnormal.

Feature y4. The setting monitoring means sets a regulated state in which execution of a predetermined progressing process for advancing the game is regulated based on the fact that the setting value of the target to be used is identified as abnormal in the setting monitoring process. Regulation means (in the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB119 in the main CPU 63, in the 51st embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB619 in the main CPU 63, in the 52nd embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB63 in the main CPU 63) In the 53rd embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the process of step SB823, and in the 54th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the process of step SC125). The gaming machine according to any one of features y1 to y3.

According to feature y4, when it is specified that the setting value to be used is abnormal, execution of a predetermined progress process for advancing the game is regulated, so even if the setting value to be used is abnormal. It becomes possible to prevent the game from being started regardless of the situation.

Feature y5. Means for canceling the restricted state based on the occurrence of the setting possible situation (in the 49th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB303 in the main CPU 63, and in the 53rd embodiment, a function of executing step SB904 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature y4, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of (a).

According to feature y5, when the situation where the setting value of the usage target is abnormal is canceled, it is possible to make a new setting of the setting value of the usage target.

Feature y6. Feature y4 or y5, characterized in that the regulating means is configured to enter the regulating state when the supply of operating power is restarted even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the regulating state is present. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature y6, it is possible to prevent a state in which execution of a predetermined progress process is restricted due to an abnormal setting value of a usage target from being canceled simply by stopping the supply of operating power.

Feature y7. Features y4 to 4, characterized in that the device is provided with means for executing non-restrictive processing different from the predetermined progress processing even in the regulated state (a function for executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of y6.

According to feature y7, even in a situation where the execution of the predetermined progress process is restricted due to an abnormality in the set value of the usage target, the non-restricted process can be executed. This makes it possible to ensure execution of necessary processing even in a restricted state.

Feature y8. The gaming machine according to feature y7, wherein the non-regulated processing includes a power outage monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage.

According to feature y8, the power outage monitoring process is executed even in the restricted state, so that when a power outage occurs in the restricted state, it is possible to appropriately deal with it.

Feature y9. The setting monitoring means is configured to provide a notification that allows the player to recognize that the setting possible situation should occur based on the fact that the setting value of the target to be used is determined to be abnormal in the setting monitoring process. Means for executing the process (in the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB121 in the main CPU 63, in the 51st embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB621 in the main CPU 63, the 52nd embodiment) In the embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step SB728, in the 53rd embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step SB825, and in the 54th embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step SC127 The gaming machine according to any one of features y1 to y8, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of:

According to feature y9, when it is determined that the setting value of the target to be used is abnormal, a notification is executed that allows the player to recognize that a setting possible situation should occur. If the value becomes abnormal, it is possible to prompt the manager of the game hall to resolve it.

Note that for the configuration of features y1 to y9, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above characteristic group y, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably manage the setting values that determine the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristics z group>
Features z1. Predetermined monitoring means (33rd embodiment) for monitoring whether or not a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to information stored in a predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control) when supply of operating power is started. In the 35th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function to execute steps S7906 and S7909, in the 35th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function to execute steps S8807 and S8810, and in the 36th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a step A function to execute the process of S9408 and step S9411, a function to execute the process of step S9506 and step S9509 in the main CPU 63 in the 37th embodiment, a function to execute the process of step S9905 and step S9908 in the main CPU 63 in the 42nd embodiment In the 45th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function to execute steps SA406 and SA409, and in the 46th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function to execute steps SA907 and SA910. In the 49th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps SB104 to SB106, in the 51st embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps SB604 to SB606, and in the 52nd embodiment, the main The function of executing the processing of steps SB703 to SB705 in the side CPU 63, the function of executing the processing of steps SB804 to SB806 of the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of steps SC104 to SB806 of the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment function of executing the process of step SC106);
Regulation means for setting a regulation state in which execution of a predetermined progress process for advancing a game is regulated based on the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality being identified by the predetermined monitoring means (33rd embodiment) In the 35th embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step S8811, and in the 36th embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step S9412. In the 37th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S9510 in the main CPU 63, in the 42nd embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S9909 in the main CPU 63, and in the 45th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S9909 in the main CPU 63. The function of executing the process of step SA410, the function of executing the process of step SA911 in the main CPU 63 in the 46th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB119 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SA911 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, In the embodiment, the function executes the process of step SB619 in the main CPU 63, in the 52nd embodiment, the function executes the process of step SB726 in the main CPU 63, and in the 53rd embodiment, the function executes the process of step SB823 in the main CPU 63. a function to execute, in the 54th embodiment, a function to execute the process of step SC125 in the main CPU 63),
Means for executing a non-restrictive process different from the predetermined progress process even in the regulated state (in the 33rd embodiment, a function to execute the processes of steps S8201 to S8206 in the main CPU 63, in the 35th embodiment (a function of executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the processing of steps SA101 to step SA106 in the main CPU 63 in the 42nd embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature z1, when it is identified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to information stored in a predetermined storage area, execution of a predetermined progress process for advancing the game is regulated. It is possible to prevent a game from being started even though a problem has occurred. Furthermore, even in a situation where execution of the predetermined progress process is restricted due to the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality, the non-restricted process can be executed. This makes it possible to ensure execution of necessary processing even in a restricted state.

Features z2. The non-regulated processing includes a power outage monitoring process (step S8201 in the 33rd embodiment, step S8901 in the 35th embodiment, and step SA102 in the 42nd embodiment) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage. The gaming machine according to feature z1.

According to feature z2, the power outage monitoring process is executed even in the regulated state, so if a power outage occurs in the regulated state, it is possible to appropriately deal with it.

Features z3. Feature z1 or z2, characterized in that the regulating means is configured such that even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the regulated state, the regulated state is set when the supply of operating power is restarted. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature z3, it is possible to prevent a state in which execution of a predetermined progress process is restricted due to the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality from being canceled simply by stopping the supply of operating power.

Features z4. Setting means (in the 49th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB311 in the main CPU 63, In the embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB915 in the main CPU 63);
Situation generation means (in the 49th embodiment, step SB114 in the main CPU 63 In the 51st embodiment, the main CPU 63 makes an affirmative decision in step SB614. In the 52nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 makes an affirmative decision in step SB717. (in the embodiment, the main CPU 63 makes an affirmative determination in step SB812; in the 54th embodiment, the main CPU 63 makes an affirmative determination in step SC113);
The gaming machine according to any one of features z1 to z3, characterized by comprising:

According to feature z4, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, if a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in a predetermined storage area, there is a possibility that an abnormality has also occurred with respect to the set value. On the other hand, with the configuration of feature z1 above, when it is identified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to information stored in a predetermined storage area, execution of a predetermined progress process for advancing the game is regulated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being started even though there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred regarding the set values.

Features z5. Means for executing notification that allows the player to recognize that the settable situation should occur based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has occurred by the predetermined monitoring means ( In the 49th embodiment, the function of executing step SB121 in the main CPU 63, in the 51st embodiment, the function of executing step SB621 in the main CPU 63, and in the 52nd embodiment, step SB728 in the main CPU 63 (in the 53rd embodiment, the function to execute the process of step SB825 in the main CPU 63; in the 54th embodiment, the function to execute the process in step SC127 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to feature z4, characterized by:

According to feature z5, when it is specified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred, a notification is executed that allows the player to recognize that a settable situation should occur, so that when a predetermined abnormality occurs, It becomes possible to prompt the game hall manager to set the set value.

Features z6. Means for canceling the restricted state based on the occurrence of the setting possible situation (in the 49th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB303 in the main CPU 63, and in the 53rd embodiment, a function of executing step SB904 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature z4 or z5, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of z4 or z5.

According to feature z6, it is possible to make a new setting of the setting value to be used when a situation in which a predetermined abnormality has occurred is canceled.

Note that for the configuration of features z1 to z6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αA group>
Feature αA1. Predetermined monitoring means (49th embodiment) that monitors whether or not a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to information stored in a predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control) when supply of operating power is started. In the 51st embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function to execute steps SB104 to SB106. In the 51st embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function to execute steps SB604 to SB606. In the 52nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a step A function to execute the processing from SB703 to step SB705, a function to execute the processing from step SB804 to step SB806 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, a function to execute the processing from step SC104 to step SC106 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. ) and
If the predetermined monitoring means identifies that the predetermined abnormality has occurred, the execution content of the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is determined by the predetermined monitoring means that the predetermined abnormality has occurred. Regulation means for making the execution content different from that in the case where there was no execution (in the 49th embodiment, a function to execute the process of step SB119 in the main CPU 63, and in the 51st embodiment, a function to execute the process in step SB619 in the main CPU 63) In the 52nd embodiment, the function to execute the process of step SB726 in the main CPU 63, in the 53rd embodiment, the function to execute the process in step SB823 in the main CPU 63, in the 54th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SC125 in the CPU 63);
Specific output means (in the 49th embodiment, the process of step SB122 in the main CPU 63 In the 51st embodiment, the function to execute step SB622 in the main CPU 63; in the 52nd embodiment, the function to execute step SB729 in the main CPU 63; in the 53rd embodiment, the main (a function of executing the process of step SB826 in the side CPU 63, a function of executing the process of step SC128 in the main side CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature αA1, when it is specified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to information stored in a predetermined storage area, the execution content of the process at the time of starting supply of operating power is determined when the predetermined abnormality does not occur. Since the execution content is different from the above, it is possible to prevent the process from proceeding normally even though a predetermined abnormality has occurred. Furthermore, a specific output is performed to the outside of the gaming machine based on the fact that it has been specified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred. This makes it possible to prompt the game hall manager to take action against the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality.

Feature αA2. The gaming machine according to feature αA1, wherein the specific output means performs the specific output to the outside of the gaming machine even when it is specified that an event different from the predetermined abnormality has occurred.

According to feature αA2, a specific output is performed to the outside of the gaming machine even when an event different from a predetermined abnormality occurs. This allows the configuration to be used for specific output.

Feature αA3. The specific output means is configured to control the gaming machine when the predetermined abnormality occurs when the supply of operating power is restarted even if the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where the predetermined abnormality occurs. The gaming machine according to feature αA1 or αA2, characterized in that the specific output is performed externally.

According to feature αA3, in a situation where a predetermined abnormality has occurred, it is possible to perform a specific output to the outside of the gaming machine each time the supply of operating power is restarted. This makes it easier for the game hall manager to recognize that a predetermined abnormality has occurred.

Feature αA4. The regulating means is characterized in that, based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has been identified by the predetermined monitoring means, a regulating state is established in which execution of a predetermined progression process for advancing the game is regulated. The gaming machine according to any one of features αA1 to αA3.

According to feature αA4, when it is identified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to information stored in a predetermined storage area, execution of a predetermined progress process for advancing the game is regulated, so that the predetermined abnormality is detected. It is possible to prevent a game from being started even though a problem has occurred.

Feature αA5. Means for executing a non-restrictive process different from the predetermined progress process even in the regulated state (in the 33rd embodiment, a function to execute the processes of steps S8201 to S8206 in the main CPU 63, in the 35th embodiment Feature αA4 is characterized in that the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S8901 to S8905, and in the 42nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps SA101 to SA106. The game machine described.

According to feature αA5, even in a situation where execution of the predetermined progression process is restricted due to the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality, the non-restricted process can be executed. This makes it possible to ensure execution of necessary processing even in a restricted state.

Feature αA6. The non-regulated processing includes a power outage monitoring process (step S8201 in the 33rd embodiment, step S8901 in the 35th embodiment, and step SA102 in the 42nd embodiment) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage. The gaming machine according to feature αA5.

According to feature αA6, the power outage monitoring process is executed even in the restricted state, so that when a power outage occurs in the restricted state, it is possible to appropriately deal with it.

Feature αA7. Features αA4 to αA6, characterized in that the regulating means is configured to enter the regulating state when the supply of operating power is restarted even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the regulating state is present. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature αA7, it is possible to prevent a state in which execution of a predetermined progress process is restricted due to the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality from being canceled simply by stopping the supply of operating power.

Feature αA8. Setting means (in the 49th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB311 in the main CPU 63, In the embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB915 in the main CPU 63);
Situation generation means (in the 49th embodiment, step SB114 in the main CPU 63 In the 51st embodiment, the main CPU 63 makes an affirmative decision in step SB614. In the 52nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 makes an affirmative decision in step SB717. (in the embodiment, the main CPU 63 makes an affirmative determination in step SB812; in the 54th embodiment, the main CPU 63 makes an affirmative determination in step SC113);
The gaming machine according to any one of features αA4 to αA7.

According to feature αA8, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, if a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in a predetermined storage area, there is a possibility that an abnormality has also occurred with respect to the set value. On the other hand, with the configuration of feature αA1 described above, if it is specified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to information stored in a predetermined storage area, the execution content of the process at the start of supply of operating power is predetermined. Since the execution contents are different from those when no abnormality has occurred, it is possible to prevent processing from proceeding normally even though there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred regarding the setting value. Become. In addition, since a specific output is made to the outside of the gaming machine based on the identification of a predetermined abnormality occurring, the gaming machine It becomes possible to prompt the hall manager.

Feature αA9. Means for executing notification that allows the player to recognize that the settable situation should occur based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has occurred by the predetermined monitoring means ( In the 49th embodiment, the function of executing step SB121 in the main CPU 63, in the 51st embodiment, the function of executing step SB621 in the main CPU 63, and in the 52nd embodiment, step SB728 in the main CPU 63 (in the 53rd embodiment, the function to execute the process of step SB825 in the main CPU 63; in the 54th embodiment, the function to execute the process in step SC127 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to feature αA8.

According to feature αA9, when it is specified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred, a notification is executed that allows the player to recognize that a settable situation should occur, so that when a predetermined abnormality occurs, It becomes possible to prompt the game hall manager to set the set value.

Feature αA10. The regulating means sets a regulating state in which execution of a predetermined progression process for advancing the game is regulated based on the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality being identified by the predetermined monitoring means. ,
This gaming machine has a means for canceling the restricted state based on the occurrence of the setting possible situation (in the 49th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB303 in the main CPU 63, in the 53rd embodiment, the main CPU 63 The gaming machine according to feature αA8 or αA9, further comprising a function of executing the process of step SB904 in the side CPU 63.

According to feature αA10, when a situation where a predetermined abnormality occurs is canceled, it is possible to make a new setting of the setting value to be used.

Note that for the configuration of features αA1 to αA10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αB group>
Feature αB1. Means for starting processing at the start of supply of operating power when supply of operating power is started (steps SB101 to SB122 in the 49th embodiment, steps SB601 to SB622 in the 51st embodiment, steps SB601 to SB622 in the 52nd embodiment) In the embodiment, steps SB701 to SB729, in the 53rd embodiment, steps SB801 to SB818 and steps SB823 to SB826, and in the 54th embodiment, steps SC101 to SC120 and steps SC125 to SC128),
means for executing periodically activated interrupt processing (a function for executing the first timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63);
Means for executing profit granting processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set to be used from among setting values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) ) and
As a part of the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power, a setting-related execution means (a function of executing a setting value update process or a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) executes a predetermined setting-related process regarding the setting value. )and,
Permission setting means for setting a state in which execution of the interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which execution of the interrupt processing is permitted when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed in the processing at the start of supply of operating power. (In the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB201 or step SB301 in the main CPU 63, and in the 53rd embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB901 in the main CPU 63),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature αB1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In addition, since the predetermined setting-related processing related to the setting value is executed as a part of the processing at the start of supply of operating power, it is difficult to perform an act of illegally executing the predetermined setting-related processing. It becomes possible.

In this case, when a predetermined setting-related process is executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power, execution of the interrupt process changes from a prohibited state to a permitted state. That is, while execution of the interrupt process is basically prohibited in the process when the supply of operating power is started, the interrupt process can be activated by interrupting in the predetermined setting-related process. By basically prohibiting execution of interrupt processing in the processing at the start of supply of operating power, it is possible to shorten the time required to complete the processing at the start of supply of operating power. On the other hand, in the predetermined settings-related process, it is assumed that the time required to complete the process will be longer because the process related to the setting value is executed. By allowing the execution of interrupt processing, it is possible to optimize the execution mode of the processing.

Feature αB2. The gaming machine according to feature αB1, wherein the setting-related execution means terminates the predetermined setting-related process based on a termination trigger operation being performed in the predetermined setting-related process.

According to feature αB2, the predetermined setting-related process is continued until an end triggering operation is performed, so the time required to complete the process tends to be long. In this case, with the configuration of feature αB1 described above, execution of interrupt processing is permitted in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, so it is possible to make the execution mode of the process suitable. .

Feature αB3. A prohibition setting means (in the forty-ninth embodiment, a prohibition setting means in the main CPU 63 for setting a state in which execution of the interrupt processing is permitted to a state in which execution of the interrupt processing is prohibited when the predetermined setting-related processing is completed) The gaming machine according to feature αB1 or αB2, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of executing the process of step SB206 or step SB312, or in the 53rd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB916 in the main CPU 63.

According to feature αB3, when the predetermined setting-related process ends, execution of the interrupt process is prohibited again. This makes it possible to limit the period during which execution of the interrupt process is permitted in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed to the period during which the predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

Feature αB4. The gaming machine according to any one of features αB1 to αB3, wherein the interrupt processing includes a power outage monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage.

According to feature αB4, the power outage monitoring process is executed even when a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, so the configuration can take a long time to complete the predetermined setting-related process. However, if a power outage occurs while a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, it becomes possible to appropriately deal with the power outage.

Feature αB5. The interrupt process includes a progress corresponding process (steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63) executed to control the progress of the game,
If the interrupt process is interrupted and activated in a situation where the predetermined setting-related process is being executed, the power outage monitoring process is executed, but the progress response process is not executed,
When the interrupt process is interrupted and activated after the process at the start of the supply of operating power is completed, both the power failure monitoring process and the progress response process can be executed. Game machine.

According to feature αB5, in a configuration in which the occurrence of a power outage is periodically monitored in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, an interrupt process is interrupted and activated in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process is being executed. Even if there is a problem, it is possible to prevent the progress corresponding processing for controlling the progress of the game from being executed.

Feature αB6. The setting-related execution means includes:
When the supply of operating power is started, the use is performed as the predetermined setting-related process based on the fact that the first setting-related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed. means for executing a changeable process in which a target setting value can be changed (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63);
Based on the fact that the second setting-related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a) is performed when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used is set as the predetermined setting-related process. A means for executing a setting notification process for making the notification (a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The permission setting means sets a state in which execution of the interrupt process is prohibited to a state in which execution of the interrupt process is permitted when the changeable process is executed in the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power. and when the setting notification process is executed in the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power, the interrupt process is set from a state in which execution is prohibited to a state in which execution of the interrupt process is permitted. The gaming machine according to any one of features αB1 to αB5.

According to feature αB6, in order to change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting-related operation when the supply of operating power is started, so the setting value to be used cannot be changed illegally. This makes it possible to make it difficult to perform the desired action. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used will be notified by performing the second setting-related operation, so the administrator of the game hall can check the setting value to be used as necessary. becomes possible.

Note that for the configuration of features αB1 to αB6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature z group, the feature αA group, and the feature αB group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, processing needs to be performed appropriately when the supply of operating power is started, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic αC group>
Feature αC1. Means for executing profit granting processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set to be used from among setting values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) ) and
a setting-related execution unit (a function of executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) that executes a predetermined setting-related process regarding the setting value when the supply of operating power is started;
A regulation that restricts the execution of a predetermined progression process for advancing the game when the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed and the supply of operating power is started thereafter. state regulation means (in the 53rd embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB808 in the main CPU 63; in the 54th embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SC108 and step SC116 in the main CPU 63); ,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature αC1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, if the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related processing, and the supply of operating power is restarted afterwards, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game is regulated. Ru. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game from being executed even though the predetermined setting-related processing has not been completed.

Feature αC2. The regulating means is configured such that the predetermined setting-related process is executed even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed and the supply of operating power is started thereafter. The gaming machine according to feature αC1, wherein the gaming machine does not enter the restricted state when

According to feature αC2, it is possible to prevent the execution of a predetermined progress process for advancing the game from being restricted even when a predetermined setting-related process is executed when the supply of operating power is restarted. .

Feature αC3. Feature αC1 or The gaming machine described in αC2.

According to feature αC3, even in a situation where execution of the predetermined progression process is restricted, the non-restricted process can be executed. This makes it possible to ensure execution of necessary processing even in a restricted state.

Feature αC4. The gaming machine according to feature αC3, wherein the non-regulated processing includes a power outage monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage.

According to feature αC4, the power outage monitoring process is executed even in the restricted state, so that when a power outage occurs in the restricted state, it is possible to appropriately deal with it.

Feature αC5. Features αC1 to αC4, wherein the regulating means is configured to enter the regulating state when the supply of operating power is restarted even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the regulating state. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature αC5, it is possible to prevent the state in which execution of the predetermined progress process is restricted from being canceled simply by stopping the supply of operating power.

Feature αC6. Means for executing notification that allows the player to recognize that the predetermined setting-related process should be executed based on the regulation state (in the 53rd embodiment, In any one of the features αC1 to αC5, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the process of step SB825, and in the 54th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SC127 in the main CPU 63. The game machine described.

According to feature αC6, if the supply of operating power is stopped before completing a predetermined setting-related process, it is possible to prompt the gaming hall manager to execute the predetermined setting-related process again. Become.

Feature αC7. The regulating means may prevent specific related operations (setting key insertion part 68a The gaming machine according to any one of features αC1 to αC6, characterized in that the restriction state is not set based on the ON operation of the reset button 68c and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c.

According to feature αC7, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before a predetermined setting-related process is completed, the game can be progressed by performing a specific related operation when the supply of operating power is restarted. It becomes possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress process from being restricted.

Feature αC8. The gaming machine according to feature αC7, wherein the setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related process based on the specific related operation being performed when supply of operating power is started. .

According to feature αC8, it is possible to prevent the execution of a predetermined progress process for advancing the game from being restricted even when a predetermined setting-related process is executed when the supply of operating power is restarted. .

Feature αC9. The specific related operation includes the setting key insertion section (setting key insertion section 68a) being brought into a predetermined compatible state (ON operation state) by the setting key, and other predetermined operations (pressing the reset button 68c). ) is being carried out,
The regulating means may be configured to control whether the other predetermined operation is not performed if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, and if the supply of operating power is subsequently started. The gaming machine according to feature αC8, wherein the setting key insertion portion is not set to the restricted state based on the fact that the setting key insertion portion is in the predetermined compatible state.

According to feature αC9, even if a specific related operation is not performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, the setting key insertion section is set to a predetermined corresponding state, so that a predetermined progress process for progressing the game is executed. This makes it possible to prevent regulations from being regulated. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped during execution of a predetermined setting-related process, the setting key insertion part is in the predetermined compatible state, but the power is turned on without performing any other predetermined operations. Even if this occurs, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress process from being restricted.

Feature αC10. When the supply of operating power is started, another related process regarding the setting value is executed based on the setting key insertion section being brought into the predetermined corresponding state in a situation where the other predetermined operation is not performed. The gaming machine according to feature αC9, further comprising a separate related execution means (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63).

According to feature αC10, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before completing a predetermined setting-related process, by performing an operation to execute another related process when restarting the supply of operating power, It becomes possible to prevent the execution of a predetermined progression process for advancing the game from being restricted.

Feature αC11. When the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed and the supply of operating power is started thereafter, the setting key insertion section The gaming machine according to feature αC10, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is executed without executing the other related process based on the fact that the setting-related process is set to the predetermined compatible state.

According to feature αC11, when the supply of operating power is stopped before completing a predetermined setting-related process, an operation is performed to cause another related process to be executed when the supply of operating power is restarted. A predetermined setting-related process is executed instead of a separate related process. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of predetermined setting-related processing.

Feature αC12. The predetermined setting-related process is a process that allows changing the setting value to be used,
The gaming machine according to feature αC11, wherein the separate related process is a process for notifying the setting value to be used.

According to feature αC12, when the supply of operating power is stopped while changing the setting value to be used, when the supply of operating power is restarted, the setting value to be used is notified. It becomes possible to give priority to the execution of the process for changing the setting value to be used over the process.

Feature αC13. The gaming machine according to any one of features αC1 to αC12, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process that allows changing the setting value to be used.

According to feature αC13, if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the process for changing the setting value to be used, there is a process to proceed with the game when the supply of operating power is resumed. Execution of the predetermined progress process is regulated. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game from being executed even though the setting value change has not been completed.

Note that for the configuration of features αC1 to αC13, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αD group>
Feature αD1. Means for executing profit granting processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set to be used from among setting values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) ) and
When the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined setting-related process regarding the setting value is executed based on the fact that a specific related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed. a setting-related execution means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63);
When the supply of operating power is started, based on a predetermined related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a), another related execution means (main) executes a predetermined other related process regarding the setting value. function of executing setting value update processing in the side CPU 63);
A regulation that restricts the execution of a predetermined progression process for advancing the game when the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed and the supply of operating power is started thereafter. state regulation means (in the 53rd embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB808 in the main CPU 63; in the 54th embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SC108 and step SC116 in the main CPU 63); ,
Equipped with
The regulation means is such that even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, the specific related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started thereafter. , and even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, if the supply of operating power is started thereafter, the above-mentioned A gaming machine that does not enter the restricted state based on a predetermined related operation being performed.

According to feature αD1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, if the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related processing, and the supply of operating power is restarted afterwards, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game is regulated. Ru. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game from being executed even though the predetermined setting-related processing has not been completed.

Further, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, execution of the predetermined progress process is not restricted because a specific related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game from being restricted even when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed upon restarting the supply of operating power.

In addition, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the specified setting-related process is completed, the execution of the specified progress process will be restricted even if the specified related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed. Not done. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress process from being restricted when an operation for executing a process related to the set value is performed.

Feature αD2. When the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related process and the supply of operating power is started thereafter, the other related process is performed based on the predetermined related operation being performed. The gaming machine according to feature αD1, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is executed without being executed.

According to feature αD2, when the supply of operating power is stopped before completing a predetermined setting-related process, an operation is performed to cause another related process to be executed when the supply of operating power is restarted. A predetermined setting-related process is executed instead of a separate related process. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of predetermined setting-related processing.

Feature αD3. The specific related operation includes the setting key insertion section (setting key insertion section 68a) being brought into a predetermined compatible state (ON operation state) by the setting key, and other predetermined operations (pressing the reset button 68c). ) is being carried out,
Feature αD2, characterized in that the predetermined related operation includes the setting key insertion section being brought into the predetermined corresponding state by the setting key, but does not include the other predetermined operation being performed. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature αD3, even if no specific related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, the setting key insertion section is set to a predetermined compatible state, so that a predetermined progress process for progressing the game is executed. This makes it possible to prevent regulations from being regulated. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped during execution of a predetermined setting-related process, the setting key insertion part is in the predetermined compatible state, but the power is turned on without performing any other predetermined operations. Even if this occurs, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress process from being restricted.

Feature αD4. The predetermined setting-related process is a process that allows changing the setting value to be used,
The gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD3, wherein the separate related process is a process for notifying the setting value to be used.

According to feature αD4, if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the process for changing the setting value to be used, when the supply of operating power is restarted afterwards, there is a process to proceed with the game. Execution of the predetermined progress process is regulated. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game from being executed even though the setting value change has not been completed. Additionally, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting values to be used are being changed, a process is performed that allows the setting values to be used to be changed when the supply of operating power is restarted. The predetermined progress process is performed not only when an operation is performed to cause the process to be executed, but also when an operation is performed to notify the setting value to be used. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the above from being restricted.

Feature αD5. Features αD1 to D1 are characterized in that the present invention includes a means for executing a non-restrictive process different from the predetermined progress process even in the regulated state (a function of executing the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of αD4.

According to feature αD5, even in a situation where execution of the predetermined progression process is restricted, the non-restricted process can be executed. This makes it possible to ensure execution of necessary processing even in a restricted state.

Feature αD6. The gaming machine according to feature αD5, wherein the non-regulated processing includes a power outage monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage.

According to feature αD6, the power outage monitoring process is executed even in the restricted state, so that if a power outage occurs in the restricted state, it is possible to appropriately deal with it.

Feature αD7. Features αD1 to αD6, wherein the regulating means is configured to enter the regulated state when the supply of operating power is restarted even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the regulated state. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature αD7, it is possible to prevent the state in which execution of the predetermined progress process is restricted from being canceled simply by stopping the supply of operating power.

Feature αD8. Means for executing notification that allows the player to recognize that the predetermined setting-related process should be executed based on the regulation state (in the 53rd embodiment, In any one of the features αD1 to αD7, The game machine described.

According to feature αD8, if the supply of operating power is stopped before completing a predetermined setting-related process, it is possible to prompt the gaming hall manager to re-execute the predetermined setting-related process. Become.

Feature αD9. Means for executing profit granting processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set to be used from among setting values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) ) and
When the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined setting-related process regarding the setting value is executed based on the fact that a specific related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed. a setting-related execution means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63);
A regulation that restricts the execution of a predetermined progression process for advancing the game when the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed and the supply of operating power is started thereafter. state regulation means (in the 53rd embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB808 in the main CPU 63; in the 54th embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SC108 and step SC116 in the main CPU 63); ,
Equipped with
The specific related operation includes a first related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a) and a second related operation (pressing the reset button 68c),
The regulating means may be configured such that even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, the specific related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started thereafter. , and even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, if the supply of operating power is started thereafter, the above-mentioned A gaming machine characterized in that the restricted state is not set based on the fact that the first related operation out of the first related operation and the second related operation is performed.

According to feature αD9, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, if the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related processing, and the supply of operating power is restarted afterwards, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game is regulated. Ru. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game from being executed even though the predetermined setting-related processing has not been completed.

Further, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, execution of the predetermined progress process is not restricted because a specific related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game from being restricted even when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed upon restarting the supply of operating power.

Furthermore, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, if the first related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, the execution of the predetermined progress process will be restricted. Not done. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress process from being restricted when a part of the operation for executing the predetermined setting-related process is performed.

Note that for the configuration of features αD1 to αD9, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αE group>
Feature αE1. Means for executing profit granting processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set to be used from among setting values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) ) and
When the supply of operating power is started, a settable situation (setting value A situation generation means (in the 53rd embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB812 in the main CPU 63, and in the 54th embodiment, in step SC113 in the main CPU 63) function to make a positive judgment), and
an operation specifying means (a function for executing the process of step SB910 in the main CPU 63) for specifying whether or not the predetermined corresponding operation means is operated;
When the operation specifying means specifies that the predetermined corresponding operation means is not operated, the storage state becomes a non-operation corresponding state, and the operation specifying means specifies that the predetermined corresponding operation means is operated. an operation compatible storage means (OFF confirmation flag 361) whose storage state becomes an operation compatible state when
The selection is made based on the fact that the operation specifying means specifies that the predetermined corresponding operation means is being operated in a situation where the storage state of the operation correspondence storage means is the non-operation correspondence state in the settable situation. Selection target changing means for changing target setting values (a function of executing the process of step SB914 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The configuration is such that the setting value to be selected is the setting value to be used when a termination trigger occurs in the setting possible situation,
This gaming machine includes a state setting means (53rd embodiment In the 54th embodiment, a gaming machine is provided with a function of executing the process of step SB901 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing the process of step SC114 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment.

According to feature αE1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In addition, in order to create a settable situation in which it is possible to change the set value to be used, it is necessary to turn on the power while a specific related operation including the operation of a predetermined corresponding operation means is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally change the setting values to be used. In addition, since the setting value of the selection target is changed based on the operation of a predetermined corresponding operation means that is operated to cause a setting possible situation, the number of operation means required to change the setting value is It is possible to suppress it. In addition, in the setting possible situation, the setting value to be selected is changed based on the fact that it is specified that the predetermined corresponding operation means is being operated in a situation where the storage state of the operation corresponding storage means is the non-operation corresponding state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting value to be selected from being changed multiple times in response to one operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means.

In this case, when the settable situation is started or when the settable situation is started, the storage state of the operation compatible storage means is set to the operation compatible state. As a result, if the operation of the predetermined response operation means to cause a settable situation continues even after the start of the settable situation, the setting value to be selected will be changed by the operation of the predetermined response operation means. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Feature αE2. When the detection state of the means for detecting the operation of the predetermined response operation means is an operation detection state, the situation generating means determines that the predetermined response operation means is being operated regardless of the storage state of the operation response storage means. The gaming machine according to feature αE1.

According to feature αE2, when specifying whether or not a specific related operation has been performed, the predetermined corresponding operation is performed, rather than specifying whether the predetermined corresponding operation means has switched from a state in which it is not operated to a state in which it is operated. Since the configuration specifies whether or not the means is being operated, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying whether or not a settable situation is generated.

Feature αE3. a setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used;
selection correspondence storage means (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be selected;
Equipped with
The selection target changing means specifies that the predetermined corresponding operation means is being operated by the operation specifying means in a situation where the storage state of the operation corresponding storage means is the non-operation corresponding state in the settable situation. Based on this, the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means is changed so that the setting value to be selected is changed,
The situation generation means stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means in the setting correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information when the termination trigger occurs in the setting possible situation. The gaming machine according to feature αE1 or αE2, wherein the setting value that was the selection target in the setting possible situation is set as the usage target.

According to feature αE3, the setting correspondence storage means stores the setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used, and the selection correspondence storage means stores the selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value that is being changed in the setting possible situation. By providing this, it becomes possible to change the setting value in the settable situation while storing and retaining information on the setting value that was set before the settable situation started.

Feature αE4. Means for displaying the setting values to be selected in the setting possible state on predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) (step SA801 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to any one of features αE1 to αE3, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of executing the process of step SA803).

According to feature αE4, it is possible to change a setting value while checking the setting value that is being changed in the setting possible situation.

Feature αE5. Means for executing profit granting processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set to be used from among setting values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) ) and
When the supply of operating power is started, a settable situation (setting value A situation generation means (in the 53rd embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB812 in the main CPU 63, and in the 54th embodiment, in step SC113 in the main CPU 63) function to make a positive judgment), and
an operation specifying means (a function for executing the process of step SB910 in the main CPU 63) for specifying whether or not the predetermined corresponding operation means is operated;
Selection object changing means (step SB914 in the main CPU 63 function) and
Equipped with
The configuration is such that the setting value to be selected is the setting value to be used when a termination trigger occurs in the setting possible situation,
In this gaming machine, when the supply of operating power for generating the settable situation is started, the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means triggers a change in the setting value to be selected in the settable situation. A means for preventing it from being handled as an operation (in the 53rd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB901 in the main CPU 63, and in the 54th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SC114 in the main CPU 63). A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature αE5, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In addition, in order to create a settable situation in which it is possible to change the set value to be used, it is necessary to turn on the power while a specific related operation including the operation of a predetermined corresponding operation means is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally change the setting values to be used. In addition, since the setting value of the selection target is changed based on the operation of a predetermined corresponding operation means that is operated to cause a setting possible situation, the number of operation means required to change the setting value is It is possible to suppress it.

In this case, the operation of the predetermined response operation means when the supply of operating power to generate the settable situation is started is treated as the operation that triggers the change of the setting value to be selected in the settable situation. It will be made sure that there is no such thing. As a result, if the operation of the predetermined response operation means to cause a settable situation continues even after the start of the settable situation, the setting value to be selected will be changed by the operation of the predetermined response operation means. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Note that for the configuration of features αE1 to αE5, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above feature αC group, the above feature αD group, and the above feature αE group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to have a suitable configuration regarding the setting values that determine the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic αF group>
Feature αF1. Specific display means (special figure display section 37a, regular figure display section 38a),
Display data setting means (a function for executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63) for setting display data in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, third display data buffer 273);
specific display control means (a function of executing the processes of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed; ,
Initialization means (second RAM clearing of the main CPU 63 in the 55th embodiment) that initializes a predetermined storage area (clear target area 371 in the 55th embodiment) based on the start of supply of operating power function to perform processing), and
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the display storage area is not initialized by the initialization means.

According to feature αF1, the predetermined storage area is initialized based on the start of supply of operating power, so that the game can be started in a situation where the predetermined storage area is initialized. It becomes possible. In this case, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized, the display storage area in which display data for displaying on the specific display unit is set is not initialized by the initialization unit. As a result, when the supply of operating power is started, the display contents of the specific display means can be changed to It becomes possible to display the display contents before the supply of the information was stopped. Therefore, even if the player checks the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is made impossible to identify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means. becomes possible.

Feature αF2. Setting means (55th item) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of levels of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage in a setting possible situation that has occurred based on the start of the supply of operating power. A function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment),
The initializing means initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means or after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to feature αF1.

According to feature αF2, the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means when or when a new setting of the setting value to be used is performed when the supply of operating power is started. By doing so, when a new set value is set to be used, it is possible to start the game with the predetermined storage area initialized. In this case, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means in conjunction with the new setting of the setting value to be used, display data for displaying on the specific display means is set. The display storage area is not initialized by the initialization means. As a result, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, and when a new setting of the setting value to be used is made, and a new setting of the setting value to be used is made. In either case, it is possible to display the display contents before the supply of operating power is stopped. Therefore, even if the player checks the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is impossible to identify whether or not a new setting of the setting value to be used has been made. becomes possible.

Feature αF3. If the predetermined initialization conditions are met when the supply of operating power is started (no information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has occurred, and the setting update display flag and game stop flag are not set to "1") separate initialization means for initializing the predetermined storage area even if the setting value to be used is not set by the setting means. function of executing the first RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the 55th embodiment),
The gaming machine according to feature αF2, wherein the display storage area is not initialized by the separate initialization means.

According to feature αF3, when the supply of operating power is started and a predetermined initialization condition is met, the predetermined storage area is stored even if no new setting of the setting value to be used is performed. is initialized, it is possible to start the game in a situation where the predetermined storage area has been initialized even in a situation where no new settings are made for the setting values to be used. In this case, regardless of whether a new set value is set to be used or a predetermined initialization condition is met, the display data for displaying on the specific display means is set. The display storage area is not initialized. As a result, when the supply of operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means is changed to a predetermined initialization when a new set value is set, when a new set value is not set. Regardless of whether the condition is met or the predetermined initialization condition is not met, it is possible to display the display content before the supply of operating power is stopped. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is difficult to determine whether new settings have been made and whether predetermined initialization conditions have been met. This makes it possible to make it impossible to identify the

Feature αF4. The present invention is characterized by comprising means (a power supply/launch control device 78) for supplying backup power to the display storage area and the predetermined storage area in a situation where operating power is not supplied to the specific display control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features αF1 to αF3.

According to feature αF4, even if the display storage area and the predetermined storage area have a configuration that requires the supply of operating power to store and retain information, in a situation where operating power is not supplied to the specific display control means. Since backup power is supplied to the display storage area and the predetermined storage area, information can be stored and retained in the display storage area and the predetermined storage area even when operating power is not supplied to the specific display means. becomes possible.

Feature αF5. It is determined whether or not to grant a benefit to a player, and when granting a benefit to a player, benefit grant information (information of "1" set in a flag corresponding to the type of jackpot result) is set in the predetermined manner. A provision determining means (a function for executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the storage area;
A benefit granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) that grants a benefit (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the benefit granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area. )and,
Equipped with
The display data setting means stores display data corresponding to the result (the display data selected in step S507 or step S509) corresponding to the determination result of the provision determination means in the display storage area when it is time to display the determination result. Set to
The specific display control means responds to the determination result of the provision determination means by controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data corresponding to the result stored in the display storage area is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of features αF1 to αF4, characterized in that the specific display means displays the following information.

According to feature αF5, the specific display means displays a display corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to give a benefit to the player, so that the player pays attention to the specific display means. In this case, by having the configuration described in feature αF1 above, when the supply of operating power is started, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means, the display is not displayed on the specific display means. The display storage area in which display data for displaying is set is not initialized by the initialization means. As a result, when the supply of operating power is started, the display contents of the specific display means can be changed to It becomes possible to display the display contents before the supply of the information was stopped. Therefore, even if the player checks the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is made impossible to identify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means. becomes possible.

Feature αF6. Even if the privilege granting information is deleted from the predetermined storage area by initializing the predetermined storage area by the initialization means, the display storage area is not initialized by the initialization unit. The gaming machine according to feature αF5.

According to feature αF6, if the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is started, the benefit provision information is deleted from the predetermined storage area, thereby stopping the supply of operating power. Even if the bonus grant information is stored in a predetermined storage area before the bonus grant information is deleted, when the supply of operating power is resumed, it is possible to start the game with the bonus grant information erased. In this case, even if the benefit provision information is deleted from the predetermined storage area, the display storage area where the display data for displaying on the specific display means is set is initialized by the initialization means. not be converted into As a result, even if the player checks the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is impossible to identify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means. This allows you to prioritize things.

Feature αF7. The specific display means includes a first specific display means (special figure display section 37a) and a second specific display means (general figure display section 38a),
The display storage area includes a first display storage area (first display data buffer 271) and a second display storage area (third display data buffer 273),
The display data setting means includes:
a first display data setting means for setting display data in the first display storage area (a function for executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63 regarding the special figure display section 37a);
a second display data setting means for setting display data in the second display storage area (a function for executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63 regarding the general figure display section 38a);
Equipped with
The specific display control means is
A first specific display control means for controlling the display of the first specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the first display storage area is displayed (steps in the main CPU 63 regarding the special figure display section 37a) a function to execute the processing from SC412 to step SC414);
A second specific display control means for display-controlling the second specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the second display storage area is displayed (steps in the main CPU 63 regarding the general figure display section 38a) a function to execute the processing from SC412 to step SC414);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features αF1 to αF6, wherein the first display storage area and the second display storage area are not initialized by the initialization means.

According to feature αF7, the display contents when the supply of operating power is started for both the first specific display means and the second specific display means are changed when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means, and when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means. Even if the initialization is not performed, it is possible to display the display contents before the supply of operating power is stopped. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display contents of either the first specific display means or the second specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the initialization means. This makes it possible to make it impossible to identify whether or not the information has been received.

Feature αF8. When the supply of operating power is started, processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power is executed, and the processing for initializing the predetermined storage area by the initializing means is performed at the time of starting the supply of operating power. It is a configuration included in the processing of
Any one of the features αF1 to αF7, characterized in that, when the supply of operating power is started, the specific display control means starts the display of the specific display unit after the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power is completed. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to feature αF8, regardless of whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means or not, the specific display means is activated at the timing after the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed. It becomes possible to start displaying the .

Feature αF9. Based on the start of the supply of operating power, a setting enable situation is created in which it is possible to set the setting value to be used from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level. Equipped with a situation generating means (a function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the 55th embodiment),
The initializing means is configured to initialize the predetermined storage area when the settable situation occurs or after the settable situation occurs,
The gaming machine according to feature αF8, wherein the settable situation occurs in a situation where the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is being executed.

According to feature αF9, regardless of whether a settable situation occurs or not, the display on the specific display means is started at a timing after the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed. It becomes possible to do so.

Note that for the configuration of features αF1 to αF9, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αG group>
Feature αG1. Specific display means (special figure display section 37a, regular figure display section 38a),
Display data setting means (a function for executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63) for setting display data in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, third display data buffer 273);
specific display control means (a function of executing the processes of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed; ,
Initialization means (main in the 56th embodiment) that initializes a predetermined storage area (clear target area 371 in the 56th embodiment) including the display storage area based on the start of supply of operating power a function of executing the second RAM clearing process of the side CPU 63);
Equipped with
The display data setting means is configured to initialize the predetermined storage area by the initialization means when supply of operating power is started, and to set the display data by the initialization means when supply of operating power is started. Correspondence setting means (step SC502 in the main CPU 63) sets specific correspondence display data in the display storage area for causing the specified display means to display a specified correspondence even if the predetermined storage area is not initialized. , a function of executing the processes of step SC503, step SC507, and step SC510).

According to feature αG1, the predetermined storage area is initialized based on the start of the supply of operating power, so that the game can be started in a situation where the predetermined storage area is initialized. It becomes possible. In this case, when the supply of operating power is started, the specific correspondence display is performed by the specific display means both when the predetermined storage area is initialized and when it is not initialized. As a result, even if the player checks the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is impossible to determine whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature αG2. Setting means (56th item) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage in a setting possible situation that has occurred based on the start of the supply of operating power. A function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment),
The initializing means initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting unit. The gaming machine according to feature αG1.

According to feature αG2, a predetermined storage area is initialized when or when the setting value of the target of use is set when the supply of operating power is started. When the setting value is newly set, it becomes possible to start the game with the predetermined storage area initialized. In this case, whether the predetermined storage area is initialized in conjunction with a new setting of the setting value to be used or not, the specific display means displays a specific correspondence. As a result, even if the player checks the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is impossible to identify whether or not a new setting has been made for the setting value to be used. becomes possible.

Feature αG3. If the predetermined initialization conditions are met when the supply of operating power is started (no information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has occurred, and the setting update display flag and game stop flag are not set to "1") separate initialization means for initializing the predetermined storage area even if the setting value to be used is not set by the setting means. function of executing the first RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the 56th embodiment),
The correspondence setting means sets the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area even when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine described in characteristic feature αG2.

According to feature αG3, if a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined storage area is initialized even if a set value is not set. Even in a situation where new settings are not made, it is possible to start a game in a situation where a predetermined storage area has been initialized. In this case, if a new set value is set, if a new set value is not set, if a predetermined initialization condition is met, or if a predetermined initialization condition is not met. In either case, a specific correspondence display is performed by the specific display means. As a result, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power has started, it is possible to check whether new settings have been made and whether the predetermined initialization conditions have been met. It becomes possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not the

Feature αG4. The correspondence setting means determines whether or not the operating power is supplied in a predetermined regulation situation (during the execution of a game round, during the opening/closing execution mode, during the execution of the fluctuation display round on the normal figure display section 38a, during the execution of the normal power open state). If the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the initialization means when the supply of operating power is started after the operation is stopped, the specific corresponding display data is not set in the display storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of features αG1 to αG3.

According to feature αG4, if the supply of operating power is stopped in a predetermined regulation situation and the supply of operating power is subsequently started and the predetermined storage area is not initialized, the display storage area Since the specific corresponding display data is not set in the display storage area, the display data when the supply of operating power is stopped is stored and held as is in the display storage area. As a result, if the supply of operating power is stopped under a specified regulatory situation and the supply of operating power is subsequently started and the specified storage area is not initialized, the supply of operating power will be stopped. It becomes possible to start displaying the specific display means from the display content of the specific display means when the display is stopped.

Feature αG5. It is determined whether or not to grant a benefit to a player, and when granting a benefit to a player, benefit grant information (information of "1" set in a flag corresponding to the type of jackpot result) is set in the predetermined manner. A provision determining means (a function for executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the storage area;
A benefit granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) that grants a benefit (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the benefit granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area. )and,
Equipped with
The display data setting means stores display data corresponding to the result (the display data selected in step S507 or step S509) corresponding to the determination result of the provision determination means in the display storage area when it is time to display the determination result. and set it to
The specific display control means responds to the determination result of the provision determination means by controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data corresponding to the result stored in the display storage area is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of features αG1 to αG4, characterized in that the specific display means displays the following information.

According to feature αG5, the specific display means displays a display corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to give a benefit to the player, so that the player pays attention to the specific display means. In this case, by having the configuration described in feature αG1 above, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized or not initialized when the supply of operating power is started, Specific correspondence display is performed by the specific display means. As a result, even if the player checks the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is impossible to determine whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature αG6. The specific display control means controls the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the determination result of the provision determination means is performed after the variable display of the symbols is started;
The correspondence setting means performs the initialization in the case where the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a variable display of a pattern is being displayed on the specific display means, and when the supply of operating power is subsequently started. The gaming machine according to feature αG5, characterized in that when the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the means, the specific correspondence display data is not set in the display storage area.

According to feature αG6, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a variable display of a picture is being performed on the specific display means, and when the supply of operating power is subsequently started, the predetermined storage area is If the display storage area is not initialized, the specific correspondence display data is not set in the display storage area, and therefore the display data that would be displayed when the supply of operating power is stopped is stored and held as is in the display storage area. As a result, a predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a fluctuating display of a picture is being performed on the specific display means, and when the supply of operating power is subsequently started. If not, it becomes possible to restart the variable display of the picture on the specific display means.

Feature αG7. When the benefit granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area, the benefit granting means grants the benefit after a display corresponding to the granting of the benefit is displayed on the specific display means. It is a thing,
The correspondence setting means is configured to cause the initialization means to set the above-mentioned behavior by the initialization means in the case where the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means and the supply of operating power is subsequently started. The gaming machine according to feature αG5 or αG6, wherein if the predetermined storage area is not initialized, the specific corresponding display data is not set in the display storage area.

According to feature αG7, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a privilege is granted, and when the supply of operating power is subsequently started, the predetermined storage area is not initialized. Since the specific correspondence display data is not set in the display storage area, the display data in the case where the supply of operating power is stopped is stored and held as is in the display storage area. As a result, if the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a benefit is granted, and the specified storage area is not initialized when the supply of operating power is subsequently started, the benefit It becomes possible to start the display of the specific display means from the display content corresponding to the situation in which .

Feature αG8. When the specific display means performs the specific display when the supply of operating power is started, the specific display control means controls the specific display after the specific display data is set in the display storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of features αG1 to αG7, characterized in that the display of the means is started.

According to feature αG8, display contents are prevented from being displayed on the specific display means when the supply of operating power is stopped before the specific corresponding display is performed when the supply of operating power is started. becomes possible.

Feature αG9. When the supply of operating power is started, the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is executed, and the process of initializing the predetermined storage area by the initializing means is carried out at the time of starting the supply of operating power. It is a configuration included in the processing of
The specific display control means starts the display of the specific display means after the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is executed when the supply of the operating power is started. Game machine.

According to feature αG9, regardless of whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means or not, the specific display means is activated at the timing after the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed. It becomes possible to start displaying the .

Feature αG10. A setting means (56th item) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level in a setting possible situation that has occurred based on the start of the supply of operating power. (a function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment),
The initializing means is configured to initialize the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting unit. and
The gaming machine according to feature αG9, wherein the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting means in a situation where the process at the time of starting supply of operating power is being executed.

According to feature αG10, regardless of whether or not a new setting of the setting value to be used is performed, the display on the specific display means is performed at a timing after the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed. It becomes possible to start the display.

Note that for the configuration of features αG1 to αG10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αH group>
Feature αH1. Specific display means (special figure display section 37a, regular figure display section 38a),
Display data setting means for setting display data in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, third display data buffer 273) (in the case of the 55th to 57th embodiments, executes the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63) (in the case of the 58th to 60th embodiments, the function of executing the process of step SC717 in the main CPU 63),
specific display control means (a function of executing the processes of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed; ,
Setting means (55th to A function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the sixtieth embodiment);
Equipped with
When the supply of operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means indicates that the setting value to be used has been set by the setting means when the supply of operating power is started, and the operating power A game machine characterized in that display content makes it impossible to distinguish that a predetermined situation in which the setting value to be used is not set by the setting means when the supply of the setting value is started.

According to feature αH1, in order to set the setting value to be used by setting the setting value to be used in a setting possible situation that occurs based on the start of supply of operating power, In this case, it becomes necessary to start a new supply of operating power, and even if the setting value to be used is set illegally, it becomes difficult to do so. In this case, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started indicates that the setting value that will be used when the supply of operating power is started and that the supply of operating power is The displayed content makes it impossible to distinguish that this is a predetermined situation in which the setting value to be used is not set when the setting value is started. As a result, even if the player checks the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power has started, it is possible to prevent the player from being able to identify whether or not the setting value to be used has been set. It becomes possible.

Feature αH2. Specific display means (special figure display section 37a, regular figure display section 38a),
Display data setting means for setting display data in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, third display data buffer 273) (in the case of the 56th to 57th embodiments, executes the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63) (in the case of the 58th to 60th embodiments, the function of executing the process of step SC717 in the main CPU 63),
specific display control means (a function of executing the processes of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed; ,
Setting means (56th to A function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the sixtieth embodiment);
Equipped with
The display data setting means sets the setting value to be used by the setting means when supply of operating power is started, and when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means when supply of operating power is started. Correspondence setting means for setting specific correspondence display data in the display storage area for causing the specified display means to perform a specific correspondence display even in the case of a predetermined situation in which the setting value to be used is not set. (In the 56th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps SC502, SC503, SC507, and SC510. In the 57th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps SC602 and SC603. In the 58th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps SC802 to SC805, in the 59th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps SC902 to SC905, and in the 60th embodiment A gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with a function for executing the processes of steps SD102 to SD105, step SD109, step SD110, step SD113, and step SD114 in the main CPU 63.

According to feature αH2, in order to set the setting value to be used by setting the setting value to be used in the setting possible situation that occurs based on the start of the supply of operating power. In this case, it becomes necessary to start a new supply of operating power, and even if the setting value to be used is set illegally, it becomes difficult to do so. In this case, when the setting value to be used when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used when the supply of operating power is started is not set. In any of the predetermined situations, a specific correspondence display is performed by the specific display means. As a result, even if the player checks the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power has started, it is possible to prevent the player from being able to identify whether or not the setting value to be used has been set. It becomes possible.

Feature αH3. If the predetermined initialization conditions are met when the supply of operating power is started (no information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has occurred, and the setting update display flag and game stop flag are not set to "1") (when a "RAM clear operation" is performed in the situation), another initialization means for initializing the predetermined storage area (a function of executing the first RAM clear processing of the main CPU 63 in the 56th to 60th embodiments) Equipped with
The correspondence setting means configures the use by the setting means when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when supply of operating power is started, and when supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to feature αH2, wherein the specific corresponding display data is set in the display storage area in any case where a target setting value is set.

According to feature αH3, when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined storage area is initialized, so that a game can be played in a situation where the predetermined storage area has been initialized. It becomes possible to start. In this case, whether the setting value to be used is set or the specified storage area is initialized, a specific display means will display a specific response when the supply of operating power is started. will be held. As a result, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, neither new setting of the setting value to be used nor initialization of the predetermined storage area will be performed. This makes it possible to make it impossible to distinguish between

Feature αH4. Initialization means (fifty-sixth to The gaming machine according to feature αH2 or αH3, further comprising a function of executing the second RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the sixtieth embodiment.

According to feature αH4, a predetermined storage area is initialized when or when the setting value of the target of use is set when the supply of operating power is started. When the setting value is newly set, it becomes possible to start the game with the predetermined storage area initialized. In this case, when the setting value to be used when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used when the supply of operating power is started is not set. In any of the predetermined situations, a specific correspondence display is performed by the specific display means. As a result, even if the player checks the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power has started, it is possible to prevent the player from being able to identify whether or not the setting value to be used has been set. It becomes possible.

Feature αH5. It is determined whether or not to grant a benefit to a player, and when granting a benefit to a player, benefit grant information (information of "1" set in a flag corresponding to the type of jackpot result) is set in the predetermined manner. A provision determining means (a function for executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the storage area;
A benefit granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) that grants a benefit (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the benefit granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area. )and,
Equipped with
The display data setting means stores display data corresponding to the result (the display data selected in step S507 or step S509) corresponding to the determination result of the provision determination means in the display storage area when it is time to display the determination result. Set to
The specific display control means responds to the determination result of the provision determination means by controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data corresponding to the result stored in the display storage area is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of features αH2 to αH4, characterized in that the specific display means displays the following.

According to feature αH5, the specific display means displays a display corresponding to the determination result as to whether or not to give a benefit to the player, so that the player pays attention to the specific display means. In this case, by having the configuration described in feature αH1 above, when the setting value to be used is set when the supply of operating power is started and the supply of operating power is started. In any of the predetermined situations in which the setting value to be used is not set, the specific display means displays the specific correspondence. As a result, even if the player checks the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power has started, it is possible to prevent the player from being able to identify whether or not the setting value to be used has been set. It becomes possible.

Feature αH6. The gaming machine according to feature αH5, wherein the specific correspondence display data is display data used as display data corresponding to the result.

According to feature αH6, when the supply of operating power is started using the display data corresponding to the result used to notify the determination result of the provision determining means, the specific display means performs a specific correspondence display. . As a result, while suppressing the increase in display data capacity, setting values that are used even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means are set when the supply of operating power is started. This makes it possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not the

Feature αH7. In feature αH6, the specific corresponding display data is display data that is used when the award determining means decides not to award the benefit to the player, among the display data corresponding to the result. The game machine described.

When a game hall is closed, the power to the gaming machine is usually cut off in a situation where the specific display means displays the display content corresponding to the fact that the award determining means has decided not to award the benefit to the player. . In this case, according to feature αH7, the setting value to be used when the supply of operating power is started and the setting value to be used when the supply of operating power is started. In any of the predetermined situations in which the setting is not made, the display content of the specific display means corresponds to the fact that the award determining means has decided not to award the benefit to the player. As a result, even if the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power has started, the displayed content is the display content that was displayed before the supply of operating power was stopped. This makes it possible for the player to recognize this, and it becomes possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not the setting value to be used has been set.

Feature αH8. There are multiple types of specific correspondence display data,
According to any one of features αH2 to αH7, the correspondence setting means sets the specific correspondence display data to be used from among the plurality of types of the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area. gaming machines.

According to feature αH8, it is possible to diversify the display contents of the specific correspondence display of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature αH9. When the specific display means performs the specific display when the supply of operating power is started, the specific display control means controls the specific display after the specific display data is set in the display storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of features αH2 to αH8, characterized in that the display of the means is started.

According to feature αH9, display contents are prevented from being displayed on the specific display means when the supply of operating power is stopped before the specific corresponding display is performed when the supply of operating power is started. becomes possible.

Feature αH10. The setting means sets the setting value to be used in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed,
The specific display control means starts the display of the specific display means after the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is executed when the supply of the operating power is started. Game machine.

According to feature αH10, regardless of whether the setting value to be used is set or the setting value to be used is not set, the process at the start of supply of operating power is performed. It becomes possible to start the specific correspondence display on the specific display means at a timing after the completion of the display.

Feature αH11. If the predetermined initialization conditions are met when the supply of operating power is started (no information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has occurred, and the setting update display flag and game stop flag are not set to "1") separate initialization means (56th to 56th) for initializing the predetermined storage area even if the setting value is not set by the setting means). a function of executing the first RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment No.
The separate initialization means initializes the predetermined storage area in a situation where the process at the time of starting supply of operating power is being executed,
The correspondence setting means configures the setting by the setting means when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when supply of operating power is started, and when supply of operating power is started. In any case where a value is set, the specific corresponding display data is set in the display storage area,
Feature αH9 or αH10 is characterized in that the specific display control unit starts displaying the specific display unit after the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is executed when the supply of operating power is started. The game machine described.

According to feature αH11, when the supply of operating power is started and a predetermined initialization condition is met, a predetermined storage area is initialized, so new settings for the setting values to be used are performed. Even in a situation where the predetermined storage area is not available, it is possible to start the game in a situation where the predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, whether the setting value to be used is set or the specified storage area is initialized, a specific display means will display a specific response when the supply of operating power is started. will be held. As a result, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, neither new setting of the setting value to be used nor initialization of the predetermined storage area will be performed. This makes it possible to make it impossible to distinguish between In addition, regardless of whether the setting value to be used is set or the predetermined storage area is initialized, the specific display means It becomes possible to start a specific correspondence display in .

Note that for the configuration of features αH1 to αH11, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αI group>
Feature αI1. Specific display means (special figure display section 37a, regular figure display section 38a),
Decide whether or not to grant a benefit to a player, and when granting a benefit to a player, benefit grant information (information of "1" set in a flag corresponding to the type of jackpot result) is stored in a predetermined manner. A provision determining means (a function for executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the area (clear target area 371 in the 57th to 60th embodiments);
A benefit granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) that grants a benefit (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the benefit granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area. )and,
When it is time to display the determination result, display data (display data selected in step S507 or step S509) corresponding to the determination result of the provision determining means is displayed in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, Display data setting means to be set in the third display data buffer 273 (a function of executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63 in the 57th embodiment, the main CPU 63 in the 58th to 60th embodiments) function of executing the process of step SC717);
By controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data corresponding to the result stored in the display storage area is displayed, the display corresponding to the determination result of the provision determination means is displayed by the specific display means. a specific display control means (a function for executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63);
Initializing means (57th to 57th to (a function of executing the second RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment No. 60);
Equipped with
The display data setting means sets specific corresponding display data to be used as display data corresponding to the result when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initializing means when supply of operating power is started. Correspondence setting means to be set in the display storage area (in the 57th embodiment, a function to execute the processing of step SC602 and step SC603 in the main CPU 63, and in the 58th embodiment, a function to execute the processing of steps SC802 to step SC805 in the main CPU 63) The function to be executed, in the 59th embodiment, the function to execute the processing of steps SC902 to SC905 in the main CPU 63, and in the 60th embodiment, the function to execute the processing in the main CPU 63 from steps SD102 to SD105, step SD109, step SD110, and step SD113 and a function of executing the process of step SD114).

According to feature αI1, the specific display means displays a display corresponding to the determination result as to whether or not to give a benefit to the player, so that the player pays attention to the specific display means. Furthermore, by initializing the predetermined storage area based on the start of supply of operating power, it is possible to start the game in a situation where the predetermined storage area has been initialized. In this case, when the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is started, display data corresponding to the result used to notify the determination result of the provision determination means is set in the display storage area. be done. As a result, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means is displayed when notifying the determination result of the provision determination means. It becomes the content. Therefore, even if the player checks the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to make it impossible to identify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized. Become.

Feature αI2. Setting means (57th to a function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the sixtieth embodiment,
The initializing means initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting unit. The gaming machine according to feature αI1.

According to feature αI2, a predetermined storage area is initialized when or when the setting value of the target of use is set when the supply of operating power is started. When the setting value is newly set, it becomes possible to start the game with the predetermined storage area initialized. In this case, if the predetermined storage area is initialized in conjunction with the new setting of the setting value to be used, the display data corresponding to the result used to notify the determination result of the provision determination means is displayed and stored. Set to area. As a result, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means is displayed when notifying the determination result of the provision determination means. It becomes the content. Therefore, even if the player checks the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from being able to identify whether or not the setting value to be used has been newly set. It becomes possible.

Feature αI3. If the predetermined initialization conditions are met when the supply of operating power is started (no information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has occurred, and the setting update display flag and game stop flag are not set to "1") (when a "RAM clear operation" is performed in the situation), a separate initialization means (a separate initialization means (a second (a function of executing the first RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the 57th to 60th embodiments),
The correspondence setting means sets the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area even when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine described in characteristic feature αI2.

According to feature αI3, if a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined storage area is initialized even if the setting value to be used is not set. Therefore, it is possible to start the game in a situation where the predetermined storage area has been initialized even in a situation where no new settings are made for the setting values to be used. In this case, regardless of whether a new setting is made for the setting value to be used or a predetermined storage area is initialized by satisfying a predetermined initialization condition, the allocation determining means Display data corresponding to the result used to notify the decision result is set in the display storage area. As a result, the display of the specific display means can be performed either when a new setting is made for the setting value to be used or when a predetermined storage area is initialized by satisfying the predetermined initialization condition. The content is the display content that is displayed when notifying the determination result of the grant determining means. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is difficult to determine whether new settings have been made for the target settings and whether the predetermined initialization conditions are met. This makes it possible to make it impossible to identify whether or not the user has done so.

Feature αI4. The specific corresponding display data is display data that is used when the award determining means decides not to award the benefit to the player, among the display data corresponding to the result. The gaming machine according to any one of αI3.

When a game hall is closed, the power to the gaming machine is usually cut off in a situation where the specific display means displays the display content corresponding to the fact that the award determining means has decided not to award the benefit to the player. . In this case, according to feature αI4, if the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means indicates that the award determination means does not award a benefit to the player. The display content corresponds to what has been determined. As a result, even if the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power has started, the displayed content is the display content that was displayed before the supply of operating power was stopped. This makes it possible for the player to recognize this, and it becomes possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized.

Feature αI5. There are multiple types of specific correspondence display data,
According to any one of features αI1 to αI4, the correspondence setting means sets the specific correspondence display data to be used from among a plurality of types of the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area. gaming machines.

According to feature αI5, it is possible to diversify the display contents of the specific correspondence display of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature αI6. When the specific display means performs the specific display when the supply of operating power is started, the specific display control means controls the specific display after the specific display data is set in the display storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of features αI1 to αI5, characterized in that the display of the means is started.

According to feature αI6, display contents are prevented from being displayed on the specific display means when the supply of operating power is stopped before the specific corresponding display is performed when the supply of operating power is started. becomes possible.

Feature αI7. When the supply of operating power is started, the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is executed, and the process of initializing the predetermined storage area by the initializing means is carried out at the time of starting the supply of operating power. It is a configuration included in the processing of
The specific display control means starts the display of the specific display means after the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is executed when the supply of the operating power is started. Game machine.

According to feature αI7, regardless of whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means or not, the specific display means is activated at a timing after the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed. It becomes possible to start displaying the .

Feature αI8. Setting means (57th to a function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the sixtieth embodiment,
The initializing means is configured to initialize the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting unit. and
The gaming machine according to feature αI7, wherein the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting means in a situation where the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is being executed.

According to feature αI8, regardless of whether or not a new setting is made for the setting value to be used, the specific display means is displayed at a timing after the process at the start of the supply of operating power is completed. It becomes possible to start the display.

Note that for the configuration of features αI1 to αI8, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αJ group>
Feature αJ1. Specific display means (special figure display section 37a, regular figure display section 38a),
Display data setting means for setting display data in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, third display data buffer 273) (in the case of the 58th to 60th embodiments, executes the process of step SC717 in the main CPU 63) (in the case of the 61st embodiment, a function to execute the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63),
specific display control means (a function of executing the processes of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed; ,
Initialization means (58th to 58th to 61st embodiments) that initializes a predetermined storage area (clear target area 371 in the 58th to 61st embodiments) including the display storage area based on the start of supply of operating power. (a function of executing the second RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment of No. 61);
Correspondence setting means (fifty-eighth) for setting the display content of the specific display means to a specific correspondence display when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means when supply of operating power is started. In the embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps SC802 to SC805, in the 59th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps SC902 to SC905, and in the 60th embodiment, the main CPU 63 (in the 61st embodiment, a function to execute the processes in steps SD202 to SD217 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that there are a plurality of types of specific correspondence displays.

According to feature αJ1, the predetermined storage area is initialized based on the start of the supply of operating power, so that the game can be started in a situation where the predetermined storage area is initialized. It becomes possible. In this case, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started becomes the specific corresponding display. There are multiple types of specific correspondence displays. This allows the display contents of the specific display means to be diversified when a predetermined storage area is initialized. Therefore, even if the display contents of the specific display means are checked when the supply of operating power is started, it becomes difficult to specify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized.

Feature αJ2. The correspondence setting means provides a specific correspondence display for causing the specific display means to display the specific correspondence when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means when supply of operating power is started. data is set in the display storage area,
The gaming machine according to feature αJ1, wherein a plurality of types of specific correspondence display data exist.

According to feature αJ2, when the supply of operating power is started and a predetermined storage area is initialized, any one of the plurality of types of specific corresponding display data is stored in the display storage area. By setting, a specific correspondence display is performed by the specific display means. As a result, it is possible to cause the specific display means to display a specific response by simply selecting one type of specific response display data from among multiple predetermined types of specific response display data and setting it in the display storage area. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for causing the specific display means to display one type of specific correspondence display among the plurality of types of specific correspondence displays.

Feature αJ3. It is determined whether or not to grant a benefit to a player, and when granting a benefit to a player, benefit grant information (information of "1" set in a flag corresponding to the type of jackpot result) is set in the predetermined manner. A provision determining means (a function for executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the storage area;
A benefit granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) that grants a benefit (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the benefit granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area. )and,
Equipped with
The display data setting means stores display data corresponding to the result (the display data selected in step S507 or step S509) corresponding to the determination result of the provision determination means in the display storage area when it is time to display the determination result. Set to
The specific display control means responds to the determination result of the provision determination means by controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data corresponding to the result stored in the display storage area is displayed. display is performed on the specific display means,
The gaming machine according to feature αJ2, wherein the specific correspondence display data is display data used as display data corresponding to the result.

According to feature αJ3, the specific display means displays a display corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to give a benefit to the player, so that the player pays attention to the specific display means. In this case, when the supply of operating power is started using the display data corresponding to the result used to notify the determination result of the provision determining means, the specific display means performs a specific correspondence display. As a result, while suppressing the increase in the display data capacity, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to ensure that the predetermined storage area is not initialized. It becomes possible to make it difficult to specify whether or not the

Feature αJ4. In feature αJ3, the specific corresponding display data is display data that is used when the award determining means decides not to award the benefit to the player, among the display data corresponding to the result. The game machine described.

When a game hall is closed, the power to the gaming machine is usually cut off in a situation where the specific display means displays the display content corresponding to the fact that the award determining means has decided not to award the benefit to the player. . In this case, according to feature αJ4, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means does not award a benefit to the player in the award determining means. The display content corresponds to the determination. As a result, even if the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power has started, the displayed content is the display content that was displayed before the supply of operating power was stopped. This makes it possible for the player to recognize this, and it becomes possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not a predetermined storage area has been initialized.

Feature αJ5. The specific correspondence display data includes, among the display data corresponding to the results, display data that is used when the award determining means decides not to award the benefit to the player, and display data that is used when the award determining means decides not to award the benefit to the player. The gaming machine according to feature αJ3, characterized in that the gaming machine includes both display data to be used when it is decided to grant the benefit.

According to feature αJ5, when the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is started, and when the award determining means determines not to award a benefit to the player, the display and award determining means Any of the displays in the case where it is determined that a benefit is to be given to the player is performed on the specific display means as a specific corresponding display. As a result, even if the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power has started, the displayed content is the display content that was displayed before the supply of operating power was stopped. This makes it possible for the player to recognize this, and it becomes possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not a predetermined storage area has been initialized.

Feature αJ6. Setting means (58th to a function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the sixty-first embodiment,
The initializing means initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features αJ1 to αJ5.

According to feature αJ6, a predetermined storage area is initialized when or when the setting value of the target of use is set when the supply of operating power is started. When the setting value is newly set, it becomes possible to start the game with the predetermined storage area initialized. In this case, if the predetermined storage area is initialized in conjunction with the new setting of the setting value to be used, one of the multiple types of specific correspondence displays will be displayed in the specific display means. It will be done. As a result, the display contents of the specific display means will be diversified when new settings are made for the setting values to be used, and the player will be able to display the Even if the contents are confirmed, it is possible to make it impossible to determine whether new settings have been made for the setting values to be used.

Feature αJ7. If the predetermined initialization conditions are met when the supply of operating power is started (no information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has occurred, and the setting update display flag and game stop flag are not set to "1") separate initialization means (58th to 58th) for initializing the predetermined storage area even when the setting value is not set by the setting means) a function of executing the first RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment No.
The correspondence setting means configures the use by the setting means when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when supply of operating power is started, and when supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to feature αJ6, characterized in that the display content of the specific display means is made to be a specific correspondence display in any case where a target setting value is set.

According to feature αJ7, if a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined storage area is initialized even if a set value is not set. Even in a situation where new settings are not made, it is possible to start a game in a situation where a predetermined storage area has been initialized. In this case, whether a new set value is set or a predetermined initialization condition is met and a predetermined storage area is initialized, the specific display means displays a specific correspondence display. It will be done. As a result, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power has started, it is possible to check whether new settings have been made and whether the predetermined initialization conditions have been met. It becomes possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not the

Feature αJ8. The correspondence setting means sets the display content of the specific display means to the specific correspondence display even if the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the initialization means when supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features αJ1 to αJ7.

According to feature αJ8, when the supply of operating power is started, the specific correspondence display is performed by the specific display means both when the predetermined storage area is initialized and when it is not initialized. As a result, even if the player checks the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is impossible to determine whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature αJ9. The correspondence setting means determines whether or not the operating power is supplied in a predetermined regulation situation (during the execution of a game round, during the opening/closing execution mode, during the execution of the fluctuation display round on the normal figure display section 38a, during the execution of the normal power open state). specific correspondence display data for causing the specific correspondence display to be performed if the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the initialization means when the supply of operating power is started after the stoppage; The gaming machine according to feature αJ8, wherein: is not set in the display storage area.

According to feature αJ9, if the supply of operating power is stopped in a predetermined regulatory situation and the supply of operating power is subsequently started and the predetermined storage area is not initialized, the display storage area Since the specific corresponding display data is not set in the display storage area, the display data when the supply of operating power is stopped is stored and held as is in the display storage area. As a result, if the supply of operating power is stopped under a specified regulatory situation and the supply of operating power is subsequently started and the specified storage area is not initialized, the supply of operating power will be stopped. It becomes possible to start displaying the specific display means from the display content of the specific display means when the display is stopped.

Feature αJ10. The specific display control means controls the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the determination result of the provision determination means is performed after the variable display of the symbols is started;
The correspondence setting means performs the initialization in the case where the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a variable display of a pattern is being displayed on the specific display means, and when the supply of operating power is subsequently started. The gaming machine according to feature αJ8 or αJ9, characterized in that when the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the means, specific correspondence display data for causing the specific correspondence display to be performed is not set in the display storage area. .

According to feature αJ10, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a variable display of a picture is being displayed on the specific display means, and when the supply of operating power is subsequently started, the predetermined storage area is If the display storage area is not initialized, the specific correspondence display data is not set in the display storage area, and therefore the display data that would be displayed when the supply of operating power is stopped is stored and held as is in the display storage area. As a result, a predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a fluctuating display of a picture is being performed on the specific display means, and when the supply of operating power is subsequently started. If not, it becomes possible to restart the variable display of the picture on the specific display means.

Feature αJ11. When the benefit granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area, the benefit granting means grants the benefit after a display corresponding to the granting of the benefit is displayed on the specific display means. It is a thing,
The correspondence setting means is configured to cause the initialization means to set the above-mentioned information by the initialization means in the case where the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means and the supply of operating power is subsequently started. The game according to any one of features αJ8 to αJ10, characterized in that when the predetermined storage area is not initialized, specific correspondence display data for causing the specific correspondence display to be performed is not set in the display storage area. Machine.

According to feature αJ11, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a privilege is granted, and when the supply of operating power is subsequently started, the predetermined storage area is not initialized. Since the specific correspondence display data is not set in the display storage area, the display data in the case where the supply of operating power is stopped is stored and held as is in the display storage area. As a result, if the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a benefit is granted, and the specified storage area is not initialized when the supply of operating power is subsequently started, the benefit It becomes possible to start the display of the specific display means from the display content corresponding to the situation in which .

Feature αJ12. When the specific display means performs the specific response display when the supply of operating power is started, the specific display control means starts displaying the specific display means in a state where the specific response display is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features αJ1 to αJ11.

According to feature αJ12, display contents are prevented from being displayed on the specific display means when the supply of operating power is stopped before the specific corresponding display is performed when the supply of operating power is started. becomes possible.

Feature αJ13. When the supply of operating power is started, the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is executed, and the process of initializing the predetermined storage area by the initializing means is carried out at the time of starting the supply of operating power. It is a configuration included in the processing of
The specific display control means starts the display of the specific display means after the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is executed when the supply of the operating power is started. Game machine.

According to feature αJ13, regardless of whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means or not, the specific display means is activated at a timing after the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed. It becomes possible to start displaying the .

Feature αJ14. Setting means (58th to a function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the sixty-first embodiment,
The initializing means is configured to initialize the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting unit. and
The gaming machine according to feature αJ13, wherein the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting means in a situation where the process at the time of starting supply of operating power is being executed.

According to feature αJ14, regardless of whether or not a new setting is made for the setting value to be used, the specific display means is displayed at a timing after the process at the start of supply of operating power is completed. It becomes possible to start the display.

Note that for the configuration of features αJ1 to αJ14, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αK group>
Feature αK1. Specific display means (special figure display section 37a, regular figure display section 38a),
Decide whether or not to grant a benefit to a player, and when granting a benefit to a player, benefit grant information (information of "1" set in a flag corresponding to the type of jackpot result) is stored in a predetermined manner. A provision determining means (a function of executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the area (clear target area 371 in the 61st embodiment);
A benefit granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) that grants a benefit (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the benefit granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area. )and,
When it is time to display the determination result, display data (display data selected in step S507 or step S509) corresponding to the determination result of the provision determining means is displayed in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, a display data setting unit (a function for executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63) to set the display data in the third display data buffer 273;
By controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data corresponding to the result stored in the display storage area is displayed, the display corresponding to the determination result of the provision determination means is displayed by the specific display means. a specific display control means (a function for executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63);
Initialization means (main in the 61st embodiment) that initializes a predetermined storage area (clear target area 371 in the 61st embodiment) including the display storage area based on the start of supply of operating power a function of executing the second RAM clearing process of the side CPU 63);
Correspondence setting means (main CPU 63 (a function to execute the processing of steps SD202 to SD217);
Equipped with
There are multiple types of specific correspondence displays,
A gaming machine characterized in that the plurality of types of specific corresponding displays include display contents that are not selected as displays corresponding to the determination result of the award determining means.

According to feature αK1, the predetermined storage area is initialized based on the start of supply of operating power, so that the game can be started in a situation where the predetermined storage area is initialized. It becomes possible. In this case, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started becomes the specific corresponding display. There are a plurality of types of specific correspondence displays, and the plurality of types of specific correspondence displays include display contents that are not selected as a display corresponding to the determination result of the provision determining means. This allows the display contents of the specific display means to be diversified when a predetermined storage area is initialized. Therefore, even if the display contents of the specific display means are checked when the supply of operating power is started, it becomes difficult to specify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized.

Feature αK2. The plurality of types of specific corresponding displays include display contents that can be selected as a display corresponding to the determination result of the grant determining means and display contents that are not selected as a display corresponding to the determination result of the grant determining means. The gaming machine according to feature αK1.

According to feature αK2, since the plurality of types of specific correspondence displays include both display contents that can be selected as a display corresponding to the determination result of the provision determination means and display contents that cannot be selected, the predetermined storage area is initially It becomes possible to diversify the display contents of the specific display means when

Feature αK3. The specific display means has a plurality of light emitting parts,
The correspondence setting means executes a lottery process (step SD204, step SD212) to determine whether each of the plurality of light emitting units is to be turned on individually, and determines the result of the lottery process for each of the plurality of light emitting units. The gaming machine according to feature αK1 or αK2, wherein the specific correspondence display is performed by setting display data of a lighting pattern corresponding to the above in the display storage area.

According to feature αK3, a lottery process is executed to determine whether each of the plurality of light emitting parts in the specific display means should be turned on, and the display contents of the lighting pattern corresponding to the results of the lottery process are stored in a predetermined storage area. is displayed on the specific display means as a specific correspondence display when the is initialized. This makes it possible to diversify the display content of the specific display means when a predetermined storage area is initialized, as well as diversify the display content of the specific display means when a predetermined storage area is initialized. It becomes possible to make it regular.

Feature αK4. Setting means (sixty-first) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage in a setting possible situation that has occurred based on the start of supply of operating power. (a function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment),
The initializing means initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features αK1 to αK3.

According to feature αK4, a predetermined storage area is initialized when the setting value of the target of use is set or set when the supply of operating power is started. When the setting value is newly set, it becomes possible to start the game with the predetermined storage area initialized. In this case, if the predetermined storage area is initialized in conjunction with the new setting of the setting value to be used, one of the multiple types of specific correspondence displays will be displayed in the specific display means. It will be done. As a result, the display contents of the specific display means will be diversified when new settings are made for the setting values to be used, and the player will be able to display the Even if the contents are confirmed, it is possible to make it impossible to determine whether new settings have been made for the setting values to be used.

Feature αK5. If the predetermined initialization conditions are met when the supply of operating power is started (no information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has occurred, and the setting update display flag and game stop flag are not set to "1") (when a "RAM clear operation" is performed in the situation), a separate initialization means (a separate initialization means (a second a function of executing the first RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment No.
The correspondence setting means configures the use by the setting means when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when supply of operating power is started, and when supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to feature αK4, characterized in that the display content of the specific display means is made to be a specific correspondence display in any case where a target setting value is set.

According to feature αK5, if a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined storage area is initialized even if a set value is not set. Even in a situation where new settings are not made, it is possible to start a game in a situation where a predetermined storage area has been initialized. In this case, whether a new set value is set or a predetermined initialization condition is met and a predetermined storage area is initialized, the specific display means displays a specific correspondence display. It will be done. As a result, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power has started, it is possible to check whether new settings have been made and whether the predetermined initialization conditions have been met. It becomes possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not the

Feature αK6. When the specific display means performs the specific response display when the supply of operating power is started, the specific display control means starts displaying the specific display means in a state where the specific response display is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features αK1 to αK5.

According to feature αK6, display contents are prevented from being displayed on the specific display means when the supply of operating power is stopped before the specific corresponding display is performed when the supply of operating power is started. becomes possible.

Feature αK7. When the supply of operating power is started, the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is executed, and the process of initializing the predetermined storage area by the initializing means is carried out at the time of starting the supply of operating power. It is a configuration included in the processing of
The specific display control means starts the display of the specific display means after the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is executed when the supply of the operating power is started. Game machine.

According to feature αK7, regardless of whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means or not, the specific display means is activated at the timing after the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed. It becomes possible to start displaying the .

Feature αK8. A setting means (56th item) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level in a setting possible situation that has occurred based on the start of the supply of operating power. (a function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment),
The initializing means is configured to initialize the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting unit. and
The gaming machine according to feature αK7, wherein the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting means in a situation where the process at the time of starting supply of operating power is being executed.

According to feature αK8, regardless of whether or not a new setting is made for the setting value to be used, the specific display means is displayed at a timing after the process at the start of the supply of operating power is completed. It becomes possible to start the display.

Note that for the configuration of features αK1 to αK8, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention relating to the above feature αF group, the above feature αG group, the above feature αH group, the above feature αI group, the above feature αJ group, and the above feature αK group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the one exemplified above, it is necessary to make the operation at the time of starting the supply of operating power suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic αL group>
Feature αL1. Specific display means (special figure display section 37a, regular figure display section 38a),
A specific display control means (a function for executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63) that controls the display of the specific display means;
Setting means (62nd to A function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the 63rd embodiment);
Equipped with
The specific display control means determines that the setting value to be used has been set by the setting means, and that the setting value or operation is higher than or equal to the advantage of the setting value before the supply of operating power is stopped. Based on the fact that a setting value that is more advantageous than the setting value before the power supply is stopped is set by the setting means as the setting value to be used, and that a certain suggestion target situation has occurred. , a mode of determining the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started corresponding to the suggestion target situation (a mode of referring to the second display distribution table 392 for special symbols, a mode of referring to the second display distribution table 392 for special symbols, a mode of determining the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, 2 display distribution table 394)) (in the 62nd embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SD402 to Step SD411 in the main CPU 63; in the 63rd embodiment, the mode determining means in the main CPU 63) A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a function of executing the process of step SD502.

According to feature αL1, by checking the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it can be determined that a new setting of the setting value to be used has been made, or a setting to be used It is possible to predict that the advantage of a value has become greater than or equal to the advantage of a previously set value. This makes it possible for the player to make predictions regarding the set value using the display content of the specific display means, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature αL2. The aspect determining means determines that the set value is equal to or higher than the advantage of the set value before the supply of operating power is stopped, or that the set value is more advantageous than the set value before the supply of operating power is stopped. determining the display content of the specific display means when supply of operating power is started based on the setting value set by the setting means as the setting value to be used, in a determination manner corresponding to the suggestion target situation; In the case where the supply of operating power is started based on the setting value being set by the setting means as the setting value to be used, which is lower than the advantage of the setting value before the supply of power is stopped. A mode of determining the display content of the specific display means corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation (a mode of referring to the first display distribution table 391 for special figures, a mode of referring to the first display distribution table 393 for regular figures) The gaming machine according to feature αL1, wherein the gaming machine is determined by:

According to feature αL2, when the advantage of the setting value to be used becomes higher than the advantage of the previous setting value or higher than the advantage of the previous setting value, the decision mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation is determined. The display content of the specific display means is determined in the step 1, and if the advantage of the set value to be used becomes lower than the previous set value, the display content of the specific display means is determined in a decision mode corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation. Display contents are determined. This makes it easier to predict whether the advantage of the setting value to be used has become greater than or equal to the advantage of the previous setting value or higher than the advantage of the previous setting value.

Feature αL3. The mode determining means determines the display content of the specific display means as the non-suggestion target when supply of operating power is started based on the setting value not being set by the setting means to be used. The gaming machine according to feature αL2, characterized in that a decision is made in a decision manner that corresponds to the situation.

According to feature αL3, when the supply of operating power is started, the supply of operating power is started in the determination mode corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation even if no new setting of the setting value to be used is performed. Since the display content of the specific display means is determined in the case where the display content of the specific display means is determined in the determination mode corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation, the new set value for use in that situation is determined. It is possible to make it impossible to specify whether the setting is not performed or whether the setting value to be used is less advantageous than before.

Feature αL4. Any one of the features αL1 to αL3, characterized in that, in the case of the suggestion target situation, the mode determining means determines the display content of the specific display means by lottery according to a lottery mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature αL4, it is possible to diversify the display contents of the specific display means in the suggestion target situation. This makes it possible to make it impossible to clearly identify whether the situation is a suggestion target situation even if the specific display means is checked.

Feature αL5. The mode determining means is characterized in that, in the case of a non-suggestion target situation that is not the suggestion target situation, the display content of the specific display means is determined by lottery in a lottery mode corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation. The gaming machine according to feature αL4.

According to feature αL5, it is possible to diversify the display contents of the specific display means in non-suggestion target situations. This makes it possible to make it impossible to clearly identify whether or not the situation is a non-suggestion target situation even if the specific display means is checked.

Feature αL6. The display contents that can be selected by lottery in a lottery mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation and the display contents of the specific display means selected by a lottery mode in a lottery mode corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation. There are common display contents (first to third initial displays for special figures, first to third initial displays for regular figures) among the possible display contents, and the selection probability of the common display contents is The gaming machine according to feature αL5, wherein the lottery mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation is different from the lottery mode corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation.

According to feature αL6, the common display content is displayed using the specific display means regardless of whether the situation is a suggestion target situation or a non-suggestion target situation, so it is clear whether the situation is a suggestion target situation or a non-suggestion target situation. This makes it possible to make it impossible for the person to be identified. On the other hand, the selection probability of the common display content is different depending on whether the situation is a suggestion target or a non-suggestion target situation. It becomes possible to predict whether there will be any.

Feature αL7. comprising display data setting means (a function for executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63) for setting display data in the display storage area,
The specific display control means controls the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is displayed,
Initialization for initializing a predetermined storage area including the display storage area when the setting value of the usage target is set by the setting means or after the setting value of the usage target is set by the setting unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features αL1 to αL6, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with means (a function of executing the second RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the sixty-second to sixty-third embodiments).

According to feature αL7, a predetermined storage area is initialized when or when the setting value of the target of use is set when the supply of operating power is started. When the setting value is newly set, it becomes possible to start the game with the predetermined storage area initialized. In this case, by having the configuration of feature αL1 above, by utilizing the situation in which the display storage area is initialized with the initialization of a predetermined storage area, the suggested target situation is determined by the display content of the specific display means. It becomes possible to predict whether the

Feature αL8. If the predetermined initialization conditions are met when the supply of operating power is started (no information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has occurred, and the setting update display flag and game stop flag are not set to "1") (when a "RAM clear operation" is performed in the situation), another initialization means for initializing the predetermined storage area (a function of executing the first RAM clear process of the main CPU 63 in the 62nd to 63rd embodiments) Equipped with
The mode determining means determines display contents of the specific display means corresponding to a non-suggestion target situation when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initializing means and when supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to feature αL7, wherein the gaming machine is determined based on the aspect.

According to feature αL8, when the supply of operating power is started and a predetermined initialization condition is met, the predetermined storage area is initialized, so that the game cannot be played in a situation where the predetermined storage area has been initialized. It becomes possible to start. In this case, if the predetermined storage area is initialized by a separate initialization means, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started is determined in a manner corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation. Therefore, it becomes easier to predict whether the situation is a suggestion target situation or not.

Feature αL9. Decide whether or not to grant a benefit to a player, and when granting a benefit to a player, benefit grant information (information of "1" set in a flag corresponding to the type of jackpot result) is stored in a predetermined manner. A provision determining means (a function for executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the area;
A benefit granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) that grants a benefit (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the benefit granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area. )and,
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features αL1 to αL8, wherein the specific display control unit causes the specific display unit to display a display corresponding to the determination result of the grant determining unit.

According to feature αL9, the specific display means displays a display corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to give a benefit to the player, so that the player pays attention to the specific display means. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature αL1, it becomes possible to achieve the excellent effects described above using the specific display means.

Feature αL10. The display content of the specific display means determined in the decision mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation is display content that would not be displayed if the display corresponding to the determination result of the provision determination means is performed on the specific display means. The gaming machine according to feature αL9.

According to the feature αL10, it is possible to distinguish the display content determined in the determination mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation from the display content corresponding to the determination result of the provision determination means.

Feature αL11. The specific display control means controls the display content determined by the mode determining means when the specific display means displays the display content determined by the mode determining means when supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features αL1 to αL10, characterized in that the display on the specific display means is started in a state where the display is performed.

According to feature αL11, when the supply of operating power is stopped before the display according to the display content determined by the mode determining means is displayed when the supply of operating power is started, the display content is displayed by the specific display means. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Note that for the configuration of features αL1 to αL11, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above characteristic αL group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic αM group>
Feature αM1. a setting means (a function for executing the process of step SB311 in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
Corresponding operation control means that sets a state of a predetermined area that is visible from the front of the gaming machine as a corresponding operation state in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process (setting value update process, setting confirmation process) regarding the set value is being executed. (In the 64th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SE304, step SE305, step SE308, and step SE309 in the main CPU 63, and in the 65th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SE604 and step SE607 in the main CPU 63. In the 66th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps SE704, SE707, SE802, and SE816, and in the 67th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps SE904 and SE907. , in the 68th embodiment, the function of controlling the display of the 15R display section 481, 6R display section 483, and small hit display section 484 in the main CPU 63),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature αM1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process regarding the set value is being executed, the state of the predetermined area that is visible from the front of the gaming machine becomes the corresponding operation state. Thereby, the administrator of the game hall can easily grasp whether or not a predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

Feature αM2. A predetermined operation means provided in the predetermined area that is visible from the front of the gaming machine (in the 65th embodiment, a normal figure display section 423a, a first special figure display section 425, a second special figure display section 426, and a special display section) 429, the 67th embodiment includes a first special figure display section 425 and a second special figure display section 426),
The corresponding operation control means controls the operation of the predetermined area by setting the operation state of the predetermined operation means to an operation state that does not occur when a game is being executed in a situation where the predetermined setting-related process is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature αM1, characterized in that the state is the corresponding operation state.

According to feature αM2, in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, the operating state of the predetermined operating means becomes an operating state that does not occur when a game is being executed. This makes it possible to issue a notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed by using the predetermined operation means that operates when a game is being played.

Feature αM3. A plurality of predetermined operation means (in the 64th embodiment, the first special figure display section 425, the second special figure display section 426, and the special display section 429, in the 65th embodiment Here, the general figure display section 423a, the ordinary figure reservation display section 423b, the first special figure display section 425, the second special figure display section 426, the first special figure reservation display section 427, the second special figure reservation display section 428, and the special display section part 429, in the 66th embodiment, the special prize winning device 416, the first special figure display part 425, and the second special figure display part 426, in the 68th embodiment, the 15R display part 481, the 6R display part 483, and the small winning display part 484),
The gaming machine according to feature αM1 or αM2, wherein the corresponding operation control means sets a combination of the operation states of the plurality of predetermined operation means as the corresponding operation state.

According to feature αM3, a notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed is performed using a combination of the operating states of a plurality of predetermined operating means. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the user to illegally issue a notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

Feature αM4. The gaming machine according to feature αM3, wherein the corresponding operating state is a combination of operating states of the plurality of predetermined operating means that does not occur when a game is being executed.

According to feature αM4, a combination of operating states of a plurality of predetermined operating means is set to a combination that does not occur when a game is being executed, thereby providing notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed. is executed. This makes it possible to issue a notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed by using a plurality of predetermined operation means that operate when a game is being played.

Feature αM5. Each individual operating state in the corresponding operating state of the plurality of predetermined operating means is an operating state that can occur when a game is being executed, while these individual operating states occur simultaneously when a game is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature αM4, characterized in that the gaming machine is in an operating state in which no operation is performed.

According to feature αM5, each individual operation state in the corresponding operation states of the plurality of predetermined operation means is an operation state that can occur when a game is being executed, so that it does not occur when a game is being executed. Using the obtained operating state, it is possible to issue a notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

Feature αM6. The gaming machine according to any one of features αM3 to αM5, wherein the first predetermined action means among the plurality of predetermined action means is a display means, and the second predetermined action means is a movable means.

According to feature αM6, a combination of the individual operating states of the display means and the movable means is used to notify that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, so that the predetermined setting-related process is executed. This makes it easier to understand what the situation is.

Feature αM7. The corresponding operation control means includes:
In a situation where a first setting-related process is being executed as the predetermined setting-related process, a first corresponding operation control means sets a combination of the operation states of the plurality of predetermined operation means as the first corresponding operation state as the corresponding operation state. (In the 64th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SE304 and step SE305 in the main CPU 63, in the 65th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SE604 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the processing of steps SE704, step SE802, and step SE816 in the CPU 63; a function of display controlling the 15R display section 481 and the small winning display section 484 in the main CPU 63 in the 68th embodiment);
In a situation where a second setting-related process is being executed as the predetermined setting-related process, a second corresponding operation control means sets a combination of the operation states of the plurality of predetermined operation means as the corresponding operation state to a second corresponding operation state. (In the 64th embodiment, the function of executing the processing in step SE308 and step SE309 in the main CPU 63, in the 65th embodiment, the function of executing the processing in step SE607 in the main CPU 63, in the 66th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SE707, step SE802, and step SE816 in the CPU 63; a function of display controlling the 15R display section 481 and the 6R display section 483 in the main CPU 63 in the 68th embodiment);
The gaming machine according to any one of features αM3 to αM6.

According to feature αM7, there is a notification that the first setting-related process is being executed using a combination of the operating states of a plurality of predetermined operating means, and a situation is that the second setting-related process is being executed. It becomes possible to carry out each notification.

Feature αM8. The first setting-related process is a process that enables the setting means to set the setting value to be used,
The gaming machine according to feature αM7, wherein the second setting-related process is a process for notifying the current setting value.

According to feature αM8, it is possible to notify that a process is being executed that allows setting of a setting value to be used by using a combination of the operating states of a plurality of predetermined operating means, and to be used. It becomes possible to perform notifications indicating that a process is being executed to notify setting values.

Note that for the configuration of features αM1 to αM8, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αN group>
Feature αN1. a first period generating means (a function of executing the processing of step SD815 and step SD816 in the main CPU 63) that generates a first period (game round) in a situation where a game is being executed;
A first predetermined operation means (first special figure display unit 425, second special figure display unit 426) that controls the first predetermined operation means (first special figure display unit 425, second special figure display unit 426) so as to be in a state corresponding to the first period (a state in which a variable display of symbols is performed) in the first period. 1 predetermined operation control means (a function for executing the process of step SD706 in the main CPU 63);
a second period generating means (a function of executing the processing of step SD904 and step SE116 in the main CPU 63) that generates a second period (opening/closing execution mode) in a situation where a game is being executed;
A second predetermined operation control means (processing from step SD710 to step SD712 in the main CPU 63) that controls the second predetermined operation means (special electric prize winning device 416) so as to be in a second period compatible state (open state) in the second period. ) and
a setting means (a function for executing the process of step SB311 in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
In a situation where a predetermined setting-related process (setting value update process, setting confirmation process) regarding the set value is being executed, the first predetermined operating means is in the state corresponding to the first period, and the second predetermined operating means is in the state corresponding to the first period. Corresponding operation control means (a function of executing the processes of step SE704, step SE707, step SE802 and step SE816 in the main side CPU 63) for causing the second period compatible state to be achieved;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature αN1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, in a situation where a game is being executed, a first period may occur in which the first predetermined operating means is in a state corresponding to the first period, and a second period in which the second predetermined operating means is in a state corresponding to the second period may occur. In a configuration that may occur, in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process regarding a set value is being executed, the first predetermined operating means becomes in a state corresponding to the first period, and the second predetermined operating means becomes in a state corresponding to the second period. As a result, notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed can be executed by using the first predetermined operation means and the second predetermined operation means that operate when a game is being played. It becomes possible.

Further, it is possible to perform notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed by using the first period compatible state and the second period compatible state that may occur when a game is being executed. It becomes possible. Furthermore, when attempting to fraudulently issue a notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, it is necessary to perform fraud on both the first predetermined operating means and the second predetermined operating means. There is. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the user to fraudulently issue a notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

Feature αN2. The gaming machine according to feature αN1, wherein the second period generating means generates the second period after the first period.

According to feature αN2, in a situation where a game is being played, the second period occurs after the first period, so the first predetermined operating means is in a state corresponding to the first period, and the second predetermined operating means is in a state corresponding to the second period. When the corresponding state is reached, it becomes possible to give the manager of the game hall the recognition that the situation is a special situation different from the situation in which a game is being played. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to clearly recognize that a predetermined setting-related process regarding set values is being executed.

Feature αN3. The gaming machine according to feature αN1 or αN2, wherein one of the first predetermined operation means and the second predetermined operation means is a display means and the other is a movable means.

According to feature αN3, a notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed is performed based on a combination of the period-corresponding states of the display means and the movable means, so that the predetermined setting-related process is executed. This makes it easier to understand what the situation is.

Feature αN4. A means for executing a period lottery for determining whether or not to cause the second period after the first period (a function of executing the process of step SD803 in the main CPU 63);
The first predetermined operation control means causes the first predetermined operation means to be notified of the result of the period lottery after the first predetermined operation means is in a state corresponding to the first period in the first period;
The second predetermined operation control means controls the second predetermined operation control means such that when the result of the period lottery is a result that causes the second period, the state corresponds to the second period after the first period ends. 2. The gaming machine according to any one of features αN1 to αN3, characterized in that the predetermined operation means is controlled.

According to feature αN4, the first predetermined operation means for notifying the result of the period lottery and the second predetermined operation means that becomes a state compatible with the second period when the result of the period lottery is a winning result It becomes possible to issue a notification indicating that a setting-related process is being executed.

Feature αN5. The first predetermined operation means is a pattern display device (first special pattern display section 425, second special pattern display section 426) that variably displays the pattern,
The second predetermined operation means is a variable ball entrance means (special electric prize winning device 416) provided to be switchable between an open state and a closed state,
The first predetermined operation control means brings the picture display means into a state corresponding to the first period by causing the picture to be displayed in a variable manner during the first period;
The gaming machine according to feature αN4, wherein the second predetermined operation control means brings the variable ball entry means into a state compatible with the second period by bringing the variable ball entry means into the open state during the second period. .

According to feature αN5, in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, and in a situation where a variable display of a pattern is being executed on the pattern display device, the variable ball entrance device is in an open state. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to clearly recognize that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

Feature αN6. The predetermined setting-related process is a process that enables the setting means to set the setting value to be used, or a process that allows the current setting value to be notified. The gaming machine according to any one of features αN1 to αN5.

According to feature αN6, in order to notify the situation in which a process that enables setting of the setting value to be used is being executed or the current setting value while producing the excellent effects as already explained. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to recognize that the process is being executed.

Note that for the configuration of features αN1 to αN6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αO group>
Feature αO1. Predetermined display means (first special figure display section 425, second special figure display section 426) that displays a predetermined display in a situation where a game is being executed;
a setting means (a function for executing the process of step SB311 in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
In a situation where a predetermined setting-related process (setting value update process, setting confirmation process) regarding the setting value is being executed, the predetermined display means is used to notify that the predetermined setting-related process is being executed. Execution notification control means (in the 64th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SE304 and step SE308 in the main CPU 63, and in the 65th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SE604 and step SE607 in the main CPU 63) A function to execute the process, a function to execute the process of step SE704 and step SE707 in the main CPU 63 in the 66th embodiment, a function to execute the process of step SE904 and step SE907 in the main CPU 63 in the 67th embodiment, In the 68th embodiment, a function of controlling the display of the 15R display section 481 in the main CPU 63);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature αO1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, in a configuration equipped with a predetermined display means that displays a predetermined display in a situation where a game is being executed, the predetermined display means is used in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process regarding a setting value is being executed. A notification that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed is executed. This makes it possible for the game hall administrator to recognize that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, and also allows this notification to be made using a predetermined display means. .

Feature αO2. The execution notification control means causes the predetermined display means to display a specific display that does not occur when a game is being executed in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process regarding the set value is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature αO1.

According to feature αO2, in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, a specific display that does not occur in a situation where a game is being executed is performed on the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to clearly understand from the display content of the predetermined display means that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

Feature αO3. A specific display means (special display section 429 in the 64th and 65th embodiments, 6R display section 483 and small win display section 484 in the 68th embodiment) that displays a specific display in the situation where the game is being executed. Prepare,
In a situation where a predetermined setting-related process regarding the set value is being executed, the execution notification control means is configured to notify the predetermined display unit and the specific display unit that the predetermined setting-related process is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature αO1 or αO2, characterized in that the game is played at

According to feature αO3, when an attempt is made to fraudulently issue a notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, fraud must be performed on both the predetermined display means and the specific display means. It is necessary to apply Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the user to fraudulently issue a notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

Feature αO4. The gaming machine according to feature αO3, wherein the predetermined display means and the specific display means are concentrated in a predetermined range (special figure unit 422) that is visible from the front of the gaming machine.

According to feature αO4, in a configuration in which a combination of display content of a predetermined display means and display content of a specific display means is used to notify that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, It becomes possible to easily confirm the displayed contents.

Feature αO5. The execution notification control means causes the predetermined display means to display a predetermined correspondence, and the specific display means to display a specific correspondence in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process regarding the set value is being executed. It is possible to
The predetermined corresponding display on the predetermined display means is a display content that may occur in a situation where a game is being executed;
The specific correspondence display on the specific display means is a display content that may occur in a situation where a game is being executed;
The gaming machine according to feature αO3 or αO4, wherein the predetermined correspondence display on the predetermined display means and the specific correspondence display on the specific display means do not occur simultaneously in a situation where a game is being executed.

According to feature αO5, a situation where a predetermined setting-related process is executed using a predetermined correspondence display on a predetermined display means and a specific correspondence display on a specific display means that may occur when a game is being executed. It becomes possible to issue a notification indicating that this is the case.

Feature αO6. Means for executing a transition lottery for determining whether or not to transition the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (a function for executing the process of step SD803 in the main CPU 63);
Means for display-controlling the predetermined display means so that a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the transfer lottery is displayed after the fluctuating display of symbols has started (a function of executing the process of step SD706 in the main CPU 63) and,
If the lottery result of the transition lottery is a result corresponding to transition to the predetermined gaming state, and after the corresponding stop result is displayed on the predetermined display means, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state. (a function of executing the processing of step SD904 and step SE116 in the main CPU 63);
means for display-controlling the specific display means so that a state-based display is performed in the predetermined gaming state (a function for executing the processing of step SD903 and step SE115 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature αO5, wherein the predetermined correspondence display is a variation display of the picture, and the specific correspondence display is a state correspondence display.

According to feature αO6, in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, a predetermined gaming state is indicated on a specific display means in a situation where a fluctuating symbol is displayed on a predetermined display means. A status-based display is performed. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to clearly recognize that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

Feature αO7. The predetermined setting-related process is a process that enables the setting means to set the setting value to be used, or a process that allows the current setting value to be notified. The gaming machine according to any one of features αO1 to αO6.

According to feature αO7, in order to notify the situation in which a process that enables setting of the setting value to be used is being executed or the current setting value while producing the excellent effects as already explained. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to recognize that the process is being executed.

Note that for the configuration of features αO1 to αO7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αP group>
Feature αP1. A first response state in which the first specific operation means (the special display section 429 in the 64th embodiment, the special electric winning device 416 in the 66th embodiment) is in the first response state in a situation where a game is being executed. Execution means (in the 64th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SD903 and step SE115 in the main CPU 63, in the 66th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SD710 to step SD712 in the main CPU 63),
When the first specific operation means is in the first corresponding state in a situation where a game is being executed, the second specific operation means (in the 64th embodiment, the special display section 429 and the second special figure display section 426, In the 66th embodiment, the second corresponding state execution means (in the 64th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SD706 in the main CPU 63) causes the special display section 429 to enter the second compatible state. In the embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SD903 and step SE115 in the main CPU 63);
a setting means (a function for executing the process of step SB311 in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
In a situation where a predetermined setting-related process (setting value update process, setting confirmation process) regarding the setting value is being executed, the first specific operation means is in the first corresponding state, and the second specifying operation means is in the first corresponding state. A specific response control means (in the 64th embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps SE304, SE305, SE308, and step SE309 in the main CPU 63, In the form, a function of executing the processing of step SE704, step SE707, step SE802, and step SE816 in the main CPU 63),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature αP1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, when the first specific operation means is in the first corresponding state in the situation where the game is being executed, the second specific operation means is in the second corresponding state, and the predetermined setting related to the setting value is set. In a situation where the process is being executed, the first specific action means is in the first corresponding state, whereas the second specific action means is in a state different from the second corresponding state. This makes it possible for the administrator of the game hall to recognize that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, and also allows the manager to receive this notification using the first specific operation means and the second specific operation means. It becomes possible to do this by

Feature αP2. The gaming machine according to feature αP1, wherein one of the first specific operation means and the second specific operation means is a display means and the other is a movable means.

According to feature αP2, since a notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed is performed based on a combination of the respective states of the display means and the movable means, the predetermined setting-related process is not executed. It becomes easier to understand the situation.

Feature αP3. The second specific operation means is a variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 416) that is switched between an open state and a closed state in a predetermined gaming state,
The second corresponding state is a state in which the second specific operation means is switched between an open state and a closed state,
The first specific operation means is a display means (special display section 429) that displays a display indicating that the predetermined gaming state is the predetermined gaming state by entering the first corresponding state in the predetermined gaming state,
The gaming machine according to feature αP1 or αP2, wherein the specific response control unit maintains the second specific operation unit in the closed state in a situation where the predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

According to feature αP3, in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, the second specific operation means does not operate even though the first specific operation means is displaying a display indicating that the predetermined gaming state is in progress. remains closed. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to clearly recognize that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

Feature αP4. The first specific operation means is a variable ball entering means (special electric winning device 416) that is switched between an open state and a closed state in a predetermined gaming state,
The first corresponding state is the open state,
The second specific operation means is a display means (special display section 429) that performs a display indicating that the predetermined gaming state is in the predetermined gaming state by entering the second corresponding state in the predetermined gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature αP1 or αP2.

According to feature αP4, in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, even though the first specific operation means is in an open state, the second specific operation means is in a predetermined gaming state. No display is performed. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to clearly recognize that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

Feature αP5. The gaming machine according to feature αP4, wherein the specific response control means hides the second specific operation means in a situation where the predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

According to feature αP5, in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, a display indicating that the second specific operation means is in the predetermined gaming state even though the first specific operation means is in the open state. Not only is it not done, but it is hidden. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to clearly recognize that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

Feature αP6. Equipped with means for executing a transition lottery for determining whether to transition the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (a function of executing the process of step SD803 in the main CPU 63),
The second corresponding state execution means controls the display of the second specific operation means so that a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the transition lottery is displayed after the fluctuating display of symbols is started,
In this gaming machine, when the lottery result of the transition lottery is a result corresponding to transition to the predetermined gaming state, the transition stop result that is the corresponding stop result is determined by the second specific operation means. A means for shifting the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state after being displayed (a function of executing the processing of step SD904 and step SE116 in the main CPU 63),
The first corresponding state execution means switches the first specific operation means between an open state and a closed state in the predetermined gaming state,
The first corresponding state is the open state,
The gaming machine according to feature αP1 or αP2, wherein the second corresponding state is a state in which the transition stop result is displayed by the second specific operation means.

According to feature αP6, in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, the transition stop result is not displayed in the second specific operation unit even though the first specific operation unit is in an open state. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to clearly recognize that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

Feature αP7. The predetermined setting-related process is a process that enables the setting means to set the setting value to be used, or a process that allows the current setting value to be notified. The gaming machine according to any one of features αP1 to αP6.

According to feature αP7, in order to notify the situation where a process is being executed or the current setting value that enables setting of the setting value to be used while producing the excellent effects as already explained. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to recognize that the process is being executed.

Note that for the configuration of features αP1 to αP7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αQ group>
Feature αQ1. A variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 416) that allows a game ball flowing down the gaming area to enter and is switchable between an open state and a closed state;
an updating means (a function of executing the process of step S8902 in the main CPU 63) that updates the updated numerical information every time an update opportunity occurs;
A predetermined acquisition means that acquires the updated numerical information when a predetermined acquisition opportunity occurs (in the 64th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SD701 regarding the reservation information on the second special drawing side in the main CPU 63, In the 69th to 71st embodiments, the function of executing the process of step SF101 in the main CPU 63);
A predetermined transition determination means for executing a predetermined transition determination for determining whether the updated numerical information acquired by the predetermined acquisition means corresponds to numerical information corresponding to transition to a predetermined gaming state (open/close execution mode). (In the 64th embodiment, the main side CPU 63 has a function of executing the process of step SD803 on the pending information on the 2nd special figure side, and in the 69th to 71st embodiments, the function of executing the process of step SF304 on the pending information);
Switching control means for switching the variable ball entry means between the open state and the closed state in the predetermined game state (in the 64th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps SD710 to SD712 in the main CPU 63, In the 69th to 71st embodiments, the main CPU 63 executes steps SF108 to SF110 and SF208 to SF210);
Based on the fact that the result of the predetermined transition determination is a first winning result (jackpot result), the predetermined gaming state is transferred to, and a gaming mode that affects the player's advantage is set after the predetermined gaming state ends. The first transition means that can be changed from before the start of the predetermined gaming state (in the 64th embodiment, the reservation information on the second special drawing side in the main CPU 63 in steps SD805 to SD807, step SD904, and steps SE202 to SE208) A function of executing the process, in the 69th to 71st embodiments, a function of executing the process of steps SF306 to SF308 and step SF403 regarding the reservation information on the first special figure side in the main side CPU 63),
Based on the fact that the result of the predetermined transition determination is a second winning result (small win result), the predetermined gaming state is caused to shift to a state where an opportunity to shift to the predetermined gaming state can occur, or the predetermined gaming state is caused to shift to the predetermined gaming state. A second transition means for continuing the game mode before the start of the predetermined game state after the end of the game state (in the 64th embodiment, step SD809 to step SD811 and A function of executing the process of step SD915, a function of executing the processes of step SF310, step SF311 and step SF405 regarding the reservation information on the first special figure side in the main CPU 63 in the 69th to 71st embodiments),
a setting means (a function for executing the process of step SB311 in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
Equipped with
If the result of the predetermined transition determination is a negative result, the transition to the predetermined gaming state does not occur,
Among the plurality of setting values, the second setting value (e.g., “setting 6”) is determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination than the first setting value (e.g., “setting 1”). the number of the updated numerical information is a first specific number;
The number of the updated numerical information for which the second set value is determined to be the outlier result in the predetermined transition determination than the first set value is a second specific smaller number,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second specific number is greater than or equal to the first specific number.

According to feature αQ1, when the predetermined transition determination results in the first winning result or the second winning result, the player shifts to the predetermined gaming state in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state. 2. Players will play the game while hoping for a winning result. In addition, since the subsequent gaming state will be different depending on whether the predetermined transition determination results in the first winning result or the second winning result, it is necessary to diversify the gaming state transition format. becomes possible. In addition, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among multiple levels of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can be aware that the more advantageous setting value is the one to be used. That's to be expected.

In this case, the variation in the number of updated numerical information that is determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination between the first set value and the second set value is a negative result in the predetermined transition determination. This is absorbed by the variation in the number of updated numerical information determined to be. As a result, the probability of obtaining the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination can be adjusted between the first setting value and the second setting value while not affecting the probability of obtaining the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination. It becomes possible to change the value.

Feature αQ2. For all of the set values of the plurality of stages, the variation in the number of the updated numerical information that is determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is determined to be the losing result in the predetermined transition determination. The gaming machine according to feature αQ1, wherein the variation is absorbed by the variation in the number of updated numerical information.

According to feature αQ2, it is possible to vary the probability that the predetermined transition determination will result in the first winning result while not affecting the probability that the predetermined transition determination will result in the second winning result for all the setting values of multiple stages. becomes possible.

Feature αQ3. The gaming machine according to feature αQ1 or αQ2, wherein the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination is the same for all of the setting values of the plurality of stages. .

According to the feature αQ3, it is possible to make the probability of obtaining the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination constant for all the setting values in multiple stages. Furthermore, even in a configuration where the probability of the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination is constant, the variation in each setting value of the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination will be considered a negative result. Therefore, it is possible to set the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination to a probability that corresponds to the set value.

Feature αQ4. Any one of the features αQ1 to αQ3, characterized in that the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the outgoing result in the predetermined transition determination is the largest regardless of any of the set values in the plurality of stages. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature αQ4, in a configuration in which the number of updated numerical information determined to be a losing result in the predetermined transition determination is the largest regardless of each set value, the first winning result is determined in the predetermined transition determination. The variation of each set value in the number of updated numerical information that is determined to be is absorbed by the variation in the number of updated numerical information that is determined to be an incorrect result in the predetermined transition determination. As a result, even if the variation in each set value of the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is absorbed by the variation in the probability of a negative result in the predetermined transition determination, in the predetermined transition determination. As for the probability of an incorrect result, it is possible to prevent large fluctuations between set values in multiple stages.

Feature αQ5. As the game mode, there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is relatively high or low,
In a situation where the setting value of the plurality of stages has the highest probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination, and the gaming mode is the high probability mode, the predetermined transition determination is made. The gaming machine according to any one of features αQ1 to αQ4, wherein the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the missing result is 0.

According to feature αQ5, in a situation where the highest setting value is the highest probability mode and the probability of the first winning result is highest in the predetermined transition determination, the predetermined transition determination is determined to be an unsuccessful result. The number of updated numerical information becomes 0. As a result, in a configuration in which the variation in each set value of the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is absorbed by the variation in the probability of a negative result in the predetermined transition determination, the predetermined transition determination as described above In a situation where the probability of obtaining the first winning result is the highest, it is possible to make the probability of obtaining the first winning result as high as possible.

Feature αQ6. As the game mode, there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is relatively high or low,
In a situation where the setting value of the plurality of stages has the highest probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination, and the gaming mode is the high probability mode, the predetermined transition determination is made. The gaming machine according to any one of features αQ1 to αQ4, wherein the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the missing result is one or more.

According to feature αQ6, in a situation where the probability of the first winning result is highest in the predetermined transition determination, that is, the highest setting value and high probability mode, the predetermined transition determination is determined to be an unsuccessful result. The number of pieces of updated numerical information to be updated becomes one or more. As a result, in a configuration in which the variation in each set value of the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is absorbed by the variation in the probability of a negative result in the predetermined transition determination, the predetermined transition determination as described above Even in a situation where the probability of obtaining the first winning result is highest, it is possible to select an unsuccessful result in the predetermined transition determination.

Feature αQ7. a specific acquisition means (in the 69th to 70th embodiments, a function of executing the process of step SF201 in the main CPU 63) that acquires the updated numerical information when a specific acquisition opportunity occurs;
Specific transition determination means (69th to In the 70th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SF304 on the reservation information on the second special figure side in the main side CPU 63),
Equipped with
The first transition means causes the transition to the predetermined gaming state based on the fact that the result of the specific transition determination is the first winning result, and changes the gaming mode after the end of the predetermined gaming state to the predetermined gaming state. can be changed even before the start of
The second transition means causes the game to transition to a state where an opportunity to transition to the predetermined gaming state can occur, or transition to the predetermined gaming state, based on the fact that the result of the specific transition determination is the second winning result. and after the end of the predetermined gaming state, the gaming mode before the start of the predetermined gaming state continues,
If the result of the specific transition determination is the negative result, the transition to the predetermined gaming state does not occur,
The amount of variation due to the difference in the set value of the number of updated numerical information that is determined to be the first winning result in the specific transition determination is the difference in the number of updated numerical information that is determined to be the first winning result in the specific transition determination. The gaming machine according to any one of features αQ1 to αQ6, characterized in that the amount of variation in the number of updated numerical information is absorbed.

According to feature αQ7, not only in the predetermined transition determination but also in the specific transition determination, the probability of the first winning result is varied between each set value while not affecting the probability of the second winning result. becomes possible.

Feature αQ8. The gaming machine according to feature αQ7, wherein the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the second winning result in the specific transition determination is the same for all of the plurality of setting values.

According to feature αQ8, it is possible to make the probability of obtaining the second winning result constant for all of the setting values in multiple stages, not only in the predetermined transition determination but also in the specific transition determination. Furthermore, even in a configuration where the probability of the second winning result is fixed in the specific transition determination, the variation in each setting value of the probability of the first winning result in the specific transition determination will be considered a missed result. Since it is absorbed by the variation in the probability that becomes, it is possible to set the probability of the first winning result in the specific transition determination to a probability that corresponds to the set value.

Feature αQ9. The game according to feature αQ7 or αQ8, characterized in that the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the negative result in the specific transition determination is the largest regardless of any of the set values in the plurality of stages. Machine.

According to feature αQ9, in the configuration in which the number of updated numerical information determined to be a losing result in the specific transition determination is the largest for each set value, the first winning result is determined in the specific transition determination. The variation in each set value of the number of updated numerical information that is determined to be is absorbed by the variation in the number of updated numerical information that is determined to be an incorrect result in the specific transition determination. As a result, even if the variation in each set value of the probability of the first winning result in the specific transition determination is absorbed by the variation in the probability of a negative result in the specific transition determination, in the specific transition determination. As for the probability of a wrong result, it is possible to prevent large fluctuations in the probability.

Note that for the configuration of features αQ1 to αQ9, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αR group>
Feature αR1. A variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 416) that allows a game ball flowing down the gaming area to enter and is switchable between an open state and a closed state;
an updating means (a function of executing the process of step S8902 in the main CPU 63) that updates the updated numerical information every time an update opportunity occurs;
A predetermined acquisition means that acquires the updated numerical information when a predetermined acquisition opportunity occurs (in the 64th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SD701 regarding the reservation information on the second special drawing side in the main CPU 63, In the 69th to 71st embodiments, the function of executing the process of step SF101 in the main CPU 63);
A predetermined transition determination means for executing a predetermined transition determination for determining whether the updated numerical information acquired by the predetermined acquisition means corresponds to numerical information corresponding to transition to a predetermined gaming state (open/close execution mode). (In the 64th embodiment, the main side CPU 63 has a function of executing the process of step SD803 on the pending information on the 2nd special figure side, and in the 69th to 71st embodiments, the function of executing the process of step SF304 on the pending information);
Switching control means for switching the variable ball entry means between the open state and the closed state in the predetermined game state (in the 64th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps SD710 to SD712 in the main CPU 63, In the 69th to 71st embodiments, the main CPU 63 executes steps SF108 to SF110 and SF208 to SF210);
Based on the fact that the result of the predetermined transition determination is the first winning result (jackpot result), the first transition means (in the 64th embodiment, the second special drawing side in the main CPU 63) transitions to the predetermined gaming state. A function to execute the processing of steps SD805 to SD807, step SD904, and steps SE202 to SE208 regarding the reservation information, and in the 69th to 71st embodiments, the function executes the processing of steps SF306 to Step SF306 regarding the reservation information on the first special drawing side in the main side CPU 63. function to execute the processing of SF308 and step SF403);
a setting means (a function for executing the process of step SB311 in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
Equipped with
As a result of the predetermined transition determination, there is another winning result in addition to the losing result in which the transition to the predetermined gaming state does not occur and the first winning result,
Among the plurality of setting values, the second setting value (e.g., “setting 6”) is determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination than the first setting value (e.g., “setting 1”). the number of the updated numerical information is a first predetermined number;
The number of updated numerical information that is determined to be a predetermined target result (missing result) different from the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is the highest in each of the first setting value and the second setting value. There are many configurations,
The number of the updated numerical information for which the second set value is determined to be the predetermined target result in the predetermined transition determination than the first set value is a second predetermined smaller number,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second predetermined number is greater than or equal to the first predetermined number.

According to feature αR1, when the predetermined transition determination results in the first winning result, the variable entry means shifts to the open state and the game enters the predetermined gaming state, so the player, while expecting the first winning result, A game will be played. In addition, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among multiple levels of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can be aware that the more advantageous setting value is the one to be used. That's to be expected.

In this case, in a configuration in which the number of updated numerical information determined to be a predetermined target result in the predetermined shift determination is the largest regardless of whether it is the first set value or the second set value, Updated numerical information that is determined to be a predetermined target result in a predetermined transition determination by the amount of change between the first set value and the second set value of the number of updated numerical information that is determined to be a winning result. is absorbed by the variation in the number of As a result, even if the variation in each set value of the probability of becoming the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is absorbed by the variation in the probability of becoming the predetermined target in the predetermined transition determination, the predetermined transition determination With regard to the probability of a predetermined target result, it is possible to prevent large fluctuations in the probability. Therefore, while it is possible to predict the setting value based on the probability that the first winning result will be selected in the predetermined transition determination, the predetermined target result whose probability will fluctuate in accordance with the fluctuation of the probability of the first winning result is selected. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the setting value from the probability that the setting value will be set.

Feature αR2. The number of the updated numerical information determined to be the predetermined target result in the predetermined transition determination is the largest in any of the plurality of setting values,
A variation in the number of the updated numerical information that is determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination for all of the set values of the plurality of stages is determined to be the predetermined target result in the predetermined transition determination. The gaming machine according to feature αR1, wherein the variation is absorbed by the variation in the number of updated numerical information.

According to feature αR2, the variation in the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is absorbed by the relatively small variation in the probability of the predetermined target result with the highest selection probability among all the setting values of multiple stages. becomes possible.

Feature αR3. There are a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the first winning result is relatively high or low in the predetermined transition determination,
Even in a situation where the setting value of the plurality of stages has the highest probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination, and the situation is in the high probability mode, the predetermined transition determination may be made. The gaming machine according to feature αR1 or αR2, wherein the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the predetermined target result is the largest.

According to feature αR3, even in a situation where the probability of obtaining the first winning result is the highest in the predetermined transition determination, that is, the highest setting value and the high probability mode, the predetermined target result will be determined in the predetermined transition determination. The number of updated numerical information determined to be the largest. As a result, even if the highest setting value is the highest probability mode, which is the situation where the probability of getting the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is the highest, the probability that the predetermined target result will be obtained in the predetermined transition determination is increased. While avoiding large fluctuations in the probability, it is possible to absorb the fluctuation in the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination by the fluctuation in the probability of the predetermined target result in the predetermined transition determination. Become.

Feature αR4. a specific acquisition means (in the 69th to 70th embodiments, a function of executing the process of step SF201 in the main CPU 63) that acquires the updated numerical information when a specific acquisition opportunity occurs;
Specific transition determination means (69th to In the 70th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SF304 on the reservation information on the second special figure side in the main side CPU 63),
Equipped with
The first transition means transitions to the predetermined gaming state based on the result of the specific transition determination being the first winning result,
As a result of the specific transition determination, there is another winning result in addition to the losing result in which the transition to the predetermined gaming state does not occur and the first winning result,
A specific target result (missing result) exists as a lottery result that is not a lottery result with the highest probability of being selected in the specific transition determination for each of the first setting value and the second setting value,
The second setting value is configured such that the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the specific transition determination is a first specific number more than the first setting value,
The number of the updated numerical information determined to be the specific target result in the specific transition determination is a second specific smaller number than the first setting value,
The gaming machine according to any one of features αR1 to αR3, wherein the second specific number is greater than or equal to the first specific number.

According to feature αR4, in the specific transition determination, the variation in the probability of each set value that becomes the first winning result in the specific transition determination is absorbed by the fluctuation in the probability of the specific target result that is not the highest selection probability. As a result, in the specific shift determination, the player can estimate the set value using each of the selection probability of the first winning result and the selection probability of the specific target result.

Feature αR5. The gaming machine according to feature αR4, wherein the specific target result is the predetermined target result.

According to feature αR5, in the predetermined transition determination, it is difficult to estimate the setting value depending on the selection probability of the predetermined target result, while in the specific transition determination, it is made easier to estimate the setting value depending on the selection probability of the predetermined target result. becomes possible.

Feature αR6. The specific target result is not a lottery result with the highest probability of being selected in the specific transition determination in all of the setting values of the plurality of stages,
A variation in the number of the updated numerical information that is determined to be the first winning result in the specific transition determination for all of the set values of the plurality of stages is determined to be the specific target result in the specific transition determination. The gaming machine according to feature αR4 or αR5, wherein the variation in the number of updated numerical information is absorbed.

According to feature αR6, it becomes possible to absorb the variation in the probability of the first winning result in the specific transition determination due to the relatively large variation in the probability of the specific target result in all the setting values of multiple stages. .

Feature αR7. a specific acquisition means (in the 71st embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SF201 in the main CPU 63) that acquires the updated numerical information when a specific acquisition opportunity occurs;
Specific transition determination means (71st In the embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SF304 on the reservation information on the second special figure side in the main side CPU 63),
Equipped with
The first transition means transitions to the predetermined gaming state based on the result of the specific transition determination being the first winning result,
As a result of the specific transition determination, there is another winning result in addition to the losing result in which the transition to the predetermined gaming state does not occur and the first winning result,
The number of the updated numerical information that is determined in the specific transition determination to be a specific target result (small winning result) different from the first winning result is determined in each of the first setting value and the second setting value. This is the most common configuration,
The second setting value is configured such that the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the specific transition determination is a first specific number more than the first setting value,
The number of the updated numerical information determined to be the specific target result in the specific transition determination is a second specific smaller number than the first setting value,
The second specific number is greater than or equal to the first specific number,
The gaming machine according to any one of features αR1 to αR3, wherein the predetermined target result and the specific target result are different.

According to feature αR7, even if the lottery results with the highest selection probability are different between the predetermined transition determination and the specific transition determination, the selection probability of the lottery result with the highest selection probability in each of the predetermined transition determination and the specific transition determination The variation between the respective set values of the selection probability of the first winning result is absorbed by the variation. As a result, while it is possible to infer the set value from the probability that the first winning result will be selected in both the predetermined transition determination and the specific transition determination, the probability fluctuates according to fluctuations in the probability of the first winning result. It is possible to make it difficult to estimate the setting value based on the probability that different lottery results will be selected.

Feature αR8. The number of the updated numerical information determined to be the specific target result in the specific migration determination is the largest in any of the plurality of setting values,
A variation in the number of the updated numerical information that is determined to be the first winning result in the specific transition determination for all of the set values of the plurality of stages is determined to be the specific target result in the specific transition determination. The gaming machine according to feature αR7, wherein the variation is absorbed by the variation in the number of updated numerical information.

According to feature αR8, regardless of whether it is a predetermined transition determination or a specific transition determination, the first winning result is determined by a relatively small change in the probability of the lottery result with the highest selection probability in all of the multiple stage setting values. It becomes possible to absorb fluctuations in probability.

Note that for the configuration of features αR1 to αR8, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αS group>
Feature αS1. an updating means (a function of executing the process of step S8902 in the main CPU 63) that updates the updated numerical information every time an update opportunity occurs;
a predetermined acquisition means (in the seventieth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SF201 in the main CPU 63) that acquires the updated numerical information when a predetermined acquisition opportunity occurs;
A predetermined transition determination means for executing a predetermined transition determination for determining whether the updated numerical information acquired by the predetermined acquisition means corresponds to numerical information corresponding to transition to a predetermined gaming state (open/close execution mode). (In the 70th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SF304 on the reservation information on the second special figure side in the main side CPU 63),
Based on the fact that the result of the predetermined transition determination is the first winning result (the jackpot result when the pending information on the second special symbol side in the 70th embodiment is subject to the win/fail determination process), the predetermined game A first transition means (in the 70th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SF306 to SF308 and step SF403 regarding the pending information on the second special figure side in the main side CPU 63), which enables transition to the state.
a setting means (a function for executing the process of step SB311 in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
Equipped with
If the result of the predetermined transition determination is a negative result, the transition to the predetermined gaming state does not occur,
There are a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the first winning result is relatively high or low in the predetermined transition determination,
In the situation where the high probability mode is set, the amount of variation between the set values of the plurality of stages of the number of updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination is determined in the predetermined shift determination. The structure is such that the fluctuation is absorbed by the variation in the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the outlier result,
In a situation where the setting value has the highest probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination among the setting values in the plurality of stages, and the situation is in the high probability mode, the failure in the predetermined transition determination In order to ensure that the number of updated numerical information that is determined to be a result is one or more, the setting value that has the lowest probability of becoming the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination among the setting values of the plurality of stages is selected. A gaming machine characterized in that a number of the updated numerical information items that are determined to be an off result in the predetermined transition determination in a certain situation and in the high probability mode is set.

According to feature αS1, since it is possible to shift to the predetermined gaming state when the predetermined transition determination results in the first winning result, the player should play the game while expecting the first winning result. Become. In addition, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among multiple levels of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can be aware that the more advantageous setting value is the one to be used. That's to be expected.

In this case, in a situation where the high probability mode is set, the amount of variation between the set values of multiple stages of the number of updated numerical information that is determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination results in a negative result in the predetermined transition determination. It is absorbed by the variation in the number of updated numerical information determined to be . Then, in a situation where the probability of the first winning result is highest in the predetermined transition determination, the highest setting value is in the high probability mode, and the updated numerical value is determined to be an unsuccessful result in the predetermined transition determination. The number of pieces of information is one or more. As a result, in a configuration in which the variation in each set value of the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is absorbed by the variation in the probability of a negative result in the predetermined transition determination, the predetermined transition determination as described above Even in a situation where the probability of obtaining the first winning result is highest, it is possible to select an unsuccessful result in the predetermined transition determination.

Feature αS2. Based on the fact that the result of the predetermined shift determination is the second winning result (the small winning result when the pending information on the second special symbol side in the 70th embodiment is subject to the win/fail determination process), the predetermined a second transition means (second transition means) for transitioning to a state where an opportunity to transition to a gaming state can occur, or for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state and continuing the gaming mode before the start of the predetermined gaming state after the end of the predetermined gaming state; In the embodiment No. 70, the main side CPU 63 is provided with a function of executing the processes of step SF310, step SF311, and step SF405 regarding the reservation information on the second special drawing side,
The number of the updated numerical information determined to be the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination in the high probability mode is the same among the set values of the plurality of stages. The gaming machine described in αS1.

According to the feature αS2, it is possible to make the probability of obtaining the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination constant for all the setting values in multiple stages. Furthermore, even in a configuration where the probability of the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination is constant, the variation in each setting value of the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination will be considered a negative result. Therefore, it is possible to set the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination to a probability that corresponds to the set value.

Feature αS3. Based on the fact that the result of the predetermined shift determination is the second winning result (the small winning result when the pending information on the second special symbol side in the 70th embodiment is subject to the win/fail determination process), the predetermined a second transition means (second transition means) for transitioning to a state where an opportunity to transition to a gaming state can occur, or for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state and continuing the gaming mode before the start of the predetermined gaming state after the end of the predetermined gaming state; In the embodiment No. 70, the main side CPU 63 is provided with a function of executing the processes of step SF310, step SF311, and step SF405 regarding the reservation information on the second special drawing side,
The number of the updated numerical information determined to be the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination in the high probability mode is the largest in each of the plurality of setting values. The gaming machine described in αS1 or αS2.

According to feature αS3, in the high probability mode, even if the configuration has the highest probability that the second winning result will be selected in the predetermined transition determination, the probability that the first winning result will be selected in the predetermined transition determination is low. It becomes possible to select an out-of-range result in a predetermined transition determination in a situation where the value is highest.

Note that for the configuration of features αS1 to αS3, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αT group>
Feature αT1. A variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 416) that allows a game ball flowing down the gaming area to enter and is switchable between an open state and a closed state;
an updating means (a function of executing the process of step S8902 in the main CPU 63) that updates the updated numerical information every time an update opportunity occurs;
a predetermined acquisition means (in the 69th to 71st embodiments, a function of executing the process of step SF101 in the main CPU 63) that acquires the updated numerical information when a predetermined acquisition opportunity occurs;
A predetermined transition determination means for executing a predetermined transition determination for determining whether the updated numerical information acquired by the predetermined acquisition means corresponds to numerical information corresponding to transition to a predetermined gaming state (open/close execution mode). (In the 69th to 71st embodiments, the function of executing the process of step SF304 on the reservation information on the first special figure side in the main side CPU 63),
Switching control means for switching the variable ball entry means between the open state and the closed state in the predetermined game state (in the 69th to 71st embodiments, steps SF108 to SF110 and SF208 to SF208 in the main CPU 63) function to execute SF210 processing),
Based on the fact that the result of the predetermined transition determination is a first winning result (jackpot result), the predetermined gaming state is transferred to, and a gaming mode that affects the player's advantage is set after the predetermined gaming state ends. A first transition means that can be varied from before the start of the predetermined gaming state (in the 69th to 71st embodiments, the main CPU 63 executes the processing of steps SF306 to SF308 and step SF403 regarding the reservation information on the first special drawing side) function) and
Based on the fact that the result of the predetermined transition determination is a second winning result (small win result), the predetermined gaming state is caused to shift to a state where an opportunity to shift to the predetermined gaming state can occur, or the predetermined gaming state is caused to shift to the predetermined gaming state. A second transition means for continuing the game mode before the start of the predetermined game state after the end of the game state (in the 69th to 71st embodiments, step SF310 regarding reservation information on the first special figure side in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the processing of step SF311 and step SF405);
a setting means (a function for executing the process of step SB311 in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
Equipped with
If the result of the predetermined transition determination is a negative result, the transition to the predetermined gaming state does not occur,
As the game mode, there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is relatively high or low,
The probability of the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination is the same regardless of the setting value to be used set by the setting means and the gaming mode. Game machine.

According to feature αT1, when the predetermined transition determination results in the first winning result or the second winning result, the variable entry means shifts to the open state and the player enters the predetermined gaming state. 2. Players will play the game while hoping for a winning result. In addition, since the subsequent gaming state will be different depending on whether the predetermined transition determination results in the first winning result or the second winning result, it is necessary to diversify the gaming state transition format. becomes possible. In addition, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among multiple levels of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can be aware that the more advantageous setting value is the one to be used. That's to be expected.

In this case, the probability of obtaining the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination is the same regardless of the setting value and gaming mode. This makes it possible to prevent the player from inferring both the setting value and the gaming mode based on the probability of the second winning result.

Feature αT2. a specific acquisition means (in the 69th to 70th embodiments, a function of executing the process of step SF201 in the main CPU 63) that acquires the updated numerical information when a specific acquisition opportunity occurs;
Specific transition determination means (69th to In the 70th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SF304 on the reservation information on the second special figure side in the main side CPU 63),
Equipped with
The first transition means causes the transition to the predetermined gaming state based on the fact that the result of the specific transition determination is the first winning result, and changes the gaming mode after the end of the predetermined gaming state to the predetermined gaming state. can be changed even before the start of
The second transition means causes the game to transition to a state where an opportunity to transition to the predetermined gaming state can occur, or transition to the predetermined gaming state, based on the fact that the result of the specific transition determination is the second winning result. and after the end of the predetermined gaming state, the gaming mode before the start of the predetermined gaming state continues,
If the result of the specific transition determination is the negative result, the transition to the predetermined gaming state does not occur,
The probability of the second winning result in the specific transition determination is the same regardless of the setting value to be used set by the setting means and the gaming mode. The gaming machine described in feature αT1.

According to the feature αT2, the probability of obtaining the second winning result not only in the predetermined transition determination but also in the specific transition determination is the same regardless of the setting value and the gaming mode. Thereby, regardless of whether the predetermined transition determination or the specific transition determination is made, it is possible to prevent the player from inferring both the setting value and the gaming mode based on the probability of the second winning result.

Feature αT3. The gaming machine according to feature αT2, wherein the probability of obtaining the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination is different from the probability of obtaining the second winning result in the specific transition determination.

According to feature αT3, in a configuration where the probability of the second winning result is the same not only in the predetermined transition determination but also in the specific transition determination is the same regardless of the setting value and the gaming mode, the probability of the second winning result is It is possible to create a situation in which the probability that .

Feature αT4. a specific acquisition means (in the 69th to 71st embodiments, a function of executing the process of step SF201 in the main CPU 63) that acquires the updated numerical information when a specific acquisition opportunity occurs;
Specific transition determination means (69th to In the 71st embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SF304 on the reservation information on the second special figure side in the main side CPU 63),
Equipped with
The first transition means causes the transition to the predetermined gaming state based on the fact that the result of the specific transition determination is the first winning result, and changes the gaming mode after the end of the predetermined gaming state to the predetermined gaming state. can be changed even before the start of
The second transition means causes the game to transition to a state where an opportunity to transition to the predetermined gaming state can occur, or transition to the predetermined gaming state, based on the fact that the result of the specific transition determination is the second winning result. and after the end of the predetermined gaming state, the gaming mode before the start of the predetermined gaming state continues,
If the result of the specific transition determination is the negative result, the transition to the predetermined gaming state does not occur,
The gaming machine according to feature αT1, wherein the probability of obtaining the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination is different from the probability of obtaining the second winning result in the specific transition determination.

According to feature αT4, it is possible to create a situation in which the probability of the second winning result fluctuates.

Note that for the configuration of features αT1 to αT4, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention relating to the above feature αM group, the above feature αN group, the above feature αO group, the above feature αP group, the above feature αQ group, the above feature αR group, the above feature αS group, and the above feature αT group, the following problems can be solved. It is possible to solve it.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to have a suitable configuration regarding the setting values that determine the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic αU group>
Feature αU1. A specific storage means (main side RAM 65 in the 72nd embodiment) that has a plurality of storage areas with associated addresses and stores information;
Address designation means for designating a predetermined address in the specific storage means as a target address (step SF801, step SF803, step SF807, step SG101, step SG103, step SG107, step SG201, step of the main CPU 63 in the 72nd embodiment) function of executing the processing of SG204 and step SG208);
Specific processing execution means (processing of step SF802, step SG102, and step SG202 of the main CPU 63 in the 72nd embodiment ) and
Equipped with
The addressing means includes:
Address update means (72nd embodiment) for updating the target address to the address next in order with respect to the address that is the current target address when the execution of the specific process by the specific process execution unit is completed function of executing the process of step SF901 of the main CPU 63);
The target address after being updated by the address updating means is a specific address ("0100" in hexadecimal if it is the work area 221 for specific control, "0200" in hexadecimal if it is the stack area 222 for specific control) , "0300" in hexadecimal for the work area 223 for non-specific control, "0400" in hexadecimal for the stack area 224 for non-specific control), the predetermined first information is set as the predetermined first information. Information setting means (a function for executing the process of step SF903 of the main CPU 63 in the 72nd embodiment) to set in the storage area (carry flag 516);
Equipped with
The gaming machine characterized in that the specific processing execution means ends execution of the specific processing when the predetermined first information is set in the predetermined first information storage area.

According to feature αU1, the target address is sequentially updated, and the storage area corresponding to the updated target address becomes the execution target of the specific process. Thereby, it becomes possible to sequentially target a plurality of storage areas in the specific storage means for execution of specific processing. In this case, when the updated target address becomes a specific address, the predetermined first information is set, and when the predetermined first information is set, the execution of the specific process is ended. As a result, when specifying whether or not execution of a specific process has been completed for all storage areas to be executed, it is only necessary to specify whether or not the predetermined first information has been set. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load required to perform this. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably handle the information stored in the specific storage means.

Feature αU2. The address is set as multi-bit data,
The address updating means updates the target address by updating a numerical value for updating the target address,
The information setting means sets the predetermined first information by changing the value of a reference bit (upper byte 515a) in the plurality of bits of data when the update numerical value is updated for the target address. The gaming machine according to feature αU1, wherein the predetermined first information is set in a storage area.

According to feature αU2, the predetermined first information is set when the value of the reference bit is changed by updating the target address. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for setting the predetermined first information.

Feature αU3. The address is set as multi-bit data,
The address updating means updates the target address by adding an update value to the target address,
The information setting means is configured to change the value of a reference bit (upper byte 515a) different from the least significant bit in the plurality of bits of data when the update numerical value is added to the target address. The gaming machine according to feature αU1 or αU2, wherein the predetermined first information is set in the predetermined first information storage area.

According to feature αU3, the predetermined first information is set when a carry to the reference bit occurs due to addition of the update numerical value to the target address. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for setting the predetermined first information.

Feature αU4. There are multiple specific addresses,
For any of these multiple specific addresses, when the update numerical value is updated for the target address in a situation where the immediately preceding address is set as the target address, the value of the reference bit changes. The gaming machine according to feature αU2 or αU3, characterized in that the address is

According to feature αU4, in a configuration where there are multiple specific addresses, no matter which specific address the previous address is set as the target address, when the target address is updated, the reference bit is changed. Value is changed. Then, the predetermined first information is set by changing the value of the reference bit. This makes it possible to set the predetermined first information at the same time even in a configuration where a plurality of specific addresses exist. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for identifying the trigger for ending the specific processing.

Feature αU5. an address information storage area (address counter 515) configured by a plurality of bytes and in which address information of the target address is set;
The address updating means includes:
A first update unit (step SF901 of the main CPU 63 in the 72nd embodiment) that updates the target address by updating the update numerical value for the first byte (lower byte 515b) in the address information storage area. function) and
The second byte in the address information storage area when the numerical information of the first byte is changed from one of the minimum value and the maximum value to the other by updating the update numerical value to the first byte. (upper byte 515a); a second update means (a function that executes the process of step SF905 of the main CPU 63 in the 72nd embodiment);
Equipped with
The specific address is such that when the update numerical value is updated to the first byte, the numerical information of the first byte is changed from one of the minimum value and the maximum value to the other, and the second byte is updated. is the resulting address of
The information setting means is configured to set the predetermined number of values when the numerical information of the first byte is changed from one of a minimum value and a maximum value to the other by updating the update numerical value for the first byte. the predetermined first information is set in one information storage area;
The second updating means updates the second byte when the predetermined first information is set in the predetermined first information storage area when the update numerical value is updated for the first byte. The gaming machine according to any one of features αU1 to αU4, characterized in that the gaming machine performs updating.

When the numerical information of the first byte is changed from one of the minimum value and the maximum value to the other by updating the numerical value for update to the first byte, it is necessary to update the second byte. In this case, when the numerical information of the first byte is changed from one of the minimum value and the maximum value to the other, the predetermined first information is set, so it is specified whether the predetermined first information is set. This makes it possible to specify whether or not the second byte needs to be updated. In this case, according to feature αU5, by specifying whether the predetermined first information is set, it is possible to specify whether execution of the specific process has been completed for all storage areas to be executed. It becomes possible to do so. As a result, by using the configuration for determining whether or not the second byte needs to be updated, it is possible to determine whether or not execution of a specific process has been completed for all storage areas that should be executed. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature αU6. The specific process execution means executes the specific process on the storage area included in a specific range of addresses in the specific storage unit when a specific execution opportunity occurs;
In the specific range of addresses, the last address in the execution order of the specific process is the specific address, or the address immediately before the specific address (in the case of the work area 221 for specific control) "00FF" in hexadecimal, "01FF" in hexadecimal for the stack area 222 for specific control, "02FF" in hexadecimal for the work area 223 for non-specific control, stack area 224 for non-specific control The gaming machine according to any one of features αU1 to αU5, wherein the address in the specific range is set so that the address is “03FF” in hexadecimal.

According to feature αU6, by specifying whether or not the predetermined first information is set, it is possible to specify whether execution of the specific process on the storage area included in the address in the specific range has been completed. . This makes it easier to determine whether execution of specific processing for a storage area included in a specific range of addresses has been completed.

Feature αU7. The gaming machine according to feature αU6, wherein an unused storage area exists in the storage area corresponding to an address in the order preceding the address in the specific range in the specific storage means.

According to feature αU7, the storage area included in the specific range of addresses in the specific storage means is set so that it is easy to specify whether execution of specific processing for the storage area included in the specific range of addresses has been completed. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature αU8. The specific range of addresses includes a first specific range of addresses (for example, the address range of the stack area 222 for specific control) and a second specific range of addresses (for example, the address range of the stack area 224 for non-specific control). exists,
The specific processing execution means executes the specific processing on the storage area included in the first specific range of addresses in the specific storage means when a first specific execution trigger occurs, and executes the specific processing on the storage area included in the first specific range of addresses when a first specific execution trigger occurs; The specific processing is executed on the storage area included in the second specific range of addresses in the specific storage means when the above occurs;
As the specific address, there are at least a first specific address corresponding to the address in the first specific range and a second specific address corresponding to the address in the second specific range,
In the addresses of the first specific range, the last address in the execution order of the specific process is the first specific address, or the address immediately before the first specific address, an address in the first specific range is set;
In the second specific range of addresses, the last address in the execution order of the specific process is the second specific address, or the address immediately before the second specific address, The gaming machine according to feature αU6 or αU7, wherein an address in the second specific range is set.

According to feature αU8, when specifying whether or not execution of specific processing has been completed for a storage area included in addresses in the first specific range, and when specifying whether or not execution of specific processing has been completed for a storage area included in addresses in the second specific range, Regardless of whether the execution is completed or not, it is only necessary to specify whether or not the predetermined first information is set. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether execution of the specific process has been completed.

Feature αU9. The gaming machine according to any one of features αU1 to αU8, wherein a plurality of types of the specific processing exist.

According to feature αU9, it is possible to specify the termination trigger by specifying whether or not the predetermined first information is set, regardless of which of the plurality of types of specific processing is being executed.

Feature αU10. The gaming machine according to any one of features αU1 to αU9, wherein the specific process is a process for clearing information in the storage area corresponding to the target address.

According to feature αU10, it is possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the trigger for ending the processing for clearing information in the storage area of the specific storage means.

Note that for the configuration of features αU1 to αU10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above feature αU group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a need for a configuration that can suitably execute processing on a specific storage means for storing information, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic αV group>
Feature αV1. a numerical information storage area (address counter 515) that is composed of multiple bytes and stores numerical information;
A first updating unit (step SF901 of the main CPU 63 in the 72nd embodiment) that updates the numerical information by updating the numerical value for update to the first byte (lower byte 515b) in the numerical information storage area. function) and
When the numerical information of the first byte is changed from one of the minimum value and the maximum value to the other by updating the update numerical value to the first byte, the predetermined first information storage area (carry an information setting unit (a function for executing the process of step SF903 of the main CPU 63 in the 72nd embodiment) for setting predetermined first information in the flag 516);
When the update numerical value is updated for the first byte and the predetermined first information is set in the predetermined first information storage area, the second byte (upper byte) in the numerical information storage area 515a) (a function that executes the process of step SF905 of the main CPU 63 in the 72nd embodiment);
Special processing execution means (step SG805 to step SG810, step SF105 to step SG810 of the main CPU 63 in the 72nd embodiment) that executes special processing based on the predetermined first information being set in the predetermined first information storage area a function of executing the processing of step SF107 and step SF206 to step SF208);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

When the numerical information of the first byte is changed from one of the minimum value and the maximum value to the other by updating the numerical value for update to the first byte, it is necessary to update the second byte. In this case, when the numerical information of the first byte is changed from one of the minimum value and the maximum value to the other, the predetermined first information is set, so it is specified whether the predetermined first information is set. This makes it possible to specify whether or not the second byte needs to be updated. In this case, according to the feature αV1, by specifying whether or not the predetermined first information is set, it is possible to specify whether or not special processing needs to be executed. This makes it possible to specify an opportunity to perform special processing by using the configuration for identifying an opportunity to update the numerical information of the second byte. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for identifying an opportunity to execute special processing.

Feature αV2. When the update numerical value is updated for the first byte and the second byte is updated by setting the predetermined first information in the predetermined first information storage area; The first situation (a situation targeting the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control) and the second situation (the situation targeting the work area 223 for non-specific control and the non-specific control work area 223) in which the numerical information of the second byte is different. (a situation in which the stack area 224 for specific control is targeted) exists,
The special processing execution means executes the special processing based on the predetermined first information being set in the predetermined first information storage area regardless of either the first situation or the second situation. The gaming machine described in characteristic feature αV1.

According to feature αV2, special processing is executed based on the predetermined first information being set regardless of whether the numerical information of the second byte after updating is different in the first situation or the second situation. It becomes possible to reduce the processing load for executing special processing in each of the first situation and the second situation.

Feature αV3. It has a plurality of storage areas with associated addresses, and includes a specific storage means (main side RAM 65 in the 72nd embodiment) for storing information,
The numerical information stored in the numerical information storage area is information of a target address,
This gaming machine has a specific processing execution means (executes the processing of step SF802, step SG102, and step SG202 of the main CPU 63 in the 72nd embodiment) that makes the storage area corresponding to the target address the execution target of the specific processing. The gaming machine according to feature αV1 or αV2, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following function.

According to feature αV3, when special processing is executed in conjunction with updating a target address, it is possible to reduce the processing load for executing the special processing.

Feature αV4. The game according to feature αV3, wherein the special process execution means terminates execution of the specific process as the special process when the predetermined first information is set in the predetermined first information storage area. Machine.

According to feature αV4, by specifying whether or not the predetermined first information is set, it is possible to specify whether execution of the specific process has been completed for all storage areas to be executed. It becomes possible. As a result, by using the configuration for determining whether or not the second byte needs to be updated, it is possible to determine whether or not execution of a specific process has been completed for all storage areas that should be executed. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature αV5. The gaming machine according to feature αV4, wherein there are a plurality of types of the specific processing.

According to feature αV5, it is possible to specify the termination trigger by specifying whether or not the predetermined first information is set, regardless of which of the plurality of types of specifying processes is being executed.

Note that for the configuration of features αV1 to αV5, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above feature αV group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a need for a configuration that allows the control means to suitably execute processing, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic αW group>
Feature αW1. Predetermined operation means (movable body 512),
a predetermined operation control means (sound-light side CPU 353) that controls the operation of the predetermined operation means;
Initial operation control means for causing the predetermined operation means to perform an initial operation when supply of operating power is started (a function for executing the process of step SG311 of the sound-light side CPU 353 in the 72nd embodiment, the 73rd embodiment) function of executing the process of step SG412 of the sound-light side CPU 353);
Delay means for delaying the start timing of the initial operation (a function of executing the process of step SG310 of the sound-light side CPU 353 in the 72nd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SG411 of the sound-light side CPU 353 of the 73rd embodiment) function) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature αW1, when the supply of operating power is started, the predetermined operating means performs an initial operation, so it is necessary to check whether the predetermined operating means operates normally when starting the supply of operating power. becomes possible. In this case, by delaying the start timing of the initial operation in the predetermined operation means, there is no need to confirm the initial operation immediately after the supply of operating power is started, and the initial operation is confirmed with sufficient time. It becomes possible to do this.

Feature αW2. Specific operation means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204),
a specific operation control means (main CPU 63) that controls the operation of the specific operation means;
Means for causing the specific operation means to perform an initial operation when supply of operating power is started (a function of executing the process of step SF524 of the main CPU 63 in the 72nd embodiment and a function of executing the second timer interrupt process) )and,
Equipped with
One of the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means is provided so as to be visible by exposing the back side of the gaming machine,
The gaming machine according to feature αW1, wherein the other of the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means is provided so as to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine.

According to feature αW2, when the supply of operating power is started, the specific operating means performs an initial operation, so it is necessary to check whether the specific operating means operates normally when starting the supply of operating power. becomes possible. In addition, one of the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means becomes visible by exposing the back side of the gaming machine, while the other becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. In order to confirm the initial operation of each operating means, it is necessary to visually check the back side and the front side of the gaming machine. In this case, the configuration of feature αW1 is provided, and the start timing of the initial operation in the predetermined operation means is delayed. Thereby, it becomes possible to confirm the initial operation in the predetermined operation means after confirming the initial operation in the specific operation means, and it becomes possible to suitably confirm each initial operation.

Feature αW3. Specific operation means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) provided so as to be visible by exposing the back side of the gaming machine;
a specific operation control means (main CPU 63) that controls the operation of the specific operation means;
Means for causing the specific operation means to perform an initial operation when supply of operating power is started (a function of executing the process of step SF524 of the main CPU 63 in the 72nd embodiment and a function of executing the second timer interrupt process) )and,
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature αW1, wherein the predetermined operating means is provided so as to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine.

According to feature αW3, when the supply of operating power is started, the specific operating means performs an initial operation, so it is necessary to check whether the specific operating means operates normally when starting the supply of operating power. becomes possible. In addition, the specific operating means becomes visible by exposing the back side of the gaming machine, while the predetermined operating means becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. In order to confirm the initial operation, it is necessary to visually check both the back side and the front side of the gaming machine. In this case, the configuration of feature αW1 is provided, and the start timing of the initial operation in the predetermined operation means is delayed. As a result, after the back side of the gaming machine is exposed and the initial operation of the specific operating means is confirmed, the front side of the gaming machine is returned to the normal state where it is visible and the initial operation of the predetermined operating means can be confirmed. This makes it possible to suitably confirm each initial operation.

Feature αW4. The gaming machine according to any one of features αW1 to αW3, wherein the delay means sets a waiting period for delaying the start timing of the initial operation.

According to feature αW4, the initial operation of the predetermined operation means is delayed by measuring the standby period, so it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for delaying the initial operation of the predetermined operation means.

Feature αW5. Equipped with progress control means (main CPU 63) for controlling the progress of the game,
The predetermined operation control means controls the operation of the predetermined operation means based on instruction information transmitted from the progress control means,
The delay means receives start reference information (in the 72nd embodiment, a normal return command, a return command upon clearing, a return command upon confirmation, and a return command upon update) from the progress control means after the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to feature αW4, wherein the waiting period is set when a command (in the 73rd embodiment, a return command upon clearing, a return command upon confirmation, and a return command upon update) is received.

According to feature αW5, the waiting period is measured based on the timing at which the start reference information transmitted from the progress control means is received. This makes it possible to delay the initial operation of the predetermined operation means based on the progress of control in the progress control means.

Feature αW6. The progress control means executes the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (step SF501 to step SF523 of the main CPU 63 in the 72nd embodiment) when the supply of operating power is started. The start reference information of different types is transmitted depending on the execution content of the process at the time of starting supply of operating power,
The gaming machine according to feature αW5, wherein the delay means sets the waiting period regardless of which type of the start reference information is received.

According to feature αW6, since the progress control means transmits different types of start reference information depending on the execution content of the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power, the predetermined operation control means transmits different types of start reference information when the progress control means starts supplying the operating power. It becomes possible to execute control according to the execution content of the process. In this case, no matter which type of start reference information is transmitted, a waiting period is set to delay the initial operation of the predetermined operation means, so that when the progress control means starts supplying operating power, It becomes possible to delay the initial operation of the predetermined operation means regardless of the execution content of the process.

Feature αW7. The progress control means executes the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (step SF501 to step SF523 of the main CPU 63 in the 72nd embodiment) when the supply of operating power is started. The start reference information of different types is transmitted depending on the execution content of the process at the time of starting supply of operating power,
The delay means sets the waiting period when a predetermined type of the start reference information (return command for clearing, return command for confirmation, and return command for update) is received, and when the start reference information of a predetermined type is received, The gaming machine according to feature αW5, wherein the waiting period is not set when the start reference information (normal return command) is received.

According to feature αW7, since the progress control means transmits different types of start reference information depending on the execution content of the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power, the predetermined operation control means transmits different types of start reference information when the progress control means starts supplying the operating power. It becomes possible to execute control according to the execution content of the process. In this case, a waiting period is set when a predetermined type of start reference information is transmitted, and a standby period is not set when start reference information of a type other than the predetermined type is transmitted. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the initial operation of the predetermined operation unit is delayed and a situation in which it is not delayed, depending on the execution content of the process at the start of supply of operating power in the progress control unit.

Feature αW8. The progress control means executes the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps SF501 to SF523 of the main CPU 63 in the 72nd embodiment) when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features αW5 to αW7, characterized in that the start reference information is transmitted when the process at the time of starting supply of operating power ends.

According to feature αW8, it is possible to delay the initial operation of the predetermined operation means based on the timing at which the processing at the start of supply of operating power in the advancement control means is completed.

Feature αW9. The predetermined operating means is provided so as to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine,
The delay means delays the start timing of the initial operation when an operation to expose the back side of the gaming machine is performed when the supply of operating power is started, and when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features αW1 to αW8, wherein the start timing of the initial operation is not delayed if no operation is performed to expose the back side of the gaming machine.

According to feature αW9, when the supply of operating power is started and an operation is being performed to expose the back side of the gaming machine, the start timing of the initial operation of the predetermined operation means is delayed. In such a situation, it is possible to check the initial operation of the predetermined operation means after returning the gaming machine to a normal state in which the front side is visible. On the other hand, if the operation to expose the back side of the game machine is not performed when the supply of operating power is started, the start timing of the initial operation of the predetermined operation means is not delayed, so that in such a situation, It becomes possible to check the initial operation of the predetermined operation means immediately after the supply of operating power is started.

Note that for the configuration of features αW1 to αW9, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above feature αW group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately confirm whether or not the predetermined operating means operates normally, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic αX group>
Feature αX1. Progress control means (main CPU 63) that controls the progress of the game;
Predetermined operation means (movable body 512),
a predetermined operation control means (sound-light side CPU 353) that controls the operation of the predetermined operation means based on instruction information transmitted from the progress control means;
Equipped with
The progress control means is
Means (of the main CPU 63 in the 72nd embodiment) for executing the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SF501 to 523 of the main CPU 63 in the 72nd embodiment) when the supply of operating power is started. A function that executes the processing from step SF501 to step SF523);
When the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is executed, the start reference information (in the 72nd embodiment, the normal return command, the return command at clearing, the return command at confirmation, the return command at update, and the 73rd embodiment) In the embodiment, the start sending means (step SF514, step SF519, step SF607 of the main CPU 63 in the 72nd embodiment) sends a normal return command, a return command when clearing, a return command when checking, and a return command when updating. and a function of executing the process of step SF714),
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined operation control means causes the predetermined operation means to perform a predetermined operation (initial operation) after receiving the start reference information.

According to the feature αX1, the predetermined operation is performed by the predetermined operation means after the predetermined operation control means receives the start reference information transmitted when the process at the time of starting supply of operating power is executed in the progress control means. This makes it possible for the predetermined operation means to perform a predetermined operation after the progress control means executes the processing at the start of supply of operating power.

Feature αX2. The start transmitting means transmits different types of the start reference information depending on the execution content of the process at the time of starting supply of the operating power,
The gaming machine according to feature αX1, wherein the predetermined operation control means causes the predetermined operation means to perform the predetermined operation regardless of which type of the start reference information is received.

According to feature αX2, since the predetermined operation is performed by the predetermined operation means regardless of which type of start reference information is transmitted, the execution content of the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power in the progress control means is Regardless, it becomes possible to cause the predetermined operation means to perform the predetermined operation.

Feature αX3. The start transmitting means transmits different types of the start reference information depending on the execution content of the process at the time of starting supply of the operating power,
When the predetermined type of start reference information (return command for clearing, return command for confirmation, and return command for update) is received, the predetermined operation control means controls the start reference information other than the predetermined type ( The gaming machine according to feature αX1 or αX2, wherein the control content of the predetermined operation means is different depending on when a normal return command is received.

According to feature αX3, since the progress control means transmits different types of start reference information depending on the execution content of the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power, the predetermined operation control means transmits different types of start reference information when the progress control means starts supplying the operating power. It becomes possible to execute control according to the execution content of the process. In this case, the control content of the predetermined operation means is different depending on whether a predetermined type of start reference information is transmitted or a case where start reference information of a type other than the predetermined type is transmitted. This makes it possible to vary the execution mode of the predetermined operation of the predetermined operation means depending on the execution content of the process at the start of supply of operating power in the progress control means.

Feature αX4. The gaming machine according to any one of features αX1 to αX3, wherein the start transmitting means transmits the start reference information when the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power ends.

According to feature αX4, it is possible to cause the predetermined operation means to perform a predetermined operation based on the timing at which the processing at the start of supply of operating power in the advancement control means is completed.

Note that for the configuration of features αX1 to αX4, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, Features αG1 to αG10, Features αH1 to αH11, Features αI1 to αI8, Features αJ1 to αJ14, Features αK1 to αK8, Features αL1 to αL11, Features αM1 to αM8, Features αN1 to αN6, Features αO1 to αO7, Features αP1 to Configuration of one or more of αP7, features αQ1 to αQ9, features αR1 to αR8, features αS1 to αS3, features αT1 to αT4, features αU1 to αU10, features αV1 to αV5, features αW1 to αW9, and features αX1 to αX4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above feature αX group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably control the predetermined operation means to perform a predetermined operation, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

Below, the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or is applied to each feature will be shown.

Pachinko machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, and a gaming area A gaming machine that provides a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each of the game components.

A reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays a plurality of symbols, the variable display of the plurality of symbols is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the plurality of symbols is started due to the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after the display is stopped or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and a bonus is given to a player according to the symbols after the stoppage.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 12... Game machine main body, 14... Front door frame, 28... Launch operation device, 33... First operating port, 34... Second operating port, 35... Through gate, 37a... Special figure display section, 38a ...General map display section, 49a...Gate detection sensor, 62...MPU, 63...Main side CPU, 65...Main side RAM, 68a...Setting key insertion section, 68b...Update button, 68c...Reset button, 69a...First notification 69b...Second notification display device, 69c...Third notification display device, 78...Power/launch control device, 112...Management side CPU, 117...History memory, 171...Separate storage memory, 181 ~186...Memory for history for settings 1 to 6, 191...Memory for first history, 192...Memory for second history, 201...Display device for first notification, 201a-201g...Segment for display, 202...Second history Notification display device, 202a to 202g... Display segment, 203... Third notification display device, 204... Fourth notification display device, 221... Work area for specific control, 222... Stack area for specific control, 223 ...Work area for non-specific control, 224...Stack area for non-specific control, 231...Normal counter area, 232...Counter area for opening/closing execution mode, 233...Counter area for high-frequency support mode, 234...Calculation result storage Area, 241... Management RAM, 251... Reset signal output section, 252... Program monitoring section, 266... Display IC, 271... First display data buffer, 273... Third display data buffer, 311... Current area, 312... Third 1 history area, 313...Second history area, 314...Third history area, 321-324...Display segment, 325...Settings corresponding storage area, 325a-325f...First to sixth setting information storage area, 326...Settings Corresponding storage areas, 326a to 326c...First to third setting information storage areas, 341...Setting reference area, 342...Setting update area, 352...Sound-light side MPU, 353...Sound-light side CPU, 356...RTC, 357...memory for RTC, 361...OFF confirmation flag, 371...area to be cleared, 391...first display distribution table for special figures, 392...second display distribution table for special figures, 393...for regular figures 1st display distribution table, 394... 2nd display distribution table for ordinary figures, 416... special electric prize winning device, 423a... ordinary figure display section, 425... 1st special figure display section, 426... 2nd special figure display section , 429... Special display section, 481... 15R display section, 483... 6R display section, 484... Small win display section, 512... Movable body, 515... Address counter, 515a... Upper byte, 515b... Lower byte, 516... Carry flag .

Claims (1)

A specific storage means having a plurality of storage areas associated with addresses and storing information;
Addressing means for specifying a predetermined address in the specific storage means as a target address;
specific processing execution means for executing specific processing on the storage area corresponding to the target address specified by the address specifying means;
Equipped with
The addressing means includes:
address updating means for updating the target address to an address that is next in order with respect to the address that is the current target address when execution of the specific processing by the specific processing execution unit is completed;
information setting means for setting predetermined first information in a predetermined first information storage area when the target address updated by the address updating means becomes a specific address;
Equipped with
The gaming machine characterized in that the specific processing execution means ends execution of the specific processing when the predetermined first information is set in the predetermined first information storage area.

Images